Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

Form 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

 

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended 30 June 2009

or

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from              to             

or

 

¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report

For the transition period from              to             

Commission file number: 1-31318

 

 

Gold Fields Limited

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Republic of South Africa

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

150 Helen Road

Sandown, Sandton, 2196

South Africa

011-27-11-562-9700

(Address of principal executive offices)

Michael Fleischer

Executive Vice President—General Counsel

Tel: 011-27-11-562-9724

Fax: 011-27-11-562-9828

michael.fleischer@goldfields.co.za

150 Helen Road

Sandown, Sandton, 2196

South Africa

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

 

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of Each Class

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered

Ordinary shares of par value Rand 0.50 each

American Depositary Shares, each representing one ordinary share

 

New York Stock Exchange*

New York Stock Exchange

 

* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of the American Depositary Shares pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

(Title of Class)

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

None

(Title of Class)

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the Annual Report:

704,749,849 ordinary shares of par value Rand 0.50 each

50 Redeemable Preference Shares of Rand 0.01 each

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act:    Yes   x     No   ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Note—Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer   x     Accelerated filer   ¨     Non-accelerated filer   ¨

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

U.S. GAAP   x     International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board   ¨     Other   ¨

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:

Item 17   ¨     Item 18   ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes   ¨     No   x

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.    Yes   ¨     No   ¨

 

 

 


Table of Contents

The Worldwide Locations of Gold Fields’ Operations

LOGO

LOGO


Table of Contents

LOGO

LOGO

LOGO


Table of Contents

Presentation of Financial Information

Gold Fields Limited, or Gold Fields or the Company, is a South African company and the majority of its operations, based on gold production, are located there. Accordingly, its books of account are maintained in South African Rand and its annual and interim financial statements are prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, or IFRS, as prescribed by law. Gold Fields also prepares annual financial statements in accordance with United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles, or U.S. GAAP, which are translated into U.S. dollars. Except as otherwise noted, the financial information included in this annual report has been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP and is presented in U.S. dollars, and descriptions of critical accounting policies refer to accounting policies under U.S. GAAP.

For Gold Fields’ financial statements, unless otherwise stated, balance sheet item amounts are translated from Rand to U.S. dollars at the exchange rate prevailing on the date that it closed its accounts for fiscal 2009 (Rand 8.06 per $1.00 as of June 24, 2009), except for specific items included within shareholders’ equity and the statements of cash flows that are translated at the rate prevailing on the date the relevant transaction was entered into, and statements of operations item amounts are translated from Rand to U.S. dollars at the weighted average exchange rate for each period (Rand 9.01 per $1.00 for the year ended June 30, 2009).

In this annual report, Gold Fields presents the financial items “total cash costs,” “total cash costs per ounce”, “total production costs” and “total production costs per ounce,” which have been determined using industry standards promulgated by the Gold Institute and are not U.S. GAAP measures. The Gold Institute was a non-profit international industry association of miners, refiners, bullion suppliers and manufacturers of gold products that ceased operation in 2002, which developed a uniform format for reporting production costs on a per ounce basis. The Gold Institute has now been incorporated into the National Mining Association. The guidance was first adopted in 1996 and revised in November 1999. An investor should not consider these items in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, income before tax, net income, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. While the Gold Institute provided definitions for the calculation of total cash costs and total production costs, the calculation of total cash costs, total cash costs per ounce, total production costs and total production costs per ounce may vary significantly among gold mining companies, and by themselves do not necessarily provide a basis for comparison with other gold mining companies. See “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data,” “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total cash costs per ounce” and “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total production costs per ounce.”

In this annual report Gold Fields also presents the financial items “operating costs” and “notional cash expenditure”, or NCE. Operating costs and NCE have been determined by Gold Fields on the basis of internally developed definitions and are not U.S. GAAP measures. Gold Fields defines operating costs as production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization) plus corporate expenditure, employment termination costs and accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation—Gold Fields defines NCE as operating costs plus additions to property plant and equipment. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.” An investor should not consider these items in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, cash flows from operating activities or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Operating costs and NCE as presented in this annual report may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of performance of other companies.

Defined Terms and Conventions

In this annual report, all references to “South Africa” are to the Republic of South Africa, all references to “Ghana” are to the Republic of Ghana, all references to “Australia” are to the Commonwealth of Australia, all references to “Venezuela” are to the Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela, all references to “Finland” are to the Republic of Finland and all references to “Peru” are to the Republic of Peru.

 

1


Table of Contents

In this annual report, all references to the “DMR” are references to the South African Department of Mineral Resources, the government body responsible for regulating the mining industry in South Africa, or to its predecessor entity, the Department of Minerals and Energy which was split into the Department of Mineral Resources and the Department of Energy in July 2009, as applicable.

This annual report contains descriptions of gold mining and the gold mining industry, including descriptions of geological formations and mining processes. In order to facilitate a better understanding of these descriptions, this annual report contains a glossary defining a number of technical and geological terms. See “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms.”

This annual report contains references to “serious injury frequency rates” at each Gold Fields mining operation. The serious injury frequency rate is not comparable across Gold Fields’ operations and may not be comparable with similarly titled measures of other companies. In particular, the serious injury frequency rate for South African operations includes only those lost time injuries where the injured employee does not return to work within 14 days of the injury; whereas the serious injury frequency rate for Ghanaian and Peruvian operations includes both medically treated injuries and those lost time injuries where an employee is unable to attend any single shift due to a work-related injury; and lastly, the serious injury frequency rate for the Australian operations includes all lost time injuries where an employee is unable to attend any single shift due to a work-related injury.

In this annual report, “R” and “Rand” refer to the South African Rand and “Rand cents” refers to subunits of the South African Rand, “$,” “U.S.$” and “U.S. dollars” refer to United States dollars, “U.S. cents” refers to subunits of the U.S. dollar, “A$” and “Australian dollars” refer to Australian dollars and “CAD” refers to Canadian dollars.

In this annual report, gold production figures are provided in troy ounces, which are referred to as “ounces” or “oz,” and ore grades are provided in grams per metric ton, which are referred to as “grams per ton” or “g/t.” All references to “tons” or “t” in this annual report are to metric tons. All references to “gold” include gold and gold equivalent ounces, as applicable. See “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms” for further information regarding units of measurement used in this annual report and a table providing rates of conversion between different units of measurement.

In this annual report, except where otherwise noted, all production and operating statistics are based on Gold Fields’ total operations, which include production from the Tarkwa and Damang mines in Ghana and from the Cerro Corona mine in Peru which is attributable to the minority shareholders in those mines. This annual report contains references to “gold equivalent ounces” which are quantities of metals (such as copper) expressed as amounts of gold using the prevailing prices of gold and the other metals. To calculate this, the accepted total value of the metal based on its weight and value is divided by the accepted value of one troy ounce of gold.

Certain information in this annual report presented in Rand and Australian dollars has been translated into U.S. dollars. Unless otherwise stated, the conversion rates for these translations are Rand 8.06 per $1.00 and A$1.00 per $0.798, which were the closing rates on June 24, 2009. By including the U.S. dollar equivalents, Gold Fields is not representing that the Rand or Australian dollar amounts actually represent the U.S. dollar amounts shown or that these amounts could be converted into U.S. dollars at the rates indicated.

Information on South Deep, Western Areas and BGSA

This annual report contains certain information relating to Western Areas Limited (now known as Gold Fields Operations Limited), or Western Areas, Barrick Gold South Africa (Pty) Limited, or BGSA (now known as GFI Joint Ventures Holding (Pty) Limited, or GFI Joint Ventures), and the South Deep gold mine, or South Deep, including information contained in “Risk Factors,” “Information on the Company,” “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” and “Additional Information.” This information, as it relates to information

 

2


Table of Contents

regarding South Deep, Western Areas and BGSA in the period before Gold Fields’ acquisition of these entities, has been compiled from information published by Western Areas, including information filed with JSE Limited, or JSE, and certain due diligence materials made available to Gold Fields by Western Areas and Barrick Gold Corporation, or Barrick, and has not been commented on by any representative of Western Areas or Barrick. Gold Fields has sought to ensure that the information presented has been accurately reproduced from these sources. However, Gold Fields is otherwise unable to confirm that the information relating to Western Areas, South Deep and BGSA is in accordance with the facts and does not omit anything likely to affect the import of the information.

A portion of Gold Fields’ proven and probable reserves for South Deep are based on the pre-acquisition South Deep operation reserve figures as declared for December 2005 by an independent review panel, or IRP, for the Barrick Gold-Western Areas Joint Venture between BGSA (formerly, Placer Dome South Africa Proprietary Limited) and Western Areas. However, a significant portion of the June 30, 2009 South Deep reserves now take into account new estimation and mine design work on the Upper Elsburg Reefs completed during fiscal 2009 in accordance with Gold Fields’ standards and procedures. 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to the current mining area, or the Current Mine, and the area below the Current Mine and above infrastructure, or Phase 1, north of the Wrench Fault and also Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure). 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to Phase 2, being the South Shaft/Old Mine and the Ventersdorp Contact Reef, or the VCR. The 50% relating to the Current Mine, Phase 1 north of the Wrench Fault and Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure) have been remodeled and designed. Due to no further information being available at this stage, the remaining deeper portion of the reserves continue to be based on the pre-acquisition figures, as declared by the IRP, as described above.

Gold Fields is presently undertaking a surface drilling exploration program that Gold Fields expects will provide additional technical information on the geological structure, sedimentology, facies characteristics and tenor of the Ventersdorp Contact Reef, or the VCR, and Upper Elsburg Reefs in the area below current infrastructure to the southern boundary of the mining area, or Phase 2. When the surface drilling exploration program is completed, Gold Fields expects the additional information will provide for enhanced resource modeling of the Phase 2 ground and will increase confidence levels with regard to in situ facies geometry, reef grades and tonnages. See also “Risk Factors—Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields included in this annual report.”

Forward-looking Statements

This annual report contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, with respect to Gold Fields’ financial condition, results of operations, business strategies, operating efficiencies, competitive position, growth opportunities for existing services, plans and objectives of management, markets for stock and other matters. Statements in this annual report that are not historical facts are “forward-looking statements.”

These forward-looking statements, including, among others, those relating to the future business prospects, revenues and income of Gold Fields, wherever they may occur in this annual report and the exhibits to the annual report, are necessarily estimates reflecting the best judgment of the senior management of Gold Fields and involve a number of risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those suggested by the forward-looking statements. As a consequence, these forward-looking statements should be considered in light of various important factors, including those set forth in this annual report. Important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from estimates or projections contained in the forward-looking statements include, without limitation:

 

   

overall economic and business conditions in South Africa, Ghana, Australia, Peru and elsewhere;

 

   

the ability to achieve anticipated efficiencies and other cost savings in connection with past and future acquisitions;

 

   

the ability to achieve anticipated cost savings at existing operations;

 

3


Table of Contents
   

the success of exploration and development activities;

 

   

decreases in the market price of gold or copper;

 

   

the occurrence of hazards associated with underground and surface gold mining;

 

   

the occurrence of work stoppages related to health and safety incidents;

 

   

the occurrence of labor disruptions and industrial actions;

 

   

the ability to manage and maintain access to current and future sources of liquidity, capital and credit, including the terms and conditions of Gold Fields facilities and Gold Fields overall cost of funding;

 

   

changes in relevant government regulations, particularly environmental regulations and potential new legislation affecting mining and mineral rights;

 

   

fluctuations in exchange rates, currency devaluations and other macroeconomic monetary policies; and

 

   

political and social instability in South Africa, Ghana, Peru or regionally in Africa or South America.

Gold Fields undertakes no obligation to update publicly or release any revisions to these forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date of this annual report or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.

 

4


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

 

       Page

Presentation of Financial Information

   1

Defined Terms and Conventions

   1

Information on South Deep, Western Areas and BGSA

   2

Forward-looking Statements

   3

PART I

   8

ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

   8

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

   8

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

   8

Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data

   8

Exchange Rates

   12

RISK FACTORS

   13

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

   32

Introduction

   32

Developments since June 30, 2008

   32

Organizational Structure

   35

Reserves of Gold Fields as of June 30, 2009

   42

Gold ore reserve statement as of June 30, 2009

   46

Copper ore reserve statement as of June 30, 2009

   49

Gold and copper price sensitivity

   50

Description of Mining Business

   51

Gold Fields’ Mining Operations

   56

Exploration

   101

Advanced Projects

   104

Arctic Platinum Project

   104

Sino Gold Alliance

   105

Recent Developments

   107

Insurance

   108

Environmental and Regulatory Matters

   108

Property

   128

Research and Development

   129

Legal Proceedings

   130

Glossary of Mining Terms

   130

 

5


Table of Contents
       Page

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

   137

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

   138

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

   200

Directors

   200

Directors and Executive Officers

   200

Executive Directors

   201

Non-executive Directors

   202

Executive Officers

   204

Retired Executive Officer

   205

Company Secretary

   206

Board of Directors’ Committees

   206

Executive Committee

   207

Regional Executive Management Committees

   207

Compensation of Directors and Senior Management

   209

Share Ownership of Directors and Executive Officers

   215

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan

   215

The GF Management Incentive Scheme

   216

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan

   217

The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan

   217

Executive Directors’ Terms of Employment

   217

Non-executive Director Fees

   219

Employees

   220

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

   230

Major Shareholders

   230

Related Party Transactions

   231

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

   236

Dividends and Dividend Policy

   236

Significant Changes

   236

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

   237

Listing Details

   237

JSE Trading History

   237

New York Stock Exchange Trading History

   238

JSE Limited

   239

 

6


Table of Contents
       Page

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

   240

General

   240

South African Exchange Control Limitations Affecting Security Holders

   255

Taxation

   256

Documents on Display

   261

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

   262

Foreign Currency Sensitivity

   262

Commodity Price Sensitivity

   264

Interest Rate Sensitivity

   267

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

   268

PART II

   269

ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

   269

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

   270

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

   271

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

   272

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

   273

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

   274

Audit Committee’s Policies and Procedures

   274

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

   275

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

   276

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

   277

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

   278

PART III

   279

ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

   279

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

   280

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

   280

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

   281

SIGNATURES

   285

 

7


Table of Contents

PART I

ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

Not applicable.

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable.

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data

The selected historical consolidated financial data set out below for each of the three years ended June 30, 2009 and as of June 30, 2009 and 2008 have been derived from Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements for those years and as of those dates and the related notes. The selected historical consolidated financial data for each of the two years ended June 30, 2006, and as of June 30, 2007, 2006 and 2005 have been derived from Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements as of that date, which are not included in this annual report, and adjusted where applicable as described below. The selected historical consolidated financial data presented below have been derived from financial statements which have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP. The other Operating Data presented has been calculated as described in the footnotes to the table below:

 

     Year ended June 30, (1)(2)  
     2005     2006     2007     2008     2009  
     ($ millions, unless otherwise stated)  

Statements of Operations Data

          

Revenues

   1,893.1      2,282.0      2,735.2      3,206.2      3,228.3   

Production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization)

   1,372.4      1,499.9      1,707.7      1,996.1      1,998.6   

Depreciation and amortization

   366.4      353.3      388.2      400.5      433.5   

Corporate expenditure

   22.5      21.9      38.4      41.0      35.5   

Employment termination costs

   13.7      9.1      4.9      16.2      21.0   

Exploration expenditure

   46.0      39.3      47.4      39.8      58.0   

Impairment of assets

   233.1      —        —        11.4      —     

Shaft closure costs

   —        —        —        3.3      (0.2

Impairment of critical spares

   2.8      —        —        —        —     

(Decrease)/increase in post-retirement healthcare provision

   (4.2   (0.5   1.3      (0.7   3.4   

Accretion expense on environmental rehabilitation

   11.5      8.6      6.4      12.0      13.9   

Share-based compensation

   2.1      11.5      12.5      20.7      33.7   

Harmony hostile bid costs

   50.8      —        —        —        —     

IAMGold transaction costs

   9.3      —        —        —        —     

Interest and dividends

   29.2      26.8      26.8      31.2      24.9   

Finance expense

   (54.9   (55.6   (95.2   (100.4   (73.9

Unrealized gain on financial instruments

   4.9      14.6      15.4      —        —     

Realized gain/(loss) on financial instruments

   2.1      (9.1   (10.7   19.8      (1.3

Realized (loss)/gain on foreign exchange

   —        —        (15.1   1.7      10.2   

Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment

   0.8      3.7      7.4      4.6      0.5   

Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries

   —        —        —        208.4      (0.3

Profit/(loss) on disposal of listed investments

   8.1      6.3      26.8      3.7      (16.1

Impairment of listed investments

   (7.7   —        —        —        (16.0

Profit on disposal of exploration rights

   7.5      —        —        —        —     

Other (expenses)/income

   (4.3   (16.5   (2.2   5.9      (7.7
                              

 

8


Table of Contents
     Year ended June 30, (1)(2)  
     2005     2006     2007     2008     2009  

(Loss)/income before tax, impairment of investment in equity investee, share of equity investees’ (losses)/income and minority interests

   (247.6   309.1      481.6      840.8      551.2   

Income and mining tax benefit/(expense)

   85.8      (110.6   (209.3   (271.2   (264.6
                              

(Loss)/Income before impairment of investment in equity investee, share of equity investees’ (losses)/income and minority interests

   (161.8   198.5      272.3      569.6      286.6   

Impairment of investment in equity investee

   —        —        —        (61.3   (87.4

Share of equity investees’ (losses)/income

   (0.8   (7.0   0.3      (16.0   (3.5

Minority interests

   (20.6   (29.8   (26.5   (39.8   (34.8
                              

Net (loss)/income

   (183.2   161.7      246.1      452.5      160.9   

Basic (loss)/earnings per share ($)

   (0.37   0.33      0.44      0.69      0.24   

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share ($)

   (0.37   0.33      0.44      0.69      0.24   

Dividend per share (Rand)

   0.70      0.80      2.00      1.60      1.50   

Dividend per share ($)

   0.11      0.13      0.28      0.22      0.17   

Other Operating Data

          

Total cash costs per ounce of gold produced ($) (3)

   302      338      394      505      538   

Total production costs per ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

   385      419      482      610      659   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

   416      441      596      822      763   

 

Notes:

 

(1) The data for each of the two years ended June 30, 2005 and 2006 has been adjusted due to a change in accounting policy in fiscal 2007 regarding ore reserve development costs, which were previously expensed and are now capitalized. Under this revised accounting policy, all costs associated with the development of a specific underground block or area are capitalized until saleable minerals are extracted from that specific block or area. At Gold Fields’ underground mines, these costs include the cost of shaft sinking and access, the costs of building access ways, lateral development, drift development, ramps, box cuts and other infrastructure development. Previously, at Gold Fields’ underground mines, costs incurred to develop the property were capitalized only until the reef horizons were intersected. Subsequent mine development costs to access other specific ore blocks or areas of the mine were treated as variable production costs and expensed as incurred.

 

(2) As a result of the acquisition of Western Areas, Western Areas was fully consolidated with Gold Fields as from December 1, 2006. See Note 3(d) to Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this annual report. During the period between December 1, 2006 and March 31, 2007, Gold Fields did not own 100% of Western Areas and therefore did not own 100% of South Deep. The percentages of the results of Western Areas and South Deep that did not accrue to Gold Fields have been accounted for as minority interests. U.S. GAAP requires that, where a company is acquired through a series of transactions, an investment in that company that was previously accounted for as available for sale be retrospectively accounted for on an equity basis. Since Gold Fields had previously held interests in Western Areas which were accounted for as available for sale, its results for prior years and the period July 1, 2006 to November 30, 2006 have been adjusted accordingly to account for the investment in Western Areas using the equity method.

 

(3)

Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce by dividing total cash costs, as determined using guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. The Gold Institute was a non-profit international industry association of miners, refiners, bullion suppliers and manufacturers of gold products that ceased operation in 2002, which developed a uniform format for reporting production costs on a per ounce basis. The Gold Institute has now been incorporated into the National Mining Association. The guidance was first adopted in 1996 and revised in November 1999. Total cash costs, as defined in the Gold Institute industry guidance, are production costs as recorded in the statement of operations, less offsite (i.e. central) general and administrative expenses (including head office costs performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand, Australian dollar and the Bolivar, compared with the

 

9


Table of Contents
 

U.S. dollar). Total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce are not U.S. GAAP measures. Management, however, believes that total cash costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/(loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. In particular, depreciation and amortization is included in a measure of production costs under U.S. GAAP, but is not included in total cash costs under the guidance provided by the Gold Institute. Furthermore, while the Gold Institute provided a definition for the calculation of total cash costs, the calculation of total cash costs per ounce may vary significantly among gold mining companies, and by itself does not necessarily provide a basis for comparison with other gold mining companies. See “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total cash costs per ounce.” For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total cash costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(4) Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce by dividing total production costs, as determined using the guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. Total production costs, as defined by the Gold Institute industry guidance, are total cash costs, as calculated using the Gold Institute guidance, plus amortization, depreciation and rehabilitation costs. Changes in total production costs per ounce are affected by operational performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand, and the Australian dollar compared with the U.S. dollar. Changes in the currency exchange rate between the Bolivar and the U.S. dollar affected changes in total production costs per ounce until the sale of the Choco 10 mine on November 30, 2007. Total production costs per ounce is not a U.S. GAAP measure. Management, however, believes that total production costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total production costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/(loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. While the Gold Institute provided a definition for the calculation of total production costs, the calculation of total production costs per ounce may vary significantly among gold mining companies, and by itself does not necessarily provide a basis for comparison with other gold mining companies. See “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total production costs per ounce.” For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008, and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(5) Gold Fields defines notional cash expenditure, or NCE, as operating costs plus additions to property, plant and equipment, and defines operating costs as production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization) plus corporate expenditure, employment termination costs and accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation. Gold Fields reports NCE on a per equivalent ounce basis. Management considers NCE per equivalent ounce to be an important measure as it believes NCE per equivalent ounce provides more information than other commonly used measures, such as total cash costs per equivalent ounce, regarding the real cost to Gold Fields of producing an equivalent ounce of gold, reflecting not only the ongoing costs of production but also the investment cost of bringing mines into production. Management also believes that NCE per equivalent ounce is a useful indication of the cash Gold Fields has available to do things other than produce gold, such as paying taxes, repaying debt, funding exploration and paying dividends.

 

    

NCE per equivalent ounce is not a U.S. GAAP measure. An investor should not consider NCE or operating costs in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, cash flows from operating activities or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. NCE and operating costs as presented in this annual report may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of performance of other companies. For a

 

10


Table of Contents
 

reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

 

     As at June 30, (1)(2)  
     2005     2006     2007    2008     2009  
     ($ millions, unless otherwise stated)  

Balance Sheet Data

           

Cash and cash equivalents

   503.7      217.7      326.4    253.7      357.5   

Current portion of financial instruments

   46.8      30.4      —      6.9      —     

Receivables

   119.9      148.7      297.7    280.1      383.5   

Inventories

   77.4      111.3      144.9    152.8      196.0   

Material contained on heap leach pads

   55.1      47.7      58.1    74.5      81.3   
                             

Total current assets

   802.9      555.8      827.1    768.0      1,018.3   

Property, plant and equipment, net

   2,688.6      3,172.1      5,576.8    5,423.7      5,756.9   

Goodwill

   —        —        1,222.7    1,092.8      1,084.7   

Non-current portion of financial instruments

   32.4      —        —      —        —     

Non-current investments

   192.0      371.8      401.8    737.4      475.2   
                             

Total assets

   3,715.9      4,099.7      8,028.4    8,021.9      8,335.1   
                             

Accounts payable and provisions

   241.9      299.8      463.6    610.3      533.5   

Current portion of financial instruments

   —        —        10.8    —        1.7   

Interest payable

   32.6      29.8      34.7    29.2      14.4   

Income and mining taxes payable

   18.0      46.8      72.2    123.1      98.2   

Current portion of long-term loans

   —        0.3      227.5    772.9      317.8   

Bank overdraft

   —        —        3.3    2.7      9.7   
                             

Total current liabilities

   292.5      376.7      812.1    1,538.2      975.3   

Long-term loans

   653.1      737.9      1,211.8    564.2      785.9   

Deferred income and mining taxes

   650.0      781.8      879.5    719.9      817.7   

Provision for environmental rehabilitation

   134.6      146.4      197.2    216.2      236.9   

Provision for post-retirement healthcare costs

   9.0      7.4      9.5    7.9      11.4   

Other non-current liabilities

   —        —        —      —        3.9   

Minority interests

   118.4      125.1      127.1    151.4      279.5   

Share capital

   43.7      43.9      54.8    54.9      57.7   

Additional paid-in capital

   1,797.9      1,827.6      4,459.8    4,490.4      4,944.2   

Retained earnings

   24.0      123.9      211.8    521.8      561.5   

Accumulated other comprehensive (loss)/income

   (7.3   (71.0   64.8    (243.0   (338.9

Total shareholders’ equity

   1,858.3      1,924.4      4,791.2    4,824.1      5,224.5   
                             

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

   3,715.9      4,099.7      8,028.4    8,021.9      8,335.1   
                             

 

     As at June 30, (1)(2)
     2005    2006    2007    2008    2009
     ($ millions, unless otherwise stated)

Other Financial Data

              

Number of ordinary shares as adjusted to reflect changes in capital structure

   492,294,226    494,824,723    652,158,066    653,200,682    704,749,849

Net assets

   1,858.3    1,924.4    4,791.2    4,824.1    5,224.5

 

Notes:

 

(1) The data as of June 30, 2005 and 2006 has been adjusted due to a change in accounting policy in fiscal 2007 regarding ore reserve development costs, which were previously expensed and are now capitalized. Under this revised accounting principle, all costs associated with the development of a specific underground block or area are capitalized until saleable minerals are extracted from that specific block or area. At Gold Fields’ underground mines, these costs include the cost of shaft sinking and access, the costs of building access ways, lateral development, drift development, ramps, box cuts and other infrastructure development. Previously, at Gold Fields’ underground mines, costs incurred to develop the property were capitalized only until the reef horizons were intersected. Subsequent mine development costs to access other specific ore blocks or areas of the mine were treated as variable production costs and expensed as incurred.

 

11


Table of Contents
(2) As a result of the acquisition of Western Areas, Western Areas was fully consolidated with Gold Fields as from December 1, 2006. See Note 3(d) to Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this annual report. During the period between December 1, 2006 and March 31, 2007, Gold Fields did not own 100% of Western Areas and therefore did not own 100% of South Deep. The percentages of the results of Western Areas and South Deep that did not accrue to Gold Fields have been accounted for as minority interests. U.S. GAAP requires that, where a company is acquired through a series of transactions, an investment in that company that was previously accounted for as available for sale be retrospectively accounted for on an equity basis. Since Gold Fields had previously held interests in Western Areas which were accounted for as available for sale, its results for prior years and the period July 1, 2006 to November 30, 2006 have been adjusted accordingly to account for the investment in Western Areas using the equity method.

Exchange Rates

The following tables set forth, for the periods indicated, the average, high, low and period-end exchange rates of Rand for US Dollars, expressed in Rand per $1.00. For periods prior to December 31, 2008, the following tables express the exchange rates in terms of the noon buying rate in New York City for cable transfers in Rand as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. As of December 31, 2008, the Federal Reserve Bank ceased publication of the noon buying rate and, as such, the exchange rates for fiscal 2009 are sourced from I-Net Bridge, being the closing rate at period end.

 

Year ended June 30,

   Average (1)  

2005

   6.20 (1)  

2006

   6.42 (1)  

2007

   7.20 (1)  

2008

   7.30 (1)  

2009

   9.01 (2)  

2010 (through November 30, 2009)

   7.67 (2)  

 

Notes:

 

(1) The average of the noon buying rates on the last day of each full month during the relevant period as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York.

 

(2) The daily average of the closing rate during the relevant period as reported by I-Net Bridge.

 

Month ended

   High    Low

May 31, 2009

   8.65    7.93

June 30, 2009

   8.20    7.72

July 31, 2009

   8.27    7.71

August 31, 2009

   8.15    7.74

September 30, 2009

   7.89    7.31

October 30, 2009

   7.84    7.23

November 30, 2009

   7.97    7.32

The closing rate for the Rand on November 30, 2009 as reported by I-Net Bridge was Rand 7.40 per $1.00. Fluctuations in the exchange rate between the Rand and the U.S. dollar will affect the dollar equivalent of the price of the ordinary shares on JSE Limited, or JSE, which may affect the market price of the American Depositary Shares, or ADSs, on the New York Stock Exchange. These fluctuations will also affect the U.S. dollar amounts received by owners of ADSs on the conversion of any dividends paid in Rand on the ordinary shares.

 

12


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

In addition to the other information included in this annual report, the considerations listed below could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, financial condition or results of operations, resulting in a decline in the trading price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs. The risks set forth below comprise all material risks currently known to Gold Fields. However, there may be additional risks that Gold Fields does not currently know of or that Gold Fields currently deems immaterial based on the information available to it. These factors should be considered carefully, together with the information and financial data set forth in this document.

Changes in the market price for gold, and to a lesser extent copper, which in the past have fluctuated widely, affect the profitability of Gold Fields’ operations and the cash flows generated by those operations.

Substantially all of Gold Fields’ revenues are derived from the sale of gold. Historically, the market price for gold has fluctuated widely and has been affected by numerous factors over which Gold Fields has no control, including:

 

   

the demand for gold for industrial uses and for use in jewelry;

 

   

actual, expected or rumored purchases and sales of gold bullion holdings by central banks or other large gold bullion holders or dealers;

 

   

speculative trading activities in gold;

 

   

the overall level of forward sales by other gold producers;

 

   

the overall level and cost of production by other gold producers;

 

   

international or regional political and economic events or trends;

 

   

the strength or weakness of the U.S. dollar (the currency in which gold prices generally are quoted) and of other currencies;

 

   

financial market expectations regarding the rate of inflation; and

 

   

interest rates.

In addition, the current demand for and supply of gold affects the price of gold, but not necessarily in the same manner as current demand and supply affect the prices of other commodities. Since the potential supply of gold is large relative to mine production in any given year, normal variations in current production will not necessarily have a significant effect on the supply of gold or the gold price. Central banks, financial institutions and individuals historically have held large amounts of gold as a store of value, and production in any given year historically has constituted a small portion of the total potential supply of gold. Historically, gold has tended to retain its value in relative terms against basic goods in times of inflation and monetary crisis. Pursuant to a gold sales agreement entered into by 15 European central banks, individual banks may sell up to 400 tons of gold per year and the International Monetary Fund has indicated that it may sell up to approximately 400 tons of gold and has already sold 200 tons of gold to the central bank of India. However, the effect on the market of these or any other gold sales is unclear.

While the aggregate effect of these factors is impossible for Gold Fields to predict, if gold prices should fall below the amount it costs Gold Fields’ to produce gold and remain at such levels for any sustained period, Gold Fields may experience losses and may be forced to curtail or suspend some or all of its operations and/or reduce capital expenditures. In addition, Gold Fields might not be able to recover any losses it may incur during that period.

Copper accounts for a significant proportion of the revenues at Gold Fields’ Cerro Corona mine, although copper is not a major element of Gold Fields’ overall revenues. A decline in copper prices, which have also fluctuated widely, could adversely affect the revenues and cashflows from the Cerro Corona mine.

 

13


Table of Contents

Because Gold Fields does not use commodity or derivative instruments to protect against low gold prices with respect to its production, Gold Fields is exposed to the impact of any significant decline in the gold price.

As a general rule, Gold Fields sells its gold production at market prices. Gold Fields generally does not enter into forward sales, derivatives or other hedging arrangements to establish a price in advance for the sale of its future gold production. In general, hedging reduces the risk of exposure to volatility in the gold price. Hedging also enables a gold producer to fix a future price for hedged gold that generally is higher than the then current spot price. To the extent that it does not generally use commodity or derivative instruments, Gold Fields will not be protected against decreases in the gold price and, if the gold price decreases significantly, Gold Fields runs the risk of reduced revenues in respect of gold production that is not hedged. See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk.”

Gold Fields’ reserves are estimates based on a number of assumptions, any changes to which may require Gold Fields to lower its estimated reserves.

The ore reserves stated in this annual report represent the amount of gold and copper that Gold Fields estimated, as of June 30, 2009, could be mined, processed and sold at prices sufficient to recover Gold Fields’ estimated future total costs of production, remaining investment and anticipated additional capital expenditures. Ore reserves are estimates based on assumptions regarding, among other things, Gold Fields’ costs, expenditures, prices and exchange rates, many of which are beyond Gold Fields’ control. In the event that Gold Fields revises any of these assumptions in an adverse manner, Gold Fields may need to revise its ore reserves downwards. In particular, if Gold Fields’ production costs or capital expenditures increase, if gold or copper prices decrease or if the Rand or Australian dollar strengthens against the U.S. dollar, a portion of Gold Fields’ ore reserves may become uneconomical to recover, forcing Gold Fields to lower its estimated reserves. See “Information on the Company—Reserves of Gold Fields as of June 30, 2009.”

To the extent that Gold Fields seeks to expand through acquisitions, it may experience problems in executing acquisitions or managing and integrating the acquisitions with its existing operations.

In order to expand its operations and reserve base, Gold Fields may seek to make acquisitions of selected precious metal producing and/or exploration companies or assets. Gold Fields’ success at making any acquisitions will depend on a number of factors, including, but not limited to:

 

   

negotiating acceptable terms with the seller of the business or equities to be acquired;

 

   

obtaining approval from regulatory authorities;

 

   

assimilating the operations of an acquired business in a timely and efficient manner;

 

   

maintaining Gold Fields’ financial and strategic focus while integrating the acquired business;

 

   

implementing uniform standards, controls, procedures and policies at the acquired business; and

 

   

operating in a new environment to the extent that Gold Fields makes an acquisition outside of markets in which it has previously operated.

There can be no assurance that any acquisition will achieve the results intended. Any problems experienced by Gold Fields in connection with an acquisition as a result of one or more of these factors could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

To the extent that Gold Fields seeks to expand through its exploration program, it may experience problems associated with mineral exploration or developing mining projects.

In order to expand its operations and reserve base, Gold Fields may rely on its exploration program for gold and other metals associated with gold and its ability to develop mining projects. Exploration for gold and other metals associated with gold is speculative in nature, involves many risks and frequently is unsuccessful. Any

 

14


Table of Contents

exploration program entails risks relating to the location of economic orebodies, the development of appropriate metallurgical processes, the receipt of necessary governmental permits and regulatory approvals and the construction of mining and processing facilities at the mining site. Gold Fields’ exploration efforts may not result in the discovery of gold or other metals associated with gold and any mineralization discovered may not result in an increase of Gold Fields’ reserves. If orebodies are developed, it can take a number of years and substantial expenditures from the initial phases of drilling until production commences, during which time the economic feasibility of production may change. Gold Fields’ exploration program may not result in the replacement of current production with new reserves or result in any new commercial mining operations. Also, to the extent Gold Fields participates in the development of a project through a joint venture or any other commercial structure, there could be disagreements, legal or otherwise, or divergent interests or goals among the joint venture parties which could jeopardize the success of the project.

In addition, significant capital investment is required to achieve commercial production from exploration efforts. There is no assurance that Gold Fields will have, or be able to raise, the required funds to engage in these activities or to meet its obligations with respect to the exploration properties in which it has or may acquire an interest.

Due to the nature of mining and the type of gold mines it operates, Gold Fields faces a material risk of liability, delays and increased production costs from environmental and industrial accidents and pollution.

The business of gold mining by its nature involves significant risks and hazards, including environmental hazards and industrial and mining accidents. In particular, hazards associated with Gold Fields’ underground mining operations include:

 

   

rock bursts;

 

   

seismic events, particularly at the Driefontein, Kloof and South Deep operations;

 

   

underground fires and explosions, including those caused by flammable gas or in connection with blasting;

 

   

cave-ins or gravity falls of ground;

 

   

discharges of gases and toxic substances;

 

   

releases of radioactivity;

 

   

flooding;

 

   

electrocution;

 

   

falling from height;

 

   

accidents related to the presence of mobile machinery, including shaft conveyances and elevators;

 

   

ground and surface water pollution, including as a result of potential spillage or seepage from tailings dams;

 

   

sinkhole formation and ground subsidence;

 

   

human error; and

 

   

other accidents and conditions resulting from drilling, blasting and removing and processing material from an underground mine.

Gold Fields’ South African operations may be more susceptible to certain of these risks because significant amounts of mining occur at deep levels of up to 3,500 meters below the surface.

 

15


Table of Contents

Hazards associated with Gold Fields’ open pit mining operations include:

 

   

flooding of the open pit;

 

   

collapses of the open pit walls;

 

   

electrocution;

 

   

accidents associated with the operation of large open pit mining and rock transportation equipment;

 

   

accidents related to the presence of other mobile machinery;

 

   

accidents associated with the preparation and ignition of large-scale open pit blasting operations;

 

   

ground and surface water pollution, including as a result of potential spillage or seepage from tailings dams;

 

   

production disruptions due to weather; and

 

   

hazards associated with heap leach processing, such as groundwater and waterway contamination.

Hazards associated with Gold Fields’ rock dump and production stockpile mining and tailings disposal include:

 

   

accidents associated with operating a rock dump and production stockpile and rock transportation equipment;

 

   

production disruptions due to weather;

 

   

sinkhole formation and ground subsidence;

 

   

collapses of tailings dams; and

 

   

ground and surface water pollution, on and off site.

Gold Fields is at risk of experiencing any and all of these environmental or other industrial hazards. The occurrence of any of these hazards could delay or halt production, increase production costs and result in liability for Gold Fields.

Gold Fields may also be subject to actions by labor groups or other interested parties who object to perceived conditions at the mines or to the perceived environmental impact of the mines. These actions may delay or halt production or may create negative publicity related to Gold Fields.

If Gold Fields experiences losses of senior management or is unable to hire and retain sufficient technically skilled employees, its business may be materially and adversely affected.

Gold Fields’ ability to operate or expand effectively depends largely on the experience, skills and performance of its senior management team. There can be no certainty that the services of its senior management will continue to be available to Gold Fields. Any senior management departures could adversely affect Gold Fields’ efficiency, control over operations and results of operations.

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields restructured its operations into four regions. See “Information on the Company—Strategy—Regional Delivery Model”. An important element of this restructuring is bolstering the technical skills base of each of the four regional management teams to provide additional resources and to provide for succession planning. The mining industry, including Gold Fields, continues to experience a global shortage of technically skilled employees. Gold Fields may be unable to hire or retain appropriate technically skilled employees or other management personnel, or may have to pay higher levels of compensation than it currently intends in order to do so. If Gold Fields is not able to hire and retain appropriate management and technically skilled personnel, it may not achieve the intended benefits of its regional restructuring, which could have an adverse effect on its results of operations and financial position.

 

16


Table of Contents

Because gold is generally sold in U.S. dollars, while most of Gold Fields’ production costs are in Rand, Australian dollars and other non-U.S. dollar currencies, Gold Fields’ operating results or financial condition could be materially harmed by an appreciation in the value of these other currencies.

Gold is sold throughout the world principally in U.S. dollars, but Gold Fields’ costs of production are incurred principally in Rand, Australian dollars and other non-U.S. dollar currencies. As a result, any significant and sustained appreciation of any of these currencies against the U.S. dollar may materially increase Gold Fields’ costs in U.S. dollar terms, which could adversely affect Gold Fields’ operating results or financial condition.

Economic, political or social instability in the countries or regions where Gold Fields operates may have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.

Gold Fields has significant operations in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. As a result, changes or instability to the economic, political or social environment in any of these countries or in neighboring countries could affect an investment in Gold Fields.

Several of these countries have, or have had in the recent past, high levels of inflation. Continued or increased inflation in any of the countries where it operates could increase the prices Gold Fields pays for products and services, including wages for its employees and power costs, which if not offset by increased gold prices or currency devaluations could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ financial condition and results of operations.

The South African government has implemented laws aimed at alleviating and redressing the disadvantages suffered by citizens under previous governments. In the future, the South African government may implement new laws and policies, which in turn may have an adverse impact on Gold Fields’ operations and profits. In recent years, South Africa has continued to experience high levels of crime and unemployment. These problems may have impacted fixed inward investment into South Africa and have prompted emigration of skilled workers. As a result, Gold Fields may have difficulties attracting and retaining qualified employees.

National elections took place in South Africa in April 2009. South Africa is a young democracy, with the election being only the fourth since the current political system was instituted. It is not certain what, if any, political, economic or social impact the elections will have in South Africa generally, or on Gold Fields specifically. Regional and national elections will take place in Peru in late 2010 and early 2011, respectively. It is not certain what, if any, political or economic impact the elections will have on Peru generally, or on Gold Fields specifically.

There has been an increase in union activity in many industries in the countries in which Gold Fields operates. Greater union activity may increase labor costs and the risk of strikes and may adversely affect Gold Fields’ financial position and results of operations. A number of unions in various industries have recently gone on strike in South Africa causing work stoppages and production losses. In Ghana, Gold Fields is currently negotiating with unions representing many of its employees and labor unions have recently undertaken strikes and “go slow” actions against other mining companies. The Australian federal government has introduced a new federal industrial relations system which increases the role and rights of unions in the workplace. Under the new system, the federal government has abolished the use of Australian Workplace Agreements and introduced a new collective bargaining framework that introduces “good faith bargaining” obligations for employers, fewer restrictions on the content of collective agreements and an enhanced role for union officials as bargaining representatives, parties to agreements and participants in dispute resolution. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—Australia.”

There has been regional political and economic instability in certain of the countries surrounding South Africa. Any similar political or economic instability in South Africa could have a negative impact on Gold Fields’ ability to manage and operate its South African operations. There has been local opposition to mine

 

17


Table of Contents

development projects in Peru. Notwithstanding the fact that Gold Fields was complying with the commitments it had made to the local communities, in mid-October 2006, there was an illegal blockade of the access road to the Cerro Corona site resulting in a temporary suspension of construction activities at the site for 30 days. The blockade was accompanied by demands for increased employment from local communities and increased use of local contractors. In addition, the Cerro Corona site is located near the Yanacocha mine which is operated by another company. The Yanacocha mine has also been the subject of local protests, including ones that blocked the road between the Yanacocha mine complex and the City of Cajamarca, which also affected access to the Cerro Corona site. There have also been protests against a Gold Fields joint venture exploration project in Peru. If Gold Fields experiences further opposition in connection with its operations in Peru, or if protests aimed at other mining operations affect operations at Cerro Corona, it could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ financial condition and results of operations.

As a result of its disposal of its operations in Venezuela to Rusoro Mining Limited, or Rusoro, Gold Fields holds a stake in Rusoro valued at approximately $48.4 million as of June 30, 2009 and is therefore indirectly exposed to the risks of operating in Venezuela. Venezuela has experienced intense political and social turmoil in recent years and there can be no guarantee that Gold Fields’ stake in Rusoro will not lose some or all of its value.

Some of Gold Fields’ power suppliers have forced it to halt or curtail activities at its mines, due to severe power disruptions. Power stoppages, fluctuations and power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations and its financial condition.

In South Africa, Gold Fields’ mining operations are dependent upon electrical power generated by the State utility, Eskom. Eskom holds a monopoly on power supply in the South African market. As a result of an increase in demand exceeding available generating capacity, South Africa has been subject to disruptions in electrical power supply. On January 24, 2008, Gold Fields was forced to suspend all mining activity at its South African operations for several days, due to Eskom declaring force majeure and advising its Key Industrial Consumers, of which Gold Fields is one, that it could not guarantee the supply of electricity, forcing Gold Fields to reduce consumption to the minimum possible level. 50% of Gold Fields’ normal electrical consumption is required simply to pump, ventilate and refrigerate its South African operations. On January 28, 2008, the power supply was restored to 71% of total average consumption allowing Gold Fields to begin ramping up production at its South African operations. By mid-March 2008, the total power available to Gold Fields’ Driefontein and Kloof mines was approximately 95% of the historical average consumption profile, and at the Beatrix and South Deep mines the percentage was approximately 90%. However, there can be no assurance that power supplies can or will be maintained at this level. The determination of the historical average consumption profile remains under discussion with Eskom, while the Department of Energy finalizes rules regarding baseline adjustments and load growth. Eskom has increased power tariffs significantly, with announced average rises of approximately 33.6% for industrial customers. Gold Fields has experienced real increases in power tariffs of 36.0%, an increase in excess of the announced average for industrial customers as a result of structural changes made to the large power user tariffs and a limitation of 15% on the increase to certain residential tariffs. Gold Fields expects further significant additional increases during the next several years as Eskom embarks on an electricity generation capacity expansion program. While Eskom has applied to the National Energy Regulator of South Africa, or NERSA, for a 35% average tariff increase on each of April 1, 2010, 2011 and 2012, it is uncertain what level of increase will be granted by NERSA. The application is subject to a public comment period, in which Gold Fields has participated, which will end with public hearings in January 2010. Should Gold Fields experience any additional power outages or further power tariff increases or usage constraints, then its financial condition and results of operations may be adversely impacted. In fiscal 2009, power costs made up approximately 11.0% of the costs of production at the South African operations. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Driefontein Operation—Mining.”

Gold Fields’ power needs in South Africa will increase as it builds up production at its South Deep mine. It has requested an additional allocation from Eskom and Eskom has indicated that the additional requested capacity will be granted. However, there can be no assurance that Gold Fields will receive all of the power it needs. Any failure to receive power allocation could have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ ability to develop South Deep.

 

18


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Ghana Limited, or Gold Fields Ghana, among other mining companies in Ghana, was asked by the state electricity supplier, the Volta River Authority, or VRA, in August 2006 to significantly reduce its electricity demand largely because of the low water reservoir level of the VRA’s Akosombo generating facility and concerns about its ability to meet future supply and demand at present consumption levels. The VRA subsequently raised the electricity tariff significantly. Since then, the power supply has stabilized and the tariff has been reduced. Although the VRA did not impose any power cuts, frequent power interruptions were experienced. The national utility remains reliant on hydropower for approximately 50% of its generation and there can be no assurance that there will not be new disruptions to the electricity supply in the future.

Actual and potential shortages of production inputs may have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.

Gold Fields’ results of operations may be affected by the availability and pricing of raw materials and other essential production inputs, including fuel, steel and cyanide and other reagents. The price of raw materials may be substantially affected by changes in global supply and demand, along with weather conditions, governmental controls and other factors. A sustained interruption on the supply of any of these materials would require Gold Fields to find substitute suppliers acceptable to the Company and could require it to pay higher prices for such materials. Any significant increase in the prices of these materials will increase the Company’s operating costs and affect production considerations.

Giant tires, of the type used by Gold Fields for its large earthmoving equipment and trucks, are in short supply, and prices have risen recently and may continue to rise in the future. This shortage of tires for earthmoving vehicles is causing mining companies to review operating practices, to seek additional methods of preserving tire life and to examine alternative sources of tire supply. To the extent that Gold Fields is unable to procure an adequate supply of these tires, it may have to alter its mining plans, especially at its open pit operations, which could reduce its gold production and have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

The transportation of concentrate produced at Cerro Corona by truck and ship can be interrupted, or result in environmental damage.

The gold/copper concentrate produced at Gold Field’s Cerro Corona operation in Peru is transported by truck from the mine to the coast where it is loaded onto ships for transportation to smelters in Asia and Europe, with the risk of loss passing to the buyers only once the concentrate is loaded onto the ship. Gold Fields uses convoys of at least five trucks, accompanied by security personnel to transport the concentrate to the port, but the trucks are still susceptible to road blockades and possible theft of concentrate. On arrival at the port, transfer of the concentrate to ships can be delayed by restrictions on port operations. Any delays in the transportation of concentrate can adversely affect the timing of Gold Fields’ cashflows and its results of operations. The movement of the concentrate also presents the possibility of environmental damage in the case of spillage. Gold Fields could be held responsible for the damage, even if a contractor undertakes the actual transportation.

Gold Fields’ insurance coverage may prove inadequate to satisfy potential claims.

Gold Fields may become subject to liability for pollution, occupational illnesses or other hazards against which it has not insured, cannot insure or has insufficiently insured, including those in respect of past mining activities. Gold Fields’ existing property and liability insurance contains exclusions and limitations on coverage. Should Gold Fields suffer a major loss, future earnings could be affected. In addition, insurance may not continue to be available at economically acceptable premiums. As a result, in the future, Gold Fields’ insurance coverage may not cover the extent of claims against Gold Fields, including, but not limited to, claims for environmental or industrial accidents, occupational illnesses or pollution.

 

19


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ financial flexibility could be materially constrained by South African exchange control regulations.

South Africa’s exchange control regulations restrict the export of capital from South Africa, the Republic of Namibia, and the Kingdoms of Lesotho and Swaziland, known collectively as the Common Monetary Area. Transactions between South African residents (including companies) and non-residents of the Common Monetary Area are subject to exchange controls enforced by the South African Reserve Bank, or SARB. As a result, Gold Fields’ ability to raise and deploy capital outside the Common Monetary Area is restricted.

Under South African exchange control regulations, Gold Fields must obtain approval from the SARB regarding any capital raising involving a currency other than the Rand. In connection with its approval, it is possible that the SARB may impose conditions on Gold Fields’ use of the proceeds of any such capital raising, such as limits on Gold Fields’ ability to retain the proceeds of the capital raising outside South Africa or requirements that Gold Fields seek further SARB approval prior to applying any such funds to a specific use. These restrictions could hinder Gold Fields’ financial and strategic flexibility, particularly its ability to fund acquisitions, capital expenditures and exploration projects outside South Africa. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Exchange Controls.”

An acquisition of shares in or assets of a South African company by a non-South African purchaser that is subject to exchange control regulations may not be granted regulatory approval.

In some circumstances, potential acquisitions of shares in or assets of South African companies by non-South African resident purchasers are subject to review by the SARB pursuant to South African exchange control regulations. In 2000, the South African Treasury, or the Treasury, refused to approve an acquisition of Gold Fields by Franco-Nevada Mining Corporation Limited, a Canadian mining company. The Treasury may refuse to approve similar proposed acquisitions of Gold Fields in the future. As a result, Gold Fields’ management may be limited in its ability to consider strategic options and Gold Fields’ shareholders may not be able to realize the premium over the current trading price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares which they might otherwise receive upon such an acquisition. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Exchange Controls.”

Gold Fields’ operations and financial condition may be adversely affected by labor disputes or changes in labor laws.

Gold Fields may be affected by certain labor laws that impose duties and obligations regarding worker rights, including rights regarding wages and benefits. For example, laws in South Africa impose monetary penalties for non-compliance with the administrative and the reporting requirements in respect of affirmative action policies, while Ghanaian law contains broad provisions requiring mining companies to recruit and train Ghanaian personnel and to use the services of Ghanaian companies. There can be no assurance that existing labor laws will not be amended or new laws enacted to impose additional reporting or compliance obligations or further increase worker rights in the future. Any expansion of these obligations or rights, especially to the extent they increase Gold Fields’ labor costs, could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

Gold Fields may suffer adverse consequences as a result of its reliance on outside contractors to conduct some of its operations.

A significant portion of Gold Fields’ operations in Australia, Peru and the Damang operation in Ghana, and a smaller portion elsewhere, are currently conducted by outside contractors. As a result, Gold Fields’ operations at those sites are subject to a number of risks, some of which are outside Gold Fields’ control, including:

 

   

negotiating agreements with contractors on acceptable terms;

 

   

the inability to replace a contractor and its operating equipment in the event that either party terminates the agreement;

 

20


Table of Contents
   

reduced control over those aspects of operations which are the responsibility of the contractor;

 

   

failure of a contractor to perform under its agreement with Gold Fields;

 

   

interruption of operations or increased costs in the event that a contractor ceases its business due to insolvency or other unforeseen events;

 

   

failure of a contractor to comply with applicable legal and regulatory requirements, to the extent it is responsible for such compliance; and

 

   

problems of a contractor with managing its workforce, labor unrest or other employment issues.

In addition, Gold Fields may incur liability to third parties as a result of the actions of its contractors. The occurrence of one or more of these risks could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, results of operations and financial condition. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—Ghana”, “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—Australia” and “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—Peru.”

Regulation of greenhouse gas emissions and climate change issues may adversely affect Gold Fields’ operations.

Energy is a significant input to Gold Fields’ mining and processing operations, with its principal energy sources being electricity, purchased petroleum products, natural gas and coal. There is a substantial weight of scientific evidence concluding that CO 2 emissions from fossil fuel-based energy consumption contribute to global warming, greenhouse effects and climate change.

A number of governments or governmental bodies have introduced or are contemplating regulatory changes in response to the potential impacts of climate change. The December 1997 Kyoto Protocol established a set of greenhouse gas emission targets for developed countries that have ratified the Protocol. South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru have ratified the Protocol. The Australian Government’s plan of action on climate change includes the introduction of a national emissions trading scheme by 2010 and a mandatory renewable energy target of 20% by the year 2020. Elsewhere, there is current and emerging climate change regulation that will affect energy prices, demand and margins for carbon intensive products. From a medium- and long-term perspective, Gold Fields is likely to see an increase in costs relating to its energy-intensive assets and assets that emit significant amounts of greenhouse gases as a result of regulatory initiatives in countries in which it operates. These regulatory initiatives will be either voluntary or mandatory and may impact Gold Fields’ operations directly or by affecting its suppliers or customers. Inconsistency of regulations particularly between developed and developing countries may affect Gold Fields’ decision to pursue opportunities in certain countries and also may affect its costs of operations. Assessments of the potential impact of future climate change regulation are uncertain, given the wide scope of potential regulatory change in countries in which Gold Fields operates.

The potential physical impacts of climate change on Gold Fields’ operations are highly uncertain, and would be particular to the geographic circumstances. These may include changes in rainfall patterns and intensities, water shortages, changing sea levels, and changing temperatures. These effects may adversely impact the cost, production and financial performance of Gold Fields’ operations.

Illegal mining occurs on Gold Fields’ properties, is difficult to control, can disrupt Gold Fields’ business and can expose Gold Fields to liability.

A number of Gold Fields’ properties have experienced illegal mining activities. For example, in 2008, approximately 2,000 miners illegally occupied the Rex pit at the Damang operation. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Ghana Operations—Damang Mine—Mining”. Illegal mining could result in depletion of mineral deposits, potentially making the future mining of such deposits uneconomic. The activities of the illegal miners could cause environmental damage or other damage to Gold Fields’ properties

 

21


Table of Contents

including underground fires, or personal injury or death, for which Gold Fields could potentially be held responsible. The presence of illegal miners could lead to project delays and disputes regarding the development or operation of commercial gold deposits, particularly in Ghana. Illegal mining could also have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ financial condition or results of operations.

Gold Fields’ South African operations may be adversely affected by increased labor costs or industrial action at its mining operations in South Africa.

Wages and related labor costs accounted for approximately 50% of Gold Fields’ total production costs in South Africa in fiscal 2009. Accordingly, Gold Fields’ costs may be materially affected by increases in wages and related labor costs, particularly with respect to Gold Fields’ South African employees, who are unionized. Negotiations with South African unions that concluded in July 2009 resulted in above-inflation wage increases ranging from 9% to 10.2%, depending upon the category of employee. In total, labor costs increased approximately 14.1% in South Africa in fiscal 2009 (excluding South Deep due to the impact of the retrenchment that took place in fiscal 2009), mainly due to wage increases and a 1% increase in employee numbers necessary to support the increase in mining volumes.

In addition, the South African mining unions have taken and have indicated they may continue to take industrial action to protest a variety of issues. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Driefontein Operation—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Kloof Operation—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Beatrix Operation—Mining” and “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—South Deep Operation—Mining”.

If Gold Fields is unable to increase production levels or implement cost cutting measures to offset these increased wages and labor costs and production losses from industrial action, these costs and losses could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ mining operations in South Africa and, accordingly, on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—South Africa.”

HIV/AIDS poses risks to Gold Fields in terms of lost productivity and increased costs.

The prevalence of HIV/AIDS in South Africa poses risks to Gold Fields in terms of potentially reduced productivity and increased medical and other costs. In May 2009, management estimated that approximately 33.2% of Gold Fields’ workforce in South Africa was infected with HIV. Increasingly, Gold Fields is seeing an adverse impact of HIV/AIDS on its affected employees, evidenced by increased absenteeism and reduced productivity. Compounding this is the concomitant infections with tuberculosis that accompanies the end stages of HIV illness and causes additional healthcare-related costs. Of particular concern is the risk of HIV positive patients developing multi-drug-resistant tuberculosis, which is very difficult and expensive to treat and has long-term impacts on the employees ability to perform their job productively. Medical literature states that HIV positive individuals have an eight times greater risk per year of developing tuberculosis than HIV negative patients. However, even with extensive intervention campaigns, the potential impact of HIV/AIDS on Gold Fields’ South African operations and financial condition is large. Factors influencing the impact of HIV/AIDS include the incidence of HIV infection among Gold Fields’ employees and in the community as a whole, the progressive impact of HIV/AIDS on infected employees’ health and productivity, and the medical and other costs associated with the infection. Most of these factors are beyond Gold Fields’ control. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Health and Safety—Health—HIV/AIDS Program.”

Gold Fields’ operations in South Africa are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Gold Fields’ South African operations are subject to various environmental laws and regulations including, for example, those relating to waste treatment, emissions and disposal, and must comply with permits or standards governing, among other things, tailings dams and waste disposal areas, water consumption, air

 

22


Table of Contents

emissions and water discharges. Gold Fields may, in the future, incur significant costs to comply with the South African environmental requirements imposed under existing or new legislation, regulations or permit requirements or to comply with changes in existing laws and regulations or the manner in which they are applied. Also, Gold Fields may be subject to litigation and other costs as a result of environmental rights granted to individuals under South Africa’s Constitution or other sources of rights. These costs could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Environmental.”

Gold Field’s South African operations are also subject to various health and safety laws and regulations which impose various duties on Gold Fields’ mines while granting the authorities broad powers to, among other things, close unsafe mines and order corrective action relating to health and safety matters. Further, certain targets were set by the Mine Health and Safety Council, a body consisting of representatives from the government, mining companies and unions, for the reduction of accidents, noise and silicosis to be achieved by 2013. Although projections indicate that these targets will be achieved there can be no assurance that this will occur. If a mine fails to achieve these targets, the Mine Health and Safety Council could potentially order that operations be halted.

There have been a number of accidents, many of which have resulted in fatalities, at various mining operations in South Africa recently, including accidents at some of Gold Fields’ operations. In October 2007, former President Thabo Mbeki ordered the DMR to conduct an occupational health and safety audit at all mines. There is no assurance that the occupational health and safety audit will not result in the introduction of more stringent safety regulations, which could result in restrictions on Gold Fields’ ability to conduct its mining operations and/or impose additional costs. Regardless of the consequences of the audit or improved health and safety programs, there can be no assurance that the unions will not take industrial action that could lead to losses in Gold Fields’ production. The DMR can and does issue instructions following safety incidents or accidents to partially or completely halt operations at affected mines. Moreover, it is Gold Fields’ policy to halt production at its operations where serious accidents occur in order to rectify dangerous situations and, if necessary, retrain workers. Any additional stoppages in production, or increased costs, could have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. In April 2009, the Mine Health and Safety Amendment Bill became law. As a result, Gold Fields is now subject to more stringent regulations regarding mine health and safety and may be subject to an increased risk of prosecution for industrial accidents as well as greater penalties and fines for non-compliance. Further, any changes to the health and safety laws which increase the burden of compliance or the penalties for non-compliance may cause Gold Fields to incur further significant costs. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Health and Safety.”

Gold Fields’ operations in South Africa are subject to water use licenses which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Under South African law, Gold Fields’ South African operations are subject to water use licenses that govern each operation’s water usage and that require, among other things, that mining operations achieve and maintain certain water quality limits regarding all water discharges. The Kloof operation was issued a water license in December 2008 which requires it to achieve compliance with these limits by 2012. Gold Fields’ other South African operations have been issued draft water licenses, which, when issued in final form, will likely be on terms similar to those in the Kloof license. Gold Fields’ operations have been generally in compliance with the proposed limits, however there have been instances where the water discharge exceeded the limits stipulated in the new water use licenses (draft and issued).

Gold Fields is reviewing and investigating a water treatment strategy that will, if successfully implemented, position Gold Fields favorably with regard to achieving these limits. However, there can be no assurance that Gold Fields will achieve such compliance within the required timeframe due primarily to the associated

 

23


Table of Contents

regulatory approval processes and commercial agreements that are required. Gold Fields is currently in discussions with the Department of Water Affairs to amend the Kloof license to extend the deadline for compliance beyond 2012. However, there can be no assurance that Gold Fields will receive such an extension. Gold Fields expects to make significant expenditure to achieve and maintain compliance with the license requirements at each South African operation. Any failure on Gold Fields’ part to achieve or maintain compliance with the requirements of these licenses with respect to any of its operations could result in Gold Fields being subject to substantial penalties, fees and expenses, significant delays in operations or potentially the loss of the relevant water use license, which could curtail or halt production at the affected operation. Any of the above could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

Gold Fields’ mineral rights in South Africa are subject to legislation which could impose significant costs and burdens.

The 2002 Minerals Act

The Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act No. 28 of 2002, or the 2002 Minerals Act, came into effect on May 1, 2004, together with the implementation of a broad-based socio-economic empowerment charter, or the Mining Charter, for effecting entry of historically disadvantaged South Africans, or HDSAs, into the mining industry. Among other things, the Mining Charter requires (i) each mining company to achieve a 15% HDSA ownership of mining assets within five years after the Mining Charter’s coming into effect and a 26% HDSA ownership of mining assets within 10 years after the Mining Charter’s coming into effect, (ii) the mining industry as a whole to agree to assist HDSA companies in securing finance to fund participation in an amount of Rand 100 billion over the first five years and (iii) mining companies to spell out plans for achieving employment equity at management level with a view to achieving a baseline of 40% HDSA participation in management and achieving a baseline of 10% participation by women in the mining industry, in each case within five years. In accordance with the 2002 Minerals Act, the DMR published a Code of Good Conduct on April 30, 2009, or the Code, and the Housing and Living Code Standard for the Mining Industry, or the Standard, relating to the socio-economic transformation of the mining industry. However, certain provisions of the Code and the Standard appear to be inconsistent with the Mining Charter, or to go beyond the scope envisaged in the 2002 Minerals Act. Various industry participants have been in discussions with the DMR regarding the scope and applicability of the Code and the Standard but there is significant uncertainty regarding the standing and effect of the Code and the Standard’s provisions. It is unclear what the final form of the Code and the Standard will be and what effect they may have on Gold Fields’ results and operations. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights—The 2002 Minerals Act.”

The acquisition by Mvelaphanda Resources Limited of a 15% beneficial interest in the South African gold mining assets of Gold Fields for cash consideration of Rand 4,139 million was effected to meet the requirement for a 15% HDSA ownership within five years of the charter coming into effect. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Overview—General—Mvelaphanda Transaction.” Management is in dialogue with the DMR regarding Gold Fields’ plans and proposals to ensure compliance with relevant HDSA ownership thresholds under the 2002 Minerals Act. Any further adjustment to the ownership structure of Gold Fields’ South African mining assets in order to meet the mining charter’s 10-year HDSA ownership requirement of 26% could have a material adverse effect on the value of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares and failing to comply with the charter’s requirements could subject Gold Fields to negative consequences, the scope of which has not yet been fully determined. Gold Fields may also incur expenses to give effect to the charter’s other requirements, and may need to incur additional indebtedness in order to comply with the industry-wide commitment to assist HDSAs in securing Rand 100 billion of financing during the first five years of the mining charter’s effectiveness. Moreover, there is no guarantee that any steps Gold Fields has already taken or might take in the future will ensure the successful renewal of all of its existing mining rights or the retaining of new mining rights or the granting of further new mining rights or that the terms of renewals of its rights would not be significantly less favorable to Gold Fields than the terms of its current rights.

 

24


Table of Contents

The Royalty Act

After going through several draft Bills, the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, 2008, or the Royalty Act, was promulgated on November 24, 2008 and was due to come into operation on May 1, 2009. However, it was announced on February 11, 2009 that the Act would not come into operation until March 1, 2010. The Royalty Act imposes a royalty on refined and unrefined minerals payable to the State.

The royalty in respect of refined minerals (which include gold and platinum) is calculated by dividing earnings before interest and taxes, or EBIT, by the product of 12.5 times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. EBIT refers to taxable mining income (with certain exceptions such as no deduction for interest payable) before assessed losses but after capital expenditure. A maximum royalty of 5% has been introduced for refined minerals.

The royalty in respect of unrefined minerals (which include uranium) is calculated by dividing EBIT by the product of nine times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. A maximum royalty of 7% has been introduced. Where unrefined mineral resources (such as uranium) constitute less than 10% in value of the total composite mineral resources, the royalty rate in respect of refined mineral resources may be used for all gross sales and a separate calculation of EBIT for each class of mineral resources is not required. For Gold Fields, this means that currently it will pay a royalty based on the refined minerals royalty calculation as applied to its gross revenue.

See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights—The Royalty Act.”

Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana are subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Gold Fields’ Ghana operations are subject to various environmental laws and regulations. The Ghanaian environmental protection laws require, among other things, that Gold Fields register with the Ghanaian environmental authorities, and obtain environmental permits and certificates for the Ghana operations, as well as to rehabilitate land disturbed as a result of their mining operations. Gold Fields is required to secure estimated environmental rehabilitation costs in part by posting a reclamation bond. Gold Fields Ghana is required to post a reclamation bond and deposit a cash amount sufficient to cover 50% of the estimated rehabilitation costs for the two-year period after the date of the last estimate. Changes in the required method of calculation for these bonds or an unforeseen circumstance which produces unexpected costs may materially and adversely affect Gold Fields’ future environmental expenditures. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Ghana—Environmental.”

Ghanaian health and safety regulations impose statutory duties on an owner of a mine to, among other things, take steps to ensure that the mine is managed and worked in a manner which provides for the safety and proper discipline of the mine workers. Additionally, Gold Fields is required, under the terms of its mining leases, to comply with the reasonable instructions of the relevant authorities for securing the health and safety of persons working in or connected with the mine. A violation of the health and safety regulations or a failure to comply with the reasonable instructions of the relevant authorities could lead to, among other things, a temporary shutdown of all or a portion of the mine, a loss of the right to mine or the imposition of costly compliance procedures and, in the case of a violation of the regulations relating to health and safety, constitutes an offense under Ghanaian law. If Ghanaian health and safety authorities require Gold Fields to shut down all or a portion of its mines or to implement costly compliance measures, whether pursuant to existing or new health and safety laws and regulations, such measures could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Ghana—Health and Safety.”

 

25


Table of Contents

Gold Fields, as the holder of the mining lease, has potential liability arising from injuries to, or deaths of, workers, including, in some cases, workers employed by its contractors. In Ghana, statutory workers’ compensation is not the exclusive means for workers to claim compensation. Gold Fields’ insurance for health and safety claims or the relevant workers’ compensation arrangements may not be adequate to meet the costs which may arise upon any future health and safety claims.

Gold Fields’ mineral rights in Ghana are currently subject to regulations, and may become subject to new regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens.

In Ghana, the ownership of land on which there are mineral deposits is separate from the ownership of the minerals. All minerals in their natural state in or upon any land or water are, under Ghanaian law, the property of Ghana and vested in the President on behalf of the people of Ghana. The new Minerals and Mining Act, 2006 (Act 703), or the Minerals and Mining Act, was passed by the Ghanaian Parliament in fiscal 2006. The Minerals and Mining Act repealed the Minerals and Mining Law, 1986 (PNDCL 153) as amended, or the Minerals and Mining Law, although, as regards existing mineral rights, the Minerals and Mining Law continues to apply to Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso Goldfields Limited, or Abosso, unless the minister responsible for mines provides otherwise by legislative instrument. Although the Minerals and Mining Act provides that it shall not have the effect of increasing the holder’s costs, or financial burden, for a period of five years, if in the future new amendments or provisions are passed under the Minerals and Mining Act or new laws are passed which impose significant new costs or burdens on Gold Fields’ abilities to mine in Ghana or to obtain new mining leases for properties on which deposits are identified, this could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Ghana—Mineral Rights.”

Gold Fields’ operations in Australia are subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Gold Fields’ Australian operations are subject to various laws and regulations relating to the protection of the environment. Gold Fields may, in the future, incur significant costs to comply with the Australian environmental requirements imposed under existing or new legislation, regulations or permit requirements or to comply with changes in existing laws and regulations or the manner in which they are applied. These costs may have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

Australian mining companies are required by law to undertake rehabilitation works as part of their ongoing operation and the Gold Fields subsidiaries that hold its Australian operations provide unconditional bank-guaranteed performance bonds to the Western Australian government as security for the estimated costs. These bonds do not cover remediation for events that were unforeseen at the time the bond was taken. Changes in the required method of calculation for these bond amounts or an unforeseen circumstance which produces unexpected costs may materially and adversely affect future environmental expenditures. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Australia—Environmental.”

Gold Fields is obligated to provide and maintain a working environment which is safe for mine workers. A violation of the health and safety laws or a failure to comply with the instructions of the relevant health and safety authorities could lead to, among other things, a temporary shutdown of all or a portion of the mine, a loss of the right to mine or the imposition of costly compliance procedures and penalties (including imprisonment). If health and safety authorities require Gold Fields to shut down all or a portion of the mine or to implement costly compliance measures, whether pursuant to existing or new health and safety laws and regulations, such measures could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Australia—Health and Safety.”

 

26


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ tenements in Australia are subject to native title claims and include Aboriginal heritage sites which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Certain of Gold Fields’ tenements are subject to native title claims, and there are Aboriginal heritage sites located on certain of Gold Fields’ tenements. Native title and Aboriginal legislation protect the rights of Aboriginals in relation to the land in certain circumstances. Other tenements may become subject to native title claims if Gold Fields seeks to expand or otherwise change its interest in rights to those tenements. Native title claims could require costly negotiations with the claimants or could affect Gold Fields’ access to or use of its tenements, and, as a result, have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

Aboriginal heritage sites relate to distinct areas of land which have either ongoing ethnographic, archaeological or historic significance. Aboriginal heritage sites have been identified with respect to portions of some of Gold Fields’ Australian mining tenements. Additional Aboriginal heritage sites may be identified on the same or additional tenements. Gold Fields may, in the future, incur significant costs as a result of changes in the interpretation of, or new laws regarding, native title and Aboriginal heritage, which may result in a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Australia—Land Claims.”

Gold Fields’ mineral rights in Peru are currently subject to regulations which may be subject to change, and may become subject to new regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Gold Fields’ operations in Peru depend on mining concessions for exploration and exploitation works, obtained from the Geologic, Mining and Metallurgic Institute ( Instituto Geológico Minero Metalúrgico ), or the INGEMMET. In addition, Gold Fields’ operations in Peru depend on obtaining other administrative rights, such as provisional permits, from the Ministry of Energy and Mines, or the MEM, for exploration rights on the area of a claim, and beneficiation or processing concessions, obtained from the MEM, for treatment of mining ores.

Under Peru’s current regulatory regime, mining concessions for the exploration and exploitation of minerals have an indefinite term, subject to compliance by the titleholder with the obligations set forth by the General Mining Act (Ley General de Minería), or the LGM. Compliance with such obligations is required to maintain the mining concessions in good standing. Among such obligations are the payment of an Annual Concession Fee (equivalent to U.S.$3 per hectare) and compliance with a minimum annual production target. Failure to pay the Annual Concession Fee for any two consecutive or non-consecutive years may result in the cancellation of the relevant mining concession. Gold Fields’ processing concession at Cerro Corona also has an indefinite term, subject to compliance with the obligations established by the LGM. Payment of an Annual Concession Fee (calculated on the production capacity of the processing plant) is also required to maintain the processing concession in good standing. Failure to pay the Annual Concession Fee for two consecutive or non-consecutive years may result in the cancellation of the processing concession.

If the INGEMMET or the MEM revoke or cancels any of Gold Fields’ concessions, Gold Fields’ financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected. See “Information on the Company on Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Peru—Regulatory”.

On June 24, 2004, the Peruvian Congress approved the Mining Royalty Law, which established a mining royalty that owners of mining concessions must pay to the Peruvian government for the exploitation of metallic and non-metallic resources. The mining royalties are calculated on a sliding scale with rates ranging from 1% to 3% over the value of mineral concentrates based on international market prices. As provided by the Mining Royalty Law, effective since January 26, 2007, the Peruvian Tax Authority is responsible for the collection of mining royalties.

There can be no assurance that the Peruvian government will not impose additional mining royalties or payments in the future or that they will not have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ results of operations or financial condition.

 

27


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ operations in Peru are subject to environmental laws, health and safety laws and other regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Gold Fields’ exploration, mining and milling activities in Cerro Corona are subject to a number of Peruvian laws and regulations, including environmental and health and safety laws and regulations. All mines, including Cerro Corona, must obtain environmental permits from the government and have an Environmental Impact Assessment approved. Other matters subject to regulation include, but are not limited to, transportation of ore or hazardous substances, water use and discharges, power use and generation, use and storage of explosives, housing and other facilities for workers, reclamation, labor standards and mine safety and occupational health.

There is no assurance that current environmental laws, health and safety laws, and other regulations that may have an impact on Gold Fields’ operations will not be replaced or modified in the future, or that Gold Fields will not become subject to new more stringent regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens on its operations. For instance, the development of more stringent environmental protection programs in Peru could impose constraints and additional costs on Gold Fields’ operations in Peru. Likewise, existing or new health and safety laws and regulations could cause health and safety authorities to require Gold Fields to shut down all or a portion of the mine or to implement costly compliance measures. Any of these events could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Peru—Health and Safety.”

The acquisition of Western Areas, BGSA and South Deep may expose Gold Fields to unknown liabilities and risks.

Prior to acquiring South Deep from GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited (previously known as Barrick Gold South Africa (Pty) Limited, or BGSA), a subsidiary of Barrick Gold Corporation, or Barrick, and Gold Fields Operations Limited (previously known as Western Areas Limited, or Western Areas), Gold Fields was able to conduct only limited due diligence on South Deep, Western Areas and BGSA. There can be no assurance that Gold Fields identified all the liabilities of, and risks associated with, South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas prior to acquiring them or that it will not be subject to unknown liabilities of, and risks associated with, South Deep, Western Areas or BGSA, including liabilities and risks that may become evident only after Gold Fields has been involved in the operational management of South Deep for a longer period of time. On August 21, 2008, Western Areas received a summons from Randgold and Exploration Company Limited, or R&E, and African Strategic Investment (Holdings) Limited. The summons claims that, under prior ownership, Western Areas was part of a scam whereby JCI Limited unlawfully disposed of shares owned by R&E in Randgold Resources Limited and Afrikander Lease Limited, now known as Uranium One. See “Information on the Company—Legal Proceedings”.

Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields included in this annual report.

In respect of information relating to South Deep or Western Areas presented in this annual report for the period before their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields, Gold Fields relied upon publicly available information, including information publicly filed by Western Areas with JSE Limited, or the JSE, and certain due diligence materials supplied by Western Areas and Barrick. For example, a portion of Gold Fields’ attributable proved and probable reserves are based on the pre-acquisition South Deep operation reserve figures as declared for December 2005 by an independent review panel, or the IRP, for the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture between BGSA (formerly, Placer Dome South Africa Proprietary Limited) and Western Areas. A significant portion of the June 30, 2009 South Deep reserves take into account new estimation and mine design work on the Upper Elsburg Reefs completed during fiscal 2009 in accordance with Gold Fields’ standards and procedures. 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to the Current Mine, Phase 1 north of the Wrench Fault and Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure). 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to Phase 2, being the South Shaft/Old Mine and the VCR. The 50% relating to the Current Mine, Phase 1 north of the Wrench

 

28


Table of Contents

Fault and Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure) have been remodeled and designed. Due to no further information being available at this stage, the remaining deeper portion of the reserves continue to be based on the pre-acquisition figures declared by the IRP, as described above.

Gold Fields is presently undertaking a surface drilling exploration program that will provide additional technical information on the geological structure, sedimentology, facies characteristics and tenor of the Ventersdorp Contact Reef (VCR) and Upper Elsburg Reefs in the area below current infrastructure to the southern boundary of the mining area, or Phase 2.

Gold Fields was not involved in the preparation of this information and has not had the opportunity to perform comprehensive due diligence on them. Until the exploration drilling and resource modeling in Phase 2 is completed, Gold Fields cannot verify the accuracy or completeness of the information or materials or any failure by Western Areas or Barrick to disclose events that may have occurred, but that are unknown to Gold Fields, that may affect the significance or accuracy of any such information.

Investors in the United States may have difficulty bringing actions, and enforcing judgments, against Gold Fields, its directors and its executive officers based on the civil liabilities provisions of the federal securities laws or other laws of the United States or any state thereof.

Gold Fields is incorporated in South Africa. The majority of Gold Fields’ directors and executive officers (as well as Gold Fields’ independent registered public accounting firm) reside outside of the United States. Substantially all of the assets of these persons and substantially all of the assets of Gold Fields are located outside the United States. As a result, it may not be possible for investors to enforce against these persons or Gold Fields a judgment obtained in a United States court predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the federal securities or other laws of the United States or any state thereof. A foreign judgment is not directly enforceable in South Africa, but constitutes a cause of action which will be enforced by South African courts provided that:

 

   

the court which pronounced the judgment had jurisdiction to entertain the case according to the principles recognized by South African law with reference to the jurisdiction of foreign courts;

 

   

the judgment is final and conclusive (that is, it cannot be altered by the court which pronounced it);

 

   

the judgment has not lapsed;

 

   

the recognition and enforcement of the judgment by South African courts would not be contrary to public policy, including observance of the rules of natural justice which require that the documents initiating the United States proceedings were properly served on the defendant and that the defendant was given the right to be heard and represented by counsel in a free and fair trial before an impartial tribunal;

 

   

the judgment was not obtained by fraudulent means;

 

   

the judgment does not involve the enforcement of a penal or revenue law; and

 

   

the enforcement of the judgment is not otherwise precluded by the provisions of the Protection of Businesses Act 99 of 1978, as amended, of the Republic of South Africa.

It is the policy of South African courts to award compensation for the loss or damage actually sustained by the person to whom the compensation is awarded. Although the award of punitive damages is generally unknown to the South African legal system, that does not mean that such awards are necessarily contrary to public policy. Whether a judgment is contrary to public policy depends on the facts of each case. Exorbitant, unconscionable or excessive awards will generally be contrary to public policy. South African courts cannot enter into the merits of a foreign judgment and cannot act as a court of appeal or review over the foreign court. South African courts will usually implement their own procedural laws and, where an action based on an international contract is brought before a South African court, the capacity of the parties to the contract will usually be determined in accordance with South African law. It is doubtful whether an original action based on United States federal securities laws may be brought before South African courts. A plaintiff who is not resident in South Africa may be required to

 

29


Table of Contents

provide security for costs in the event of proceedings being initiated in South Africa. Furthermore, the Rules of the High Court of South Africa require that documents executed outside South Africa must be authenticated for the purpose of use in South Africa.

Investors may face liquidity risk in trading Gold Fields’ ordinary shares on JSE Limited.

Historically, trading volumes and liquidity of shares listed on the JSE have been low in comparison with other major markets. The ability of a holder to sell a substantial number of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares on the JSE in a timely manner, especially in a large block trade, may be restricted by this limited liquidity. See “The Offer and Listing—JSE Limited.”

Gold Fields may not pay dividends or make similar payments to its shareholders in the future.

Gold Fields pays cash dividends only if funds are available for that purpose. Whether funds are available depends on a variety of factors, including the amount of cash available and Gold Fields’ capital expenditures and other cash requirements existing at the time. Under South African law, Gold Fields will be entitled to pay a dividend or similar payment to its shareholders only if it meets the solvency and liquidity tests set out in the Companies Act No. 61 of 1973, or the Companies Act, and Gold Fields’ Articles of Association. Cash dividends or other similar payments may not be paid in the future.

Gold Fields’ non-South African shareholders face additional investment risk from currency exchange rate fluctuations since any dividends will be paid in Rand.

Dividends or distributions with respect to Gold Fields’ ordinary shares have historically been paid in Rand. The U.S. dollar or other currency equivalent of any dividends or distributions with respect to Gold Fields’ ordinary shares will be adversely affected by potential future reductions in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar or other currencies. In the future, it is possible that there will be changes in South African exchange control regulations, such that dividends paid out of trading profits will no longer be freely transferable outside South Africa to shareholders who are not residents of the Common Monetary Area. See “Additional Information—South African Exchange Control Limitations Affecting Security Holders.”

Gold Fields’ ordinary shares are subject to dilution upon the exercise of Gold Fields’ outstanding share options.

As of September 30, 2009, Gold Fields had an aggregate of 1,000,000,000 ordinary shares authorized to be issued and as of that date an aggregate of 705,391,269 ordinary shares were issued and outstanding. Gold Fields currently has two securities option plans which are authorized to grant options in an amount of up to an aggregate of 35,242,431 ordinary shares. As of September 30, 2009, 13,379,456 shares had been awarded under these plans.

Gold Fields’ employees and directors had outstanding, as of September 30, 2009, options to purchase a total of 2,078,144 ordinary shares at exercise prices of between Rand 46.23 and Rand 154.65 that expire between November 24, 2009 and March 23, 2013. Such expiry dates may be extended due to unscheduled closed periods during which certain Gold Fields employees and directors may be prohibited from exercising options. Gold Fields had outstanding, as of September 30, 2009, 4,520,386 share appreciation rights at strike prices of between Rand 69.48 and Rand 127.72, which expire between February 28, 2010 and September 1, 2015, and 6,781,118 performance vesting restricted shares due to be settled between March 1, 2010 and September 1, 2012. As of the same date, Gold Fields had outstanding 18,900 restricted shares due to be settled in November 2009, 29,600 restricted shares due to be settled in November 2010 and 52,600 restricted shares due to be settled in November 2011 under The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan. Shareholders’ equity interests in Gold Fields will be diluted to the extent of future exercises or settlements of these rights and any additional rights. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The GF Management Incentive Scheme,” “Directors, Senior

 

30


Table of Contents

Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan,” “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan” and “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan.”

Sales of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares, or the perception that a large number of ordinary shares will be sold, may cause the market price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares to decrease.

As of March 17, 2009, Mvelaphanda Resources, through its wholly-owned subsidiary Mvelaphanda Gold Limited, Mvela Gold, took receipt of a 15% shareholding in GFI Mining South Africa, or GFIMSA, as part of a series of transactions effected to meet the requirement for 15% HDSA ownership within five years of the enactment of the Mining Charter. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Overview—General—Mvelaphanda Transaction.” Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvelaphanda Gold Limited exercised its right to require the exchange of the GFIMSA shares for 50 million new ordinary shares in the issued share capital of Gold Fields.

Accordingly, on March 17, 2009, Mvela Gold used the GFIMSA Shares to subscribe for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields. Pursuant to these transactions, Mvela Gold owned approximately 7% of the listed shares of Gold Fields. Since March 17, 2009, Mvela Gold has sold approximately 11 million of its Gold Fields ordinary shares, representing approximately 1.6% of the listed shares of Gold Fields. Gold Fields holds a right of first refusal over the ordinary shares held by Mvela Gold in the event Mvela Gold wishes to sell them.

A large volume of sales of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares by Mvelaphanda Gold Limited or another shareholder, all at once or in blocks, could decrease the prevailing market price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares and could impair Gold Fields’ ability to raise capital through the sale of equity securities in the future. Additionally, even if substantial sales are not effected, the mere perception of the possibility of these sales could decrease the market price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares and could have a negative effect on Gold Fields’ ability to raise capital in the future. Further, anticipated downward pressure on Gold Fields’ ordinary share price due to actual or anticipated sales of ordinary shares could cause some institutions or individuals to engage in short sales of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares, which may itself cause the price of the ordinary shares to decline.

 

31


Table of Contents

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

Introduction

Gold Fields is a significant producer of gold and major holder of gold reserves in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. In Peru, Gold Fields also produces copper. Gold Fields is primarily involved in underground and surface gold and copper mining and related activities, including exploration, extraction, processing and smelting. Gold Fields also has an interest in a platinum group metal exploration project. Gold Fields is one of the largest gold producers in the world, based on annual production.

The majority of Gold Fields’ operations, based on gold production, are located in South Africa. Its South African operations are Driefontein, Kloof, Beatrix and South Deep. Gold Fields also owns the St. Ives and Agnew gold mining operations in Australia and has a 71.1% interest in each of the Tarkwa gold mine and the Damang gold mine in Ghana. Gold Fields also owns an 80.72% economic interest in the Cerro Corona mine, which started producing in the first quarter of fiscal 2009. In addition, Gold Fields has gold and other precious metal exploration activities and interests in Africa, Eurasia, Australasia and the Americas.

As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields had attributable proven and probable reserves of approximately 81.1 million ounces, including copper expressed as gold equivalent ounces, and attributable gold reserves (excluding copper) of 78.9 million ounces of gold, as compared to the 80.5 million ounces (excluding copper) reported as of June 30, 2008. With the exception of South Deep, the reserves are based on the figures reported by Gold Fields’ mining operations. A portion of Gold Fields’ proven and probable reserves for South Deep are based on the pre-acquisition South Deep operation reserve figures as declared for December 2005 by an independent review panel, or the IRP, for the Barrick Gold-Western Areas Joint Venture between Barrick Gold South Africa (Pty) Limited, or BGSA, (formerly, Placer Dome South Africa Proprietary Limited) and Western Areas Limited (now known as Gold Fields Operations Limited), or Western Areas. The June 30, 2009 South Deep reserves take into account new estimation and mine design work on the Upper Elsburg Reefs completed during fiscal 2009 in accordance with Gold Fields’ standards and procedures. 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to the current mining area, or the Current Mine, and the area below the Current Mine and above infrastructure, or Phase 1, north of the Wrench Fault and also Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure). 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to Phase 2, being the South Shaft/Old Mine and the Ventersdorp Contact Reef, or the VCR. The 50% relating to the Current Mine, Phase 1 north of the Wrench Fault and Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure) have been remodeled and designed. Due to no further information being available at this stage, the remaining deeper portion of the reserves continue to be based on the pre-acquisition figures, declared by the IRP, described above.

Gold Fields is presently undertaking a surface drilling exploration program that Gold Fields expects will provide additional technical information on the geological structure, sedimentology, facies characteristics and tenor of the Ventersdorp Contact Reef, or the VCR, and Upper Elsburg Reefs in the area below current infrastructure to the southern boundary of the mining area, or Phase 2. When the surface drilling exploration program is completed, Gold Fields expects the additional information will provide for enhanced resource modeling of the Phase 2 ground and will increase confidence levels with regard to in situ facies geometry, reef grades and tonnages. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields included in this annual report.”

In the year ended June 30, 2009, Gold Fields processed 52.9 million tons of ore and produced 3.691 million ounces of gold (including gold equivalent ounces). On an attributable basis, Gold Fields produced 3.414 million ounces of gold (including gold equivalent ounces).

Developments since June 30, 2008

Since the beginning of fiscal 2009, the following significant events have occurred:

On August 21, 2008, Gold Fields Operations Limited, formerly known as Western Areas Limited, or WAL, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields, received a summons from Randgold and Exploration Company

 

32


Table of Contents

Limited, or R&E, and African Strategic Investment (Holdings) Limited. The summons claims that, during the period that WAL was under the control of Brett Kebble, Roger Kebble and others, WAL was allegedly part of a scam whereby JCI Limited unlawfully disposed of shares owned by R&E in Randgold Resources Limited and Afrikander Lease Limited, now known as Uranium One. For further information, see “—Legal Proceedings”.

On September 10, 2008, Gold Fields announced that the Arctic Platinum Project in Finland had reverted to Gold Fields after North American Palladium Limited, a Canadian platinum metals group producer, declined to exercise its rights in terms of a Letter of Intent entered into between the parties and announced on October 18, 2005 and an Acquisition and Framework Agreement subsequently entered into between the parties. See “Operating Review and Prospects—Recent Developments—Reversion of Arctic Platinum Project to Gold Fields.” See “—Exploration”.

On October 2, 2008, Gold Fields entered into an agreement with Bateman Engineering N.V., or Bateman Engineering, to sell its Biox ® Technology Business to Bateman Engineering for a net cash consideration of U.S.$8.8 million. The transaction was conditional, among other things, upon the approval of the South African Reserve Bank, or SARB. The SARB failed to approve the transaction within the timeframes stipulated in the agreement. Following the onset of the global economic crisis, Bateman Engineering elected not to proceed with the transaction and the Biox ® Technology Business remains part of the Gold Fields group. See “—Research and Development”.

As part of the proceeds on disposal of its assets in Venezuela on November 30, 2007, Gold Fields received 140 million shares in Rusoro, a junior gold producer listed on the TSX Venture Exchange. Gold Fields accounted for its 36% investment (subsequently reduced to 26.4%) under the equity method and, due to the decrease in market value of the investment since acquisition, also recorded an impairment of $61.3 million on June 30, 2008. See “Operating Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Year ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Impairment of Investment in Equity Investee”. As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ interest in Rusoro had been reduced to 26.4% because Gold Fields did not participate in a rights offer by Rusoro in March 2009. At June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ investment in Rusoro was impaired further to its market value of $48.4 million.

On December 3, 2008, Gold Fields Orogen Holdings BVI Limited, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, announced a joint venture agreement with Orsu Metals Corporation for the further exploration and development of the Talas license area, northwest of Kyrgyzstan. The agreement gives Gold Fields the right to earn as much as a 70% interest in Orsu’s Talas license area. See “—Exploration—Advanced Projects”.

On February 29, 2009, Minera Gold Fields Peru S.A., a wholly-owned exploration subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, and Compañía de Minas Buenaventura S.A.A., or Buenaventura, entered into an agreement, or the Buenaventura Agreement, that entitled Buenaventura to explore certain mining rights owned by Gold Fields in the area of Chucapaca, Moquegua (South Peru). As the discoveries made by Buenaventura essentially involved gold deposits, Gold Fields exercised a “back-in right” according to whose terms a joint venture vehicle operated by Gold Fields has been established to develop the project. Once Gold Fields has spent approximately $8 million on the exploration of the Chucapaca Gold Project, Gold Fields will earn-in a 51% participation in the joint venture company. Otherwise, it will only retain a 2% net smelter revenue royalty on the future results of the project.

Gold Fields announced on March 17, 2009 that, in terms of the R4.1 billion Black Economic Empowerment transaction approved by shareholders of Gold Fields on March 8, 2004, Mvelaphanda Resources, or Mvela Resources, took receipt, through its wholly-owned subsidiary Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Mvela Gold, of its 15% shareholding in GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, or GFIMSA, a subsidiary of Gold Fields which owns and operates the South African gold mining assets of Gold Fields. Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvela Gold exercised its right to use the GFIMSA Shares to subscribe for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields, or the Gold Fields shares. This brought the total number of Gold Fields shares in issue at that time to 703,839,976. Pursuant to the above transactions, Mvela Gold owned

 

33


Table of Contents

approximately 7% of the listed shares of Gold Fields and Gold Fields again owns 100% of GFIMSA. Since March 17, 2009, Mvela Gold has sold approximately 11 million of the Gold Fields shares, representing approximately 1.6% of the listed shares of Gold Fields, through the market. The Gold Fields shares are subject to a right of first refusal in favor of Gold Fields.

On March 25, 2009, Gold Fields entered into a non-binding Letter of Intent, or LOI, with Glencar Mining Plc, or Glencar, in relation to the terms on which the parties would agree to enter a joint venture agreement over Glencar’s Komana license in West Africa. Following termination of negotiations regarding the joint venture agreement, on August 7, 2009, Gold Fields launched a recommended cash offer for Glencar which valued Glencar at approximately U.S.$47.7 million. On September 7, 2009, Gold Fields announced that it had received acceptances of approximately 83.1% of the share capital of Glencar, allowing Gold Fields to take control of the Company. All conditions of the offer were satisfied or waived at that time and therefore the offer was declared unconditional in all respects. Gold Fields has also taken control of the board of Glencar with the appointment of three new directors. Subsequently, Gold Fields completed the final squeeze-out of shareholders on November 9, 2009. Gold Fields now holds 100% of Glencar Mining plc. See “—Exploration—Advanced Projects”.

On June 3, 2009, Gold Fields announced that Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited, a subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, had entered into an agreement under which it would sell its 19.9% stake in Sino Gold Mining Limited to Eldorado Gold Corporation for a total consideration of approximately U.S.$282 million payable in Eldorado shares. This consideration was settled by the issue to Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited of shares in Eldorado with it receiving a share exchange ratio of 48 Eldorado shares for every 100 Sino Gold shares on July 27, 2009, resulting in a total holding of 27,824,654 Eldorado shares or approximately 7% of the outstanding shares of Eldorado on a fully diluted basis. On September 4, 2009, Gold Fields sold its entire shareholding in Eldorado on the market for a consideration of CAD 323 million ($299.3 million). In addition, Gold Fields holds a top-up right for a period of 18 months, which will apply if Eldorado purchases an additional 5% or more of the outstanding shares of Sino Gold and the sellers in that transaction realize a consideration ratio in excess of the share exchange ratio of 0.48 Eldorado shares per Sino Gold share received by Gold Fields. On August 26, 2009, Eldorado and Sino Gold announced that they had agreed that Eldorado would acquire all of the issued and outstanding shares of Sino Gold by exchanging 0.55 Eldorado shares for each share of Sino Gold. Sino Gold shareholders approved the transaction on December 1, 2009. Assuming completion of the offer based on the terms announced by Eldorado and Sino Gold on August 26, 2009, Gold Fields would receive 4,057,762 shares due to its top-up rights. See “—Exploration—Sino Gold Alliance”.

On August 26, 2009, Gold Fields executed an agreement with Morgan Stanley Bank, or Morgan Stanley, to terminate a royalty, or the Royalty, payable by Gold Fields’ wholly-owned Australian subsidiary, St. Ives Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd, to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley for a consideration of A$308 million ($257.1 million). When Gold Fields acquired St. Ives in 2001, the total consideration included the Royalty, which was subsequently acquired by Morgan Stanley. The Royalty comprised two parts: (i) a payment equal to 4% of the net smelter returns for gold produced from St. Ives to the extent that cumulative production of gold from November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces, but subject to the average spot price of gold for the relevant quarter exceeding A$400 per ounce; and (ii) provided that the gold price exceeded A$600 per ounce, a payment equal to 10% of the difference between revenue calculated at the spot gold price expressed in Australian dollars per ounce and at a price of A$600 per ounce calculated on all future ounces produced by St. Ives. Both components of the Royalty were payable on all future production from St. Ives. The transaction was financed from cash resources and available facilities and closed on August 26, 2009.

Gold Fields is a public company incorporated in South Africa, with a registered office located at 150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton, 2196, South Africa, telephone number +27-11-562-9700.

 

34


Table of Contents

Organizational Structure

Gold Fields is a holding company with its significant ownership interests organized as set forth below.

Group Structure ( 1)

LOGO

 

 

(1) Unless otherwise stated, all subsidiaries are, directly or indirectly, wholly-owned by Gold Fields Limited.

 

35


Table of Contents

Strategy

General

Following the appointment of Nicholas Holland as Chief Executive Officer as of May 1, 2008, Gold Fields undertook a review of the Group strategy which concluded that, while the basic strategy remained robust and appropriate, a number of strategic adjustments needed to be made.

These changes were developed and assimilated into a new Gold Fields Franchise which describes “ who we are ”, “ what we do ”, and “ how we do it ”, and comprises of:

 

   

a new vision statement;

 

   

a new set of core values;

 

   

a new overarching strategic production goal;

 

   

the three long-standing but refocused core pillars of the strategy, namely a) “ Sweating Our Assets ”, b) “ Growing Gold Fields , and c) “ Securing Our Future ”; and

 

   

a new regional operational delivery model.

In addition a number of short- and medium-term strategic priorities were identified and implemented, most notably the elevation of Safety as the Group’s number one value and strategic priority, which is discussed in the section on Securing Our Future below.

Vision Statement

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields developed a simple yet powerful new vision for the Group:

To be the Global Leader in Sustainable Gold Mining.

The purpose was to establish a simple yet compelling new vision that all stakeholders, in particular Gold Fields’ 47,000 employees around the globe, could understand and buy into, and which could serve as a common and powerful motivational force across the organization.

The new vision statement, which was successfully introduced across the Group during fiscal 2010, reflects Gold Fields’ desire to be the best at what it does rather than to be the biggest; the imperative to maintain a sustainable business model with particular regard to the social, economic and environmental impacts of the Group and its operations on current and future generations of stakeholders; and the fact that Gold Fields is a focused gold mining company as opposed to a diversified precious or poly metals company.

Overarching Strategic Production Goal

The Group’s overarching strategic production goal is to grow its production from the 3.4 million ounces achieved in fiscal 2009, to approximately five million quality, attributable gold ounces, either in development or production, by the end of 2014. Towards achieving this goal, the South Africa Region is expected to contribute between 2.2 and 2.5 million ounces per annum, with each of the Group’s international regions (the West Africa Region, the Australasia Region and the South America Region) contributing approximately one million attributable ounces. The majority of this growth is expected to come from improvements at the current operations, described in the Sweating Our Assets section below, and from both near mine and greenfields exploration success which is described in the Growing Gold Fields section below.

Core Values

Supporting the vision statement and directing the strategy are six core values that every employee is expected to embrace and which defines the way in which Gold Fields conducts its business. These values are:

 

   

Safety

If we cannot mine safely, we will not mine;

 

36


Table of Contents
   

Responsibility

We act responsibly and care for the environment, each other, and all of our Stakeholders our employees, our communities and our shareholders;

 

   

Honesty

We act with fairness, integrity, honesty and transparency;

 

   

Respect

We treat each other with trust, respect and dignity;

 

   

Innovation

We encourage innovation and entrepreneurship ; and

 

   

Delivery

We do what we say we will do.

Sweating Our Assets

Sweating Our Assets is about ensuring that all of the assets in the portfolio are turned to full account safely. It is about ensuring that systems and processes are optimized to deliver what they were designed to deliver; that infrastructure is well maintained to deliver to its full capacity; that mineral resources and reserves are optimally developed and exploited; that costs are well managed, on a notional cash expenditure or NCE basis, to ensure optimal free cash flow; and all our mines deliver the production that they are capable of delivering safely. Sweating Our Assets is also about technological innovation aimed at improving delivery and about “doing what we say we will do”.

Gold Fields has nine world-class producing mines. Fundamental to the attainment of the Group’s vision and overarching strategic goal is for each one of these mines to produce to its real potential, and to maintain stability, predictability and consistency at its steady state level.

The first priority under Sweating Our Assets is a substantial improvement in the safety performance of the Group, which is discussed in the section on Securing Our Future below.

The second priority under Sweating Our Assets relates to the optimal exploitation of the Group’s substantial mineral reserve endowment. With attributable mineral reserves of 81 million gold equivalent ounces, it is essential to bring these ounces to account in the most cost effective way and, in doing so, to ensure longevity for each of the mines. Equally important is the need to achieve the required levels of ore reserve development to create mining flexibility, which is a prerequisite for maintaining stability, predictability and consistency. After safety, ore reserve development is the most important strategic priority on all of the mines in the Group.

The third priority under Sweating Our Assets is to return the Group’s production to its sustainable steady state production level. To this end, a short-term strategic priority was established late in fiscal 2008, for Gold Fields to return to its steady state production of approximately one million ounces of gold per quarter by the third quarter of fiscal 2009, at a Notional Cash Expenditure, or NCE, of approximately $725 per equivalent ounce (as calculated for management reporting purposes, using an exchange rate of R8.00 to $1.00). While this goal was not achieved, mainly as a result of the greater than expected impact of safety interventions during the year, the Group did show significantly improved stability, predictability and consistency, with production increasing every quarter for the last three quarters of the year, to 906,000 ounces of attributable production (at an NCE of $825 per equivalent ounce, using an exchange rate of R8.00 to $1.00) in the final quarter of fiscal 2009. This was 108,000 ounces or 14% higher than the production low-point of 798,000 ounces reported in quarter one of fiscal 2009. During the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009, guidance for fiscal 2010 was adjusted, to reflect the ongoing impact of safety interventions, to between 925,000 and 950,000 attributable ounces per quarter during fiscal 2010, with the goal of achieving the million ounce per quarter steady state run-rate during fiscal 2011.

 

37


Table of Contents

Gold Fields believes the necessary steps for achieving the Group’s short- and medium-term production targets include:

 

   

the continued build-up in production at South Deep which is scheduled to increase production for fiscal 2010 to a total 300,000 ounces, and to build up to an annualized production rate of between 750,000 and 800,000 ounces by the end of 2014;

 

   

the stabilization of production at Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix at a steady state level of approximately 836,000 ounces (6.5 tons per quarter), 707,000 ounces (5.5 tons per quarter) and 424,000 ounces (3.3 tons per quarter) per annum respectively, and maintaining production at these levels for at least the next five years, and close to these levels for the next 10 years;

 

   

stabilizing the Tarkwa mine at full production of approximately 750,000 ounces per annum now that the CIL expansion is complete, and to build up to a steady state level of approximately 800,000 ounces over the course of fiscal 2010, as various optimization projects start to deliver further incremental production increases;

 

   

increasing gold production at Damang to a steady state level of at least 240,000 ounces per annum by completing the secondary crusher project, and to sustain production at this level by doubling the current life of mine to at least 15 years through an aggressive near mine exploration program which is under way;

 

   

returning St. Ives to a steady state production level of between 440,000 and 460,000 ounces per annum during fiscal 2010 as the open pit development improvement project and the underground development improvement project delivers results, and then to build up to at least 500,000 ounces after the new Athena underground mine comes into production during the second quarter of fiscal 2011. An extensive near mine exploration program is under way across the entire St. Ives tenement with the objective to double the life of this mine, at the 500,000 ounces per annum production level, to at least 10 years;

 

   

ensuring that Agnew maintains production at a steady state level of between 190,000 and 200,000 ounces per annum by extending the current life of mine to five years through an aggressive near mine exploration program; and

 

   

maintaining production at Cerro Corona at the steady state level of approximately 320,000 attributable gold equivalent ounces per annum (based on gold and copper prices of $1,100 per ounce of gold and $3.00 per pound of copper), while seeking incremental production growth from the on-surface stockpile of approximately six million tons of oxide ore, as well as through the potential conversion of an additional approximately 30 million tons of ore at depth by securing additional tailings management capacity at the mine.

The fourth priority under Sweating Our Assets relates to the proactive management of costs with a view to maintaining a free cash flow margin of at least $200 per ounce of gold produced, at an assumed long-term baseline gold price of $950 per ounce, and to maintain the size of the margin commensurate with changes in the gold price received. To this end, Gold Fields has introduced the concept of notional cash expenditure, or NCE, which is defined as operating costs plus additions to property plant and equipment, as well as brownfields exploration. Operating costs is defined as production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization) plus corporate expenditure, employment termination costs and accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation. Gold Fields reports NCE on a per equivalent ounce basis. Management considers NCE per ounce to be an important measure as it believes NCE per equivalent ounce provides more information than other commonly used measures, such as total cash costs per equivalent ounce, regarding the real cost to Gold Fields of producing an equivalent ounce of gold, reflecting not only the ongoing costs of production but also the investment cost of maintaining production at steady state levels and bringing mines into production. Management also believes that NCE per equivalent ounce is a useful indication of the cash Gold Fields has available for paying taxes, repaying debt, funding exploration and paying dividends and the like.

 

38


Table of Contents

NCE is not a U.S. GAAP measure. An investor should not consider NCE or operating costs in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, cash flows from operating activities or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. NCE and operating costs as presented in this annual report may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of performance of other companies. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

Growing Gold Fields

Growing Gold Fields is about growing the value of the business on a per share basis. It is not about size, or the number of ounces produced, but about the quality of the portfolio and the generation of real value for shareholders, on a per share basis.

In the medium-term, Gold Fields’ target is to regionalize and grow itself into a truly global gold producer, with a goal of approximately one million gold equivalent ounces per annum either in, or close to, production in each of its West Africa, Australasia and South America Regions, and between 2.2 and 2.5 million ounces in the South Africa Region.

The bulk of this growth is expected to come from improvements at existing mines as described in the Sweating Our Assets section above, organic growth resulting from near mine exploration success, and from greenfields exploration success.

While growth through the acquisition of assets is not entirely ruled out, Gold Fields recognizes that value-adding opportunities are not readily available in the current market environment. The company has coined a phrase, “ no M&A heroics ”, to describe its approach to the acquisition of assets. Against this back-drop, the Company continues to monitor the market for accretive M&A opportunities.

The objective of the growth strategy is not merely to add ounces to the portfolio, but to add ounces that will improve the quality of the asset base and grow value on a NAV/share, EBITDA/share and cash earnings/share basis, and lower the overall NCE of the Group.

Owing to the shortage of large, viable gold projects, Gold Fields has lowered its size selection criteria compared to previous years. To be considered by Gold Fields, generally growth projects must have the potential to meet certain target criteria (which vary depending on other strategic objectives and the quality of the project) described as “ The Rule of Twos ”: the potential for a minimum of 2,000,000 (formerly 5,000,000) ounces of reserves; production rates in the range of 200,000 (formerly 500,000) gold equivalent ounces per year; and a positive real internal rate of return of at least 5% for producing assets and brownfields projects, and at least 10% for greenfields projects, adjusted for project-specific risks, at a long-term gold price of $950 per ounce.

Emphasis is also placed on reviewing non-geological aspects of prospective projects, such as social, political, environmental and commercial risks, ensuring that an appropriate risk versus reward tradeoff analysis is factored into the decision. Gold Fields is prepared to consider projects with a higher risk profile if it believes they will offer superior returns. The focus will remain on gold and its by-product metals.

In fiscal 2010, Gold Fields plans to spend about $40 million on near mine exploration, and about $80 million on greenfields exploration, the latter largely in the three targeted international regions.

Outside South Africa, the three key regions of West Africa, Australasia and South America have been identified as containing prospective emerging gold and mineral belts with medium to long-term potential where Gold Fields has existing operational capabilities. Gold Fields’ objective in each of these regions is to develop one million ounce per annum production profiles. In appropriate circumstances, Gold Fields will also consider opportunities outside its key regions of focus.

 

39


Table of Contents

During fiscal 2009 Gold Fields has made considerable progress with the development of its greenfields exploration pipeline. For the first time since its inception the Company now has four exploration projects in the advanced drilling category. These include the Yanfolila Project in Mali, the Chucapaca Project in Peru the Talas Project in Kyrgyzstan, and the APP Project in Finland. In addition the Company has a large number of exploration projects in earlier stages of development. The objective during fiscal 2010 is to progress all of the advanced stage projects significantly, and to get at least one of the projects to a scoping study level.

For acquisitions of assets or companies outside South Africa, South African exchange control regulations limit Gold Fields’ ability to provide guarantees or borrow outside South Africa without express approval from the SARB. However, the government has indicated that its intention is to gradually phase out the remaining exchange controls over time and Gold Fields has a good track record in gaining approval for its offshore acquisitions and in growing its international operations.

Securing Our Future

Securing Our Future is about ensuring the long-term sustainability of the business. It encompasses safety and Human Resources, as well as a wide range of environmental social and economic parameters that impact on the business today and into the future. It is about acquiring and maintaining a “social license to operate” in each of the jurisdictions in which the Company operates.

Gold Fields has embraced the concept of sustainable development and incorporated it into its vision statement in order to maintain the long-term sustainability of the business. The Company has developed a Sustainable Development Framework which is closely aligned with the sustainable development principles of the International Council for Minerals and Metals (ICMM), and the Global Compact, both of which Gold Fields is a member of. The Sustainable Development Framework consists of a Sustainable Development Policy, with subsidiary policies, strategies and practice guides in each of the following eight pillars of sustainability, namely: Health and Safety; Human Rights; Stakeholder Engagement; Risk Management; Community; Ethics and Corporate Governance; Environment; and Materials Stewardship.

While the Chief Executive Officer has assumed overall executive responsibility for Sustainable Development within the Group, each one of the Regional Heads is responsible for the implementation of the Framework in their respective regions.

Safety

Safety has always been of critical importance to Gold Fields and the renewed commitment to safety introduced during fiscal 2008 has resulted in a reduction in fatalities and a reduction in work-related injuries. During fiscal 2009, 21 workers in South Africa lost their lives compared to 47 during fiscal 2008. Outside South Africa, there were no fatalities in fiscal 2009, compared to 4 in fiscal 2008. The Company will continue with its commitment to safety, making the safe operation of its mines its top strategic priority. Indeed, Gold Fields has publicly stated that, if it cannot mine safely, it will not mine. As part of its commitment, the Company has undertaken the following initiatives:

 

   

in South Africa, a Safe Production Management Program was designed and is being rolled out across all the operations. Through a process of review of all historical serious safety incidences and through extensive consultation with numerous parties, the Gold Fields’ Safe Production Rules have been developed with the fundamental message in the Safe Production Rules being the statement made by the Chief Executive Officer: “If we cannot mine safely, we will not mine”. The Safe Production Rules have been printed in a booklet format and distributed to all employees. Future exposure to the Safe Production Rules for all new employees and contractors will be through the induction program where the Safe Production Rules will be presented. The rules work hand-in-hand with other initiatives like the “Stop, Think, Fix, Verify and then Continue” campaign, which has had a tremendous impact on employees’ safety behavior and awareness;

 

40


Table of Contents
   

in February 2008, the South African operational bonus system was changed to provide an equal weighting between production and safety performance. A similar principle has been applied to executive incentive compensation starting in fiscal 2009, with approximately 30% of executive bonus payments, including those of the Chief Executive Officer, now linked to health and safety performance;

 

   

full audits for compliance with the Gold Fields’ Full Compliance Health and Safety Management System (see “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Health and Safety—Safety”) are now to occur at least once a year, and quarterly or semi-annually until required levels of compliance are achieved;

 

   

a comprehensive review of pillar and remnant mining across all operations has been undertaken, resulting in a reduction of planned pillar mining at the Driefontein and Kloof operations in South Africa;

 

   

DuPont International conducted a comprehensive safety audit across all of Gold Fields’ operations, covering all aspects of Gold Fields’ health and safety management systems, strategies and plans. The project was completed during fiscal 2009 and all recommendations have been included in the Safe Production Management Program; and

 

   

a comprehensive review of the status of infrastructure across all of Gold Fields’ operations was initiated, which identified a number of items in South Africa that required immediate action to improve safety. In fiscal 2009, all South African operations reduced primary development for a period of time to address the status of secondary support.

Regional Delivery Model

Gold Fields views itself as a truly global mining company, but believes that in some circles it is perceived as predominantly a South African company with a few international operations. In order to change this perception and to improve delivery of its operational and growth aspirations, Gold Fields restructured its operations into four regions during fiscal 2009. These regions are: the South Africa Region; the West Africa Region; the South America Region; and the Australasia Region.

Most of the key regional executives have been appointed and good progress has been made in creating strong, entrepreneurial and appropriately resourced and incentivized management teams in each region. These teams are tasked with running the mines safely and efficiently, as well as driving and being significantly involved in the growth of the business within the region.

The corporate office has relocated to new premises separate from the South African regional office. Management believes this separation will enhance the ability of the corporate office to serve as a “brain trust”, focused on overall strategy, the allocation of capital and strategic guidance for the regions. The corporate office also establishes and monitors operational standards which apply across the regions in areas such as safety, health and environmental issues, finance and human resources.

Hedging

Gold Fields’ policy remains not to enter into forward sales, derivatives or other hedging arrangements to establish a price in advance for future gold production. Gold Fields believes that investors in Gold Fields’ shares seek an unlimited exposure to movements in the U.S. dollar gold price and the resulting effect on Gold Fields’ earnings. However, commodity hedges are sometimes undertaken in one or more of the following circumstances: to protect cash flows at times of significant capital expenditures; for specific debt servicing requirements; and to safeguard the viability of higher-cost operations.

Gold Fields may, from time to time, establish currency and/or interest rate financial instruments to protect underlying cash flows or to take advantage of potential favorable currency movements.

 

41


Table of Contents

Specific Strategic Goals and Objectives for fiscal 2010

The specific strategic goals and objectives for fiscal 2010 flows from the strategy and were designed to consolidate the operational gains made during fiscal 2009. The specific strategic goals and objectives for fiscal 2010 are:

 

1) to further enhance the efforts on health and safety. While the ultimate goal remains the total elimination of all serious and fatal accidents on all operations, during 2010 the aim is to achieve at least a 33% improvement in all safety measures in the South Africa Region and at least 20% in the International Regions;

 

2) to open up ore bodies by stepping up development. This has become particularly urgent in South Africa where the focus on secondary support over the past year has seen resources diverted away from development. As a result, flexibility has been affected, as was expected. The target is to have at least 24-months of opened-up reserves at each of the long-life shafts in the Group. Improved flexibility will also support the achievement of the targeted production run-rate, on a sustainable basis.

 

3) to achieve greater predictability, reliability and consistency in quarterly production while working towards the goal of producing at a run-rate of between 925,000 and 950,000 ounces of gold per quarter during fiscal 2010, and moving closer to the one million ounce of production per quarter target within the following 12 months;

 

4) to build momentum at South Deep by increasing production to an average of approximately 300,000 ounces for fiscal 2010, while advancing the Twin Shaft infrastructure for completion in fiscal 2012, and focusing on the development of the ore body below 95-level, which will facilitate the ultimate build-up to full production of between 750,000 and 800,000 ounces per annum by December 2014;

 

5) to increase the skills levels across the organization by attracting and retaining key personnel through a more aggressive recruitment program, as well as by further enhancing education and training initiatives;

 

6) to improve the Group’s ability to develop and deliver capital projects within scope, on budget and on time by developing a strong project culture;

 

7) to further improve performance in the field of sustainable development and, in particular, to improve environmental performance;

 

8) to further entrench the regionalization strategy by bolstering the executive teams in each of the regions, in order to enhance operational delivery and to drive the growth strategy;

 

9) to increase greenfields and near mine exploration to U.S.$80 million and U.S.$40 million, respectively;

 

10) to deliver at least one of the advanced-stage exploration projects to scoping study stage;

 

11) to complete the Uranium feasibility study in South Africa by early in 2010; and

 

12) to complete the feasibility study of the new Athena underground mine at St. Ives in Australia, initial construction of which has commenced.

Reserves of Gold Fields as of June 30, 2009

Methodology

While there are some differences between the definition of the South African Code for Reporting of Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves, or SAMREC Code, and that of the Securities and Exchange Commission’s, or SEC’s, industry guide number 7, only reserves at each of Gold Fields’ operations and exploration projects as of June 30, 2009 which qualify as reserves for purposes of the SEC’s industry guide number 7 are presented in the table below. See “—Glossary of Mining Terms.” In accordance with the requirements imposed by the JSE, Gold Fields reports its reserves using the terms and definitions of the SAMREC Code. Mineral or ore reserves, as defined under the SAMREC Code, are divided into categories of proved and probable reserves and are expressed in terms of tons to be processed at mill feed head grades, allowing for estimated mining dilution, recovery and other factors.

 

42


Table of Contents

Gold Fields reports reserves using cut-off grades (international operations and South Deep) and pay limits (South Africa excluding South Deep) to ensure the reserves realistically reflect both the cost structures and required margins relevant to each mining operation. Cut-off grade is the grade that distinguishes the material within an orebody that is to be extracted and treated from the remaining material. The pay limit is the grade at which an orebody can be mined without profit or loss calculated using an appropriate gold price and working costs, plus modifying factors. Modifying factors used to calculate the pay limit grades include adjustments to mill delivered amounts, due to dilution incurred in the course of mining. Modifying factors applied in estimating reserves are primarily historical, but commonly incorporate adjustments for planned operational improvements such as those described below under “—Description of Mining Business—Productivity Initiatives.” Tonnage and grade may include some mineralization below the selected pay limit and cut-off grade to ensure that the reserve comprises blocks of adequate size and continuity. Reserves also take into account cost levels at each operation and are supported by mine plans.

The estimation of reserves at the South African underground operations is based on surface drilling, underground drilling, surface three-dimensional reflection seismics, orebody facies modeling, structural modeling, underground mapping channel sampling and geostatistical estimation. The reefs are initially explored by drilling from the surface on an approximately 500-meter to 2,000-meter grid. Once underground access is available, drilling is undertaken on an approximately 30-meter by 60-meter grid. Underground channel sampling perpendicular to the reef is undertaken at three-meter intervals in development areas and five-meter intervals at stope faces.

The following sets out the reserve estimation methodologies for the different categories of reserves at the underground operations of each of the South African mines.

Driefontein

 

Reserve Classification

   Sample Spacing Range
Min/Max
(meters)
   Maximum Distance Data is
Projected
(meters)

Proved

   3 to 180    110

Probable (AI) (1)

   3 to 1,140    570

Probable (BI) (1)

   3 to 2,840    1,420

 

Note:

 

(1) AI is above infrastructure; BI is below infrastructure.

For proved reserves, the orebody is opened up and sampled on a three-meter spacing for development (such as raises), and a five meter grid for stoping, together with underground borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters. Blocks classified as proved are therefore generally adjacent to closely spaced sampling and generally pierced by a relatively dense irregular pattern of boreholes. Estimation is constrained within both geologically homogenous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged small-scale grids, ranging from 10-meter to 20-meter block sizes.

For above infrastructure probable reserves, the estimates are founded on significant numbers of samples on a three-meter spacing for development, and a five-meter grid for stoping bordering these areas. In addition underground borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters are used together with surface boreholes and seismic surveys. Blocks classified as probable (AI) are generally adjacent to blocks classified as proved. Estimation is constrained within homogenous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged medium- to macro-scale-sized grids ranging from 40-meter to 420-meter sizes, or through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques. For planning purposes, these blocks are further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

 

43


Table of Contents

For below infrastructure probable reserves, the estimates access the significant numbers of samples on a three-meter spacing for development, and a five-meter grid for stoping above these areas. In addition underground borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters are used together with surface boreholes and seismic surveys. Blocks classified as probable (BI) are generally downdip of blocks classified as proved or probable (AI). Estimation is constrained within homogenous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged medium- to macro-scale-sized grids ranging from 40 meters to 420 meter sizes, or through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques. For planning purposes, these blocks are further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

Kloof

 

Reserve Classification

   Sample Spacing Range
Min/Max
(meters)
   Maximum Distance Data is
Projected
(meters)

Proved

   3 to 150    150

Probable (AI) (1)

   3 to 718    360

Probable (BI) (1)

   3 to 1,390    890

 

Note:

 

(1) AI is above infrastructure; BI is below infrastructure.

Estimations for proved reserves are made on the same basis as at Driefontein.

Estimations for above infrastructure probable reserves are made on the same basis as at Driefontein, but with medium-sized kriged grids starting from 40 meters to macro blocks of 400 meters. For planning purposes, these blocks are further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

Estimations for below infrastructure probable reserves are made on the same basis as at Driefontein, but with medium-sized kriged grids starting from 40 meters to macro blocks of 400 meters. The distinction between estimation techniques for above infrastructure and below infrastructure probable reserves is the same as at Driefontein. For planning purposes, these blocks are further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

Beatrix

 

Reserve Classification

   Sample Spacing Range
Min/Max
(meters)
   Maximum Distance Data is
Projected
(meters)

Proved

   3 to 120    120

Probable (AI) (1)

   3 to 820    700

Probable (BI) (1)

   3 to 580    740

 

Note:

 

(1) AI is above infrastructure; BI is below infrastructure.

Estimations for proved reserves are made on the same basis as at Driefontein but with kriging blocks ranging from 16 meters to 32 meters.

Estimations for above infrastructure probable reserves are made on the same basis as at Driefontein but with medium-sized kriged blocks of 32 meters, and macro geological zone estimates being made through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques or macro-scale-sized kriged grids of up to 128 meters. For planning purposes these blocks are further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

 

44


Table of Contents

Estimations for below infrastructure probable reserves are made on the same basis as at Driefontein but with medium-sized kriged blocks being 32 meters, to macro geological zone estimates through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques or macro scale sized kriged grids of up to 128 meters. The distinction between estimation techniques for above infrastructure and below infrastructure probable reserves is the same as at Driefontein. For planning purposes, these blocks are further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

South Deep

 

Reserve Classification

   Sample Spacing Range
Min/Max
(meters)
   Maximum Distance Data is
Projected
(meters)

Proved

   0 to 100    220

Probable (AI) (1)

   100 to 180    450

Probable (BI) (1)

   >180    1,200

 

Note:

 

(1) AI is above infrastructure; BI is below infrastructure.

For proved reserves, the orebody must be fully destressed and drilling is planned at an approximate 30-meter by 30-meter grid-spacing for development (such as access ramps and drives), and similarly for stoping. Estimation is constrained within both geologically homogenous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged small-scale grids.

For above infrastructure probable reserves, the estimates access a significant number of samples on spacing greater than the spacing for development and stoping bordering these areas. In addition, borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters are used in conjunction with 3D seismic survey results that confirm certain structural elevations and surfaces. Reserves classified as probable above infrastructure are generally adjacent to those classified as proven. Estimation is constrained within homogenous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from simple and ordinary kriging and through declustered averaging techniques.

The below infrastructure probable reserves are based on the December 2005 pre-acquisition reserve figures as defined by an Independent Review Panel acting on behalf of the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture between BGSA (formerly, Placer Dome South Africa Proprietary Limited) and Western Areas Limited. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields as included in this annual report.”

The primary assumptions of continuity of the geologically homogenous zones are driven by the geological model, which is updated when new information arises. Any changes to the model are subject to peer, internal technical corporate consultant and independent consultant review. Historically, mining at South African deep-level gold mines has shown significant geological continuity, so that new mines were started based on limited surface borehole information. Customarily, geological models are primarily based on the definition of different facies within each conglomerate horizon. These facies are extrapolated into new, undeveloped areas taking into account any surface borehole data in those areas. Normally these facies are continuous, supported by extensive historical sample databases, and can be incorporated in the macro kriging of large blocks.

Ghana

For the Tarkwa open pit operation, estimation of reserves is based on a combination of an initial 100- or 200-meter grid of diamond drilling and in certain areas a 12.5-meter to 25.0-meter grid of reverse circulation drilling. For the Damang open pit operation, estimation of reserves is based on a 20-meter to 80-meter grid of diamond drilling and in certain areas reverse circulation drilling on an eight-meter by five-meter drill grid.

 

45


Table of Contents

Australia

At the Australian operations, the estimation of reserves for both underground and open pit operations is based on exploration, sampling and testing information gathered through appropriate techniques, primarily from boreholes and mine development. The locations of sample points are spaced closely enough to deduce or confirm geological and grade continuity. Generally, drilling is undertaken on grids, which range between 20 meters by 20 meters to 40 meters by 40 meters, although this may vary depending on the continuity of the orebody. Due to the variety and diversity of resources at St. Ives and Agnew, sample spacing may also vary depending on each particular ore type.

Peru

For the Cerro Corona operation, estimation is based on diamond drill and reverse circulation holes. The spacing of holes at Cerro Corona is generally around 50 meters, with some areas approximating a 25-meter grid.

Reserve Statement

As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields had aggregate attributable proved and probable gold reserves of approximately 78.9 million ounces as set forth in the following table.

Gold ore reserve statement as of June 30, 2009 (1)

 

    Tons   Proved
reserves
Head

Grade
  Gold   Tons   Probable
reserves
Head

Grade
  Gold   Tons   Total
reserves
Head

Grade
  Gold   Attributable
gold
production
in the

12 months
ended
June 30,
2009 (2)
    (million)   (g/t)   (‘000 oz)   (million)   (g/t)   (‘000 oz)   (million)   (g/t)   (‘000 oz)   (‘000 oz)

Underground (“UG”)

                   

South Africa

                   

Driefontein (UG) (total)

  17.6   7.4   4,157   48.0   9.0   13,832   65.6   8.5   17,989   761

Above infrastructure (3)

  17.6   7.4   4,157   20.6   8.7   5,735   38.2   8.1   9,892   761

Below infrastructure (3)

  —     —     —     27.4   9.2   8,097   27.4   9.2   8,097   —  

Kloof (UG) (total)

  19.2   7.6   4,704   21.8   7.8   5,477   41.0   7.7   10,180   621

Above infrastructure (3)

  19.2   7.6   4,704   18.4   7.8   4,609   37.6   7.7   9,313   621

Below infrastructure (3)

  —     —     —     3.4   8.0   868   3.4   8.0   868   —  

South Deep (UG) (total) (6)

  15.2   5.9   2,906   134.2   6.2   26,580   149.4   6.1   29,486   175

Above infrastructure (3)(6)

  15.2   5.9   2,906   67.6   6.6   14,265   82.8   6.5   17,171   175

Below infrastructure (3)(6)

  —     —     —     66.6   5.8   12,315   66.6   5.8   12,315   —  

Beatrix (UG) (total)

  13.9   4.7   2,087   27.1   5.0   4,361   41.0   4.9   6,448   391

Above infrastructure (3)

  13.9   4.7   2,087   24.7   5.0   3,990   38.6   4.9   6,077   391

Below infrastructure (3)

  —     —     —     2.4   4.8   371   2.4   4.8   371   —  

Australia

                   

St. Ives

  1.4   5.3   230   6.4   4.6   943   7.7   4.7   1,173   181

Agnew

  0.6   8.9   186   1.9   8.7   526   2.5   8.7   712   192

Total Underground

  67.9   6.5   14,270   239.4   6.7   51,719   307.2   6.7   65,988   2,322

Surface (Rock Dumps)

                   

Driefontein

  —     —     —     9.6   0.7   213   9.6   0.7   213   69

Kloof

  —     —     —     12.2   0.9   341   12.2   0.9   341   22

South Deep (6)

  —     —     —     —     —     —     —     —     —     —  

 

46


Table of Contents
    Tons   Proved
reserves
Head

Grade
  Gold   Tons   Probable
reserves
Head

Grade
  Gold   Tons   Total
reserves
Head

Grade
  Gold   Attributable
gold
production
in the

12 months
ended
June 30,
2009 (2)
 
    (million)   (g/t)   (‘000 oz)   (million)   (g/t)   (‘000 oz)   (million)   (g/t)   (‘000 oz)   (‘000 oz)  

Surface (Production Stockpile)

                   

Ghana

                   

Tarkwa

  3.1   0.7   72   —     —     —     3.1   0.7   72   —   (4)  

Damang

  —     —     —     3.6   1.1   131   3.6   1.1   131   —   (4)  

Australia

                   

St. Ives

  4.1   1.1   139   —     —     —     4.1   1.1   139   —   (4)  

Agnew

  0.3   0.9   10   —     —     —     0.3   0.9   10   —   (4)  

Peru

                   

Cerro Corona

  1.0   1.2   39   —     —     —     1.0   1.2   39   —   (4)  

Surface (Open Pit)

                   

Ghana

                   

Tarkwa

  106.4   1.3   4,423   82.4   1.2   3,096   188.8   1.2   7,519   435   

Damang (5)

  2.5   1.8   147   19.6   1.6   1,016   22.0   1.7   1,163   142   

Australia

                   

St. Ives (5)

  0.5   1.8   30   17.8   1.7   980   18.3   1.7   1,010   247   

Agnew (5)

  —     —     —     —     —     —     —     —     —     —     

Peru

                   

Cerro Corona

  17.3   1.1   610   53.8   0.9   1,628   71.1   1.0   2,238   85   

Total Surface

  135.2   1.3   5,470   199.0   1.2   7,405   334.1   1.2   12,875   998   

Grand Total

  203.2   3.0   19,740   438.3   4.2   59,122   641.4   3.8   78,863   3,322   

Totals by Mine

                   

Driefontein

  17.6   7.4   4,157   57.6   7.6   14,045   75.2   7.5   18,202   830   

Kloof

  19.2   7.6   4,704   34.0   5.3   5,818   53.2   6.2   10,521   643   

South Deep (6)

  15.2   5.9   2,906   134.2   6.2   26,580   149.4   6.1   29,486   175   

Beatrix

  13.9   4.7   2,087   27.1   5.0   4,361   41.0   4.9   6,448   391   

Tarkwa

  109.5   1.3   4,495   82.4   1.2   3,096   192.0   1.2   7,591   435   

Damang

  2.5   1.8   147   23.2   1.5   1,147   25.7   1.6   1,294   142   

St. Ives

  6.0   2.1   399   24.1   2.5   1,922   30.1   2.4   2,322   428   

Agnew

  1.0   6.3   196   1.9   8.7   526   2.9   7.8   722   192   

Cerro Corona

  18.3   1.1   649   53.8   0.9   1,628   72.1   1.0   2,277   85   

Grand Total

  203.2   3.0   19,740   438.3   4.2   59,122   641.4   3.8   78,863   3,322   

 

Notes:

 

(1)   (a) Quoted as mill delivered metric tons and Run of Mine, or RoM, grades, inclusive of all mining dilutions and gold losses except mill recovery. Metallurgical recovery factors have not been applied to the reserve figures. The approximate metallurgical factors are as follows: (1) Driefontein 97.0%; (2) Kloof 97.6%; (3) Beatrix 96.1%; (4) South Deep 97.3%; (5) Tarkwa 97.0% for milling, 64.0% for heap leach; (6) Damang 92.5% to 93.5%; (7) St. Ives 85% to 95% for milling, 57% to 75% for heap leach; (8) Agnew 92.6%; and (9) Cerro Corona 55% to 75% for gold. The metallurgical recovery is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the mass of the specific mineral product actually recovered from ore treated at the plant to its total specific mineral content before treatment. The South African operations have a fairly consistent metallurgical recovery, while the recoveries on the International operations vary according to the mix of the source material and method of treatment.

 

47


Table of Contents
  (b) For Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix, a gold price of Rand 230,000 per kilogram ($800 per ounce at an exchange rate of Rand 8.95 per $1.00) was applied in calculating ore reserve figures. For the Tarkwa and Damang operations, ore reserve figures are based on an optimized pit at a gold price of $800 per ounce. For the Australian operations, ore reserve figures are based on a gold price of A$1,000 per ounce ($800 per ounce at an exchange rate of A$1.25 per $1.00). Open pit ore reserves at the Australian operations are similarly based on optimized pits. The gold price used for reserves is the approximate three-year trailing average, calculated on a monthly basis, of the London afternoon fixing price of gold for both the U.S.$ and A$. The gold price in Rand used for South African reserves represents a two-year trailing average. These prices are approximately 53% higher in South African Rand terms, 23% higher in U.S. dollar terms and 33% higher in Australian dollar terms than the prices used for the June 30, 2008 declaration and reflect the effect of a consistently increasing gold price on the two- or three-year historical average. Gold Fields is still evaluating the overall reserve position at South Deep following its acquisition of the mine during fiscal 2007 and accordingly has included the reserves for the Upper Elsburg reefs in the Current Mine and in Phase 1 north of the Wrench Fault and also Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above mine infrastructure) as remodeled, re-evaluated, designed and scheduled in accordance with Gold Fields’ standards and procedures. The remainder of the reserves are as declared by the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture (now, the South Deep Joint Venture) as at December 31, 2005, before its acquisition by Gold Fields. These historical reserves were calculated using a Rand price of 87,193 per kilogram ($400 per ounce at an exchange rate of Rand 6.78 per $1.00). For the Cerro Corona gold reserves, the optimized pit is based on a gold price of $800 per ounce and a copper price of $1.75 per pound, which, due to the nature of the deposit and the importance of net smelter returns, need to be considered together.

 

  (c) For the South African operations, mine dilution relates to the difference between the mill tonnage and the stope face tonnage and includes other sources stoping (which is waste that is broken on the mining horizon, other than on the stope face), development to mill and tonnage discrepancy (which is the difference between the tonnage expected on the basis of the mine’s measuring methods and the tonnage accounted for by the plant). For the International operations, dilution relates to unplanned waste and/or low-grade material being mined and delivered to the mill. Ranges are given for those operations that have multiple orebody styles and mining methodologies. The mine dilution factors are as follows: (i) Driefontein 23%; (ii) Kloof 24%; (iii) Beatrix 23%; (iv) South Deep 6%; (v) Tarkwa 11%; (vi) Damang 15% for hydrothermal and 20 cm for each of the hanging wall and footwall for paleoplacer; (vii) St. Ives 1% to 13% (open pits) and 5% to 20% (underground); (viii) Agnew 13% to 33%; and (ix) Cerro Corona 0%.

 

  (d) The mining recovery factor relates to the proportion or percentage of ore mined from the defined orebody at the gold price used for the declaration of reserves. This percentage will vary from mining area to mining area and reflects planned and scheduled reserves against total potentially available reserves (at the gold price used for the declaration of reserves), with all modifying factors, mining constraints and pillar discounts applied. The mining recovery factors are as follows: (i) Driefontein 81%; (ii) Kloof 78%; (iii) Beatrix 53%; (iv) Tarkwa 98%; (v) Damang 100%; (vi) St. Ives 95% to 99% (open pits) and 75% to 100% (underground); and (vii) Agnew 100%. The methodology of this factor is currently being reviewed across the operations, and South Deep continues to be excluded from this summary pending completion of the review of the original acquisition model.

 

  (e) The pay limit (South African operations) and cut-off grade (International operations) vary per shaft, open pit or underground mine, depending on the respective costs, depletion schedule, ore type and dilution. The following are the average or range of values applied in the planning process: (i) Driefontein 1170 cm.g/t; (ii) Kloof 1310 cm.g/t; (iii) Beatrix 840 cm.g/t; (iv) South Deep 4.0g/t (at South Deep, the values are expressed in g/t, as focus is on tonnage rather than square meters, and they are only applicable to the area remodeled by Gold Fields); (v) Tarkwa 0.30 g/t for heap leach and 0.43 g/t for mill feed; (vi) Damang 0.62 g/t for fresh ore and 0.43 g/t for oxide ore; (vii) St. Ives 0.41 g/t to 0.81 g/t for heap leach, 0.41 g/t to 0.81 g/t for mill feed—open pit, and 2.2 g/t to 4.9 g/t for mill feed—underground; (viii) Agnew 0.28 g/t for mill feed—stockpiles, and 3.6 to 4.6 g/t for mill feed—underground; and (ix) Cerro Corona $10.92 net smelter return (combined copper and gold).

 

48


Table of Contents
  (f) Totals may not sum due to rounding. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.

 

(2) Actual gold produced after metallurgical recovery.

 

(3) Above infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently has infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur. Below infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently does not have infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur, but where the operation has made plans to install additional infrastructure in the future which will allow mining to occur at that level. The current studies for below infrastructure reserves at Driefontein, which contemplate accessing the area via a sub-vertical shaft complex, are currently being reviewed versus multiple declines, which may materially impact the below infrastructure reserve ounces at this operation.

 

(4) Includes some gold produced from stockpile material, which cannot be separately measured.

 

(5) Excludes inferred material within the pit design.

 

(6) See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields included in this annual report” and note (1)(b) above.

The following table sets forth the proved and probable copper reserves of the Cerro Corona mine as of June 30, 2009 that are attributable to Gold Fields.

Copper ore reserve statement as of June 30, 2009 (1 )( 2)

 

    Tons   Proved
Reserves
Grade
Cu
  Cu   Tons   Probable
Reserves
Grade
Cu
  Cu   Tons   Total
Reserves
Grade
Cu
  Cu   Attributable
copper
production
in the
12 months
ended
June 30,
2009
    (million)   (%)   (million
lbs)
  (million)   (%)   (million
lbs)
  (million)   (%)   (million
lbs)
 

(million

lbs)

Surface (Open Pit) Peru

                   

Cerro Corona

  18.3   0.6   226   53.8   0.5   571   72.1   0.5   797   43.1

 

Notes:

 

(1) Metallurgical recovery factors have not been applied to the reserve figures. The approximate metallurgical factor for copper at Cerro Corona is 58% to 89%.

 

(2) For the copper reserves, the optimized pit is based on a gold price of $800 per ounce and a copper price of $1.75 per pound, which, due to the nature of the deposit, need to be considered together.

 

49


Table of Contents

Gold and copper price sensitivity

The amount of gold mineralization that Gold Fields can economically extract, and therefore can classify as reserves, is very sensitive to fluctuations in the price of gold. At gold prices significantly different than the gold price of $800 per ounce used to estimate Gold Fields’ attributable gold reserves (excluding copper) of 78.9 million ounces of gold as of June 30, 2009 listed above, Gold Fields’ operations would have had materially different reserves. Based on the same methodology and assumptions as were used to estimate Gold Fields’ reserves as of June 30, 2009 listed above, but applying different gold prices that are 10% above and below the $800 per ounce gold price used to estimate Gold Fields’ attributable reserves, the attributable gold reserves of Gold Fields’ operations, excluding South Deep, would have been as follows:

 

     $720/oz    $800/oz    $880/oz
     (‘000 oz)

Driefontein (1)

   17,293    18,202    18,692

Kloof (1)

   9,461    10,521    10,992

Beatrix (1)

   5,588    6,448    7,275

Tarkwa

   6,611    7,591    8,576

Damang

   1,095    1,294    1,415

St. Ives

   2,188    2,322    2,534

Agnew

   626    722    977

Cerro Corona (2)

   2,277    2,277    2,277
              

 

Notes:

 

(1) South African operations’ reserves include run-of-mine ore stockpiles and low-grade strategic stockpiles. Gold Fields is still evaluating the overall reserve position at South Deep following its acquisition of the mine during fiscal 2007. It has included the Phase 2 reserves for South Deep declared by the Placer Dome—Western Areas Limited Joint Venture as at December 31, 2005, calculated using a U.S. dollar price of $400 per ounce and has updated to June 30, 2009 for remodeling of the Upper Elsburg reefs in the Current Mine, Phase 1 north of the Wrench Fault and also Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above mine infrastructure). Therefore, it is not feasible to present a comparable sensitivity analysis for South Deep. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields included in this annual report.”

 

(2) Under the current tailings dam design at Cerro Corona, reserves would not respond to an upward movement of the gold price because of current capacity constraints at the tailings storage facility for the Cerro Corona mine. A decrease of 10% in gold prices is insufficient to affect the level of gold reserves.

The London afternoon fixing price for gold on November 30, 2009 was U.S.$1,176 per ounce. Gold Fields’ attributable gold reserves decreased from 80.5 million ounces at June 30, 2008 to 78.9 million ounces at June 30, 2009, primarily due to mining depletion.

The amount of copper mineralization that Gold Fields can economically extract, and therefore can classify as reserves, could be sensitive to fluctuations in the price of copper. However, under the current tailings dam design at Cerro Corona, reserves would not respond to an upward movement of the copper price because of current capacity constraints at the tailings storage facility for Cerro Corona and a decrease of 10% in copper prices is insufficient to affect the level of copper reserves.

The London Metal Exchange, or LME, cash buyer price for copper on November 30, 2009 was U.S.$6,815 per ton.

Gold Fields’ methodology for determining its reserves is subject to change and is based upon estimates and assumptions made by management regarding a number of factors as noted above under “—Methodology.” Accordingly, the sensitivity analysis of Gold Fields’ reserves provided above should not be relied upon as

 

50


Table of Contents

indicative of what the estimate of Gold Fields’ reserves would actually be or have been at the gold or copper prices indicated, or at any other gold or copper price, nor should it be relied upon as a basis for estimating Gold Fields’ ore reserves based on the current gold or copper price or what Gold Fields’ reserves will be at any time in the future. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ reserves are estimates based on a number of assumptions, any changes to which may require Gold Fields to lower its estimated reserves.”

Geology

The majority of Gold Fields’ gold production is derived from deep-level underground gold mines located along the northern and western margins of the Witwatersrand Basin in South Africa. These properties include the Driefontein operation, the Kloof operation, the Beatrix operation and the South Deep operation. These mines are typical of the many Witwatersrand Basin operations, which have been the primary contributors to South Africa’s production of a significant portion of the world’s recorded gold output since 1886.

The Witwatersrand Basin comprises a 6,000-meter vertical thickness of sedimentary rocks, extending laterally for some 350 kilometers northeast to southwest by some 1200 kilometers northwest to southeast, generally dipping at shallow angles toward the center of the basin. The basin outcrops at its northern extent near Johannesburg but to the west, south and east it is overlaid by up to 4,000 meters of volcanic and sedimentary rocks. The Witwatersrand Basin is Archaean in age, meaning the sedimentary rocks are of the order of 2.8 billion years old.

Gold mineralization occurs within laterally extensive quartz pebble conglomerate horizons called reefs, which are developed above unconformable surfaces near the basin margin. As a result of faulting and primary controls on mineralization processes, the gold fields are not continuous and are characterized by the presence or dominance of different reef units. The reefs are generally less than two meters in thickness and are widely considered to represent laterally extensive braided fluvial deposits or unconfined flow deposits, which formed along the flanks of alluvial fan systems around the edge of an inland sea. Dykes and sills of diabase or dolerite composition are developed within the Witwatersrand Basin and are associated with several intrusive and extrusive events.

The gold generally occurs in native form, often associated with pyrite, carbon and uranium. Pyrite and gold within the reefs display a variety of forms, some obviously indicative of detrital transport within the depositional system and others suggesting crystallization within the reef itself.

The most fundamental controls of gold distribution are the primary sedimentary features such as facies variation and channel directions. Consequently, the modeling of sedimentary features within the reefs and the correlation of payable grades within certain facies is key to in situ reserve estimation as well as effective operational mine planning and grade control.

For a discussion of the geological features present at the Tarkwa, Damang, St. Ives, Agnew and the Cerro Corona mines, see the geology discussion contained in the description of each of those mines found below under “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Ghana Operations—Tarkwa Mine,” “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Ghana Operations—Damang Mine,” “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—St. Ives,” “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—Agnew”, “Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Peru Operations—Cerro Corona.”

Description of Mining Business

The discussion below provides a general overview of the mining business as it applies to Gold Fields.

Exploration

Exploration activities are focused on the extension of existing orebodies and identification of new orebodies both at existing sites and at undeveloped sites. Once a potential orebody has been discovered, exploration is extended and intensified in order to enable clearer definition of the orebody and the potential portions to be mined. Geological techniques are constantly refined to improve the economic viability of prospecting and mining activities.

 

51


Table of Contents

Mining

Gold Fields currently mines only gold, with copper and silver as by-products. The mining process can be divided into two principal activities: (1) developing access to the orebody; and (2) extracting the orebody once accessed. These two processes apply to both surface and underground mines.

Underground Mining

Developing Access to the Orebody

For Gold Fields’ South African underground mines, access to orebodies is provided through vertical, inclined and declined shaft systems. If additional depth is required to fully exploit the reef, and it is economically feasible, then secondary (sub-vertical) or tertiary shafts are sunk from the underground levels. Horizontal development at various intervals of a shaft, known as levels, extends access to the horizon of the reef to be mined. On-reef development then provides specific mining access. South African mine layouts generally follow a linear, crisscross pattern, while Australian mines have more varied layouts and typically use a spiral-shaped decline layout to descend alongside the orebody.

Extracting the Orebody

Once an orebody has been accessed, drilling, blasting, supporting and cleaning activities are carried out on a daily basis. At Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix, the broken ore is scraped into and down gullies to ore passes, where it is channeled to the crosscut below. The ore is then hauled by rail to shaft ore passes, where it is tipped into loading stations for hoisting to the surface. At South Deep, now a fully mechanized mine, ore is hauled by trucks along decline corridors to ore pass systems which connect to corridor crosscuts below. The ore is then transported by rail and tipped into loading stations for hoisting to the surface. At the Australian operations, the broken ore is loaded straight from the stope face into trucks, using mechanical loaders, and hauled to the surface via the decline. Mining methods employed at Gold Fields’ operations include longwall mining, closely spaced dip pillar mining and conventional scattered mining. In Australia, extraction methods are highly mechanized, with mechanized equipment used within the declines and at the stope for drilling, loading and hauling.

Open Pit Mining

Developing Access to the Orebody

In open pit mining, access to the ore is achieved by stripping the overburden in benches of fixed height to expose the ore below. This is most typically achieved by drilling and blasting an area, loading the broken rock with excavators into dump trucks and hauling the rock and/or soil to dumps.

Extracting the Orebody

Extraction of the orebody in open pit mining involves the same activity as in stripping the overburden. Lines are established demarcating ore from waste material and the rock is then drilled and blasted. The ore is loaded into dump trucks and hauled to the crusher or stockpile, while the waste is hauled to waste rock dumps.

Rock Dump and Production Stockpile Mining

Gold Fields mines surface rock dumps and production stockpiles using mechanized earth-moving equipment.

Mine Planning and Management

Operational and planning management on the mines receives support from corporate management and centralized support functions. The current philosophy is one of top-down/bottom-up management, with the non-financial operational objectives at each mine defined by the personnel at the mine based on parameters, objectives and guidelines provided by Gold Fields’ head office. This is based on the premise that the people on the ground have the best understanding of what is realistically achievable.

 

52


Table of Contents

Each operation compiles a detailed one-year operational plan that rolls into a life of mine, or LoM, plan prior to the commencement of each fiscal year. The plans are based on financial parameters determined by the Gold Fields Executive Committee. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Executive Committee.” The operational plan is presented to the Gold Fields Executive Committee, which takes it to the Board for approval before the commencement of each fiscal year. The planning process is sequential and is based upon geological models, evaluation models, mine design, depletion schedules and, ultimately, financial analysis. Capital planning is formalized pursuant to Gold Fields’ capital spending planning process. Projects are categorized in terms of total expenditure, and all projects involving amounts exceeding Rand 100 million (South Africa), A$15 million (Australia) and U.S.$15 million (Ghana/Peru) are submitted to the Gold Fields’ Board for approval. Material changes to the plans have to be referred back to the Executive Committee and the Board.

The South African operations have implemented an integrated electronic reserve and resource information system, called IRRIS, to enhance LoM planning capabilities. This system provides a common planning platform to facilitate quicker, more flexible and more accurate short- and long-term planning and more timely identification of production shortfalls. Short-term planning on the operations is conducted monthly and aligned with the operational plan. Financial and economic parameters for the LoM and the operational plan are issued to the operations from the Executive Committee and relevant survey and evaluation factors are determined in accordance with Gold Fields’ guidelines. Significant changes in the LoM plans may occur from year to year as a result of mining experience, new ore discoveries, changes in the ore reserve estimates, changes in mining methods and rates, process changes, investment in new equipment and technology, input costs and gold prices.

Processing

Gold Fields currently has 15 gold processing facilities (8 in South Africa, 3 in Ghana, 3 in Australia and 1 in Peru) which treat ore to extract gold and, in the case of Cerro Corona, copper. A typical processing plant circuit includes two phases: comminution and treatment.

Comminution

Comminution is the process of breaking up the ore to expose and liberate the gold and make it available for treatment. Conventionally, this process occurs in multi-stage crushing and milling circuits, which include the use of jaw and gyratory crushers and rod, tube, ball and semi-autogenous grinding, or SAG, mills. Most of Gold Fields’ milling circuits utilize SAG milling where the ore itself and steel balls are used as the primary grinding media. Through the comminution process, ore is ground to a minimum size before proceeding to the treatment phase.

Treatment

In most of Gold Fields’ metallurgical plants, gold is extracted into a leach solution by leaching with cyanide in agitated tanks. Gold is then extracted onto activated carbon from the solution using either the CIL or CIP process. The activated carbon is then eluted with gold recovered by electrowinning.

Gold Fields has two active heap leach operations. In the heap leach process, crushed ore is stacked on impervious leach pads and a cyanide leaching solution is sprayed on the pile. The solution percolates through the heap and dissolves liberated gold. A system of underdrains removes the gold-containing solution, which is then passed through columns containing activated carbon. The loaded carbon is then eluted and the gold recovered by electrowinning.

As a final recovery step, gold recovered from the carbon using the above processes is smelted to produce rough gold bars. These bars are then transported to the refinery which is responsible for refining the bars to good delivery status.

At Cerro Corona, gold/copper concentrate is produced using a standard flotation process. The concentrate is then shipped to a third-party smelter for further processing.

 

53


Table of Contents

Productivity and Cost Initiatives

Towards the end of fiscal 2008, the Gold Fields South African operations reviewed a number of their productivity and cost projects in order to ensure that focus was only on those projects with substantial value beyond the next two to five years. The result of the review was the identification of a suite of projects called Project “M”, as noted below:

Project 1M One-meter extra face advance is a productivity initiative that aims to improve quality mining volumes by increasing the face advance by an extra meter per month to an average of 8 meters per month by the end of fiscal 2010.

Project 2M Mechanization of flat-end development , which is development on the horizontal plane, is a technology sub-group initiative aimed at mechanizing all flat-end development at the long-life shafts by the end of fiscal 2010 in order to improve safety and increase reserve flexibility.

Project 3M is a suite of projects focused on reducing energy and utilities consumption, work-place absenteeism and surface costs. Project 3M comprises:

The Energy and Utilities Project which focuses on reducing, by 10% by fiscal 2010, the consumption of power, compressed air and water. It also aims to reduce diesel consumption by 20% within a one-year period. This project is driven primarily at reducing the safety risk to employees of interruptible power supply, maintaining the integrity of equipment and machinery in the face of power supply risks and minimizing the erosion of operating margins due to higher power tariffs and oil prices.

Some of the key initiatives include on-line monitoring of power consumption, main fan vane control, energy-efficient lighting, energy-efficient machinery and equipment, and reducing air and water wastage through stope shut-off valves. In the case of diesel, strict controls are being enforced, supported by the continued replacement of diesel with battery locomotives and outsourcing and upgrade of the old surface vehicle fleet.

The Management of Workplace Absenteeism Project focuses on reducing workplace absenteeism by 4% by fiscal 2010 in order to minimize the impact of lost shifts on production. Some of the key initiatives under this project include reducing unnecessary time spent by employees in training, work orientation and recruitment and healthcare assessment processes by creating a one-stop engagement and health-assessment center, particularly for Driefontein and Kloof. Stricter controls have been implemented to manage sick leave and its abuse, while maintaining focus on continual improvement of wellness programs and employee and union relations.

The Above-ground Cost Project focuses on reducing surface costs by at least R100 million per annum. Various initiatives are in place including review of surface labor, improving workshop performance, implementing salvage and reclamation programs, enhancing procurement processes, and efficient management and utilization of inventories through a vigorous application of standards and norms.

Project 4M Achievement of the Mine Health and Safety Council (MHSC) Milestones, as agreed to on June 15, 2003 . This initiative focuses on the Mine Health and Safety Council, or the MHSC, milestones agreed to on June 15, 2003 by a tripartite health and safety summit comprising representatives from Government, organized labor unions and associations, and mining companies. The focus is on achieving occupational health and safety targets and milestones over a 10-year period. The commitment was driven by the need to achieve greater improvements in occupational health and safety in the mining industry. In order to meet the “noise-induced hearing loss” target, the company is focusing on the noise at source. A target was set that no machine or piece of equipment may generate a noise level in excess of 110 dB after December 2013. A number of action plans have been put in place to meet this target based on the highest potential exposure source. Progress is monitored quarterly. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees Health and Safety—Safety.”

 

54


Table of Contents

Refining and Marketing

South Africa

Gold Fields has appointed Rand Refinery Limited, or Rand Refinery, to refine all of Gold Fields’ South African-produced gold. Rand Refinery is a non-listed public company in which Gold Fields holds a 34.9% interest, with the remaining interests held by other South African gold producers.

Since October 1, 2004, Gold Fields’ treasury department arranges the sale of all the gold production from the South African operations. Rand Refinery advises Gold Fields on a daily basis of the amount of gold available for sale. Gold Fields sells the gold at a price benchmarked against the London afternoon fixing price. Two business days after the sale of gold, Gold Fields deposits an amount in U.S. dollars equal to the value of the gold at the London afternoon fixing price into Rand Refinery’s nominated U.S. dollar account. Rand Refinery deducts refining charges payable by Gold Fields relating to such amount of gold and deposits the balance of the proceeds into the nominated U.S. dollar account of Gold Fields.

Ghana

All gold produced by Gold Fields at the Tarkwa and Damang mines in Ghana is refined by Rand Refinery pursuant to two non-exclusive evergreen agreements entered into in October 2004 between Rand Refinery and Gold Fields Ghana Limited, or Gold Fields Ghana, and between Rand Refinery and Abosso Goldfields Limited, or Abosso. Under these agreements, Rand Refinery collects, refines and sells gold as instructed by Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso. Rand Refinery assumes responsibility for the gold upon collection at either the Tarkwa or Damang mine. The gold is then transported to the Rand Refinery premises in Johannesburg, South Africa, where it is refined. Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso reimburse Rand Refinery for transportation costs. Under these agreements, Rand Refinery sells the refined gold on behalf of Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso at the London afternoon fixing price for gold on the date of delivery. Rand Refinery receives refining fees for gold received, and a realization fee for gold refined. Each of these agreements continues until either party terminates it upon 90 days’ written notice.

Australia

In Australia, all gold produced by St. Ives and Agnew is refined by AGR Matthey, which is a partnership between WA Mint, Australian Gold Alliance and Johnson Matthey (Australia), under an evergreen agreement which became effective on September 1, 2002. The agreement is between St. Ives Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd, Agnew Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd and AGR Matthey. AGR Matthey applies competitive charges for the collection, transport and refining services. The collection and transportation fees are calculated by the weight of the unrefined gold and a nominal fixed fee component. The refining fees are calculated per ounce of refined gold produced which includes small refining losses of both gold and silver. AGR Matthey takes responsibility for the unrefined gold at collection from St. Ives and Agnew where they engage a sub-contractor, Brinks Australia. Brinks delivers the unrefined gold to AGR Matthey in Perth, Australia, where it is refined and the refined ounces of gold and silver are credited to the relevant metal accounts held by St. Ives and Agnew with AGR Matthey. St. Ives and Agnew then inform Gold Fields treasury in the corporate office in Johannesburg of the amount of fine gold available for sale in Perth, Australia. After such confirmation, Gold Fields treasury either sells the gold directly to AGR Matthey, at the London afternoon fixing price, or swaps it into London for a competitive fee per ounce, meaning AGR Matthey provides that volume of fine gold in London for sale by Gold Fields. In the case of a location swap, AGR Matthey is instructed to credit St. Ives’ or Agnew’s metal account held with Deutsche Bank, London. Once the gold is sold to a third-party, Deutsche Bank in London is instructed by Gold Fields to deliver the gold to the relevant counterparty bank. All silver is sold to AGR Matthey at market rates. The agreement with AGR Matthey continues indefinitely until terminated by either party upon 90 days’ written notice.

 

55


Table of Contents

Peru

La Cima has three contracts for the sale of the entire output of concentrate from the Cerro Corona mine, one with a Japanese refiner, one with a South Korean refiner and one with a German refiner. Two of the contracts expire on December 31, 2015, while the third contract expires on December 31, 2014. Under these contracts, La Cima is to sell approximately one-third of the concentrate to each company and to use reasonable efforts to spread the deliveries evenly throughout the year. Risk passes when the concentrate is loaded in the port of Salaverry, Peru or an alternative port chosen by La Cima. Pricing for copper and gold under each of the contracts is based on average LME copper prices and London Bullion Market Association gold prices, respectively.

World Gold Council

Gold Fields supports and participates in the gold marketing activities of the World Gold Council, or WGC, and, prior to January 1, 2009, contributed to the WGC in support of its activities at a rate of $1.75 per ounce of the gold it produced in South Africa (excluding gold produced from the South Deep Project) and Australia and $1.75 per ounce of its attributable production from Tarkwa and Damang. From January 1, 2009, the amount contributed per ounce increased to $1.85.

Services

Mining activities require extensive services, located both on the surface and underground at the mines. Services include:

 

   

mining-related services such as engineering, rock mechanics, ventilation and refrigeration, materials handling, operational performance evaluation and capital planning;

 

   

safety and training;

 

   

housing and health-related services, including hostel and hospital operations;

 

   

reserves management, including sampling and estimation, geological services, including mine planning and design, and mine survey;

 

   

metallurgy;

 

   

equipment maintenance; and

 

   

assay services.

Most of these services are provided directly by Gold Fields, either at the operational level or through the head office, although some are provided by third-party contractors.

Gold Fields’ Mining Operations

Gold Fields conducts underground mining operations at each site except Tarkwa, Damang and Cerro Corona and conducts some processing of surface rock dump material at Driefontein, Kloof and South Deep. Processing of surface rock dump material at Agnew was completed in October 2008. Gold Fields conducts open pit mining at Tarkwa, Damang, St. Ives (which also conducts underground mining) and Cerro Corona and also processes material from production stockpiles at Tarkwa, Damang and St. Ives.

 

56


Table of Contents

Total Operations

The following chart details the operating and production results (including gold equivalents) for each of fiscal 2007, 2008 and 2009 for all operations owned by Gold Fields during that fiscal year. The results of operations for mines acquired during the relevant period are included as from the date of control, which is December 1, 2006 for South Deep. The results of operations for mines sold during the relevant period are included through the date of execution of the sale agreement, which was November 30, 2007 for Choco 10 in Venezuela.

 

     Year ended June 30,
       2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   52,166    50,376    52,907

Recovered grade (g/t)

   2.6    2.4    2.2

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

   4,285    3,915    3,691

Results of operations ($ million)

        

Revenues

   2,735.2    3,206.2    3,228.3

Total production costs (2)

   2,052.5    2,387.9    2,430.5

Total cash costs (3)

   1,692.5    1,975.2    1,986.1

Cash profit (4)

   1,042.7    1,231.0    1,242.2

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   482    610    659

Total cash costs

   394    505    538

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

   596    822    763

 

Notes:

 

(1) In fiscal 2007, 4.024 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in fiscal 2008, 3.670 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, and in fiscal 2009, 3.414 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Peru operation during fiscal 2009, attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Venezuela operation during fiscal 2008 and attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana, Venezuela and South Deep operations in fiscal 2007.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

 

57


Table of Contents

Underground Operations

The following chart details the operating and production results for Gold Fields’ underground operations for fiscal 2007, 2008 and 2009. The underground operations include all of the mines in the South African operations and the underground portions of the mines in the Australian operations. The results of operations for mines acquired during the relevant period are included as from the date of control, which is December 1, 2006 for South Deep.

 

     Year ended June 30,
       2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   13,386    12,017    11,541

Recovered grade (g/t)

   6.7    6.7    6.2

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

   2,884    2,585    2,300

Results of operations ($million)

        

Revenues

   1,840.2    2,100.5    2,015.2

Total production costs (2)

   1,346.4    1,535.0    1,508.9

Total cash costs (3)

   1,086.5    1,244.7    1,216.6

Cash profit (4)

   753.7    855.8    798.6

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   474    594    656

Total cash costs

   377    481    529

 

Notes:

 

(1) In fiscal 2007, 2,881 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields. In fiscal 2008, all 2.585 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields and in fiscal 2009, all 2,300 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

Tons milled from the underground operations decreased from 12.0 million tons in fiscal 2008 to 11.5 million tons in fiscal 2009. At the South African operations, the decrease was mainly due to the addressing of the backlog in secondary support and infrastructure rehabilitation across all operations. The amount of gold produced from underground operations decreased from 2.585 million ounces in fiscal 2008 to 2.300 million ounces in fiscal 2009. This decrease was also due to the addressing of the backlog in secondary support, lower underground grades and infrastructure rehabilitation across all operations.

Surface Operations

The following chart details the operating and production results (including gold equivalents) for Gold Fields’ surface operations for fiscal 2007, 2008 and 2009. Surface operations include all of the mines in the Ghana, Venezuela and Peru operations, the open pit portions of the mines in the Australian operations and the surface rock dump material at the mines in the South African operation. The results of operations for mines

 

58


Table of Contents

acquired during the relevant period are included as from the date of control, which is December 1, 2006 for South Deep. The results of operations for Choco 10 are included only through the date of the sale, which was November 30, 2007.

 

     Year ended June 30,
       2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   38,780    38,359    41,366

Recovered grade (g/t)

   1.1    1.1    1.0

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

   1,401    1,330    1,391

Results of operations ($ million)

        

Revenues

   895.0    1,105.7    1,213.1

Total production costs (2)

   706.1    852.9    921.6

Total cash costs (3)

   606.1    730.5    769.5

Cash profit (4)

   288.9    375.2    443.6

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   504    642    663

Total cash costs

   432    550    553

 

Notes:

 

(1) In fiscal 2007, 1.142 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in fiscal 2008, 1.085 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields and in fiscal 2009, 1.114 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Peru operations in fiscal 2009, attributable to minority shareholders in both the Ghana and Venezuela operations in fiscal 2008 and attributable to minority shareholders in Ghana, Venezuela and South Deep in fiscal 2007.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

Tons milled and treated from the surface operations increased from 38.4 million tons in fiscal 2008 to 41.4 million tons in fiscal 2009, primarily because of the inclusion of the Cerro Corona operation in Peru.

Driefontein Operation

Introduction

The Driefontein gold mine is located in the Northwest Province of South Africa in the Far West Rand mining district, some 70 kilometers southwest of Johannesburg. Driefontein operates under mining rights covering a total area of approximately 8,600 hectares. It is an underground mine with nominal surface reserves represented by rock dumps that have been accumulated through the operating history of the mine. Driefontein has multiple operating shaft systems and three metallurgical plants and operates at depths of between 700 meters and 3,420 meters below surface. The Driefontein operation has access to the national electricity grid and water, road and rail infrastructure and is located near regional urban centers where it can routinely obtain needed supplies. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, it produced 0.830 million ounces of gold. As of June 30, 2009, Driefontein had approximately 19,200 employees, including approximately 3,200 employed by outside contractors.

 

59


Table of Contents

History

Driefontein was formed from the consolidation in 1981 of the East Driefontein and West Driefontein mines. Gold mining began at Driefontein in 1952.

Geology

Driefontein is located in the West Wits Line that forms part of the Far West Rand of the Witwatersrand Basin. The operation is geologically divided into an eastern section and a western section, separated by a bank anticline and associated faulting. Gold mineralization at Driefontein is contained within three reef horizons. The Carbon Leader Reef, or Carbon Leader, the Ventersdorp Contact Reef, or VCR, and the Middelvlei Reef, or MVR, occur at depths of between 500 meters and 4,000 meters. Stratigraphically, the Carbon Leader is situated 40 to 70 meters below the VCR and MVR and is a generally high-grade reef comprising different facies and dips to the south at approximately 25 degrees. The Carbon Leader subcrops against the VCR in the eastern part of the mine. The west-dipping Bank Fault defines the eastern limit of both reefs. The VCR is most extensively developed in the east, and subcrops to the west. The MVR is a secondary reef, situated approximately 50 meters above the Carbon Leader, and, at present, it is a minor contributor to reserves and production. The average gold grades vary with lithofacies changes in all of the reefs.

Mining

In the northern, older portions of Driefontein, which include Shaft Nos. 2, 6 and 8, production is focused on remnant pillar extraction and accessing and mining of secondary reef horizons. In the southern, newer portions of the mine, which include Shaft Nos. 1 and 4, the focus is on scattered or longwall mining. In the western portion of the mine, at Shafts No. 10 and 6 Tertiary, extensive reclamation and cleaning operations are being conducted. The shafts at the deepest levels of the mine, consisting of Shaft No. 1 Tertiary and Shaft No. 5 Sub-Vertical, employ the closely spaced dip pillar mining method. This method provides additional mining flexibility. Following increased seismicity, impacting on footwall development at Shaft Nos. 1 and 5, the mine instituted a comprehensive strategy to increase the support density in all major off-reef development. Most of the development at Shaft Nos. 1, 4 and 5 was halted in September 2008, and crews were redeployed in order to address the accumulating backlog in implementing secondary support at these shafts. An estimated 90% of the high priority backlog was completed by January 2009. Development at Shaft Nos. 1, 4 and 5 recommenced in January 2009. Development at Shaft No. 7 recommenced in July 2009. In order to prevent secondary support from falling behind again, the mine also introduced the “one pass” system, where crews will install their own secondary support as they mine. Gold Fields believes this will limit the deterioration of the hanging wall and, to a degree, the footwall infrastructure due to seismicity. Gold Fields expects to complete the backlog by the end of fiscal 2010.

Reviews of pillar mining were also conducted during the year, which led to the stoppage of extraction of numerous higher-grade pillars across the mine. These stoppages had a significant impact on gold production during the year.

 

60


Table of Contents

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Driefontein for the past three fiscal years.

 

     Year ended June 30,
     2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   6,652    5,981    6,217

Recovered grade (g/t)

   4.8    4.8    4.2

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

   1,017    928    830

Results of operations ($million)

        

Revenues

   648.2    756.8    726.5

Total production costs (1)

   425.9    477.6    448.7

Total cash costs (2)

   355.0    384.5    373.8

Cash profit (3)

   293.2    372.3    352.7

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   419    515    541

Total cash costs

   349    414    450

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

   481    584    610

 

Notes:

 

(1) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(3) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(4) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

The increase in tonnage from fiscal 2008 to 2009 was primarily due to an increase in surface ore milled. Gold production decreased primarily due to a drop in both underground mill tons and yield. Underground production and yield was severely affected by stoppages relating to safety. In addition, numerous higher-grade areas had to be abandoned during the year due to unacceptable risk levels. Gold Fields experienced an increase in total cash costs and total production costs per ounce of gold from fiscal 2008 to fiscal 2009 at Driefontein, mainly due to lower gold production and increased input costs.

In order to improve operational excellence, in fiscal 2009, Driefontein focused on the implementation of various new technologies and initiatives. These initiatives are aimed at improving mining efficiencies and streamlining the mining process, and include the purchase of a boxhole borer, various mechanized loaders, new era locomotives and development drill rigs.

The Driefontein operation is engaged in both underground and rock dump mining, and is thus subject to all of the underground and rock dump mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors.” The primary safety challenges facing the Driefontein underground operation include falls of ground, seismicity, flammable gas, water intrusion and temperatures. Water intrusion is dealt with through drilling, cementation sealing techniques and an extensive water-pumping network. Also, because rock temperatures tend to increase with depth, Driefontein requires an extensive cooling infrastructure. Driefontein has instituted a number of initiatives to reduce the risks posed by seismicity, including a detailed analysis of previous seismic events, preconditioning and backfilling, the use of hydraulic props, monitoring seismic risk parameters to allow quicker reactions to changes and centralized blasting. In addition, during fiscal 2009, Driefontein adopted a revised stope support standard in all areas with

 

61


Table of Contents

friable hangwall and in areas that have the Westonaria Formation Lava hangwall. Continued reviews of remnant and pillar mining areas were also conducted during the year leading to the stoppage of extraction at numerous higher risk areas across the mine. Driefontein has contracted with external seismologists and rock engineers as a seismic task team to assess and improve seismic strategies.

On January 24, 2008, Gold Fields suspended all mining activity at its South African operations, due to Eskom advising their Key Industrial Consumers, of which Gold Fields is one, that they could not guarantee supply. On January 28, 2008, the power supply was restored to 71% of total average consumption allowing Gold Fields to begin ramping up production at its South African operations. 50% of Gold Fields’ normal electrical consumption is required simply to pump, ventilate and refrigerate its operations. Therefore, the amount of power available on January 28, 2008, was sufficient for essential maintenance, pumping, ventilation, refrigeration, opening up faces and ensuring working areas were safe to operate, but not for production or beneficiation purposes. By mid-March 2008, the total power available to Gold Fields’ South African mines was approximately 95% of the historical average consumption profile at Driefontein and Kloof, and 90% at the Beatrix and South Deep mines. Gold Fields’ power needs in South Africa will increase as it builds up production at its South Deep mine. It has requested an additional allocation from Eskom and Eskom has indicated that the additional requested capacity will be granted. If a power conservation program is implemented, Gold Fields expects that the power allocations of each of its operations will be tradable. As a result, Gold Fields expects to be able to shift power usage from one mine to another as necessary. See “Risk Factors—Some of Gold Fields’ power suppliers have forced it to halt or curtail activities at its mines, due to severe power disruptions. Power stoppages, fluctuations and power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations and its financial condition”.

As a result of the electricity issues, sinking operations at Shaft No. 9 have been suspended indefinitely. Gold Fields plans to continue to perform essential maintenance on the shaft so that the deepening project may be resumed quickly if Gold Fields decides to do so. In the interim, Driefontein will continue with the drilling program in the area below the lowest area currently being mined, targeting the area expected to be accessed by Shaft No. 9. Gold Fields is also conducting an optimization study on mining below current infrastructure. This study is currently investigating a viable alternative to the Shaft No. 9 project, such as a phased mini-decline start system.

Driefontein continued to process low-grade surface material in fiscal 2009, for which the biggest risk is a decrease in grade of the remaining dumps. In order to manage this risk, the grade of the rock dumps is monitored on a daily basis. Grade management is undertaken through the screening of material to separate out the smaller fraction sizes of ore, which tend to be of higher grade. This process reduces the tonnage that will be available for processing. The surface operation safety risks include problems with ground stability, moving machinery and dust generation. Driefontein has a risk management system in place that guides the mining of the rock dumps to minimize these risks.

In total, during fiscal 2009, there were seven fatalities at Driefontein and, to date in fiscal 2010, there have been three fatalities. Of the 10 fatalities, six were due to seismic events, one due to a winches and rigging related accident, one due to an accident related to a discharge of gas and two due to tramming related accidents. The serious injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2009 was 3.0 serious injuries for every million hours worked, reflecting an improvement as compared to the serious injury frequency rate of 4.4 for fiscal 2008 and 7.1 for fiscal 2007. The fatal injury frequency rate decreased from 0.26 in fiscal 2008 to 0.16 fatalities for every million hours worked in fiscal 2009. In fiscal 2007, the fatal injury frequency rate was 0.26 fatalities for every million hours worked. A major source of accidents in the mine remains falls of ground, which make up about a third of all accidents. Based on the results of the Presidential Safety Audit conducted in 2007, as well as the Du Pont audit in fiscal 2009, Gold Fields is designing a safety management system called the Safe Production Management System, to address outstanding issues identified and to assist Driefontein and the other South African operations to improve health and safety to best practice levels. The mine also continued with the Masiphephe safety program, which incorporates elements of the Safe Production Management System, during the year. On June 12, 2009, the mine completed in excess of 2.85 million fatality-free shifts, which is a record

 

62


Table of Contents

achievement for the mine and set a new benchmark for deep-level gold mining in South Africa. Driefontein again maintained its Occupational Health and Safety Assessment Series, or OHSAS 18001 certification, through external audits conducted in fiscal 2009.

During fiscal 2009, after each major mine incident or accident, Driefontein received, and complied with, various instructions to halt operations from the Principal Inspector of the Gauteng area of the DMR. As part of Gold Fields’ compliance with these instructions, Driefontein participated in the Health and Safety Audit which checked legal compliance of the mine. The Department of Mineral Resources has expressed its satisfaction with the mine’s remedial measures. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Safety”.

During fiscal 2009, there were three industrial actions that affected production at Driefontein. On July 23, 2008, there was a one-day regional work stoppage in Gauteng province in support of COSATU’s protest against the electricity crisis in South Africa followed by another one-day COSATU national stay-away on August 6, 2008 for the same reason. The third action was an isolated illegal work stoppage that lasted for a day at Driefontein’s Shaft No. 1. For more information about labor relations at Driefontein, see “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—South Africa.” Driefontein’s productivity improvement strategies continue to be hampered by high levels of worker absenteeism. Although the mine has succeeded in reducing the absenteeism rate, the sick rate, which is one factor of the absenteeism rate, remains an area of concern. Driefontein is continuing with a wellness program as an initiative aimed at improving the health of employees generally. The previous shortage of skilled labor at Driefontein has been eased following closures in other areas of the mining industry.

The total shaft hoisting capacity of Driefontein is detailed below.

 

Shaft System

   Hoisting capacity
     (tons/month)

No. 1

   105,000

No. 2

   165,000

No. 4

   107,000

No. 5

   150,000

No. 6 (1)

   96,000

No. 7

   190,000

No. 8

   96,000

No. 10 (1)

   121,000

 

Note:

 

(1) Shaft Nos. 6 Tertiary and 10 are currently only operated on a limited scale, with the focus on reclamation and cleaning.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserve estimates at Driefontein and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Driefontein, Driefontein’s June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 18.2 million ounces of gold will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2040. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which thus could materially change the life of mine.

Driefontein achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in October 2009.

 

63


Table of Contents

Processing

The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, for each of the plants at Driefontein:

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

  Year
commissioned (1)
  Comminution
phase
  Treatment
phase
  Capacity (2)   Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
  Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (4)
 
                (tons/month)   (tons/month)      

No. 1 Plant

  1972   SAG milling   CIP treatment and
electrowinning
  240,000   246,043   97

No. 2 Plant

  1964   SAG/ball milling   CIP treatment (3)   200,000   174,981   92

No. 3 Plant

  1998   SAG milling   CIP treatment (3)   115,000   97,098   92

 

Notes:

 

(1) No. 1 Plant was substantially upgraded in fiscal 2004, and No. 2 Plant was substantially upgraded in fiscal 2003. No. 3 Plant was originally commissioned as a uranium plant and was upgraded to a gold plant in 1998. Therefore, No. 3 Plant lists the year commissioned as a gold plant.

 

(2) Nameplate capacity. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(3) After CIP treatment, electrowinning occurs at No. 1 Plant.

 

(4) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

In fiscal 2009, the Driefontein plants collectively extracted approximately 97% of the gold contained in ore delivered for processing.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $115 million on capital expenditures at the Driefontein operation in fiscal 2009, primarily on ore reserve development, shaft pillar extraction at Shaft No. 4, upgrading and building of accommodation units, historical tailings treatment operation, emergency power generators, the introduction of battery locomotives and continued implementation of new technology such as development drill rigs and a box-hole borer. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately $147 million of capital expenditures at Driefontein for fiscal 2010, principally for the Shaft No. 4 pillar extraction project, the Uranium Project feasibility study, ore reserve development, continuing mechanization and a residential area upgrade.

Kloof Operation

Introduction

Kloof is situated approximately 60 kilometers west of Johannesburg, near the towns of Carletonville and Westonaria in the Gauteng Province of South Africa. The Kloof mine operates under mining rights covering a total area of approximately 20,100 hectares. It is principally an underground operation, with surface rock dump material being processed at both the Kloof and South Deep plants. Kloof currently has five operating shaft systems serviced by two metallurgical plants. Kloof is an intermediate to ultra-deep-level mine, with operating depths between 1,300 meters and 3,500 meters below surface. The Kloof operation has access to the national electricity grid and water, road and rail infrastructure and is located near regional urban centers where it can routinely obtain needed supplies. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, it produced 0.643 million ounces of gold. As of June 30, 2009, Kloof had approximately 17,200 employees, including approximately 2,300 who were employed by outside contractors.

 

64


Table of Contents

History

Kloof’s present scope of operations is the result of the consolidation of the Kloof, Libanon, Leeudoorn and Venterspost mines. Gold mining began in the area now covered by these operations in 1934.

Geology

The majority of production at Kloof is from the VCR, which occurs at depths of between 1,300 meters and 3,350 meters below surface. The VCR is a tabular orebody that has a general northeast-southwest strike and dips to the southeast at between 20 and 45 degrees. The Middelvlei Reef, or MVR, is classified as Kloof’s secondary reef and minor production volumes are also delivered from the Kloof Reef, or KR, and Libanon Reef, or LR.

Kloof lies between the Bank Fault to the west, and the north trending West Rand Fault to the east. The latter truncates the VCR along the eastern boundary of the mine, with a 1- to 1.5-kilometer up throw to the east. Normal faults are developed sub-parallel to the westerly dipping West Rand Fault, with sympathetic north-northeast trending dykes that show little to no apparent offset of the stratigraphy. A conjugate set of faults and dykes occurs on a west-southwest trend, with throws of 1 to 15 meters. Structures that offset the VCR increase in frequency toward the southern portion of the mine as the Bank Fault is approached.

Mining

The current preferred mining method at Kloof is breast stoping with closely spaced dip pillar mining, with limited application of longwalling and remnant pillar mining in the mature areas. Shaft Nos. 1, 3, 4 and 7 provide the main centers of current production at Kloof, although for the first six months of fiscal 2009 essential maintenance work was performed on Main Shaft infrastructure which hampered production.

In fiscal 2009, Kloof faced several challenges in meeting several of its production targets. Planned production was severely affected by numerous safety-related shaft and full mine production stoppages that were imposed by the DMR, as well as safety stoppages required by management. Production was also adversely affected by the Shaft No. 1 maintenance work mentioned above, a slow return to standard production levels following the Christmas and Easter breaks, seismicity damage, an underground fire at Shaft No. 7 and an illegal stay-away by some miners at Kloof for two months beginning on June 11, 2008. Although grade variability of the primary VCR reef was high, total underground average yield was 4% lower than in fiscal 2008.

The planned extraction of the high-grade Shaft No. 1, or Main Shaft, pillar has been deferred until fiscal 2014 after an external audit review by GroundWorks Consulting revealed that the geotechnical information concerning the Main Shaft pillar area is insufficient to guide the pillar extraction and associated activities required to assist in the safe and profitable extraction of this pillar. The Main Shaft pillar extraction project’s original extraction report was reviewed subsequent to a full geotechnical investigation. The report highlighted that mining of the pillar fringes are possible, but indicate significant seismic risk associated with the inherent geological structure. Further seismic analysis and a review of the design is required to minimize the seismic risk. The final design on how to mine the shaft pillar with the necessary bracket and regional stability pillars is currently being modeled and the final mining sequence and seismic risk analysis will then be completed. Mining of the outskirts of the pillar, though, has begun.

At Shaft No. 3, plans are on track to reopen those areas that were isolated during the power crisis of fiscal 2008, and at Shaft No. 4, an additional refrigeration plant has been commissioned and should assist in improving environmental conditions underground. Shaft No. 7 has all major infrastructure in place and working conditions are conducive to production delivery. As of the date of this annual report, Shaft No. 8 is predominantly mining the lower-grade MVR reef with reduced remnant mining on the VCR horizon due to the presence of complex geological structures which have to be negotiated and which result in reef elimination and gold losses. In line with the overall Gold Fields productivity initiatives, Kloof continues to focus on optimizing mine design and configuration, while ensuring that the high-productivity drivers of workforce motivation and competence are addressed through training and incentive schemes.

 

65


Table of Contents

Short-term grade management is well entrenched and, together with the initiatives put into operation to drive the mine call factor, or MCF, and quality mining program, it is envisaged that the full potential of the mining grade can be realized. The objectives of the quality management program are to ensure that the mine reduces the grade gap between the stope face and the plant, optimizing the size of rock fragments delivered to the plant and ensuring that effective cleaning methods of ore accumulations are employed. A feasibility study for the modified Kloof Extension Area, or KEA, project, now called the 55 Line Decline, is underway. This project consists of a three-level, 14-degree conveyor decline and a service way, and will target the southern portion of the original KEA. Planned infill drilling at Shaft No. 4 will further test the extent of certain higher-grade Sandy 1 facies below the current infrastructure. Additional drilling is also planned to target the MVR area to the south of Shaft No. 1 sub-vertical.

During the first quarter of fiscal 2010, it became evident that the production trajectory and forward gold profile for Kloof was showing misalignment with Kloof’s operational plan. There had been a decrease in the mining grades as well as a loss of high-grade panels due to seismicity.

Gold Fields has undertaken a comprehensive review of the mine’s fiscal 2010 operational plan, taking into consideration the latest information on areas affected by seismicity, geology, evaluation, face length flexibility, payability, mining mix, production rates, quality factors and costs. This work is critical to producing a safe production baseline for Kloof that can be used as a realistic point of departure before building in new opportunities and expediting a number of quality aspects waiting to be leveraged. Gold Fields now believes that Kloof will produce between five and five and a half tons per quarter until it has improved flexibility.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Kloof for the past three fiscal years.

 

     Year ended June 30,
     2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   3,829    3,953    3,319

Recovered grade (g/t)

   7.5    6.5    6.0

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

   923    821    643

Results of operations ($million)

        

Revenues

   587.0    660.9    562.3

Total production costs (1)

   423.1    445.6    413.7

Total cash costs (2)

   338.6    354.6    328.7

Cash profit (3)

   248.4    306.3    233.6

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   458    543    643

Total cash costs

   367    432    511

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

   501    602    698

 

Notes:

 

(1) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(3) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(4) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

 

66


Table of Contents

The decrease in tonnage from fiscal 2008 to 2009 was primarily as a result of planned reductions in production due to the maintenance work on Shaft No. 1. Gold production for fiscal 2009 decreased by 21.7% to 0.643 million ounces from 0.821 million ounces in fiscal 2008, due to the planned decreases in production, maintenance on Shaft No. 1 and numerous safety-related stoppages during the year. Recovered grade decreased from 6.5 g/t in fiscal 2008 to 6.0 g/t in fiscal 2009, primarily due to the higher proportion of lower-grade surface tons processed during fiscal 2009. Total cash costs per ounce increased in fiscal 2009, due to the planned decrease in production and commodity price increases.

The Kloof operation is engaged in underground and rock dump mining, and is thus subject to all of the underground and rock dump risks discussed in “Risk Factors.” A significant challenge facing the Kloof operation is seismicity, and a lesser risk is flammable gas. Gold Fields seeks to reduce the impact of seismicity at Kloof by using the closely spaced dip pillar mining method. In addition, during fiscal 2009, Kloof adopted a revised stope support standard in all areas with friable hangwall and in areas that have the Westonaria Formation Lava hangwall. Early detection and increased ventilation of the shafts are being used to minimize the risk of incidents caused by flammable gas. Also Kloof requires extensive cooling infrastructure to maintain comfortable conditions for workers due to the extreme depth of its operations.

As discussed in regards to Driefontein, the Kloof operation experienced a total suspension of production during the third quarter of fiscal 2008 due to power constraints. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Driefontein Operation—Mining”. An application for additional power was made to Eskom in fiscal 2009. This has been granted and Kloof is now permitted a greater power allocation that it used prior to the power crisis. This additional power is required for the installation of new ventilation equipment and the running of the mills at higher capacity. In addition, in the unlikely event of a total power outage for a prolonged period, Kloof has installed and commissioned an emergency generation plant to allow mine personnel to be evacuated speedily. If a power conservation program is implemented, Gold Fields expects that the power allocations of each of its operations will be tradable. As a result, Gold Fields expects to be able to shift power usage from one mine to another as necessary.

Ten workers lost their lives at Kloof in fiscal 2009, in nine separate incidents. One was related to an ore-pass incident, one as a result of a conveyance incident, one related to blasting, one due to falling from a height, one from a gravity incident and five were seismicity related. To date in fiscal 2010, there have been two fatalities at Kloof. One was related to an ore-pass incident and one was related to a conveyance incident. The serious injury frequency rates (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) at Kloof in fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 were 3.3, 6.3 and 7.0 injuries per million hours worked, respectively. The fatality frequency rate in fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was 0.13, 0.33 and 0.23 fatalities per million hours worked, respectively. Shaft No. 7 achieved one million fatality-free shifts in November 2007 and Kloof as a whole achieved one million fatality-free shifts in June 2008. Management is committed to reducing serious injuries and fatalities at Kloof through its safety programs, including the Kloof Eyethu team development program, the Sawubona Kusasa initiative and an incident-reporting initiative entitled Cabanga Inyoka. To date, almost 100% of employees at Kloof have been through the Sawubona Kusasa Training and positive feedback has been received from follow-up audits on all shafts. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Safety”. Kloof maintained its OHSAS 18001 certification through external audits conducted in fiscal 2009. In October 2007, former President Thabo Mbeki ordered the DMR to conduct an occupational health and safety audit at all mines, including Gold Fields’ mines. The audit of legal compliance has been completed and a report of its findings has been received. Kloof has enacted action plans to address issues identified in the report. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Health and Safety.”

In fiscal 2009, Kloof experienced numerous safety-related work stoppages imposed internally as well as by the DMR. Production at the entire Kloof mine was stopped for a total of eight days, at Shaft No. 1 for a further 16 days and Shaft No. 7 for a further day. Other interruptions were a national stay-away organized by COSATU to protest the energy crisis, a month-long underground fire at Shaft No. 7 and a one-day stay-away related to an investigation of absenteeism at Shaft No. 4. In addition, the Main Shaft repairs, the slow start-up after the

 

67


Table of Contents

Christmas and Easter holidays and lost shifts due to the weeklong implementation of the new stope support standards on portions of all shafts had a negative effect on production during fiscal 2009.

The total shaft hoisting capacity of Kloof is detailed below.

 

Shaft System

   Hoisting capacity
     (tons/month)

No. 1

   265,000

No. 3 (1)

   131,000

No. 4

   112,000

No. 7

   176,000

No. 8

   84,000

 

Notes:

 

(1) This shaft does not hoist material to the surface. It has a capacity of 131,000 tons per month for sub-surface hoisting.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserve estimates at Kloof and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Kloof, Kloof’s June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 10.5 million ounces of gold will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2030. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

Kloof achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in October 2009.

Processing

The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and metallurgical recovery factor during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, for each of the plants at Kloof:

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

  Year
commissioned
   Comminution
phase
   Treatment
phase
  Capacity (1)    Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
   Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
 
                  (tons/month)    (tons/month)       

No. 1 Plant

  1968    Traditional crushing
and milling
   CIP treatment (3)   180,000    86,473    98

No. 2 Plant

  1990    SAG milling    CIP treatment
and
electrowinning
  150,000    143,236    97

 

Notes:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

 

(3) After CIP treatment, electrowinning occurs at No. 2 Plant.

In fiscal 2009, the Kloof plants collectively extracted approximately 97.3% of gold contained in ore delivered for processing. Gold Fields is currently undertaking a review of the infrastructure at No. 1 Plant to

 

68


Table of Contents

determine whether to refurbish and upgrade the plant or instead to expand the plant at South Deep (which is adjacent to Kloof) to allow it to treat ore from Kloof. A decision on which option is preferred is currently expected to be made during the third quarter of fiscal 2010.

Capital Expenditures

Gold Fields spent approximately $106 million on capital expenditures at the Kloof operation in fiscal 2009, primarily on development at Shaft No. 4, the social labor plan housing project, emergency power generators, the upgrading of high-density accommodation, which is a socio-economic development program to upgrade hostels, maintenance on Shaft No. 1 and ore reserve development. Gold Fields expects to spend approximately $142 million on capital expenditures in fiscal 2010, primarily on the 69 Line Decline Project (a depth extension to Shaft No. 7), further upgrading of high-density accommodation, a refrigeration plant at Shaft No. 3, a pump system at Shaft No. 4, refurbishment of Shaft No. 2 sub-vertical steelwork and ore reserve development.

Beatrix Operation

Introduction

The Beatrix operation is located in the Free State Province of South Africa, some 240 kilometers southwest of Johannesburg, near Welkom and Virginia, and comprises the Beatrix mine. The Beatrix operation was formerly known as the Free State operation.

Beatrix operates under mining rights covering a total area of approximately 16,800 hectares. Beatrix is an underground only operation. Beatrix has four shaft systems, with two ventilation shafts to provide additional up-cast and down-cast ventilation capacity and is serviced by two metallurgical plants. It is a shallow to intermediate-depth mining operation, at depths between 700 meters and 2,200 meters below surface. The Beatrix mine has access to the national electricity grid and water, road and rail infrastructure and is located near regional urban centers where it can routinely obtain needed supplies. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, Beatrix produced 0.391 million ounces of gold. As of June 30, 2009, Beatrix had approximately 11,700 employees, including approximately 1,400 employed by outside contractors.

History

Beatrix’s present scope of operations is the result of the consolidation with effect from July 1, 1999 of two adjacent mines: Beatrix and Oryx. Gold mining commenced at Beatrix in 1985 and at Oryx in 1991.

Geology

The Beatrix mine exploits the Beatrix Reef, or BXR, at Shaft Nos. 1, 2 and 3, and the Kalkoenkrans Reef, or KKR, at Shaft No. 4 (the former Oryx mine). The reefs are developed on the Aandenk erosional surface and dip to the north and northeast at between four degrees and nine degrees.

In general, the BXR occurs at depths of between 570 meters and 1,380 meters and the KKR occurs at depths of between 1,800 meters and 2,200 meters. Both the BXR and KKR reefs are markedly channelized and consist of multi-cycle, upward fining conglomerate beds with sharp erosive basal contacts. A general east-west trending pay-zone, some 500 to 800 meters wide, has been identified east of Shaft No. 4 and is known as the main channel Zone 2. In addition, surface exploratory drilling, and underground development has confirmed the reserves to the south of Beatrix’s Shaft No. 4 main channel in Zone 5, which now represents the majority of the reserves at the operation. Ongoing development and underground exploration drilling has continued over the past fiscal year so that all facies and structures have been updated and layouts and planning adapted. All new information is used as part of customary mine planning practices.

 

69


Table of Contents

Mining

Beatrix is managed as three operational sections: the North Section (comprising Shaft No. 3), the South Section (comprising Shaft No. 2 and Shaft No. 1) and the West Section (comprising Shaft No. 4). No shafts were closed or opened in fiscal 2009.

Mining at Beatrix is based upon a scattered mining method with the North Section being the primary source of production. Focus on increasing development volumes at all shafts to provide future mining flexibility and ore body definition remains essential at Beatrix. However, cessation of activities on some levels, as well as delays associated with water intersections and secondary support upgrading, resulted in a 24% decrease in development volumes at Beatrix in fiscal 2009, as compared to fiscal 2008. The emphasis on development volumes is planned to continue in fiscal 2010. Overall stoping volumes at Beatrix decreased by approximately 10% between fiscal 2008 and 2009.

At the North Section in fiscal 2009, activity focused upon continued haulage development and building up stoping production to full production at the shaft. In general, development and stoping volumes were in line with expectations but were lower year on year due to hoisting constraints and revisions to the mine plan. The purpose of revising the 2009 plan was to allocate time to upgrade the rock hoist at Beatrix Shaft No. 3 in order to minimize the hoisting constraint. The overall mining grade at the North Section remained constant year on year and gold output was affected by the lower mine call factor and volumes. The power source being used for a variety of activities including drilling is primarily hydropower, as opposed to compressed air, with a majority of the mining equipment being run off a high-pressure water system. The benefits of the system include improved cooling underground, improved machine efficiency, lower noise levels and less electrical power usage

The South Section was repositioned during the latter half of fiscal 2009 to deliver reduced volumes at an improved grade during fiscal 2010. This, coupled with a stope width reduction and efforts to improve the mine call factor, is intended to improve the economics and earnings at the South Section during fiscal 2010.

The performance at Shaft No. 4 remained flat in fiscal 2009 primarily as a result of higher stoping volumes, at similar grades, offset by a lower mine call factor. Tramming discipline has been addressed during the second half of fiscal 2009, resulting in improved separation of ore and waste and therefore improved grades during the same period. Shaft No. 4 was impacted in fiscal 2009 by numerous middle and senior management changes. The KKR, which was historically characterized as being a highly erratic reef structure, is tending to exhibit greater reef consistency in Zone 5.

The overall MCF remained a major technical and operational challenge for fiscal 2009. Renewed efforts during the year coupled with training and in-stope behavior changes, such as revised drilling patterns and explosives usage and focus on conventional sweepings were undertaken to reduce the loss of free gold content within the various Beatrix reefs. Implementation of the recommendations of an external review of mining quality remains ongoing. The program initiated to clean up accumulated broken rock and mud in the mine resulted in a positive change in the MCF trend and metrics during the latter half of fiscal 2009.

In fiscal 2009, ongoing improvements were made to rail tracks and ventilation conditions, to increase the logistics capacity and support future mining volumes, and they are expected to continue in fiscal 2010. Lower-grade and marginal mining activities continued to be curtailed at Beatrix in fiscal 2009, despite the increasing gold price, as the mine plans to maintain operating margins.

Beatrix requires cooling infrastructure to maintain comfortable conditions for workers at depth. The Beatrix West Section has a refrigeration plant installed on its surface, which provides chilled water to bulk air coolers on surface and mid-shaft to the West Section’s primary sub-vertical shaft, Shaft No. 4. Presently, this cooling system at Shaft No. 4 extends into Zone 5, where Gold Fields installed two bulk air coolers during fiscal 2007. Additional air coolers were installed during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009.

 

70


Table of Contents

Based on the higher gold price received and in anticipation of improving gold prices in the longer term, a number of incremental expansion opportunities are being examined at Beatrix. Initial development work on the Vlakpan project area commenced in fiscal 2008 which involves an extension of Beatrix on lower levels with access via the infrastructure of Shaft No. 1 and Shaft No. 3. This work continued in fiscal 2009. Additionally, a down dip extension project to access ground below the bottom level of Shaft No. 3 is planned and development of this area is expected to commence in fiscal 2011, with stoping commencing in fiscal 2014.

An extensive delineation drilling program has been approved for fiscal 2010. Drilling began in July 2009 of five surface holes at the Vlakpan area of the BXR. Surface hole drilling is expected to continue for 18 months. It is also expected that six long incline boreholes (LIB) will be drilled to explore the northern extent of the VS5, a thicker portion of the BXR, and structure north of a Tear fault. Nine reef intersections are planned in the North Block with LIB drilling having started in July 2009. Four other reef intersections are also planned to explore the potential of extensions to other zones.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Beatrix for the past three fiscal years.

 

     Year ended June 30,
     2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   3,590    3,215    2,991

Recovered grade (g/t)

   4.7    4.2    4.1

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

   543    438    391

Results of operations ($million)

        

Revenues

   344.9    359.7    339.1

Total production costs (1)

   247.5    269.4    267.7

Total cash costs (2)

   205.6    228.0    217.7

Cash profit (3)

   139.3    131.7    121.4

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   455    615    684

Total cash costs

   378    520    557

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

   552    724    757

 

Notes:

 

(1) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(3) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(4) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

The decrease in tonnage milled from fiscal 2008 to fiscal 2009 was primarily due to hoisting constraints and repositioning of the mine going forward. Gold production was lower in fiscal 2009 and the overall recovered grade in fiscal 2009 decreased due to an increase in stoping width and lower mining grade.

No surface tonnage was processed during the year. Beatrix intends to review its low-grade dumps under the dynamics of variable gold prices during fiscal 2010 by milling and treating screened waste for ten days during the Christmas break.

 

71


Table of Contents

The increase in total cash costs per ounce of gold and total production costs per ounce of gold from fiscal 2008 to fiscal 2009 resulted primarily from the reduced gold produced and the increases in the prices of material, labor and electricity costs.

The Beatrix mine is engaged in underground mining, and thus is subject to all of the underground mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors.” The primary safety risks at Beatrix are falls of ground, tramming accidents, winches, ventilation control and flammable gas explosions. Beatrix does experience seismic events and, while the seismic risk is much lower at Beatrix than it is at Kloof or Driefontein, the operation manages these events with a seismic network consisting of several geophones.

As discussed in regards to Driefontein, the Beatrix operations experienced a total suspension of production during the third quarter of fiscal 2008 due to power constraints. Power has been restored to 90% of the historical average consumption profile and Gold Fields believes that Beatrix can be fully functional at current levels of electricity supply owing to the shallower depth at which Beatrix operates. Current mine planning and project implementation have taken these power constraints into account and are aligned with power availability. See “Risk Factors—Some of Gold Fields’ power suppliers have forced it to halt or curtail activities at its mines, due to severe power disruptions. Power stoppages, fluctuations and power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations and its financial condition” and “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Driefontein Operation—Mining”.

The principal risks at Beatrix include falls of ground, tramming accidents and methane. In April 2008, Beatrix embarked on a focused awareness campaign called “Khuseleka” (be protected) regarding falls of ground and tramming accidents. This campaign involves a one-day team concept training session, covering theoretical and practical issues. Health and safety audits of working places are used to measure behavior when crews return to work. Methane hazard awareness training remains an area of focus and is ongoing. During fiscal 2007, Beatrix was audited against the requirements of OHSAS 18001 and it received accreditation in the first quarter of fiscal 2008. Two surveillance audits were carried out during fiscal 2008 and one audit in fiscal 2009.

The mine has an ongoing methane management system which includes the declaration by competent ventilation staff of certain locations as hazardous, methane emission rate monitoring, ongoing awareness campaigns as well as the deployment of gas, velocity and fan sensors connected to an electronic telemetry system to act as early warning. These sensors are connected to the mine’s electronic telemetry system. Furthermore, all critical fans are connected to the telemetry system and, in certain instances, equipped with localized alarms. These safety systems are monitored on a 24-hour basis from a central control room from which action is taken in the event of alarm.

Although there were four fatalities at Beatrix in fiscal 2009, Beatrix experienced no shaft closures for any length of time in fiscal 2009 due to accidents. Of the four fatalities in fiscal 2009, one was due to falling down an ore-pass, one was as a result of a gravity fall incident and two were tramming-related incidents. To date in fiscal 2010, there have been no fatalities at Beatrix. The serious injury frequency rate (See “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was 3.81, 2.89 and 4.02 serious injuries for every million hours worked, respectively. In fiscal 2009, the fatal injury frequency rate was 0.13 fatalities for every million hours worked, while it was 0.29 in fiscal 2008. In October 2007, former President Thabo Mbeki ordered the DMR to conduct an occupational health and safety audit at all mines, including Gold Fields’ mines. The audit of legal compliance has been completed and the audit results have been received. Beatrix has implemented action plans to address any issues raised. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Health and Safety”.

Production was affected by local and national strikes in fiscal 2009. On July 16, 2008 there was a one-day regional work stoppage in the Free State province in support of COSATU’s protest on the electricity crisis in South Africa followed by another one-day COSATU national stay-away on August 6, 2008 for the same reason. A further work stoppage occurred at Shaft No. 4 on July 1 and 2, 2008 when the South African Police Services arrested a number of employees for criminal activities. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—South Africa.”

 

72


Table of Contents

The total shaft hoisting capacities of Beatrix are detailed below.

 

Shaft System

   Hoisting capacity
     (tons/month)

No. 1

   170,000

No. 2

   170,000

No. 3

   170,000

No. 4

   180,000

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at Beatrix and that there are no changes to the current mine plan, Beatrix’s June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 6.5 million ounces of gold will be sufficient to maintain production through to approximately fiscal 2022. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

Beatrix achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in July 2009.

Processing

The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and metallurgical recovery factor during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, for each of the plants at Beatrix.

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

  Year
commissioned
  Comminution
phase
  Treatment
phase
  Capacity (1)   Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
  Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
 
                (tons/month)   (tons/month)      

No. 1 Plant

  1983   SAG milling   CIP treatment   260,000   197,800   95

No. 2 Plant

  1992   SAG milling   CIP treatment   150,000   51,500   96

 

Notes:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

In fiscal 2009, the Beatrix plants collectively extracted approximately 95.5% of gold contained in ore delivered for processing. In fiscal 2004, Gold Fields installed a Knelson concentrator at the No. 1 Plant which removes gold earlier in the metallurgical process. A gravity concentrating circuit, which was commissioned in November 2006, was installed at No. 2 Plant in order to reduce locked-up gold in the mills and to improve the overall recovery. These improvements to capacity are expected to remain effective going forward.

None of the metallurgical plants or facilities was upgraded or temporarily or permanently closed in fiscal 2009, and normal routine maintenance and repairs were carried out as part of regular asset management. No major expansion or upgrades are currently planned.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $70 million on capital expenditures at the Beatrix operation in fiscal 2009, primarily on ore reserve development, upgrade to rail infrastructure from high-volume stoping areas, continuing

 

73


Table of Contents

infrastructure development at Shaft No. 3, improvements at both No. 1 and No. 2 Plants in order to achieve compliance with the International Cyanide Management Code, hydropower equipment, the conversion of employee hostel accommodations from higher to lower density. Gold Fields expects to spend approximately $69 million on capital expenditures at Beatrix in fiscal 2010, primarily on ore reserve development, upgrades to rail infrastructure, continuing the hostel accommodation alterations, mechanization of horizontal development and the continuing infrastructure development at Shaft No. 3.

South Deep Operation

Introduction

Gold Fields acquired control of South Deep on December 1, 2006. South Deep is situated adjacent to Kloof, in the Gauteng Province of South Africa. South Deep is a capital project and remains a developing mine where currently most of the permanent infrastructure to support expanded production is under construction. South Deep operates under old order mining rights covering a total area of approximately 3,600 hectares. South Deep has submitted an application to have its mining rights converted to mining rights under the 2002 Minerals Act. It is engaged in underground mining and is comprised of two operating shaft systems, the older South Shaft Complex and the newer Twin Shaft complex, and one metallurgical plant. The South Shaft Complex includes a main shaft and three sub-vertical (SV) shafts, two of which are operational. SV2 is used to hoist rock with SV3 being used to move personnel and materials. SV1 is on care and maintenance and only the upper half of the shaft is accessible as a shaft sidewall failure damaged the lower portion of the shaft prior to acquisition by Gold Fields. Options for the life of mine plan for the South Shaft area are currently being assessed with the objective of optimizing the mining schedule. The Twin Shaft complex consists of a single-barrel main shaft and an adjacent bratticed ventilation shaft. The South Shaft complex operates at depths between 1,510 meters and 2,650 meters below surface and the Twin Shaft complex operates between the surface and 2,995 meters below surface. The South Deep operation has access to the national electricity grid, water, and road infrastructure and is located near regional urban centers where it can routinely obtain needed supplies. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, South Deep produced 0.175 million ounces of gold. As of June 30, 2009, South Deep had approximately 4,700 employees, including approximately 2,300 employed by outside contractors.

History

The current South Deep operations derive from the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture, which Gold Fields acquired in a series of transactions in the second and third quarters of fiscal 2007. The Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture is now named the South Deep Joint Venture.

Geology

Gold mineralization at South Deep is hosted by conglomerates of the Upper Elsburg reefs and the VCR. The Upper Elsburg reefs sub-crop against the VCR in a northeasterly trend, which defines the western limits of the Upper Elsburg reefs. To the east of the sub-crop, the Upper Elsburg reefs are preserved in an easterly diverging sedimentary wedge attaining a total thickness of approximately 120 meters, which is subdivided into the lower “Individuals” and the overlying “Massives.” To the west of the sub-crop, only the VCR is preserved.

The stratigraphic units at South Deep generally dip southward at around 12 to 15 degrees and the gold-bearing reefs occur at depths of 1,500 meters to 3,500 meters below surface. The gold grade generally decreases within a reef unit, gradually toward the east away from the Upper Elsburg Reef sub-crop, as sedimentary parameters influence the overall tenor of the reefs in the distal environment.

The north-south trending “normal” West Rand and Panvlakte faults, which converge on the western side of the lease, are the most important large-scale faults in the area and form the western limit to gold mineralization for the mine.

 

74


Table of Contents

Mining

Production at South Deep currently is from the Upper Elsburgs (the Massives and the Individuals). The Upper Elsburgs occur to the east of a north-northeast striking subcrop with the overlaying VCR and form part of an easterly divergent clastic wedge. In general terms, the Upper Elsburg succession represents an easterly prograding sedimentary sequence, with the Massives containing higher gold grades and showing more proximal sedimentological attributes in the eastern sector of the mining authorization than the underlying Individuals. South Deep’s workings are at depth and therefore require significant cooling infrastructure.

Mining at South Deep is entirely mechanized. The Upper Elsburgs are mined by a variety of methods including long hole open stoping, drift-and-fill and drift-and-benching. South Deep’s mining method is trackless, mechanized mining. Trackless mining is a modern rock excavation technique which features an array of methods and mobile machines combined so as to form the most efficient excavation system for a given area.

South Deep remains, at present, a developing mine with large sections of its infrastructure, especially at lower levels, incomplete. Horizontal development below the current mining area has now started and is expected to build up to 500 meters per month by the second quarter of fiscal 2010. De-stressing on the Upper Elsburg Individual horizon using mechanized methods commenced during fiscal 2009. Employees with the skills to undertake trackless, mechanized mining, including drill rig operation, load haul dumper operation, dump truck operation and utility vehicle operation, are highly sought after by other trackless miners and the construction sector. Gold Fields made adjustments to remuneration packages in fiscal 2007 to attract and retain qualified staff.

As indicated at the time of acquisition, the planned production build-up at South Deep could not be delivered due to the following significant factors which required the re-planning of the mine in February 2008. The VCR mining encountered the Waterpan Fault earlier than anticipated, leading to the earlier than planned termination of conventional mining in February 2008. In the acquisition plan, the strategy of down-dip mining below the current mining area from the existing trackless mining projects was essential to the planned build-up. However, on a detailed review and considering the lack of structural and geological information, this mining method was put on hold. With the future production volumes of the Elsburg Reef package remaining dependent upon de-stress mining rates, the shift from conventional to mechanized de-stress mining was implemented in fiscal 2009 in order to accelerate the de-stress mining volumes and the opening up of minable reserves. The changes required the mine to be re-planned with the intent to maximize production from the current projects, complete the initial Twin Shaft infrastructure and develop the orebody below the current mining area. The above changes led to the restructuring of the mine and the downsizing of the workforce by approximately 2,000 employees.

Installation of the brattice wall at the Twin Shaft complex ventilation shaft was completed in the first quarter of fiscal 2009 and commissioning of the first surface fan occurred early in the second quarter of fiscal 2009. Further work on deepening the shaft and equipping it for rock hoisting has an estimated completion date of June 2012. Moving forward, management focus will be on developing pumping and rock-handling infrastructure below the current mining area and installation of additional refrigeration units, which are required to allow the expansion of mining at the lower levels.

The new tailing dam required at South Deep for the life of mine production received approval and construction commenced in the first quarter of fiscal 2010 with the first tailings deposit planned for the third quarter of fiscal 2011. The rock winder for the Twin Shafts’ ventilation shaft has been ordered and commission is scheduled for the second half of fiscal 2011.

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields remodeled the reserves above infrastructure serviced by the Twin Shaft complex. Efforts are focused on bringing the mine into full production by the end of calendar 2014 for these reserves. As a result, the conceptual study of potential underground synergies between Kloof and South Deep was put on hold early in fiscal 2009. However, Gold Fields intends to seek to identify other operational synergies

 

75


Table of Contents

between the two operations, which could include the provision of technical and financial services, the utilization of surface infrastructure such as workshops and offices, the procurement of consumables and supply chain management and the potential upsizing of the South Deep metallurgical treatment plant capacity to allow for treatment of Kloof ore.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at South Deep for the seven-month period from December 1, 2006 to June 30, 2007 (the period of Gold Fields ownership of the mine in fiscal 2007) and the fiscal years ended June 30, 2008 and 2009.

 

       Seven months ended
June 30, 2007
   Year ended
June 30, 2008
   Year ended
June 30, 2009

Production (1)

        

Tons (‘000)

   1,104    1,367    1,241

Recovered grade (g/t)

   4.6    5.3    4.4

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

   163    232    175

Results of operations ($ million)

        

Revenues

   107.9    184.6    155.2

Total production costs (2)

   118.6    213.2    157.6

Total cash costs (3)

   98.9    178.2    125.3

Cash profit (4)

   9.0    6.4    29.9

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   714    919    902

Total cash costs

   595    768    717

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

   866    1,253    1,403

 

Notes:

 

(1) For fiscal 2007, production is reported from December 1, 2006, the date on which Gold Fields effectively acquired the mine.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses”.

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

The decrease in tonnage and gold production was due primarily to the ending of the VCR mining operations and the reduction in mechanized mining in the first quarter in order to install support on main railways. Cash costs decreased primarily due to the reduction in the labor force related to the conversion of South Deep to mechanized mining.

South Deep is engaged in underground mining and is thus subject to all of the underground mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors”. The primary safety issues facing South Deep underground operations include seismicity (including seismic induced falls of ground) and aerial support coverage of the hanging wall to prevent falls of ground. A renewed fall of ground prevention campaign, which was started by Gold Fields during the

 

76


Table of Contents

second half of fiscal 2009, has reduced such incidents but a review of safety-related incidents has highlighted the need to focus on slip and fall risks. South Deep is addressing the seismic risks through de-stressing and backfilling which help to alleviate seismic risks. In addition, mechanized mining requires fewer workers and allows them to conduct mining activities at a greater distance from the rock face than conventional mining methods, thereby reducing the exposure of employees to higher risk areas. During fiscal 2009, South Deep implemented a one-pass mesh and bolt ground reinforcement and support regime and a significant ground control upgrade program to further mitigate rock-fall risk.

As discussed in regards to Driefontein, the South Deep operation experienced a total suspension of production during the third quarter of fiscal 2008 due to power constraints. Power has since been restored to 90% of the historical average consumption profile, and Gold Fields believes that South Deep is currently fully functional at this level owing to the shift from more power intensive conventional mining to mechanized mining. See “Risk Factors—Some of Gold Fields’ power suppliers have forced it to halt or curtail activities at its mines, due to severe power disruptions. Power stoppages, fluctuations and power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations and its financial condition” and “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Driefontein Operation—Mining”.

As production builds up, the power needs at South Deep will increase. South Deep has requested an additional allocation of electricity from Eskom. Eskom has indicated that the additional requested capacity will be granted. If a power conservation program is implemented, Gold Fields expects that the power allocations of each of its operations will be tradable. As a result, Gold Fields expects to be able to shift power usage from one mine to another as necessary.

In fiscal 2009, the serious injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) was 2.08 injuries for every million hours worked, as compared to 5.25 injuries for every million hours worked in fiscal 2008, and the fatal injury frequency rate was 0.0 fatalities for every million hours worked. There were no fatalities at the South Deep operation in fiscal 2009. The mine achieved one million fatality-free shifts in March 2009 and there were no safety-related work stoppages imposed by the DMR in fiscal 2009. To date in fiscal 2010, there have been no fatalities. In October 2007, former President Thabo Mbeki ordered the DMR to conduct an occupational health and safety audit at all mines, including Gold Fields’ mines. The audit of legal compliance has been completed and a report of its finding have been released. South Deep has enacted action plans to address any issues identified in the audit. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Health and Safety”.

On July 23, 2008, there was a one-day regional work stoppage in Gauteng province in support of COSATU’s protest against the electricity crisis in South Africa followed by another one-day COSATU national stay-away on August 6, 2008 for the same reason.

The ISO 14001:2004 Environmental Management System implementation was successfully achieved in the first half of fiscal 2009. During fiscal 2010, South Deep was audited against the requirements of OHSAS 18001 and it has been recommended for certification. South Deep achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in December 2008.

 

77


Table of Contents

The total shaft hoisting capacities of South Deep are detailed below.

 

Shaft System

   Hoisting capacity
     (tons/month)

Twins Main

   175,000

Twins Main Ventilation Shaft (1)

   195,000

SV2 (2)

   60,000

South Shaft (3)

   60,000

 

Notes:

 

(1) The Twins Main ventilation shaft is under construction and is planned to have a hoisting capacity of 195,000 tons/month once commissioned.

 

(2) This shaft does not hoist material to the surface. It has a capacity of 60,000 tons per month for sub-surface hoisting.

 

(3) The South Shaft complex was refurbished in fiscal 2009 for hoisting operations to recommence in fiscal 2010. 60,000 tons per month is planned to be hoisted in fiscal 2010 at South Shaft as the Twin Shaft builds to full capacity. Ongoing refurbishment and infrastructure upgrades at South Shaft are planned to continue over the next several years.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not materially increase or decrease reserves estimates at South Deep and that there are no significant changes to the life of mine plan, South Deep’s June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 29.5 million ounces will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2050. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine. A portion of Gold Fields’ deeper proven and probable reserves at South Deep are based on the pre-acquisition figures as declared for December 2005 by the IRP for the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture between BGSA (formerly, Placer Dome South Africa Proprietary Limited) and Western Areas. However, a significant portion of the June 30, 2009 South Deep reserves now take into account new estimation and mine design work on the Upper Elsburg Reefs completed during fiscal 2009 in accordance with Gold Fields’ standards and procedures. 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to the Current Mine, Phase 1 north of the Wrench Fault and Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure). 50% of the total reserve ounces relate to Phase 2, being the South Shaft/Old Mine and the VCR. The 50% relating to the Current Mine, Phase 1 north of the Wrench Fault and Phase 1 south of the Wrench Fault (above infrastructure) have been remodeled and designed. Due to no further information being available at this stage, the remaining reserves continue to be based on the pre-acquisition figures, declared by the IRP, as described above.

Gold Fields is presently undertaking a surface drilling exploration program that Gold Fields expects will provide additional technical information on the geological structure, sedimentology, facies characteristics and tenor of the Ventersdorp Contact Reef, or the VCR, and Upper Elsburg Reefs in the area below current infrastructure to the southern boundary of the mining area, or Phase 2. When the surface drilling exploration program is completed, Gold Fields expects the additional information will provide for enhanced resource modeling of the Phase 2 ground and will increase confidence levels with regard to in situ facies geometry, reef grades and tonnages. See also “Risk Factors—Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields included in this annual report.”

 

78


Table of Contents

Processing

All processing at South Deep is provided by a single plant. The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during fiscal 2009 for the plant.

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
   Comminution
phase
   Treatment phase    Capacity (1)    Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
    Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
 
                    (tons/month)    (tons/month)        

Twin Shaft Plant

   2002    Primary SAG
and
Secondary
Ball milling
   Leach, CIP
treatment with
elution and
electrowinning
   220,000    103,000 (2)     96.7

 

Note:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(2) Excludes Kloof low grade surface material.

During fiscal 2009, the South Deep Plant treated an average of 0.103 million tons per month made up of underground and surface material. During fiscal 2009, the plant treated an average of approximately 47,000 tons of Kloof low-grade surface material per month. Gold Fields originally planned to increase plant capacity from 220,000 tons/month to 330,000 tons/month. However, the Company is now exploring options to increase capacity further. An additional exercise to review the viability of the South Deep plant treating a further 100,000 tons per month from Kloof and being expanded to include a floatation circuit, should the uranium project being considered go ahead, is scheduled to be completed during the first half of fiscal 2010 and the work is well advanced. See “—Exploration—Project 5M”. Regardless of the ultimate capacity chosen, South Deep is required to order the new mill by March 2010 for the final plant capacity.

During fiscal 2009, 15.0% by mass of the annual tons milled was returned underground as backfill with the remainder sent to the residue disposal facility. The current backfill plant has the capacity to recover 42% by mass of the tons milled as backfill product though produced in batches. South Deep is exploring the possibility of converting its backfill to continuous production (not batched) in the short-term and full plant tailings in the medium-term. The current residue disposal facilities have a capacity of only 132,000 tons per month. The design for a new residue disposal facility for South Deep has been completed and approved by the Board. Construction commenced in the first quarter of fiscal 2010. It is expected to take up to two years to complete the construction program to a point where deposits of residue on the dam can begin.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $113 million on capital expenditures at the South Deep operation in fiscal 2009, primarily on developing the orebody, establishing ore handling infrastructure, ventilation infrastructure and shaft infrastructure. Gold Fields expects to spend approximately $193 million on capital expenditures at South Deep in fiscal 2010, primarily on continuing the infrastructure development.

Ghana Operations

The Ghana operations are comprised of the Tarkwa and Damang mines.

 

79


Table of Contents

Tarkwa Mine

Introduction

Gold Fields Ghana, which holds the interest in the Tarkwa mine, is owned 71.1% by Gold Fields, 18.9% by IAMGold and 10.0% by the government of Ghana.

The Tarkwa mine is located in southwestern Ghana, about 300 kilometers by road west of Accra. The Tarkwa mine consists of several open pit operations on the original Tarkwa property and the adjacent southern portion of the property, which was formerly referred to as the Teberebie property and was acquired by Gold Fields in August 2000, together with a heap leach facility, referred to as the North Plant Heap Leach Facility. A new SAG mill and CIL plant commenced continuous operations at the Tarkwa property in November 2004. In December 2008, the expanded CIL plant was commissioned and the stacking of new ore at the South Plant Heap Leach Facility was terminated, although gold harvesting for the existing heaps will continue while it is economically viable. The expansion of the CIL Plant to incorporate a ball mill in close circuit with the SAG mill doubled the capacity of the CIL Plant to 12.3 million tons treated annually. The total treatment capacity including both the North Plant and the CIL Plant is estimated to be 23 million tons per annum.

The Tarkwa mine operates under mining leases with a total area of approximately 20,800 hectares. It currently conducts only surface operations, although it previously had a small underground mining operation which it operated through July 1999 under Gold Fields’ agreement with the government of Ghana. The Tarkwa mine has access to the national electricity grid, water, road and railroad infrastructure. Most supplies are trucked in from either the nearest seaport, which is approximately 140 kilometers away by road in Takoradi, or from Tema near Accra, which is approximately 300 kilometers away by road. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, Tarkwa produced 0.612 million ounces of gold, of which 0.435 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in Gold Fields Ghana. As of June 30, 2009, Tarkwa had approximately 3,900 employees, including approximately 2,000 employed by outside contractors.

History

Investment in large-scale mining in the Tarkwa area commenced in the last quarter of the nineteenth century. In 1993, Gold Fields of South Africa, or GFSA, took over an area previously operated by the State Gold Mining Corporation, or SGMC. SGMC had, in turn, acquired the property from private companies owned by European investors. Following initial drilling, feasibility studies and project development (which included the removal of overburden and the resettlement of approximately 22,000 people), mining operations commenced in 1997.

Geology

Gold mineralization at Tarkwa is hosted by Proterozoic Tarkwaian metasediments, which overlie but do not conform to a Birimian greenstone belt sequence. Gold mineralization is concentrated in conglomerate reefs and has some similarities to deposits in the Witwatersrand Basin in South Africa. The deposit comprises a succession of stacked, tabular paleoplacer units consisting of quartz pebble conglomerates. Approximately 10 such separate economic units occur in the concession area within a sedimentary package ranging from 40 meters to 110 meters in thickness. Low-grade to barren quartzite units are interlayered between the separate reef units.

Mining

The existing surface operation currently exploits narrow auriferous conglomerates from four pits, namely Pepe, Akontansi, Teberebie and Kottraverchy. A fifth pit, West Hill, was fully depleted in February 2007. Two additional pits, Atuabo and Mantraim, which have previously been mined by Gold Fields, are temporarily inactive, but both are planned to be reactivated within the next few years pending the relocation of an electrical sub-station which lies on the edge of the current allowed blast radius and as adjacent active pits are expanded to join them.

 

80


Table of Contents

Tarkwa uses the typical open pit mining methods of drilling, blasting, loading and hauling. The progression of blasting in the open pit occurs in steps of six meters (or in some cases three meters) with the ore loaded into 144-ton dump trucks.

Tarkwa currently presents no unusual challenges beyond those faced at most open pit and heap leaching mining operations, including variations in amenability of ores to leaching. However, harder ores are expected at Tarkwa which could reduce throughput and recoverable grade at the North Heap Leach facility. As yet, throughput has not been affected, but heap leach recoveries declined from 71% in fiscal 2008 to 62% in fiscal 2009 as a result of the increase in competent ore, which is less amenable to heap leaching. The operational challenges during the year consisted of initial delay in the completion of the CIL expansion project, challenges during the commissioning of the expanded plant and maintaining planned availability of an aging mining fleet.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Tarkwa for the past three fiscal years.

 

     Year ended June 30,
       2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   22,639    22,035    21,273

Recovered grade (g/t)

   1.0    0.9    0.9

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

   697    646    612

Results of operations ($million)

        

Revenues

   444.8    531.5    537.2

Total production costs (2)

   302.6    357.0    417.8

Total cash costs (3)

   263.6    317.6    368.1

Cash profit (4)

   181.2    213.9    169.1

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   434    553    682

Total cash costs

   378    492    601

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

   500    753    831

 

Notes:

 

(1) In fiscal 2007, 2008 and 2009, 0.496 million ounces, 0.459 million ounces and 0.435 million ounces of production, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana operations.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

In fiscal 2009, overall ore tonnage decreased by 0.7 million tons compared to fiscal 2008 levels due to challenges during the commissioning of the CIL plant. Stacking of ore on the South Plan Heap Leach Facility

 

81


Table of Contents

heaps ceased in December 2008 but irrigation of the South Heap Leach Facility heaps will continue until all economically viable gold has been recovered. Total waste mined increased as additional equipment was added to ensure that sufficient waste was mined to meet the production profile for the life of mine. Compared to fiscal 2008 levels, gold production at Tarkwa decreased in fiscal 2009 primarily because of lower throughput due to commissioning challenges at the expanded plant. Total cash costs per ounce of gold increased approximately 22% during fiscal 2009, primarily due to lower throughput and associated gold production.

Gold Fields Ghana, among other mining companies in Ghana, was asked by the state electricity supplier, the Volta River Authority, or VRA, in August 2006 to significantly reduce its electricity demand largely because of the low water reservoir level of the VRA’s Akosombo generating facility and concerns about its ability to meet future supply and demand at then present consumption levels. As part of the efforts to stabilize the power supply situation, during fiscal 2008, the four largest mining companies in Ghana, including Gold Fields Ghana, formed a consortium and agreed to jointly fund the construction of an 80MW power plant, known as the Mining Reserve Plant, or MRP, to guarantee electricity supply into the future. The MRP was commissioned in the second quarter of fiscal 2008 and has been put into service to stabilize power during periods of peak demand. A new VRA substation has been installed close to the Tarkwa mine and the mine has been connected to the national network to the north, in addition to the existing southern connection which is expected to result in a more reliable transmission network.

A 60% increase in the electricity tariff became effective on November 1, 2007, followed by a further 80% increase with effect from July 1, 2008. The electricity tariff has since reverted to the tariff in effect on November 1, 2007 with effect from January 1, 2009. During fiscal 2009, Tarkwa registered as a “bulk electricity user” which allows Tarkwa to negotiate power tariffs directly with the VRA.

During fiscal 2009, the VRA ceased providing electricity transmission as part of the power sector restructuring program in Ghana. A new Government-owned transmission company called the Ghana Grid Company Limited, or GRIDCo, was formed to carry out the transmission functions. The VRA is now responsible for the generation of power alongside other power generation companies that are emerging. No required power usage cuts were experienced in fiscal 2009, although frequent power interruptions did occur. This trend increased over the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009, and can be attributed to a combination of localized problems within the old GRIDCo substation at Tarkwa and inflexibility within the transmission network. A new VRA substation has been installed close to the Tarkwa mine and the mine has been connected to the national network to the north in addition to the existing southern connection, which is expected to result in more reliable electricity transmission. Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at Tarkwa and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Tarkwa, Tarkwa’s June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 10.7 million ounces (7.6 million of which were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana operations) will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2022. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

The Tarkwa mine is engaged in open pit mining and is thus subject to all of the risks associated with open pit mining discussed in “Risk Factors.” Although surface mining generally is less dangerous than underground mining, serious and even fatal accidents do still occur. Tarkwa had no fatalities in fiscal 2009 and had three fatalities in fiscal 2008. To date in fiscal 2010, there have been no fatalities at Tarkwa. The serious injury frequency rate for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was 0.3, 0.2 and 0.0 serious injuries for every million hours worked, respectively. The fatal injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2009 was 0.0 fatal injuries for every million hours worked, while for 2008 and 2007 it was 0.2 and 0.0 fatal injuries for every million hours worked, respectively. OHSAS 18001 (2004) certification was maintained during the year. The mine also was recertified under the ISO 14001 (2007) standard during fiscal 2009. There were no material work stoppages during fiscal 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010.

 

82


Table of Contents

Processing

Tarkwa’s ore can be processed using either conventional heap leach techniques with acceptable recoveries or SAG milling with a CIL plant. The operation incorporated two separate heap leach circuits, the North Plant and the South Plant, until December 2008 when the South Plant was closed. The operation also incorporates a SAG mill with a CIL plant which was commissioned in 2004. An expansion of the CIL Plant to incorporate a ball mill was commissioned in December 2008. The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, for each of the plants at Tarkwa.

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

  Year
commissioned
 

Comminution
phase

  

Treatment

phase

  Capacity (1)     Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
    Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
 
                 (tons/month)     (tons/month)        

CIL Plant

  2004   SAG milling (with ball mill) (3)    CIL treatment   350,000/

1,000,000

  

(4)  

  455,000/834,000 (5)     97

North Plant Heap Leach Facility

 

1997

 

Multiple-stage crushing and screening process and agglomeration

  

Heap leach with AD&R treatment

 

810,000

  

 

871,400

  

 

74

% (6)  

South Plant Heap Leach Facility (7)

 

1992

 

Multiple-stage crushing and screening process and agglomeration

  

Heap leach with AD&R treatment and electrowinning

 

530,000

  

 

490,000

  

 

60

% (6)  

 

Notes:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

 

(3) The ball mill was added in December 2008.

 

(4) 350,000 represents the capacity from July 2008 to December 2008. 1,000,000 represents the capacity with the new configuration with ball mill from January 2009 to June 2009.

 

(5) 455,000 represents the average milled from July 2008 to December 2008. 834,000 represents the average milled with the new configuration with ball mill from January 2009 to June 2009.

 

(6) Heap leach recoveries are the result of an extended solution application process with full recovery requiring several leach cycles. Full recovery of all recoverable gold for current ores is only achieved over several years. Thus, recoveries must be considered in terms of recovery as time progresses, or a “progressive” recovery. Over time, Gold Fields expects both plants to achieve progressive recovery factors of about 64% of contained gold, equivalent to full recovery of all recoverable gold during the life of mine.

 

(7) Results are reported until December 22, 2008, the date on which the South Plant Heap Leach Facility was closed.

 

83


Table of Contents

The SAG mill and CIL plant exceeded nameplate capacity during fiscal 2009. The amount of tonnage treated at the heap leach facilities decreased by 2.9 million tons in fiscal 2009 as a result of expansion of the CIL and resulting planned closure of the South Plant. Expansion of the North Plant heap leach pads commenced during the third quarter of fiscal 2007. The CIL plant processed 7.73 million tons in fiscal 2009, as compared to 5.57 million tons in fiscal 2008. The increased throughput is due to the CIL expansion project commissioned in December 2008.

Tarkwa achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in June 2008.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $141 million on capital expenditures at the Tarkwa operation in fiscal 2009 (excluding $60 million spent on capital waste mining, which is expensed), primarily on the CIL plant expansion, further expansion of the north plant heap leach pad and additional mining equipment. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately $66 million for capital expenditures at Tarkwa for fiscal 2010 (excluding $94 million spent on capital waste mining, which is expensed), principally for additional mining equipment and high-pressure grinding rolls to improve heap leach recovery.

Damang Mine

Introduction

Abosso, which owns the interest in the Damang mine, is owned 71.1% by Gold Fields, 18.9% by IAMGold and 10% by the Ghanaian government, mirroring the shareholding structure of Gold Fields Ghana.

The Damang deposits are located in the Wassa West District in southwestern Ghana approximately 330 kilometers by road west of Accra and approximately 30 kilometers by road northeast of the Tarkwa mine. The Damang mine consists of an open pit operation with a SAG mill and CIL processing plant.

Damang operates under a mining lease with a total area of approximately 8,100 hectares. The Damang mine has access to the national electricity grid and water and road infrastructure. Most supplies are trucked in from either the nearest seaport, which is approximately 200 kilometers away by road in Takoradi, or from Accra, which is approximately 360 kilometers away by road. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, the Damang mine produced 0.200 million ounces of gold, of which 0.143 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in Abosso. As of June 30, 2009, Damang had approximately 1,600 employees, including approximately 1,200 employed by outside contractors.

History

Mining on the Abosso concession began with underground mining in the early twentieth century. Surface mining at Damang commenced in August 1997 and Gold Fields assumed control of operations on January 23, 2002. Historically, the underground mine was in operation from 1878 until 1956.

Geology

Damang is located on the Damang Anticline, which is marked by Tarkwaian metasediments on the east and west limbs, around a core of Birimian metasediments and volcanics. Gold in the Tarkwaian metasediment and volcanics is predominantly found in the conglomerates of the Banket Formation and is similar to the Witwatersrand in South Africa; however, at Damang, hydrothermal processes have enriched much of this paleoplacer mineralization. Within the region, the contact between the Birimian and Tarkwaian metasediment and volcanics is commonly marked by zones of intense shearing and is host to a number of significant shear hosted gold deposits including Prestea, Bogoso, and Obuasi.

 

84


Table of Contents

Paleoplacer mineralization occurs on the west limb of the anticline at Abosso, Chida, and Tomento, and on the east limb of the anticline at the Kwesie, Lima South, and Bonsa North locations. Hydrothermal enrichment of the Tarkwaian paleoplacer occurs at the Rex, Amoanda, and Nyame areas on the west limb and the Damang and Bonsa areas on the east limb.

Mining

Damang uses the typical open pit mining methods of drilling, blasting, loading and hauling. The progression of blasting in the open pit occurs in six-meter benches, which are then combined to form steps of three meters with the ore and waste loaded into 100-ton dump trucks. The primary operational challenges include managing the Damang Pit Cut Back, or DPCB, and maintaining adequate and timely supply of appropriate plant feed blend. There were no material stoppages to the mining operations during fiscal 2009.

During fiscal 2009, the DPCB pit remained the high-grade fresh ore feed source to the plant. Of the five Tomento pits, four were fully depleted by the end of fiscal 2008 and the oxide in the fifth pit, the Tomento pit 2, was depleted during fiscal 2009. Currently, the main oxide feed sources to the plant are the Tomento East and Rex pits, which were started during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2008 and the first quarter of fiscal 2009, respectively.

The DPCB waste stripping continued in fiscal 2009. Approval was sought for additional waste stripping expenditure over the life of the pit. The waste stripping expenditure, which is projected to increase compared to the original forecast due to the increase in mining volumes and the increasing contract rates of African Mining Services (Ghana) Pty Ltd, or AMS, the main contractor at Damang, is required for the continued development of the DPCB. In addition, a scoping study supplementary to the pre-feasibility study was completed to evaluate the underground mining potential at Abosso Deeps, an area at the southern end of the Damang lease area near the old Abosso underground mine. The scoping study identified that additional drilling from the surface as well as a study into the feasibility of alternative mining methods were required. A first phase of drilling on Abosso Deeps was completed during fiscal 2009. However, further drilling is required to better define the ore body. That drilling is scheduled for fiscal 2010. Based upon the results of this drilling, Gold Fields will determine whether to undertake a feasibility study.

The development of Damang’s several satellite pits has increased the size of the mine extensively, requiring compensation payments and in some cases the resettlement of affected landowners. The development of Rex Pit in fiscal 2009 and the extension of Tomento East waste dumps resulted in the relocation of 95 landowners. Additional resettlement is required in fiscal 2010 at the Rex and Tomento pit areas due to delays in achieving consensus with the affected landowners. Following Gold Fields’ acquisition of Damang in January 2002, an exploration program was started to seek alternative sources of ore to replace the Damang pit, by testing both hydrothermal and conglomerate styles of mineralization across the Damang lease area. The Rex pit is a new pit located on southern extent of the Damang Mining Lease. The Rex exploration program was conducted in fiscal 2006 and the pit was originally planned to be mined in fiscal 2010. In light of the occurrence of illegal mining activities in the Rex project area, management decided to accelerate the mining of the Rex pit to fiscal 2009. Negotiations between the mine and the illegal miners resulted in the peaceful withdrawal of the illegal miners over several months without incident. Although the illegal miners mined some of the ore body, they vacated the area before the mining plan was seriously affected.

AMS performs a substantial proportion of the mining operations at Damang. In January 2006, AMS was awarded a six-year contract beginning June 25, 2005 to reflect the increased scope of works from mining the DPCB and the Damang satellite pits. In July 2008, the AMS contract was extended by three years. AMS provides employees, supplies and equipment for mining at Damang, which includes drilling, blasting and waste stripping. AMS receives fees under the contract which depend on the type of service being performed and the equipment being used. Under the terms of the contract, AMS is liable for any damage or loss it causes, including that caused by any subcontractor it hires. AMS is not liable for damage that is the result of work performed in accordance

 

85


Table of Contents

with the terms of the contract that is unavoidable or that is caused by any negligent act or omission of employees of Abosso or third parties over whom AMS has no control. AMS is required to take out insurance to cover potential damage and liability. Abosso can terminate its contract at any time; however, there are significant penalties associated with doing this, particularly early on in the life of the contract. In the event of termination, Abosso is under no obligation to purchase any of the AMS equipment, although, should AMS agree, it would have an option to purchase such equipment.

A different contractor, Engineers & Planners Company Limited, performs the ore haulage contract work at Damang, using 30-ton trucks to haul the material from the various satellite pits to the Run of Mine, or RoM, pad, which is the ore stockpile dump close to the crushing plant.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Damang for the past three fiscal years.

 

     Year ended June 30,
       2007    2008    2009

Tons (‘000)

   5,269    4,516    4,991

Recovered grade (g/t)

   1.1    1.3    1.2

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

   188    194    200

Results of operations ($ million)

        

Revenues

   119.5    160.4    175.7

Total production costs (2)

   113.1    131.6    144.0

Total cash costs (3)

   112.2    127.8    134.4

Cash profit (4)

   7.3    32.6    41.3

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   602    678    719

Total cash costs

   597    658    671

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

   624    717    745

 

Notes:

 

(1) In fiscal 2007, 2008 and 2009, 0.134 million ounces, 0.138 million ounces and 0.142 million ounces of production, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in Abosso.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenue less total cash costs.

 

(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

The gold production in fiscal 2009 increased primarily due to processing more high-grade material from DPCB. The grade, however, decreased as a result of more lower-grade oxide material treated from Tomento Pit. Total production and cash costs increased in fiscal 2009 due to mining more expensive tons from the DPCB and higher consumable costs. Mill tonnage throughput increased due to better fragmentation and improved plant availability.

 

86


Table of Contents

Total production and cash costs increased in fiscal 2009 due to increases in mining costs, haulage, fuel, power and consumable costs, together with expenditure incurred on the DPCB.

Damang obtains its electricity indirectly from the VRA, which generates the electricity. The electricity is distributed by Electricity Company of Ghana, or the ECG, which is a distributor for GRIDCo, the electricity transmission utility. A 60% increase in the electricity tariff became effective on November 1, 2007, followed by a further 80% increase with effect from July 1, 2008. The electricity tariff has since reverted to the tariff in effect on November 1, 2007 with effect from January 1, 2009. During fiscal 2009, Damang registered as a “bulk electricity user” which allows Damang to negotiate electricity tariffs directly with the VRA rather than with ECG or GRIDCo. Damang has a back-up power generation facility that is owned and controlled by the mine. This is only used during power outages or reduced supply capacity from the VRA or the ECG. During fiscal 2010, standby power generation units are being rebuilt and upgraded. Power outages from ECG and VRA and poor-quality power from VRA resulted in the need to use back-up generation from time to time.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at Damang and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Damang, Damang’s June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 1.8 million ounces (approximately 1.3 million of which were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana operations) will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2019. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors that can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

The Damang mine comprises open pit mining, and is thus subject to all of the risks associated with open pit mining discussed in “Risk Factors.” Although surface mining generally is less dangerous than underground mining, serious and even fatal accidents do still occasionally occur. The Damang mine has not had a fatal injury since its acquisition by Gold Fields in 2002, including to date in fiscal 2010. The serious injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) at Damang for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was 0.0, 0.0 and 0.0 serious injuries for every million hours worked. The Damang mine has introduced a management system in accordance with OHSAS 18001. The environmental management system at the mine is certified to the ISO 14001 standard. There were no strikes or material work stoppages at Damang in fiscal 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010. Damang achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in May 2008.

Processing

All ore at Damang is processed through a single facility. The following table sets forth the year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and metallurgical recovery factor during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 for the plant.

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
  

Comminution

phase

  

Treatment
phase

   Capacity (1)    Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
   Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
 
                    (tons/month)    (tons/month)       

Main Plant

   1997    Single-stage crushing with
SAG and ball milling
   CIL treatment    383,000    415,892    93

 

Notes:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

 

87


Table of Contents

Optimization of the Damang mill involves careful blending of hard and soft ores to maximize use of the milling circuit, which remains the major throughput constraint in this plant. Mining operations continue to focus on maintaining an appropriate plant feed blend.

A feasibility study for the installation of a secondary crusher was initiated in the latter half of fiscal 2009. This project is intended to increase the hard fresh ore production in the mill feed which has better grades compared with the soft oxide ore.

The walls of the East Tailings Storage Facility were raised during fiscal 2008 to increase the capacity of the facility and the work was completed during the second quarter of fiscal 2009. This provides capacity for the tailings to be generated during the expected life of the mine.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $17 million on capital expenditures at the Damang mine in fiscal 2009, primarily on crusher rehabilitation, exploration drilling, new computer software and development of satellite pits. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately $25 million of capital expenditures at Damang for fiscal 2010, primarily for exploration and installation of a secondary crusher.

Australia Operations

When Gold Fields acquired the St. Ives and Agnew gold mining operations from WMC Resources Limited, or WMC, on November 30, 2001, part of the purchase consideration included Gold Fields agreeing to pay a royalty to WMC. Separate, but similar, royalties were payable for gold produced from the St. Ives and Agnew operations, calculated as follows:

 

   

4% of the net smelter returns for gold produced from St. Ives to the extent that cumulative production of gold from November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces, but subject to the average spot price of gold for the relevant quarter exceeding A$400 per ounce. A similar royalty was payable for gold production at Agnew but only for cumulative production of gold from November 30, 2001 in excess of 0.8 million ounces; and

 

   

a price participation royalty equal to 10% of the difference between revenue calculated at the spot gold price expressed in Australian dollars per ounce and at A$600 per ounce of gold in respect of all gold produced from the St. Ives and Agnew operations each quarter after November 30, 2001, subject to the spot price of gold exceeding A$600 per ounce.

On June 26, 2002, WMC agreed to give up its right to receive royalties from the Agnew operation in exchange for a payment of A$3.6 million. In July 2002, WMC sold its right to royalties from the St. Ives operation to Morgan Stanley. During fiscal 2009, the gold price continued to exceed the A$600 price required to trigger the price participation royalty and, as a result, royalties of A$25.8 million (approximately U.S.$19.1 million) were expensed in fiscal 2009. During June 2008, St. Ives exceeded the threshold of 3.3 million ounces of cumulative production of gold from November 30, 2001, creating the liability to pay the 4% net smelter return royalty on subsequent ounces sold, and, as a result, additional royalties of A$20.5 million (approximately U.S.$15.2 million) were expensed in fiscal 2009.

On August 26, 2009, Gold Fields executed an agreement with Morgan Stanley pursuant to which the royalty payable by St. Ives to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley was terminated for a consideration of A$308 million ($267.1 million). See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Recent Developments—Termination of Royalty Over St. Ives.”

 

88


Table of Contents

St. Ives

Introduction

St. Ives is located 80 kilometers south of Kalgoorlie and 20 kilometers south of Kambalda, straddling Lake Lefroy in Western Australia. It holds exploration licenses, prospecting licenses and mining leases covering a total area of approximately 83,500 hectares. St. Ives is both a surface and underground operation, with a number of open pits, three operating underground mines, a metallurgical CIP plant and a heap leach facility. The St. Ives operation obtains electricity pursuant to a contract with a major mining company that expires in January 2014 and has access to water, rail, air and road infrastructure. Needed supplies are trucked in locally from both Kambalda and Kalgoorlie. In fiscal 2009, St. Ives produced 0.428 million ounces of gold. St. Ives had a workforce of approximately 950 employees as of June 30, 2009, approximately 660 of whom were employed by outside contractors.

Gold production takes place over an extensive area at St. Ives, although it is mainly concentrated in a 55-kilometer corridor extending south-southeast from Kambalda across Lake Lefroy.

History

Gold mining began in the St. Ives area in 1897, with WMC commencing gold mining operations at St. Ives in 1980. Gold Fields acquired the St. Ives gold mining operation from WMC in November 2001.

Geology

The gold deposits of St. Ives are located at the southern end of the Norseman-Wiluna greenstone belt of the West Australian Goldfields Province. In the St. Ives area the belt consists of Kalgoorlie Group volcanic rocks, Black Flag group felsic volcanic rocks and sediments and a variety of intrusive and overlying post-tectonic sediments. The area is structurally complex, with host rocks metamorphosed to upper greenschist and lower amphibolite facies. Gold mineralization discovered to date is best developed in the mafic-dominated parts of the sequence, hosted in minor structures including vein arrays, breccia zones and central, quartz-rich and mylonitic parts of shear zones. Deposit styles and ore controls are varied, but deposits are commonly associated with subsidiary structures which splay off the regionally extensive Boulder-Lefroy Fault.

Mining

St. Ives sources production from a variety of underground and surface operations, has a mill that treats primary ore and a heap leach facility which treats low- and marginal-grade ore. The principal production sources in fiscal 2009 included the Argo, Belleisle and Cave Rocks underground mines together with the Leviathan, Cave Rocks, Agamemnon, Grinder, Pluton and North Revenge open pits. During fiscal 2009, underground production increased significantly as the Cave Rocks and Belleisle underground mines moved from a capital development phase with some production into full production. The primary open pit production sources shifted in fiscal 2009, with the full depletion of the Cave Rocks, Pluton and North Revenge pits, which were replaced by new open pits at Leviathan, Agamemnon and Grinder. As many of the operations at St. Ives involve mining deposits on or under Lake Lefroy (which is a shallow salt pan that has water in it only intermittently), extracting ore requires construction of bunds and other earthworks to prevent water intrusion. Open pit operations use 180- to 250-ton excavators loading 150-ton trucks. Waste dumps are formed adjacent to the pits or, if practicable, waste is dumped in previously exhausted pits.

Argo Complex . Stoping activities at the Argo mine commenced in November 2003. The Argo underground mine operated below capacity during fiscal 2009 due to challenging ground conditions. Performance at Argo in fiscal 2010 is expected to increase with modifications to mining methods to reduce losses through dilution. Based on the June 30, 2009 reserves, Argo has a further four years of production. It is however expected that production will continue beyond this point as existing ore resources are converted and further exploration and development is performed at the Argo mine.

 

89


Table of Contents

Greater Revenge Complex . Mining at the Greater Revenge Area commenced in 1989. The operation utilizes typical open pit and lake sediment mining methods. Further exploration and mine design updates resulted in extensions to the Agamemnon open pit during fiscal 2008. The North Revenge and Pluton pits were depleted early in fiscal 2009, with production from the Agamemnon and Grinder pits starting in fiscal 2009.

Belleisle Underground Mine . The Belleisle deposit lies in the Greater Revenge area adjacent to the depleted Mars open pit. Development of a decline tunnel commenced in the second half of fiscal 2007 to access the Belleisle ore body. Development continued during fiscal 2008 but was delayed due to a number of water in-flow intersections and difficult working conditions. Some ore production occurred during the development phase and a first stope opened in June 2008. The Belleisle mine moved into a full production schedule during the second quarter of fiscal 2009. Production was affected negatively in the second quarter by an accident related to the paste plant which reduced the paste filling capability of the mine. This reduction in paste filling resulted in a stope failure in the fourth quarter and cessation of stoping for the months of May and June 2009. At the end of June, the backlog of paste filling stopes was nearing clearance. Access development to the Belleisle extension recommenced in the fourth quarter by restarting the decline. The Belleisle extension reserve ounces are expected to be included in the 2010 reserve statement.

Cave Rocks . Cave Rocks is located approximately six kilometers to the west of the Kambalda West township and was previously an open pit mine completed in 1985. The mining of a series of three open pits was completed in the first quarter of fiscal 2009. Development of an underground mine via a decline tunnel from the southern pit commenced in September 2007, with a second decline being developed from the northern pit, which commenced in November 2007. Development was based on the ore body mined in the open pits. However, during development, the geometry of the ore body was found to be different than expected in the original interpretation, being a series of lenses instead of a single sheet. This does not significantly change the stoping method but does slightly increase the quantity of development needed on a level to connect the lenses. The underground mine utilizes primarily open stoping methods without backfill to extract ore as originally planned and is currently undergoing an intensive delineation and exploration program. The life of this mine is expected to be approximately four years, with potential for reserve extension. The Cave Rocks mine moved into a full production schedule during the third quarter of fiscal 2009.

Leviathan Open Pit . The Leviathan open pit is based on the expansion of a pre-existing open pit located approximately two kilometers southeast of the Lefroy processing plant. Mining of the cut back commenced in the third quarter of fiscal 2007, with first ore production in the fourth quarter. The mine utilizes conventional truck and shovel mining practices. Mining is planned to occur through areas previously exploited by underground mining methods, requiring special care when passing through these mined areas. Procedures based on industry best practice in the mining district have been implemented to manage the risks associated with these zones. Production continued at Leviathan throughout fiscal 2009 and is expected to continue until 2012 under current economic assumptions.

St. Ives’s exploration program in fiscal 2009 led to an improved understanding of the underlying geological mineralization, enabling consolidation of a number of key project areas going forward. The majority of activities completed during fiscal 2009 were the focused drill out and discovery of the Athena orebody and surrounding Hamlet environment. See “Exploration—Near Mine Exploration.” Continued early-stage exploration and follow-up of prospective targets with first-pass exploratory drilling was also completed in a number of areas. In fiscal 2009, the exploration program included expansion of underground reserves at the Argo and Belleisle Mines, extensional growth at operating pits and further Santa Ana open pit mining areas, and selective targeting in prospective greenfield areas. Santa Ana is another project area with potential mineralization for the extension of the St. Ives life of mine.

The St. Ives production schedule requires that new open pit and underground mining sources are progressively accessed. Underground production in fiscal 2009 was enhanced by the Cave Rocks and Belleisle underground mines moving into full production while the Leviathan, Grinder and Agamemnon open pits replaced depleted pits. The Leviathan and Agamemnon open pits are expected to continue to provide the primary source of open pit ore in fiscal 2010.

 

90


Table of Contents

The Underground Development Improvement Project, or UDIP, was fully implemented in fiscal 2009. The objective of the project was to substantially reduce costs, improve productivities and create a safer and more efficient workplace based on the principles of improved communication and transparency between management and the contractor. This process is intended to continue in fiscal 2010. A similar project, the Open Pit Development Improvement Project, or ODIP, was started at the end of fiscal 2009 for the open pit mines.

All underground mining activities are completed under an agreement with Carlowen Proprietary Ltd, which trades as GBF Underground Mining, or GBF. A five-year agreement with GBF commenced in April 2004, which includes a cost-reimbursable performance-based remuneration model. In fiscal 2009, a term sheet was agreed with GBF for a three-year contract with extension options beyond the three years at the sole discretion of St. Ives. GBF provides all the employees and equipment necessary to complete the underground development and stoping. Under the terms of the agreement, Gold Fields approves all expenditures incurred and guarantees to reimburse 95% of these costs, with the remaining 5% plus any profit earned contingent on GBF achieving certain key performance indicators. Under the terms of the agreement, GBF is liable for claims arising from its performance or non-performance, and any loss, damage, injury or death related to the presence of its employees onsite. GBF is not liable for liabilities or losses that are the result of negligence or a breach of a statutory duty of the mine owner. GBF is required to ensure that it and any subcontractors have adequate insurance.

Leighton Contractors Proprietary Limited, or Leighton, performs the surface mining at St. Ives under an alliance agreement which was extended in January 2004 for a five-year period. In fiscal 2009, a letter of intent was agreed with Leighton that extends the existing contract and contemplates a term sheet and ultimately a new agreement for a three year term with extension options for up to two more years at the sole discretion of St. Ives. As of November 30, 2009, negotiations were ongoing. Leighton provides employees and equipment for mining ore and waste from the open pit mines. Leighton is reimbursed 100% of its approved costs and earns an additional margin payment contingent upon Leighton achieving targets in regards to certain key performance indicators. Under the terms of the agreement, Leighton is liable for claims arising from any loss and/or damage related to the negligence, injury or death of its employees on the sites. Leighton is not liable for claims or loss resulting from the mine owner’s negligence. Leighton is required to ensure that it and any subcontractors have adequate insurance.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at St. Ives for the past three fiscal years.

 

     Year ended June 30,
     2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   6,759    7,233    7,262

Recovered grade (g/t)

   2.2    1.8    1.8

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

   487    418    428

Results of operations ($ million)

        

Revenues

   310.4    342.1    378.6

Total production costs (1)(2)

   286.8    351.4    350.3

Total cash costs (3)

   202.6    276.0    280.2

Cash profit (4)

   107.8    66.1    98.4

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   589    841    818

Total cash costs

   416    661    654

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

   582    915    802

 

Notes:

 

(1) For purposes of allocating production costs between St. Ives and Agnew, the consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets.

 

91


Table of Contents
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

From fiscal 2008 to fiscal 2009, there was an increase in tonnage at St. Ives with a higher tonnage treated at the Lefroy Plant more than offsetting a small decrease in tonnage treated through the heap leach circuit. The reduced tonnage treated through the heap leach was a consequence of the availability of heap leachable ore throughout the year. If the available ore was expected to provide a better return by processing through the Lefroy Plant, then it was stockpiled for treatment by the Plant. Gold production increased from fiscal 2008 to fiscal 2009 primarily due to increased underground ore production. Total cash costs in fiscal 2009 increased as compared to fiscal 2008 due to higher mining costs and higher royalty payments to Morgan Stanley with the commencement of the 4% net smelter return royalty triggered by the volume of production at St. Ives in June 2008 and the impact of the higher Australian dollar gold price on the royalty payment.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at St. Ives and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at St. Ives, St. Ives’ June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 2.3 million ounces will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2014. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

St. Ives is engaged in underground mining and in both open pit and production stockpile surface mining, and is thus subject to all of the underground and surface mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors.” Seismicity is the primary safety risk with mining increasingly occurring at depths below 500 meters. The risk is addressed through the use of backfilling and by mining different parts of the orebody in controlled steps to improve stability, which is called stope sequencing. No fatalities were recorded in 2007, 2008, 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010. The serious injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was 0.0, 0.0 and 0.0 serious injuries per million hours worked, respectively. St. Ives has a health and safety system that conforms to the requirements of OHSAS 18001 and is integrated with its ISO 14001 environmental management system. St. Ives achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in August 2009. There were no strikes or material work stoppages at St. Ives in fiscal 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010.

 

92


Table of Contents

Processing

The table below sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during fiscal 2009, for each of the plants at St. Ives.

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

  Year
commissioned
 

Comminution

phase

 

Treatment

phase

  Capacity (1)   Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
  Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
 
                (tons/month)   (tons/month)      

Lefroy Plant

  2005   Single-stage crushing and SAG milling   CIP   375,000   401,777   91

Heap Leach Facility

 

2000

 

Multiple-stage crushing and screening process

 

Carbon absorption

 

167,000

 

203,380

 

56

% (3)  

 

Notes:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

 

(3) Heap leach recoveries are the result of an extended solution application process with full recovery requiring several leach cycles. Full recovery of all recoverable gold (about 60% of the contained gold) for current ores is only achieved over several years. Thus, recoveries must be considered in terms of recovery as time progresses, or a “progressive” recovery. Over time, Gold Fields expects the plant to achieve progressive recovery factors of about 60% of contained gold, equivalent to full recovery of all recoverable gold.

The Lefroy Plant was fully commissioned in February 2005 and is located on the south shore of Lake Lefroy, approximately 12 kilometers south of the township of Kambalda. The plant consistently achieved in excess of nameplate capacity throughout fiscal 2009 and optimization continued throughout the year to realize incremental improvements in throughput, costs and recovery.

The Heap Leach Facility treats low- and marginal-grade ore from St. Ives. During fiscal 2009, a number of improvements were made on the heap leach circuit, including a spent ore rehandling strategy being established instead of building pad extensions for future stacking.

The Lake Disturbance Permit required to operate on Lake Lefroy expires in 2011. The mine has started the reapproval process and Gold Fields believes that there is ample time to get this permit approved.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $49 million on capital expenditures at St. Ives in fiscal 2009, primarily on the continued development of the underground operations at Argo, Belleisle and Cave Rocks. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately $55 million for capital expenditures at St. Ives for fiscal 2010, which is principally earmarked for the development of the Athena underground mine and continued development at the Argo, Belleisle and Cave Rocks underground mines.

 

93


Table of Contents

Agnew

Introduction

Agnew is located 23 kilometers southwest of Leinster, approximately 375 kilometers north of Kalgoorlie in Western Australia. It holds exploration licenses, prospecting licenses and mining leases covering a total area of approximately 58,000 hectares. Agnew is an underground operation, having completed mining of the most recent open pit in August 2007 and processing of its ore stockpiles by October 2008. All mining is from the Waroonga Underground Complex which comprises multiple ore zones. Agnew has one metallurgical plant. Agnew has access to electricity pursuant to a contract with a neighboring mine operated by a major mining company that expires in January 2014 and has access to road infrastructure. Accommodation for workers at Agnew is provided pursuant to an arrangement with the same neighboring mine. Agnew also has access to sealed roads to the mine gate. Less than 10% of the water requirement comes from local bores. The bulk of the water is supplied from the mining operations and recovered from the in-pit tailings facility. Supplies are generally trucked in from Perth or Kalgoorlie. In fiscal 2009, the operation produced 0.19 million ounces of gold. As of June 30, 2009, Agnew had approximately 340 employees, including approximately 200 who were employed by outside contractors.

History

Gold was discovered at Agnew in 1895 and production was intermittent until Western Mining Corporation, or WMC, acquired the operation in the early 1980s and constructed the current mill in 1986. Since that time, numerous open pits and underground operations have been mined.

Geology

The Agnew deposits are located within the northwest portion of the Norseman-Wiluna greenstone belt of the Western Australian Goldfields. In the Agnew area the greenstone belt consists of an older sequence of ultramafic flows, gabbros, basalts, felsic volcanics and related sedimentary rocks. The rocks are folded about the large, moderately north plunging Lawlers Anticline. The Agnew deposits are located on the western limb of this anticline, and major deposits discovered to date lie on sheared contacts between stratigraphic units. The anticline is cut by north-northeast trending faults such as the Waroonga and East Murchison Unit shear zones.

Mining

The principal production source in fiscal 2009 at Agnew was the Waroonga underground mining complex. Gold Fields expects the principal production source in fiscal 2010 will remain the Waroonga complex.

Waroonga Underground Complex . The Waroonga Underground Complex currently includes underground mining of the Kim South, Rajah and Main Lode orebodies. The mining method involves longhole open stoping with paste filling. Ore development tunnels are developed on 20 to 25 meter vertical spacings, with stoping taking place between these tunnels in blocks of 20 to 40 meters along strike depending on ground conditions. Each stope is mucked clean using tele-remote loaders prior to pastefilling. Access to the orebody is through a decline tunnel which accommodates workers, materials and equipment. Waroonga underground performance increased from less than 55,000 tons per month in the fourth quarter of 2008 to greater than 65,000 tons per month in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009.

Songvang Open Pit . The Songvang open pit, located 16 kilometers south of the Agnew metallurgical plant, commenced production during fiscal 2005. The Songvang open pit was successfully depleted in August 2007 and the mining fleet demobilized. The Songvang high grade stockpile was blended with underground ore until February 2008, after which time the Songvang low grade stockpile was substituted. The Songvang stockpile was depleted in the second quarter of fiscal 2009.

During fiscal 2009, a significant amount of effort was placed in redesigning the Kim and Main Lode declines and level accesses to improve the productivity of the mine, including a second link drive between the

 

94


Table of Contents

orebodies at a depth of 650 meters below surface. This will provide additional flexibility in the mine and is expected to be completed in fiscal 2010. Capital development of the Kim and Main declines has been accelerated to enable detailed ore definition drilling of the ore body prior to ore development and to provide drilling platforms for future reserve conversion.

Underground mining is performed by Byrnecut Mining Services Limited, or Byrnecut. Byrnecut provides employees, consumables and equipment including drilling, blasting and haulage of ore and waste. Byrnecut receives fees under an agreement which depend on the type of service being performed and the equipment being used, with adjustments for performance. Under the terms of the agreement, Byrnecut is liable for claims arising from its performance or non-performance and any loss, damage or injury related to the presence of its employees on the sites. Byrnecut is not liable for claims or loss due to the mine owner’s negligence. Byrnecut is required to ensure that it and any subcontractors have adequate insurance. Byrnecut has operated at Agnew for 18 consecutive years and their current contract expires in May 2010.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Agnew for the past three fiscal years.

 

     Year ended June 30,
     2007    2008    2009

Production

        

Tons (‘000)

   1,323    1,315    1,066

Recovered grade (g/t)

   5.0    4.8    5.6

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

   212    204    192

Results of operations ($ million)

        

Revenues

   136.3    169.0    169.9

Total production costs (1)(2)

   98.2    109.6    94.1

Total cash costs (3)

   84.7    84.4    77.6

Cash profit (4)

   51.6    84.6    92.3

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

        

Total production costs

   462    538    490

Total cash costs

   399    414    404

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

   487    606    564

 

Notes:

 

(1) For purposes of allocating production costs between St. Ives and Agnew, the consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets.

 

(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

In fiscal 2009, 1.1 million tons of ore were processed and 0.19 million ounces of gold were produced. Tons processed were lower than fiscal 2008 and gold production was lower than in fiscal 2008 due to the completion of processing of the Songvang pit stockpiles, with 94% of ounces produced coming from underground compared

 

95


Table of Contents

to 68% in fiscal 2008. Although the total cash costs decreased in U.S. dollar terms due to the weakening Australian dollar, total cash costs increased in Australian dollar terms during fiscal 2009, due to the increased production from underground operations, though the increase was more pronounced on a per ounce basis.

Exploration to extend reserves at Waroonga focused on down-dip extensions to the Kim South and Main Lode resources. Deep drilling to a depth of 1,000 to 1,400 meters below surface is underway at Kim Lode with the objective of increasing reserves below current infrastructure by June 2010.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at Agnew and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Agnew, the June 30, 2009 proven and probable reserves of 0.7 million ounces will be sufficient to maintain production through mid-fiscal 2013. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

Agnew is engaged in underground mining and surface stockpile reclamation and may pursue further open pit opportunities in the future and is thus subject to all of the underground and surface mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors.” The primary safety risk at Agnew is falls of ground at the underground operations, which is addressed through the use of ground support, backfilling of open voids and sequencing of mine operations to improve overall stability of the ground. There were no fatalities at Agnew in fiscal 2007, 2008, 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010. The serious injury frequency rate for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was 0.0, 0.0 and 0.0 serious injuries per million hours worked, respectively.

Agnew deploys a health and safety management system that conforms to the requirements of OHSAS 18001. The mine also has an environmental management system that is certified to the ISO 14001 standard. Agnew achieved substantial compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in June 2009 and expects to achieve full compliance certification by the end of December 2009. There were no strikes or material work stoppages at Agnew in fiscal 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010.

Processing

All processing at Agnew is provided by a single plant. The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tons milled per month and the metallurgical recovery factor during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 for the plant:

 

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
  

Comminution
phase

  

Treatment
phase

   Capacity (1)    Average milled
for the year
ended June 30,
2009
   Approximate
recovery factor
for the year
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
 
                    (tons/month)    (tons/month)       

Main Plant

   1986    2-stage ball milling    CIP treatment    100,000    88,849    93

 

Notes:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity as stated by the manufacturer. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

 

(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

 

96


Table of Contents

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $22 million on capital expenditures at Agnew in fiscal 2009, primarily on further development of the Kim South and Main Lode declines and various capital works projects in the underground mine and processing plant and on exploration. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately $27 million for capital expenditures at Agnew for fiscal 2010, primarily for further development of the Kim South and Main Lode declines and capital works projects in the processing plant and on exploration.

Peru Operation

Gold Fields owns a 92% voting interest (80.7% economic interest) in the Cerro Corona mine through its shareholding in Gold Fields La Cima S.A., or La Cima.

Cerro Corona

Introduction

The Cerro Corona mine became operational by the end of the first quarter of fiscal 2009. It forms part of a porphyry copper-gold deposit situated within the Hualgayoc Mining District in northern Peru. It is located in the highest part of the Western Cordillera of the Andes, in northern Peru, close to the headwaters of the Atlantic continental basin. It lies approximately 80 kilometers by road north of the City of Cajamarca and near the village of Hualgayoc. Cerro Corona holds mining leases covering a total area of approximately 1,600 hectares and the project was developed over an area of 940 hectares. Access to Cerro Corona from Cajamarca is by means of two roads, one from Cajamarca to the Yanacocha Mine (40 kilometers), and then from Yanacocha to the village of Hualgayoc (40 kilometers). Cerro Corona’s electricity is supplied through a long-term contract with a local power supplier and transported through the national power transmission system and a 34 kilometer transmission line constructed by the project. Cerro Corona’s water requirements are provided primarily by retention of rainfall and pit dewatering; water is continuously recycled. In fiscal 2009, the operation produced 105,000 ounces of gold and 24,000 tons of copper for a total of 219,000 gold equivalent ounces, of which 85,000 ounces of gold and 19,700 tons of copper for a total of 177,000 gold equivalent ounces were attributable to Gold Fields. As of June 30, 2009, Cerro Corona had approximately 840 employees involved in operating the mine including approximately 540 contractors. As of the same date, Cerro Corona also had approximately 1,170 employees working on the construction of the tailings dam, or TMF, including approximately 1,160 contractors.

History

In December 2003, Gold Fields, through a subsidiary, signed a definitive agreement to purchase an 80.72% economic and 92% voting interest in the Cerro Corona mine from a Peruvian family-owned company, Sociedad Minera Corona S.A., or SMC. The agreement called for a reorganization whereby the assets of Cerro Corona were transferred to La Cima, in July 2004. Following approval of an environmental impact assessment on December 2, 2005, Gold Fields completed the purchase of the 92% voting interest (80.7% economic interest) in La Cima in January 2006, for a total consideration of $40.5 million. La Cima subsequently acquired all requisite additional permits to construct the mine and construction commenced in May 2006.

Geology

The Cerro Corona gold-copper deposit is hosted by a 600- to 700-meter diameter sub-vertical cylindrical-shaped quartz diorite porphyry stock emplaced into mid-Cretaceous limestone and marls. Within the porphyry, gold-copper mineralization is primarily hosted by extensive zones of stockwork veining. There are at least two phases of diorite placement, only one of which is mineralized. The non-mineralized diorite is generally regarded as the last phase, and is referred to as “barren core.” The latest re-modeling suggests that the Cerro Corona porphyry is probably comprised of four or five satellite stocks with the last two being barren. The intrusive has

 

97


Table of Contents

been emplaced at the intersection of Andean-parallel and Andeannormal ( transandean ) structures. Supergene oxidation and leaching processes at Cerro Corona have led to the development of a weak to moderate copper enrichment blanket, allowing for the subdivision of the deposit, from the surface downward, into an oxide zone, a mixed oxide-sulphide zone, a secondary enriched ( supergene ) sulphide zone and a primary ( hypogene ) sulphide zone.

Mining

The Cerro Corona deposit is mined by conventional, bulk surface mining methods. The Cerro Corona operation involves a single surface mine. This ore is treated in a conventional milling and sulphide flotation concentrator capable of treating 6.2 million tons per annum of ore and producing between 100,000 and 140,000 tons per annum of copper and gold containing concentrate, which is treated mainly at smelters in Japan, Korea and Europe.

Following completion of a definitive cost and schedule estimate in January 2007, the capital construction costs for the Cerro Corona mine were estimated at approximately U.S.$343 million and the treatment of ore was scheduled to commence early in the third quarter of fiscal 2008. However, through the first half of fiscal 2007, progress on the TMF construction and on the later stages of erection of the concentrator lagged behind schedule and cost escalations on various aspects of the project were experienced. On November 15, 2007, La Cima announced a four-month delay and a revised capital forecast for Cerro Corona, amounting to U.S.$421 million, which included an additional contingency of U.S.$20 million, and the scheduled commencement of ore treatment was delayed until the fourth quarter of fiscal 2008. In August 2008, La Cima announced a further revised capital construction forecast for Cerro Corona amounting to U.S.$550 million. The first shipment of concentrate was made in September 2008. There were four primary causes of the increase in construction costs:

 

   

the delay in the completion of the mine which attracted significant additional costs in terms of management and engineering personnel, as well as attendant indirect or support costs such as the maintenance of the remote onsite camp and other services such as transportation and meals;

 

   

an increase in the construction costs for the TMF due to higher unit rates for mining and crushing of construction materials and also due to difficulties in obtaining adequate construction materials onsite;

 

   

poor ground conditions encountered in the construction of the various facility platforms as well as mine and access road construction which has necessitated additional cut and fill activities to ensure the stability of the various structures; and

 

   

continued price escalation of commodity based products, such as steel, electrical cabling and power lines as well as the piping and mechanical and electrical components of the tailing management systems.

 

98


Table of Contents

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Cerro Corona for the 10 month period from September 2008 to June 30, 2009 (the period of operations at the mine in fiscal 2009).

 

     10 months ended
June 30, 2009
 

Production (1)

  

Tons (‘000)

   4,547   

Recovered gold grade (g/t)

   0.7   

Recovered copper grade (%)

   0.78   

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

   105   

Copper produced (‘000 tons)

   24 (2)  

Results of operations ($ million)

  

Revenues

   183.8   

Total production costs (3)

   120.4   

Total cash costs (4)

   80.3   

Cash profit (5)

   103.5   

Cost per ounce of gold ($) (6)

  

Total production costs

   553   

Total cash costs

   369   

Notional cash expenditure per equivalent ounce of gold produced ($) (7)

   908   

 

Notes:

 

(1) For fiscal 2009, production is reported from September 2008.

 

(2) Equates to 114,000 ounces on a gold equivalent basis at a price of $875 per ounce of gold and $4,115 per ton of copper.

 

(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—Costs and Expenses” and “—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(4) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—Costs and Expenses” and “—Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007—Costs and Expenses.”

 

(5) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

 

(6) Calculated on the basis of a total of 217,800 ounces of gold and gold equivalent sold.

 

(7) Calculated on the basis of a total of 219,000 ounces of gold and gold equivalent produced. For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ notional cash expenditure to its production costs for fiscal 2009, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure.”

In fiscal 2009, 4.5 million tons of ore were processed. 105,000 ounces of gold and 24,000 tons of copper were produced.

The single largest contractor employer is Minera San Martin. Minera San Martin carries out all mining activities under the direction of the La Cima mining and geology department. All mine planning, excavation and head grade and engineering specifications to meet the required design performance through the life of mine are directly managed by La Cima personnel. Other contractors provide camp administration and catering, security, safety and laboratory operations. In addition, as of June 30, 2009, there were approximately 1,160 temporary contractors on site working on the second phase of the TMF construction.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserve estimates at Cerro Corona and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Cerro Corona, Cerro Corona’s June 30, 2009 proven and probable

 

99


Table of Contents

reserves of 2.8 million ounces of gold and 988 million pounds of copper (of which, 2.3 million ounces of gold and 797 million pounds of copper were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Peru operation) will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2024. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

The Cerro Corona mine involves open pit mining, and is thus subject to all of the risks associated with open pit mining discussed in “Risk Factors.” Although surface mining generally is less dangerous than underground mining, serious and even fatal accidents do still occasionally occur.

There were no fatalities at Cerro Corona in fiscal 2009 and none to date in fiscal 2010. The serious injury frequency rate at Cerro Corona for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007 was 0.2, 0.4 and 0.1 serious injuries for every million hours worked, respectively. Cerro Corona has implemented a health and safety management system in accordance with the Gold Fields Full Compliance Health and Safety Management System and in accordance with the OHSAS 18001. The environmental management system implementation started in June 2008. Certification to the ISO 14001 (2004) standard is in progress. The final audit took place in October 2009 with a final recommendation that Cerro Corona be granted ISO 14001 certification. The OHSAS 18001 certification process began in July 2009. For its safety and environmental practices, La Cima was awarded two important recognition prizes during fiscal 2009; second prize for national open pit safety by the Peruvian National Institute of Mine Engineers and second prize in the Expomina national contest for environmental practices and projects.

Currently, La Cima’s employees at the mine are not unionized and there were no strikes in fiscal 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010. However, road access to the mine has been blocked on occasion by members of local communities mainly as part of regional or national protests, not targeting Cerro Corona directly. No blockades or demonstrations occurred during fiscal 2009 or to date in fiscal 2010 that have impacted Cerro Corona’s operations.

Over the last few years Peru has seen many cases of conflict and dissention between local communities and mining operations and mining projects, stemming largely from the communities’ desire for greater participation in the economic benefits of these mining projects. Cerro Corona has undertaken extensive community consultation and negotiation since 2003 through the land purchase and permitting process to achieve agreement with local communities on various aspects of community involvement. A comprehensive strategy to work with the communities has been implemented through the construction and operations stages. The main focus of this strategy relies on three pillars which are (i) promoting the development of basic local infrastructure such as roads, telecommunications, electricity, potable water, education and health, (ii) training and employing the local communities, including employing more than 1,000 locals during construction and approximately 500 currently, and developing more than 50 local contractors and (iii) developing economically self-sustaining projects such as a natural pastures and dairy project, a blueberry plantation and pork and guinea pig farms. Gold Fields believes its social strategy has created goodwill with the local communities, with key projects underway such as the paving of the road to Hualgayoc, rural electrification, a potable water plant, and the Kunturwasi highway, among others. The sustainable development projects have been very successful, with more than 300 hectares of natural pastures improved, 150 cows genetically enhanced to improve production of milk and a dairy plant built and currently under commissioning. The blueberry pilot program is expected to deliver the first fruits by November 2009. In recognition of these projects, La Cima was awarded a government grant of U.S.$250,000 to support its funding needs. Through the construction and operations phase, La Cima has carefully delivered on the agreements with local communities.

Gold Fields believes that over time Cerro Corona has generated strong community relationships; however, there have been instances of conflict with the local communities in the past and continuous work is conducted by the Cerro Corona social team to ensure continuity in the relationships. Following three weeks of blocked road access to Cerro Corona in October 2006 by the local communities, no other blockade or significant protest activity has occurred. In particular, Gold Fields’ 50:50 joint venture, Consolidada de Hualgayoc, has been affected and activity at the joint venture has been suspended after violent clashes between local communities and anti-mining campaigners.

 

100


Table of Contents

Processing

The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, for the processing plant at Cerro Corona:

 

Processing Techniques

Plant

  Year
commissioned
  Comminution
phase
  Treatment
phase
  Capacity (1)   Average milled
for the 10 months
ended June 30,
2009
  Approximate
recovery factor
for the 10 months
ended June 30,
2009 (2)
                (tons/month)   (tons/month)    

Processing Plant

  2008   SAG/ball
milling
  Conventional
sulphide flotation
circuit
  517,000   455,000   59% Gold
71% Copper

 

Note:

 

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.

Gold Fields operates a concentrate storage warehouse at the port of Salaverry in Trujillo city, approximately 450 kilometers away from Cerro Corona. Concentrate is shipped from the Salaverry port in bulk carrier vessels. Gold Fields entered into a five-year contract with Transporters Rodrigo Carranza, or TRC, in the third quarter of fiscal 2008 pursuant to which TRC handles the logistics of trucking concentrate from the mine to the warehouse and then transferring it to the ships. Operations at Saláverry are managed under the same safety and environmental standards as those at Cerro Corona. La Cima has contributed to improvement of the environmental practices at the port by implementing the first fully hermetic shiploading equipment in Peru.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately $117 million on capital expenditures at Cerro Corona in fiscal 2009, consisting of approximately $63 million on project expenditure primarily to complete the construction of the processing plant and facilities and $53 million on life of mine capital primarily on ongoing tailings facilities. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately $90 million for capital expenditures at Cerro Corona for fiscal 2010, consisting primarily of further construction on the TMF.

Exploration

Gold Fields holds a diverse portfolio of active gold exploration projects and assets in Africa, Central Asia, the Americas and Australasia. In addition, Gold Fields has in place a number of exploration projects in connection with mineral rights it holds which are adjacent to its active mining operations and advanced exploration projects in South Africa, Ghana, Peru and Australia. Gold Fields’ exploration program is run out of two exploration hubs in Perth, Western Australia; and Denver, Colorado. The company also has offices in Santiago, Chile; Lima, Peru; Vancouver, Canada; Bamako, Mali; Accra, Ghana; and Beijing, China. As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ exploration team included 207 full-time and contract employees, of which 47 are geoscientists, who provide the key exploration capability in the regions of focus around the world.

Gold Fields’ exploration strategy is based on a balanced approach to projects, which provides the ability to consider a project at any stage of development, from the early grassroots stage through to full feasibility study.

The goal of this strategy is to maintain a steady pipeline at various stages of exploration to deliver a new feasibility level project every one or two years.

 

101


Table of Contents

Generally, Gold Fields budgets to spend about $20 per ounce of gold it produces on greenfields exploration (distinct from near mine exploration which refers to exploration around Gold Fields’ mine sites), provided the opportunities offered warrant such expenditure.

Gold Fields focuses its exploration activities on finding opportunities with the correct balance of quality, size and risk. When determining whether it will proceed with a project, Gold Fields weighs a variety of factors, including acquisition costs, expected operating and capital costs of production, as well as the possible technical, commercial, social, environmental and geo-political risks against the likely returns for the project. Other important considerations include the optionality embedded in the project and the projects’ strategic importance in terms of geographic diversification and production profiles. This could result in consideration of additional multi-commodity targets such as copper-gold deposits or gold-silver type deposits.

Outside South Africa, the focus is on growing Gold Fields’ three international regions of West Africa, Australasia and South America with the objective of achieving one million ounces per annum of production from each region. Gold Fields will leverage off its established infrastructure wherever possible to reduce development hurdles and delivery timelines for new opportunities. Near mine exploration projects, which are adjacent to Gold Fields’ existing mining operations, endeavor to capture any possible operating synergies which can be realized, for example, by sharing processing plants and other infrastructure, which has a knock-on effect with regard to minimum project size criteria. For greenfield projects, Gold Fields makes use of its existing operating centers in Ghana, Australia and Peru (through Minera Gold Fields Peru S.A.) to pursue, incubate and facilitate new opportunities within other prospective countries in the respective regions.

In the longer term, Gold Fields is also considering a limited number of opportunities in jurisdictions outside its established regions. The focus is on areas of the world which are historically under-explored or where new technologies and concepts can be applied to improve the likelihood of discovery. Gold Fields has successfully expanded its exploration activities in countries and regions where it has limited experience by means of equity investments in, and strategic alliances with, junior mining partners that are already operating in the relevant region with the requisite operating experience and in some cases have mining permits and approvals. Gold Fields has historically applied this strategy to exploration projects in Mali, China, Philippines, and Kyrgyzstan, amongst others.

Gold Fields divides the different phases of an exploration target’s development into what it refers to as the resource pipeline. An exploration project normally comprises several distinct exploration targets and the resource pipeline provides for the progression of the exploration targets in five stages: (1) target definition, (2) initial drilling, (3) advanced drilling, (4) resource development and (5) feasibility study. To be successful, exploration targets need to be drill tested and moved up to the next exploration phase, or be divested. There is, therefore, a focus on turning over targets as quickly and as effectively as possible by drill testing. Greenfields exploration is generated by reviewing and ranking the most prospective terrains across the world and exploration areas are selected after considering country risk and strategic fit. Each exploration region continuously monitors and reviews projects, targeting projects at all stages of development.

 

102


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ Greenfields Exploration Targets

The table below provides a breakdown of the number of targets in Gold Fields’ three main exploration regions, as well as targets in the rest of the world, for each of the five stages of the resource triangle as of June 30, 2009. The table does not include near mine exploration projects on sites adjacent to Gold Fields’ existing operations in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru.

 

Phase

   Africa    Australasia    South America    Rest of World  

Feasibility Study

   —      —      —      —     

Resource Development

   —      —      —      —     

Advanced Drilling

   1    —      1    2 (1)  

Initial Drilling

   4    14    13    3   

Target Definition

   20    8    14    9   

 

Note:

 

(1) Including the Arctic Platinum Project

Gold Fields spent $46.6 million on greenfield exploration projects not adjacent to its mining operations and $4.3 million on equity investments in exploration related, third-party companies (not including investments in Sino Gold) during fiscal 2009. Gold Fields’ total exploration budget for greenfields projects for fiscal 2010 is approximately $80 million.

Early Stage Projects

At the East Lachlan joint ventures in New South Wales, Australia, Gold Fields signed an additional agreement with Clancy Exploration Ltd. on the Myall property and is now earning into an 80% interest on four separate joint venture projects namely Myall, Wellington North, Gobondery and Cowal East. During the fiscal year, initial drilling of bedrock geochemical and geophysical targets confirmed the presence of large porphyry systems on two of the properties, analogous to the nearby Cadia and Ridgeway porphyry mines. Drilling on several targets returned significant intercepts of strong alteration and anomalous copper-gold-molybdenum mineralization.

In Chile, Gold Fields is earning into a 90% interest in certain claims held by SBX Asesorias e Inversiones and 100% of a claim held by Aguas Heladas. During the year, Gold Fields completed geophysical surveys, bulldozer trenching and a reverse circulation drill program. Positive results were returned from the Pircas target and a follow-up drilling program is planned for the next field season starting in the second quarter of fiscal 2010.

On March 4, 2009, Gold Fields and Cascadero Copper Corp. signed an agreement which allows Gold Fields to earn up to a 75% interest in Cascadero’s Toodoggone copper and gold project in British Columbia, Canada. An airborne magnetics survey was completed in April 2009 and field work commenced in June 2009 and includes ground follow-up geophysics and geologic mapping. Initial drilling started in August 2009.

On March 27, 2009, Gold Fields signed a letter of intent with SBX Asesorias e Inversiones, a private Chilean company, to earn up to a 70% interest in the Ojo de Maricunga project. However, after entering into the letter of intent, Gold Fields and SBX were unable to agree deal terms.

On May 5, 2009, Gold Fields entered into an agreement with Mindoro Resources Ltd. on the Batangas joint venture which allows Gold Fields to earn up to a 75% interest in this large copper and gold porphyry project located in the Philippines. A community relations program and field work commenced at the end of fiscal 2009 and initial drilling began in September 2009.

 

103


Table of Contents

On July 30, 2009, Gold Fields signed a joint venture agreement with Fjordland Exploration Inc. and Cariboo Rose Resources, or the Woodjam Partners, to earn into a 70% interest in a joint venture on a 40,500 hectare property covering several known porphyry copper and gold targets in south-central British Columbia, Canada. Field work consisting of core re-logging, geological mapping and soil sampling has commenced. Geophysical surveys and initial drilling began in August 2009.

Advanced Projects

On December 3, 2008, Gold Fields announced a joint venture agreement with Orsu Metals Corporation for the further exploration and development of the Talas license area in northwestern Kyrgyzstan. The agreement gives Gold Fields the right to earn as much as a 70% interest in Orsu’s Talas license area. Gold Fields assumed operatorship of the Talas Project at the beginning of the third quarter of fiscal 2009 and continued an aggressive drilling program through the winter months to delineate the resource potential at the Taldybulak gold and copper porphyry target as well as testing other promising targets within the license area. Results continue to be encouraging and work is progressing toward the completion of a conceptual study by the end of fiscal 2010. Gold Fields expects to complete its initial earn into a 60% interest in the joint venture in the second quarter of fiscal 2010.

On March 18, 2009, Minera Gold Fields Peru S.A. formally exercised its back-in right with Compania de Minas Buenaventura to earn a 51% interest in the Chucapaca project located in southern Peru. The option was triggered on the back of the Canahuire discovery made by Buenaventura on the Chucapaca tenements where drilling intersected significant gold mineralization with locally important copper grades. Operatorship for the project was transferred to Minera Gold Fields Peru S.A. during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009 and an aggressive drill campaign was commenced to delineate the extent of mineralization of the main deposit as well to test several other prospective targets in the area. Results have confirmed and expanded the potential of the deposit and work is progressing to complete a scoping study on the Canahuire deposit by the end of fiscal 2010.

On March 25, 2009, Gold Fields signed a non-binding Letter of Intent with Glencar, which allowed Gold Fields to earn up to a 65% interest in the Komana project in Mali. As part of the agreement, Gold Fields acquired an equity interest in Glencar and as of June 30 2009 held approximately 9% of Glencar’s issued share capital. Gold Fields and Glencar were unable to negotiate the definitive terms for joint venture and abandoned joint venture discussions. On August 2, 2009, Gold Fields launched a recommended cash offer for Glencar which valued Glencar at approximately U.S.$47.7 million. On September 7, 2009, Gold Fields announced that it had received acceptances of approximately 83.2% of the share capital of Glencar, allowing Gold Fields to take control of the Company. All conditions of the offer were satisfied or waived at that time and therefore the offer was declared unconditional in all respects. Gold Fields took control of the board of Glencar with the appointment of three new directors. Subsequently, Gold Fields completed the final squeeze-out of shareholders on November 9, 2009. Gold Fields now holds 100% of Glencar Mining plc. As a result, Gold Fields now owns 100% of the Komana, Solona and Sankarani (formerly a joint venture with Gold Fields) projects.

Field work including geophysical surveys, diamond drilling and air core drilling commenced on the Komana East and West shear-hosted orogenic gold zones and their extensions in May 2009 but was suspended for the rainy season by the end of June 2009. Field work and drilling was re-started in October 2009. At the Sankarani project (originally operated as a joint venture), initial drilling results over the year have broadly defined extensive mineralized trends with economic gold grades over significant drill widths at the Finguana, Bokoro and Sanioumale licenses. Additional field work and follow up drilling has commenced following the rainy season in October 2009, with the aim of progressing at least one target to the Advanced Drilling stage.

Arctic Platinum Project

The Arctic Platinum Project, or APP, is located approximately 60 kilometers south of the city of Rovaniemi in northern Finland. The APP is assessing two potential surface mineable deposits called Konttijarvi and

 

104


Table of Contents

Ahmavaara, which are referred to as the Suhanko Project. The Konttijarvi and Ahmavaara deposits are found in the Konttijarvi-Suhanko Intrusion, which forms part of the Portimo mafic layered complex situated in northern Finland. Gold Fields completed a feasibility study for the Suhanko Project in the third quarter of fiscal 2005. Based on the results of the study, including a lower than expected mine head grade, prevailing metal market conditions and significant euro currency strengthening, Gold Fields decided to postpone the development of a large-scale surface mining complex and to continue investigations into smaller scale, high-margin projects. Exploration drilling at Konttijarvi and Ahmavaara continued until March 2005.

On March 24, 2006, an Acquisition and Framework Agreement, or Acquisition Agreement, was entered into between North American Palladium Limited, or NAP, Gold Fields Exploration BV, Gold Fields Finland Oy and North American Palladium Finland Oy to form a joint venture to further explore mining properties and develop a mine at the APP. The Acquisition Agreement granted NAP an option to acquire up to a 60% undivided interest in the APP, including the Suhanko, SJ Reef and SK Reef mining properties and claims located south of Rovaniemi, Finland upon satisfaction of certain conditions on or before August 31, 2008. During the option period, NAP was the operator with the responsibility to manage and fund the project.

On September 10, 2008, NAP declined to exercise its right to acquire 60% of the APP and the project has reverted back to Gold Fields. See also “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Arctic Platinum Project.”

For the remainder of fiscal 2009, Gold Fields explored the possibility of applying the Platsol hydrometallurgical process at APP. Preliminary metallurgical testwork returned positive results and further engineering work was conducted to provide initial operating and capital cost estimates to use Platsol on a commercial scale at APP. For fiscal 2010, further analysis will be performed to assess the economic viability of the Platsol process and a decision is expected to be made on pilot plant testing by the year end.

Sino Gold Alliance

In November 2006, Gold Fields’ wholly-owned subsidiary Gold Fields Australasia BVI entered into an alliance, or the Alliance, with Sino Gold Mining Limited, or Sino Gold, for the purposes of exploring and developing geological belts within the People’s Republic of China, or PRC. Gold Fields agreed that it could undertake activities in the PRC only through the Alliance while the Alliance remained in place. In connection with the Alliance, Gold Fields acquired an equity stake in Sino Gold which was increased to 19.9% during fiscal 2008.

On June 3, 2009, Gold Fields agreed to sell its stake in Sino Gold to Eldorado Gold Corporation, or Eldorado, for a total consideration of approximately U.S.$282 million and the sale was completed on July 27, 2009. Gold Fields received a share exchange ratio of 48 Eldorado shares for every 100 Sino Gold shares, which resulted in Gold Fields holding 27,824,654 Eldorado shares or approximately 7% of the outstanding shares of Eldorado on a fully diluted basis. On September 4, 2009, Gold Fields sold its entire shareholding in Eldorado on the market for consideration of CAD 323 million ($299.3 million). In addition, Gold Fields holds a top-up right for a period of 18 months commencing June 3, 2009, which will apply should Eldorado purchase an additional 5% or more of the outstanding shares of Sino Gold and the sellers in that transaction realize a consideration ratio in excess of the share exchange ratio of 0.48 Eldorado shares per Sino Gold share received by Gold Fields. On August 26, 2009, Eldorado and Sino Gold announced that they had agreed that Eldorado would acquire all of the issued and outstanding shares of Sino Gold in exchange for 0.55 Eldorado shares for each share of Sino Gold. Sino Gold shareholders approved the transaction on December 1, 2009. The transaction remains subject to final approval of the Federal Court of Australia. Assuming completion of the offer based on the terms announced by Eldorado and Sino Gold on August 26, 2009, Gold Fields would receive 4,057,762 shares due to its top-up rights.

The Exploration Alliance was dissolved on July 3, 2009. However, Gold Fields and Sino Gold continued to participate in a Stage 2 drilling program at the Jinshu project, which was part of the Alliance. In November 2009, subsequent to the drilling program, both companies decided to dispose of their respective interests and, as a result, no further business is being undertaken.

 

105


Table of Contents

Gold Fields has maintained a limited number of staff in Beijing and is currently developing a new strategy for exploration in China.

Near Mine Exploration

Gold Fields is undertaking a project, which it refers to as Project 5M, or the Uranium Project, focused on exploring the economic potential of processing Gold Fields’ South African tailings dams to recover uranium, gold and sulphur and its underground reserves to recover uranium and sulphur. Drilling of the tailings dams has been completed and models developed that define the gold, uranium and sulphur content of each tailings dam. These models will be reviewed by independent experts and further evaluation is expected to be achieved by the end of fiscal 2010. A bankable feasibility study began in July 2009 to optimize the best option identified during the pre-feasibility study. This option envisages the concurrent re-treatment of all tailings dams and the current horizons from Driefontein, Kloof and South Deep in two processing plants. The bankable feasibility study is expected to cost approximately R119.33 million. The engineering and marketing studies will be completed by March 2010, with the regulatory processes expected to be completed by the end of September 2010.

Near mine exploration at the South Deep mine in South Africa has five surface drill rigs targeting the Upper Elsburg Reefs of the Witwatersrand Basin, contiguous to the mine lease area. To the east, four of these rigs are drilling boreholes to test the potential of the reefs down-dip to the current mine workings in “Uncle Harry’s Area,” at depths ranging from 2,450 meters to 2,760 meters below surface. To the south, the remaining rig is probing the strike extension of the Upper Elsburg subcrop against the VCR at a depth of 3,330 meters below surface. Three of the boreholes have intersected reef, providing 10 intersections through deflection drilling. Early indications suggest the structural and sedimentological parameters are consistent with the current geological models.

At the St. Ives mine in Western Australia, the main focus for the year was delineating reserves and extensional drilling at the Athena target which is located adjacent to the Argo underground mine. The Athena orebody is located approximately 2 kilometers to the east of the Argo Underground mine offices and workshop. The orebody consists of three lodes, South, Central and North, of which the Central lode contains more than 80% of known reserves. The orebody has an ore zone with 500 meters of strike, dipping to the east at 50-60 degrees with a shallow southern plunge. The project commenced in July 2009 with the beginning of the excavation of a box-cut to access hard rock for the decline portal. Drilling at Athena has produced encouraging results and demonstrates both grade and structural continuity in line with expectations. The majority of drilling related to the Athena conceptual study has now been completed and a full feasibility study is scheduled to be completed in early fiscal 2010. Also within the Argo/Athena area, drilling at Hamlet focused on extending the lateral and depth extents of the known mineralization. Drilling will continue testing along the length of these deeper results in the first quarter of fiscal 2010 to assess if the high grade mineralization extends.

At the Agnew mine in Western Australia, drilling for the year focused on the underground extensional drilling and reserve delineation at Waroonga, specifically at Kim South and 450 South Ore Shoots. Unfortunately, there were technical delays in the drilling but these have been overcome and increased drilling performance is expected through fiscal 2010. Surface drilling north and south of Waroonga was also started and these programs are expected to extend through fiscal 2010.

At the Damang mine in Ghana, the emphasis during fiscal 2009 has been on extensional drilling to the south of the main Damang mine and between some of the smaller surface mines. Positive results are being returned from the Nyame and Tamang prospects and suggest that the Damang mineralization may extend for at least 2 kilometers south of the Damang pit cutback. Extensional drilling to the north of the Amoanda surface mine, and between Amoanda and the Rex surface mine, is also starting to show promise. These initial drilling targets are supported by an extensive, lease wide gravity and IP geophysical survey which is scheduled for completion by the third quarter of fiscal 2010.

 

106


Table of Contents

At Cerro Corona in Peru, district exploration continues under a 50:50 joint venture with Compania de Minas Buena ventura. At the Titan-Arabe copper-gold target, access was negotiated through the local communities to gain drilling access. However, after commencing drilling, the joint venture partners decided to suspend activities following violent clashes between the local communities and anti-mining campaigners.

Recent Developments

On August 7, 2009, Gold Fields launched a recommended cash offer for Glencar, which valued Glencar at approximately U.S.$ 47.7 million. On September 7, 2009, Gold Fields announced that it had received acceptances of approximately 83.1% of the share capital of Glencar, allowing Gold Fields to take control of the Company. All conditions of the offer were satisfied or waived at that time and therefore the offer was declared unconditional in all respects. Gold Fields has also taken control of the board of Glencar with the appointment of three new directors. Subsequently, Gold Fields completed the final squeeze-out of shareholders on November 9, 2009. Gold Fields now holds 100% of Glencar Mining plc.

On June 3, 2009, Gold Fields agreed to sell its current 19.9% stake in Sino Gold to Eldorado Gold Corporation, or Eldorado for a total consideration of approximately U.S.$282 million. and the sale was completed on July 27, 2009. Gold Fields received a share exchange ratio of 48 Eldorado shares for every 100 Sino Gold shares, which resulted in Gold Fields holding 27,824,654 Eldorado shares or approximately 7% of the outstanding shares of Eldorado on a fully diluted basis. On September 4, 2009, Gold Fields sold its entire shareholding in Eldorado on the market for consideration of CAD 323 million ($299.3 million). In addition, Gold Fields holds a top-up right for a period of 18 months, which will apply should Eldorado purchase an additional 5% or more of the outstanding shares of Sino Gold and the sellers in that transaction realize a consideration ratio in excess of the share exchange ratio of 0.48 Eldorado shares per Sino Gold share received by Gold Fields. On August 26, 2009, Eldorado and Sino Gold announced that they had agreed that Eldorado would acquire all of the issued and outstanding shares of Sino Gold in exchange for 0.55 Eldorado shares for each share of Sino Gold. Sino Gold shareholders approved the transaction on December 1, 2009. The transaction remains subject to final approval of the Federal Court of Australia. Assuming completion of the offer based on the terms announced by Eldorado and Sino Gold on August 26, 2009, Gold Fields would receive 4,057,762 shares due to its top-up rights.

On August 26, 2009, Gold Fields executed an agreement with Morgan Stanley Bank, or Morgan Stanley, to terminate the royalty, or the Royalty, payable by Gold Fields’ wholly owned Australian subsidiary, St. Ives Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd, to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley for a consideration of A$308 million ($257.1 million). When Gold Fields acquired St. Ives in 2001, the total consideration included the Royalty, which was subsequently acquired by Morgan Stanley. The Royalty comprised two parts: (i) a payment equal to 4% of the net smelter returns for gold produced from St. Ives to the extent that cumulative production of gold from November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces, but subject to the average spot price of gold for the relevant quarter exceeding A$400 per ounce; and (ii) provided that the gold price exceeded A$600/oz, a payment equal to 10% of the difference between revenue calculated at the spot gold price expressed in Australian dollars per ounce and at a price of A$600/oz calculated on all future ounces produced by St. Ives. Both components of the Royalty were payable on all future production from St. Ives (the 3.3 million ounces production threshold having been exceeded in June 2008) and thus represented an uncapped liability. The transaction was financed from cash resources and available facilities and closed on August 26, 2009.

Insurance

Gold Fields holds insurance policies providing coverage for general liability, accidental loss or damage to its property, business interruption in the form of fixed operating costs or standing charges, material damage and other losses, some of which are insured, through a captive insurance company domiciled in Gibraltar. Gold Fields’ insurance program does not insure all potential losses associated with its operations as some insurance premiums might be considered to be economically unacceptable, or the risk considered too remote to insure or insurance cover is not available in the global insurance markets. Should an event occur for which there is no or limited insurance cover, this could affect Gold Fields’ cash flows and profitability.

 

107


Table of Contents

Management believes that the scope and amounts of coverage of its insurance policies are adequate, taking into account the probability and potential severity of each identified risk, and in accordance with customary practice for a gold mining company of its size with multinational operations. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ insurance coverage may prove inadequate to satisfy potential claims.”

Environmental and Regulatory Matters

South Africa

Environmental

Gold Fields’ South African operations are subject to various laws relating to the protection of the environment. South Africa’s Constitution grants the people of South Africa the right to an environment that is not harmful to human health or well-being and to protection of that environment for the benefit of present and future generations through reasonable legislative and other measures. The Constitution and the National Environmental Management Act 107 of 1998, or NEMA, grants legal standing to a wide range of people and interest groups to bring legal proceedings to enforce their environmental rights, which are enforceable against private entities as well as the South African government.

South African environmental legislation commonly requires businesses whose operations may have an impact on the environment to obtain permits and authorizations for those operations. The applicable environmental legislation also imposes general compliance requirements and incorporates the “polluter pays” principle. Under the terms of the 2002 Minerals and Petroleum Resources Development Act, or the 2002 Minerals Act, all prospecting and mining operations are to be conducted according to an environmental management plan/program which must be approved by the DME. Directors will be held liable under provisions of the 2002 Minerals Act and NEMA for any environmental degradation. See “—Mineral Rights.”

South African mining companies are required by law to undertake rehabilitation works as part of their ongoing operations in accordance with an approved environmental management plan/program, which incorporates a mine closure plan. In addition, during the operational life of the mine they must provide for the cost of mine closure and post-closure rehabilitation and monitoring once mining operations cease. Gold Fields funds these environmental rehabilitation costs by making contributions into an environmental trust fund. The trust fund system enables payments to be made in a tax-efficient way, while providing comfort to the regulators that the operator has the means to restore any mine after operations have ceased. As of September 30, 2009, Gold Fields had contributed more than Rand 900 million, including accrued interest, to the fund. Gold Fields has implemented environmental management systems in compliance with ISO 14001 throughout its operations in South Africa, and has received full certification under ISO 14000 for all surface portions of its South African operations including the shafts. South Deep is in the process of implementing an environmental management system that is ISO 14001 compliant, with certification successfully achieved in fiscal 2009.

In addition, Gold Fields became a signatory to the International Cyanide Management Code, or Cyanide Code, on November 3, 2005, along with nine gold companies and five cyanide manufacturers. All of Gold Fields’ operations are committed to complying with the Cyanide Code. The implementation structure of the Cyanide Code allows the operations up to three years from the date of becoming a signatory to have independent, third-party audits conducted to evaluate compliance status. As of October 2009, all of Gold Fields’ eligible operations had obtained accreditation under the Cyanide Code with seven of the eight eligible operations achieving full compliance.

Under the National Water Act, all water in the hydrological cycle is under the custodianship of the State held in trust for the people of South Africa and all water users have been required to re-register their water uses. In addition, the National Water Act governs waste water and waste discharge into water resources. Gold Fields is

 

108


Table of Contents

lawfully removing water from its South African mines. Kloof was issued a water use license in December 2008. Driefontein has been issued a draft license, subject to further comment by Gold Fields and the Department of Water Land Environmental Affairs or DWEA (previously the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry). While the water use license application for South Deep was submitted on time, there has been a delay in processing it. There is some uncertainty regarding the water quality parameters applicable to the removed water and Gold Fields has engaged DWEA to address these issues.

In September 2005, certain sections of the National Environmental Management Air Quality Act, or the Air Quality Act, came into force. In the past, certain air polluting activities were allowed to be carried on provided that the operator registered the activity and was granted permission from the authority with responsibility for air quality in the region. However, the Air Quality Act sets more onerous standards which companies will be required to achieve. It is envisaged that the Air Quality Act will be fully phased in over the next few years. To the extent that more stringent requirements may be introduced regarding dust, Gold Fields is positioning itself operationally.

The National Environmental Management Amendment Act 62 of 2008, or NEMAA, was promulgated on January 9, 2009 and came into effect on May 1, 2009. The Minerals and Petroleum Resources Development Amendment Act 49 of 2008, or MPRDAA, was promulgated on April 21, 2009, although a commencement date has not been proclaimed by the President. Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations, or EIA Regulations, for 2009 have also been published for final comments and, once effective, will replace the existing 2006 EIA Regulations. The effect of the amendments as contained in the NEMAA and the MPRDAA will ultimately mean that NEMA will be responsible for all environmental authorizations for and relating to mining and the Minister of Water and Environmental Affairs will be the relevant authority. There are three relevant periods or phases that will take place before the ultimate position is achieved. Until the MPRDAA comes into effect, as well as during the first 18 month period after such effect, the 2002 Minerals Act is the applicable legislation and the Minister of Mineral Resources is the responsible authority for all environmentally related mining activities. Once the first 18 month period has elapsed, the provisions relating to the environment will be excised from the 2002 Minerals Act and included in NEMA. NEMA will contain all the environmental provisions relating to mining, therefore environmental authorizations will be applied for in terms of NEMA. The Minister of Mineral Resources will remain the responsible authority and appeals may be directed to the Minister of Water and Environmental Affairs. Upon completion of the second 18 month period, that is three years after the commencement of the MPRDAA, NEMA will be the applicable legislation for all environmental provisions relating to mining, however, the Minister of Water and Environmental Affairs will be the responsible authority.

Section 24G of NEMA introduced an amnesty period to allow operations which had not been authorized under the previous Environment Conservation Act EIA regulations to continue. The amnesty period was available from January 7, 2005 to July 6, 2005. Gold Fields submitted three applications for such amnesty (as each identified activity required its own application) and is currently awaiting the decision of the environmental authorities in this regard. The applications related to the authorization of cyanide plants at Beatrix, Kloof and Driefontein. It is likely that the applications will be granted. If the applications are granted, the maximum fine that can be levied is R1 million per application. In the unlikely event that the applications are not granted, the authorities may order that the activities are stopped and that remediation and rehabilitation takes place.

Although South Africa has a comprehensive environmental regulatory framework, enforcement of environmental law has traditionally been poor. The Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism has indicated that enforcement will improve and Environmental Management Inspectors have been appointed under NEMA. The Environmental Management Inspectors have commenced with environmental inspections and investigations at some of the major industrial facilities. The focus to date has been on those industries that impact heavily on air quality, such as platinum mines and the steel industry.

 

109


Table of Contents

Gold Fields undertakes activities which are regulated by the National Nuclear Regulator Act 47 of 1999, or the NNR Act. The NNR Act requires Gold Fields to obtain authorization from the National Nuclear Regulator, or NNR, and undertake activities in accordance with the conditions of such authorizations. The NNR has alleged certain non-compliance issues relating to radiation levels in water running adjacent to certain of Gold Fields’ properties. Gold Fields does not concede the accuracy of the NNR samples and is currently undertaking its own sampling. Despite Gold Fields’ belief that it has not breached compliance with the NNR Act, it is in discussions with the NNR regarding the possible remediation of these areas as part of an industry initiative.

It has been publicly indicated by various individuals purporting to represent certain non-governmental organizations and other interested parties that they believe that Gold Fields, together with various other mining companies in South Africa, have polluted the water in and around the Wonderfontein Spruit, which is a catchment area in the West Wits Basin. This may lead to action being taken against Gold Fields, individually or collectively with other mining companies, and/or against the regulator. In March 2008, Gold Fields and two other mining companies received letters of demand from attorneys representing Duffuel (Pty) Ltd, or Duffuel, claiming substantial damages in the sum of R50 million based on this alleged pollution. In April 2009, Duffuel instituted action for damages of approximately R100 million against one of the other mining companies, but as yet no such action has been instituted against Gold Fields.

During fiscal 2008, a decision was taken by the Executive Committee to consolidate and contextualize the environmental and associated legal risks at the South African operations. This was done through a due diligence exercise conducted by two external firms that specialize in environmental risk and environmental law, respectively. The reason for selecting these firms was to ensure objectivity and to maintain an irreproachable level of credibility. The exercise was expected to fully identify the South African operation’s current risk profile in terms of environmental and associated legal risks.

The results of this exercise have been finalized and will form the basis upon which existing strategies will be reviewed and modified so as to reduce any risks that have been identified. If deemed necessary, Gold Fields intends to undertake mitigating action focused on reducing existing risks and preventing future risks.

Health and Safety

The principal objective of the South African Mine Health and Safety Act No. 29 of 1996, or the Mine Health and Safety Act, is to protect the health and safety of persons at mines. The Mine Health and Safety Act requires that employers and others ensure their operating and non-operating mines provide a safe and healthy working environment, determines penalties and a system of administrative fines for non-compliance and gives the Minister of Minerals and Energy the right to restrict or stop work at any mine and require an employer to take steps to minimize health and safety risks at any mine. The Mine Health and Safety Act further provides for employee participation through the establishment of health and safety committees and by requiring the appointment of health and safety representatives. It also gives employees the right to refuse dangerous work. Finally, it describes the powers and functions of a mine health and safety inspectorate (which is part of the DMR) and the process of enforcement.

Under the Mine Health and Safety Act, an employer is obligated, among other things, to ensure, as far as reasonably practicable, that its mines are designed, constructed and equipped to provide conditions for safe operation and a healthy working environment and the mines are commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned in such a way that employees can perform their work without endangering their health and safety or that of any other person. Every employer must ensure, as far as reasonably practicable, that persons who are not employees, but who may be directly affected by the activities at a mine, are not exposed to any hazards to their health and safety.

The Mine Health and Safety Amendment Act came into operation on May 30, 2009. Gold Fields is subject to more stringent regulations regarding mine health and safety as a result of the Act taking effect. The Mine

 

110


Table of Contents

Health and Safety Amendment Act criminalizes violations of the Mine Health and Safety Act and increases the maximum fines. Any owner convicted in terms of the above offenses may have its mining permits withdrawn or suspended, be fined R3 million and/or be imprisoned for a period not exceeding five years, while the maximum fine for other offenses and administrative fines are increased, with the highest fine being R1 million per occurrence. Two sections of the Mine Health and Safety Amendment Act, which create new offenses of contravening or failing to implement provisions of the Act resulting in a person’s death and vicarious liability for an employer where certain persons commit an offense and the employer permitted or did not take all reasonable steps to prevent the person’s actions, have not yet come into effect as several mining companies objected on the basis that the provisions appeared to be unconstitutional. The government agreed that these provisions would not come into effect pending further discussion with the industry.

In October 2007, as a result of a spate of accidents at various mining operations in South Africa, including Gold Fields’ operations, former President Thabo Mbeki ordered the Department of Minerals and Energy to conduct an occupational health and safety audit at all mines. The department developed audit protocols and divided them into two parts: (1) Legal Audit and (2) Technical Audit of certain installations and practices at mines. The intention of the audits was to give an indication of the extent to which mines comply with health and safety requirements, and also to help mines develop programs of action to improve their health and safety. The legal audits began in December 2007 and the results were released in the Presidential Mine Health and Safety Audit Report in February 2009. As yet, there has been no further development regarding the technical audit. The audit process was intended to broadly cover the topics indicated below:

Legal audit of mines:

 

   

Design and maintenance;

 

   

Legal appointments;

 

   

Occupational health and safety policy;

 

   

Occupational health and safety risk management;

 

   

Training;

 

   

Health and safety representatives and committees;

 

   

Reporting;

 

   

Mandatory codes of practice;

 

   

Explosives control;

 

   

Water management; and

 

   

Public health and safety.

Technical audit of mines:

 

   

Shafts and shaft infrastructure;

 

   

Rockfalls and rockbursts;

 

   

Rail bound and trackless mobile equipment;

 

   

Occupational health; and

 

   

Effectiveness of the Mine Health and Safety Act legal sanctions.

See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations in South Africa are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

 

111


Table of Contents

The Occupational Diseases in Mines and Works Act 78 of 1973, or the Occupational Diseases Act, governs compensation and medical costs related to certain illnesses contracted by persons employed in mines or at sites where activities ancillary to mining are conducted. Occupational healthcare services are made available by Gold Fields to employees from its existing facilities. Pursuant to changes in the Occupational Diseases Act, Gold Fields may experience an increase in the cost of these services. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations in South Africa are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.” This increased cost, should it transpire, is currently indeterminate.

Mineral Rights

The 2002 Minerals Act

The 2002 Minerals Act came into effect on May 1, 2004. The 2002 Minerals Act vests the right to prospect and mine in the state (which includes the rights to grant prospecting and mining rights on behalf of the nation) to be administered by the government of South Africa in order to, among other things, promote equitable access to the nation’s mineral resources by South Africans, expand opportunities for historically disadvantaged persons who wish to participate in the South African mining industry, advance social and economic development, and create an internationally competitive and efficient administrative and regulatory regime, based on the universally accepted principle, and consistent with common international practice, that mineral resources are part of a nation’s patrimony. In accordance with the 2002 Minerals Act, the DMR published a Code of Good Conduct, or the Code, and the Housing Code Standard for the Mining Industry, or the Standard, relating to the socio-economic transformation of the mining industry. However, certain provisions of the Code and the Standard appear to be inconsistent with the Mining Charter, or to go beyond the scope envisaged by the 2002 Minerals Act. Various industry participants have been in discussions with the DMR regarding the scope and applicability of the Code and the Standard but there is significant uncertainty regarding the standing and effect of the Code and the Standard’s provisions. It is unclear what the final form of the Code and the Standard will be and what effect they may have on Gold Fields’ results and operations. In a speech on June 23, 2009, the Minster of Minerals and Energy acknowledged that she was aware that some stakeholders had concerns and said that the Department would be consulting with them with a view to finding a lasting solution to the problem.

Under the 2002 Minerals Act, prospecting rights are initially granted for a maximum period of five years and can be renewed once upon application for a further period not exceeding three years. Mining rights are valid for a maximum period of 30 years, and can be renewed upon application for further periods, each of which may not exceed 30 years. Provision is made for the grant of retention permits, which would have a maximum term of three years and could be renewed once upon application for a further two years. A wide range of factors and principles, including proposals relating to black economic empowerment and social responsibility, will be considered by the Minister of Minerals and Energy when exercising her discretion whether to grant these applications. A mining right can be canceled if the mineral to which such mining right relates is not mined at an “optimal” rate. In November 2006, the DMR approved the conversion of Gold Fields’ mining licenses under the old regulatory regime at Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix into rights under the new regime. The South Deep application was completed in December 2008 and is currently under review by the DMR.

The 2002 Minerals Act provides that pursuant to the terms of the 2002 Minerals Act a broad-based socio-economic empowerment charter, or the Mining Charter, for effecting entry of historically disadvantaged South Africans, or HDSAs, into the mining industry became effective on May 1, 2004.

The Mining Charter’s stated objectives are to:

 

   

promote equitable access to South Africa’s mineral resources for all the people of South Africa;

 

   

substantially and meaningfully expand opportunities for HDSAs, including women, to enter the mining and minerals industry and to benefit from the exploitation of South Africa’s mineral resources;

 

112


Table of Contents
   

utilize the existing skills base for the empowerment of HDSAs;

 

   

expand the skills base of HDSAs in order to serve the community;

 

   

promote employment and advance the social and economic welfare of mining communities and areas supplying mining labor; and

 

   

promote beneficiation of South Africa’s mineral commodities beyond mining and processing, including the production of consumer products.

The charter clarifies that it is not the government’s intention to nationalize the mining industry.

To achieve these objectives, the charter requires that, within five years of its May 1, 2004 effective date, each mining company achieves a 15% HDSA ownership of mining assets and, within 10 years of that date, a 26% HDSA ownership of mining assets. Ownership can comprise active involvement, through HDSA-controlled companies (where HDSAs own at least 50% plus one share of the company and have management control), strategic joint ventures or partnerships (where HDSAs own at least 25% plus one vote of the joint venture or partnership interest and there is joint management and control) or collective investment vehicles, the majority ownership of which is HDSA based, or passive involvement, particularly through broad-based vehicles such as employee stock option plans. The charter envisages measuring progress on transformation of ownership by:

 

   

taking into account, among other things, attributable units of production controlled by HDSAs;

 

   

allowing flexibility by credits or offsets, so that, for example, where HDSA participation exceeds any set target in a particular operation, the excess may be offset against shortfalls in another operation;

 

   

taking into account previous empowerment deals in determining credits and offsets; and

 

   

considering special incentives to encourage the retention by HDSAs of newly acquired equity for a reasonable period.

It is envisaged that transactions will take place in a transparent manner and for fair market value with stakeholders meeting after five years to review progress in achieving the 26% target. Under the charter, the mining industry as a whole agreed to assist HDSA companies in securing finance to fund participation in an amount of Rand 100 billion over the first five years. Beyond the Rand 100 billion commitment, HDSA participation will be increased on a willing seller-willing buyer basis, at fair market value, where the mining companies are not at risk.

In addition, the charter requires, among other things, that mining companies:

 

   

spell out plans for achieving employment equity at management level with a view to achieving a baseline of 40% HDSA participation in management and achieving a baseline of 10% participation by women in the mining industry, in each case within five years;

 

   

give HDSAs preferred supplier status, where possible, in the procurement of capital goods, services and consumables; and

 

   

identify current levels of beneficiation and indicate opportunities for growth.

When considering applications for the conversion of existing licenses, the government takes a “scorecard” approach to the different facets of promoting the objectives of the charter. The scorecard sets out the requirements of the charter in tabular form which allows the DMR to “tick off” areas where a mining company is in compliance. The scorecard covers the following areas:

 

   

human resource development;

 

   

employment equity;

 

   

migrant labor;

 

113


Table of Contents
   

mine community and rural development;

 

   

housing and living conditions;

 

   

ownership and joint ventures;

 

   

beneficiation; and

 

   

reporting.

The scorecard does not indicate the relative significance of each item, nor does it provide a particular score which an applicant must achieve in order to be in compliance with the charter and be granted new order rights. The charter, together with the scorecard, provides a system of “credits” or “offsets” with respect to measuring compliance with HDSA ownership targets. Offsets may be claimed for beneficiation activities undertaken or supported by a company above a predetermined “base state,” which has not yet been established for each mineral. Offsets may also be claimed for continuing effects of previous empowerment transactions.

The charter also requires mining companies to submit annual, audited reports on progress toward their commitments, as part of an ongoing review process.

On March 8, 2004, the shareholders of Gold Fields approved a series of transactions, referred to in this discussion as the Mvelaphanda Transaction, involving the acquisition by Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, or Mvela Resources, of a 15% beneficial interest in the South Africa gold mining assets of Gold Fields for cash consideration of R4,139 million. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Overview—General—Mvelaphanda Transaction.”

The Mvelaphanda Transaction was intended to meet the Mining Charter’s requirement that mining companies achieve a 15% HDSA ownership within five years of the Mining Charter coming into effect. Management is in dialogue with the DMR regarding Gold Fields’ plans and proposals to ensure compliance with relevant HDSA ownership thresholds under the 2002 Minerals Act.

As the initial five year period contemplated by the charter has expired, the government has appointed an independent auditor to audit compliance by mining companies with the provisions of the charter. As of November 30, 2009, Gold Fields has not been notified of the audit of any of its operations by the government appointed independent auditor.

The Royalty Act

After going through several draft Bills, the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, 2008, or the Royalty Act, was promulgated on November 24, 2008 and was due to come into operation on May 1, 2009. However, it was announced on February 11, 2009 that the Act would not come into operation until March 1, 2010. The Royalty Act imposes a royalty on refined and unrefined minerals payable to the State.

The royalty in respect of refined minerals (which include gold and platinum) is calculated by dividing earnings before interest and taxes, or EBIT, by the product of 12.5 times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. EBIT refers to taxable mining income (with certain exceptions such as no deduction for interest payable) before assessed losses but after capital expenditure. A maximum royalty of 5% has been introduced for refined minerals.

The royalty in respect of unrefined minerals (which include uranium) is calculated by dividing EBIT by the product of nine times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. Where unrefined mineral resources (such as uranium) constitute less than 10% in value of the total composite mineral resources, the royalty rate in respect of refined mineral resources may be used for all gross sales and a separate calculation of EBIT for each class of mineral resources is not required. For Gold Fields, this means that currently it will pay a royalty based on the refined minerals royalty calculation as applied to its gross revenue.

 

114


Table of Contents

Based on the proposed formula, the rate for Gold Fields, if applied to the results for fiscal 2009, would have been approximately 2% of revenue. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ mineral rights in South Africa have become subject to new legislation which could impose significant costs and burdens—The Royalty Act.”

Exchange Controls

South African law provides for exchange control regulations, which, among other things, restrict the outward flow of capital from the Common Monetary Area, or CMA, comprising South Africa, the Kingdoms of Lesotho and Swaziland and the Republic of Namibia. The exchange control regulations, which are administered by the South African Reserve Bank, or the SARB, are applied throughout the CMA and regulate transactions involving South African residents, including companies. The basic purpose of exchange controls is to mitigate the negative effects caused by a decline of foreign capital reserves in South Africa, which may result in the devaluation of the Rand against other currencies. It is anticipated that South African exchange controls will remain in place for the foreseeable future. The South African government has, however, committed itself to gradually relaxing exchange controls and various relaxations have occurred in recent years. The most recent relaxations of Exchange Controls were announced by the Minister of Finance in the 2009 Medium Term Budget Policy Statement in October 2009. It is the stated objective of the authorities to achieve equality of treatment between residents and non-residents in relation to inflows and outflows of capital. The gradual approach to the abolition of exchange controls is designed to allow the economy to adjust more smoothly to the removal of controls that have been in place for a considerable period of time.

SARB approval is required for Gold Fields and its South African subsidiaries to receive and/or repay loans to non-residents of the CMA. Repayment of principal and interest on such loans will usually be approved where the payment is limited to the amount borrowed and a market-related rate of interest.

Funds raised outside of the CMA by Gold Fields’ non-South African resident subsidiaries (whether through debt or equity) can be used for overseas expansion, subject to any conditions imposed by the SARB. Gold Fields and its South African subsidiaries would, however, require SARB approval in order to provide guarantees for the obligations of any of Gold Fields’ subsidiaries with regard to funds obtained from non-residents of the CMA. Debt raised outside the Common Monetary Area by Gold Fields’ non-South African subsidiaries must be repaid or serviced by those foreign subsidiaries. Absent SARB approval, income earned in South Africa by Gold Fields and its South African subsidiaries cannot be used to repay or service such foreign debts. Unless specific SARB approval has been obtained, income earned by one of Gold Fields’ foreign subsidiaries cannot be used to finance the operations of another foreign subsidiary.

Exchange Control Circular No.16/2009, announced in October 2009, addresses foreign direct investments outside the CMA by South African companies. Transfers of funds from South Africa for the purchase of shares in offshore entities or for the creation or expansion of business ventures offshore require exchange control approval. However, if the investment is a new outward foreign direct investment where the total cost does not exceed R500 million per company per calendar year, the investment application may, without specific SARB approval, be processed by an authorized dealer, subject to all existing criteria and reporting obligations. In determining whether Gold Fields and its South African subsidiaries can invest overseas, the SARB will consider whether the investment meets certain requirements, including the benefit of the investment to South Africa. Gold Fields applies annually to the SARB for blanket approval for offshore exploration expenditure and to make exploration related foreign investments. The current approval allows for annual expenditure of up to $80 million per year. Gold Fields is required to provide the SARB with an annual update on the Group’s activities, including any such exploration investments.

South African companies are allowed to retain foreign dividends declared after October 26, 2004 offshore. Foreign dividends repatriated to South Africa after that date may be transferred offshore at any time and be used for any purpose.

 

115


Table of Contents

Prior to October 2009, South African entities operating Customer Foreign Currency accounts, or CFC Accounts, were obliged to convert foreign currency proceeds and repatriate to South Africa within 180 days. Under Exchange Control Circular No. 19/2009 issued in October 2009, the above restrictions have been abolished and South African entities are not required to convert and repatriate funds.

A listing by a South African company on any stock exchange other than the JSE for the purpose of raising capital needs permission from the SARB. Any such listing which would result in a South African company being redomiciled also needs approval from the Minister of Finance.

Gold Fields must obtain approval from the SARB regarding any capital raising involving a currency other than the Rand. In connection with its approval, it is possible that the SARB may impose conditions on Gold Fields’ use of the proceeds of any such capital raising, such as limits on Gold Fields’ ability to retain the proceeds of the capital raising outside South Africa or requirements that Gold Fields seeks further SARB approval prior to applying any such funds to a specific use. Any limitations imposed by the SARB on Gold Fields’ use of the proceeds of a capital raising could adversely affect Gold Fields’ financial and strategic flexibility. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ financial flexibility could be materially constrained by South African exchange control regulations.”

In his speech to Parliament on February 20, 2008, the Minister of Finance announced that the requirement for South African companies to obtain a significant equity interest in investments outside the CMA of at least 25% was replaced with the requirement that at least 10% of the foreign target entity’s voting rights must be acquired. In addition, to further enable South African companies, trusts, partnerships and banks to manage their foreign exposure, they are to be permitted to participate without restriction in the Rand futures market on the JSE. This dispensation was also extended to investment in inward-listed (foreign) instruments on the JSE Limited and the Bond Exchange of South Africa.

Ghana

Environmental

The laws and regulations relating to the environment in Ghana have their roots in the 1992 Constitution which charges both the state and individuals with a duty to take appropriate measures to protect and safeguard the natural environment. Mining companies are also required, under the Minerals and Mining Act, 2006 (Act 703), Environmental Assessment Regulations 1999 (LI 1652) and Water Use Regulations 2001 (LI 1692), to obtain all necessary approvals from the Environmental Protection Agency, or EPA, and the Forestry Commission before undertaking mining operations. The Minerals and Mining Act also requires mines to comply with all laws for the protection of the environment.

Under the relevant environmental laws and regulations, mining operations are required to undergo an environmental impact assessment process and obtain approval for an environmental permit prior to commencing operations. Within 24 months of the date upon which operations commence, Ghanaian mining operations must submit an environmental management plan for the operations to obtain an environmental certificate. Environmental management plans are submitted every three years and include details regarding the likely impact of the operation on the environment, including local communities, as well as a comprehensive plan and timetable for actions to lessen and remediate adverse impacts.

The laws also require mining operations to rehabilitate land disturbed as a result of mining operations pursuant to an environmental reclamation plan agreed with the Ghanaian environmental authorities. The reclamation plan provides an estimate of the costs to rehabilitate the mining area for the life of the mine, or the life of mine rehabilitation estimate, and an estimate of the costs to rehabilitate the mine as at the date of the reclamation plan, or the current estimated rehabilitation costs. These estimates are adjusted every two years, taking into account any new disturbance or rehabilitation undertaken during the two year period from the date of

 

116


Table of Contents

the previous estimate. The obligations to rehabilitate the mining area and to provide security for the rehabilitation costs is included in a reclamation security agreement negotiated with the EPA and signed by the mining company. Each mining company is required to secure a percentage (typically between 50% and 100%) of the current estimated rehabilitation costs by posting a reclamation bond and a cash deposit, which serve as a security deposit against default.

In Ghana, updated reclamation plans are submitted to the EPA every two years with a readjustment of the calculated bond based on the current estimated rehabilitation costs. Gold Fields Ghana’s current reclamation bond secures an amount of $7.4 million which is 50% of the rehabilitation costs estimated as at December 2005. The amount secured will be revised based on adjusted current estimated rehabilitation costs as at the date a new reclamation security agreement is signed. The EPA is reviewing the current life of mine rehabilitation estimate forecast for Tarkwa (following its expansion) of $39.2 million. Upon submission of a Notice of Intent for the Tarkwa expansion project in 2006, Gold Fields Ghana was advised by the EPA to submit a new environmental impact statement, or EIS, and the EPA further advised Gold Fields Ghana to submit an updated reclamation plan and revised security bond agreement after the approval of the new EIS document. Gold Fields Ghana submitted a new EIS in February 2007 which was approved by the EPA in May 2007. A new environmental permit was issued in May 2007 allowing Gold Fields Ghana to continue operations subject to submission of a revised EMP for the site within 18 months. Gold Fields Ghana submitted a revised EMP to the EPA in November 2008 and the EPA responded in January 2009 that it was reviewing the document. In late June 2009, Gold Fields was advised by African Environmental Research Consultants to reformat the document and to address issues raised by consultants engaged by the EPA. The EPA has also asked that recommendations made in the “Akoben” inspection, a mine-wide audit conducted by consultants engaged by the EPA in July 2009, be incorporated in the EMP before the certificate is issued. Following this review, a revised Closure Plan and security bond agreement will be negotiated based on the agreed estimated rehabilitation costs.

Abosso has submitted the required environmental management plans and reclamation plans and is in compliance with all permit, certificate and reclamation requirements. Following submission of Damang’s Environmental Management Plan 2005 to 2008 in August 2005, on January 23, 2006 Damang’s environmental certificate was renewed for a further three years . A revised Environmental Management Plan for the period from 2008 to 2011 was submitted to the EPA in November 2008. The EPA has indicated that the new environmental certificate, which covers a three year period, will be issued after concerns raised in the “Akoben” inspection have been addressed. Under Ghanaian law, a mining company may continue operations while its application is being considered as long as all necessary filings have been made.

Abosso was the first mining company in Ghana to sign a reclamation security agreement, in May 2001. Following various intermediate amendments to the agreement, in April 2006, Abosso provided the EPA with a revised draft reclamation security agreement. The draft reclamation security agreement was based on calculated current estimated rehabilitation costs totaling $4.2 million. The current life of mine rehabilitation estimate is $5.8 million (which includes the $4.2 million in current estimated rehabilitation costs) and takes into account a reduction in the liability for completed reclamation works. Meetings with the EPA were held during 2007 and a further draft agreement was submitted to the EPA in November 2007. Abosso was asked to make certain amendments to this draft and submitted a final draft to the EPA in November 2008. A reclamation bond (in the form of an irrevocable letter of credit of $2.0 million) and a $200,000 cash deposit were provided as security. The bond expired in June 2008, but has been renewed, most recently in June 2009. The bond is expected to continue to be renewed until the amount required to be secured is revised by the EPA and a new reclamation security agreement can be signed with the EPA.

Gold Fields has implemented environmental management systems in compliance with ISO 14001 throughout its operations in Ghana. Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana were re-certified under ISO 14001 (2007) during fiscal 2009 for a further three years.

 

117


Table of Contents

Following Gold Fields becoming a signatory to the Cyanide Code on November 3, 2005, all its operations, including the Ghanaian operations, are committed to complying with the code. Certification under the code at both Ghana operations was achieved in May 2008. As of October 2009, all of Gold Fields’ eligible operations had obtained accreditation under the International Cyanide Management Code.

Health and Safety

A mine owner is statutorily obligated to, among other things, take steps to ensure that the mine is managed and worked in accordance with the regulations that provide for the safety and proper discipline of the mine workers. The regulations prescribe the measures to be taken at every mining operation to ensure the safety and health of mine workers. Additionally, Gold Fields is required under the terms of its mining leases to comply with the reasonable instructions of the Chief Inspector of Mines regarding health and safety in the mine. A violation of the provisions of the health and safety regulations or failure to comply with the reasonable instructions of the Chief Inspector of Mines could lead to, among other things, a shutdown of all or a portion of the mine or the imposition of costly compliance procedures, and, in the case of a violation of the regulations relating to health and safety, constitutes an offense. Gold Fields, as the holder of the mining lease, has potential liability arising from injuries to, or deaths of, workers, including, in some cases, workers employed by its contractors. Although Ghanaian law provides statutory workers’ compensation for injuries or fatalities to workers, it is not the exclusive means for workers to claim compensation. Gold Fields’ insurance for health and safety claims or the relevant workers’ compensation may not be adequate to meet the costs which may arise upon any future health and safety claims. As a result, Gold Fields may suffer adverse consequences. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

Every person resident in Ghana is required to belong to either a public or private health insurance scheme. Since August 1, 2004, to fund the National Health Insurance Fund, a levy of 2.5% has been imposed on goods and services produced or provided in, or imported into, Ghana, although certain types of machinery used in mining, as well as water and certain types of fuel, are exempt from the levy. Employers who establish or contribute to a private health insurance scheme are not exempt from payment of the levy. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

Mineral Rights

Gold Fields Ghana holds five mining leases in respect of its operations at the Tarkwa property, each dated April 18, 1997, and two mining leases dated February 2, 1988 and June 18, 1992, respectively, for its operations at the former Teberebie property. The Tarkwa property mining leases all expire in 2027 and the Teberebie property mining leases both expire in 2018. Under the provisions of the Minerals and Mining Law, 1986 (PNDCL 153), or the Minerals and Mining Law, and the terms of the mining leases, all of the Tarkwa property and Teberebie property mining leases are renewable by agreement between Gold Fields Ghana and the government of Ghana.

Abosso holds a mining lease in respect of the Damang mine dated April 19, 1995, as amended by an agreement dated April 4, 1996. This lease expires in 2025. Abosso also holds a mining lease in respect of Lima South, dated March 22, 2006, which expires in 2017. As with the Tarkwa and Teberebie mining leases, these leases are renewable under their terms and the provisions of the Minerals and Mining Law by agreement between Abosso and the government of Ghana.

In addition, under Ghanaian law, the Tarkwa property mining leases are subject to the ratification of Parliament. The Minerals Commission, the statutory corporation overseeing the mining operations on behalf of the government of Ghana, has confirmed that the Tarkwa property leases have been ratified by Parliament.

 

118


Table of Contents

A license is required for the export, sale or other disposal of minerals and the permission of the Chief Inspector of Mines is required to remove minerals obtained by the holder of a mineral right. Under Ghanaian law, the government has the right to compel the sale to it of all mineral rights obtained in Ghana and all products derived from the refining or treatment of minerals. However, the current project development agreement entitles Gold Fields to export and sell its entire production of gold and by-products. In respect of Abosso, the government has agreed not to exercise these pre-emption rights for as long as Abosso follows such procedure for marketing its products as may be approved by the Bank of Ghana acting on the advice of the Minerals Commission.

Under the provisions of the Minerals and Mining Law, the size of an area in respect of which a mining lease may be granted cannot exceed 50 square kilometers for any single grant or 150 square kilometers in the aggregate for any company. Gold Fields Ghana’s mining leases cover approximately 207 square kilometers and Abosso’s mining lease covers approximately 52 square kilometers. Gold Fields Ghana is currently discussing a development agreement with the Ghanaian government which would permit it to hold all its current land.

The Minerals and Mining Act came into force on March 31, 2006. Although the Minerals and Mining Act repealed the Minerals and Mining Law, and the amendments to it, the Minerals and Mining Act provides that leases, permits and licenses granted or issued under the repealed laws will continue under those laws unless the Minister responsible for minerals provides otherwise by regulation. Therefore, unless and until such regulations are passed in respect of Gold Fields’ mineral rights, the Minerals and Mining Law will continue to apply to Gold Fields’ current operations in Ghana.

The major provisions of the Minerals and Mining Act are as follows:

 

   

the government of Ghana’s right to a 10% free carried interest in mineral operations is restricted to mining leases. The government may participate further in mineral operations upon agreement with the holder;

 

   

mineral rights in land over which mineral rights have been granted may not be granted to any other person in respect of the same minerals;

 

   

introduction of a new system for demarcating the land, referred to as the cadastral system, whereby land is demarcated in blocks. Under the new system, a mining lease area may not be less than one block or more than 300 contiguous blocks. A block is defined as 21 hectares;

 

   

mining companies which have invested or intend to invest at least $500 million may benefit from stability and development agreements, relating to both existing and new operations, which will serve to protect holders of current and future mining leases for a period not exceeding 15 years against changes in laws and regulations generally and in particular relating to customs and other duties, levels of payment of taxes, royalties and exchange control provisions, transfer of capital and dividend remittances. A development agreement may contain further provisions relating to the mineral operations and environmental issues. Each stability and development agreement is subject to the ratification of Parliament;

 

   

provisions requiring the renewal of a mining lease for a further period of up to 30 years once the holder has made an application for renewal pursuant to the terms of the lease if the holder is in material compliance with its obligations under law and under the lease;

 

   

provisions restricting royalty rates to not more than 6% or less than 3% of the total revenue of minerals; and

 

   

changes to the definition of a “mining company.” Under the Minerals and Mining Law, a mining company is defined as a company which or whose subsidiary is the holder of a mining lease. The Minerals and Mining Act defines a mining company as “a company which or whose subsidiary is the holder of a mineral right” (holders of mineral rights include prospecting and reconnaissance license holders) and excludes companies listed on a stock exchange and companies whose holding in mining

 

119


Table of Contents
 

companies or whose subsidiary’s assets are less than 50% of the market value of their total assets. The effect of this re-definition is that persons seeking to become controllers of prospecting or reconnaissance license holders as well as mining lease holders are required to seek the approval of the Minister responsible for mines. Further, mineral rights holders are required to notify the Minister of changes in control. Additionally, similar to its rights currently in respect of companies holding mining leases, the government of Ghana is entitled to a “special share” in prospecting or reconnaissance license holders. See “—Government Option to Acquire Shares of Mining Companies.”

Under the Minerals and Mining Act, neither a landowner nor any other person may search for minerals or mine on any land without having been granted a mineral right by the Minister responsible for mines. Additionally, even if a mineral right granted under the Minerals and Mining Law is made subject to the Minerals and Mining Act, the Act provides that this shall not have the effect of increasing the holder’s costs, or financial burden, for a period of five years.

Ghana’s finance minster has announced that the government intended to increase the minimum royalty rate from 3% to 6%. Gold Fields expects a draft bill to be circulated within the Ghanaian parliament in the near future and further expects that the royalty increase will take effect immediately upon gazetting of the bill as an Act.

Government Option to Acquire Shares of Mining Companies

Under Ghanaian law, the government is entitled to a 10% interest in any Ghanaian company which holds a mining lease in Ghana, without the payment of compensation. The government of Ghana has already received this 10% interest in each of Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso. The government also has the option, under the Minerals and Mining Law, of acquiring an additional 20% interest in the share capital of mining companies whose rights were granted under the Minerals and Mining Law at a price agreed upon by the parties, at the fair market value at the time the option is exercised, or as may be determined by international arbitration. The government of Ghana exercised this option in respect of Gold Fields Ghana and subsequently transferred the interest, which now forms part of the IAMGold interest in Gold Fields Ghana. The Government of Ghana retains this option to purchase an additional 20% of the share capital of Abosso. As far as management is aware, the government of Ghana has not exercised this option for any other gold mining company in the past.

Under the Minerals and Mining Law, which continues to apply to Gold Fields Ghana’s operations, and under the Minerals and Mining Act, the government has a further option to acquire a “special share” in a mining company for no consideration or in exchange for such consideration as the government and that company shall agree. This interest, when acquired, constitutes a special share which gives the government the right to attend and speak at any general meeting of shareholders, but does not entitle the government to any voting rights. The special share does not entitle the government to distributions of profits of the company which issues it to the government. The written consent of the government is required to make any amendment to a company’s articles of incorporation relating to the government’s option to acquire a special share. Although the government of Ghana has agreed not to exercise this option in respect of Gold Fields Ghana, it has retained this option for Abosso.

Exchange Controls

Under Ghana’s mining laws, the Bank of Ghana or the Minister for Finance may permit the holder of a mining lease to retain a percentage of its foreign exchange earnings for certain expenses in bank accounts in Ghana. Under a foreign exchange retention account agreement with the government of Ghana, Gold Fields Ghana is required to repatriate 20% of its revenues derived from the Tarkwa mine to Ghana and use the repatriated revenues in Ghana or maintain them in a Ghanaian bank account. Management believes that Gold Fields Ghana is entitled to rely on the provisions of the foreign exchange retention account agreement for the duration of the Tarkwa mining leases. Abosso is currently obligated to repatriate 25% of its revenue to Ghana, although the level of repatriation under the deed of warranty between Abosso and the government of Ghana is subject to renegotiation every two years. The most recent negotiations were concluded in February 2003. Since then there have been no requests for negotiations by either side and Abosso’s obligations remain the same. Until Abosso’s repatriation level is renegotiated, it will remain the same. While management has no reason to believe that the repatriation level will increase as a result of the next set of negotiations, there is no agreed ceiling on the

 

120


Table of Contents

repatriation level, and it could be increased. Any increase could adversely affect Gold Fields’ ability to use the cash flow from the Damang mine outside Ghana, including to fund working costs and capital expenditures at other operations, to provide funds for acquisitions and to repay principal and interest on indebtedness. Gold Fields currently repatriates on average approximately 40% of revenues from the Ghana operations to Ghana, annually. In fiscal 2009, Gold Fields repatriated approximately 84% to fund its capital expenditures and capital waste program in Ghana. However, Gold Fields does not expect repatriation to remain at this level in the future.

Australia

Environmental

While Australia’s national government retains the power to regulate activities which impact matters of national environmental significance, the Constitution vests the power to legislate environmental matters principally in the states. Gold Fields’ gold operations in Australia are primarily subject to the environmental laws and regulations of the State of Western Australia which require, among other things, that Gold Fields obtains environmental licenses, work approvals and mining licenses to begin mining operations.

During the operational life of its mines, Gold Fields is required by law to make provisions for the ongoing rehabilitation of its mines and to provide for the cost of post-closure rehabilitation and monitoring once mining operations cease. Gold Fields guarantees its environmental obligations by providing the Western Australian government with unconditional bank-guaranteed performance bonds. However, these bonds would not cover any environmental events requiring remediation that were unforeseen at the time the bonds were issued or which occur as a result of a breach of Gold Fields’ environmental licensing conditions. The Western Australian Government is proposing to increase the value of these bonds to cover approximately 50% of the total cost of rehabilitation. The current value of the bonds is in the order of 25%.

Gold Fields is subject to the Environmental Protection Act 1986. Under the Environmental Protection Act 1986, Gold Fields is obliged to prevent and abate pollution and environmental harm. Under the Contaminated Sites Act 2003, Gold Fields is required to report known or suspected contaminated sites. The Western Australian government’s Department of Environment and Conservation then classifies the site based on the risk posed to human health and the environment. Gold Fields may be required to investigate or remediate an affected site if there is contamination that is likely to cause harm to human health or the environment. If that happens, Gold Fields’ environmental duties and responsibilities will be increased. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations in Australia are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

Gold Fields is required to publicly report energy use and efficiency measures under the Energy Efficiency Opportunities (EEO) Act 2006, with the first report for the 2008 fiscal year already submitted and published on the Gold Fields website in December 2008. Reports are required by the 31 st of December following the end of each fiscal year, with an additional more detailed government report due December 31, 2011.

Under the National Greenhouse and Energy Reporting (NGER) Act 2007, Gold Fields is required to submit yearly reports to the federal government in relation to the energy use, energy production and greenhouse gas emissions associated with its Australian mining operations. The scheme, which commenced on July 1, 2008, also requires regulated companies to retain energy and emissions data for seven years for audit. Gold Fields Australia, which includes St. Ives, Agnew, the Australian division of the Exploration group and associated offices, recently submitted energy use and emission data for the 2009 fiscal year.

In May 2009, a bill was introduced into the Australian parliament which, if passed, would have introduced a country-wide “cap and trade” system for greenhouse gases. The Carbon Pollution Reduction Scheme Bill 2009, or the CPRS Bill, would have required large direct emitters of greenhouse gases in certain sectors of the economy to purchase and then surrender carbon permits called Australian Emission Units, or AEUs. Currently, a revised version of the CPRS Bill is being negotiated in the Australian Senate. If passed, the scheme is planned to come into effect on July 1, 2011.

 

121


Table of Contents

Under the CPRS Bill as previously drafted, at the end of each financial year, regulated entities would be required surrender to the Federal Government one AEU for each ton of CO2-e directly produced by their facilities during that financial year. Permits would be available for purchase at monthly auctions or on the secondary market, and could also be earned through eligible onshore or offshore carbon offsetting projects.

Gold Fields would have direct liability for permits under the scheme due to St Ives gold mine exceeding the 25kt CO2-e facility threshold for direct emissions. In terms of indirect liability, created by the use of electricity generated by an external supplier, both St Ives and Agnew gold mines will incur a pass-through cost equivalent to the associated permit cost.

Certain eligible companies are expected to receive permits free of charge from the Federal Government under the Emissions-Intensive Trade-Exposed Industries, or EITE, program. The gold industry’s average emissions intensity sits on the lower threshold of assistance, whereby 60% free permits would be allocated, although a decision on the eligibility of the industry is not expected until the first half of 2010.

On December 2, 2009, a revised version of the CPRS Bill was again defeated in the Australian Senate. The government is considered likely to re-introduce the bill to parliament for a third time in February 2010. If passed through parliament, Gold Fields is likely to be regulated directly under this scheme and its operational expenditure will be affected by the pass-through of compliance costs through its contracts with regulated suppliers.

Following Gold Fields becoming a signatory to the International Cyanide Management Code, or the Code, on November 3, 2005, all its operations, including its Australian operations, are committed to complying with the Code. The Code requires signatories to have their compliance audited by independent, third-party auditors every three years. As of October 2009, all of Gold Fields’ eligible operations had obtained accreditation under the International Cyanide Management Code. St. Ives achieved full compliance with the Code on August 5, 2009. Agnew expects to be in full compliance by the end of December 2009.

Health and Safety

The Western Australia Mines Safety and Inspection Act 1994 (WA), or the Safety and Inspection Act, regulates the duties of employers and employees in the mining industry with regard to occupational health and safety and outlines offenses and penalties for breach. The regulations prescribe specific measures and provide for inspectors to review the work site for hazards and violations of the health and safety requirements. A violation of the health and safety laws or failure to comply with the instructions of the relevant health and safety authorities could lead to, among other things, a temporary shutdown of all or a portion of the mine, a loss of the right to mine or the imposition of costly compliance procedures. However, mine owner liability for contractors’ employees and labor hire employees under the Safety and Inspection Act extends only to matters over which the Company has the capacity to exercise control. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations in Australia are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

The Safety and Inspection Act was amended in April 2005 and the changes include:

 

   

a new regime of penalties characterized by significant increases (particularly in relation to companies), higher penalties for repeat offenses, and new offenses of causing death or serious harm through “gross negligence,” which attract high penalties including the option of imprisonment;

 

   

broader powers for inspectors to impose improvements or prohibition notices on machinery and work practices; and

 

   

a new duty of care imposed on employers with respect to residential accommodation supplied in connection with employment.

 

122


Table of Contents

The effect of the amendments is that Gold Fields’ exposure to prosecution has increased, as has the cost of health and safety compliance of Gold Fields’ mining operations in Australia.

Mineral Rights

In Australia, the ownership of land is separate from the ownership of most minerals, which are the property of the states and are thus regulated by the state governments. The Western Australian Mining Act 1978 (WA), or the Mining Act, is the principal piece of legislation governing exploration and mining on land in Western Australia. Licenses and leases for, among other things, prospecting, exploration and mining must be obtained pursuant to the requirements of the Mining Act before the relevant activity can begin. Application fees and rental payments are payable in respect of each mining tenement.

Prospecting licenses, exploration licenses and mining leases are subject to prescribed minimum annual expenditure commitments. Royalties are payable to the state based on the amount of ore produced or obtained from a mining tenement. A monthly production report must be filed and royalties are calculated accordingly at a fixed rate of 2.5%.

Ministerial consent is required with respect to assignment or sale of a mining lease and certain other leases and tenements. Gold Fields has obtained ministerial consent for the transfer of all material mining leases and other tenements acquired from WMC.

Land Claims

In 1992, the High Court of Australia recognized a form of native title which protects the rights of indigenous people in relation to land in certain circumstances. As a result of this decision, the Native Title Act 1993 (Cth), or Native Title Act, was enacted to recognize and protect existing native title by providing a mechanism for the determination of native title claims and a statutory right for Aboriginal groups or persons to negotiate, object, and/or be consulted when, among other things, there is an expansion of, or change to, the rights and interests in the land which affects native title and constitutes a “future act” under the Native Title Act. The existence of these claims does not necessarily prevent continued mining under existing tenements. Tenements granted prior to January 1, 1994 are not “future acts” and do not need to comply with the aforementioned consultation or negotiation procedures. As a general rule, tenements granted after January 1, 1994 need to comply with this process. However, in Western Australia, some tenements were granted without complying with this consultation or negotiation process on the basis of then prevailing Western Australian legislation. This legislation was subsequently found to be invalid as it conflicted with the Native Title Act which is Commonwealth legislation. Subsequent legislation was passed validating the grant of tenements between January 1, 1994 and December 23, 1996, provided certain conditions were met.

Certain of Gold Fields’ tenements are currently subject to native title claims. However, most of Gold Fields’ tenements were granted prior to January 1, 1994. Where tenements were granted between January 1, 1994 and December 23, 1996, Gold Fields believes it complies with the conditions set out by the Native Title Act for those tenements to be validly granted. On those tenements not granted before December 1996, Gold Fields has entered into agreements with the claimant parties which provides the Company with security of tenure. Therefore, the granting of native title over any of these tenements will not have a material effect on Gold Fields’ tenure.

Mining leases do not necessarily extinguish all native title, but do extinguish the native title rights with which they conflict. The right of native title holders to control access to land is extinguished by a mining lease in Western Australia. However, mining leases may not extinguish other native title rights. Therefore, some native title rights may co-exist with the rights granted under a mining lease. Compensation could be payable for rights lost by native title holders on the grant of a mining lease. In addition, negotiations with native title applicants are generally necessary before a new mining lease will be granted by the state and these can be time consuming and costly.

 

123


Table of Contents

It is possible that land comprised in seven of Gold Fields’ existing tenements could be at risk due to native title claims, because those particular tenements may have been granted by the State of Western Australia in a manner contrary to the Native Title Act. Although the validity of those seven tenements is in question, Gold Fields’ management does not believe those tenements are material to its Australian operation.

The Aboriginal heritage laws protect sites of significance to Aboriginal people which have ongoing ethnographic, archaeological or historic significance. Gold Fields is aware of several Aboriginal heritage sites on its tenements. However, it does not believe that the protected status of these sites will materially affect its current operations in Australia. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations in Australia are subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

Peru

Regulatory

The regulatory framework governing the development of mining activities in Peru mainly consists of a General Mining Act (Ley General de Minería), or the LGM, and Regulations relating to mining procedures, health and safety, environmental protection, and mining investment and guarantees. Other laws, such as the Mining Royalty Law and laws relating to the granting of mining concessions in urban areas and urban expansion areas, the closing of mines, and liabilities for environmental damage, also affect mining companies.

The exploration and exploitation of mineral substances from the soil or subsoil is governed by the LGM. Mining activities as defined by the LGM include surveying, prospecting, exploration, exploitation, general workings, beneficiation, trading and transportation of ore.

Regulatory and Supervisory Entities

In general terms, the principal regulator of mining activities in Peru is the Ministry of Energy and Mines, or the MEM, through its General Bureau of Mining (Dirección General de Minería) , or DGM, and its General Bureau of Mining and Environmental Affairs ( Dirección General de Asuntos Ambientales Mineros) , or DGAAM. Other regulatory institutions are the Geological, Mining and Metallurgical Institute (Instituto Geológico Minero Metalúrgico) , or the INGEMMET, and the Supervisory Body of Investment in Energy and Mining (Organismo Supervisor de la Inversión en Energía Minería) , or the OSINERGMIN .

The DGM is the senior body of the MEM overseeing the mining industry. It reports directly to the Office of the Vice-Minister of Mining and is responsible for, among other things, the promotion of mining activities, the granting of beneficiation, ore transportation and general working concessions, the proposal of welfare, health and safety regulations.

The DGAAM has the following duties, among others: (i) propose policy and legal provisions for environmental conservation and protection in the mining sector; (ii) approve technical standards for the appropriate application of regulations on environmental conservation and protection to apply to activities of the mining sector; and (iii) assess environmental and social impacts derived from activities of the mining sector, establishing the preventive and corrective measures necessary to control such impacts.

The INGEMMET has the following duties, among others: (i) process mining claims, grant titles to mining concessions and act on applications relating to mining rights pursuant to law; (ii) keep the National Mining Land Register (Castastro Minero) ; administer and distribute the Annual Concession Fee, or ACF, and collect any penalties for failure to meet minimum annual production targets; and (iii) cancel mining claims or mining concessions pursuant to applicable laws.

The OSINERGMIN supervises and inspects mining activities as regards matters of mine safety and health, and environmental conservation and protection and may impose sanctions on any operations failing to comply with these regulations.

 

124


Table of Contents

Concessions

In accordance with the LGM, mining activities (except surveying, prospecting and trading) must be performed exclusively under the concession system. A concession confers upon its holder the exclusive right to develop a specific mining activity within a defined area. The LGM establishes four types of concessions:

Mining Concessions

Mining concessions confer the right to explore and exploit the mineralization granted which is within a solid of undefined depth, limited by vertical planes corresponding to the sides of a square, rectangle or closed polygon, the vertices of which refer to Universal Transversal Mercator, or UTM, coordinates. A mining concession is a real property interest independent and separate from surface land located within the UTM coordinates of the concession. It is granted by the INGEMMET. Once the claimed area is subject to a mining concession, the titleholder must register its title with the Public Mining Registry ( Registro de Derechos Mineros ) administered by the National Superintendent of Public Registers ( Superintendencia Nacional de Registros Públicos ) where all the agreements, resolutions and acts thereto must also be registered.

Holders of mining concessions are also required to meet minimum annual production targets prescribed by law. Titleholders are entitled to aggregate multiple concessions for these purposes provided certain conditions are met. In the case of mining concessions obtained prior to October 2008, the minimum annual production target for concessions to mine metals is equivalent to U.S.$100.00 per hectare per year. If the titleholder has not met the minimum annual production target by the end of the sixth year of the concession having been granted, the titleholder is required to pay from the seventh year a penalty equal to U.S.$6.00 per year per hectare until the year in which the minimum annual production target is achieved. The penalty increases to U.S.$20.00 per year per hectare if the minimum production target is not met by the end of the twelfth year of the concession having been granted. Failure to pay this penalty for two consecutive years may lead to the cancellation of the mining concession, although titleholders may be able to avoid paying the penalty if they can prove to the mining authorities that they have invested an amount equivalent to at least 10 times the amount of the penalty in the concession or Administrative Economic Unit (a grouping of concessions) during the previous year.

Pursuant to new regulations enacted in 2008, in the case of mining concessions obtained starting in October 2008, the minimum annual production target for metallic concessions is equivalent to one Fiscal Payment Unit, or UIT, per hectare per year. The UIT is fixed on a yearly basis and in 2009 is equal to approximately U.S.$1,200. If the titleholder has not met the minimum annual production target by the end of the tenth year of the mining concession having been granted, the titleholder is required to pay as of the eleventh year an annual penalty equal to 10% of the minimum annual production target until the target is fulfilled. This regime also applies to mining concessions acquired prior to October 2008, if the titleholder does not achieve the minimum annual production target by January 2, 2019.

Pursuant to the new regulations, mining concessions obtained after October 2008 may be canceled if the titleholder (i) does not meet the minimum annual production target for two consecutives years between the eleventh and fifteenth year of the concession having been granted or (ii) does not meet, after the fifteenth year, the minimum annual production target, unless the corresponding penalty has been paid and the titleholder has evidenced investments in mining activities or in public infrastructure for an amount equivalent to 10 times the penalty. Finally, if the non-fulfillment of the minimum annual production target remains until the end of the twentieth year, the mining concession will be canceled. These requirements will also apply to mining concessions obtained prior to October 2008, in case they do not meet the minimum annual production target established by the new regulations by January 2, 2019.

Beneficiation Concessions

Beneficiation or process concessions confer the right to extract or concentrate the valuable substances of an aggregate of minerals and/or to smelt, purify or refine metals through a set of physical, chemical and/or physicochemical processes. This concession is granted by the DGM.

 

125


Table of Contents

General Working Concessions

General workings concessions confer the right to render ancillary services to two or more mining concession holders. The following are considered ancillary services: ventilation, drainage, hoisting or extraction in favor of two or more concessions of different concessionaires. This concession is granted by the DGM.

Ore Transportation Concessions

Ore transportation concessions confer the right to install and operate a system for the continuous massive transportation of mineral products between one or more mining centers and a port or beneficiation plant, or a refinery, or along one or more stretches of these routes. The ore transportation system must be non-conventional, such as conveyor belts, pipelines or cable cars, among others. This concession is granted by the DGM. Conventional transportation systems are authorized by the Ministry of Transport and Communications.

All the concessions regulated by the LGM must be registered with the Public Mining Registry. In addition, all concessions in force must be registered with the National Mining Land Register, administered by the INGEMMET, including the UTM coordinates of the vertices of each mining concession.

The holders of mining concessions or of any pending claims for mining concessions must comply with several obligations, among which is the payment of the ACF. In the case of mining concessions and mining claims, the ACF is equivalent to U.S.$3.00 per hectare and, in the case of beneficiation or processing concessions, the ACF is calculated on the basis of the production capacity of the processing plant. Default in payment of the ACF for two consecutive years may result in the cancellation of the respective concession or claim.

In order to fulfill the work obligations established by Peruvian law, the holder of more than one mining concession of the same class and nature may group them in Administrative Economic Units, provided that the concessions are located within a radius of five kilometers in the case of non-ferrous metallic minerals or primary auriferous metallic minerals such as gold, silver and copper; 20 kilometers in the case of ferrous, coal or non-metallic minerals; and 10 kilometers in the case of auriferous detritus or heavy minerals detritus. Creation of an Administrative Economic Unit requires an approval resolution issued by the DGM.

The holders of concessions have the following rights, among others: (i) in concessions granted on uncultivated lands, to make free mining use of the concession surface for their economic purpose, without any additional request being required; (ii) to request the right to the free mining use, for the same purpose, of uncultivated lands located outside the concession; (iii) to request an authorization to establish easements on third-party lands as necessary for the rational use of the concession; an easement will be established after paying fair value compensation; (iv) to request an authorization to establish mining use or easements, if applicable, on the surface lands of other concessions, provided that the mining activity of their holders is not disturbed or hindered; (v) to construct, on neighboring concessions, the works that may be necessary for access, ventilation and drainage of its own concessions, ore transportation and the safety of its workers, after appropriate compensation has been paid if such works cause any damages and without creating any encumbrance to the adjacent concessions; and (vi) to use the water necessary for the concession operations pursuant to the applicable law.

On June 24, 2004, the Peruvian Congress approved the Mining Royalty Law, which established a mining royalty that owners of mining concessions must pay to the Peruvian government for the exploitation of metallic and non-metallic resources. The mining royalties are calculated on a sliding scale with rates ranging from 1% to 3% over the value of mineral concentrates based on international market prices. As provided by the Mining Royalty Law, since January 26, 2007, the Peruvian Tax Authority is responsible for the collection of mining royalties.

Environmental

During the 1990s, a modern environmental practice that conforms to the international environmental standards was established and made generally applicable to most of the mining industry. In 1990, the

 

126


Table of Contents

Environmental Code was enacted, which established for the first time a legal and institutional system to preserve the environment. In 1993, the Environmental Protection Regulations for Mining and Metallurgical Activities were enacted. On October 15, 2005, the Environmental Act completely repealed and replaced the Environmental Code.

The following items are required to be produced under the environmental laws in order to perform mining activities:

 

   

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) : EIAs are required for new projects, expansions of the operations by more than 50% and in conjunction with a project moving from the exploration stage to the development stage. EIAs must evaluate the physical, biological, socioeconomic and cultural impacts on the environment resulting from the execution of the mining projects.

 

   

Semi-Detailed Environmental Impact Assessment (SD-EIAs) and Environmental Impact Statement (DIA) : SD-EIAs and DIAs are required for mining exploration projects. SD-EIAs apply to larger projects while DIAs apply to smaller projects.

 

   

Annual Consolidated Statement : Holders of mining concessions must submit statements by June 30 of each year describing emissions to the environment and follow-up actions taken pursuant to the previously approved EIA and/or the Program for Environmental Adequacy, or PAMA.

Periodic Environmental Audits are made by OSINERGMIN to supervise compliance with the commitments undertaken in the respective EIAs and/or PAMA.

In 2003, a law regulating mine closure was approved. The closure of a mine usually entails the sealing of exits, in the case of underground mines, the removal of surface infrastructure and the environmental rehabilitation of the surface where the mining activity has been developed. The law requires mining companies to ensure the availability of the resources necessary for the execution of an adequate mine closure plan, including an Environmental Liabilities Closure Plan, in order to prevent, minimize and control the risks to and negative effects on health, personal safety and environment that may be generated or may continue after the cessation of mining operations. Furthermore, the law obligates holders of mining concessions to furnish guarantees in favor of the MEM to ensure that they will carry out the Environmental Liabilities Closure Plan in accordance with the environmental protection regulations and to ensure that the MEM has the necessary funds to execute the mine closure plan in the event of non-compliance by the holder of the mining concession. Mine concession holders may satisfy these requirements by providing to the MEM stand-by letters of credit to cover the amount of any mine closure plan.

Regulations under the mine closure law establish the procedure to be followed to obtain approval of the Environmental Liabilities Closure Plan and the requirements and characteristics of the guarantees furnished by the holders of mining concessions. These regulations also establish procedures for the approval of mine closure plans and inspection of the implementation of such plans, as well as the penalties to be imposed in the event of non-compliance by the holders of mining concessions.

 

127


Table of Contents

Property

Gold Fields’ operations as of June 30, 2009 comprised the following:

Gold Fields’ operative mining areas as of June 30, 2009

 

Operation

   Size

South Africa

  

Driefontein

   8,561 hectares

Kloof

   20,087 hectares

Beatrix

   16,821 hectares

South Deep

   3,566 hectares

Ghana

  

Tarkwa

   20,825 hectares

Damang

   8,111 hectares

Australia

  

St. Ives

   83,458 hectares

Agnew

   62,298 hectares

Peru

  

Cerro Corona

   940 hectares

Gold Fields leases its corporate headquarters in Sandton, its South African Regional Office in Roodepoort and its exploration offices not located at the mines.

As discussed earlier, the 2002 Minerals Act came into operation on May 1, 2004 and vests the right to prospect and mine in the South African State with administration by the government of South Africa. See “—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights.” In November 2006, the South African Department of Minerals and Energy approved the conversion of Gold Fields’ mining rights under the former regulatory regime at Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix into rights under the new regime. The application for the conversion of the South Deep mining rights has been completed and is currently under review by the DMR. See “—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights.”

Gold Fields also owns most of the surface rights with respect to its South African mining properties. Where Gold Fields conducts surface operations on land the surface rights of which it does not own, it does so in accordance with applicable mining and property laws. In addition, Gold Fields owns various mineral rights, under the previous regime, and surface rights contiguous to its operations in South Africa. As required under the 2002 Minerals Act, Gold Fields has registered its surface rights utilized for mining purposes. Gold Fields has received prospecting rights on properties which it has identified as being able to contribute, now or in the future, to its business and is in the process of converting those prospecting rights to mining rights under the 2002 Minerals Act. See “—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights.”

Gold Fields Ghana obtained the mining rights for the Tarkwa property from the government of Ghana in 1993. In August 2000, with the consent of the government of Ghana, Gold Fields Ghana was assigned the mining rights for the northern portion of the Teberebie property. The Tarkwa rights expire in 2027, while the Teberebie rights expire in 2018. Abosso holds the right to mine at the Damang property under a mining lease from the government of Ghana which expires in 2025. Gold Fields may exploit all surface and underground gold at all three sites until the rights expire, provided that Gold Fields pays the government of Ghana a quarterly royalty which is calculated on the basis of a formula which ranges from 3% to 12% of revenues derived from mining at the sites. For fiscal 2009, this formula resulted in Gold Fields Ghana paying royalties equivalent to approximately 3% of the revenues from gold produced at the Tarkwa and Teberebie properties, and Abosso paying approximately 3% of the revenues from gold produced at the Damang property. Ghana’s finance minster announced in a speech on December 2, 2009 that the government intended to increase the minimum royalty rate from 3% to 6%. Gold Fields expects a draft bill to be circulated within the Ghanaian parliament in the near future and further expects that the royalty increase will take effect immediately upon gazetting of the bill as an Act.

 

128


Table of Contents

In Australia, mining rights and property are leased from the state. Australian mining leases have an initial term of 21 years with one automatic 21-year renewal period and thereafter an indefinite number of 21-year renewals with government approval. At the St. Ives operations, the initial 21-year term has expired for 12 mining leases, with those mining leases having now entered their second 21-year term in the last two to three years. At the Agnew operations the initial 21-year term has expired for 20 mining leases, with those mining leases having now entered (in most cases only quite recently) their second 21-year term. In relation to gold produced from the mining leases at St. Ives and Agnew, Gold Fields pays an annual royalty to the state of 2.5% of production.

In Peru, exploration and extraction activities can only be performed in duly authorized areas. Authorization is granted when a mining concession is issued. Mining concessions are for an indefinite term provided the titleholder complies with the timely payment of annual concession fees of U.S.$3.00 per hectare and any applicable fines. In addition, La Cima owns mining rights outside Cerro Corona covering 185.2 hectares and surface rights related to Cerro Corona covering 881.3 hectares.

As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields also held exploration tenements covering a total of approximately 3.6 million hectares in various countries, including the Dominican Republic, Chile, Brazil, Peru, Indonesia, Finland, Kyrgyzstan, South Africa, Ghana, Guinea, the Democratic Republic of Congo, Mali, Australia and Canada. Gold Fields’ ownership interests in these sites vary with its participation interests in the relevant exploration projects. Gold Fields’ international exploration offices are leased under various contract terms and durations. See “—Exploration.”

Gold Fields also holds title to numerous non-mining properties in South Africa, including buildings, shops, farmland and hospitals. Gold Fields controls approximately 53,500 hectares of land in the West Wits and Welkom regions.

Research and Development

Gold Fields undertakes various research and development projects relating to gold production technology and potential uses of gold. In particular, Gold Fields has developed a patented technology called Biox ® through its wholly-owned Swiss subsidiary Biomin Technologies S.A. Biox ® , which involves a process whereby bacteria release gold from sulfide-bearing gold ore to permit more economical recovery of the gold. On October 2, 2008, Gold Fields entered into an agreement with Bateman Engineering to sell its Biox ® Technology Business to Bateman Engineering for a net cash consideration of U.S.$8.8 million. However, the agreement was canceled on February 3, 2009 as some of the conditions precedent to completion were not fulfilled. Gold Fields continues to actively develop and market Biox ® technology.

Gold Fields participates in a collaborative research and development project, entitled the Autek Project, together with AngloGold Ashanti Limited, Harmony Gold Mining Company Limited and Mintek, which is focused on investigating potential new industrial uses for gold. The Autek Project has been integrated into the Nanotechnology Innovation Centre, which is an initiative of the South African government’s Department of Science and Technology. Gold Fields’ primary contribution to the Autek Project is aimed at researching gold nanotechnology.

The Company is currently involved in the testing of biotechnology for the destruction of cyanide compounds in residue streams, for the purpose of complying with the Cyanide Code.

Gold Fields is continuing its support of the AMIRA International project, P420D. AMIRA International is an independent association of minerals companies, created to develop, broker and facilitate collaborative research projects. The P420 project, centered on gold processing technology, commenced in 1984. P420D is designed to build on previous work with a focus on the areas of industry sustainability, capturing and preserving industry knowledge, predicting and improving ore processing, protecting the license to operate, and processing difficult ores. The funding commitment for this project is through calendar 2012.

 

129


Table of Contents

In Australia, Gold Fields signed a relationship agreement with the Commonwealth Scientific & Industrial Research Organisation, or CSIRO, to work together on mining projects that are mutually beneficial. The agreement commenced in July 2008 with project work to date being carried out primarily in the mineral exploration field, relevant to the St. Ives and Agnew operations, as well as a mechanical agitation project at Agnew using a CSIRO patented technology. Laboratory scale tests have been carried out to test this technology which proved successful. The project has moved into the feasibility stage with full scale trials expected in calendar 2010. Further to this, preliminary test work carried out by CSIRO in the application of in situ leaching of small, shallow, oxide ore zones has led to a proposal in which Gold Fields will consider participation in full scale trials to be carried out through June 30, 2010.

Legal Proceedings

On August 21, 2008, Gold Fields Operations Limited, formerly known as Western Areas Limited, or WAL, a subsidiary of Gold Fields, received a summons from Randgold and Exploration Company Limited, or R&E, and African Strategic Investment (Holdings) Limited. The summons claims that during the period that WAL was under the control of Brett Kebble, Roger Kebble and others, WAL was allegedly part of a scam whereby JCI Limited unlawfully disposed of shares owned by R&E in Randgold Resources Limited, or Resources, and Afrikander Lease Limited, now known as Uranium One. WAL’s preliminary assessment was that it had strong defenses to these claims and, accordingly, WAL’s attorneys were instructed to vigorously defend the claims. The claims have been computed in various ways. The highest claims have been computed on the basis of the highest prices of Resources and Uranium One between the dates of the alleged thefts and March 2008 (approximately R12 billion). The alternative claims have been computed on the basis of the actual amounts allegedly received by WAL to fund its operations (approximately R519 million). The claims lie only against WAL, which holds a 50% stake in the South Deep Mine. This alleged liability is historic and relates to a period of time prior to Gold Fields purchasing the company.

On May 1, 2008, an accident occurred at the Twin Shaft Complex of the South Deep Mine. The accident occurred at the mine’s ventilation raise hole and nine people were fatally injured. The Mine Health and Safety Inspectorate, or MHSI, of the DMR has completed an investigation into the accident pursuant to the Mine Health and Safety Act. Although the MHSI has completed its investigation, Gold Fields has not been notified of the results and, at this point in time, it is unclear whether the MHSI will convert its investigation into an inquiry pursuant to the Mine Health and Safety Act or whether it will hold an inquiry jointly with an inquest. Accordingly, Gold Fields is unable at this time to furnish a view regarding the dates and possible full implications of such further proceedings.

Other than the summons and investigation described above, Gold Fields is not a party to any material legal or arbitration proceedings, nor is any of its property the subject of pending material legal proceedings.

Glossary of Mining Terms

The following explanations are not intended as technical definitions, but rather are intended to assist the reader in understanding some of the terms used in this annual report.

Absorption, desorption and recovery, or AD&R: a treatment process involving the extraction of gold in solution using activated carbon, followed by removal of the gold from the carbon.

Agglomeration: a method of concentrating gold based on its adhesive characteristics.

Backfill: material, generally sourced from tailings or waste rock, used to refill mined-out areas to increase the long-term stability of mines and mitigate the effects of seismicity.

 

130


Table of Contents

Brattice wall: a partition normally made from pre-cast concrete panels that separates the fresh air entering and the exhaust exiting a mine shaft.

Breast Stoping: a mining method whereby the direction of mining is in the direction of strike of the reef.

Carbon absorption: a treatment process which uses activated carbon to remove gold in solution.

Carbon in leach, or CIL: a process similar to CIP (described below) except that the ore slurries are not leached with cyanide prior to carbon loading. Instead, the leaching and carbon loading occur simultaneously.

Carbon in pulp, or CIP: a common process used to extract gold from cyanide leach slurries. The process consists of carbon granules suspended in the slurry and flowing counter-current to the process slurry in multiple-staged agitated tanks. The process slurry, which has been leached with cyanide prior to the CIP process, contains soluble gold. The soluble gold is absorbed onto the carbon granules which are subsequently separated from the slurry by screening. The gold is then recovered from the carbon by electrowinning onto steel wool cathodes or by a similar process.

Cleaning: the process of removing broken rock from a mine.

Closely spaced dip pillar mining method: a mining method where support pillars are left in place at relatively close intervals to increase the stability of the mine. Mining is conducted using conventional drilling and blasting techniques.

Comminution: the breaking, crushing or grinding of ore by mechanical means.

Crosscut: a mine working driven horizontally and at right angles to a level.

Cut-off grade: the grade which distinguishes the material within the orebody that is to be extracted and treated from the remainder.

De-bottlenecking: decreasing production constraints (e.g., removing mechanical deficiencies so that processed tonnage may be increased).

Decline or incline: a sloping underground opening for machine access from the surface to an underground mine or from level to level in a mine. Declines and inclines are often driven in a spiral to access different elevations in the mine.

Declustered averaging: an estimation technique used in the evaluation of ore reserves.

Depletion: the decrease in quantity of ore in a deposit or property resulting from extraction or production.

Development: activities (including shaft sinking and on-reef and off-reef tunneling) required to prepare for mining activities and maintain a planned production level and those costs incurred to enable the conversion of mineralization to reserves.

Dilution: the mixing of waste rock with ore, resulting in a decrease in the overall grade.

Dissolution: the process whereby a metal is dissolved and becomes amenable to separation from the gangue material.

Electrowinning: the process of removing gold from solution by the action of electric currents.

Elution: removal of the gold from the activated carbon.

 

131


Table of Contents

Exploration: activities associated with ascertaining the existence, location, extent or quality of mineralization, including economic and technical evaluations of mineralization.

Flotation: the process whereby certain chemicals are added to the material fed to the leach circuit in order to float the desired minerals to produce a concentrate of the mineral to be processed. This process can be carried out in column flotation cells.

Friable Hangwall: a hangwall made of rock that crumbles naturally or is easily broken or pulverized.

Gangue: commercially valueless material remaining after ore extraction from rock.

Gold in process: gold in the processing circuit that is expected to be recovered during or after operations.

Gold reserves: the gold contained within proven and probable reserves on the basis of recoverable material (reported as mill delivered tons and head grade).

Grade: the quantity of metal per unit mass of ore expressed as a percentage or, for gold, as grams of gold per ton of ore.

Greenfield: a potential mining site of unknown quality.

Grinding: reducing rock to the consistency of fine sand by crushing and abrading in a rotating steel grinding mill.

Head grade: the grade of the ore as delivered to the metallurgical plant.

Heap leaching: a relatively low-cost technique for extracting metals from ore by percolating leaching solutions through heaps of ore placed on impervious pads. Generally used on low-grade ores.

Hypogene: ore or mineral deposits formed by ascending fluids within the earth.

In situ: within unbroken rock or still in the ground.

Kriging: an estimation technique used in the evaluation of ore reserves.

Leaching: dissolution of gold from the crushed and milled material, including reclaimed slime, for absorption and concentration onto the activated carbon.

Level: the workings or tunnels of an underground mine which are on the same horizontal plane.

Life of mine, or LoM: the expected remaining years of production, based on production rates and ore reserves.

London afternoon fixing price: the afternoon session open fixing of the gold price which takes place daily in London and is set by a board comprising five financial institutions.

London morning fixing price: the morning session open fixing of the gold price which takes place daily in London and is set by a board comprising five financial institutions.

Longwall mining method: a mining method involving mining over large continuous spans without the use of pillars.

Mark-to-market: the current fair value of a derivative based on current market prices, or to calculate the current fair value of a derivative based on current market prices, as the case may be.

 

132


Table of Contents

Measures: conversion factors from metric units to U.S. units are provided below.

 

Metric unit

       

U.S. equivalent

1 ton

   = 1 t    = 1.10231 short tons

1 gram

   = 1 g    = 0.03215 ounces

1 gram per ton

   = 1 g/t    = 0.02917 ounces per short ton

1 kilogram per ton

   = 1 kg/t    = 29.16642 ounces per short ton

1 kilometer

   = 1 km    = 0.62137 miles

1 meter

   = 1 m    = 3.28084 feet

1 centimeter

   = 1 cm    = 0.39370 inches

1 millimeter

   = 1 mm    = 0.03937 inches

1 hectare

   = 1 ha    = 2.47104 acres

Metallurgical plant: a processing plant used to treat ore and extract the contained gold.

Metallurgical recovery factor: the proportion of metal in the ore delivered to the mill, that is recovered by the metallurgical process or processes.

Metallurgy: in the context of this document, the science of extracting metals from ores and preparing them for sale.

Mill delivered tons: a quantity, expressed in tons, of ore delivered to the metallurgical plant.

Milling/mill: the comminution of the ore, although the term has come to cover the broad range of machinery inside the treatment plant where the gold is separated from the ore.

Mine call factor: the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the specific product recovered at the mill (plus residue) to the specific product contained in an orebody calculated based on an operation’s measuring and valuation methods.

Mineralization: the presence of a target mineral in a mass of host rock.

Net smelter return: the volume of refined gold sold during the relevant period multiplied by the average spot gold price and the average exchange rate for the period, less refining, transport and insurance costs.

Open pit: mining in which the ore is extracted from a pit. The geometry of the pit may vary with the characteristics of the orebody.

Ore: a mixture of material containing minerals from which at least one of the minerals can be mined and processed at an economic profit.

Orebody: a well defined mass of material of sufficient mineral content to make extraction economically viable.

Ore grade: the average amount of gold contained in a ton of gold-bearing ore expressed in grams per ton.

Ore reserves or reserves: that part of a mineral deposit which could be economically and legally extracted or produced at the time of the reserve determination.

Ounce: one troy ounce, which equals 31.1035 grams.

Overburden: the soil and rock that must be removed in order to expose an ore deposit.

Paste filling: a technique whereby cemented paste fill is placed in mined out voids to improve and maintain ground stability, minimize waste dilution and maximize extraction of the ore.

 

133


Table of Contents

Pay limit: the value at which the orebody can be mined without profit or loss, calculated using an appropriate gold price, production costs and recovery factors.

Porphyry: an igneous rock of any composition that contains larger, well-formed mineral grains in a finer-grained groundmass.

Probable reserves: reserves for which quantity and grade and/or quality are computed from information similar to that used for proven reserves, but the sites for inspection, sampling, and measurement are farther apart or are otherwise less adequately spaced. The degree of assurance, although lower than that for proven reserves, is high enough to assume continuity between points of observation.

Production stockpile: the selective accumulation of low grade material which is actively managed as part of the current mining operations.

Prospect: to investigate a site with insufficient data available on mineralization to determine if minerals are economically recoverable.

Prospecting permit or right: permission to explore an area for minerals.

Proven reserves: reserves for which: (1) quantity is computed from dimensions revealed in outcrops, trenches, workings or boreholes; (2) grade and/or quality are computed from the results of detailed sampling; and (3) the sites for inspection, sampling and measurement are spaced so closely and the geologic character is so well defined that size, shape, depth and mineral content of reserves are well-established.

Reef: a gold-bearing sedimentary horizon, normally a conglomerate band, that may contain economic levels of gold.

Refining: the final stage of metal production in which final impurities are removed from the molten metal by introducing air and fluxes. The impurities are removed as gases or slag.

Rehabilitation: the process of restoring mined land to a condition approximating its original state.

Remnant pillar mining: the removal of blocks of ground previously left behind for various reasons during the normal course of mining.

Rock burst: an event caused by seismicity which results in damage to underground workings and/or loss of life and equipment.

Rock dump: the historical accumulation of low grade material derived in the course of mining which is processed in order to take advantage of spare processing capacity.

Run of Mine, or RoM: a loose term to describe ore of average grade.

Sampling: taking small pieces of rock at intervals along exposed mineralization for assay (to determine the mineral content).

Scattered mining method: conventional mining which is applied in a non-systematic configuration.

Seismicity: a sudden movement within a given volume of rock that radiates detectable seismic waves. The amplitude and frequency of seismic waves radiated from such a source depend, in general, on the strength and state of stress of the rock, the size of the source of seismic radiation, and the magnitude and the rate at which the rock moves during the fracturing process. Rock bursts, as defined above, involve seismicity.

 

134


Table of Contents

Semi-autogenous grinding, or SAG, mill: a piece of machinery used to crush and grind ore which uses a mixture of steel balls and the ore itself to achieve comminution. The mill is shaped like a cylinder causing the grinding media and the ore itself to impact upon the ore.

Shaft: a shaft provides principal access to the underground workings for transporting personnel, equipment, supplies, ore and waste. A shaft is also used for ventilation and as an auxiliary exit. It may be equipped with a surface hoist system that lowers and raises conveyances for men, materials and ore in the shaft. A shaft generally has more than one conveyancing compartment.

Shortfall: the ratio of actual reef tonnage hoisted compared to monthly reef tonnage broken.

Sichel “t”: an estimation technique used in the evaluation of ore reserves.

Slimes: the finer fraction of tailings discharged from a processing plant after the valuable minerals have been recovered.

Slurry: a fluid comprising fine solids suspended in a solution (generally water containing additives).

Smelting: thermal processing whereby molten metal is liberated from beneficiated ore or concentrate with impurities separating as lighter slag.

Spot price: the current price of a metal for immediate delivery.

Stockpile: a store of unprocessed ore.

Stope: the underground excavation within the orebody where the main gold production takes place.

Stripping: the process of removing overburden to mine ore.

Stripping ratio: the number of units of overburden which must be removed in order to mine one unit of ore.

Sulfide: a mineral characterized by the linkages of sulfur with a metal or semi-metal, such as pyrite (iron sulfide). Also a zone in which sulfide minerals occur.

Supergene: ores or ore minerals formed where descending surface water oxidizes mineralized rock and redistributes the ore minerals, often concentrating them in zones.

Tailings: finely ground rock from which valuable minerals have been extracted by milling.

Tailings dam/slimes dam: dams or dumps created from tailings or slimes.

Ton: one ton is equal to 1,000 kilograms (also known as a “metric” ton or “tonne”).

Tonnage: quantities where the ton or tonne is an appropriate unit of measure. Typically used to measure reserves of gold-bearing material in situ or quantities of ore and waste material mined, transported or milled.

Total cash costs per ounce: a measure of the average cost of producing an ounce of gold, calculated by dividing the total cash costs in a period by the total gold sold over the same period. Total cash costs represent production costs as recorded in the statement of operations less offsite (i.e., central) general and administrative expenses (including head office costs charged to the mines, central training expenses, industry association fees and social development costs) and rehabilitation costs, plus royalties and employee termination costs. In determining the total cash cost of different elements of the operations, production overheads are allocated pro rata.

 

135


Table of Contents

Total production costs per ounce: a measure of the average cost of producing an ounce of gold, calculated by dividing the total production costs in a period by the total gold production over the same period. Total production costs represent total cash costs, plus amortization, depreciation and rehabilitation costs.

Waste: rock mined with an insufficient gold content to justify processing.

Westonia Formation Lava Hangwall: lava formations directly overlying the VCR in certain localities. Under mining conditions, the lava is brittle and is easily fractured.

Yield: the actual grade of ore realized after the mining and treatment process.

 

136


Table of Contents

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

Not applicable.

 

137


Table of Contents

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

You should read the following discussion and analysis together with Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements including the notes, appearing elsewhere in this annual report. Certain information contained in the discussion and analysis set forth below and elsewhere in this annual report includes forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. See “Forward-looking Statements” and “Risk Factors” for a discussion of important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from the results described in or implied by the forward-looking statements contained in this annual report.

Overview

General

Gold Fields is a significant producer of gold and a major holder of gold reserves in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. In Peru, Gold Fields also produces copper. Gold Fields is primarily involved in underground and surface gold and copper mining and related activities, including exploration, extraction, processing and smelting. Gold Fields is one of the largest gold producers in the world, based on annual production. In the year ended June 30, 2009, Gold Fields produced 3.691 million ounces of gold and gold equivalents, 3.414 million ounces of which were attributable to Gold Fields, and the remainder of which were attributable to minority shareholders in Gold Fields Ghana Limited, or Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso Goldfields Limited, or Abosso and Gold Fields La Cima S.A., or La Cima. Gold Fields reported attributable gold reserves, including copper expressed as gold equivalent ounces, of 81.1 million ounces as of June 30, 2009, with attributable gold reserves (excluding copper) of 78.9 million ounces and attributable copper reserves of 797 million pounds. For a description of how gold equivalent ounces are determined, see “Defined Terms and Conventions”.

The Gold Fields group holdings evolved through a series of transactions, principally in 1998 and 1999. With effect from January 1, 1998, a company formed on November 21, 1997 and referred to in this discussion as Original Gold Fields acquired substantially all of the gold mining assets and interests previously held by Gold Fields of South Africa Limited, or GFSA, Gencor Limited, New Wits Limited and certain other shareholders in the companies owning the assets and interests. These assets and interests included all of the Beatrix, Oryx and Kloof mines, a 70.0% interest in the Tarkwa mine (which was increased to 71.1% through dilution of some of the other shareholders in 1999), a 54.2% interest in the St. Helena mine and a 37.3% interest in the Driefontein mine. The transaction involved a purchase of the assets and interests held by the three selling companies, as well as offers to the minority shareholders of the three companies holding the Beatrix, Oryx and Kloof mines to acquire their shares in exchange for Original Gold Fields shares. Original Gold Fields accounted for the transaction as a purchase. Because Original Gold Fields was formed as a subsidiary of GFSA, the assets acquired from GFSA were accounted for at the value they had been carried at on GFSA’s books. The assets acquired from Gencor Limited, New Wits Limited and the minority shareholders were accounted for at fair value.

With legal effect from January 1, 1999, Original Gold Fields was acquired by the company that is today Gold Fields. For accounting purposes, Original Gold Fields was fully consolidated with effect from June 1, 1999. Although for legal purposes Gold Fields acquired Original Gold Fields, for accounting purposes, Original Gold Fields was considered the acquirer because the Original Gold Fields shareholders obtained the majority interest in the enlarged company. As part of this transaction, the remaining interest in the Driefontein mine came into the Gold Fields group.

With effect from July 1, 1999, Gold Fields acquired the remaining interest in the St. Helena mine and reorganized the group to simplify its holding structure. Since that time, Gold Fields has acquired its Australian operations and Abosso mine in Ghana, sold the St. Helena mine, completed a transaction with Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, or Mvela Resources, involving a 15% beneficial interest in its South African operations, restructured its South African operations, and acquired its interests in the Cerro Corona Mine. It also acquired, then sold, its Venezuelan operations. See “Information on the Company—History.”

 

138


Table of Contents

In fiscal 2007, Gold Fields acquired the entire issued share capital of Barrick Gold South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, or BGSA, and the remaining shares of Western Areas Limited, or Western Areas, which it did not already own. BGSA and Western Areas each held a 50% interest in the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture, an unincorporated entity that owned the developing South Deep gold mine adjacent to Gold Fields’ Kloof gold mine, located in the Witwatersrand basin near Johannesburg. See “—Acquisition of South Deep.” After the acquisition, BGSA was renamed GFI Joint Ventures Holding (Pty) Limited, or GFI Joint Ventures, and Western Areas was renamed Gold Fields Operations Limited, or Gold Fields Operations.

Total managed gold production was 3.691 million ounces in fiscal 2009 (3.414 million ounces of which were attributable to Gold Fields with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso and La Cima). Total gold production was 3.915 million ounces in fiscal 2008 (3.670 million ounces of which were attributable to Gold Fields with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso and the Venezuelan operations).

In fiscal 2009, production from the South African operations decreased 15.7% mainly due to safety related stoppages and rehabilitation projects. Driefontein’s production was 10.6% lower due to a decrease in volumes mined mainly due to safety factors as a result of the need to address the accumulating backlog in implementing secondary support and the suspension of significant pillar mining. At Kloof, production was 21.7% lower mainly due to the Main Shaft refurbishment project and safety related mine stoppages. Beatrix’s production was 10.7% lower primarily due to lower mining volumes, limited flexibility and lower than planned grades. South Deep’s production was 24.7% lower primarily due to termination of conventional VCR mining as a result of a major geological fault and the rehabilitation of two main access ramps. Production at the international operations increased 12.9%. The main reason for this increase was the inclusion of 0.22 million gold equivalent ounces from Cerro Corona not included in the previous year. In Ghana, Tarkwa’s production was 5.2% lower due to commissioning issues at the new CIL plant, which affected the whole plant. Damang’s production was 3.2% higher due to the build-up of the crushed ore stockpile in fiscal 2008, which resulted in a more consistent feed to the mill in fiscal 2009. In Australia, St. Ives’ production increased 2.5% mainly due to increased production from the Argo and Cave Rocks underground mines being processed through the plant. At Agnew, production was 5.7% lower primarily due to the depletion of Songvang stockpiles.

Mvelaphanda Transaction

On March 8, 2004, the shareholders of Gold Fields approved a series of transactions, referred to in this discussion as the Mvelaphanda Transaction, involving the acquisition by Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, or Mvela Resources, of a 15% beneficial interest in the South African gold mining assets of Gold Fields for cash consideration of Rand 4,139 million.

The Mvelaphanda Transaction was preceded by an internal restructuring of Gold Fields, whereby each of the Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix mining operations, as well as certain ancillary assets and operations, were transferred to a new, wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, or GFIMSA.

On November 26, 2003, Gold Fields, Mvela Resources, Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Mvela Gold, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Mvela Resources, and GFIMSA entered into a covenants agreement, or the Covenants Agreement, regulating their rights and obligations with respect to GFIMSA. This agreement became effective following the advance by Mvela Gold of the loan to GFIMSA described below, which is referred to in this discussion as the Mvela Loan. On December 11, 2003, Gold Fields, GFIMSA, and Mvela Gold entered into a subscription and share exchange agreement, or the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement, pursuant to which, upon repayment of the Mvela Loan, Mvela Gold had to subscribe for shares equal to 15% of GFIMSA’s outstanding share capital, including the newly issued shares, for consideration of Rand 4,139 million. In addition, for a period of one year after the subscription by Mvela Gold of the GFIMSA shares, each of Gold Fields and Mvela Gold would be entitled to require the exchange of Mvela Gold’s GFIMSA shares for ordinary shares of

 

139


Table of Contents

Gold Fields of an equivalent value based on an exchange ratio equal to 15% of a discounted cash flow calculation as applied to GFIMSA’s operations divided by the same calculation as applied to Gold Fields’ operations, with certain adjustments. Mvela Gold ceded its rights under the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement to secure its obligations under certain mezzanine financing it incurred to fund, in part, the Mvela Loan. Mvela Gold was entitled to dispose of the GFIMSA shares and any Gold Fields ordinary shares it may hold only in accordance with the terms of a pre-emptive rights agreement entered into by the parties whereby if Mvela Gold receives an offer for, or otherwise wished to sell, any GFIMSA or Gold Fields shares, it has to first offer to sell them to Gold Fields. The Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement became unconditional following the advance of the Mvela Loan to GFIMSA on March 17, 2004.

On December 11, 2003, Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Mvela Gold, First Rand Bank Limited, Gold Fields Australia Pty Limited, or Gold Fields Australia, and Gold Fields Guernsey Limited (now Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, or Gold Fields Holdings), entered into a loan agreement, or the Mvela Loan Agreement, pursuant to which Mvela Gold advanced a loan of Rand 4,139 million, or the Mvela Loan, to GFIMSA on March 17, 2004. GFIMSA applied the loan toward funding its acquisition of Gold Fields’ South African mining operations and certain ancillary assets and operations as part of the internal restructuring of Gold Fields. The Mvela Loan had a term of five years, bore interest at a rate of 10.57% per annum and was guaranteed by Gold Fields, Gold Fields Australia and Gold Fields Holdings.

The Mvela Loan was funded by way of commercial bank debt of approximately Rand 1,300 million and mezzanine finance of approximately Rand 1,100 million, with the balance of approximately Rand 1,700 million being raised by way of an international private placement of shares of Mvela Resources. In connection with the mezzanine finance, Gold Fields subscribed for preference shares in an amount of Rand 200 million in Micawber 325 (Proprietary) Limited, or Micawber, a special purpose entity established by the mezzanine lenders. Further, Gold Fields subscribed for Rand 100 million of the shares issued by Mvela Resources in the private placement. In addition, pursuant to an agreement entered into on February 13, 2004, or the PIC Agreement, Gold Fields had effectively guaranteed a loan of Rand 150 million, or the PIC Loan, made by the Public Investment Corporation, or the PIC, to Micawber. Interest on the PIC Loan accrued at the rate of 14.25%, was compounded semi-annually and was payable in one lump sum at the end of the term of the loan. Under the terms of the PIC Agreement, the PIC had the right to require Gold Fields to assume all its rights and obligations under the PIC Loan, together with its underlying security, which consisted of the PIC’s proportionate share of Mvela Gold’s rights under the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement and a guarantee of Rand 200 million from Mvela Resources, at a price equal to the value of the principal and interest of the PIC Loan, net of a guarantee fee equal to 3.75% per annum of the value of the principal and interest of the loan, if, at the time the PIC Loan was due for repayment, Micawber did not repay the loan in full. Whether or not the PIC required Gold Fields to assume its rights and obligations under the PIC Loan, the PIC was obligated to pay the guarantee fee to Gold Fields on the date on which the PIC Loan was repaid to the PIC.

On February 13, 2004, the Mvela Loan Agreement was amended, principally in order to add and clarify certain definitions.

On November 17, 2004, GFL Mining Services Limited, or GFLMSL, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources and GFIMSA entered into an agreement, referred to in this discussion as the Amendment Agreement, amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement and the Covenants Agreement. Pursuant to the Amendment Agreement, among other things, Mvela Gold would be entitled to not less than 45,000,000 or not more than 55,000,000 Gold Fields ordinary shares in the event that GFIMSA shares were exchanged for Gold Fields shares pursuant to the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement. These minimum and maximum numbers of ordinary shares were subject to adjustment to take account of changes to Gold Fields’ capital structure and certain corporate activities of Gold Fields. During the first part of fiscal 2007, Mvelaphanda Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, or Mvela Holdings, entered into various agreements in terms of which the status quo regarding the shareholding in Mvela Resources as of the date of the Mvelaphanda Transaction was restored by Mvela Holdings once again having a

 

140


Table of Contents

direct interest in the issued share capital of Mvela Resources. On July 17, 2006, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others entered into an agreement further amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Covenants Agreement and the sponsor support, guarantee and retention agreement, or the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement, dated February 13, 2004, among Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, Mvela Gold, Micawber and FirstRand Bank Limited. In accordance with the revised agreements, Mvela Holdings undertook to remain an HDSA company, to retain beneficial ownership of no less than 26% of the issued equity share capital of Mvela Resources, to have board control of Mvela Resources (together with other HDSAs) and to retain management control of Mvela Resources pursuant to a written management agreement.

On December 7, 2006, Mvela Resources announced a transaction between Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, or Mvela Holdings, the parent company of Mvela Resources, Lazarus Zim and Afripalm Resources, an HDSA company formed by Lazarus Zim, in terms of which the parties among other things agreed as follows:

 

   

Afripalm would subscribe for shares in Mvela Resources to acquire economic and voting interests in Mvela Resources of approximately 19.3% and 31%, respectively. As a result of such acquisition, the economic and voting interests of Mvela Holdings, the other major HDSA shareholder in Mvela Resources, would be approximately 22.9% and 19.6%, respectively. As a result of the increase in the broad-based HDSA voting control of Mvela Resources to more than 50%, Mvela Resources would thus be an HDSA controlled company; and

 

   

the management agreement between Mvela Resources and Mvela Holdings, in terms of which the latter managed the day-to-day operations of Mvela Resources, was canceled.

Subsequently, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others entered into an agreement further amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Covenants Agreement and the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement. In accordance with the revised agreements, Mvela Holdings and Afripalm (and certain of its subsidiaries) undertook jointly (i) to remain HDSA companies, (ii) to retain beneficial ownership of no less than 26% of the issued equity share capital of Mvela Resources, (iii) to retain voting control over no less than 50% of the issued equity share capital of Mvela Resources, and (iv) to have board control of Mvela Resources (together with other HDSAs).

On August 24, 2007, the Mvela Loan Agreement was amended, principally in order to relax certain financial covenants.

On March 17, 2008, a Memorandum of Agreement was signed between the Company, GFLMSL, Mvela Resources, Mvela Gold and GFIMSA whereby the number of shares for which the GFIMSA shares were to be exchanged pursuant to the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement was fixed at 50,000,000.

On March 27, 2008, Mvela Resources obtained the consent of the Company, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others under the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement to enter into a proposed transaction with Anglo Platinum Limited, or APL, and Northam Platinum Limited, or Northam, in terms of which Mvela Resources would purchase approximately 53.1 million Northam shares from APL’s subsidiaries and would advance shareholder loans to, and became the holder of the entire issued share capital of, Micawber 278 (Proprietary) Limited, or M278, which owned APL’s indirect 50% beneficial interest in the Booysendal Platinum Project. In addition, Mvela Resources would sell all its indirect shareholdings in M278 to Northam in exchange for 121 million new Northam shares.

In addition, this transaction effectively replaced the Mvela Holdings guarantee set out in the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement with a guarantee by Nedbank Limited for the due and punctual payment and performance by Mvela Resources of its obligations under the guarantee provided by Mvela Resources under the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement.

 

141


Table of Contents

On March 17, 2009, the Mvela Loan was repaid and Mvela Gold took receipt of its 15% shareholding in GFIMSA. Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvela Gold exercised its right to exchange the GFIMSA shares for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields. This brought the total number of Gold Fields shares in issue at that time to 703,839,976. Pursuant to the above transactions, Mvela Gold owned approximately 7% of the listed shares of Gold Fields at that time and Gold Fields again owns 100% of GFIMSA. Since March 17, 2009, Mvela Gold has sold approximately 11 million of the Gold Fields shares, representing approximately 1.6% of the listed shares of Gold Fields, through the market. Gold Fields holds a right of first refusal in the event Mvela Gold wishes to sell any of its remaining Gold Fields shares.

The Mvelaphanda Transaction was intended to meet the Mining Charter’s requirement that mining companies achieve a 15% HDSA ownership within five years of the Mining Charter coming into effect. Management is in dialogue with the DMR regarding Gold Fields’ plans and proposals to ensure compliance with relevant HDSA ownership thresholds under the 2002 Minerals Act.

Acquisition and Disposal of Choco 10

Effective on February 28, 2006, Gold Fields acquired a 95% interest in the Choco 10 gold mine and surrounding exploration tenements in the El Callao district of Guayana, Venezuela, through the purchase of Bolivar Gold Corp., or Bolivar, for total cash consideration of approximately U.S.$330 million.

Gold Fields owned its interest in the Choco 10 mine through its 95% holding in Promotora Minera de Guyana (PMG) S.A., or PMG. PMG was a venture between Promotora Minera de Venezuela, S.A., or Promiven (a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields which it acquired from Bolivar), and a subsidiary of Corporacion Venezolana de Guayana, or CVG, a governmental development entity for the Guayana region. Gold Fields assumed operation of PMG on March 1, 2006.

On November 30, 2007, Gold Fields disposed of its assets in Venezuela to Rusoro Mining Ltd., or Rusoro, for a total consideration of approximately U.S.$413 million comprising U.S.$180 million in cash and 140 million newly issued Rusoro shares, which at the time of sale represented approximately 37% of the outstanding shares of Rusoro.

Acquisition of La Cima

On January 11, 2006, Gold Fields acquired an 80.72% economic and 92% voting interest in Sociedad Minera La Cima S.A., now known as Gold Fields La Cima S.A., or La Cima, for a total consideration of U.S.$40.5 million. La Cima is the holding company for the Cerro Corona Mine. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Peru Operation” and “—Credit Facilities—Cerro Corona Facility.”

The Cerro Corona Mine became operational during the first quarter of fiscal 2009.

Acquisition of South Deep

In fiscal 2007, pursuant to a series of transactions, Gold Fields acquired 100% of BGSA and Western Areas, giving it ownership of the South Deep gold mine in South Africa. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—South Deep Operation” and “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

On December 1, 2006, Gold Fields acquired 100% of the issued share capital of BGSA for $1,154.8 million. The $1,154.8 million comprised:

 

   

$324.0 million in Gold Fields ordinary shares issued;

 

   

$801.8 million in cash;

 

142


Table of Contents
   

$24.2 million relating to the reimbursement of an insurance claim to the vendors; and

 

   

$4.8 million of direct costs relating to the acquisition.

Gold Fields also repaid $407.0 million owing by BGSA to Barrick Gold Africa.

Through a series of purchases completed by March 31, 2007, Gold Fields acquired 100% of the issued share capital of Western Areas for $1,033.5 million. The $1,033.5 million comprised:

 

   

$893.8 million in Gold Fields ordinary shares issued;

 

   

$116.6 million in respect of shares acquired in years prior to fiscal 2007;

 

   

$17.2 million in cash paid in fiscal 2007; and

 

   

$5.9 million of direct costs relating to the acquisition.

Therefore, the total purchase consideration to acquire South Deep was $2,188.3 million.

These business combinations have been accounted for as purchase transactions, with Gold Fields being identified as the acquirer and BGSA and Western Areas as the acquirees. Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements for fiscal 2007 include the operating results of BGSA and Western Areas for the period from December 1, 2006 to June 30, 2007.

For the purposes of Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements, the purchase consideration for each of BGSA and Western Areas has been allocated to the underlying assets acquired and liabilities assumed, based on management’s best estimates, taking into account all available information at the time of acquisition.

Gold Fields concluded that the excess of the purchase consideration over the net identifiable tangible and intangible assets acquired represents goodwill in respect of the transaction.

The allocation of the purchase consideration of $2,188.3 million is as follows:

 

   

Property, plant and equipment totaling $1,867.7 million;

 

   

Other assets worth $297.5 million;

 

   

Liabilities totaling $1,196.2 million which included the gold derivative structure held by Western Areas; and

 

   

Goodwill of $1,219.3 million.

The goodwill arising on the acquisition of BGSA and Western Areas principally represents the difference between the purchase consideration and the fair value on the assets acquired and can be attributed to the upside potential of the asset.

As a result of Gold Fields acquiring 100% of the issued share capital of BGSA, South Deep was fully consolidated as from December 1, 2006.

During the period between December 1, 2006 and March 31, 2007, Gold Fields did not own 100% of Western Areas and therefore did not own 100% of South Deep. The percentages of the results of Western Areas and South Deep that did not accrue to Gold Fields have been accounted for as minority interests. As a result of the acquisition of Western Areas, Gold Fields became exposed to the gold derivative structure held by Western Areas, which consisted of put and call options as well as deferred premium. The marked to market valuation of this derivative structure as of December 1, 2006, the date of acquisition, was negative $539.0 million at a gold price of $631.75 per ounce. The structure was closed out on January 24, 2007 at a gold price of $643.00 per ounce with a payment of $549 million after deducting scheduled maturities of $10 million. This resulted in a realized loss of $20.7 million.

 

143


Table of Contents

During December 2006 and January 2007, Western Areas purchased 1.005 million ounces of gold, which was the net delta position of the gold derivative structure, at an average gold price of $622.14 per ounce. These purchases are referred to herein as gold delta purchases. This position was subsequently sold at a gold price of $643.00 per ounce on January 24, 2007 resulting in a net gain of $21.0 million on the gold delta purchases.

Acquisition and disposal of IRCA

On March 1, 2007, Gold Fields acquired 70% of IRCA (Pty) Limited, or IRCA, for $7.9 million. The consideration consisted of $5.3 million in cash plus the assumption of a bank overdraft of $2.6 million. IRCA is a company that specializes in mine safety training and it formed part of the Gold Fields Business Leadership Academy structure. The holding in IRCA was disposed of in March 2009 for $5.0 million, resulting in a loss of $0.3 million.

Sale of Essakane Project

On October 11, 2007, Gold Fields reached an agreement to sell its 60% stake in the Essakane exploration project located in Burkina Faso to Orezone for a minimum total consideration of U.S.$200 million. The transaction closed on November 26, 2007. Orezone paid Gold Fields U.S.$152 million in cash and issued 41,666,667 common shares having an aggregate subscription price of U.S.$48 million to its wholly-owned subsidiary, Gold Fields Essakane (BVI) Limited. Following the acquisition, Gold Fields owned 41,666,667 common shares of Orezone, representing 12.2% of Orezone’s issued and outstanding common shares. During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields exchanged the Orezone shares for approximately 3.3 million shares of IAMGold Limited, as a result of the acquisition of all Orezone shares by IAMGold. Gold Fields subsequently disposed of the IAMGold shares for a cash consideration of $33.4 million. See “—Results of Operations—Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008—(Loss)/Profit on disposal of listed investments.”

Revenues

Substantially all of Gold Fields’ revenues are derived from the sale of gold and copper. As a result, Gold Fields’ revenues are directly related to the prices of gold and copper. Historically, the prices of gold and copper have fluctuated widely. The gold and copper prices are affected by numerous factors over which Gold Fields does not have control. See “Risk Factors—Changes in the market price for gold, and to a lesser extent copper, which in the past have fluctuated widely, affect the profitability of Gold Fields’ operations and the cash flows generated by those operations.” The volatility of gold and copper prices is illustrated in the following tables, which show the annual high, low and average of the London afternoon fixing price of gold and the London Metal Exchange cash settlement price for copper in U.S. dollars for the past 12 calendar years and to date in calendar year 2009:

 

     Price per ounce (1)  

Gold

   High      Low      Average  
     ($)  

1997

   367       283       331   

1998

   313       273       294   

1999

   326       253       279   

2000

   313       264       282   

2001

   293       256       270   

2002

   349       278       310   

2003

   416       320       363   

2004

   454       375       409   

2005

   537       411       445   

2006

   725       525       604   

2007

   834       607       687   

2008

   1,011       713       872   

2009 (through November 30, 2009)

   1,183       810       959   

On November 30, 2009, the London afternoon fixing price of gold was U.S.$1,176 per ounce.

 

144


Table of Contents
     Price per ton (1)

Copper

   High    Low    Average
     ($/ton)

1997

   2,720    1,699    2,276

1998

   1,880    1,438    1,654

1999

   1,846    1,354    1,574

2000

   2,009    1,607    1,814

2001

   1,837    1,319    1,577

2002

   1,690    1,421    1,558

2003

   2,321    1,545    1,780

2004

   3,287    2,337    2,867

2005

   4,650    3,072    3,687

2006

   8,788    4,537    6,728

2007

   8,301    5,226    7,128

2008

   8,985    2,770    6,952

2009 (through November 30, 2009)

   6,946    3,051    4,999

 

Source: I-Net

Note:

 

(1) Rounded to the nearest U.S. dollar.

On November 30, 2009, the London Metal Exchange cash settlement price for copper was U.S.$6,815 per ton.

As a general rule, Gold Fields sells the gold it produces at market prices to obtain the maximum benefit from prevailing gold prices and does not enter into hedging arrangements such as forward sales or derivatives which establish a price in advance for the sale of its future gold production. Hedges are sometimes undertaken in one or more of the following circumstances: to protect cash flows at times of significant capital expenditures; for specific debt servicing requirements; and to safeguard the viability of higher cost operations. At June 30, 2009, Gold Fields was party to forward sales and zero cost collar derivative agreements which established a price in advance for approximately 50% of its forecasted copper production in fiscal 2010. These agreements were entered into to protect cash flows at the Cerro Corona operation due to significant capital expenditures budgeted for fiscal 2010. See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risk—Commodity Price Sensitivity”. Significant changes in the prices of gold and copper over a sustained period of time may lead Gold Fields to increase or decrease its production in the near-term, which could have a material impact on Gold Fields’ revenues.

Sales of copper concentrate are “provisionally priced”—that is the selling price is subject to final adjustment at the end of a period normally ranging from 30 to 90 days after delivery to the customer, based on market prices at the relevant quotation points stipulated in the contract. Revenue on provisionally priced copper concentrate sales is recorded on the date of shipment, net of refining and treatment charges, using the forward London Metal Exchange price to the estimated final pricing date, adjusted for the specific terms of the agreements. Variations between the price used to recognize revenue and the actual final price received can be caused by changes in prevailing copper and gold prices and result in an embedded derivative. The host contract is the receivable from the sale of copper concentrate at the forward London Metal Exchange price at the time of sale. The embedded derivative, which does not qualify for hedge accounting, is marked-to-market each period until final settlement occurs, with changes in fair value classified as provisional price adjustments and included as a component of revenue while the contract itself is recorded in accounts receivable.

Gold Fields’ Realized Gold and Copper Prices

The following table sets out the average, the high and the low London afternoon fixing price per ounce of gold and Gold Fields’ average U.S. dollar realized gold price during the past three fiscal years. Gold Fields’ average realized gold price is calculated using the actual price per ounce of gold received on gold sold and the

 

145


Table of Contents

actual amount of revenue received on sales of copper concentrate, expressed in terms of the price per gold equivalent ounce. For a description of how gold equivalent ounces are determined, see “Defined Terms and Conventions.”

 

     Year ended June 30,

Realized Gold Price

   2007    2008    2009

Average

   638    821    874

High

   691    1,011    989

Low

   561    649    713

Gold Fields’ average realized gold price (1)

   638    819    875

 

Note:

 

(1) Gold Fields’ average realized gold price may differ from the average gold price due to the timing of its sales of gold within each year.

The following table sets out the average, the high and the low London Metal Exchange cash settlement price per ton for copper and Gold Fields’ average U.S. dollar realized copper price for the 10 month period from September 1, 2008 (when the Cerro Corona Mine commenced production) and June 30, 2009.

 

Realized Copper Price

   10 months ended
June 30, 2009

Average

   4,322

High

   7,420

Low

   2,770

Gold Fields’ average realized copper price (1)

   4,115

 

Note:

 

(1) Gold Fields’ average realized copper price may differ from the average copper price due to the timing of its sales of copper within each year and is net of treatment and refining charges.

Costs

Over the last three fiscal years, Gold Fields’ total cash costs have typically made up approximately 80% of total costs and consist primarily of labor and, where applicable, contractor costs, and consumable stores, which include explosives, timber and other consumables, including diesel fuel and other petroleum products.

Gold Fields’ South African operations are labor intensive due to the use of deep level underground mining methods. As a result, over the last three fiscal years labor has represented on average approximately 50% of total cash costs at the South African operations. At the South African operations, power and water made up on average approximately 11% of total cash costs over the last three fiscal years. At the Ghana operations, mining operations at Damang are conducted by an outside contractor, while starting in fiscal 2005, Tarkwa began engaging in owner mining and therefore significantly reduced its use of outside contractors. Contractor costs represented on average 21% of total cash costs at Tarkwa over the last three fiscal years, and 21% of total cash costs during fiscal 2009. Over the last three fiscal years contractor costs represented on average 48% of total cash costs at Damang. Direct labor costs represent on average a further 10% of total cash costs at Tarkwa over the last three fiscal years and 9% in fiscal 2009. Over the last three fiscal years direct labor costs represented on average 6% at Damang and 7% in fiscal 2009. At the Australian operations, mining operations are conducted by outside contractors. Over the last three fiscal years, total contractor costs represented on average 51% at Agnew and 39% at St. Ives of total cash costs and direct labor costs represented on average a further 15% at Agnew and 11% at St. Ives of total cash costs.

For open-pit operations, such as those at the Ghana and Australia operations, cash costs tend to vary over the life of the open pit. Initially, cash costs are relatively high because the proportion of waste rock to ore, or

 

146


Table of Contents

stripping ratio, is higher when operations first commence. As an open pit evolves, the stripping ratio and cash cost per ounce tend to decrease. Stripping ratios can, however, increase over the life of an operation.

Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana consume large quantities of diesel fuel for the running of their mining fleet. The cost of diesel fuel is directly related to the oil price and any movement in the oil price will have an impact on the cost of diesel fuel and therefore the cost of running the mining fleet. Over the last three fiscal years, fuel costs have represented approximately 15% of total cash costs at the Ghana operations. Fuel use is proportionately higher at the Ghana operations than at other operations because open pit mining in general requires more fuel usage than underground mining and because of the configuration of the Ghana operations, including the scale of certain of the pits and the distances between the pits and the plants. In order to provide some protection against future rises in oil prices, and therefore in diesel fuel prices, Gold Fields has in recent years entered into various call options for diesel fuel for the benefit of its Ghana operations. See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Sensitivity,” “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Hedging Policy—Oil,” “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Hedging Experience—Oil” and “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Contract Position—Oil.”

During fiscal 2009, price participation royalties of A$25.8 million (U.S.$19.1 million) were paid to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley Bank in respect of St. Ives. Total gold produced from St. Ives since November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces during fiscal 2009, creating the liability to pay the 4% net smelter volume royalty which amounted to A$20.5 million (U.S.$15.2 million) for fiscal 2009. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations.” On August 26, 2009, Gold Fields entered into an agreement to terminate the royalty for a consideration of A$308 million (U.S.$257.1 million). See “—Recent Developments—Termination of Royalty Over St. Ives”.

The remainder of Gold Fields’ total costs consist primarily of amortization and depreciation, exploration costs and selling, administration and general and corporate charges.

Notional Cash Expenditure

Gold Fields defines notional cash expenditure, or NCE, as operating costs plus additions to property, plant and equipment, and defines operating costs as production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization) plus corporate expenditure, employment termination costs and accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation. Gold Fields reports NCE on a per equivalent ounce basis. Management considers NCE per equivalent ounce to be an important measure as it believes NCE per ounce provides more information than other commonly used measures, such as total cash costs per equivalent ounce, regarding the real cost to Gold Fields of producing an equivalent ounce of gold (including gold equivalent ounces), reflecting not only the ongoing costs of production but also the investment cost of bringing mines into production. Management also believes that NCE per equivalent ounce is a useful indication of the cash Gold Fields has available for paying taxes, repaying debt, funding exploration and paying dividends and the like.

NCE is not a U.S. GAAP measure. An investor should not consider NCE or operating costs in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, cash flows from operating activities or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. NCE and operating costs as presented in this annual report may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of performance of other companies.

 

147


Table of Contents

The following tables set out a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs, as calculated in accordance with U.S. GAAP, to its NCE for fiscal 2009, 2008 and 2007.

 

    For the year ended June 30, 2009
    Driefontein   Kloof   Beatrix   South
Deep
  Tarkwa   Damang   St. Ives   Agnew   Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)

Production Costs

  378.9   330.6   218.4   128.3   359.4   130.7   288.9   84.6   79.1      (0.3   1,998.6

Add:

                     

Corporate expenditure

  7.1   5.7   3.9   2.5   8.1   1.3   3.4   1.5   2.0      —        35.5

Employment termination costs

  1.8   2.5   2.0   —     —     —     0.6   0.2   —        —        7.1

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

  4.0   3.5   1.8   1.0   0.8   0.2   1.0   0.3   1.3      —        13.9
                                               

Operating costs

  391.8   342.3   226.1   131.8   368.3   132.2   293.6   86.6   82.4      (0.3   2,055.1

Additions to property, plant and equipment

  114.8   106.4   69.9   113.3   140.8   16.9   49.4   21.7   116.8      10.2      760.3
                                               

Notional cash expenditure

  506.6   448.7   296.0   245.1   509.1   149.1   343.3   108.3   199.2      9.9      2,815.4
                                               

Gold produced (‘000oz)

  829.9   643.0   391.1   174.7   612.4   200.4   428.3   192.1   219.3 (2)     —        3,691.2

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

  610   698   757   1,403   831   744   802   564   908      —        763
                                               

 

Notes:

 

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R9.01 per $1.00.

 

(2) Including gold equivalent ounces.

 

    For the year ended June 30, 2008
    Driefontein   Kloof   Beatrix   South
Deep
  Tarkwa   Damang   Choco 10   St. Ives   Agnew   Cerro
Corona
  Corporate     Group
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)

Production Costs

  390.3   358.9   229.0   170.3   312.5   126.9   25.1   292.2   97.5   —     (6.6   1,996.1

Add:

                       

Corporate expenditure

  8.5   7.4   4.6   2.8   3.7   1.4   2.1   3.0   1.0   5.2   1.3      41.0

Employment termination costs

  2.2   1.9   2.4   9.4   —     —     —     0.3   —     —     —        16.2

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

  1.1   2.6   2.0   0.5   0.8   0.2   1.0   3.0   0.8   —     —        12.0
                                                 

Operating costs

  402.1   370.8   238.0   183.0   317.0   128.5   28.2   298.5   99.3   5.2   (5.3   2,065.3

Additions to property, plant and equipment

  139.8   123.5   79.3   107.9   169.7   10.8   7.4   83.6   24.1   348.4   59.9      1,154.4
                                                 

Notional cash expenditure

  541.9   494.3   317.3   290.9   486.7   139.3   35.6   382.1   123.4   353.6   54.6      3,219.7
                                                 

Gold produced (‘000oz)

  928.0   820.9   438.1   232.1   646.1   194.2   33.8   417.7   203.7   —     —        3,914.6

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

  584   602   724   1,253   753   717   1,053   915   606   —     —        822
                                                 

 

Note:

 

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R7.27 per $1.00.

 

148


Table of Contents
    For the year ended June 30, 2007
    Driefontein   Kloof   Beatrix   South
Deep
  Tarkwa   Damang     Choco 10   St. Ives   Agnew     Cerro
Corona
  Corporate     Group
    (in $ million except as otherwise noted) (1)

Production Costs

  361.2   344.9   211.1   99.0   261.5   109.0      33.7   212.5   83.1      —     (8.3   1,707.7

Add:

                       

Corporate expenditure

  8.6   5.7   3.8   2.9   3.0   2.0      3.7   2.3   0.8      —     5.6      38.4

Employment termination costs

  2.1   1.8   0.9   —     —     —        —     —     —        —     0.1      4.9

Accretion expense on provision for environmental habilitation

  3.6   2.0   1.8   0.1   0.6   (1.8   0.5   1.6   (2.0   —     —        6.4
                                                     

Operating costs

  375.5   354.4   217.6   102.0   265.1   109.2      37.9   216.4   81.9      —     (2.6   1,757.4

Additions to property, plant and equipment

  113.2   107.8   82.3   39.4   83.8   8.2      20.5   67.0   21.5      233.9   19.4      797.0
                                                     

Notional cash expenditure

  488.7   462.2   299.9   141.4   348.9   117.4      58.4   283.4   103.4      233.9   16.8      2,554.4
                                                     

Gold produced (‘000oz)

  1,016.5   922.9   543.4   163.2   697.2   187.9      54.6   486.9   212.4      —     —        4,285.0

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

  481   501   552   866   500   624      1,070   582   487      —     —        596
                                                     

 

Note:

 

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R7.20 per $1.00.

NCE decreased from $822 per ounce in fiscal 2008 to $763 per ounce in fiscal 2009, primarily because of significant decreases in additions to property, plant and equipment mainly due to the completion of the Cerro Corona project, the Tarkwa CIL expansion and the 23.9% weakening of the South African Rand.

One of Gold Fields’ short-term strategic objectives is to reduce its NCE per ounce to $725 (as calculated for management reporting purposes, using an exchange rate of R8.00 to $1.00). See “Information on the Company—Strategy—Strategic Review—Short-term Priorities”.

South African Power Disruptions

In South Africa, Gold Fields’ mining operations are dependent upon electrical power generated by the State utility, Eskom. Eskom holds a monopoly on power supply in the South African market. On January 25, 2008 as a result of an increase in demand exceeding available generating capacity, Gold Fields was forced to suspend all mining activity at its South African operations for several days, due to Eskom requesting that their Key Industrial Consumers, of which Gold Fields is one, reduce consumption to the minimum possible level. 50% of Gold Fields’ normal electrical consumption is required simply to pump, ventilate and refrigerate its operations. By mid-March 2008, total power available to Gold Fields’ South African mines had been restored to approximately 95% of the historical average consumption profile at Driefontein and Kloof, and 90% at the Beatrix and South Deep mines. Since then, Gold Fields has applied to Eskom for an additional power allocation and Eskom has indicated the additional requested capacity will be granted. Gold Fields has no reason to expect that the remainder will not be granted. Moreover, if a power conservation program is implemented, Gold Fields expects that the power allocations of each of its operations will be tradable. As a result, Gold Fields expects to be able to shift power usage from one mine to another as necessary. During fiscal 2009 Eskom increased power tariffs significantly, with an announced average rise of 31.3% and approximately 33.6% for industrial customers. Gold

 

149


Table of Contents

Fields has experienced real increases in power tariffs of 36%, an increase in excess of the announced average for industrial customers as a result of structural changes made to the large power user tariffs and a limitation of 15% on the increase to certain residential tariffs. Gold Fields expects further significant increases during the next several years as Eskom embarks on an electricity generation capacity expansion program. In fiscal 2009, power costs made up approximately 11% of the operating cost of production at the South African operations. See “Risk Factors—Some of Gold Fields’ power suppliers have forced it to halt or curtail activities at its mines, due to severe power disruptions. Power stoppages, fluctuations and power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations and its financial condition” and “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Driefontein Operation—Mining”.

Income and Mining Taxes

South Africa

Gold Fields pays taxes on its taxable income generated by its mining and non-mining tax entities. Under South African law, gold mining companies and non-gold mining companies are taxed at different rates. For tax purposes, GFIMSA is considered a gold mining company whereas Gold Fields itself and its other South African subsidiaries are non-gold mining companies. All non-gold mining companies pay tax at the statutory rate of 28% which was reduced from 29% for tax years ending on or after April 1, 2008, whereas gold mining companies pay tax at a rate which is calculated in terms of a formula which is explained below. In addition, non-gold mining companies are liable for Secondary Tax on Companies, or STC, which is currently charged at a rate of 10%, effective as from October 1, 2007 (previously 12.5%). STC is a tax on dividends declared by companies or closed corporations that are resident in South Africa. It differs from a dividend withholding tax in that it is a tax imposed on companies or closed corporations, and not on its shareholders. STC is payable on the amount of dividends declared by the company, less the sum of qualifying dividends received or accrued to the company during a particular time period (referred to as a dividend cycle).

Gold mining companies are subject to tax at different rates on their mining and non-mining income. Mining income is taxed on a formula basis, in terms of which the tax rate rises as the ratio of taxable income to gross mining revenue increases. The formula takes the form of y = a-ab/x, where y = the tax rate, a = the marginal tax rate, b = the quantum of revenue that is free of tax (which is a form of depletion allowance and is calculated as a percentage of mining revenue, with the currently applicable rate being effectively 5%) and x = the ratio of profit to revenue (expressed as a percentage).

Gold mining companies can elect to be exempt from STC and different formulae are used to calculate tax on mining income depending on whether an election has been made. If the election has been made, the current relevant values are a = 43 and b = 5. These values are effective for tax years ending on or after April 1, 2008. For tax years ending on or after April 1, 2008, the rate applicable to non-mining income for gold mining companies who have made the election is 35%.

As a result of the consolidation of the South African assets into GFIMSA in 2004, the mines are no longer separate tax entities but are treated as a single tax entity. However, unredeemed capital expenditure is still ring fenced between the divisions of GFIMSA, so that capital expenditure at one mine cannot be used to reduce taxable income from another mine. GFIMSA has elected to be exempt from STC. However, Gold Fields itself, as a holding company not conducting any gold mining operations, as well as its other non-mining South African subsidiaries, are not eligible to be exempt from STC. To the extent Gold Fields receives dividends from GFIMSA, such received dividends are offset against the amount of dividends paid by Gold Fields for purposes of calculating the net amount subject to STC.

After going through several draft Bills, the Mineral and Petroleum Resource Royalty Act, 2008, or the Royalty Act, was promulgated on November 24, 2008 and was due to come into operation on May 1, 2009. However, it was announced on June 1, 2009 that Act would not come into operation until March 1, 2010. The Royalty Act imposes a royalty on refined and unrefined minerals payable to the State.

 

150


Table of Contents

The royalty in respect of refined minerals (which include gold and platinum) is calculated by dividing earnings before interest and taxes, or EBIT, by the product of 12.5 times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. EBIT refers to taxable mining income (with certain exceptions such as no deduction for interest payable) before assessed losses but after capital expenditure. A maximum royalty of 5% has been introduced on refined minerals.

The royalty in respect of unrefined minerals (which include uranium) is calculated by dividing EBIT by the product of nine times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. A maximum royalty of 7% has been introduced on unrefined minerals.

Where unrefined mineral resources (such as uranium) constitute less than 10% in value of the total composite mineral resources, the royalty rate in respect of refined mineral resources may be used for all gross sales and a separate calculation of EBIT for each class of mineral resources is not required. For Gold Fields, this means that currently it will pay a royalty based on the refined minerals royalty calculation as applied to its gross revenue.

Ghana

Ghanaian resident companies are subject to tax on the basis of income derived from, accruing in, received in, or brought into Ghana. The standard corporate income tax rate is currently 25% having been reduced from 28% with effect from January 1, 2006. Because the mineral rights are owned by the state, the Tarkwa and Damang operations are also subject to a gold royalty of a minimum of 3% and a maximum of 6%, depending on the profitability of the mine, calculated on the basis of a formula which came into effect from July 4, 1986. This royalty is included in the income and mining tax benefit/(expense) line item in Gold Fields’ consolidated statements of operations. A reconstruction and development levy of 2.5% on operating profit that was introduced on January 1, 2001 was abolished from January 1, 2006.

On July 21, 2009, the Ghanaian government promulgated the National Fiscal Stabilization Levy Act, which introduces a levy of 5% on profits before tax of companies in selected industries, including mining. The Ghanaian government has indicated that this will only be applicable to the 2009 and 2010 calendar years, commencing for Gold Fields during the quarter ended September 30, 2009. The levy has been introduced as a temporary measure to raise additional revenue and meet critical government expenditure, and is not intended to be a permanent feature of the Ghanaian fiscal regime.

Tax depreciation of capital equipment operates under a capital allowance regime. The capital allowances consist of an initial allowance of 80% of the cost of the asset and the balance is added to the balance carried forward and depreciated at a rate of 50% per year on a declining balance basis. For the purposes of computing depreciation for the year following its acquisition, 5% of the cost of the mining asset is included in the balance, effectively allowing a total of 105% allowance on mining assets. Under the project development agreement entered into between the Ghanaian government and Gold Fields Ghana and the deed of warranty entered into between the Ghanaian government and Abosso, the government has agreed that no withholding tax shall be payable on any dividend or capital repayment declared by Gold Fields Ghana or Abosso which is due and payable to any shareholder not normally resident in Ghana.

Australia

Generally, Australia will impose tax on the worldwide income (including capital gains) of all of Gold Fields’ Australian incorporated and tax resident entities. The current income tax rate for companies is 30%. Exploration costs are deductible in full as incurred and other capital expenditure is deductible over the lives of the assets acquired. In addition, other expenditures, such as export market development, mine closure costs actually incurred and the defense of native title claims, may be deducted from income. The St. Ives and Agnew operations are also subject to a 2.5% gold royalty, which came into effect from July 1, 1998, because the mineral rights are owned by the state. This royalty is included in the income and mining tax benefit/(expense) line item in Gold Fields’ consolidated statements of operations.

 

151


Table of Contents

With effect from July 1, 2001 the Australian legislature introduced a Uniform Capital Allowance, which allows tax deductions for:

 

   

depreciation attributable to assets; and

 

   

certain other capital expenditures.

Gold Fields Australia and its wholly-owned Australian controlled entities have elected to be treated as a tax consolidated group for taxation purposes. As a tax consolidated group, a single tax return is lodged for the group based on the consolidated results of all companies within the group. The decision to implement the tax consolidation regime was made by Gold Fields during the 2005 fiscal year and applied as of July 1, 2003.

Withholding tax is payable on dividends, interest and royalties paid by Australian residents to non-residents. In the case of dividend payments to non-residents, withholding tax at a rate of 30% will apply. However, where the recipient of the dividend is a resident of a country with which Australia has concluded a double taxation agreement, the rate of withholding tax is generally limited to 15% (or 10% where the dividend is paid to a company’s parent company). Where dividends are paid out of profits that have been subject to Australian corporate tax there is no withholding tax, regardless of whether a double taxation agreement is in place.

Peru

Peru taxes resident individuals and domiciled corporations on their worldwide income. The corporate income tax rate applicable to domiciled corporations is 30% on taxable income. Capital gains are also taxed as ordinary income (except for resident individuals whom are levied with a 5% income tax rate).

Tax losses may be carried forward by a domiciled corporation using one of the following methods:

 

   

Losses may be carried forward and used in full in the subsequent four tax years. The balance of tax losses carried forward and not used during these four tax years is forfeited

 

   

Losses can be carried forward, and up to 50% of the tax loss may be set off against taxable income in a subsequent tax year. The balance of the assessed losses may be carried forward and applied on this basis until balance is fully used up, with no time limit on the carry forward.

On October 4, 2007, La Cima and its parent company, Gold Fields Corona (BVI) Limited, or Gold Fields Corona, signed stability agreements with the relevant governmental authorities in Peru. These agreements, among other things, guarantee the current tax regime, including a 4.1% withholding tax rate on dividends and 30% income tax rate, for a period of 10 years. In line with certain provisions of these agreements, Gold Fields Corona capitalized $404.5 million of inter-company loans in March 2008.

On June 24, 2004, the Peruvian Congress approved the Mining Royalty Law, which established a mining royalty that owners of mining concessions must pay to the Peruvian government for the exploitation of metallic and non-metallic resources. The mining royalties are calculated on a sliding scale with rates ranging from 1% to 3% of the value of mineral concentrates based on international market prices.

Exchange Rates

Gold Fields’ South African revenues and costs are very sensitive to the Rand/U.S. dollar exchange rate because revenues are generated using a gold price denominated in U.S. dollars, while the costs of the South African operations are incurred principally in Rand. Depreciation of the Rand against the U.S. dollar reduces Gold Fields’ average costs when they are translated into U.S. dollars, thereby increasing the operating margin of the South African operations. Conversely, appreciation of the Rand results in South African operating costs being translated into U.S. dollars at a lower Rand/U.S. dollar exchange rate, resulting in lower operating margins. The impact on profitability of any change in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar can be substantial.

 

152


Table of Contents

Furthermore, the exchange rates obtained when converting U.S. dollars to Rand are set by foreign exchange markets, over which Gold Fields has no control. For more information regarding fluctuations in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar, see “Key Information—Exchange Rates.” In fiscal 2009, movements in the U.S. dollar/Rand exchange rate had a significant impact on Gold Fields’ results of operations as the Rand weakened 23.9% against the U.S. dollar, from an average of 7.27 in fiscal 2008 to 9.01 in fiscal 2009.

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields had two different forward purchase contracts to manage its exposure to fluctuations in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar:

 

   

As a result of the draw down on January 31, 2007 of $550 million under a $1.8 billion bridge loan facility entered into to close-out the Western Areas gold derivative structure and refinance certain working capital loans, U.S. dollar/Rand forward cover was purchased during the fiscal quarter ended March 31, 2007 in an amount of $550.8 million for settlement August 6, 2007, at an average forward rate of R7.3279 based on a spot rate of R7.1918. Subsequently, that cover was extended for periods of between one and three months during fiscal 2008 and 2009. The cover was reduced as a result of loan repayments of $60.8 million and $172.0 million made on December 6, 2007 and December 31, 2007 respectively. During fiscal 2009, a further amount of $44 million was repaid against the loan and the forward cover was reduced by the same amount. The balance of the $274 million forward cover was extended to July 15, 2009, being the next repayment date on the loan, at an average forward rate of R8.0893. On September 17, 2009, the forward cover of $274 million was settled as a result of the decision to repay the outstanding loan amount. For accounting purposes, this forward cover has been designated as a hedging instrument. As a result the gains and losses are accounted for under foreign exchange gains/(losses), along with gains and losses on the underlying loan that has been hedged. The forward cover points are deemed to be an interest cost and are therefore accounted for as part of interest. Subsequent to year end this contract was closed out; and

 

   

In October 2008, $150 million of expected gold revenue for the December quarter was sold forward on behalf of the South African operations. In December 2008, the $150 million was extended to the March quarter at an average forward rate of R10.3818. During the March quarter $30 million was settled at a gain for the quarter of $0.7 million. The outstanding balance of $120 million was extended into the June quarter at an average forward rate of R10.2595. In the June quarter, the remaining forward cover of $120 million was partly settled by delivering U.S. dollar proceeds into the contract and the balance closed out, resulting in a gain of $6.0 million. This was accounted for in the income statement under realized gain/(loss) on financial instruments.

Gold Fields’ operations are also affected by movements in the Australian dollar/U.S. dollar exchange rate. In October 2008, $70 million of expected gold revenue for the December quarter was sold forward on behalf of the Australian operations. $14 million of the forward sales instruments were settled by delivering U.S. dollar proceeds into the contract during the December quarter. In December 2008, $56 million was extended to the March quarter at an average forward rate of A$0.6650. During the March quarter an additional $8 million of the same instruments were taken out. The total of $64 million was extended into the June quarter at an average forward rate of A$0.6445. In the June quarter the forward cover of $64 million was partly settled by delivering U.S. dollar proceeds into the contract and the balance closed out, resulting in a gain of $1.4 million. This was accounted for in the income statement under realized gain/(loss) on financial instruments.

See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Foreign Currency Sensitivity—Foreign Currency Hedging Experience”.

With respect to the Australian operations, Gold Fields expects that the effect of fluctuations in the value of the Australian dollar against the U.S. dollar will be similar to that for the Rand, with weakness in the Australian dollar resulting in improved earnings for Gold Fields and strength in the Australian dollar producing the opposite result. In order for the Group to participate in potential Australian dollar appreciation, a strip of quarterly maturing Australian dollar/U.S. dollar call options were purchased in fiscal 2005. The last of these instruments

 

153


Table of Contents

matured during fiscal 2007. Gold Fields accounted for these financial instruments on a mark-to-market basis, using exchange rates prevailing at the end of the relevant accounting period.

With respect to its operations in Ghana and Peru, a substantial portion of Gold Fields’ operating costs (including wages) are either directly incurred in U.S. dollars or are determined according to a formula by which costs are indexed to the U.S. dollar. Accordingly, fluctuations in the Ghanaian Cedi and Peruvian Nuevos Soles do not materially impact operating results for the Ghana and Peru operations.

Inflation

It is possible that a period of significant inflation in South Africa could adversely affect Gold Fields’ results and financial condition. However, because the majority of Gold Fields’ costs at the South African operations are in Rand, while its revenues from gold sales are in U.S. dollars, the extent to which the Rand devalues against the U.S. dollar will offset the impact of South African inflation. In Ghana and Peru, Gold Fields’ operations are not significantly impacted by Ghanaian and Peruvian inflation because a substantial portion of Gold Fields’ costs are either incurred directly in U.S. dollars or are determined according to a formula by which U.S. dollar amounts are converted into Ghanaian Cedi and Peruvian Soles. Gold Fields expects that the impact of Australian inflation will be similar to that of South Africa.

South African, Ghanaian and Peruvian Economic and Political Environment

Gold Fields is a South African company and a substantial portion of its operations, based on gold production, are in South Africa. As a result, Gold Fields is subject to various economic, fiscal, monetary and political policies and factors that generally affect South African companies. See “Risk Factors—Economic or political instability in the countries or regions where Gold Fields operates may have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.”

South African companies, including Gold Fields, are subject to exchange control restrictions which require companies to repatriate some or all of their offshore profits. While exchange controls have been relaxed in recent years, South African companies remain subject to restrictions on their ability to deploy capital outside of the Southern African Common Monetary Area. See “Information on the Company—Regulatory and Environmental Matters—South Africa—Exchange Controls.”

Gold Fields also has significant operations in Ghana and is therefore subject to various economic, fiscal, monetary and political policies and factors that affect companies operating in Ghana. See “Risk Factors— Economic or political instability in the countries or regions where Gold Fields operates may have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.” In addition, pursuant to an agreement which it has entered into with the Ghanaian government with respect to the Tarkwa mine, Gold Fields is required to repatriate at least 20% of the revenues derived from the Tarkwa mine to Ghana and either use such amounts in Ghana or maintain them in a Ghanaian bank account. Abosso is currently obligated to repatriate 25% of its revenue to Ghana, although the level of repatriation under the deed of warranty between Abosso and the government of Ghana is subject to renegotiation every two years. See “Information on the Company—Regulatory and Environmental Matters—Ghana—Exchange Controls.” Although it has been more than two years since the last set of negotiations with the Bank of Ghana regarding the Damang mine’s level of repatriation, the next set of negotiations has not been scheduled pending the execution of a new development agreement with the government of Ghana. Gold Fields currently repatriates on average approximately 40% of revenues from the Ghana operations to Ghana, annually. In fiscal 2009, Gold Fields repatriated approximately 84% to fund its capital expenditures and capital waste program in Ghana. However, Gold Fields does not expect repatriation to remain at this level in the future. While management has no reason to believe that the repatriation level will increase as a result of the next set of negotiations, there is no agreed ceiling on the repatriation level, and it could be increased. Any increase could adversely affect Gold Fields’ ability to use the cash flow from the Damang mine outside Ghana, including to fund working costs and capital expenditures at other operations, to provide funds for acquisitions and to repay principal and interest on indebtedness.

 

154


Table of Contents

In addition, Gold Fields has operations in Australia and Peru and is therefore subject to various economic, fiscal, monetary and political policies and factors that affect companies, and particularly mining companies, operating in Australia and Peru.

See “Risk Factors—Economic or political instability in the countries or regions where Gold Fields operates may have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.”

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

Gold Fields’ significant accounting policies are more fully described in note 2 to its audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this annual report. Some of Gold Fields’ accounting policies require the application of significant judgments and estimates by management that can affect the amounts reported in the financial statements. By their nature, these judgments are subject to a degree of uncertainty and are based on Gold Fields’ historical experience, terms of existing contracts, management’s view on trends in the gold mining industry, information from outside sources and other assumptions that Gold Fields considers to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results could differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

Gold Fields’ significant accounting policies that are subject to significant judgments, estimates and assumptions are summarized below.

Business combinations

Management accounts for its business acquisitions under the purchase method of accounting. The total value of consideration paid for acquisitions is allocated to the underlying net assets acquired, based on their respective estimated fair values determined by using internal or external valuations. Management uses a number of valuation methods to determine the fair value of assets and liabilities acquired including discounted cash flows, external market values, valuations on recent transactions or a combination thereof and others and believes that it uses the most appropriate measure or a combination of measures to value each asset or liability. In addition, management believes that it uses the most appropriate valuation assumptions underlying each of those valuation methods based on current information available including discount rates, market risk rates, entity risk rates, cash flow assumptions and others. The accounting policy for valuation of business acquisitions is considered critical because judgments made in determining the estimated fair value and expected useful lives assigned to each class of assets and liabilities acquired can significantly impact the value of the asset or liability, including the impact on deferred taxes, the respective amortization periods and ultimately net profit. Therefore the use of other valuation methods, as well as other assumptions underlying these valuation methods, could significantly impact the determination of financial position and the results of operations.

Depreciation, depletion and amortization of mining assets

Depreciation, depletion and amortization charges are calculated using the units-of-production method and are based on Gold Fields’ current gold production as a percentage of total expected gold production over the lives of Gold Fields’ mines. An item is considered to be produced at the time it is removed from the mine. The lives of the mines are estimated by Gold Fields’ mineral resources department using interpretations of mineral reserves, as determined in accordance with the SEC’s industry guide number 7.

Depreciation, depletion and amortization at Gold Fields’ South African operations are calculated using above-infrastructure proven and probable reserves only, which because of their reserve base and respective long lives (which range from 13 to 30 years), are less sensitive to change in reserve assumptions. Accordingly, at these locations, it is Gold Fields’ policy to update its depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations only once the new ore reserve declarations have been approved by Gold Field’s Board. However, if Gold Fields’ management becomes aware of significant changes in its above-infrastructure reserves ahead of the scheduled

 

155


Table of Contents

updates, management would not hesitate to immediately update its depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations and then subsequently notify the Board.

A similar approach is followed at Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana and Peru, due to the longer life of the primary orebody. At Gold Fields’ Australian operations, where mine-life ranges from 4 to 5 years, proven and probable reserves used for the calculation of depreciation, depletion and amortization are more susceptible to changes in reserve estimates. At these locations, Gold Fields’ depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations are updated on a more regular basis (at least quarterly) for all known changes in proven and probable reserves. The nature of the orebody, and the on-going information being gathered in connection with the orebody, facilitates these updates.

The estimates of the total expected future lives of Gold Fields’ mines could be different from the actual amount of gold mined in the future and the actual lives of the mines due to changes in the factors used in determining Gold Fields’ mineral reserves. Changes in management’s estimates of the total expected future lives of Gold Fields’ mines would therefore impact the depreciation, depletion and amortization charge recorded in Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements. Changes due to acquisitions, sales or closures of shafts expected to have a material impact on Gold Fields’ depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations, are incorporated in those calculations as soon as they become known.

Impairment of long-lived assets

Gold Fields reviews and tests the carrying amounts of assets when events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. Assets are grouped at the lowest level for which identifiable cash flows are largely independent of the cash flows of other assets and liabilities. The lowest level at which such cash flows are generated are generally at an individual operating mine, even if the individual operating mine is included in a larger mine complex.

If there are indications that an impairment may have occurred, Gold Fields prepares estimates of expected future cash flows for each group of assets. Expected future cash flows reflect:

 

   

estimated sales proceeds from the production and sale of recoverable ounces of gold contained in proven and probable reserves;

 

   

expected future commodity prices and currency exchange rates (considering historical averages, current prices, forward pricing curves and related factors). In impairment assessments conducted in fiscal 2009, the Group used an expected future market gold price of $950 per ounce, and expected future market exchange rates of R8.02 to $1.00 for fiscal 2010 and 2011 and R9.17 to $1.00 thereafter and A$1.27 to $1.00 for fiscal 2010 and 2011 and A$1.16 to $1.00 thereafter;

 

   

expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

 

   

expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves.

Gold Fields records a reduction of a group of assets to fair value as a charge to earnings if expected future cash flows are less than the carrying amount. The process of determining fair value is subjective as gold mining companies typically trade at a market capitalization that is based on a multiple of net asset value and requires management to make numerous assumptions. Gold Fields estimates fair value by discounting the expected future cash flows using a discount factor that reflects a market-related rate of interest for a term consistent with the period of expected cash flows.

Expected future cash flows are inherently uncertain, and could materially change over time. They are significantly affected by reserve estimates, together with economic factors such as gold prices and currency exchange rates, estimates of costs to produce reserves and future sustaining capital.

 

156


Table of Contents

Because of the significant capital investment that is required at many mines, if an impairment occurs, it could materially impact earnings. Due to the long-life nature of many mines, the difference between total estimated discounted net cash flows and carrying value can be substantial. An impairment is only recorded when the carrying amount of a long-lived asset exceeds the total estimated discounted net cash flows. Therefore, although the value of a mine may decline gradually over multiple reporting periods, the application of impairment accounting rules could lead to recognition of the full amount of the decline in value in one period. Due to the highly uncertain nature of future cash flows, the determination of when to record an impairment charge can be very subjective. Management makes this determination using available evidence taking into account current expectations for each mining property.

For acquired exploration-stage properties, the purchase price is capitalized, but post-acquisition exploration expenditures are expensed. The future economic viability of exploration stage properties largely depends upon the outcome of exploration activity, which can take a number of years to complete for large properties. Management monitors the results of exploration activity over time to assess whether an impairment may have occurred. The measurement of any impairment is made more difficult because there is not an active market for exploration properties, and because it is not possible to use discounted cash flow techniques due to the very limited information that is available to accurately model future cash flows. In general, if an impairment occurs at an exploration stage property, it would probably have minimal value and most of the acquisition cost may have to be written down.

Gold Fields recorded no impairment charges on its long-lived assets during fiscal 2009 or fiscal 2007 and recorded impairment charges amounting to $11.4 million in fiscal 2008.

Impairment of goodwill

Gold Fields acquired the South Deep mine on December 1, 2006. Goodwill related to this acquisition is reflected in the balance sheet in the U.S. dollar reporting currency at $1,084.7 million. Gold Fields performs its annual impairment test of goodwill related to the South Deep mine on June 30 each year.

Under U.S. GAAP, the goodwill impairment test consists of two steps. The first step, which compares the reporting unit’s fair value to its carrying amount, is used as a screening process to identify potential goodwill impairment. If the carrying amount of a reporting unit exceeds the reporting unit’s fair value, the second step of the impairment test must be completed to measure the amount of the reporting unit’s goodwill impairment loss, if any. During this step, the reporting unit’s fair value is assigned to the reporting unit’s assets and liabilities, using the initial acquisition accounting guidance in FAS 141(R), in order to determine the implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill. The implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill is then compared with the carrying amount of the reporting unit’s goodwill to determine the goodwill impairment loss to be recognized, if any.

The process for determining fair value of the South Deep mine is subjective as gold mining companies typically trade at a market capitalization that is based on a multiple of net asset value and requires management to make numerous assumptions. The net asset value represents a discounted cash flow valuation based on expected future cash flows. The expected future cash flows used to determine the fair value of the reporting unit are inherently uncertain and could materially change over time. They are significantly affected by a number of factors including, but not limited to, reserves and production estimates, together with economic factors such as the spot gold price and foreign currency exchange rates, estimates of production costs, future capital expenditure and discount rates. Therefore it is possible that outcomes within the next financial year that are materially different from the assumptions used in the impairment testing process could require an adjustment to the carrying values.

 

157


Table of Contents

Management’s estimates and assumptions to estimate the fair value of the South Deep reporting unit include:

 

   

estimated sales proceeds from the production and sale of recoverable ounces of gold contained in proven and probable reserves;

 

   

expected future commodity prices and currency exchange rates (considering historical averages, current prices, forward pricing curves and related factors). In impairment assessments conducted in fiscal 2009, the Group used an expected future market gold price of $950 per ounce, and expected future market exchange rate of R8.02 to $1.00 for fiscal 2010 and 2011 and R9.17 to $1.00 thereafter;

 

   

expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

 

   

expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves.

Gold Fields has determined that the fair value of the South Deep mine is considered in excess of its carrying value of $2,984.1 million and the goodwill related to the South Deep mine was therefore not considered impaired under U.S. GAAP.

Deferred taxation

Management establishes a valuation allowance for certain deferred tax assets where cumulative losses require a valuation allowance or where management believes that they will not be realized based on projections. These determinations are based on the projected taxable income and realization of tax allowances and tax losses. In the event that these tax assets are not realized, an adjustment to the valuation allowance would be required, which would be charged to income in the period that the determination was made. Likewise, should management determine that Gold Fields would be able to realize tax assets in the future in excess of the recorded amount, an adjustment to reduce the valuation allowance would be recorded generally as a credit to income in the period that the determination is made.

Gold Fields is periodically required to estimate the tax basis of assets and liabilities. Where tax laws and regulations are either unclear or subject to varying interpretations, it is possible that changes in these estimates could occur that materially affect the amounts of deferred income tax assets and liabilities recorded in the consolidated financial statements. Changes in deferred tax assets and liabilities generally have a direct impact on earnings in the period of changes. See note 6 to the audited consolidated financial statements which appear elsewhere in this annual report.

Derivative financial instruments

The determination of the fair value of derivative financial instruments, when marked-to-market, takes into account estimates such as interest rates, commodity prices and foreign currency exchange rates under prevailing market conditions, depending on the nature of the financial derivatives. These estimates may differ materially from actual interest rates and foreign currency exchange rates prevailing at the maturity dates of the financial derivatives and, therefore, may materially influence the values assigned to the financial derivatives, which may result in a charge to or an increase in Gold Fields’ earnings through maturity of the financial derivatives.

Environmental rehabilitation costs

Gold Fields makes provision for environmental rehabilitation costs and related liabilities when environmental disturbances occur based on management’s interpretations of current environmental and regulatory requirements. The provisions are recorded by discounting the expected cash flows associated with the environmental rehabilitation using a discount factor that reflects a credit-adjusted, risk-free rate of interest. The principal factors that can cause expected cash flows to change are: the construction of new processing facilities; changes in the quantities of material in reserves and a corresponding change in the life of mine plan; changing ore characteristics that ultimately impact the environment; changes in water quality that impact the extent of

 

158


Table of Contents

water treatment required; and changes in laws and regulations governing the protection of the environment. In general, as the end of the mine life becomes nearer, the reliability of expected cash flows increases, but earlier in the mine life, the estimation of rehabilitation liabilities is inherently more subjective. Significant judgments and estimates are made when estimating the fair value of rehabilitation liabilities. In addition, expected cash flows relating to rehabilitation liabilities could occur over periods up to the planned life of mine at the time the estimate is made and the assessment of the extent of environmental remediation work is highly subjective. While management believes that the environmental rehabilitation provisions made are adequate and that the interpretations applied are appropriate, the amounts estimated for the future liabilities may, when considering the factors discussed above, differ materially from the costs that will actually be incurred to rehabilitate Gold Fields’ mine sites in the future.

Employee benefits

Management’s determination of Gold Fields’ obligation and expense for pension and provident funds, as well as post-retirement healthcare liabilities, depends on the selection of certain assumptions used by actuaries to calculate the amounts. These assumptions are described in note 16 to Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements and include, among others, the discount rate, healthcare inflation costs and rates of increase in compensation costs. Actual results that differ from management’s assumptions are accumulated and charged over future periods, which will generally affect Gold Fields’ recognized expense and recorded obligation in future periods. While management believes that these assumptions are appropriate, significant changes in the assumptions may materially affect Gold Fields’ pension and other post-retirement obligations as well as future expenses, which will result in an impact on earnings in the periods that the changes in the assumptions occur.

Stockpiles, gold-in-process and product inventories

Costs that are incurred in or benefit the production process are accumulated as stockpiles, gold-in-process, ore on leach pads and product inventories. Net realizable value tests are performed at least annually and represent the estimated future sales price of the product based on prevailing and long-term metals prices, less estimated costs to complete production and bring the product to sale.

Stockpiles are measured by estimating the number of tons added and removed from the stockpile, the number of contained gold ounces based on assay data, and the estimated recovery percentage based on the expected processing method. Stockpile tonnages are verified by periodic surveys.

Although the quantities of recoverable metal are reconciled by comparing the grades of ore to the quantities of gold actually recovered (metallurgical balancing), the nature of the process inherently limits the ability to precisely monitor recoverability levels. As a result, the metallurgical balancing process is constantly monitored and the engineering estimates are refined based on actual results over time.

Concentrate inventories represent concentrate available for shipment. The concentrate inventory is valued at the average cost, including an allocated portion of amortization. Costs are added to and removed from the concentrate inventory based on tons of concentrate and are valued at the lower of average cost and net realizable value. Management’s determination of the percentage gold and copper content and the total quantity by weight of gold and copper in the concentrate depends on assay and laboratory results for the content and survey for the quantity.

Share-based compensation

Effective July 1, 2005, Gold Fields adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123(R), Share-Based Payment, or SFAS 123(R), for all share option grants subsequent to that date. SFAS 123(R) requires Gold Fields to determine the fair value of share options as of the date of the grant, which is then amortized as share-based compensation expense in the income statement over the vesting period of the option grant. Gold Fields has determined the fair value of all its options grants (a) prior to, but not yet vested as of, July 1, 2005, based on the grant-date fair value estimated in accordance with the original provisions of SFAS 123(R), and

 

159


Table of Contents

(b) subsequent to July 1, 2005 based on the grant-date fair value estimated in accordance with SFAS 123(R), using the Black-Scholes or Monte Carlo simulation valuation model, which require Gold Fields to make assumptions regarding the estimated term of the option, share price volatility, expected forfeiture rates and Gold Fields’ expected dividend yield. While Gold Fields’ management believes that these assumptions are appropriate, the use of different assumptions could have a material impact on the fair value of the option grant and the related recognition of share-based compensation expense in the consolidated income statement. Gold Fields’ options have characteristics significantly different from those of traded options and therefore fair values may also differ.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

In December 2007, the Financial Accounting Services Board (“FASB”) issued FASB Statement No. 141(R), “Business Combinations”, or SFAS 141(R), which amends SFAS 141, and provides revised guidance for recognizing and measuring identifiable assets and goodwill acquired, liabilities assumed, and any non-controlling interest in the acquiree. It also provides disclosure requirements to enable users of the financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business combination. In April 2009, the FASB also published FSP No. FAS 141(R)-1, “Accounting for Assets Acquired and Liabilities Assumed in a Business Combination that Arise from Contingencies”, or FSP FAS 141(R)-1. FSP FAS 141(R)-1 provides further guidance about recognition of assets and liabilities associated with contingencies. SFAS 141(R) and FSP FAS 141(R)-1 are effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009 and are to be applied prospectively. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement and staff position on its financial position and results of operations.

In December 2007, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 160, “Non-controlling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements—an amendment of ARB No. 51”, or SFAS 160, which establishes accounting and reporting standards pertaining to ownership interests in subsidiaries held by parties other than the parent, the amount of net income attributable to the parent and to the no controlling interest, changes in a parent’s ownership interest, and the valuation of any retained no controlling equity investment when a subsidiary is deconsolidated. SFAS 160 also establishes disclosure requirements that clearly identify and distinguish between the interests of the parent and the interests of the no controlling owners. The provisions of SFAS 160 are effective for the Group beginning July, 2009. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on its financial position and results of operations.

In March 2008, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 161, “Disclosures about Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities an amendment of FASB Statement No. 133”, or SFAS 161. SFAS 161 requires enhanced disclosures about an entity’s derivative and hedging activities with the aim of improving transparency of financial reporting. The provisions of SFAS 161 are effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009. The Group does not expect the adoption of SFAS 161 to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

In April 2008, the FASB published FSP No. FAS 142-3 “Determination of the Useful Life of Intangible Assets”, or FSP FAS 142-3. The FSP reflects the FASB’s recognition of potential inconsistencies in the useful life of intangible assets recognized under SFAS No. 142 “Intangible Assets” and the period of expected cash flows used to measure the fair value of the asset under SFAS No. 141 (revised 2007) “Business Combinations.” The FSP allows an entity to use its own assumptions about renewal or extension of an arrangement even when there is likely to be substantial cost or material modifications associated with such terms in determining the appropriate useful life for intangible assets. The provisions of FSP FAS 142-3 are effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009. The Group does not expect the adoption of FSP FAS 142-3 to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

In May 2008, the FASB published FSP No. APB 14-1,” Accounting for Convertible Debt Instruments That May Be Settled in Cash upon Conversion (Including Partial Cash Settlement)”, or FSP APB 14-1. FSP APB 14-1 applies to convertible debt instruments that, by their stated terms, may be settled in cash (or other assets) upon conversion, including partial cash settlement, unless the embedded conversion option is required to be separately

 

160


Table of Contents

accounted for as a derivative under SFAS 133 “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities”, or SFAS 133. Convertible debt instruments within the scope of FSP APB 14-1 are not addressed by the existing APB 14. FSP APB 14-1 requires that the liability and equity components of convertible debt instruments within the scope of FSP APB 14-1 be separately accounted for in a manner that reflects the entity’s nonconvertible debt borrowing rate. This will require an allocation of the convertible debt proceeds between the liability component and the embedded conversion option (that is, the equity component). The difference between the principal amount of the debt and the amount of the proceeds allocated to the liability component would be reported as a debt discount and subsequently amortized to earnings over the instrument’s expected life using the effective interest method. FSP APB 14-1 is effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009. The Group does not expect the adoption of FSP APB 14-1 to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

In June 2008, the Emerging Issues Task Force, or EITF, reached consensus on Issue No. 07-5, “Determining Whether an Instrument (or Embedded Feature) Is Indexed to an Entity’s Own Stock”, or EITF 07-5. EITF 07-5 clarifies the determination of whether an instrument (or an embedded feature) is indexed to an entity’s own stock, which would qualify as a scope exception under SFAS 133. EITF 07-5 is effective for the Group’s fiscal years beginning July 1, 2009. Early adoption for an existing instrument is not permitted. The Group does not expect the adoption of EITF 07-5 to have a material impact on the Group’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.

In November 2008, the EITF reached consensus on Issue No. 08-6, “Equity Method Investment Accounting Considerations”, or EITF 08-6, which clarifies the accounting for certain transactions and impairment considerations involving equity method investments. The intent of EITF 08-6 is to provide guidance on determining the initial carrying value of an equity method investment, performing an impairment assessment of an underlying indefinite-lived intangible asset of an equity method investment, accounting for an equity method investee’s issuance of shares, and accounting for a change in an investment from the equity method to the cost method. EITF 08-6 is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2009 and is to be applied prospectively. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on the Group’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.

In December 2008, the FASB issued FSP No. FAS 132(R)-1, “Employers’ Disclosures about Post-Retirement Benefit Plan Assets”, or FSP SFAS 132(R)-1, which amends FASB Statement No. 132 “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Post-Retirement Benefits”, or SFAS 132, to provide guidance on an employer’s disclosures about plan assets of a defined benefit pension or other post retirement plan. The objective of FSP SFAS 132(R)-1 is to require more detailed disclosures about employers’ plan assets, including employers’ investment strategies, major categories of plan assets, concentrations of risk within plan assets, and valuation techniques used to measure the fair value of plan assets. FSP SFAS 132(R)-1 is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2009. Upon initial application, the provisions of this FSP are not required for earlier periods that are presented for comparative purposes. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on the Group’s defined benefit pension and post-retirement benefit plan disclosures.

In June 2009, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 167, “Amendments to FASB Interpretation No. 46(R)”, or SFAS 167 to amend the consolidation guidance for variable interest entities. SFAS 167 addresses the need for reconsideration of whether an entity is a variable interest entity, requires additional qualitative considerations about the determination of the primary beneficiary of variable interest entities and prescribes disclosures about variable interest entities. SFAS 167 is effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2010. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on its financial position and results of operations.

In June 2009, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 168 “The FASB Accounting Standards Codification and the Hierarchy of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles” as the single source of authoritative GAAP to be applied by nongovernmental entities. The Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) is a new structure

 

161


Table of Contents

which took existing accounting pronouncements and organized them by accounting topic. Relevant authoritative literature issued by the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) and select SEC staff interpretations and administrative literature was also included in the ASC. All other accounting guidance not included in the ASC is non-authoritative. The ASC is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2009. The adoption of the ASC is not expected to have an impact on the Group’s consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

In August 2009, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update 2009-5 “Measuring Liabilities at Fair Value” (“ASU 2009-5”). ASU 2009-5 provides updates on the guidance for fair value measurements and disclosure in the ASC to further define fair value of liabilities. This update provides clarification for circumstances in which: (i) a quoted price in an active market for the identical liability is not available; (ii) the liability has a restriction that prevents its transfer; and (iii) the identical liability is traded as an asset in an active market in which no adjustments to the quoted price of an asset are required. The updated guidance is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2010. The Group is evaluating the potential impact of adopting this guidance on the Group’s consolidated financial position, results of operations and cash flows.

Results of Operations

Years Ended June 30, 2009 and 2008

Revenues

Product sales increased by $22.1 million, or 0.7%, from $3,206.2 million in fiscal 2008 to $3,228.3 million in fiscal 2009. The increase in product sales was primarily due to an increase in the average realized gold price of 6.8% from $819 per ounce in fiscal 2008 to $875 per ounce in fiscal 2009, partially offset by a decrease of approximately 0.223 million ounces, or 5.7%, in total gold sold, from 3.914 million ounces in fiscal 2008 to 3.691 million ounces in fiscal 2009. At the Cerro Corona operation in Peru copper production was converted to equivalent gold ounces on a monthly basis using average copper and gold prices for the month in which the copper was produced.

At the South African operations, gold production decreased from 2.42 million ounces in fiscal 2008 to 2.04 million ounces in fiscal 2009. At Driefontein, gold output decreased by 10.6% from 0.93 million ounces to 0.83 million ounces as a result of lower underground volumes mined and processed, exacerbated by lower underground yield. The lower volumes were mainly due to the need to address the accumulating backlog in implementing secondary support and the suspension of significant pillar mining, for safety related reasons. Gold output at Kloof decreased by 21.7% from 0.82 million ounces to 0.64 million ounces primarily as a result of the Main Shaft refurbishment project during the first half of the year and safety related stoppages. At Beatrix, gold output decreased 10.7% from 0.44 million ounces to 0.39 million ounces mainly due to a decline in volumes mined and processed due to limited flexibility and lower than planned grades. At South Deep, production decreased from 0.23 million ounces in fiscal 2008 to 0.17 million ounces for fiscal 2009 due to the termination of mining of the VCR as a result of a major geological fault and rehabilitation of the two main access ramps.

At the international operations, total gold production increased from 1.46 million ounces in fiscal 2008 to 1.65 million ounces in fiscal 2009. This was mainly due to the inclusion of 0.22 million ounces of gold equivalent production from Cerro Corona. At Tarkwa, the decrease of 5.2% from 0.65 million ounces to 0.61 million ounces was due to commissioning issues at the new CIL plant, which affected the whole plant. At Damang, production increased by 3.2% from 0.194 million ounces to 0.200 million ounces due to the build-up of the crushed ore stockpile in fiscal 2008, which resulted in a more consistent feed to the mill in fiscal 2009. At St. Ives, the increase of 2.5% from 0.42 million ounces to 0.43 million ounces was primarily due to increased production from Belleisle and Cave Rocks underground mines. At Agnew, gold production was 5.7% lower, declining from 0.21 million ounces to 0.19 million ounces, due to the depletion of Songvang low grade stockpiles. Total gold sold and total gold produced are the same at all the operations with the exception of Cerro Corona, where there may be differences where sales are recognized once concentrate is loaded onto a ship for transport to the refineries.

 

162


Table of Contents

Costs and Expenses

The following table sets out Gold Fields’ total ounces sold and weighted average total cash costs and total production costs per ounce for fiscal 2008 and fiscal 2009.

 

    Fiscal 2008   Fiscal 2009   Percentage
increase/
(decrease) in
unit total
cash costs
    Percentage
increase/
(decrease) in
unit total
production
costs
 
    Gold sold   Total cash
costs (1)
  Total
production
costs (2)
  Gold sold   Total cash
costs (1)
  Total
production
costs (2)
   
    (‘000 oz)   ($/oz)   (‘000 oz)   ($/oz)   (%)  

South Africa

               

Driefontein

  928   414   515   830   450   541   8.7      5.0   

Kloof

  821   432   543   643   511   643   18.3      18.4   

Beatrix

  438   520   615   391   557   684   7.1      11.2   

South Deep

  232   768   919   175   717   902   (6.6   (1.8

Ghana

               

Tarkwa (3)

  646   492   553   612   601   682   22.2      23.3   

Damang (4)

  194   658   678   200   671   719   2.0      6.0   

Peru

               

Cerro Corona (5)

  —     —     —     219   369   553   —        —     

Venezuela

               

Choco 10 (6)

  33   726   726   —     —     —     —        —     

Australia (7)

               

St. Ives

  418   661   841   428   654   818   (1.1   (2.7

Agnew

  204   414   538   192   404   490   (2.4   (8.9

Total (8)(9)

  3,914   —     —     3,690   —     —     —        —     

Weighted average

  —     505   610   —     538   659   6.5      8.0   

 

Notes:

 

(1) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 3.”

 

(2) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4.”

 

(3) In fiscal 2008 and 2009, 0.459 million ounces and 0.435 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.

 

(4) In fiscal 2008 and 2009, 0.138 million ounces and 0.142 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Damang operation.

 

(5) In fiscal 2009, 0.176 million ounces of sales were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation.

 

(6) In fiscal 2008, 0.031 million ounces of sales were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Choco 10 operation.

 

(7) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.

 

(8) In fiscal 2008 and 2009, 3.669 million ounces and 3.414 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Venezuela operations.

 

(9) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

 

163


Table of Contents

The following tables set out a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total cash costs and total production costs for fiscal 2009 and fiscal 2008.

 

      For the year ended June 30, 2009
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
  Tarkwa     Damang   Cerro
Corona
    St. Ives   Agnew   Corporate     Group
    (in $ millions except as otherwise noted) (1)

Production Costs

  378.9      330.6      218.4      128.3   359.4      130.7   79.1      288.9   84.6   (0.3   1,998.6

Less:

                     

G&A other than corporate costs

  8.7      6.9      4.7      3.0   10.1      1.6   2.5      4.1   1.8   —        43.4

GIP adjustment (2)

  (1.8   (2.5   (2.0   —     (2.7   —     (1.1   14.7   9.6   (0.3   13.9

Exploration

  —        —        —        —     —        —     —        —     —     —        —  

Plus:

                     

Employee termination costs

  1.8      2.5      2.0      —     —        —     —        0.6   0.2   —        7.1

Royalties

  —        —        —        —     16.1      5.3   2.6      9.5   4.2   —        37.7

Total cash costs

  373.8      328.7      217.7      125.3   368.1      134.4   80.3      280.2   77.6   —        1,986.1

Plus:

                     

Amortization (2)

  70.9      81.5      48.2      31.3   48.9      9.4   38.8      69.1   16.2   16.2      430.5

Rehabilitation

  4.0      3.5      1.8      1.0   0.8      0.2   1.3      1.0   0.3   —        13.9

Total production costs

  448.7      413.7      267.7      157.6   417.8      144.0   120.4      350.3   94.1   16.2      2,430.5

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

  829.9      643.0      391.1      174.7   612.4      200.4   219.3      428.3   192.1   —        3,691.2

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

  829.9      643.0      391.1      174.7   612.4      200.4   217.8      428.3   192.1   —        3,689.7

Total cash costs ($/oz) (4)

  450      511      557      717   601      671   369      654   404   —        538

Total production costs ($/oz) (5)

  541      643      684      902   682      719   553      818   490   —        659

 

Notes:

 

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R9.01 per $1.00.

 

(2) Non-cash portion of Gold in Progress, or GIP, adjustments shown separately. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.

 

(3) In fiscal 2009, 3.414 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Cerro Corona operations.

 

(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 3.”

 

(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4.”

 

164


Table of Contents
    For the year ended June 30, 2008
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang   Choco 10     St. Ives   Agnew   Corporate     Group
    (in $ millions except as otherwise noted) (1)

Production Costs

  390.2      358.9      229.0      170.3      312.5      126.9   25.1      292.2   97.5   (6.5   1,996.1

Less:

                     

G&A other than corporate costs

  10.1      8.1      5.8      1.9      13.4      1.1   2.0      5.8   2.0   (6.5   43.7

GIP adjustment (2)

  (2.2   (1.9   (2.4   (0.4   (2.6   —     (0.2   17.5   14.7   —        22.5

Exploration

  —        —        —        —        —        2.8   —        1.8   0.6   —        5.2

Plus:

                     

Employee termination costs

  2.2      1.9      2.4      9.4      —        —     —        0.3   —     —        16.2

Royalties

  —        —        —        —        15.9      4.8   0.8      8.6   4.2   —        34.3

Total cash costs

  384.5      354.6      228.0      178.2      317.6      127.8   24.1      276.0   84.4   —        1,975.2

Plus:

                     

Amortization (2)

  90.6      89.2      40.2      34.6      38.8      3.8   —        74.1   24.9   8.4      404.6

Rehabilitation

  2.5      1.8      1.2      0.4      0.6      —     —        1.3   0.3   —        8.1

Total production costs

  477.6      445.6      269.4      213.2      357.0      131.6   24.1      351.4   109.6   8.4      2,387.9

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

  928.0      820.9      438.1      232.1      646.1      194.2   33.8      417.7   203.7   —        3,914.6

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

  928.0      820.9      438.1      232.1      646.1      194.2   33.2      417.7   203.7   —        3,914.0

Total cash costs ($/oz) (4)

  414      432      520      768      492      658   726      661   414   —        505

Total production costs ($/oz) (5)

  515      543      615      919      553      678   726      841   538   —        610

 

Notes:

 

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.27 per $1.00.

 

(2) Non-cash portion of Gold in Progress, or GIP, adjustments shown separately. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.

 

(3) In fiscal 2008, 3.669 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Choco 10 operations.

 

(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 3.”

 

(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4.”

Gold Fields’ weighted average total cash costs per ounce increased by $33 per ounce, or 6.5%, from $505 per ounce in fiscal 2008 to $538 per ounce in fiscal 2009. The majority of this increase was due to increases in wage and electricity costs together with lower production at all the operations except Damang and St. Ives. There was a 25% increase in electricity costs at the South African operations which was considerably above inflation, lower, though still above inflation, electricity price increases at the Ghanaian operations and increased input costs including for fuel and explosives, partly offset by cost saving initiatives at all the operations. In fiscal 2009 exchange rate translations had a very significant effect on costs as the Rand weakened 23.9% against the U.S. dollar from an average of 7.27 in fiscal 2008 to 9.01 in fiscal 2009.

Production costs

Production costs increased by $2.5 million, or 0.1%, from $1,996.1 million in fiscal 2008 to $1,998.6 million in fiscal 2009. This was primarily due to the inclusion of Cerro Corona and increased cost of waste removal at the Teberebie cutback at Tarkwa, as well as increased royalties, offset by the impact of the weaker

 

165


Table of Contents

Rand on translation of South African Rand costs into U.S dollars. In South Africa, in Rand terms, production costs increased more or less in line with inflation with the impact of lower production offset by increases in wage and power costs. In addition, there was a significant increase in input costs across Gold Fields’ operations, especially fuel, steel and cyanide and other reagents, during the first half of the year.

Depreciation and amortization

Depreciation and amortization charges increased by $33.0 million, or 8.2%, from $400.5 million in fiscal 2008 to $433.5 million in fiscal 2009. Depreciation and amortization is calculated on the units-of-production method and is based on current gold production as a percentage of total expected gold production over the lives of the different mines. The principal reason for the increase was the inclusion of Cerro Corona ($38.8 million) for nine months in fiscal 2009. This increase was partially offset by a decrease in amortization at all the South African operations except Beatrix and at the Australian operations as a result of the lower production.

The table below depicts the changes from December 31, 2006 to June 30, 2008 for proven and probable reserves above current infrastructure and for the life of mine for each operation, and the resulting impact on the amortization charge in fiscal 2008 and 2009, respectively. The life of mine numbers below are taken from the operations’ strategic plans, adjusted for proven and probable reserve balances. In basic terms, amortization is calculated using the life of mine for each operation, which is based on: (1) the proven and probable reserves above infrastructure for the operation at the start of the relevant year (which are taken to be the same as at the end of the prior fiscal year and using only above infrastructure reserves); and (2) the amount of gold produced by the operation during the year. The ore reserve statement as at June 30, 2009 became effective on July 1, 2009.

 

     Proven and probable
reserves as of
   Life of mine (1) as of    Amortization as of
     December 31,
2006
   June 30,
2007
   June 30,
2008
   June 30,
2006
   June 30,
2007
   June 30,
2008
   June 30,
2008
   June 30,
2009
     (‘000 oz)    (years)    ($ million)

South Africa

                       

Driefontein (2)

   12,900    12,300    11,000    17    17    17    90.6    70.9

Kloof

   11,900    11,400    10,500    15    16    16    89.2    81.5

Beatrix

   7,800    7,500    6,200    13    12    12    40.2    48.2

South Deep (3)

   18,200    18,100    16,800    23    42    41    34.6    31.3

Ghana

                       

Tarkwa (4)

   12,700    12,200    11,300    14    14    13    38.8    48.9

Damang (5)

   1,600    1,400    1,400    6    7    6    3.8    9.4

South America

                       

Choco 10

   1,800    1,800    3,000    9    9    —      —      —  

Cerro Corona (6)

   3,200    3,200    3,000    —      —      16    —      38.8

Australia (7)

                       

St. Ives

   2,600    2,500    1,900    5    5    5    74.1    69.1

Agnew

   700    600    600    3    3    4    24.9    16.2

Corporate and other

   —      —      —      —      —      —      4.3    19.2

Total

   70,200    67,800    62,700    —      —      —      400.5    433.5

Reserves below infrastructure (8)

   23,100    23,100    22,100    —      —      —      —      —  

Total reserves (9)

   96,400    94,100    84,800    —      —      —      —      —  

 

Notes:

 

(1) The life of mine for each operation shown in the above table differs from that shown in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations.” The life of mine in the above table is based on the above infrastructure proven and probable reserves, whereas the life of mine information in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations” is based on both above and below infrastructure proven and probable reserves.

 

166


Table of Contents
(2) At Driefontein, amortization increased due primarily to changes in the sources of production as amortization is calculated based on the reserves at each shaft.

 

(3) As of December 31, 2006, reserves of 2.940 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the South Deep operation. Gold Fields acquired 100% of South Deep during the course of fiscal 2007.

 

(4) As of December 31, 2006, June 30, 2007 and June 30, 2008, reserves of 9.000 million ounces, 8.700 million ounces and 8.000 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.

 

(5) As of December 31, 2006, June 30, 2007 and June 30, 2008, reserves of 1.100 million ounces, 1.000 million ounces and 1.000 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Damang operation.

 

(6) As of June 30, 2008, reserves of 2.400 million ounces of gold were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation.

 

(7) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.

 

(8) Below infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently does not have infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur, but where the operation has made plans to install additional infrastructure in the future which will allow mining to occur at that level.

 

(9) As of December 31, 2006, June 30, 2007 and 2008 reserves of 91.600 million ounces, 89.600 million ounces and 80.500 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghanaian and Venezuelan operations and, as of December 31, 2006, the South Deep operation and, as of June 30, 2008, the Cerro Corona operation.

Corporate expenditure

Corporate expenditure was $35.5 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $41.0 million in fiscal 2008, a decrease of 13.4%. The decrease is mainly due to the weakening of the Rand against the U.S. dollar, as costs in Rand increased. Corporate expenditure consists primarily of general corporate overhead and corporate service department costs, primarily in the areas of technical services, human resources and finance, which are used by the operations. Corporate expenditure also includes business development costs. In Rand terms, corporate expenditure increased from R298.2 million in fiscal 2008 to R320.0 million in fiscal 2009. The increase was mainly driven by inflation.

Employee termination costs

In fiscal 2009, Gold Fields incurred employee termination costs of $21.0 million compared to $16.2 million in fiscal 2008. The charge in fiscal 2009 relates primarily to restructuring costs at the Driefontein, Kloof, Beatrix and South Deep operations. The charge in fiscal 2008 resulted principally from an accrual raised for the retrenchment of approximately 1,900 employees at the South Deep mine following closure of the VCR section of the mine. The retrenchment plan was announced and communicated to employees prior to June 30, 2008.

Exploration expenditure

Exploration expenditure was $58.0 million in fiscal 2009, an increase of 46.0% from $39.8 million in fiscal 2008. The bulk of the expenditure was incurred on a diversified pipeline of projects in Africa, Australia, China and North, South and Central America, with the increase in fiscal 2009 due primarily to a higher spend on several advanced stage exploration projects. See “Information on the Company—Exploration”.

 

167


Table of Contents

Impairment of assets

Impairment of assets was nil in fiscal 2009 and $11.4 million in fiscal 2008. The impairment in fiscal 2008 comprised $6.0 million for impairment of the Biox ® trademark which was written down to its realizable value, with the balance attributable to impairment of the St. Ives’ Junction mine and the original Leviathan pit which were closed and an impairment of the old slimes dam at Agnew that is no longer in use.

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields continued to dispose of certain surplus property, plant and equipment. The net profit on the sale of this property, plant and equipment amounted to $0.5 million, comprising profit from the sale of surplus housing at Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix.

During fiscal 2008, Gold Fields disposed of certain surplus property, plant and equipment. The net profit on the sale of this property, plant and equipment amounted to $4.6 million, comprising:

 

   

$3.0 million profit from the sale of a stage winder by Driefontein; and

 

   

$1.6 million profit from the sale of surplus housing by Beatrix and South Deep.

Shaft closure costs

Closure costs of $3.3 million in fiscal 2008 relate to suspension of the Driefontein Shaft No. 9 deepening project due to the lack of power supply. During fiscal 2009, there was a reversal of an overprovision of $0.2 million after finalization of the total closure costs.

Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement healthcare costs

In South Africa, Gold Fields provides medical benefits to employees in its operations through the Gold Fields Medical Scheme (formerly known as the Medicines Medical Scheme).

Under the medical plan which covers certain of its former employees, Gold Fields remains liable for 50% of these retired employees’ medical contributions after their retirement. At June 30, 2009, 203 (fiscal 2008: 213) former employees were covered under this plan, which is not available to members of the scheme formerly available to employees of the former Free State operation (which is now the Beatrix operation) who retired after August 31, 1997 and members of the Gold Fields Medical Scheme who retired after January 31, 1999.

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, Gold Fields assumed an additional post-retirement healthcare cost liability. Former employees of South Deep belong to a commercial medical scheme with employer liability for contribution per pensioner limited to R400 per month. The R400 monthly contribution is fixed until the termination of Gold Fields’ obligations on December 31, 2011. At June 30, 2009, there were 204 (fiscal 2008: 223) former South Deep employees that were subject to this employer contribution.

In fiscal 2009, an amount of $3.4 million was debited to earnings, compared to a credit of $0.7 million in fiscal 2008, in respect of Gold Fields’ obligations under these medical plans. The $3.4 million debit in fiscal 2009 comprises the annual interest and service charge and an increase in the cross subsidization liability. The credit of $0.7 million in fiscal 2008 relates to a release of the cross-subsidization liability of $1.1 million, partially offset by the annual interest and service charge of $0.4 million. The post-retirement healthcare provision is updated annually based on actuarial calculations, with any increase in the provision reflected in the statement of operations.

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

At all of its operations, Gold Fields makes full provision for environmental rehabilitation based on the net present value of the estimated cost of restoring the environmental disturbance that has occurred up to the balance

 

168


Table of Contents

sheet date. The rehabilitation charge for fiscal 2009 was $13.9 million compared to $12.0 million in fiscal 2008. The increase is due primarily to above-inflation increases in the base case rehabilitation costs for the South African and Ghanaian operations.

For its South African operations, Gold Fields contributes to environmental trust funds it has established to provide for any environmental rehabilitation obligations and expected closure costs relating to its mining operations. The amounts invested in the trust funds are classified as non-current assets and any income earned on these assets is accounted for as interest income. For the Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations Gold Fields does not contribute to a trust fund.

Share-based compensation

The charge for share-based compensation in fiscal 2009 was $33.7 million compared to $20.7 million in fiscal 2008. The increase is primarily due to a modification made to the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, or the Plan, and an additional allocation of share-based compensation made in fiscal 2008 (as part of the employee retention strategy) resulting in two allocations being made to employees as opposed to one in the previous year. The effect of this modification and additional allocation were recognized for a full year in fiscal 2009 as opposed to only a portion of the year in fiscal 2008. The modification to the Plan involved the substitution of new performance-based criteria to assess whether certain restricted shares are released to Plan participants. See note 17 to Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this annual report. This modification resulted in incremental fair value of $17.1 million which will be expensed over the remaining vesting period of the restricted shares, with $4.7 million and $2.1 million having been included in Share-based compensation for fiscal 2009 and fiscal 2008 respectively.

Interest and dividends

Interest and dividends amounted to $24.9 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $31.2 million in fiscal 2008. Interest received on cash and cash equivalents amounted to $23.6 million in fiscal 2009 as compared to $26.5 million in fiscal 2008 due principally to lower cash balances and interest rates in fiscal 2009. Dividends received decreased to $1.3 million in fiscal 2009 as compared to $4.7 million in fiscal 2008 mainly due to the redemption of the Mvela preference shares on which dividends were received as well as the absence in fiscal 2009 of a $1.9 million dividend received from Rand Mutual Assurance Limited in fiscal 2008.

Finance expense

Gold Fields recognized net finance expense of $73.9 million in fiscal 2009 as compared to $100.4 million in fiscal 2008.

Net finance expense in fiscal 2009 consisted of interest payments of $137.5 million partially offset by interest capitalized of $63.6 million.

The interest payments of $137.5 million in fiscal 2009 comprised:

 

   

$34.9 million on the Mvela Loan;

 

   

$37.8 million on forward cover costs for the foreign exchange contract taken out for the revolving credit facility. These forward cover costs are deemed to be interest costs;

 

   

$4.6 million on additional amounts borrowed under the split-tenor facility for partial funding of the Cerro Corona capital expenditure and purchases of additional shares in Sino Gold Mining Limited, or Sino Gold;

 

   

$42.5 million on various Rand denominated borrowings incurred to finance capital expenditure and operating costs at Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix;

 

   

$9.8 million on non-convertible redeemable preference shares issued on December 24, 2007;

 

169


Table of Contents
   

$6.0 million on $150.0 million borrowed under the Cerro Corona project finance facility;

 

   

$1.6 million on short-term notes issued during the fourth quarter under a Rand 10 billion Domestic Commercial Paper Programme to refinance existing facilities; and

 

   

$0.3 million of miscellaneous interest payments.

See “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

Interest on borrowings incurred in respect of assets requiring a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use is capitalized to the date on which the assets are substantially completed and ready for their intended use, at which time they will be amortized over the lives of the corresponding assets. $63.6 million of interest payments were capitalized in this way in fiscal 2009, in respect of the following operations:

 

•        South Deep:

   $7.1 million;

•        Tarkwa:

   $13.0 million; and

•        Cerro Corona:

   $43.5 million.

Net finance expense in fiscal 2008 consisted of interest payments of $142.5 million partially offset by interest capitalized of $42.1 million.

The interest payments of $142.5 million in fiscal 2008 comprised:

 

   

$61.0 million on the Mvela Loan;

 

   

$28.2 million on forward cover costs for the foreign exchange contract taken out for the revolving credit facility;

 

   

$23.2 million on amounts borrowed under the split-tenor facility in the prior year in terms of the South Deep purchase;

 

   

$10.6 million on various Rand denominated borrowings incurred to finance capital expenditure and operating costs at Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix;

 

   

$5.5 million paid on various amounts borrowed under the split-tenor facility in fiscal 2008 for partial funding of the Cerro Corona capital expenditure and purchases of additional shares in Sino Gold;

 

   

$2.7 million on $172.0 million of non-convertible redeemable preference shares issued on December 24, 2007;

 

   

$2.5 million on $63.6 million of Rand denominated borrowings under various uncommitted credit facilities taken out for the purchase of mineral rights adjacent to the South Deep operation;

 

   

$7.8 million on $150.0 million borrowed under the Cerro Corona project finance facility; and

 

   

$1.0 million of miscellaneous interest payments.

See “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

$42.1 million of interest payments were capitalized in fiscal 2008, in respect of the following operations:

 

•        Kloof:

   $0.3 million;

•        Driefontein:

   $2.4 million;

•        South Deep:

   $2.8 million;

•        Tarkwa:

   $4.8 million; and

•        Cerro Corona:

   $31.8 million.

 

170


Table of Contents

Realized (loss)/gain on financial instruments

Gold Fields recognized a realized loss of $1.3 million in fiscal 2009 compared to a realized gain of $19.8 million in fiscal 2008 relating to financial instruments.

The $1.3 million realized loss in fiscal 2009 comprised:

 

   

$14.0 million loss on the settlement of a portion of the international petroleum exchange Gasoil call option;

 

   

$0.3 million loss on the settlement of a U.S. dollar/Rand currency hedge;

 

   

$6.8 million gain on the settlement of U.S. dollar/Rand forward sales;

 

   

$1.4 million gain on the settlement of U.S. dollar/Australian dollar forward sales; and

 

   

$4.8 million gain related to an interest rate swap Gold Fields had entered into in connection with the Mvela Loan. This swap was closed out on June 3, 2005 resulting in a realized gain of $36.2 million. This gain has been accounted for in the income statement over the remaining period of the underlying loan, which was repaid on March 17, 2009. $31.1 million has been accounted for in the income statement since the close-out. The balance of $5.1 million relates to exchange differences due to differing rates used for the purposes of initial recognition and subsequent income statement charges.

The $19.8 million realized gain in fiscal 2008 comprised:

 

   

$11.6 million gain on the expiration of U.S. dollar/Rand currency hedges;

 

   

$8.1 million gain related to an interest rate swap Gold Fields had entered into in connection with the Mvela Loan. This swap was closed out on June 3, 2005 resulting in a realized gain of $36.2 million. This gain is being accounted for in the income statement over the remaining period of the underlying loan. $26.3 million has been accounted for in the income statement since the close-out. The balance of $9.9 million will be accounted for in fiscal 2009;

 

   

$1.4 million gain on the settlement of IPE gasoil call options; and

 

   

$1.3 million loss on various warrants and options converted to shares.

Gain/(loss) on foreign exchange

Gold Fields recognized an exchange gain of $10.2 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $1.7 million in fiscal 2008.

The gain of $10.2 million in fiscal 2009 comprises:

 

   

$13.8 million gain on the repayment of Australian dollar denominated intercompany loans;

 

   

$3.9 million gain on the U.S. dollar proceeds received in respect of an insurance claim of $17 million, relating to a fire at South Deep; and

 

   

$7.5 million loss on cash balances held in currencies other than the functional currencies of the Group’s various subsidiary companies.

The gain of $1.7 million in fiscal 2008 comprised exchange gains on foreign currency denominated cash balances.

(Loss)/profit on disposal of listed investments

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields continued to liquidate certain non-current investments. The loss on the sale of these investments amounted to $16.1 million and resulted from the following sales:

 

   

$23.2 million loss resulting from the exchange of 41.7 million Orezone shares for 3.3 million IAMGold shares as a result of the acquisition of all Orezone shares by IAMGold;

 

171


Table of Contents
   

$0.1 million loss from the sale of 0.1 million shares in Lakota Resources Inc; and

 

   

$7.2 million gain from the subsequent sale of the above-mentioned 3.3 million shares in IAMGold.

During fiscal 2008, Gold Fields realized a profit on the sale of investments amounting to $3.7 million resulting from the following sales:

 

   

$2.1 million gain from the sale of 14.8 million shares in Emed Mining Public Limited;

 

   

$4.8 million gain from the sale of various shares held by the New Africa Mining Fund;

 

   

$0.1 million gain from the sale of 0.03 million shares in Resource Investment Trust;

 

   

$2.7 million loss from the sale of 8.1 million shares in Committee Bay Resources Limited; and

 

   

$0.6 million loss from the sale of 0.5 million shares in Lakota Resources Inc.

(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries

During fiscal 2009 Gold Fields realized a loss on sale of subsidiaries of $0.3 million relating to the disposal of its 70% holding in IRCA. See “Information on the Company—History”. During fiscal 2008 Gold Fields realized a profit on sale of subsidiaries of $208.4 million comprised of $191.1 million realized on the sale of the Essakane project in Burkina Faso and $17.3 million realized on the sale of the Venezuelan assets.

Impairment of listed investments

The charge in fiscal 2009 of $16.0 million relates to an impairment of various offshore listed exploration investments to their market value as June 30, 2009. The decline in market value below the carrying value of these investments was determined to be other than temporary.

There were no impairment of listed investments in fiscal 2008.

Other (expenses)/income

Other (expenses)/income represents miscellaneous corporate expenditure not allocated to the operations and therefore not included in the corporate expenditure line item, net of miscellaneous revenue items such as scrap sales and rental income. In fiscal 2009, there were other expenses of $7.7 million compared with other income of $5.9 million in fiscal 2008.

Other (expenses)/ income in fiscal 2009 and fiscal 2008 consisted of miscellaneous items which included:

 

   

corporate social investment costs;

 

   

professional fees related to corporate advice;

 

   

a fair value adjustment to biological assets; and

 

   

refunds/ final settlements received for costs incurred at the Essakane project.

Income and mining tax expense

The table below sets forth Gold Fields’ effective tax rate for fiscal 2009 and fiscal 2008, including normal and deferred tax.

 

         Year ended June 30,      
     2009     2008  

Effective tax expense rate

   48.0   32.2

 

172


Table of Contents

In fiscal 2009, the effective tax expense rate of 48.0% differed from the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43%, primarily due to $54.4 million of net non-deductible expenditure, $37.7 million in charges relating to levies and royalties in Ghana and Australia and a $17.5 million increase in valuation allowance on Gold Fields Operations, GFI Joint Venture Holdings, Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg) and Arctic Platinum losses. The $54.4 million of net non-deductable expenditure comprises mainly the $87.4 million impairment of the Company’s shareholding in Rusoro, the impairment of listed investments of $16.0 million partially offset by non-deductable share based payments of $33.7 million.

The above increases were partly offset by $49.1 million of non-South African mining income being taxed at lower rates and a $27.7 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula.

In fiscal 2008, the effective tax expense rate of 32.2% differed from the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43%, due to a reduction of $47.2 million in net tax charge arising from non-South African mining income being taxed at lower rates, a $30.5 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula and $74.6 million of net non-taxable income, mainly due to the sale of the Essakane project.

These reductions were partly offset by $33.5 million in charges relating to levies and royalties in Ghana and Australia and a $34.0 million increase in valuation allowance on Gold Fields Operations, GFI Joint Venture Holdings, Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg) and Arctic Platinum losses.

Impairment of investment in equity investee

The impairment of investment in equity investee was $87.4 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $61.3 million in fiscal 2008. This impairment in both years related to Gold Fields’ investment in Rusoro. Gold Fields owned 36.2% of Rusoro at the beginning of fiscal 2009. The stake was subsequently reduced to 26.4%, mainly because Gold Fields did not participate in a rights offer by Rusoro during fiscal 2009. The investment in Rusoro was impaired to its market value at both June 30, 2009 and June 30, 2008.

Share of equity investees’ (losses)/income

Share of equity investees’ losses decreased from $16.0 million in fiscal 2008 to $3.5 million in fiscal 2009.

Gold Fields equity accounts for two associates: Rusoro and Rand Refinery Limited, or Rand Refinery. Gold Fields’ share of Rusoro’s after-tax loss was $5.1 million in fiscal 2009. Gold Fields owns 34.9% of Rand Refinery, and its share of Rand Refinery’s after-tax profits was $1.6 million in fiscal 2009.

The $16.0 million in fiscal 2008 relates to the recording of $20.7 million of losses from Rusoro, partly offset by $4.7 million of profits related to Rand Refinery.

Minority interests

Minority interests represented an expense of $34.8 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $39.8 million in fiscal 2008. For fiscal 2009 these amounts reflect the portion of the net income of Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso, La Cima and Living Gold attributable to their minority shareholders. For fiscal 2008 these amounts reflect the portion of the net income of Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso, PMG until its disposal on November 30, 2007 and Living Gold attributable to their minority shareholders. The minority shareholders’ interest was 28.9% in Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso in fiscal 2009 and 2008, 19.3% in La Cima in fiscal 2009, 35% in Living Gold in fiscal 2009 and 2008 and 5% in PMG in fiscal 2008. The amounts due to minority shareholders were lower in fiscal 2009 primarily due to decreased net income at Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso in fiscal 2009, partially offset by the inclusion of La Cima.

Net income

As a result of the factors discussed above, Gold Fields’ net income was $160.9 million in fiscal 2009, compared with net income of $452.5 million in fiscal 2008.

 

173


Table of Contents

Years Ended June 30, 2008 and 2007

Revenues

Product sales increased by $471.0 million, or 17.2%, from $2,735.2 million in fiscal 2007 to $3,206.2 million in fiscal 2008. The increase in product sales was due to an increase in the average realized gold price of 28.4% from $638 per ounce in fiscal 2007 to $819 per ounce in fiscal 2008, partially offset by a decrease of approximately 0.375 million ounces, or 8.7%, in total gold sold, from 4.289 million ounces in fiscal 2007 to 3.914 million ounces in fiscal 2008. The decrease in ounces sold resulted from lower production from both the South African and the international operations.

At the South African operations, gold production decreased from 2.65 million ounces in fiscal 2007 to 2.42 million ounces in fiscal 2008. At Driefontein, gold output decreased by 8.8% from 1.02 million ounces to 0.93 million ounces as a result of lower underground volumes mined and processed, partially offset by an improved underground yield. The lower volumes were mainly in the latter half of the year due to the power disruptions discussed above which affected all of the South African operations. See “—South African Power Disruptions”. Gold output at Kloof decreased by 10.9% from 0.92 million ounces to 0.82 million ounces as a result of lower underground yield as well as the power disruptions. At Beatrix, gold output decreased by 18.5% from 0.54 million ounces to 0.44 million ounces due to a decline in volumes mined and processed due to the power disruptions, together with a decrease in yield due to a poor mine call factor. Part of the decline at the South African operations was offset by increased attributable production at South Deep, control of which Gold Fields acquired on December 1, 2006. South Deep produced 0.23 million ounces in fiscal 2008, compared with 0.17 million ounces for the seven months ended June 30, 2007.

At the international operations, total gold production decreased from 1.64 million ounces in fiscal 2007 to 1.49 million ounces in fiscal 2008. At St. Ives, the decrease of 14.3% from 0.49 million ounces to 0.42 million ounces was primarily due to reductions in recovered grade as scheduled ore from Cave Rocks and Belleisle did not come into production during the year. At Agnew, gold production was 4.8% lower, declining from 0.21 million ounces to 0.20 million ounces, due to the depletion of Songvang high grade stockpiles which were replaced by lower grade stockpiles. At Tarkwa, the decrease of 7.1% from 0.70 million ounces to 0.65 million ounces was due to exceptionally high seasonal rainfall in the first half of the year which resulted in lower volumes mined and processed and a slightly lower yield. At Choco 10, gold production decreased from 0.056 million ounces to 0.034 million ounces. This was due to Choco 10 being included only for five months as it was sold on November 30, 2007. The decline in production from the international operations was partially offset by an increase in production at Damang, which increased by 3.7% from 0.187 million ounces to 0.194 million ounces due to increased high grade ore from the Damang pit cutback.

Total gold sold and total gold produced are the same at all the operations with the exception of Choco 10, where there may be differences due to timing of sales.

 

174


Table of Contents

Costs and Expenses

The following table sets out Gold Fields’ total ounces sold and weighted average total cash costs and total production costs per ounce for fiscal 2007 and fiscal 2008.

 

    Fiscal 2007   Fiscal 2008   Percentage
increase/
(decrease) in
unit total
cash costs
  Percentage
increase/
(decrease) in
unit total
production
costs
    Gold sold   Total cash
costs (1)
  Total
production
costs (2)
  Gold sold   Total cash
costs (1)
  Total
production
costs (2)
   
    (‘000 oz)   ($/oz)   (‘000 oz)   ($/oz)   (%)

South Africa

               

Driefontein

  1,017   349   419   928   414   515   18.6   22.9

Kloof

  923   367   458   821   432   543   17.7   18.6

Beatrix

  543   378   455   438   520   615   37.6   35.2

South Deep (3)

  166   595   714   232   768   919   29.1   28.7

Ghana

               

Tarkwa (4)

  697   378   434   646   492   553   30.2   27.4

Damang (5)

  188   597   602   194   658   678   10.2   12.6

Venezuela

               

Choco 10 (6)

  56   565   659   33   726   726   28.5   10.2

Australia (7)

               

St. Ives

  487   416   589   418   661   841   58.9   42.8

Agnew

  212   399   462   204   414   538   3.8   16.5

Total (8)(9)

  4,289   —     —     3,914   —     —     —     —  

Weighted average

  —     394   482   —     505   610   28.2   26.6

 

Notes:

 

(1) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information— Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 3.”

 

(2) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce by dividing total production costs, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4.”

 

(3) In fiscal 2007, 0.163 million ounces of sales were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the South Deep operation. Gold Fields acquired 100% of South Deep during the course of fiscal 2007.

 

(4) In fiscal 2007 and 2008, 0.496 million ounces and 0.459 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.

 

(5) In fiscal 2007 and 2008, 0.134 million ounces and 0.138 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Damang operation.

 

(6) In fiscal 2007 and 2008, 0.053 million ounces and 0.031 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Choco 10 operation.

 

(7) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.

 

(8) In fiscal 2007 and 2008, 4.024 million ounces and 3.669 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Venezuela operations and, in fiscal 2007, South Deep.

 

(9) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

 

175


Table of Contents

The following tables set out a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total cash costs and total production costs for fiscal 2008 and fiscal 2007.

 

    For the year ended June 30, 2008
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang   Choco 10     St. Ives   Agnew   Corporate     Group
    (in $ millions except as otherwise noted) (1)

Production Costs

  390.2      358.9      229.0      170.3      312.5      126.9   25.1      292.2   97.5   (6.5   1,996.1

Less:

                     

G&A other than corporate costs

  10.1      8.1      5.8      1.9      13.4      1.1   2.0      5.8   2.0   (6.5   43.7

GIP adjustment (2)

  (2.2   (1.9   (2.4   (0.4   (2.6   —     (0.2   17.5   14.7   —        22.5

Exploration

  —        —        —        —        —        2.8   —        1.8   0.6   —        5.2

Plus:

                     

Employee termination costs

  2.2      1.9      2.4      9.4      —        —     —        0.3   —     —        16.2

Royalties

  —        —        —        —        15.9      4.8   0.8      8.6   4.2   —        34.3

Total cash costs

  384.5      354.6      228.0      178.2      317.6      127.8   24.1      276.0   84.4   —        1,975.2

Plus:

                     

Amortization (2)

  90.6      89.2      40.2      34.6      38.8      3.8   —        74.1   24.9   8.4      404.6

Rehabilitation

  2.5      1.8      1.2      0.4      0.6      —     —        1.3   0.3   —        8.1

Total production costs

  477.6      445.6      269.4      213.2      357.0      131.6   24.1      351.4   109.6   8.4      2,387.9

Gold produced
(‘000 oz)
(3)

  928.0      820.9      438.1      232.1      646.1      194.2   33.8      417.7   203.7   —        3,914.6

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

  928.0      820.9      438.1      232.1      646.1      194.2   33.2      417.7   203.7   —        3,914.0

Total cash costs
($/oz) (4)

  414      432      520      768      492      658   726      661   414   —        505

Total production costs ($/oz) (5)

  515      543      615      919      553      678   726      841   538   —        610

 

Notes:

 

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.27 per $1.00.

 

(2) Non-cash portion of Gold in Progress, or GIP, adjustments shown separately. GIP, represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.

 

(3) In fiscal 2008, 3.669 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana and Choco 10 operations.

 

(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 3.”

 

(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4.”

 

176


Table of Contents
    For the year ended June 30, 2007  
    Driefontein   Kloof   Beatrix   South
Deep
  Tarkwa     Damang     Choco 10   St. Ives     Agnew     Corporate     Group  
    (in $ millions except as otherwise noted) (1)  

Production Costs

  361.2   344.9   211.1   99.0   261.5      109.0      33.7   212.5      83.1      (8.3   1,707.7   

Less:

                     

G&A other than corporate costs

  7.5   7.9   6.0   0.1   11.2      0.2      3.6   4.2      1.5      (5.8   36.4   

GIP adjustment (2)

  —     —     —     —     (0.6   —        —     0.9      (7.2   —        (6.9

Exploration

  0.8   0.2   0.4   —     0.6      0.2      —     12.6      7.6      —        22.4   

Plus:

                     

Employee termination costs

  2.1   1.8   0.9   —     —        —        —     —        —        0.1      4.9   

Royalties

  —     —     —     —     13.3      3.6      1.2   7.8      3.5      —        29.4   

Total cash costs

  355.0   338.6   205.6   98.9   263.6      112.2      31.3   202.6      84.7      (2.4   1,690.1   

Plus:

                     

Amortization (2)

  70.1   84.3   41.5   19.7   39.7      2.7      5.4   83.1      22.5      19.2      388.2   

GIP adjustments (2)

  —     —     —     —     (0.6   —        —     0.9      (7.2   —        (6.9

Rehabilitation

  0.8   0.2   0.4   —     (0.1   (1.8   —     (0.2   (1.8   —        (2.1

Total production costs

  425.9   423.1   247.5   118.6   302.6      113.1      36.7   286.8      98.2      16.8      2,069.3   

Gold produced
(‘000 oz)
(3)

  1,016.5   922.9   543.4   163.2   697.2      187.9      54.6   486.9      212.4      —        4,284.9   

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

  1,016.5   922.9   543.4   166.1   697.2      187.9      55.7   487.0      212.4      —        4,288.9   

Total cash costs ($/oz) (4)

  349   367   378   595   378      597      562   416      399      —        394   

Total production costs ($/oz) (5)

  419   458   455   714   434      602      659   589      462      —        482   

 

Notes:

 

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.20 per $1.00.

 

(2) Non-cash portion of GIP adjustments shown separately. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.

 

(3) In fiscal 2007, 4.024 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana, Choco 10 and South Deep operations.

 

(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 3.”

 

(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4.”

Gold Fields’ weighted average total cash costs per ounce increased by $111 per ounce, or 28.2%, from $394 per ounce in fiscal 2007 to $505 per ounce in fiscal 2008. The majority of this increase was due to increased expenditure on the Teberebie cutback at Tarkwa and the Damang pit cutback, together with lower production at all the operations except Damang and South Deep. In addition, there was a significant increase in input costs, especially fuel, steel and cyanide and other reagents, together with increased fleet maintenance costs at Tarkwa and increased wages across all operations due to a severe skills shortage as a result of the global resources boom. In South Africa power costs increased significantly in the second half of the fiscal year. Gold Fields expects these increases and an almost doubling of power costs in Ghana to have a significant impact on its results, starting in fiscal 2009. Exchange rate translations had little effect on costs as the Rand weakened only 1.0% against the U.S. dollar from an average of 7.20 in fiscal 2007 to 7.27 in fiscal 2008.

Production costs

Production costs increased by $288.4 million, or 16.9%, from $1,707.7 million in fiscal 2007 to $1,996.1 million in fiscal 2008. This was primarily due to the increased cost of waste removal at the Teberebie cutback at

 

177


Table of Contents

Tarkwa, the Damang main pit cutback and the open pits at St. Ives as well as increased royalties. In South Africa production costs increased more or less in line with inflation with the slightly lower production offset by increases in wage and power costs. Costs at South Deep have been included for the full year in fiscal 2008 compared with only seven months in fiscal 2007. In addition, there was a significant increase in input costs across Gold Fields’ operations, especially fuel, steel and cyanide and other reagents.

Depreciation and amortization

Depreciation and amortization charges increased by $12.3 million, or 3.2%, from $388.2 million in fiscal 2007 to $400.5 million in fiscal 2008. Depreciation and amortization is calculated on the units-of-production method and is based on current gold production as a percentage of total expected gold production over the lives of the different mines. The principal reason for this increase was due to an increase in capitalized ore reserve development now being amortized at the South African operations and increased mining at higher capital cost shafts such as Kloof Shaft No. 4 and Driefontein Shaft No. 5. Also South Deep was included for 12 months in fiscal 2008 compared to seven months in fiscal 2007. This increase was partially offset by a decrease in amortization at St. Ives due to a 14% decrease in gold production.

The table below depicts the changes from December 31, 2005 to June 30, 2007 for proven and probable reserves above current infrastructure and for the life of mine for each operation, and the resulting impact on the amortization charge in fiscal 2007 and 2008, respectively. The life of mine numbers below are taken from the operations’ strategic plans, adjusted for proven and probable reserve balances. In basic terms, amortization is calculated using the life of mine for each operation, which is based on: (1) the proven and probable reserves above infrastructure for the operation at the start of the relevant year (which are taken to be the same as at the end of the prior fiscal year and using only above infrastructure reserves); and (2) the amount of gold produced by the operation during the year. During fiscal 2006, Gold Fields decided to align determination of its reserves with its planning cycle and as a result a reserve statement as at December 31, 2005 was issued. This ore reserve statement became effective for amortization calculations as from April 1, 2006. The ore reserve statement as at December 31, 2006 become effective on May 1, 2007. The ore reserve statement as at June 30, 2007 became effective on March 1, 2008.

 

    Proven and probable reserves as of   Life of mine (1) as of   Amortization as of
    December 31,
2005
  December 31,
2006
  June 30,
2007
  December 31,
2005
  December 31,
2006
  June 30,
2007
  June 30,
2007
  June 30,
2008
        (‘000 oz)           (years)       ($ million)

South Africa

               

Driefontein (2)

  14,400   12,900   12,300   18   17   17   70.1   90.6

Kloof

  12,500   11,900   11,400   15   15   16   84.3   89.2

Beatrix

  8,200   7,800   7,500   14   13   12   41.5   40.2

South Deep (3)

  —     18,200   18,100   —     23   42   19.7   34.6

Ghana

               

Tarkwa (4)

  14,400   12,700   12,200   23   14   14   39.7   38.8

Damang (5)

  1,400   1,600   1,400   6   6   7   2.7   3.8

Venezuela

               

Choco 10

  1,200   1,800   1,800   8   9   9   5.4   —  

Australia (6)

               

St. Ives

  2,200   2,600   2,500   5   5   5   84.4   74.1

Agnew

  800   700   600   3   3   3   22.5   24.9

Corporate and other

  —     —     —     —     —     —     19.1   4.3

Total

  55,100   70,200   67,800   —     —     —     388.2   400.5

Cerro Corona

  3,200   3200   3,200   —     —     —     —     —  

Reserves below infrastructure (7)

  10,000   23,100   23,100   —     —     —     —     —  

Total reserves (8)

  68,300   96,400   94,100   —     —     —     —     —  

 

178


Table of Contents

 

Notes:

 

(1) The life of mine for each operation shown in the above table differs from that shown in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations.” The life of mine in the above table is based on the above infrastructure proven and probable reserves, whereas the life of mine information in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations” is based on both above and below infrastructure proven and probable reserves.

 

(2) At Driefontein, amortization increased due primarily to changes in the sources of production as amortization is calculated based on the reserves at each shaft.

 

(3) As of December 31, 2006, reserves of 2.940 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the South Deep operation. Gold Fields acquired 100% of South Deep during the course of fiscal 2007.

 

(4) As of December 31, 2005 and 2006 and June 30, 2007, reserves of 10.200 million ounces, 9.000 million ounces and 8.700 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.

 

(5) As of December 31, 2005 and 2006 and June 30, 2007, reserves of 1.000 million ounces, 1.140 million ounces and 1.000 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Damang operation.

 

(6) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.

 

(7) Below infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently does not have infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur, but where the operation has made plans to install additional infrastructure in the future which will allow mining to occur at that level.

 

(8) As of December 31, 2005 and 2006 and June 30, 2007, reserves of 63.100 million ounces, 91.600 million ounces and 89.600 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghanaian and Venezuelan operations and, as of December 31, 2006, the South Deep operation.

Corporate expenditure

Corporate expenditure was $41.0 million in fiscal 2008 compared to $38.4 million in fiscal 2007, an increase of 6.8%. Corporate expenditure consists primarily of general corporate overhead and corporate service department costs, primarily in the areas of technical services, human resources and finance, which are used by the operations. Corporate expenditure also includes business development costs. In Rand terms, corporate expenditure increased from R276.0 million in fiscal 2007 to R298.2 million in fiscal 2008. The increase was mainly driven by inflation.

Employee termination costs

In fiscal 2008, Gold Fields incurred employee termination costs of $16.2 million compared to $4.9 million in fiscal 2007. The increase in employee termination costs resulted principally from an accrual raised for the retrenchment of approximately 1,900 employees at the South Deep mine following closure of the Ventersdorp Contact Reef section of the mine. The retrenchment plan was announced and communicated to employees prior to June 30, 2008.

Exploration expenditure

Exploration expenditure was $39.8 million in fiscal 2008, a decrease of 16.0% from $47.4 million in fiscal 2007. The decrease is mainly due to a decrease in exploration on the Arctic Platinum Project in fiscal 2008.

 

179


Table of Contents

Impairment of assets

Impairment of assets was $11.4 million in fiscal 2008 and nil in fiscal 2007. The impairment comprised $6.0 million for impairment of the Biox ® trademark which was written down to its realizable value, with the balance attributable to impairment of the St. Ives’ Junction mine and the original Leviathan pit, which have been closed, and an impairment of the old slimes dam at Agnew that is no longer in use.

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment

During fiscal 2008, Gold Fields continued to dispose of certain surplus property, plant and equipment. The net profit on the sale of this property, plant and equipment amounted to $4.6 million, comprising:

 

   

$3.0 million profit from the sale of a stage winder by Driefontein; and

 

   

$1.6 million profit from the sale of surplus housing by Beatrix and South Deep.

During fiscal 2007, Gold Fields disposed of certain surplus property, plant and equipment. The net profit on the sale of this property, plant and equipment amounted to $7.4 million, comprising:

 

   

$2.6 million profit from the sale of two stage winders by Driefontein;

 

   

$3.5 million profit from the sale of surplus housing by Beatrix and South Deep;

 

   

$0.7 million profit from the sale of two mills by Driefontein; and

 

   

$0.6 million from miscellaneous asset sales by the operating mines.

Shaft closure costs

Closure costs of $3.3 million relate to suspension of the Driefontein Shaft No. 9 deepening project due to the lack of power supply.

(Decrease)/increase in provision for post-retirement healthcare costs

In South Africa, Gold Fields provides medical benefits to employees in its operations through the Medicines Medical Scheme.

Under the medical plan which covers certain of its former employees, Gold Fields remains liable for 50% of retired employees’ medical contributions. At June 30, 2008, 213 (fiscal 2007: 224) former employees were covered under this plan, which is not available to members of the scheme formerly available to employees of the former Free State operation (which is now the Beatrix operation) who retired after August 31, 1997 and members of the Medicines medical scheme who retired after January 31, 1999.

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, Gold Fields assumed an additional post-retirement healthcare cost liability. Former employees of South Deep belong to a commercial medical scheme with employer liability for contribution per pensioner limited to R400 per month. The R400 monthly contribution is fixed until the termination of Gold Fields’ obligations on December 31, 2011. At June 30, 2008, there were 223 (fiscal 2007: 235) former South Deep employees that were subject to this employer contribution.

In fiscal 2008, an amount of $0.7 million was credited to earnings, compared to a debit of $1.3 million in fiscal 2007, in respect of Gold Fields’ obligations under these medical plans. The credit of $0.7 million in fiscal 2008 relates to a release of the cross-subsidization liability of $1.1 million, partially offset by the annual interest and service charge of $0.4 million. The $1.3 million debit in fiscal 2007 comprises the annual interest and service charge. The post-retirement healthcare provision is updated annually based on actuarial calculations, with any increase in the provision reflected in the statement of operations.

 

180


Table of Contents

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

At all of its operations, Gold Fields makes full provision for environmental rehabilitation based on the net present value of the estimated cost of restoring the environmental disturbance that has occurred up to the balance sheet date. The rehabilitation charge for fiscal 2008 was $12.0 million compared to $6.4 million in fiscal 2007. The increase is due primarily to above-inflation increases in the base case rehabilitation costs for Cerro Corona and Tarkwa.

For its South African operations, Gold Fields contributes to environmental trust funds it has established to provide for any environmental rehabilitation obligations and expected closure costs relating to its mining operations. The amounts invested in the trust funds are classified as non-current assets and any income earned on these assets is accounted for as interest income. For the Ghana, Australia and Peru operations Gold Fields does not contribute to a trust fund.

Share-based compensation

The charge for share-based compensation in fiscal 2008 was $20.7 million compared to $12.5 million in fiscal 2007. The increase is primarily due to a modification made to the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, or the Plan, and an additional allocation of share-based compensation made in fiscal 2008 resulting in two allocations being made to employees as opposed to one in the previous year. The modification to the Plan involved the substitution of new performance-based criteria to assess whether certain restricted shares are released to Plan participants. See note 17(a) to Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this annual report. This modification resulted in incremental fair value of $17.1 million, which will be expensed over the remaining vesting period of the restricted shares, with $2.1 million having been included in Share-based compensation for fiscal 2008.

Interest and dividends

Interest and dividends amounted to $31.2 million in fiscal 2008 compared to $26.8 million in fiscal 2007. Interest received on cash and cash equivalents amounted to $26.5 million in fiscal 2008 as compared to $24.6 million in fiscal 2007. Dividends received increased to $4.7 million in fiscal 2008 as compared to $2.2 million in fiscal 2007, mainly due to a $1.9 million dividend received from Rand Mutual Assurance Limited.

Finance expense

Gold Fields recognized net finance expense of $100.4 million in fiscal 2008 as compared to $95.2 million in fiscal 2007.

Net finance expense in fiscal 2008 consisted of interest payments of $142.5 million, partially offset by interest capitalized of $42.1 million.

The interest payments of $142.5 million in fiscal 2008 comprised:

 

   

$61.0 million on the Mvela loan;

 

   

$28.2 million on forward cover costs for the foreign exchange contract taken out for the revolving credit facility. These forward cover costs are deemed to be interest costs;

 

   

$23.2 million on amounts borrowed under the split-tenor facility in the prior year for the South Deep purchase;

 

   

$10.6 million on various Rand denominated borrowings incurred to finance capital expenditure and operating costs at Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix;

 

   

$5.5 million paid on various amounts borrowed under the split-tenor facility in fiscal 2008 for partial funding of the Cerro Corona capital expenditure and purchases of additional shares in Sino Gold;

 

181


Table of Contents
   

$2.7 million on $172.0 million of non-convertible redeemable preference shares issued on December 24, 2007;

 

   

$2.5 million on $63.6 million of Rand denominated borrowings under various uncommitted credit facilities taken out for the purchase of mineral rights adjacent to the South Deep operation;

 

   

$7.8 million on $150.0 million borrowed under the Cerro Corona project finance facility; and

 

   

$1.0 million of miscellaneous interest payments.

See “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

Interest on borrowings incurred in respect of assets requiring a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use is capitalized to the date on which the assets are substantially completed and ready for their intended use, at which time it will be amortized over the lives of the corresponding assets. $42.1 million of interest payments were capitalized in this way in fiscal 2008, in respect of the following operations:

 

•        Kloof:

   $0.3 million;

•        Driefontein:

   $2.4 million;

•        South Deep:

   $2.8 million;

•        Tarkwa:

   $4.8 million; and

•        Cerro Corona:

   $31.8 million.

Net finance expense in fiscal 2007 consisted of net interest payments of $89.4 million and realized exchange losses on loans of $5.8 million.

The interest payments of $102.7 million in fiscal 2007 comprised:

 

   

$61.6 million on the Mvela loan;

 

   

$9.3 million on the $168 million borrowed to partly finance the Bolivar acquisition;

 

   

$13.8 million on $1.2 billion borrowed to finance the acquisition of BGSA under a $1.8 billion bridge loan facility entered into by GFIMSA;

 

   

$12.9 million on a further $550 million borrowed under the bridge facility to settle the Western Areas gold derivative structure and to finance certain working capital requirements;

 

   

$3.6 million of loan transaction costs incurred on the $1.8 billion bridge loan facility and a $750 million syndicated loan facility entered into by GFIMSA, Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited, or Orogen, and Western Areas; and

 

   

$1.5 million of miscellaneous interest payments.

See “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

$13.3 million of interest payments were capitalized to capital projects, resulting in net interest payments of $89.4 million. The $13.3 million was capitalized to:

 

•        Kloof:

   $0.2 million;

•        Driefontein:

   $0.2 million;

•        South Deep:

   $0.1 million;

•        Tarkwa:

   $0.4 million; and

•        Cerro Corona:

   $12.4 million.

 

182


Table of Contents

The realized exchange losses on loans of $5.8 million comprised a $6.3 million loss on the $1.2 billion borrowed under the bridge loan facility to finance the acquisition of BGSA, offset in part by a $0.5 million gain on the $550 million borrowed to settle the Western Areas gold derivative structure before this exposure was hedged by a foreign exchange contract.

Unrealized gain on financial instruments

There was no unrealized gain or loss on financial instruments in fiscal 2008 compared to an unrealized gain of $15.4 million in fiscal 2007.

The unrealized gain of $15.4 million in fiscal 2007 consisted of a mark-to-market gain on various warrants and options held in respect of underlying share investments, primarily related to Sino Gold options.

Realized gain/(loss) on financial instruments

Gold Fields recognized a realized gain of $19.8 million in fiscal 2008 compared to a realized loss of $10.7 million in fiscal 2007 relating to financial instruments.

The $19.8 million realized gain in fiscal 2008 comprised:

 

   

$11.6 million gain on the expiration of U.S. dollar/Rand currency hedges;

 

   

$8.1 million gain related to an interest rate swap Gold Fields had entered into in connection with the Mvela Loan. This swap was closed out on June 3, 2005, resulting in a realized gain of $36.2 million. This gain is being accounted for in the income statement over the remaining period of the underlying loan. $26.3 million has been accounted for in the income statement since the close-out. The balance of $9.9 million which was accounted for in fiscal 2009 was made up of a $4.8 million gain and $5.1 million exchange difference due to differing rates used for the purposes of initial recognition and subsequent income statement charges;

 

   

$1.4 million gain on the settlement of IPE gasoil call options; and

 

   

$1.3 million loss on various warrants and options converted to shares.

The $10.7 million realized loss in fiscal 2007 comprised:

 

   

$1.0 million net loss on the settlement of the $30.0 million U.S. dollar/Rand currency financial instruments;

 

   

$2.5 million loss on the settlement of IPE gasoil call options;

 

   

$20.7 million loss on settlement of the Western Areas gold derivative structure; and

 

   

$16.0 million loss on the forward exchange contract taken out to partly settle the $1.2 billion borrowed under the $1.8 billion bridge loan facility to finance substantially all of the cash portion of the acquisition of BGSA.

Partly offset by:

 

   

$21.0 million gain on the Western Areas gold delta purchases;

 

   

$8.2 million gain related to the Mvela Loan interest rate swap; and

 

   

$0.3 million gain on U.S. dollar/Australian call options.

Gain/(loss) on foreign exchange

Gold Fields recognized an exchange gain of $1.7 million in fiscal 2008 compared to an exchange loss of $15.1 million in fiscal 2007. The gain of $1.7 million in fiscal 2008 comprised exchange gains on foreign

 

183


Table of Contents

currency denominated cash balances. The exchange loss in fiscal 2007 comprised a $16.5 million exchange loss on the settlement of the Western Areas gold derivative structure, partially offset by a $1.4 million exchange gain on foreign currency denominated bank balances, mainly at Choco 10 and Cerro Corona.

Profit on disposal of listed investments

During fiscal 2008, Gold Fields continued to liquidate certain non-current investments. The profit on the sale of these investments amounted to $3.7 million and resulted from the following sales:

 

   

$2.1 million gain from the sale of 14.8 million shares in Emed Mining Public Limited;

 

   

$4.8 million gain from the sale of various shares held by the New Africa Mining Fund;

 

   

$0.1 million gain from the sale of 0.03 million shares in Resource Investment Trust;

 

   

$2.7 million loss from the sale of 8.1 million shares in Committee Bay Resources Limited; and

 

   

$0.6 million loss from the sale of 0.5 million shares in Lakota Resources Inc.

During fiscal 2007, Gold Fields realized a profit on the sale of investments amounting to $26.8 million resulting from the following sales:

 

   

$17.1 million gain from the sale of 19.8 million shares in Avoca Resources Ltd;

 

   

$6.0 million gain from the sale of the Bibiani project in Ghana;

 

   

$1.0 million gain from the sale of 3.2 million shares in the TLC Ventures Corporation;

 

   

$1.0 million gain from the sale of 7.6 million shares in Comaplex Minerals Corporation;

 

   

$0.7 million gain from the sale of 21.5 million shares in Anglo Australian Resources Ltd; and

 

   

$1.0 million gain from the sale of various other investments.

Profit on disposal of subsidiaries

During fiscal 2008 Gold Fields realized a profit on sale of subsidiaries of $208.4 million comprised of $191.1 million realized on the sale of the Essakane project in Burkina Faso and $17.3 million realized on the sale of the Venezuelan assets. See “Information on the Company—History”.

There were no disposals of subsidiaries during fiscal 2007.

Other income/(expenses)

Other income/(expenses) represents miscellaneous corporate expenditure not allocated to the operations and therefore not included in the corporate expenditure line item, net of miscellaneous revenue items such as scrap sales and rental income. Other income/(expenses) increased by $8.1 million, from $2.2 million of expenses in fiscal 2007 to $5.9 million of income in fiscal 2008.

Other income/(expenses) in fiscal 2008 and fiscal 2007 consisted of miscellaneous items which included:

 

   

corporate social investment costs;

 

   

professional fees related to corporate advice;

 

   

a positive fair value adjustment to biological assets; and

 

   

refunds received for costs incurred at the Essakane project.

 

184


Table of Contents

Income and mining tax expense

The table below sets forth Gold Fields’ effective tax rate for fiscal 2008 and fiscal 2007, including normal and deferred tax.

 

         Year ended June 30,      
     2008     2007  

Effective tax expense rate

   32.2   43.5

In fiscal 2008, the effective tax expense rate of 32.2% differed from the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43%, due to a reduction of $47.2 million in net tax charge arising from non-South African mining income being taxed at lower rates, a $30.5 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula and $74.6 million of net non-taxable income, mainly due to the sale of the Essakane project.

These reductions were partly offset by $33.5 million in charges relating to levies and royalties in Ghana and Australia and a $34.0 million increase in valuation allowance on Gold Fields Operations, GFI Joint Venture Holdings, Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg) and Arctic Platinum losses.

In fiscal 2007, the effective tax expense rate of 43.5% differed from the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 45%, due to a reduction of $62.6 million in net tax charge arising from non-South African mining income being taxed at lower rates, a $27.9 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula and a $3.3 million reduction due to an increase in tax values in Australia following the recalculation of the consolidation of St. Ives and Agnew for tax purposes. A change in legislation in Australia allows companies that consolidate for tax purposes to recalculate the tax values of assets based on a market value calculation.

These reductions were partly offset by $29.4 million in charges relating to levies and royalties in Ghana and Australia, a further $45.5 million of net non-deductible expenditure, mainly due to exploration costs and share-based payment costs, and a $20.5 million increase in valuation allowance on Western Areas and BGSA’s losses.

Impairment of investment in equity investee

Impairment of investment in equity investee was $61.3 million in fiscal 2008. This impairment related to Gold Fields’ investment in Rusoro, in which Gold Fields owns 36.2%, which was written down to its market value.

There was no impairment of investment in equity investee in fiscal 2007.

Share of equity investees’ (losses)/income

Share of equity investees’ (losses)/income decreased from $0.3 million of income in fiscal 2007 to $16.0 million of loss in fiscal 2008.

Gold Fields equity accounts for two associates: Rand Refinery Limited, or Rand Refinery, and Rusoro Mining Limited, or Rusoro. Gold Fields owns 34.9% of Rand Refinery, and its share of Rand Refinery’s after-tax profits was $4.7 million in fiscal 2008. Gold Fields acquired a 36.2% stake in Rusoro in connection with the sale of its Venezuelan assets on November 30, 2007. Gold Fields’ share of Rusoro’s after-tax loss was $20.7 million for the seven months it held the Rusoro shares in fiscal 2008. See “Information on the Company—History.”

The $0.3 million of income in fiscal 2007 relates to the recording of $2.0 million of profits from Rand Refinery Limited, of which Gold Fields owns 34.9%, partly offset by $1.7 million of equity losses related to Western Areas prior to Gold Fields gaining control of Western Areas, with effect from December 1, 2006.

Minority interests

Minority interests represented an expense of $39.8 million in fiscal 2008, compared to an expense of $26.5 million in fiscal 2007. For fiscal 2008 these amounts reflect the portion of the net income of Gold Fields Ghana,

 

185


Table of Contents

Abosso, Choco 10 until its disposal on November 30, 2007 and Living Gold attributable to their minority shareholders. For fiscal 2007 these amounts reflect the portion of the net income of Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso, Choco 10, Living Gold, as well as Western Areas and South Deep for the four months, from December 1, 2006 to March 31, 2007, that Gold Fields controlled, but did not own 100% of, those entities. The minority shareholders’ interest was 28.9% in Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso in fiscal 2008 and 2007, 5% in Choco 10 in fiscal 2008 and fiscal 2007 and 35% in Living Gold in fiscal 2008 and 2007. The amounts due to minority shareholders were higher in fiscal 2008 primarily due to increased net income at Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso in fiscal 2008.

Net income

As a result of the factors discussed above, Gold Fields’ net income was $452.5 million in fiscal 2008, compared with net income of $246.1 million in fiscal 2007.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Cash resources

Cash flows from operations

Net cash provided by operations in fiscal 2009 was $634.9 million compared to $899.0 million in fiscal 2008.

Gold Fields’ realized gold price increased from an average of $819 per ounce in fiscal 2008 to an average of $875 per ounce in fiscal 2009. At the Cerro Corona operation in Peru, copper production was converted to equivalent gold ounces on a monthly basis using average copper and gold prices for the month in which the copper was produced. The increase in realized price offset the decline in ounces of gold sold and resulted in revenue from product sales increasing by $22.1 million from $3,206.2 million in fiscal 2008 to $3,228.3 million in fiscal 2009.

The increased revenue was partially offset by:

 

   

a marginal $2.5 million increase in production costs, which increased from $1,996.1 in fiscal 2008 to $1,998.6 in fiscal 2009;

 

   

a negative movement of $168.3 million in working capital resulting from an investment of $120.3 million in fiscal 2009 versus a release of $48.0 million in fiscal 2008, which was mainly due to an increase in trade receivables for gold sales in fiscal 2009 and exchange rate impact; and

 

   

a $54.4 million increase in taxes paid as a result of the increased profitability at a number of subsidiaries.

Net cash provided by operations in fiscal 2008 was $899.0 million compared to $205.2 million in fiscal 2007. In fiscal 2008, Gold Fields’ realized gold price increased to an average of $816 per ounce compared to $638 per ounce in fiscal 2007. The increase in realized price more than offset the decline in ounces of gold sold and resulted in revenue from product sales increasing by $471.0 million from $2,735.2 million in fiscal 2007 to $3,206.2 million in fiscal 2008.

The increased revenues were offset in part by a $288.4 million increase in production costs, which increased from $1,707.7 million in fiscal 2007 to $1,996.1 million in fiscal 2008. In addition there was a $44.2 increase in taxes paid as a result of the increased profitability. The net effect was a $693.8 million increase in cash flow provided by operations.

Although revenues from Gold Fields’ South African operations are denominated in U.S. dollars, Gold Fields receives them in Rand, which are then subject to South African exchange control limitations. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Exchange Controls.” As a result, those revenues are generally not available to service Gold Fields’ non-Rand debt obligations or to make investments outside South Africa without the approval of the South African Reserve Bank.

 

186


Table of Contents

Revenues from Gold Fields’ Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations are also denominated in U.S. dollars, but, unlike in South Africa, Gold Fields receives them in U.S. dollars or is freely able to convert them into U.S. dollars. The Ghanaian and Australian U.S. dollar revenues can be used by Gold Fields to service its U.S. dollar-denominated debt and to make investments in its non-South African operations taking into account SARB-applicable requirements. Under the terms of the Cerro Corona Facility agreement (see “—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—Cerro Corona Facility”), all payments from the Peruvian operations to any Gold Fields group entity are restricted until the Facility has been repaid in full.

Cash flows from investing activities

Net cash utilized in investing activities was $720.6 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $970.1 million in fiscal 2008. The decrease was primarily due to a decrease in capital expenditure of $394.1 million and a decrease in purchase of listed investments of $121.7 million, partially offset by a decrease in proceeds on disposal of subsidiaries of $305.9 million.

Net cash utilized in investing activities was $970.1 million in fiscal 2008 compared to $2,066.5 million in fiscal 2007. The increase was primarily due to a decrease in the acquisition of subsidiaries of $1,240.9 million and an increase in proceeds on disposal of subsidiaries of $310.9 million, partially offset by an increase in capital expenditure of $357.4 million.

Capital expenditure decreased by $394.1 million to $760.3 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $1,154.4 million in fiscal 2008. Capital expenditure increased by $357.4 million to $1,154.4 million in fiscal 2008 compared to $797.0 million in fiscal 2007. In Rand terms, capital expenditure decreased by R1,542.1 million to R6,850.6 million in fiscal 2009 compared to R8,392.5 million in fiscal 2008. Capital expenditure in Rand terms was R5,738.6 million in fiscal 2007. The decrease in capital expenditure in fiscal 2009 was mainly due to the completion of the Cerro Corona Mine in Peru and a decrease in ore reserve development at the South African operations, due to the re-examination of the plan for extracting Kloof’s Main Shaft and increased secondary support programs at Driefontein and Kloof, as well as the suspension of the Shaft No. 9 deepening project at Driefontein, deferral of the Main Shaft pillar extraction at Kloof and reduced expenditure on the heap leach facility at Tarkwa with the closure of the South Plant Heap Leach Facility.

Expenditure on Gold Fields’ major capital projects in fiscal 2009 included:

 

   

$116.8 million at Cerro Corona in Peru, as compared to $348.4 million in fiscal 2008 and $234.0 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$143.5 million on ore reserve development at the South African operations, compared to $169.6 million in fiscal 2008 and $137.1 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$113.3 million on the development and equipping of the South Deep mine as the mine builds to full production as compared to $103.5 million in fiscal 2008 and $36.7 million in fiscal 2007 (the mine was acquired on December 1, 2006);

 

   

$77.5 million on the CIL expansion project at Tarkwa, which was completed in December 2008, as compared to $89.7 million in fiscal 2008 and $18.5 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

no expenditure on the Shaft No. 9 deepening project at Driefontein, as compared with $36.7 million in fiscal 2008 and $22.5 million in fiscal 2007. This project was suspended during fiscal 2008 due to power constraints;

 

   

$63.6 million of interest capitalized as compared to $42.1 million in fiscal 2008 and $13.3 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$7.9 million on the heap leach pads at Tarkwa, as compared to $30.4 million in fiscal 2008 and $10.4 million in fiscal 2007;

 

187


Table of Contents
   

$13.6 million on the Beatrix Shaft No. 3 expansion project as compared to $16.0 million in fiscal 2008 and $20.0 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$28.3 million on new mining equipment at Tarkwa, as compared to $10.3 million in fiscal 2008 and $17.3 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$1.0 million on the Kloof Shaft No. 1 pillar extraction, as compared to $8.4 million in fiscal 2008 and $8.6 million in fiscal 2007. Extraction of this pillar has been deferred until fiscal 2014. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Kloof Operation;”

 

   

$3.4 million on the Shaft No. 4 project at Kloof, as compared to $5.7 million in fiscal 2008 and $11.6 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$1.4 million on the Shaft No. 1 and Shaft No. 5 projects at Driefontein, as compared to $3.1 million in fiscal 2008 and $9.6 million in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$7.9 million on the historical tailings uranium project at Driefontein, as compared to $0.3 million in fiscal 2008 and $nil in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$8.0 million on the re-examination of the plan for extracting the Main Shaft at Kloof, which started in fiscal 2009;

 

   

$45.4 million on the tailings management facility at Cerro Corona; prior to September 2008 expenditure on this project was capitalized as part of the construction of Cerro Corona;

 

   

$13.6 million on development of the Waroonga underground complex at Agnew compared to $9.2 million in fiscal 2008 and $9.2 million in fiscal 2007; and

 

   

$36.9 million on development of underground mines at St. Ives compared to $69.3 million in fiscal 2008 and $16.8 million in fiscal 2009.

Proceeds on the disposal of property, plant and equipment decreased from $5.8 million in fiscal 2008 to $3.6 million in fiscal 2009. Proceeds on the disposal of property, plant and equipment were $8.8 million in fiscal 2007. In all three years this related to the disposal of various mining assets by the South African mining operations.

Purchase of listed investments decreased from $134.5 million in fiscal 2008 to $12.8 million in fiscal 2009. The major net investment purchases comprising the $12.8 million spent in fiscal 2009 were:

 

   

$12.4 million invested in Sino Gold as part of a rights offer;

 

   

$1.9 million invested in Glencar Mining Plc; and

 

   

$0.2 million invested in Clancy Exploration Limited.

Purchase of listed investments increased from $68.1 million in fiscal 2007 to $134.5 million in fiscal 2008. The major net investment purchases comprising the $134.5 million spent in fiscal 2008 were:

 

   

$109.4 million invested in Sino Gold;

 

   

$11.7 million on the conversion of options held in Mvelaphanda Resources Limited to shares;

 

   

$9.2 million invested in Conquest Mining Limited;

 

   

$0.7 million invested in Emed Mining Public Limited; and

 

   

$5.2 million invested in Orsu Metals Corporation (previously Lero Gold Corporation).

Proceeds from the sale of listed investments increased from $13.7 million in fiscal 2008 to $54.3 million in fiscal 2009. The major investment disposals comprising the $54.3 million in fiscal 2009 were:

 

   

$33.4 million from the sale of IAMGold shares received in exchange for Orezone shares as a result of the acquisition of all Orezone shares by IAMGold; and

 

188


Table of Contents
   

$20.9 million from the redemption of preference shares held in a wholly-owned subsidiary of Mvela Resources Limited.

Proceeds from the sale of listed investments decreased from $45.3 million in fiscal 2007 to $13.7 million in fiscal 2008. The major investment disposals comprising the $13.7 million in fiscal 2008 were:

 

   

$5.6 million from the sale of Emed Mining Public Limited shares;

 

   

$5.2 million from the sale of various shares held by the New Africa Mining Fund, a trust in which Gold Fields holds an interest;

 

   

$1.6 million from the sale of Committee Bay Resources Limited shares; and

 

   

$1.0 million from the sale of Encore Oil Limited shares.

Proceeds on disposal of subsidiaries decreased from $310.9 million in fiscal 2008 to $5.0 million in fiscal 2009. During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields disposed of its 70% holding in IRCA for $5.0 million. During fiscal 2008, Gold Fields realized cash proceeds of $310.9 million from disposals of subsidiaries. This comprised $143.3 million of net cash proceeds received from the sale of the Essakane project in Burkina Faso and $167.6 million of net cash proceeds received from the sale of the Venezuelan assets. The gross proceeds of the sale of Essakane amounted to $200.0 million, consisting of the above-mentioned net cash of $143.3 million and 41,666,667 shares in Orezone with a value of $48.0 million. The gross proceeds from the sale of the Venezuelan assets amounted to $413.0 million and comprised net cash of $167.6 million and 140,000,000 shares in Rusoro with a value of $213.0 million. There were no disposals of subsidiaries during fiscal 2007.

There were no acquisitions of subsidiaries during fiscal 2009 or 2008.

During fiscal 2007 Gold Fields acquired South Deep and IRCA, which resulted in a net cash outflow of $1,240.9 million.

South Deep, which is an unincorporated joint venture, was acquired through the purchase of 100% of BGSA, which owned 50% of the joint venture, and 100% of Western Areas, which owned the other 50% of the joint venture. On December 1, 2006, Gold Fields acquired 100% of the issued share capital of BGSA for $1,130.9 million. The cash element of the consideration, including a loan repayment, was $1,213.7 million. This amount, less the $2.1 million cash acquired, resulted in a net cash outflow of $1,211.6 million. Through a series of purchases starting in fiscal 1998 and completed by March 31, 2007, Gold Fields acquired 100% of the issued share capital of Western Areas for $1,039.2 million.

The cash element of the consideration paid during fiscal 2007 was $23.0 million. This amount, less the $1.4 million cash acquired, resulted in a net cash outflow of $21.6 million.

Therefore, the total purchase consideration to acquire South Deep was $2,170.1 million and the net cash outflow was $1,233.0 million.

On 1 March 2007, Gold Fields acquired 70% in IRCA for $7.9 million ($5.3 million paid plus bank overdraft of $2.6 million assumed).

For its South African operations, Gold Fields contributes to an environmental trust fund it has established to provide for any environmental rehabilitation obligations and expected closure costs relating to its mining operations. The amounts invested in the trust funds are classified as non-current assets and any income earned on these assets is accounted for as interest income. The amount required to be contributed each year is calculated pursuant to a statutory formula, and can vary depending on how the fund’s investments performed, the lives of mine of the different South African operations and various other factors. During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields’ South African operations contributed $10.4 million to the environmental trust fund compared to $11.6 million in fiscal 2008 and $14.6 million in fiscal 2007. For the Ghana, Australia and Peru operations, Gold Fields does not contribute to a trust fund.

 

189


Table of Contents

Cash flows from financing activities

Net cash provided by financing activities was $215.3 million in fiscal 2009 as compared to net cash utilized in financing activities of $20.2 million in fiscal 2008. The main reason for this movement was that fiscal 2009 included $1,312.3 million in loans received compared to only $603.4 million received in fiscal 2008, although loans repaid increased from $586.5 million in fiscal 2008 to $993.5 million in fiscal 2009.

The $1,312.3 million in loans received in fiscal 2009 comprised:

 

   

$416.8 million drawn down under an overnight credit facility in order to repay the Mvela Loan. Mvela Gold then used the proceeds from the loan repayment to subscribe for a 15% interest in GFIMSA by paying R4,139 million (the Rand equivalent of the $416.8 million) to GFIMSA. Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvela exercised its right to exchange the GFIMSA shares for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields;

 

   

$488.0 million borrowed by GFIMSA from various local banks under committed and uncommitted facilities to fund short-term working capital requirements and capital expenditure;

 

   

$138.0 million drawn down under the $750 million syndicated facility to fund capital expenditure on Cerro Corona and the acquisition of additional Sino Gold shares;

 

   

$133.5 million issued under the R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Programme to refinance existing facilities;

 

   

$116.0 drawn down under the syndicated revolving loan facility for the purpose of refinancing existing facilities; and

 

   

$20.0 million drawn down under the short term syndicated facility to fund capital expenditure.

The $603.4 million in loans received in fiscal 2008 comprised:

 

   

$225.0 million drawn down under a $750.0 million split-tenor revolving credit facility entered into by GFIMSA, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations to fund the capital expenditure on Cerro Corona and the acquisition of additional Sino Gold shares;

 

   

$172.0 million from the issuance of non-convertible, redeemable preference shares to Rand Merchant Bank for the purpose of refinancing existing facilities;

 

   

$23.0 million borrowed under the Cerro Corona project finance loan; and

 

   

$183.4 million borrowed by GFIMSA from various local banks, including borrowings under the Absa 1 and 2 Facilities described below under “—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources”, to fund working capital requirements and capital expenditure.

The $993.5 million in loans repaid in fiscal 2009 comprised:

 

   

$416.8 million repayment to effect the Mvela transaction as described above;

 

   

$319.2 million repayment of various Group committed and uncommitted facilities used to finance short-term working capital and capital expenditure of the GFIMSA divisions;

 

   

$150.0 million repayment of the split-tenor revolving credit facility taken out in fiscal 2007;

 

   

$63.5 million repayment of the preference shares issued; and

 

   

$44.0 million repayment of the Syndicated revolving loan facility taken out in fiscal 2009.

The $586.5 million in loans repaid in fiscal 2008 comprised:

 

   

$432.0 million to repay in part the split-tenor revolving credit facility; and

 

   

$154.5 million to repay various committed and uncommitted facilities, including the Absa 1 and 2 facilities used to finance working capital and capital expenditure of the GFIMSA divisions.

 

190


Table of Contents

For a description of the Gold Fields’ various credit facilities, see “—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources”.

$11.5 million of minority shareholder loans at Tarkwa were repaid in fiscal 2007. No minority shareholder loans were repaid in fiscal 2009 and 2008.

Dividends paid amounted to $121.2 million in fiscal 2009 compared to $142.5 million in fiscal 2008. Dividend payments in fiscal 2009 amounted to R981.0 million, or 150 SA cents per ordinary share, as compared to R1,044.8 million, or 160 SA cents per ordinary share, in fiscal 2008.

During fiscal 2007, Damang paid a dividend and the minority shareholders’ share of this payment was $1.5 million. No such dividends were paid during fiscal 2009 and 2008.

In fiscal 2008, $96.0 million was raised in a rights issue to minority shareholders in La Cima. As a result of Gold Fields converting its inter-company loan to equity, the minority shareholders decided to participate in a rights issue to avoid a dilution of their interest. The issuance of the shares to the minority shareholders was awaiting finalization of all statutory requirements at the end of fiscal 2008. The shares were issued to minority shareholders in August 2008.

In fiscal 2009, $10.7 million was received as a result of share options exercised, as compared to $10.0 million in fiscal 2008. In addition to $10.8 million received from share options exercised in fiscal 2007, Gold Fields received $1,402.0 million from the issue of 90,850,000 shares as a result of the capital raising that took place in February 2007. The $1,402.0 million comprised gross proceeds of $1,427.4 million net of transaction costs of $25.4 million relating to the issue of these shares.

Net cash utilized in financing activities was $20.2 million in fiscal 2008 as compared to net cash provided by financing activities of $1,931.9 million in fiscal 2007. The main reason for this movement was that fiscal 2007 included the proceeds of the $2,637.5 million of loans raised as compared to the $603.4 million loan raised in fiscal 2008. In addition, Gold Fields received $1,402.0 million from the capital raising that took place in fiscal 2007. These amounts were partly offset by loans repaid of $1,950.5 in fiscal 2007 as compared to loans repaid of $586.5 million in fiscal 2008. Dividends paid amounted to $158.2 million in fiscal 2007 compared to $142.5 million in fiscal 2008. Dividend payments in fiscal 2007 amounted to Rand 1,131.0 million, or 200 SA cents per ordinary share as compared to R1,044.8 million, or 160 SA cents per ordinary share, in fiscal 2008. In fiscal 2008, $96.0 million was raised in a rights issue to minority shareholders in La Cima. In fiscal 2007, $10.8 million was received as a result of share options exercised as compared to $10.0 million in fiscal 2008.

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

As a result of the above, net cash increased by $103.8 million, resulting in cash and cash equivalents at June 30, 2009 of $357.5 million.

Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources

As at June 30, 2009, Gold Fields had committed, unutilized banking facilities of $239.0 million available under the $311.0 million syndicated revolving credit facility described below and R1,500 million ($186.1 million) available under the R1,500 million long term revolving credit facility described below. As of November 30, 2009, Gold Fields had committed unutilized banking facilities of $51.0 million under the $500 million revolving credit facility, $311 million under the $311 million syndicated revolving credit facility and R1,500 million ($202.7 million) under the R1,500 million long term revolving credit facility described below. Substantial contractual arrangements for uncommitted borrowing facilities are maintained with several banking counterparties to meet Gold Fields’ normal contingency funding requirements. As of the date of this annual report, Gold Fields was not in default under the terms of any of its outstanding credit facilities.

 

191


Table of Contents

In the event that Gold Fields undertakes any acquisitions or incurs significant capital expenditure, it may need to incur further debt or arrange other financing to fund the costs, which could have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ liquidity, including increasing its level of debt.

Cerro Corona Facility

On November 14, 2006, Gold Fields La Cima S.A., or La Cima, entered into a U.S.$150 million project finance facility agreement, or the Cerro Corona Facility, with The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Citigroup Global Markets Inc., The Bank of Nova Scotia, The Bank of Nova Scotia Trust Company of New York, Scotiabank Peru S.A.A. and other financial institutions, as set out in the agreement. The terms of the Cerro Corona Facility are an upfront arrangement fee of 1.2% and a margin over LIBOR of 0.45% during the pre-completion phase and between 1.25% and 1.75% thereafter. Scheduled principal repayments shall be made in 16 semi-annual installments of various amounts ranging from 4.75% to 6.75% of the principal amount, beginning on June 30, 2009. The final installment is due on the tenth anniversary of the signing date. The Cerro Corona Facility is secured by, among other things, pledges of and mortgages over the assets and properties of La Cima. La Cima can elect to make optional prepayments and must make prepayments in certain circumstances, including with the proceeds of any bond issuances up to a maximum of U.S.$100 million. As at June 30, 2009, Gold Fields La Cima had drawn down U.S.$150.0 million under this facility. Subsequent to year end, $9.75 million was repaid under the facility. Under the terms of the Cerro Corona Facility, all payments from the Peruvian operations to any Gold Fields group entities are restricted until the Cerro Corona Facility has been repaid in full.

See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Peru Operation—Cerro Corona Mine.”

Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility

On May 16, 2007, GFIMSA, Orogen and Western Areas entered into a U.S.$750.0 million split-tenor revolving credit facility, or the Split-tenor Facility, with lead lenders Barclays Bank Plc and ABN Amro N.V. As originally constituted, the Split-tenor Facility consisted of a U.S.$250 million 364-day revolving tranche (Facility A) and a U.S.$500 million five-year revolving tranche (Facility B). Facility A has since expired, as explained below. Borrowings under the Split-tenor Facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, Orogen and Western Areas. Under the Split-tenor Facility, Gold Fields must maintain a consolidated EBITDA to consolidated net finance charge ratio of at least 5 to 1 and a consolidated net borrowing to consolidated EBITDA ratio of no more than 2.5 to 1. There are also restrictions on the ability of Gold Fields and certain of its subsidiaries to encumber their assets, dispose of assets or enter into a merger or corporate reconstruction. In connection with this facility Gold Fields paid an arrangement fee of 0.10% on Facility A and 0.30% on Facility B and pays a quarterly commitment fee of 0.09% of any undrawn amounts under Facility B and an agency fee of $35,000 per annum. Borrowings under Facility A bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.25% per annum while borrowings under Facility B bear interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.3% per annum. Where the total utilizations under Facility A were equal to or greater than 50% of the amount available, a utilization fee of 0.05% per annum was payable on the total amount of utilizations. The utilization fee was payable quarterly in arrears.

On April 25, 2008, Gold Fields Operations exercised a term-out option under Facility A pursuant to which the $250 million advance outstanding under Facility A at that date was converted to a term loan with a final maturity date of May 16, 2009. In connection with the conversion, Gold Fields paid a term-out fee of 0.05% of the amount that was converted.

On various dates during fiscal 2009, Orogen made draw downs under facility B totaling $120 million. On May 15, 2009, Gold Fields Operations drew down $118 million under Facility B to partly refinance its maturing loan under Facility A. The balance of the Gold Fields Operations’ loan outstanding under Facility A on May 15, 2009 in the amount of $59 million was refinanced using the $311 million facility described below. Also on May 15, 2009, Orogen repaid $16 million of its portion of the maturing Facility A and refinanced the remaining $57 million using the $311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility, as defined below.

 

192


Table of Contents

The total borrowings at June 30, 2009 for Gold Fields Operations and Orogen under Facility B were $259 million and $241 million, respectively.

On September 17, 2009, Gold Fields utilized some of the proceeds from the sale of its shares in Eldorado Gold Corporation, or Eldorado, (see “—Recent Developments—Disposal of stake in Sino Gold”) to repay the $259 million borrowed by Gold Fields Operations under Facility B. Subsequent to this, Orogen drew down $221 million under Facility B to repay its total borrowings under the $311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility. On November 20, 2009, Orogen repaid $13 million borrowed under this facility.

The total borrowings at the date of this report under Facility B are $449 million.

Facility B matures on May 16, 2012. Facility A expired on May 16, 2009 in accordance with its terms.

$311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

On May 7, 2009, GFIMSA, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations entered into a 364-day $311 million syndicated revolving credit facility, or the Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility, with an option, or the Extension Option, to extend on the same terms for an additional 364 days from the date of the original final maturity. At any time prior to the date of final maturity, Gold Fields has the option, or the Term Out Option, to convert all advances outstanding under this facility into a term loan with a final maturity date being no more than 24 months after the signing date of the facility. The Extension Option may not be exercised if the Term Out Option has been previously exercised. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate purposes.

On May 15, 2009, Gold Fields Operations and Orogen drew down $59 million and $57 million, respectively, under this facility to refinance their respective portion of the loans maturing under Facility A of the Split-tenor Facility. On June 15, 2009, Gold Fields Operations repaid $44 million of its loan under the Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility.

The total borrowings at June 30, 2009 under this facility were $72 million.

During July 2009, Orogen drew down $50 million under this facility to fund the acquisition of Glencar Mining Plc. Orogen also drew down $130 million on various dates during August 2009 under this facility to fund the consideration for terminating the royalty over St. Ives.

On September 17, 2009, Gold Fields utilized some of the proceeds from the sale of its shares in Eldorado to repay the $15 million borrowed by Gold Fields Operations under this facility. The balance of the proceeds were utilized to repay $36 million of Orogen’s debt under this facility on September 22, 2009. Subsequent to this and on various dates, Orogen refinanced the remaining $221 million under this facility with draw downs under Facility B of the split-tenor revolving credit facility.

The facility bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 2.75% per annum. The borrowers are required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 1.10% per annum, payable on the undrawn portion of the facility. A term out flat fee of 0.25% is payable on the date on which Gold Fields exercises the Term Out Option. This fee will be calculated on the amount of the facility which has been converted into the term loan. Borrowings under the Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Gold Fields Holdings, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations. There are no outstanding borrowings under this facility at the date of this report.

R500 million Revolving Credit Facility

On August 21, 2007, GFIMSA entered into a R500 million 364-day revolving credit facility, or the Absa 1 Facility, with Absa Capital (a division of Absa Bank Limited). Borrowings under this facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields. The Absa 1 Facility was used for general corporate purposes. Under the terms of the facility

 

193


Table of Contents

agreement, Gold Fields had to maintain a ratio of total net borrowing to tangible consolidated net worth not exceeding 0.40, minimum tangible consolidated net worth of R13 billion and a minimum interest cover ratio of 2.5 times. On September 22, 2008, this facility was reinstated as a short-term facility expiring on October 21, 2008 with the same covenants as the Absa 1 Facility. With effect from November 11, 2008, this facility was again reinstated as a 364-day facility, expiring on November 10, 2009, with the same covenants as the Absa 1 Facility. This facility now bears interest at Johannesburg Interbank Agreed Rate, or JIBAR, plus a margin of 1.20% per annum. On May 15, 2009, R500 million was drawn down under the facility. That amount remained outstanding at June 30, 2009. On November 10, 2009, Gold Fields utilized the proceeds from notes issued under the R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Program to repay the outstanding amount when the facility expired in accordance with its terms.

R1,000 million Short Term Revolving Credit Facility

On January 31, 2008, GFIMSA, Gold Fields Operations, Orogen and GFLMSL entered into a R1,000 million 364-day revolving credit facility effective May 15, 2008, or the Absa 2 Facility, with Absa Capital. The Absa 2 Facility was used for capital expenditure in respect of gold mining projects and general corporate and working capital purposes. During fiscal 2008, Gold Fields utilized and repaid the full amount of the Absa 2 Facility. R500 million was drawn down under the Absa 2 Facility on June 27, 2008 and a further R500 million was drawn down on August 5, 2008. These amounts were repaid on May 4, 2009 and May 14, 2009, respectively, and the facility expired on May 14, 2009.

R1,500 million Long Term Revolving Credit Facility

On May 6, 2009, GFIMSA and Gold Fields Operations entered into a R1.5 billion five-year revolving credit facility with Nedbank Limited, effective June 10, 2009. The facility is to be used for capital expenditure, general corporate and working capital requirements and the refinancing of existing debt. The facility bears interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 2.95% per annum. The borrowers are required to pay a commitment fee of 0.75% per annum on the undrawn and uncanceled amounts of the facility, calculated and payable semi-annually in arrears. The facility matures on June 10, 2014. Borrowings under the facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, Gold Fields Holdings, Gold Fields Operations, Orogen and GFIMSA. As at June 30, 2009 no amounts were drawn under the facility. There are no outstanding borrowings under this facility at the date of this report.

Preference Shares

On December 24, 2007, Gold Fields Limited issued R1,200 million ($172.0 million at the exchange rate in effect on the date of issuance) of non-convertible redeemable preference shares, or the Preference Shares, to Rand Merchant Bank. The dividend rate payable is a floating rate that increases from 22% up to 54% of the prime lending rate quoted by FirstRand Bank Limited, or the Prime Rate, over the life of the Preference Shares. In certain circumstances, the dividend rate increases up to 61% of the Prime Rate in the event the Preference Shares are redeemed before their scheduled maturity date and the dividend rate is also subject to adjustment in the case of a change in law or regulation. Dividends accrue quarterly and are rolled up until the redemption date. The Preference Shares can be redeemed by the Company in the event the dividend rate is adjusted according to the terms of the Preference Shares, or at any time on 14 days’ notice. The proceeds of the issuance of the Preference Shares were used to refinance a portion of the Split-tenor Facility. The Preference Shares mature on January 24, 2011 and payment in full of all dividends, redemption amounts, costs and expenses that may become payable in respect of the Preference Shares has been guaranteed by GFIMSA, Orogen, Gold Fields Operations and Gold Fields Holdings.

On October 10, 2008, R600 million ($63.5 million) of the R1,200 million preference shares was repaid, with an attributable dividend of R23.2 million ($2.5 million). The remaining balance as at June 30, 2009 was R684.2 million ($84.9 million), consisting of capital of R600.0 million ($74.4 million) and an attributable dividend of R84.2 million ($10.5 million). The balance remaining at November 30, 2009 is R600 million ($81.1 million) plus attributable dividend of R102.8 million ($13.9 million).

 

194


Table of Contents

R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

Gold Fields established a R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Programme, the Programme, on April 6, 2009. Under the Programme, Gold Fields may from time to time issue notes denominated in any currency. The notes are not subject to any minimum or maximum maturity and the maximum aggregate nominal amount of all notes from time to time outstanding may not exceed R10 billion. The Programme has been registered with the Bond Exchange of South Africa Limited, or BESA, and the notes issued can be listed on BESA or not, at Gold Fields’ election.

Under the Programme, Gold Fields issued listed notes on April 9, 2009 and June 4, 2009, totaling R568 million and R575 million, respectively. The different notes issued mature either three months or six months from the date of issue and bear interest at Johannesburg Interbank Agreed Rate (JIBAR) plus a margin ranging from 0.675% to 1.000% per annum.

The total principal amount of notes in issue at June 30, 2009 under the Programme was R1,143 million ($141.8 million).

R90 million of notes matured on July 9, 2009, R240 million matured on September 3, 2009, R708 million matured on October 9, 2009, R335 million matured on December 2, 2009 and R340 million matured on December 3, 2009. In addition, on July 9, 2009, R230 million and R120 million of notes were issued with a 3 month and a 6 month maturity respectively. On September 3, 2009, R340 million, R282 million and R100 million were issued with a three-month, six-month and 12-month maturity respectively. On October 9, 2009, R598 million and R110 million were issued with a 4 month and 6 month maturity respectively. On October 22, 2009, a further R200 million, R300 million and R50 million were issued with a three-month, six-month and 12-month maturity respectively. Notes with a value of R569 million and R231 million and a maturity of 3 months and 6 months, respectively, were issued on December 3, 2009.

On October 6, 2009, Gold Fields amended the Programme by which GFIMSA, Gold Fields Holdings, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations agreed to guarantee to the noteholders the due and punctual performance by Gold Fields of all its payment obligations under the notes. All notes issued under the Programme subsequent to October 6, 2009 are subjected to the guarantee.

The total principal amount of notes in issue on December 3, 2009 under the Programme is R2,560 million.

Acquisition of South Deep

In connection with the acquisition of BGSA and Western Areas, GFIMSA entered into a U.S.$1.8 billion credit facility, or the GFIMSA Facility, with Citibank, N.A. London Branch, J.P. Morgan Plc and J.P. Morgan Europe Limited on November 24, 2006. Under the GFIMSA Facility, Gold Fields paid a commitment fee of 0.15% until three months from the date of the agreement, then 0.20% until six months from the date of the agreement and 0.25% thereafter on any undrawn amounts. Gold Fields paid an upfront arrangement fee of 0.15% and further arrangement fees of 0.10% of the unborrowed amount as of the first day of each of the fourth and seventh months from the date of the agreement, as well as an agency fee of U.S.$5,000 per annum. Amounts borrowed under the GFIMSA Facility bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.40% until three months from the date of the agreement, 0.50% until six months from the date of the agreement and 0.60% thereafter.

On December 1, 2006, Gold Fields borrowed U.S.$1.2 billion under the GFIMSA facility to finance substantially all of the cash portion of the acquisition of BGSA, including the repayment of an outstanding loan. On January 30, 2007, Gold Fields borrowed a further U.S.$550 million under the GFIMSA facility to settle the Western Areas gold derivative structure and to refinance certain existing working capital loans.

In February 2007, Gold Fields used available cash to repay the U.S.$1.2 billion of debt incurred in connection with the acquisition of BGSA. On May 18, 2007, Gold Fields utilized a portion of the Split-tenor Facility to repay the balance of the GFIMSA Facility in full.

 

195


Table of Contents

Bolivar Acquisition

On February 28, 2006, Gold Fields acquired the remaining interest of 85.55% it did not already own in Bolivar for $289.5 million ($295.4 million paid less cash acquired of $5.9 million). On that date, Gold Fields also made a loan of $72.4 million to Bolivar, which was part of the purchase consideration and was subsequently capitalized.

On March 3, 2006, Orogen entered into a U.S.$250.0 million syndicated loan term facility, or the Orogen Facility, with lead lenders Barclays Bank Plc and JP Morgan Europe Limited. The purpose of the facility was to partly finance the acquisition of Bolivar and to provide funding lines for general corporate purposes. On March 9, 2006, Orogen drew down U.S.$158.0 million under the Orogen Facility and on January 8, 2007, it drew down a further U.S.$10 million. The loan bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.35% and was repaid in full on May 21, 2007, using a portion of the Split-tenor Facility.

Mvela Loan

On March 17, 2004, as part of the transaction involving the acquisition by Mvela Resources of a 15% beneficial interest in the South African gold mining assets of Gold Fields, Mvela Gold advanced Rand 4,139 million, or the Mvela Loan, to GFIMSA. The Mvela Loan had a term of five years and bore interest at a rate of 10.57% per annum.

GFIMSA applied the net proceeds of the Mvela Loan of $586.7 million (R4,139 million less R32 million of costs at an exchange rate of R7.00 to $1.00) toward funding its acquisition of Gold Fields’ South African mining operations and certain ancillary assets and operations as part of an internal restructuring of Gold Fields. In connection with the Mvela Loan, GFIMSA entered into two interest rate swaps, both of which were designated as fair value hedges and which were accounted for as a single swap. The interest rate swap was closed out on June 3, 2005 with the loan reverting to the fixed interest rate mentioned above. Gold Fields realized mark-to-market gains on the swap of $36.2 million and interest rate credits of $14.8 million, giving a total gain of $51.0 million. Of the $36.2 million realized mark-to-market gain, $26.3 million was accounted for prior to fiscal 2009 and $4.9 million was accounted for in fiscal 2009. The balance of $5.0 million relates to exchange differences due to differing rates used for the purpose of initial recognition and subsequent income statement charges. See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Interest Rate Sensitivity.”

On March 17, 2009, GFIMSA repaid the Mvela Loan to Mvela Gold by utilizing an overnight facility, upon which repayment Mvela Gold subscribed for 15% of the ordinary shares in the capital of GFIMSA for a subscription price of R4,139 million. Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvela Gold exercised its right to exchange the GFIMSA shares for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields.

Capital expenditure

Capital expenditure was $760.3 million in fiscal 2009, compared to $1,154.4 million in fiscal 2008, See “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Cash Resources—Cash flows from investing activities.” Gold Fields expects to incur approximately Rand 7,200.0 million ($800.0 million) in capital expenditure in fiscal 2010, which it expects to finance from internal sources and, to the extent required, credit facilities. Details regarding the specific capital expenditure for each operation are found in the individual operation sections under “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations.”

 

196


Table of Contents

Contractual obligations and commitments as at June 30, 2009

 

     Payments due by period
     Total    Less than
12 months
   12-36
months
   36-60
months
   After 60
months
     ($ millions)

Long-term debt

              

Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

              

Capital

   72.0    —      72.0    —      —  

Interest

   4.1    2.2    1.9    —      —  

Split-tenor Facility

              

Capital

   500.0    —      500.0    —      —  

Interest

   8.9    3.1    5.8    —      —  

Project Finance (Cerro Corona)

              

Capital

   150.0    19.5    31.1    39.8    59.6

Interest

   8.6    0.5    3.3    2.8    2.0

Preference shares

              

Capital

   74.4    —      74.4    —      —  

Interest

   28.7    —      28.7    —      —  

Medium Term Note Programme

              

Capital

   141.8    141.8    —      —      —  

Interest

   3.7    3.7    —      —      —  

Short-term syndicated facility

              

Capital

   20.0    20.0    —      —      —  

Interest

   0.2    0.2    —      —      —  

Absa and uncommitted facilities

              

Capital

   136.4    136.4    —      —      —  

Interest

   0.6    0.6         

Operating lease obligations—building

   5.5    1.7    3.0    0.8    —  

Other long-term obligations

              

Post-retirement healthcare (1)

   11.4    0.2    0.5    0.2    10.5

Environmental obligations (2)

   237.0    4.0    8.0    8.0    217.0

Total contractual obligations

   1,403.3    333.9    728.7    51.6    289.1

 

Notes:

 

(1) Gold Fields’ provision for post-retirement healthcare obligations increases annually based on the expected increases in the level of individual contributions in order to settle its obligations to its former employees, set off by payments made on behalf of certain pensioners and dependants of former employees on a pay-as-you-go basis.

 

(2) Gold Fields makes full provision for all environmental obligations based on the net present value of the estimated cost of restoring the environmental disturbance that has occurred up to the balance sheet date. This provision increases annually based on expected inflation. Management believes that the provisions made for environmental obligations are adequate to cover the expected volume of such obligations. See “—Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates—Environmental rehabilitation costs.”

 

197


Table of Contents
     Amounts of commitments expiring by period
     Total    Less than
12 months
   12-36
months
   36-60
months
   After 60
months
     ($ millions)

Other commercial commitments

              

Guarantees (1)

   2.5    2.5    —      —      —  

Capital expenditure (2)

   131.4    131.4    —      —      —  

Funding commitments (3)

   0.6    0.6    —      —      —  

Total commercial commitments

   134.5    134.5    —      —      —  

 

Notes:

 

(1) Guarantees consist of numerous obligations. Guarantees consisting of $27.1 million committed to guarantee Gold Fields’ environmental obligations with respect to its Ghanaian and Australian operations are fully provided for under the provision for environmental rehabilitation and are not included in the amount above.

 

(2) Capital expenditure consists only of amounts committed to external suppliers, although as of June 30, 2009 an amount of $958.7 million in respect of capital expenditure had been approved by Gold Fields’ Board.

 

(3) Funding commitments consist of a $0.6 million commitment to the New Africa Mining Fund, or NAMF. NAMF is a private equity fund incorporated in South Africa for the purpose of investing in junior mining opportunities in South Africa and the broader Africa continent. Gold Fields originally committed R50 million ($6.2 million) for a six-year period which expired on February 28, 2009. No new investments are permitted but follow on investments of up to $7.0 million are allowed, the Gold Fields portion of which is estimated at approximately $0.6 million. As at June 30, 2009 Gold Fields Limited had contributed net $3.9 million.

Working capital

Management believes that Gold Fields’ working capital resources, by way of internal sources and banking facilities, are sufficient to fund Gold Fields’ currently foreseeable future business requirements.

Off balance sheet items

At June 30, 2009, Gold Fields had no off balance sheet items.

Recent Developments

Disposal of stake in Sino Gold

On June 3, 2009, Gold Fields Limited reached agreement to sell its 19.9% stake in Sino Gold to Eldorado for a total consideration of approximately $282 million payable in Eldorado shares. The conditions precedent for this agreement were reached, and the Eldorado shares were received, after fiscal year end, on July 27, 2009. Gold Fields received a share exchange ratio of 48 Eldorado shares for every 100 Sino Gold shares, which resulted in Gold Fields holding 27,824,654 Eldorado shares or approximately 7% of the outstanding shares of Eldorado on a fully diluted basis.

In addition, Gold Fields holds a top-up right for a period of 18 months effective from the date of the agreement, being June 3, 2009, which will apply should Eldorado purchase an additional 5% or more of the outstanding shares of Sino Gold and the sellers in that transaction realize a consideration ratio in excess of the share exchange ratio of 0.48 Eldorado shares per Sino Gold share received by Gold Fields. Assuming completion of the offer based on the terms announced by Eldorado and Sino Gold on August 26, 2009, Gold Fields would receive 4,057,762 shares due to its top-up rights.

On September 4, 2009, Gold Fields disposed of its entire holding in Eldorado for a total consideration of CAD 323 million ($299.3 million).

 

198


Table of Contents

Acquisition of Glencar Mining

On July 24, 2009, Gold Fields Limited, through a wholly owned subsidiary, reached agreement with Glencar Mining Plc, or Glencar, on the terms of a recommended cash offer to acquire the entire issued capital of Glencar for cash. On August 7, 2009, the offer document was posted to eligible Glencar shareholders, who had until September 4, 2009 to accept the offer. On September 7, 2009, Gold Fields announced that it had received 83.1% of acceptances and therefore 83.1% of the issued share capital of Glencar. All conditions of the offer were satisfied or waived at that time and therefore the offer was declared unconditional in all respects. Gold Fields has also taken control of the board of Glencar with the appointment of three new directors. Subsequently, Gold Fields completed the final squeeze-out of shareholders on November 9, 2009. Gold Fields now holds 100% of Glencar Mining plc.

Termination of Royalty Over St. Ives

When Gold Fields acquired St. Ives in late 2001, the total consideration included a royalty, which was subsequently acquired by subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley Bank. The royalty comprised two parts (i) a payment equal to 4% of the net smelter returns for gold produced from St. Ives to the extent that cumulative production of gold from November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces, but subject to the average spot price of gold for the relevant quarter exceeding A$400 per ounce; and (ii) provided that the gold price exceeded A$600/oz, a payment equal to 10% of the difference between revenue calculated at the spot gold price expressed in Australian dollars per ounce and at a price of A$600/oz calculated on all future ounces produced by St. Ives. Both components of the royalty were payable on all future production from St. Ives.

On August 26, 2009 an Agreement was executed under which the royalty was terminated for a consideration of A$308 million ($257.1 million). The transaction was financed from cash resources and available facilities and closed on August 26, 2009.

Trend and Outlook

The trend and outlook below are based on management accounts, which are prepared based on IFRS.

During the first quarter of fiscal 2010, Gold Fields’ operating profit was lower than that achieved in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009. The lower operating profit was primarily due to the lower gold price and increased production costs. Gold production and sales were similar to the June quarter. Production at Tarkwa increased due to higher throughput at the new CIL plant and equivalent production increased at Cerro Corona due to a favourable copper price. These increases were mostly offset by lower production from Australia due to a stope failure at one of the underground mines at St. Ives, while production at Damang, Agnew and the South African operations were similar quarter on quarter. Increased production costs at the South African operations were driven largely by the annual wage increase and increased power costs. In West Africa, increased production costs resulted from the increased throughput at Tarkwa. Cerro Corona’s production cost increase was primarily due to the accrual for statutory Workers Legal Participation of profits. Australia’s production costs were lower in local currency due to the cessation of the Morgan Stanley royalty. The average gold price Gold Fields achieved during the quarter was $964 per ounce, compared to $928 in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009. In the first quarter of fiscal 2010, net earnings were positive compared with a loss in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009. This was mainly due to profit on the sale of our stake in Sino Gold and the sale of Eldorado shares compared with a loss in the previous quarter due to an impairment of our investment in Rusoro.

Gold production is expected to increase slightly at Gold Fields’ operations in the second quarter of fiscal 2010 compared with the first quarter. Operating margins are expected to remain fairly constant. Management believes that Gold Fields remains on target to achieve its short-term priorities. See “Information on the Company—Strategy— Specific Strategic Goals and Objectives for fiscal 2010”.

 

199


Table of Contents

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Directors

Gold Fields’ directors and their ages and positions are:

 

Name

   Age   

Position

   Term Expires (1)

Alan J. Wright

   68    Non-executive Chairman    November 2011

Nicholas J. Holland

   51    Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer    November 2012

Paul A. Schmidt (2)

   42    Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer    November 2010

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

   61    Non-executive Director    November 2010

Chris I. von Christierson

   62    Non-executive Director    November 2011

Kofi Ansah

   65    Non-executive Director    November 2010

John G. Hopwood

   61    Non-executive Director    November 2010

Donald M. J. Ncube

   62    Non-executive Director    November 2010

David N. Murray

   64    Non-executive Director    November 2011

Gayle M. Wilson (3)

   64    Non-executive Director    November 2011

Richard P. Menell (4)

   54    Non-executive Director    November 2012

Cheryl A. Carolus (5)

   49    Non-executive Director    November 2012

Roberto Dañino (6)

   58    Non-executive Director    November 2012

Alan R. Hill (7)

   66    Non-executive Director    November 2012

 

Notes:

 

(1) Terms expire on the date of the annual general meeting in that year.

 

(2) Paul A. Schmidt joined the Board on November 6, 2009 as an Executive Director.

 

(3) Gayle M. Wilson joined the Board on August 1, 2008 as a Non-executive Director.

 

(4) Richard P. Menell joined the Board on October 8, 2008 as a Non-executive Director.

 

(5) Cheryl Carolus joined the Board on March 10, 2009 as a Non-executive Director.

 

(6) Roberto Dañino joined the Board on March 10, 2009 as a Non-executive Director.

 

(7) Alan R. Hill joined the Board on August 21, 2009 as a Non-executive Director.

Terence P. Goodlace resigned as an executive director and chief operating officer with effect from October 15, 2008. Gill Marcus resigned as a non-executive director with effect from July 20, 2009.

Directors and Executive Officers

The Articles of Association of Gold Fields provide that the Board must consist of no less than four and no more than 15 directors at any time. The Board currently consists of two executive directors and 12 non-executive directors, all of whom are independent.

The Articles of Association of Gold Fields provide that the longest serving one-third of directors must retire from office at each annual general meeting of Gold Fields. Retiring directors normally make themselves available for re-election and are re-elected at the annual general meeting at which they retire. Executive directors may be appointed as directors by contract with Gold Fields for a maximum period of five years at any one time and are subject to retirement by rotation. The number of directors serving under these contracts must at all times be less than one-half of the total number of directors in office. Gold Fields’ current executive directors are appointed to their positions as directors by contract.

 

200


Table of Contents

According to the Articles of Association, the Board may meet as it sees fit and set its own policies for adjourning and otherwise regulating meetings. Any director may call for a meeting at any time by requesting the company secretary to convene a meeting. The Articles of Association further provide for the following:

 

   

no director may vote on any contract or arrangement in which the director is interested. If the director votes on a transaction in which the director is interested, the director’s vote will not be counted. An interested director, with certain exceptions, will not be counted for the purpose of determining a quorum for a meeting in which the Board is voting on a resolution in which the director is interested. However, a director who owns ordinary shares may vote his ordinary shares at a general meeting of shareholders in a transaction in which the director is interested;

 

   

a director may not vote as a director to determine his own compensation. The shareholders in a general meeting determine the fees for directors from time to time. Any additional compensation, including compensation for additional services performed by the director for Gold Fields’ business or for other positions in Gold Fields or its subsidiaries, must be determined by a quorum of directors whose compensation would not be affected by the decision; and

 

   

the directors are not required to hold shares in Gold Fields, although a shareholding qualification may be imposed at any meeting of the shareholders.

The Articles of Association do not provide for a mandatory retirement age for directors. However, Gold Fields’ Board charter specifies the retirement age to be 72 years of age.

Some of the executive officers and all of the executive directors are members of the boards of directors of various subsidiaries of Gold Fields.

Under Section 303A.11 of the New York Stock Exchange Company Manual, or the NYSE Listing Standards, foreign private issuers such as Gold Fields must disclose any significant ways in which their corporate governance practices differ from those followed by U.S. listed companies under the NYSE Listing Standards. Disclosure of the significant ways in which Gold Fields’ corporate governance practices differ from practices followed by U.S. companies listed on the New York Stock Exchange can be found in Item 16G of this report.

The business address of all the directors and executive officers of Gold Fields is 150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton, 2196 South Africa, the address of Gold Fields’ head office.

Executive Directors

Nicholas J. Holland. BCom, BAcc, Witwatersrand; CA (SA). Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer. Mr. Holland has been an Executive Director of Gold Fields since April 14, 1998 and became Chief Executive Officer on May 1, 2008. He served as Executive Director of Finance from April 1998. On April 15, 2002, his title changed to Chief Financial Officer until April 30, 2008. Mr. Holland has 29 years’ experience in financial management and 20 years of experience in the mining industry. Prior to joining Gold Fields he was Financial Director and Senior Manager of Corporate Finance of Gencor Limited. He is also an alternate director of Rand Refinery Limited.

Paul A. Schmidt. , BCom, Witwatersrand; BCompt (Hons), UNISA; CA (SA). Executive Director, Chief Financial Officer. Mr Schmidt was appointed Chief Financial Officer on January 1, 2009 and joined the Board on November 6, 2009. Prior to this, Mr. Schmidt was acting Chief Financial Officer from May 1, 2008. Prior to this appointment, Mr Schmidt was financial controller for Gold Fields from April 1, 2003. He has more than 12 years’ experience in the mining industry. Mr Schmidt holds no other directorships.

 

201


Table of Contents

Non-executive Directors

Alan J. Wright. CA (SA). Chairman of the Board of Directors. Mr. Wright was appointed the non-executive Chairman of the Board on November 17, 2005. Prior to that, Mr. Wright had been Deputy Chairman of Gold Fields since November 1997. Prior to September 1998, Mr. Wright was the Chief Executive Officer of Gold Fields of South Africa Limited. Mr. Wright holds no other directorships.

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea. BA, Trinity College, Dublin, Ireland; MA, University of Manchester, UK. Non-executive Director. Mr. Pennant-Rea has been a Director of Gold Fields since July 1, 2002. He is Chairman of Henderson Group Plc and is a Director of First Quantum Minerals, Go-Ahead Group, Times Newspaper Holdings Limited and a number of other companies. Previously, Mr. Pennant-Rea was editor of The Economist and Deputy Governor of the Bank of England.

Chris I. von Christierson. BCom, Rhodes; MA, Cambridge, UK. Non-executive Director. Mr. von Christierson has been a Director of Gold Fields since May 10, 1999. As a result of a takeover by Lundin Mining, he stepped down as the Chairman of Rio Narcea Gold Mines Limited on July 18, 2007. He is currently a Director of Southern Prospecting (UK) Limited and director of Platmin Limited.

Kofi Ansah. BSc (Mechanical Engineering) UST Ghana; MSc (Metallurgy) Georgia Institute of Technology, USA. Non-executive Director. Mr. Ansah was appointed a Director of Gold Fields in April 2004. He is a Director of Ecobank (Ghana) Limited and Aluworks Limited.

John G. Hopwood. B.Com, Natal; CA (SA). Non-executive Director. Mr. Hopwood was appointed a Director of Gold Fields on February 15, 2006. Previous experience includes being a Director and head of the Mergers and Acquisitions division at Ernst & Young Corporate Finance. He was an Executive Director of Gold Fields of South Africa Limited from January 1992 to September 1998. Mr. Hopwood is a member of the Board of Trustees of the New Africa Mining Fund and Chairman of the Fund’s Investment Committee and a non-executive director of Pan African Resources Plc and of Metorex Ltd.

Donald M. J. Ncube. BA Economics and Political Science, Fort Hare University; Post Graduate Diploma in Labor Relations, Strathclyde University, Scotland; Graduate MSc Manpower Studies, University of Manchester, UK, Diploma in Financial Management. Non-executive Director. Mr. Ncube was appointed a Director of Gold Fields on February 15, 2006. Previously, he was an alternate Director of Anglo American Industrial Corporation Limited and Anglo American Corporation of South Africa Limited, a Director of AngloGold Ashanti Limited as well as Non-Executive Chairman of South African Airways. He is currently Chairman of Rare Holdings Limited, Chairman of Badimo Gas (Proprietary) Limited and Executive Director of Cincinnati Mine Machines (RSA) (Proprietary) Limited. He serves on the boards of various other companies.

David N. Murray. BA Hons Econ; MBA (UCT). Mr. Murray joined the Board on January 1, 2008. He has more than 36 years’ experience in the mining industry and has been Chief Executive Officer of Rio Tinto Portugal, Rio Tinto Brazil, TVX Gold INC, Avgold Limited and Avmin Limited. He is a non-executive Director of Ivernia, Inc.

Gayle M. Wilson . BCom, BCompt (Hons); CA (SA). Non-executive Director. Mrs. Wilson was appointed a Director on August 1, 2008. She was previously an audit partner at Ernst & Young for 16 years where her main focus was on mining clients. In 1998, she was involved in AngloGold Ashanti Limited’s listing on the NYSE and in 2001 she took over as the lead partner on the global audit. Other mining clients during her career include Northam Platinum Limited, Aquarius Platinum Limited, Anglovaal Mining Limited (now African Rainbow Minerals Limited) and certain Anglo Platinum operations. She is a non-executive Director of Witwatersrand Consolidated Gold Resources Limited.

Richard P. Menell. BA (Hons), MA (Natural Sciences, Geology), Trinity College, Cambridge, UK; M.Sc. (Mineral Exploration and Management), Stanford University, California, USA. Non-executive Director. Mr. Menell has been a Director of Gold Fields since October 8, 2008. He has over 30 years’ experience in the

 

202


Table of Contents

mining industry. Previously, he has been the President and Member of the Chamber of Mines of South Africa, President and Chief Executive Officer of TEAL Exploration & Mining Inc. and Chairman of Anglovaal Mining Limited and Avgold Limited. He is a Director of Weir Group Plc, Mutual and Federal Insurance Company Limited, the Standard Bank of South Africa Limited, the Standard Bank Group Limited, the National Business Initiative and various other companies. Mr Menell is the Chairman of the City Year South Africa Citizen Service Organization and Chairman of the Palaeo-Anthropological Scientific Trust.

Cheryl A. Carolus. BA Law; Bachelor of Education, University of the Western Cape. Non-executive Director. Ms. Carolus has been a director of Gold Fields since March 10, 2009. Ms. Carolus joined the United Democratic Front (UDF) in 1983. She was National Co-ordinator of the UDF from 1985 to 1990. In May 1990, Ms Carolus was elected to be part of the African National Congress’ (ANC) delegation which held talks with the apartheid government, and in July 1991, she was elected to the ANC’s National Executive Committee. From 1994 to 1997, she was Deputy Secretary General of the ANC and from 1997 to 1998 she was acting Secretary General. In 1998, she became South Africa’s High Commissioner to the UK. Between 2001 and 2004, she was the Chief Executive Officer of SA Tourism (SATOUR). She served as chairperson of the South African National Parks Board for six years. She is currently Executive Chairperson of Peotona Holdings, an investment company that deals with business development, and a Non-executive Director of De Beers Consolidated Mines Limited, Fenner Conveyor Belting SA (Pty) Limited, Macsteel Service Centres SA, IQ Business Group, Investec Limited, Investec Plc and the Constitution Hill Trust (Proprietary) Limited. Ms. Carolus is a Non-executive Director and Chairperson of South African Airways (Pty) Limited and a Non-executive Chairperson of the LoveLife Trust. She is a Non-executive Director of WWF International (World Wildlife Fund) and the Soul City Institute. Ms. Carolus is Non-executive Trustee of WWW South Africa and a Non-executive Member of the International Crisis Group.

Roberto Dañino. LLM, Harvard Law School; Bachelor of Law and Attorney, Pontificia Universidad Católica del Perú. Non-executive Director. Mr. Dañino has been a director of Gold Fields since March 10, 2009. He served as Prime Minister of Peru from 2001 to 2002 and Ambassador of Peru to the United States from 2002 to 2003. From 2003 to 2006, Mr Dañino was the Senior Vice President and General Counsel of the World Bank Group as well as Secretary General of the International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID). He was also the founding General Counsel of the Inter-American Investment Corporation (IIC) in Washington, D.C., the private sector affiliate of the Inter-American Development Bank. Mr. Dañino sits on various corporate and non-profit boards, both in Peru and the United States, including Gold Fields La Cima in Peru. Mr Dañino is a Peruvian lawyer who has practiced for over 30 years as a partner of leading law firms in Lima and Washington, DC. He has extensive experience throughout Latin America, as well as in the United States and the United Kingdom. He is a graduate of Harvard Law School and the Pontificia Universidad Catolica del Peru. Mr Dañino is currently the Deputy Chairman of the Board of Hochschild Mining Plc.

Alan R. Hill. B.Sc (Hons), M. Phil (Rock Mechanics), Leeds University, UK. Mr Hill joined the Board on August 21, 2009. From 2004 to 2007, Mr Hill was the non-executive chairman of Alamos Gold Limited and, from 2005 to 2009, he held the position of President and CEO of Gabriel Resources Limited. Both companies are involved in gold exploration and development. Mr Hill’s mining career started on the Zambian Copperbelt, following which he joined Noranda, Inc. where he managed gold and nickel mines. He worked as a consultant for a short period, before joining Camflo Mines in 1981, which merged with Barrick Gold in 1984. Mr Hill joined Barrick as part of the merger and spent 19 years with Barrick and was instrumental in its considerable growth, having played a pivotal role in its various merger and acquisition initiatives through the years. He retired from Barrick in 2003 as its Executive Vice President, Development.

Retired Executive Director

Terence P. Goodlace (49). National Higher Diploma Metalliferous Mining: BCom (UNISA); MBA, Wales. Mr. Goodlace joined the board on May 1, 2008 when he was appointed Chief Operating Officer. Prior to this appointment, he was Executive Vice President and Head of South African Operations, Executive Vice President

 

203


Table of Contents

and Head of International Operations, Senior Vice President—Strategic Planning, Senior Manager for Corporate Finance for Gold Fields and Manager at various Gencor Limited mines. He has more than 27 years’ experience in the mining industry. Mr. Goodlace resigned as a Director of Gold Fields effective October 15, 2008.

Retired Non-executive Director

Gill Marcus (60). BCom, University of South Africa (UNISA). Non-executive Director. Prof. Marcus was appointed a Director of Gold Fields on February 14, 2007. She served as a member of the ANC National Executive Committee from 1991 to 1999 and Member of Parliament from 1994 to 1999. Prof. Marcus served as Deputy Minister of Finance from 1996 to 1999. She served as Deputy Governor of the South African Reserve Bank from 1999 to 2004. Since 2004, she has been Professor of Policy, Leadership and Gender Studies at the Gordon Institute of Business Science. From November 2005 to March 2007, Prof. Marcus was Executive Chairperson of Western Areas Limited. In 2007, she was appointed as Non-executive Chairperson of Absa Group Limited. Prof. Marcus resigned as a Non-executive Director of Gold Fields effective July 20, 2009. She was appointed Governor of the South African Reserve Bank on November  9, 2009.

Executive Officers

James W. D. Dowsley (51). BSc (Mining Engineering), Witwatersrand. Senior Vice President and Head of Corporate Development. Mr. Dowsley was General Manager of Corporate Development at Gold Fields since March 1998. On April 15, 2002, Mr. Dowsley’s title changed to Senior Vice President, Corporate Development. Prior to his appointment as General Manager of Corporate Development, Mr. Dowsley served as General Manager of New Business, and also as Manager of the Mineral Economics Division of Gold Fields of South Africa Limited.

Jan W. Jacobsz (48). BA, University of Johannesburg (previously Rand Afrikaans University). Senior Vice President, Head of Investor Relations and Corporate Affairs. Mr. Jacobsz was appointed Senior Vice President, Head of Investor Relations and Corporate Affairs on December 10, 2007. Prior to this, he was appointed as Senior Vice President, North American Investor Relations and Sustainable Development in July 2007. Previously, Mr. Jacobsz held the position of Manager and Senior Manager of Investor Relations and Corporate Affairs of Gold Fields. Prior to that, Mr. Jacobsz was Program Manager of the Vulindela Transformation Program for Gold Fields of South Africa Limited and Administrator of The Gold Fields Foundation.

Michael D. Fleischer (48). BProc, University of Witwatersrand. Admitted as attorney of the High Court of South Africa in 1991, Advanced Taxation Certificate, University of South Africa. Executive Vice President, General Counsel. Mr. Fleischer was appointed to his current position of Executive Vice President, General Counsel on November 1, 2006. Prior to his appointment, Mr. Fleischer was a partner in the corporate services department at Webber Wentzel, one of the leading South African law firms. Mr. Fleischer has a wide range of experience in mergers and acquisitions, commercial transactions, mining law and stock exchange transactions. He was ranked as one of South Africa’s leading commercial lawyers by Chambers Global.

Italia Boninelli (53). MA Witwatersrand; PDLR (UNISA) SBL. Senior Vice President, Head of Human Resources. Mrs. Boninelli was appointed to the position of Senior Vice President, Head of Human Resources of Gold Fields on January 8, 2007. She is also the Chairperson of the Gold Fields Business Leadership Academy. Prior to that, she was group human resources director of Netcare. She has previously held senior human resources, marketing and communications positions in Standard Bank and Sappi Limited.

Tommy D. McKeith (45). BSc. Hons (Geology), GDE (Mining) and MBA, University of the Witwatersrand (South Africa). Mr. McKeith was appointed Executive Vice President, Head of Exploration on October 1, 2007. Prior to rejoining Gold Fields in October 2007, he served as Chief Executive Officer for Troy Resources NL. From August 2004 until January 2006, he was Vice President of Business Development at Gold Fields. Before joining Troy, he worked for over 15 years with Gold Fields and its predecessors in various mine geology, exploration and business development positions. Mr. McKeith has 21 years of experience in business development, mining and exploration geology in the international mining sector.

 

204


Table of Contents

Vishnu P. Pillay (52). BSc, MSc at Maharaja Sayajirao University of Baroda, Gujurat, India. Executive Vice President, Head of the South African Region. Mr Pillay was appointed Executive Vice President, Head of the South African Region on May 1, 2008. He was previously Vice President, Head of Operations at Driefontein from 2006. He was formerly Senior Consultant, Mineral Resources Management and, apart from a brief period with Council for Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR) where he held the positions of Executive Director, CSIR Mining Technology and Group Executive, Institutional Planning and Operation, he has 23 years of service with Gold Fields.

Peter L. Turner (52). National Higher Diploma (NHD) Vaal Triangle Technikon SA, Mechanical Engineering; South African Mine Manager Certificate of Competency—Metalliferous. Executive Vice President, Head of West Africa. Mr Turner was appointed as Executive Vice President, Head of West Africa on August 1, 2009. He moved to Ghana in 2008 when he was appointed Vice President of Operations and before that he was the head of the Kloof Gold Mine in South Africa from 2005. Prior to joining Gold Fields in 2005, he was Managing Director of Geita Gold Mining Limited in Tanzania from 2002 to 2005 and, before that, General Manager of East and West Africa Region for AngloGold Ashanti where he spent the majority of his career. He progressed through the ranks, starting as an engineering trainee at Vaal Reefs in 1975, later spending time in various managerial positions at numerous gold mining operations. Mr Turner has more than 34 years of experience in the mining industry.

Juan L. Kruger (39). Bachelor degree in Business and Finance, Universidad del Pacifico; MBA, Harvard Business School. Executive Vice President, Head of Operations for South America. Mr. Kruger was appointed as Executive Vice President, Head of Operations for South America on August 1, 2009. He has over 15 years of broad experience in corporate finance, strategic planning and general management in the mining, consumer goods, airline, telecommunications and financial services industries in South America. Mr. Kruger joined Gold Fields in October 2007 as Senior Vice President and country manager for the Peruvian Operations, and led the start-up team at Cerro Corona. As of April 2008, he assumed responsibilities for the South American region. From 2001 to 2004, Mr Kruger was the Chief Financial and Strategy Officer for Telefonica and, from 2004 to 2006, he was employed by Glencore A.G. where he was in charge of managing Empresa Minera Los Quenales and Perubar S.A. Prior to joining the company, he also held senior management positions for LAN Airlines, McKinsey & Co and Procter & Gamble in South America.

Ben Zikmundovsky (59). Bachelor of Science, Mechanical Engineering, University of Technology, Prague, Czech Republic; Diploma in Business Management. Executive Vice President, Head of International Capital Projects and International Technical Services. Mr. Zikmundovsky was appointed as Executive Vice President, Head of International Capital Projects and International Technical Services on August 1, 2009. He held the position of Business Manager with Bechtel Australia from 1999 to 2002 and was the Managing Director—Africa of GRD Minproc Limited from 2002 until he joined the company. Mr Zikmundovsky has over 30 years’ experience in the development of companies, operations and projects in the mining, mineral processing, construction and equipment industries on the African continent, in South America, the former Soviet Union countries, the Middle East and in Europe. He started his career in 1973 as a project design engineer for Roberts Union Corporation (RUC) in South Africa.

Retired Executive Officer

Glenn R. Baldwin (37). BEng (Hons) Mining, University of South Australia. Executive Vice President, Head of Australasia. Mr. Baldwin was appointed Executive Vice President, Head of Australasia on May 1, 2009. Previously, Mr. Baldwin was appointed Executive Vice President, Head of International Operations in April 2007. Prior to his appointment at Gold Fields, Mr. Baldwin was the Chief Operating Officer at Ivanhoe Nickel & Platinum Ltd. After finishing his degree, Mr. Baldwin spent seven years in Australia in operational mining activities in various capacities (technical and managerial). In South Africa, he previously served as Vice President of Operations for Southern Platinum Limited and in various roles within the Anglo American Group. Mr. Baldwin resigned from Gold Fields effective December 31, 2009.

 

205


Table of Contents

James J. Komadina (52). BSc (Metallurgical Engineering), University of Arizona; MBA (Finance), University of Phoenix; AMP Wharton. Senior Vice President, Development Projects. Mr Komadina joined Gold Fields in February 2005. He was responsible for all project development activities outside of South Africa. Prior to joining Gold Fields he was executive officer, North America for AngloGold Limited. Mr. Komadina resigned from Gold Fields effective September 15, 2008.

Company Secretary

Cain Farrel (59). FCIS, MBA, Southern Cross University, Australia. Mr. Farrel was appointed Company Secretary on May 1, 2003. Mr. Farrel is past President and a Director of the Southern African Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators. Previously, Mr. Farrel served as Senior Divisional Secretary of AngloAmerican Corporation of South Africa.

Board of Directors’ Committees

In order to ensure good corporate governance, the Board has formed an Audit Committee, a Remuneration Committee, a Nominating and Governance Committee and a Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee. All the committees are comprised exclusively of Non-executive Directors. All committees are chaired by an independent Non-executive Director. The remuneration of Non-executive Directors for their service on the various committees has been approved by the shareholders. The Audit Committee monitors and reviews Gold Fields’ accounting controls and procedures, including the effectiveness of the Group’s information systems and other systems of internal control; the effectiveness of the internal audit function; reports of both external and internal auditors; quarterly reports, the annual report and the annual financial statements; the accounting policies of the Group and any proposed revisions thereto; external audit findings, reports and fees, and the approval thereof; and compliance with applicable legislation and requirements of regulatory authorities and Gold Fields’ Code of Ethics. Membership of the Audit Committee is as follows:

John G. Hopwood (chairman)

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

Donald M. J. Ncube

Gayle M. Wilson

Richard P. Menell

The Remuneration Committee establishes the compensation philosophy of Gold Fields and the terms and conditions of employment of executive directors and other executive officers. Membership of the Remuneration Committee is as follows:

Chris I. von Christierson (chairman)

Alan J. Wright

John G. Hopwood

Gayle M. Wilson

Donald M. J. Ncube

The Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee reviews adherence to occupational health, safety and environmental standards by Gold Fields. The Committee seeks to minimize mining-related accidents, to ensure that the Company’s operations are in compliance with all environmental regulations and to establish policy in respect of HIV/AIDS and health matters. Membership of the Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee is as follows:

David N. Murray (chairman)

Kofi Ansah

Alan J. Wright

Cheryl A. Carolus

Richard P. Menell

 

206


Table of Contents

The Nominating and Governance Committee develops and implements policy on corporate governance issues, develops the policy and process for evaluating nominations to the Board of Directors, identifies successors to the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer and considers selection and rotation of the Board committee members. Membership of the Nominating and Governance Committee is as follows:

Alan J. Wright (chairman)

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

Kofi Ansah

Roberto Dañino

Chris I. von Christierson

The Capital Projects Control and Review Committee was established on May 1, 2009 as a sub-committee to satisfy the Board that Gold Fields has used correct and efficient methodologies and has adequate controls in place in respect of new capital projects proposed by management in excess of R1.5 billion or U.S.$200 million. These projects are reviewed from inception to completion and the committee makes recommendations to management as it considers appropriate. Membership of the Capital Projects Control and Review Committee is as follows:

Richard P. Menell (chairman)

Gayle M. Wilson

Chris I. von Christierson

Alan Hill

David N. Murray

Executive Committee

Gold Fields’ Executive Committee meets on a regular basis to discuss and make decisions on strategic and operating issues facing Gold Fields. The composition of the Executive Committee is as follows:

 

Nicholas J. Holland    Chairman
Paul A. Schmidt    Chief Financial Officer
Italia Boninelli    Vice President—Human Resources
James W. D. Dowsley    Senior Vice President—Corporate Development
Tommy D. McKeith    Executive Vice President—Exploration and Business Development
Vishnu P. Pillay    Executive Vice President—South African Operations
Peter L. Turner    Executive Vice President—West African Operations
Juan L. Kruger    Executive Vice President—South American Operations
Ben Zikmundovsky    Executive Vice President—International Capital Projects and International Technical Services
Jan W. Jacobsz    Senior Vice President—Investor Relations and Corporate Affairs
Glenn R. Baldwin (1)    Executive Vice President—Australasia Operations
Michael D. Fleischer    Executive Vice President—General Counsel
Cain Farrel    Company Secretary

 

Note:

 

(1) Glenn R. Baldwin resigned from Gold Fields effective December 31, 2009.

Regional Executive Management Committees

Each of Gold Fields’ four operating regions (South Africa, Australasia, West Africa and South America) has a Regional Executive Management Committee.

 

207


Table of Contents

South African Regional Executive Management Committee composition:

 

Vishnu P. Pillay    Chairman of the Regional Executive Management Committee and Executive Vice President and
Head of South African Operations
Paddy Govender    Vice President—Commercial Services
Koos Barnard    Vice President and Head of Operations—Driefontein
Charl Keyter    Senior Manager Finance—South African Operations
Ben Haumann    Vice President and Head of Operations—Beatrix
Philip Schoeman    Vice President and Head of Operations—Kloof
Mark Morcombe    Vice President and Head of Operations—South Deep
Duncan Scott    Manager—Health and Safety
Tim Rowland    Vice President—Technical Services
Robert van Neikerk    Senior Vice President—Mining Engineering
Stuart Allen    Vice President—Capital Projects
Morapedi Mutloane    Senior Manager—Human Resources—South African Region
Steve Tainton    Senior Manager—Strategy South African Region
Strini Mudaly    Senior Manager—IT
Nash Lutchman    Senior Manager—Protection Services
Brian Grobbelaar    Senior Manager—Health and Safety

Australasian Regional Executive Management Committee composition:

 

Glenn R. Baldwin (1)    Chairman of the Regional Executive Management Committee and Executive Vice President and
Head of Australasia Operations
Ted Lambourne    Acting General Manager—St. Ives
Tim Gilbert    General Manager—Agnew
Mark Zeptner    Senior Consultant—Projects and Technology
Peter Bourn    Head of Human Resources—Australasia
Alex Munt    Senior Finance Manager
Paul Walson    Head of Safety—Australasia
Brett Mattison    General Manager—Business Development
Craig Freeby    Regional Manager—Exploration

 

Note:

 

(1) Glenn R. Baldwin resigned from Gold Fields effective December 31, 2009.

West African Regional Executive Management Committee composition:

 

Peter Turner    Chairman of the Regional Executive Management Committee and Executive Vice President and
Head of West African Operations
Stephen Ellis    Business Development Manager—Africa
Serge Nitiema    Regional Exploration Manager—Africa
Peet van Schalkwyk    General Manager—Tarkwa
Alfred Bako    General Manager—Damang
Nico de Lange    Manager—Finance
Anthony Aubynn    Manager—Corporate Affairs and Social Development
Christo Rothman    Manager—Human Resources
Pat Yaa Antwi    Manager—Legal Affairs
Johna Addei    Regional Supply Chain Coordinator

 

208


Table of Contents

South American Regional Executive Management Committee composition:

 

Juan Luis Kruger    Chairman of the Regional Executive Management Committee and Executive Vice President and
Head of South American Operations
Manuel Diaz    General Manager—Cerro Corona
Alberto Cardenas    Operations Manager—Cerro Corona
Rodolfo Michels    CFO, South American Operations
Adrian Mendoza    Manager—Human Resources
Diego Ortega    Manager—Corporate Affairs
Ralph Alosilla-Velasco    Manager—Logistics and Commercial

Compensation of Directors and Senior Management

During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, the aggregate compensation paid or payable to directors and senior management of Gold Fields as a group was approximately Rand 64.2 million, including all salaries, fees, bonuses and contributions during such period to provide pension, retirement or similar benefits for directors and senior management of Gold Fields, of which Rand 4.7 million was due to pension scheme contributions and life insurance, Rand 18.2 million was due to bonus and performance-related payments and Rand 2.5 million was expenses.

The following table presents information regarding the compensation paid by Gold Fields for the year ended June 30, 2009 to its directors:

 

    Board fees   Committee
fees
  Travel
allowance (1)
  Salary   Bonuses and
performance
related
payments (2)
  Pension
scheme
contributions
  Expenses (5)   Total (3)
                (in Rand)            

Executive Directors

               

Nicholas J. Holland

  —     —     —     6,402,896.96   3,745,532.92   892,959,96   693,950.48   11,735,340.32

Terence P. Goodlace (4)

  —     —     —     1,158,185.66   1,991,796.12   116,550.19   —     3,266,531.97

Non-executive Directors

               

Alan J. Wright

  1,118,500.00   —     46,200.00   —     —     —     311,248.57   1,475,948.60

Kofi Ansah

  212,700.00   161,200.00   251,196.00   —     —     —     —     625,096.00

John G. Hopwood

  202,700.00   237,950.00   —     —     —     —     96,858.33   537,508.33

Gill Marcus

  202,700.00   80,250.00     —     —     —     —     282,950.00

David N. Murray

  212,700.00   132,550.00   251,196.00   —     —     —     —     596.446.00

Donald M. J. Ncube

  202,700.00   161,100.00   —     —     —     —     7,371.67   371,171.67

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

  193,900.00   162,500.00   251,196.00   —     —     —     —     607,596.00

Chris I. von Christierson

  203,900.00   202,200.00   213,664.00   —     —     —     158,917.50   778,681.50

Cheryl A. Carolus

  72,140.88   14,290.61   46,200.00   —     —     —     —     132,631.49

Roberto Dañino

  72,140.88   —     46,200.00   —     —     —     —     118,340.88

Richard P. Mennell

  154,017.39   102,964.40   46,200.00   —     —     —     —     303,181.79

Gayle M. Wilson

  193,791.30   102,002.02   46,200.00   —     —     —     118,482.55   460,475.87

Alan R. Hill

  —     —     —     —     —     —       —  
                               

Total

  3,041,890.45   1,357,007.03   1,198,252.00   7,561,082.62   5,737,329.04   1,009,510.15   1,386,829.10   21,291,900.39
                               

 

Notes:

 

(1) A travel allowance for the Non-executive Directors was approved at the annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005.

 

(2) Bonuses are for fiscal 2008 performance, paid in fiscal 2009.

 

(3) These amounts reflect the full Directors’ emoluments in Rand, for comparative purposes. The portion of Executive Directors’ emoluments payable offshore are paid in terms of agreements with the Company’s subsidiaries for work done by such Directors offshore for offshore subsidiaries. See “—Executive Directors’ Terms of Employment.” The total U.S. dollar amounts paid for fiscal 2009 were as follows: Nicholas J. Holland $415,930.29, Terence P. Goodlace $40,886.77. These amounts are included in the Rand amounts above.

 

(4) Resigned from the Board on October 15, 2008.

 

(5) These amounts reflect spousal travel costs, which are not included in the travel allowance for the Non-executive Directors.

 

209


Table of Contents

Share options and restricted shares outstanding and held by directors, former directors, executive officers and former executive officers as of September 30, 2009 were, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, as follows:

 

Name

   Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
   Share
appreciation
rights
(SARS)
   Restricted
shares
   Option/
SARS
exercise
price
(in Rand)
  

Expiration/
settlement date (1)

Executive Directors

              

Nicholas J. Holland

   13,334    —      —      46.23    November 24, 2009
   13,333    —      —      46.23    August 17, 2010
   13,333    —      —      46.23    December 3, 2010
   15,334    —      —      125.37    June 26, 2010
   7,666    —      —      125.37    April 19, 2011
   5,900    —      —      84.17    August 6, 2010
   5,900    —      —      84.17    March 11, 2011
   5,900    —      —      84.17    May 21, 2011
   5,267    —      —      93.49    January 7, 2011
   5,267    —      —      93.49    July 8, 2011
   5,266    —      —      93.49    August 12, 2011
   12,667    —      —      83.18    July 23, 2011
   6,333    —      —      83.18    February 25, 2012
   6,334    —      —      76.75    November 15, 2011
   6,333    —      —      76.75    March 12, 2012
   6,333    —      —      76.75    July 7, 2012
   6,334    —      —      67.93    February 25, 2012
   12,666    —      —      67.93    July 16, 2012
   12,667    —      —      63.65    May 23, 2012
   25,333    —      —      63.65    October 12, 2012
   —      11,550    —      125.28    March 24, 2012
   —      18,800    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      11,700    —      March 1, 2010
   —      14,100    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      18,500    —      March 3, 2011
   —      35,850    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      41,250    —      June 2, 2011
   —      49,000    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      71,040    —      March 2, 2012

Terence P. Goodlace

   3,167    —      —      154.65    December 27, 2009
   3,167    —      —      154.65    December 31, 2009
   3,166    —      —      154.65    December 31, 2009
   1,967    —      —      93.49    December 31, 2009
   1,967    —      —      93.49    December 31, 2009
   1,966    —      —      93.49    December 31, 2009

Non-executive Directors

              

Alan J. Wright

   10,000    —      —      110.03    December 2, 2009
   10,000    —      —      88.38    August 17, 2010
   10,000    —      —      68.59    February 12, 2011
   —      —      2,800    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      4,100    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      7,600    —      November 12, 2011

 

210


Table of Contents

Name

   Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
   Share
appreciation
rights
(SARS)
   Restricted
shares
   Option/
SARS
exercise
price
(in Rand)
  

Expiration/
settlement date (1)

J. Michael McMahon (3)

   —      —      1,900    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

Jakes G Gerwel (3)

   —      —      1,200    —      November 10, 2009

Patrick J. Ryan (3)

   —      —      1,900    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

Tokyo M. G. Sexwale (3)

   —      —      1,900    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010

Chris I. von Christierson

   10,000    —      —      110.03    December 2, 2009
   10,000    —      —      88.38    August 17, 2010
   —      —      1,900    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

   5,000    —      —      110.03    December 2, 2009
   10,000    —      —      88.38    August 17, 2010
   10,000    —      —      68.59    February 12, 2011
   —      —      1,900    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

Kofi Ansah

   6,700    —      —      68.59    February 12, 2011
   —      —      1,900    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

Donald M. J. Ncube

   —      —      800    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

John G. Hopwood

   —      —      800    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

Artem Grigorian (3)

   —      —      1,900    —      November 10, 2009
   —      —      2,700    —      November 2, 2010

Gill Marcus

   —      —      1,200    —      November 2, 2010
   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

David N. Murray

   —      —      5,000    —      November 12, 2011

 

211


Table of Contents

Name

   Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
   Share
appreciation
rights
(SARS)
   Restricted
shares
   Option/
SARS
exercise
price
(in Rand)
  

Expiration/
settlement date (1)

Executive Officers

              

James W. D. Dowsley

   7,333    —      —      46.23    August 17, 2010
   33    —      —      46.23    December 3, 2010
   2,567    —      —      84.17    August 6, 2010
   2,567    —      —      84.17    March 11, 2011
   2,566    —      —      84.17    May 21, 2011
   2,300    —      —      93.49    January 7, 2011
   2,300    —      —      93.49    July 8, 2011
   2,300    —      —      93.49    August 12, 2011
   5,000    —      —      83.18    July 23, 2011
   2,500    —      —      83.18    February 25, 2012
   2,500    —      —      76.75    November 15, 2011
   2,500    —      —      76.75    March 12, 2012
   2,500    —      —      76.75    July 7, 2012
   2,500    —      —      67.93    February 25, 2012
   5,000    —      —      67.93    July 16, 2012
   5,000    —      —      63.65    May 23, 2012
   10,000    —      —      63.65    October 12, 2012
   —      5,925    —      125.28    March 24, 2012
   —      5,500    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      5,700    —      March 1, 2010
   —      12,750    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      9,300    —      March 3, 2011
   —      12,750    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      13,950    —      June 2, 2011
   —      9,950    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      10,200    —      March 2, 2012

Italia Boninelli

   —      11,000    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      11,300    —      March 1, 2010
   —      21,250    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      18,600    —      March 3, 2011
   —      12,750    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      13,950    —      June 2, 2011
   —      14,930    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      15,300    —      March 2, 2012

Michael D. Fleischer

   —      11,067    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      12,533    —      March 1, 2010
   —      15,900    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      12,800    —      March 3, 2011
   —      15,900    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      19,200    —      June 2, 2011
   —      20,400    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      23,330    —      March 2, 2012

 

212


Table of Contents

Name

   Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
   Share
appreciation
rights
(SARS)
   Restricted
shares
   Option/
SARS
exercise
price
(in Rand)
  

Expiration/
settlement date (1)

Jan W. Jacobsz

   4,000    —      —      46.23    November 24, 2009
   4,000    —      —      46.23    August 17, 2010
   500    —      —      46.23    December 3, 2010
   3,967    —      —      154.65    May 18, 2010
   3,966    —      —      154.65    August 22, 2010
   3,967    —      —      154.65    December 25, 2010
   1,834    —      —      84.17    August 6, 2010
   1,833    —      —      84.17    March 11, 2011
   1,833    —      —      84.17    May 21, 2011
   1,667    —      —      93.49    January 7, 2011
   1,667    —      —      93.49    July 8, 2011
   1,666    —      —      93.49    August 12, 2011
   5,000    —      —      83.18    July 23, 2011
   2,500    —      —      83.18    February 25, 2012
   2,500    —      —      76.75    November 15, 2011
   2,500    —      —      76.75    March 12, 2012
   2,500    —      —      76.75    July 7, 2012
   2,500    —      —      67.93    February 15, 2012
   5,000    —      —      67.93    July 16, 2012
   5,000    —      —      63.65    May 23, 2012
   10,000    —      —      63.65    October 12, 2012
   —      3,950    —      125.28    March 24, 2012
   —      5,500    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      5,700    —      March 1, 2010
   —      12,750    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      9,300    —      March 3, 2011
   —      12,750    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      13,950    —      June 2, 2011
   —      9,950    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      10,200    —      March 2, 2012

Tommy D. McKeith

   —      50,000    —      121.82    October 1, 2013
   —      —      50,000    —      October 1, 2010
   —      10,600    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      12,800    —      March 3, 2011
   —      10,600    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      12,800    —      June 2, 2011
   —      20,400    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      23,330    —      March 2, 2012

Glenn R. Baldwin (2)

   —      8,000    —      127.72    April 2, 2013
   —      —      9,100    —      April 2, 2010
   —      10,600    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      12,800    —      March 3, 2011
   —      10,600    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      12,800    —      June 2, 2011
   —      13,600    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      15,550    —      March 2, 2012

 

213


Table of Contents

Name

   Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
   Share
appreciation
rights
(SARS)
   Restricted
shares
   Option/
SARS
exercise
price
(in Rand)
  

Expiration/
settlement date (1)

Vishnu P. Pillay

   —      8,000    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      8,167    —      March 1, 2010
   —      8,550    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      6,200    —      March 3, 2011
   —      15,900    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      19,200    —      June 2, 2011
   —      19,390    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      22,800    —      March 2, 2012

Paul Schmidt

   500    —      —      84.17    August 6, 2010
   2,534    —      —      83.85    August 21, 2010
   900    —      —      93.49    January 7, 2011
   2,400    —      —      83.18    July 23, 2011
   2,400    —      —      76.75    March 12, 2012
   1,200    —      —      67.93    February 25, 2012
   1,200    —      —      67.93    July 16, 2012
   2,400    —      —      63.65    May 23, 2012
   2,400    —      —      63.65    October 12, 2012
   —      4,500    —      125.28    March 24, 2012
   —      —      1,900    —      March 1, 2010
   —      4,950    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      2,500    —      March 3, 2011
   —      6,300    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      5,625    —      June 2, 2011
   —      9,450    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      18,750    —      March 2, 2012
   —      14,390    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      7,790    —      June 1, 2012
   —      8,220    —      103.78    June 1, 2015

Juan L. Kruger

   —      10,000    —      124.19    October 15, 2013
   —      —      10,000    —      October 15, 2010
   —      8,500    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      9,300    —      March 3, 2011
   —      8,500    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      9,300    —      June 2, 2011
   —      9,950    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      10,200    —      March 2, 2012
   —      3,600    —      99.87    September 1, 2015
   —      —      4,800    —      September 1, 2012

Peter L. Turner

   15,000    —      —      89.80    November 1, 2012
   —      5,625    —      125.28    March 24, 2012
   —      4,800    —      124.19    March 1, 2013
   —      —      4,900    —      March 1, 2010
   —      8,550    —      107.59    March 3, 2014
   —      —      6,200    —      March 3, 2011
   —      8,550    —      103.99    June 2, 2014
   —      —      9,300    —      June 2, 2011
   —      6,650    —      109.66    March 2, 2015
   —      —      6,850    —      March 2, 2012
   —      5,500    —      99.87    September 1, 2015
   —      —      6,800    —      September 1, 2012

 

214


Table of Contents

Name

   Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
   Share
appreciation
rights
(SARS)
   Restricted
shares
   Option/
SARS
exercise
price
(in Rand)
  

Expiration/
settlement date (1)

Ben Zikmundovsky

   —      4,500    —      99.87    September 1, 2015
   —      —      4,700    —      September 1, 2012
                        

Total outstanding at September 30, 2009

   447,400    663,047    773,365    —      —  
                        

 

Notes:

 

(1) Certain expiration dates have been extended under the rules of the Schemes and Plans to cater for a special closed period during which certain officers and directors were not permitted to deal in their options during fiscal 2009 and 2010. The expiration date of Terence Goodlace’s options was accelerated to December 31, 2009 in connection with his resignation as Chief Operating Officer.

 

(2) Glenn R. Baldwin resigned from Gold Fields effective December 31, 2009.

 

(3) These individuals had resigned as directors prior to fiscal 2009.

Share Ownership of Directors and Executive Officers

The following sets forth, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, the total amount of ordinary shares directly or indirectly owned by the directors and executive officers of Gold Fields as of September 30, 2009:

 

Holder

   Ordinary
shares
   Percentage  

Nicholas J. Holland

   —      —     

Alan J. Wright

   68,582    0.01

John G. Hopwood

   15,000    0.01

Rupert Pennant-Rea

   2,030    0.00

Total Directors (13 persons) (1)

   85,612    0.02

Total Non-Director Executive Officers (11 persons) (1)

   —      —     
           

Total Directors and Executive Officers (24 persons) (1 )

   85,612    0.02
           

 

Notes:

(1)    Paul A. Schmidt joined the Board on November 6, 2009 and is counted as a Non-Director Executive Officer for the purposes of this table.

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan

At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, or The 2005 Plan, under which employees, including executive directors, will be compensated going forward.

The 2005 Plan provides for two types of awards: performance vesting restricted shares, or PVRS, and performance allocated share appreciation rights, or SARS. The PVRS will only be released to participants and the SARS will vest three years after the date of the award and/or allocation of such shares. However, in respect of the PVRS, company performance criteria need to be met in respect of awards to executives. The size of the initial allocation of SARS and PVRS is dependent on the performance of the participant at the time of allocation. The allocations under The 2005 Plan are usually made annually in March. Gold Fields had outstanding as of September 30, 2009, 4,520,386 SARS and 6,781,118 PVRS under The 2005 Plan.

All PVRS allocations made from March 1, 2006 to March 1, 2008 were conditionally awarded to participants. Based on the rules of the Plan, the actual number of PVRS which would be settled to a participant

 

215


Table of Contents

three years after the original award date is determined by the company’s performance measured against the performance of five other major gold mining companies (the peer group) based on the relative change in the Gold Fields share price compared to the basket of the respective U.S. dollar share prices of the peer group. Effective June 1, 2008, the rules were modified so that two performance measures apply. The target performance criterion has been set at 85% of the company’s expected gold production over the three-year measurement period as set out in the Business Plans of the company approved by the Board. In the event that the target performance criterion is met, the full initial target award shall be settled on the settlement date. In addition, the Remuneration Committee has determined that the number of PVRS to be settled may be increased by up to 300% of the number of the initial target PVRS conditionally awarded, depending on the performance of the company relative to the performance of five other major gold mining companies (the peer group) based on the relative change in the Gold Fields share price compared to the basket of the respective U.S. dollar share prices of the peer group. The above amendments were effected under the ambit of the existing rules as previously approved by the shareholders in the annual general meeting.

The GF Management Incentive Scheme

Prior to approval of The 2005 Plan, share options were available to executive officers and other employees, as determined by the Board of Directors under The GF Management Incentive Scheme. Options to purchase a total of 2,078,144 ordinary shares were outstanding under The GF Management Incentive Scheme as of September 30, 2009, of which options to purchase 206,900 ordinary shares at a weighted average price of Rand 88.93 were held by the executive directors of Gold Fields. The exercise prices of all outstanding options range between Rand 46.23 and Rand 154.65 per ordinary share and they expire between November 24, 2009 and March 23, 2013. The exercise price of each ordinary share which is the subject of an option is the weighted average price of the ordinary shares on the JSE on the day immediately preceding the date on which the Board of Directors resolved to grant the option.

Each option may normally only be exercised by a participant on the following bases: (1) after two years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than one-third of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; (2) after three years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than a further one-third (representing two-thirds cumulatively) of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; and (3) after four years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of all the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option, subject to revision by the Board of Directors. For so long as a person continues to work for Gold Fields, options lapse seven years after the date of acceptance of the option by the participant. Options vest as soon as they are exercisable, and employees who leave Gold Fields have one year following their departure to exercise options which have vested. Options which are not yet exercisable are forfeited upon leaving employment, subject to exceptions relating to changes in control of Gold Fields and no fault termination of service as part of organizational restructuring.

The share option scheme may be amended from time to time by the Board of Directors and the trustees of the scheme in any respect (except in relation to amendments affecting: (1) the eligibility of participants under the scheme; (2) the formula for calculating the total number of ordinary shares which may be issued under the scheme; (3) the maximum number of options which may be acquired by any participant; (4) the option price formula; and (5) the voting, dividend and transfer rights attaching to options, which may only be amended through approval in a general meeting), provided that no such amendment shall operate to affect the vested rights of any participant.

The first allocations were made under The 2005 Plan in March 2006 and no further allocations will be made under The GF Management Incentive Scheme from that date.

A total of 5% of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital, being 35,237,492 shares as of June 30, 2009, is reserved for issuance under all the prevailing share schemes described above. This percentage may only be amended with the approval of shareholders in general meeting and the JSE.

 

216


Table of Contents

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan

At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan, or The 2005 Non-Executive Plan. Participants in The 2005 Non-Executive Plan will be non-executive directors of Gold Fields who are not members of the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee, which is a committee comprising the Chief Executive Officer and two representatives of shareholders of Gold Fields nominated by the Chief Executive Officer under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan. The Plan provides for the release of restricted shares awarded to the non-executive directors three years after the date of the award, provided that the non-executive director is not removed, disqualified or forced to resign from the Board of Directors during that period. No consideration is payable for the grant of an award of restricted shares. Awards in respect of 52,600 shares were authorized at Gold Fields’ annual general meeting on November 12, 2008.

The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan

Prior to the approval of The 2005 Non-Executive Plan, share options were available to non-executive directors selected by the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee. No member of the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee could be a participant in The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan. The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan was adopted at the annual general meeting of shareholders on October 31, 2001. The exercise price of each ordinary share which is the subject of an option is the weighted average price of the ordinary shares on the JSE on the day immediately preceding the date on which the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee resolves to grant the option.

Under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan, all options granted may only be exercised no less than 12 months and no more than five years after the date on which the option was accepted by the participant.

If an option holder ceases to hold office for any reason, he will be entitled within 30 days to exercise share options which he was entitled to exercise immediately prior to his ceasing to hold office, failing which the options shall automatically lapse. The share option plan may be amended from time to time by the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee in any respect, except in relation to: (1) the eligibility of participants under the plan; (2) the formula for calculating the total number of ordinary shares which may be acquired pursuant to the plan; (3) the maximum number of options which may be acquired by any participant; (4) the price payable by participants; and (5) the voting, dividend and transfer rights attaching to options, which may only be amended through approval by the shareholders in a general meeting and by the JSE.

Options to purchase a total of 81,700 ordinary shares were held by the non-executive directors of Gold Fields under the plan as of June 30, 2009. The exercise prices of all outstanding options granted under this plan range between Rand 68.59 and Rand 110.03 per ordinary share, and they expire between December 2, 2009 and February 12, 2011.

Following the approval of The 2005 Non-Executive Plan at the Annual General Meeting held on November 17, 2005 and the approval of the first allocations under that Plan at that meeting, no further allocations will be made under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan.

Executive Directors’ Terms of Employment

Nicholas J. Holland (Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer) is party to three employment agreements: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited, or Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Gold Fields Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited, or Orogen, and one with Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, or GFGS. Terence P. Goodlace (former Executive Director and former Chief Operating Officer) from May 1, 2008 until his resignation with effect from October 15, 2008, was party to three employment agreements: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Orogen, and one with GFL Mining Services Ltd. The terms and conditions of employment for each executive director were substantially similar, except where otherwise

 

217


Table of Contents

indicated below. Effective November 6, 2009, Paul A. Schmidt (Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer) became party to three employment contracts: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Orogen, and one with GFGS.

The annual gross remuneration package, or GRP, payable to each of Mr. Holland and Mr. Goodlace for fiscal 2009 was determined by the Remuneration Committee and is as follows:

 

•      Nicholas J. Holland

   R4,464,800 plus U.S.$251,500

•      Terence P. Goodlace

   R991,916 plus U.S.$33,097

The split between the contracts for these amounts payable to the executive directors is determined on the basis of the amount of time spent by that executive director in respect of each contract.

The GFGS Contracts

Under the GFGS Contracts, the employment of an executive director will continue until terminated upon (i) six months’ notice by either party or (ii) retirement of the relevant executive director (currently provided for at age 60 in the contract). Gold Fields can also terminate the executive director’s employment summarily for any reason recognized by law as justifying summary termination.

The value of the GRP payable in terms of the GFGS Contract is to be allocated among the following benefits: (i) salary; (ii) compulsory retirement fund contribution (with contributions set at 20% of “Pensionable Emoluments,” which are set at a rate between 50% and 100% of the GRP as elected by the executive director); (iii) voluntary participation in a vehicle scheme; (iv) compulsory medical coverage; and (v) compulsory Group Personal Accident Policy coverage. In addition, it is compulsory for the executive director to contribute 1% of his GRP to the Unemployment Insurance Fund, subject to any legislated contribution maximum at the time.

The Offshore Contracts

Under the agreements with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings and Orogen, or the Offshore Contracts, the executive director is paid offshore, in an appropriate currency, that portion of the GRP relating to the amount of time spent performing duties offshore for the relevant offshore companies. In the interest of simplicity, no benefits other than annual leave accrue to each executive director under the Offshore Contracts.

Other Remuneration

In addition to the gross guaranteed remuneration payable, each executive director is entitled, among other things, to the following benefits under their employment contracts: (i) participation in the GF Management Incentive Scheme and The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan; and (ii) consideration for an annual (financial year) incentive bonus based upon the fulfillment of certain targets set by the Board of Directors and an expense allowance.

The amount and manner of any bonus payment is determined by the Remuneration Committee of the Board. See “—Board of Directors Committees.” The annual bonus is set at a target of 50% of the value of the GRP, assuming fulfillment of all targets, with scope to award a lesser bonus if targets are not met, or a greater bonus, up to a further 50% of the GRP, if targets are exceeded.

The employment contracts also provide that, in the event of the relevant executive director’s employment being terminated solely as a result of a “change of control” as defined below, and within 12 months of the change of control, the director is entitled to: (i) payment of an amount equal to twice his GRP, or two and a half times in the case of the Chief Executive Officer; (ii) payment of an amount equal to the average of the incentive bonuses paid to the executive director during the previous two completed financial years; (iii) any other payments and/or benefits due under the contracts; (iv) payment of any annual incentive bonus he has earned during the financial year notwithstanding that the financial year is incomplete; (v) an entitlement, for two years after the date of termination, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to him, including those which may not have vested at the date of such

 

218


Table of Contents

termination; and (vi) an entitlement to be settled with the SARS and Restricted Shares allocated and awarded to him, subject to the rules of The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan then in force, and in the case of the SARS will have a further period of one year in which to exercise such SARS. The employment contracts further provide that these payments cover any compensation or damages the executive director may have under any applicable employment legislation.

A “change of control” for the above is defined as the acquisition by a third-party or concert parties of 30% or more of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares.

In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other reorganization, whether or not there is a change of control, if the executive director’s services are terminated, the “change of control” provisions summarized above also apply.

Non-executive Director Fees

At the Annual General Meeting which was held on November 12, 2008, the shareholders increased Board fees as follows: the chairman of the Board receives an annual fee of Rand 1.187 million ($131,743), the ordinary annual fee for each Board member, excluding the Chairman is R135,000; the attendance fee for each Board member, excluding the Chairman, for each Board meeting is Rand 10,000 ($1,110) per meeting; the annual fee for each chairman of a Board committee, other than the Audit Committee chairman, is Rand 98,300 ($10,910); the annual fee for the chairman of the Audit Committee is Rand 137,600 ($15,272); the attendance fee for each Board committee member for each Board committee meeting is Rand 6,000 ($666) per meeting; the annual fee for members of each Board committee, other than the Audit Committee, is Rand 49,200 ($5,461); the annual fee for each member of the Audit Committee, excluding the chairman, is Rand 68,900 ($7,647); and the shareholder-approved travel allowance payable to directors who travel internationally to attend meetings is $5,000 per international trip. Gold Fields has no service contracts with its non-executive directors. On November 4, 2009, Gold Fields’ shareholders voted to change the basis on which the remuneration of non-executive directors is determined. Effective January 1, 2010, a flat fee will be paid to all non-executive directors, the amount of which will represent a 12% increase on the fees approved and shares awarded at the last annual general meeting. Under this flat fee arrangement, the retainer fee for the Board will be as follows: the Chairman of the Board will receive an annual fee of R1,325,000; the Chairman of the Audit Committee will receive an annual fee of R195,000; the Chairmen of the Capital Projects Control and Review Committee, the Nominating and Governance Committee, the Remuneration Committee and the Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee will receive an annual fee of R150,000, respectively; each member of the Board (excluding the Chairman of the Board) will receive an annual fee of R275,000; each member of the Audit Committee will receive an annual fee of R120,000; each member of the Capital Projects Control and Review Committee, the Nominating and Governance Committee, the Remuneration Committee and the Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee will receive an annual fee of R95,000, respectively. Each director that travels internationally to attend meetings will receive $5,400 per international trip required.

 

219


Table of Contents

Employees

The gold mining industry, particularly in South Africa, is labor-intensive. The total number of employees, including employees of outside contractors, as of the end of the last three fiscal years at each of the operations owned by Gold Fields as of those dates was:

 

     As of June 30, (1)  
     2007    2008    2009  

South Africa

        

Driefontein

   20,500    18,800    19,200 (2)  

Kloof

   17,000    16,400    17,200 (2)  

Beatrix

   12,300    12,700    11,700 (2)  

South Deep

   6,400    6,200    4,700 (2)  

Ghana

        

Tarkwa

   3,800    4,700    3,900 (2)  

Damang

   1,000    1,600    1,600 (2)  

Australia

        

St. Ives

   800    1,200    950 (3)  

Agnew

   300    500    340 (3)  

Venezuela

        

Choco 10 (4)

   1,000    —      —     

Peru

        

Cerro Corona

   —      3,900    2,000 (2)(5)  

Corporate

   200    200    100   
                

Total

   63,300    66,200    65,800 (6)  
                

 

Notes:

 

(1) This table provides the number of employees at each operation based on each employee’s cost center. Therefore, the numbers in this table may not be comparable to those in the Company’s 2009 Annual Report.

 

(2) Rounded to the nearest hundred.

 

(3) Rounded to the nearest ten.

 

(4) On November 30, 2007, Gold Fields sold its interests in Choco 10.

 

(5) Includes employees and employees of outside contractors involved in the construction of the Cerro Corona tailings dam.

 

(6) As of June 30, 2009, approximately 46,700 of these employees were laborers and semi-skilled employees.

Labor Relations

South Africa

Since 1995, the South African legislature has enacted various labor laws that enhance the rights of employees. For example, these laws:

 

   

confirm the right of employees to belong to trade unions and the right of unions to have access to the workplace;

 

   

guarantee employees the right to strike, picket and participate in secondary strikes in certain prescribed circumstances;

 

   

provide for mandatory severance pay in the event of termination of employment for operational reasons;

 

   

reduce and limit the maximum ordinary hours of work;

 

   

increase the rate of pay for overtime;

 

220


Table of Contents
   

require large employers such as Gold Fields to implement affirmative action policies to benefit historically disadvantaged groups, and impose significant monetary penalties for non-compliance with the administrative and reporting requirements of the legislation;

 

   

provide for the financing of training programs by means of a levy grant system and a National Skills Fund; and

 

   

grant employees the right to strike if a company employing over 500 employees terminates the employment of over 50 employees at any one time for operational reasons.

Approximately 79% of the labor force at Gold Fields’ South African operations is unionized, with the major portion of its South African workforce being members of the National Union of Mineworkers, or the NUM, the other two recognized unions being UASA and Solidarity. As a result of its highly unionized labor force in South Africa and the fact that labor costs constitute approximately 50% of production costs, Gold Fields has attempted to balance union demands with the need to contain and reduce total cash costs in order to ensure the long-term viability of its operations.

In December 2008, an employee relations summit was held between senior management and representatives from the three recognized unions in order to improve external stakeholder engagement and to create a collaborative working relationship with organized labor. The current discussion agenda is safe production management and productivity improvement initiatives.

Gold Fields’ South African operations suffered several work stoppages during fiscal 2009 mainly as a result of mine accident fatalities, as well as a result of national protest actions called by COSATU, a national federation of trade unions, related to socio-economic issues. The work stoppages related to fatal accidents were in support of the majority trade union’s resolution that, for each fatal accident, there will be “a day of mourning” where no production activities shall take place. Through engagement with the unions, alternative arrangements for memorial services have now been agreed although occasional days of mourning do sporadically occur in the event of mine fatalities.

Wage Agreements

2009 – 2011 Agreement

Wage increases and changes to terms and conditions of employment are negotiated with the unions every two years, and on July 28, 2009, Gold Fields reached a two-year wage agreement, or the 2009 wage agreement, with the United Association of South Africa, or UASA, Solidarity Trade Union, or Solidarity, and the NUM. This agreement provided for wage increases marginally above inflation, where the majority of employees received increases between 9% and 10.5%, depending upon the category of employee, implemented with effect from July 1, 2009. A further increase of CPI plus 1% will be implemented with effect from July 1, 2010 for all employee categories except management (whose increases are effective on January 1st of each year).

The 2009 wage agreement further provided for a few adjustments to other conditions of employment, such as medical incapacitation benefits, as well as an increase in the “living out allowance” from R1,200 to R1,300, effective from September 1, 2009 and a further increase to R1,400, effective from September 1, 2010. Currently, approximately 36% of Gold Fields’ South African labor force receive living out allowances.

In total, labor costs in South Africa (excluding South Deep) in fiscal 2009 increased approximately 10.2%, mainly due to wage increases, together with indirect costs and allowances, which increased in line with industry trends and market-related adjustments. At South Deep, labor costs decreased due to the implementation of mechanized mining and the ending of VCR mining.

In addition, the South African mining unions have from time to time indicated they may participate in occasional single day industrial action to protest a variety of issues such as changes to labor laws and food and fuel prices. There have been threats of a one-day national strike in March 2010 in support of banning the use of

 

221


Table of Contents

labor brokers. In addition, in November 2009, the NUM threatened a strike in support of discontinuing physical tests of applicants for employment and rehabilitated employees, which are carried out to ascertain whether the individuals are able to undertake physical work in a mining environment and which are required under the Mine Health and Safety Act. The union has since indicated that they will refrain from industrial action until 2010, and will only embark on such action then if management and the union are unable to reach agreement on the issue. As Gold Fields is under a legal obligation to conduct such tests, it will be approaching the State’s Department of Mineral Resources to obtain assistance in the resolution of this issue. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Driefontein Operation—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Kloof Operation—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Beatrix Operation—Mining” and “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—South Deep Operation—Mining.”

Ghana

In Ghana, there are various constitutional and legislative provisions relating to labor which, among other things:

 

   

entitle workers to join trade unions and give those unions the power to negotiate on their behalf with regard to their conditions of employment;

 

   

prohibit discrimination against union members;

 

   

entitle workers to strike in certain prescribed circumstances;

 

   

regulate the hours of work, termination notice, severance pay and minimum length of annual leave for workers;

 

   

provide for social security for workers and workers’ compensation; and

 

   

provide for arbitration in trade disputes.

On October 8, 2003, the Ghanaian Parliament passed the Labor Act, 2003 (Act 651), or the Labor Act. The Labor Act gives employees greater freedom to form and to join trade unions, among other rights. The Labor Regulations 2007 (L.I 1833), or the Regulations, made under the Labor Act came into effect on June 8, 2007.

Of the Ghanaian employees at Tarkwa, Damang and the Accra office, including those employed by African Mining Services (Ghana) Pty Ltd, or AMS, the majority are members of the Ghana Mineworkers Union, or GMWU, whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement originally concluded in 1996 and revised in 2000, 2003, 2004 and 2006. Wages are revised annually by negotiation with the GMWU.

In connection with the renegotiation of the collective bargaining agreement in 2006, as a profit-sharing arrangement, Gold Fields agreed to pay a lump sum amount of U.S.$1,049 to each employee in Gold Fields’ service during the period from July 1, 2006 to June 30, 2007. Additionally, Gold Fields negotiated a new employee gain-sharing model with the union for fiscal 2007, 2008 and 2009, pursuant to which 1.25% of profits after tax and royalties will be shared among local employees. On July 24, 2008, GMWU and Gold Fields agreed a 15% wage increase in basic pay rates, effective January 1, 2008. GMWU and Gold Fields also agreed to a 10% increase in the monthly housing allowance, effective July 1, 2008.

The terms of employment of supervisors and specialist technical staff, or Officials, are also governed by the Labor Act. Under the Labor Act, employees considered to be in “policy-making” positions are prohibited from joining unions. As a result, Officials and supervisors who are not in “policy-making” positions could be eligible to join unions which would then negotiate terms of employment on their behalf. Pursuant to this, in fiscal 2007, Gold Fields’ Officials association, which previously constituted a non-bargaining consultative unit representing senior staff, joined the GMWU. In turn, the GMWU obtained a bargaining certificate on May 24, 2007 to negotiate on the association’s behalf, thus leading to the formation of the Professional and Managerial Staff Union, or PMSU. Following the formation of the PMSU and the election of its executives, Gold Fields’ management was obligated to negotiate conditions for the Officials with the GMWU. In August 2007, the PMSU

 

222


Table of Contents

accepted and signed a wage increase and gain share agreement with the same terms as the agreement signed by GMWU and Gold Fields on August 23, 2007, as described above. On August 21, 2008, the collective bargaining agreement governing the conditions of service of the Officials was agreed.

Negotiations commenced on June 15, 2009 to settle the 2009 annual general increase for the staff and Officials, the renewal of the collective bargaining agreement for the staff employees and the potential continuation of the gain-sharing arrangement. These negotiations ended in a “deadlock” and the national Labor Commission referred the parties to voluntary arbitration. The voluntary arbitration process commenced on November 2, 2009. On November 26, 2009, an award of a 13.5% increase on the basic rate of pay for 2009 was made. All other conditions of service remained the same.

Australia

In Western Australia, where Gold Fields’ Australian operations are located, labor is now primarily regulated by the Fair Work Act (2009), or the Fair Work Act, and the federal industrial relations system created thereby. The Fair Work Act came into effect on July 1, 2009, replacing the previous federal industrial relations system created by the Workplace Relations Act 1996 (Cth.), or the Workplace Relations Act.

With the exception of a range of state statutes limited to health and safety, long-service leave, discrimination and workers’ compensation, Gold Fields and its employees are not subject to state industrial or employment laws.

The Fair Work Act continues to prescribe, among other things:

 

   

minimum wages;

 

   

maximum weekly hours;

 

   

forms of leave (other than long-service leave);

 

   

conditions regarding termination of an employee for redundancy;

 

   

sanctions for unfair dismissal and unlawful termination;

 

   

rights of unions to enter a workplace;

 

   

collective bargaining rights for employees; and

 

   

sanctions against unlawful industrial action.

However, the Fair Work Act has made significant changes to the previous federal industrial relations system under the Workplace Relations Act by enhancing employee collective bargaining rights and increasing the role of unions in the collective bargaining process. Changes to the federal industrial relations system under the Fair Work Act include, among other things:

 

   

the removal of the ability for employers to make Australian Workplace Agreements which were individual statutory agreements used by employers to exclude collective bargaining and union access to the workplace;

 

   

the introduction of a new collective bargaining framework that introduces “good faith bargaining” obligations for employers, fewer restrictions on the content of agreements and an enhanced role for union officials as bargaining representatives, parties to agreements and participants in dispute resolution;

 

   

the introduction of the National Employment Standards on January 1, 2010, which prescribe core minimum conditions of employment applicable to all Australian employees under the federal industrial relations system;

 

223


Table of Contents
   

the introduction of new industry-wide terms of employment known as Modern Awards on January 1, 2010, which simplify and update such agreements for different industry sectors, including the mining industry;

 

   

the opening of access to unfair dismissal laws to all Australian employees; and

 

   

the creation of a national body called Fair Work Australia which, among other matters, will have wider arbitration powers in relation to collective agreements and hear and determine unlawful dismissal claims and matters relating to minimum entitlements of employment and freedom of association.

All of Gold Fields’ Australian employees and the employees of the contractors at the St. Ives and Agnew mines are employed pursuant to individually negotiated federal workplace agreements under the Workplace Relations Act which will eventually terminate or expire and will no longer exist under the Fair Work Act.

The commencement of the Fair Work Act means that unions have an increased role in negotiating collective agreements for pay and working conditions and may lead to an increased union presence in Western Australia’s mining industry, potentially including at Gold Fields’ mining operations in Australia. In order to mitigate potential labor risks, Gold Fields has implemented an Employee Collective Agreement with its employees which provides some protection from potential third-party interventions. The Employee Collective Agreement excludes unions from negotiating terms and conditions of employment for a period of five years starting from August 27, 2009.

Peru

Mine workers in Peru are subject to the general regulations of the private labor system. In addition to these general regulations, the specific legal framework regarding mining activities is provided by the General Mining Law and its regulations and the Mine Safety and Hygiene Regulations.

New regulations regarding the contracting of outsourcing services have been recently enacted in the private labor system. Under the new regulations, mining companies that decide to hire outsourcing companies for the execution of specialized services involving the assignment of personnel will be jointly liable with the outsourcing companies for the payment of labor benefits and social security obligations of the assigned personnel. The liability is enforceable against the mining company up to a term of one year after the personnel have concluded its assignment.

The employees at Cerro Corona are not unionized and currently have no collective bargaining agreement. However, Peruvian labor regulations provide that a collective negotiation process may be commenced by a union or by workers’ representatives elected by the majority thereof. Beyond these collective bargaining rights, there are various labor regulations which, among other things:

 

   

entitle workers to strike in certain prescribed circumstances and manners;

 

   

prescribe maximum ordinary hours of work;

 

   

prescribe overtime pay;

 

   

prescribe minimum wages;

 

   

require mine owners to transport workers between remote mine sites and population centers; and

 

   

provide for mediation or arbitration in certain collective bargaining negotiations.

Though not required by law, Gold Fields provides to certain management staff a flat amount to cover housing and utility expenses in the city of Cajamarca in accordance with Gold Fields’ internal policy.

Also, Gold Fields provides to its workers, as a working condition, free transportation between the mine site and the city of Cajamarca.

 

224


Table of Contents

Benefits

Gold Fields provides benefits to its employees, generally including pension, medical and accommodation benefits. Employees are also entitled to a severance package if they are laid off. At Damang, medical benefits are provided by AMS, while the costs of such benefits are paid by Gold Fields under the terms of the contract between Gold Fields and AMS, the mining contractor, to its own employees. Gold Fields’ own employees are generally provided with medical and retirement benefits. In Australia, benefits for contractors’ employees are the responsibility of each contractor and Gold Fields’ own employees are generally responsible for their own medical costs and other benefits, except that Gold Fields contributes to a third-party pension plan.

In South Africa, Gold Fields plans to attract and retain motivated high caliber employees through a mix of guaranteed and performance-based remuneration, as well as short-term and long-term incentives, and non-financial rewards relating to work experience. Gold Fields has also implemented changes to company pay structuring for management employees and also for Officials in South Africa. This structuring is known as the Gross Remuneration Package structuring approach.

Furthermore, in order to maintain competitiveness in the South African labor market, regular industry market surveys are conducted, to benchmark remuneration practices and to keep abreast of industry movements regarding employee benefits and non-financial recognition programs. Gold Fields is also currently actively involved in an industry task team working with the Institute of Directors in formulating industry standards for remuneration practices based on labor market dynamics.

Gold Fields provides 50% of the contributions (premiums) under a medical plan, or the Gold Fields Plan, for certain former employees in South Africa. As of June 30, 2009, approximately 200 former employees were still covered under this plan.

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, Gold Fields assumed an additional post-retirement healthcare cost liability, or the South Deep Plan. Former employees of South Deep belong to a commercial medical scheme with employer liability for contribution per pensioner limited to R400 per month. The R400 monthly contribution is fixed and is payable until the arrangement terminates on December 31, 2011. At June 30, 2009, there were 208 former South Deep employees that were subject to this employer contribution.

In fiscal 2009, $3.4 million was debited to earnings under the Gold Fields Plan described above. No additional amount is attributable to the inheritance of the South Deep Plan.

Bonus Schemes

Gold Fields has extensive bonus schemes for workers at all levels. The focus of Gold Fields’ bonus schemes is based on specific production and safety targets as the primary drivers, with quality factors being secondary drivers at management levels.

Employment Equity

Under the South African Employment Equity Act, Gold Fields has a responsibility to: (1) promote equal opportunity and fair treatment in employment by eliminating unfair discrimination; and (2) implement affirmative action measures to redress the disadvantages in employment experienced by certain groups, in order to ensure their equitable representation in all occupational categories and levels in the workforce. As required by the Act, Gold Fields has a formal employment equity plan, which has been approved by its unions and submitted as part of its report to South African regulatory officials. The plan includes numerical targets to be achieved over a five-year period, with regular meetings of employment equity forums involving management and employee representatives to monitor progress against the plan. Employment equity progress was hindered by labor restructuring and economic challenges to operations in fiscal 2009. However, management believes that Gold Fields is currently making adequate progress toward the targets under its plan and is in compliance with legal and regulatory requirements regarding employment equity.

 

225


Table of Contents

Training

Gold Fields spent approximately R163 million on employee training and development in fiscal 2009 at its South African operations and US$4 million at its Ghanaian, Australian, Peruvian and Exploration operations.

During fiscal 2009, almost all Gold Fields employees in South Africa participated in one or more of the numerous training and development programs offered. Approximately 40,500 employees and 7,800 contractor employees went through the induction and skills review training program. Approximately 16,700 employees participated in team-based health and safety training, and approximately 2,600 employees and 1,200 local community members attended adult literacy programs. In addition, approximately 1,000 employees were given portable skills training, in order to support personal growth and empower employees with technical skills that can be used outside the mining industry.

In the area of higher education and development, Gold Fields has launched a Foundational Learning Competency program, which is aimed at enhancing employees’ communications and mathematical literacy. In addition, approximately 400 employees underwent technical trade qualification programs in engineering domain in fiscal 2009 and approximately 500 received mining qualification training. Qualifications training and short skills-enhancement programs were also offered to approximately 500 technical service employees and 1,700 metallurgical employees.

For fiscal 2010, the direct employee training and development in human resources at the South African operations is expected to be R132 million. For fiscal 2010, Gold Fields estimates that the investment in human resources development at the Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations and the Exploration division will be approximately U.S.$4 million.

Gold Fields continues to provide comprehensive training to its employees, in full compliance with the regulatory requirements at the sites at which it operates. The training provided in South Africa is aligned with South Africa’s National Qualifications Framework, and is carried out within the ambit of Gold Fields’ education, training and development, or ETD, establishment, which is fully accredited with the relevant Sectoral Education and Training Authority, or SETA, which for Gold Fields is the Mining Qualifications Authority, or MQA. Gold Fields’ ETD establishment has secured accreditation and program approvals from a number of SETAs outside of the mining industry, and is fully certificated in terms of the ISO 9001/2000 and ISO 14000 quality management standards. In order to secure optimal workplace safety and productive work performance, Gold Fields exposes its employees to ETD interventions which significantly exceed compliance to minimum standards, in the form of additional mining and safety skills training, team-based behavioral training, and non-mining related life and social skills training.

In addition, Gold Fields continues to focus systematically on managerial, leadership, and professional development though its Leadership and Professional Talent Pipeline program, by means of a process known as the Management Review, which is integrated with its performance management system.

In South Africa, Gold Fields has increased its enrollment of University Bursars and entry level scholarships across the technical disciplines. The Gold Fields Business and Leadership Academy, or GFBLA, plays an active role to ensure appropriate development pathways are established and implemented for every employee who has been identified within the succession plan for Gold Fields.

A salient development in the training environment within Gold Fields has been the review of GFBLA’s strategic and business plan. The principal goal of this new plan is to enhance the focus on performance-based training. Gold Fields has established a subsidiary training and development body, Gold Fields External Training Services, to provide commercial training to external clients in support of the South African government’s strategy to improve the technical skills base in the national economy. In addition, GFBLA will continue to utilize any additional facility and practitioner capacity to increase our contribution towards this goal.

 

226


Table of Contents

GFBLA’s performance met expectations in fiscal 2009, including regarding its budgeted cost and revenue targets, and Gold Fields believes it is well positioned to improve performance in the future.

Gold Fields continues to subscribe to initiatives concerning national critical skills formation, operating through various private sector collaborative initiatives such as the Gold Producer’s Committee’s “Collaborative Skills Development” initiative and the Technical Skills Business Partnership, or TSBP, which involves Arcelor-Mittal, SASOL, ESKOM, Transnet, Angloplats and Gold Fields.

All of Gold Fields’ employee training activities in South Africa take account of the human resources development requirements of the Mining Charter, and are fully described in the Social and Labor Plan submitted by Gold Fields to the Department of Minerals and Energy. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights.”

Gold Fields has initiated training and development programs internationally appropriate to the specific regions, commensurate with regional and site specific objectives and constraints. A comprehensive leadership development program at Gold Fields’ operations has been developed to further the growth of identified individuals considered leaders of the future. These include management, specialist, high performers, and other individuals with potential. While the program is already being implemented in the South African region, it is being customized for the international domain. In fiscal 2010, Gold Fields expects to develop supervisory and management skills components and initiatives to further this program. One focal point for the training effort in fiscal 2009 remained Health, Safety and Environmental training to comply with site specific safety and environmental systems as well as to support the leadership directive stated by the Chief Executive Officer that “we will not mine if we cannot mine safely”.

Health and Safety

Health

The principal health risks associated with Gold Fields’ mining operations in South Africa arise from occupational exposure to dust, noise, heat and chemicals. The most significant occupational diseases affecting Gold Fields’ workforce include lung diseases (such as silicosis, tuberculosis and a combination of the two) and noise-induced hearing loss. In South Africa, the incidence of tuberculosis in mine workers is aggravated by exposure to crystalline silica dust and by compromised immunity due to HIV infection. Gold Fields has many current initiatives to reduce exposure to silica dust at its underground operations. In addition, noise-induced hearing loss is the subject of numerous interventions, including implementation of hearing conservation programs, engineering controls, training of exposed workers and the provision of hearing protection devices to exposed employees. Gold Fields has embarked on significant initiatives to address HIV infection and AIDS among its workforce.

In Ghana, Australia and Peru, the primary health risks include dust and noise-induced hearing loss. Malaria is also a significant health risk in Ghana. To combat these risks, Gold Fields provides workers with appropriate protective gear and regular training and screening tests.

Gold Fields provides free healthcare to a substantial portion of its South African, Peruvian and Ghanaian employees while they are employed by Gold Fields. This includes the operation of hospitals and/or clinics to provide treatment as needed. Workers in Australia are responsible for their own healthcare.

HIV/AIDS Program . On December 12, 2001, Gold Fields entered into an agreement with the principal labor unions representing its employees, under which Gold Fields and the unions agreed to implement various initiatives aimed at reducing the spread of HIV/AIDS among Gold Fields’ workforce and providing for the treatment and care of employees who are HIV positive or suffering from AIDS. These initiatives include, among others, improving awareness and education among employees regarding HIV/AIDS, promoting condom usage among employees, managing sexually transmitted infections and collectively supporting a wellness management program for employees who are HIV positive. In April 2003, the Gold Fields HIV/AIDS program was recognized as one of the nine best programs in the world by the Global Business Coalition Against AIDS.

 

227


Table of Contents

Gold Fields believes that its South African workforce has a similar level of HIV prevalence to that present in groups of males of the same mix of age groups in South Africa generally. Accordingly, Gold Fields has developed and implemented a significant HIV/AIDS program with the goals of reducing the rate of HIV infection among its workforce and minimizing the potential financial impact of AIDS on its operations. This program involves a multi-faceted approach, including the following components:

 

   

HIV/AIDS awareness campaigns;

 

   

peer education and training, involving more than 800 peer educators;

 

   

voluntary counseling and testing;

 

   

condom promotion and distribution, with a stated goal of three condoms per employee per week;

 

   

treatment of sexually transmitted diseases, including treatment of infected sex workers and “periodic presumptive therapy” which involves giving a broad spectrum of antibiotics to asymptomatic sex workers at high risk of contracting sexually transmitted diseases;

 

   

care and support for workers with HIV/AIDS. This includes wellness management, ill health retirement for workers with AIDS (with workers encouraged to return home to their families) and home-based care for such workers following retirement. In January 2004, Gold Fields announced that it had extended the program to include the delivery of Highly Active Antiretroviral Therapy, or HAART, as a treatment option for employees living with AIDS; and

 

   

collaboration with international initiatives such as the Global Health Initiative, World Economic Forum, World Health Organization and USAID.

In May 2008, management estimated that approximately 33.2% of Gold Fields’ workforce in South Africa was infected with HIV. The actuarial model which the Company has applied consistently since 2001 estimates that peak prevalence has almost been reached.

Increasingly, Gold Fields is seeing an adverse impact of HIV/AIDS on its affected employees, evidenced by increased absenteeism and reduced productivity. Compounding this is the concomitant infections with tuberculosis that accompanies the end stages of HIV illness and causes additional healthcare related costs. A particular concern is the risk of HIV positive patients developing multi-drug-resistant tuberculosis, which is very difficult and expensive to treat and has long-term impacts on the employees’ ability to perform their job productively. Medical literature states that HIV positive individuals have an eight times greater risk per year of developing Tuberculosis than HIV negative patients. Gold Fields has managed this additional risk down to four times greater through an extensive anti-retroviral therapy and tuberculosis prophylaxis program. Gold Fields hopes to continue to limit the impact of HIV/AIDS on its operating costs through its HIV/AIDS program.

See “Risk Factors—HIV/AIDS poses risks to Gold Fields in terms of lost productivity and increased costs.”

HIV/AIDS prevalence is not significant in Gold Fields’ Ghanaian, Australian or Peruvian workforces. Gold Fields has also introduced its HIV/AIDS program in Ghana.

Safety

Operating mines, particularly underground mines, involves significant safety hazards. Gold Fields takes steps to address particular safety issues which are present at its operations. Specific safety issues are explained in further detail in connection with the description of each of Gold Fields’ operations. See “Information on the Company”.

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields faced a number of significant safety issues, including the deaths of 21 workers at its mines. The Company continually renews its commitment to safety. In fiscal 2009, Gold Fields initiated the Gold Fields Safe Production Rules which are a standard set of rules for all employees intended to protect employees from serious harm. See “Information on the Company—Strategy.”

 

228


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ Full Compliance Health and Safety Management System started as a health and safety initiative at the end of 2000. A group consisting of representatives of management, the DMR’s Mine Health and Safety inspectorate and South African trade unions developed the management system for Gold Fields. The Full Compliance Health and Safety Management System consists of programs of tailored safety training, emergency preparation, safety inspections and investigations aimed at improving the safety performance of each mine. Every year the system is revisited taking into consideration recent fatal accidents, lessons learned from the investigations and the outcomes of the various safety audits that have been conducted. In addition, each of the South African operations has designed and implemented a safety training initiative tailored for its particular circumstances, and those initiatives are used for both initial and ongoing training. All employees are expected to be trained at least once a year.

In June 2008, Gold Fields engaged Du Pont International to assess the existing health and safety management systems at Gold Fields’ operations and benchmark them against international best practice in the areas of health and safety, policy formulation and implementation, strategy development and structure, monitoring, performance measurement, review processes, follow-up, and risk assessment. Current behaviors, attitudes, practices and procedures were analyzed and comparative analyses against industry best practices in health and safety were conducted for each operation. In response to the findings of the review, a team has been put together to develop and roll out the Safe Production Management (SPM) strategy over the next two to three years to improve health and safety metrics on the GFIMSA operations. This new approach is based on five strategic drivers which include (i) Programme for Safe Production System, (ii) Technical, Engineering and Mine Design, (iii) Change, Culture, Values and Beliefs, (iv) Organizational Structure Effectiveness and Efficiency, and (v) Performance & Leadership Excellence. The design is to be all inclusive and integrated for the complete business.

The results of the Presidential audit conducted by the Department of Mineral Resources were made available in January 2009. Based on these results, the operations in South Africa have implemented action plans to ensure best practice. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Health and Safety”.

Gold Fields’ operations in Australia, Ghana and Peru are certified under OHSAS 18001, an occupational health and safety management specification system. Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix received re-certification in fiscal 2009 and South Deep received a re-certification audit and was recommended for re-certification in fiscal 2010 for the upgraded 2007 version.

Gold Fields’ South African operations have subscribed to the milestones set for accidents, elimination of silicosis and noise-induced hearing loss issued by the Mine Health and Safety Council of South Africa, which is a legislative body set up under the Mine Health and Safety Act to advise the Minister of Minerals and Energy on mine safety standards. These milestones include (i) achieving safety performance levels equivalent to international standards for underground metalliferous mines by 2013, (ii) by December 2008, achieving respirable crystalline silica levels of below 0.1mg per cubic meter in 95% of exposure measurement results, (iii) after December 2013, there being no new cases of silicosis among individuals previously unexposed prior to 2008, (iv) after December 2008, eliminating hearing deterioration of more than 10% among occupationally exposed individuals and (v) by December 2013, reducing the noise emitted by equipment to a level below 110dB(A) at any location in the workplace. As of September 30, 2009, Gold Fields measured respirable crystalline silica levels of below 0.1mg per cubic meter in 94% of exposure measurement results and no confirmed cases of hearing loss were reported to Gold Fields. Reported cases for this period may arise in the future. Gold Fields has set itself further internal targets more stringent than these milestones. Action plans to achieve these milestones have been developed and the Vice President and Head of South African operations reports to the Board’s Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee on a quarterly basis. Cartoon booklets that assist in communicating health, safety and hygiene hazards are being rolled out to all South African operations. Workshops have been implemented to monitor progress on current initiatives and identify cost-effective action plans for future implementation.

 

229


Table of Contents

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Major Shareholders

To the knowledge of management: (1) Gold Fields is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled (a) by another corporation or (b) by any foreign government; and (2) there are no arrangements the operation of which may at a subsequent date result in a change in control of Gold Fields. To the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, there is no controlling shareholder of Gold Fields.

As of September 30, 2009, the issued share capital of Gold Fields consisted of 705,191,269 ordinary shares.

A list of the individuals and organizations holding, to the knowledge of management, directly or indirectly, 5% or more of its issued share capital as of September 30, 2009 is set forth below.

 

Beneficial owner

   Ordinary
shares
   Percentage  

Mvelaphanda Gold (Pty) Limited

   39,913,335    5.66

Arnhold & S. Bleichroeder Advisers LLC

   37,874,900    5.39

Tradewinds Global Investors LLC

   35,629,231    5.07

Public Investment Corporation of South Africa

   35,251,092    5.02

To the knowledge of management, none of the above shareholders holds voting rights which are different from those held by Gold Fields’ other shareholders.

The table below shows the significant changes in the percentage of ownership by Gold Fields’ major shareholders, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, during the past three fiscal years.

 

     Beneficial ownership
     As of June 30,    As of
September 30,
2009
     2007     2008     2009   
           (%)           

Beneficial owner

         

Mvelaphanda Gold (Pty) Limited (1)

   —        —        5.66    5.66

Tradewinds Global Investors

   —   (2)     7.2 (2)     5.51    5.07

Arnhold & S. Bleichroeder Advisers LLC

   —        —        5.13    5.39

Public Investment Corporation of South Africa (4)

   5.0      4.8      5.01    5.02

BlackRock Investment Management (UK) Limited (3)

   6.6      7.0      4.42    4.50

Capital World Investors (formerly known as Capital Research and Management) (5)

   7.4      4.2      3.90    3.91

Old Mutual Investment Group South Africa Pty Limited (6)

   4.4      5.2      3.22    2.91

 

Notes:

 

(1) For further information on the Mvelaphanda Gold (Pty) Limited shareholding, see “—Related Party Transactions—Mvelaphanda”.

 

(2) To the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, the entities did not own Gold Fields’ ordinary shares on the dates specified.

 

(3) BlackRock Investment Management, previously known as Merrill Lynch Investment Management, was established in October 2006 with the merger of Merrill Lynch’s asset management business and BlackRock’s asset management business.

 

(4) Public Investment Commissioner holds a portion of its shares directly and a portion of its shares through Stanlib Asset Management, Sanlam Investment Managers, Old Mutual Asset Managers, Future Growth and RMB Asset Management.

 

(5) Capital Research and Management holds its shares through JPMorgan Chase Bank and State Street Bank & Trust Company.

 

(6) Old Mutual plc holds its shares through Old Mutual Life Assurance Company of South Africa Limited and various subsidiaries.

 

230


Table of Contents

Related Party Transactions

None of the directors, officers or major shareholders of Gold Fields or, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, their families had any interest, direct or indirect, in any transaction during the last three fiscal years or in any proposed transaction which has affected or will materially affect Gold Fields or its investment interests or subsidiaries, other than as stated below.

Mvelaphanda

Tokyo M. G. Sexwale, a former non-executive director of Gold Fields, who did not stand for re-election at the Annual General Meeting held on November 2, 2007, was a non-executive director of Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, or Mvela Resources, and chairman of Mvelaphanda Holdings (Proprietary) Limited until his resignation effective May 12, 2009.

On July 10, 2002, Gold Fields announced that it had granted Mvela Resources the right to acquire a beneficial ownership interest of between 5% and 15% in, and a corresponding share of Gold Fields’ obligations and liabilities with respect to, the development, financing or construction of any precious metals mine which was developed in Africa, beginning March 1, 2002. In consideration for the transaction, referred to in this discussion as the Exploration Arrangement, Mvela Resources is obligated to issue to Gold Fields options to subscribe in tranches for linked units in Mvela Resources, consisting of one ordinary share and one unsecured debenture issued by Mvela Resources, at a 10% premium to the five-day weighted average trading price listed on the JSE. The Exploration Arrangement expired in accordance with its terms on February 28, 2007.

On September 26, 2002, Mvela Resources issued to GFL Mining Services Limited, or GFLMSL, 380,102 options to subscribe for linked units pursuant to this arrangement at a strike price of R26.3087 per option. Thereafter, each year Mvela Resources was obligated to issue to GFLMSL options to subscribe for linked units with a value equal to half of the amount spent by GFLMSL on the precious metals exploration projects covered by the agreement between the parties during that year. On May 5, 2003, Mvela Resources issued to GFLMSL further options to subscribe for 373,435 linked units at a strike price of R19.3468. In November 2003, Mvela Resources implemented a Scheme of Arrangement and a consolidation of its share capital, which are described below. As a result of these actions, GFLMSL’s right to receive options to subscribe for linked units has been converted into a right to receive options to subscribe for ordinary shares of Mvela Resources. On May 30, 2004, Mvela Resources issued to Gold Fields options to subscribe for 521,812 ordinary shares in Mvela Resources at a strike price of R25.0357. The options granted under the Exploration Arrangement were originally exercisable for a period of two years from the date of issuance, but as of September 16, 2004, this period was extended to five years. On May 9, 2005, Mvela Resources issued to GFLMSL options to subscribe for 1,375,584 ordinary shares in Mvela Resources expiring on May 30, 2007 at a strike price of R16.9364. On May 16, 2006, Mvela Resources issued to GFLMSL options to subscribe for 1,396,925 ordinary shares in Mvela Resources expiring on May 30, 2008 at a strike price of R39.1871.

On May 29, 2007, GFLMSL exercised 1,375,584 options for a full consideration of R23,297,440.86 and received 1,375,584 Mvelaphanda Resources shares. On September 25, 2007, GFLMSL exercised 380,102 options for a full consideration of R9,999,989.49 and received 380,102 Mvelaphanda Resources shares. On March 11, 2008, GFLMSL exercised the balance of 2,292,172 Mvela Resources options for a full consideration of R75,030,140.61 and received 2,292,172 Mvelaphanda Resources shares.

On March 8, 2004, the shareholders of Gold Fields approved a series of transactions, referred to in this discussion as the Mvelaphanda Transaction, involving the acquisition by Mvela Resources of a 15% beneficial interest in the South African gold mining assets of Gold Fields for a cash consideration of Rand 4,139 million.

The Mvelaphanda Transaction was preceded by an internal restructuring of Gold Fields, whereby each of the Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix mining operations, as well as certain ancillary assets and operations, was transferred to a new, wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, or GFIMSA.

 

231


Table of Contents

On November 26, 2003, Gold Fields, Mvela Resources, Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Mvela Gold, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Mvela Resources, and GFIMSA entered into a covenants agreement, or the Covenants Agreement, regulating their rights and obligations with respect to GFIMSA. This agreement became effective following the advance by Mvela Gold of the loan to GFIMSA described below, which is referred to in this discussion as the Mvela Loan, and, among other things, provides for Mvela Gold to nominate two members of GFIMSA’s Board of Directors and two members of each of GFIMSA’s Operations Committee and Transformation Committee, the latter of which has been established to monitor compliance with the mining charter promulgated under the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act No. 28 of 2002. Under the Covenants Agreement, GFIMSA cannot dispose of any material assets, enter into, cancel or alter any material transaction between GFIMSA and any related party or make any material amendment to its constitutive documents without the prior written consent of Mvela Gold. In addition, if Gold Fields or GFIMSA wants to increase the interest of black empowerment entities in GFIMSA or in any business or assets of GFIMSA, other than pursuant to an employee share incentive scheme, Gold Fields must offer to Mvela Gold the opportunity to increase its interest in GFIMSA. By its terms, the Covenants Agreement remains in force for so long as Gold Fields remains a shareholder in GFIMSA and Mvela Gold holds its empowerment interest in or is a shareholder of GFIMSA and Mvela Gold holds the right to subscribe for 15% of the share interest in GFIMSA, provided that it terminates if the shares of GFIMSA are listed on the JSE.

On December 11, 2003, Gold Fields, GFIMSA, and Mvela Gold entered into a subscription and share exchange agreement, or the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement, pursuant to which, upon repayment of the Mvela Loan, Mvela Gold must subscribe for shares equal to 15% of GFIMSA’s outstanding share capital, including the newly issued shares, for a consideration of R4,139 million. In addition, for a period of one year after the subscription by Mvela Gold of the GFIMSA shares, each of Gold Fields and Mvela Gold will be entitled to require the exchange of Mvela Gold’s GFIMSA shares for ordinary shares of Gold Fields of an equivalent value based on an exchange ratio equal to 15% of a discounted cash flow calculation as applied to GFIMSA’s operations divided by the same calculation as applied to Gold Fields’ operations, with certain adjustments. Mvela Gold is entitled to dispose of the GFIMSA shares and any Gold Fields ordinary shares it may hold only in accordance with the terms of a pre-emptive rights agreement entered into by the parties, whereby if Mvela Gold receives an offer for, or otherwise wishes to sell, any GFIMSA or Gold Fields shares, it must first offer to sell them to Gold Fields. The Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement became unconditional following the advance of the Mvela Loan to GFIMSA on March 17, 2004.

On December 11, 2003, Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Mvela Gold, First Rand Bank Limited, Gold Fields Australia Pty Limited, or Gold Fields Australia, and Gold Fields Guernsey Limited, or Gold Fields Guernsey (which was reincorporated and renamed during fiscal 2006 as Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited), entered into a loan agreement, or the Mvela Loan Agreement, pursuant to which Mvela Gold advanced a loan of Rand 4,139 million, or the Mvela Loan, to GFIMSA on March 17, 2004. GFIMSA applied the loan toward funding its acquisition of Gold Fields’ South African mining operations and certain ancillary assets and operations as part of the internal restructuring of Gold Fields.

The Mvela Loan was funded by way of commercial bank debt of approximately Rand 1,300 million and mezzanine finance of approximately Rand 1,100 million, with the balance of approximately Rand 1,700 million being raised by way of an international private placement of shares of Mvela Resources. In connection with the mezzanine finance, Gold Fields subscribed for preference shares in an amount of Rand 200 million in Micawber 325 (Proprietary) Limited, or Micawber, a special-purpose entity established by the mezzanine lenders. Further, Gold Fields subscribed for 4,350,000 ordinary shares of Mvela Resources which were issued by Mvela Resources in the private placements for a consideration of Rand 100 million. In order to facilitate the private placement, Mvela Resources proposed a scheme of arrangement, or the Scheme, between itself and the holders of its linked units. The effect of the Scheme, which became operative on November 24, 2003, was that each linked unit holder received two ordinary shares of Mvela Resources for each linked unit held. In order to maintain the same number of listed instruments in issue after the implementation of the Scheme, Mvela Resources consolidated its ordinary share capital on a two for one basis. As a result, the net effect of the Scheme and the

 

232


Table of Contents

share consolidation is that Gold Fields has 1,275,349 options to acquire the same number of ordinary shares of Mvela Resources issued in connection with the Exploration Arrangement. In addition, pursuant to an agreement entered into on February 13, 2004, or the PIC Agreement, Gold Fields has effectively guaranteed a loan of Rand 150 million. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Cash Resources—Cash flows from investing activities” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—Mvela Loan.”

On February 13, 2004, the Mvela Loan Agreement was amended, principally in order to add and clarify certain definitions.

On November 17, 2004, GFLMSL, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources and GFIMSA entered into an agreement, referred to in this discussion as the Amendment Agreement, amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement and the Covenants Agreement. The agreements were amended to provide, among other things, that Mvela Resources may acquire a minimum of 45,000,000 and a maximum of 55,000,000 Gold Fields shares should it elect to exchange its equity interest in the South African assets for Gold Fields’ shares.

During the first half of fiscal 2007, Mvela Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, or Mvela Holdings, the parent company of Mvela Resources, entered into various agreements in terms of which the status quo regarding the shareholding in Mvela Resources as of the date of the Mvelaphanda Transaction was restored by Mvela Holdings once again having a direct interest in the issued share capital of Mvela Resources. On July 17, 2006, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others entered into an agreement further amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Covenants Agreement and the sponsor support, guarantee and retention agreement, or the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement, dated February 13, 2004, among Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, Mvela Gold, Micawber and FirstRand Bank Limited. In accordance with the revised agreements, Mvela Holdings undertook to remain an HDSA company, to retain beneficial ownership of no less than 26% of the issued equity share capital of Mvela Resources, to have board control of Mvela Resources (together with other HDSAs) and to retain management control of Mvela Resources pursuant to a written management agreement.

On March 30, 2007, Mvela Resources executed and, on April 26, 2007, amended an agreement between, among others, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, Lazarus Zim and Afripalm Resources (Proprietary) Limited, or Afripalm, an HDSA company formed by Lazarus Zim, in terms of which the parties, among other things, agreed as follows:

 

   

Afripalm will subscribe for shares in Mvela Resources to acquire economic and voting interests in Mvela Resources of approximately 19.3% and 31%, respectively. As a result of this acquisition, the economic and voting interests of Mvela Holdings, the other major HDSA shareholder in Mvela Resources, will be approximately 22.9% and 19.6%, respectively. As a result of the increase in the broad-based HDSA voting control of Mvela Resources to more than 50%, Mvela Resources will thus be an HDSA controlled company; and

 

   

the management agreement between Mvela Resources and Mvela Holdings, in terms of which the latter managed the day-to-day operations of Mvela Resources, was canceled.

Simultaneously, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others entered into an agreement on March 30, 2007 further amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Covenants Agreement and the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement. In accordance with the revised agreements, Mvela Holdings and Afripalm (and certain of its subsidiaries) undertook jointly (i) to remain HDSA companies, (ii) to retain beneficial ownership of no less than 26% of the issued equity share capital of Mvela Resources, (iii) to retain voting control over no less than 50% of the issued equity share capital of Mvela Resources, and (iv) to have board control of Mvela Resources (together with other HDSAs).

 

233


Table of Contents

On August 24, 2007, the Mvela Loan Agreement was amended, principally in order to bring certain financial covenants in line with the financial covenants set out in the Split-tenor Facility (and its predecessors).

On March 17, 2008, Gold Fields, GFLMSL, Mvela Resources, GFIMSA and Mvela Gold entered into an agreement in terms of which the parties agreed that the number of ordinary shares of Gold Fields which Mvela Gold will receive if either Gold Fields or Mvela Gold exercises the right to require the exchange of Mvela Gold’s GFIMSA shares for ordinary shares of Gold Fields (as contemplated in the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement) will be 50 million Gold Fields shares.

On March 27, 2008, Mvela Resources obtained the consent of the Company, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others under the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement to enter into a proposed transaction with Anglo Platinum Limited, or APL, and Northam Platinum Limited, or Northam, in terms of which Mvela Resources will purchase approximately 53.1 million Northam shares from APL’s subsidiaries and will advance shareholder loans to, and become the holder of the entire issued share capital of, Micawber 278 (Proprietary) Limited, or M278, which owns APL’s indirect 50% beneficial interest in the Booysendal Platinum Project. In addition, Mvela Resources will sell all its indirect shareholdings in M278 to Northam in exchange for 121 million new Northam shares.

In addition, this agreement effectively replaced the Mvela Holdings guarantee set out in the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement with a guarantee by Nedbank Limited for the due and punctual payment and performance by Mvela Resources of its obligations under the guarantee provided by Mvela Resources under the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement.

On March 17, 2009, Mvela Resources took receipt of its 15% shareholding in GFIMSA. Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvela Gold exercised its right to exchange the GFIMSA shares for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields. This brought the total number of Gold Fields shares in issue at that time to 703,839,976. Pursuant to the above transactions, Mvela Gold owned approximately 7% of the listed shares of Gold Fields and Gold Fields again owns 100% of GFIMSA. Since March 17, 2009, Mvela Gold has sold 11 million of the Gold Fields shares, representing approximately 1.6% of the listed shares of Gold Fields, through the market. The Gold Fields shares are subject to a right of first refusal in favor of Gold Fields.

Rand Refinery

GFLMSL, as agent for GFIMSA and its subsidiaries, has an agreement with Rand Refinery Limited, or Rand Refinery, in which Gold Fields holds a 34.9% interest, providing for the refining of substantially all of Gold Fields’ South African gold production by Rand Refinery. Prior to October 1, 2004, GFLMSL acted as agent for Rand Refinery to sell up to 50% of Gold Fields’ South African production. However, since October 1, 2004, Gold Fields has sold the gold produced from its South African operations itself. Gold Fields Ghana Limited, or Gold Fields Ghana, and Abosso Goldfields Limited, or Abosso, are each party to agreements with Rand Refinery to transport, refine and sell substantially all of the gold production from the Tarkwa and Damang mines entered into in June 2003. Nicholas J. Holland, who is the Chief Executive Officer and a Director of Gold Fields, was a Director of Rand Refinery from July 12, 2000 until September 30, 2008. He remains an alternate Director. As a Director of GFLMSL, which is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields, Mr. Holland declared his interest in the contract between Rand Refinery and GFLMSL, pursuant to South African requirements, and did not participate in the decision of Rand Refinery to enter into the agreement with GFLMSL, Gold Fields Ghana or Abosso. Mr. Holland signed the agreement with Rand Refinery on behalf of GFLMSL. See “Information on the Company—Description of Mining Business—Refining and Marketing” for further details regarding these arrangements.

New Africa Mining Fund

John Hopwood, a non-executive director of Gold Fields, is a trustee of the New Africa Mining Fund and is the chairman of the New Africa Mining Fund Investment Committee. Gold Fields has been instrumental in the

 

234


Table of Contents

formation of the New Africa Mining Fund and is a significant investor in the fund. As at June 30, 2009, Gold Fields had contributed a net amount of U.S.$3.9 million to the New Africa Mining Fund. Gold Fields originally committed R50 million ($6.2 million) for a six-year period which expired on February 28, 2009. No new investments are permitted but follow-on investments are allowed. Gold Fields’ share of potential follow-on investments is estimated to be $0.6 million. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Contractual obligations and commitments as at June 30, 2009.”

Absa Credit Facilities

Gill Marcus, a non-executive director of Gold Fields who retired from the Board on July 20, 2009, was the chairman of Absa Group Limited and Absa Bank Limited until July 2009. Gold Fields currently has a R500 million 364-day revolving credit facility with Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited. On May 15, 2009, a R1 billion 364-day revolving credit facility with Absa Capital also expired. Gold Fields has also established a Domestic Medium Term Note Programme, or the DMTN Programme, on April 6, 2009 with Absa Capital as the arranger, dealer and sponsoring member of the DMTN Programme. Absa Capital has also been appointed as transfer, paying and calculation agent under the DMTN Programme. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

Uncle Harry’s Area

Cheryl A. Carolus, a non-executive director of Gold Fields, is a party to the agreement described below in her individual capacity and also in her capacity as a founding shareholder of Peotona Gold Holdings, a 33% shareholder of Peotona Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Peotona Gold.

On April 21, 2009, Gold Field Operations Limited, or GFO, GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, Peotona Gold (Proprietary) Limited, Western Areas Prospecting (Proprietary) Limited, a company 74% owned by GFO and 26% owned by Peotona Gold, or WAP, and others entered into an agreement under which WAP relinquishes and abandons exploration rights on ground contiguous to the South Deep mine (commonly known as “Uncle Harry’s Area”) in favor of the South Deep Joint Venture. The agreement is subject to the conversion of the old order mining rights of South Deep under the 2002 Mineral Act to the new regulatory regime and Ministerial approval to extend the area covered by the South Deep Mining Rights to cover “Uncle Harry’s Area”. Peotona Gold also granted GFO an option to acquire its 26% shareholding in WAP.

Gold Fields believes that the above transactions with related parties have been conducted on terms at least as favorable to it as arm’s length terms.

None of the directors or officers of Gold Fields or any associate of such director or officer is currently or has been at any time during the past three fiscal years materially indebted to Gold Fields.

 

235


Table of Contents

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Reference is made to Item 18 for a list of all financial statements filed as part of this annual report. For information on legal proceedings, please refer to “Information on the Company” above.

Dividends and Dividend Policy

The following table sets forth the dividends announced and paid per share in respect of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended June 30,
     2005    2006    2007    2008    2009 (1)    2010
     ($)    (R)    ($)    (R)    ($)    (R)    ($)    (R)    ($)    (R)    ($)    (R)

Prior year’s final dividend

   0.06    0.40    0.06    0.40    0.15    1.10    0.13    0.95    0.16    1.20    0.10    0.80

Interim dividend

   0.05    0.30    0.07    0.40    0.13    0.90    0.09    0.65    0.03    0.30    —      —  
                                                           

Total dividend

   0.11    0.70    0.13    0.80    0.28    2.00    0.22    1.60    0.19    1.50    0.10    0.80
                                                           

 

Note:

 

(1) A final dividend was announced on August 5, 2009 and paid on August 31, 2009.

Gold Fields’ dividend policy is to declare an interim and final dividend in respect of each financial year based on 50% of the earnings for the year before taking account of investment opportunities and after excluding impairments. Earnings are adjusted to exclude unrealized gains and losses on financial instruments and foreign debt, but adjusted to include cash payments and receipts in relation to the underlying financial instruments.

Significant Changes

Please refer to “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Recent Developments.”

 

236


Table of Contents

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

Listing Details

The principal non-United States trading market for the ordinary shares of Gold Fields is JSE Limited, or JSE, on which they trade under the symbol “GFI.” The ordinary shares of Gold Fields are also listed on the SWX Swiss Exchange. Gold Fields’ International Depositary Shares are listed on Euronext Brussels. As of June 30, 2009, 17,536 record holders of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares, holding an aggregate of 166,723,511 ordinary shares (23.6%), were listed as having addresses in South Africa. As of June 30, 2009, 204 record holders of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares, holding an aggregate of 429,702,904 ordinary shares (61%), were listed as having addresses in the United States.

Gold Fields’ American Depositary Shares, or ADSs, currently trade in the United States on The New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “GFI.” The American Depositary Receipts, or ADRs, representing the ADSs are issued by The Bank of New York Mellon, as Depositary. Each ADS represents one ordinary share. Gold Fields’ ADRs are also listed on the Dubai International Financial Exchange.

JSE Trading History

The tables below show the high and low closing prices in Rand and the average daily volume of trading activity on the JSE for Gold Fields’ ordinary shares for the last five fiscal years.

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a yearly basis for the last five fiscal years, as reported by I-Net Bridge (Proprietary) Limited, or I-Net Bridge, a South African financial information service:

 

     Ordinary share price    Average daily
trading volume
(number of
ordinary shares)

Year ended June 30,

       High            Low       
     (Rand per ordinary share)     

2005

   94.02    55.09    1,485,099

2006

   162.00    69.01    2,067,115

2007

   173.80    109.40    2,580,019

2008

   135.00    87.01    2,900,832

2009

   123.50    54.00    3,011,023

2010 (through November 30, 2009)

   111.60    89.99    2,966,805

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a quarterly basis for the periods indicated, as reported by I-Net Bridge:

 

     Ordinary share price    Average daily
trading volume
(number of
ordinary shares)

Quarter ended

       High            Low       
     (Rand per ordinary share)     

September 30, 2007

   128.75    103.45    2,973,176

December 31, 2007

   127.79    93.58    2,376,850

March 31, 2008

   135.00    100.50    3,450,315

June 30, 2008

   118.50    87.01    2,751,270

September 30, 2008

   102.00    58.10    2,934,183

December 31, 2008

   96.35    54.00    3,110,786

March 31, 2009

   123.50    77.37    3,244,318

June 30, 2009

   111.90    88.35    2,892,541

September 30, 2009

   109.50    89.99    3,065,713

 

237


Table of Contents

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a monthly basis for each of the last six months, as reported by I-Net Bridge:

 

     Ordinary share price    Average daily
trading volume
(number of
ordinary shares)

Month ended

       High            Low       
     (Rand per ordinary share)     

June 30, 2009

   108.60    92.00    3,084,266

July 31, 2009

   97.69    89.99    2,424,954

August 31, 2009

   102.03    91.50    3,392,247

September 30, 2009

   109.50    93.72    3,456,513

October 31, 2009

   111.00    100.50    2,734,448

November 30, 2009

   111.60    101.50    2,908,793

On November 30, 2009, the closing price of the ordinary shares on the JSE was R108.10.

New York Stock Exchange Trading History

The tables below show the high and low closing prices in U.S. dollars and the average daily volume of trading activity on The New York Stock Exchange for the last five fiscal years.

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a yearly basis for the last five fiscal years, as reported by Bloomberg:

 

     ADS price    Average daily
trading volume
(number of ADSs)

Year ended June 30,

       High            Low       
     ($ per ADS)

2005

   14.94    9.25    1,557,127

2006

   26.33    10.69    2,289,061

2007

   24.10    15.63    3,141,519

2008

   19.13    10.88    6,368,692

2009

   13.72    4.90    7,635,974

2010 (through November 30, 2009)

   15.11    10.99    5,774,818

The following table sets out ADS trading information on a quarterly basis for the periods indicated, as reported by Bloomberg:

 

     ADS price    Average daily
trading volume
(number of ADSs)

Quarter ended

       High            Low       
     ($ per ADS)     

September 30, 2007

   18.33    13.67    5,143,061

December 31, 2007

   19.13    13.61    5,632,441

March 31, 2008

   17.61    13.22    8,938,902

June 30, 2008

   15.11    10.88    5,861,693

September 30, 2008

   13.15    7.16    7,774,018

December 31, 2008

   10.08    4.90    7,617,060

March 31, 2009

   12.47    7.94    9,485,419

June 30, 2009

   13.72    10.09    5,724,221

September 30, 2009

   14.76    10.99    5,073,456

 

238


Table of Contents

The following table sets out ADS trading information on a monthly basis for each of the last six months, as reported by Bloomberg:

 

     ADS price    Average daily
trading volume
(number of ADSs)

Month ended

       High            Low       
     ($per ADS)

June 30, 2009

   13.72    11.27    5,619,386

July 31, 2009

   12.54    10.99    3,902,269

August 31, 2009

   12.67    11.51    3,696,395

September 30, 2009

   14.76    11.86    7,677,474

October 30, 2009

   15.05    12.69    6,917,110

November 30, 2009

   15.11    12.82    6,762,658

On November 30, 2009, the closing price of Gold Fields’ ADSs quoted on The New York Stock Exchange was $14.78.

JSE Limited

The JSE was formed in 1887. The JSE provides facilities for the buying and selling of a wide range of securities, including equity and corporate debt securities and warrants in respect of securities, as well as Krugerrands.

The JSE is a self-regulating organization operating under the ultimate supervision of the Ministry of Finance, through the Financial Services Board and its representative, the Registrar of Stock Exchanges. Following the introduction of the Stock Exchanges Control Amendment Act No. 54 of 1995, or the Stock Exchange Act, which provides the statutory framework for the deregulation of the JSE, the JSE’s rules were amended with effect from November 8, 1995. These amendments removed the restrictions on corporate membership and allowed stockbrokers to form limited liability corporate entities. Members were, for the first time, also required to keep client funds in trust accounts separate from members’ own funds. Further rules to complete the deregulation of the JSE, as envisaged by the Stock Exchange Act, were promulgated during 1996 to permit members of the JSE to trade either as agents or as principals in any transaction in equities and to allow members to negotiate freely the brokerage commissions payable on agency transactions in equities. With effect from 1996, screen trading commenced on the JSE. The Securities Services Act No. 36 of 2004 came into effect on January 18, 2005. This act consolidates and amends the laws relating to the regulation and control of exchanges and securities trading, the regulation and control of central securities depositories and the custody and administration of securities and the prohibition of insider trading.

The market capitalization of companies listed on the JSE was approximately Rand 5.76 trillion as of October 30, 2009. The actual float available for public trading is significantly smaller than the aggregate market capitalization because of the large number of long-term holdings by listed holding companies in listed subsidiaries and associates, the existence of listed pyramid companies and cross-holdings between listed companies. Liquidity on the JSE (measured by reference to the total market value of securities traded as a percentage of the total market capitalization) was 55.3% for 2008. Trading is concentrated in a small, but growing, number of companies. As of October 30, 2009, there were 412 listed companies on the JSE.

South Africa was included in the Morgan Stanley Capital International Emerging Markets Free Index and the International Finance Corporation Investable Index in March and April 1995, respectively. South Africa has a significant representation in these emerging market indices.

The JSE has established a project named Share Transactions Totally Electronic, or STRATE, which has involved the dematerialization of share certificates in a central securities depositary and the introduction of contractual, rolling, electronic settlement in order to increase the speed, certainty and efficiency of settlement and to fall into line with international practice. Gold Fields joined STRATE on October 1, 2001. Investors are given the choice of either holding their securities in dematerialized form in the central securities depositary or retaining their share certificates. Shareholders who elect to retain their share certificates are not able to trade their shares on the JSE, although they may trade their shares off-market. Settlement of dematerialized shares traded electronically on the JSE is made five days after each trade (T+5).

 

239


Table of Contents

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

General

Gold Fields is a public company registered in South Africa under the Companies Act No. 61 of 1973, or the Companies Act, which limits the liability of its shareholders, and is governed by its Memorandum of Association and Articles of Association and the provisions of the Companies Act. Gold Fields’ registration number is 1968/004880/06. Section 3 of Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Association provides that its objectives are, among other things: (1) to purchase, lease or otherwise acquire mines, mineral and other properties, lands, farms and hereditaments, (2) to buy, sell, refine and deal in bullion, specie, coin and precious metals and (3) to carry on any mining and metallurgical operation which may seem conducive to any of Gold Fields’ objectives. On April 9, 2009, South Africa passed the Companies Act No. 71 of 2008. However, as of the date of this report, it has not yet come into force.

Dividends and Payments to Shareholders

Gold Fields may make payments (including the payment of dividends) to its shareholders from time to time in accordance with provisions of the Companies Act and the requirements of the JSE and Gold Fields’ Articles of Association. The Companies Act prohibits any payment (including the payment of any dividend) to a company’s shareholders if there are reasonable grounds for believing that:

 

   

the company is, or would be after the payment, unable to pay its debts as they become due; or

 

   

the consolidated assets of the company fairly valued would, after the payment, be less than the consolidated liabilities of the company.

Subject to the above requirements, the shareholders of Gold Fields in a general meeting or the directors may from time to time declare a dividend or any other payment to be paid to shareholders and to the holders of share warrants (if any) in proportion to the number of shares held by them.

All unclaimed dividends or other payments to shareholders may be invested or otherwise made use of by the directors for the benefit of Gold Fields until claimed, provided that any dividend or bonus or other payment to shareholders remaining unclaimed for a period of not less than three years from the date on which it became payable may be forfeited by resolution of the directors for the benefit of Gold Fields.

Voting Rights

Every shareholder of Gold Fields, or representative of a shareholder, who is present at a shareholders’ meeting has one vote on a show of hands, regardless of the number of shares he holds or represents or the number of shareholders he represents, unless a poll is demanded. Every Gold Fields’ shareholder is, on a poll, entitled to one vote per ordinary share held. A poll may be demanded by any person entitled to vote at the meeting. Neither the Companies Act nor Gold Fields’ Articles of Association provide for cumulative voting.

A shareholder is entitled to appoint a proxy to attend, speak and vote at any meeting on his or her behalf. The proxy need not be a shareholder.

Issue of Additional Shares and Pre-emptive Rights

Shareholder approval is required for any issuance of additional shares. Shareholders may either convey a general or specific authority to directors to issue shares. A general authority is valid until the earlier of the next annual general meeting and 15 months after the authority was granted.

The JSE and Gold Fields’ Articles of Association require that any new issue of equity shares by Gold Fields must first be offered to existing shareholders in proportion to their shareholding in the company unless, among other things, the issuance to new shareholders is:

 

   

pursuant to a shareholder approved employee share incentive scheme;

 

240


Table of Contents
   

for the acquisition of an asset, provided that, if the issue is more than 30% of the company’s issued share capital, a simple majority of shareholders must vote in favor of the acquisition;

 

   

to raise cash through a general issuance at the discretion of the directors to the general public (but not to related parties) of up to 15% of the issued share capital in any one fiscal year at an issue price with a discount not exceeding 10% of the 30-business-day weighted average trading price prior to the date the application is made to the JSE to list the shares provided that a 75% majority of votes cast by shareholders at a general meeting must approve the granting of such authority to the directors; or

 

   

to raise cash through a specific issuance of shares for cash, provided that a 75% majority of shareholders, other than controlling shareholders, votes in favor of the resolution to issue the shares at a general meeting.

Transfer of Shares

The transfer of any Gold Fields certificated share will be implemented in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act using the then common form of transfer. Dematerialized shares which have been traded on the JSE are transferred on the STRATE system and delivered five business days after each trade. The transferor of any share is deemed to remain the holder of that share until the name of the transferee is entered in Gold Fields’ register for that share. Since Gold Fields shares are traded through STRATE, only shares which have been dematerialized may be traded on the JSE. Accordingly, Gold Fields shareholders who hold shares in certificated form will need to dematerialize their shares in order to trade on the JSE.

Disclosure of Interest in Shares

Under South African law, a registered holder of Gold Fields shares who is not the beneficial owner of such shares is required to disclose every three months to Gold Fields the identity of the beneficial owner and the number and class of securities held on behalf of the beneficial owner. Moreover, Gold Fields may, by notice in writing, require a person who is a registered shareholder, or whom Gold Fields knows or has reasonable cause to believe has a beneficial interest in Gold Fields ordinary shares, to confirm or deny whether or not such person holds the ordinary shares or beneficial interest and, if the ordinary shares are held for another person, to disclose to Gold Fields the identity of the person on whose behalf the ordinary shares are held. Gold Fields may also require the person to give particulars of the extent of the beneficial interest held during the three years preceding the date of the notice. Gold Fields is obligated to establish and maintain a register of the disclosures described above and to publish in its annual financial statements a list of the persons who hold a beneficial interest equal to or in excess of 5% of the total number of ordinary shares issued by Gold Fields together with the extent of those beneficial interests.

General Meetings of Shareholders

The directors may convene general meetings of Gold Fields shareholders and a general meeting may also be convened on a requisition by shareholders made pursuant to the Companies Act. Gold Fields is obligated to hold an annual general meeting for each fiscal year within nine months of the end of each fiscal year and prior to 15 months after the date of the last annual general meeting.

Annual general meetings and meetings calling for the passage of a special resolution require 21 days’ notice in writing of the place, day and time of the meeting to shareholders. Any other general meeting of Gold Fields shareholders requires at least 14 days’ notice in writing to shareholders.

Business may be transacted at any meeting of shareholders only while a quorum of shareholders is present. Three shareholders present personally or by representative and entitled to vote constitute a quorum for a general meeting and an annual general meeting.

 

241


Table of Contents

The annual general meeting deals with and disposes of all matters prescribed by Gold Fields’ Articles of Association and the Companies Act, including:

 

   

the consideration of the audited financial statements and report of the independent accountants; and

 

   

the election of directors.

Annual Report and Accounts

Gold Fields is required to keep the accounting records and books of accounts as are necessary to present the state of affairs of the company and to explain the financial position of the company as prescribed by the Companies Act. No shareholder (who is not a director of Gold Fields) has the right to inspect any account or book or document of Gold Fields, except as conferred by the Companies Act or authorized by the directors or by a resolution of Gold Fields in general meeting.

The directors of Gold Fields will cause to be prepared annual financial statements and an annual report as required by the Companies Act and the JSE Listing Requirements. Gold Fields will send by mail to the registered address of every shareholder a copy of the annual report and annual financial statements. Not later than three months after the first six months of its financial year, Gold Fields will mail to every shareholder an interim report for the previous six-month period.

Changes in Capital or Objects and Powers of Gold Fields

The Gold Fields shareholders may, by the passing of a special resolution in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act:

 

   

increase Gold Fields’ authorized share capital;

 

   

divide all or any part of Gold Fields’ share capital into shares of larger amounts than Gold Fields’ existing shares or consolidate and reduce the number of the issued no par value shares, if any;

 

   

subdivide all or any portion of Gold Fields’ shares into shares of a smaller amount than is fixed by Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Association;

 

   

convert all of Gold Fields’ ordinary or preference share capital from having a par value into shares of no par value;

 

   

reduce Gold Fields’ authorized share capital and, if required by law, its issued share capital, stated capital and any capital redemption reserve fund or any share premium account;

 

   

alter the provisions of Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Association with respect to the objects and powers of the company; and

 

   

subject to the provisions of the Companies Act or any other South African law governing companies and the requirements of the JSE and any other stock exchange upon which the shares of Gold Fields may be quoted or listed from time to time, allow Gold Fields to acquire shares issued by itself or by its holding company or in any subsidiary of its holding company from time to time, and provided that:

 

   

the directors may resolve that any return of capital made to all or any shareholders whose registered addresses are outside South Africa will, subject to any exchange control regulations then in force, be paid in such other currencies as may be stipulated by the directors. The directors may also stipulate the date for converting Rand to those currencies and the provisional rate of exchange, provided that the date for conversion must be within a period of 30 days prior to the date of payment; and

 

   

all unclaimed amounts due as a result of a reduction of capital or any consolidation or subdivision of capital may be invested or otherwise made use of by the directors for the benefit of Gold Fields until claimed.

 

242


Table of Contents

Variation of Rights

All or any of the rights, privileges or conditions attached to Gold Fields’ ordinary shares may be varied by a special resolution of Gold Fields passed in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act.

Distribution of Assets on Liquidation

In the event of a voluntary or compulsory liquidation, dissolution or winding-up, the assets remaining after payment of all the debts and liabilities of Gold Fields, including the costs of liquidation, shall be dealt with by a liquidator who may, with the sanction of a special resolution, among other things, divide among the shareholders any part of the assets of Gold Fields, and may vest any part of the assets of Gold Fields as the liquidator deems fit in trustees for the benefit of shareholders. The division of assets is not required to be done in accordance with the legal rights of shareholders of Gold Fields. In particular, any class may be given preferential or special rights or may be partly or fully excluded.

Purchase of Shares

The Companies Act permits the establishment of share incentive trusts for the purpose of purchasing shares of a company for the benefit of its employees, including salaried directors. These share incentive trusts are permitted to extend loans to company employees, other than non-salaried directors, for the purpose of purchasing or subscribing for shares of the company.

Gold Fields may, if authorized by special resolution, acquire its own shares; provided that there are no reasonable grounds for believing that Gold Fields is or would be, after the payment, unable to pay its debts or that Gold Fields’ consolidated assets would, after the payment, be less than its consolidated liabilities. The procedure for acquisition of shares by Gold Fields is regulated by its Articles of Association, the Companies Act and the Listings Requirements of the JSE.

Borrowing Powers

The directors may exercise all the powers of Gold Fields to borrow money and to give all or any part of its property as security and to issue debentures or debenture stock (whether secured or unsecured) and other securities (with such special privileges, if any, as to allotment of shares or stock, attending and voting at general meetings, appointment of directors or otherwise as may be sanctioned by a general meeting) whether outright or as security for any debt, liability or obligation of Gold Fields or of any third-party. Gold Fields has unlimited borrowing powers.

Non-South African Shareholders

There are no limitations imposed by South African law or by the Articles of Association of Gold Fields on the rights of non-South African shareholders to hold or vote Gold Fields’ ordinary shares.

Rights of Minority Shareholders and Directors’ Duties

Majority shareholders of South African companies have no fiduciary obligations under South African common law to minority shareholders. However, under the Companies Act, a shareholder may, under certain circumstances, seek relief from the court if he has been unfairly prejudiced by the company. There may also be common law personal actions available to a shareholder of a company.

In South Africa, the common law imposes on directors duties to, among other things, act with care, skill and diligence and to conduct the company’s affairs honestly and in the best interests of the company.

 

243


Table of Contents

Material Contracts

Mvelaphanda Transaction

On March 8, 2004, the shareholders of Gold Fields approved a series of transactions, referred to in this discussion as the Mvelaphanda Transaction, involving the acquisition by Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, or Mvela Resources, of a 15% beneficial interest in the South African gold mining assets of Gold Fields for cash consideration of Rand 4,139 million. In connection with the Mvelaphanda Transaction:

 

   

on July 25, 2003, Beatrix Mining Ventures Limited, or Beatrix, Driefontein Consolidated (Proprietary) Limited, or Driefontein, Kloof Gold Mining Company Limited, or Kloof, GFL Mining Services Limited, or GFLMSL, Gold Fields and Newshelf 706 Limited, or GFIMSA, entered into a reorganization agreement, or the Reorganization Agreement, pursuant to which each of the Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix mining operations was transferred to a new, wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields;

 

   

on November 26, 2003, Gold Fields, Mvela Resources, Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Mvela Gold, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Mvela Resources, and GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, or GFIMSA, entered into a covenants agreement, or the Covenants Agreement, regulating their rights and obligations with respect to GFIMSA;

 

   

on December 11, 2003, Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Mvela Gold, First Rand Bank Limited, Gold Fields Australia Pty Limited and Gold Fields Guernsey entered into a loan agreement, or the Mvela Loan Agreement, pursuant to which Mvela Gold advanced a loan of Rand 4,139 million, or the Mvela Loan, to GFIMSA on March 17, 2004;

 

   

on December 11, 2003, Gold Fields, GFIMSA, and Mvela Gold entered into a subscription and share exchange agreement, or the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement, pursuant to which, upon repayment of the Mvela Loan, Mvela Gold must subscribe for shares equal to 15% of GFIMSA’s outstanding share capital, including newly issued shares, for a consideration of Rand 4,139 million;

 

   

on February 12, 2004, Beatrix, Kloof, Driefontein, GFLMSL, Gold Fields and GFIMSA entered into Addendum Number 1 to the Reorganization Agreement pursuant to which the remainder of the South African gold mining businesses and related assets of Gold Fields were transferred to GFIMSA;

 

   

on February 13, 2004 Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Mvela Gold, First Rand Bank Limited, Gold Fields Australia Pty Limited and Gold Fields Guernsey entered into an addendum to the Mvela Loan Agreement, principally in order to add and clarify certain definitions;

 

   

on February 13, 2004, Gold Fields, GFLMSL and the Public Investment Corporation, or the PIC, entered into a put option agreement pursuant to which Gold Fields has effectively guaranteed a loan of Rand 150 million from the PIC to a special-purpose entity established by the mezzanine lenders that funded, in part, the Mvela Loan;

 

   

on November 17, 2004, Gold Fields, GFLMSL, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources and GFIMSA entered into an agreement amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement and the Covenants Agreement;

 

   

on November 17, 2004, Gold Fields, GFLMSL, Mvela Gold, Gold Fields Australia, Gold Fields Guernsey, First Rand Bank Limited and GFIMSA entered into a second addendum to the Mvela Loan Agreement;

 

   

on July 17, 2006, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others entered into an agreement further amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Covenants Agreement and the sponsor support, guarantee and retention agreement, or the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement, dated February 13, 2004, among Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, Mvela Gold, Micawber 325 (Proprietary) Limited, or Micawber, and FirstRand Bank Limited;

 

244


Table of Contents
   

on March 30, 2007, Mvela Resources executed and, on April 26, 2007, further amended, an agreement between, among others, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, Lazarus Zim and Afripalm Resources (Proprietary) Limited, an HDSA company formed by Lazarus Zim;

 

   

on March 30, 2007, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Mvela Resources, Mvela Holdings, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others entered into an agreement further amending the existing agreements relating to the Mvelaphanda Transaction, including, among others, the Covenants Agreement and the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement;

 

   

on August 24, 2007, Gold Fields, Mvela Gold, Gold Fields Australia, Gold Fields Holding Company (BVI) Limited (formerly, Gold Fields Guernsey), First Rand Bank Limited and GFIMSA entered into a third addendum to the Mvela Loan Agreement;

 

   

on March 17, 2008, Gold Fields, GFLMSL, Mvela Resources, GFIMSA and Mvela Gold entered into an agreement in terms of which the parties agreed that the number of ordinary shares of Gold Fields which Mvela Gold will receive if either Gold Fields or Mvela Gold exercises the right to require the exchange of Mvela Gold’s GFIMSA shares for ordinary shares of Gold Fields (as contemplated in the Subscription and Share Exchange Agreement), will be 50 million Gold Fields shares;

 

   

on March 27, 2008, Mvela Resources obtained the consent of the Company, GFIMSA, GFLMSL and others under the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement to enter into a proposed transaction with Anglo Platinum Limited, or APL, and Northam Platinum Limited, or Northam, in terms of which Mvela Resources will purchase approximately 53.1 million Northam shares from APL’s subsidiaries and will advance shareholder loans to, and become the holder of the entire issued share capital of, Micawber 278 (Proprietary) Limited, or M278, which owns APL’s indirect 50% beneficial interest in the Booysendal Platinum Project. In addition, Mvela Resources will sell all its indirect shareholdings in M278 to Northam in exchange for 121 million new Northam shares. In addition, this agreement effectively replaced the Mvela Holdings guarantee set out in the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement with a guarantee by Nedbank Limited for the due and punctual payment and performance by Mvela Resources of its obligations under the guarantee provided by Mvela Resources under the Sponsor Support, Guarantee and Retention Agreement; and

 

   

on March 17, 2009, GFIMSA repaid the Mvela Loan to Mvela Gold, upon which repayment Mvela Gold subscribed for 15% of the ordinary shares in the capital of GFIMSA, or the GFIMSA shares, for a subscription price in the amount of R4,139 million. Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvela Gold exercised its right to exchange the GFIMSA shares for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields, or the Gold Fields Shares. This brought the total number of Gold Fields shares in issue to 703,839,976. Pursuant to the above transactions, Mvela Gold owned approximately 7% of the listed shares of Gold Fields and Gold Fields again owns 100% of GFIMSA. Since March 17, 2009, Mvela Gold has sold 11 million of the Gold Fields shares, representing approximately 1.6% of the listed shares of Gold Fields, through the market. The Gold Fields shares are subject to a right of first refusal in favor of Gold Fields.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Overview—General—Mvelaphanda Transaction” and “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions—Related Party Transactions—Mvelaphanda.”

Arctic Platinum Project

On October 18, 2005, Gold Fields announced that it had entered into a letter of intent with North American Palladium Limited, or NAP, a Canadian platinum metals group producer, to form a joint venture to further explore mining properties and develop a mine at the APP.

On March 24, 2006, an Acquisition and Framework Agreement, or Acquisition Agreement, was entered into between NAP, Gold Fields Exploration BV, Gold Fields Finland Oy and North American Palladium Finland Oy. The Acquisition Agreement took effect from April 13, 2006 and, in accordance with the terms and conditions of

 

245


Table of Contents

the Acquisition Agreement, a Service Agreement was also entered into between Gold Fields Arctic Platinum Oy, NAP and North American Palladium Arctic Services Oy on March 24, 2006, pursuant to which NAP provided services to the APP.

The Acquisition Agreement provided that NAP was granted an option to acquire up to a 60% undivided interest in the APP, including the Suhanko, SJ Reef and SK Reef mining properties and claims located south of Rovaniemi, Finland.

On September 10, 2008, NAP declined to exercise its right to acquire 60% of the APP. Therefore, the APP has reverted to Gold Fields with a full 100% unencumbered interest. Further, all contractual arrangements with NAP have been dissolved as of June 30, 2009.

See “Information on the Company—Exploration—Gold Fields’ Greenfields Exploration Targets—Arctic Platinum Project.”

Cerro Corona Facility

On November 14, 2006, Gold Fields La Cima S.A. (formerly known as Sociedad Minera La Cima S.A.), or La Cima, entered into a U.S.$150 million project finance facility agreement with The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Citigroup Global Markets Inc., The Bank of Nova Scotia, The Bank of Nova Scotia Trust Company of New York, Scotiabank Peru S.A.A and other financial institutions, as set out in the agreement. As of the date of this annual report, the facility is fully drawn.

See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Peru Operation—Cerro Corona” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—Cerro Corona Facility.”

Preference Share Subscription Agreement

On December 24, 2007, Rand Merchant Bank, a division of FirstRand Bank Limited, or RMB, subscribed for 100 non-convertible redeemable preference shares in the issued share capital of Gold Fields, or the Preference Shares, at an aggregate subscription price of R1.2 billion ($172 million at the exchange rate in effect on the date of issuance). On October 10, 2008, 50 of the Preference Shares were redeemed for an amount of R600 million, together with applicable dividends of R23.2 million.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—Preference Shares.”

R500 million Revolving Credit Facility

On August 21, 2007, GFIMSA entered into a R500 million 364-day revolving credit facility, or the Absa 1 Facility, with Absa Capital (a division of Absa Bank Limited). Borrowings under this facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields. On August 19, 2008, the total amount of R500 million borrowed under the facility was repaid. On September 22, 2008, this facility was renegotiated as a short-term facility expiring on October 21, 2008. With effect from November 11, 2008, this facility was renegotiated as a 364 day facility, expiring on November 10, 2009.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—R500 million Revolving Credit Facility.”

Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility

On May 16, 2007, GFIMSA, Orogen and Western Areas entered into a U.S.$750.0 million split-tenor revolving credit facility, or the Split-tenor Facility, with lead lenders Barclays Bank Plc and ABN Amro N.V.

 

246


Table of Contents

The Split-tenor Facility consists of a U.S.$250 million 364-day revolving tranche (Facility A) and a U.S.$500 million five-year revolving tranche (Facility B). On May 15, 2009, Facility A was repaid in full. The amount drawn down under the Split-tenor Facility as of the date of this annual report is U.S.$500 million (U.S.$500 million under Facility B).

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility.”

Sale of Essakane Project

On November 26, 2007, Gold Fields sold its 60% stake in the Essakane project to Orezone. Gold Fields received U.S.$150 million in cash and 41,666,667 common shares of Orezone having an aggregate subscription price of U.S.$50 million, which were issued to Gold Fields’ wholly-owned subsidiary Gold Fields Essakane (BVI) Limited. Following the acquisition, Gold Fields owns 41,666,667 common shares of Orezone, representing 12.2% of Orezone’s issued and outstanding common shares.

Sale of Choco 10

On November 30, 2007, Gold Fields disposed of its assets in Venezuela to Rusoro Mining Ltd., or Rusoro, for a total consideration of U.S.$413 million, comprising U.S.$180 million in cash and 140 million newly-issued Rusoro shares, which at the time of sale represented approximately 37% of the outstanding shares of Rusoro and currently represents 26.4% of the outstanding shares of Rusoro. Pursuant to the transaction, Rusoro acquired Gold Fields’ stake in the Choco 10 gold mine, as well as the contiguous mineral rights owned by Gold Fields.

R1,000 million Short Term Revolving Credit Facility

On January 31, 2008, GFIMSA, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Orogen, and GFL Mining Services Limited entered into a R1 billion 364-day revolving credit facility, or the Absa 2 Facility, with Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited. On August 5, 2008, R500 million was drawn down under this facility. On August 19, 2008, a further R500 million was drawn down under this facility. This facility was repaid in full on May 15, 2009.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—R1,000 million Short Term Revolving Credit Facility.”

$311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

On May 7, 2009, GFIMSA, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations entered into a 364-day U.S.$311 million syndicated revolving loan facility with an option to extend the term on the same terms for an additional 364 days from the date of the original final maturity. As of June 30, 2009, the total borrowings under this facility were U.S.$72 million.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—$311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility.”

R1,500 million Long Term Revolving Credit Facility

On May 6, 2009, GFIMSA and Gold Fields Operations entered into a R1,5 billion five-year revolving credit facility with Nedbank Limited. As of June 30, 2009, the facility was unutilized.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—R1,500 million Long Term Revolving Credit Facility.”

 

247


Table of Contents

R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

On April 6, 2009, Gold Fields established a R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Programme. As of June 30, 2009, the total principal amount of notes issued under the programme was R1,143 million.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Programme.”

Sino Gold Mining Limited

On June 3, 2009, Gold Fields entered into an agreement under which it would sell its 19.9% stake in Sino Gold Mining Limited to Eldorado Gold Corporation, or Eldorado, for a total consideration of approximately U.S.$282 million payable in Eldorado shares which were received on July 27, 2009. On September 4, 2009, Gold Fields sold its entire shareholding in Eldorado on the market for a consideration of CAD 323 million ($299.3 million).

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Recent Developments—Disposal of stake in Sino Gold.”

Acquisition of Glencar Mining

On July 24, 2009, Gold Fields Limited, through a wholly-owned subsidiary, reached agreement with Glencar Mining Plc, or Glencar, on the terms of a recommended cash offer to acquire the entire issued capital of Glencar for cash. On August 7, 2009, the offer document was posted to eligible Glencar shareholders who had until September 4, 2009 to accept the offer. On September 7, 2009, Gold Fields announced that it had received 83.1% of acceptances and therefore 83.1% of the issued share capital of Glencar. All conditions of the offer were satisfied or waived at that time and therefore the offer was declared unconditional in all respects. On September 8, 2009, Gold Fields took control of Glencar as the existing directors of Glencar resigned and Gold Fields appointed three new directors. Subsequently, Gold Fields completed the final squeeze-out of shareholders on November 9, 2009. Gold Fields now holds 100% of Glencar Mining plc.

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospectus—Recent Developments—Acquisition of Glencar Mining.”

Termination of Royalty Over St. Ives

On August 26, 2009, Gold Fields executed an agreement with Morgan Stanley Bank in terms of which the royalty payable by St. Ives Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley Bank was terminated for a consideration of A$308 million ($257.1 million).

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Recent Developments—Termination of Royalty Over St. Ives.”

Management and Other Compensatory Plans and Arrangements

Gold Fields’ share plan, the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, was approved by the shareholders on November 17, 2005 and is available to its executive officers and other employees. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan.”

Gold Fields shareholders also approved on November 17, 2005 a new share plan available to its non-executive directors. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan.”

Gold Fields’ share option scheme, the GF Management Incentive Scheme, was adopted on November 10, 1999 and is available to its executive officers and other employees. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The GF Management Incentive Scheme.”

 

248


Table of Contents

Gold Fields also has a share option plan available to its non-executive directors. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan.”

In fiscal 2009, Nicholas J. Holland, Gold Fields’ Chief Executive Officer and an executive director of Gold Fields, was party to three employment agreements: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Orogen, and one with GFGS. In fiscal 2009, Terence P. Goodlace, Gold Fields Chief Operating Officer and an executive director of Gold Fields from May 1, 2008 until his resignation with effect from October 15, 2008, was party to three employment agreements: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Orogen and one with GFL Mining Services Ltd. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Executive Directors’ Terms of Employment.” Effective November 6, 2009, Paul A. Schmidt, Gold Fields’ Chief Financial Officer and an Executive Director of Gold Fields, was party to three employment agreements: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Orogen, and one with GFGS.

Deposit Agreement

Gold Fields has an American Depositary Receipt facility. In connection with this facility, Gold Fields is party to a Deposit Agreement, dated as of February 2, 1998, as amended and restated as of May 21, 2002 among Gold Fields, The Bank of New York (now known as The Bank of New York Mellon, or BNYM), as Depositary, and all owners and holders from time to time of American Depositary Receipts issued thereunder.

This summary is subject to and qualified in its entirety by reference to the Deposit Agreement, including the form of ADRs attached thereto. Terms used in this section and not otherwise defined will have the meanings set forth in the Deposit Agreement. Copies of the Deposit Agreement are available for inspection at the Corporate Trust Office of the Depositary, located at 101 Barclay Street, New York, New York 10286. The Depositary’s principal executive office is located at One Wall Street, New York, New York 10286.

American Depositary Receipts

Each Gold Fields ADS represents ownership interests in one Gold Fields ordinary share and the rights attributable to one Gold Fields ordinary share that Gold Fields will deposit with one of the custodians, which currently are Standard Bank of South Africa, Absa Bank Limited, French Bank of South Africa, First National Bank of South Africa and Nedcor Bank Limited. Each Gold Fields ADR also represents securities, cash or other property deposited with BNYM but not distributed to holders of Gold Fields ADRs.

As BNYM will actually be the holder of the underlying ordinary shares, Gold Fields will not treat you as one of its shareholders. As a holder of ADSs, you will have ADR holder rights. A Deposit Agreement among Gold Fields, BNYM and you, as a Gold Fields ADR holder, sets out the ADR holders’ rights and obligations of BNYM, as depositary. New York state law governs the Deposit Agreement and the ADRs evidencing the Gold Fields ADSs.

You may hold ADRs either directly or indirectly through your broker or financial institution. If you hold ADRs directly, you are an ADR holder. This description assumes you hold your ADRs directly. If you hold the ADRs indirectly, you must rely on the procedures of your broker or financial institution to assert the rights of ADR holders described in this section. You should consult with your broker or financial institution to find out what those procedures are.

Share Dividends and Other Distributions

How will you receive dividends and other distributions on the ordinary shares?

BNYM will pay to you the cash dividends or other distributions it or the custodian receives on the ordinary shares or other deposited securities, after deducting its fees and expenses. You will receive these distributions in proportion to the number of ordinary shares your Gold Fields ADSs represent.

 

249


Table of Contents

Cash:

BNYM will convert any cash dividend or distribution Gold Fields pays on the ordinary shares, other than any dividend or distribution paid in U.S. dollars, into U.S. dollars. If that is not possible on a reasonable basis, or if any approval from any government is needed and cannot be obtained, the Deposit Agreement allows BNYM to distribute the foreign currency only to those ADS holders to whom it is possible to do so or to hold the foreign currency it cannot convert for the account of the ADS holders who have not been paid. It will not invest the foreign currency and it will not be liable for any interest.

Before making a distribution, BNYM will deduct any withholding taxes that must be paid under applicable laws. It will distribute only whole U.S. dollars and U.S. cents and will round any fractional amounts to the nearest whole cent. If the exchange rates fluctuate during a time when BNYM cannot convert the foreign currency, you may lose some or all of the value of the distribution.

Ordinary shares:

BNYM will distribute new ADRs representing any ordinary shares Gold Fields distributes as a dividend or free distribution, if Gold Fields requests that BNYM make this distribution and if Gold Fields furnishes BNYM promptly with satisfactory evidence that it is legal to do so. BNYM will only distribute whole ADRs. It will sell ordinary shares which would require it to issue a fractional ADS and distribute the net proceeds to the holders entitled to those ordinary shares. If BNYM does not distribute additional cash or ADSs, each ADS will also represent the new ordinary shares.

Right to purchase additional ordinary shares:

If Gold Fields offers holders of securities any rights, including rights to subscribe for additional ordinary shares, BNYM may take actions necessary to make these rights available to you. Gold Fields must first instruct BNYM to do so and furnish it with satisfactory evidence that it is legal to do so. If Gold Fields does not furnish this evidence and/or give these instructions, and BNYM determines that it is practical to sell the rights, BNYM may sell the rights and allocate the net proceeds to holders’ accounts. BNYM may allow rights that are not distributed or sold to lapse. In that case, you will receive no value for them.

If BNYM makes rights available to you, upon instruction from you it will exercise the rights and purchase the ordinary shares on your behalf. BNYM will then deposit the ordinary shares and deliver ADSs to you. It will only exercise rights if you pay BNYM the exercise price and any charges the rights require you to pay. U.S. securities laws may restrict the sale, deposit, cancellation and transfer of the ADSs issued after exercise of rights. In this case, BNYM may deliver the ADSs under a separate restricted deposit agreement, which will contain the same provisions as the Deposit Agreement, except for changes needed to put the restrictions in place. BNYM will not offer you rights unless those rights and the securities to which the rights relate are either exempt from registration or have been registered under the Securities Act of 1933 with respect to a distribution to you.

Other distributions:

BNYM will send to you anything else Gold Fields distributes on deposited securities by any means BNYM thinks is legal, fair and practical. If it cannot make the distribution in that way, BNYM may decide to sell what Gold Fields distributed—for example by public or private sale—and distribute the net proceeds, in the same way as it does with cash, or it may decide to hold what Gold Fields distributed, in which case the ADRs will also represent the newly distributed property.

BNYM is not responsible if it decides that it is unlawful or impractical to make a distribution available to any ADR holder. Gold Fields will have no obligation to take any other action to permit the distribution of ADSs, ordinary shares, rights or anything else to ADS holders. This means that you may not receive the distribution Gold Fields makes on its ordinary shares or any value for them if it is illegal or impractical for Gold Fields to make them available to you.

 

250


Table of Contents

Deposit, Withdrawal and Cancellation

How does the Depositary issue ADSs?

BNYM will deliver the ADSs that you are entitled to receive in the offer against deposit of the underlying ordinary shares. BNYM will deliver additional ADSs if you or your broker deposit ordinary shares with the custodian. You must also deliver evidence satisfactory to BNYM of any necessary approvals of the governmental agency in South Africa, if any, which is responsible for regulating currency exchange at that time. If required by BNYM, you must in addition deliver an agreement transferring your rights as a shareholder to receive dividends or other property. Upon payment of its fees and of any taxes or charges, BNYM will register the appropriate number of ADSs in the names you request and will deliver the ADRs at its Corporate Trust Office to the persons you request.

How do ADS holders cancel an ADS and obtain ordinary shares?

You may submit a written request to withdraw ordinary shares and turn in your ADRs evidencing your ADSs at the Corporate Trust Office of BNYM. Upon payment of its fees and of any taxes or charges, such as stamp taxes or stock transfer taxes, BNYM will deliver the deposited securities underlying the ADSs to an account designated by you at the office of the custodian. At your request, risk and expense, BNYM may deliver at its Corporate Trust Office any dividends or distributions with respect to the deposited securities represented by the ADSs, or any proceeds from the sale of any dividends, distributions or rights, which may be held by BNYM.

Record Dates

Whenever any distribution of cash or rights, change in the number of ordinary shares represented by ADSs or notice of a meeting of holders of ordinary shares or ADSs is made, BNYM will fix a record date for the determination of the owners entitled to receive the benefits, rights or notice.

Voting of Deposited Securities

How do you vote?

If you are an ADS holder on a record date fixed by BNYM, you may exercise the voting rights of the same class of securities as the ordinary shares represented by your ADSs, but only if Gold Fields asks BNYM to ask for your instructions. Otherwise, you will not be able to exercise your right to vote unless you withdraw the ordinary shares.

However, you may not know about the meeting enough in advance to withdraw the ordinary shares. If Gold Fields asks for your instructions, BNYM will notify you of the upcoming meeting and arrange to deliver certain materials to you. The materials will: (1) include all information included with the meeting notice sent by Gold Fields to BNYM, (2) explain how you may instruct BNYM to vote the ordinary shares or other deposited securities underlying your ADSs as you direct if you vote by mail or by proxy and (3) include a voting instruction card and any other information required under South African law that Gold Fields and BNYM will prepare. For instructions to be valid, BNYM must receive them on or before the date specified in the instructions. BNYM will try, to the extent practical, subject to applicable law and the provisions of the by-laws of Gold Fields, to vote or have its agents vote the underlying shares as you instruct. BNYM will only vote, or attempt to vote, as you instruct. However, if BNYM does not receive your voting instructions, it will give a proxy to vote your ordinary shares to a designated representative of Gold Fields, unless Gold Fields informs BNYM that either: (1) it does not want the proxy issued, (2) substantial opposition exists or (3) the matter materially and adversely affects the rights of holders of ordinary shares.

Gold Fields cannot assure that you will receive the voting materials in time to ensure that you can instruct BNYM to vote your ordinary shares. In addition, BNYM and its agents are not responsible for failing to carry out voting instructions or for the manner of carrying out voting instructions. This means that you may not be able to exercise your right to vote and there may be nothing you can do if your ordinary shares are not voted as you requested.

 

251


Table of Contents

Inspection of Transfer Books

BNYM will keep books for the registration and transfer of ADRs. These books will be open at all reasonable times for inspection by you, provided that you are inspecting the books for a purpose related to Gold Fields or the Deposit Agreement or the ADRs.

Reports and Other Communications

BNYM will make available for your inspection at its Corporate Trust Office any reports or communications, including any proxy material, received from Gold Fields, as long as these materials are received by BNYM as the holder of the deposited securities and generally available to Gold Fields shareholders. At Gold Fields’ written request, BNYM will also send copies of reports, notices and communications to you.

Fees and Expenses

BNYM, as Depositary, will charge any party depositing or withdrawing ordinary shares or any party surrendering ADRs or to whom ADRs are issued:

 

For:

  

Gold Fields ADS holders must pay:

•   each issuance of a Gold Fields ADS, including as a result of a distribution of ordinary shares or rights or other property or upon exercise of a warrant to purchase an ADS

  

•   $5.00 or less per 100 Gold Fields ADSs or portion thereof

•   each distribution of securities distributed to holders of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares which are distributed by BNYM to Gold Fields’ ADR holders

  

•   any fees that would be payable if the securities had been ordinary shares and those ordinary shares had been deposited for the issuance of ADSs

•   each cancellation of a Gold Fields ADS, including if the Deposit Agreement terminates

  

•   $5.00 or less per 100 Gold Fields ADSs or portion thereof

•   each cash distribution pursuant to the Deposit Agreement

  

•   not more than $0.02 per ADS (or portion thereof)

•   annual depositary services

  

•   not more than $0.02 per ADS (or portion thereof) paid annually, provided that this fee will not be charged if the $0.02 fee for cash distributions described above was charged during the calendar year

•   transfer and registration of ordinary shares on the Gold Fields’ share register from your name to the name BNYM or its agent when you deposit or withdraw ordinary shares

  

•   registration or transfer fees

•   conversion of foreign currency to U.S. dollars

  

•   expenses of BNYM

•   cable, telex and facsimile transmission expenses, if expressly provided in the Deposit Agreement

  

•   expenses of BNYM

•   as necessary

  

•   certain taxes and governmental charges BNYM or the custodian has to pay on any Gold Fields ADS or ordinary share underlying a Gold Fields ADS

Payment of Taxes

You will be responsible for any taxes or other governmental charges payable on your ADRs or on the deposited securities underlying your ADRs. BNYM may deduct the amount of any taxes owed from any payments to you. It may also restrict or refuse the transfer of your Gold Fields ADSs or restrict or refuse the

 

252


Table of Contents

withdrawal of your underlying deposited securities until you pay any taxes owed on your Gold Fields ADSs or underlying securities. It may also sell deposited securities to pay any taxes owed. You will remain liable if the proceeds of the sale are not enough to pay the taxes. If BNYM sells deposited securities, it will, if appropriate, reduce the number of Gold Fields ADSs held by you to reflect the sale and pay to you any proceeds, or send to you any property, remaining after it has paid the taxes.

Reclassifications, Recapitalizations and Mergers

If Gold Fields:

 

   

changes the par value of any of the Gold Fields ordinary shares;

 

   

reclassifies, splits or consolidates any of the Gold Fields ordinary shares;

 

   

distributes securities on any of the Gold Fields ordinary shares that are not distributed to you; or

 

   

recapitalizes, reorganizes, merges, consolidates, sells its assets, or takes any similar action, then:

the cash, ordinary shares or other securities received by BNYM will become new deposited securities under the Deposit Agreement, and each Gold Fields ADS will automatically represent the right to receive a proportional interest in the new deposited securities; and BNYM may and will, if Gold Fields asks it to, distribute some or all of the cash, ordinary shares or other securities it received. It may also issue new Gold Fields ADSs or ask you to surrender your outstanding Gold Fields ADSs in exchange for new Gold Fields ADSs identifying the new deposited securities.

Amendment and Termination of the Deposit Agreement

How may the Deposit Agreement be amended?

Gold Fields may agree with BNYM to amend the Deposit Agreement and the Gold Fields ADRs without your consent for any reason. If the amendment adds or increases fees or charges, except for taxes and governmental charges, or prejudices an important right of Gold Fields ADS holders, it will only become effective 30 days after BNYM notifies you of the amendment. At the time an amendment becomes effective, you are considered, by continuing to hold your ADSs, to agree to the amendment and to be bound by the agreement as amended. However, no amendment will impair your right to receive the deposited securities in exchange for your Gold Fields ADSs.

How may the Deposit Agreement be terminated?

BNYM will terminate the Deposit Agreement if Gold Fields asks it to do so, in which case it must notify you at least 30 days before termination. BNYM may also terminate the agreement after notifying you if BNYM informs Gold Fields that it would like to resign and Gold Fields does not appoint a new depositary bank within 90 days.

If any Gold Fields ADSs remain outstanding after termination, BNYM will stop registering the transfer of Gold Fields ADSs, will stop distributing dividends to Gold Fields ADS holders, and will not give any further notices or do anything else under the Deposit Agreement other than:

 

   

collect dividends and distributions on the deposited securities;

 

   

sell rights and other property offered to holders of deposited securities; and

 

   

deliver ordinary shares and other deposited securities upon cancellation of Gold Fields ADSs.

At any time after one year after termination of the Deposit Agreement, BNYM may sell any remaining deposited securities by public or private sale. After that, BNYM will hold the money it received on the sale, as well as any cash it is holding under the Deposit Agreement, for the pro rata benefit of the Gold Fields ADS holders that have not surrendered their Gold Fields ADSs. It will not invest the money and has no liability for interest. BNYM’s only obligations will be to account for the money and cash. After termination, Gold Fields’ only obligations will be with respect to indemnification of, and to pay specified amounts to, BNYM.

 

253


Table of Contents

Your Right to Receive the Ordinary Shares Underlying Your Gold Fields ADSs

You have the right to cancel your Gold Fields ADSs and withdraw the underlying ordinary shares at any time except:

 

   

due to temporary delays caused by BNYM or Gold Fields closing its transfer books, the transfer of ordinary shares being blocked in connection with voting at a shareholders’ meeting, or Gold Fields paying dividends;

 

   

when you or other ADR holders seeking to withdraw ordinary shares owe money to pay fees, taxes and similar charges; or

 

   

when it is necessary to prohibit withdrawals in order to comply with any laws or governmental regulations that apply to Gold Fields ADSs or to the withdrawal of ordinary shares or other deposited securities.

This right of withdrawal may not be limited by any provision of the Deposit Agreement.

Limitations on Obligations and Liability to Gold Fields ADS Holders

The Deposit Agreement expressly limits the obligations of Gold Fields and BNYM. It also limits the liability of Gold Fields and BNYM. Gold Fields and BNYM:

 

   

are only obligated to take the actions specifically set forth in the Deposit Agreement without negligence or bad faith;

 

   

are not liable if either of them is prevented or delayed by law, any provision of the Gold Fields by-laws or circumstances beyond their control, from performing their obligations under the agreement;

 

   

are not liable if either of them exercises, or fails to exercise, discretion permitted under the agreement;

 

   

have no obligation to become involved in a lawsuit or proceeding related to the ADSs or the Deposit Agreement on your behalf or on behalf of any other party unless they are indemnified to their satisfaction; and

 

   

may rely upon any advice of or information from any legal counsel, accountants, any person depositing ordinary shares, any Gold Fields ADS holder or any other person whom they believe in good faith is competent to give them that advice or information.

In the Deposit Agreement, Gold Fields and BNYM agree to indemnify each other under specified circumstances.

Requirements for Depositary Actions

Before BNYM will deliver or register the transfer of a Gold Fields ADS, make a distribution on a Gold Fields ADS, or permit withdrawal of ordinary shares, BNYM may require:

 

   

payment of taxes, including stock transfer taxes or other governmental charges, and transfer or registration fees charged by third parties for the transfer of any ordinary shares or other deposited securities, as well as the fees and expenses of BNYM;

 

   

production of satisfactory proof of the identity of the person presenting ordinary shares for deposit or Gold Fields ADSs upon withdrawal, and of the genuineness of any signature; and

 

   

compliance with regulations BNYM may establish consistent with the Deposit Agreement, including presentation of transfer documents.

BNYM may refuse to deliver, transfer, or register transfer of Gold Fields ADSs generally when the transfer books of BNYM are closed or at any time if BNYM or Gold Fields thinks it advisable to do so.

 

254


Table of Contents

Pre-Release of Gold Fields ADSs

In certain circumstances, subject to the provisions of the Deposit Agreement, BNYM may deliver Gold Fields ADSs before deposit of the underlying ordinary shares. This is called a pre-release of Gold Fields ADSs. BNYM may also deliver ordinary shares prior to the receipt and cancellation of pre-released Gold Fields ADSs (even if those Gold Fields ADSs are canceled before the pre-release transaction has been closed out). A pre-release is closed out as soon as the underlying ordinary shares are delivered to BNYM. BNYM may receive Gold Fields ADSs instead of the ordinary shares to close out a pre-release. BNYM may pre-release Gold Fields ADSs only under the following conditions:

 

   

before or at the time of the pre-release, the person to whom the pre-release is being made must represent to BNYM in writing that it or its customer, as the case may be, owns the ordinary shares or Gold Fields ADSs to be deposited;

 

   

the pre-release must be fully collateralized with cash or collateral that BNYM considers appropriate; and

 

   

BNYM must be able to close out the pre-release on not more than five business days’ notice.

The pre-release will be subject to whatever indemnities and credit regulations BNYM considers appropriate. In addition, BNYM will limit the number of Gold Fields ADSs that may be outstanding at any time as a result of pre-release.

Governing Law

The Deposit Agreement is governed by the law of the State of New York.

South African Exchange Control Limitations Affecting Security Holders

The discussion below relates to exchange controls in force as of the date of this annual report. These controls are subject to change at any time without notice. It is not possible to predict whether existing exchange controls will be abolished, continued or amended by the South African government in the future. Investors are urged to consult a professional adviser as to the exchange control implications of their particular investments.

Acquisitions of shares or assets of South African companies by non-South African purchasers solely for cash consideration will generally be permitted by the SARB pursuant to South African exchange control regulations. An acquisition of shares or assets of a South African company by a non-South African purchaser may be refused by SARB in other circumstances, such as if the consideration for the acquisition is shares in a non-South African company or if the acquisition is financed by a loan from a South African lender. Denial of SARB approval for an acquisition of shares or assets of a South African company may result in the transaction not being completed. Subject to this limitation, there are no restrictions on equity investments in South African companies and a foreign investor may invest freely in the ordinary shares and ADSs of Gold Fields.

There are no exchange control restrictions on the remittance in full of dividends declared out of trading profits to non-residents of the Common Monetary Area (comprising South Africa, the Kingdoms of Lesotho and Swaziland and the Republic of Namibia) by Gold Fields.

Under South African exchange control regulations, the ordinary shares and ADSs of Gold Fields are freely transferable outside South Africa between persons who are not residents of the Common Monetary Area. Additionally, where ordinary shares are sold on the JSE on behalf of shareholders of Gold Fields who are not residents of the Common Monetary Area, the proceeds of such sales will be freely exchangeable into foreign currency and remittable to them. Any share certificates held by non-resident Gold Fields shareholders will be endorsed with the words “non-resident.” The same endorsement, however, will not be applicable to ADSs of Gold Fields held by non-resident shareholders.

 

255


Table of Contents

Taxation

Certain South African Tax Considerations

The discussion in this section sets forth the material South African tax consequences of the purchase, ownership and disposition of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs under current South African law. Changes in the law may alter the tax treatment of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs, possibly on a retroactive basis.

The following summary is not a comprehensive description of all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to a decision to purchase, own or dispose of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs and does not cover tax consequences that depend upon your particular tax circumstances. In particular, the following summary addresses tax consequences for holders of ordinary shares or ADSs who are not residents of, or who do not carry on business in, South Africa and who hold ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets (that is, for investment purposes). For the purposes of the income tax treaty between South Africa and the United States, and South African tax law, a United States resident that owns Gold Fields ADSs will be treated as the owner of the Gold Fields ordinary shares represented by such ADSs. Gold Fields recommends that you consult your own tax adviser about the consequences of holding Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs, as applicable, in your particular situation.

Withholding Tax on Dividends

Under South African law, no withholding tax applies to, and no other tax is payable by, shareholders or ADS holders on dividends paid to non-resident shareholders or non-resident ADS holders. It should be noted that the planned introduction in 2010 of a 10% withholding tax on dividends declared by South African resident companies to non-resident shareholders or non-resident ADS holders is generally permissible under the terms of a reciprocal tax treaty entered into between South Africa and the United States, or the Treaty; provided that the Treaty generally limits the withholding tax to 5% of the gross amount of the dividends if the beneficial owner of the shares is a company holding directly at least 10% of the voting stock of the company paying the dividends and to 15% of the gross amount of the dividends in all other cases. South Africa imposes a corporate tax known as a secondary tax on companies, or STC, on the distribution of earnings in the form of dividends on the company declaring the dividend. STC is a recognized form of tax in terms of the double taxation convention between South Africa and the United States, but does not constitute a withholding tax on dividends. With effect from October 1, 2007, the rate of STC was reduced to 10% (previously, it was 12.5%). STC will be abolished in 2010 once the withholding tax on dividends is introduced.

Income Tax and Capital Gains Tax

Non-resident holders of ordinary shares or ADSs will not be subject to income or capital gains tax in South Africa, with respect to the disposal of those ordinary shares or ADSs, on the basis that the Shares do not relate to any immovable property held in South Africa, unless the non-resident carried on business through a permanent establishment in South Africa, and the profits are realized in the ordinary course of that business.

Securities Transfer Tax

No Securities Transfer Tax, or STT, is payable in South Africa with respect to the issue of a security.

STT is charged at a rate of 0.25% on the taxable amount of the transfer of every security issued by a company or a close corporation incorporated in South Africa, or a company incorporated outside South Africa but listed on an exchange in South Africa, subject to certain exemptions.

The word “transfer” is broadly defined and includes the transfer, sale, assignment or cession or disposal in any other manner of a security. The cancellation or redemption of a security is also regarded as a transfer unless the company is being liquidated. However, the issue of a security that does not result in a change in beneficial ownership is not regarded as a transfer.

 

256


Table of Contents

STT is levied on the taxable amount of a security. The taxable amount of a listed security is the greater of the consideration for the security declared by the transferee or the closing price of that security. The taxable amount of an unlisted security is the greater of the consideration given for the acquisition of the security or the market value of the unlisted security. In the case of a transfer of a listed security, either the member or the participant or the person to whom the security is transferred is liable for the tax. The tax must be paid within a period of 14 days from the transfer. The liability for tax with respect to the transfer of listed securities lies with the party facilitating the transfer or the recipient of the security.

The liability for STT with respect to the transfer of unlisted securities is that of the company that issued the unlisted security. The STT must be paid by the company issuing the unlisted security within two months from the date of the transfer of such security.

U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations

TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH TREASURY DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR 230, HOLDERS ARE HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT: (A) ANY DISCUSSION OF FEDERAL TAX ISSUES IN THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT INTENDED OR WRITTEN TO BE RELIED UPON, AND CANNOT BE RELIED UPON, BY HOLDERS FOR THE PURPOSE OF AVOIDING PENALTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED ON HOLDERS UNDER THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE; (B) SUCH DISCUSSION IS INCLUDED HEREIN BY GOLD FIELDS IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROMOTION OR MARKETING (WITHIN THE MEANING OF CIRCULAR 230) BY GOLD FIELDS OF THE TRANSACTIONS OR MATTERS ADDRESSED HEREIN; AND (C) HOLDERS SHOULD SEEK ADVICE BASED ON THEIR PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES FROM AN INDEPENDENT TAX ADVISER.

The following discussion summarizes the material U.S. federal income tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares and ADSs. This summary applies to you only if you are a beneficial owner of ordinary shares or ADSs and you are, for U.S. federal income tax purposes:

 

   

a citizen or resident of the United States;

 

   

a corporation created or organized under the laws of the United States or any State within the United States; or

 

   

otherwise subject to U.S. federal income tax on a net income basis in respect of the ordinary shares or ADSs.

The U.S. federal income tax treatment of a partner in a partnership that holds ordinary shares or ADSs will depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. If you are a partnership, you should consult your tax adviser concerning the U.S. federal income tax consequences to your partners of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs by you.

This summary only applies to holders that hold ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets. This summary is based upon:

 

   

the current tax laws of the United States, including the Internal Revenue Code of 1986;

 

   

current U.S. Internal Revenue Service practice and applicable U.S. court decisions; and

 

   

the income tax treaty between the United States and South Africa.

This summary assumes that the obligations of the Depositary under the Deposit Agreement and any related agreements will be performed in accordance with their terms.

 

257


Table of Contents

The following summary is of a general nature and does not address all U.S. federal income tax consequences that may be relevant to you in light of your particular situation. For example, this summary does not apply to:

 

   

investors that own (directly or indirectly) 10% or more of Gold Fields’ voting stock;

 

   

financial institutions;

 

   

insurance companies;

 

   

investors liable for the alternative minimum tax;

 

   

individual retirement accounts and other tax-deferred accounts;

 

   

tax-exempt organizations;

 

   

dealers in securities or currencies;

 

   

investors that hold ordinary shares or ADSs as part of straddles, hedging transactions or conversion transactions for U.S. federal income tax purposes; or

 

   

investors whose functional currency is not the U.S. dollar.

Gold Fields does not believe that it should be treated as, and does not expect to become, a PFIC for U.S. federal income tax purposes but the Company’s possible status as a PFIC must be determined annually and therefore may be subject to change. If Gold Fields were to be treated as a PFIC, U.S. Holders of Shares or ADSs would be required (i) to pay a special U.S. addition to tax on certain distributions and gains on sale and (ii) to pay tax on any gain from the sale of Shares or ADSs at ordinary income (rather than capital gains) rates in addition to paying the special addition to tax on this gain. Additionally, dividends paid by the Company would not be eligible for the special reduced rate of tax described below under “Taxation of Dividends.” Prospective purchasers should consult their tax advisers regarding the potential application of the PFIC regime.

The summary of U.S. federal income tax consequences set out below is for general information only. You are urged to consult your tax advisers as to the particular tax consequences to you of acquiring, owning and disposing of the ordinary shares or ADSs, including the applicability and effect of state, local, foreign and other tax laws and possible changes in tax law.

U.S. Holders of ADSs

For U.S. federal income tax purposes, an owner of ADSs will be treated as the owner of the corresponding number of underlying ordinary shares held by the depositary for the ADSs, and references to ordinary shares in the following discussion refer also to ADSs representing the ordinary shares.

Taxation of Dividends

Distributions paid out of Gold Fields’ current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for U.S. federal income tax purposes) will generally be taxable to you as foreign source dividend income, and will not be eligible for the dividends received with the deduction allowed to corporations. Distributions that exceed Gold Fields’ current and accumulated earnings and profits will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of your basis in the ordinary shares and thereafter as capital gain. However, we do not maintain calculations of our earnings and profits in accordance with U.S. federal income tax accounting principles. You should therefore assume that any distribution by us with respect to the shares will constitute ordinary dividend income. You should consult your own tax advisers with respect to the appropriate U.S. federal income tax treatment of any distribution received from us. For purposes of determining limitations on any foreign tax credits, dividends paid by Gold Fields will generally constitute “passive income.”

 

258


Table of Contents

For taxable years that begin before 2011, dividends paid by Gold Fields will be taxable to shareholders that are individuals at the special reduced rate normally applicable to capital gains, provided that either Gold Fields qualifies for the benefits of the income tax treaty between the United States and South Africa, or the ADSs are considered to be “readily tradable” on the NYSE. You will be eligible for this reduced rate only if you are an individual, and have held the ordinary shares for more than 60 days during the 121-day period beginning 60 days before the ex-dividend date.

For U.S. federal income tax purposes, the amount of any dividend paid in Rand will be included in income in a U.S. dollar amount calculated by reference to the exchange rate in effect on the date the dividends are received by you or the depositary (in the case of ADSs). If you or the depositary, as the case may be, convert dividends received in Rand into U.S. dollars on the day they are received, you generally will not be required to recognize foreign currency gain or loss in respect of this dividend income.

Effect of South African Withholding Taxes

As discussed in “Certain South African Tax Considerations—Withholding Tax on Dividends”, South Africa imposes the STC on the distribution of earnings in the form of dividends on the company declaring the dividend. A U.S. Holder will generally not be entitled to a credit for the STC. However, beginning in 2010, the STC will be replaced by a withholding tax of 10% on dividends paid by Gold Fields. U.S. Holders that receive payments subject to this withholding tax will be treated, for U.S. federal income tax purposes, as having received the amount of South African taxes withheld by Gold Fields, and as then having paid over the withheld taxes to the South African taxing authorities. As a result of this rule, the amount of dividend income included in gross income for U.S. federal income tax purposes by a U.S. Holder with respect to a payment of dividends may be greater than the amount of cash actually received (or receivable) by the U.S. Holder from Gold Fields with respect to the payment.

A U.S. Holder will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to a credit against its U.S. federal income tax liability, or a deduction in computing its U.S. federal taxable income, for South African income taxes withheld by Gold Fields. However, a U.S. Holder will generally not be entitled to a credit for the STC (as discussed in “Certain South African Tax Considerations—Withholding Tax on Dividends”).

For purposes of the foreign tax credit limitation, foreign source income is classified in one of two “baskets”, and the credit for foreign taxes on income in any basket is limited to U.S. federal income tax allocable to that income. Dividends paid by Gold Fields generally will constitute foreign source income in the “passive income” basket. If a U.S. Holder receives a dividend from Gold Fields that qualifies for the reduced rate described above under “Taxation of Dividends”, the amount of the dividend taken into account in calculating the foreign tax credit limitation will in general be limited to the gross amount of the dividend, multiplied by the reduced rate divided by the highest rate of tax normally applicable to dividends. In certain circumstances, a U.S. Holder may be unable to claim foreign tax credits (and may instead be allowed deductions) for foreign taxes imposed on a dividend if the U.S. Holder has not held the Shares for at least 16 days in the 31-day period beginning 15 days before the ex dividend date.

U.S. Holders that are accrual basis taxpayers, and who do not otherwise elect, must translate South African taxes into U.S. dollars at a rate equal to the average exchange rate for the taxable year in which the taxes accrue, while all U.S. Holders must translate taxable dividend income into U.S. dollars at the spot rate on the date received. This difference in exchange rates may reduce the U.S. dollar value of the credits for South African taxes relative to the U.S. Holder’s U.S. federal income tax liability attributable to a dividend. However, cash basis and electing accrual basis U.S. Holders may translate South African taxes into U.S. dollars using the exchange rate in effect on the day the taxes were paid. Any such election by an accrual basis U.S. Holder will apply for the taxable year in which it is made and all subsequent taxable years, unless revoked with the consent of the IRS.

 

259


Table of Contents

Taxation of a Sale or Other Disposition

Your tax basis in an ordinary share will generally be its U.S. dollar cost. The U.S. dollar cost of an ordinary share purchased with foreign currency will generally be the U.S. dollar value of the purchase price on the date of purchase or, in the case of ordinary shares traded on an established securities market, as defined in the applicable Treasury Regulations, that are purchased by a cash basis taxpayer (or an accrual basis taxpayer that so elects), on the settlement date for the purchase. Such an election by an accrual basis taxpayer must be applied consistently from year to year and cannot be revoked without the consent of the IRS.

Upon a sale or other disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs, other than an exchange of ADSs for ordinary shares and vice versa, you will generally recognize capital gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes equal to the difference between the amount realized and your adjusted tax basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs. This capital gain or loss will be long-term capital gain or loss if your holding period in the ordinary shares or ADSs exceeds one year. However, regardless of your actual holding period, any loss may be treated as long-term capital loss to the extent you receive a dividend that qualifies for the reduced rate described above under “Taxation of Dividends” and also exceeds 10% of your basis in the ordinary shares. Any gain or loss will generally be U.S. source.

The amount realized on a sale or other disposition of ordinary shares for an amount in foreign currency will be the U.S. dollar value of this amount on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, you will recognize U.S. source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the U.S. dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, in the case of ordinary shares traded on an established securities market that are sold by a cash basis taxpayer (or an accrual basis taxpayer that so elects), the amount realized will be based on the exchange rate in effect on the settlement date for the sale, and no exchange gain or loss will be recognized at that time.

Foreign currency received on the sale or other disposition of an ordinary share will have a tax basis equal to its U.S. dollar value on the settlement date. Foreign currency that is purchased will generally have a tax basis equal to the U.S. dollar value of the foreign currency on the date of purchase. Any gain or loss recognized on a sale or other disposition of a foreign currency (including its use to purchase ordinary shares or upon exchange for U.S. dollars) will be U.S. source ordinary income or loss.

Deposits and withdrawals of ordinary shares by U.S. holders in exchange for ADSs will not result in the realization of gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Your tax basis in withdrawn ordinary shares will be the same as your tax basis in the ADSs surrendered, and your holding period for the ordinary shares will include the holding period of the ADSs.

To the extent you incur Securities Transfer Tax in connection with a transfer or withdrawal of ordinary shares as described under “—Certain South African Tax Considerations—Securities Transfer Tax” above, such securities transfer tax will not be a creditable tax for U.S. foreign tax credit purposes.

Backup Withholding and Information Reporting

Payments of dividends and other proceeds with respect to ordinary shares or ADSs by U.S. persons will be reported to you and to the IRS as may be required under applicable regulations. Backup withholding may apply to these payments if you fail to provide an accurate taxpayer identification number or certification of exempt status or fail to report all interest and dividends required to be shown on your U.S. federal income tax returns. Some holders (such as corporations) are not subject to backup withholding. You should consult your tax adviser as to your qualification for an exemption from backup withholding and the procedure for obtaining an exemption.

 

260


Table of Contents

Documents on Display

Gold Fields files annual and special reports and other information with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or SEC. You may read and copy any reports or other information on file at the SEC’s public reference room at the following location:

100 F Street, N.E.

Washington, D.C. 20549

Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference room. The SEC filings are also available to the public from commercial document retrieval services. Gold Fields’ SEC filings may also be obtained electronically via the EDGAR system on the website maintained by the SEC at http://www.sec.gov.

 

261


Table of Contents

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Gold Fields is exposed to market risks, including foreign currency, commodity price and interest rate risk associated with underlying assets, liabilities and anticipated transactions. Following periodic evaluation of these exposures, Gold Fields may enter into derivative financial instruments to manage some of these exposures. As part of its strategy, however, Gold Fields does not generally hedge against the risk of changes in the price of gold. See “—Commodity Price Sensitivity—Commodity Price Hedging Policy.”

Gold Fields has policies in areas such as counterparty exposure, hedging practices and prudential limits which have been approved by Gold Fields’ Board of Directors. Management of financial risk is centralized at Gold Fields’ treasury department, which acts as the interface between Gold Fields’ operations and counterparty banks. The treasury department manages financial risk in accordance with the policies and procedures established by the Gold Fields Board of Directors and Executive Committee. Gold Fields’ Audit Committee has approved dealing limits for money market, foreign exchange and commodity transactions, which Gold Fields’ treasury department is required to adhere to. Among other restrictions, these limits describe which instruments may be traded and demarcate open position limits for each category as well as indicating counterparty credit-related limits. The dealing exposure and limits are checked and controlled each day and reported to the Chief Financial Officer.

Foreign Currency Sensitivity

General

In the ordinary course of business, Gold Fields enters into transactions, such as gold and concentrate sales, denominated in foreign currencies, primarily U.S. dollars. In addition, Gold Fields has investments and indebtedness in various foreign currencies, primarily U.S. and Australian dollars. Although this exposes Gold Fields to transaction and translation exposure from fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates, Gold Fields does not generally hedge this exposure, although it may do so in specific circumstances, such as foreign currency commitments, financing projects or acquisitions. Also, Gold Fields on occasion undertakes currency hedging to take advantage of favorable short-term fluctuations in exchange rates when management believes exchange rates are at unsustainably high levels.

Foreign Currency Hedging Experience

Gold Fields uses various derivative instruments to protect its exposure to adverse movements in foreign currency exchange rates. The instruments that were outstanding as of June 30, 2009, are described below.

South African Rand Instruments

On May 18, 2007, Gold Fields utilized a portion of a $750 million split-tenor revolving credit facility entered into on May 16, 2007, or the Split-tenor Facility, to refinance prior borrowings. In connection with the borrowing, U.S. dollar/Rand forward cover was originally purchased during the third quarter of fiscal 2007 in an amount of $550.8 million. The cover has since been extended but was reduced to $490 million in line with a partial repayment of the Split-tenor Facility made on December 6, 2007, and was further reduced to $318 million in line with a repayment $172 million under the Split-tenor Facility on December 28, 2007. In line with the rollover of the corresponding loan, the forward cover of $318 million was extended on March 6, 2008 for two months at an average rate of Rand 7.9752 based on a spot rate of Rand 7.8052 and was then extended on a monthly basis through June 15, 2009, at average rates of between Rand 7.3817 and Rand 10.4625 based on spot rates of between Rand 7.3193 and Rand 10.3811.

On June 15, 2009, a further $44 million was repaid under the Split-tenor Facility, and forward cover of $274 million was extended as follows:

 

   

Extended on June 11, 2009 to July 15, 2009 at an average rate of Rand 8.0893, based on a spot rate of Rand 8.0419.

 

262


Table of Contents
   

Extended on July 13, 2009 to August 17, 2009 at an average rate of Rand 8.3839, based on a spot rate of Rand 8.3275.

 

   

Extended on August 13, 2009 to September 17, 2009 at an average rate of Rand 8.0387 based on a spot rate of Rand 7.9886.

On September 17, 2009, the forward cover of $274 million was settled as a result of the decision to repay the outstanding loan amount.

During fiscal 2009, forward cover was taken out to cover various commitments of Gold Fields Ghana and the South African operations. Of the contracts outstanding at the end of fiscal 2009, the most significant one was a contract for USD 9.0 million at a rate of Rand 8.4648 per $1.00 maturing on August 31, 2009.

In October 2008, GFIMSA entered into a number of forward exchange contracts to sell $150.0 million of expected gold revenue proceeds. The forward sale was concluded at an average forward rate of Rand 9.1910 per $1.00, with weekly deliveries of $15.0 million starting October 17, 2008, until December 19, 2008. The forward exchange contracts were extended at various times during the year at rates ranging from R9.6600 per $1.00 to R11.5695 per $1.00.

The contracts were settled during the last quarter of fiscal 2009 by partly delivering U.S. dollar proceeds into the contract and partly closing out the instruments. The total profit resulting from the settlement and close out of the $150.0 million gold forward sales was $6.7 million.

In October 2008, the Australian operations entered into a number of forward exchange contracts to sell $70.0 million of expected gold revenue proceeds. The forward sale was concluded at an average forward rate of A$0.7088 per $1.00, with fortnightly deliveries of $14.0 million starting October 22, 2008, until December 17, 2008. The forward exchange contracts were extended at various times during the year at rates ranging from $0.6278 per A$1.00 to $0.6732 per A$1.00. The contracts were settled during fiscal 2009 by partly delivering U.S. dollar proceeds into the contract and partly closing out the instruments.

The total net profit resulting from the settlement and close-out of the Australian operations forward sales was $1.4 million.

Realized gains and losses on financial instruments are disclosed in detail under “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Realized (loss)/gain on financial instruments.”

Foreign Currency Contract Position

As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ material foreign currency contract position was as follows:

 

     2009

$/R forward exchange contracts:

  

Volume ($ million)

   274.0

$ per R1.00

   0.1236

Foreign Currency Sensitivity Analysis

Gold Fields’ revenues and costs are very sensitive to the Rand/U.S. dollar exchange rate because revenues are generated using a gold price denominated in U.S. dollars, while costs of the South African operations are incurred principally in Rand. Depreciation of the Rand against the U.S. dollar reduces Gold Fields’ average costs when they are translated into U.S. dollars, thereby increasing the operating margin of the South African operations. Conversely, appreciation of the Rand results in South African operating costs increasing when translated into U.S. dollars, resulting in lower operating margins. The impact on profitability of changes in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar can be substantial.

 

263


Table of Contents

A sensitivity analysis of the mark-to-market valuations of Gold Fields’ material foreign currency contracts as of June 30, 2009 is set forth below.

South African Rand Instruments

 

     $/R (1) exchange rate as of June 30, 2009  

Sensitivity to $/R exchange rates

   -10.0   -7.5   -5.0   Spot (2)     +5.0   +7.5   +10.0

Mark-to-market forwards ($ million)

   27.4      20.5      13.7      (0.1   (13.7   (20.6   (27.4

 

Notes:

 

(1) “+” and “-” designate the strengthening and weakening of the Rand against the U.S. dollar.

 

(2) Spot rate: $0.1241 = R1.00.

 

     Weighted average Rand interest rate as of June 30, 2009  

Sensitivity to Rand interest rates

   (1.5 )%    (1.0 )%    (0.5 )%    Spot (1)     +0.5   +1.0   +1.5

Mark-to-market forwards ($ million)

   (0.3   (0.2   (0.1   (0.1   —        0.1      0.2   

 

Note:

 

(1) Spot Rand interest rate: 7.69%.

 

     Weighted average U.S. dollar interest rate as of June 30, 2009  

Sensitivity to U.S. dollar interest rates

   (1.5 )%    (1.0 )%    (0.5 )%    Spot (1)     +0.5   +1.0   +1.5

Mark-to-market forwards ($ million)

   0.2      0.1      —        (0.1   (0.1   (0.2   (0.3

 

Note:

 

(1) Spot U.S. dollar interest rate: 0.31%.

Commodity Price Sensitivity

General

Gold and copper

The market price of gold and to a lesser extent copper have a significant effect on the results of operations of Gold Fields, the ability of Gold Fields to pay dividends and undertake capital expenditures, and the market price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares. Gold and copper prices have historically fluctuated widely and are affected by numerous industry factors over which Gold Fields does not have any control. See “Risk Factors—Changes in the market price for gold, and to a lesser extent copper, which in the past have fluctuated widely, affect the profitability of Gold Fields’ operations and the cash flows generated by those operations” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Revenues.” The aggregate effect of these factors on the gold and copper prices, all of which are beyond the control of Gold Fields, is impossible for Gold Fields to predict.

Oil

The market price of oil has a significant effect on the results of the offshore operations of Gold Fields. The offshore operations consume large quantities of diesel in the running of their mining fleets. Oil prices have historically fluctuated widely and are affected by numerous factors over which Gold Fields does not have any control.

Commodity Price Hedging Policy

Gold and copper

Generally, Gold Fields does not enter into forward sales, derivatives or other hedging arrangements to establish a price in advance for future gold and copper production. On an exceptional basis, Gold Fields may consider gold and copper hedging arrangements in one or more of the following circumstances:

 

   

to protect cash flows at times of significant capital expenditure;

 

264


Table of Contents
   

for specific debt-servicing requirements; and

 

   

to safeguard the viability of higher cost operations.

See “Information on the Company—Strategy—Hedging.”

To the extent that it enters into commodity hedging arrangements, Gold Fields seeks to use different counterparty banks consisting of local and international banks to spread risk. None of the counterparties is affiliated with, or a related party of, Gold Fields.

Oil

Generally Gold Fields does not enter into derivatives or other hedging arrangements to establish a price in advance for future oil consumption. However, where oil prices are expected to increase in the short- to medium-term, Gold Fields may consider hedging the oil price in order to protect itself against the adverse cost effects of a material increase in the oil price.

Commodity Price Hedging Experience

Gold

As part of the acquisition of Western Areas, Gold Fields acquired Western Areas’ gold derivative structure, which consisted of put and call options as well as deferred premium. The Western Areas Limited gold derivative structure was closed out on January 24, 2007, by purchasing 1.005 million ounces of gold, which was the net delta of the structure, at a total cost of $527.8 million, net of maturities scheduled for the end of January 2007, for settlement on January 30, 2007.

Copper

During June 2009, Gold Fields La Cima sold forward 8,705 tons of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for fiscal 2010 for monthly deliveries. The contract runs from June 24, 2009 to June 23, 2010. The average forward price for the monthly deliveries is U.S.$5,001 per ton. An additional 8,705 tons of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for fiscal 2010 was hedged by means of a zero cost collar, guaranteeing a minimum price of U.S.$4,600 per ton with full participation up to a maximum price of U.S.$5,400 per ton.

Oil

From time to time, various subsidiaries of Gold Fields enter into call options to fix the price of specified quantities of diesel fuel. During fiscal 2009, the following options were entered into and, with the exception of the instruments outstanding at June 30, 2009, expired unexercised:

 

   

On June 25, 2008, after the Company closed its accounts for fiscal 2008, Gold Fields Ghana purchased a one-year Asian style ICE Gasoil call option in respect of 30 million liters of diesel for the period July 1, 2008 to June 30, 2009 at a strike price of $1.09 per liter. The call option resulted in a premium of $2.5 million paid upfront. At the end of fiscal 2009, 2.5 million liters remained outstanding.

 

   

On June 27, 2008, Gold Fields Ghana purchased a further one-year Asian style ICE Gasoil call option in respect of 30 million liters of diesel for the period July 1, 2008 to June 30, 2009 at a strike price of $1.11 per liter. The call option resulted in a premium of $3.3 million paid upfront. At the end of fiscal 2009, 2.5 million liters remained outstanding.

 

   

On July 21, 2008, Gold Fields Australia (Pty) Ltd purchased a one-year Asian Style Singapore 0.5% Gasoil call option in respect of 30 million liters of diesel for the period August 1, 2008 to July 31, 2009 at a strike price of $1.095 per liter. The call option resulted in a premium of $2.85 million paid upfront. At the end of fiscal 2009, 5.0 million liters remained outstanding.

 

265


Table of Contents
   

On August 21, 2008, Gold Fields Ghana purchased a further two-month Asian style ICE Gasoil call option in respect of 10 million liters of diesel for the period July 1, 2009 to August 31, 2009 at a strike price of $0.98 per liter. The call option resulted in a premium of $1.0 million paid upfront. At the end of fiscal 2009, 10.0 million liters remained outstanding.

 

   

On September 18, 2008, Gold Fields Ghana purchased a further six-month Asian style ICE Gasoil call option in respect of 36 million liters of diesel for the period September 1, 2009 to February 28, 2010 at a strike price of $0.90 per liter. The call option resulted in a premium of $3.6 million paid upfront. At the end of fiscal 2009, 36.0 million liters remained outstanding.

 

   

On September 18, 2008, Gold Fields Australia (Pty) Ltd purchased a further six-month Asian Style Singapore 0.5% Gasoil call option in respect of 17.5 million liters of diesel for the period August 1, 2009 to February 28, 2010 at a strike price of $0.91 per liter. The call option resulted in a premium of $1.6 million paid upfront. At the end of fiscal 2009, 17.5 million liters remained outstanding.

Commodity Price Contract Position

Copper

As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ copper contract position was as follows:

 

Copper forward sale contracts:

  

Volume (tons)

   8,705.0

$ per ton

   5,001.0

Zero cost collar contracts:

  

Volume (tons)

   8,705.0

$ per ton

   4,600.0 – 5,400.0

Oil

As of the end of fiscal 2009, Gold Fields had outstanding commodity price hedging contracts, totaling 51 million outstanding liters for Gold Fields Ghana and 22.5 million liters for Gold Fields Australia (Pty) Ltd, with a final expiry at the end February 2010 for both sets of contracts.

Commodity Price Sensitivity Analysis

A sensitivity analysis of the mark-to-market valuations of Gold Fields’ significant commodity contracts as of June 30, 2009 is set forth below.

Copper instruments

 

     Copper spot price (1) as of June 30, 2009  

Sensitivity to copper spot price

   -15.0   -10.0   -5.0   Spot (2)     +5.0   +10.0   +15.0

Mark-to-market forwards ($ million)

   6.0      3.8      1.7      (0.5   (2.7   (4.9   (7.1

Mark-to-market zero cost collar ($ million)

   4.0      2.3      0.6      (1.2   (2.8   (4.5   (6.3

 

Notes:

 

(1) Spot price $5,040.

 

(2) “+” and “-” designate the strengthening and weakening of the copper price against spot.

 

266


Table of Contents
     $/R (2) exchange rate as of June 30, 2009  

Sensitivity to R/$ exchange rate

   -10.0   -7.5   -5.0   Spot (1)     +5.0   +7.5   +10.0

Mark-to-market forwards ($ million)

   (0.5   (0.5   (0.5   (0.5   (0.6   (0.6   (0.6

Mark-to-market zero cost collar ($ million)

   (1.0   (1.0   (1.1   (1.2   (1.2   (1.2   (1.2

 

Notes:

 

(1) “+” and “-” designate the strengthening and weakening of the copper price against spot.

 

(2) Spot rate: $0.1241 = R1.00.

 

     Weighted average U.S. dollar interest rate (2) as of June 30, 2009  

Sensitivity to U.S. dollar interest rates

   -1.5   -1.0   -0.5   Spot (1)     +0.5   +1.0   +1.5

Mark-to-market forwards ($ million)

   (0.5   (0.5   (0.5   (0.5   (0.5   (0.5   (0.5

Mark-to-market zero cost collar ($ million)

   (0.9   (0.9   (1.0   (1.2   (1.2   (1.2   (1.3

 

Notes:

 

(1) “+” and “-” designate the strengthening and weakening of the copper price against spot.

 

(2) Spot rate: $0.1241 = R1.00.

 

     Copper volatility (1) as of June 30, 2009  

Sensitivity to copper volatility

   -1.5   -1.0   -0.5   Spot (2)     +0.5   +1.0   +1.5

Mark-to-market zero cost collar ($ million)

   (1.0   (1.0   (1.0   (1.2   (1.1   (1.1   (1.2

 

Notes:

 

(1) Spot copper volatility 44.7%.

 

(2) “+” and “-” designate the strengthening and weakening of the copper price against spot.

Interest Rate Sensitivity

General

As of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ indebtedness amounted to $1,103.7 million. Gold Fields generally does not undertake any specific action to cover its exposure to interest rate risk, although it may do so in specific circumstances. For a discussion of Gold Fields’ credit facilities and other borrowings outstanding as of June 30, 2009, including the interest rates applicable to them, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

Interest Rate Sensitivity Analysis

All of Gold Fields interest bearing debt outstanding as of June 30, 2009 was exposed to interest rate fluctuations. This debt is normally rolled for periods between one and three months and is therefore exposed to the rate changes in this period.

$740.5 million of the total debt was exposed to changes in LIBOR while $363.2 million was exposed to the Prime Rate and JIBAR. The following table indicates the change to finance expense had LIBOR and the Prime Rate differed as indicated.

 

     Change in finance expense for LIBOR, Prime Rate and JIBAR changes
as of June 30, 2009
 

Sensitivity to interest rates

   (1.5 )%    (1.0 )%    (0.5 )%    +0.5    +1.0    +1.5

Sensitivity to LIBOR interest rate ($ million)

   (8.4   (5.6   (2.8   2.8       5.6       8.4   

Sensitivity to Prime and JIBAR ($ million)

   (3.8   (2.6   (1.3   1.3       2.6       3.8   
                                      

Change in finance expense ($ million)

   (12.2   (8.2   (4.1   4.1       8.2       12.2   
                                      

 

267


Table of Contents

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

Not applicable.

 

268


Table of Contents

PART II

ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

Not applicable.

 

269


Table of Contents

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

Not applicable.

 

270


Table of Contents

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

 

(a) Disclosure Controls and Procedures:

 

     Gold Fields has carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of Gold Fields, of the effectiveness of the design and operation of Gold Fields’ disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(e)) as of the end of the period covered by this annual report. Based upon that evaluation, Gold Fields’ Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that, as of June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ disclosure controls and procedures were effective.

 

(b) Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting:

 

     Gold Fields’ management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 defines internal control over financial reporting in Rule 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) as a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers and effected by the company’s board of directors, management and other personnel, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and includes those policies and procedures that:

 

   

pertain to the maintenance of records that in reasonable detail accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company;

 

   

provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and

 

   

provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements.

 

     Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

     Gold Fields’ management assessed the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2009. In making this assessment, Gold Fields’ management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, or COSO, in Internal Control-Integrated Framework. Based upon its assessment, Gold Fields’ management concluded that, as of June 30, 2009, its internal control over financial reporting is effective based upon those criteria.

 

     PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc., an independent registered public accounting firm that audited the consolidated financial statements included in this annual report on Form 20-F, has issued an attestation report on the effectiveness of Gold Fields’ internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2009.

 

(c) Attestation Report of the Registered Public Accounting Firm:

 

     See report of PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc., an Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm, on page F-1.

 

(d) Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting:

 

     There has been no change in Gold Fields’ internal control over financial reporting that occurred during fiscal 2009 that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, Gold Fields’ internal control over financial reporting.

 

271


Table of Contents

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The Board of Directors has determined that Gold Fields’ Audit Committee does not have an “audit committee financial expert,” as defined in the rules promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission. Although a person with such qualifications does not serve on the Audit Committee, the Board of Directors believes that the members of the Audit Committee collectively possess the knowledge and experience to oversee and assess the performance of Gold Fields’ management and auditors, the quality of Gold Fields’ disclosure controls, the preparation and evaluation of Gold Fields’ financial statements and Gold Fields’ financial reporting. Gold Fields’ Board of Directors also believes that the members of the Audit Committee collectively possess the understanding of audit committee functions necessary to diligently execute their responsibilities. For biographical information on each member of the Audit Committee, see “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Non-executive Directors.”

 

272


Table of Contents

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

Gold Fields has adopted a Company Code of Ethics, or the Code, which applies to all directors and employees, the text of which can be accessed on Gold Fields’ website at www.goldfields.co.za. The Code was revised in fiscal 2007 and the revisions were implemented in September 2007. The revised Code updates the disclosure requirements and allocates responsibility for managing the Code to different levels of management.

 

273


Table of Contents

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc., or PwC, has served as Gold Fields’ principal accountant for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2008 and 2009. Set forth below are the fees for audit and other services rendered by PwC for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2008 and 2009.

 

     Year ended
June 30,
2008
   Year ended
June 30,
2009
     (R millions)

Audit fees

   22.9    25.7

Audit-related fees

   —      —  

Tax fees

   0.3    1.9

All other fees

   0.7    2.4
         

Total

   23.9    30.0
         

Audit fees include fees billed for audit services rendered for Gold Fields’ annual consolidated financial statements filed with regulatory organizations.

Tax fees include fees billed for tax compliance, tax advice, tax planning and other tax-related services.

All other fees consist of fees for all other services not included in any of the other categories noted above.

All of the above fees were pre-approved by the Audit Committee.

Audit Committee’s Policies and Procedures

In accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission rules regarding auditor independence, the Audit Committee has established Policies and Procedures for Audit and Non-Audit Services Provided by an Independent Auditor. The rules apply to Gold Fields and its consolidated subsidiaries engaging any accounting firms for audit services and the auditor who audits the accounts filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the external auditor, for permissible non-audit services.

When engaging the external auditor for permissible non-audit services (audit-related services, tax services, and all other services), pre-approval is obtained prior to the commencement of the services.

 

274


Table of Contents

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable.

 

275


Table of Contents

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER

AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

None.

 

276


Table of Contents

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

Not applicable.

 

277


Table of Contents

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Gold Fields’ home country corporate governance practices are regulated by the Listings Requirements of JSE Limited, or the JSE Listing Requirements. The following is a summary of the significant ways in which Gold Fields’ home country corporate governance standards and its corporate governance practices differ from those followed by domestic companies under the listing standards of The New York Stock Exchange, or the NYSE Listing Standards.

 

   

The NYSE Listing Standards require that the non-management directors of U.S. listed companies meet at regularly scheduled executive sessions without management. The JSE Listing Requirements do not require such meetings of listed company non-executive directors. Gold Fields’ non-management directors do meet regularly without management.

 

   

The NYSE Listing Standards require U.S. listed companies to have a nominating/corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors. The JSE Listing Requirements also require the appointment of such a committee, and stipulate that all members of this committee must be non-executive directors, the majority of whom must be independent. Gold Fields has a Nominating and Governance Committee which is currently comprised of five non-executive directors, all of whom are independent under the NYSE Listing Standards and which is chaired by the Chairman of Gold Fields, as required by the JSE Listing Requirements.

 

   

The NYSE Listing Standards require U.S. listed companies to have a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors. The JSE Listing Requirements merely require the appointment of such a committee. Gold Fields has appointed a Compensation Committee, currently comprised of five board members, all of whom are independent under both the JSE Listing Requirements and the NYSE Listing Standards.

 

   

The NYSE Listing Standards require U.S. listed companies to have an audit committee composed entirely of independent directors. The JSE Listing Requirements merely require the appointment of such a committee. Gold Fields has appointed an Audit Committee, currently comprised of five board members, all of whom are non-executive and independent, as defined under both the JSE Listing Requirements and the NYSE Listing Standards.

 

278


Table of Contents

PART III

ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Gold Fields has responded to Item 18 in lieu of responding to this item.

 

279


Table of Contents

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The following financial statements of Gold Fields Limited are filed as part of this annual report.

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

       Page

Gold Fields Limited

  

Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   F-1

Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Years Ended June 30, 2009, 2008 and 2007

   F-2

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of June 30, 2009 and 2008

   F-3

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity for the Years Ended June  30, 2009, 2008 and 2007

  

F-4

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the Years Ended June 30, 2009, 2008 and 2007

   F-6

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended June 30, 2009, 2008 and 2007

   F-7

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

   F-8

Schedules to Gold Fields Limited’s Financial Statements

  

Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   S-1

Schedule 1—Valuation and Qualifying Accounts

   S-2

 

280


Table of Contents

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

The following instruments and documents are included as Exhibits to this annual report.

 

No.

  

Exhibit

1.1    Memorandum of Association of Gold Fields (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.1 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
1.2    Articles of Association of Gold Fields (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.2 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
1.3    Amended Articles of Association of Gold Fields (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.3 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 7, 2007)
2.1    Memorandum of Association of Gold Fields (included in Exhibit 1.1)
2.2    Articles of Association of Gold Fields (included in Exhibit 1.2)
2.3    Deposit Agreement among Gold Fields, Gold Fields Limited (f/k/a/Driefontein Consolidated Limited), The Bank of New York, as depositary, and the owners and beneficial owners from time to time of American Depositary Receipts, dated as of February 2, 1998, as amended and restated as of May 21, 2002 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.3 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on October 24, 2002)
2.4    Form of American Depositary Receipt (included in Exhibit 2.3)
2.5    Excerpts of relevant provisions of the South African Companies Act (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.5 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
2.6    Excerpts of relevant provisions of JSE Limited listing requirements (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.6 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
2.7    Amended Articles of Association of Gold Fields (included in Exhibit 1.3)
4.1    The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan, adopted October 31, 2001 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
4.2    The GF Management Incentive Scheme, adopted November 10, 1999 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
4.3    Deed of Amendment to the GF Non-Executive Share Plan, adopted December 6, 2002 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 26, 2004)
4.4    Deed of Amendment to the GF Management Incentive Scheme between Gold Fields Limited and Tokyo Mosima Gabriel Sexwale and Gordon Rae Parker, both in their capacity as trustees for The GF Management Incentive Trust, adopted May 4, 2001 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 26, 2004)

 

281


Table of Contents

No.

  

Exhibit

4.5    Deed of Amendment to the GF Management Incentive Scheme between Gold Fields Limited and Tokyo Mosima Gabriel Sexwale and Gordon Rae Parker, both in their capacity as trustees for The GF Management Incentive Trust, adopted October 31, 2001 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.5 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 26, 2004)
4.6    The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan, adopted November 17, 2005 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.24 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 22, 2005)
4.7    The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, adopted November 17, 2005 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.25 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 22, 2005)
4.8    U.S.$150,000,000 Facility Agreement between Gold Fields La Cima S.A., The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Citigroup Global Markets Inc., The Bank of Nova Scotia, The Bank of Nova Scotia Trust Company of New York, Scotiabank Peru S.A.A. and Financial Institutions (as defined in the Facility Agreement), dated November 14, 2006 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.32 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 24, 2006)
4.9    U.S.$750,000,000 Facility Agreement between GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, Western Areas Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Barclays Capital and Barclays Bank plc, dated May 16, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.37 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 7, 2007)
4.10    Rand 500,000,000 Facility Agreement between Absa Capital (a division of Absa Bank Limited) and GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, dated August 21, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.38 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 7, 2007)
4.11    Preference Share Subscription Agreement entered into between Firstrand Bank Limited (acting through its Rand Merchant Bank division) and Gold Fields Limited, dated December 24, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.36 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)
4.12    Rand 1,000,000,000 Facility Agreement between Absa Bank Limited (acting through its Absa Capital division), GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, GFL Mining Services Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Gold Fields Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Limited, dated January 31, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.37 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)
4.13    Memorandum of Agreement between Gold Fields Limited, GFL Mining Services Limited, Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited and Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited, dated March 17, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.38 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)
4.14    Agreement between Gold Fields Limited, Mvelaphanda Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited, FirstRand Bank Limited (as agent for Micawber 325 (Proprietary) Limited), Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, GFL Mining Services Limited, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Newshelf 849 (Proprietary) Limited, Atripalm Resources (Proprietary) Limited, Public Investment Corporation Limited and FirstRand Bank Limited (acting through its Rand Merchant Bank and FNB Corporate Divisions) dated March 27, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.39 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)

 

282


Table of Contents

No.

  

Exhibit

4.15    Placement Agreement between Sino Gold Mining Limited and Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Ltd., dated May 19, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.40 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)
4.16    Rand 500,000,000 Facility Agreement between Absa Capital (a division of Absa Bank Limited) and GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, dated September 22, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.41 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)
4.17    Rand 500,000,000 Facility Agreement between Absa Bank Limited (acting through its Absa Capital division), GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited and Gold Fields Limited, dated October 21, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.42 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)
4.18    Agreement between Terence P. Goodlace and GFL Mining Services Limited, dated March 19, 2007 and effective April 1, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.43 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 17, 2008)
4.19    Agency Agreement in respect of the Domestic Medium Term Note Programme, between Gold Fields Limited and Absa Capital, dated April 6, 2009, including Annexures
4.20    Gold Fields Limited Programme Memorandum in respect of the Domestic Medium Term Note Programme, dated April 6, 2009
4.21    Gold Fields Limited Operating and Procedures Memorandum in respect of the Domestic Medium Term Note Programme, dated April 6, 2009
4.22    Programme Agreement in respect of the Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme, between Gold Fields Limited, Absa Capital and Nedbank Capital, dated April 6, 2009
4.23    Rand 1,500,000,000 Revolving Credit Facility Agreement between Nedbank Limited, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Field Operations Limited and the Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated May 6, 2009
4.24    U.S.$311 million Credit Facility Agreement between GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Bank of China Limited, Bank of Montreal Ireland plc, Barclays Capital, Citibank, N.A., London Branch, Commonwealth Bank of Australia, J.P. Morgan plc, Scotiabank Europe plc and Standard Chartered Bank and Barclays Bank Plc, dated May 7, 2009
4.25    Syndication Fee Letter between Gold Fields Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Bank of China Limited, Bank of Montreal Ireland plc, Barclays Capital, Citibank, N.A., London Branch, Commonwealth Bank of Australia, J.P. Morgan plc, Scotiabank Europe plc and Standard Chartered Bank in respect of the Facility Agreement at 4.24 above, dated May 7, 2009
4.26    Participation Fee Letter between Gold Fields Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Bank of China Limited, Bank of Montreal Ireland plc, Barclays Capital, Citibank, N.A., London Branch, Commonwealth Bank of Australia, J.P. Morgan plc, Scotiabank Europe plc and Standard Chartered Bank in respect of the Facility Agreement at 4.24 above, dated May 7, 2009
4.27    Share Purchase and Sale Agreement between Eldorado Gold Corporation and Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited, dated June 3, 2009
4.28    Amending Agreement between Eldorado Gold Corporation and Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited, dated July 10, 2009, in relation to a Share Purchase and Sale Agreement between Eldorado Gold Corporation and Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited, dated June 3, 2009

 

283


Table of Contents

No.

  

Exhibit

  4.29    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, dated March 6, 2009 and effective March 1, 2009
  4.30    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited, dated March 9, 2009 and effective March 1, 2009
  4.31    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Orogen Holding Company (BVI), dated March 6, 2009 and effective March 1, 2009
  4.32    Term sheet related to the Block Trade of common shares of Eldorado Gold Corporation by Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited to National Bank Financial, Inc., dated September 3, 2009
  4.33    Agreement between Paul A. Schmidt and Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, dated November 24, 2009 and effective November 6, 2009
  4.34    Agreement between Paul A. Schmidt and Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited, dated November 24, 2009 and effective November 6, 2009
  4.35    Agreement between Paul A. Schmidt and Gold Fields Orogen Holding Company (BVI), dated November 24, 2009 and effective November 6, 2009
  8.1    Amended list of subsidiaries of the registrant
12.1    Certification of Chief Executive Officer
12.2    Certification of Chief Financial Officer
13.1    Certification of Chief Executive Officer
13.2    Certification of Chief Financial Officer
99.1    Circular regarding the Recommended Cash Offer by Gold Fields Metal BV for Glencar Mining plc dated August 7, 2009
101.INS    XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document
101.CAL    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document
101.LAB    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document
101.PRE    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document
101.DEF   

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document

 

284


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

G OLD F IELDS L IMITED

/s/ Nicholas J. Holland

Name:   Nicholas J. Holland
Title:   Chief Executive Officer

Date: December 3, 2009

 

285


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Gold Fields Limited

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in shareholders’ equity, comprehensive income and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Gold Fields Limited and its subsidiaries at June 30, 2009 and June 30, 2008, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2009 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2009, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc

Johannesburg, Republic of South Africa

December 3, 2009

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Operations

For the years ended June 30,

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

    2009     2008     2007  
    $’m     $’m     $’m  

REVENUES

     

Product sales

  3,228.3      3,206.2      2,735.2   
                 

COSTS AND EXPENSES

     

Production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization)

  1,998.6      1,996.1      1,707.7   

Depreciation and amortization

  433.5      400.5      388.2   

Corporate expenditure

  35.5      41.0      38.4   

Employee termination costs

  21.0      16.2      4.9   

Exploration expenditure

  58.0      39.8      47.4   

Impairment of assets

  —        11.4      —     

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment

  (0.5   (4.6   (7.4

Shaft closure costs

  (0.2   3.3      —     

Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement health care costs

  3.4      (0.7   1.3   

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

  13.9      12.0      6.4   

Share-based compensation

  33.7      20.7      12.5   
                 
  2,596.9      2,535.7      2,199.4   
                 

OTHER (EXPENSES)/INCOME

     

Interest and dividends

  24.9      31.2      26.8   

Finance expense

  (73.9   (100.4   (95.2

Unrealized gain on financial instruments

  —        —        15.4   

Realized (loss)/gain on financial instruments

  (1.3   19.8      (10.7

Gain/(loss) on foreign exchange

  10.2      1.7      (15.1

(Loss)/profit on disposal of listed investments

  (16.1   3.7      26.8   

Impairment of listed investments

  (16.0   —        —     

(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries

  (0.3   208.4      —     

Other (expenses)/income

  (7.7   5.9      (2.2
                 
  (80.2   170.3      (54.2
                 

INCOME BEFORE TAX, IMPAIRMENT OF INVESTMENT IN EQUITY INVESTEE, SHARE OF EQUITY INVESTEES’ (LOSSES)/INCOME AND MINORITY INTERESTS

  551.2      840.8      481.6   

Income and mining tax expense

  (264.6   (271.2   (209.3
                 

INCOME BEFORE IMPAIRMENT OF INVESTMENT IN EQUITY INVESTEE, SHARE OF EQUITY INVESTEES’ (LOSSES)/INCOME AND MINORITY INTERESTS

  286.6      569.6      272.3   

Impairment of investment in equity investee

  (87.4   (61.3   —     

Share of equity investees’ (losses)/income

  (3.5   (16.0   0.3   

Minority interests

  (34.8   (39.8   (26.5
                 

NET INCOME

  160.9      452.5      246.1   
                 

BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE ($)

  0.24      0.69      0.44   

DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE ($)

  0.24      0.69      0.44   

WEIGHTED AVERAGE NUMBER OF SHARES USED IN THE

     

—COMPUTATION OF BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE

  670,328,262      652,538,212      558,259,686   

—COMPUTATION OF DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE

  677,790,732      656,252,205      562,207,148   

DIVIDEND PER SHARE ($)

  0.17      0.22      0.28   

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Balance Sheets

At June 30,

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

     2009     2008  
     $’m     $’m  

ASSETS

    

CURRENT ASSETS

    

Cash and cash equivalents

   357.5      253.7   

Financial instruments

   —        6.9   

Receivables

   383.5      280.1   

Inventories

   196.0      152.8   

Materials contained on heap leach pads

   81.3      74.5   
            

Total current assets

   1,018.3      768.0   
            

Property, plant and equipment, net

   5,756.9      5,423.7   

Goodwill

   1,084.7      1,092.8   

Non-current investments

   475.2      737.4   
            

TOTAL ASSETS

   8,335.1      8,021.9   
            

LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

    

Accounts payable and provisions

   533.5      610.3   

Financial instruments

   1.7      —     

Interest payable

   14.4      29.2   

Income and mining taxes payable

   98.2      123.1   

Bank overdraft

   9.7      2.7   

Short-term loans and current portion of long-term loans

   317.8      772.9   
            

Total current liabilities

   975.3      1,538.2   

Long-term loans

   785.9      564.2   

Deferred income and mining taxes

   817.7      719.9   

Provision for environmental rehabilitation

   236.9      216.2   

Other non-current liabilities

   3.9      —     

Provision for post-retirement health care costs

   11.4      7.9   
            

Total liabilities

   2,831.1      3,046.4   
            

COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES—see notes 20 and 21

    

Minority interests

   279.5      151.4   

SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

    

Share capital—1,000,000,000 (2008: 1,000,000,000) authorized ordinary shares of 50 South African cents each. Shares issued 704,749,849 (2008: 653,200,682)

   57.7      54.9   

Additional paid-in capital

   4,944.2      4,490.4   

Retained earnings

   561.5      521.8   

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

   (338.9   (243.0
            

Total shareholders’ equity

   5,224.5      4,824.1   
            

TOTAL LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

   8,335.1      8,021.9   
            

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity

For the years ended June 30,

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

    Number of
ordinary
shares issued
  Share
capital
  Additional
paid-in capital
    Retained
earnings
    Accumulated
other
comprehensive
(loss)/income
    Total  

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2006

  494,824,723   43.9   1,827.6      123.9      (71.0   1,924.4   

Net income

  —     —     —        246.1      —        246.1   

Dividends declared

  —     —     —        (158.2   —        (158.2

Share-based compensation

  —     —     12.5      —        —        12.5   

Shares issued in connection with capital raising

  90,850,000   6.3   1,421.1      —        —        1,427.4   

Shares issued in connection with the acquisition of subsidiaries

  65,098,754   4.5   1,213.3      —        —        1,217.8   

Transaction costs relating to issue of shares

  —     —     (25.4   —        —        (25.4

Exercise of employee share options

  1,384,589   0.1   10.7      —        —        10.8   

Mark-to-market of listed investments

  —     —     —        —        65.8      65.8   

Realized gain on disposal of listed investments

  —     —     —        —        (23.5   (23.5

Foreign exchange translation

  —     —     —        —        93.5      93.5   
                               

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2007

  652,158,066   54.8   4,459.8      211.8      64.8      4,791.2   

Net income

  —     —     —        452.5      —        452.5   

Dividends declared

  —     —     —        (142.5   —        (142.5

Share-based compensation

  —     —     20.7      —        —        20.7   

Exercise of employee share options

  1,042,616   0.1   9.9      —        —        10.0   

Share of equity investee’s other comprehensive income movements

  —     —     —        —        9.6      9.6   

Mark-to-market of listed investments

  —     —     —        —        43.1      43.1   

Realized loss on disposal of listed investments

  —     —     —        —        0.9      0.9   

Foreign exchange translation

  —     —     —        —        (361.4   (361.4
                               

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2008

  653,200,682   54.9   4,490.4      521.8      (243.0   4,824.1   

Net income

  —     —     —        160.9      —        160.9   

Dividends declared

  —     —     —        (121.2   —        (121.2

Share-based compensation

  —     —     33.7      —        —        33.7   

Shares issued on conversion of debt instrument to equity: Mvela

  50,000,000   2.7   412.2          414.9   

Exercise of employee share options

  1,549,167   0.1   7.9      —        —        7.9   

Share of equity investee’s other comprehensive income movements

  —     —     —        —        (0.3   (0.3

Loss arising on dilution of shareholding in equity investee

          (24.5   (24.5

Mark-to-market of listed investments

  —     —     —        —        (122.4   (122.4

Impairment of listed investments

          16.0      16.0   

Realized loss on disposal of listed investments

  —     —     —        —        16.1      16.1   

Foreign exchange translation

  —     —     —        —        19.2      19.2   
                               

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2009

  704,749,849   57.7   4,944.2      561.5      (338.9   5,224.5   
                               

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity (Continued)

For the years ended June 30,

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

The following is a reconciliation of the components of accumulated other comprehensive (loss)/ income for the periods presented

 

     Share of equity
investee’s other
comprehensive
income

$’m
    Mark-to-market
of listed
investments

$’m
    Foreign
exchange
translation
$’m
    Accumulated
other
comprehensive
(loss)/income
$’m
 

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2006

   —        70.6      (141.6   (71.0

Mark-to-market of listed investments

   —        65.8      —        65.8   

Realized gain on disposal of listed investments

   —        (23.5   —        (23.5

Foreign exchange translation

   —        —        93.5      93.5   
                        

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2007

   —        112.9      (48.1   64.8   

Share of equity investee’s other comprehensive income movements

   9.6      —        —        9.6   

Mark-to-market of listed investments

   —        43.1      —        43.1   

Realized loss on disposal of listed investments

   —        0.9      —        0.9   

Foreign exchange translation

   —        —        (361.4   (361.4
                        

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2008

   9.6      156.9      (409.5   (243.0

Share of equity investee’s other comprehensive income movements

   (0.3   —        —        (0.3

Loss arising on dilution of shareholding in equity investee

   (24.5       (24.5

Mark-to-market of listed investments

   —        (122.4   —        (122.4

Realized loss on disposal of listed investments

     16.1        16.1   

Impairment of listed investments

   —        16.0      —        16.0   

Foreign exchange translation

   —        —        19.2      19.2   
                        

BALANCE—JUNE 30, 2009

   (15.2   66.6      (390.3   (338.9
                        

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

For the years ended June 30,

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

     2009     2008     2007  
     $’m     $’m     $’m  

Net income

   160.9      452.5      246.1   

Other comprehensive (loss)/income

      

Share of equity investee’s other comprehensive income movements

   (0.3   9.6      —     

Loss arising on dilution of shareholding in equity investee

   (24.5    

Mark-to-market adjustment of listed investments

   (122.4   43.1      65.8   

Realized loss/(gain) on disposal of listed investments

   16.1      0.9      (23.5

Impairment of listed investments

   16.0       

Foreign currency translation adjustment

   19.2      (361.4   93.5   
                  

Other comprehensive (loss)/income

   (95.9   (307.8   135.8   
                  

Comprehensive income

   65.0      144.7      381.9   
                  

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

For the years ended June 30,

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

     2009     2008     2007  
     $’m     $’m     $’m  

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATIONS

      

Net income

   160.9      452.5      246.1   

Reconciled to net cash provided by operations:

      

—Minority interests

   34.8      39.8      26.5   

—Share of equity investees’ losses/(income)

   3.5      16.0      (0.3

—Impairment of investment in equity investee

   87.4      61.3      —     

—Income and mining tax expense

   264.6      271.2      209.3   

—Impairment of assets

   —        11.4      —     

—Loss/(profit) on disposal of listed investments

   16.1      (3.7   (26.8

—Impairment of listed investments

   16.0      —        —     

—Loss/(profit) on disposal of subsidiaries

   0.3      (208.4   —     

—Shaft closure costs

   (0.2   3.3      —     

—Depreciation and amortization

   433.5      400.5      388.2   

—Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment

   (0.5   (4.6   (7.4

—Share-based compensation

   33.7      20.7      12.5   

—Unrealized gain on financial instruments

   —        —        (15.4

—Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

   13.9      12.0      6.4   

—Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement health care costs

   3.4      (0.7   1.3   

—Payment against post-retirement health care provision

   (0.2   (0.4   (0.3

—Settlement of Western Areas derivative structure

   —        —        (534.6

—Finance expense capitalized

   (63.6   (42.1   (16.7

—Other

   (50.5   (34.3   13.9   

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

      

—Receivables

   (104.9   (24.0   176.8   

—Inventories and heap leach pads

   (60.3   (34.0   (31.1

—Accounts payable and provisions

   44.9      106.0      (143.9

—Income and mining taxes paid

   (197.9   (143.5   (99.3
                  

NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATIONS

   634.9      899.0      205.2   
                  

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

      

Additions to property, plant and equipment

   (760.3   (1,154.4   (797.0

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

   3.6      5.8      8.8   

Purchase of listed investments

   (12.8   (134.5   (68.1

Proceeds on sale of listed investments

   54.3      13.7      45.3   

Proceeds on disposal of subsidiary

   5.0      310.9      —     

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired

   —        —        (1,240.9

Investment in environmental trust fund

   (10.4   (11.6   (14.6
                  

NET CASH UTILIZED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES

   (720.6   (970.1   (2,066.5
                  

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

      

Long and short-term loans raised

   1,312.3      603.4      2,637.5   

Long and short-term loans repaid

   (993.5   (586.5   (1,950.5

Utilization/(repayment) of bank overdraft

   7.0      (0.6   3.3   

Decrease in minority funding

   —        —        (11.5

Dividends paid to Company shareholders

   (121.2   (142.5   (158.2

Dividends paid to minority shareholders

   —        —        (1.5

Proceeds from rights issue—Cerro Corona

   —        96.0      —     

Ordinary shares issued

   10.7      10.0      1,412.8   
                  

NET CASH PROVIDED BY/(UTILIZED IN) FINANCING ACTIVITIES

   215.3      (20.2   1,931.9   
                  

EFFECT OF EXCHANGE RATE ON CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

   (25.8   18.6      38.1   
                  

NET INCREASE/(DECREASE) IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

   103.8      (72.7   108.7   
                  

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS—JULY 1,

   253.7      326.4      217.7   
                  

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS—JUNE 30,

   357.5      253.7      326.4   

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-7


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

1 GENERAL

Gold Fields Limited (formerly Driefontein Consolidated Limited (“Driefontein”), the “Company” or the “Group”) was originally incorporated in South Africa and listed on the JSE Securities Exchange S.A. (“JSE”) during 1968 as East Driefontein Gold Mining Company Limited. Following a merger with West Driefontein Gold Mining Company Limited, it was renamed Driefontein on June 15, 1981. On May 10, 1999, Driefontein completed a business combination, with another South African company listed on the JSE, Gold Fields Limited (“Old Gold Fields”). Old Gold Fields evolved through a series of transactions in 1998, whereby it acquired substantially all of the gold mining assets and interests previously held by Gold Fields of South Africa Limited, Gencor Limited, New Wits Limited and certain other shareholders in the companies owning the assets and interests. These assets and interests included publicly traded gold mining companies, mineral rights and service agreements. Driefontein, the surviving entity, was renamed Gold Fields Limited, and Old Gold Fields was renamed GFL Mining Services Limited, effective from that date. The Group is engaged in gold mining and related activities, including exploration, extraction, processing and smelting. Gold bullion, the Group’s principal product, is currently produced in South Africa, Ghana and Australia and sold in South Africa and internationally. The Group also produces copper/gold concentrate in Peru, which is sold internationally.

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

  (a) USE OF ESTIMATES: The preparation of the consolidated financial statements in conformity with United States generally accepted accounting principles (“US GAAP”) requires the Group’s management to make estimates and assumptions about current and future events that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Future events and their effects cannot be determined with absolute certainty. Therefore, the determination of estimates requires the exercise of judgment based on various assumptions and other factors such as historical experience, current and expected economic conditions, and in some cases actuarial techniques. Actual results ultimately may differ from those estimates.

The more significant areas requiring the use of management estimates and assumptions relate to mineral reserves that are the basis of future cash flow estimates and unit-of-production depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations; environmental, reclamation and closure obligations; estimates of recoverable gold and other materials in heap leach pads; asset impairments (including impairments of goodwill, long-lived assets, and investments); write-downs of inventory to net realizable value; post employment, post retirement and other employee benefit liabilities (including valuation of share-based compensation); valuation allowances for deferred tax assets; reserves for contingencies and litigation; and the fair value and accounting treatment of financial instruments.

The following are accounting policies used by the Group which have been consistently applied for all periods presented:

 

  (b)

CONSOLIDATION: The Group’s financial statements include the financial statements of the Group, and its subsidiaries, and its investments in associates. A company in which the Group has, directly or indirectly, through subsidiary undertakings, a controlling interest is classified as a subsidiary undertaking. In addition, the Company reviews its relationships with other entities to assess if the Company is the primary beneficiary of a variable interest entity. If the determination is made that the Company is the primary beneficiary, then that entity is consolidated from the date that the Company was deemed to have become the primary beneficiary. The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of are included in the Group statements from the effective dates of acquisition or excluded from such

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

 

statements as from the effective dates of disposal. Investments in companies which the Company does not control, but where it has the ability to exercise significant influence over their operating and financial policies, are accounted for by the equity method.

Inter-company transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation. Gains or losses that arise from a change in the Group’s interest in subsidiaries or equity method investees’ are recognized in equity.

Any excess between the purchase price and the fair value of the attributable net assets of subsidiaries and associates at the date of acquisition is capitalized as goodwill.

Goodwill is not amortized; however it is subject to an annual assessment for impairment. The Company evaluates the carrying amount of goodwill to determine whether current events and circumstances indicate that such carrying amount may no longer be recoverable. To accomplish this, the Company compares the estimated fair values of its reporting units to their carrying amounts. If the carrying value of the reporting unit exceeds its estimated fair value, the Company compares the implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill to its carrying amount, and any excess of the carrying value over the fair value is charged to earnings. The Company’s fair value estimates are based on numerous assumptions and it is possible that actual fair values will be significantly different from the estimates, as actual future quantities of recoverable minerals, gold and other commodity prices, production levels and operating costs of production and capital are each subject to significant risks and uncertainties.

 

  (c)  (i) FOREIGN CURRENCY TRANSACTIONS: Foreign currency transactions are recorded at the prevailing exchange rate at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities designated in foreign currencies are translated at the exchange rate ruling at year-end. Gains and losses arising from these translations are recognized in earnings.

 

  (ii) FOREIGN ENTITIES: The Group’s foreign entities are regarded as those entities that are considered to be self-sustaining. The balance sheet and statements of operations of foreign subsidiaries are translated on the following basis:

Assets and liabilities are translated at the prevailing exchange rate at year-end. Statement of operations items are translated at the average exchange rate for the year. Exchange differences on translation are accounted for in shareholders’ equity. These differences are recognized in earnings upon realization of the underlying foreign entity.

 

  (iii) FUNCTIONAL CURRENCY: The functional currency of the Group’s South African operations is the South African Rand, of its Australian operations is the Australian dollar, of its Ghanaian operations and of its Peruvian operation is the U.S. dollar and of its Venezuelan operation was the Venezuelan Bolivar. The translation differences arising as a result of converting the South African Rand, the Australian dollar and Venezuelan Bolivar to U.S. dollars (reporting currency) using the current exchange rate method are included as a separate component of shareholders’ equity.

 

  (d) PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

 

  (i) MINING ASSETS: Mining assets, including mine development costs and mine plant facilities, are recorded at cost.

At the Group’s surface mines, when it has been determined that a mineral property can be economically developed as a result of establishing proven and probable reserves, costs incurred to develop the property are capitalized as incurred until saleable minerals are extracted from the mine and are amortized using the units-of-production method over the estimated life of the ore

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

body based on estimated recoverable ounces or pounds mined from proven and probable reserves. These costs include costs to further delineate the ore body and remove overburden to initially expose the ore body. Subsequent mine development costs are treated as variable production costs.

At the Group’s underground mines, the Group capitalizes all underground development costs to access specific ore blocks or other areas of the mine where such costs will provide future economic benefits as a result of establishing proven and probable reserves associated with a specific block or area of operations, even after the reef horizon may have been intersected with the development of the first specific ore block or area of the mine. All costs associated with the development of a specific underground block or area are capitalized until saleable minerals are extracted from that specific block or area. At the Group’s underground mines, these costs include the cost of shaft sinking and access, the costs of building access ways, lateral development, drift development, ramps, box cuts and other infrastructure development.

The costs incurred to access specific ore blocks or areas of the mine, which only provide an economic benefit over the period during which that ore block or area is being mined, are attributed to earnings using the units-of-production method where the denominator is estimated recoverable ounces of gold contained in proven and probable reserves within that ore block or area. Capitalized costs that provide an economic benefit over the entire mine life, such as the initial primary shaft in an underground complex, will continue to be attributed to earnings using the units-of-production method, where the denominator is the estimated recoverable ounces of gold contained in total accessible proven and probable reserves.

Interest on borrowings incurred in respect of assets requiring a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use is capitalized to the date on which the assets are substantially completed and ready for their intended use.

 

  (ii) LAND: Land is shown at cost and is not depreciated.

 

  (iii) MINERAL INTERESTS: Mineral interests represent mineral and surface use rights for parcels of land owned by the Group. Mineral interests and other tangible assets include acquired mineral use rights in production, development and exploration stage properties. The amount capitalized related to mineral interests represents its fair value at the time it was acquired, either as an individual asset purchase or as part of a business combination.

Production stage mineral interests represent mineral interests in operating properties that contain proven and probable reserves. Development stage mineral interests represent interests in properties under development that contain proven and probable reserves. Exploration stage mineral interests represent interests in properties that are believed to potentially contain (i)  other mineralized material such as inferred material within pits, measured, indicated and inferred material with insufficient drill spacing to qualify as proven and probable reserves; and inferred material in close proximity to proven and probable reserves; (ii)  around-mine exploration potential such as inferred material not immediately adjacent to existing reserves and mineralization but located within the immediate mine infrastructure; (iii)  other mine-related exploration potential that is not part of measured, indicated or inferred material and is comprised mainly of material outside of the immediate mine area; or (iv)  greenfield exploration potential that is not associated with any other production, development or exploration stage property as described above. The Group’s mineral use rights are enforceable regardless of whether proven or probable reserves have been established. In certain limited situations, the nature of a use right

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

changes from an exploration right to mining right upon the establishment of proven and probable reserves. The Group has the ability and intent to renew mineral use rights where the existing term is not sufficient to recover all identified and valued proven and probable reserves and/or undeveloped mineral interests.

 

  (iv) AMORTIZATION AND DEPRECIATION OF MINING ASSETS: Mining assets, mine development and evaluation costs, and mine plant facilities are amortized over the life of mine using the units-of-production method, based on estimated above infrastructure proven and probable ore reserves. Proven and probable ore reserves reflect estimated quantities of economically recoverable reserves, which can be recovered in future from known mineral deposits. At the Group’s South African operations, its amortization and depreciation calculations are generally based on the Group’s most recent life-of-mine plan and annual above-infrastructure reserve declarations as approved by the Company’s Board. However, if management becomes aware of significant changes in its above-infrastructure reserves ahead of the scheduled updates, management would not hesitate to immediately update its amortization and depreciation calculations and then subsequently notify the Company’s Board. A similar approach is followed at the Group’s operations in Ghana and Peru, due to the longer-life of the primary orebody. At the Group’s other international operations, such as Australia, the Group’s amortization and depreciation calculations are updated on a more regular basis during the year for all known changes in proven and probable reserves. The nature and life-span of the orebody, and the on-going information gathered in connection with the orebody, facilitates these more frequent updates.

 

  (v) AMORTIZATION OF MINERAL INTERESTS: Mineral interests associated with production stage mineral interests are amortized over the life-of-mine using the units-of-production method in order to match the amortization with the expected underlying future cash flows. Mineral interests associated with development and exploration stage mineral interests are not amortized until such time as the underlying property is converted to the production stage.

 

  (vi) DEPRECIATION OF NON-MINING ASSETS: Other non-mining assets are recorded at cost and depreciated on a straight-line basis over their expected useful lives as follows:

 

Vehicles

   —      20.0%                    

Computers

   —      33.3%                    

Furniture and Equipment

   —      10.0%                    

 

  (vii) MINING EXPLORATION: Expenditure on exploration activities is expensed as incurred. Such expenditure includes the costs incurred for purposes of upgrading resources from one category to another or for purposes of upgrading resources to proven and probable reserves, even when in close proximity to the Company’s development and production stage properties. When it has been determined that a property can be economically developed as a result of establishing proven and probable reserves, costs incurred prospectively to develop the property are capitalized as mine development costs.

 

  (viii) IMPAIRMENT: The Group reviews and tests the carrying amounts of long-lived assets, which include development costs, when events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. For impairment purposes, assets are grouped at the lowest level for which identifiable cash flows are largely independent of the cash flows of other assets and liabilities. The lowest level at which such cash flows are generated is generally at an individual operating mine, even if the individual operating mine is included in a larger mine complex.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

     If there are indications that an impairment may have occurred, the Group prepares estimates of expected future cash flows for each group of assets. Expected future cash flows are based on a probability-weighted approach applied to potential outcomes and reflect:

 

   

estimated sales proceeds from the production and sale of recoverable ounces of gold contained in proven and probable reserves;

 

   

expected gold prices and currency exchange rates (considering historical and current prices, price trends and related factors);

 

   

expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on approved life-of-mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

 

   

expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves, which include the expected cash outflows required to develop and extract the value beyond proven and probable reserves.

The impairment analysis first compares the total estimated cash flows on an undiscounted basis to the carrying amount of the asset, including goodwill, if any. If the undiscounted cash flows are less than the carrying amount of the asset, a second step is performed. The Group records a reduction of a group of assets to fair value as a charge to earnings if discounted expected future cash flows are less than the carrying amount. The Group estimates fair value by discounting the expected future cash flows using a discount factor that reflects the risk-free rate of interest for a term consistent with the period of expected cash flows.

Management’s estimate of future cash flows is subject to risk and uncertainties. It is therefore reasonably possible that changes could occur which may affect the recoverability of the Group’s mining assets.

 

  (ix) LEASES: Operating leases are charged against income as incurred.

 

  (e) DEFERRED TAXATION: Deferred taxation is calculated on the comprehensive basis using the balance sheet approach. Deferred tax liabilities and assets are recognized by applying expected tax rates to the temporary differences existing at each balance sheet date between the tax values and their carrying amounts. These temporary differences are expected to result in taxable or deductible amounts in determining taxable profits for future periods when the carrying amount of the asset is recovered or the liability is settled. The effect on deferred tax of any changes in tax rates is recognized in the income statement during the period in which the change occurs.

The principal temporary differences arise from depreciation on property, plant and equipment, provisions and tax losses carried forward. A valuation allowance is recorded to reduce the carrying amounts of deferred tax assets if it is more likely than not that such assets will not be realized.

 

  (f) NON-CURRENT INVESTMENTS: Non-current investments comprise (i) investments in listed companies which are classified as available-for-sale and are accounted for at fair value, with unrealized holding gains and losses excluded from earnings and reported as a separate component of shareholders’ equity; and (ii) investments in unlisted companies which are carried at their original costs as the directors believe that the original cost is not materially different from the fair value; (iii) monies in environmental trust fund; and (iv) equity method investments. Realized gains and losses are included in the determination of net income or loss.

Unrealized losses are included in the determination of net income or loss where it is determined that a decline, other than a temporary decline, in the value of the investment has occurred.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

  (g) MATERIALS CONTAINED IN HEAP LEACH PADS: The recovery of gold from certain oxide ores is best achieved through the heap leaching process. Under this method, ore is placed on leach pads where it is permeated with a chemical solution, which dissolves the gold contained in the ore. The resulting “pregnant” solution is further processed in a leach plant where the gold in solution is recovered. For accounting purposes, value is added to leach pads based on current mining costs, including applicable depreciation and amortization relating to mining operations. Value is removed from the leach pad as ounces are recovered in circuit at the leach plant based on the average cost per recoverable ounce of gold on the leach pad.

The engineering estimates of recoverable gold on the heap leach pads are calculated from quantities of ore placed on the pads (measured tonnes added to the leach pads), the grade of ore placed on the leach pads (based on assay data) and a recovery percentage (based on the leach process and the ore type). In general, the leach pad production cycles project recoveries of approximately 50% to 70% of the placed recoverable ounces in the first year of leaching, declining each year thereafter until the leaching process is completed.

Although the quantities of recoverable gold placed on the leach pads are reconciled by comparing the grades of ore placed on the pads to the quantities of gold actually recovered (metallurgical balancing), the nature of the leaching process inherently limits the ability to precisely monitor inventory levels. As a result, the metallurgical balancing process is constantly monitored and engineering estimates are refined based on actual results over time. Variations between actual and estimated quantities resulting from changes in assumptions and estimates that do not result in write-downs to net realizable value are accounted for on a prospective basis. The ultimate recovery of gold from the pad will not be known until the leaching process is terminated.

The current portion of leach pad inventories is determined based on engineering estimates of the quantities of gold at the balance sheet date that are expected to be recovered during the next twelve months.

 

  (h) INVENTORIES : Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realizable value. The Group’s inventories comprise consumable stores, gold-in-process, gold bullion, ore stockpiles and mineral rights and are accounted for as follows:

Consumable stores: Consumable stores are valued at average cost, after appropriate provision for surplus and slow moving items.

Gold-in-process: Gold in-process inventories represent materials that are currently in the process of being converted to a saleable product. Conversion processes vary depending on the nature of the ore and the specific mining operation, but include mill in-circuit, leach in-circuit, flotation and column cells, and carbon in-pulp inventories. In-process material is measured based on assays of the material fed to process and the projected recoveries of the respective plants. In-process inventories are valued at the average cost of the material fed to process attributable to the source material coming from the mine, stockpile or leach pad plus the in-process conversion costs, including applicable depreciation relating to the process facility, incurred to that point in the process.

Gold bullion: Gold bullion inventories represent saleable gold ore or gold bullion and are valued at the average cost of the respective in-process inventories incurred prior to the refining process, plus refining costs.

Concentrates: Concentrate inventories represent concentrate available for shipment. The concentrate inventory is valued at the average cost, including an allocated portion of amortization. Costs are added to and removed from the concentrate inventory based on tons of concentrate and are valued at the lower

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

of average cost and net realizable value. Management’s determination of the gold and copper concentrate content and quantity depends on assay and laboratory results for the metal content and survey for the quantities.

Stockpiles: Stockpiles represent coarse ore that has been extracted from the mine that is available for further processing. Stockpiles are measured by estimating the number of tons (via truck counts and/or in-pit surveys of the ore before stockpiling) added and removed from the stockpile, the number of contained ounces (based on assay data) and the recovery percentage (based on the process for which the ore is destined). Stockpile tonnages are verified by periodic surveys. Stockpiles are valued based on mining costs incurred up to the point of stockpiling the ore, including applicable depreciation and amortization relating to mining operations. Value is added to a stockpile based on the current mining cost per ton plus applicable depreciation and amortization and removed at the average cost per recoverable ounce of gold in the stockpile.

Mineral rights: Mineral rights not linked to any specific operation are valued at the lower of cost and net realizable value.

 

  (i) FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: Financial instruments carried on the balance sheet include cash and cash equivalents, investments, receivables, derivative financial instruments, accounts payable and accrued liabilities. The particular recognition method for each financial instrument item is disclosed in its respective significant accounting policy description.

 

  (j) HEDGING : The Group accounts for its hedging activities in accordance with SFAS No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities, (“SFAS No. 133”), as amended by Statements of Financial Accounting Standards 137, 138 and 149.

Under SFAS No. 133, all derivatives are recognized on the balance sheet at their fair value, unless they meet the criteria for the normal purchases normal sale exemption. On the date a derivative contract is entered into, the Group designates the derivative as (1) a hedge of the fair value of a recognized asset or liability (fair value hedge), (2) a hedge of a forecasted transaction (cash flow hedge), or (3) a hedge of a net investment in a foreign entity. Certain derivative transactions, while providing effective economic hedges under the Group’s risk management policies, do not qualify for hedge accounting. Hedging activities are conducted in accordance with guidelines established by the Audit Committee which allow for the use of various hedging instruments.

Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is highly effective, and that is designated and qualifies as a fair value hedge, are recorded in earnings, along with the change in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that is attributable to the hedged risk.

Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is highly effective, and that is designated and qualifies as a cash flow hedge, are recognized directly in shareholders’ equity. Amounts deferred in shareholders’ equity are included in earnings in the same period during which the hedged firm commitment or forecasted transaction affects earnings.

Recognition of derivatives which meet the criteria for the normal purchases normal sales exception under SFAS No. 133 is deferred until settlement. Under these contracts, the Group must deliver a specified quantity of gold at a future date at a specified price to the contracted counter-party.

Hedges of net investment in foreign entities are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges.

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting are recognized in the statement of operations, under the caption entitled gains and losses on financial instruments. The fair value recognized on the balance sheet is included under the caption financial instruments.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The Group formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. This process includes linking derivatives designed as hedges to specific assets and liabilities or to specific firm commitments or forecasted transactions. The Group also formally assesses, both at the hedge inception date and on an ongoing basis, whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions are highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged items.

 

  (k) CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS: Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand, demand deposits and investments in money market instruments. These are all highly liquid investments with a maturity of three months or less at the date of purchase.

The carrying amount of cash and cash equivalents is stated at cost which approximates fair value.

 

  (l) TRADE RECEIVABLES: Trade receivables are carried at anticipated realizable value. Estimates are made for doubtful debts based on a review of all outstanding amounts at year-end. Irrecoverable amounts are written off during the year in which they are identified.

 

  (m) PROVISIONS: Provisions are recognized when information is available prior to the issuance of the financial statements which indicates that it is probable that an asset has been impaired or a liability had been incurred at the date of the financial statements and the amount can be reasonably estimated.

 

  (n) REHABILITATION COSTS: SFAS No. 143, Accounting for asset retirement obligations (“SFAS No. 143”) applies to legal obligations associated with the retirement of a long-lived asset that result from the acquisition, construction, development and/or the normal operation of a long-lived asset. Under SFAS No. 143 the Group records the fair value of a liability for an asset retirement obligation in the period in which it is incurred. When the liability is initially recorded, the Group correspondingly capitalizes the cost by increasing the carrying value of the related long-lived asset. Over time, the liability is increased (accretion) to reflect an interest element considered in its initial measurement at fair value, and the capitalized cost is amortized over the useful life of the related asset. Upon settlement of the liability, the Group will record a gain or loss if the actual cost incurred differs from the liability recorded.

Environmental liabilities, other than rehabilitation costs which relate to liabilities from specific events, are expensed as incurred.

 

  (o) ENVIRONMENTAL TRUST FUNDS: Contributions are made to the Group’s trust funds, created in accordance with statutory requirements, to fund the estimated cost of pollution control, rehabilitation and mine closure at the end of the life of the Group’s South African mines. Contributions are determined on the basis of the estimated environmental obligation over the life of the mine. Income earned on monies paid to environmental trust funds is accounted for as investment income. The funds contributed to the trusts plus growth in the trust funds are included under investments on the balance sheet.

 

  (p) EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

 

  (i) PENSION AND PROVIDENT FUNDS: In South Africa, the Group operates a defined benefit pension plan and a defined contribution retirement plan and contributes to a number of industry-based defined contribution retirement plans. The retirement plans are funded by payments from employees and the Group.

The expected costs of the defined benefit pension plan are assessed in accordance with the advice of independent actuaries. The cost of experience adjustments or planned amendments is

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

expensed to the statement of operations over the expected average remaining service lives of the relevant employees. Any shortfalls are funded either immediately or as increased employer contributions to ensure the ongoing soundness of the fund.

Contributions to defined contribution funds are expensed to the statement of operations as incurred.

 

  (ii) POST-RETIREMENT HEALTH CARE COSTS: Medical coverage is provided through a number of schemes.

Post-retirement health care in respect of existing employees is recognized as an expense over the remaining service lives of the relevant employees.

The Group has an obligation to provide medical benefits to certain of its pensioners and dependents of ex-employees. These liabilities are unfunded and have been provided in full, calculated on an actuarial basis.

Valuation of these obligations is carried out annually by independent actuaries using appropriate mortality tables, long-term estimates of increases in medical costs and appropriate discount rates.

 

  (iii) SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION PLANS: Compensation costs recognized in fiscal years 2009, 2008 and 2007 include: a) compensation cost for all share-based payments granted prior to, but not yet vested as of July 1, 2005, based on the grant-date fair value estimated in accordance with the original provisions of FASB Statement No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation (“FAS 123”), and b) compensation cost for all share-based payments granted subsequent to June 30, 2005, based on the grant-date fair value estimated in accordance with the provisions of SFAS 123(R), Share-Based-Payment.

Prior to July 1, 2005, the Group accounted for share-based payments under the recognition and measurement provisions of APB Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees (“APB 25”), and related Interpretations, as permitted by FAS 123. In accordance with APB 25, no compensation cost was required to be recognized for options granted that had an exercise price equal to the market value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant other than on occasions where the term of the share option vesting schedules are modified or accelerated.

 

  (q) REVENUE RECOGNITION: Revenue arising from gold and by-product sales is recognized when the risks and rewards of ownership and title pass to the buyer under the terms of the applicable contract and the pricing is fixed and determinable. Sales revenue excludes value-added tax but includes the net profit and losses arising from hedging transactions from matched gold sales contracts, which are designated as normal sales contracts.

Contracts for the Sales of copper concentrate are provisionally priced—that is, the selling price is subject to final adjustment at the end of a period normally ranging from 30 to 90 days after delivery to the customer, based on market prices at the relevant quotation points stipulated in the contract. Revenue on provisionally priced copper concentrate sales is recorded on the date of shipment, net of refining and treatment charges, using the forward London Metal Exchange price to the estimated final pricing date, adjusted for the specific terms of the relevant agreement. Variations between the price used to recognize revenue and the actual final price received can be caused by changes in prevailing copper and gold prices and result in an embedded derivative. The host contract is the receivable from the sale of copper concentrate at the forward London Metal Exchange price at the time of sale. The embedded derivative, which does not qualify for hedge accounting, is marked-to-market each period until final settlement occurs, with changes in fair value classified as provisional price adjustments and included as a component of revenue while the contract itself is recorded in accounts receivable.

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

  (r) DIVIDEND INCOME: Dividends are recognized when the right to receive payment is established.

 

  (s) INTEREST INCOME: Interest is recognized on a time proportion basis taking account of the principal outstanding and the effective rate to maturity on the accrual basis.

 

  (t) DIVIDENDS DECLARED: Dividends proposed and the related taxation thereon are recognized only when the dividends are declared. Dividends are payable in South African Rand.

 

  (u) SEGMENT REPORTING: The Group is a gold mining company operating geographically in South Africa, Ghana, Australia, Peru and Venezuela up to the date of disposal of the Venezuelan assets. The business segments comprise geographical operations based on locations and operating units.

 

  (v) EARNINGS/(LOSS) PER SHARE is calculated based on the net income/(loss) divided by the weighted average number of common shares in issue during the year. Diluted earnings per share is presented when the inclusion of potential ordinary shares has a dilutive effect on earnings per share.

 

  (w) RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS: In December 2007, the Financial Accounting Services Board (“FASB”) issued FASB Statement No. 141(R), “Business Combinations” (“SFAS 141(R)”) which amends SFAS 141, and provides revised guidance for recognizing and measuring identifiable assets and goodwill acquired, liabilities assumed, and any noncontrolling interest in the acquiree. It also provides disclosure requirements to enable users of the financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business combination. In April 2009, the FASB also published FSP No. FAS 141(R)-1, “Accounting for Assets Acquired and Liabilities Assumed in a Business Combination that Arise from Contingencies” (“FSP FAS 141(R)-1”). FSP FAS 141(R)-1 provides further guidance about recognition of assets and liabilities associated with contingencies. SFAS 141(R) and FSP FAS 141(R)-1 are effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009 and are to be applied prospectively. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement and staff position on its financial position and results of operations.

In December 2007, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 160, “Noncontrolling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements—an amendment of ARB No. 51” (“SFAS 160”) which establishes accounting and reporting standards pertaining to ownership interests in subsidiaries held by parties other than the parent, the amount of net income attributable to the parent and to the noncontrolling interest, changes in a parent’s ownership interest, and the valuation of any retained noncontrolling equity investment when a subsidiary is deconsolidated. SFAS 160 also establishes disclosure requirements that clearly identify and distinguish between the interests of the parent and the interests of the noncontrolling owners. The provisions of SFAS 160 are effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on its financial position and results of operations.

In March 2008, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 161, “Disclosures about Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities an amendment of FASB Statement No. 133” (“SFAS 161”). SFAS 161 requires enhanced disclosures about an entity’s derivative and hedging activities with the aim of improving transparency of financial reporting. The provisions of SFAS 161 are effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009. The Group does not expect the adoption of SFAS 161 to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

In April 2008, the FASB published FSP No. FAS 142-3 “Determination of the Useful Life of Intangible Assets” (“FSP FAS 142-3”). The FSP reflects the FASB’s recognition of potential inconsistencies in the useful life of intangible assets recognized under SFAS No. 142 “Intangible Assets” and the period of expected cash flows used to measure the fair value of the asset under SFAS No. 141 (revised 2007) “Business Combinations.” The FSP allows an entity to use its own assumptions

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

about renewal or extension of an arrangement even when there is likely to be substantial cost or material modifications associated with such terms in determining the appropriate useful life for intangible assets. The provisions of FSP FAS 142-3 are effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009. The Group does not expect the adoption of FSP FAS 142-3 to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

In May 2008, the FASB published FSP No. APB 14-1, “Accounting for Convertible Debt Instruments That May Be Settled in Cash upon Conversion (Including Partial Cash Settlement)” (“FSP APB 14-1”). FSP APB 14-1 applies to convertible debt instruments that, by their stated terms, may be settled in cash (or other assets) upon conversion, including partial cash settlement, unless the embedded conversion option is required to be separately accounted for as a derivative under SFAS 133 “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities” (“SFAS 133”). Convertible debt instruments within the scope of FSP APB 14-1 are not addressed by the existing APB 14. FSP APB 14-1 requires that the liability and equity components of convertible debt instruments within the scope of FSP APB 14-1 be separately accounted for in a manner that reflects the entity’s nonconvertible debt borrowing rate. This will require an allocation of the convertible debt proceeds between the liability component and the embedded conversion option (that is, the equity component). The difference between the principal amount of the debt and the amount of the proceeds allocated to the liability component would be reported as a debt discount and subsequently amortized to earnings over the instrument’s expected life using the effective interest method. FSP APB 14-1 is effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2009. The Group does not expect the adoption of FSP APB 14-1 to have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

In June 2008, the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) reached consensus on Issue No. 07-5, “Determining Whether an Instrument (or Embedded Feature) Is Indexed to an Entity’s Own Stock” (“EITF 07-5”). EITF 07-5 clarifies the determination of whether an instrument (or an embedded feature) is indexed to an entity’s own stock, which would qualify as a scope exception under SFAS 133. EITF 07-5 is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2009. Early adoption for an existing instrument is not permitted. The Group does not expect the adoption of EITF 07-5 to have a material impact on the Group’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.

In November 2008, the EITF reached consensus on Issue No. 08-6, “Equity Method Investment Accounting Considerations” (“EITF 08-6”), which clarifies the accounting for certain transactions and impairment considerations involving equity method investments. The intent of EITF 08-6 is to provide guidance on determining the initial carrying value of an equity method investment, performing an impairment assessment of an underlying indefinite-lived intangible asset of an equity method

investment, accounting for an equity method investee’s issuance of shares, and accounting for a change in an investment from the equity method to the cost method. EITF 08-6 is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2009 and is to be applied prospectively. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on the Group’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.

In December 2008, the FASB issued FSP No. FAS 132(R)-1, “Employers’ Disclosures about Post-Retirement Benefit Plan Assets” (“FSP SFAS 132(R)-1”), which amends FASB Statement No. 132 “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Post-Retirement Benefits” (“SFAS 132”), to provide guidance on an employer’s disclosures about plan assets of a defined benefit pension or other postretirement plan. The objective of FSP SFAS 132(R)-1 is to require more detailed disclosures about employers’ plan assets, including employers’ investment strategies, major categories of plan assets, concentrations of risk within plan assets, and valuation techniques used to measure the fair value of plan assets. FSP SFAS 132(R)-1 is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2009. Upon

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

initial application, the provisions of this FSP are not required for earlier periods that are presented for comparative purposes. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on the Group’s defined benefit pension and post-retirement benefit plan disclosures.

In June 2009, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 167, “Amendments to FASB Interpretation No. 46(R)” (“SFAS 167”) to amend the consolidation guidance for variable interest entities. SFAS 167 addresses the need for reconsideration of whether an entity is a variable interest entity, requires additional qualitative considerations about the determination of the primary beneficiary of variable interest entities and prescribes disclosures about variable interest entities. SFAS 167 is effective for the Group beginning July 1, 2010. The Group is currently evaluating the potential impact of adopting this statement on its financial position and results of operations.

In June 2009, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 168 “The FASB Accounting Standards Codification and the Hierarchy of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles” as the single source authoritative GAAP to be applied by nongovernmental entities. The Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) is a new structure which took existing accounting pronouncements and organized them by accounting topic. Relevant authoritative literature issued by the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) and select SEC staff interpretations and administrative literature was also included in the ASC. All other accounting guidance not included in the ASC is non-authoritative. The ASC is not expected to have an impact on the Group’s consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

In August 2009, the FASB issued Accounting Standard Update 2009-5 “Measuring Liabilities at Fair Value” (“ASU 2009-5”). ASU 2009-5 provides updates on the guidance for fair value measurements and disclosure in the ASC to further define fair value of liabilities. This update provides clarification for circumstances in which: (i) a quoted price in an active market for the identical liability is not available, (ii) the liability has a restriction that prevents its transfer, and (iii) the identical liability is traded as an asset in an active market in which no adjustments to the quoted price of an asset are required. The updated guidance is effective for the Group’s fiscal year beginning July 1, 2010. The Group is evaluating the potential impact of adopting this guidance on the Group’s consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

 

3 ACQUISITION AND DISPOSAL OF BUSINESSES

(a) Disposal of IRCA (Pty) Limited

On March 28, 2009, Gold Fields disposed of its assets in IRCA (Pty) Limited (“IRCA”), for a total cash consideration of $5.0 million, realizing a loss of $0.3 million, which has been included in loss on sale of subsidiaries in the consolidated statement of operations in fiscal 2009.

(b) Disposal of Choco 10

On November 30, 2007, Gold Fields disposed of its assets in Venezuela to Rusoro Mining Limited (“Rusoro”), for a total consideration of $413.0 million comprising $180.0 million in cash and 140 million newly-issued Rusoro shares with a value of $233.0 million, which at the time of sale represented approximately 37% of the outstanding shares of Rusoro.

The Group realized a profit of $17.3 million on the sale of the Venezuelan assets, which has been included in profit on sale of subsidiaries in the consolidated statement of operations in fiscal 2008. Due to the retention of the ongoing interest in Rusoro which is sufficient to enable the Group to exert significant influence, the Group has not classified the results of operations and cash flows of Choco 10 as discontinued.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

(c) Sale of Essakane joint venture

On October 11, 2007, Gold Fields reached an agreement to sell its 60% stake in the Essakane project to Orezone Resources Inc. (“Orezone”). The transaction closed on November 26, 2007. Orezone paid Gold Fields $152.0 million in cash and issued 41,666,667 common shares, having an aggregate subscription price of $48.0 million, to Gold Fields’ wholly-owned subsidiary Gold Fields Essakane (BVI) Limited. Following the disposal, Gold Fields owned 41,666,667 common shares of Orezone, representing 12.2% of Orezone’s issued and outstanding common shares.

The Group realized a profit of $191.1 million on the sale of the Essakane joint venture, which has been included in profit on sale of subsidiaries in the consolidated statement of operations in fiscal 2008.

(d) Acquisition of South Deep

On September 11, 2006, the Company announced that it had reached an agreement with Barrick Gold Corporation Limited (“Barrick”) to acquire the entire issued share capital of Barrick Gold South Africa (Proprietary) Limited (“BGSA”), which held a 50% interest in the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture, an unincorporated entity in which Barrick and Western Areas Limited (“WAL”) each held an interest of 50%. The Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture owned the developing South Deep gold mine (“South Deep”) adjacent to the Group’s Kloof gold mine, located in the Witwatersrand basin near Johannesburg. As a result of Gold Fields acquiring 100% of the issued share capital of BGSA, South Deep was fully consolidated as from December 1, 2006. On December 1, 2006, the Group already owned 40.9% in WAL shares, which increased to 73% on December 8, 2006 (see below). The interest in WAL that the Group did not already own, was accounted for as a minority interest.

On October 30, 2006, the Company commenced an offer to acquire the entire issued share capital of WAL it did not already own by offering 35 Gold Fields ordinary shares for every 100 WAL shares (the “Offer”). WAL’s principal asset was its 50% interest in South Deep. Pursuant to the Offer and the subsequent compulsory acquisition of WAL shares, the Company issued a total of 33,461,565 Gold Fields’ Ordinary Shares to WAL shareholders. In support of the Offer, and pursuant to an agreement between the Company and JCI Limited (“JCI”), and certain subsidiaries of JCI, the Company, on November 16, 2006, acquired 27 million WAL shares from one of the subsidiaries of JCI in exchange for the issue to JCI of 9,450,000 Gold Fields shares. In addition, pursuant to the agreement, Gold Fields, on November 28, 2006, exercised call options in respect of a further 9.96 million Western Areas shares held by the JCI subsidiaries.

As a result of these transactions and the Offer, Gold Fields acquired 100% of WAL and the South Deep mine.

 

     2007
     $’m

Purchase consideration

  

—Gold Fields shares issued to Barrick (1)

   324.0

—cash paid to Barrick

   801.8

—insurance claim refund due to Barrick

   24.2

—Gold Fields shares issued to WAL shareholders (2)

   893.8

—direct cost relating to the acquisition

   10.7
    

Purchase consideration excluding shares in WAL prior to obtaining control

   2,054.5

Shares held in WAL prior to obtaining control

   133.8
    

Net investment in South Deep

   2,188.3
    

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

 

1 The measurement of the share component of the BGSA purchase consideration represents the average market price for the two days prior to and closing date as specified by the sales agreement with Barrick.

 

2 The measurement of the share component of the WAL purchase consideration represents the average closing price for the two days prior to and two days after the public announcement on September 11, 2006 representing the general offer for WAL shareholders.

In accordance with the purchase method of accounting, the purchase cost of WAL and BGSA was allocated to the underlying assets acquired and liabilities assumed based primarily upon their estimated fair values at the date of acquisition. The estimated fair values were based on a combination of independent appraisals and internal estimates, with the excess of purchase cost over the net identifiable tangible and intangible assets acquired allocated to goodwill as follows:

 

     2007  
     $’m  

The fair value of the assets and liabilities acquired are:

  

Property, plant and equipment

   1,867.7   

Non-current asset—Rehabilitation Trust Fund

   4.6   

Inventory

   4.6   

Trade and other receivables

   284.8   

Deferred taxation assets ($414.1 million less valuation allowance of $44.1 million)

   370.0   

Cash and cash equivalents

   3.5   

Trade and other payables

   (782.6

Deferred taxation liabilities

   (370.0

Long-term loans

   (406.8

Long-term provisions

   (6.8
      

Fair value of the assets and liabilities assumed

   969.0   

Goodwill

   1,219.3   
      

Total purchase consideration

   2,188.3   
      

Prior to the acquisition of the South Deep mine by the Group, both BGSA and WAL reported cumulative losses in excess of three years. This has resulted in the Group recognizing a valuation allowance in respect of the approximately $44.1 million in net deferred tax assets (arising on taxable losses and deductable capital expenditure carry-forwards) at the acquisition date. The Group will continue to assess the appropriateness of the valuation allowance in future periods. If it is determined that a portion of the losses and deductable capital expenditure carry-forwards may be recognized without a valuation allowance, the release of the valuation allowance will, upon adoption of SFAS 141(R), reduce current income tax expense.

The acquired business consisting of South Deep, BGSA and WAL contributed revenues of $107.9 million and loss of $54.5 million between December 1, 2006 and June 30, 2007.

Subsequent to the acquisition WAL was renamed Gold Fields Operations Limited (“Gold Fields Operations”) and BGSA was renamed GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Limited (“GFI Joint Venture Holdings”). They are referred to by those names in the remainder of these financial statements.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Pro Forma Information (unaudited)

The following unaudited pro forma consolidated results of operations assume that the acquisition of South Deep was completed as of July 1 for the fiscal year shown below.

 

     2007
     $’m

Revenues

   2,798.2

Net income

   183.3

Basic earnings/(loss) per share

   0.30

Weighted average number of shares used in the computation of basic earnings per share

   590,742,047

Diluted earnings/(loss) per share

   0.30

Weighted average number of shares used in the computation of diluted earnings per share

   594,689,510

The unaudited pro forma information above may not be indicative of the results that would have been obtained had these events actually occurred at the beginning of the periods presented, nor does it intend to be a projection of future results.

(e) Acquisition of IRCA (Pty) Limited and TMTI (Pty) Limited

On February 28, 2007, Gold Fields acquired 70% in IRCA (Pty) Ltd (“IRCA”). IRCA specializes in mine safety training and has been incorporated in the Gold Fields Business Leadership Academy structure. On January 1, 2007, Gold Fields also acquired 100% of the issued share capital of TMTI (Pty) Ltd (“TMTI”). TMTI specializes in mining and artisan training in the Free State region and has been incorporated in the Gold Fields Business Leadership Academy structure.

 

     2007  
     $’m  

Details of the net assets acquired are as follows:

  

Purchase consideration

  

—cash paid

   3.2   

—loans advanced

   2.1   
      

Total purchase consideration

   5.3   

Fair value of the net assets acquired

   5.3   
      
   —     
      

The fair value of the assets and liabilities acquired are:

  

Property, plant and equipment

   4.4   

Trade and other receivables

   4.1   

Bank overdraft

   (2.6

Trade and other payables

   (2.7

Loans receivable

   2.7   
      

Assets acquired and liabilities assumed

   5.9   

Minority shareholders’ interest

   (0.6
      

Fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed

   5.3   
      

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

4 IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m
   2007
$’m

St Ives

   —      2.6    —  

Agnew

   —      2.8    —  

Biox ®

   —      6.0    —  
              
   —      11.4    —  
              

St Ives—$2.6 million

The impairment relates to the closure of the St Ives’ Junction mine and the original Leviathan pit.

Agnew—$2.8 million

The impairment relates to the rehabilitation assets relating to an old slimes dam at Agnew that is no longer in use.

Biox ® —$6.0 million

During fiscal 2008, the Group also impaired its patented technology, known as the Biox ® process, which is used for the pretreatment of refractory ores and concentrates prior to gold recovery through conventional cyanide leaching techniques. On October 2, 2008 the Group entered into an agreement to sell its Biox ® technology process. The agreement was subsequently cancelled.

 

5 FINANCE EXPENSE

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
    2007
$’m
 

Interest expense—Mvelaphanda loan

   (34.9   (61.0   (61.6

Interest expense—preference share dividend

   (9.8   (2.7   —     

Interest expense—other

   (92.8   (78.8   (44.4

Realized loss on foreign debt, net of cash

   —        —        (5.9
                  

Total finance expense

   (137.5   (142.5   (111.9

Capitalized interest

   63.6      42.1      16.7   
                  
   (73.9   (100.4   (95.2
                  

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

6 INCOME AND MINING TAX EXPENSE

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
    2007
$’m
 

Current income taxes

      

South Africa

   (101.6   (120.8   (59.2

Ghana

   (34.2   (55.2   (41.6

Australia

   (21.0   (12.7   (20.3

Peru

   (16.1   (5.6   —     

Venezuela

   —        (0.8   (1.7
                  

Current income and mining taxes

   (172.9   (195.1   (122.8
                  

Deferred income taxes

      

South Africa

   (37.5   (61.5   (69.3

Ghana

   (24.7   (8.7   (11.6

Australia

   (12.8   (2.8   (5.3

Peru

   (16.7   (3.0   —     

Venezuela

   —        (0.1   (0.3
                  

Deferred income and mining taxes

   (91.7   (76.1   (86.5
                  

Total income and mining taxes

   (264.6   (271.2   (209.3
                  

The Company’s pre-tax income before impairment of equity investee, share of equity investee’s share of profits/(losses) and minority interests comprise:

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
    2007
$’m
 

South Africa

   269.9      430.8      281.3   

Ghana

   140.7      200.4      145.9   

Australia

   92.3      7.2      65.3   

Peru

   82.7      (0.7   (4.4

Venezuela

   —        8.6      (6.5

British Virgin Islands (1)

   (34.4   179.1      —     

Other

   —        15.4      —     
                  
   551.2      840.8      481.6   
                  
 
  (1) The pre-tax (loss)/income relates to non-operating entities incorporated in the British Virgin Islands and includes, in fiscal 2009, a net loss on disposal and impairment of listed investments (fiscal 2008, profit realized on the sale of the Essakane project).

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

South African mining tax on mining income is determined on a formula basis which takes into account the profit and revenue from mining operations during the year. Non-mining income is taxed at a standard rate. Deferred tax is provided at the estimated effective mining tax rate on temporary differences. Major items causing the Group’s income tax provision to differ from the South African mining statutory rate of 43% (2008: 43% and 2007: 45%) were:

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
    2007
$’m
 

Tax on net income at South African mining statutory rate

   (237.0   (361.5   (216.7

Rate adjustment to reflect estimated effective mining tax rate in South Africa of 38% (2008: 38% and 2007: 38%), tax rate in Ghana of 25% (2008: 25% and 2007: 25.0%), tax rate in Australia of 30% (2008: 30% and 2007: 30%), tax rate in Venezuela of 34% for 2008 and 2007 and tax rate in Peru of 35.6% (2008: 35.6% and 2007: not applicable).

   49.1      47.2      62.6   

South African mining tax formula rate adjustment

   27.7      30.5      27.9   

Valuation allowance raised against deferred tax assets

   (17.5   (34.0   (20.5

Reversal of valuation allowance previously raised against deferred tax assets

   2.7      4.2      3.8   

Non taxable income/non deductible expenditure

   (54.4   74.6      (45.5

Australian tax benefit from tax consolidations

   —        —        3.3   

South African capital gains tax

   —        (0.9   —     

Foreign levies and royalties

   (37.7   (33.5   (29.4

Other

   2.5      2.2      5.2   
                  

Income and mining tax expense

   (264.6   (271.2   (209.3
                  

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Deferred income and mining tax liabilities and assets on the balance sheet as of June 30, 2009 and 2008 relate to the following:

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Deferred income and mining tax liabilities

    

Mining assets

   1,765.6      1,639.8   

Investment by environmental trust funds

   41.9      35.6   

Inventory

   6.1      3.7   

Other

   33.1      30.5   
            

Gross deferred income and mining tax liabilities

   1,846.7      1,709.6   
            

Provisions, including rehabilitation accruals

   (114.9   (103.6

Tax losses

   (476.7   (423.6

Unredeemed capital expenditure

   (625.8   (644.7
            

Gross deferred income and mining tax assets

   (1,217.4   (1,171.9

Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets

   195.5      186.4   
            

Total deferred income and mining tax assets

   (1,021.9   (985.5
            

Net deferred income and mining tax liabilities

   824.8      724.1   

Less short term portion of deferred income and mining tax (included in accounts payable)

   (7.1   (4.2
            

Net deferred income and mining tax liabilities

   817.7      719.9   
            

The classification of deferred income and mining tax liabilities or assets is based on the related liability or asset creating the deferred tax. Deferred taxes not related to a specific liability or asset are classified based on the estimated period of reversal.

The Group has established a valuation allowance for certain deferred tax assets where cumulative losses require a valuation allowance, or where management believes that they will not be realized based on projections as of June 30, 2009 and 2008. The valuation allowance relates primarily to net operating loss carry-forwards for the entities below, except for Gold Fields Operations and GFI Joint Venture Holdings which also include unredeemed capital expenditure.

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg)

   56.8    63.5

Gold Fields Arctic Platinum Oy

   28.9    31.8

Living Gold (Pty) Limited

   4.9    4.7

Gold Fields Operations

   47.1    31.6

GFI Joint Venture Holdings

   56.8    54.1

Other

   1.0    0.7
         
   195.5    186.4
         

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

As at June 30, 2009 and 2008 the Group has unredeemed capital expenditure and tax loss carry forwards available for deduction against future mining income at its South African mining operations as follows:

 

  unredeemed capital expenditure at the Beatrix Division of GFI Mining South Africa (Pty) Limited of $167.4 million (2008: $196.6 million).

 

  unredeemed capital expenditure at Gold Fields Operations of $335.3 million (2008: $277.1 million).

 

  unredeemed capital expenditure at GFI Joint Venture Holdings of $780.1 million (2008: $723.6 million).

 

  estimated assessed losses at Gold Fields Operations of $579.0 million (2008: $557.9 million).

 

  estimated assessed losses at GFI Joint Venture Holdings of $95.2 million (2008: $104.0 million).

 

  estimated assessed losses at Golden Oils (Pty) Limited of $0.7 million (2008: $0.4 million).

 

  estimated assessed losses at Agrihold (Pty) Limited of $2.2 million (2008: $1.1 million).

 

  estimated assessed losses at Golden Hytec Farming (Pty) Limited of $1.2 million (2008: $1.2 million).

 

  estimated assessed losses at Gold Fields Limited of $ nil (2008: $1.5 million).

 

  estimated assessed losses at Living Gold (Pty) Limited of $17.6 million (2008: $16.9 million).

These future deductions are utilizable against income generated by the individual tax entity concerned and do not expire unless the tax entity ceases to commercially operate for a period longer than one year. Under South African tax ring-fencing legislation, each tax entity is treated separately and as such these deductions can only be utilized by the tax entities in which the deductions have been generated.

The Group has estimated capital allowances to be offset against future income of $96.7 million (2008: $28.1 million), $6.7 million (2008: $7.8 million) and $615.4 million (2008: $707.9 million) at Gold Fields Ghana Limited, Abosso Goldfields Limited and Gold Fields La Cima, respectively. The estimated capital allowances do not have an expiration date. In terms of current Ghanaian taxation legislation, tax losses not utilized by Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited are forfeited after 5 years. Gold Fields Ghana Limited, Abosso Goldfields Limited and Gold Fields La Cima currently have no tax losses available for utilization against future profits.

The Group has tax losses available of $188.9 million (2008: $211.5 million) at Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg), which can only be used to offset future interest income generated by Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg). In terms of current Luxembourg taxation legislation, losses incurred in accounting periods subsequent to December 31, 1990, can be carried forward indefinitely. Losses incurred prior to this date could only be carried forward for 5 years. All losses incurred by Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg) were incurred subsequent to December 31, 1990.

Australian tax legislation makes provision for companies that consolidate for tax purposes to recalculate their tax values based on a market value calculation. This gross up calculation was performed in fiscal 2005 by Gold Fields’ subsidiaries in Australia and Gold Fields recorded a net deferred tax benefit of $26.8 million. There was an additional adjustment to the tax benefit recorded in year ended June 30, 2007 of $3.3 million.

The Group has estimated tax losses of $nil (2008: $32.8 million) at Gold Fields Australia (Pty) Limited. These estimated tax losses do not have an expiration date. In terms of current Australian taxation legislation, tax losses incurred by Gold Fields Australia (Pty) Limited are carried forward indefinitely.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Tax years open for assessments

 

South Africa (1)

   2001-2008

Ghana (2)

   All years open

Australia (3)

   2002-2008

Peru (4)

   2004-2008

 

Notes:

 

(1) The South African Tax legislation allows the Revenue Authorities to reopen assessments issued for a period of up to 3 years after the assessments were issued.

 

(2) The Ghanaian Tax Authorities have the right to examine and, if necessary, amend the income tax determined by the relevant Group entity for any year without limitation to the years which may be reassessed.

 

(3) The Australian Tax Authorities have the right to examine and, if necessary, amend the income tax determined by the relevant Group entity in the last four years, as from the date the tax returns have been filed.

 

(4) The Peruvian Tax Authorities have the right to examine and, if necessary, amend the income tax determined by the relevant Group entity in the last four years, as from the date the tax return have been filed.

It is possible that the Group will receive assessments during the next twelve months, which may have an effect on uncertain tax positions. The Group cannot estimate the amounts of possible changes as a result of an assessment.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

7 EARNINGS PER SHARE

 

     For the year ended June 30, 2009
     Income
Numerator

$’m
   Shares
Denominator
   Per-share
Amount

$

Basic earnings per share

        

Shares outstanding July 1, 2008

      653,200,682   

Weighted average number of shares issued during the year

      17,127,580   
              

Income available to common stockholders

   160.9    670,328,262    0.24

Fully diluted earnings per share

        

Effect of dilutive securities

   —      7,462,470   
              

Income available to common stockholders

   160.9    677,790,732    0.24
              
     For the year ended June 30, 2008
     Income
Numerator

$’m
   Shares
Denominator
   Per-share
Amount

$

Basic earnings per share

        

Shares outstanding July 1, 2007

      652,158,066   

Weighted average number of shares issued during the year

      380,146   
              

Income available to common stockholders

   452.5    652,538,212    0.69

Fully diluted earnings per share

        

Effect of dilutive securities*

   —      3,713,993   
              

Income available to common stockholders

   452.5    656,252,205    0.69
              

 

* The conversion of Mvela’s debt to equity ,which would have resulted in the issue of another 50,000,000 shares, is anti-dilutive and has been excluded from the calculation.

 

     For the year ended June 30, 2007
     Income
Numerator

$’m
   Shares
Denominator
   Per-share
Amount

$

Basic earnings per share

        

Shares outstanding July 1, 2006

      494,824,723   

Weighted average number of shares issued during the year

      63,434,963   
              

Income available to common stockholders

   246.1    558,259,686    0.44

Fully diluted earnings per share

        

Effect of dilutive securities*

   —      3,947,462   
              

Income available to common stockholders

   246.1    562,207,148    0.44
              

 

* The conversion of Mvela’s debt to equity, which would have resulted in the issue of another 47,000,049 shares, is anti-dilutive and has been excluded from the calculation.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

8 RECEIVABLES

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Product sale trade receivables

   137.1    64.7

Other trade receivables

   19.2    44.3

Deposits

   38.6    0.4

Value added tax

   144.0    131.0

Interest receivable

   1.1    0.8

Payroll debtors

   4.6    4.5

Prepayments

   26.8    23.9

Diesel rebate

   0.8    1.2

Other

   11.3    9.3
         
   383.5    280.1
         

 

9 INVENTORIES

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Ore stockpiles

   44.8    32.4

Gold in-process

   28.2    18.9

Consumable stores

   121.0    99.5

Other

   2.0    2.0
         
   196.0    152.8
         

 

10 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Cost

   9,361.6      8,701.5   

Accumulated depreciation and amortization

   (3,604.7   (3,277.8
            
   5,756.9      5,423.7   
            

Mining properties, mine development costs, mine plant facilities and mineral interests

   5,371.5      5,126.1   

Asset retirement costs

   87.1      76.4   

Other non-mining assets

   298.3      221.2   
            
   5,756.9      5,423.7   
            

Included in property, plant and equipment is cumulative capitalized interest, net of amortization, relating to the following assets:

    

South African operations

   13.2      5.6   

Tarkwa Mine

   17.8      5.1   

Cerro Corona

   89.2      47.6   
            
   120.2      58.3   
            

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment amounted to $433.5 million (2008: $400.5 million, 2007: $388.2 million).

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

11 GOODWILL

 

Balance at beginning of the year

   1,092.8      1,222.7   

Translation adjustment

   (8.1   (129.9
            

Balance at end of the year

   1,084.7      1,092.8   
            

The goodwill arose on the acquisition of South Deep as described in note 3(c) and was attributable to the upside potential of the asset, deferred tax and other factors. The total goodwill has been allocated to South Deep, being the reporting unit where it is tested for impairment as part of the reporting unit.

Goodwill is tested for impairment on an annual basis on June 30. In addition, the Group reviews and tests the carrying value of assets when events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying amount of a reporting unit may not be recoverable.

For goodwill impairment testing purposes, Gold Fields estimated the fair value of the South Deep reporting unit. The process for determining fair value is subjective as gold mining companies typically trade at a market capitalization that is based on a multiple of net asset value and requires management to make numerous assumptions. The net asset value represents a discounted cash flow valuation based on expected future cash flows. The expected future cash flows used to determine the fair value of the reporting unit are inherently uncertain and could materially change over time. They are significantly affected by a number of factors, including, but not limited to, reserves and production estimates, together with economic factors such as the spot gold price and foreign currency exchange rates, estimates of production costs, future capital expenditure and discount rates. Therefore it is possible that outcomes within the next financial year that are materially different from the assumptions used in the impairment testing process could require an adjustment to the carrying values.

Based on management’s assessment, no impairment to the goodwill was required at June 30, 2009. Management’s estimates and assumptions for the goodwill impairment test include:

 

   

Long-term gold price of R245,000 per kilogram ($950 per oz at an exchange rate of R8.02 to $1.00) for fiscal years 2010 and 2011 and R280,000 per kilogram ($950 per oz at an exchange rate of R9.17 to $1.00) for the remainder of the life of mine. The South Deep life of mine is 41 years.

 

   

An appropriate discount rate of 6% based on a calculated weighted average cost of capital to Gold Fields;

 

   

Expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

 

   

Expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves.

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

12 NON-CURRENT INVESTMENTS

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Listed investments (a)

   312.4    442.4

Unlisted investments (b)

   0.8    27.8

Investments held by environmental trust funds (c)

   110.0    93.3

Equity investees (d)

   51.2    171.1

Other investments

   0.8    2.8
         
   475.2    737.4
         

 

(a) Listed investments mainly consist of:

 

     2009    2008
     Number of
shares
   Market value,
$ per share
   Number of
shares
   Market value,
$ per share

Sino Gold Limited

   57,968,029    3.76    55,381,651    5.17

Mvelaphanda Resources Limited

   8,397,858    3.72    8,397,858    7.44

Conquest Mining Limited

   51,783,388    0.34    51,783,338    0.41

GoldQuest Mining Corporation

   5,362,500    0.07    5,362,500    0.37

Troy Resources NL

   3,130,400    0.91    3,130,400    2.09

Orezone Resources Inc

   5,208,333    0.43    41,666,667    1.09

Gold One International Limited

   12,500,000    0.26    12,500,000    0.05

Glencar Mining Plc

   27,431,197    0.01    —      —  

 

     The fair value of listed investments at June 30, 2009 of $312.4 million (2008: $442.4 million) comprises a cost of $263.7 million (2008: $306.3 million) and a net unrealized gain of $48.7 million (2008: $136.1 million). The net unrealized gain comprises a gross unrealized gain of $65.2 million (2008: $147.2 million) partly offset by a gross unrealized loss of $16.5 million (2008: $11.1 million). The gross unrealized loss of $16.5 million (2008: $711.1 million) comprises 8 equity investments (2008: 8) in listed entities. None of these equity investments have been in a continuous unrealized loss position for more than 12 months. A net realized loss of $16.1 million was reclassified from equity for the year ended June 30, 2009 (2008: profit of $3.7 million, 2007: $26.8 million). This realized loss consisted of gross realized gains of $7.2 million and gross realized losses of $23.3 million.

 

(b) Unlisted investments at June 30, 2008 comprised mainly preference shares in Mvelaphanda Resources Limited with a cost of $25.0 million.

 

(c) The environmental trust funds are irrevocable trusts under the Group’s control. The monies in the trusts are invested primarily in interest bearing short-term investments and the costs of these investments approximate their fair value. The investments provide for the estimated cost of rehabilitation during and at the end of the life of the Group’s South African mines. While the asset is under the Company’s control, it is not available for the general purposes of the Company. All income from this asset is reinvested or spent to meet these obligations. These obligations are described in note 15, “Provision for Environmental Rehabilitation”.

 

F-32


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

(d) Equity investees comprise the following at June 30, 2009 and 2008:

 

     Description of business    Ownership %    Market value

Investment

      2009    2008    2009    2008

Rusoro Mining Limited

   Gold mining    26.4    36.2    48.4    165.7

Rand Refinery Limited

   Refining of gold bullion and
by-products
   34.9    34.9    —      —  

 

     The carrying value of the equity investment in Rusoro:

 

     2009     2008  
     $’m     $’m  

Balance at July 1

   165.7      —     

Arising on disposal of interest in the Venezuelan assets

   —        236.9   

Share of current year loss

   (5.1   (20.7

Other comprehensive income movements

   (0.3   9.6   

Dilution loss recognised in statement of changes in shareholders’ equity

   (24.5   —     

Impairment of investment

   (87.4   (61.3

Translation

   —        1.2   
            

Balance at June 30

   48.4      165.7   
            

 

     Rusoro, a company listed on the TSX Venture Exchange, is a junior gold producer with a large land position in the Bolivar State gold region of southern Venezuela. Gold Fields acquired a 36.2% interest (140 million shares) in Rusoro as part of the consideration for the sale of the Group’s Venezuelan assets. At June 30, 2009, the interest in Rusoro had been reduced to 26.4% mainly because Gold Fields did not participate in a Rusoro rights offer during fiscal 2009. This resulted in a dilution loss of $24.5 million which has been accounted for in equity.

 

     The investment in Rusoro has been impaired to market value on June 30, 2009.

 

     The summarized financial information of Rusoro, is shown below:

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Current assets

   95.3      113.2   

Non-current assets

   882.2      1,505.7   

Current liabilities

   34.6      57.0   

Non-current liabilities

   311.8      518.3   

Minority interests and equity

   631.1      1,043.6   

Revenues

   76.8      38.3   

Gross loss

   6.0      (10.4
            

Net loss

   (30.7   (71.6
            

 

     The Group acquired its interest in Rusoro on November 30, 2007.

 

F-33


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

     The carrying value of the equity investment in Rand Refinery Limited (“Rand Refinery”):

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Balance at July 1

   5.4      1.2   

Share of current year profits recognized

   1.5      4.7   

Dividend received

   (4.2   —     

Translation

   0.1      (0.5
            

Balance at June 30

   2.8      5.4   
            

 

     The carrying value of the equity investment in Rand Refinery was reduced to nil in fiscal 2006 because Gold Fields’ share of the losses exceeded its carrying value in Rand Refinery. Gold Fields’ obligation to make good its share of the losses in the investee is limited to the carrying value of the investment. Due to profits realized since fiscal 2007, the carrying value of the investment has been adjusted accordingly. During the years ended June 30, 2009 and 2008, the Company received dividends from Rand Refinery of $4.2 million and $nil million, respectively.

 

     Rand Refinery acts as a sale agent on behalf of the Company’s African operations. The market value of the Company’s investment in Rand Refinery is not readily determinable. At June 30, 2009 an amount of $50.5 million was owing from Rand Refinery (2008: $25.5 million).

 

13 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE AND PROVISIONS

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Trade payables

   191.8    193.7

Accruals

   214.6    206.0

Payroll and other compensation

   57.5    57.8

Leave pay accrual

   50.7    47.1

Funds received for shares to be issued (1)

   —      96.0

Financial instruments payable

   —      1.4

Foreign levies payable

   0.3    2.9

Short term portion of deferred income and mining tax

   7.1    4.2

Other

   11.5    1.2
         
   533.5    610.3
         

 

(1) Relates to funds received from the minority shareholders of Gold Fields La Cima in fiscal 2008 for which the shares were not issued until fiscal 2009. The funds are included within minority shareholders as at 30 June 2009.

 

F-34


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14 SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Collateralized

    

—Mvelaphanda loan agreement (a)

   —        522.9   

—Split-tenor revolving credit facility (b)

   498.5      510.5   

—Syndicated revolving loan facility (c)

   72.0      —     

—Project finance facility (d)

   150.0      150.0   

—Preference shares (e)

   84.9      152.4   

Uncollateralized

    

—Commercial paper (f)

   141.8      —     

—Short-term syndicated facility (g)

   20.0      —     

—Industrial Development Corporation loan (h)

   —        1.1   

—Other loans (i)

   136.5      0.2   
            
   1,103.7      1,337.1   

Short-term loans and current portion of long-term loans

   (317.8   (772.9
            

Total long-term loans

   785.9      564.2   
            

(a) Mvelaphanda loan

On March 17, 2004, Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited (“Mvela Gold”), a wholly owned subsidiary of Mvelaphanda Resources Limited, advanced an amount of $591.3 million to GFI Mining South Africa (Pty) Limited (“GFIMSA”), (the “Mvela Loan”). The loan bore interest at a fixed rate of 10.57% nominal annual compounded semi-annually and was guaranteed by Gold Fields, Gold Fields Australia and Gold Fields Holding Company (BVI) Limited (formerly Gold Fields Guernsey). Interest was payable semi-annually and the loan amount was repayable five years from the date of advance.

Under the terms of the loan, on the date the loan was repaid, Mvela Gold was obligated to use the entire proceeds of the loan repayment to subscribe for new shares in GFIMSA such that after the subscription it owned 15% of the enlarged equity of GFIMSA.

In addition, for a period of one year after the subscription by Mvela Gold of the GFIMSA shares, each of Gold Fields and Mvela Gold was entitled to require the exchange of Mvela Gold’s GFIMSA shares for ordinary shares of Gold Fields of an equivalent value based on an exchange ratio equal to 15% of a discounted cash flow calculation as applied to GFIMSA’s operations divided by the same calculation as applied to Gold Fields’ operations, with certain adjustments.

In connection with the Mvela loan, GFIMSA entered into two interest rate swaps, an amortizing and an accreting swap. The amortizing swap for $236.2 million and the accreting swap of $355.1 million reflected the profile of the Mvela loan and was designated as a fair value hedge. The fixed rate receivable on these interest rate swaps was equal to the interest rate payable on the loan from Mvelaphanda Gold (Proprietary) Limited and the floating rate payable was the three month Johannesburg Interbank Agreed Rate, or JIBAR rate plus a margin of 1.025%.

On June 3, 2005, the interest rate swaps were closed-out resulting in a gain of $36.2 million. Of the $36.2 million, $9.9 million, offset by an exchange loss of $5.0 million, was accounted for in the statement of operations as a gain on financial instruments in fiscal 2009 (2008:$8.1 million and 2007:$8.2 million).

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

On March 17, 2009, the date the loan was repaid, Mvela Resources took receipt, through its wholly owned subsidiary Mvela Gold, of its 15% shareholding in GFIMSA. Immediately upon receipt of the GFIMSA shares, Mvela Gold exercised its right to exchange the GFIMSA shares to subscribe for 50 million new ordinary shares in Gold Fields as of the date of exchange. Pursuant to the above transactions, Mvela Gold owned approximately 7 per cent of the listed shares of Gold Fields immediately following the exchange, and Gold Fields again owns 100% of GFIMSA.

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Loan advanced

   591.3      591.3   

Fair value adjustment in relation to interest rate swap (up to close-out of swap in 2005)

   36.2      36.2   

Amortization of the fair value adjustment after close-out of interest rate swap

   (36.2   (26.3

Repayment of the loan

   (414.7   —     

Translation adjustment

   (176.6   (78.3
            

Balance at end of year

   —        522.9   
            

The fair value adjustment in relation to the interest rate swaps was calculated using cash flows over the remaining period of the debt discounted at the five year forward curve of the three month JIBAR rate plus a margin of 1.025%.

(b) Split-tenor revolving credit facility

On May 16, 2007, GFIMSA, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations entered into a $750.0 million split-tenor revolving credit facility consisting of a $250.0 million 364-day revolving tranche with a twelve-month term out option (“Facility A”) and a $500.0 million 5-year revolving tranche (“Facility B”).

On April 28, 2008 Gold Fields Limited exercised the term-out option under Facility A which converted the full $250.0 million advance at that point into a term loan with a final maturity date of May 16, 2009. In connection with its exercising the option, Gold Fields paid a term-out fee of 0.05% on the amount that was converted. In terms of the facility agreement, Facility B matures on May 16, 2012. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate purposes.

On May 21, 2007, Gold Fields Operations drew down $50.8 million under Facility A and $500.0 million under Facility B. In addition, on May 21, 2007, Orogen drew down $168.0 million under Facility A. On September 25, 2007 Orogen drew down $31.1 million under Facility A.

On December 6, 2007, Gold Fields utilized the proceeds from the sale of its Essakane exploration project in Burkina Faso and its Choco 10 mine in Venezuela to repay Facility A in its entirety ($250.0 million) and to partly repay Facility B ($10.0 million). On December 31, 2007 Gold Fields utilized the proceeds from the issue of non-convertible redeemable preference shares to further partly repay Facility B by $172 million. Subsequent to this Orogen drew down $73.0 million under Facility A on various dates and on April 25, 2008, Gold Fields Operations drew down $177.0 million under Facility A to partly repay its loan under Facility B. As a result, Gold Fields was able to exercise the term-out option under Facility A as detailed above. In addition Orogen drew down a further $121.0 million under Facility B on various dates subsequent to the term-out option being exercised.

On various dates during fiscal 2009 Orogen drew down a further US$120 million under facility B. On May 15, 2009, GF Operations drew down US$118 million under Facility B to partly refinance its maturing loan

 

F-36


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

under Facility A. The balance of the GF Operations loan outstanding under Facility A in the amount of US$59 million was refinanced with borrowings under a new $311 million syndicated revolving loan facility, which is detailed below. Also on May 15, 2009, Orogen repaid US$16 million of its portion of the maturing Facility A and refinanced the remaining US$57 million with borrowings under the $311 million syndicated revolving loan facility. The total borrowings at June 30, 2009 under this revolving credit facility were $500.0 million (2008: $512.0 million). The difference of US$1.5 million between the total borrowings above and the borrowings disclosed below relates to the transaction costs deducted from the liability on initial measurement.

The loan under Facility A bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.25% per annum while the loan under Facility B bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.30% per annum. Where the total utilizations under Facility A were equal to or greater than 50%, a utilization fee of 0.05% per annum was paid on the total amount of utilization. The utilization fee was paid quarterly in arrears.

Borrowings under this revolving credit facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GFIMSA, Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations.

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Balance at beginning of year

   510.5      717.3   

Loan advanced, net of transaction costs

   138.0      225.1   

Loan repayments

   (150.0   (431.9
            

Balance at end of year

   498.5      510.5   
            

(c) Syndicated revolving loan facility

On May 7, 2009, GFIMSA, Orogen and GF Operations entered into a 364-day US$311 million syndicated revolving loan facility with the option to extend the term on the same terms for an additional 364 days from the date of the original final maturity (the “Extension Option”). At any time prior to the date of final maturity, Gold Fields has the option to convert all advances outstanding under this facility into a term loan with a final maturity date being no more than 24 months after the signing date of the facility (the “Term Out Option”). The Extension Option may not be exercised if the Term Out Option has been previously exercised. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate purposes.

On May 15, 2009, GF Operations and Orogen drew down US$59 million and US$57 million respectively under this facility to refinance their respective portion of the loans maturing under Facility A of the Split-tenor revolving credit facility as described above. On June 15, 2009, GF Operations repaid US$44 million of its loan. The total borrowings at year end under the facility were US$72 million.

The facility bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 2.75% per annum. The borrowers are required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 1.10% per annum, payable on the undrawn portion of the facility. A term-out fee of 0.25% flat is payable on the date on which Gold Fields exercises the Term Out Option. This fee will be calculated on the amount of the facility which has been converted into the term loan.

 

F-37


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Borrowings under the syndicated revolving loan facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GFIMSA, GF Holdings, Orogen and GF Operations.

 

     2009
$’m
 

Balance at beginning of year

   —     

Loan advanced, net of transaction costs

   116.0   

Loan repayments

   (44.0
      

Balance at end of year

   72.0   
      

(d) Project Finance Facility

On November 14, 2006, Gold Fields La Cima (formerly known as Sociedad Minera La Cima S.A.) entered into a $150.0 million project finance facility with a number of lenders. The purpose of the facility is to finance the project costs related to the development of the Cerro Corona copper-gold porphyry deposit located in the Hualgayoc province in the Cajamarca region in northern Peru.

At June 30, 2009 Gold Fields La Cima has drawn down $150 million (2008, $150 million) under this facility.

As at June 30, 2009, Gold Fields La Cima had drawn down $150.0 million (2008: $150.0 million). The loan bears interest at a margin over LIBOR of 0.45% during the pre-completion phase (that is, prior to the financial completion date) and between 1.25% and 1.75% thereafter. Scheduled principal payments shall be made in 16 semi-annual instalments of various amounts ranging from 4.75% to 6.75% of the principal amount, beginning June 30, 2009. The final instalment is due on the tenth anniversary of the signing date.

During the pre-completion phase the loan is guaranteed by Gold Fields and Gold Fields Corona (BVI) Limited (a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields). The facility is secured by, among other things, pledges of and mortages over the assets and properties of Gold Fields La Cima.

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Balance at beginning of year

   150.0    127.0

Loan advanced, net of transaction costs

   —      23.0
         

Balance at end of year

   150.0    150.0
         

(e) Preference shares

On December 24, 2007 Gold Fields issued R1.2 billion of non-convertible redeemable preference shares to Rand Merchant Bank (RMB, a division of First Rand Bank Limited). The dividend rate payable is a floating rate that increases from 22% to up to 61% of the prime lending rate quoted by First Rand Bank Limited (the “Prime Rate”) over the life of the Preference Shares. In certain circumstances, the dividend rate increases to 61% of the Prime Rate in the event the Preference Shares are redeemed before their scheduled maturity date and the dividend rate is also subject to adjustment in the case of a change in law or regulation. Dividends accrue quarterly and are rolled up until the redemption date. The purpose of the preference shares was to refinance existing credit facilities.

 

F-38


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The preference shares mature on January 24, 2011 and have been guaranteed by GFIMSA, Orogen and Gold Fields Operations. On October 10, 2008 $63.5 million of the outstanding preference shares was repaid. In addition, an attributable dividend of $2.5 million was also paid on the same date. The balance of the preference shares is redeemable at the option of Gold Fields.

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Shares issued

   172.0      172.0   

Preference share dividend

   9.8      2.7   

Redemptions

   (63.5   —     

Translation

   (33.5   (22.3
            

Balance at end of year

   84.9      152.4   
            

(f) Commercial paper

On April 6, 2009, Gold Fields established a R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Programme (the “Programme”) in terms of which Gold Fields may, from time to time, issue notes denominated in any currency. The notes will not be subject to any minimum and maximum maturity and the maximum aggregate nominal outstanding amount of all notes will not exceed R10 billion. The Programme has been registered with the Bond Exchange of South Africa (“BESA”).

On April 9 and June 4, 2009, Gold Fields issued listed notes totalling $66 million and $67 million respectively. These notes mature either three months or six months from the date of issue and bear interest at the Johannesburg Interbank Agreed Rate (“JIBAR”) plus a margin ranging from 0.675% to 1% per annum.

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$‘m

Loan advanced

   133.5    —  

Translation

   8.3    —  
         

Balance at end of year

   141.8    —  
         

(g) Short-term syndicated facility

Gold Fields Ghana Limited entered into a twelve month $20 million syndicated facility. The facility is to be used for working capital requirements associated with the expansion of the carbon-in-leach (CIL) plant at the Tarkwa mine and related capital expenditure. The loan bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 3.0% per annum.

In December 2008, Tarkwa drew down $20 million under the loan. The principal payments under the loan are scheduled monthly, beginning on June 30, 2009 as follows: $2 million for the first four months and $4 million for the last three months beginning June 30, 2009. The final instalment is due on December 31, 2009.

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Loan advanced

   20.0    —  
         

Balance at end of year

   20.0    —  
         

 

F-39


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

(h) Industrial Development Corporation loan

On May 28, 2004, Living Gold (Pty) Limited (“Living Gold”), a subsidiary of GFIMSA, entered into an agreement with the Industrial Development Corporation of South Africa Limited (“IDC”) in terms of which the IDC agreed to provide a loan facility of $2.5 million. On November 24, 2004, Living Gold drew down the full amount of the facility and on 1 July 2006 the IDC converted $1.4 million of the outstanding loan to equity. On 1 July 2008 the remaining $1.1 million was converted to equity.

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Balance at beginning of year

   1.1      1.2   

Capitalisation of loan to minority interests

   (1.1   —     

Translation

   —        (0.1
            

Balance at end of year

   —        1.1   
            

The Group was in compliance with all of its debt covenant ratios and restrictions as of June 30, 2009 and 2008.

(i) Other loans

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Balance at beginning of year

   0.2      0.6   

Loans advanced

   904.8      173.3   

Loans repaid

   (736.0   (173.7

Translation

   (32.5   (0.0
            

Balance at end of year

   136.5      0.2   
            

Other loans comprise:

R500 million revolving credit facility : On August 21, 2007, GFIMSA entered into a R500 million 364-day revolving credit facility. The facility was used for general corporate purposes and bore interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 0.70% per annum. During fiscal 2008, GFIMSA drew down and repaid R500 million under the facility.

In fiscal 2009, GFIMSA drew R500 million under this facility and fully repaid the loan on August 19, 2008, three days before the facility expired. On September 22, 2008, this facility was renegotiated as a short term facility expiring on October 21, 2008. On May 15, 2009, R500 million was drawn down under the facility. No repayments had been made as at June 30, 2009.

Borrowings under the facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields Limited.

On 11 November 2008, GFIMSA entered into a new R500 million 364-day revolving credit facility. This facility is to be used for general corporate and working capital requirements. The facility bears interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 1.20% per annum.

R1 billion revolving credit facility : On January 31, 2008, GFIMSA, GF Operations, Orogen and GFL Mining Services Limited entered into a R1 billion 364-day revolving credit facility effective May 15, 2008. The facility was to be used for capital expenditure in respect of gold mining projects, general corporate and working

 

F-40


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

capital requirements. Borrowings under the facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, GF Holdings, GF Operations, Orogen and GFIMSA and bore interest at JIBAR plus 0.70% per annum. Gold Fields paid a quarterly commitment fee of 0.15% per annum on any undrawn amounts under the facility.

The group utilised the abovementioned facility with other uncommitted loan facilities from some of the major banks to fund the capital expenditure and working capital requirements of the South African operations. The total of $904.8 million (2008: $173.3 million) borrowed under the combination of these loan facilities was repaid in part during fiscal 2009 from cash profits generated by the operations. There were no amounts outstanding at June 30, 2009 and 2008.

R1.5 billion long-term revolving credit facility : On May 6, 2009, GFIMSA and GF Operations (the “Borrowers”) entered into a R1.5 billion 5 year revolving credit facility effective June 10, 2009. The facility is to be utilised for capital expenditure, general corporate and working capital requirements and the refinancing of existing debt.

The facility is unutilised at June 30, 2009. It bears interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 2.95% per annum. The Borrowers are required to pay a commitment fee of 0.75% per annum on the undrawn and un-cancelled amounts of the facility, calculated and payable semi-annually in arrears. The facility matures on June 10, 2014. Borrowings at June 30, 2009 under the facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GF Holdings, GF Operations, Orogen and GFIMSA.

(j) Debt maturity ladder

The combined aggregate maturities of short- and long-term loans at June 30, 2009 for each of the next five years is tabulated below:

 

Maturity

   $

1

   317.8

2

   171.2

3

   515.4

4

   19.5

5

   20.3

Thereafter

   59.5

 

15 PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL REHABILITATION

The Group has made, and expects to make in the future, expenditures to comply with environmental laws and regulations, but cannot predict the full amount of such future expenditures. Estimated future reclamation costs are based principally on legal and regulatory requirements. The following is a reconciliation of the total liability for environmental rehabilitation:

 

     2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
 

Asset retirement obligations

    

Balance at July 1

   216.2      197.2   

Addition to liabilities

   19.2      16.9   

Liabilities settled

   (4.0   (3.9

Accretion of liability

   13.9      12.0   

Foreign currency translation adjustment

   (8.4   (6.0
            

Balance at June 30

   236.9      216.2   
            

 

F-41


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The Group intends to finance the ultimate rehabilitation costs of the South African operations from the monies invested with the environmental trust fund, ongoing contributions, as well as the proceeds of the sale of assets and gold from plant clean-up at the time of mine closure.

 

16 PROVISION FOR POST-RETIREMENT HEALTH CARE COSTS

 

     2009    2008
     $’m    $’m

Gold Fields Group (excluding South Deep) accrued post-retirement health care costs (a)

   11.0    7.2

South Deep accrued post-retirement health care costs (b)

   0.4    0.7
         

Gold Fields Group accrued post-retirement health care costs

   11.4    7.9
         

The Group is exposed to obligations for post-retirement health care costs under two separate schemes, the Gold Fields Group (excluding South Deep) health care scheme and the South Deep health care scheme.

(a) Gold Fields Group (excluding South Deep) accrued post-retirement health care costs

The Group has certain liabilities to subsidize the contributions payable by certain pensioners and dependants of ex-employees on a pay-as-you-go basis. The Group’s contributions to these schemes on behalf of current and retired employees amounted to $0.1 million in fiscal 2009 (2008: $0.2 million and 2007: $0.2 million). The obligation has been actuarially valued and the outstanding contributions will be funded over the lifetime of these pensioners and dependants.

The following table sets forth the funded status and amounts recognized by the Group (excluding South Deep) for post-retirement health care costs:

 

     2009     2008  
     $’m     $’m  

Actuarial present value

   11.0      7.2   

Plan assets at fair value

   —        —     
            

Accumulated benefit obligation in excess of plan assets

   11.0      7.2   

Prior service costs

   —        —     

Unrecognized net (gain)/loss

   —        —     
            

Post-retirement health care liability

   11.0      7.2   
            
    

The following is a reconciliation of the benefit obligation:

    

Balance at beginning of year

   7.2      8.6   

Service costs

   0.6      0.8   

Contributions paid

   (0.1   (0.2

Additional/(release of) cross subsidization liability

   2.9      (1.4

Foreign currency translation adjustment

   0.3      (0.6
            

Balance at end of year

   11.0      7.2   
            

 

F-42


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The obligation has been valued using the projected unit credit funding method on past service liabilities. The valuation assumes a health care cost inflation rate of 7.0% per annum (2008: 8.0%) and a discount rate of 8.375% per annum (2008: 10.0%).

 

     2009    2008
     $’m    $’m

Service costs

   0.6    0.8
         

Net periodic benefit cost

   0.6    0.8
         

Assumed health care cost trend rates have a significant effect on the amounts reported for the health care plans. A one percentage point increase in assumed health care cost trend rates would have increased the aggregate of service and interest cost for 2009 by $0.2 million (2008: $0.1 million). The effect of this change on the accumulated post-retirement health care benefit obligation at fiscal year-end 2009 would be an increase of $1.0 million (2008: $0.3 million). A one percentage point decrease in assumed health care cost trend rates would have decreased the aggregate of service and interest cost for 2009 by $0.1 million (2008: $0.1 million). The effect of this change on the accumulated post-retirement health care benefit obligation at fiscal year-end 2009 would be a decrease of $0.9 million (2008: $0.3 million).

(b) South Deep accrued post-retirement health care costs

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, the post-retirement health care cost liability was assumed. The Group has certain liabilities to provide fixed monthly post-retirement medical benefits to certain pensioners and dependents of ex-employees. The Group’s contributions to these schemes on behalf of current and retired employees amounted to $0.1 million in fiscal 2009 (2008:$0.2 million). The obligation was actuarially valued at June 30, 2009 and the outstanding contributions will be funded until December 31, 2011.

The following table sets forth the funded status and amounts recognized by the Group for post-retirement health care costs:

 

     2009     2008  
     $’m     $’m  

Actuarial present value

   0.4      0.7   

Plan assets at fair value

   —        —     
            

Accumulated benefit obligation in excess of plan assets

   0.4      0.7   

Prior service costs

   —        —     

Unrecognized net (gain)/loss

   —        —     
            

Post-retirement health care liability

   0.4      0.7   
            

The following is a reconciliation of the benefit obligation:

    

Balance at beginning of year

   0.7      0.9   

Service costs

   0.1      —     

Contributions paid

   (0.1   (0.2

Release of cross subsidization liability

   (0.1   (0.1

Foreign currency translation adjustment

   (0.2   0.1   
            

Balance at end of year

   0.4      0.7   
            

 

F-43


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The obligation has been valued using the projected unit credit funding method on past service liabilities. The valuation assumes a health care cost inflation rate of 7.0% per annum (2008: 8.0%) and a discount rate of 8.375% per annum (2008: 10.0%).

 

     2009    2008
     $’m    $’m

The net periodic benefit cost is explained as follows:

     

Service costs

   0.1    —  

Recognized actuarial loss

   —      —  
         

Net periodic benefit cost

   0.1    —  
         

An increase or decrease in assumed health care trend rates would not have affected the interest cost for fiscal 2009. A change in the medical inflation assumption does not affect the employer liability as the subsidy does not escalate. The monthly contributions will remain constant.

 

17 EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

Retirement benefits

The Gold Fields Limited Corporate Pension Fund, a defined benefit scheme, with 14 active members, transferred all pensioner members to a retirement scheme of their choice by June 30, 2005. The scheme was valued at intervals of not less than three years using the projected unit credit method. The last actuarial valuation was carried out at June 30, 2004 and showed the fund was under-funded by approximately $0.4 million, which was fully provided for. This was the only defined benefit scheme in the Group and was wound up in fiscal 2009.

Contributions to the various retirement schemes are fully expensed during the year in which they are funded. The cost of providing retirement benefits for the Company’s defined contribution plans for the year amounted to $57.0 million (2008: $68.0 million and 2007: $56.5 million).

Share option schemes

The Company currently maintains the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan and the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan. The Company also maintains prior stock plans (the GF Management Incentive Scheme and the GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan), but no longer grants awards under these plans. The details of these Plans are discussed below.

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan: At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, or The 2005 Plan, under which employees, including executive directors, will be compensated going forward.

The 2005 Plan provides for two types of awards: performance vesting restricted shares, or PVRS, and performance allocated share appreciation rights, or SARS. The PVRS will only be released to participants and the SARS will vest three years after the date of the award and/or allocation of such shares. However, in respect of the PVRS, Company performance criteria need to be met in respect of awards to executives. The size of the initial allocation of SARS and PVRS is dependent on the performance of the participant at the time of allocation. The allocations under The 2005 Plan are usually made annually in March. A special allocation was made in June 2008 as a direct response to the need to retain critical skills.

 

F-44


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Details of the PVRS and SARS granted under this Plan are as follows:

 

     Number of
PVRS
    Number of
SARS
    Average price
         Rand    US$

Outstanding at July 1, 2006

   413,700      979,250      125.28    19.58

Granted during the year

   1,507,797      876,559      124.19    17.25

Exercised and released

   (2,042   (805   125.28    17.40

Forfeited

   (64,003   (89,464   120.13    16.68
                     

Outstanding at June 30, 2007

   1,855,452      1,765,540      124.75    17.45

Granted during the year

   4,238,161      2,569,481      105.97    14.58

Exercised and released

   (21,933   —        —      —  

Forfeited

   (674,793   (497,084   118.77    16.34
                     

Outstanding at June 30, 2008

   5,396,887      3,837,937      112.73    14.09
                     

Granted during the year

   2,616,171      1,311,271      108.90    12.09

Exercised and released

   (73,954   —        —      —  

Forfeited

   (880,240   (539,582   121.07    13.44
                     

Conditions for vesting not met

   (226,900   —        —      —  
                     

Outstanding at June 30, 2009

   6,831,964      4,609,626      111.50    13.83
                     

In terms of the 2005 Plan rules, PVRS are granted for no consideration, vest after three years from grant date and do not expire. The PVRS due to vest in fiscal 2009 did not meet the vesting conditions. None of the PVRS granted during the years ended June 30, 2009, 2008 or 2007 were exercisable on June 30, 2009.

At the time the 2005 Plan was first implemented, the release of PVRS was subject to, among other things, the Group’s relative performance on the Philadelphia XAU Index (“XAU Index”). In fiscal 2008, it became evident that the XAU Index was not representative of Gold Fields’ peer competitors, as some of the companies in the XAU Index are not pure gold mining companies. Furthermore, since the selection of the XAU Index as a benchmark, a number of relatively small gold producers have been included in the XAU Index and again these cannot be regarded as representative of Gold Fields’ peer competitors. Accordingly instead of using the XAU Index, Gold Fields’ performance will be measured against only five gold mining companies whom it believes can be regarded as its peer competitors.

The incremental fair value resulting from the modification amounts to $17.1 million which will be expensed over the remaining vesting period of the restricted shares, with $4.7 million and $2.1 million having been included in Share-based compensation for fiscal 2009 and fiscal 2008 respectively.

In terms of the 2005 Plan rules, SARS currently expire no later than six years from the grant date and vest three years after grant date. 558,863 SARS granted during the year ended June 30, 2006 were exercisable on June 30, 2009. The average exercise price for SARS outstanding at June 30, 2009 was R111.50 ($13.83).

 

F-45


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The following tables summarize information relating to the options outstanding at June 30, 2009.

 

     Outstanding options
     Price range    Number of
options
   Contractual
life

(in years)
   Weighted average
exercise price
     Rand    US$          Rand    US$

Range of prices

   69.48 – 124.19    8.62 – 15.41    4,014,855    4.93    109.45    13.58
   124.20 – 127.72    15.41 – 15.85    594,771    2.76    125.31    15.55
                             

Total

         4,609,626    4.65    111.50    13.83
                         

The PVRS have not been included in the table above as they do not have an expiry date and are granted for no consideration.

GF Management Incentive Scheme: Prior to approval of The 2005 Plan, share options were available to executive officers and other employees, as determined by the Board of Directors under The GF Management Incentive Scheme. Options to purchase a total of 2,096,811 ordinary shares were outstanding under The GF Management Incentive Scheme as of September 30, 2009, of which options to purchase 191,500 ordinary shares at a weighted average price of Rand 77.27 were held by the executive directors of Gold Fields. The exercise prices of all outstanding options range between Rand 46.23 and Rand 154.65 per ordinary share and they expire between July 7, 2009 and February 20, 2013. The exercise price of each ordinary share which is the subject of an option is the weighted average price of the ordinary shares on the JSE on the day immediately preceding the date on which the Board of Directors resolved to grant the option.

Each option may normally only be exercised by a participant on the following bases: (1) after two years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than one-third of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; (2) after three years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than a further one-third (representing two-thirds cumulatively) of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; and (3) after four years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of all the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option, subject to revision by the Board of Directors. For so long as a person continues to work for Gold Fields, options lapse seven years after the date of acceptance of the option by the participant. Options vest as soon as they are exercisable, and employees who leave Gold Fields have one year following their departure to exercise options which have vested. Options which are not yet exercisable are forfeited upon leaving employment, subject to exceptions relating to changes in control of Gold Fields and no fault termination of service as part of organizational restructuring.

The share option scheme may be amended from time to time by the Board of Directors and the trustees of the scheme in any respect (except in relation to amendments affecting: (1) the eligibility of participants under the scheme; (2) the formula for calculating the total number of ordinary shares which may be issued under the scheme; (3) the maximum number of options which may be acquired by any participant; (4) the option price formula; and (5) the voting, dividend and transfer rights attaching to options, which may only be amended through approval in a general meeting), provided that no such amendment shall operate to affect the vested rights of any participant.

The first allocations were made under The 2005 Plan in March 2006 and no further allocations will be made under The GF Management Incentive Scheme from that date. A total of 5% of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital, being 35,249,451 shares as of September 30, 2009, is reserved for issuance under all the prevailing share schemes described above. This percentage may only be amended with the approval of shareholders in general meeting and the JSE.

At the annual general meeting held on October 31, 2001, the shareholders approved an increase in the maximum number of shares to 5% of the Company’s issued ordinary shares as at June 30, 2001, being

 

F-46


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

22,791,830 shares. For the convenience of the reader, the Rand amounts have been converted to U.S. dollars at the balance sheet rates for the respective fiscal years.

Details of the options granted under the GF Management Scheme are as follows:

 

     Number of
Options
    Average option price
           Rand                US$        

Outstanding at July 1, 2006

   6,948,560      75.81    10.20

Granted during the year

   —        —      —  

Exercised and released

   (899,263   65.29    9.07

Forfeited

   (464,324   76.63    10.64
               

Outstanding at July 1, 2007

   5,584,973      76.66    10.72

Granted during the year

   —        —      —  

Exercised and released

   (990,175   71.82    9.88

Forfeited

   (382,579   72.33    9.95
               

Outstanding at July 1, 2008

   4,212,219      78.38    9.80

Granted during the year

   —        —      —  

Exercised and released

   (1,367,882   69.69    7.73

Forfeited

   (539,916   105.39    11.70
               

Outstanding at July 1, 2009

   2,304,421      77.20    9.58
               

In terms of the GF Management Scheme rules, options currently expire no later than seven years from the grant date and vest as follows. Upon the second anniversary of the grant date, a third of the total option grant vests, and then annually upon future anniversaries of the grant date, a further third of the total option grant vests. Proceeds received by the Company from the exercise of options are credited to common stock and additional paid-in capital. The options exercisable on June 30, 2009, 2008 and 2007 were 2,266,799, 3,307,624 and 3,152,277 respectively. The range of exercise prices for options outstanding at June 30, 2009 was R46.23 to R154.65. The range of exercise prices for options is wide primarily due to the fluctuation of the price of the Company’s stock over the period of the grants.

No further allocations are being made under the GF Management Incentive Scheme in view of the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan. However, during fiscal 2009 some share option expiry dates were extended to enable participants who were disadvantaged due to closed periods to be placed in an equitable position. The incremental fair value of the modification is R8.1 million ($0.9 million) and was accounted for in its entirety in fiscal 2009.

The following directors were affected by the modification:

 

     Number of
options
   Weighted
average price
(Rand)
   Contractual
life extended
by (years)

Executive directors

        

Nicholas J. Holland

   172,499    76.59    0.38

Terence P. Goodlace

   3,167    154.65    0.01

Non-Executive directors

        

Kofi Ansah

   6,700    68.59    0.39

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

   25,000    84.79    0.39

Chris I. Von Christierson

   20,000    99.21    0.39

Alan J. Wright

   55,000    68.41    0.39

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The following tables summarize information relating to the options outstanding at June 30, 2009.

 

               Outstanding options
               Number of
options
   Contractual
life

(in years)
   Weighted average
exercise price
     Rand    US$          Rand    US$

Range of prices

   36.07 – 57.50    4.48 – 7.13    93,200    0.02    46.23    5.74
   57.51 – 73.29    7.14 – 9.09    993,156    2.86    65.30    8.10
   73.80 – 84.17    9.16 – 10.44    785,186    1.53    81.22    10.08
   84.18 – 119.90    10.44 – 14.88    359,481    1.77    96.61    11.99
   125.37 – 154.65    15.55 – 19.19    73,398    1.51    139.55    17.31
                             

Total

         2,304,421    2.08    77.20    9.58
                         

 

               Exercisable options
     Price range    Number of
options
   Weighted average
exercise price
     Rand    US$       Rand    US$

Range of prices

   46.23 – 46.23    5.74 – 5.74    93,200    46.23    5.74
   60.40 – 73.22    7.49 – 9.08    993,156    65.30    8.10
   73.80 – 84.17    9.16 – 10.44    785,186    81.22    10.08
   86.01 – 116.85    10.67 – 14.50    329,425    96.22    11.94
   125.37 – 154.65    15.55 – 19.19    65,832    139.42    17.30
                        

Total

         2,266,799    76.68    9.51
                    

These options will expire if not exercised at specific dates ranging from July 7, 2009 to February 20, 2013. Market prices of shares for which options were exercised during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2009 and 2008 ranged from R54.00 to R135.00.

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Director Share Plan: At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan, or The 2005 Non-Executive Plan. Participants in The 2005 Non-Executive Plan will be non-executive directors of Gold Fields who are not members of the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee, which is a committee comprising the Chief Executive Officer and two representatives of shareholders of Gold Fields nominated by the Chief Executive Officer under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan. The Plan provides for the release of restricted shares awarded to the non-executive directors three years after the date of the award, provided that the non-executive director is not removed, disqualified or forced to resign from the Board of Directors during that period. No consideration is payable for the grant of an award of restricted shares. Awards in respect of 52,600 shares were authorized at Gold Fields’ annual general meeting on November 12, 2008.

 

F-48


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Details of the restricted shares granted under this Plan are as follows:

 

     No of restricted
shares
 

Outstanding at July 1, 2006

   33,000   

Granted during the year

   18,000   

Exercised and released

   —     

Forfeited

   —     

Outstanding at June 30, 2007

   51,000   
      

Granted during the year

   29,600   

Exercised and released

   —     

Forfeited

   —     

Outstanding at June 30, 2008

   80,600   
      

Granted during the year

   52,600   

Exercised and released

   (33,000

Forfeited

   —     
      

Outstanding at June 30, 2009

   100,200   
      

The restricted shares have not been split per range as they do not have an expiry date and are granted for no consideration. In addition, none of the vested instruments were exercisable at June 30, 2009.

During fiscal 2008, the terms of the restricted shares granted to non-executive directors were modified in the same way as the PVRS granted under the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan. The incremental fair value resulting from the modification amounted to $0.5 million to be expensed over the remaining life of the options and the portion relating to fiscal 2009 and fiscal 2008 amounted to $0.2 million and $0.1 million respectively and are included in share-based compensation for fiscal 2009 and fiscal 2008.

The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan: Prior to the approval of The 2005 Non-Executive Plan, share options were available to non-executive directors selected by the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee. No member of the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee could be a participant in The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan. The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan was adopted at the annual general meeting of shareholders on October 31, 2001. The exercise price of each ordinary share which is the subject of an option is the weighted average price of the ordinary shares on the JSE on the day immediately preceding the date on which the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee resolves to grant the option.

Under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan, all options granted may only be exercised no less than 12 months and no more than five years after the date on which the option was accepted by the participant.

If an option holder ceases to hold office for any reason, he will be entitled within 30 days to exercise share options which he was entitled to exercise immediately prior to his ceasing to hold office, failing which the options shall automatically lapse. The share option plan may be amended from time to time by the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee in any respect, except in relation to: (1) the eligibility of participants under the plan; (2) the formula for calculating the total number of ordinary shares which may be acquired pursuant to the plan; (3) the maximum number of options which may be acquired by any participant; (4) the price payable by participants; and (5) the voting, dividend and transfer rights attaching to options, which may only be amended through approval by the shareholders in a general meeting and by the JSE.

 

F-49


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The exercise prices of all outstanding options granted under this plan range between Rand 68.59 and Rand 110.03 per ordinary share, and they expire between December 2, 2009 and February 12, 2011.

Following the approval of The 2005 Non-Executive Plan at the Annual General Meeting held on November 17, 2005 and the approval of the first allocations under that Plan at that meeting, no further allocations will be made under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan.

The following tables summarize information relating to the options outstanding at June 30, 2009. For the convenience of the reader, the Rand amounts have been converted to U.S. dollars at the balance sheet rates for the respective fiscal years.

Details of the Plan are as follows:

 

     Number of
Options
    Average option price
           Rand            US$    

Outstanding as of June 30, 2006

   184,400      82.66    11.13

Granted during the year

   —        —      —  

Exercised and released

   (10,000   —      —  
               

Outstanding as of June 30, 2007

   174,400      83.47    11.67

Granted during the year

   —        —      —  

Exercised and released

   (27,700   81.71    11.24
               

Outstanding as of June 30, 2008

   146,700      83.81    10.48

Granted during the year

   —        —      —  

Exercised and released

   (25,000   43.70    4.85

Forfeited

   (40,000   99.21    11.01
               

Outstanding as of June 30, 2009

   81,700      88.54    10.99
               

The following tables summarize information relating to options outstanding under the Plan as of June 30, 2009.

 

               Outstanding options
                     
               Number of
options
   Contractual
life

years
   Weighted average
Exercise price
       Rand    US$              Rand            US$    

Range of prices

   65.56 – 88.37    8.13 – 10.96    26,700    1.64    68.59    8.51
   88.38 – 110.03    10.97 – 13.65    55,000    0.83    98.22    12.19
                             
         81,700    1.09    88.54    11.07
                         

 

               Exercisable options
     Rand    US$    Number of
options
   Contractual
life

years
   Weighted average
Exercise price
                   Rand            US$    

Range of prices

   65.56 – 88.37    8.13 – 10.96    26,700    1.64    68.59    8.51
   88.38 – 110.03    10.97 – 13.65    55,000    0.83    98.22    12.19
                             
         81,700    1.09    88.54    11.07
                         

 

F-50


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

These options will expire if not exercised at specific dates ranging from December 2, 2009 to February 12, 2011. Market prices of shares for which options were exercised during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2009 and 2008 ranged from R54.00 to R135.00.

The compensation cost related to awards not yet recognized under all four schemes amounts to $111.7 million and is to be spread over three years.

The Company uses the Black Scholes Model to value the SARS. The inputs to the model for awards granted during the year were as follows:

 

     2009     2008  

Weighted average exercise price—Rand

   R108.90      R105.98   

Weighted average expected volatility (based on a statistical analysis of the share price on a weighted moving average basis for the expected term of the option)

   51.7   41.7

Expected term (years)

   3.0 – 4.2      3.0 – 4.2   

Long-term expected dividend yield

   1.8   1.5

Weighted average risk free interest rate

   6.90   10.82

Weighted average fair value—Rand

   R45.90      R41.72   

The Company uses the Monte-Carlo Simulation to value the PVRS. The inputs to the model for awards granted during the year were as follows:

 

     2009     2008  

Weighted average expected volatility (based on a statistical analysis of the share price on a weighted moving average basis for the expected term of the option)

   67.80   42.37

Expected term (years)

   3.0      3.0   

Historical dividend yield

   2.30   1.45

Weighted average risk free interest rate (based on US interest rate)

   0.60   2.79

Weighted average fair value—Rand

   R209.40      R146.30   

The Company used the following inputs to calculate the effect of the modification to the PVRS in fiscal 2008:

 

Weighted average expected volatility (based on a statistical analysis of the share price on a weighted moving average basis for the expected term of the option)

   41.19

Expected term (years)

   3.0   

Expected dividend yield

   0.83

Weighted average risk free interest rate (based on US interest rate)

   2.46

Weighted average fair value—Rand

   R62.53   

 

F-51


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

18 DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FAIR VALUE AND CREDIT RISK OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Risk management activities

In the normal course of its operations, the Group is exposed to commodity price, currency, interest rate, liquidity and credit risk. In order to manage these risks, the Group has developed a comprehensive risk management process to facilitate control and monitoring of these risks.

Concentration of credit risk

The Group’s financial instruments do not represent a concentration of credit risk as the Group deals with a number of major banks. Accounts receivable are regularly monitored and assessed and where necessary an adequate level of provision is maintained.

A formal process of allocating counterparty exposure and prudential limits is approved by the audit committee and is applied under the supervision of the Group’s executive committee. Facilities requiring margin payments are not engaged.

Foreign currency and commodity price risk

In the normal course of business the Group enters into transactions for the sale of its gold, denominated in US Dollars. In addition, the Group has assets and liabilities in a number of different currencies (primarily US Dollars and Australian Dollars). As a result, the Group is subject to transaction and translation exposure from fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates.

As at June 30, 2009, Gold Fields held the following derivative instrument to protect its exposure to adverse movements in foreign currency.

 

  As a result of the draw down on January 31, 2007 of $550 million under a $1.8 billion bridge loan facility entered into to close-out the Western Areas gold derivative structure and refinance certain working capital loans, U.S. dollar/rand forward cover was purchased during the fiscal quarter ended March 31, 2007 in an amount of $550.8 million for settlement August 6, 2007, at an average forward rate of R7.3279 based on a spot rate of R7.1918. Subsequently, that cover was extended for periods of between one and three months during fiscal 2008 and 2009. The cover was reduced as a result of loan repayments of $60.8 million and $172.0 million made on December 6, 2007 and December 31, 2007 respectively. During fiscal 2009, a further amount of $44 million was repaid against the loan and the forward cover was reduced by the same amount. The balance of the $274 million forward cover was extended to July 15, 2009, being the next repayment date on the loan, at an average forward rate of R8.0893/$1. For accounting purposes, this forward cover has been designated as a hedging instrument. As a result the gains and losses are accounted for under foreign exchange gains/(losses), along with gains and losses on the underlying loan that has been hedged. The forward cover points are deemed to be an interest cost and are therefore accounted for as part of interest. The forward cover was closed out on September 17, 2009.

 

F-52


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Under the long-established structure of sales agreements prevalent in the industry, substantially all of Gold Fields’ copper concentrate sales are provisionally priced at the time of shipment. The provisional prices are finalized in a contractually specified future period (generally one to three months) primarily based on quoted LME prices. Sales subject to final pricing are generally settled in a subsequent month. Because a significant portion of Gold Fields’ copper concentrate sales in a period usually remain subject to final pricing, the forward price is a major determinant of recorded revenues and the average recorded copper price for the period.

LME copper prices averaged $4,919 per ton during fiscal 2009 ($4,322 per ton since September 2008 when copper concentrate sales commenced at Cerro Corona), compared with the Company’s recorded average provisional price of $4,057 per ton. The applicable forward copper price at the end of fiscal 2009 was $4,057 per ton. During fiscal 2009, increasing copper prices resulted in a provisional pricing mark-to-market gain of $5.7 million (included in revenue). At June 30, 2009, the Company had copper sales of 9,950 tons priced at an average of $3,571 per ton, subject to final pricing in the first quarter of fiscal 2010.

As at June 30, 2009, Gold Fields held the following derivative instruments to protect its exposure to adverse movements in copper commodity prices:

 

  During June 2009 Gold Fields entered into copper concentrate forward sales contracts based on the expected production of copper concentrate at Cerro Corona. The forward sales contracts have a total notional amount of 8,705 tons of copper concentrate at an average forward price of $5,001 per ton and have monthly settlement dates between June 24, 2009 and June 23, 2010. The forward sales contracts have not been designated as hedging instruments and changes in the fair value of the contracts are recorded as part of gain/loss on financial instruments in the statement of operations.

 

  During June 2009, Gold Fields also entered into copper concentrate zero cost collar contracts based on the expected production of copper concentrate at Cerro Corona. The zero cost collar contracts have a total notional amount of 8,705 tons of copper concentrate with a floor price of $4,600 per ton and a ceiling price of $5,400 per ton. The zero cost collar contracts have monthly settlement dates between June 24, 2009 and June 23, 2010. The zero cost collar contracts have not been designated as hedging instruments and changes in the fair value of the contracts are recorded as part of gain/loss on financial instruments in the statement of operations.

In addition to the above instruments outstanding at June 30, 2009, the following were in existence during the year although they were closed out prior to year end:

 

  South Africa: US Dollars / Rand forward sales—In October 2008, $150 million of expected gold revenue for the December quarter was sold forward on behalf of the South African operations. In December 2008, the $150 million was extended to the March quarter at an average forward rate of R10.3818. During the March quarter $30 million was settled at a gain for the quarter of $0.7 million. The outstanding balance of $120 million was extended into the June quarter at an average forward rate of R10.2595. In the June quarter, the remaining forward cover of $120 million was partly delivered into and the balance closed out, resulting in a gain of $6.0 million. This was accounted for in the statement of operations;

 

  Australia: US Dollars / Australian Dollars forward sales—In October 2008, $70 million of expected gold revenue for the December quarter was sold forward on behalf of the Australian operations. In December 2008, $56 million was extended to the March quarter at an average forward rate of A$0.6650. During the March quarter an additional $8 million of the same instruments were taken out. The total of $64 million was extended into the June quarter at an average forward rate of A$0.6445. In the June quarter, the forward cover of $64 million was partly delivered into and the balance closed out, resulting in a gain of $1.4 million. This was accounted for in the statement of operations.

 

F-53


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Interest rate and liquidity risk

Fluctuations in interest rates impact on the value of investments and financing activities, giving rise to interest rate risk. The Group does not currently hedge its exposure to interest rate risk.

In the ordinary course of business, the Group receives cash proceeds from its operations and is required to fund working capital and capital expenditure requirements. The cash is managed to ensure surplus funds are invested to maximize returns while ensuring that capital is safeguarded to the maximum extent possible by investing only with top financial institutions.

Substantial contractual arrangements for uncommitted borrowing facilities are maintained with several banking counterparties to meet the Group’s normal contingency funding requirements.

Fair value

The fair value of a financial instrument is defined as the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. The carrying amounts of receivables, accounts payable and cash and cash equivalents are a reasonable estimate of their fair values due to the short-term maturity of such instruments. The investments in the environmental trust fund approximate fair value, as the monies are invested in short-term maturity investments. The listed investments are carried at market value. Long-term loans, except for the Mvela loan which was at a fixed interest rate, approximate fair value as they are subject to market based floating rates. On June 30, 2008, the Mvela loan was fair valued based on applicable market rates. The Mvela loan was repaid in full on March 17, 2009.

The estimated fair values of the Group’s financial instruments are:

 

     June 30, 2009    June 30, 2008
     Carrying
value
   Fair
value
   Carrying
value
   Fair
value

Financial assets

           

Cash and cash equivalents

   357.5    357.5    253.7    253.7

Financial instruments

   —      —      6.9    6.9

Receivables

   383.5    383.5    280.1    280.1

Non-current investments

   475.2    475.2    737.4    737.4

Financial liabilities

           

Long-term loans

   785.9    785.9    564.2    566.9

Accounts payable and provisions

   533.5    533.5    610.3    610.3

Financial instruments

   1.7    1.7    —      —  

Interest payable

   14.4    14.4    29.2    29.2

Bank overdraft

   9.7    9.7    2.7    2.7

Current portion of long-term loans

   317.8    317.8    772.9    772.9

Other non-current assets

   3.9    3.9    —      —  

FAS 157 establishes a fair value hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value. The hierarchy gives the highest priority to unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1 measurements) and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs (Level 3 measurements). The three levels of the fair value hierarchy under FAS 157 are described below:

 

   

Level 1 Unadjusted quoted prices in active markets that are accessible at the measurement date for identical, unrestricted assets or liabilities;

 

F-54


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

   

Level 2 Quoted prices in markets that are not active, or inputs that are observable, either directly or indirectly, for substantially the full term of the asset or liability;

 

   

Level 3 Prices or valuation techniques that require inputs that are both significant to the fair value measurement and unobservable (supported by little or no market activity).

The following table sets forth our financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value by level within the fair value hierarchy. As required by FAS 157, assets and liabilities are classified in their entirety based on the lowest level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement.

 

     Fair value at 30 June 2009
     Total
$’m
   Level 1
$’m
   Level 2
$’m
   Level 3
$’m

Assets:

           

Cash equivalents

   63.4    63.4    —      —  

Listed investments

   312.4    312.4    —      —  

Investments held by environmental trust funds

   110.0    110.0    —      —  

Unlisted investments

   0.8    —      —      0.8

Trade receivable from provisional copper concentrate sales, net

   54.0    54.0    —      —  
                   
   540.6    539.8    —      0.8
                   

Liabilities:

           

Financial instruments

   1.7    —      1.7    —  
                   
   1.7    —      1.7    —  
                   

The Group’s cash equivalent instruments are classified within level 1 of the fair value hierarchy because they are valued using quoted market prices. The cash instruments that are valued based on quoted market prices in active markets are primarily money market securities.

The Group’s listed investments comprise equity investments in listed entities and are therefore valued using quoted market prices in active markets and classified within level 1 of the fair value hierarchy. The fair value of the listed investments is the product of the quoted market price and the number of shares held.

The Group’s investments held by environmental funds primarily comprise interest bearing short-term investments which are valued using quoted market prices.

The Group’s net trade receivable from provisional copper concentrate sales is valued using quoted market prices based on the forward London Metal Exchange (“LME”) and, as such, is classified within Level 1 of the fair value hierarchy.

The Group’s financial instruments are valued using pricing models and classified within level 2 of the fair value hierarchy. Where possible, the values produced by the valuation models are verified to market prices. Valuation models require a variety of inputs, including contractual terms, market prices, yield curves, credit spreads, measures of volatility and correlations of such inputs.

The table below sets forth a summary of changes in the fair value of our Level 3 financial assets for the year ended June 30, 2009.

 

     $’m  

Balance at the beginning of the year

   27.8   

Settlements

   (20.0

Unrealised loss

   (1.7

Translation

   (5.2
      

Balance at the end of the period

   0.8   
      

 

F-55


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Unrealized loss of $1.7 million for the year was included in Accumulated other comprehensive loss. As of June 30, 2009, the assets classified within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy represent 0.2% of the total assets measured at fair value.

Derivative contracts as at June 30, 2009

Foreign currency contracts

The following tables summarize the foreign currency contracts held by the Company as at June 30, 2009:

$/ZAR currency contracts

 

     Forward sales

Maturity date

   $’m
Notional
   ZAR1=$
Strike price

July 15, 2009

   274.0    0.1236

The mark-to-market value of these contracts amounted to a loss of $0.05 million at June 30, 2009, which value is based on the prevailing interest rates and volatility at the time. On September 17, 2009, the forward cover of $274 million was settled as a result of the decision to repay the outstanding loan amount.

Copper commodity contracts

 

          Financial instruments

Maturity date

        Notional
Mts
   Copper price $

July 23, 2009 – June 23, 2010

   Forward sale    8,705.0    5,001.0

July 23, 2009 – June 23, 2010

   Zero cost collar    8,705.0    4,600.0 – 5,400.0

The mark-to-market value of these contracts amounted to a loss of $1.7 million at June 30, 2009, which value is based on the prevailing interest rates and volatility at the time.

Derivative contracts as at June 30, 2008

Foreign currency contracts

The following tables summarize the foreign currency contracts held by the Company as at June 30, 2008:

$/ZAR currency contracts

 

     Forward sales

Maturity date

   $’m
Notional
   ZAR1=$
Strike price

July 7, 2008

   318.0    0.1274

The mark-to-market value of these contracts amounted to a gain of $6.9 million at June 30, 2008, which value is based on the prevailing interest rates and volatility at the time.

 

F-56


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

19 ADDITIONAL CASH FLOW INFORMATION

 

  (a) Supplemental cash flow disclosures

The income and mining taxes paid in the statement of cash flow represents actual cash paid.

The following amounts of interest paid were included in net cash provided by operating activities:

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m
   2007
$’m

Interest paid

   73.9    100.4    89.3

 

  (b) Non cash-items

Excluded from the statements of cash flows are the following:

 

  i) For the year ended June 30, 2009

The $122.4 million loss on mark-to-market of listed investments.

 

  ii) For the year ended June 30, 2008

The $43.1 million gain on mark-to-market of listed investments.

 

  iii) For the year ended June 30, 2007

The $65.8 million gain on mark-to-market of listed investments.

 

  (c) Acquisitions of subsidiaries

 

  (i) Acquisition of South Deep

The following information reflects the cashflow impacts of the acquisition of South Deep. See note 3(c).

 

     2007
$’m
 

Total purchase consideration

   2,188.3   

Purchase consideration settled in shares

   (1,217.8

Purchase of shares in prior years

   (116.6

Insurance claim refund due to Barrick

   (24.2

Purchase consideration used to settle borrowings of BGSA

   406.8   
      

Purchase consideration settled in cash

   1,236.5   

Cash and cash equivalents in subsidiary acquired

   (3.5
      

Cash outflow on acquisition

   1,233.0   
      

 

  (ii) Acquisition of IRCA (Pty) Limited and TMTI (Pty) Limited

The following information reflects the cashflow impacts of the acquisition of IRCA (Pty) Limited and TMTI (Pty) Limited. See note 3(d).

 

     2007
$’m

Purchase consideration settled in cash

   3.2

Inter-company loans advanced

   2.1

Overdraft in subsidiary acquired

   2.6
    

Cash outflow on acquisition

   7.9
    

 

F-57


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The $7.9 million net cash paid is included in acquisition of subsidiaries on the cash flow statement.

 

20 COMMITMENTS

 

     2009
$’m
   2008
$’m

Capital expenditure

     

—authorized

   958.7    932.3

—contracted for

   131.4    167.5

Other guarantees

   3.1    39.6

Guarantees consist of $0.6 million to New Africa Mining Fund (“NAMF”), $1.2 million to the Department of Minerals and Energy in South Africa and $1.3 million for numerous other obligations. NAMF is a private equity fund incorporated in South Africa for the purpose of investing in junior mining opportunities in South Africa and the broader Africa continent. The Group also provides environmental obligation guarantees with respect to its Ghanaian and Australian operations. These guarantees, amounting to $39.6 million at June 30, 2009, have not been included in the amount of guarantees of $3.1 million because they are fully provided for under the asset retirement obligation.

Under an agreement with the Public Investment Commission (“PIC”) related to the Mvela Loan, the Company effectively guaranteed a loan of R150.0 million ($18.8 million) made by the PIC to certain lenders to Mvela, at an interest rate of 14.25%. Under the terms of the agreement, the PIC had the right to require the Company to assume all its rights and obligations under this loan together with its underlying security. The PIC was obliged to pay the Company a guarantee fee equal to 3.75% per annum on the date the loan was repaid. This guarantee expired with repayment of the Mvela loan on March 17, 2009.

Commitments will be funded from internal cash resources and borrowings as necessary.

 

21 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

World Gold Council

Gold Fields is a member of the World Gold Council. In terms of the membership agreement, all members are responsible for certain costs, including ongoing costs on a three year rolling basis, winding up costs, if applicable, and various other contingent liabilities. Apportionment of liabilities, should they arise, is done proportionate to the member’s production relative to the total production of all members. To date, no claims have been made on Gold Fields.

Occupational health care services

The Group provides occupational health care services to its employees through its existing facilities at the various operations. There is a risk that the cost of providing such services could increase in the future depending upon changes in the nature of underlying legislation and the profile of employees. This increased cost, should it transpire, is currently indeterminate. The Group is monitoring developments in this regard.

Randgold and Exploration summons

On August 21, 2008, Gold Fields Operations received a summons from Randgold and Exploration Company Limited (“R&E”) and African Strategic Investment (Holdings) Limited. The summons claims that during the

 

F-58


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

period that Gold Fields Operations was under the control of Brett Kebble, Roger Kebble and others, Gold Fields Operations was allegedly part of a scam whereby JCI Limited unlawfully disposed of shares owned by R&E in Randgold Resources Limited, or Resources, and Afrikander Lease Limited, now Uranium One.

Gold Fields Operations’ preliminary assessment was that it had strong defences to these claims and accordingly, Gold Fields Operations’ attorneys were instructed to vigorously defend the claims. Werksmans Attorneys have been so instructed. Much of the preparatory work is still being undertaken and pleadings have not yet closed.

The claims have been computed in various ways. The highest claims have been computed on the basis of the highest prices of Resources and Uranium One between the dates of the alleged thefts and March 2008 (approximately $1.4 billion or R11 billion). The alternative claims have been computed on the basis of the actual amounts allegedly received by Gold Fields Operations to fund its operations (approximately $64.4 million or R519 million).

It should be noted that the claims lie only against Gold Fields Operations, whose only interest is a 50% stake in the South Deep Mine.

 

22 LINES OF CREDIT

The Group had unused lines of credit available amounting to $632.6 million at June 30, 2009 (2008: $371.3 million).

 

23 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

New Africa Mining Fund

John G Hopwood, a non-executive director of Gold Fields Limited, is a Trustee of New Africa Mining Fund and is the Chairman of the New Africa Mining Fund Investment Committee. Gold Fields has been instrumental in the formation of the New Africa Mining Fund and is a significant investor in the fund. The fund has as its objectives the promotion of black economic empowerment and the transformation of the South African mining industry by facilitating junior mining projects.

As at June 30, 2009 Gold Fields Limited had contributed net $3.9 million. Gold Fields previously provided a commitment to fund $6.2 million in total for an original commitment period of six years. This commitment period expired on February 28, 2009. No new investments are permitted but follow on investments of up to $7.0 million are allowed, the Gold Fields portion of which is estimated at approximately $0.6 million.

Mvelaphanda Resources Limited

Tokyo MG Sexwale, a non-executive director of Gold Fields Limited until November 2, 2007 was an executive director on the Board of Mvelaphanda Resources Limited (“Mvela”). Mvela is a broad based black economic empowerment consortium.

On July 10, 2002, the Group announced that it had granted Mvela participation rights, varying between a minimum of 5% and a maximum of 15% in any new Gold Fields precious metals exploration projects in Africa, beginning March 1, 2002. In consideration for the transaction Mvela was obligated to issue the Company with options to subscribe in tranches for ordinary shares, consisting of one ordinary share and one unsecured

 

F-59


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

debenture issued by Mvela, in Mvela at a 10% premium to the five day weighted average trading price on the JSE. The Company was issued with 4,047,858 options under this arrangement. As at June 30, 2009, the Company had exercised all the Mvela options to subscribe for ordinary shares which were held by the Company. The shares are reflected under listed investments.

The term of the Mvela exploration agreement was five years. On February 28, 2007 the agreement expired in accordance with its terms.

The transaction with Mvela to acquire a 15% beneficial interest in the Group’s South African mining operations for a total cash consideration of R4.1 billion ($591.3 million) became effective on March 15, 2004. The Group had provided Mvela with vendor financing of R300 million ($47.6 million) comprising R200 million of preference shares and R100 million of ordinary shares on commercial terms in connection with the transaction. The R200 million in preference shares were repaid in accordance with the terms of the contract on March 17, 2009.

Rand Refinery

Rand Refinery, in which the Company holds a 34.9% interest, has an agreement with the Group whereby it refines all the Company’s South African and Ghanaian operations gold production. The Group’s chief executive officer is currently an alternate director of Rand Refinery and has held his directorship since September 30, 2008. Prior to this date, he had been a director since July 10, 2000. The Company paid Rand Refinery $1.8 million, $2.2 million and $1.3 million in refining fees for the years ended June 30, 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Refer to note 12—Non-current Investments for amounts owing by Rand Refinery to the Company as at June 30, 2009 and 2008, and the dividends received from Rand Refinery for the years ended June 30, 2009 and 2008.

On November 21, 2000, GFL Mining Services Limited (“GFLMS”) entered into an agreement with Rand Refinery in terms of which GFLMS acts as an agent for Rand Refinery with regard to the sale of a maximum of 50% of Gold Fields’ South African gold production. On June 1, 2004, GFLMS exercised its right, by giving notice to Rand Refinery, to sell all of Gold Fields’ South African gold production with effect from October 1, 2004. Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited also have had agreements with Rand Refinery since March 2002 to transport, refine and sell substantially all of the gold production from the Tarkwa and Damang mines.

Absa Credit Facilities

Gill Marcus, a non-executive director of Gold Fields Limited until July 20, 2009, was the Chairperson of ABSA Group Limited and ABSA Bank Limited until July 20, 2009. On August 21, 2007, Gold Fields entered into a R500.0 million 364-day revolving credit facility (the “ABSA 1 Facility”) with ABSA Capital (a division of ABSA Bank Limited). On August 24, 2007, GFIMSA drew down R250.0 million under the ABSA 1 Facility. On February 25, 2008 GFIMSA drew down an additional R250.0 million. On June 24, 2008 the R500.0 million was repaid in full.

Subsequent to the end of fiscal 2008, R500.0 million was drawn down on the ABSA 1 Facility and was fully repaid on August 19, 2008. The ABSA 1 Facility expired on August 21, 2008 and on September 22, 2008, this facility was renegotiated as a short term facility expiring on October 21, 2008. On October 28, 2008, this facility was renegotiated as a 364 day facility, expiring on November 10, 2009. On May 15, 2009, R500 million was drawn down under the facility with no repayments subsequent to that date.

 

F-60


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

On January 31, 2008, GFIMSA, Gold Fields Operations, Orogen and GFLMS entered into a R1.0 billion 364-day revolving credit facility (the “ABSA 2 Facility”) with ABSA Capital. R500 million drawn down on the ABSA 2 Facility on June 27, 2008 and a further R500 million was drawn down on August 5, 2008. These amounts were repaid on May 4, 2009 and May 14, 2009 respectively when the facility expired.

Uncle Harry’s Area

Cheryl A. Carolus, a non-executive director of Gold Fields, is a party to the agreement described below in her individual capacity and also in her capacity as a founding shareholder of Peotona Gold Holdings, a 33% shareholder of Peotona Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Peotona Gold.

On April 21, 2009, Gold Field Operations Limited, or GFO, GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, Peotona Gold (Proprietary) Limited, Western Areas Prospecting (Proprietary) Limited, a company 74% owned by GFO and 26% owned by Peotona Gold, or WAP, and others entered into an agreement in terms of which WAP relinquishes and abandons exploration rights on ground contiguous to the South Deep mine (commonly known as “Uncle Harry’s Area”) in favor of the South Deep Joint Venture. The agreement is subject to the conversion of the old order mining rights of South Deep under the 2002 Mineral Act to the new regulatory regime and Ministerial approval. Peotona Gold also granted GFO an option to acquire its 26% shareholding in WAP.

Gold Fields believes that the above transactions with related parties have been conducted on terms at least as favorable to it as arm’s length terms.

None of the directors or officers of Gold Fields or any associate of such director or officer is currently or has been at any time during the past three fiscal years materially indebted to Gold Fields.

 

24 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION

Gold Fields is primarily involved in gold mining, exploration and related activities. Activities are conducted and investments held both inside and outside of South Africa. The segment results have been prepared and presented based on management’s reporting format. Management prepares its financial records in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) and reconciled IFRS information is what the Company’s chief operating decision maker reviews in allocating resources and making investment decisions. The Company’s gold mining operations are managed and internally reported based upon the following geographic areas: in South Africa the Driefontein division, the Kloof division, the Beatrix division and the South Deep mine,

 

F-61


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

in Ghana the Tarkwa and Damang mines, Australia, Venezuela and Peru, starting in fiscal 2008. The Group also has exploration interests which are included in the Corporate and other segment. Corporate costs are allocated between segments based upon the time spent on each segment by members of the executive team.

 

    Fiscal year ended June 30, 2009  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Venezuela   Peru                    
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives/
Agnew
    Choco 10   Cerro
Corona
    Corporate
and other
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Statement of operations

                       

Revenue

  726.5      562.3      339.1      155.2      537.2      175.7      548.5      —     183.8      —        —        3,228.3   

Operating costs (1)

  (391.8   (342.3   (226.1   (131.9   (338.1   (132.4   (330.3   —     (86.4   —        (106.0   (2,085.3

Gold inventory change (2)

  —        —        —        —        18.0      2.3      (1.1   —     4.1      —        11.4      34.7   
                                                                     

Operating profit

  334.7      220.0      113.0      23.3      217.1      45.6      217.1      —     101.5      —        (94.6   1,177.7   

Amortization and depreciation

  (69.4   (76.9   (48.3   (31.4   (55.0   (18.8   (104.9   —     (38.9   (16.2   26.3      (433.5
                                                                     

Net operating profit/(loss)

  265.3      143.1      64.7      (8.1   162.1      26.8      112.2      —     62.6      (16.2   (68.4   744.1   

Exploration expenditure

  —        —        —        —        —        —        —        —     —        (56.4   (1.6   (58.0

Other items as detailed in statement of operations

  (21.0   (17.0   (7.0   6.1      (14.3   (9.6   0.4      —     (17.8   (74.8   20.1      (134.9

Current taxation

  (66.9   (28.2   (0.1   —        (16.1   (8.3   (21.0   —     (16.1   (16.2   —        (172.9

Deferred taxation

  (19.6   (12.2   (21.8   0.8   (31.8   0.3      (21.8   —     (3.3   21.1      (3.4   (91.7
                                                                     

Profit/(loss) after taxation

  157.8      85.7      35.8      (1.2   99.9      9.2      69.8      —     25.4      (142.5   (53.3   286.6   
                                                                     

 

* Indicative as tax is provided in the holding companies of South Deep.

 

    Fiscal year ended June 30, 2009
    South Africa   Ghana   Australia   Venezuela   Peru                
    Driefontein   Kloof   Beatrix   South
Deep
  Tarkwa   Damang   St Ives/
Agnew
  Choco 10   Cerro
Corona
  Corporate
and other
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated

Balance sheet

                       

Total assets

  968.0   725.4   262.2   146.9   939.3   152.6   872.7   —     820.9   3,208.2      238.9      8,335.1

Total liabilities excluding deferred tax

  324.4   224.9   69.4   83.7   165.0   28.8   127.4   —     274.7   743.5      (35.5   2,006.3

Deferred tax liability/(asset)

  222.6   208.0   83.5   —     145.6   17.6   95.5   —     6.3   (18.8   64.5      824.8

Capital expenditure

  114.8   106.4   69.9   113.3   201.1   16.9   99.6   —     116.8   10.3      (88.8   760.3

 

(1) Operating costs for management reporting purposes includes: Corporate expenditure—$35.5 million, Environmental rehabilitation—$13.9 million and Employee termination costs—$21.0 million, which are not included in production costs under U.S. GAAP. In addition, gold inventory change is included in production costs under U.S. GAAP.

 

(2) Reflects the change in quantity and value of broken ore and ore on the heap leach pad during the financial year.

 

F-62


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

    Fiscal year ended June 30, 2008  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Venezuela     Peru                  
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives/
Agnew
    Choco 10     Cerro
Corona
  Corporate
and other
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Statement of operations

                       

Revenue

  756.8      660.9      359.7      184.6      531.5      160.4      511.1      41.2      —     —        —        3,206.2   

Operating costs (1)

  (403.4   (370.0   (237.2   (173.8   (283.2   (118.1   (323.9   (26.3   —     —        (120.4   (2,056.3

Gold inventory change (2)

  —        —        —        —        4.9      10.6      (27.3   (1.2   —     —        19.4      6.4   
                                                                     

Operating profit

  353.4      290.9      122.5      10.8      253.2      52.9      159.9      13.7      —     —        (101.0   1,156.3   

Amortization and depreciation

  (75.4   (81.3   (40.2   (31.9   (45.6   (13.9   (106.7   (2.5   —     (21.2   18.2      (400.5
                                                                     

Net operating profit/(loss)

  278.0      209.6      82.3      (21.1   207.6      39.0      53.2      11.2      —     (21.2   (82.8   755.8   

Exploration expenditure

  —        —        —        —        —        —        —        (1.2   —     (45.1   6.5      (39.8

Other items as detailed in statement of operations

  (14.0   (10.4   (8.2   (11.7   0.1      —        9.4      (3.2   —     176.7      (13.9   124.8   

Current taxation

  (68.9   (44.5   (0.2   0.0      (45.6   (7.5   (12.7   (0.7   —     (15.0   —        (195.1

Deferred taxation

  (25.5   (24.3   (28.2   13.2   (14.3   (5.6   (13.1   0.1      —     25.7      (4.1   (76.1
                                                                     

Profit/(loss) after taxation

  169.6      130.4      45.7      (19.6   147.8      25.9      36.8      6.2      —     121.1      (94.3   569.6   
                                                                     

 

* Indicative as tax is provided in the holding companies of South Deep.

 

    Fiscal year ended June 30, 2008
    South Africa   Ghana   Australia   Venezuela   Peru                
    Driefontein   Kloof   Beatrix   South
Deep
  Tarkwa   Damang   St Ives/
Agnew
  Choco 10   Cerro
Corona
  Corporate
and other
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated

Balance sheet

                       

Total assets

  935.0   747.9   341.9   138.9   745.9   139.6   962.6   —     808.5   3,044.3      157.4      8,022.0

Total liabilities excluding deferred tax

  220.6   175.0   78.3   74.6   125.7   25.4   135.8   —     386.2   645.1      455.6      2,322.3

Deferred tax liability/(asset)

  202.2   195.9   59.6   —     113.8   17.9   86.5   —     3.0   (1.2   46.4      724.1

Capital expenditure

  139.8   123.5   79.3   107.9   212.0   28.1   141.0   9.6   348.4   59.9      (95.1   1,154.4

 

(1) Operating costs for management reporting purposes includes: Corporate expenditure—$41.0 million, Environmental rehabilitation—$12.0 million and Employee termination costs—$16.2 million, which are not included in production costs under U.S. GAAP. In addition, gold inventory change is included in production costs under U.S. GAAP.

 

(2) Reflects the change in quantity and value of broken ore and ore on the heap leach pad during the financial year.

 

F-63


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

    Fiscal year ended June 30, 2007  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Venezuela     Peru                  
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives/
Agnew
    Choco 10     Cerro
Corona
  Corporate
and other
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Statement of operations

                       

Revenue

  648.2      587.1      344.9      107.9      444.8      119.5      446.8      36.0      —     —        —        2,735.2   

Operating costs (1)

  (371.0   (352.2   (215.4   (100.0   (248.9   (88.0   (277.9   (40.1   —     —        (74.0   (1,767.5

Gold inventory change (2)

  —        —        —        (1.8   17.0      (1.4   15.4      4.9      —     —        (20.2   13.9   
                                                                     

Operating profit

  277.2      234.9      129.5      6.1      212.9      30.1      184.3      0.8      —     —        (94.2   981.6   

Amortization and depreciation

  (67.2   (75.7   (41.7   (19.8   (40.6   (4.9   (142.5   (5.4   —     (19.1   28.7      (388.2
                                                                     

Net operating profit/(loss)

  210.0      159.2      87.8      (13.7   172.3      25.2      41.8      (4.6   —     (19.1   (65.5   593.4   

Exploration expenditure

  —        —        —        —        —        —        —        —        —     (40.9   (6.5   (47.4

Other items as detailed in statement of operations

  (0.5   (3.7   (4.5   3.2      (0.5   —        22.8      1.9      —     (52.5   (30.6   (64.4

Current taxation

  (47.5   (12.8   (0.1   —        (37.1   (4.4   (20.3   (1.7   —     1.2      —        (122.7

Deferred taxation

  (22.5   (32.9   (31.7   4.2   (17.8   (4.8   (2.8   (1.1   —     13.7      9.1      (86.6
                                                                     

Profit/(loss) after taxation

  139.5      109.8      51.5      (6.3   116.9      16.0      41.5      (5.5   —     (97.6   (93.5   272.3   
                                                                     

 

* Indicative as tax is provided in the holding companies of South Deep.

 

    Fiscal year ended June 30, 2007
    South Africa   Ghana   Australia   Venezuela     Peru              
    Driefontein   Kloof   Beatrix   South
Deep
  Tarkwa   Damang   St Ives/
Agnew
  Choco 10     Cerro
Corona
  Corporate
and other
  Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated

Balance sheet

                       

Total assets

  854.5   697.2   308.7   144.3   523.4   102.8   816.9   110.9      —     4,191.6   275.7      8,026.0

Total liabilities excluding deferred tax

  219.0   192.9   90.5   39.7   66.6   20.4   114.4   28.9      —     952.0   506.2      2,230.6

Deferred tax liability/(asset)

  200.4   194.5   38.0   —     99.5   12.3   64.2   (1.8   —     229.3   40.7      877.1

Capital expenditure

  113.2   107.8   82.3   39.4   107.7   31.7   104.4   22.9      —     237.3   (49.7   797.0

 

(1) Operating costs for management reporting purposes includes: Corporate expenditure—$38.4 million, Environmental rehabilitation—$6.4 million and Employee termination costs—$4.9 million, which are not included in production costs under U.S. GAAP. In addition, gold inventory change is included in production costs under U.S. GAAP.

 

(2) Reflects the change in quantity and value of broken ore and ore on the heap leach pad during the financial year.

 

F-64


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The following provides a breakdown of the reconciling items for each line item presented.

 

         2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
    2007
$’m
 

Operating costs

        

On-mine exploration

   (k)   (24.3   (25.8   (15.8

Provision for rehabilitation

   (l)   4.7      2.9      2.1   

Cut-backs

   (j)   (64.3   (67.1   (47.3

Deferred stripping

   (o)   (22.1   (30.4   (13.1
                    
     (106.0   (120.4   (74.0
                    

Gold inventory

        

Inventory

   (q)   6.3      18.4      (10.7

Inventory stockpiles

   (u)   5.1      1.0      (9.5
                    
     11.4      19.4      (20.2
                    

Amortization and depreciation

        

Business combination—formation of Original Gold Fields

   (a)   (5.0   (7.8   (8.9

Business combination—formation of Gold Fields

   (b)   (2.8   (3.4   (3.5

Business combination—purchase of St. Ives and Agnew

   (c)   0.7      1.0      1.6   

Business combination—purchase of Abosso

   (d)   0.2      0.2      0.3   

Amortization of reserves

   (h)   0.6      (3.7   (7.6

Cut-backs

   (j)   13.1      14.1      3.0   

Amortization—inclusion of future costs

   (i)   19.9      18.2      9.5   

Amortization—capitalised interest

   (t)   (1.7   —        —     

Amortization—cut-off between development and production

   (v)   —        —        34.0   

Provision for rehabilitation

   (l)   1.3      (0.4   0.3   
                    
     26.3      18.2      28.7   
                    

Exploration expenditure

        
                    

Exploration costs

   (k)   (1.6   6.5      (6.5
                    

Other items as detailed in the statement of operations

        

Post-retirement medical benefits

   (n)   (3.1   1.1      (1.4

Impairment of assets

   (g)   (0.2   (4.4   —     

Mvelaphanda transaction—interest paid

   (s)   (32.4   (51.4   (46.8

Mvelaphanda transaction—debt insurance costs

   (s)   (0.5   (0.9   (0.9

Mvelaphanda transaction—profit on close out of hedge

   (s)   4.9      8.1      8.2   

Interest capitalisation

   (t)   51.7      26.4      13.3   

Profit on sale of Chocco 10

   (p) (e)   —        7.1      —     

Other

     (0.2   0.1      (3.0
                    
     20.1      (13.9   (30.6
                    

 

F-65


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

         2009
$’m
    2008
$’m
    2007
$’m
 

Total liabilities excluding deferred income and mining taxes

        

Provision for rehabilitation

   (l)   (44.0   (35.7   (0.6

Post-retirement medical benefits

   (n)   8.5      4.9      6.7   

Mvelaphanda transaction—debt issuance cost

   (s)   —        4.0      4.5   

Mvelaphanda transaction—fair value hedge accounting

   (s)   —        5.5      14.4   

Mvelaphanda transaction—classification of instrument

   (s)   —        306.7      343.2   

Mvelaphanda transaction—interest paid

   (s)   —        170.2      138.0   
                    
     (35.5   455.6      506.2   
                    

Total assets

        

Business combination—formation of Original Gold Fields

   (a)   94.0      100.3      126.0   

Business combination—formation Gold Fields

   (b)   39.3      42.7      51.2   

Business combination—purchase of St Ives and Agnew

   (c)   (2.6   (3.5   (4.8

Business combination—purchase of Abosso

   (d)   (1.2   (1.4   (1.8

Business combination—purchase of Bolivar

   (e)   —        —        (79.7

Business combination—purchase of South Deep

   (f)   512.9      516.0      521.3   

Mvelaphanda transaction—debt issuance cost

   (s)   —        0.6      1.6   

Cutbacks

   (j)   (174.6   (124.3   (70.8

Amortization of reserves

   (h)   (70.5   (85.4   (72.1

Amortization—inclusion of future costs

   (i)   63.0      50.2      27.2   

Amortization—cut off between development and production

   (v)   34.5      41.5      36.7   

Exploration costs

   (k)   (172.6   (164.5   (138.7

Provision for rehabilitation

   (l)   (40.0   (37.7   (5.8

Investments in affiliates

   (m)   (3.4   (68.9   (3.9

Deferred stripping

   (o)   (107.7   (99.8   (62.2

Inventory at net realizable value

   (q)   14.2      8.5      (9.5

Impairment of Agnew

   (r)   (40.5   (48.6   (43.0

Interest capitalisation

   (t)   97.5      40.1      13.5   

Inventory stockpiles

   (u)   (3.4   (8.4   (9.5
                    
     238.9      157.4      275.7   
                    

 

F-66


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Notes to the reconciliation of segment information to the historical financial statements

 

(a) Business combination—formation of Original Gold Fields

 

  For management reporting purposes, the formation of Original Gold Fields was accounted for as a uniting-of-interests. Under US GAAP, the Company accounted for the assets and liabilities acquired from Gold Fields of South Africa Limited at historical cost, and the assets and liabilities acquired from Gencor and outside shareholders as a purchase.

 

(b) Business combination—formation of Gold Fields

 

  For management reporting purposes, the difference between the purchase price and net asset value of acquired assets that arose on this transaction was set-off against shareholders’ equity. Under US GAAP, the excess purchase price was capitalized to property, plant and equipment and is being amortized over its useful life.

 

(c) Business combination—purchase of St. Ives and Agnew

 

  For management reporting purposes, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued on the date they are issued. Under US GAAP, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued a few days before and after the terms of the transaction are announced.

 

(d) Business combination—purchase of Abosso

 

  For management reporting purposes, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued on the date they are issued. Under US GAAP, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued a few days before and after the terms of the transaction are announced.

 

(e) Business combination—purchase of Bolivar

 

  For management reporting purposes, the entire interest acquired was fair valued upon gaining a controlling interest. Under US GAAP, only the additional interest acquired was fair valued. In addition, US GAAP requires retrospective equity accounting from the date the interest is acquired until the Group obtains control and the investment becomes a subsidiary. For management reporting purposes no retrospective equity accounting was applied.

 

(f) Business combinations—purchase of South Deep

 

  For management reporting purposes, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued on the date they are issued. Under US GAAP, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued a few days before and after the terms of the transaction are announced.

 

  For management reporting purposes, the entire interest acquired in South Deep was fair valued upon gaining a controlling interest. Under US GAAP, only the additional interest acquired was accounted for at fair value; assets acquired before obtaining control are stated at historical carrying amounts. In addition, US GAAP requires retrospective equity accounting from the date the interest is acquired until the Group obtains control and the investment becomes a subsidiary. For management reporting purposes no retrospective equity accounting is applied.

 

 

For management reporting purposes, any excess arising over the purchase price paid and the fair value of the net identifiable assets and liabilities acquired for additional interests in subsidiaries from minority

 

F-67


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

 

shareholders are recorded directly in equity (‘economic entity model’). Under US GAAP, any excess over the purchased price paid and the fair value of the net identifiable assets and liabilities are recorded as goodwill (‘parent company model’).

 

(g) Impairment of assets

 

  Prior to fiscal 2003, impairment charges were recorded for management purposes based on discounted cash flows, but not recorded under US GAAP, since the undiscounted cash flows exceeded the carrying amounts of the assets under US GAAP.

 

(h) Amortization of reserves

 

  For management reporting purposes, a portion of ore resources at the Australian operations, based on the philosophy of “endowment”, is used for calculating depreciation and amortization. Under US GAAP, depreciation and amortization is calculated based upon existing proven and probable reserves.

 

(i) Amortization—inclusion of future costs

 

  For management reporting purposes, future mine development costs are included in mining assets in calculating depreciation and amortization. Under US GAAP, future development costs are not included in the calculation of depreciation and amortization.

 

(j) Cut-backs

 

  For management reporting purposes, waste laybacks at surface operations are capitalized as mine development costs. Under US GAAP, once the production phase of a mine has commenced, waste laybacks are considered variable production costs that should be included as a component of inventory to be recognized in Production costs exclusive of depreciation and amortization in the same period as the revenue from the sale of inventory. As a result, capitalization of waste laybacks is appropriate only to the extent product inventory exists at the end of a reporting period.

 

(k) Exploration costs

 

  For management reporting purposes, exploration costs are capitalized from the date the drilling program confirms sufficient evidence of mineralization to proceed with a feasibility study. Under US GAAP, exploration costs are capitalized from the date a bankable feasibility study is completed.

 

(l) Provision for rehabilitation

 

  Revisions to the asset retirement obligation

 

  Subsequent to initial recognition, asset retirement obligations are adjusted for changes in estimated cash flows, and accreted, based on current market-based discount rates for management reporting purposes. Under US GAAP, the Group recognized changes in asset retirement obligations due to the passage of time by applying an interest method of allocation to the amount of the liability at the beginning of the period. The interest rate used to measure the change was the credit-adjusted, risk-free rate that existed when the liability, or portion thereof, was initially measured. In addition, under US GAAP, upward revisions in the estimated cash flows were discounted by using a current credit-adjusted, risk-free rate, and downward revisions were discounted by using the credit-adjusted, risk-free rate that existed when the original liability was recognized.

 

  Amortization of rehabilitation asset

 

  The rehabilitation assets carrying value for management reporting purposes is different to that under U.S. GAAP, mainly as a result of the unique transition provisions under SFAS No. 143 and revisions to the asset retirement obligation described above, which results in a different amortization charge.

 

F-68


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

 

(m) Investments in equity investees

 

  For management reporting purposes an equity investment exceeding a 20% shareholding was treated as an available-for-sale investment prior to fiscal 2003. Under US GAAP this investment was accounted for under the equity method since acquisition.

 

  In addition for management reporting purposes, Gold Fields’ share of an equity investee’s losses in fiscal 2009 and 2008 was based on the latest available results of the equity investee at the time of preparation of the management report (results through March 31, 2009 and 2008). Under US GAAP, Gold Fields’ share of the equity investee’s losses was based on results of the equity investee through June 30, 2009 and 2008.

 

  In addition under US GAAP, Gold Fields’ investment in an equity investee was written down to the market value of the investment at June 30, 2008, but not recorded for management reporting purposes. At June 30, 2009, Gold Fields’ investment in the equity investee was written down to market value for both management reporting purposes and US GAAP.

 

(n) Post-retirement health care costs

 

  For management reporting purposes, only the employer’s contribution liability is accounted for. Under US GAAP, the liability includes certain employees’ cross subsidy liabilities.

 

(o) Deferred stripping

 

  For management reporting purposes, the Company defers the waste stripping costs in excess of the expected average pitlife stripping ratio. Under US GAAP, waste stripping costs are considered costs of the extracted minerals and recognized as a component of inventory to be recognized in production costs exclusive of depreciation and amortization in the same period as the revenue from the sale of inventory.

 

(p) Profit on disposal of Choco 10

 

  The carrying value of assets and liabilities for management reporting purposes is different to that under US GAAP, which results in a different profit on disposal. See footnote (e), Business combination—purchase of Bolivar.

 

(q) Inventory

 

  Under US GAAP additional amortization, waste normalization and cut backs expensed are included in the cost of inventory produced. No such absorption of costs occurred for management reporting purposes. Additionally, for management reporting purposes, no adjustment is required to record inventory at net realizable value. Under US GAAP, due to the impact of the amortization adjustments on the inventory valuation, an adjustment is required to record inventory at net realizable value.

 

(r) Impairment of Agnew

 

  For management reporting purposes the Agnew mine was not determined to be impaired. Under US GAAP the Agnew mine was determined to be impaired and an impairment charge was recognized.

 

(s) Mvelaphanda transaction

Classification of instrument

 

  For management reporting purposes the Mvela loan is split between a debt component and an equity component. Under US GAAP the Mvela loan is classified as debt.

 

F-69


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

Interest paid

 

  Due to the classification of the Mvela loan as debt under US GAAP, additional interest is charged to the income statement.

Debt issuance cost

 

  For management reporting purposes debt issuance cost is set off against debt. Under US GAAP debt issuance cost is recorded as a deferred cost within accounts receivable.

Fair value hedge accounting

 

  For management reporting purposes only the amortizing swap is treated as a fair value hedge in relation to the debt component of the Mvela loan. Under US GAAP both the amortizing and accreting swap are treated as a fair value hedge as the entire loan is classified as debt.

Profit on close out of hedge

 

  For management reporting purposes the profit on close-out of the interest rate swaps was accounted for in earnings at the time the swaps were closed out. Under US GAAP the profit is deferred and amortized to earnings over the life of the hedged item.

 

(t) Interest capitalization

 

  For management reporting purposes, borrowing costs are capitalized to the extent that qualifying assets are financed through specific debt financing or general outstanding debt not for any specific purpose other that funding the operations of the Group. Under US GAAP, total outstanding debt financing is taken into account in calculating the amount of borrowing cost to be capitalized.

 

(u) Inventory stockpiles

 

  For management reporting purposes, previous impairment charges writing down stockpiles to net realizable values are reversed when the net realizable rises above the original cost. Under US GAAP, the net realizable value is deemed the new base cost and impairment charges are not reversed.

 

(v) Amortization-cut-off between development and production

 

  For Group reporting purposes, the cut-off point between the development phase of mining and the production phase of mining is determined when the operation reaches a predetermined cut-off point of commercial levels of production. Costs are capitalized during the development phase of mining and expensed to working costs when the production phase commences. Under US GAAP, the production phase commences when more than a de minimus amount of ore has been extracted from the ore body.

 

F-70


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—(Continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

Subsequent events have been assessed through December 3, 2009.

Disposal of stake in Sino Gold

On June 3, 2009, Gold Fields Limited reached agreement to sell its 19.9% stake in Sino Gold Mining Limited (“Sino”) to Eldorado Gold Corporation (“Eldorado”) for a total consideration of approximately $282 million payable in Eldorado shares which were received on July 27, 2009. Gold Fields received a share exchange ratio of 48 Eldorado shares for every 100 Sino Gold shares, which resulted in Gold Fields holding 27,824,654 Eldorado shares or approximately 7% of the outstanding shares of Eldorado on a fully diluted basis.

In addition, Gold Fields holds a top-up right for a period of 18 months, which will apply should Eldorado purchase an additional 5% or more of the outstanding shares of Sino Gold and the sellers in that transaction realize a consideration ratio in excess of the share exchange ratio of 0.48 Eldorado shares per Sino Gold share received by Gold Fields.

On September 4, 2009, Gold Fields disposed of its holding in Eldorado for a total consideration of CAD323 million (approximately $299.3 million).

Acquisition of Glencar Mining

On July 24, 2009, Gold Fields Limited, through a wholly owned subsidiary, reached agreement with Glencar Mining Plc (“Glencar”) on the terms of a recommended cash offer to acquire the entire issued capital of Glencar. On August 7, 2009, the offer document was posted to eligible Glencar shareholders who had until September 4, 2009 to accept the offer. On September 7, 2009, Gold Fields announced that it had received 83.1% of acceptances and therefore 83.1% of the issued share capital of Glencar. All conditions of the offer were satisfied or waived at the time and therefore the offer was declared unconditional in all respects. On September 7, 2009, Gold Fields took control of Glencar as the existing directors of Glencar resigned and Gold Fields appointed three new directors. Subsequently, Gold Fields completed the final squeeze-out of shareholders on November 9, 2009. Gold Fields now holds 100% of Glencar Mining Plc.

Termination of royalty over St Ives

On August 27, 2009 an Agreement was executed in terms of which the royalty payable by St Ives Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd (St. Ives) to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley Bank was terminated for a consideration of A$308 million.

When Gold Fields acquired St Ives in late 2001, the total consideration included the royalty, which was subsequently acquired by subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley Bank. The royalty comprised two parts: (i) a payment equal to 4% of the net smelter returns to the extent that cumulative production of gold from November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces, but subject to the average spot price of gold for the relevant quarter exceeding A$400 per ounce; and (ii) provided that the gold price exceeded A$600/oz, a payment equal to 10% of the difference between the revenue calculated at the spot gold price expressed in Australian dollars per ounce and at a price of A$600/oz calculated on all future ounces produced by St Ives.

 

F-71


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm on Financial Statement Schedule

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Gold Fields Limited

Our audits of the consolidated financial statements and of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting referred to in our report dated December 3, 2009 appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 20-F also included an audit of the financial statement schedule listed in Item 18 of this Annual Report on Form 20-F. In our opinion, this financial statement schedule presents fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein when read in conjunction with the related consolidated financial statements.

PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc

Johannesburg, Republic of South Africa

December 3, 2009

 

S-1


Table of Contents

Schedule 1—Valuation and Qualifying Accounts

 

     Balance at
beginning
of period
   Charged
to costs
and
expenses
   Deduction     Arising on
acquisition
of
subsidiaries
   Foreign
currency
translation
adjustment
    Balance
at end of
period

Year ended June 30, 2009

               

Valuation allowance

   186.4    17.5    (2.7   —      (5.7   195.5

Year ended June 30, 2008

               

Valuation allowance

   155.8    34.0    (4.2   —      0.8      186.4

Year ended June 30, 2007

               

Valuation allowance

   92.1    20.5    (3.8   44.1    2.9      155.8

 

S-2

Exhibit 4.19

Gold Fields_Agency Agreement

AGENCY AGREEMENT

in respect of the

ZAR10,000,000,000

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED DOMESTIC MEDIUM TERM NOTE PROGRAMME

Dated 6 October 2009

entered between

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(as Issuer )

and

ABSA CAPITAL (a division of Absa Bank Limited)

( as Paying Agent)

and

ABSA CAPITAL (a division of Absa Bank Limited)

( as Transfer Agent)

 

 

LOGO


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1   

INTERPRETATION

   4
2   

INTRODUCTION

   16
3   

APPOINTMENT AS TRANSFER AGENT

   17
4   

APPOINTMENT AS CALCULATION AGENT

   18
5   

APPOINTMENT OF PAYING AGENT

   19
6   

REGISTER

   19
7   

sub-register

   21
8   

TRANSFER OF NOTES

   23
9   

ISSUE OF GLOBAL CERTIFICATES

   24
10   

ISSUE OF INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATES

   26
11   

TERMS OF ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES

   28
12   

PAYMENTS

   30
13   

EXCHANGEABLE NOTES

   35
14   

DETERMINATIONS AND NOTIFICATIONS IN RESPECT OF NOTES

   35
15   

INTEREST DETERMINATION INCLUDING FALLBACK PROVISIONS

   37
16   

NOTICE OF WITHHOLDING OR DEDUCTION

   41
17   

DUTIES OF THE TRANSFER AGENT IN CONNECTION WITH EARLY REDEMPTION

   41
18   

RECEIPT AND PUBLICATION OF NOTICES

   44
19   

CANCELLATION OF NOTES

   44
20   

EXCHANGE OR REPLACEMENT OF CERTIFICATES

   46
21   

COPIES OF DOCUMENTS AVAILABLE FOR INSPECTION

   48
22   

MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS

   49
23   

COMMISSIONS AND EXPENSES

   49
24   

INDEMNITY

   50
25   

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF APPOINTMENT

   51
26   

CHANGES IN AGENTS

   54
27   

MERGER AND CONSOLIDATION

   59
28   

CHANGE OF SPECIFIED OFFICE

   60
29   

NOTICES

   60
30   

TAXES AND STAMP DUTIES

   61
31   

OTHER COSTS

   61

 

LOGO

 

Page 2


32   

AMENDMENTS

   62
33   

GOVERNING LAW AND SUBMISSION TO JURISDICTION

   62
34   

DISPUTE RESOLUTION

   63
35   

COUNTERPARTS

   63

ANNEXES

 

SCHEDULE 1:

  

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

SCHEDULE 2:

  

FORM OF NOTES

SCHEDULE 3:

  

PRICING SUPPLEMENT

SCHEDULE 4:

  

PROVISIONS FOR MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS

SCHEDULE 5:

  

FORM OF PUT NOTICE

SCHEDULE 6

  

BANKING DETAILS

APPENDIX A:

  

ACCESSION LETTER (TRANSFER AGENT)

APPENDIX B:

  

FORM OF CALCULATION AGENCY AGREEMENT

APPENDIX C:

  

ACCESSION LETTER (PAYING AGENT)

 

LOGO

 

Page 3


1 INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Terms and expressions defined in the Programme Agreement not otherwise defined in this Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Agreement, except where the context otherwise requires or otherwise defined in this Agreement.

 

1.2 Without prejudice to the foregoing and unless the context otherwise requires, terms used in this Agreement and in the Schedules and Appendices hereto shall have the meanings given to them as follows:

 

1.2.1 Absa Capital ” means Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited, Registration Number 1986/004794/06, a registered bank and public company with limited liability incorporated in South Africa;

 

1.2.2 Agreement ” means this amended and restated agreement and appendices and schedules hereto;

 

1.2.3 Applicable Pricing Supplement ” means the Pricing Supplement relating to each Tranche of Notes;

 

1.2.4 Applicable Procedures ” means the rules and operating procedures for the time being of the Central Securities Depository, Settlement Agents, the bond market of the JSE and or any such other relevant financial exchange, as the case may be;

 

1.2.5 Beneficial Interest ” means the undivided share of a co-owner of the Notes represented by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form, as provided in section 41 of the Securities Services Act, 2004;

 

LOGO


1.2.6 Business Day ” means a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday or public holiday within the meaning of the Public Holidays Act, 1994) which is a day on which commercial banks settle ZAR payments in Johannesburg or any Additional Business Centre specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement save that if the Applicable Pricing Supplement so provides, “ Business Day ” shall include a Saturday;

 

1.2.7 Calculation Agent ” means such entity appointed by the Issuer as Calculation Agent either in respect of the Programme or a Tranche or Series of Notes issued under the Programme pursuant to the execution of a Calculation Agency Agreement in the form of Appendix B to this Agreement;

 

1.2.8 Central Securities Depository ” means Strate Limited (registration number 1998/022242/06), operating as a central securities depository duly licensed as such in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004, or any successor thereto;

 

1.2.9 Certificates ” means Global Certificates or Individual Certificates;

 

1.2.10 Dealers ” means Absa Capital, Nedbank Capital and/or any other additional Dealer appointed under the Programme Agreement from time to time, which appointment may be for a specific issue of Notes or on an ongoing basis;

 

1.2.11 Designated Maturity ” has the meaning given to that expression in the ISDA Definitions specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.12 Financial Exchange ” means the bond market of the JSE or its successor and any other or future exchange or exchanges duly licensed to operate as such in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004, on which any Notes

 

LOGO

 

Page 5


 

are listed, and references in this Agreement to the “Relevant Financial Exchange” shall, in relation to any Notes, be references to the exchange, stock exchange or exchanges or stock exchanges on which such Notes are from time to time, or are intended to be, listed;

 

1.2.13 FirstRand ” means FirstRand Bank Limited, (Registration Number 1929/001225/06) (acting through its Rand Merchant Bank Division) a limited liability public company incorporated in South Africa and registered as a bank in terms of the Banks Act, 1990;

 

1.2.14 Fixed Rate Notes ” means Notes on which interest is calculated at a fixed rate payable in arrears on a fixed date or dates in each year and on redemption or on such other dates as may be specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.15 Floating Rate Notes ” means Notes on which interest is calculated at a floating rate payable, one, two, three, six or twelve monthly or in respect of such other period or on such date(s) as may be specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.16 Global Certificate ” means the single certificate, without interest coupons, registered in the name of the Central Securities Depository and representing those Registered Notes issued in terms of the Terms and Conditions which are lodged and immobilised in the Central Securities Depository, other than those Notes represented by Individual Certificates, such certificate being in the form or substantially in the form set out in Part I of Schedule 2 with such modifications (if any) as may be agreed in writing between the Issuer, the Transfer Agent and the Relevant Dealer and having the Terms and Conditions incorporated therein by reference and having the Applicable Pricing Supplement (or the relevant provisions thereof) attached thereto;

 

LOGO

 

Page 6


1.2.17 Guarantee ” means the unconditional and irrevocable guarantee given by each Guarantor, jointly and severally, to all Noteholders;

 

1.2.18 Guarantors ” means each of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, Registration Number 2002/031431/07, Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, Registration Number 1959/003209/06, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, Registration Number 184982 and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, Registration Number 651406;

 

1.2.19 Indexed Interest Notes ” means Notes in respect of which the Interest Amount is calculated by reference to such index and/or formula as may be specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.20 Indexed Note ” means an Indexed Interest Note and/or an Indexed Redemption Amount Note, as applicable;

 

1.2.21 Indexed Redemption Amount Notes ” means Notes in respect of which the Final Redemption Amount is calculated by reference to an index and/or a formula as may be specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.22 Individual Certificate ” means in respect of Registered Notes, evidenced by the definitive registered form of a single Certificate each such Certificate being in the form or substantially in the form set out in

 

LOGO

 

Page 7


 

Part I (in respect of Registered Notes), of Schedule 2 with such modifications (if any) as may be determined by the Issuer, the Transfer Agent and the Relevant Dealer and having the Terms and Conditions incorporated therein by reference (unless otherwise determined by the Issuer) and having the Applicable Pricing Supplement (or the relevant provisions thereof) attached thereto;

 

1.2.23 Instalment Amount ” means the amount expressed as a percentage of the Principal Amount of an Instalment Note, being an instalment of principal (other than the final instalment) on an Instalment Note;

 

1.2.24 Instalment Notes ” means Notes redeemable in Instalment Amounts by the Issuer on an amortised basis on different Instalment Dates as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.25 Interest Payment Date(s) ” means the Interest Payment Date(s) specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement or if no express Interest Payment Date(s) is/are specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, each date which occurs after a certain period after the preceding Interest Payment Date (being such period as is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) or, in the case of the first Interest Payment Date, after the Interest Commencement Date;

 

1.2.26 Interest Rate ” means the rate or rates of interest applicable to Notes other than Zero Coupon Notes;

 

1.2.27 Issue Date ” means the date of issue of a Note, in each case pursuant to and in accordance with the Programme Agreement or any other agreement between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer and as set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

LOGO

 

Page 8


1.2.28 Issue Price ” means the total subscription price payable in respect of a Note and as set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.29 Issuer ” means Gold Fields Limited (registration number 1968/04880/06);

 

1.2.30 Last Day to Register ” means with respect to a particular Series of Notes (as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement), the last day immediately preceding an Interest Payment Day on which the Agent will accept Transfer Forms and record the transfer of Notes in the Register for that particular Series of Notes and whereafter the Register is closed for further transfers or entries until the Payment Day;

 

1.2.31 JSE ” means the JSE Limited (Registration Number 2005/022939/06), a licensed financial exchange in terms of the Securities Services Act or any exchange which operates as a successor exchange to the JSE, or, where the context so requires, such other or further exchange or exchanges on which the Notes are listed;

 

1.2.32 Maturity Date ” means in relation to a Note, the date on which it is expressed to be redeemable as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.33 Nedbank Capital ” means Nedbank Capital, a division of Nedbank Limited, Registration Number 1951/000009/06, a registered bank and public company with limited liability incorporated in South Africa;

 

1.2.34 Noteholders ” means the holders of the Registered Notes (as recorded in the Register kept by the Transfer Agent under this Agreement and in terms of the Terms and Conditions);

 

LOGO

 

Page 9


1.2.35 Notes ” means the notes issued or to be issued by the Issuer under the Programme and represented by a Certificate as well as Uncertificated Notes;

 

1.2.36 Outstanding ” means in relation to the Notes, all the Notes issued other than -

 

1.2.36.1 those which have been redeemed in full in accordance with the Terms and Conditions;

 

1.2.36.2 those in respect of which the date for redemption in accordance with the Terms and Conditions has occurred and the redemption moneys wherefor (including all interest (if any) accrued thereon up to the date for such redemption and any interest (if any) payable under the Terms and Conditions after such date) have been duly paid to the Paying Agent as provided herein (and, where appropriate, notice has been given to the Noteholders of the relevant Series in accordance with Condition 17 of the Terms and Conditions) and remain available for payment to the Relevant Noteholders against presentation of Certificates;

 

1.2.36.3 those which have been purchased and cancelled as provided in Condition 9 of the Terms and Conditions;

 

1.2.36.4 those which have become prescribed under Condition 14 of the Terms and Conditions;

 

LOGO

 

Page 10


1.2.36.5 Notes represented by mutilated or defaced Certificates which have been surrendered in exchange for replacement Certificates pursuant to Condition 11 of the Terms and Conditions;

 

1.2.36.6 (for the purpose only of determining how many Notes are outstanding and without prejudice to their status for any other purpose) those Notes represented by Certificates alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed and in respect of which replacement Certificates have been issued pursuant to Condition 11 of the Terms and Conditions,

provided that for each of the following purposes, namely -

 

1.2.36.6.1 the right to attend and vote at any meeting of the Noteholders; and

 

1.2.36.6.2 the determination of how many and which Notes are for the time being Outstanding for the purposes of Conditions 18 and 19 of the Terms and Conditions,

all Notes (if any) which are for the time being held by the Issuer (subject to any applicable law) or by any person for the benefit of the Issuer and not cancelled (unless and until ceasing to be so held);

shall be deemed not to be Outstanding;

 

1.2.37 Paying Agent ” means Absa Capital and/or such other entity appointed by the Issuer as Paying Agent either in respect of the Programme or a Tranche or Series of Notes issued under the Programme pursuant to the execution of an accession letter substantially in the form of Appendix C to this Agreement;

 

1.2.38 Put Notice ” means a notice in the form set out in Schedule 5;

 

LOGO

 

Page 11


1.2.39 Reference Banks ” means FirstRand, Standard Bank, Absa Capital and Nedbank;

 

1.2.40 Registered Note ” means a note issued in registered form and transferable in accordance with Condition 13.1 of the Terms and Conditions;

 

1.2.41 Relevant Dealer ” shall, in relation to any Note, be a reference to the Dealer or Dealers with whom the Issuer has agreed the issue of that Note;

 

1.2.42 Representative ” means a person duly authorised to act on behalf of a Noteholder, who may be regarded by the Issuer, the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent (all acting in good faith) as being duly authorised based upon the tacit or express representation thereof by such representative, in the absence of express written notice to the contrary from such Noteholder;

 

1.2.43 Screen Rate Determination ” means the method, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, in terms of which the Interest Rate specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement for a particular Tranche of Notes is to be determined;

 

1.2.44 Series ” means a Tranche of the Notes together with any further Tranche or Tranches of the Notes which are (i) expressed to be consolidated and form a single series and (ii) identical in all respects (including as to listing) except for their respective Issue Dates, Interest Commencement Dates and/or Issue Prices;

 

1.2.45 Settlement Agent ” means a Participant, approved by the JSE or any other Relevant Financial Exchange to perform electronic net settlement of both funds and scrip on behalf of market participants;

 

LOGO

 

Page 12


1.2.46 “Standard Bank” means The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited, Registration Number 1962/000738/06 (acting through its Corporate and Investment Banking Division), a limited liability public company incorporated in South Africa and registered as a bank in terms of the Banks Act, 1990;

 

1.2.47 Sub-register ” means a subregister as contemplated in section 91A of the Companies Act, 1973;

 

1.2.48 Terms and Conditions ” means in relation to the Notes, the terms and conditions in accordance with which the Notes will be issued, and which may be endorsed on or incorporated by reference in the Certificate representing the Note or Notes, such Terms and Conditions being in or substantially in the form set out in Schedule 1 or in such other form, as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer, as modified and supplemented by the Applicable Pricing Supplement relating to the Notes of the relevant Series;

 

1.2.49 Tranche ” means all Notes which are identical in all respects (including as to listing) and are issued in a single issue;

 

1.2.50 Transfer Agent means Absa Capital or such other entity appointed by the Issuer as Transfer Agent either in respect of the Programme or a Tranche or Series of Notes issued under the Programme pursuant to the execution of an accession letter substantially in the form of Appendix A to this Agreement;

 

1.2.51 Uncertificated Note means a note which is not represented by any certificate or written instrument as contemplated in the Security Services Act, 2004;

 

LOGO

 

Page 13


1.2.52 ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX ” means the mid-market rate for deposits in South African Rand (ZAR) for a period of the Designated Maturity which appears on the Reuters Screen SAFEY Page as at 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the relevant date or any successor rate;

 

1.2.53 Zero Coupon Note ” means Notes which will be offered and sold at a discount to their Principal Amount or at par and will not bear interest other than in the case of late payment.

 

1.3 When any number of days is prescribed in this Agreement, same shall be reckoned inclusively of the first and exclusively of the last day unless the last day falls on a day which is not a Business Day, in which case the last day shall be the immediately following Business Day.

 

1.4 In the event that the day for payment of any amount due in terms of this Agreement should fall on a day which is not a Business Day, then the relevant date for payment shall be the following Business Day.

 

1.5 Where figures are referred to in numerals and in words, if there is any conflict between the two, the words shall prevail.

 

1.6 Where any term is defined within the context of any particular clause in this Agreement, the term so defined, unless it is clear from the clause in question that the term so defined has limited application to the relevant clause, shall bear the same meaning as ascribed to it for all purposes in terms of this Agreement, notwithstanding that that term has not been defined in this interpretation clause.

 

LOGO

 

Page 14


1.7 The use of the word “ including ” followed by a specific example or examples shall not be construed as limiting the meaning of the general wording preceding it and the eiusdem generis rule shall not be applied in the interpretation of such general wording or such specific example or examples.

 

1.8 Any reference to a statute in this Agreement is to that statute as at the date of signature of this Agreement and as amended or re-enacted from time to time and shall include any succeeding statute.

 

1.9 The rule of construction that, in the event of ambiguity, the contract shall be interpreted against the party responsible for the drafting or preparation of the Agreement, shall not apply.

 

1.10 The expiration or termination of this Agreement shall not affect such of the provisions of this Agreement as expressly provide that they will operate after any such expiration or termination or which of necessity must continue to have effect after such expiration or termination, notwithstanding that the clauses themselves do not expressly provide for this.

 

1.11 Words denoting the singular number only shall include the plural number also and vice versa; words denoting one gender only shall include the other genders; and words denoting persons only shall include firms and corporations and vice versa.

 

1.12 All references in this Agreement to costs or charges or expenses shall exclude any Value Added Tax or similar tax charged or chargeable in respect thereof.

 

LOGO

 

Page 15


1.13 For the purposes of this Agreement, the Notes of each Series shall form a separate series of Notes and the provisions of this Agreement shall apply mutatis mutandis separately and independently to the Notes of each Series and in this Agreement the expressions “Notes” and “Noteholders” shall be construed accordingly.

 

1.14 All references in this Agreement to an agreement, instrument or other document (including, without limitation, this Agreement, the Programme Agreement, the Programme Memorandum, the Operations and Procedures Memorandum, the Placement Agreement, the Notes and any terms and conditions appertaining thereto) shall be construed as a reference to that agreement, instrument or document as the same may be amended, modified, varied, restated, superseded, supplemented, replaced or novated from time to time.

 

1.15 Words denoting the singular number only shall include the plural number also and vice versa ; words denoting any one gender only shall include the other genders also; and words denoting persons only shall include firms and corporations and vice versa .

 

2 INTRODUCTION

 

2.1 On 6 April 2009, the Issuer, the Arranger and Dealers named therein executed the Programme Agreement (the “ Previous Programme Agreement ”) pursuant to which the Issuer may issue Notes in an aggregate nominal amount of up to ZAR10,000,000,000 under the Issuer’s Domestic Medium Term Note Programme. On 6 October 2009, the Issuer, the Arranger and Dealers named therein executed a revised programme agreement, which programme agreement has amended and restated the Previous Programme Agreement (the “ Programme Agreement ”) and which Programme Agreement may be further supplemented and/or amended and/or restated from time to time.

 

LOGO

 

Page 16


2.2 On 6 April 2009, the Issuer also executed and issued a Programme Memorandum (the “ Previous Programme Memorandum ”) pursuant to the Previous Programme Agreement. On 6 October 2009, the Issuer executed and issued a revised programme memorandum pursuant to the Programme Agreement, which programme memorandum supersedes the Previous Programme Memorandum (the “ Programme Memorandum ”) and which Programme Memorandum may be further amended and/or supplemented from time to time.

 

2.3 In addition to the matters recorded in the Programme Agreement, the Issuer wishes to record in this Agreement certain matters relating to the Notes, the Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent.

 

3 APPOINTMENT AS TRANSFER AGENT

The Issuer hereby appoints the Transfer Agent to act as Transfer Agent of the Issuer upon the terms and conditions set out below, for the purposes of, inter alia :

 

3.1 preparing, printing, completing, authenticating and delivering Global Certificates and preparing, printing, completing, authenticating and delivering Individual Certificates and in the case of Uncertificated Notes, providing the relevant central securities depository with such information and documentation as it may require to electronically record ownership thereof;

 

LOGO

 

Page 17


3.2 delivering Individual Certificates upon the exchange of Beneficial Interests in Notes represented by Global Certificates (in whole or in part) for Individual Certificates in accordance with the Terms and Conditions;

 

3.3 arranging on behalf of the Issuer for notices to be communicated to the Noteholders;

 

3.4 calculating and affixing the stamp duty, if any or such other duty as may be payable by the Issuer on the issue of Notes under the Programme;

 

3.5 subject to the Operations and Procedures Memorandum, submitting to the JSE or any other Relevant Financial Exchange such number of copies of each Pricing Supplement which relates to Notes which are to be listed as may reasonably be required;

 

3.6 maintaining the Register of Noteholders on behalf of the Issuer;

 

3.7 safekeeping (to the order of the Issuer) of any unissued, unexecuted blank Certificates which the Issuer may from time to time deliver to the Transfer Agent;

 

3.8 performing all other obligations and duties imposed upon it by the Terms and Conditions, the Notes, the Operations and Procedures Memorandum and this Agreement; and

 

3.9 procuring that the relevant Participants maintain a Sub-register in respect of Uncertificated Notes.

 

4 APPOINTMENT AS CALCULATION AGENT

The Issuer shall appoint the Calculation Agent to act as Calculation Agent of the Issuer upon the terms and conditions set out below, for the purposes of, inter alia :

 

4.1 acting as Calculation Agent in respect of Notes where named as such in the Applicable Pricing Supplement; and

 

LOGO

 

Page 18


4.2 performing all other obligations and duties imposed upon it by the Terms and Conditions, the Notes, the Operations and Procedures Memorandum and this Agreement.

 

5 APPOINTMENT OF PAYING AGENT

The Issuer hereby appoints the Paying Agent to act as Paying Agent of the Issuer upon the terms and conditions set out below, for the purposes of, inter alia :

 

5.1 acting as Paying Agent in respect of Notes where named as such in the Applicable Pricing Supplement; and

 

5.2 performing all other obligations and duties imposed upon it by the Terms and Conditions, the Notes, the Operations and Procedures Memorandum and this Agreement.

 

6 REGISTER

 

6.1 The Transfer Agent shall as long as any Note is Outstanding -

 

6.1.1 maintain at its offices (specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement), the Register. The Register shall reflect the number of Registered Notes issued and Outstanding. The Register shall contain the name, address and bank account details of the Noteholders holding Registered Notes. The Register shall set out the Principal Amount of the Notes issued to

 

LOGO

 

Page 19


 

each such Noteholder and shall show the date of such issue and the date upon which each such Noteholder became registered as such. The Register shall show the serial numbers of Certificates issued. The Register shall be open for inspection during normal business hours of the Transfer Agent to the Issuer, any Noteholder or any person authorised in writing by the Issuer or any Noteholder. The Transfer Agent shall not be bound to enter any trust in the Register or to take notice of any or to accede to any trust executed, whether expressly or impliedly to which any Note may be subject;

 

6.1.2 alter the Register in respect of any change of name, address or bank account number or other change in respect of any of the Noteholders of Registered Notes of which it is notified in accordance with the Terms and Conditions;

 

6.1.3 register within the prescribed statutory or other regulatory period all transfers of Registered Notes;

 

6.1.4 receive and keep in safe custody any document in relation to or affecting the title to any of the Notes including all Transfer Forms, forms of exchange, letters of administration and powers of attorney;

 

6.1.5 accept Certificates delivered to it for transfer, with the Transfer Form relating thereto duly executed or accompanied by a written instrument of transfer in a form satisfactory to the Transfer Agent, the relevant Settlement Agent and the Issuer, as well as complying with any legislative requirements for such Transfer Form, and duly executed by, the transferor and the transferee thereof (or their attorneys duly authorised in writing) for the transfer of all or part of the Notes represented by any such Certificate in accordance with the Terms and Conditions.

 

LOGO

 

Page 20


6.2 Any person becoming entitled to Notes in consequence of the death, sequestration or liquidation of the holder of such Notes may upon producing such evidence that he holds the position in respect of which he proposes to act under this clause or of his title as the Issuer shall require, be registered himself as the holder of such Notes or, subject to the requirements of Conditions 12 and 13 of the Terms and Conditions, may transfer such Notes. The Issuer and the Paying Agent shall be entitled to retain any amount payable upon the Notes to which any person is so entitled until such person shall be registered as aforesaid or shall duly transfer the Notes.

 

6.3 The Register will be closed from the Last Day to Register preceding any Interest Payment Date in respect of the Notes until that Interest Payment Date and the Transfer Agent shall not be required, during the period in which the Register is closed, unless directed by the Issuer, to register any transfer, or exchange of any Registered Notes.

 

7 SUB-REGISTER

 

7.1 For as long as any Beneficial Interest is outstanding, the Transfer Agent shall procure that the relevant Participant maintains the Sub-register which complies with all applicable legal rules and the requirements of the Security Services Act and the following provisions:

 

7.1.1 without limiting the provisions of clause 7.1 above, the Sub-register will contain the name, address and bank account details of Noteholders in respect of Beneficial Interest;

 

LOGO

 

Page 21


7.1.2 the Sub-register will set out the Principal Amount of Beneficial Interest issued to a Noteholder and registered in the Sub-register, the date of issue and the date on which the relevant entry was made in it;

 

7.1.3 the Sub-register will be open for inspection during normal business hours of the relevant Participant to the Issuer, persons authorised by the Issuer thereto and any person entered as a Noteholder in it or any person authorised by such Noteholder in writing;

 

7.1.4 the relevant Participant shall not be obliged to enter into any trust in the Sub-register or to take notice of any or accede to any trust executed, expressly or impliedly, to which any Beneficial Interest may be subject;

 

7.1.5 the Sub-register shall be altered in respect of any change of name, address or bank account number or other change in respect of any holder of Beneficial Interest which is notified in accordance with the Terms and Conditions;

 

7.1.6 the relevant Participant shall register within the prescribed statutory or other regulatory period, all transfers of Beneficial Interest;

 

7.1.7 the relevant Participant shall receive and keep in safe custody, any document in relation to or affecting the title to any relevant Beneficial Interest;

 

7.1.8 the relevant Participant shall accept any instrument delivered to it in respect of the transfer of Beneficial Interest and ensure compliance of such instrument with applicable legislation and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions; and

 

LOGO

 

Page 22


7.1.9 the Transfer Agent shall procure that the relevant Participant complies with the provisions of this clause 7.

 

7.2 Any person becoming entitled to Beneficial Interest in consequence of the death, sequestration or liquidation of the holder of such Beneficial Interest may upon producing such evidence that he holds the position in respect of which he proposes to act under this clause or of his title as the Issuer or the relevant Participant shall require, be registered in the Sub-register as the holder of such Beneficial Interest or, subject to the requirements of Conditions 12 and 13 of the Terms and Conditions, may transfer such Beneficial Interest . The Issuer and the Paying Agent shall be entitled to retain any amount payable upon the Beneficial Interest to which any person is so entitled until such person shall be registered as aforesaid or shall duly transfer the Beneficial Interest.

 

7.3 The Sub-register will be closed from the Last Day to Register preceding any Interest Payment Date in respect of the Beneficial Interest until that Interest Payment Date and the Transfer Agent or the Participant shall not be required, during the period in which the Sub-register is closed, unless directed by the Issuer, to register any transfer, or exchange of any Beneficial Interest.

 

8 TRANSFER OF NOTES

 

8.1 Registered Notes are transferable by registration only in accordance with the provisions of Condition 13.1 of the Terms and Conditions. Ownership in Uncertificated Notes is transferable only upon debiting and crediting, respectively, of the account in the Sub-register from which the transfer is effected and the account in the Sub-register to which transfer is to be made, in accordance with the rules of the Central Securities Depository.

 

LOGO

 

Page 23


8.2 Where a holder of Notes has transferred part only of his holding of Notes represented by a single Certificate, there shall be delivered to him without charge by the Issuer a Certificate in respect of the balance of such holding, subject to the provisions of Condition 13.1 of the Terms and Conditions in relation to Registered Notes.

 

9 ISSUE OF GLOBAL CERTIFICATES

 

9.1 Subject to clause 9.3, in connection with the issue of any Registered Notes, following receipt of a signed copy of the Applicable Pricing Supplement (signed by the Issuer’s authorised representative named in the list referred to in clause 25.8), the Issuer hereby authorises the Transfer Agent and the Transfer Agent hereby agrees, to take the steps required of the Transfer Agent in the Operations and Procedures Memorandum. For this purpose the Transfer Agent will, inter alia on behalf of the Issuer -

 

9.1.1 prepare a Global Certificate, incorporating the Terms and Conditions, to which is attached a copy of the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

9.1.2 authenticate such Global Certificate in accordance with the provisions of clause 11.3 of this Agreement;

 

9.1.3 in respect of Notes listed on the bond market of the JSE or, if unlisted, still held in the Central Securities Depository and evidenced by a Global Certificate, deliver by hand such Global Certificate to the Central Securities Depository (via the Issuer’s Settlement Agent) as depository and registered holder of the Notes represented by the Global Certificate, against receipt from the Central Securities Depository of confirmation

 

LOGO

 

Page 24


 

that it is holding the Global Certificate in safe custody for the account of the Issuer’s Settlement Agent and instruct the Issuer’s Settlement Agent, unless otherwise agreed in writing between the Transfer Agent and the Issuer, to credit the Notes represented by such Global Certificate to the Relevant Dealer’s (or investor’s) securities accounts with their Settlement Agents against the receipt of payment, less any permitted deductions, by the Issuer’s Settlement Agent on the Issue Date of such Notes;

 

9.1.4 in respect of Notes listed on a Relevant Financial Exchange other than the bond market of the JSE, deliver to the relevant central securities depository such Certificates or other documents as may be required for the dematerialisation, immobilisation or registration of the Notes;

 

9.1.5 ensure that the Notes of each Tranche are assigned a stock code and International Securities Identification Number (“ ISIN ”) (if applicable) by the JSE or any other Relevant Financial Exchange;

 

9.1.6 enter the name of the Central Securities Depository (or its nominee) or any other relevant central securities depository as registered holder of the Notes represented by the Global Certificates in the Register.

 

9.2 Global Certificates shall be dated -

 

9.2.1 in the case of a Global Certificate issued on the Issue Date, the Issue Date; or

 

9.2.2 in the case of a Global Certificate issued to the transferor upon transfer in part of the Notes represented by the original Global Certificate, with the same date as the date of the Note transferred; or

 

LOGO

 

Page 25


9.2.3 in the case of a Global Certificate issued pursuant to Condition 11 of the Terms and Conditions, with the same date as the date of the lost, stolen, mutilated, defaced or destroyed Global Certificate in replacement of which it is issued.

 

9.3 The Transfer Agent shall only be required to perform its obligations under clause 9.1 if it holds a duly executed written authorisation (being the Applicable Pricing Supplement and the confirmation referred to in the Operations and Procedures Memorandum) from the Issuer’s authorised representative as well as the required signatures to affix to the Global Certificate. The Transfer Agent will provide the Central Securities Depository or any other relevant central securities depository and the Participants with the notifications, instructions or other information required to be given by the Transfer Agent to the Central Securities Depository and the Participants in accordance with the Applicable Procedures.

 

10 ISSUE OF INDIVIDUAL CERTIFICATES

 

10.1 Upon the issue of unlisted Registered Notes which are not intended to be held in the Central Securities Depository or upon notice from a Participant pursuant to the Terms and Conditions requesting the exchange or partial exchange of a Beneficial Interest in Notes for an Individual Certificate, the Transfer Agent shall deliver the relevant Certificate(s) in accordance with the Terms and Conditions. For this purpose the Transfer Agent is hereby authorised on behalf of the Issuer -

 

10.1.1 to prepare the requested form of Certificate(s) incorporating the Terms and Conditions (unless otherwise determined by the Issuer) and to attach the Applicable Pricing Supplement thereto;

 

LOGO

 

Page 26


10.1.2 to authenticate such Certificate(s) in accordance with clause 11.3 of this Agreement;

 

10.1.3 to deliver to the Relevant Dealer or the investors procured by the Relevant Dealer, such Certificate(s); and

 

10.1.4 in respect of Registered Notes, to deliver in accordance with the Applicable Procedures by hand or by registered mail such Individual Certificate(s) to the Participant (at the risk of the Noteholder) requesting such Certificate(s) in exchange or partial exchange for a Beneficial Interest in Registered Notes. In the case of a partial exchange, the Transfer Agent shall enter details of any partial exchange in the Register and cancel the Global Certificate, if any, representing the Notes prior to the issue of Individual Certificate(s), and then issue and authenticate a new Global Certificate, if any, representing the balance of the relevant Notes (excluding the amount of Notes represented by the newly-issued Individual Certificate(s)).

 

10.2 The Transfer Agent shall notify the Issuer forthwith upon receipt of a request for issue of Individual Certificate(s) in accordance with the Terms and Conditions (and the aggregate nominal amount of such Notes to be exchanged in connection therewith).

 

10.3 Certificates shall be dated -

 

10.3.1 in the case of an Individual Certificate issued on the Issue Date, the Issue Date; or

 

10.3.2 in the case of an Individual Certificate issued in exchange for a Beneficial Interest in Notes, or upon transfer of Notes represented by an Individual Certificate, the date of registration in the Register of the exchange or transfer; or

 

LOGO

 

Page 27


10.3.3 in the case of an Individual Certificate issued to the transferor upon transfer in part of Notes represented by an Individual Certificate, the same date as the original Certificate; or

 

10.3.4 in the case of an Individual Certificate issued pursuant to Condition 11 of the Terms and Conditions, the same date as the date of the lost, stolen, mutilated, defaced or destroyed document in replacement of which it is issued.

 

10.4 The Transfer Agent shall, to the extent that the Terms and Conditions permit this, charge to the recipient holder of an Individual Certificate pursuant to an issue, exchange or transfer (i) the costs or expenses (if any) in delivering Certificates issued pursuant to such issue, exchange or transfer other than by regular mail and (ii) a sum sufficient to cover any stamp duty, tax or other governmental charge that may be imposed in relation to the exchange or transfer.

 

11 TERMS OF ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES

 

11.1 The Transfer Agent shall cause all Certificates prepared by or delivered to it and held by it under this Agreement to be maintained in safe custody and shall ensure that such Certificates are issued and delivered only in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and the Terms and Conditions.

 

11.2 Subject to the procedures set out in the Operations and Procedures Memorandum, for the purposes of clause 9.1 and 10, the Transfer Agent is

 

LOGO

 

Page 28


 

entitled to treat a facsimile or other written means of communication from a person purporting to be (and who the Transfer Agent believes in good faith to be) an authorised representative of the Issuer named in the list referred to in, or notified pursuant to, clause 25.8 as sufficient instructions and authority of the Issuer for the Transfer Agent to act.

 

11.3 Certificates shall be signed physically by, or by affixing electronic signatures thereto of, two directors of the Issuer, as required in terms of the Commercial Paper Regulations published in Government Notice 2172 (Government Gazette 16167 of 14 December 1994). The identities of such duly authorised signatories shall be notified to the Transfer Agent. The Issuer shall promptly notify the Transfer Agent of any change in identity of the authorised signatories and if necessary provide new certificates to the Transfer Agent reflecting such change.

 

11.4 In the event that a person who has signed on behalf of the Issuer any Certificate, not yet issued but held by the Transfer Agent in accordance with clause 11.1, ceases to be authorised as described in clause 25.8, the Transfer Agent shall (unless the Issuer gives notice to the Transfer Agent that Certificates signed by that person do not represent valid and binding obligations of the Issuer or otherwise until replacements have been provided to the Transfer Agent) continue to have authority to issue any such Certificates, and the Issuer hereby warrants to the Transfer Agent that such Certificates shall, unless notified as aforesaid, be valid and binding obligations of the Issuer. Promptly upon the Transfer Agent being notified that such person has ceased to be authorised, the Transfer Agent shall prepare replacement Certificates, the Transfer Agent shall cancel and destroy the Certificates held by it which are signed by such person and shall provide to the Issuer a confirmation of destruction in respect thereof specifying the certificates so cancelled and destroyed.

 

LOGO

 

Page 29


11.5 Unless otherwise requested by the relevant Noteholder, the holder of Notes of any Series shall be entitled to receive one Certificate in respect of his entire holding of such Series.

 

11.6 The joint holders of Registered Notes in any Series shall be entitled to one Certificate only in respect of their joint holding of such Notes which shall, except where they otherwise direct, be delivered to the joint holder whose name appears first in the Register in respect of such joint holding.

 

12 PAYMENTS

 

12.1 Save as otherwise agreed, the Calculation Agent will notify the Issuer, not less than 10 Business Days prior to each due date for payment in respect of each Series of Notes for the time being Outstanding of the aggregate amount payable in respect of such Series on such due date.

 

12.2 Unless otherwise agreed with the Transfer Agent, the Issuer will ensure that no later than 10h00 (Johannesburg time) on the second Business Day immediately preceding the date on which any payment is to be made by the Paying Agent under the Terms and Conditions, the amount specified by the Calculation Agent in terms of clause 12.1 is paid, in freely transferable funds, into a separate bank account of the Issuer. The details of this bank account are set out in Schedule 6 hereto. The Paying Agent shall have the ability to draw the amount specified in clause 12.1 to meet all payment obligations under the Notes and such payment made by the Issuer shall be sufficient in amount so as to allow the Paying Agent to meet all payment

 

LOGO

 

Page 30


 

obligations under the Notes. So long as any Notes remain Outstanding, the Issuer undertakes not to withdraw such money required by the Paying Agent to meet the payment obligations under the Notes.

 

12.3 All interest in respect of the bank account referred to in clause 12.2 shall accrue for the sole benefit of the Issuer and all bank charges in respect of such account shall be borne by the Issuer.

 

12.4 Immediately after paying such amount into the abovementioned bank account, the Issuer shall ensure that the Paying Agent receives an irrevocable confirmation that payment has been made, in the form of a SWIFT or telefax message or other form acceptable to the Paying Agent.

 

12.5 Whilst any Registered Notes are represented by a Global Certificate, all payments due in respect of such Notes shall be made to, or to the order of, the registered holder of the Global Certificate(s), subject to and in accordance with the provisions of the Terms and Conditions in respect of those Notes.

 

12.6 Whilst any Registered Notes are represented by an Individual Certificate, all payments due in respect of such Notes shall be made to, or to the order of, the person(s) whose name(s) appear on the Register relating to the Individual Certificates, subject to and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions in respect of those Notes.

 

12.7 Holders of Uncertificated Notes are not required to present and/or surrender any documents of title for payment. Payment in respect of Uncertificated Notes will be made upon presentation of acceptable proof of identity of the prospective payee.

 

LOGO

 

Page 31


12.8 All payments in accordance with this clause 12 shall be made in the manner described in Condition 8 of the Terms and Conditions.

 

12.9 On the occasion of any payments by the Paying Agent, upon presentation and surrender of the relevant Certificates, the Paying Agent shall cause such Certificates to be cancelled.

 

12.10 Subject to the receipt by the Paying Agent of the payment confirmation as provided in clause 12.4, on each date on which any payment in respect of a Note becomes due under the Terms and Conditions, the Paying Agent shall pay such amount by no later than 10h00 (Johannesburg time), on that day. Payment shall be made by the Paying Agent in immediately available and freely transferable funds to the nominated account of the Noteholder via a SWIFT message, or such other payment system or mechanism as the Paying Agent and the relevant Noteholder may agree.

 

12.11 If for any reason the Paying Agent considers that the amounts to be received by the Paying Agent pursuant to clause 12.2 will be, or the amounts actually received by it pursuant thereto are, insufficient to satisfy all claims in respect of all payments then falling due in respect of the Notes, the Paying Agent shall promptly give written notice to the Issuer indicating the insufficient amount and the Paying Agent shall not be obliged to pay any claims under the Notes until the Paying Agent has received the full amount of all such payments.

 

12.12

If the Paying Agent pays any amounts to the holders of Notes from its own funds at a time when it has not received payment in full in respect of the relevant Notes in accordance with clause 12.2 (the excess of the amounts so paid over the amounts so received being the “ Shortfall ”), the Issuer will, in

 

LOGO

 

Page 32


 

addition to paying amounts due under clause 12.2, pay to the Paying Agent, on demand, interest (at a rate determined at that time by the Paying Agent which represents the Paying Agent’s cost of funding the Shortfall) on the Shortfall (or the unreimbursed portion thereof) until the receipt in full by the Paying Agent of the Shortfall.

 

12.13 If the amount of principal and/or interest then due for payment is not paid in full as contemplated in clauses 12.11 and 12.12 (otherwise than by reason of a deduction required by law to be made therefrom), the Paying Agent shall keep a record of such insufficient amount or Shortfall (as the case may be) and such record shall, in the absence of manifest error, be prima facie evidence that the payment in question has not been made to the extent of the insufficient amount or Shortfall (as the case may be).

 

12.14 If for any reason the Paying Agent, draws funds from the bank account referred to in clause 12.2 but is not required to make certain payments in terms of clause 12, the Paying Agent shall transfer the funds not utilised back to the Issuer.

 

12.15 A certificate by the Paying Agent certifying that, as at the date of such certificate ( “Certificate Date” ), the Paying Agent has paid all amounts of the principal and/or interest then due in respect of any Notes issued by the Issuer under the Programme to -

 

12.15.1 the Central Securities Depository or such other registered holder of the Global Certificate, in the case of Notes represented by a Global Certificate; and/or

 

12.15.2 all Noteholders reflected in the Register on the Certificate Date, in the case of Notes represented by Individual Certificates; and/or

 

LOGO

 

Page 33


12.15.3 the Central Securities Depository or such other registered holder of the Uncertificated Note reflected as such on the Certificate Date, in the case of Uncertificated Notes,

and such certificate shall constitute prima facie proof, as between the Issuer on the one hand, and the Noteholders, Arranger and Dealers or any of them, on the other hand, of the discharge of all obligations of the Issuer to Noteholders under such Notes insofar as payment of the principal and/or interest is concerned. For the avoidance of doubt, the rights of the Dealers, Arranger and Noteholders in respect of the Programme shall not be affected by the provisions of this clause.

 

12.16 If on issue of the Notes the Paying Agent pays an amount (the “ Advance ”) to the Issuer on the basis that a payment (the “ Payment ”) has been, or will be, received from a Dealer or investor and if the Payment is not received by the Paying Agent on the date the Paying Agent pays the Issuer, the Issuer shall repay to the Paying Agent the Advance and shall pay interest on the Advance (or the unreimbursed portion thereof) from (and including) the date such Advance is made to (but excluding) the earlier of repayment of the Advance and receipt by the Paying Agent of the Payment from the Dealer or investor (at a rate determined at the time of the Advance by the Paying Agent to represent its cost of funding the Advance provided that the manner of calculating such rate is consented to by the Issuer, whose consent shall not be unreasonably withheld). If the Paying Agent pays an amount in terms of this clause, then it shall promptly notify the Issuer of the fact that such payment by it was in fact an Advance and that the required payment has not yet been received by the Paying Agent.

 

LOGO

 

Page 34


12.17 Upon the Issuer being discharged from its obligation to make payments in respect of any Notes pursuant to the relevant Terms and Conditions, and provided that there is no outstanding bona fide and proper claim in respect of any such payments, the Paying Agent shall forthwith refrain from drawing on any sums paid by the Issuer pursuant to clause 12.2.

 

13 EXCHANGEABLE NOTES

The Issuer shall from time to time issue instructions to the Transfer Agent in relation to the redemption of Exchangeable Notes, including the manner in which the Exchange Securities will be delivered to Noteholders.

 

14 DETERMINATIONS AND NOTIFICATIONS IN RESPECT OF NOTES

 

14.1 The Calculation Agent shall, unless otherwise agreed, make all such determinations and calculations (howsoever described) as it is required to do under the Terms and Conditions, all subject to and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions and the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

14.2 The Calculation Agent shall not be responsible to the Issuer or to any third party (except in the event of negligence, default or bad faith of the Calculation Agent, as the case may be) for any losses arising from or as a result of the Calculation Agent having acted on any quotation given by any Reference Bank which subsequently may be found to be incorrect.

 

14.3 The Calculation Agent shall promptly notify (and confirm in writing to) the Issuer, the Relevant Financial Exchange (if any), the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent of, inter alia , each Interest Rate, Interest Amount and Interest

 

LOGO

 

Page 35


 

Payment Date and all other amounts, rates and dates which it is obliged to determine or calculate under the Terms and Conditions, the Calculation Agency Agreement and the Applicable Pricing Supplement as soon as practicable after the determination thereof (and in any event not later than 10 Business Days, prior to the relevant Interest Payment Date) and of any subsequent amendment thereto pursuant to the Terms and Conditions.

 

14.4 The Calculation Agent shall use reasonable endeavours to cause each Interest Rate, Interest Amount and Interest Payment Date and all other amounts, rates and dates which it is obliged to determine or calculate under the Terms and Conditions, the Calculation Agency Agreement and the Applicable Pricing Supplement to be notified to relevant parties as required in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the Calculation Agency Agreement and this Agreement as soon as possible after their determination or calculation.

 

14.5 If the Calculation Agent does not for any reason determine and/or calculate and/or publish the Interest Rate, Interest Amount and/or Interest Payment Date in respect of any Interest Period or any other amount, rate or date as provided in this clause 14, it shall forthwith notify the Issuer, the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent of that fact.

 

14.6 The Calculation Agent shall in relation to each Series of relevant Notes, perform all the functions and duties imposed on the Calculation Agent by the Terms and Conditions of the relevant Notes. Should the Relevant Dealer, or the Lead Manager, agree with the Issuer to appoint in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, such Dealer or Lead Manager or another person nominated by such Dealer or Lead Manager, as Calculation

 

LOGO

 

Page 36


 

Agent, then the appointment of such Dealer, Lead Manager or nominee shall be automatic upon the issue of the relevant Tranche or Series of Notes, and shall, except as separately agreed between the relevant parties, be on the terms and conditions as set out in the Calculation Agency Agreement in the form attached hereto as Appendix B (the terms of which shall be incorporated herein without the need for separate execution thereof to the extent that the Dealer, Lead Manager or nominee acts as the Calculation Agent), and the Calculation Schedule to the Calculation Agency Agreement shall be deemed to be duly annotated to include such Tranche or Series of Notes. The name of the Dealer, Lead Manager or nominee so appointed will be entered in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

15 INTEREST DETERMINATION INCLUDING FALLBACK PROVISIONS

 

15.1 Screen Rate Determination

 

15.1.1 Where Screen Rate Determination is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the manner in which the Interest Rate is to be determined, the Interest Rate for each Interest Period will, save as provided below, be either -

 

15.1.1.1 the offered quotation (if there is only one quotation on the Relevant Screen Page); or

 

15.1.1.2 the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place, with 0.00005 being rounded upwards) of the offered quotations,

for the Reference Rate which appears or appear, as the case may be, on the Relevant Screen Page as at 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the Interest

 

LOGO

 

Page 37


Determination Date in question, plus or minus (as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) the Margin (if any), all as determined by the Calculation Agent. If five or more such offered quotations are available on the Relevant Screen Page, the highest (or, if there is more than one such highest quotation, one only of such quotations) and the lowest (or, if there is more than one such lowest quotation, one only of such quotations) shall be disregarded by the Transfer Agent for the purpose of determining the arithmetic mean (rounded as provided above) of such offered quotations.

 

15.1.2 If the Relevant Screen Page is not available or if, in the case of 15.1.1.1, no such offered quotation appears or, in the case of 15.1.1.2, fewer than three such offered quotations appear, in each case as at the time specified in the preceding paragraph, the Calculation Agent shall request the principal Johannesburg office of each of the Reference Banks to provide the Calculation Agent with its offered quotation (expressed as a percentage rate per annum) for the Reference Rate at approximately 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the Interest Determination Date in question. If two or more of the Reference Banks provide the Calculation Agent with such offered quotations, the Interest Rate for such Interest Period shall be the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place with 0.00005 being rounded upwards) of such offered quotations plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any), all as determined by the Calculation Agent.

 

15.1.3 If the Interest Rate cannot be determined by applying the provisions of clauses 15.1.1 and 15.1.2, the Interest Rate for the relevant Interest Period shall be the rate per annum which the Calculation Agent

 

LOGO

 

Page 38


 

determines as being the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place, with 0.00005 being rounded upwards) of the rates, as communicated to (and at the request of) the Calculation Agent by the Reference Banks or any two or more of them, at which such banks offered, at approximately 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the relevant Interest Determination Date, in respect of deposits in an amount approximately equal to the nominal amount of the Notes of the relevant Series for a period equal to that which would have been used for the Reference Rate to prime banks in the Johannesburg inter-bank market plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any). If fewer than two of the Reference Banks provide the Calculation Agent with such offered rates, the Interest Rate for the relevant Interest Period will be determined by the Calculation Agent as the arithmetic mean (rounded as provided above) of the rates for deposits in an amount approximately equal to the nominal amount of the Notes of the relevant Series, for a period equal to that which would have been used for the Reference Rate, quoted at approximately 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the relevant Interest Determination Date, by four leading banks in Johannesburg (selected by the Calculation Agent and approved by the Issuer) plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any). If the Interest Rate cannot be determined in accordance with the foregoing provisions of this clause, the Interest Rate shall be determined as at the last preceding Interest Determination Date (though substituting, where a different Margin is to be applied to the relevant Interest Period from that which applied to the last preceding Interest Period, the Margin relating to the relevant Interest Period, in place of the Margin relating to that last preceding Interest Period).

 

LOGO

 

Page 39


15.1.4 If the Reference Rate from time to time in respect of Floating Rate Notes is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as being other than ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX, the Interest Rate in respect of such Notes will be determined as provided in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

15.2 ISDA Determination

 

15.2.1 Where ISDA Determination is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the manner in which the Interest Rate is to be determined, the Interest Rate for each Interest Period will be the relevant ISDA Rate plus or minus (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) the Margin (if any).

 

15.2.2 For the purposes of this clause 15.2 -

 

15.2.2.1 ISDA Rate ” for an Interest Period means a rate equal to the Floating Rate that would be determined by such agent as is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement under a notional interest rate swap transaction if that agent were acting as Calculation Agent for that swap transaction under the terms of an agreement incorporating the ISDA Definitions and under which -

 

15.2.2.1.1 the Floating Rate Option is as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

15.2.2.1.2 the Designated Maturity is the period specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement; and

 

15.2.2.1.3 the relevant Reset Date is either: (i) if the applicable Floating Rate Option is based on ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX, on the first day of that Interest Period; or (ii) in any other case, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

LOGO

 

Page 40


15.2.2.2 Floating Rate ”, “ Floating Rate Option ”, “ Designated Maturity ” and “ Reset Date ” have the meanings given to those expressions in the ISDA Definitions.

 

15.2.3 The Calculation Agent shall be deemed to have fulfilled its obligations as aforesaid if it has made the required determinations in the manner provided in Condition 10.2 of the Terms and Conditions.

 

16 NOTICE OF WITHHOLDING OR DEDUCTION

If the Issuer is, in respect of any payment, compelled to withhold or deduct any amount for or on account of taxes, duties, assessments or governmental charges as specifically contemplated under the Terms and Conditions, the Issuer shall give notice thereof to the Paying Agent as soon as it becomes aware of the requirement to make such withholding or deduction and shall give to the Paying Agent such information as it shall require to enable it to comply with such requirement.

 

17 DUTIES OF THE TRANSFER AGENT IN CONNECTION WITH EARLY REDEMPTION

 

17.1 If the Issuer decides to redeem any Notes for the time being Outstanding prior to their Maturity Date in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the Issuer shall give notice of such decision to the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent not less than 7 days before the date on which the Issuer will give notice to the Noteholders in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of such redemption in order to enable the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent to undertake their obligations herein and in respect of the Terms and Conditions.

 

LOGO

 

Page 41


17.2 If only some of the Notes are to be redeemed on such date, the Transfer Agent shall make the required drawing in accordance with the Terms and Conditions but shall give the Issuer reasonable notice of the time and place proposed for such drawing and the Issuer shall be entitled to send representatives to attend such drawing.

 

17.3 Not less than 30 days nor more than 60 days (in the case of redemption for tax reasons) and not less than 15 days nor more than 30 days (in the case of redemption at the option of the Issuer) prior to redemption the Transfer Agent shall publish the notice required in connection with any such redemption and shall at the same time also publish a separate list of the serial numbers of any Certificates previously drawn and not presented for redemption. Such notice shall specify the date fixed for redemption, the redemption amount, the manner in which redemption will be effected and, in the case of a partial redemption, the serial numbers of the Certificates representing Notes to be redeemed. Such notice will be published in accordance with the Terms and Conditions. The early redemption of any Notes represented by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form shall be effected and publicised in accordance with the Applicable Procedures, to the extent relevant.

 

17.4 The Transfer Agent will keep a stock of notices (each a “ Put Notice ”) in the form set out in Schedule 5 and will make such notices available on demand to holders of Notes, the conditions of which provide for redemption at the option of Noteholders. Upon receipt of any Certificate deposited in the

 

LOGO

 

Page 42


 

exercise of such option in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the Transfer Agent shall hold such Certificate on behalf of the depositing Noteholder (but shall not, save as provided below, release it) until the due date for redemption of the relevant Notes consequent upon the exercise of such option, when, subject as provided below, it presents such Certificate to the Paying Agent which shall pay such moneys in accordance with the directions of the Noteholder contained in the Put Notice. Where the Issuer and/or the Noteholders have an option to redeem the Notes, the Applicable Pricing Supplement will state that no splitting will be allowed, and where such option is applicable, the relevant Certificate shall be attached to the Put Notice. If, prior to such due date for redemption, such Note becomes immediately due and payable, or if upon due presentation, payment of such redemption money is improperly withheld or refused, the Transfer Agent shall post such Certificate by uninsured post to, and at the risk of, the relevant Noteholder (unless the Noteholder has otherwise requested and paid the costs of such insurance to the Transfer Agent at the time of depositing the Certificates) to such address as may have been given by the Noteholder in the Put Notice.

 

17.5 In respect of the receipt by the Transfer Agent of notice in respect of the redemption of a Beneficial Interest in Notes represented by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form, the Transfer Agent shall notify the Issuer, the relevant Settlement Agent and the Paying Agent to proceed with such redemption in terms of the Applicable Procedures, to the extent relevant.

 

17.6 In respect of the receipt by the Transfer Agent of notice in respect of the redemption of an interest in Uncertificated Notes, the Transfer Agent shall

 

LOGO

 

Page 43


 

notify the Issuer, the relevant Settlement Agent and the Paying Agent to proceed with such redemption in terms of the Applicable Procedures, to the extent relevant.

 

17.7 The Transfer Agent shall receive Certificates surrendered in respect of any early redemption and, at the request of the Paying Agent, deliver such number of new Certificates, as may be necessary upon the partial redemption of any Notes.

 

17.8 At the end of each period for exercise of options, the Transfer Agent shall promptly notify the Issuer of the nominal amount of Notes in respect of which options have been exercised together with the serial numbers of the Certificates where applicable, representing such Notes and confirm that such Certificates have been cancelled.

 

18 RECEIPT AND PUBLICATION OF NOTICES

 

18.1 Forthwith upon the receipt by the Transfer Agent of a demand or notice from any Noteholder in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the Transfer Agent shall forward a copy thereof to the Issuer.

 

18.2 On behalf of and at the request and expense of the Issuer, the Transfer Agent shall cause to be published all notices required to be given by the Issuer to the Noteholders in accordance with the Terms and Conditions.

 

19 CANCELLATION OF NOTES

 

19.1 All Certificates representing Notes, which are redeemed, transferred or replaced shall be surrendered to and cancelled by the Transfer Agent. In addition, all those Certificates representing Notes which are purchased by, or on behalf of the Issuer, and cancelled, shall be surrendered to the Transfer Agent.

 

LOGO

 

Page 44


19.2 A certificate stating -

 

19.2.1 the aggregate nominal amount of Notes (and serial numbers of Certificates in respect thereof) which have been redeemed, paid, transferred or replaced and the aggregate amount paid in respect thereof;

 

19.2.2 the aggregate nominal amount of purchased Notes cancelled (and serial numbers in respect thereof);

 

19.2.3 the number of Certificates cancelled and the serial numbers thereof; and

 

19.2.4 the aggregate amount paid in respect of principal and/or interest on such Notes,

shall be given to the Issuer by the Transfer Agent as soon as reasonably practicable and in any event within three months after the date of such redemption or, as the case may be, cancellation, payment, transfer or replacement.

 

19.3 The Transfer Agent shall destroy all cancelled Certificates and, forthwith upon destruction, furnish the Issuer with a certificate of the serial numbers of the destroyed Certificates.

 

19.4 Without prejudice to the obligations of the Transfer Agent pursuant to clause 19.2, the Transfer Agent shall keep a full and complete record of all Notes and of their redemption, purchase by or on behalf of the Issuer or subscription and cancellation, payment, transfer or exchange (as the case may be) and of all replacement Certificates issued in substitution for

 

LOGO

 

Page 45


 

mutilated, defaced, destroyed, lost or stolen Certificates as well as Beneficial Interests in Notes represented by a Global Certificate which have been exchanged for Individual Certificates. The Transfer Agent shall at all reasonable times make such record available to the Issuer and any persons authorised by it, for inspection and for the taking of copies thereof or extracts therefrom.

 

19.5 All records and certificates made or given pursuant to this clause 19 and clause 20 shall make a distinction between Notes of each Series and between Registered Notes.

 

19.6 The Transfer Agent acknowledges that all forms of Notes and Certificates delivered to and held by it pursuant to this Agreement are held by it as custodian only and it shall not be entitled to and shall not claim any lien or other security interest therein. The Transfer Agent shall further only use such forms of Certificates in accordance with this Agreement, take security measures to prevent theft, loss, destruction and keep an inventory of all such forms and make that inventory available to the Issuer at all times, provided that the Transfer Agent shall have no liability for their theft, loss or destruction, unless caused by the negligence or wilful default of the Transfer Agent.

 

20 EXCHANGE OR REPLACEMENT OF CERTIFICATES

 

20.1 In the case of Registered Notes represented by the Global Certificate or uncertificated form, the registered holder shall initially be the Central Securities Depository or other central securities depository. In the case of Registered Notes issued in the form of an Individual Certificate, the Register shall contain the name of the person that so requested the issue of an Individual Certificate pursuant to Condition 11 of the Terms and

 

LOGO

 

Page 46


 

Conditions, or took transfer of Notes represented by an Individual Certificate pursuant to Condition 13 of the Terms and Conditions. Certificates shall be issued without charge by the Issuer to such persons requesting the issue of an Individual Certificate or taking transfer of Notes represented by an Individual Certificate.

 

20.2 The Issuer will cause a sufficient quantity of additional forms of executed Certificates to be available, upon request, to the Transfer Agent at its specified office for the purpose of issuing replacement Certificates as provided below, alternatively, the Transfer Agent may, from time to time, store in safekeeping, to the order of the Issuer, a sufficient number of additional forms of Certificates for the purpose of issuing replacement Certificates as provided below.

 

20.3 The Transfer Agent will, subject to and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions and the following provisions of this clause 20, cause to be authenticated and delivered any replacement Certificates in place of Certificates which have been lost, stolen, mutilated, defaced or destroyed.

 

20.4 The Transfer Agent shall not issue any replacement Certificate unless and until the claimant therefor shall have -

 

20.4.1 paid such costs and expenses as may be incurred in connection therewith;

 

20.4.2 furnished the Transfer Agent with such evidence and indemnity as the Issuer may reasonably require; and

 

20.4.3 in the case of any mutilated or defaced Certificate surrendered such Certificate to the Transfer Agent.

 

LOGO

 

Page 47


20.5 The Transfer Agent shall cancel any mutilated or defaced Certificate, in respect of which a replacement Certificate, has been issued pursuant to this clause 20 and, unless otherwise instructed by the Issuer in writing within 7 Business Days of such notice, thereafter shall destroy such cancelled Certificates, and furnish the Issuer with a destruction certificate containing the information specified in clauses 19.2 and 19.3.

 

20.6 The Transfer Agent shall, on issuing any replacement Certificate, forthwith inform the Issuer and the Paying Agent of the serial number of such replacement Certificate, issued and (if known) of the serial number of the Certificate in place of which such replacement Certificate, has been issued.

 

20.7 The Transfer Agent shall keep a full and complete record of all replacement Certificates, issued and shall make such record available at all reasonable times to the Issuer and any persons authorised by the Issuer for inspection and for the taking of copies thereof or extracts therefrom.

 

20.8 Whenever any Certificate, for which a replacement Certificate, has been issued and in respect of which the serial number is known is presented to the Transfer Agent for payment, the Transfer Agent shall immediately send notice thereof to the Issuer.

 

21 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS AVAILABLE FOR INSPECTION

 

21.1 The Issuer shall supply sufficient copies of the following documents to the Transfer Agent which shall hold copies available for inspection at its specified office during normal business hours -

 

21.1.1 certified copies of resolutions of the Issuer evidencing that the Issuer is authorised to issue Notes;

 

LOGO

 

Page 48


21.1.2 the published audited annual financial statements, and notes thereto, of the Issuer, for the 3 (three) financial years prior to the Issue Date of each Tranche of Notes;

 

21.1.3 the Programme Agreement and this Agreement (including the forms of the Global Certificate and the Individual Certificates);

 

21.1.4 the Guarantee executed by the Guarantors in favour of the Noteholders;

 

21.1.5 the Programme Memorandum; and

 

21.1.6 any future programme memoranda and supplements to the Programme Memorandum and any other documents incorporated therein by reference.

 

22 MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS

The provisions of Schedule 4 hereto shall apply to meetings of the Noteholders and shall have effect in the same manner as if set out in this Agreement.

 

23 COMMISSIONS AND EXPENSES

The Issuer agrees to pay to the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and Calculation Agent such fees and commissions as the Issuer, the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent shall separately agree in writing in respect of the services of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent hereunder together with any reasonable expenses (including legal, printing, postage, fax, cable and advertising expenses) incurred by the Paying Agent, Calculation Agent or Transfer Agent in connection with the said services.

 

LOGO

 

Page 49


24 INDEMNITY

 

24.1 The Issuer indemnifies each of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent against any losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses (including, but not limited to, all reasonably and properly incurred costs, charges and expenses paid or incurred in disputing or defending any of the foregoing but excluding any indirect or consequential loss or damage) which the Transfer Agent or the Paying Agent or the Calculation Agent (as the case may be) incurs directly as a result of or in connection with their appointment or the exercise of their respective powers and duties hereunder except such as may result from their own default, negligence or bad faith respectively or that of their officers, directors, employees or agents, respectively or the breach by any of them of the terms of this Agreement.

 

24.2 Each of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent indemnifies the Issuer against any losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses (including, but not limited to, all reasonably and properly incurred costs, legal fees, charges and expenses paid or incurred in disputing or defending any of the foregoing but excluding any indirect or consequential loss or damage) which the Issuer incurs directly as a result of or in connection with the breach by the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent or the Calculation Agent (as the case may be) of the terms of this Agreement or their respective default, negligence or bad faith or that of their officers, directors or employees or agents. The liability of each of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent under this clause 24.2 shall be independent from that of the others and shall be several.

 

LOGO

 

Page 50


24.3 Each indemnified person in clauses 24.1 and 24.2, as the case may be, shall certify all losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses which it may incur (including a reasonable description thereof) to the indemnifying person. Each indemnified person shall act in good faith to minimise such losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses and to minimise the amounts otherwise payable by the indemnifying person under this Agreement.

 

25 TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF APPOINTMENT

 

25.1 The Paying Agent shall be entitled to deal with money paid to it by the Issuer for the purpose of this Agreement in the same manner as other money paid to a banker by its customers except -

 

25.1.1 that it shall not exercise any right of set-off, lien or similar claim in respect thereof;

 

25.1.2 that Paying Agent shall not pay interest on monies paid to it by the Issuer in terms of the Terms and Conditions;

 

25.1.3 as provided in clause 25.3.

 

25.2 The Paying Agent shall not be entitled to utilise the monies kept in the bank account referred to in clause 12.2 for any purposes other than for payments to the Noteholders in terms of the Terms and Conditions and this Agreement.

 

25.3 In acting hereunder and in connection with the Notes, the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent shall act solely as agents of the Issuer and will not thereby assume any obligations towards or relationship

 

LOGO

 

Page 51


 

of agency or trust for or with any of the holders of the Notes, and all funds placed at the disposal of the Paying Agent for payment to the holders of Notes, shall be held on behalf of the Issuer in the bank account referred to in clause 12.2, to be applied as set forth herein.

 

25.4 Each of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent hereby undertake to the Issuer to perform such obligations and duties, and shall be obliged to perform only such obligations and duties, as are set out herein, in the Terms and Conditions, the Applicable Pricing Supplement and in the Operations and Procedures Memorandum and no implied duties or obligations shall be read into this Agreement or the Terms and Conditions, the Applicable Pricing Supplement or the Operations and Procedures Memorandum against the Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or the Calculation Agent, other than the duty to act honestly and in good faith and to exercise the diligence of a reasonable agent in comparable circumstances.

 

25.5 Except where expressly stated herein, the obligations of the Transfer Agent, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent shall be several.

 

25.6 The Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent shall be protected and shall incur no liability in respect of any action taken, omitted or suffered in reliance upon any instruction, request or order from the Issuer or upon any notice, resolution, direction, consent, certificate, affidavit, statement, cable, or other paper or document which it reasonably believes upon proper investigation to be genuine and to have been delivered, signed or sent by the proper party or parties or upon written instructions from the Issuer.

 

LOGO

 

Page 52


25.7 Any of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent and their officers, directors and employees may become the owner of, or acquire any interest in, any Notes with the same rights that it would have if the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent or the Calculation Agent, as the case may be, concerned were not appointed hereunder, and may engage or be interested in any financial or other transaction with the Issuer and may act on, or act as depository, trustee or agent for, any committee or body of holders of Notes or in connection with any other obligations of the Issuer as freely as if the Transfer Agent, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent were not appointed hereunder.

 

25.8 The Issuer shall provide the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent with a certified copy of the list of persons authorised to execute documents and take action on its behalf in connection with this Agreement as stated in the Initial Documentation List in the Programme Agreement and shall notify the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent immediately in writing if any of such persons ceases to be so authorised or if any additional person becomes so authorised together, in the case of an additional authorised person, with evidence satisfactory to the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent that such person has been so authorised. Unless so notified, the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent shall be entitled to rely on the most recent such list of persons.

 

25.9 The Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent agree, subject to the relevant confidentiality undertakings being made and given to the relevant agent, other than in circumstances where required by law, to allow the internal audit personnel of the Issuer as well as the Issuer’s external auditors to perform regular audits on the records, systems and

 

LOGO

 

Page 53


 

documents in the possession of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent, which pertain to this Agency Agreement and the role of the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent as agents to the Issuer hereunder upon reasonable notice having been given by the Issuer to the Transfer Agent, Calculation Agent and/or Paying Agent, as the case may be.

 

26 CHANGES IN AGENTS

 

26.1 Subject to the provisions of clauses 26.11 and 26.12, the Issuer agrees that, for so long as any Note is Outstanding, or until moneys for the payment of all amounts in respect of all Outstanding Notes have been made available to the Transfer Agent or Paying Agent and so long as any Notes are listed on any Financial Exchange, there will at all times be a Transfer Agent, a Paying Agent and a Calculation Agent with a specified office in such place as may be required by the rules and regulations of the Relevant Financial Exchange.

 

26.2 Any variation, termination, appointment or change of Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or Calculation Agent shall only take effect (other than in the case of insolvency as provided in clause 26.7 and breach as provided in clause 26.8, when it shall be of immediate effect) after not less than 45 days prior notice thereof shall have been given to the Noteholders in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, provided that where any Notes are Outstanding, such notice shall not expire less than 10 days before any date upon which any payment is due in respect of any Notes, and in such instance the Notice shall be deemed to be extended until the day following the due date for payment, unless the Issuer elects to terminate the appointment immediately where it is entitled to do so in terms of this Agreement and in such case the Issuer shall notify the Noteholders of such immediate termination.

 

LOGO

 

Page 54


26.3 The Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent as well as the Calculation Agent may (subject as provided in clause 26.5) at any time resign as agent by giving at least 90 days written notice to the Issuer of such intention on its part, specifying the date on which its desired resignation shall become effective.

 

26.4 The Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent as well as the Calculation Agent may (subject as provided in clause 26.5) be removed at any time by the Issuer on at least 45 days notice in writing by the Issuer, specifying such removal and the date when it shall become effective.

 

26.5 Any resignation under clause 26.3 or removal under clauses 26.4, 26.7 or 26.8 shall only take effect upon the appointment by the Issuer as hereinafter provided, of the successor Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or Calculation Agent and (other than in cases of insolvency of the relevant agent or cancellation for breach) on the expiry of the notice to be given under clause 26.3. The Issuer agrees with the Transfer Agent or the Paying Agent or the Calculation Agent (as the case may be) that if, by the day falling 10 days before the expiry of any notice under clause 26.3, a successor agent has not been appointed, then the Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or Calculation Agent (as the case may be) shall be entitled, on behalf of the Issuer, to appoint as a successor Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or Calculation Agent in its place a reputable institution of good standing.

 

26.6 Any successor Transfer Agent or Paying Agent shall be appointed by way of the execution of an accession letter in the form set out in Appendix A or C, as the case may be and any successor Calculation Agent shall be appointed by the execution of a Calculation Agency Agreement in the form set out in Appendix B.

 

LOGO

 

Page 55


26.7 If at any time the Transfer Agent or the Paying Agent or the Calculation Agent becomes incapable of acting or is placed into liquidation, curatorship or judicial management, whether provisionally or finally, or is voluntarily wound up by either the members or creditors of the Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or Calculation Agent (as the case may be), whether provisionally or finally or makes an assignment for the benefit of its creditors or consents to the appointment of a liquidator, curator or judicial manager of all or a substantial part of its property, or admits in writing its inability to pay or meet its debts as they mature or suspends payment thereof, or if any order of any court is made confirming any application made by or against it under the provisions of any insolvency law or if a judicial manager, curator or liquidator takes charge or control of it or of its property or affairs for the purpose of judicial management, liquidation or curatorship a successor Transfer Agent, Paying Agent or Calculation Agent (as the case may be), which shall be a reputable institution of good standing may be appointed by the Issuer on written notice to the successor Transfer Agent, Paying Agent or Calculation Agent (as the case may be) and subject to such successor Transfer Agent, Paying Agent or Calculation Agent agreeing in writing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agency Agreement. Upon the appointment as aforesaid of a successor Transfer Agent, Paying Agent or Calculation Agent and acceptance by the agent of such appointment the Transfer Agent, Paying Agent or Calculation Agent so superseded shall cease to be the agent hereunder with immediate effect.

 

LOGO

 

Page 56


26.8 Should the Transfer Agent or the Paying Agent or Calculation Agent commit any breach of any term or condition of this Agreement, and fail to remedy that breach within a period of 3 (three) Business Days after the receipt of a written notice to that effect by the Issuer, then the Issuer shall without prejudice to its rights be entitled to terminate the Transfer Agent’s or the Paying Agent’s or the Calculation Agent’s appointment (as the case may be) and remove such agent. A successor agent, which shall be a reputable institution of good standing, may be appointed by the Issuer on written notice to the successor agent. Upon the appointment as aforesaid of a successor agent and acceptance by the agent of such appointment and upon expiry of the notice to be given under this clause 26.8, the agent so superseded shall cease to be the agent hereunder.

 

26.9 Upon its resignation or removal becoming effective, the Transfer Agent or the Paying Agent or the Calculation Agent, as the case may be -

 

26.9.1 shall forthwith transfer all monies in its possession and not yet paid out as contemplated in this Agreement, and all records and all forms of Certificates, kept in terms of this Agreement to the successor Transfer Agent, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent hereunder (as the case may be); and

 

26.9.2 shall be entitled to the payment by the Issuer of its commissions, fees and expenses for the services theretofore rendered hereunder in accordance with the terms of clause 23; and

 

26.9.3 shall not have any further duties, obligations, liabilities or responsibilities hereunder.

 

LOGO

 

Page 57


26.10 Upon its appointment becoming effective, a successor Transfer Agent, Paying Agent or Calculation Agent (as the case may be) shall, without further act or formality, become vested with all the authority, rights, powers, trusts, immunities, duties and obligations of its predecessor with like effect as if originally named as Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or Calculation Agent (as the case may be) hereunder.

 

26.11 Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, the parties acknowledge and agree that the Issuer shall at all times be entitled to act as Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent provided that it has assumed any such capacity in terms of this Agreement.

 

26.12 Should the Issuer assume the position of Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent as contemplated herein, this Agreement will continue to be a binding legal agreement on the Issuer to the extent that -

 

26.12.1 it is incorporated by reference in the Programme Memorandum and shall, to that extent, impose binding rights and obligations upon the Issuer acting as Transfer Agent, and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent as a stipulation in favour of the Noteholders (which shall be deemed to have been accepted by them upon subscription for or purchase of the Notes); and

 

26.12.2 any third party executes a letter of accession to this Agreement, this Agreement shall, impose binding rights and obligations upon the Issuer and such third party; and

 

26.12.3 any action, conduct or functions in such role shall be understood to mean that the Issuer shall perform such action, conduct or function itself; and

 

LOGO

 

Page 58


26.12.4 requirements for consultation, indemnification by or of, payment by or to, delivery by or to, notice by or to, consent by or to or agreement between the Issuer and such Transfer Agent, Calculation Agent or Paying Agent (as the case may be) shall be disregarded to the extent that the Issuer performs such role.

 

27 MERGER AND CONSOLIDATION

 

27.1 Any corporation into which the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent may be merged or converted, or any corporation with which the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent may be consolidated, or any corporation resulting from any merger, conversion or consolidation to which the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent shall be a party, or any corporation to which the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent shall sell or otherwise transfer all or substantially all the assets and/or business of the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent shall, on the date when such merger, conversion, consolidation or transfer becomes effective and to the extent permitted by any applicable laws, become the successor Transfer Agent or Paying Agent or Calculation Agent (as the case may be) under this Agreement without the execution of any written agreement or any further act on the part of the parties hereto, unless otherwise required by the Issuer and after the said effective date all references in this Agreement to the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent shall be deemed to be references to such corporation.

 

27.2 Written notice of any such merger, conversion, consolidation or transfer shall forthwith be given to the Issuer by the Transfer Agent and/or the

 

LOGO

 

Page 59


 

Paying Agent and/or the Calculation Agent (as the case may be) as soon as the Transfer Agent and/or the Paying Agent and/or the Calculation Agent (as the case may be) is reasonably able to do so. On the merger, conversion, consolidation or transfer of the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent it shall give or cause to be given a notice therefor to the Noteholders in accordance with the Terms and Conditions.

 

28 CHANGE OF SPECIFIED OFFICE

If the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent determines to change its specified office it shall (after having, in any such case other than a change of specified office within the same city, obtained the prior written approval of the Issuer thereto) give to the Issuer written notice of such determination giving the address of the new specified office and stating the date on which such change is to take effect, which shall not be less than 45 days thereafter. The Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent shall within 15 days of having given such notice to the Issuer (unless the appointment of the Transfer Agent and/or Paying Agent and/or Calculation Agent is to terminate pursuant to clause 26 on or prior to the date of such change) give or cause to be given notice thereof to the Noteholders in accordance with the Terms and Conditions.

 

29 NOTICES

 

29.1 Any notice or communication given hereunder shall be sufficiently given or served -

 

29.1.1 if delivered in person or posted by registered post to the relevant address specified on the signature pages hereof and, if so delivered, shall be deemed to have been received at time of delivery; or

 

LOGO

 

Page 60


29.1.2 if sent by facsimile to the relevant number specified on the signature pages hereof and, if so sent, shall be deemed to have been delivered when an acknowledgement of receipt is received.

 

29.2 Where a communication is received after business hours it shall be deemed to be received and become effective on the next Business Day. Every communication shall be irrevocable save in respect of any manifest error therein or with the agreement of the recipient.

 

29.3 All notices received by the Transfer Agent from Noteholders shall forthwith be copied by the Transfer Agent to the Issuer.

 

30 TAXES AND STAMP DUTIES

The Issuer agrees to pay any and all stamp and other documentary taxes and duties which may be payable in the Republic of South Africa in connection with the execution, delivery, performance and enforcement of this Agreement.

 

31 OTHER COSTS

The Issuer agrees to pay any and all other costs (in addition to those referred to in clause 30) which may be payable in the Republic of South Africa in connection with the execution, delivery, performance and enforcement of this Agreement (including, but not limited to, legal fees, advertising fees and postage costs).

 

LOGO

 

Page 61


32 AMENDMENTS

This Agreement may be amended in writing by agreement between the Issuer, the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent but without the consent of any Noteholder, for the purpose of curing any ambiguity or of curing, correcting or supplementing any defective provision contained herein or in any manner which the parties may mutually deem necessary or desirable and which shall not be materially prejudicial to the interests of the Noteholders. The Issuer, the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent may also agree to any modification pursuant to Condition 18 of the Terms and Conditions.

 

33 GOVERNING LAW AND SUBMISSION TO JURISDICTION

 

33.1 This Agreement is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

33.2 Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably consents to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the South Gauteng High Court in relation to any disputes which may arise out of or in connection with this Agreement and that accordingly any suit, action or proceedings (together referred to as “ Proceedings ”) arising out of or in connection with this Agreement may be brought in such court. Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably waives any objection which it may have now or hereafter to the laying of the venue of any such Proceedings in any such court and any claim that any such Proceedings have been brought in an inconvenient forum and hereby further irrevocably agrees that a judgement in any such Proceedings brought in the above South African court shall be conclusive and binding upon the parties hereto and may be enforced in the courts of any other jurisdiction. Nothing contained in this clause shall limit any right to take Proceedings in any other court of competent jurisdiction nor shall the taking of Proceedings in one or more jurisdictions preclude the taking of Proceedings in any other jurisdiction, whether concurrently or not.

 

LOGO

 

Page 62


34 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

In the event of there being any dispute or difference between the Parties arising out of this Agreement, or in connection with it, or regarding its interpretation, validity, execution, implementation, termination or cancellation, the said dispute or difference will first, on written demand by any Party to the dispute be submitted to the Head of Treasury of each party, or a manager of similar seniority and status, for resolution. Should the designated representatives fail to resolve the said dispute with a period of 21 days from written submission, each party shall be entitled to follow its rights in terms of this Agreement.

 

35 COUNTERPARTS

This Agreement may be executed by any one or more of the parties hereto in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all such counterparts shall together constitute one and the same instrument.

 

LOGO

 

Page 63


SIGNED at Sandton on 6 April 2009

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED ( as Issuer)

 

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED ( as Issuer)

/s/ Nicholas John Holland

 

/s/ Gayle Margaret Wilson

Signature:   Signature:

Nicholas John Holland

 

Gayle Margaret Wilson

Name:   Name:

CEO

 

Director

Designation:   Designation:

Address:

Tel:

Fax:

Attention:

 

150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton

+2711 562 9700

+2711 562 9825

Chief Financial Officer

 
SIGNED at Sandton on 6 April 2009

For and on behalf of

ABSA CAPITAL (a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED) ( as Paying Agent)

 

For and on behalf of

ABSA CAPITAL (a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED) ( as Paying Agent)

/s/ Jacques Els

 

 

Signature:   Signature:

Jacques Els

 

 

Name:   Name:

Head: Debt Capital Markets

 

 

Designation:   Designation:

Address:

Tel:

Fax:

Attention:

 

15 Alice Lane, Sandton, 2196

+2711 895 7027

+2711 895 7829

Head: Debt Capital Markets

 

 

LOGO

 

Page 64


SIGNED at Sandton on 6 April 2009

For and on behalf of

ABSA CAPITAL (a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED) ( as Transfer Agent)

 

For and on behalf of

ABSA CAPITAL (a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED) ( as Transfer Agent)

/s/ Jacques Els

 

 

Signature:   Signature:

Jacques Els

 

 

Name:   Name:

Head: Debt Capital Markets

 

 

Designation:   Designation:

Address:

Tel:

Fax:

Attention:

 

15 Alice Lane, Sandton, 2196

+2711 895 7027

+2711 895 7829

Head: Debt Capital Markets

 

 

LOGO

 

Page 65


SCHEDULE 1

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

This section of the Programme Memorandum headed “ Terms and Conditions of the Notes ” is incorporated herein by reference

SCHEDULE 2

FORM OF NOTES

Part I: Form of Certificate for Registered Notes

 

LOGO

 

Page 66


PART I

 

               

 

FORM OF REGISTERED NOTES

 

         

Instrument Stock

Code

 

Certificate

Number

   

Issued under Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

(the “Programme”)

    Aggregate Principal Amount

 

References herein to the Terms and Conditions shall be to the Terms and Conditions of the Notes incorporated herein by reference and as found in the section of the Programme Memorandum headed “Terms and Conditions of the Notes” (the “ Programme Memorandum ”)”, which expression shall be construed as a reference to that programme memorandum, as amended, supplemented or restated as of the date hereof) dated [ ] and executed by the Issuer as modified and supplemented by the information set out in the Pricing Supplement. In the event of any conflict between the provisions of that section in the Programme Memorandum and the information set out in the Pricing Supplement, the Pricing Supplement will prevail.            
           
    Redeemable     ISIN Number
       

 

Series/          

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(a public company duly incorporated under the company laws of the Republic of South Africa under registration number [ ])

(the “ Issuer ”)

 
Tranche/            
         

The Notes represented by this Certificate have not been, and will not be, registered under the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended

(“the Securities Act”).

The Notes may not be offered, sold or delivered within the United States or to or for the account or benefit of United States persons except in certain transactions exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act.

 

NAME AND PRINCIPAL ADDRESS OF THE ISSUER   REGISTERED ADDRESS OF TRANSFER AGENT

[ ]

      

Words and expressions defined or set out in the Terms and Conditions and/or the Pricing Supplement shall bear the same meaning when used herein.

 

This is to certify that the under-mentioned Noteholder is, at the date hereof, entered in the Register as the holder of the Principal Amount of Notes, as stated below, of the duly authorised issue of Notes (the “ Notes ”) described, and having the provisions specified in the Pricing Supplement attached hereto (the “ Pricing Supplement ”) and the Terms and Conditions (as defined below).

 

This Certificate is issued, subject to, and with the benefit of, the Terms and Conditions and the Agency Agreement (as defined below).

   

Subject to and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the registered holder(s) of this Certificate only is/are entitled to receive:

 

    (a)   

on each Instalment Date (if the Notes are repayable in instalments) and on the Maturity Date and/or on such earlier date(s) as the Notes may become due and payable in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the principal amount(s) payable under the Terms and Conditions in respect of the Notes on each such due date; and

 

    (b)   

on each Interest Payment Date (if interest is payable) interest on the Notes calculated and payable as provided in the Terms and Conditions together with any other sums payable under the Terms and Conditions.

 

   

The Notes represented by this Certificate are transferable only in accordance with, and subject to, the provisions hereof (including the legend set out above) and of the Terms and Conditions and, if listed, the rules and operating procedures of Strate Limited and The Bond Exchange of South Africa Limited or any other relevant exchange upon which the Notes are listed. This Certificate is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, South African law. This Certificate shall not be valid unless authenticated by the Transfer Agent.

 

Stamp Duty (if due upon issue) has been paid.

 

A copy of the Programme Memorandum dated [ ], as amended or supplemented, executed by the Issuer in respect of the Programme, may be obtained from the Transfer Agent.

 

Name and Address of Noteholder

 

   Reference Number    Date of Registration    Certificate Number    Principal Amount    Audited

 

LOGO


           
                          

 

            Given on behalf of the Issuer
This certificate must be read in conjunction with the Pricing Supplement dated: [ ]       WITHOUT RECOURSE, WARRANTY OR LIABILITY BY
NO TRANSFER OF THIS HOLDING MAY BE  

 

   

 

 
REGISTERED WITHOUT THE PRODUCTION OF THIS CERTIFICATE       AUTHORISED SIGNATORY   AUTHORISED SIGNATORY
      Date:                          Date:                       

 

LOGO


This Certificate is issued, subject to, and with the benefit of, the Terms and Conditions, the Pricing Supplement and the Agency Agreement (as defined below).

References herein to the Terms and Conditions shall be to the Terms and Conditions of the Notes incorporated herein by reference and as found in the section of the Programme Memorandum headed “Terms and Conditions of the Notes” (the “ Programme Memorandum ”)”, which expression shall be construed as a reference to that programme memorandum, as amended, supplemented or restated as of the date hereof) dated 6 October 2009 and executed by the Issuer as modified and supplemented by the information set out in the Pricing Supplement. In the event of any conflict between the provisions of that section in the Programme Memorandum and the information set out in the Pricing Supplement, the Pricing Supplement will prevail.

Words and expressions defined or set out in the Terms and Conditions and/or the Pricing Supplement shall bear the same meaning when used herein.

The ultimate borrower under the Programme in respect of the Notes is identified in the Pricing Supplement. The Issuer is a going concern and can in all circumstances be reasonably expected to meet its commitments under this certificate as and when they fall due. Pricewaterhouse Coopers, the auditors of the Issuer confirm that in their opinion, the issue of the Notes in accordance with the Terms and Conditions pursuant to the Programme Memorandum complies in all respects with the provisions of the Commercial Paper Regulations.

Subject to and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the holder(s) of this Certificate only is/are entitled to receive:

 

(a) on each Instalment Date (if the Notes are repayable in instalments) and on the Maturity Date and/or on such earlier date(s) as the Notes may become due and payable in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, the principal amount(s) payable under the Terms and Conditions in respect of the Notes on each such due date; and

 

(b) on each Interest Payment Date (if interest is payable) interest on the Notes calculated and payable as provided in the Terms and Conditions together with any other sums payable under the Terms and Conditions.

The Notes represented by this Certificate are transferable only in accordance with, and subject to, the provisions hereof (including the legend set out above) and of the Terms and Conditions and as contemplated in clauses 6.2 and 6.3 of the Agency Agreement. This Certificate is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, South African law. This Certificate shall not be valid unless authenticated by the Transfer Agent.

Stamp Duty (if due upon issue) has been paid.

Each of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited guarantees the payment obligations of the Issuer under the Notes represented by this Certificate.

A copy of the Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009, as amended or supplemented, executed by the Issuer in respect of the Programme, may be obtained from the Paying Agent.

 

LOGO


SCHEDULE 3

PRICING SUPPLEMENT

 

LOGO


SCHEDULE 4

PROVISIONS FOR MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS

 

1. The Issuer may at any time convene a meeting of all Noteholders or holders of any Series of Notes upon at least 21 days’ prior written notice to such Noteholders and to the Central Securities Depository. This notice is required to be given in terms of Condition 19. Such notice shall specify the date, place and time of the meeting to be held, which place shall be in the Republic of South Africa.

 

2. Every director or duly appointed representative of the Issuer may attend and speak at a meeting of Noteholders, but shall not be entitled to vote, other than as a proxy or representative of a Noteholder.

 

3. Noteholders holding not less than 10% (ten per cent) in Nominal Amount of the outstanding Notes or Series of Notes shall be able to request the Issuer to convene a meeting of Noteholders. Should the Issuer fail to requisition such a meeting within 10 days of such a request being received by the Issuer, the Noteholders requesting such a meeting may convene such meeting.

 

4. A Noteholder may by an instrument in writing (a “form of proxy”) signed by the holder or, in the case of a corporation, executed under its common seal or signed on its behalf by an attorney or a duly authorised officer of the corporation, appoint any person (a “proxy”) to act on his or its behalf in connection with any meeting or proposed meeting of the Noteholders.

 

5. Any Noteholder which is a corporation may by resolution of its directors or other governing body authorise any person to act as its representative (a “representative”) in connection with any meeting or proposed meeting of the Noteholders.

 

6. Any proxy or representative appointed shall, so long as the appointment remains in force, be deemed for all purposes in connection with any meeting or proposed meeting of the Noteholder specified in the appointment, to be the holder of the Notes to which the appointment relates and the holder of the notes shall be deemed for such purposes not to be the holder.

 

7. The chairman of the meeting shall be appointed by the Issuer. The procedures to be followed at the meeting shall be as determined by the chairman subject to the remaining provisions of Condition 19. Should the Noteholder requisition a meeting, and the Issuer fail to call such a meeting within 10 days of the requisition, then the chairman of the meeting held at the instance of the Noteholders shall be selected by a majority of Noteholders present in person, by representative or by proxy.

 

8.

At any such meeting one or more Noteholders present in person, by representative or by proxy, holding in aggregate not less than one third of the Nominal Amount of

 

LOGO


 

Notes or Series of Notes for the time being outstanding shall form a quorum for the transaction of business. On a poll, each Noteholder present in person or by proxy at the meeting shall have the number of votes equal to the number of Notes, by denomination, held by the Noteholder.

 

9. At any such meeting one or more Noteholders present in person, by representative or by proxy, holding in aggregate not less than one third of the Nominal Amount of Notes or Series of Notes for the time being outstanding shall form a quorum for the transaction of business. On a poll, each Noteholder present in person or by proxy at the meeting shall have the number of votes equal to the number of Notes, by denomination, held by the Noteholder.

 

10. If within half an hour (or such longer period as those present may agree) after the time appointed for such meeting, the said quorum is not present, the meeting will stand adjourned to the same day of the next week (or if that day is not a business day, the following business day) at the same time and place. Written notice of such adjourned meeting (incorporating an agenda) shall be given to all Noteholders or Noteholders of the relevant Series not less than 72 (seventy two) hours before such adjourned meeting is to be held.

 

11. At such adjourned meeting, provided that one or more Noteholders in person, by representative or by proxy are present, such Noteholders or Noteholders of the relevant Series shall form the quorum for the transaction of business.

 

LOGO


SCHEDULE 5

FORM OF PUT NOTICE

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

ZAR10,000,000,000 DOMESTIC MEDIUM TERM NOTE PROGRAMME

TRANCHE [ ] SERIES [ ]

By depositing this duly completed Notice together with the attached Certificate(s) referred to below with the Transfer Agent, the undersigned holder of the above series of Notes (the “ Notes ”) irrevocably exercises its option to have [the full/         Principal Amount of] 1 such Notes redeemed in accordance with Condition 11 of the Terms and Conditions of the Notes on the Optional Redemption Date.

This Notice relates to Notes in the aggregate Principal Amount of [ ]:

 

 

 

Certificate(s) bearing the following serial numbers are hereby surrendered:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

If the Certificate(s) [or a new Certificate(s) in respect of the balance of the Notes] 1 referred to above are to be returned 2 to the undersigned under clause 17.4 of the Agency Agreement, they should be returned by post to:

 

 

 

 

1 Delete as applicable.
2 The Agency Agreement provides that Certificates so returned will be sent by post, uninsured and at the risk of the Noteholder, unless the Noteholder otherwise requests and pays the costs of such insurance to the relevant Agent at the time of depositing the Certificate referred to above.

 

LOGO


 

 

 

 

Payment Instructions in relation to Certificate(s)

Please make payment in respect of the above-mentioned Notes by [cheque posted to the above address/transfer to the following bank account] 2 :

 

Bank:  

 

 
Branch Address:  

 

 
Branch Code:  

 

 
Account Number:  

 

 
Signature of holder:  

 

 
Duly authorised on behalf of [            ]  
[To be completed by recipient Transfer Agent]  
Received by:  

 

 
[Signature and stamp of Transfer Agent]  
At its office at:  

 

 
On:  

 

 

The Transfer Agent with whom the above-mentioned Certificate(s) is/are deposited will not in any circumstances be liable to the depositing Noteholder or any other person for any loss or damage arising from any act, default or omission of the Transfer Agent in relation to the said Certificates or any of them unless such loss or damage was caused by the fraud or gross negligence of such Transfer Agent or its directors, officers or employees.

 

2 Delete as applicable

 

LOGO


This Put Notice is not valid unless all of the clauses requiring completion are duly completed. Once validly given this Put Notice is irrevocable except in the circumstances set out in clause 17.4 of the Agency Agreement.

 

LOGO


SCHEDULE 6

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

BANKING DETAILS

To be provided in writing to the Transfer Agent and Paying Agent from time to time.

 

LOGO


APPENDIX A

ACCESSION LETTER

 

[Date:]   
To:    Gold Fields Limited (the “ Issuer ”)
   [ ],
CC:    [Existing Transfer Agent, if applicable]

Dear Sirs

ACCESSION LETTER

We, [prospective Transfer Agent], refer to the Agency Agreement dated [ ] (which agreement, as amended and/or supplemented and/or restated from time to time, is referred to herein as the “ Agency Agreement ”).

Words and expressions defined in the Agency Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Transfer Agent Accession Letter.

 

(1) We hereby confirm that we are to assume the role and duties of the Transfer Agent with effect from [date] under and in accordance with the terms of the Agency Agreement.

 

(2) We acknowledge and agree that upon and by reason of our delivering this Transfer Agent Accession Letter to the Issuer we will thereby forthwith become a party to the Agency Agreement as the Transfer Agent thereunder and shall be entitled to the rights and benefits, and be bound by the obligations, of the Transfer Agent thereunder.

 

LOGO


(3) Our facsimile number, telephone number and address for the purpose of notice under the Agency Agreement are as follows:

Address:

Contact:

Facsimile No:

Telephone:

SIGNED at                                               on this the      day              20    .

 

 

[ Name of prospective Transfer Agent ]

Name of signatory:

Capacity:

Who warrants his authority hereto

 

LOGO


APPENDIX B

FORM OF CALCULATION AGENCY AGREEMENT

CALCULATION AGENCY AGREEMENT

in respect of Gold Fields Limited

ZAR10,000,000 DOMESTIC MEDIUM TERM NOTE PROGRAMME

Dated [ ]

Between

Gold Fields Limited

as Issuer

and

[INSERT]

as Calculation Agent

 

LOGO


CALCULATION AGENCY AGREEMENT

 

1 PARTIES

THIS AGREEMENT is entered into on [ ] between:

 

1.1 Gold Fields Limited, (the “ Issuer ”); and

 

1.2 [INSERT] (the “ Calculation Agent ”).

 

2 INTRODUCTION

 

2.1 The Issuer entered into a Programme Agreement with the Arranger and Dealers named therein dated [ ] (as such agreement may be amended and/or supplemented and/or restated from time to time) (the “ Programme Agreement ”), under which the Issuer may issue Notes (the “ Notes ”) with an aggregate nominal amount of up to ZAR10,000,000,000.

 

2.2 The Notes will be issued subject to and with the benefit of an Agency Agreement (the “ Agency Agreement ” which expression includes the same as it may be amended, supplemented or restated from time to time) dated [ ] and entered into between the Issuer, Absa Capital and its successor or successors for the time being under the Agency Agreement.

 

3 INTERPRETATION

Terms and expressions defined in the Programme Agreement, the Issuer’s Programme Memorandum dated [ ] as amended or supplemented from time to time and which is issued pursuant to the Programme Agreement (the “ Programme Memorandum ”), or the Agency Agreement and the schedules and appendices thereto shall have the same meanings in this Agreement, except where the context requires otherwise or unless otherwise stated.

 

4 APPOINTMENT OF THE CALCULATION AGENT

The Issuer hereby appoints [ Insert ] as the Calculation Agent in respect of the particular Tranche or Series of Notes described in the Calculation Schedule hereto (the “ Relevant Notes ”) for the purposes set out in clause 5, all upon the provisions hereinafter set out. The agreement of the parties hereto that this Agreement is to apply to each Tranche or Series of Relevant Notes shall be evidenced by the manuscript annotation and signature in counterpart of the Schedule hereto.

 

LOGO

 

Page 1


5 DUTIES OF THE CALCULATION AGENT

The Calculation Agent shall in relation to each Tranche or Series of Relevant Notes perform all the functions and duties imposed on the Calculation Agent by the Terms and Conditions of the Relevant Notes (the “ Conditions ”), the Notes, the Programme Memorandum, the Operations and Procedures Memorandum and the Applicable Pricing Supplement, including endorsing the Schedule hereto appropriately in relation to each Tranche or Series of Relevant Notes.

 

6 COMMISSIONS AND EXPENSES

The Issuer agrees to pay to the Calculation Agent such fees and commissions, if any, as the Issuer and the Calculation Agent shall separately agree in respect of the services of the Calculation Agent hereunder together with any reasonable expenses (including legal, printing, postage, fax, cable and advertising expenses) incurred by the Calculation Agent in connection with its said services.

 

7 INDEMNITY

 

7.1 The Issuer indemnifies the Calculation Agent against any losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses (including, but not limited to, all reasonably and properly incurred costs, charges and expenses paid or incurred in disputing or defending any of the foregoing but excluding any indirect or consequential loss or damages) which it may incur or which may be made against it as a result of or in connection with its appointment or the exercise of its powers and duties under this Agreement except such as may result from its own default, negligence or bad faith or that of its officers, directors or employees or agents or the breach by it of the terms of this Agreement.

 

7.2 The Calculation Agent indemnifies the Issuer against any losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses (including, but not limited to, all reasonably and properly incurred costs, legal fees, charges and expenses paid or incurred in disputing or defending any of the foregoing but excluding any indirect or consequential loss or damages) which the Issuer may incur or which may be made against the Issuer as a result of or in connection with the breach by the Calculation Agent of the terms of this Agreement or its default, negligence or bad faith or that of its officers, directors or employees or agents.

 

7.3 Each indemnified person in clauses 7.1 and 7.2, as the case may be, shall certify all losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses which it may incur (including a reasonable description thereof) to the indemnifying person. Each indemnified person shall act in good faith to minimise such losses, liabilities, costs, claims, actions, demands or expenses and to minimise the amounts otherwise payable by the indemnifying person under this Agreement.

 

8 TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF APPOINTMENT

 

8.1 In acting hereunder and in connection with the Relevant Notes, the Calculation Agent shall act as agent of the Issuer and shall not thereby assume any obligations towards or relationship of agency or trust for or with any of the owners or holders of the Relevant Notes, Coupons.

 

LOGO

 

Page 2


8.2 In relation to each issue of Relevant Notes, the Calculation Agent shall be obliged to perform such duties and only such duties as are stated herein and in the Terms and Conditions, the Applicable Pricing Supplement and the Operations and Procedures Memorandum specifically set forth and no implied duties or obligations shall be read into this Agreement or the Terms and Conditions, the Applicable Pricing Supplement or the Operations and Procedures Memorandum against the Calculation Agent, other than the duty to act honestly and in good faith and to exercise the diligence of a reasonably prudent expert in comparable circumstances.

 

8.3 The Calculation Agent shall be protected and shall incur no liability for or in respect of any action taken or omitted in reliance upon any instruction, request or order from the Issuer or upon any notice, resolution, direction, consent, certificate, affidavit, statement, cable, or other paper or document which it reasonably believes upon proper investigation to be genuine and to have been delivered, signed or sent by the proper party or parties or upon written instructions from the Issuer.

 

8.4 The Calculation Agent and any of its officers, directors and employees may become the owner of, or acquire any interest in, any Notes with the same rights that it or he would have if the Calculation Agent were not appointed hereunder, and may engage or be interested in any financial or other transaction with the Issuer and may act on, or as depository, trustee or agent for, any committee or body of holders of Notes or in connection with any other obligations of the Issuer as freely as if the Calculation Agent were not appointed hereunder.

 

8.5 The Issuer shall provide the Calculation Agent with a certified copy of the list of persons authorised to execute documents and take action on its behalf in connection with this Agreement as listed in the Initial Documentation List in the Programme Agreement and shall notify the Calculation Agent immediately in writing if any of such persons ceases to be so authorised or if any additional person becomes so authorised together, in the case of an additional authorised person, with evidence satisfactory to the Calculation Agent that such person has been so authorised.

 

8.6 The Calculation Agent agrees to allow the internal audit personnel of the Issuer as well as the Issuer’s external auditors to perform regular audits on the records, systems and documents in the possession of the Calculation Agent, which pertain to this Agreement and the role of the Calculation Agent as agent to the Issuer hereunder.

 

8.7 The Calculation Agent hereby warrants that it carries and will continue to carry, for so long as it is party to this Agreement, sufficient and proper insurance in relation to any breach by it of its obligations under this Agreement, the Terms and Conditions as well as the Operations and Procedures Memorandum.

 

LOGO

 

Page 3


9 TERMINATION OF APPOINTMENT

 

9.1 The Issuer may terminate the appointment of the Calculation Agent at any time by giving to the Calculation Agent at least 45 days prior written notice to that effect, provided that, so long as any of the Relevant Notes are Outstanding such notice shall not expire less than 10 days before any date upon which any payment is due in respect of any Relevant Notes and the Notice shall be deemed to be extended accordingly unless the Issuer elects to terminate the appointment immediately where it is entitled to do so in terms of this Agreement.

 

9.2 The Calculation Agent may (subject as provided in clause 9.3) at any time resign as Agent by giving at least 90 (ninety) days’ written notice to the Issuer of such intention on its part, specifying the date on which its desired resignation shall become effective. Following receipt of a notice of resignation from the Calculation Agent, the Issuer shall promptly give notice thereof to the holders of the Relevant Notes in accordance with the Terms and Conditions.

 

9.3 Any resignation under clause 9.2 or removal under clause 9.1 shall only take effect upon the appointment by the Issuer as hereinafter provided, of the successor Calculation Agent and (other than in cases of insolvency of the relevant Calculation Agent or cancellation for breach) on the expiry of the notice to be given under clause 9.2. The Issuer agrees with the Calculation Agent that if, by the day falling 10 days before the expiry of any notice under clause 9.2, a successor Agent has not been appointed, then the Calculation Agent shall be entitled, on behalf of the Issuer, to appoint as a successor Calculation Agent in its place a reputable institution of good standing approved by the Issuer (such approval not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed).

 

9.4 Notwithstanding the provisions of clause 9.1, if at any time -

 

9.4.1 the Calculation Agent becomes incapable of acting, or is placed in liquidation or under judicial management whether provisionally or finally or is voluntarily wound up by either its members or its creditors whether provisionally or finally or is placed under curatorship or makes an assignment for the benefit of its creditors or consents to the appointment of a liquidator or judicial manager or curator of all or any substantial part of its property, or it admits in writing its inability to pay or meet its debts as they may mature or suspends payment thereof, or if any order of any court is made approving any application brought by or against it under the provisions of any applicable insolvency law or if any officer takes charge or control of the Calculation Agent or of its property or affairs for the purpose of judicial management, liquidation or curatorship; or

 

9.4.2

the Calculation Agent fails duly to perform any function or duty imposed upon it by the Terms and Conditions or this Agreement or commits any breach of this Agreement or the Terms and Conditions which is not remedied within a period of 3 (three) Business Days after the receipt of a written notice to that effect by the Issuer,

 

LOGO

 

Page 4


 

the Issuer may forthwith without notice terminate the appointment of the Calculation Agent, in which event notice thereof shall be given to the holders of the Relevant Notes in accordance with the Terms and Conditions as soon as practicable thereafter.

 

9.5 The termination of the appointment pursuant to clause 9.1 or 9.2 of the Calculation Agent hereunder shall not entitle the Calculation Agent to any amount by way of compensation but shall be without prejudice to any amount in respect of fees, commissions and expenses then due.

 

9.6 Notwithstanding the provisions of clauses 9.1 and 9.2, so long as any of the Relevant Notes is Outstanding, the termination of the appointment of the Calculation Agent (whether by the Issuer or by the resignation of the Calculation Agent) shall not be effective unless upon the expiry of the relevant notice (if any) a successor Calculation Agent has been appointed.

 

9.7 Upon its appointment becoming effective, a successor Calculation Agent shall without further act, deed or conveyance, become vested with all the authority, rights, powers, trusts, immunities, duties and obligations under the Terms and Conditions, the Operations and Procedures Memorandum and this Agreement of such predecessor with like effect as if originally named as the Calculation Agent hereunder.

 

9.8 If the appointment of the Calculation Agent hereunder is terminated (whether by the Issuer or by the resignation of the Calculation Agent), the Calculation Agent shall on the date on which such termination takes effect deliver to the successor Calculation Agent all monies in its possession and not yet paid out as contemplated in this Agreement and all records kept in terms of this Agreement, and be entitled to the payment by the Issuer of its commissions, fees and expenses for the services rendered hereunder up to such date.

 

9.9 Any corporation into which the Calculation Agent may be merged or converted, or any corporation with which the Calculation Agent may be consolidated, or any corporation resulting from any merger, conversion or consolidation to which the Calculation Agent shall be a party, or any corporation to which the Calculation Agent shall sell or otherwise transfer all or substantially all of its assets shall, on the date when such merger, consolidation or transfer becomes effective and to the extent permitted by any applicable laws, become the successor Calculation Agent under this Agreement without the execution of any written agreement or any further act on the part of any of the parties hereto, unless otherwise required by the Issuer, and after the said effective date all references in this Agreement to the Calculation Agent shall be deemed to be references to such corporation. Written notice of any such merger, conversion, consolidation or transfer shall forthwith be given to the Issuer and the Transfer Agent as soon as the Calculation Agent is reasonably able to do so. On the merger, conversion, consolidation or transfer of the Calculation Agent, the Calculation Agent shall give or cause to be given notice thereof to the Noteholders in accordance with the Terms and Conditions.

 

LOGO

 

Page 5


10 DETERMINATIONS AND NOTIFICATIONS IN RESPECT OF NOTES

 

10.1 The Calculation Agent shall, unless otherwise agreed, make all such determinations and calculations (howsoever described) as it is required to do under the Terms and Conditions, all subject to and in accordance with the Terms and Conditions and the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

10.2 The Calculation Agent shall not be responsible to the Issuer or to any third party (except in the event of negligence, default or bad faith of the Calculation Agent, as the case may be) as a result of the Calculation Agent having acted on any quotation given by any Reference Bank (as defined in clause 11.1.5) which subsequently may be found to be incorrect.

 

10.3 The Calculation Agent shall promptly notify (and confirm in writing to) the Issuer, the Relevant Financial Exchange (if any), the Paying Agent, the Transfer Agent and Noteholders (where the Transfer Agent is not the Calculation Agent) of, inter alia , each Interest Rate, Interest Amount and Interest Payment Date and all other amounts, rates and dates which it is obliged to determine or calculate under the Terms and Conditions and the Applicable Pricing Supplement as soon as practicable after the determination thereof (and in any event not later than 10 Business Days, prior to the relevant Interest Payment Date) and of any subsequent amendment thereto pursuant to the Terms and Conditions.

 

10.4 The Calculation Agent shall use reasonable endeavours to cause each Interest Rate, Interest Amount and Interest Payment Date and all other amounts, rates and dates which it is obliged to determine or calculate under the Terms and Conditions or the Applicable Pricing Supplement to be published as required in accordance with the Terms and Conditions as soon as possible after their determination or calculation.

 

10.5 If the Calculation Agent does not for any reason determine and/or calculate and/or publish the Interest Rate, Interest Amount and/or Interest Payment Date in respect of any Interest Period or any other amount, rate or date as provided in this clause 10.1, it shall forthwith notify the Issuer, the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent.

 

10.6

The Calculation Agent shall in relation to each Series of relevant Notes, perform all the functions and duties imposed on the Calculation Agent by the Terms and Conditions of the relevant Notes. Should the Relevant Dealer or (in the case of a syndicated issue) the Lead Manager agree with the Issuer to appoint, in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, such Dealer or Lead Manager or another person nominated by such Dealer or Lead Manager, as Calculation Agent in the place of the original Calculation Agent, then the appointment of such Dealer or Lead Manager shall be automatic upon the issue of the relevant Tranche or Series of Notes, and such appointment shall, except as agreed between the relevant parties, be on the terms and conditions as set out in this Agreement in relation to that Tranche or Series of Notes and the Calculation Schedule to this Agreement shall be deemed to be duly annotated to include such

 

LOGO

 

Page 6


 

Tranche or Series of Notes. The name of the agent acting as Calculation Agent, or as the case may be, the Dealer or Lead Manager or other entity acting as Calculation Agent shall be entered in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

11 INTEREST DETERMINATION, INCLUDING FALLBACK PROVISIONS

 

11.1 Screen Rate Determination

 

11.1.1 Where Screen Rate Determination is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the manner in which the Interest Rate is to be determined, the Interest Rate for each Interest Period will, save as provided below, be either -

 

11.1.1.1 the offered quotation (if there is only one quotation on the Relevant Screen Page); or

 

11.1.1.2 the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place, with 0.00005 being rounded upwards) of the offered quotations,

for the Reference Rate which appears or appear, as the case may be, on the Relevant Screen Page as at 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the Interest Determination Date in question plus or minus (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) the Margin (if any), all as determined by the Calculation Agent. If five or more such offered quotations are available on the Relevant Screen Page, the highest (or, if there is more than one such highest quotation, one only of such quotations) and the lowest (or, if there is more than one such lowest quotation, one only of such quotations) shall be disregarded by the Calculation Agent for the purpose of determining the arithmetic mean (rounded as provided above) of such offered quotations.

 

11.1.2 If the Relevant Screen Page is not available or if, in the case of clause 11.1.1.1 above, no such offered quotation appears or, in the case of 11.1.1.2 above, fewer than three such offered quotations appear, in each case as at the time specified in the preceding clause the Calculation Agent shall request the principal Johannesburg office of each of the Reference Banks (as defined below) to provide the Calculation Agent with its offered quotation (expressed as a percentage rate per annum) for the Reference Rate at approximately 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the Interest Determination Date in question. If two or more of the Reference Banks provide the Calculation Agent with such offered quotations, the Interest Rate for such Interest Period shall be the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place with 0.00005 being rounded upwards) of such offered quotations plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any), all as determined by the Calculation Agent.

 

11.1.3

If the Interest Rate cannot be determined by applying the provisions of clauses 11.1.1 and 11.1.2 above, the Interest Rate for the relevant Interest Period shall be the rate per annum which the Calculation Agent determines as being the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place, with 0.00005 being rounded upwards) of the rates, as communicated to (and

 

LOGO

 

Page 7


 

at the request of) the Calculation Agent by the Reference Banks or any two or more of them, at which such banks offered, at approximately 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the relevant Interest Determination Date, deposits in an amount approximately equal to the nominal amount of the Notes of the relevant Series, for a period equal to that which would have been used for the Reference Rate to prime banks in the Johannesburg inter-bank market plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any). If fewer than two of the Reference Banks provide the Calculation Agent with such offered rates, the Interest Rate for the relevant Interest Period will be determined by the Calculation Agent as the arithmetic mean (rounded as provided above) of the rates for deposits in an amount approximately equal to the nominal amount of the Notes of the relevant Series, for a period equal to that which would have been used for the Reference Rate, quoted at approximately 12h00 Johannesburg time on the relevant Interest Determination Date, by four leading banks in Johannesburg (selected by the Calculation Agent and approved by the Issuer) plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any). If the Interest Rate cannot be determined in accordance with the foregoing provisions of this clause, the Interest Rate shall be determined as at the last preceding Interest Determination Date (though substituting, where a different Margin is to be applied to the relevant Interest Period from that which applied to the last preceding Interest Period, the Margin relating to the relevant Interest Period, in place of the Margin relating to that last preceding Interest Period).

 

11.1.4 If the Reference Rate from time to time in respect of Floating Rate Notes is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as being other than ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX, the Interest Rate in respect of such Notes will be determined as provided in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

11.2 Reference Banks ” means four leading banks in the South African inter-bank market selected by the Calculation Agent.

 

11.3 ZAR – JIBAR SAFEX ” means the mid-market rate for deposits in South African Rand (ZAR) for a period of the Designated Maturity which appears on the Reuters Screen SAFEY Page as at 12h00 (Johannesburg time) on the relevant date.

 

11.4 ISDA Determination

 

11.4.1 Where ISDA Determination is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the manner in which the Interest Rate is to be determined, the Interest Rate for each Interest Period will be the relevant ISDA Rate plus or minus (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) the Margin (if any).

 

11.4.2 For the purposes of this clause 11.2 -

 

11.4.2.1 ISDA Rate ” for an Interest Period means a rate equal to the Floating Rate that would be determined by the agent, specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement under a notional interest rate swap transaction, if that agent were acting as Calculation Agent for that swap transaction under the terms of an agreement incorporating the ISDA definitions and under which -

 

LOGO

 

Page 8


11.4.2.2 The Floating Rate Option is as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

11.4.2.3 The Designated Maturity is the period specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement; and

 

11.4.2.4 The relevant Reset Date is either: (i) if the applicable Floating Rate Option is based on the mid-market rate for deposits in South African Rand which appears on the Reuters Screen SAFEY page as at 12h00 (Johannesburg time) (“ ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX ”), on the first day of that Interest Period; or (ii) in any other case, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

11.4.3 Floating Rate ”, “ Floating Rate Option ”, “ Designated Maturity ” and “ Reset Date ” have the meanings given to those expressions in the ISDA Definitions.

 

11.4.4 The Calculation Agent shall be deemed to have fulfilled its obligations as aforesaid if it has made the required determinations in the manner provided in Condition 11.2 of the Terms and Conditions.

 

12 NOTICES

 

12.1 Any notice or communication given hereunder shall be sufficiently given or served -

 

12.1.1 if delivered in person or by registered post to the relevant address specified on the signature pages hereof and, if so delivered, shall be deemed to have been delivered at time of receipt or within 7 days of posting; or

 

12.1.2 if sent by facsimile to the relevant number specified on the signature pages hereof and, if so sent, shall be deemed to have been delivered when an acknowledgement of receipt is received.

 

12.2 Where a communication is received after business hours it shall be deemed to be received and become effective on the next Business Day. Every communication shall be irrevocable save in respect of any manifest error therein or with the agreement of the recipient.

 

12.3 Notwithstanding the above, if the Calculation Agent determines to change its specified office it shall (after having, in any such case other than a change of specified office within the same city, obtained the prior written approval of the Issuer thereto) give to the Issuer written notice of such determination giving the address of the new specified office and stating the date on which such change is to take effect, which shall not be less than 45 days thereafter. The Calculation Agent shall within 15 days of having given such notice to the Issuer (unless the appointment of the Calculation Agent is to terminate on or prior to the date of such change) give or cause to be given notice thereof to the Noteholders in accordance with the Terms and Conditions.

 

LOGO

 

Page 9


13 DESCRIPTIVE HEADINGS AND COUNTERPARTS

 

13.1 The descriptive headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only and shall not define or limit the provisions hereof.

 

13.2 This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, all of which, taken together, shall constitute one and the same agreement and any party may enter into this Agreement by executing a counterpart.

 

14 GOVERNING LAW AND SUBMISSION TO JURISDICTION

 

14.1 This Agreement is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

14.2 Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably consents to the non-exclusive jurisdiction the South Gauteng High Court, Johannesburg in relation to any disputes which may arise out of or in connection with this Agreement and that accordingly any suit, action or proceedings (together referred to as “ Proceedings ”) arising out of or in connection with this Agreement may be brought in such court. Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably waives any objection which it may have now or hereafter to the laying of the venue of any such Proceedings in any such courts and any claim that any such Proceedings have been brought in an inconvenient forum and hereby further irrevocably agrees that a judgment in any such Proceedings brought in the above South African court shall be conclusive and binding upon the parties hereto and may be enforced in the courts of any other jurisdiction. Nothing contained in this clause shall limit any right to take Proceedings in any other court of competent jurisdiction nor shall the taking of Proceedings in one or more jurisdictions preclude the taking of Proceedings in any other jurisdiction, whether concurrently or not.

 

LOGO

 

Page 10


SIGNED at                                  on this the      day             20    .

 

 

Name: [ ]
Capacity: [ ]

Who warrants his authority hereto

Gold Fields Limited

 

Address [ ]
Contact:   [ ]
Telephone:   [ ]

SIGNED at                              on this the      day             20    .

 

 

Name: [ ]
Capacity: [ ]

Who warrants his authority hereto

[ INSERT NAME ]

[ Insert address ]

 

Contact:   [insert]
Telephone:   [insert]
Fax:   [insert]

 

LOGO

 

Page 11


CALCULATION SCHEDULE TO CALCULATION AGENCY AGREEMENT

 

Series

number

 

Tranche

Number

 

Issue Date

 

Maturity Date

 

Title and

Nominal

Amount

 

Annotation by
Calculation

Agent/Issuer

 

 

LOGO


APPENDIX C

 

To: Gold Fields Limited (the “ Issuer ”)

[insert address of the Issuer]

Dear Sirs

ACCESSION LETTER

We, [prospective Paying Agent], refer to the Agency Agreement dated [ ] (which agreement, as amended and/or supplemented and/or restated from time to time, is referred to herein as the “ Agency Agreement ”).

Words and expressions defined in the Agency Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Paying Agent Accession Letter.

 

(1) We hereby confirm that we are to assume the role and duties of the Paying Agent with effect from [date] under and in accordance with the terms of the Agency Agreement.

 

(2) We acknowledge and agree that upon and by reason of our delivering this Paying Agent Accession Letter to the Issuer we will thereby forthwith become a party to the Agency Agreement as the Paying Agent thereunder and shall be entitled to the rights and benefits, and be bound by the obligations, of the Paying Agent thereunder.

 

(3) Our facsimile number, telephone number and address for the purpose of notice under the Agency Agreement are as follows:

 

Address:    [insert]

 

LOGO


Contact:    [insert]
Facsimile No:    [insert]
Telephone:    [insert]

SIGNED at                                  on this the      day              20    .

 

 

[ Name of prospective Paying Agent ]

Name of signatory:

Capacity:

Who warrants his authority hereto

 

LOGO

Exhibit 4.20

LOGO

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(Incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, Registration Number 1968/004880/06 )

 

 

ZAR 10,000,000,000

Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

Jointly and severally, unconditionally and irrevocably, guaranteed by the Guarantors

 

 

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited have agreed to jointly and severally, irrevocably and unconditionally, guarantee to Noteholders the due and punctual performance by Gold Fields Limited of all its payment obligations under the Notes. The Issuer accordingly wishes to amend the provisions of the Programme Memorandum dated 6 April 2009 (the “Previous Programme Memorandum” ). With effect from the date of signature of this revised Programme Memorandum, this revised Programme Memorandum shall supersede the Previous Programme Memorandum.

Under this ZAR10,000,000,000 Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme (the “Programme” ), Gold Fields Limited (the “Issuer” ) may from time to time issue notes (the “Notes” ), denominated in any currency agreed by the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) (as defined below), subject to all applicable laws and, in the case of Notes listed on the bond market of the JSE Limited or its successor (the “JSE” ), or such other or further exchange as may be determined by the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s), the rules of the JSE or such other or further exchange, that are subject to the terms and conditions (the “Terms and Conditions” ) contained in this Programme Memorandum. Details of the Notes and any other terms and conditions not contained in the Terms and Conditions that are applicable to any Notes, replacing or modifying the Terms and Conditions, will be set forth in a pricing supplement (the “Applicable Pricing Supplement” ).

Save as set out herein, the Notes will not be subject to any minimum or maximum maturity and the maximum aggregate Nominal Amount of all Notes from time to time outstanding will not exceed ZAR10,000,000,000 (or its equivalent in other currencies calculated as described herein).

Application has been made for this Programme to be registered on the bond market of the JSE. The Programme provides that Notes may be listed on the JSE, in accordance with the BESA Listing Disclosure Requirements, or such other or further exchange(s) as may be determined by the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s), subject to all applicable laws. Details of the Notes including, the aggregate Nominal Amount (as defined in the Terms and Conditions) of Notes, interest (if any) payable in respect of Notes, the issue price of Notes and any other terms and conditions not contained herein which are applicable to each Tranche (as defined in the Terms and Conditions) of Notes will be set forth in the Applicable Pricing Supplement which will be delivered to the JSE and the Central Securities Depository (as defined in the Terms and Conditions), or such other or further exchange(s) as maybe determined by the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s), on or before the date of issue of such Notes and the Notes may then be traded by or through members of the JSE or such other or further exchange, from the date specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. The Issuer may determine that a particular tranche of Notes will not be listed on the JSE or any other exchange. With respect to Notes that are not listed on the JSE, the placement of such unlisted Notes may be reported through the the JSE reporting system in order for the settlement of trades to take place in accordance with the electronic settlement procedures of the JSE and the Central Depository. In such event, the Applicable Pricing Supplement will be delivered to the JSE and the Central Depository. With respect to Notes that are not listed on the JSE and not to be settled through the electronic settlement procedures of the JSE and the Central Depository, no Applicable Pricing Supplement will be delivered to the JSE.

The holders of Notes that are listed on the JSE may claim against the BESA Guarantee Fund (in accordance with the rules of the BESA Guarantee Fund) only if such Notes are traded by or through members of the JSE in accordance with the rules and operating procedures for the time being of the JSE and the Central Depository. The holders of Notes that are not listed on the JSE will have no recourse against the BESA Guarantee Fund even if such Notes are settled through the electronic settlement procedures of the JSE and the Central Depository.

 

1


The Notes may be issued on a continuing basis and be placed by one or more of the Dealers specified under the section entitled “ Summary of the Programme and the Terms and Conditions of the Notes ” and any additional Dealer appointed under the Programme from time to time by the Issuer, which appointment may be for a specific issue or on an ongoing basis (each a “Dealer” and together the “Dealers” ). References in this Programme Memorandum to the “Relevant Dealer” shall, in the case of Notes being (or intended to be) placed by more than one Dealer, be to all Dealers agreeing to place such Notes.

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited (each a “Guarantor” and together, the “Guarantors” ) have jointly and severally, irrevocably and unconditionally, guaranteed to Noteholders the due and punctual performance by the Issuer of all its payment obligations under the Notes on the terms and conditions of the Guarantee as set out in the section of Programme Memorandum headed “ The Guarantee ”. It is recorded that the Guarantee issued by the Guarantors shall only be in respect of Notes issued on or after the date of this Programme Memorandum.

This Programme Memorandum will only apply to Notes issued under the Programme.

 

 

Arranger, Sponsor

Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited

Dealers

Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank limited

Nedbank Capital (a division of Nedbank Limited)

Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009

 

 

 

2


The Issuer accepts responsibility for the information contained in this Programme Memorandum, except as may be otherwise stated. To the best of the knowledge and belief of the Issuer (who has taken all reasonable care to ensure that such is the case) the information contained in this Programme Memorandum does not contain any untrue statement of material fact, is not misleading in any material respect and does not omit to state any material fact necessary to make the statements, opinions and intentions expressed in this Programme Memorandum, in the context in which they are made, not misleading in any material respect. The Issuer accepts responsibility accordingly. Should the Issuer become aware of any information that is not true and accurate in all material respects, the Issuer will, for so long as any Notes in a Tranche remain outstanding and listed on the bond market of the JSE, publish a new Programme Memorandum or a supplement to this Programme Memorandum.

This document is to be read and construed with any amendment or supplement thereto (this document, as amended or supplemented, the “Programme Memorandum” ) and in conjunction with any other documents which are deemed to be incorporated herein by reference (see the section entitled “Documents Incorporated by Reference”) and, in relation to any Tranche (as defined herein) of Notes, should be read and construed together with the Applicable Pricing Supplement. This Programme Memorandum shall be read and construed on the basis that such documents are incorporated into and form part of this Programme Memorandum.

The Arranger, the Dealer(s) and any of their respective affiliates, the JSE and other professional advisers named herein have not separately verified the information contained herein. Accordingly, no representation, warranty or undertaking, express or implied, is made and no responsibility is accepted by the Arranger, Dealer(s) and any of their affiliates, the JSE and other professional advisers named herein as to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this Programme Memorandum or any other information provided by the Issuer. The Arranger, the Dealer(s) and any of their respective affiliates, the JSE and other professional advisers named herein do not accept any liability in relation to the information contained in this Programme Memorandum or any other information provided by the Issuer in connection with the Notes and the Programme.

No person has been authorised by the Issuer to give any information or to make any representation not contained in or not consistent with this Programme Memorandum or any other document entered into in relation to the Programme or any other information supplied by the Issuer in connection with the issue and sale of the Notes and, if given or made, such information or representation must not be relied upon as having been authorised by the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger, the Dealer(s) or other professional advisers named herein.

Neither this Programme Memorandum nor any other information supplied in connection with the Notes or Programme is intended to provide a basis for any credit or other evaluation, or should be considered as a recommendation by the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger or the Dealers that any recipient of this Programme Memorandum or any other information supplied in connection with the Notes should subscribe for or purchase any Notes.

Each person contemplating the subscription for or purchase of any Notes should determine for itself the relevance of the information contained in this Programme Memorandum and should make its own independent investigation of the financial condition and affairs, and its own appraisal of the creditworthiness, of the Issuer and its subscription for or purchase of Notes should be based upon any such investigation as it deems necessary. Neither this Programme Memorandum nor any Applicable Pricing Supplement nor any other information supplied in connection with the Notes constitutes an offer or invitation by or on behalf of the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger or any of the Dealer(s) to any person to subscribe for or to purchase any Notes.

Neither the delivery of this Programme Memorandum nor any Applicable Pricing Supplement nor the offering, sale or delivery of any Note shall at any time imply that the information contained herein is correct at any time subsequent to the date hereof or that any other financial statements or other information supplied in connection with the Programme is correct as of any time subsequent to the date indicated in the document containing the same. The Arranger and the Dealer(s) expressly do not undertake to review the financial condition or affairs of the Issuer during the life of the Programme. Potential investors should review, inter alia, the most recent financial statements of the Issuer when deciding whether or not to subscribe for or purchase any Notes.

 

3


The Notes will be obligations of the Issuer. Each Guarantor has, jointly and severally, irrevocably and unconditionally, guaranteed to Noteholders the due and punctual performance by the Issuer of all of its payment obligations under the Notes. The Notes will not be obligations of, or the responsibility of, or guaranteed by the Arranger or the Dealers. No liability whatsoever in respect of any failure by the Issuer or the Guarantors to pay any amount due under the Notes shall be accepted by the Arranger or the Dealers.

Neither this Programme Memorandum nor any Applicable Pricing Supplement constitutes an offer to sell or the solicitation of an offer to buy or an invitation to subscribe for or purchase any Notes. The distribution of this Programme Memorandum and any Applicable Pricing Supplement and the issue, sale or offer of Notes may be restricted by law in certain jurisdictions. Persons into whose possession this Programme Memorandum or any Applicable Pricing Supplement or any Notes come are required by the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger and the Dealer(s) to inform themselves about, and observe any such restrictions. For a description of certain restrictions on offers, sales and deliveries of Notes and on the distribution of this Programme Memorandum and any Applicable Pricing Supplement and other offering material relating to the Notes, see the section of this Programme Memorandum entitled “Subscription and Sale”.

No one of the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger, the Dealer(s) and other professional advisers named herein represents that this Programme Memorandum may be lawfully distributed, or that any Notes may be lawfully offered, in compliance with any applicable registration or other requirements in any such jurisdiction, or pursuant to an exemption available thereunder, or assumes any responsibility for facilitating any such distribution or offering. In particular, no action has been taken by the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger, the Dealer(s) or other professional advisers which would permit a public offering of any Notes or distribution of this document in any jurisdiction where action for that purpose is required. Accordingly, no Notes may be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, and neither this Programme Memorandum nor any advertisement or other offering material may be distributed or published in any jurisdiction, except under circumstances that will result in compliance with any applicable laws and regulations and the Dealers have represented that all offers and sales by them will be made on the same terms.

The price/yield and amount of the Notes to be issued under this Programme will be determined by the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger and Relevant Dealer(s) at the time of issue in accordance with the prevailing market conditions.

The Notes have not been and will not be registered under the United States Securities Act of 1933 (as amended) (the “Securities Act”). Notes may not be offered, sold or delivered within the United States or to U.S. persons except in accordance with Regulation S under the Securities Act.

All references in this document to “Rands” , “ZAR” , “South African Rand” , “R” and “cent” refer to the currency of the Republic of South Africa, to “U.S.$ or $” to the currency of the United States of America and to “Euro” or “€” to the single currency introduced at the start of the third stage of European Economic and Monetary Union pursuant to the treaty establishing the European Community, as amended.

In connection with the issue and distribution of any Tranche of Notes, the Issuer or a Dealer disclosed as the approved stabilisation manager, if any, (the “Stabilisation Manager” ) in the Applicable Pricing Supplement may, to the extent permitted by applicable laws and regulations, over-allot or effect transactions with a view to supporting the market price of the Notes of which such Tranche forms a part at a level higher than that which might otherwise prevail for a limited period after the Issue Date. However, there may be no obligation on the Stabilisation Manager to do this. Such stabilising, if commenced, may be discontinued at any time and must be brought to an end after a limited period and the price/yield and amount of Notes to be issued under this Programme will be determined by the Issuer and each Dealer at the time of issue in accordance with the prevailing market conditions.

 

4


 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

Page   

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

   6

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROGRAMME

   8

SUMMARY OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

   10

FORM OF THE NOTES

   14

PRO FORMA PRICING SUPPLEMENT

   15

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

   24

USE OF PROCEEDS

   58

RISK FACTORS

   59

DESCRIPTION OF GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

   61

THE GUARANTEE

   65

SETTLEMENT, CLEARING AND TRANSFER OF NOTES LISTED ON THE JSE

   70

SUBSCRIPTION AND SALE

   71

SOUTH AFRICAN TAXATION

   73

GENERAL INFORMATION

   75

 

5


 

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

 

 

The following documents shall be deemed to be incorporated in, and to form part of, this Programme Memorandum:

 

(a) all amendments and supplements to this Programme Memorandum prepared from time to time in accordance with the terms of the Programme Agreement dated 6 October 2009 (the “Programme Agreement” );

 

(b) in respect of any issue of Notes under the Programme the audited annual financial statements, and the notes thereto, of the Issuer for its three financial years prior to the date of such issue and the most recent quarterly audited financial statements, and the notes thereto, of the Issuer;

 

(c) the annual Mineral Resource and Ore Reserve Statement of the Issuer, prepared as a stand-alone document or as incorporated in the Issuer’s annual report to shareholders as per the listing requirements of the JSE, as the case may be;

 

(d) Item 3 (which sets out key information in relation to the Issuer) and Item 4 (which sets out general information in relation to the Issuer) of the Form 20-F filed by the Issuer with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission, pursuant to the United States Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended;

 

(e) the Guarantee issued by the Guarantors in favour of the Noteholders;

 

(f) the Programme Agreement, the Agency Agreement and the Operations and Procedures Memorandum, as each such document may be amended from time to time in accordance with its respective terms; and

 

(g) the Applicable Pricing Supplement relating to any Tranche of Notes issued under the Programme,

save that any statement contained in this Programme Memorandum or in any of the documents incorporated by reference in and forming part of this Programme Memorandum shall be deemed to be modified or superseded for the purpose of this Programme Memorandum to the extent that a statement contained in any document subsequently incorporated by reference modifies or supersedes such earlier statement (whether expressly, by implication or otherwise).

The Issuer will make available for inspection, during normal office hours, at its registered office, the details of which are set out at the end of this Programme Memorandum, without charge, to each person to whom a copy of this Programme Memorandum has been delivered, upon request of such person, a copy of any or all of the documents which are incorporated herein by reference, as such documents may be modified or superseded. Requests for such documents should be directed to the Issuer at its registered office as set out at the end of this Programme Memorandum. The documents listed in (b) to (d) above are also available on the Issuer’s website, www.goldfields.co.za.

Any statement contained in this Programme Memorandum or in any document which is incorporated by reference into this Programme Memorandum will be deemed to be modified or superseded for the purposes of this Programme Memorandum to the extent that a statement contained in any such subsequent document which is deemed to be incorporated by reference into this Programme Memorandum modifies or supersedes such earlier statement (whether expressly, by implication or otherwise).

The Issuer will, for so long as any Notes in a Tranche remain outstanding and listed on the bond market of the JSE, publish a new Programme Memorandum or a supplement to this Programme Memorandum, as the case may be, if:

 

a) a change in the condition (financial or otherwise) of the Issuer or a Guarantor has occurred which is material in the context of the Notes; or

 

b) an event has occurred which affects any matter contained in this Programme Memorandum, the disclosure of which would reasonably be required by Noteholders and/or potential investors in the Notes; or

 

c) any of the information contained in this Programme Memorandum becomes outdated in a material respect; or

 

d) this Programme Memorandum no longer contains all the materially correct information required by the Applicable Procedures;

 

6


provided that, in the circumstances set out in paragraphs (c) and (d) above, no new Programme Memorandum or supplement to this Programme Memorandum, as the case may be, is required in respect of the Issuer’s or any Guarantor, annual financial statements if such annual financial statements are incorporated by reference into this Programme Memorandum and such annual financial statements are published, as required by the Companies Act, and submitted to the JSE within six months after the financial year end of the Issuer and such Guarantor.

Any such new Programme Memorandum or Programme Memorandum as supplemented, as the case may be, will be deemed to have substituted the previous Programme Memorandum from the date of issue of the new Programme Memorandum or Programme Memorandum as supplemented, as the case may be.

 

7


 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROGRAMME

 

 

Under the Programme, the Issuer may from time to time issue Notes denominated in the currency specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. The applicable terms of any Notes will be set out in the Terms and Conditions incorporated by reference into the Notes, as modified and supplemented by the Applicable Pricing Supplement relating to the Notes and any supplement to this Programme Memorandum.

This Programme Memorandum and any supplement will only be valid for listing Notes on the bond market of the JSE and/or any other exchange or unlisted notes in an aggregate Nominal Amount which, when added to the aggregate Nominal Amount then outstanding of all Notes previously or simultaneously issued under the Programme, does not exceed ZAR 10,000,000,000 or its equivalent in other currencies. For the purpose of calculating the South African Rand equivalent of the aggregate amount of Notes issued under the Programme from time to time:

 

(a) the South African Rand equivalent of Notes denominated in another Specified Currency (as detailed in the Applicable Pricing Supplement in the Terms and Conditions) shall be determined as of the date of agreement to issue such Notes (the “Agreement Date” ) on the basis of the spot rate for the sale of the South African Rand against the purchase of such Specified Currency in the South African foreign exchange market quoted by any leading bank selected by the Issuer on the Agreement Date;

 

(b) the South African Rand equivalent of Index-Linked Notes (each as defined in the Terms and Conditions) shall be calculated by reference to the original Nominal Amount of such Notes;

 

(c) the South African Rand equivalent of Zero Coupon Notes (as defined in the Terms and Conditions) and other Notes issued at a discount or premium shall be calculated by reference to the net subscription proceeds received by the Issuer for the relevant issue; and

 

(d) the South African Rand equivalent of Partly-Paid Notes (as defined in the Terms and Conditions) shall be calculated by reference to the Nominal Amount regardless of the amount paid up on such Notes.

In the event that the Issuer issues unlisted Notes, or any Notes are listed on any exchange other than the JSE, the Issuer shall, no later than the last day of the month of such issue, inform the JSE in writing of the aggregate Nominal Amount and Maturity Date in respect of such Notes.

From time to time the Issuer may wish to increase the maximum aggregate Nominal Amount of the Notes that may be issued under the Programme. Subject to the requirements of the JSE and/or any such other financial exchange or exchanges on which Notes may be listed and subject to applicable law, the Issuer may, with the consent of all the Guarantors but without the consent of Noteholders, in accordance with the terms of the Programme Agreement, increase the maximum aggregate Nominal Amount of the Notes that may be issued under the Programme by delivering a notice thereof to Noteholders and the relevant exchange on which Notes are listed in accordance with Condition 17 of the Terms and Conditions. Upon such notice being given, all references in this Programme Memorandum or any other agreement, deed or document in relation to the Programme, to the aggregate Nominal Amount of the Notes, shall be and shall be deemed to be references to the increased maximum aggregate Nominal Amount.

To the extent that Notes may be listed on the JSE, the JSE’s approval of the listing of the Notes is not to be taken in any way as an indication of the merits of the Issuer or any Notes. The JSE has not verified the accuracy and truth of the contents of the Programme and to the extent permitted by law, the JSE will not be liable for any claim of whatsoever kind.

Claims against the BESA Guarantee Fund may only be made in respect of all trading of Notes on the bond market of the JSE and in accordance with the rules of the BESA Guarantee Fund.

For the purposes of the Programme, the BESA Guarantee Fund means the fund originally set up during 1995 under section 17(1)(n) of the Financial Markets Control Act, No. 55 of 1989 (repealed by Section 117 of the Securities Services Act).

Each Guarantor has, in terms of the Guarantee, jointly and severally, irrevocably and unconditionally, guaranteed the performance by the Issuer of its payment obligations under the Notes to the Noteholders, on the terms and conditions contained in the Guarantee. The obligations of each

 

8


Guarantor under the Guarantee constitute unconditional, unsubordinated and unsecured principal obligations of each Guarantor and will rank (subject to any obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation) at least pari passu with all other unsecured and unsubordinated obligations of such Guarantor.

 

9


SUMMARY OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

The following summary does not purport to be complete and is taken from, and is qualified in its entirety by, the remainder of this Programme Memorandum and, in relation to the Terms and Conditions of any particular Tranche of Notes, the Applicable Pricing Supplement. Words and expressions defined in the “Terms and Conditions of the Notes” below shall have the same meanings in this summary.

 

Issuer    Gold Fields Limited (Registration Number 1968/004880/06);
Guarantors    GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited (Registration Number 2002/031431/07), Gold Fields Operations Limited (Registration Number 1959/003209/06), Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited (Registration Number 184982) and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited (Registration Number 651406);
Arranger    Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited ( “Absa Capital” );
Dealers    Absa Capital, Nedbank Capital and/or such other person specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as Dealer;
Paying Agent    Absa Capital, or in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, such other person specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as Paying Agent;
Description of Programme    ZAR 10,000,000,000 Domestic Medium Term Note Programme;
Initial Programme Amount    Up to ZAR 10,000,000,000 (or its equivalent in other currencies calculated on the Agreement Date as described herein) outstanding at any time. The maximum aggregate Nominal Amount permitted to be outstanding at any time under the Programme may be increased from time to time, in accordance with the terms of the Programme Agreement;
Blocked Rand    Blocked Rand may be used to purchase Notes, subject to the Exchange Control Regulations;
Calculation Agent    Absa Capital or in relation to any particular Tranche or Series of Notes, such other person specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the Calculation Agent;
Central Depository    Strate Limited (Registration Number 1998/022242/06), registered as a central securities depository or its nominee operating in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004, or such additional, alternative or successor central securities depository as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) and the JSE;
Certain Restrictions    Each issue of Notes denominated in a currency in respect of which particular laws, guidelines, regulations, restrictions or reporting requirements apply will only be issued in circumstances which comply with such laws, guidelines, regulations, restrictions or reporting requirements from time to time (see section entitled Subscription and Sale );
Clearing and Settlement    Listed Notes will be cleared and settled in accordance with the rules of the JSE and the Central Depository provided that in the event that such Notes are listed on other exchange(s), the rules of such exchange(s) will apply with regards to the clearing and settling of Notes. Listed Notes have been accepted for clearance through the Central Depository, which forms part of the the JSE clearing system that is managed by the Central Depository and may be accepted for clearance through any additional clearing system as may be agreed between the JSE and the Issuer. The placement of unlisted Notes may be reported through the the JSE reporting system in order for the settlement of trades to take place in accordance with the electronic settlement procedures of the JSE and the Central Depository. As at the date of this Programme Memorandum, the Settlement Agents are Absa Bank Limited, FirstRand Bank Limited, Nedbank Limited, The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited and the South African

 

10


   Reserve Bank. Euroclear Bank S.A.N.V. as operator of the Euroclear System ( “Euroclear” ) and Clearstream Banking, société anonyme (Clearstream Luxembourg) ( “Clearstream” ) may hold Notes through their Settlement Agent;
Currency    South African Rand ( “ZAR” ) or as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Cross-Default    The terms of the Notes will contain a cross-default provision as further described in Condition 15.4;
Denomination    Notes will be issued in such denominations as may be agreed by the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s), and as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement save that the minimum denomination of each Note will be such as may be allowed or required from time to time by the relevant central bank or regulator (or equivalent body) or any laws or regulations applicable to the relevant Specified Currency, as defined in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Distribution    Notes may be distributed by way of private placement or any other means permitted under South African law, and in each case on a syndicated or non-syndicated basis as may be determined by the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) and reflected in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Form of Notes    Notes will be issued in the form of Registered Notes, as described in the section entitled “ Form of the Notes ”. In the case of Registered Notes which are listed on the bond market of the JSE or, if not listed but are reported through the electronic settlement procedures of the bond market of the JSE and the Central Depository, each such Tranche of Notes will initially be evidenced by a Global Certificate, which shall be deposited before its Settlement Date with the Central Depository and registered in the name of the nominee of the Central Depository or may be issued as an Uncertificated Note. Beneficial Interests in Notes evidenced by a Global Certificate or Uncertificated Note will not be exchangeable for Individual Certificates except in the circumstances described in this Programme Memorandum;
Governing Law    The Notes will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa in force from time to time;
Interest Period(s)/ Interest Payment Date(s)    Such period(s) or date(s) as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Issue and Transfer Taxes    No stamp duty, uncertificated securities tax or any similar tax is payable in respect of the issue or transfer of interest-bearing Notes under current South African law;
Issue Price    Notes may be issued on a fully-paid or a partly-paid basis and at their Nominal Amount or at a discount or premium to their Nominal Amount as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Listing and Trading    Application will be made for this Programme to be registered on the JSE (or such other or further exchange(s) as may be determined by the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) and subject to the applicable ruling laws). Notes issued under the Programme may be listed on the bond market of the JSE, in accordance with the BESA Listing Disclosure Requirements, (or such other or further exchange or exchanges as may be selected by the Issuer in relation to such issue). Unlisted Notes may also be issued under the Programme. The Applicable Pricing Supplement in respect of a Tranche will specify whether or not such Notes will be listed and, if so, on which exchange(s);
Maturities of Notes    In respect of listed Notes, such maturity(ies) that are acceptable to the JSE (or such other or further exchange or exchanges as may be selected by the Issuer in relation to such issue) and, for all Notes, such maturities that are specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. Save as described above, the Notes are not subject to any minimum or maximum maturity;
Negative Pledge    Condition 6 of the Terms and Conditions provides for a negative pledge in favour of the Noteholders;

 

11


Guarantee    Each Guarantor has jointly and severally, unconditionally and irrevocably, guaranteed to the Noteholders the due and punctual performance by the Issuer of its payment obligations under the Notes on the terms and conditions as contained in the Guarantee, as described in the section entitled “ The Guarantee ”. The obligations of each Guarantor under the Guarantee constitute unconditional, unsubordinated and unsecured principal obligations of the Guarantor and will rank (subject to any obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation) at least pari passu with all other unsecured and unsubordinated obligations of such Guarantor.
Notes    Notes may comprise:
   Fixed Rate Notes    Fixed Rate Notes will bear interest at the fixed Rate of Interest specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. Interest will be payable in arrear on such date or dates as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s), as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement and on redemption, and will be calculated on the basis of such Day Count Fraction as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s);
   Floating Rate Notes    Floating Rate Notes will bear interest calculated at a floating Rate of Interest determined: (i) on the same basis as the floating rate under a notional interest rate swap transaction in the relevant Specified Currency governed by an agreement incorporating the ISDA Definitions; or (ii) on the basis of a reference rate appearing on the agreed screen page of a commercial quoting service; or (iii) on such other basis as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s);
      The Margin (if any) relating to such floating Rate of Interest will be agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) for each issue of Floating Rate Notes;
      Floating Rate Notes may also have a maximum interest rate, a minimum interest rate or both;
      The Interest Period for Floating Rate Notes may be one, two, three, six or twelve months or such other period as the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) may agree, as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
   Zero Coupon Notes    Zero Coupon Notes will be issued at their Nominal Amount or at a discount to it and will not bear interest (except in the case of late payment as specified);
   Index-Linked Notes    Payments (whether in respect of interest on Indexed Interest Notes or in respect of principal on Indexed Redemption Amount Notes and whether at maturity or otherwise) will be calculated by reference to such index and/or formula as the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) may agree, as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
   Mixed Rate Notes    Mixed Rate Notes will bear interest over respective periods at the Rate of Interest applicable for any combination of Fixed Rate Notes, Floating Rate Notes, Zero Coupon Notes or Index-Linked Notes, each as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
   Instalment Notes    The Applicable Pricing Supplement will set out the dates on which, and the amounts in which, Instalment Notes may be redeemed;

 

12


   Partly-Paid Notes    The Issue Price of Partly Paid Notes will be payable in two or more instalments as set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
   Exchangeable Notes    Exchangeable Notes may be redeemed by the Issuer in cash or by the delivery of securities as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
   Other Notes    Terms applicable to any other type of Notes that are approved by the JSE, or such other or further exchange or exchanges as may be selected by the Issuer in relation to an issue of listed Notes, or as agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s) in respect of unlisted Notes, will be set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Noteholders    The holders of the Registered Notes (as recorded in the Register);
Redemption    The Applicable Pricing Supplement relating to a Tranche of Notes will indicate either that the Notes cannot be redeemed prior to their stated maturity (other than in specified instalments (see below), if applicable, or for taxation reasons or following an Event of Default) or that such Notes will be redeemable at the option of the Issuer and/or, the Noteholders, upon giving not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ irrevocable notice (or such other notice period (if any) as is indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) to the Noteholders or the Issuer, as the case may be, on a date or dates specified prior to such stated maturity and at a price or prices and on such terms as are indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.
   The Applicable Pricing Supplement may provide that Notes may be repayable in two or more instalments of such amounts and on such dates as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Relevant Dealers    In relation to any Note, Dealers with whom the Issuer has agreed the issue of Notes;
Selling Restrictions    There are restrictions on the sale of Notes and the distribution of offering materials in various jurisdictions. See the section entitled “ Subscription and Sale ”, and such restrictions as may be imposed in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
Status of Notes    The Notes constitute direct, unconditional, unsubordinated and unsecured obligations of the Issuer ranking pari passu amongst themselves and (save for certain obligations required to be preferred by law) at least pari passu with all other present and future unsecured and unsubordinated obligations of the Issuer;
Taxation    All payments in respect of the Notes will be made without withholding or deduction for or on account of taxes levied in South Africa, subject to certain exceptions as provided in Condition 10. In the event that withholding tax or such other deduction is required by law, then the Issuer will pay such additional amounts as shall be necessary in order that the net amounts received by the holders of the Notes after such withholding or deduction shall equal the respective amounts of principal and interest which would otherwise have been receivable in respect of the Notes, as the case may be, in the absence of such withholding or deduction; and
Transfer Agent    In relation to any Tranche of Notes, Absa Capital or such other person specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the Transfer Agent will act as transfer agent and will maintain the Register.

 

13


 

FORM OF THE NOTES

 

 

Notes will be issued in registered form, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

The Notes may be listed on bond market of the JSE, in accordance with the BESA Listing Disclosure Requirements, or such other or further exchange or exchanges as the Issuer may select in relation to an issue. Each Tranche of Notes listed on the JSE will be issued in accordance with the terms and conditions set out below in this Programme Memorandum (the “Terms and Conditions” ) in (i) uncertificated form or (ii) the form of a single certificate, without interest coupons (the “Global Certificate” ), which will be lodged and immobilised in Strate Limited (Registration number 1998/022242/06), or its nominee, operating in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004 (or any successor act thereto) (the “Central Depository” ), which forms part of the settlement system of the JSE. This will entail that the Notes, represented by the Global Certificate, will be deposited with and registered in the name of, and for the account of, the Central Depository’s nominee, or (iii) in definitive form ( “Individual Certificates” ).

CERTIFICATED NOTES

Listed Registered Notes

Beneficial interests in listed Registered Notes which are lodged in the form of the Global Certificate in the Central Depository ( “Beneficial Interests” ) may, in terms of existing law and practice, be transferred through the Central Depository by way of book entry in the securities accounts of the participants in the Central Depository ( “Participants” ). A certificate or other document issued by a Participant as to the Nominal Amount of such Beneficial Interest in Notes standing to the account of any person shall be prima facie proof of such Beneficial Interest.

Beneficial Interests in listed Registered Notes may be exchanged, without charge by the Issuer, for Individual Certificates in accordance with the provisions of Condition 11 of the Terms and Conditions. The Notes represented by the Global Certificate and Individual Certificates will be registered in the names of the Noteholders in the register of Noteholders maintained by or on behalf of the Issuer (the “Register” ). The Issuer shall regard the Register as the conclusive record of title to the Notes. The Central Depository’s nominee shall be named in the Register as the owner of the Notes represented by the Global Certificate and the individual Noteholders shall be named in the Register as the owners of the Notes represented by Individual Certificates.

Unlisted Registered Notes

Transferable and non-transferable unlisted Registered Notes may be issued under the Programme. Transferable unlisted Registered Notes may be transferable in terms of the Terms and Conditions and the applicable rules and procedures of the Transfer Agent or the Central Depository, as the case may be.

UNCERTIFICATED NOTES

The Issuer may, subject to applicable laws, issue Notes in uncertificated form. A Global Certificate may be replaced by the issue of Uncertificated Notes in terms of Section 37 of the Securities Services Act, 2004 (the “Securities Services Act” ). All transactions in uncertificated securities as contemplated in the Securities Services Act will be cleared and settled in accordance with the rules of the Central Depository.

All terms and conditions relating to the Beneficial Interests in Notes represented by Global Certificates will also apply to the Beneficial Interests in Uncertificated Notes.

 

14


 

PRO FORMA PRICING SUPPLEMENT

 

 

Set out below is the form of Applicable Pricing Supplement which will be completed for each Tranche of Notes issued under the Programme:

[ INSERT LOGO ]

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(Incorporated in the Republic of South Africa with limited liability under Registration Number 1968/004880/06)

Issue of [Aggregate Nominal Amount of Tranche] [Title of Notes]

Under its ZAR 10,000,000,000 Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

Jointly and severally, unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed by the Guarantors

This document constitutes the Applicable Pricing Supplement relating to the issue of Notes described herein. Terms used herein shall be deemed to be defined as such for the purposes of the Terms and Conditions set forth in the Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009. The Notes described in this Applicable Pricing Supplement are subject to the Terms and Conditions in the Programme Memorandum. This Applicable Pricing Supplement contains the final terms of the Notes and this Applicable Pricing Supplement must be read in conjunction with such Programme Memorandum. To the extent that there is any conflict or inconsistency between the contents of this Applicable Pricing Supplement and the Programme Memorandum, the provisions of this Applicable Pricing Supplement shall prevail.

 

DESCRIPTION OF THE NOTES

1.

   Issuer    Gold Fields Limited

2.

   Guarantors    Each of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited

3.

   Status of Notes    [Secured/Unsecured]

4.

   Series Number    [            ]

5.

   Tranche Number    [            ]

6.

   Aggregate Nominal Amount    [            ]

7.

   Interest    [Interest bearing/Non interest bearing]

8.

   Interest/Payment Basis    [Fixed Rate/Floating Rate/Zero Coupon/Index-Linked Notes/Dual Currency Notes/Partly-Paid Notes/Instalment Notes/other]

9.

   Automatic/Optional Conversion from one Interest/Redemption/Payment Basis to another    [insert details including date for conversion]

10.

   Form of Notes    Registered Notes

11.

   Issue Date    [            ]

12.

   Business Centre    [            ]

13.

   Additional Business Centre    [            ]

 

15


14.    Specified Denomination    [            ]
15.    Issue Price    [            ]
16.    Interest Commencement Date    [            ]
17.    Maturity Date    [            ]
18.    Specified Currency    [            ]
19.    Applicable Business Day Convention    [Floating Rate Business Day/Following Business Day/Modified Following Business Day/Modified Following Business Day Adjusted/Preceding Business Day/other convention – insert details]
20.    Final Redemption Amount    [            ]
21.    Last Day to Register    [            ]
22.    Books Closed Period(s)    The Register will be closed from […] to […] and from […] to […] (all dates inclusive) in each year until the Maturity Date

FIXED RATE NOTES

23.    (a)    Rate of Interest    [            ] per cent. Per annum [payable [annually/semi-annually/quarterly] in arrear]
   (b)    Fixed Interest Payment Date(s)    [            ] in each year up to and including the Maturity Date/other
   (c)    Initial Broken Amount    [            ]
   (d)    Final Broken Amount    [            ]
   (e)    Any other terms relating to the particular method of calculating interest    [            ]

FLOATING RATE NOTES

24.    (a)    Floating Interest Payment Date(s)    [            ]
   (b)    Interest Period(s)    [            ]
   (c)    Rate of Interest    [            ]
   (c)    Definition of Business Day (if different from that set out in Condition 1)    [            ]
   (d)    Minimum Rate of Interest    [            ] per cent. per annum
   (e)    Maximum Rate of Interest    [            ] per cent. per annum
   (f)    Other terms relating to the method of calculating interest (e.g.: Day Count Fraction, rounding up provision)    [            ]

 

16


25.    Manner in which the Rate of Interest is to be determined    [ISDA Determination/Screen Rate Determination/other – insert details]
26.    Margin    [(…) basis points to be added to/subtracted from the relevant (ISDA Rate/Reference Rate)]
27.    If ISDA Determination   
   (a)    Floating Rate    [            ]
   (b)    Floating Rate Option    [            ]
   (c)    Designated Maturity    [            ]
   (d)    Reset Date(s)    [            ]
   (e)    ISDA Definitions to apply    [            ]
28.    If Screen Determination   
   (a)    Reference Rate (including relevant period by reference to which the Rate of Interest is to be calculated)    [            ]
   (b)    Interest Determination Date(s)    [            ]
   (c)    Relevant Screen Page and Reference Code    [            ]
29.    If Rate of Interest to be calculated otherwise than by ISDA Determination or Screen Determination, insert basis for determining Rate of Interest/Margin/Fallback provisions    [            ]

ZERO COUPON NOTES

30.    (a)    Implied Yield    [            ]
   (b)    Reference Price    [            ]
   (c)    Any other formula or basis for determining amount(s) payable    [            ]

PARTLY-PAID NOTES

31.    (a)    Amount of each payment comprising the Issue Price    [            ]
   (b)    Date upon which each payment is to be made by Noteholder    [            ]
   (c)    Consequences (if any) of failure to make any such payment by Noteholder    [            ]

 

17


   (d)    Rate of Interest to accrue on the first and subsequent instalments after the due date for payment of such instalments    [            ] per cent.

INSTALMENT NOTES

32.    Instalment Dates    [            ]
33.    Instalment Amounts (expressed as a percentage of the aggregate Nominal Amount of the Notes)    [            ]

MIXED RATE NOTES

34.    Period(s) during which the Rate of Interest for the Mixed Rate Notes will be (as applicable) that for:   
   (a)    Fixed Rate Notes    [            ]
   (b)    Floating Rate Notes    [            ]
   (c)    Indexed Notes    [            ]
   (d)    Dual Currency Notes    [            ]
   (e)    Other Notes    [            ]
35.    The Rate of Interest and other pertinent details are set out under the headings relating to the applicable forms of Notes   

INDEX-LINKED NOTES

36.    (a)    Type of Index-Linked Notes    [Indexed Interest Notes/Indexed Redemption Amount Notes]
   (b)    Index/Formula by reference to which Rate of Interest/Interest Amount is to be determined    [            ]
   (c)    Manner in which the Rate of Interest/Interest Amount is to be determined    [            ]
   (d)    Interest Period(s)    [            ]
   (e)    Interest Payment Date(s)    [            ]
   (f)    Provisions where calculation by reference to Index and/or Formula is impossible or impracticable    [            ]
   (g)    Definition of Business Day (if different from that set out in Condition 1)    [            ]

 

18


   (h)    Minimum Rate of Interest    [            ] per cent. per annum
   (i)    Maximum Rate of Interest    [            ] per cent. per annum
   (j)    Other terms relating to the method of calculating interest (e.g.: Day Count Fraction, rounding up provision)    [            ]

DUAL CURRENCY NOTES

37.    (a)    Type of Dual Currency Notes    [Dual Currency Interest Notes/Dual Currency Redemption Amount Notes]
   (b)    Rate of Exchange/method of calculating Rate of Exchange    [            ]
   (c)    Provisions applicable where calculation by reference to Rate of Exchange if impossible or impracticable    [            ]
   (d)    Person at whose option Specified Currency(ies) is/are payable    [            ]

EXCHANGEABLE NOTES

38.    (a)    Mandatory Exchange applicable?    [Yes/No]
   (b)    Noteholders’ Exchange Right applicable?    [Yes/No]
   (c)    Exchange Securities    [            ]
   (d)    Manner of determining Exchange Price    [            ]
   (e)    Exchange Period    [            ]
   (f)    Other    [            ]

OTHER NOTES

39.    Relevant description and any additional Terms and Conditions relating to such Notes    [            ]

PROVISIONS REGARDING REDEMPTION/MATURITY

40.    Issuer’s Optional Redemption: if yes:    [Yes/No]
   (a)    Optional Redemption Date(s)    [            ]
   (b)    Optional Redemption Amount(s) and method, if any, of calculation of such amount(s)    [            ]
   (c)    Minimum period of notice (if different from Condition 9.3)    [            ]

 

19


   (d)    If redeemable in part:    [            ]
      Minimum Redemption Amount(s)    [            ]
      Maximum Redemption Amount(s)    [            ]
   (e)    Other terms applicable on Redemption   
41.    Redemption at the Option of the Noteholders: if yes:    [Yes/No]
   (a)    Optional Redemption Date(s)    [            ]
   (b)    Optional Redemption Amount(s)    [            ]
   (c)    Minimum period of notice (if different from Condition 9.4)    [            ]
   (d)    If redeemable in part:   
      Minimum Redemption Amount(s)    [            ]
      Maximum Redemption Amount(s)    [            ]
   (e)    Other terms applicable on Redemption    [            ]
   (f)    Attach pro forma put notice(s)   
42.    Early Redemption Amount(s) payable on redemption for taxation reasons, Redemption Event, Change of Control Event or on Event of Default (if required). If yes:    [Yes/No]
   Amount payable    [as per Condition 9.2, 9.5, 9.6 and 15]

GENERAL

43.    Financial Exchange    [            ]
44.    Calculation Agent    [            ]
45.    Paying Agent    [            ]
46.    Specified office of the Paying Agent    [            ]
47.    Transfer Agent    Absa Capital (a division of Absa Bank Limited)
48.    Provisions relating to stabilisation    [            ]
49.    Stabilising manager    [            ]
50.    Additional selling restrictions    [            ]

 

20


51.    ISIN    [            ]
52.    Stock Code    [            ]
53.    Method of distribution    [            ]
54.    If syndicated, names of Managers    [            ]
55.    If non-syndicated, name of Dealer    [            ]
56.    Credit Rating assigned to Notes (if any)    [            ]
57.    Governing law (if the laws of South Africa are not applicable)    [            ]
58.    Other Banking Jurisdiction    [            ]
59.    Other provisions    [            ]

 

21


Disclosure Requirements in terms of paragraph 3(5) of the Commercial Paper Regulations

Paragraph 3(5)(a)

The ultimate borrower is [ ].

Paragraph 3(5)(b)

The Issuer is a going concern and can in all circumstances be reasonably expected to meet its commitments under the Notes.

Paragraph 3(5)(c)

The auditor of the Issuer is PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc

Paragraph 3(5)(d)

As at the date of this issue:

 

(a) the Issuer has not issued any commercial paper / has issued commercial paper to the value of ZAR[ ]; and

 

(b) the Issuer estimates to issue commercial paper with a nominal value of ZAR[ ] during its current financial year, ending [ ].

Paragraph 3(5)(e)

Prospective investors in the Notes are to consider this Pricing Supplement, the Programme Memorandum and the documentation incorporated therein by reference in order to ascertain the nature of the financial and commercial risks of an investment in the Notes. In addition, prospective investors in the Notes are to consider the latest audited financial statements of the Issuer which are incorporated into the Programme Memorandum by reference and which may be requested from the Issuer.

Paragraph 3(5)(f)

There has been no material adverse change in the Issuer’s financial position since the date of its last audited financial statements.

Paragraph 3(5)(g)

The Notes issued will be [ listed/unlisted] , as stated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

Paragraph 3(5)(h)

The funds to be raised through the issue of the Notes are to be used by the Issuer for [ ].

Paragraph 3(5)(i)

The payment obligations of the Issuer in respect of the Notes are guaranteed in terms of the Guarantee by the Guarantors, but are otherwise unsecured.

Paragraph 3(5)(j)

PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc, the auditors of the Issuer, have confirmed that nothing has come to their attention that causes them to believe that this issue of Notes issued under the Programme does not comply in all respects with the relevant provisions of the Commercial Paper Regulations.

Responsibility:

The Issuer accepts responsibility for the information contained in this Applicable Pricing Supplement.

Application [is hereby]/[will not be] made to list this issue of Notes [on [date]] .

 

22


SIGNED at                                          this      day of              2009.

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(AS ISSUER)

SIGNED at                                          on                      2009

 

 

    

 

Signature:      Signature:

 

    

 

Name:      Name:

 

    

 

Designation:      Designation:

Address: 150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton

Tel:         +2711 562 9700

 

23


 

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE NOTES

 

 

The following are the Terms and Conditions of Notes to be issued by the Issuer which will be incorporated by reference into each Note. The Applicable Pricing Supplement in relation to any Tranche of Notes may specify other terms and conditions which shall to the extent so specified or to the extent inconsistent with the following Terms and Conditions, replace or modify the following Terms and Conditions for the purpose of such Tranche of Notes. The Applicable Pricing Supplement will be attached to each Note.

Before the Issuer issues any Tranche of listed Notes, the Issuer shall complete, sign and deliver to the JSE and the Central Depository a pricing supplement based on the pro forma Applicable Pricing Supplement (as defined below) included in the Programme Memorandum setting out details of such Notes. The Issuer may determine that particular Notes will not be listed on the JSE or any other exchange and in that case, no Applicable Pricing Supplement will be delivered to the JSE unless the settlement of trades in such unlisted Notes takes place in accordance with the electronic settlement procedures of the JSE and the Central Depository.

If there is any conflict or inconsistency between provisions set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement and the provisions set out in these Terms and Conditions of the Notes, then the provisions in the Applicable Pricing Supplement will prevail.

Words and expressions used in the Applicable Pricing Supplement shall have the same meanings where used in these Terms and Conditions unless the context otherwise requires or unless otherwise stated.

 

1. INTERPRETATION

In these Terms and Conditions, unless inconsistent with the context or separately defined in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the following expressions shall have the following meanings:

 

“Absa Capital”   Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited, registration number 1986/004794/06, a registered bank and public company with limited liability incorporated in the Republic of South Africa;
“Acting in Concert”   a group of persons who, pursuant to an agreement or understanding (whether formal or informal), actively co-operate, through the acquisition of shares in the Issuer by any of them, either directly or indirectly, to obtain or consolidate Control of the Issuer;
“Agency Agreement”   the amended and restated Agency Agreement to be entered into between the Issuer, the Paying Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Transfer Agent, unless such agents are appointed in terms of a separate agreement with the Issuer or the Issuer itself acts in any of the aforementioned capacities, as revised, amended, updated or replaced from time to time;
“Applicable Pricing Supplement”   the Pricing Supplement relating to each Tranche of Notes;
“Applicable Procedures”   the rules and operating procedures for the time being of the Central Depository, Settlement Agents and the JSE, as the case may be;
“Beneficial Interest”   the undivided share of a co-owner of the Notes represented by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form as provided in section 41 of the Securities Services Act;

 

24


“BESA Listing Disclosure Requirements”   the listing disclosure requirements of the bond market of the JSE, previously The Bond Exchange of South Africa Limited;
“Books Closed Period”   the period, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, commencing after the Last Day to Register, during which transfer of the Notes will not be registered, or such shorter period as the Issuer may decide in order to determine those Noteholders entitled to receive interest;
“Business Day”   a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday or public holiday within the meaning of the Public Holidays Act, 1994) which is a day on which commercial banks settle ZAR payments in Johannesburg or any Additional Business Centre specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, save that if the Specified Currency is not ZAR, “ Business Day ” shall mean a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday) which is a day on which commercial banks and foreign exchange markets settle payments in the principal financial centre of the Specified Currency and in each (if any) Additional Business Centre;
“Business Day Convention”   the business day convention, if any, specified as such and set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Calculation Agent”   Absa Capital or, in relation to any particular Tranche, or Series of Notes, such other person specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the Calculation Agent;
“Central Depository”   Strate Limited (Registration number 1998/022242/06), or its nominee, operating in terms of the Securities Services Act (or any successor legislation thereto), or any additional or alternate depository approved by the Issuer, the Relevant Dealer(s) and the JSE;
“Cerro Corona Project”   the development of the gold and copper deposits in Peru by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary;
“Cerro Corona Subsidiary”   Gold Fields La Cima S.A.;
“Certificate”   a Global Certificate or an Individual Certificate, as the case may be;
“Change of Control”   shall be deemed to have occurred at each time (whether or not approved by the senior management or board of directors of the Issuer) that any person ( “Relevant Person” ) or persons Acting in Concert or any person or persons acting on behalf of any such person(s), at any time directly or indirectly acquires Control of the Issuer, provided that a Change of Control shall not be deemed to have occurred if the shareholders of the Relevant Person are also, or immediately prior to the event which would otherwise constitute a Change of Control were, all of the shareholders of the Issuer;
“Change of Control Period”   in relation to a Change of Control of the Issuer the period ending 60 (sixty) Business Days after the date on which the Change of Control of the Issuer is publicly announced;

 

25


“Change of Control Rating Downgrade”   shall, in relation to Notes that are assigned a solicited rating, on a South African national scale, or where the Issuer has been assigned a solicited rating, on a South African national scale, by the Rating Agency, be deemed to have occurred if within the Change of Control Period the rating previously assigned to such Notes or the Issuer, as the case may be, is (i) withdrawn; or (ii) changed from an Investment Grade Rating to a Non-Investment Grade Rating;
“Companies Act”   the Companies Act, 1973 (as amended);
“Consolidated EBITDA”   for any Measurement Period, (having reversed any entries made to reflect fair value gains or losses on financial derivative investments which are undertaken in the normal course of business) Consolidated Profits Before Interest and Tax before any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets and before any extraordinary items;
“Consolidated Profits Before Interest and Tax”   in respect of any Measurement Period, the consolidated net income of the Group (less the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiary but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group (other than a Project Finance Subsidiary) from a Project Finance Subsidiary) before:
  (a)   any provision on account of normal taxation; and
  (b)   any interest, commission, discounts or other fees incurred or payable, received or receivable by any member of the Group in respect of Indebtedness;
“Control”   (A) the holding beneficially of more than 50% (fifty percent) of the issued share capital of the Issuer (excluding any part of that issued share capital that carries no right to participate beyond a specified amount in a distribution of either profits or capital), or (B) the power to cast, or control the casting of such number of the shares in the issued share capital of the Issuer carrying more than 50% (fifty percent) of the total number of votes that may be cast at a general meeting of the members of the Issuer;
“Currency”   South African Rand or as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Dealer”   any Dealer, as may be appointed under the Programme from time to time, which appointment may be for a specific issue or on an ongoing basis, subject to the Issuer’s right to terminate the appointment of any Dealer;
“Downgrade”   in relation to a solicited rating, on a South African national scale, assigned to the Issuer by a Rating Agency, the withdrawal of such previously assigned rating or the change of such previously assigned rating from an Investment Grade Rating to a Non-Investment Grade Rating;
“Early Redemption Amount”   the amount, as set out in Condition 9.7, at which the Notes will be redeemed by the Issuer pursuant to the provisions of Condition 9.2 and/or Condition 15;

 

26


“Encumbrances”     (a)   the sale, transfer or otherwise disposal by any Material Group Company of any of its assets on terms whereby they are or may be leased to or re-acquired by it or by any other Material Group Company; or
    (b)   the sale, transfer or otherwise disposal by any Material Group Company of any of its receivables on recourse terms; or
    (c)   any mortgage, pledge, lien, assignment or cession in securitatem debiti conferring security, hypothecation, security interest, preferential right or trust arrangement creating real rights of security or other encumbrance securing any obligation of any person but excluding statutory preferences and any security interest arising by operation of law; or
    (d)   the execution of any other preferential arrangement (whether conditional or not and whether relating to existing or to future assets and including any title, transfer and retention agreement) by any Material Group Company, having the effect of creating a security interest creating real rights of security to a creditor or any agreement or arrangement to give any form of security creating real rights of security to a creditor but excluding statutory preferences and any security interest arising by operation of law;
“Event of Default”   an event of default by the Issuer as set out in Condition 15;
“Exchangeable Notes”   Notes which may be redeemed by the Issuer in the manner indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement by the delivery to the Noteholders of cash or of so many of the Exchange Securities as is determined in accordance with the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Exchange Control Regulations”   the Exchange Control Regulations, 1961 issued pursuant to the Currency and Exchanges Act, 1933;
“Exchange Period”   in respect of Exchangeable Notes to which the Noteholders’ Exchange Right applies (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement), the period indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement during which such right may be exercised;
“Exchange Price”   the amount determined in accordance with the manner described in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, according to which the number of Exchange Securities which may be delivered in redemption of an Exchangeable Note will be determined;

 

27


“Exchange Securities”   the securities indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement which may be delivered by the Issuer in redemption of Exchangeable Notes to the value of the Exchange Price;
“Extraordinary Resolution”   a resolution passed at a meeting (duly convened) of the Noteholders or Noteholders of the Relevant Series of Notes, by a majority consisting of not less than 66  2 / 3 % (sixty six and two thirds per cent) of the persons voting at such meeting upon a show of hands or if a poll be duly demanded then by a majority consisting of not less than 66  2 / 3 % (sixty six and two thirds per cent) of the votes given on such poll;
“Final Redemption Amount”   the amount of principal specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement payable in respect of each Note upon the Maturity Date;
“Fitch”   Fitch Southern Africa (Proprietary) Limited, registration 1990/002436/07;
“Fixed Interest Period”   the period from (and including) an Interest Payment Date to (but excluding) the following Interest Payment Date; provided that the first interest period shall be from (and including) the Interest Commencement Date to (but excluding) the next Interest Payment Date;
“Fixed Rate Notes”   Notes which will bear interest at the fixed Rate of Interest, as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Floating Rate Notes”   Notes which will bear interest at a floating Rate of Interest as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement and more fully described in Condition 7.2;
“Global Certificate”   the single Certificate for a Tranche of Notes, without interest coupons, registered in the name of the Central Depository’s nominee and representing those Notes issued in terms of the Terms and Conditions which are lodged and immobilised in the Central Depository other than those Notes represented by the Individual Certificates. A Global Certificate may be replaced by the issue of Uncertificated Notes in terms of Section 37 of the Securities Services Act, 2007;
“Gold Fields”   Gold Fields Limited (Registration Number 1968/004880/06);
“Group”   the Issuer’s group of companies comprising of the Issuer and each Subsidiary of the Issuer from time to time whose financial results are consolidated with the financial results of the Issuer;
“Guarantee”   the unconditional and irrevocable Guarantee to be given by each Guarantor to all Noteholders as contemplated in Condition 23 as revised, amended, updated or replaced from time to time;

 

28


“Guarantor”   each of the following Material Subsidiaries of the Issuer: GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, Registration Number 2002/031431/07, Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, Registration Number 1959/003209/06, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, Registration Number 184982 and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, Registration Number 651406;
“IFRS”   means the International Financial Reporting Standard as amended from time to time;
“Implied Yield”   the yield accruing on the Issue Price of Zero Coupon Notes, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Indebtedness”   any indebtedness in respect of monies borrowed (including, but not limited to indebtedness in the form of bonds, notes, debentures) and (without double counting) guarantees and/or indemnities given, whether present or future, actual or contingent, excluding any intra-group indebtedness due to any Subsidiary of the Issuer;
“Indexed Interest Notes”   Notes in respect of which the Interest Amount is calculated by reference to such index and/or formula as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Index-Linked Notes”   an Indexed Interest Note and/or an Indexed Redemption Amount Note, as applicable;
“Indexed Redemption Amount Notes”   Notes in respect of which the Final Redemption Amount is calculated by reference to an index and/or a formula as may be indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Individual Certificate”   in respect of Registered Notes, a Note evidenced by the definitive registered form of a single Certificate registered in the name of the relevant Noteholder;
“Instalment Amount”   the amount expressed as a percentage of the Nominal Amount of an Instalment Note, being an instalment of principal (other than the final instalment) on an Instalment Note;
“Instalment Notes”   Notes issued at the same date but redeemed in Instalment Amounts by the Issuer on an amortised basis on different Instalment Dates, as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Interest Amount”   the amount of interest payable in respect of each Nominal Amount of Fixed Rate Notes, Floating Rate Notes and Indexed Notes, as determined in accordance with Condition 7.1 or 7.2, as the case may be;
“Interest Commencement Date”   the first date from which interest on the Notes, other than Zero Coupon Notes, will accrue, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Interest Payment Date”   the Interest Payment Date(s) specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement or if no express Interest Payment Date(s) is/are specified in the Applicable Pricing

 

29


  Supplement, the last day of the Interest Period commencing on the preceding Interest Payment Date, or, in the case of the first Interest Payment Date, commencing on the Interest Commencement Date;
“Interest Period”   such period(s) as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“ISDA”   the International Swaps and Derivatives Association Inc.;
“ISDA Definitions”   the ISDA Definitions published by ISDA (as amended, supplemented, revised or republished from time to time) as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Issue Date”   in relation to each Tranche of Notes, the date specified as such in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Issue Price”   in relation to each Tranche of Notes, the price specified as such in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Issuer”   Gold Fields;
“Investment Grade Rating”   a national scale local currency rating of “Baa3.za” by Moody’s or “za.BBB-” by S&P or “BBB-.(zaf)” by Fitch;
“JSE”   the JSE Limited (Registration Number 2005/022939/06), a licensed financial exchange in terms of the Securities Services Act or any exchange which operates as a successor exchange to the JSE, or, where the context so requires, such other or further exchange or exchanges on which the Notes are listed;
“Last Day to Register”   with respect to a particular Series of Notes (as reflected in the Applicable Pricing Supplement), the last date or dates preceding a Payment Day on which the Transfer Agent will accept Transfer Forms and record the transfer of Notes in the Register for that particular Series of Notes and whereafter the Register is closed for further transfers or entries until the Payment Day;
“Mandatory Exchange”   if indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the obligation of the Issuer to redeem Exchangeable Notes on the Maturity Date by delivery of Exchange Securities to the relevant Noteholders of Exchangeable Notes;
“Material Group Company”   the Issuer, each Guarantor and any Material Subsidiary of the Issuer whose affairs are required to be consolidated in the audited financial statements of the Issuer;
“Material Subsidiary”   at any time, a member of the Group which had EBITDA (calculated in the same way as Consolidated EBITDA) or gross assets in its most recently ended financial year (on a consolidated basis taking into account it and its subsidiaries only) of more than 5% (five per cent) of EBITDA (calculated in the same way as Consolidated EBITDA) or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements of the Group). Compliance with the aforementioned shall be determined by reference to the

 

30


  latest audited financial statements of such member of the Group (consolidated in the case of a member of the Group which itself has subsidiaries), provided that –
    a)   if, in the case of any member of the Group which itself has subsidiaries, no consolidated financial statements are prepared and audited, its EBITDA (calculated in the same way as Consolidated EBITDA) and gross assets shall be determined on the basis of pro forma consolidated financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and its subsidiaries, prepared for this purpose by the Issuer;
    b)   if any intra-Group transfer or re-organisation takes place, the audited financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and all relevant members of the Group shall be adjusted by the Issuer in order to take into account such intra-Group transfer or re-organisation; and
    c)   the audited financial statements of the Group and any relevant member of the Group shall be adjusted to take account of the acquisition or disposal of any member of the Group or any business of any member of the Group, after the date at which the audited financial statements of the Group are made up.
    A report by the directors of the Issuer which states that, in opinion of the directors, a Subsidiary of the Issuer is or is not or was or was not at any particular time or through any particular period a Material Subsidiary shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all parties. The Issuer may request a report from the auditors of the Issuer, addressed to the directors of the Issuer, as to the proper extraction of the figures used by the directors of the Issuer in determining the Material Subsidiaries of the Issuer and mathematical accuracy of the calculations and that the adjusted figures are an accurate reflection of the revised consolidated EBITDA or gross assets.
“Maturity Date”   the date, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, on which the Notes mature;
“Measurement Period”   each period of 12 (twelve) months ending on the last day of the Issuer’s financial year and each period of 12 (twelve) months ending on the last day of the first half of the Issuer’s financial year;
“Mixed Rate Notes”   Notes which will bear interest over respective periods at differing Rates of Interest applicable to any combination of Fixed Rate Notes, Floating Rate Notes or Indexed Notes, each as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement and as more fully described in Condition 7.3;
“Moody’s”   Moody’s Investors Service South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, registration number 2002/014566/07;

 

31


“NACA”   nominal annual compounded annually;
“NACM”   nominal annual compounded monthly;
“NACQ”   nominal annual compounded quarterly;
“NACS”   nominal annual compounded semi-annually;
“Nedbank Capital”   Nedbank Capital, a division of Nedbank Limited, a registered bank and public company with limited liability incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, registration number 1951/000009/06;
“Nominal Amount”   in relation to any Note, the total amount, excluding interest and any adjustments on account of any formula, owing by the Issuer under the Note;
“Non-Investment Grade”   a credit rating, on a South African national scale, below an Investment Grade Rating;
“Noteholders”   the holders of the Registered Notes (as recorded in the Register);
“Noteholders’ Exchange Right”   if indicated as applicable in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the right of Noteholders of Exchangeable Notes to elect to receive delivery of the Exchange Securities in lieu of cash from the Issuer upon redemption of such Notes;
“Notes”   the notes issued or to be issued by the Issuer under the Programme and represented by a Certificate as well as Uncertificated Notes;
“Operations and Procedures Memorandum”   the document which sets out guidelines for the administrative procedures to be followed in relation to the issue of Notes by the Issuer under the Programme;
“Optional Redemption Amount(s)”   has the meaning given to it in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Optional Redemption Date(s)”   has the meaning given to it in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Outstanding”   in relation to the Notes, all the Notes issued other than:
  (a)   those which have been redeemed in full;
  (b)   those in respect of which the date for redemption in accordance with the Terms and Conditions has occurred and the redemption moneys wherefor (including all interest (if any) accrued thereon to the date of such redemption and any interest (if any) payable under the Terms and Conditions after such date) remain available for payment against presentation of Certificates;
  (c)   those which have been purchased and cancelled as provided in Condition 9;
  (d)   those which have become prescribed under Condition 14;

 

32


  provided that for each of the following purposes, namely:
  (i)   the right to attend and vote at any meeting of the Noteholders; and
  (ii)   the determination of how many and which Notes are for the time being Outstanding for the purposes of Conditions 18 and 19,
  all Notes (if any) which are for the time being held by the Issuer (subject to any applicable law) or by any person for the benefit of the Issuer and not cancelled (unless and until ceasing to be so held) shall be deemed not to be Outstanding;
“Participants”   a person accepted by the Central Depository as a participant in terms of section 34 of the Securities Services Act;
“Partly-Paid Notes”   Notes which are issued with the Issue Price partly paid and which Issue Price is paid up fully by the Noteholder in instalments (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement);
“Paying Agent”   Absa Capital, unless the Issuer elects, in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, to act as Paying Agent itself or to appoint another entity as Paying Agent, in which event that other entity shall act as Paying Agent in respect of that Tranche or Series of Notes;
“Payment Day”   any day which is a Business Day and upon which a payment is due by the Issuer in respect of the Notes;
“Permitted Encumbrances”   (a)     any Encumbrance existing as at the date of the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
  (b)     any title transfer or retention arrangement entered into by any Material Group Company in the normal course of its trading activities and on terms no worse for that Material Group Company than the standard terms of the relevant supplier;
  (c)     any netting or set-off arrangement entered into by any Material Group Company in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements (which shall include, for the avoidance of doubt, those pursuant to hedging arrangement in relation to gold and silver and other commodity prices, foreign exchange rates and interest rates where such arrangements are entered into for the purposes of providing protection against fluctuation in such rates or prices in the ordinary course of business), for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;
  (d)     any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of trading and not by reason of any default (whether in payment or otherwise) of any Material Group Company;

 

33


  (e)     any Encumbrance over or affecting any asset acquired by a Material Group Company after the date of this Programme Memorandum if:
    (i)   the Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a Material Group Company; and
    (ii)   the Indebtedness secured by such Encumbrance has not been increased;
 

(f)

    any Encumbrance over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Group after the date of this Programme Memorandum, where the Encumbrance is created prior to the date on which that company becomes a member of the Group, if:
   

(i)

  the Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that company; and
    (ii)   the Indebtedness secured by such Encumbrance has not been increased;
  (g)     any Encumbrance granted in respect of Project Finance Borrowings over assets of, or the shares in, a Project Finance Subsidiary, including any Encumbrance granted in respect of the Project Finance Borrowings in connection with the Cerro Corona Project in Peru;
 

(h)

    any Encumbrance to secure inter-company Indebtedness to a Group company, provided that the holder of such Encumbrance may not cede or assign it rights in terms thereof to any other person (other than a Group company);
 

(i)

    any Encumbrance over or with respect to any receivables of any Material Group Company, if such Encumbrance was created pursuant to any securitisation or like arrangement and the Indebtedness secured by such Encumbrance is limited to the value (on or about the date of creation of such Encumbrance) of such receivables;
  (j)     in respect of Encumbrances over or affecting any asset of any Material Group Company, any Encumbrance securing indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other indebtedness which has the benefit of Encumbrances other than any permitted under (a) to (i) above and (k) below) does not at any time exceed 12% (twelve percent) of EBITDA (calculated in the

 

34


      same way as Consolidated EBITDA) (but adjusted to include the net value of new assets acquired since the last date of the latest set of consolidated annual financial statements of the Group); and
  (k)     any other Encumbrance created with the prior approval of an Extraordinary Resolution of the Noteholders;
“Programme”   the ZAR10,000,000,000 Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme under which the Issuer may from time to time issue Notes;
“Programme Agreement”   the amended and restated Programme Agreement entered into or to be entered into between the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger and the Dealer(s) relating to the procuring of subscriptions for the Notes, as revised, amended, updated or replaced from time to time;
“Programme Amount”   the maximum aggregate Nominal Amount of all of the Notes that may be issued under the Programme at any one point in time, being ZAR10,000,000,000 or such increased amount as is determined by the Issuer from time to time with the consent of all the Guarantors but without the consent of the Noteholders and subject to and in accordance with all applicable laws, the Programme Agreement, the requirements of the JSE and/or any such other exchange(s) on which the Notes may be listed;
“Programme Memorandum”   the Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009 relating to the Notes prepared in connection with the Programme, as revised, supplemented, amended, updated or replaced from time to time by the Issuer;
“Project Finance Borrowings”   any indebtedness to finance (or refinance) a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of assets which is incurred by a Project Finance Subsidiary in connection with such project and in respect of which the recourse of the person(s) making any such finance (or re-finance) available to that Project Finance Subsidiary for the payment, repayment and prepayment of such indebtedness is limited to (i) the Project Finance Subsidiary and its assets and/or the shares in that Project Finance Subsidiary and/or (ii) during the period prior to successful completion of the relevant completion tests applicable to such project guarantees from any one or more members of the Group;
“Project Finance Subsidiary”   a single purpose company whose sole business is a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of an asset which has incurred Project Finance Borrowings;
“Rate of Interest”   the rate or rates of interest applicable to Notes, other than Zero Coupon Notes, as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

35


“Rating Agency”   each of S&P, Moody’s or Fitch;
“Redemption Date”   the date upon which the Notes are redeemed by the Issuer, whether by way of early redemption or at maturity in terms of Condition 9.1, as the case may be;
“Reference Banks”   four leading banks in the South African inter-bank market selected by the Calculation Agent;
“Reference Price”   in relation to a Tranche of Zero Coupon Notes, the reference price specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Register”   the register maintained by the Transfer Agent in terms of Condition 12;
“Registered Note”   a Note issued in registered form and transferable in accordance with Condition 13.1;
“Relevant Date”   in respect of any payment relating to the Notes, the date on which such payment first becomes due, except that, in relation to monies payable to the Central Depository in accordance with these Terms and Conditions, it means the first date on which (i) the full amount of such monies have been received by the Central Depository, (ii) such monies are available for payment to the holders of Beneficial Interests and (iii) notice to that effect has been duly given to such holders in accordance with the Applicable Procedures;
“Representative”   a person duly authorised to act on behalf of a Noteholder, the Calculation Agent, the Transfer Agent and the Paying Agent who may be regarded by the Issuer (acting in good faith) as being duly authorised based upon the tacit or express representation thereof by such Representative, in the absence of express notice to the contrary from such Noteholder, Calculation Agent, Paying Agent or Transfer Agent, as the case may be;
“Securities Services Act”   the Securities Services Act, 2004;
“Series”   a Tranche of Notes together with any further Tranche or Tranches of Notes which are:
  (a)   expressed to be consolidated and form a single series; and
  (b)   identical in all respects (including as to listing) except for their respective Issue Dates, Interest Commencement Dates and/or Issue Prices;
“Settlement Agent”   a Participant, approved by the JSE in terms of the rules of the JSE to perform electronic settlement of both funds and scrip on behalf of market participants;
“Solvent Reconstruction”   an event where an order is made or an effective resolution is passed for the winding-up of the Material Group Company, other than under or in connection with a scheme of amalgamation or reconstruction or other arrangement not involving insolvency;

 

36


“Specified Currency”   has the meaning given in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“Specified Denominations”   has the meaning given in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;
“S&P”   Standard and Poor’s Rating Services, a division of The McGraw-Hill Companies Incorporated and its successors in title;
“Subsidiary”   a subsidiary company as defined in Section 1(3) of the Companies Act;
“Terms and Conditions”   the terms and conditions incorporated in this section entitled “ Terms and Conditions of the Notes ” and in accordance with which the Notes will be issued;
“Tranche”   all Notes which are identical in all respects (including as to listing) and are issued in a single issue;
“Transfer Agent”   Absa Capital, unless the Issuer elects, in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, to act as Transfer Agent itself or to appoint another entity as Transfer Agent in accordance with the terms of the Agency Agreement, in which event that other entity shall act as an Transfer Agent in respect of that Tranche or Series of Notes;
“Transfer Form”   the written form for the transfer of a Registered Note, in the form approved by the Transfer Agent, and signed by the transferor and transferee;
“Uncertificated Notes”   a Note which is not represented by any certificate or written instrument as contemplated in Section 37 of the Securities Services Act;
“ZAR”   the lawful currency of the Republic of South Africa, being South African Rand, or any successor currency;
“ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX”   the mid-market rate for deposits in ZAR for a period of the Designated Maturity (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) which appears on the Reuters Screen SAFEY Page as at 11h00, Johannesburg time on the relevant date; and
“Zero Coupon Notes”   Notes which will be offered and sold at a discount to their Nominal Amount or at par and will not bear interest other than in the case of late payment.

 

2. ISSUE

 

2.1 Notes are issued by the Issuer in Series and each Series may comprise one or more Tranches. Each Tranche will be the subject of an Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

2.2 The Noteholders are deemed to have knowledge of, and are entitled to the benefit of, and are subject to, all the provisions of the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

2.3 The Applicable Pricing Supplement for each Tranche of Notes is (to the extent relevant) incorporated herein for the purposes of those Notes and supplements these Terms and Conditions. The Applicable Pricing Supplement may specify other terms and conditions which shall, to the extent so specified or to the extent inconsistent with these Terms and Conditions, replace or modify these Terms and Conditions for the purposes of those Notes. Capitalised expressions used in these Terms and Conditions and not herein defined shall bear the meaning assigned to them in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

37


3. FORM AND DENOMINATION

 

3.1 General

 

3.1.1 Payments in relation to the Notes will be made in ZAR or such other currency as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

3.1.2 Any Note may be a Partly-Paid Note, an Instalment Note or an Exchangeable Note.

 

3.1.3 Each Note may be a Fixed Rate Note, a Floating Rate Note, a Zero Coupon Note, an Indexed Interest Note, an Indexed Redemption Amount Note, a Mixed Rate Note or a combination of any of the foregoing or such other types of Note as may be determined by the Issuer, as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

3.1.4 Notes will be issued in such denominations as may be determined by the Issuer and as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. Listed and/or unlisted Notes may be issued under the Programme.

 

3.1.5 Noteholders of Notes listed on an exchange other than the JSE and of unlisted Notes will have no recourse against the Bond Exchange Guarantee Fund, established under Part D, section 8 of the Market Association Rules of the Bond Traders Association.

 

3.2 Registered Notes

Each Tranche of Registered Notes listed on the bond market of the JSE will be issued in the form of a Global Certificate, which will be deposited with and registered in the name of, and for the account of, the Central Depository or its nominee or may be issued as an Uncertificated Note. An owner of a Beneficial Interest in the Notes represented by the Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form shall be entitled to exchange such Beneficial Interest for an Individual Certificate in accordance with Condition 13. Registered Notes which are not listed will be evidenced by Individual Certificates or, if cleared and settled through the Central Depository, by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form. If unlisted Notes are cleared and settled through the Central Depository, then the same terms and conditions relating to the clearance and settlement of Registered Notes shall apply thereto.

 

4 TITLE

 

4.1 Registered Notes

 

4.1.1 Subject to the provisions set out below, title to the Registered Notes will pass upon registration of transfer in the Register in accordance with Condition 13.1.

 

4.1.2 The Issuer may deem and treat the person reflected in the Register as the holder of any Note as the absolute owner of the Note (whether or not overdue and notwithstanding any notice of ownership or writing thereon or notice of any previous loss or theft thereof) for all purposes but, in the case of any Global Certificate, without prejudice to the provisions set out in the next succeeding paragraph.

 

4.1.3 Beneficial Interests in Notes held in uncertificated form or in Notes lodged in the Central Securities Depository in the form of the Global Certificate may, in terms of existing law and practice, be transferred through the Central Securities Depository by way of book entry in the central securities accounts of the Participants. Such transfers will not be recorded in the Register and the Central Securities Depository’s Nominee will continue to be reflected in the Register as the Noteholder in respect of the Notes held in uncertificated form or represented by the Global Certificate, notwithstanding such transfers.

 

5 STATUS OF NOTES

The Notes are direct, unconditional, unsubordinated and unsecured obligations of the Issuer and rank pari passu and rateably without any preference among themselves and (save for certain debts required to be preferred by law) equally with all other unsecured and unsubordinated obligations of the Issuer from time to time outstanding.

 

38


6 NEGATIVE PLEDGE

 

6.1 After the date of this Programme Memorandum and for so long as any of the Notes remain Outstanding, neither the Issuer nor any Guarantor will (and the Issuer shall procure that no other Material Group Company will) create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance, other than Permitted Encumbrances over any of its assets, present or future, to secure any present or future Indebtedness of the Issuer, any Guarantor or other Material Group Company unless, at the same time, or prior thereto, the Issuer’s obligations under the Notes and all the Guarantors’ obligations under the Guarantee, as the case may be, either:

 

6.1.1 are secured equally and rateably therewith and any such instrument shall expressly provide therefor; or

 

6.1.2 have the benefit of such other security, guarantee, indemnity or other arrangement as shall be approved by an Extraordinary Resolution of the Noteholders.

 

6.2 The Issuer shall be entitled but not obliged, to form, or procure the formation of, a trust or trusts or appoint, or procure the appointment of, an agent or agents to hold any such rights of security for the benefit or on behalf of such Noteholders.

 

7 INTEREST

 

7.1 Interest on Fixed Rate Notes

 

7.1.1 Except if otherwise specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, interest on Fixed Rate Notes will be paid on a six-monthly basis, on Interest Payment Dates. Each Fixed Rate Note bears interest on its outstanding Nominal Amount (or, if it is a Partly-Paid Note, the amount paid up) from (and including) the Interest Commencement Date specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement at the rate(s) per annum equal to the Rate of Interest so specified payable in arrear on the Fixed Interest Payment Dates in each year up to and including the Maturity Date.

 

7.1.2 The first payment of interest will be made on the Fixed Interest Payment Date next following the Interest Commencement Date.

 

7.1.3 Except if otherwise specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the amount of interest payable in respect of any six-month period shall be calculated by dividing the Rate of Interest by two and multiplying the product by the Nominal Amount, provided that:

 

7.1.3.1 if an Initial Broken Amount is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, then the first Interest Amount shall equal the Initial Broken Amount specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement; and

 

7.1.3.2 if a Final Broken Amount is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, then the final Interest Amount shall equal the Final Broken Amount.

 

7.1.4 If interest is required to be calculated for a period other than a Fixed Interest Period, such interest shall be calculated on the basis of the actual number of days in such period divided by 365.

 

7.2 Interest on Floating Rate Notes and Indexed Interest Notes

 

7.2.1 Interest Payment Dates

Each Floating Rate Note and Indexed Interest Note bears interest on its outstanding Nominal Amount (or, if it is a Partly-Paid Note, the amount not paid up) from (and including) the Interest Commencement Date specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement and such interest will be payable in arrear on the Interest Payment Date(s) in each year specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. Such interest will be payable in respect of each Interest Period (which expression shall, in these Terms and Conditions, mean the period from (and including) an Interest Payment Date (or the Interest Commencement Date) to (but excluding) the next (or first) Interest Payment Date).

 

39


7.2.2 Rate of Interest

The Rate of Interest payable from time to time in respect of the Floating Rate Notes and Indexed Interest Notes will be determined in the manner specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

7.2.3 Minimum and/or Maximum Rate of Interest

If the Applicable Pricing Supplement specifies a Minimum Rate of Interest for any Interest Period, then, in the event that the Rate of Interest in respect of any such Interest Period determined in accordance with the above provisions is less than such Minimum Rate of Interest, the Rate of Interest for such Interest Period shall be such Minimum Rate of Interest. If the Applicable Pricing Supplement specifies a Maximum Rate of Interest for any Interest Period, then, in the event that the Rate of Interest in respect of any such Interest Period determined in accordance with the above provisions is greater than such Maximum Rate of Interest, the Rate of Interest for such Interest Period shall be such Maximum Rate of Interest.

 

7.2.4 Determination of Rate of Interest and Calculation of Interest Amount

The Calculation Agent, in the case of Floating Rate Notes and Indexed Interest Notes will, on or as soon as practicable after each time at which the Rate of Interest is to be determined, determine the Rate of Interest and calculate the Interest Amount payable in respect of each Floating Rate Note and Indexed Interest Note in respect of each Specified Denomination for the relevant Interest Period, and the Calculation Agent shall notify the Issuer of the Rate of Interest and the Interest Amount for the relevant Interest Period as soon as practicable after determining or calculating the same but in any event no later than the 4 (four) Business Days thereafter. Each Interest Amount shall be calculated by applying the Rate of Interest to the Specified Denomination, multiplying such product by the applicable Day Count Fraction and rounding the resultant figure to the nearest Sub-unit of the relevant Specified Currency, half a Sub-unit being rounded upwards or otherwise in accordance with applicable market convention.

 

7.2.5 “Day Count Fraction” means, in respect of the calculation of an amount of interest for any Interest Period:

 

  (a) if “1/1” is specified, 1;

 

  (b) if “Actual/365” , “Act/365” , “Actual/Actual” or “Act/Act” is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the actual number of days in the Interest Period in respect of which payment is being made divided by 365 (or, if any portion of that Interest Period falls in a leap year, the sum of (i) the actual number of days in that portion of the Interest Period falling in a leap year divided by 366 and (ii) the actual number of days in that portion of the Interest Period falling in a non-leap year divided by 365); or

 

  (c) if “Actual/365 (Fixed)” , “Act/365 (Fixed)” , “A/365 (Fixed)” or “A/365F” is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the actual number of days in the Interest Period in respect of which payment is being made divided by 365; or

 

  (d) if “Actual/365 Sterling” is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the actual number of days in the Interest Period divided by 365, in the case of an Interest Payment Date falling in a leap year, 366; or

 

  (e) if “Actual/360” , “Act/360” or “A/360” is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the actual number of days in the Interest Period in respect of which payment is being made divided by 360; or

 

  (f)

if “30/360” , “360/360” or “Bond Basis” is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the number of days in the Interest Period in respect of which payment is being made divided by 360 (the number of days to be calculated on the basis of a year of 360 days with 12 30-day months (unless (i) the last day of the Interest Period is the 31st day of a month but the first day of the Interest Period is a day other than the 30th or 31st day of a month, in which case the month that includes that last day shall not be considered to

 

40


 

be shortened to a 30-day month or (ii) that last day of the Interest Period is the last day of the month of February, in which case the month of February shall not be considered to be lengthened to a 30-day month)); or

 

  (g) if “30E/360” or “Eurobond Basis” is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, the number of days in the Interest Period in respect of which payment is being made divided by 360 (the number of days to be calculated on the basis of a year of 360 days with 12 30-day months, without regard to the date of the first day or last day of the Interest Period unless, in the case of the final Interest Period, the Interest Payment Date is the last day of the month of February, in which case the month of February shall not be considered to be lengthened to a 30-day month); or

 

  (h) such other calculation method as is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

7.2.6 Interest Determination, Screen Rate Determination including Fallback Provisions

Where ISDA Determination is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the manner in which the Rate of Interest is to be determined, the Rate of Interest for each Interest Period will be the relevant ISDA Rate plus or minus (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) the Margin (if any). For the purposes of this sub-paragraph, “ISDA Rate” for an Interest Period means a rate equal to the Floating Rate that would be determined by such agent as is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement under an interest rate swap transaction if that agent were acting as Calculation Agent for that swap transaction under the terms of an agreement incorporating the most recent ISDA Definitions and under which:

 

  (a) the Floating Rate Option is as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

  (b) the Designated Maturity is the period specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement; and

 

  (c) the relevant Reset Date is either: (i) if the applicable Floating Rate Option is based on ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX, the first day of that Interest Period; or (ii) in any other case, as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

For the purposes of the above sub-paragraph “Floating Rate” , “Floating Rate Option” , “Designated Maturity” and “Reset Date” have the meanings given to those terms in the ISDA Definitions specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

Where Screen Rate Determination is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the manner in which the Rate of Interest is to be determined, the Rate of Interest for each Interest Period will, subject as provided below, be either:

 

  (a) if the Relevant Screen Page is available,

 

  (i) the offered quotation (if only one quotation appears on the screen page); or

 

  (ii) the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place, with 0.000005 being rounded upwards) of the offered quotations,

(expressed as a percentage per annum) for the Reference Rate which appears on the Relevant Screen Page as at 11h00 (or as otherwise specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) (Johannesburg time) on the Interest Determination Date in question plus or minus (as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement) the Margin (if any), all as determined by the Calculation Agent. If five or more such offered quotations are available on the Relevant Screen Page, the highest (or, if there is more than one such highest quotation, one only of such quotations) and the lowest (or, if there is more than one such lowest quotation, one only of such quotations) shall be disregarded by the Calculation Agent for the purpose of determining the arithmetic mean (rounded as provided above) of such offered quotations; or

 

41


  (b) if the Relevant Screen Page is not available or if, in the case of (i) above, no such offered quotation appears or, in the case of (ii) above, fewer than three such offered quotations appear, in each case as at the time specified in the preceding paragraph, the Calculation Agent shall request the principal Johannesburg office of each of the Reference Banks (as defined below) to provide the Calculation Agent with its offered quotation (expressed as a percentage rate per annum) for the Reference Rate at approximately 11h00 (Johannesburg time) on the Interest Determination Date in question. If two or more of the Reference Banks provide the Calculation Agent with such offered quotations, the Rate of Interest for such Interest Period shall be the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place with 0.000005 being rounded upwards) of such offered quotations plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any), all as determined by the Calculation Agent; or

 

  (c) if the Rate of Interest cannot be determined by applying the provisions of (a) and (b) above, the Rate of Interest for the relevant Interest Period shall be the rate per annum which the Calculation Agent determines as being the arithmetic mean (rounded if necessary to the fifth decimal place, with 0.000005 being rounded upwards) of the rates, as communicated to (and at the request of) the Calculation Agent by the Reference Banks or any two or more of them, at which such banks offered, at approximately 11h00 (Johannesburg time) on the relevant Interest Determination Date, deposits in an amount approximately equal to the Nominal Amount of the Notes of the relevant Series, for a period equal to that which would have been used for the Reference Rate to prime banks in the Johannesburg inter-bank market plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any). If fewer than two of the Reference Banks provide the Calculation Agent with such offered rates, the Rate of Interest for the relevant Interest Period will be determined by the Calculation Agent as the arithmetic mean (rounded as provided above) of the rates for deposits in an amount approximately equal to the Nominal Amount of the Notes of the relevant Series, for a period equal to that which would have been used for the Reference Rate, quoted at approximately 11h00 (Johannesburg time) on the relevant Interest Determination Date, by the Reference Banks plus or minus (as appropriate) the Margin (if any). If the Rate of Interest cannot be determined in accordance with the foregoing provisions of this paragraph, the Rate of Interest shall be determined as at the last preceding Interest Determination Date (though substituting, where a different Margin is to be applied to the relevant Interest Period from that which applied to the last preceding Interest Period, the Margin relating to the relevant Interest Period, in place of the Margin relating to that last preceding Interest Period).

If the Reference Rate from time to time in respect of Floating Rate Notes is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as being other than ZAR-JIBAR-SAFEX, the Rate of Interest in respect of such Notes will be determined as provided in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

7.2.7 Notification of Rate of Interest and Interest Amount

The Issuer will cause the Rate of Interest and each Interest Amount for each Interest Period and the relevant Interest Payment Date to be notified to the JSE and the Central Depository and/or every other relevant exchange or authority as soon as possible after their determination but in any event no later than the fourth Business Day thereafter. Each Interest Amount and Interest Payment Date so notified may subsequently be amended (or appropriate alternative arrangements made by way of adjustment) in the event of an extension or shortening of the Interest Period. Any such amendment will be promptly notified to the JSE, the Central Depository and/or every other relevant exchange or authority and to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 17.

 

42


7.2.8 Certificates to be Final

All certificates, communications, opinions, determinations, calculations, quotations and decisions given, expressed, made or obtained for the purposes of the provisions of this sub-paragraph 7.2, by the Calculation Agent shall (in the absence of wilful deceit, bad faith, manifest error or proven error) be binding on the Issuer and all Noteholders and in the absence as aforesaid no liability to the Issuer or the Noteholders shall attach to the Calculation Agent in connection with the exercise or non-exercise by it of its powers, duties and discretions pursuant to such provisions.

 

7.3 Mixed Rate Notes

The Interest Rate payable from time to time on Mixed Rate Notes shall be the Rate of Interest payable on the form of interest bearing Note (be it a Fixed Rate Note, Floating Rate Note, Indexed Note) specified for each respective period, each as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. During each such applicable period, the Rate of Interest on the Mixed Rate Notes shall be determined and fall due for payment on the basis that such Mixed Rate Notes are Fixed Rate Notes, Floating Rate Notes, Indexed Notes, as the case may be.

 

7.4 Accrual of Interest

Each Note (or in the case of the redemption of part only of a Note, that part only of such Note) will cease to bear interest (if any) from the date of its redemption unless, upon due presentation thereof, payment of principal is improperly withheld or refused. In such event, interest will continue to accrue at the same Rate of Interest until the date on which all amounts due in respect of such Note have actually been paid, or, in respect of Notes evidenced by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form, the date on which the full amount of the moneys payable has been received by the Central Depository and notice to that effect has been given to Noteholders in accordance with the Applicable Procedures and Condition 17.

 

7.5 Business Day Convention

If any Interest Payment Date (or other date) which is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement to be subject to adjustment in accordance with a Business Day Convention would otherwise fall on a day which is not a Business Day, then, if the Business Day Convention specified is:

 

  (a) the “Floating Rate Business Day Convention” , such Interest Payment Date (or other date) shall be postponed to the next day which is a Business Day unless it would thereby fall into the next calendar month, in which event: (i) such Interest Payment Date (or other date) shall be brought forward to the first preceding Business Day and (ii) each subsequent Interest Payment Date (or other date) shall be the last Business Day in the month which falls the number of months or other period specified as the Interest Period in the Applicable Pricing Supplement after the preceding applicable Interest Payment Date (or other date) has occurred; or

 

  (b) the “Following Business Day Convention” , such Interest Payment Date (or other date) shall be postponed to the next day which is a Business Day; or

 

  (c) the “Modified Following Business Day Convention” , such Interest Payment Date (or other date) shall be postponed to the next day which is a Business Day unless it would thereby fall into the next calendar month, in which event such Interest Payment Date (or other such date) shall be brought forward to the first preceding Business Day; or

 

  (d) the “Preceding Business Day Convention” , such Interest Payment Date (or other date) shall be brought forward to the first preceding Business Day.

 

8 PAYMENTS

 

8.1 Registered Notes/Uncertificated Notes

 

8.1.1

Payments of interest on an Individual Certificate shall be made to the registered holder of such Note, as set forth in the Register on the close of business on the Last Day to Register (as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement). In addition to

 

43


 

the above, in the case of a final redemption payment, the holder of the Individual Certificate shall be required, on or before the Last Day to Register prior to the Maturity Date, to surrender such Individual Certificate at the offices of the Transfer Agent.

 

8.1.2 Payments of interest in respect of a Global Certificate or Uncertificated Notes will be made to the Central Depository, or such other registered holder of the Global Certificate or Uncertificated Notes, as shown in the Register on the Last Day to Register and the Issuer will be discharged by proper payment to the registered holder of the Global Certificate or Uncertificated Notes in respect of each amount so paid. Each of the persons shown in the records of the Central Depository and the Participants, as the case may be, shall look solely to the Central Depository or the Participant, as the case may be, for his share of each payment so made by the Issuer to the registered holder of such Global Certificate(s) or Uncertificated Note(s).

 

8.2 Method of Payment

 

8.2.1 Payments will be made by credit or transfer, by means of electronic settlement, to the Noteholder.

 

8.2.2 If the Issuer is prevented or restricted directly or indirectly from making any payment by electronic funds transfer in accordance with the preceding paragraph (whether by reason of strike, lockout, fire, explosion, floods, riot, war, accident, act of God, embargo, legislation, shortage of or breakdown in facilities, civil commotion, unrest or disturbances, cessation of labour, Government interference or control or any other cause or contingency beyond the control of the Issuer), the Issuer shall make such payment by cheque marked “ not transferable ” (or by such number of cheques as may be required in accordance with applicable banking law and practice) to make payment of any such amounts. Such payments by cheque shall be sent by post to the address of the Noteholder of Registered Notes as set forth in the Register or, in the case of joint Noteholders of Registered Notes, the address set forth in the Register of that one of them who is first named in the Register in respect of that Note.

 

8.2.3 Each such cheque shall be made payable to the relevant Noteholder or, in the case of joint Noteholders of Registered Notes, the first one of them named in the Register. Cheques may be posted by ordinary post, provided that neither the Issuer, nor the Paying Agent shall be responsible for any loss in transmission and the postal authorities shall be deemed to be the agent of the Noteholders for the purposes of all cheques posted in terms of this Condition 8.2.

 

8.2.4 In the case of joint Noteholders of Registered Notes payment by electronic funds transfer will be made to the account of the Noteholder first named in the Register. Payment by electronic transfer to the Noteholder first named in the Register shall discharge the Issuer of its relevant payment obligations under the Notes.

 

8.2.5 Payments will be subject in all cases to any fiscal or other laws, directives and regulations applicable thereto in the place of payment, but without prejudice to the provisions of Condition 10.

 

8.2.6 Holders of Uncertificated Notes shall not be required to present and/or surrender any documents of title to the Paying Agent; however; they may be required to present such other documentation as the Participant or Paying Agent (to the extent that the Participant is not the Paying Agent in terms of the Applicable Pricing Supplement) may prescribe under its then prevailing rules.

 

8.3 Payment Day

 

8.3.1 If the date for payment of any amount in respect of any Note is not a Business Day, then:

 

8.3.1.1 if a Business Day Convention is not specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, such date for payment shall be the following Business Day; or

 

8.3.1.2 if a Business Day Convention is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, such date for payment shall be adjusted according to such Business Day Convention.

 

44


8.3.2 In respect of Floating Rate Notes, interest shall accrue to and be paid on the relevant date of payment. In respect of Fixed Rate Notes, the holder of such Note will not be entitled to further interest or other payment in respect of any delayed payment.

 

8.3.3 If the date for payment of any amount in respect of any Notes is not a Business Day and is not subject to any adjustment in accordance with a Business Day Convention, the holder thereof shall not be entitled to any further interest or other payment in respect of such delay.

 

8.4 Interpretation of Principal and Interest

 

8.4.1 Any reference in these Terms and Conditions to principal in respect of the Notes shall be deemed to include, as applicable:

 

8.4.1.1 any additional amounts which may be payable with respect to principal under Condition 10;

 

8.4.1.2 the Final Redemption Amount of the Notes or the Early Redemption Amount of the Notes, as the case may be;

 

8.4.1.3 the Optional Redemption Amount(s) (if any) of the Notes;

 

8.4.1.4 in relation to Instalment Notes, the Instalment Amounts;

 

8.4.1.5 in relation to Zero Coupon Notes, the Amortised Face Amount (as defined in Condition 9.7.2); and

 

8.4.1.6 any premium and any other amounts which may be payable by the Issuer under or in respect of the Notes, but excluding for the avoidance of doubt, interest.

 

8.4.2 Any reference in these Terms and Conditions to interest in respect of the Notes shall be deemed to include, as applicable, any additional amounts which may be payable with respect to interest under Condition 10.

 

9 REDEMPTION AND PURCHASE

 

9.1 At Maturity

Unless previously redeemed or purchased and cancelled as specified below, each Note will be redeemed by the Issuer in the Specified Currency at its Final Redemption Amount specified in, or determined in the manner specified in, the Applicable Pricing Supplement on the Maturity Date.

 

9.2 Redemption for Tax Reasons

Notes may be redeemed at the option of the Issuer, at any time (in the case of Notes other than Floating Rate Notes, Indexed Interest Notes or Mixed Rate Notes having an Rate of Interest then determined on a floating or indexed basis) or on any Interest Payment Date (in the case of Floating Rate Notes, Indexed Interest Notes or Mixed Rate Notes), on giving not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ notice to the Noteholders prior to such redemption, in accordance with Condition 17 (which notice shall be irrevocable), if the Issuer, immediately prior to the giving of such notice, is of the reasonable opinion that:

 

9.2.1 as a result of any change in, or amendment to, the laws or regulations of the Republic of South Africa or any political sub-division of, or any authority in, or of, the Republic of South Africa having power to tax, or any change or amendment which becomes effective after the relevant Issue Date, the Issuer is or would be required to pay additional amounts as provided or referred to in Condition 10; and

 

9.2.2 the requirement cannot be avoided by the Issuer taking reasonable measures available to it, provided that no such notice of redemption shall be given earlier than 90 days prior to the earliest date on which the Issuer would be obliged to pay such additional amounts were a payment in respect of the Notes then due;

 

45


Notes may be redeemed by the Issuer in accordance with this Condition 9.2 in whole or in part:

 

9.2.3 notwithstanding that such partial redemption may not entirely avoid such obligation to pay additional amounts as provided for or referred to in Condition 10; and

 

9.2.4 mutatis mutandis in the manner described in Condition 9.3, provided that the references to the giving of notice therein and to the Minimum Redemption Amount and the Maximum Redemption Amount therein shall be disregarded for such purposes.

Notes redeemed for tax reasons pursuant to this Condition 9.2 will be redeemed at their Early Redemption Amount referred to in Condition 9.7, together (if appropriate) with interest accrued from (and including) the immediately preceding Interest Payment Date to (but excluding) the date of redemption or as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

9.3 Redemption at the Option of the Issuer

 

9.3.1 If the Issuer is specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as having an option to redeem, the Issuer may, having given not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ irrevocable notice to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 17, redeem all or some of the Notes (to which such applicable Pricing Supplement relates) then Outstanding on the Optional Redemption Date(s) and at the Optional Redemption Amount(s) specified in, or determined in the manner specified in, the Applicable Pricing Supplement together, if appropriate, with interest accrued to (but excluding) the Optional Redemption Date(s).

 

9.3.2 If redeemable in part, any such redemption must be of a Nominal Amount equal to the Minimum Redemption Amount or the Maximum Redemption Amount, both as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

9.3.3 In the case of a partial redemption of Notes, the Notes to be redeemed ( “Redeemed Notes” ) will be selected individually by lot, in the case of Redeemed Notes represented by Individual Certificates, and in accordance with the rules of Central Depository, the Settlement Agents and the JSE, in the case of Redeemed Notes represented by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form, and in each case not more than 60 days prior to the date fixed for redemption (such date of selection being hereinafter called the “Selection Date” ).

 

9.3.4 In the case of Redeemed Notes represented by Individual Certificates, a list of the serial numbers of such Redeemed Notes will be published in accordance with Condition 17 not less than 30 days prior to the date fixed for redemption. The aggregate Nominal Amount of Redeemed Notes represented by Individual Certificates shall bear the same proportion to the aggregate Nominal Amount of all Redeemed Notes as the aggregate Nominal Amount of Notes outstanding represented by Individual Certificates bears to the aggregate Nominal Amount of all the Notes outstanding, in each case on the Selection Date, provided that such first mentioned Nominal Amount shall, if necessary, be rounded downwards to the nearest integral multiple of the Specified Denomination and the aggregate Nominal Amount of Redeemed Notes represented by a Global Certificate or held in uncertificated form shall be equal to the balance of the Redeemed Notes. No exchange of the relevant Global Certificate or Uncertificated Notes will be permitted during the period from and including the Selection Date to and including the date fixed for redemption pursuant to this sub-paragraph and notice to that effect shall be given by the Issuer to the Noteholders in accordance with Condition 17 at least 10 days prior to the Selection Date.

 

9.3.5 Holders of Redeemed Notes shall surrender the Individual Certificates, representing the Notes in accordance with the provisions of the notice given to them by the Issuer as contemplated above. Where only a portion of the Notes represented by such Individual Certificates are redeemed, the Transfer Agent shall deliver new Individual Certificates to such Noteholders in respect of the balance of the Notes.

 

46


9.4 Redemption at the Option of the Noteholders

 

9.4.1 If Noteholders are specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as having an option to request the redemption of Notes, such Noteholders may exercise such option in respect of such Notes represented by Individual Certificates by delivering to the Transfer Agent, in accordance with Condition 17, a duly executed notice ( “Put Notice” ), at least 30 days but not more than 60 days, prior to the Optional Redemption Date.

 

9.4.2 For redemption in part, the redemption amount specified in such Put Notice in respect of any such Note must be of a Nominal Amount equal to or greater than the Minimum Redemption Amount or equal to or less than the Maximum Redemption Amount, each as indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

9.4.3 The redemption of Notes represented by a Global Certificate or where the Notes were issued in uncertificated form, shall take place in accordance with the Applicable Procedures.

 

9.4.4 The Issuer shall proceed to redeem the Notes in respect of which such option has been exercised in accordance with the terms of the Applicable Pricing Supplement, at the Optional Redemption Amount and on the Optional Redemption Date, together, if appropriate, with interest accrued to (but excluding) the Optional Redemption Date(s).

 

9.4.5 In the event that the redeeming Noteholder is the holder of an Individual Certificate, then such Noteholder shall (attached to the Put Notice) deliver the Individual Certificate to the Transfer Agent for cancellation. A holder of an Individual Certificate shall in that holder’s Put Notice specify a bank account into which the redemption payment amount is to be paid.

 

9.4.6 The delivery of Put Notices shall be required to take place during normal office hours of the Issuer and Transfer Agent. Put Notices shall be available from the specified offices of the Transfer Agent.

 

9.4.7 Any Put Notice given by a holder of any Note pursuant to this paragraph shall be irrevocable except where after giving the notice but prior to the due date of redemption an Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing in which event such Noteholder, at its option, may elect by notice to the Issuer to withdraw the notice given pursuant to this paragraph and instead to declare such Note forthwith due and payable pursuant to Condition 15.

 

9.4.8 The Issuer shall have no liability to remedy any defects in any Put Notice or bring any such defects to the attention of any Noteholder.

 

9.5 Redemption at the Option of the Noteholders following a Redemption Event

 

9.5.1 A “Redemption Event” shall occur if –

 

9.5.1.1 any Material Group Company ceases to carry on the whole or a substantial part of its business (other than pursuant to a Solvent Reconstruction of such Material Group Company) and such cessation causes a Downgrade to occur within 60 Business Days of such cessation; or

 

9.5.1.2 any Material Group Company disposes of the whole or substantial part of its business or assets (other than pursuant to a Solvent Reconstruction of such Material Group Company) and such disposal causes a Downgrade to occur within 60 Business Days of such disposal; or

 

9.5.1.3 any governmental consent, license, approval or authorisation now or in future necessary to enable a Material Group Company to conduct the whole or a substantial part of its business is not obtained and such failure causes a Downgrade to occur within 60 Business Days of such failure; or

 

9.5.1.4 any governmental consent, license, approval or authorisation now or in future necessary to enable a Material Group Company to conduct the whole or a substantial part of its business is revoked, modified, withdrawn or withheld or ceases to be in full force and effect, and such revocation, modification, withdrawal, withholding or cessation causes a Downgrade to occur with in 60 Business Days of such revocation, modification, withdrawal, withholding or cessation.

 

47


9.5.2 If a Redemption Event occurs, then the Issuer will be obliged to convene a separate meeting of the Noteholders of each Series of Notes, in accordance with Condition 19, within 40 Business Days of the occurrence of the Redemption Event, to consider the possible early redemption of the Notes

 

9.5.3 If at any such meeting, the holders of any Series of Notes pass an Extraordinary Resolution for the early redemption of the Notes of that Series, then the Issuer shall redeem each Note in that Series of Notes within 20 Business Days of the passing of such Extraordinary Resolution at its Early Redemption Amount, together with accrued interest (if any) to the date of redemption.

 

9.6 Redemption at the Option of the Noteholders following a Change of Control Event

 

9.6.1 A “Change of Control Event” shall occur if -

 

9.6.1.1 a Change of Control occurs; and

 

9.6.1.2 within the Change of Control Period, in relation to any solicited rating, on a South African national scale, assigned to the Notes that are rated by a Rating Agency or in relation to any solicited rating, on a South African national scale, assigned to the Issuer by a Rating Agency, a Change of Control Rating Downgrade in relation to such Notes or the Issuer, as the case may be, occurs in respect of that Change of Control.

 

9.6.2 Promptly upon the Issuer becoming aware that a Change of Control Event has occurred, the Issuer shall be obliged to convene a separate meeting of the Noteholders of each Series of Notes, in accordance with Condition 19, within 40 Business Days of the occurrence of the Change of Control Event, to consider the possible early redemption of the Notes.

 

9.6.3 If at any such meeting, the holders of any Series of Notes pass an Extraordinary Resolution for the early redemption of the Notes of that Series, then the Issuer shall redeem each Note in that Series of Notes within 20 Business Days of the passing of such Extraordinary Resolution at its Early Redemption Amount, together with accrued interest (if any) to the date of redemption.

 

9.7 Early Redemption Amounts

For the purpose of the Condition 9.2, 9.5, 9.6 and Condition 15, the Notes will be redeemed at the Early Redemption Amount calculated as follows:

 

9.7.1 in the case of Notes with a Final Redemption Amount equal to the Issue Price, at the Final Redemption Amount thereof; or

 

9.7.2 in the case of Notes (other than Zero Coupon Notes) with a Final Redemption Amount which is or may be less or greater than the Issue Price or which is payable in a Specified Currency other than that in which the Notes are denominated, at the amount specified in, or determined in the manner specified in, the Applicable Pricing Supplement or, if no such amount or manner is so specified in the Pricing Supplement, at their Nominal Amount; or

 

9.7.3 in the case of Zero Coupon Notes, at an amount (the “Amortised Face Amount” ) equal to the sum of: (i) the Reference Price; and (ii) the product of the Implied Yield (compounded annually) being applied to the Reference Price from (and including) the Issue Date to (but excluding) the date fixed for redemption or (as the case may be) the date upon which such Note becomes due and repayable, or such other amount as is provided in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

Where such calculation is to be made for a period which is not a whole number of years, it shall be calculated on the basis of actual days elapsed divided by 365 or such other calculation basis as may be specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

9.8 Instalment Notes

Instalment Notes will be redeemed at the Instalment Amounts and on the Instalment Dates. In the case of early redemption in accordance with Conditions 9.2 or 15, the Early Redemption Amount will be determined pursuant to Condition 9.7.

 

48


9.9 Partly-Paid Notes

If the Notes are Partly-Paid Notes, they will be redeemed, whether at maturity, early redemption or otherwise, in accordance with the provisions of this Condition 9 and the Applicable Pricing Supplement. In the case of early redemption in accordance with Conditions 9.2 or 15, the Early Redemption Amount will be determined pursuant to Condition 9.7.

 

9.10 Exchangeable Notes

If the Notes are Exchangeable Notes, they will be redeemed, whether at maturity, early redemption or otherwise in the manner indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement. Exchangeable Notes in respect of which Mandatory Exchange is indicated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as applying, or upon the exercise by the Noteholder of the Noteholder’s Exchange Right (if applicable), will be redeemed by the Issuer delivering to each Noteholder so many of the Exchange Securities as are required in accordance with the Exchange Price. The delivery by the Issuer of the Exchange Securities in the manner set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement shall constitute the in specie redemption in full of such Notes.

 

9.11 Purchases

The Issuer or any of its Subsidiaries may at any time purchase Notes at any price in the open market or otherwise. Such Notes may, subject to applicable law, be held, resold, or, at the option of the Issuer surrendered to the Transfer Agent for cancellation.

 

9.12 Cancellation

All Notes which have been redeemed will forthwith be cancelled. All Notes so cancelled shall be forwarded to the Issuer and cannot be re-issued or resold. Where only a portion of Notes represented by a Certificate are cancelled, the Transfer Agent shall deliver a Certificate to such Noteholder in respect of the balance of the Notes.

 

9.13 Late Payment on Zero Coupon Notes

If the amount payable in respect of any Zero Coupon Note upon redemption of such Zero Coupon Note pursuant to Condition 9 or upon its becoming due and repayable as provided in Condition 15 is improperly withheld or refused, the amount due and repayable in respect of such Zero Coupon Note shall be the amount calculated as provided in Condition 9.6.2 as though the references therein to the date fixed for the redemption or the date upon which such Zero Coupon Note becomes due and payable were replaced by references to the date which is the earlier of: (i) the date on which all amounts due in respect of such Zero Coupon Note have been paid; and (ii) 5 days after the date on which the full amount of the moneys payable has been received by the Central Depository, and notice to that effect has been given to the Noteholder in accordance with Condition 17.

 

10 TAXATION

As at the date of issue of this Programme Memorandum, all payments of principal or interest in respect of the Notes will be made without withholding or deduction for or on account of any present or future taxes, duties, assessments or governmental charges (“taxes”) of whatever nature imposed or levied by or in or on behalf of the Republic of South Africa or any political subdivision or any authority thereof or therein having power to tax, unless such withholding or deduction is required by law.

In the event of any withholding or deduction in respect of taxes being levied or imposed in the Republic of South Africa on interest or principal payments on Debt Instruments (as defined below), the Issuer will pay such additional amounts as shall be necessary in order that the net amounts received by the Noteholders after such withholding or deduction shall equal the respective amounts of principal and interest which would otherwise have been receivable in respect of the Notes, as the case may be, in the absence of such withholding or deduction except that no such additional amounts shall be payable with respect to any Note:

 

10.1 held by or on behalf of a Noteholder, who is liable for such taxes in respect of such Note by reason of it having some connection with the Republic of South Africa other than the mere holding of such Note or the receipt of principal or interest in respect thereof; or

 

10.2 held by or on behalf of a Noteholder which would not be liable or subject to the withholding or deduction by complying with any statutory requirement or by making a declaration of non-residence or other similar claim for exemption to the relevant tax authority; or

 

49


10.3 where such withholding or deduction is in respect of taxes levied or imposed on interest or principal payments only by virtue of the inclusion of such payments in the Taxable Income or Taxable Gains (each as defined below) of any Noteholder; or

 

10.4 where (in the case of any payment of principal or interest which is conditional on surrender of the relevant Certificate in accordance with these Terms and Conditions) the relevant Certificate is surrendered for payment more than 30 days after the Relevant Date except to the extent that the relevant Noteholder would have been entitled to an additional amount on presenting the Certificate for payment on such thirtieth day; or

 

10.5 if such withholding or deduction arises through the exercise by revenue authorities of special powers in respect of tax defaulters; or

 

10.6 where the Noteholder is entitled to claim a tax reduction, credit or similar benefit in respect of such withholding or deduction in terms of the Noteholder’s domestic tax laws or applicable double tax treaty.

For the purposes of this Condition 10:

Debt Instrument ” means any “instrument” as defined in section 24J(1) of the Income Tax Act;

Taxable Income ” means any “taxable income” as defined in section 1 of the Income Tax Act;

Taxable Gain ” means any “taxable capital gain” as defined in paragraph 1 of Schedule 8 to the Income Tax Act; and

Income Tax Act ” means the Income Tax Act, 1962.

 

11 CERTIFICATES

 

11.1 Listed Registered Notes will initially be evidenced by a single Global Certificate which will be lodged with the Central Depository or may be issued in the form of an Uncertificated Note. The Central Depository’s nominee will be reflected in the Register as the holder of the Global Certificate or Uncertificated Note. The issue of a Global Certificate may be replaced by the issue of Uncertificated Notes in terms of Section 37 of the Securities Services Act.

 

11.2 A Beneficial Interest in Notes will be exchangeable for an Individual Certificate if (i) a written request for Notes in definitive form is submitted by the holder of the Beneficial Interest to the relevant Participant not later than 14 days prior to the requested date of such exchange, (ii) the Applicable Procedures for obtaining such a Certificate from the Transfer Agent are followed, and (iii) an equivalent number of Notes are transferred in accordance with the provisions of Condition 13 from the Central Depository or its nominee to the holder of such Beneficial Interest. If only part of the Notes represented by a Global Certificate are exchanged, a new Global Certificate for the balance will be issued and the cancelled Global Certificate will be retained by the Transfer Agent.

 

11.3 A Noteholder shall be entitled to receive a Certificate evidencing the Notes transferred to that Noteholder within 7 days after registration of that transfer in accordance with Condition 13 (and which will apply mutatis mutandis to such Certificate), provided that joint Noteholders will be entitled to receive only one Certificate in respect of that joint holding, and the delivery to one of those Noteholders shall be delivery to all of them.

 

11.4 A Noteholder shall be entitled to receive a Certificate in respect of a Registered Note which is not listed within 7 days of becoming entitled thereto, provided that joint Noteholders will be entitled to receive only one Certificate in respect of that joint holding, and the delivery to one of those Noteholders shall be delivery to all of them.

 

11.5 If a Certificate is worn out or defaced then, within 14 days of its presentation to the Transfer Agent, the Transfer Agent shall cancel that Certificate and issue a new Certificate in its place.

 

50


11.6 If a Certificate is lost or destroyed then upon proof thereof to the satisfaction of the Transfer Agent, a new Certificate in lieu thereof may be issued to the person entitled to that lost or destroyed Certificate provided that the Noteholder shall provide the Transfer Agent and the Issuer with an indemnity and pay any out-of-pocket expenses incurred in connection with the indemnity. The person providing the indemnity and the form of the indemnity shall be to the satisfaction of the Issuer. The new Certificate shall be issued within 14 days from the date that the conditions for issuing such Certificate have been fulfilled.

 

11.7 An entry as to the issue of a new Certificate and indemnity (if any) shall be made in the Register (in respect of Registered Notes) upon the date of issue of the new Certificate.

 

11.8 Certificates to be provided by the Issuer to Noteholders shall be collected by the Noteholders from the Transfer Agent.

 

11.9 Certificates shall be provided where relevant by the Issuer without charge, save as otherwise provided in these Terms and Conditions. Separate costs and expenses relating to the provision of Certificates and/or the transfer of Notes may be levied by other persons, such as a Settlement Agent, under the Applicable Procedures and such costs and expenses shall not be borne by the Issuer. The costs and expenses of delivery of Certificates otherwise than by ordinary post (if any) and, if the Issuer shall so require, taxes or governmental charges or insurance charges that may be imposed in relation to such mode of delivery shall be borne by the Noteholder.

 

12 REGISTER

 

12.1 The Register of Noteholders:

 

12.1.1 shall be kept at the office of the Transfer Agent or such other person as may be appointed for the time being by the Issuer to maintain the Register;

 

12.1.2 shall contain the names, addresses and bank account numbers of the registered Noteholders;

 

12.1.3 shall show the total Nominal Amount of the Notes held by Noteholders;

 

12.1.4 shall show the dates upon which each of the Noteholders was registered as such;

 

12.1.5 shall show the serial numbers of the Certificates and the dates of issue thereof;

 

12.1.6 shall be open for inspection at all reasonable times during business hours on Business Days by any Noteholder or any person authorised in writing by a Noteholder;

 

12.1.7 shall be closed during the Books Closed Period.

 

12.2 The Transfer Agent shall alter the Register in respect of any change of name, address or account number of any of the Noteholders of which it is notified.

 

12.3 Except as provided for in these Terms and Conditions or as required by law, in respect of Registered Notes, the Issuer will only recognise a Noteholder as the owner of the Notes registered in that Noteholder’s name as per the Register.

 

12.4 Except as provided for in these Terms and Conditions or as required by law, the Issuer shall not be bound to enter any trust in the Register or to take notice of or to accede to the execution of any trust (express, implied or constructive) to which any Certificate may be subject.

 

13 TRANSFER OF NOTES

 

13.1 Registered Notes

Beneficial Interests in Notes registered in the name of the Central Depository or its nominee may be transferred in accordance with the Applicable Procedures. Such transfers will not be recorded in the Register. In order for any transfer of Registered Notes to be effected through the Register and for the transfer to be recognised by the Issuer, each transfer of a Registered Note:

 

13.1.1 must be in writing and in the usual form or in such other form approved by the Transfer Agent;

 

13.1.2 must be signed by the relevant Noteholder and the transferee, or any authorised representatives of that registered Noteholder or transferee;

 

51


13.1.3 shall only be in respect of the Specified Denomination of the Note or integral multiples thereof, and consequently the Issuer will not recognise any fraction of the Specified Denomination;

 

13.1.4 must be delivered to the Transfer Agent together with the Certificate in question for cancellation (if only part of the Notes represented by a Certificate is transferred, a new Certificate for the balance will be issued to the transferor and the cancelled Certificate will be retained by the Transfer Agent).

The transferor of any Notes represented by a Certificate will be deemed to remain the owner thereof until the transferee is registered in the Register as the holder thereof.

Before any transfer is registered all relevant transfer taxes (if any) must have been paid and such evidence must be furnished as the Transfer Agent reasonably requires as to the identity and title of the transferor and the transferee.

No transfer will be registered whilst the Register is closed.

If a transfer is registered then the transfer form and cancelled Certificate will be retained by the Transfer Agent.

In the event of a partial redemption of Notes under Condition 9.3, the Transfer Agent shall not be required, in terms of Condition 9.3, to register the transfer of any Notes during the period beginning on the tenth day before the date of the partial redemption and ending on the date of the partial redemption (both inclusive).

 

14 PRESCRIPTION

The Notes will become void unless presented for payment of principal within a period of three years after the Relevant Date, save that claims against the Issuer under any Certificate constituting a “ bill of exchange or other negotiable instrument ” in accordance with section 11 of the Prescription Act, 1969 will prescribe within a period of six years after the Relevant Date.

 

15 EVENTS OF DEFAULT

An Event of Default shall occur if:

 

15.1 Non Payment

The Issuer fails to pay the Nominal Amount or any interest due in respect of the Notes on its due date for payment and such failure continues for a period of 5 (five) Business Days after receiving written notice from any Noteholder demanding such payment; or

 

15.2 Other Obligations

The Issuer or any Guarantor fails to perform or observe any of its other obligations under any of the Terms and Conditions or the Guarantee, as the case may be, and such failure continues for a period of 30 (thirty) calendar days after receipt by the Issuer or any Guarantor of a notice from any Noteholder in respect of such failure (and for these purposes, a failure to perform or observe an obligation shall be deemed to be remediable notwithstanding that the failure results from not doing an act or thing by a particular time); or

 

15.3 Negative Pledge

Any Material Group Company fails to remedy a breach of Condition 6 by any of them and such failure continues for a period of 7 (seven) Business Days after receipt by the Issuer (in respect of a breach by itself or by any other Material Group Company) or by a Guarantor (in respect of a breach by such Guarantor) of written notice from any Noteholder requiring same to be remedied; or

 

15.4 Cross Default

 

  a) Any Indebtedness of any Material Group Company is not paid when due and payable, or where there is an applicable grace period, on the expiry of such grace period; or

 

  b) Any Indebtedness of any Material Group Company is declared to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described); or

 

52


  c) Any commitment for any Indebtedness of any Material Group Company is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of any Material Group Company as a result of an event of default (however described); or

 

  d) Enforcement of any Encumbrance over any assets of any Material Group Company,

provided that in each case no event shall constitute an Event of Default unless the aggregate amount of Indebtedness or commitment for Indebtedness falling within paragraphs (a) to (d) above, exceeds $20,000,000 (twenty million United States dollars) (or its equivalent in any other currency); or

 

15.5 Insolvency

 

  a) Any Material Group Company is unable or admits inability to pay its debts as they fall due, suspends making payments on any of its debts or, by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, commences negotiations with one or more of its classes of creditors with a view to rescheduling any of its Indebtedness which, in the case of a Material Group Company, could reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of the Issuer and its subsidiaries taken as a whole, to meet its payment obligations under the Notes; or

 

  b) The value of the assets of any Material Group Company is less than its liabilities (taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities) which in the case of a Material Group Company could reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of the Issuer and its subsidiaries taken as a whole, to meet its payment obligations under the Notes; or

 

  c) A moratorium is declared in respect of any Indebtedness of any Material Group Company; or

 

15.6 Insolvency Proceedings

Any corporate action, legal proceedings or other similar procedure or step is taken in relation to:

 

  a) the suspension of payments, winding-up, dissolution, administration or reorganisation (by way of voluntary arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of any Material Group Company; or

 

  b) a composition, compromise, assignment or arrangement with any creditor or class of creditors of any Material Group Company; or

 

  c) the appointment of a liquidator, receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, judicial manager, compulsory manager or other similar officer in respect of any Material Group Company or any of its assets,

any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction (in each case otherwise than in respect of a Solvent Reconstruction or for purposes of a reorganisation approved by a Extraordinary Resolution of the Noteholders) and any such procedure or proceedings are not contested in good faith nor discharged within 30 (thirty) days (or such shorter period provided for contesting such procedure or proceedings under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction); or

 

15.7 Governmental Intervention

By or under the authority of any government:

 

  a) the management of any Material Group Company is wholly or partially displaced or the authority of any Material Group Company in the conduct of its business is wholly or partially taken over; or

 

  b) all or a majority of the issued shares of any Material Group Company or material part of its revenues or assets is seized, nationalised, expropriated or compulsorily acquired; or

 

53


15.8 Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for the Issuer or a Guarantor to perform any of its obligations under the Programme Memorandum or the Guarantee, as the case may be, or such obligations cease to be legal, valid, binding or enforceable obligations; or

 

15.9 Failure to comply with final judgment

Any Material Group Company fails within 5 (five) Business Days of the due date to comply with or pay any sum due from it under any material final judgement or any final order made or given by any court of competent jurisdiction. For the purposes of this Condition 15.9, a “ material final judgement ” shall be any judgement for the payment of a sum of money in excess of $20,000,000 (twenty million United States dollars).

If the Issuer becomes aware of the occurrence of any Event of Default, the Issuer shall forthwith notify all Noteholders, all Guarantors and the JSE in writing.

If any one or more of the Events of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, then any Noteholder may, by written notice to the Issuer at the registered office of the Issuer, effective upon the date of receipt thereof by the Issuer, declare the Note held by the holder to be forthwith due and payable whereupon the same shall become forthwith due and payable at the Early Redemption Amount (as described in Condition 9.7), together with accrued interest (if any) to the date of repayment, or as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement, provided that no such action may be taken by a holder of Notes if the Issuer, or any Guarantor, as the case may be, withholds or refuses to make any such payment in order to comply with any law or regulation of the Republic of South Africa or to comply with any order of a court of competent jurisdiction. For the purpose of this Condition 15, any indebtedness which is in a currency other than South African Rand shall be translated into South African Rand at the spot rate for the sale of South African Rand against the purchase of the relevant currency quoted by the Calculation Agent on the date of such Event of Default.

 

16 CALCULATION AGENT AND OTHER AGENTS

Any third party appointed by the Issuer as Calculation Agent, Transfer Agent or otherwise shall act solely as the agents of the Issuer and does not assume any obligation towards or relationship of agency or trust for or with any Noteholders. The Issuer is entitled to vary or terminate the appointment of such agents and/or appoint additional or other agents and/or approve any additional or other agents.

 

17 NOTICES

 

17.1 Notices to holders of Registered Notes shall be valid if mailed to their registered addresses appearing in the Register. Any such notice shall be deemed to have been given on the seventh day after the day on which it is mailed.

 

17.2 In the event of there being any Individual Certificates in issue, such notices shall be published, not earlier than four days after the date of posting of such notice in terms of this clause (i) in an English language daily newspaper of general circulation in the Republic of South Africa and (ii) and for so long as the Notes are listed on the bond market of the JSE or such other Financial Exchange upon which the Notes are listed, a daily newspaper of general circulation in the city in which the JSE or such other Financial Exchange is situated, and any such notices shall be deemed to have been given on the date of first publication.

 

17.3 If any notice is given to holders of Notes represented by a Global Certificate, a copy thereof shall be delivered to the JSE, the Central Depository and the Settlement Agents.

 

17.4 Any notice to the Issuer shall be deemed to have been received by the Issuer, if delivered to the registered office of the Issuer, on the date of delivery, and if sent by registered mail, on the seventh day after the day on which it is sent, together with a certified copy of the relevant Certificate. The Issuer may change its registered office upon prior written notice to Noteholders specifying such new registered office.

 

17.5 For so long as any of the Notes are represented by a Global Certificate, notice may be given by any holder of a Beneficial Interest in Notes represented by a Global Certificate to the Issuer via the relevant Settlement Agent in accordance with the Applicable Procedures, in such manner as the Issuer and the relevant Settlement Agent may approve for this purpose.

 

54


18 AMENDMENT OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS

 

18.1 These Terms and Conditions set out all the rights and obligations relating to the Notes and, subject to the further provisions of this Condition 18, no addition, variation or consensual cancellation of these Terms and Conditions shall be of any force or effect unless reduced to writing and signed by or on behalf of the Issuer and the Noteholders.

 

18.2 No modification of these Terms and Conditions may be effected without the written agreement of the Issuer. The Issuer may effect, without the consent of the relevant Noteholders, any modification of the Terms and Conditions which is of a formal, minor or technical nature or is made to correct a manifest error or to comply with mandatory provisions of the law of the jurisdiction in which the Issuer is incorporated, provided that the consent of the JSE shall be required where such Notes are listed. Any such modification shall be binding on the relevant Noteholders and any such modification shall be notified to the relevant Noteholders in accordance with Condition 17 as soon as practicable thereafter.

 

18.3

The Issuer may, with the prior sanction of an Extraordinary Resolution of Noteholders or with the prior written consent of Noteholders holding not less than 66  2 / 3 % (sixty six and two thirds per cent.) in Nominal Amount of the Notes outstanding from time to time, amend these Terms and Conditions, provided that no such amendment shall be of any force or effect unless notice of the intention to make such amendment shall have been given to all Noteholders in terms of Condition 17.

 

19 MEETINGS OF NOTEHOLDERS

 

19.1 The Issuer may at any time convene a meeting of all Noteholders or holders of any Series of Notes upon at least 21 days’ prior written notice to such Noteholders. This notice is required to be given in terms of Condition 17. Such notice shall specify the date, place and time of the meeting to be held, which place shall be in the Republic of South Africa.

 

19.2 Every director or duly appointed representative of the Issuer may attend and speak at a meeting of Noteholders, but shall not be entitled to vote, other than as a proxy or representative of a Noteholder.

 

19.3 Noteholders holding not less than 10% (ten per cent) in Nominal Amount of the outstanding Notes or Series of Notes, as the case may be, shall be able to request the Issuer to convene a meeting of Noteholders. Should the Issuer fail to requisition such a meeting within 10 days of such a request being received by the Issuer, the Noteholders requesting such a meeting may convene such meeting.

 

19.4 A Noteholder may by an instrument in writing (a “ form of proxy ”) signed by the holder or, in the case of a corporation, executed under its common seal or signed on its behalf by an attorney or a duly authorised officer of the corporation, appoint any person (a “ proxy ”) to act on his or its behalf in connection with any meeting or proposed meeting of the Noteholders.

 

19.5 Any Noteholder which is a corporation may by resolution of its directors or other governing body authorise any person to act as its representative (a “representative”) in connection with any meeting or proposed meeting of the Noteholders.

 

19.6 Any proxy or representative appointed shall, so long as the appointment remains in force, be deemed for all purposes in connection with any meeting or proposed meeting of the Noteholder specified in the appointment, to be the holder of the Notes to which the appointment relates and the holder of the notes shall be deemed for such purposes not to be the holder.

 

19.7 The chairman of the meeting shall be appointed by the Issuer. The procedures to be followed at the meeting shall be as determined by the chairman subject to the remaining provisions of this Condition 19. Should the Noteholder requisition a meeting, and the Issuer fail to call such a meeting within 10 days of the requisition, then the chairman of the meeting held at the instance of the Noteholders shall be selected by a majority of Noteholders present in person, by representative or by proxy.

 

55


19.8 At any such meeting one or more Noteholders present in person, by representative or by proxy, holding in aggregate not less than one third of the Nominal Amount of Notes for the time being outstanding shall form a quorum for the transaction of business. On a poll, each Noteholder present in person or by proxy at the meeting shall have the number of votes equal to the number of Notes, by denomination, held by the Noteholder.

 

19.9 If within half an hour (or such longer period as those present may agree) after the time appointed for such meeting, the said quorum as referred to in 19.7 above is not present, the meeting will stand adjourned to the same day of the next week (or if that day is not a business day, the following business day) at the same time and place. Written notice of such adjourned meeting (incorporating an agenda) shall be given to all Noteholders not less than 72 (seventy two) hours before such adjourned meeting is to be held.

 

19.10 At such adjourned meeting, provided that one or more Noteholders in person, by representative or by proxy are present, such Noteholders shall form the quorum for the transaction of business.

 

20 FURTHER ISSUES

The Issuer shall be at liberty from time to time without the consent of the Noteholders to create and issue further Notes having terms and conditions the same as any of the other Notes issued under the Programme or the same in all respects save for the amount and date of the first payment of interest thereon, the Issue Price and the Issue Date, so that the further Notes shall be consolidated to form a single Series with the Outstanding Notes.

 

21 GOVERNING LAW

The Notes and all rights and obligations to the Notes are governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, the laws of the Republic of South Africa in force from time to time.

 

22 INTERPRETATION

In these Terms and Conditions, unless inconsistent with the context, any reference to:

 

22.1 one gender includes a reference to the others;

 

22.2 the singular includes the plural and vice versa;

 

22.3 natural persons include juristic persons and vice versa;

 

22.4 any agreement or instrument is a reference to that agreement or instrument as amended, supplemented, varied, novated, restated or replaced from time to time, and amended or amendment will be construed accordingly;

 

22.5 a provision of law is a reference to that provision as amended or re-enacted, and includes any subordinate legislation;

 

22.6 any person includes that person’s permitted successor, transferee, assignee, cessionary and/or delegate.

 

23 GUARANTEE

 

23.1 The Issuer has procured that the payment obligations of the Issuer under the Notes are jointly and severally, unconditionally and irrevocably, guaranteed by each Guarantor on the terms and conditions as contained in the Guarantee, as described in the section of the Programme Memorandum headed “ The Guarantee ”.

 

23.2 A Guarantor that ceases to be a Material Subsidiary of the Issuer shall cease to be a Guarantor, provided that no amount is then due under the Guarantee .The Issuer shall notify the Noteholders in writing of such cessation in accordance with Condition 17.

 

56


SIGNED at Sandton this 6th day of April 2009.

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(AS ISSUER)

 

/s/ Nicholas John Holland

   

/s/ Gayle Margaret Wilson

Signature:     Signature:

Nicholas John Holland

   

Gayle Margaret Wilson

Name:     Name:

Director

   

Director

Designation:     Designation:

Address: 150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton

Tel:         +2711 562 9700

   

 

57


 

USE OF PROCEEDS

 

 

The proceeds from each issue of Notes will be applied by the Issuer as specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

58


 

RISK FACTORS

 

 

In addition to the other information included in this Programme Memorandum, the considerations listed below could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, financial condition or results of operations The risks set forth below comprise all material risks currently known to Gold Fields. However, there may be additional risks that Gold Fields does not currently know of or that Gold Fields currently deems immaterial based on the information available to it. These factors should be considered carefully, together with the information and financial data set forth in this document and the Document Incorporated by Reference.

The Risk Factors and other information and financial data may change from time to time. It is recommended that this Programme Memorandum should be read in conjunction with the Documents Incorporated by Reference especially those issued by Gold Fields subsequent to the issue of this Programme Memorandum.

 

   

Changes in the market price for gold, and to a lesser extent copper, which in the past have fluctuated widely, affect the profitability of Gold Fields’ operations and the cash flows generated by those operations.

 

   

Because Gold Fields does not use commodity or derivative instruments to protect against low gold prices with respect to its production, Gold Fields is exposed to the impact of any significant decline in the gold price. Gold Fields’ reserves are estimates based on a number of assumptions, any changes to which may require Gold Fields to lower its estimated reserves.

 

   

To the extent that Gold Fields seeks to expand through acquisitions, it may experience problems in executing acquisitions or managing and integrating the acquisitions with its existing operations.

 

   

To the extent that Gold Fields seeks to expand through its exploration programme, it may experience problems associated with mineral exploration or developing mining projects.

 

   

Due to the nature of mining and the type of gold mines it operates, Gold Fields faces a material risk of liability, delays and increased production costs from environmental and industrial accidents and pollution.

 

   

If Gold Fields experiences further losses of senior management or is unable to hire and retain sufficient technically skilled employees, its business may be materially and adversely affected.

 

   

Because gold is generally sold in U.S. dollars, while most of Gold Fields’ production costs are in Rand and other non-U.S. dollar currencies, Gold Fields’ operating results or financial condition could be materially harmed by an appreciation in the value of these other currencies.

 

   

Economic or political instability in the countries or regions where Gold Fields’ operates may have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.

 

   

Some of Gold Fields’ power suppliers have forced it to halt or curtail activities at its mines, due to severe power disruptions. Power stoppages, fluctuations and power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations and its financial condition.

 

   

Actual and potential shortages of production inputs may have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.

 

   

The transportation of concentrate produced at Cerro Corona by truck and ship can be interrupted, or result in environmental damage.

 

   

Gold Fields’ insurance coverage may prove inadequate to satisfy potential claims.

 

   

Gold Fields’ financial flexibility could be materially constrained by South African exchange control regulations.

 

   

Gold Fields’ operations and financial condition may be adversely affected by labor disputes or changes in labor laws.

 

   

Gold Fields may suffer adverse consequences as a result of its reliance on outside contractors to conduct some of its operations.

 

59


   

Gold Fields’ South African operations may be adversely affected by increased labor costs or industrial action at its mining operations in South Africa.

 

   

HIV/AIDS poses risks to Gold Fields in terms of lost productivity and increased costs.

 

   

Gold Fields’ operations in South Africa are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.

 

   

Gold Fields’ mineral rights in South Africa have become subject to new legislation which could impose significant costs and burdens.

 

   

Gold Fields’ land and mineral rights in South Africa could be subject to land restitution claims which could impose significant costs and burdens.

 

   

Illegal mining occurs on Gold Fields’ properties in Ghana, is difficult to control, can disrupt Gold Fields’ business and can expose Gold Fields to liability. Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana are subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens. Gold Fields’ mineral rights in Ghana are currently subject to regulations, and may become subject to new regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens.

 

   

Gold Fields’ operations in Australia are subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens. Gold Fields’ tenements in Australia are subject to native title claims and include Aboriginal heritage sites which could impose significant costs and burdens.

 

   

Gold Fields mineral rights in Peru are currently subject to regulations, and may become subject to new regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens. Gold Fields’ operations in Peru are subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations which could impose significant costs and burdens.

 

   

The acquisition of Western Areas, BGSA and South Deep may expose Gold Fields to unknown liabilities and risks.

 

   

Gold Fields has not independently confirmed the reliability of the South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas information for the period prior to their respective acquisitions by Gold Fields included in its annual report publications to date.

 

60


 

DESCRIPTION OF GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

 

Introduction

Gold Fields is a significant producer of gold and major holder of gold reserves in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. Gold Fields is primarily involved in underground and surface gold mining and related activities, including exploration, extraction, processing and smelting. Gold Fields also has an interest in a platinum group metal exploration project. Gold Fields is one of the largest gold producers in the world, based on annual production.

The majority of Gold Fields’ operations, based on gold production, are located in South Africa. In addition, Gold Fields has gold and other precious metal exploration activities and interests in Africa, Eurasia, Australasia, and the Americas.

As of 30 June 2009, Gold Fields had attributable gold Resources (excluding platinum and copper equivalents) of approximately 255.4 million (30 June 2008: 234.5 million) ounces and Proven and Probable Reserves of approximately 78.9 million (30 June 2008: 80.5 million) ounces, net of 4.1 and 3.8 million ounces depletion from the Resource and Reserve respectively.

In the year ended 30 June 2009, Gold Fields processed 52.9 million tons of ore and produced 3.691 million ounces of gold, of which 3.414 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields.

Organizational Structure

Gold Fields is a holding company with its significant ownership interests organized as set forth below.

 

61


Group Structure (1)

LOGO

 

(1) Unless otherwise stated, all subsidiaries are, directly or indirectly, wholly-owned by Gold Fields Limited.

Constitution of the Board

The Articles of Association of Gold Fields provide that the Board must consist of no less than four and no more than 15 directors at any time. The Board currently consists of 1 executive director and 12 non-executive directors, the majority of whom are independent.

 

62


Executive Directors

Nicholas J. Holland BComm, BAcc, Witwatersrand; CA (SA). Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer. Mr. Holland has been an Executive Director of Gold Fields since April 14, 1998 and became Chief Executive Officer on May 1, 2008. He served as Executive Director of Finance from April 1998. On April 15, 2002, his title changed to Chief Financial Officer. Mr. Holland has 28 years’ experience in financial management. Prior to joining Gold Fields he was Financial Director and Senior Manager of Corporate Finance of Gencor Limited.

Non-executive Directors

 

 

Alan J. Wright CA (SA). Chairman of the Board of Directors.

 

 

Kofi Ansah

 

 

Cheryl A. Carolus

 

 

Roberto Dañino

 

 

Alan R. Hill

 

 

John G. Hopwood

 

 

Richard P. Menell

 

 

David N. Murray

 

 

Donald M.J. Ncube

 

 

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

 

 

Chris I. von Christierson

 

 

Gayle M. Wilson

Executive Officers

 

 

Nicholas J. Holland (Chairman)

 

 

Glenn R. Baldwin

 

 

Italia Boninelli

 

 

James W. D. Dowsley

 

 

Michael D. Fleischer

 

 

Jan W. Jacobsz

 

 

Juan L. Kruger

 

 

Tommy D. McKeith

 

 

Vishnu P. Pillay

 

 

Paul A. Schmidt

 

 

Peter L. Turner

 

 

Ben Zikmundovsky

 

 

Cain Farrel (Company Secretary)

Board of Directors’ Committees

In order to ensure good corporate governance, the Board has formed an Audit Committee, a Remuneration Committee, a Nominating and Governance Committee and a Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee. All the committees are comprised exclusively of non-executive Directors. All committees are chaired by an independent non-executive director.

Membership of the Audit Committee is as follows:

 

 

John G. Hopwood (chairman)

 

 

Richard P. Menell

 

63


 

Donald M.J. Ncube

 

 

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

 

 

Gayle M. Wilson

Membership of the Remuneration Committee is as follows:

 

 

Chris I. von Christierson (chairman)

 

 

John G. Hopwood

 

 

Donald M. J. Ncube

 

 

Gayle M. Wilson

 

 

Alan J. Wright

Membership of the Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee is as follows:

 

 

David N. Murray (chairman)

 

 

Kofi Ansah

 

 

Cheryl A. Carolus

 

 

Richard P. Menell

 

 

Alan J. Wright

Membership of the Nominating and Governance Committee is as follows:

 

 

Alan J. Wright (chairman)

 

 

Kofi Ansah

 

 

Roberto Dañino

 

 

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

 

 

Chris von Christierson

Membership of the Capital Projects Control and Review Committee is as follows:

 

 

Richard P. Menell (Chairman)

 

 

Alan R. Hill

 

 

David N. Murray

 

 

Chris I. von Christierson

 

 

Gayle M. Wilson

Company Secretary

Cain Farrel (58), FCIS, MBA, Southern Cross University, Australia. Mr. Farrel was appointed Company Secretary on May 1, 2003. Mr. Farrel is past President and a Director of the Southern African Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators. Previously, Mr. Farrel served as Senior Divisional Secretary of AngloAmerican Corporation of South Africa.

 

64


 

THE GUARANTEE

 

 

GUARANTEE

BY

THE GUARANTORS

IN FAVOUR OF

THE NOTEHOLDERS IN TERMS OF THE ZAR10,000,000,000 GOLD FIELDS LIMITED DOMESTIC MEDIUM TERM NOTE PROGRAMME

 

1. Interpretation

The terms defined in the pro forma terms and conditions of the Notes to be issued by Gold Fields Limited, in terms of the ZAR10,000,000,000 Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme, as set out in the Programme Memorandum of Gold Fields Limited dated 6 October 2009 (as revised, supplemented, amended, updated or replaced from time to time) shall, except where the context otherwise requires and save where otherwise defined or provided for in this Guarantee, have the same meanings in this Guarantee and shall form part of this Guarantee.

 

2. Stipulation

 

2.1 With effect from the date of signature of this Guarantee, this Guarantee constitutes a stipulation in favour of each of the Noteholders and shall be deemed to have been accepted by each of them and to constitute a binding agreement with each of them (notwithstanding that the Noteholders shall not have executed this document) upon the issue or transfer of the Notes to such Noteholders, as the case may be.

 

2.2 On the date of signature of this Guarantee, the Guarantors shall deliver the original signed Guarantee to Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited, which has, in accordance with the undertaking annexed to this Guarantee as Schedule 1 , undertaken to hold such original Guarantee on behalf of the Noteholders and to make certified copies of this Guarantee available to the Noteholders upon written request by the Noteholders, in accordance with such undertaking.

 

3. Guarantee

 

3.1 Each Guarantor, jointly and severally, irrevocably and unconditionally:

 

3.1.1 guarantees to each Noteholder the punctual performance by the Issuer of all its payment obligations under the Notes in accordance with the Terms and Conditions; and

 

3.1.2 undertakes with each Noteholder that, whenever the Issuer does not pay any amount when due under or in connection with any Note in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, that Guarantor shall immediately on demand by the relevant Noteholder pay that amount as if it were the principal obligor in respect of that amount.

 

3.2 Each Guarantor’s obligations in respect of the Notes constitute direct, unconditional, unsecured and unsubordinated obligations of that Guarantor and will rank pari passu among themselves and (subject to any obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation) at least equally with all other unsecured, unsubordinated obligations of that Guarantor, if any, from time to time outstanding.

 

4. Continuing guarantee

This Guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of all sums payable by the Issuer under the Notes in accordance with the Terms and Conditions, regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part.

 

65


5. Reinstatement

If any payment by the Issuer or any discharge given by the Noteholders (whether in respect of the obligations of the Issuer or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is avoided or reduced as a result of insolvency or any similar event:

 

5.1 the liability of each Guarantor under this Guarantee will continue as if that payment discharge, avoidance or reduction had not occurred; and

 

5.2 the Noteholders will be entitled to recover the value or amount of that security or payment from each Guarantor as if that payment, discharge, avoidance or reduction had not occurred,

 

6. Waiver of defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this Guarantee will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this provision, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Guarantee (whether or not known to it or any Noteholder), including:

 

6.1 any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, the Issuer or other person;

 

6.2 the release of any person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of the Group;

 

6.3 the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any person;

 

6.4 any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

6.5 any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of the Issuer or other person;

 

6.6 any amendment (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) of the Terms and Conditions or any other document or security;

 

6.7 any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under the Notes or any other document or security; and/or

 

6.8 any insolvency or similar proceedings.

 

7. Immediate recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Noteholder (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) to proceed against or enforce any other right or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this Guarantee. This waiver applies irrespective of any law or any provision of the Terms and Conditions to the contrary.

 

8. Appropriations

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Issuer under or in connection with the Notes have been irrevocably paid in full, each Noteholder (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) may :

 

8.1 refrain from applying or enforcing any other moneys, security or rights held or received by that Noteholder (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) in respect of those amounts; or

 

8.2 apply and enforce any of those moneys, security or rights in such manner and order as it sees fit (whether against amounts payable under the Notes or otherwise); and

 

8.3 hold in an interest-bearing suspense account any moneys received from any Guarantor or on account of that Guarantor’s liability under this Guarantee.

 

9. Deferral of rights

Unless all amounts which may be or become payable by the Issuer under or in connection with the Notes have been irrevocably paid in full, or the relevant Noteholder otherwise directs, no Guarantor will exercise any rights which it may have by reason of performance by it of its obligations under this Guarantee:

 

9.1 to be indemnified by the Issuer;

 

66


9.2 to be subrogated to any rights, security or moneys held, received or receivable by any Noteholder (or any trustee or agent on its behalf); or

 

9.3 to claim any contribution from any other Guarantor.

 

10. Additional rights

This Guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other guarantee or security now or subsequently held by any Noteholder.

 

11. Negative Pledge

After the date of the Programme Memorandum and for so long as any of the Notes remain Outstanding, no Guarantor will create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance, other than Permitted Encumbrances over any of its assets, present or future, to secure any present or future Indebtedness of the Issuer, the Guarantor or other Material Group Company unless, at the same time, or prior thereto, all the Guarantors’ obligations under this Guarantee, either:

 

11.1 are secured equally and rateably therewith and any such instrument shall expressly provide therefor; or

 

11.2 have the benefit of such other security, guarantee, indemnity or other arrangement as shall be approved by an Extraordinary Resolution of the Noteholders.

 

12. Amendment

No amendment to this Guarantee may be effected unless in writing and signed by or on behalf of all the Guarantors and approved by an Extraordinary Resolution of the Noteholders.

 

13. Addresses and notices

 

13.1 For the purposes of this Guarantee all notices to Noteholders shall be given in the manner contemplated in Condition 17 of the Terms and Conditions and the provisions of Condition 17 shall apply mutatis mutandis to the giving of such notice.

 

13.2 Each Guarantor chooses the address to which notices may be given and at which documents in legal proceedings may be served (their domicilia citandi et executandi ) in connection with this Guarantee, that identified with its name in the execution pages to this Guarantee.

 

13.3 Any Guarantor may change its address chosen for the purposes of this clause to another address in the Republic of South Africa by giving 5 Business Days’ notice to the Noteholders.

 

13.4 Any notice given to a Guarantor in connection with this Guarantee must be:

 

13.4.1 delivered in person; or

 

13.4.2 sent by prepaid registered post or by fax;

 

13.4.3 to the address chosen by that Guarantor.

 

13.5 This clause will not operate so as to invalidate the giving or receipt of any notice which is actually received by the addressee other than by a method referred to above.

 

14. Governing Law

This Guarantee is governed by the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

15. Cessation of a Guarantor

With effect from the date that a Guarantor ceases to be a Material Subsidiary of the Issuer, such Guarantor shall automatically cease to be a Guarantor under this Guarantee, provided that no amount is then due under the Guarantee. Such termination shall not affect any accrued rights and/or obligations of the Guarantor at the date of such termination.

 

16. Jurisdiction

The parties consent to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the South Gauteng High Court, Johannesburg, to settle any dispute in connection with this Guarantee.

 

67


SIGNATURE PAGE

For and on behalf of:

 

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

 

   

 

Name:     Name:
Date:     Date:
Address:     Address:
Fax:     Fax:
Contact person:     Contact person:
For and on behalf of:    
GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED    

 

   

 

Name:     Name:
Date:     Date:
Address:     Address:
Fax:     Fax:
Contact person:     Contact person:
For and on behalf of:    
GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED  

 

   

 

Name:     Name:
Date:     Date:
Address:     Address:
Fax:     Fax:
Contact person:     Contact person:
For and on behalf of:    
GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED  

 

   

 

Name:     Name:
Date:     Date:
Address:     Address:
Fax:     Fax:
Contact person:     Contact person:

 

68


SCHEDULE 1 TO THE GUARANTEE

The Noteholders in terms of the ZAR10,000,000,000

Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

c/o [insert]

Dear Sirs

Guarantee issued by the Guarantors in terms of the ZAR10 000 000 000 Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Programme (the “Programme”), in favour of the Noteholders in terms of such Programme (the “Guarantee”)

We refer to the Guarantee. Capitalised terms not specifically defined in this undertaking shall have the meaning assigned to such terms in the Guarantee.

We hereby undertake in favour of each of the Noteholders to receive and hold in custody the original signed Guarantee to be delivered to us by the Guarantors on the date of signature of the Guarantee. This undertaking shall not imply any relationship of trust, duty of care or fiduciary obligation on our part to take any action in relation to the Guarantee.

We undertake, upon the written request by any Noteholder and at the cost of such Noteholder, to make available to the Noteholder, a certified copy of the Guarantee within 5 Business Days of receipt of such written request.

Upon the termination of the Guarantee in accordance with its terms and conditions, we shall deliver the original Guarantee to Gold Fields Limited.

This undertaking constitutes an irrevocable stipulation in favour of the Noteholders and shall be deemed to have been accepted by them, mutatis mutandis, in the manner envisaged in clause 3 of the Guarantee.

Yours faithfully

For Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited

in its capacity as the Arranger in terms of the Programme

For Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited

in its capacity as the Arranger in terms of the Programme

 

69


 

SETTLEMENT, CLEARING AND TRANSFER OF NOTES LISTED ON THE JSE

 

 

Words used in this section headed “Settlement, Clearing and Transfers” shall bear the same meanings as used in the Terms and Conditions, except to the extent that they are separately defined in this section or this is clearly inappropriate from the context.

Global Certificates

Each Tranch of Notes issued in registered form ( “Registered Notes” ) and listed on the JSE Limited, a licensed financial exchange in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004 (the “JSE” ) will initially be issued in the form of a single Global Certificate (the “Global Certificate” ) which will be lodged and immobilised in Strate Limited, a company registered as a central securities depository in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004 ( “Securities Services Act” ), or its nominee (the “Central Depository” ), which forms part of the settlement system of the JSE. The Central Depository’s nominee will be the sole Noteholder in respect of each Tranche of Notes evidenced by a Global Certificate. The Notes may also be issued as Uncertificated Notes in terms of Section 37 of the Securities Services Act.

The Central Depository holds Notes subject to the Securities Services Act and the Rules of the Central Depository. The Rules of the Central Depository as at the date of this Programme Memorandum are as published by the Registrar of Financial Markets in Government Gazette No. 27758 of 8 July 2005.

While the Notes are held in the Central Depository under the Global Certificate, or as Uncertificated Notes, the Central Depository’s nominee will be reflected as the Noteholder in the register maintained by the Transfer Agent (the “Register” ). Accordingly, in terms of the Terms and Conditions of the Notes, all amounts to be paid and all rights to be exercised in respect of the Notes held in the Central Depository, will be paid to and may be exercised only by the Central Depository, for the holders of beneficial interests in the Notes held by the Central Depository ( “Beneficial Interests” ).

The Central Depository maintains accounts only for the members of the Central Depository ( “Participants” ). As at the date of this Programme Memorandum, the Participants which are approved by the JSE as settlement agents to perform electronic settlement of funds and scrip are ABSA Bank Limited, FirstRand Bank Limited, Nedbank Limited, The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited and the South African Reserve Bank ( “Settlement Agents” ). The Participants are in turn required to maintain securities accounts for their clients. The clients of the Participants may include the holders of Beneficial Interests in the Notes or their custodians. The clients of Participants, as the holders of the Beneficial Interests in the Notes or as custodians for such holders, may exercise their rights in respect of the Notes held by them in the Central Depository only through the Participants. Euroclear Bank S.A./N.V. as operator of the Euroclear System ( “Euroclear” ) and Clearstream Banking, société anonyme, (Clearstream Luxembourg) ( “Clearstream” ) may hold Notes through the Settlement Agents.

Transfers of Beneficial Interests in Notes in the Central Depository to and from clients of Participants, who are also Settlement Agents, occur by electronic book entry in the securities accounts of the clients with the Settlement Agents. Transfers among Participants of Notes held in the Central Depository occur through electronic book entry in the Participant’s central security accounts with the Central Depository.

Beneficial Interests in Notes may be exchanged for Notes in definitive registered form.

Payments of interest or principal in respect of Notes represented by a Global Certificate or Uncertificated Notes will be made in accordance with Condition 8 of the Terms and Conditions to the Central Depository’s nominee as shown in the Register and the relevant Issuer will be discharged by proper payment to, or to the order of, the registered holder of the Global Certificate or Uncertificated Note in respect of each amount so paid. Each of the persons shown in the records of the Central Depository and the Participants as the holders of Beneficial Interests, as the case may be, shall look solely to the Central Depository or the relevant Participant, as the case may be, for such person’s share of such payment so made by the relevant Issuer to, or to the order of, the registered holder of such Global Certificate or Uncertificated Notes.

The Issuer will not have any responsibility or liability for any aspect of the records relating to, or payments made on account of, Beneficial Interests, or for maintaining, supervising or reviewing any records relating to such Beneficial Interests.

 

70


 

SUBSCRIPTION AND SALE

 

 

Words used in this section headed “Subscription and Sale” shall bear the same meanings as defined in the Terms and Conditions, unless they are defined in this section or this is clearly inappropriate from the context.

The Notes will be distributed by one or more of the Dealer(s) and/or any person appointed as dealer by the Issuer in terms of the Programme Agreement dated 6 October 2009 relating to the Programme and as may be supplemented and/or amended and/or restated from time to time (the “Programme Agreement” ). Such persons are referred to in this section titled “ Subscription and Sale ” as “Dealers” .

 

1 REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA

The Issuer, each Guarantor and each Dealer have represented and agreed that they will not solicit any offers for subscription for the Notes in contravention of any applicable law and/or any regulation of the Republic of South Africa.

 

2 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

The Notes have not been and will not be registered under the U.S. Securities Act of 1933 (the “Securities Act” ) and the Notes may not be offered or sold within the United States except pursuant to an exemption from, or a transaction not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act. Each Dealer represents that it has not offered or sold, and agrees that it will not offer or sell, any Notes constituting part of its allotment in the United States except in accordance with Rule 903 of Regulation S under the Securities Act ( “Regulation S” ). Accordingly, neither the Issuer, each Dealer, their affiliates nor any persons acting on its or their behalf have engaged or will engage in any directed selling efforts with respect to the Notes. Terms used in this paragraph have the meaning given to them by Regulation S.

 

3 UNITED KINGDOM

In relation to the Notes, each Dealer subscribing for or purchasing such Notes has represented, warranted and agreed that:

 

  (a) Notes with maturities of less than one year : in relation to any Notes which have a maturity of less than one year, (a) it is a person whose ordinary activities involve it in acquiring, holding, managing or disposing of investments (as principal or agent) for the purposes of its business and (b) it has not offered or sold and will not offer or sell any Notes other than to persons whose ordinary activities involve them in acquiring, holding, managing or disposing of investments (as principal or agent) for the purposes of their businesses or who it is reasonable to expect will acquire, hold, manage or dispose of investments (as principal or agent) for the purposes of their businesses where the issue of the Notes would otherwise constitute a contravention of section 19 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (the “FSMA” ) by the Issuer;

 

  (b) Financial promotion: it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated any invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of section 21 of the FSMA) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of any Notes in circumstances in which section 21(1) of the FSMA does not apply to the Issuer; and

 

  (c) General compliance: it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to any Notes in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.

 

4 EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA

In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a “Relevant Member State” ), each Dealer has represented,

 

71


warranted and agreed, and each further Dealer appointed under the Programme will be required to represent, warrant and agree, that with effect from and including the date on which the Prospectus Directive is implemented in that Member State (the “Relevant Implementation Date” ) it has not made and will not make an offer of Notes which are the subject of the offering contemplated by this Programme Memorandum as completed by the Applicable Pricing Supplement in relation thereto to the public in that Relevant Member State, except that it may, with effect from and including that Relevant Implementation Date, make an offer of Notes to the public in that Relevant Member State:

 

  (a) at any time to legal entities which are authorised or regulated to operate in the financial markets or, if not so authorised or regulated, whose corporate purpose is solely to invest in securities;

 

  (b) at any time to any legal entity which has two or more of (i) an average of at least 250 employees during the last financial year; (ii) a total balance sheet of more than EUR43,000,000; and (iii) an annual turnover of more than EUR50,000,000, all as shown in its last annual or consolidated accounts;

 

  (c) at any time to fewer than 100 natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive) subject to obtaining the prior consent of the Relevant Dealer or Dealers nominated by the relevant Issuer for any such offer; or

 

  (d) at any time in any other circumstances falling within Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive,

provided that no such offer of Notes referred to in (a) to (d) above shall require the Issuer or any Dealer to publish a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive or supplement a prospectus pursuant to Article 16 of the Prospectus Directive.

For the purposes of this provision, the expression “offer of Notes to the public” in relation to any Notes in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and the Notes to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase or subscribe the Notes, as the same may be varied in that Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Member State and the expression “Prospectus Directive” means Directive 2003/71/EC and includes any relevant implementing measure in each Relevant Member State.

 

5 GENERAL

Each Dealer has agreed and each further Dealer appointed under the Programme will be required to agree that it will not, directly or indirectly, purchase, offer, sell or deliver any Notes or distribute or publish any offering circular, information memorandum, prospectus, form of application, advertisement or other document or information in any country or jurisdiction except under circumstances that will, to the best of its knowledge and belief, result in compliance with any applicable laws and regulations and all purchases, offers, sales and deliveries of Notes by it will be made on the same terms.

Without prejudice to the generality of the above paragraph, each Dealer has agreed and each further Dealer appointed under the Programme will be required to agree that it will obtain any consent, approval or permission which is, to the best of its knowledge and belief, required for the offer, purchase, sale or delivery by it of Notes under the laws and regulations in force in any jurisdiction to which it is subject or in which it makes such offers, purchases, sales or deliveries and it will, to the best of its knowledge and belief, comply with all such laws and regulations.

With regard to each Tranche, the relevant Dealer(s) will be required to comply with such other additional restrictions as shall be set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

72


 

SOUTH AFRICAN TAXATION

 

 

The comments below are intended as a general guide to the current position under the laws of the Republic of South Africa ( “South Africa” ). The contents of this section headed “South African Taxation” do not constitute tax advice and persons who are in any doubt as to their tax position should consult their professional advisers.

Words used in this section shall have the same meanings as defined in the Terms and Conditions, unless they are defined in this section or this is clearly inappropriate from the context.

For purposes of this section, a “Resident” means a person who or which is a “resident” as defined in section 1 of the Income Tax Act, 1962, as amended (the “Income Tax Act” ) and “Taxes” means any present or future taxes, duties, assessments or governmental charges of whatever nature imposed, levied, collected, withheld or assessed by, or on behalf of South Africa, whether in terms of the Income Tax Act or in terms of any other legislation.

STAMP DUTY ON CREATION AND TRANSFER OF NOTES

In terms of the Securities Transfer Tax Act, 2007, no securities transfer tax is payable on the issue or on the transfer of the Notes on the basis that the Notes will not comprise a “security” as defined in section 1 of the Securities Transfer Tax Act, 2007.

INCOME TAX

In South Africa, tax is imposed on Residents in respect of their worldwide income, irrespective of where the income is earned. Non-Residents are taxed in South Africa on income from a South African source and on capital gains from the disposal of immovable property in South Africa or assets attributable to permanent establishments in South Africa.

The amount of interest to be included in income, the position of non-residents and the capital gains tax consequences are considered below.

Interest

Any interest in respect of the Notes will be liable to South African income tax if such interest is received by or accrues to any person who is a Resident.

In the case of a natural person, South African tax residence is determined by being ordinarily resident in South Africa or meeting the physical presence test. A natural person who was not at any time during the year of assessment in question ordinarily resident in South Africa (in other words, did not regard South Africa as his/her permanent home or fixed place of residence) may nonetheless, in the absence of a double taxation agreement between South Africa and the foreign jurisdiction in question, be a Resident for tax purposes if his/her physical presence in South Africa meets the physical presence test. If such person was physically present in South Africa for more than 91 days in the current tax year and in each of the preceding 5 tax years, and for a period exceeding 915 days in aggregate during the 5 preceding tax years, he/she is deemed to be a resident, from the first day of the tax year in which all the requirements are met.

A person (other than a natural person) is a Resident if it is incorporated, established or formed in South Africa or has its place of effective management in South Africa.

A person who is deemed to be exclusively a resident of another country for purposes of the application of any double tax agreement between South Africa and that country will not be treated as a South African Resident.

With respect to a Controlled Foreign Company (as defined in section 1 of the Income Tax Act), a proportionate amount of the net income of the Controlled Foreign Company will also be included in the income of such Resident subject to certain exclusions. A company is a Controlled Foreign Company if it is a foreign company (i.e. non resident) and more than 50% (fifty per cent) of the total participation rights in the foreign company are held, or more than 50% (fifty per cent) of the voting rights in that foreign company are directly or indirectly exercisable, by one or more Residents, subject to certain provisions.

 

73


Treatment of discount or premium on original issue of Notes

Any discount or premium to the nominal value at which a Note is issued or acquired is treated as part of the interest on the Note for tax purposes. The Noteholder will be deemed to have accrued such interest, on a day-to-day basis until the Noteholder disposes of the Note or until maturity of the Note, whichever occurs first. The day-to-day basis is determined by calculating the yield to maturity and applying it to the capital balance involved for the relevant tax period, unless an election has been made to treat the Note on another basis.

Gains and losses on redemption or transfer of the Notes

If the Note is transferred or redeemed prior to the Note reaching its maturity date, any adjusted gain or loss arising on transfer or redemption will be included in, or deducted from, the income of a Noteholder who holds the Note for trading purposes. However, a Noteholder who holds the Note as a fixed or capital investment will not have the adjusted gain or loss included in his or her income for tax purposes, but will rather be taxed in terms of the capital gains tax rules (see below).

Exemption for certain non-Residents

Any person who is not a Resident will generally be exempt from any taxes on any interest income received or accrued in respect of the Notes unless that person:

 

(a) has during the relevant year of assessment carried on business in South Africa through a permanent establishment; or

 

(b) is a natural person who was physically present in South Africa for a period or periods exceeding 183 days in aggregate during the year of assessment in question.

Should the non-resident be subject to tax on interest in South Africa and the South African government has entered into a double tax treaty with that non-resident’s country of residence, the resultant tax liability would be determined with reference to the provisions of the double tax agreement.

CAPITAL GAINS TAX

The disposal of a capital asset is defined in the Eighth Schedule to the Income Tax Act and includes the sale, transfer of ownership, redemption, cancellation, or surrender of the Note. Capital gains and losses of residents on the disposal of Notes (held as a capital asset) are subject to Capital Gains Tax.

Any discount or premium on acquisition of the Note that has already been treated as interest will have been taxed, or allowed for as a deduction, for income tax purposes. It will therefore not be taken into account when determining any capital gain or loss arising on disposal of the Note.

Capital Gains Tax does not apply to assets such as Notes disposed of by a person that is not a Resident, unless the Note disposed of constitutes the asset of a permanent establishment of that person, through which a trade is carried on in South Africa during the relevant year of assessment.

 

74


 

GENERAL INFORMATION

 

 

Authorisation

All consents, approvals, authorisations or other orders of all regulatory authorities required by the Issuer and the Guarantors under the laws of the Republic of South Africa have been given for (A) the establishment of the Programme, the issue of Notes and for the Issuer to undertake and perform its obligations under the Programme Agreement and the Notes and (B) for the issue of the Guarantee by the Guarantors.

Listing

The Programme has been approved by the JSE. Notes to be issued under the Programme will be listed on the bond market of the JSE or its successor or such other or further exchange(s) as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s). Unlisted Notes may be issued under the Programme.

Documents Available

So long as Notes are capable of being issued under the Programme, copies of the following documents will, when published, be available for inspection during normal office hours at the registered office of the Issuer as set out at the end of this Programme Memorandum:

 

(a) all amendments and supplements to this Programme Memorandum prepared by the Issuer from time to time in accordance with the terms of the Programme Agreement;

 

(b) in respect of any issue of Notes under the Programme, the audited annual financial statements, and the notes thereto, of the Issuer for its three financial years prior to the date of such issue and the most recent quarterly audited financial statements, and the notes thereto, of the Issuer;

 

(c) the annual Mineral Resource and Ore Reserve Statement of the Issuer, prepared as a stand alone document or as incorporated in the Issuer’s annual report to shareholders as per the listing requirements of the JSE, as the case may be;

 

(d) Item 3 (which sets out key information in relation to the Issuer) and Item 4 (which sets out general information in relation to the Issuer) of the Form 20-F filed by the Issuer with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission, pursuant to the United States Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended;

 

(e) the Guarantee issued by the Guarantors in favour of the Noteholders;

 

(f) the Programme Agreement, the Agency Agreement and the Operations and Procedures Memorandum, as each such document may be amended from time to time in accordance with its respective terms; and

 

(g) the Applicable Pricing Supplement relating to any Tranche of Notes issued under the Programme.

Clearing Systems

The Notes have been accepted for clearance through the Central Depository, which forms part of the the JSE clearing system that is managed by Strate Limited and may be accepted for clearance through any additional clearing system as may be agreed between the JSE, the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer(s).

Settlement Agents

As at the date of this Programme Memorandum, the the JSE -recognised Settlement Agents are Absa Bank Limited, FirstRand Bank Limited, Nedbank Limited, The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited and the South African Reserve Bank.

Settlement, Transfer and Clearing

Notes will be issued, cleared and transferred in accordance with the procedures and rules set out by the JSE and the Central Depository. Notes will be settled through the JSE -recognised Settlement Agents who will comply with the electronic settlement procedures. The Central Depository’s nominee will be the registered holder of a Global Certificate and will maintain securities accounts for the Participants who, in turn, will maintain securities accounts for investors in the Notes.

 

75


The Participants will be responsible for the settlement of scrip and payment transfers through the Central Depository and the South African Reserve Bank. Individual Certificates will only be issued to Noteholders in terms of the procedures set out in Condition 11. Transfer of Notes shall be undertaken in accordance with the rules of the Central Depository as well as the Terms and Conditions, save for the transfer of Individual Certificates which shall take place in accordance with the procedures set out in Condition 13. The Central Depository, its nominee, and any individual Noteholder of Individual Certificate(s) shall be the registered holders of Notes.

The Participants and the Transfer Agent shall not be required to recognise any notice of any trust nor recognise the right of any other person other than the beneficial holder of Notes.

No transfer of Notes will be made in the Register unless the prescribed transfer form and the Individual Certificate (if any) has been properly lodged with the Transfer Agent.

Litigation

Save as disclosed herein, none of the Material Group Companies are or have been involved in any legal or arbitration proceedings (including any such proceedings which are pending or threatened of which the Issuer is aware) which may have or have had a material adverse effect on the financial position of the Issuer.

Non-South African Resident Noteholders and Emigrants from the Common Monetary Area

The information below is not intended as advice and it does not purport to describe all of the considerations that may be relevant to a prospective purchaser of Notes. Prospective purchasers of Notes that are non-South African residents or emigrants from the Common Monetary Area are urged to seek further professional advice in regard to the purchase of Notes under the Programme, and, to the extent necessary, obtain Exchange Control Approval for the subscription or purchase of Notes.

Blocked Rand may be used for the purchase of Notes. Any amounts payable by the Issuer in respect of the Notes purchased with Blocked Rand may not, in terms of the Exchange Control Regulations, be remitted out of South Africa or paid into any non-South African bank account. For the purposes of this clause, Blocked Rand is defined as funds which may not be remitted out of South Africa or paid into a non-South African resident’s bank account.

Emigrants from the Common Monetary Area

Any Individual Certificates issued to emigrant Noteholders, or where the emigrant holds Notes through the Central Depository, the securities accounts maintained for such emigrants by the Settlement Agents, will be restrictively endorsed and shall be deposited with an authorised foreign exchange dealer controlling such emigrant’s blocked assets.

Any payments of interest or principal due to an emigrant Noteholder will be deposited into such emigrant’s Blocked Rand account, as maintained by an authorised foreign exchange dealer.

Non-residents of the Common Monetary Area

Any Individual Certificates issued to Noteholders who are not resident in the Common Monetary Area will be endorsed “ non-resident ”. In the event that Notes are held by a non-resident of the Common Monetary Area through the Central Depository and its relevant Settlement Agents, the securities account of such Noteholder will be designated as a “ non-resident ” account.

For the purposes of these paragraphs, the Common Monetary Area includes the Republic of South Africa, the Republic of Namibia and the Kingdoms of Lesotho and Swaziland.

 

76


ISSUER

Gold Fields Limited

150 Helen Road

Sandown

Sandton,

2196.

Contact: Mr Nick Holland

ARRANGER, DEALER AND SPONSOR

Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited

15 Alice Lane

Sandton

2196

Contact: Mr J Els

 

LEGAL ADVISERS TO THE

ARRANGER AND DEALERS

 

LEGAL ADVISERS TO THE

ISSUER AND THE

GUARANTORS

 

Cliffe Dekker Inc.

1 Protea Place

Sandown, 2196

South Africa

Contact: Mr J Coetzer

 

Webber Wentzel

10 Fricker Road

Illovo Boulevard

Johannesburg, 2196

Contact: Ms K Couzyn

 

AUDITORS TO THE ISSUER

PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc

2 Eglin Road

Sunninghill, 2157

South Africa

Contact Mr PC Hough

TRANSFER AGENT/PAYING AGENT/CALCULATION AGENT

Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited

15 Alice Lane

Sandton

2196

Contact: Mr W Green

 

77

Exhibit 4.21

Operating and Procedures Memorandum

OPERATING AND PROCEDURES MEMORANDUM

in respect of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED ZAR10,000,000,000

DOMESTIC MEDIUM TERM NOTE PROGRAMME

Dated 6 October 2009

 

 

LOGO


This is the Operating and Procedures Memorandum referred to in the Programme Agreement (as defined below) which sets out guidelines for the administrative procedures to be followed in relation to issue of Notes under the Issuer’s ZAR10,000,000,000 Domestic Medium Term Note Programme.

The aggregate nominal amount of all Notes outstanding at any time will not, save as provided below, exceed ZAR10,000,000,000, subject to increases as provided in the Programme Agreement. Clause 13 of the Programme Agreement provides for the increase in the nominal amount of Notes that may be issued under the Programme. In that event, this Operating and Procedures Memorandum shall apply to the Programme as increased.

The documentation of the Programme provides for the issue of Notes in registered, form denominated in South African Rand or ZAR on a senior (unconditional and unsubordinated) which may

 

   

be interest-bearing or non-interest bearing;

 

   

be issued at par, a premium or a discount;

 

   

be issued in fully paid or partly paid form;

 

   

be exchangeable for other assets;

have such other characteristics as may be specified in the Applicable Pricing supplement.

 

   

other forms of Notes agreed between the Relevant Dealer and the Issuer.

References herein to “Issuer” means Gold Fields Limited (Registration Number 1968/04880/06).

All terms with initial capitals used herein without definition shall have the meanings given to them in the Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009, which may be amended and/or supplemented from time to time (the “Programme Memorandum” ); the Agency Agreement dated 6 October 2009, which may be amended and/or supplemented from time to time (the “Agency Agreement” ); or the Programme Agreement dated 6 October 2009, which may be amended and/or supplemented from time to time (the “Programme Agreement” ).

 

LOGO

 

Page 2


To the extent that the Issuer acts as the Transfer Agent, Calculation Agent or Paying Agent in accordance with the Agency Agreement, all references in this Operating and Procedures Memorandum to:

any action, conduct or functions in such role shall be understood to mean that the Issuer shall perform such action, conduct or function itself; and

requirements for consultation, indemnification by or of, payment by or of, delivery by or to, notice by or to, consent by or to or agreement between the Issuer and such Transfer Agent, Calculation Agent or Paying Agent (as the case may be) shall be disregarded to the extent that the Issuer performs such role.

Any Notes issued on or after the date of this Operating and Procedures Memorandum shall be issued in accordance with the procedures prescribed in this Operating and Procedures Memorandum.

The procedures set out in this Operating and Procedures Memorandum shall apply to Notes issued in certificated form and shall, to the extent practical, also apply in respect of Notes issued in uncertificated form. A Tranche of Notes, whether listed on the JSE or not listed on the JSE but reported through the electronic settlement procedures of the JSE and the Central Securities Depository, and in each case either represented by a Global Certificate deposited with and lodged in the Central Securities Depository or issued in uncertificated form and held by the Central Securities Depository, will be cleared and settled in accordance with the rules of the JSE and the Central Securities Depository. The Participant concerned shall provide a regular statement to the person on whose behalf a Beneficial Interest in a particular Principal Amount of Notes is held. This statement shall set out the number and identity of such Beneficial Interest in such Notes.

 

LOGO

 

Page 3


Transfer of ownership in Beneficial Interests in Registered Notes shall only pass upon the debiting and crediting respectively, of both the securities account from which the transfer is effected and the securities account to which transfer is to be made, in accordance with the rules of the Central Securities Depository.

OPERATING PROCEDURES

 

1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TRANSFER AGENT

The Transfer Agent will, in addition to the responsibilities in relation to settlement described in Annexe “ A ”, be responsible for immediately notifying the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer (as defined in Annexe “ A ”) if at any time the Transfer Agent is notified by the Financial Exchange that the listing of a Tranche of Notes has been refused or otherwise will not take place.

 

2 RESPONSIBILITIES OF DEALER/ LEAD MANAGER

 

2.1 The Relevant Dealer / Lead Manager will be responsible for preparing and agreeing with the Issuer a Pricing Supplement (substantially in the form of Annexe “ C ” hereto) giving details of each Tranche of Notes to be issued.

 

2.2 In the case of an issue not to be subscribed pursuant to a Subscription Agreement, each Dealer that agrees to subscribe for or procure the subscription for Notes from the Issuer, will be responsible for notifying the Transfer Agent upon completion of the subscription for the Notes of each Tranche. In the case of a Tranche of Notes to be subscribed pursuant to a Subscription Agreement, the Lead Manager will be responsible for notifying the Transfer Agent upon completion of the subscription for the Notes of such Tranche.

 

LOGO

 

Page 4


3 SETTLEMENT

 

3.1 The settlement procedures set out in Annexe “ A ” shall apply to each issue of Notes (Part 1 in the case of issues not to be subscribed pursuant to a Subscription Agreement and Part 2 in the case of issues to be subscribed pursuant to a Subscription Agreement, unless otherwise agreed between the Issuer, the Transfer Agent and the Relevant Dealer or the Lead Manager, as the case may be. In the case of Notes listed on a Financial Exchange other than The Bond Exchange of South Africa Limited or cleared otherwise than through Strate Limited, more time may be required to comply with the relevant Financial Exchange’s listing requirements. In the case of issues of Indexed Notes more time may be required to settle documentation.

 

3.2 A Trading Desk and Administrative Contact List is set out in Annexe “ D ”.

 

LOGO

 

Page 5


ANNEXE “A”

PART 1

REGISTERED NOTES

SETTLEMENT PROCEDURES FOR ISSUES NOT TO BE SUBSCRIBED

PURSUANT TO A SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

 

Day   

Latest

Johannesburg
Time

   Action
No later than Issue Date minus 4 days    12h00   

The Issuer may agree terms with one or more of the Dealers (the “Relevant Dealer” ) for the issue of and subscription for Notes, or in respect of which the subscription for Notes will be procured (whether pursuant to an unsolicited bid from the Relevant Dealer or pursuant to an enquiry by the Issuer).

 

The Issuer confirms that it has obtained all regulatory and other consents necessary in respect of the Issue.

   14h00    If a Relevant Dealer has reached agreement with the Issuer by telephone, such Relevant Dealer confirms the terms of the agreement to the Issuer by fax confirmation (substantially in the form set out in Annexe “ B ”) attaching a copy of the Pricing Supplement (substantially in the form set out in Annexe “ C ”).
   15h00    The Issuer confirms its agreement to the terms on which the issue of Notes is to be made (including the form of the Pricing Supplement) by signing and returning a copy of the Pricing Supplement and confirmation to the Relevant Dealer.
      For listed Notes, the Relevant Dealer faxes a copy of the Pricing Supplement to the relevant Financial Exchange (if any) and requests an ISIN and stock code from the relevant Financial Exchange, if

 

Page 1


Day   

Latest

Johannesburg
Time

   Action
     

necessary. The stock code of the relevant Financial Exchange and ISIN is notified by the Relevant Dealer to the Issuer.

 

The Relevant Dealer issues instructions to the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent, for listed Registered Notes and unlisted Registered Notes (including, in the case of Floating Rate Notes, for the purposes of rate fixing) to carry out the duties to be carried out by the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent under these Settlement Procedures and the Agency Agreement including preparing, authenticating and issuing a Global Certificate (for listed Registered Notes issued in certificated form or for unlisted Registered Notes issued in certificated form that will be settled through the the JSE electronic settlement system) or the form of the Individual Certificate (for unlisted Registered Notes not settled through the the JSE electronic system), as the case may be, for the Tranche of Notes which is to be issued, giving details of such Notes. The Relevant Dealer confirms such instructions by sending a copy by fax of the signed Pricing Supplement and confirmation to the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent. The details set out in the signed Pricing Supplement and confirmation shall be conclusive evidence of the agreement (save in the case of manifest error) and shall be binding on the parties accordingly.

      The Relevant Dealer (and/or investors) instructs its relevant Participant to debit its account (as appropriate) and pay the Subscription Price or Procurement Subscription Price (as the case may be) less, in each case, any permitted

 

Page 2


Day   

Latest

Johannesburg
Time

   Action
      deductions, to the account specified by the Issuer with its Participant against delivery of the Notes as instructed by the Relevant Dealer.
No later than Issue Date minus 3 days    15h00    In the case of listed Floating Rate Notes, the Paying Agent notifies the Central Securities Depository, the relevant Financial Exchange and the Relevant Dealer by fax of the Rate of Interest for the first Interest Period (if already determined). Where the Rate of Interest has not yet been determined, this will be notified in accordance with this paragraph as soon as it has been determined.
No later than Issue Date minus 2 days    13h00    The Transfer Agent prepares and authenticates a Global Certificate (for listed Registered Notes issued in certificated form or for unlisted Registered Notes issued in certificated form that will be settled through the JSE electronic settlement system) or an Individual Certificate (for unlisted Registered Notes) as the case may be, for each Tranche of Notes which is to be issued in respect of the relevant Series and establishes the Register for any such Series. The Global Certificate (if any) is then delivered by the Transfer Agent to the Issuer’s Participant who in turn delivers such Global Certificate to the Central Securities Depository. The Individual Certificates (if any) are delivered to the Relevant Dealer who holds the Notes represented by such Individual Certificates to the order of the Issuer until Issue Date. The Issuer then provides the Relevant Dealer with delivery and receipt instructions for the Individual Certificates. Instructions are given by the Transfer Agent to credit the Notes represented by the Global Certificate (for listed Registered Notes) to the Issuer’s securities account with its Participant.

 

Page 3


Day   

Latest

Johannesburg
Time

   Action
      The Transfer Agent further instructs the relevant Participant to debit from the Issuer’s securities account the nominal amount of the relevant Tranche of Notes and to credit such nominal amount to the account(s) of the Relevant Dealer or the investor(s) procured by it, as the case may be, with the Participants against payment to the account of the Issuer of the Subscription Price or the Procurement Subscription Price (less in each case any permitted deductions) for the relevant Tranche of Notes for value on the Issue Date. The Relevant Dealer gives corresponding instructions to the Participant.
Issue Date       The Central Securities Depository, Participants and/or the Participants, if applicable, debit and credit accounts in accordance with instructions received by them (in respect of Notes represented by the Global Certificate). The Relevant Dealer delivers the Individual Certificates to investors against payment as instructed.
On or subsequent to the Issue Date       The Relevant Dealer promptly notifies the Transfer Agent that the distribution of the Notes subscribed for or in respect of which subscription was procured by it has been completed.
      The Transfer Agent enters the names of the Noteholders of the Notes in the Register.

 

Page 4


ANNEXE “A”

PART 2

REGISTERED NOTES

SETTLEMENT PROCEDURES FOR ISSUES SUBSCRIBED PURSUANT TO

SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

 

Day    Latest time    Action
No later than Issue Date minus 10 days (or such other number of days agreed between the Issuer, the LEAD Manager and the Transfer Agent)       The Issuer may, subject to the execution of the Subscription Agreement referred to below, agree terms with a Dealer or Dealers (which expression in this Part 2 includes any entity to be appointed as a Dealer under the Subscription Agreement) (the “ Lead Manager ”) for the issue and subscription (or procurement of subscription) for Notes to be subscribed pursuant to a Subscription Agreement (whether pursuant to an unsolicited bid by such Lead Manager or pursuant to an enquiry by the Issuer). The Lead Manager may invite other Dealers (new or additional) approved by the Issuer to join an underwriting syndicate either on the basis of an invitation telex agreed between the Issuer and the Lead Manager or on the terms of the Pricing Supplement referred to below and the Subscription Agreement. The Lead Manager and any such Dealers are together referred to as the “Dealers”.
      The Issuer and the Lead Manager(s) agree a form of Pricing Supplement prepared by or on behalf of the Lead Managers) (in substantially the form of Annexe “ C ”) which is submitted to the lawyers rendering a legal opinion in connection with the relevant issue for approval. A draft Subscription Agreement (in substantially the form of Appendix E to the Programme Agreement or such other form as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Lead Manager(s)) is also prepared. The Subscription Agreement may, if so agreed, be called by another name. The Lead Manager(s) sends a copy of the draft Subscription Agreement to any other Dealer at least two full

 

Page 1


     

Business Days before the Subscription Agreement is intended to be signed. At the same time the Lead Manager(s) sends a copy of the Programme Memorandum and Programme Agreement (together with such other items from the Initial Documentation List as the Lead Manager(s) deems appropriate) to any other Dealer which has not previously received such documents. The Subscription Agreement and Pricing Supplement are agreed and executed.

 

For listed Notes, the Lead Manager(s) faxes a copy of the Pricing Supplement to the relevant Financial Exchange and requests an ISIN and stock code from the relevant Financial Exchange, if necessary. Each ISIN and stock code of the relevant Financial Exchange is notified by the Lead Manager(s) to the Issuer and the other Lead Manager (where applicable).

 

A copy of the Pricing Supplement is sent by the Lead Manager(s) by fax to the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent which shall act as the Transfer Agents’ authorisation, for listed Registered Notes and unlisted Registered Notes (including, in the case of Floating Rate Notes, for the purposes of rate fixing) to carry out the duties to be carried out by them under these Settlement Procedures and the Agency Agreement including preparing, authenticating and issuing a Global Certificate (for listed Registered Notes or unlisted Registered Notes that will be settled through the the JSE electronic settlement system) or the form of the Individual Certificate (for unlisted Registered Notes), as the case my be, for the Tranche of Notes which is to be subscribed for, giving details of such Notes.

      The Dealer(s) (and/or investors) instructs its relevant Participant to debit its account (as appropriate) and pay the Subscription Price or Procurement Subscription Price (as the case may be) less in each case any permitted deductions to the account specified by the Issuer with its Participant, against delivery of the Notes as instructed by the Dealer(s).

 

Page 2


No later than Issue Date minus 3 days    15h00    In the case of listed Floating Rate Notes, the Transfer Agent notifies the Central Securities Depository and the Issuer, the relevant Financial Exchange and the Lead Manager(s) by fax of the Rate of Interest for the first Interest Period (if already determined). Where the Rate of Interest has not yet been determined, this will be notified in accordance with this paragraph as soon as it has been determined.

No later than Issue Date minus

2 days

   Agreed time    The Transfer Agent prepares and authenticates a Global Certificate (for listed and unlisted Registered Notes) or an Individual Certificate (for unlisted Registered Notes) as the case may be, for each Tranche of Notes which is to be issued in respect of the relevant Series. The Global Certificate (if any) is then delivered by the Transfer Agent to the Issuer’s Participant who in turn delivers such Global Certificate to the Central Securities Depository. Instructions are given by the Transfer Agent (on behalf of the Issuer) to the Central Securities Depository to hold the Notes represented by such Global Certificate to the Issuer’s order. The Individual Certificates (if any) are then delivered by the Transfer Agent to the Relevant Dealer who holds the Notes represented by such Individual Certificates to the order of the Issuer until Issue Date. The Issuer then provides the Relevant Dealer with delivery and receipt instructions for the delivery of Individual Certificates (for unlisted Registered Notes).
      The Transfer Agent further instructs the relevant Participant to debit from the Issuer’s securities account the nominal amount of the relevant Tranche of Notes and to credit such nominal amount to the account(s) of the Dealer(s) or the investor(s) procured by it, as the case may be with the Participants against payment to the account of the Issuer of the Subscription Price or the Procurement Subscription Price (less in each case any permitted deductions) for the relevant Tranche of Notes for value on the Issue Date. The Dealer(s) gives corresponding instructions to the Participant.

 

Page 3


Issue Date      The Central Securities Depository and/or the Participants debit and credit accounts in accordance with instructions received by them (in respect of Notes represented by the Global Certificate) or the Relevant Dealer delivers the Individual Certificates to investors against payment as instructed.
On or subsequent to the Issue Date     

Each other Dealer (if any) promptly notifies the Lead Manager(s) when the distribution of the Notes subscribed for or in respect of which subscription was procured by it has been completed. The Lead Manager(s) promptly notifies the Transfer Agent upon completion of the distribution of the Notes of the relevant Tranche.

 

The Transfer Agent enters the names of the Noteholders of the Notes in the Register.

 

Page 4


ANNEXE “B”

FORM OF DEALER’S CONFIRMATION TO ISSUER

FOR ISSUES WITH NO SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

[Date]

To: Gold Fields Limited

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

[Title of relevant Tranche of Notes (specifying type of Notes)]

(the “Notes”)

issued pursuant to the GOLD FIELDS LIMITED ZAR10,000,000,000

DOMESTIC MEDIUM TERM NOTE PROGRAMME

We hereby confirm the agreement for the issue to us or investors procured by us of the Notes under the above Programme pursuant to the terms of issue set out in the Pricing Supplement which we enclose herewith.

We undertake to subscribe for the Notes at a subscription price of [            ]% per cent of the principal amount of the Notes (the “Subscription Price” ), being the issue price of [            ]% per cent of the principal amount of the Notes less a discount of [            ]% per cent of such principal amount of the Notes;

OR

We undertake to procure the subscription of the Notes at a subscription price of [            ]% per cent of the principal amount of the Notes (the “Procurement Subscription Price” ) in consideration for which you agree to pay us a commission equal to [            ]% per cent of the principal amount of Notes (the “Procurement Commission” ).

The settlement procedures set out in Annexe “A” hereto shall apply.

Subject to the provisions of Annexe “A” hereof, if the Notes are to be listed, the Notes are to be credited to the [            ], acting as our settlement agent, account number [            ] in the name of [Name of Dealer] or [Name of Investor].

Please confirm your agreement to the terms of issue by signing and faxing to us a copy of this agreement.

 

For and on behalf of [Name of Dealer]

 

By:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 1


Accepted for and on behalf of Gold Fields Limited

 

 

   

 

By:     By:
Capacity:     Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto     Who warrants his authority hereto

 

   

 

 

Page 2


ANNEXE “C”

PRICING SUPPLEMENT TO BE COMPLETED FOR EACH TRANCHE OF

NOTES ISSUED UNDER THE PROGRAMME MEMORANDUM

[ INSERT LOGO ]

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(Incorporated in the Republic of South Africa with limited liability under

Registration Number 1968/004880/06)

Issue of [Aggregate Nominal Amount of Tranche] [Title of Notes]

Under its ZAR10,000,000,000 Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term

Note Programme, jointly and severally, unconditionally and irrevocably,

guaranteed by the Guarantors

This document constitutes the Applicable Pricing Supplement relating to the issue of Notes described herein. Terms used herein shall be deemed to be defined as such for the purposes of the Terms and Conditions set forth in the Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009. The Notes described in this Applicable Pricing Supplement are subject to the Terms and Conditions in the Programme Memorandum. This Applicable Pricing Supplement contains the final terms of the Notes and this Applicable Pricing Supplement must be read in conjunction with such Programme Memorandum. To the extent that there is any conflict or inconsistency between the contents of this Applicable Pricing Supplement and the Programme Memorandum, the provisions of this Applicable Pricing Supplement shall prevail.

 

DESCRIPTION OF THE NOTES

1.      Issuer

  Gold Fields Limited

2.      Guarantors

  Each of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited

3.      Status of Notes

  [Secured/Unsecured]

4.      Series Number

  [            ]

5.      Tranche Number

  [            ]

6.      Aggregate Nominal Amount

  [            ]

 

Page 1


7.      Interest

  [Interest bearing/Non interest bearing]

8.      Interest/Payment Basis

  [Fixed Rate/Floating Rate/Zero Coupon/Index-Linked Notes/Dual Currency Notes/Partly-Paid Notes/Instalment Notes/other]

9.      Automatic/Optional Conversion from one Interest/Redemption/Payment Basis to another

  [insert details including date for conversion]

10.    Form of Notes

  [Registered Notes]

11.    Issue Date

  [            ]

12.    Business Centre

  [            ]

13.    Additional Business Centre

  [            ]

14.    Specified Denomination

  [            ]

15.    Issue Price

  [            ]

16.    Interest Commencement Date

  [            ]

17.    Maturity Date

  [            ]

18.    Specified Currency

  [            ]

19.    Applicable Business Day Convention

  [Floating Rate Business Day/Following Business Day/Modified Following Business Day/Modified Following Business Day Adjusted/Preceding Business Day/other convention – insert details]

20.    Final Redemption Amount

  [            ]

 

Page 2


21.    Last Day to Register

  [            ]

22.    Books Closed Period(s)

  The Register will be closed from […] to […] and from […] to […] (all dates inclusive) in each year until the Maturity Date

FIXED RATE NOTES

23.    (a)     Rate of Interest

  [            ] per cent. per annum [payable [annually/semi-annually/quarterly] in arrear]

(b)    Fixed Interest Payment Date(s)

  [            ] in each year up to and including the Maturity Date/other

(c)    Initial Broken Amount

  [            ]

(d)    Final Broken Amount

  [            ]

(e)    Any other terms relating to the particular method of calculating interest

  [            ]

FLOATING RATE NOTES

24.    (a)     Floating Interest Payment Date(s)

  [            ]

(b)    Interest Period(s)

  [            ]

(c)    Rate of Interest

  [            ]

(c)    Definition of Business Day

  [            ]

(d)    Minimum Rate of Interest

  [            ] per cent. per annum

(e)    Maximum Rate of Interest

  [            ] per cent. per annum

(f)     Other terms relating to the method of calculating interest (e.g.: Day Count Fraction, rounding up provision)

  [            ]

25.    Manner in which the Rate of Interest is to be determined

  [ISDA Determination/Screen Rate Determination/other – insert details]

26.    Margin

  [(…) basis points to be added to/subtracted from the relevant (ISDA Rate/Reference Rate)]

27.    If ISDA Determination

 

(a)    Floating Rate

  [            ]

(b)    Floating Rate Option

  [            ]

(c)    Designated Maturity

  [            ]

(d)    Reset Date(s)

  [            ]

(e)    ISDA Definitions to apply

  [            ]

 

Page 3


28.    If Screen Determination

 

(a)     Reference Rate (including relevant period by reference to which the Rate of Interest is to be calculated)

  [            ]

(b)     Interest Determination Date(s)

  [            ]

(c)     Relevant Screen Page and Reference Code

  [            ]

29.    If Rate of Interest to be calculated otherwise than by ISDA Determination or Screen Determination, insert basis for determining Rate of Interest/Margin/Fallback provisions

  [            ]

ZERO COUPON NOTES

 

30.    (a)      Implied Yield

  [            ]

(b)     Reference Price

  [            ]

(c)     Any other formula or basis for determining amount(s) payable

  [            ]

PARTLY-PAID NOTES

 

31.    (a)      Amount of each payment comprising the Issue Price

  [            ]

(b)     Date upon which each payment is to be made by Noteholder

  [            ]

(c)     Consequences (if any) of failure to make any such payment by Noteholder

  [            ]

(d)     Rate of Interest to accrue on the first and subsequent instalments after the due date for payment of such instalments

  [            ] per cent.

INSTALMENT NOTES

 

32.    Instalment Dates

  [            ]

 

Page 4


33.    Instalment Amounts (expressed as a percentage of the aggregate Nominal Amount of the Notes)

  [            ]

MIXED RATE NOTES

 

34.    Period(s) during which the Rate of Interest for the Mixed Rate Notes will be (as applicable) that for:

 

(a)     Fixed Rate Notes

  [            ]

(b)     Floating Rate Notes

  [            ]

(c)     Indexed Notes

  [            ]

(d)     Dual Currency Notes

  [            ]

(e)     Other Notes

  [            ]

35.    The Rate of Interest and other pertinent details are set out under the headings relating to the applicable forms of Notes

 

INDEX-LINKED NOTES

 

36.    (a)      Type of Index-Linked Notes

  [Indexed Interest Notes/Indexed Redemption Amount Notes]

(b)     Index/Formula by reference to which Rate of Interest /Interest Amount is to be determined

  [            ]

(c)     Manner in which the Rate of Interest/Interest Amount is to be determined

  [            ]

(d)     Interest Period(s)

  [            ]

(e)     Interest Payment Date(s)

  [            ]

(f)      Provisions where calculation by reference to Index and/or Formula is impossible or impracticable

  [            ]

(g)     Definition of Business Day

  [            ]

(h)     Minimum Rate of Interest

  [            ] per cent. per annum

(i)      Maximum Rate of Interest

  [            ] per cent. per annum

 

Page 5


(j)      Other terms relating to the method of calculating interest (e.g.: Day Count Fraction, rounding up provision)

  [            ]

DUAL CURRENCY NOTES

 

37.    (a)      Type of Dual Currency Notes

  [Dual Currency Interest Notes/Dual Currency Redemption Amount Notes]

(b)     Rate of Exchange/method of calculating Rate of Exchange

  [            ]

(c)     Provisions applicable where calculation by reference to Rate of Exchange if impossible or impracticable

  [            ]

(d)     Person at whose option Specified Currency(ies) is/are payable

  [            ]

EXCHANGEABLE NOTES

 

38.    (a)      Mandatory Exchange applicable?

 

[Yes/No]

(b)     Noteholders’ Exchange Right applicable?

  [Yes/No]

(c)     Exchange Securities

  [            ]

(d)     Manner of determining Exchange Price

  [            ]

(e)     Exchange Period

  [            ]

(f)      Other

  [            ]

OTHER NOTES

 

39.    Relevant description and any additional Terms and Conditions relating to such Notes

  [            ]

PROVISIONS REGARDING REDEMPTION/MATURITY

 

40.    Issuer’s Optional Redemption: if yes:

 

[Yes/No]

(a)     Optional Redemption Date(s)

  [            ]

(b)     Optional Redemption Amount(s) and method, if any, of calculation of such amount(s)

  [            ]

(c)     Minimum period of notice

  [            ]

(d)     If redeemable in part:

  [            ]

 Minimum Redemption Amount(s)

  [            ]

 

Page 6


Maximum Redemption Amount(s)

  [            ]

(e)     Other terms applicable on Redemption

 

41.    Redemption at the Option of the Noteholders: if yes:

  [Yes/No]

(a)     Optional Redemption Date(s)

  [            ]

(b)     Optional Redemption Amount(s)

  [            ]

(c)     Minimum period of notice

  [            ]

(d)     If redeemable in part:

 

Minimum Redemption Amount(s)

  [            ]

Maximum Redemption Amount(s)

  [            ]

(e)     Other terms applicable on Redemption

  [            ]

(f)      Attach pro forma put notice(s)

 

42.    Early Redemption Amount(s) payable on redemption for taxation reasons or on Event of Default (if required). If yes:

  [Yes/No]

Amount payable

  [as per Condition 12.5]

GENERAL

 

43.    Financial Exchange

  [            ]

44.    Calculation Agent

  [            ]

45.    Paying Agent

  [            ]

46.    Specified office of the Paying Agent

  [            ]

47.    Transfer Agent

 

[ ]

[ ]

Telephone Number: [ ]

Fax Number: [ ]

 

Page 7


48.    Provisions relating to stabilisation

  [            ]

49.    Stabilising manager

  [            ]

50.    Additional selling restrictions

  [            ]

51.    ISIN

  [            ]

52.    Stock Code

  [            ]

53.    Method of distribution

  [            ]

54.    If syndicated, names of Dealers

  [            ]

55.    If non-syndicated, name of Dealer

  [            ]

56.    Credit Rating assigned to Notes (if any)

  [            ]

57.    Governing law (if the laws of South Africa are not applicable)

  [            ]

58.    Other Banking Jurisdiction

  [            ]

59.    Other provisions

  [            ]

 

Page 8


Disclosure Requirements in terms of paragraph 3(5) of the Commercial Paper Regulations

Paragraph 3(5)(a)

The ultimate borrower is [ ].

Paragraph 3(5)(b)

The Issuer is a going concern and can in all circumstances be reasonably expected to meet its commitments under the Notes.

Paragraph 3(5)(c)

The auditor of the Issuer is PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc.

Paragraph 3(5)(d)

As at the date of this issue:

 

(a) the Issuer has not issued any commercial paper / has issued commercial paper to the value of ZAR[ ]; and

 

(b) the Issuer estimates to issue commercial paper with a nominal value of ZAR[ ] during its current financial year, ending [ ].

Paragraph 3(5)(e)

Prospective investors in the Notes are to consider this Pricing Supplement, the Programme Memorandum and the documentation incorporated therein by reference in order to ascertain the nature of the financial and commercial risks of an investment in the Notes. In addition, prospective investors in the Notes are to consider the latest audited financial statements of the Issuer which are incorporated into the Programme Memorandum by reference and which may be requested from the Issuer.

Paragraph 3(5)(f)

There has been no material adverse change in the Issuer’s financial position since the date of its last audited financial statements.

Paragraph 3(5)(g)

The Notes issued will be [ listed/unlisted] , as stated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

Paragraph 3(5)(h)

The funds to be raised through the issue of the Notes are to be used by the Issuer for [ ].

Paragraph 3(5)(i)

The payment obligations of the Issuer in respect of the Notes are guaranteed in terms of the Guarantee by the Guarantors, but are otherwise unsecured.

Paragraph 3(5)(j)

PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc, the auditors of the Issuer, have confirmed that nothing has come to their attention that causes them to believe that this issue of Notes issued under the Programme does not comply in all respects with the relevant provisions of the Commercial Paper Regulations.

 

Page 9


Responsibility:

The Issuer accepts responsibility for the information contained in this Applicable Pricing Supplement.

Application [is hereby]/[will not be] made to list this issue of Notes [on [date]] .

SIGNED at                      this              day of              2009.

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(AS ISSUER)

 

SIGNED at                      on              2009

 

   

 

Signature:     Signature:

[ ]

   

[ ]

Name:     Name:

[ ]

   

[ ]

Designation:     Designation:

Address: [ ]

Tel: [ ]

   

 

Page 10


ANNEXE D

TRADING DESK AND ADMINISTRATIVE INFORMATION

 

The Issuer

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

Telephone:    +2711 562 9700
Attention:    Chief Financial Officer

The Arranger and Dealer

ABSA CAPITAL, a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED

Telephone:    +2711 895 7027
Attention:    Head: Debt Capital Markets

The Dealer

In relation to any Tranche of Notes, such person/s specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement

The Transfer Agent

ABSA CAPITAL, a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED

Telephone:    +2711 895 7027
Attention:    Head: Debt Capital Markets

The Paying Agent

ABSA CAPITAL, a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED

Telephone:    +2711 895 7027
Attention:    Head: Debt Capital Markets

The Calculation Agent

ABSA CAPITAL, a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED

Telephone:    +2711 895 7027
Attention:    Head: Debt Capital Markets

 

Page 11

Exhibit 4.22

Gold Fields_Programme Agreement

PROGRAMME AGREEMENT

in respect of the

ZAR 10,000,000,000

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED DOMESTIC MEDIUM TERM NOTE PROGRAMME

Dated 6 October 2009

entered between

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(as Issuer )

and

ABSA CAPITAL, a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED

(as Arranger and Dealer )

and

NEDBANK CAPITAL, a division of NEDBANK LIMITED

(as Dealer )

 

 

LOGO


TABLE OF CONTENTS:

 

1   

INTERPRETATION

   4
2   

INTRODUCTION

   12
3   

AGREEMENTS TO ISSUE AND SUBSCRIBE

   12
4   

CONDITIONS OF ISSUE

   15
5   

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

   20
6   

UNDERTAKINGS OF THE ISSUER

   26
7   

ISSUER’S INDEMNITY

   31
8   

AUTHORITY TO DISTRIBUTE DOCUMENTS

   34
9   

DEALERS’ UNDERTAKINGS AND INDEMNITY

   34
10   

FEES, EXPENSES AND STAMP DUTIES

   35
11   

TERMINATION OF APPOINTMENT OF DEALERS

   37
12   

APPOINTMENT OF NEW DEALERS

   37
13   

INCREASE IN THE AGGREGATE NOMINAL AMOUNT OF THE PROGRAMME

   38
14   

STATUS OF THE DEALERS AND THE ARRANGER

   39
15   

COUNTERPARTS

   40
16   

COMMUNICATIONS

   40
17   

BENEFIT OF AGREEMENT

   40
18   

CALCULATION AGENT

   41
19   

STABILISATION

   42
20   

VARIATION AND CANCELLATION

   43
21   

WHOLE AGREEMENT

   43
22   

NO WAIVER

   43
23   

GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

   43

 

LOGO

 

Page 2


APPENDICES

  

APPENDIX A:

  

INITIAL DOCUMENTATION LIST

APPENDIX B:

  

SELLING RESTRICTIONS

APPENDIX C (PART I):

  

FORM OF DEALER ACCESSION LETTER - PROGRAMME

APPENDIX C (PART II):

  

FORM OF LETTER OF APPOINTMENT - PROGRAMME

APPENDIX C (PART III):

  

FORM OF DEALER ACCESSION LETTER - NOTE ISSUE

APPENDIX C (PART IV):

  

FORM OF LETTER OF APPOINTMENT - NOTE ISSUE

APPENDIX D:

  

LETTER REGARDING INCREASE IN THE NOMINAL AMOUNT OF THE PROGRAMME

APPENDIX E:

  

FORM OF SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

 

LOGO

 

Page 3


WHEREBY THE PARTIES AGREE AS FOLLOWS:

 

1 INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Terms and expressions defined in the Agency Agreement, the Programme Memorandum or the Notes or used in the Applicable Pricing Supplement and not otherwise defined in this Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Agreement, except where the context otherwise requires.

 

1.2 Without prejudice to the aforegoing and unless the context otherwise requires, terms used in this Agreement shall have the meanings given to them as follows -

 

1.2.1 Absa Capital ” means Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited, Registration Number 1986/004794/06, a registered bank and public company with limited liability incorporated in the Republic of South Africa;

 

1.2.2 “Agency Agreement” means the Agency Agreement to be entered into between the Issuer, the Paying Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Transfer Agent, unless such agents are appointed in terms of a separate agreement with the Issuer or the Issuer itself acts in any of the aforementioned capacities;

 

1.2.3 “Agreement” means this amended and restated programme agreement and the appendices and schedules hereto;

 

1.2.4 “Agreement Date” means in respect of any Note, the date on which an agreement is concluded for the issue of such Note, which in the case of Notes issued on a syndicated basis or otherwise in relation to which a Subscription Agreement is entered into, shall be the date upon which the relevant Subscription Agreement is signed by or on behalf of the party thereto signing last in time;

 

1.2.5 “Applicable Pricing Supplement” means the Pricing Supplement relating to the Tranche of Notes in question;

 

1.2.6 “Arranger” means Absa Capital;

 

Page 4


1.2.7 “Business Day” means any day other than a Saturday, Sunday or public holiday as gazetted by the government of the Republic of South Africa;

 

1.2.8 “Calculation Agent” means Absa Capital or in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, such other person specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.9 “Central Depository” means Strate Limited (Registration Number 1998/022242/06), or its nominees, operating as a central securities depository duly licensed as such in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004, or any successor thereto or any additional or alternate depository approved by the Issuer;

 

1.2.10 “Dealers” means Absa Capital and Nedbank Capital and/or any New Dealer and excludes any entity whose appointment has been terminated pursuant to clause 11;

 

1.2.11 “Dealer Accession Letter” means –

 

1.2.11.1 in respect of the appointment of a New Dealer for the duration of the Programme, the Dealer Accession Letter substantially in the form set out in Part I of Appendix C hereto; and

 

1.2.11.2 in respect of the appointment of a New Dealer for one or more particular Tranches of Notes under the Programme, the Dealer Accession Letter substantially in the form set out in Part III of Appendix C hereto;

 

1.2.12 “Financial Exchange” means the bond market of the JSE or its successor and any other or future exchange or exchanges duly licensed to operate as such in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004, on which any Notes are listed;

 

1.2.13 JSE ” means the JSE Limited (Registration Number 2005/022939/06), a licensed financial exchange in terms of the Securities Services Act or any exchange which operates as a successor exchange to the JSE, or, where the context so requires, such other or further exchange or exchanges on which the Notes are listed;

 

LOGO

 

Page 5


1.2.14 “Gold Fields” means Gold Fields Limited (registration number 1968/04880/06);

 

1.2.15 “Guarantee” means the unconditional and irrevocable guarantee given by each Guarantor, jointly and severally, to all Noteholders;

 

1.2.16 “Guarantors” means each of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, Registration Number 2002/031431/07, Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in the Republic of South Africa, Registration Number 1959/003209/06, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, Registration Number 184982 and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, Registration Number 651406;

 

1.2.17 “Initial Documentation List” means the list of documents set out in Appendix A to this Agreement;

 

1.2.18 “Issuer” means Gold Fields, the issuer of Notes under the Programme;

 

1.2.19 “Issue Date” means, in respect of any Note, the date set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the issue date in respect of that Note;

 

1.2.20 “Lead Manager” means, in relation to any syndicated issue, the person(s) defined as the lead manager in the applicable Subscription Agreement;

 

1.2.21 “Letter of Appointment” means –

 

1.2.21.1 in respect of the appointment of a New Dealer for the duration of the Programme, the Letter of Appointment substantially in the form set out in Part II of Appendix C hereto;

 

1.2.21.2 in respect of the appointment of a New Dealer for one or more particular Tranches of Notes under the Programme, the Letter of Appointment substantially in the form set out in Part IV of Appendix C hereto;

 

LOGO

 

Page 6


1.2.22 “Material Group Company” means the Issuer, the Guarantors and any Material Subsidiary of the Issuer whose affairs are required to be consolidated in the audited financial statements of the Issuer;

 

1.2.23 “Nedbank Capital” means Nedbank Capital, a division of Nedbank Limited, Registration Number 1951/000009/06, a registered bank and public company with limited liability incorporated in the Republic of South Africa;

 

1.2.24 “New Dealer” means any entity appointed as an additional Dealer for the duration of the Programme or for a particular Tranche of Notes, whether pursuant to clause 12 or pursuant to a Subscription Agreement;

 

1.2.25 “Noteholders” means the holders of the Registered Notes (as recorded in the Register kept by the Transfer Agent in terms of the Terms and Conditions);

 

1.2.26 “Notes” means the notes issued or to be issued by the Issuer under the Programme pursuant to this Agreement, which Notes:

 

1.2.26.1 may be represented by a Certificate; or

 

1.2.26.2 may be issued in uncertificated format;

 

1.2.27 “Participants” means depository institutions accepted by the Central Depository as participants in terms of the Securities Services Act, 2004;

 

1.2.28 “Paying Agent” means Absa Capital, unless the Issuer elects to appoint, in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, to act as Paying Agent itself or to appoint another entity as Paying Agent, in which event that other entity, upon execution of an accession letter in the form of Appendix C to the Agency Agreement, shall act as Paying Agent in respect of that Tranche or Series of Notes;

 

1.2.29 “Pricing Supplement” means the pricing supplement issued in relation to each Tranche of Notes (substantially in the form set out in the Programme Memorandum) as a supplement to the Programme Memorandum and giving details of that particular Tranche;

 

LOGO

 

Page 7


1.2.30 “Procedures Memorandum” means the Operating and Procedures Memorandum, as amended or varied from time to time (whether in respect of a particular Tranche or generally) and setting out the administrative procedures and guidelines in connection with the issue and settlement of the Notes;

 

1.2.31 “Programme” means the ZAR10,000,000,000 Domestic Medium Term Note Programme established by the Programme Memorandum;

 

1.2.32 “Programme Amount” means the aggregate nominal amount of the Programme being, ZAR10,000,000,000 or any increase thereto in accordance with clause 13;

 

1.2.33 “Programme Memorandum” means the revised Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009 relating to the Notes prepared in connection with the Programme, as revised, supplemented, amended or updated from time to time by the Issuer in accordance with clause 6.2 hereof and, in relation to each Tranche of Notes, by the Pricing Supplement relating to such Tranche and such other documents as are from time to time incorporated therein by reference, except that for the purpose of clause 4.2 in respect of each Agreement Date and Issue Date, the Programme Memorandum means the Programme Memorandum as at the Agreement Date and the Issue Date but not including any subsequent revision, supplement or amendment thereto;

 

1.2.34 “Register” means the register maintained by the Transfer Agent in terms of Condition 12 of the Terms and Conditions;

 

1.2.35 “Registered Note” means a Note issued in registered form and transferable in accordance with Condition 13.1 of the Terms and Conditions and which may include Uncertificated Notes;

 

1.2.36 “Relevant Dealer” shall, in relation to any Note, be references to the Dealer or Dealers with whom the Issuer has agreed the issue of Notes;

 

LOGO

 

Page 8


1.2.37 Relevant Financial Exchange ” shall, in relation to any Notes, be references to the Financial Exchange, stock exchange or Financial Exchanges or stock exchanges on which such Notes are from time to time, or are intended to be, listed, as disclosed in the Applicable Pricing Supplement;

 

1.2.38 “Series” means a Tranche of Notes together with any further Tranche or Tranches of Notes which are: (i) expressed to be consolidated and form a single series; and (ii) identical in all respects, save as to their respective Issue Dates, Interest Commencement Dates and/or Issue Prices (including as to listing) from the date on which such consolidation is expressed to take effect and the expressions “Notes of the relevant series” and “holders of Notes of the relevant series” and related expressions shall be construed accordingly;

 

1.2.39 “Settlement Agent” means a Participant approved by the JSE or any other Relevant Financial Exchange to perform electronic net settlement of both funds and scrip on behalf of market participants;

 

1.2.40 “Sponsoring Member” means Absa Capital, or such other Sponsoring Member as the Issuer may from time to time appoint for the purposes of liaising with the Relevant Financial Exchange;

 

1.2.41 “Sub-register” means a record of uncertificated securities administered and maintained by a Participant;

 

1.2.42 “Subscription Agreement” means an agreement (by whatever name called) in or substantially in the form set out in Appendix E hereto or such other form as may be agreed between the Issuer and the Lead Manager which agreement shall be supplemental to this Agreement;

 

1.2.43 “Subsidiary” means a subsidiary company as defined in Section 1(3) of the Companies Act, 1973;

 

1.2.44 “Terms and Conditions” means the terms and conditions in accordance with which the Notes will be issued, and which may be endorsed on or incorporated by reference into the Certificates representing the Note, such Terms and Conditions being in or substantially in the form set out in the Programme Memorandum as modified and/or supplemented by the Pricing Supplement applicable to the Notes;

 

LOGO

 

Page 9


1.2.45 “Tranche” means Notes which are identical in all respects (including as to listing) and are issued in a single issue;

 

1.2.46 “Transfer Agent” means Absa Capital unless the Issuer elects to appoint, in relation to a particular Tranche or Series of Notes, to act as Transfer Agent itself or to appoint another entity as Transfer Agent in accordance with the Agency Agreement, in which event that other entity on execution of an accession letter substantially in the form of Appendix A of the Agency Agreement shall act as Transfer Agent in respect of that Tranche or Series of Notes;

 

1.2.47 “Uncertificated Note” means a note which is not represented by any certificate or written instrument as contemplated in the Securities Services Act, 2004;

 

1.2.48 “VAT” means Value Added Tax in accordance with the Value Added Tax Act, 1991; and

 

1.2.49 “ZAR” and “Rand” means the lawful currency of the Republic of South Africa, being South African Rand, or any successor currency.

 

1.3 When any number of days is prescribed in this Agreement, same shall be reckoned inclusively of the first and exclusively of the last day unless the last day falls on a day which is not a Business Day, in which case the last day shall be the immediately following Business Day.

 

1.4 In the event that the day for payment of any amount due in terms of this Agreement should fall on a day which is not a Business Day, then the relevant date for payment shall be the following Business Day unless stated otherwise in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

1.5 Where figures are referred to in numerals and in words, if there is any conflict between the two, the words shall prevail.

 

1.6

Where any term is defined within the context of any particular clause in this Agreement, the term so defined, unless it is clear from the clause in

 

LOGO

 

Page 10


 

question that the term so defined has limited application to the relevant clause, shall bear the same meaning as ascribed to it for all purposes in terms of this Agreement, notwithstanding that that term has not been defined in this interpretation clause.

 

1.7 The use of the word “including” followed by a specific example or examples shall not be construed as limiting the meaning of the general wording preceding it and the eiusdem generis rule shall not be applied in the interpretation of such general wording or such specific example or examples.

 

1.8 Any reference to a statute in this Agreement is to that statute as at the signature date of this Agreement and as amended or re-enacted from time to time and shall include any succeeding statute.

 

1.9 The rule of construction that, in the event of ambiguity, the contract shall be interpreted against the party responsible for the drafting or preparation of the Agreement, shall not apply.

 

1.10 The expiration or termination of this Agreement shall not affect such of the provisions of this Agreement as expressly provide that they will operate after any such expiration or termination or which of necessity must continue to have effect after such expiration or termination, notwithstanding that the clauses themselves do not expressly provide for this.

 

1.11 In this Agreement, clause headings are inserted for convenience and ease of reference only and shall not affect the interpretation of this Agreement.

 

1.12 All references in this Agreement to an agreement, instrument or other document (including this Agreement, the Agency Agreement, the Programme Memorandum, any Series of Notes and any Terms and Conditions appertaining thereto) shall be construed as a reference to that agreement, instrument or document as the same may be amended, modified, varied, supplemented, restated, superseded, supplemented, replaced or novated from time to time.

 

1.13 Words denoting the singular number only shall include the plural number also and vice versa ; words denoting any one gender only shall include the other genders also; and words denoting persons only shall include firms and corporations and vice versa .

 

LOGO

 

Page 11


2 INTRODUCTION

 

2.1 On 6 April 2009, the Issuer, Absa Capital and Nedbank Capital executed a Programme Agreement relating to the Arranger and Dealers, the issue of and subscription for Notes under the Programme (the “ Previous Agreement ”). The Issuer wishes to amend the provisions of the Previous Agreement. Accordingly, with effect from the date of this Agreement, this Agreement constitutes an amendment and restatement of the Previous Agreement; provided that such amendment and restatement shall not affect the rights of any party under the Previous Agreement in existence immediately prior to the date of this Agreement.

 

2.2 The Issuer has executed the Agency Agreement recording certain matters relating to the Notes, the Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent.

 

2.3 The Agency Agreement sets out provisions relating, inter alia , to the Notes, payments thereunder and documentation relating to the issue and payment of Notes and the role of the Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent under the Programme.

 

2.4 In addition to the matters recorded in the Agency Agreement, the Issuer wishes to record herein certain matters relating to the Arranger and Dealers, the issue of and subscription for the Notes under the Programme and attach pro forma documents relating to the Programme.

 

3 AGREEMENTS TO ISSUE AND SUBSCRIBE

 

3.1 Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the Issuer may from time to time agree in writing with any Dealer to issue, and any Dealer may agree in writing, to subscribe for, or to procure the subscription for, Notes in which case the Issuer shall, subject to the provisions of clause 4.2 below, be obliged to issue such Notes and such Dealer shall be obliged to subscribe for or procure the subscription for such Notes on the terms and conditions so agreed between the Issuer and such Dealer.

 

LOGO

 

Page 12


3.2 Unless otherwise agreed in writing between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer, which specific agreement will have to occur in regard to the procedures of issue of Notes with a duration of less than one year, on each occasion upon which the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer agree on the terms of the issue of and subscription for one or more Registered Notes to be listed on a Financial Exchange and/or held in a central securities depository -

 

3.2.1 in the case of Notes to be listed on the bond market of the JSE or, if unlisted, still held in the Central Depository, the Issuer shall cause such Notes in the form of a Global Certificate to be executed, issued and delivered, at least 2 (two) Business Days prior to the Issue Date, to its Settlement Agent who will in turn deliver such Notes to or procure that such Notes are lodged and immobilised in the Central Depository, which shall hold the Notes to the order of the Issuer, until the securities account(s) with the relevant Participants (as specified by the Relevant Dealer) is/are credited with such Notes on the agreed Issue Date against payment therefor, as described in the Procedures Memorandum;

 

3.2.2 in respect of Notes to be listed on a Financial Exchange other than the bond market of the JSE, the Issuer shall cause such Notes in the form of a Certificate or such other documents as may be required for the dematerialisation, immobilisation or registration of the Notes to be delivered to the relevant central securities depository;

 

3.2.3 in respect of Uncertificated Notes, no document of title shall be required to be delivered to any party;

 

3.2.4 no later than 2 (two) Business Days prior to the Issue Date, the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer will provide their respective Settlement Agents with delivery and receipt instructions for the transfer of Notes and payment therefor as described in the Procedures Memorandum, provided that Uncertificated Notes will be issued, transferred and settled in accordance with the rules of the Central Depository; and

 

3.2.5

on the Issue Date, Beneficial Interest(s) in the Notes will be transferred to the Relevant Dealer or to the investors procured by the Relevant

 

LOGO

 

Page 13


 

Dealer through their Settlement Agents, and payments therefor will be made for the account of the Issuer, as described in the Procedures Memorandum.

 

3.3 Where more than one Dealer has agreed to subscribe for, or procure the subscription for, a particular Tranche of Notes pursuant to this clause, unless otherwise agreed in writing, between the Issuer and such Dealers, the obligations of such Dealers so to (i) subscribe and pay for the Notes shall be several and not joint and (ii) the obligations of such Dealers to procure the subscription and payment for the Notes shall be joint and several.

 

3.4 Where the Issuer agrees in writing, with two or more Dealers to issue, and such Dealers agree in writing, to subscribe for, or procure the subscription for, Notes on a syndicated basis, the Issuer shall enter into a Subscription Agreement with such Dealers. The Issuer may also enter into a Subscription Agreement with one Dealer only.

 

3.5 The procedures which apply for the purposes of non-syndicated issues are set out in Part 1 of Annexe A to the Procedures Memorandum. Such procedures may, in respect of any such issue, be varied, in writing, from time to time by agreement between the Issuer, the Relevant Dealer, the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent. The procedures which apply for the purposes of syndicated issues are set out in Part 2 of Annexe A to the Procedures Memorandum. Such procedures may also, in respect of any such issue, be varied, in writing, from time to time by agreement between the Issuer, the Relevant Dealer, the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent.

 

3.6 In respect of Uncertificated Notes -

 

3.6.1 the Issuer shall cause such Notes to be issued as Uncertificated Notes, and delivered, on the Issue Date, to the relevant Participant (as specified by the Relevant Dealer); and

 

3.6.2

the Issuer and the Transfer Agent shall provide the Participant with instruction of the manner to account to the person on whose behalf such

 

LOGO

 

Page 14


 

Uncertificated Notes are held. Such manner of accountability shall set out the number and identity of the Uncertificated Notes held by the Participant on such person’s behalf and shall comply with the requirements of the Relevant Financial Exchange.

 

4 CONDITIONS OF ISSUE

 

4.1 First Issue

The Arranger shall, as soon as practicable, circulate to each Dealer all of the documents and confirmations described in the Initial Documentation List after such documents and confirmations have been provided to the Arranger by the Issuer save for item 7 (the printed Programme Memorandum), which will be provided directly to the Dealers by the Issuer. Before the Issuer reaches its first agreement with any Relevant Dealer for the issue of, the subscription or procuring the subscription for the first Tranche of Notes under the Programme, the Relevant Dealer shall have received, and found reasonably satisfactory, all of the documents and confirmations described in the Initial Documentation List. In the absence of any notification to the contrary within 10 (ten) Business Days of receipt by the Relevant Dealer(s) of the documents and confirmations described in the Initial Documentation List, the Arranger and the Relevant Dealer(s) shall be deemed to consider such documents and confirmations satisfactory.

 

4.2 Each issue

 

4.2.1 The obligations of a Relevant Dealer under any agreement for the issue of, the subscription or procuring the subscription for Notes made pursuant to clause 3 are conditional upon -

 

4.2.1.1 the representations and warranties set out in clause 5, being true, accurate and correct, in each case as if such representations and warranties were repeated on the relevant Issue Date;

 

4.2.1.2 there being no breach of any of the material obligations of the Issuer or the Guarantors under this Agreement, the Programme Memorandum, any Notes, the Guarantee or the Agency Agreement having occurred prior to Issue Date, which has not been waived in writing by the Relevant Dealer or remedied by the Issuer or the Guarantors, as the case may be, on or prior to the Issue Date;

 

LOGO

 

Page 15


4.2.1.3 subject to clause 13, the aggregate nominal amount of the Notes to be issued pursuant to such agreement, when added to the aggregate nominal amount of all Notes Outstanding on the Issue Date (excluding for this purpose Notes due to be redeemed on such Issue Date) not exceeding the Programme Amount;

 

4.2.1.4 if appropriate, the Relevant Financial Exchange having agreed to list such Notes;

 

4.2.1.5 no meeting of the holders of Notes to consider matters which might in the reasonable opinion of the Relevant Dealer be considered to be material in the context of the issue of the Notes to be issued pursuant to such agreement, having been duly convened but not yet held or, if held but adjourned, the adjourned meeting having not been held and the Issuer not being aware of any circumstances which are likely to lead to the convening of such a meeting;

 

4.2.1.6 between the Agreement Date and the Issue Date for such Notes there having been, in the reasonable opinion of the Relevant Dealer, no such change in national or international financial, political or economic conditions or currency exchange rates or exchange controls or other calamity or emergency as would, in the reasonable opinion of the Relevant Dealer, be likely to prejudice materially the success of the offering and distribution of the Notes to be issued pursuant to such agreement or dealings in such Notes in the secondary market or result in a substantial deterioration in the price and/or the value of such Notes;

 

4.2.1.7

there having been, between the Agreement Date and the Issue Date, no withdrawal (save in the case of the replacement of one rating by another rating given by another recognised statistical rating organisation (“ Rating Agency ”)), downgrading, nor any public notice of any intended or potential withdrawal or downgrading, of any rating given by a Rating Agency or the placing on “Creditwatch” with

 

LOGO

 

Page 16


 

negative implications or similar publication for formal review by the relevant Rating Agency as shall have issued a rating solicited by the Issuer in connection with the Issuer or the Notes. For the avoidance of doubt, only a rating agency solicited by the Issuer that has given a rating in respect of the Issuer may place the Issuer on “Creditwatch”;

 

4.2.1.8 the forms of the Pricing Supplement, the Global Certificate(s) and the Individual Certificates, in relation to the relevant Tranche and the relevant settlement procedures having been agreed by the Issuer, the Relevant Dealer and the Transfer Agent;

 

4.2.1.9 any calculations or determinations which are required by the relevant Terms and Conditions to have been made prior to the Issue Date having been duly made;

 

4.2.1.10 all consents, approvals, authorisations, orders and clearances of all regulatory authorities required by the Issuer or the Guarantors, for, or in connection with, the creation and offering of the Notes to be issued pursuant to such agreement under the Programme, the execution and issue of, and compliance by the Issuer with the terms of, the Notes issued under the Programme and the entry into, execution and delivery of, and compliance by the Issuer and the Guarantors with the terms of, this Agreement, the Guarantee, any Subscription Agreement and the Agency Agreement having been obtained and being in full force and effect; and

 

4.2.1.11 the Issuer having delivered to the Relevant Dealer all such opinions, certificates, documents and information reasonably requested by such Dealer in a form reasonably satisfactory to such Dealer prior to the Issue Date.

 

4.2.2 In relation to each issue of Notes, the obligations of a Relevant Dealer under any agreement for the issue of, the subscription or procuring the subscription for such Notes made pursuant to clause 3, shall be conditional upon the fulfilment of the conditions recorded in 4.2.1.

 

LOGO

 

Page 17


4.2.3 If, following an Agreement Date and before the relevant Issue Date, the Issuer becomes aware that the conditions specified in this clause 4.2 will not be satisfied in relation to the relevant Tranche, the Issuer shall forthwith notify the Relevant Dealer in writing to this effect giving full details thereof. In addition, the Issuer shall take such steps as may reasonably be requested by the Arranger and/or the Relevant Dealer, subject to the agreement of the Issuer to remedy and/or publicise the same. In such circumstances the Relevant Dealer shall be entitled by notice to the Issuer to be released and discharged from its obligations under the agreement for the issue of and subscription for Notes reached under clause 3.1. In the event that the Relevant Dealer gives notice as aforesaid, the Issuer shall, remain liable (under the terms of the relevant agreement) for the reasonable expenses of the Relevant Dealer in respect of such agreement (incurred prior to or in connection with such termination), unless otherwise agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer, but the Relevant Dealer shall not be entitled to any fee in respect of the placing of such Tranches of Notes.

 

4.3 Waiver

Any Dealer, on behalf of itself only, may by notice in writing to the Issuer waive any of the conditions precedent contained in clauses 4.1 and 4.2 (save for the conditions precedent contained in clauses 4.2.1.3 and 4.2.1.10) insofar as they relate to an issue of Notes to that Dealer or an investor procured by that Dealer.

 

4.4 Updating of legal opinions and further legal opinions

 

4.4.1 The Issuer shall be obliged -

 

4.4.1.1 prior to the first issue of Notes by the Issuer occurring;

 

4.4.1.2 in relation to each Tranche which is subscribed for or the subscription for which is procured pursuant to a Subscription Agreement, provided that the Arranger and the Dealers may issue a waiver letter in respect of this requirement in its/their sole discretion and, in the ordinary course will waive such requirement for commercial paper with a maturity of 1 (one) year or less issued in any 12 (twelve) month cycle;

 

LOGO

 

Page 18


and

 

4.4.1.3 on such other occasions as the Arranger or a Dealer reasonably requests;

 

4.4.1.4 to procure that further legal opinions in such form and with such content as the Arranger and/or the Dealers may reasonably require are delivered, at the expense of the Issuer, to -

 

4.4.1.4.1 the Arranger and the Dealers; or

 

4.4.1.4.2 (as the case may be) the Relevant Dealer,

from legal advisers (approved by the Arranger and the Dealers and the Relevant Dealer) in the Republic of South Africa or other relevant jurisdiction.

 

4.4.2 If at or prior to the time of any agreement to issue and subscribe for or procure the subscription for Notes under clause 3.1 such a request is made with respect to the Notes to be issued, the receipt of the relevant opinion or opinions in a form satisfactory to the Arranger or Dealers or (as the case may be), the Relevant Dealer shall be a further condition precedent to the issue of those Notes.

 

4.5 Determination in respect of Notes Outstanding

For the purposes of clause 4.2.1.3 -

 

4.5.1 the Rand equivalent of a Tranche of Notes denominated in another currency shall be determined, at or about the relevant Issue Date, on the basis of the spot rate at such time for the sale of such Rand amount against the purchase of such currency or unit of account in the Johannesburg inter-bank foreign exchange markets, as quoted by any leading bank selected by the Issuer;

 

4.5.2 the amount of Indexed Notes and Partly Paid Notes shall be calculated by reference to the nominal amount of such Notes (in the case of Partly Paid Notes, regardless of the amount of the subscription price paid); and

 

LOGO

 

Page 19


4.5.3 the amount of Zero Coupon Notes and other Notes issued at a discount or a premium shall be calculated by reference to the net proceeds received or to be received by the Issuer for the relevant issue.

 

5 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

5.1 As at the date of this Agreement, the Issuer hereby represents and warrants to the Arranger and the Dealers as follows:

 

5.1.1 that the Issuer is duly incorporated and validly existing under the laws of the Republic of South Africa and as such has full power and capacity to carry on its business as described in the Programme Memorandum and is lawfully qualified to do business in those jurisdictions in which business is conducted by it;

 

5.1.2 that each Guarantor is duly incorporated and validly existing under the laws of the Republic of South Africa or the British Virgin Islands, as the case may be, and as such has full power and capacity to carry on its business and is lawfully qualified to do business in those jurisdictions in which business is conducted by it;

 

5.1.3 that the execution and implementation by the Issuer of this Agreement, the Operating and Procedures Memorandum, any Subscription Agreement, the Agency Agreement and any other agreement relevant to the establishment of the Programme and the issue of the Notes have been duly authorised by the Issuer and that, subject to any suspensive conditions or conditions precedent to which it may be subject, when executed and implemented by the Issuer, such agreements constitute and will constitute valid, legally binding and, subject to any applicable laws from time to time in effect relating to liquidation, insolvency, solvent reorganisation or analogous circumstances or proceedings in any jurisdiction and other laws or other legal procedures affecting generally the enforcement of creditors’ rights, enforceable obligations of the Issuer;

 

5.1.4

that the execution and implementation by each Guarantor of the Guarantee and any other agreement relevant to the establishment of the

 

LOGO

 

Page 20


 

Programme and the issue of the Notes and to which such Guarantor is a party, have been duly authorised by such Guarantor and that, subject to any suspensive conditions or conditions precedent to which it may be subject, when executed and implemented by such Guarantor, such agreements constitute and will constitute valid, legally binding and, subject to any applicable laws from time to time in effect relating to liquidation, insolvency, solvent reorganisation or analogous circumstances or proceedings in any jurisdiction and other laws or other legal procedures affecting generally the enforcement of creditors’ rights, enforceable obligations of such Guarantor;

 

5.1.5 that the establishment of the Programme and the issue of Notes by the Issuer has been duly authorised by the Issuer and, subject to any applicable laws from time to time in effect relating to liquidation, insolvency, solvent reorganisation or analogous circumstances or proceedings in any jurisdiction and other laws or other legal procedures affecting generally the enforcement of creditors’ rights, when issued each Note will constitute legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations of the Issuer;

 

5.1.6 that no further action, condition or thing is required to be taken, fulfilled or done by or on behalf of the Issuer or the Guarantors (including without limitation the further obtaining of any consent, approvals, authorisations, orders, qualifications or licence or the making of any filing or registration) for or in connection with the execution, issue and offering of any Notes by the Issuer under the Programme, or the execution, delivery and compliance by the Issuer with the terms of this Agreement, any Subscription Agreement, the Agency Agreement, any Notes and/or the performance of the terms of any Notes or the execution, delivery and compliance by the Guarantors with the terms of the Guarantee;

 

5.1.7

that the execution and implementation of this Agreement, the Operating and Procedures Memorandum, the Guarantee, any Subscription Agreement and the Agency Agreement, the issue, offering and distribution of any Notes, the carrying out of the other transactions contemplated by this Agreement, the Operating and Procedures

 

LOGO

 

Page 21


 

Memorandum, any Subscription Agreement and/or the Agency Agreement and compliance with the terms thereof do not and will not, to the best of the Issuer’s knowledge and belief:

 

5.1.7.1 conflict with or result in a breach in any material respect of any of the terms or provisions of, or constitute a default under, documents constituting the Issuer or any Guarantor, or of any agreement or instrument to which the Issuer or a Guarantor is a party or by which it or any of its properties is bound, in a manner which would have a material adverse effect on the Issuer or such Guarantor or the Issuer’s obligations under the Terms and Conditions as well as this Agreement or such Guarantor’s obligations under the Guarantee; or

 

5.1.7.2 infringe, in any material respect, any existing applicable law, rule, regulation, judgment, order or decree of the government of the Republic of South Africa or the British Virgin Islands, as the case may be, or governmental body or court in South Africa or the British Virgin Islands, as the case may be;

 

5.1.8 that the Programme Memorandum contains all information which is material in the context of the Programme and which is necessary to enable the Noteholders to ascertain the nature of the financial and commercial risk in respect of the Notes;

 

5.1.9 that the information contained in the Programme Memorandum is true and accurate in all material respects and is not misleading in any material respect, that the opinions and intentions of the Issuer expressed therein are honestly held and that the Issuer has made all reasonable enquiries to ascertain all facts material for the purposes aforesaid;

 

5.1.10 that the most recently published audited annual financial statements, and the notes thereto, of the Issuer were prepared in accordance with the requirements of law and with international financial reporting standards (“ IFRS ”) consistently applied and they fairly present the financial position of the Issuer, as at the date to which they were prepared (the “ relevant date ”) and of the results of the operations of the Issuer in respect of the periods for which they were prepared;

 

LOGO

 

Page 22


5.1.11 that there has been no material adverse change or any development involving a prospective material adverse change in the capital stock, long term debt, business properties, management or operations of the Issuer of which the Issuer is or might reasonably be expected to be aware since the date of the most recently published audited financial statements except as disclosed in the Programme Memorandum;

 

5.1.12 that there are no litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings involving the Issuer (and, so far as the Issuer is aware, no such proceedings are pending, threatened or contemplated) which, if determined adversely to the Issuer could individually or in the aggregate have a material adverse effect on the condition (financial or otherwise) or operations of the Issuer or the ability of the Issuer to comply with or perform its obligations under the terms of any Notes, this Agreement, any Subscription Agreement and/or the Agency Agreement, save as disclosed in the Programme Memorandum;

 

5.1.13 save as disclosed in the Programme Memorandum, that no Event of Default (as defined in the Programme Memorandum) or event which with the giving of notice, the expiry of any grace period, the making of any determination, or any combination thereof will likely constitute an Event of Default is subsisting and no event has occurred which will likely constitute (after an issue of Notes) an Event of Default thereunder or which with the giving of notice, the expiry of any grace period, the making of any determination, or any combination thereof will likely (after an issue of Notes) constitute such an Event of Default;

 

5.1.14 that, except as set forth in the Programme Memorandum, all amounts payable by the Issuer in respect of the Notes shall be made free and clear of and without withholding or deduction for or on account of any present or future taxes, duties, assessments or governmental charges of whatever nature imposed or levied by or on behalf of the Republic of South Africa or any political sub-division thereof or authority or agency therein or thereof having power to tax;

 

LOGO

 

Page 23


5.1.15 that all consents, approvals, authorisations, orders and clearances of all regulatory authorities required:

 

5.1.15.1 by the Issuer, for, or in connection with, the creation and offering of Notes under the Programme, the execution and issue of, and compliance by the Issuer with the terms of, the Notes issued under the Programme and the entry into, execution and implementation of, and compliance with the terms of this Agreement, and any Subscription Agreement to be concluded and the Agency Agreement; and

 

5.1.15.2 by each Guarantor, for, or in connection with, the entry into, execution and implementation of, and compliance with the terms of the Guarantee,

have been obtained and are in full force and effect;

 

5.1.16 that none of the Issuer, its affiliates (as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act) or any persons acting on any of their behalf has engaged or will engage in any “directed selling efforts” in the U.S. (as defined in Regulation S under the Securities Act) in respect of the Notes;

 

5.1.17 that the Issuer (i) is a “foreign issuer” (as such term is defined in Regulation S) and (ii) reasonably believes that there is no “substantial U.S. market interest” (as such term is defined in Regulation S) in the Notes;

 

5.1.18 that the Issuer is not, and as a result of any offer and sale of Notes will not be, an “investment company” under and as such term is defined in, the U.S. Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “ Investment Company Act ”);

 

5.1.19 that for so long as any Notes are “restricted securities” within the meaning of Rule 144(a)(3) under the Securities Act, the Issuer will not become an “open-end company”, “unit investment trust” or “face-amount certificate company”, as such terms are defined in, and that is or is required to be registered under Section 8 of, the Investment Company Act;

 

5.1.20

that neither the Issuer, nor any of its affiliates (as defined in Rule 501(b) of Regulation D), nor any person acting on its or their behalf will, directly

 

LOGO

 

Page 24


 

or indirectly, make offers or sales of any security, or solicit offers to buy, or otherwise negotiate in respect of, any security, under circumstances that would require the registration of the Notes under the Securities Act;

 

5.1.21 to the best of its knowledge and belief, neither the Issuer, any Guarantor, any other Material Group Company nor any of their respective assets are entitled to immunity from suit, execution, attachment or other legal process in any jurisdiction;

 

5.1.22 that all Notes will rank as described in Condition 5 of the Terms and Conditions; and

 

5.1.23 that the Guarantee will rank as described in Condition 23 of the Terms and Conditions.

 

5.2 As at the date of this Agreement, the Issuer hereby represents, warrants and undertakes to the Dealers that the Issuer, its affiliates or any person acting on its behalf, will comply, in all respects, with any selling restrictions imposed and/or all applicable laws related to the selling of the Notes to which it may be subject in relevant jurisdiction(s).

 

5.3 With regard to each issue of Notes under the Programme, the Issuer shall be deemed to repeat the representations and warranties and agreements contained in clause 5.1 as at:

 

5.3.1 the Agreement Date for such Notes (any agreement on such Agreement Date being deemed to have been made on the basis of, and in reliance on, such warranties and agreements);

 

5.3.2 the Issue Date of such Notes;

 

5.3.3 each date on which the Programme Memorandum is revised, supplemented or amended or a supplementary Programme Memorandum is published; and

 

5.3.4 each date on which the aggregate nominal amount of the Programme is increased in accordance with clause 13;

as if such representations and warranties were repeated on each such date with reference to the then existing facts and circumstances and taking into account the issue of such Notes.

 

LOGO

 

Page 25


5.4 The representations and warranties and agreements contained in this clause 5 and the indemnities contained in clause 7 shall apply in respect of the relevant dates at which they are warranted and represented except in relation to an express waiver in relation to any Tranche of Notes, in full force and effect notwithstanding the failure of the Issuer to satisfy any condition precedent contemplated in this Agreement, any investigation by or on behalf of the Arranger or Dealers or completion of the subscription for and/or issue of Notes.

 

6 UNDERTAKINGS OF THE ISSUER

 

6.1 Notification of material developments

 

6.1.1 The Issuer shall, promptly after becoming aware of the occurrence thereof, notify the Arranger and each Dealer in writing of -

 

6.1.1.1 any Event of Default or any condition, event or act which, with the giving of notice, the expiry of any applicable grace period, the making of any determination or any combination thereof will likely constitute an Event of Default or any breach of the representations and warranties or undertakings contained in this Agreement or the Agency Agreement; and

 

6.1.1.2 any development adversely affecting any Material Group Company which is material in the context of the Programme or any issue of Notes thereunder.

 

6.1.2 In addition, the Issuer shall take steps as may reasonably be requested by the Arranger and/or any Dealer, and agreed to by the Issuer, to remedy and/or publicise any of the events as referred to in clause 6.1.1.

 

6.1.3 Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, the Issuer shall from time to time promptly furnish to the Arranger and each Dealer such financial information, public announcements and/or media releases relating to the Issuer relevant in the context of the issue of Notes under the Programme, as the Arranger and each Dealer may reasonably request in writing.

 

LOGO

 

Page 26


6.1.4 The Issuer will at all times ensure, and in respect of the Guarantors procure, that all necessary action is taken and all necessary conditions are fulfilled (including, without limitation, the obtaining of all necessary consents) so that it and the Guarantors may lawfully comply with their respective obligations under the Notes, this Agreement, any Subscription Agreement, the Guarantee and the Agency Agreement and, further, so that it may comply with any applicable laws, regulations and guidelines from time to time promulgated by any governmental and regulatory authorities relevant in the context of the issue of Notes under the Programme.

 

6.2 Updating of Programme Memorandum

 

6.2.1 The Issuer shall, at the cost of the Issuer, update or amend the Programme Memorandum (following consultation with the Arranger which Arranger will consult with the Dealers) as required by applicable laws and/or regulation, by the publication of a new Programme Memorandum or a supplement thereto, in a form approved by the Arranger and the Dealers in their reasonable discretion where there has been -

 

6.2.1.1 an adverse change in the condition of the capital stock, long term debt, business properties, management or operations of the Issuer which is material in the context of the Programme or the issue of any Notes and which is not then reflected in the Programme Memorandum; or

 

6.2.1.2 if an event occurs and as a result thereof the Programme Memorandum -

 

6.2.1.2.1 includes a statement of fact which is not true and accurate in all material respects;

 

6.2.1.2.2 omits any fact, the omission of which would make misleading in any material respect any statement therein contained; or

 

LOGO

 

Page 27


6.2.1.2.3 is required, in the sole and absolute discretion of the Issuer, to be amended or supplemented for any other reason,

provided that no new Programme Memorandum or supplement to the Programme Memorandum, as the case may be, is required in respect of the Issuer’s annual financial statements if such annual financial statements are incorporated by reference into the Programme Memorandum and such annual financial statements are submitted to the JSE within 6 (six) months after the financial year end of the Issuer.

 

6.2.2 Upon the publication of a revised Programme Memorandum or a supplement to the Programme Memorandum, the Issuer shall, at the cost of the Issuer, promptly supply to the Arranger, each Dealer and the Transfer Agent such number of copies of that revised Programme Memorandum or supplement as the Arranger, each Dealer or the Transfer Agent (as the case may be) may reasonably request.

 

6.2.3 The Programme Memorandum shall, as specified therein, be deemed to incorporate by reference the most recent publicly available annual audited financial statements of the Issuer. Upon any new financial statements being incorporated in the Programme Memorandum as aforesaid, the Issuer shall, at the cost of the Issuer, promptly supply to the Arranger, each Dealer and the Transfer Agent one copy of such financial statements and thereafter such other number of copies as the Arranger, each Dealer or the Transfer Agent (as the case may be) may reasonably request that are available to the public as soon as those financial statements are available.

 

6.2.4 Until the Arranger or a Dealer receives the copies of the revised Programme Memorandum or supplement which may become due in terms of clause 6.2.1 or of the financial statements which may become due in terms of clause 6.2.3, the definition of “Programme Memorandum” in clause 1.2 shall, in relation to the Arranger or such Dealer, mean the Programme Memorandum prior to the receipt by the Arranger or such Dealer of such revised Programme Memorandum or supplement or such financial statements.

 

LOGO

 

Page 28


6.3 Listing

 

6.3.1 Where the Notes are to be listed, the Issuer shall cause an application to be made for the Notes to be listed on the Relevant Financial Exchange.

 

6.3.2 The Issuer confirms that it has authorised the Sponsoring Member to make or cause to be made, and the Sponsoring Member shall make or cause to be made, an application on behalf and at the expense of the Issuer for the Programme to be registered on the bond market of the JSE. Upon agreement to issue Notes being reached under clause 3, where such Notes are to be listed, the Issuer will use its reasonable endeavours to obtain and, whilst any such Notes are Outstanding, maintain such listing. If it is unable to do so, having used its reasonable endeavours, or if the maintenance of such listing becomes unduly onerous, the Issuer will instead use its reasonable endeavours to promptly obtain and maintain approval for the Programme and a listing of the Notes on such other Financial Exchange as the Issuer may decide, and the Issuer shall notify the Arranger and Dealers promptly of such proposed alternative listing.

 

6.3.3 The Issuer shall comply, in all material respects, with the rules of the Relevant Financial Exchange and shall otherwise comply with any undertakings given by it from time to time to the Relevant Financial Exchange in connection with any Notes listed on such Financial Exchange or the listing thereof and, without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, shall furnish or procure to be furnished to the Relevant Financial Exchange all such information as such Financial Exchange may require in connection with the listing on such Financial Exchange of any Notes and pay all fees and costs in connection therewith.

 

6.3.4 The Issuer shall arrange for any announcements in respect of the Notes to be made in such publications and on such dates as may be required by the Relevant Financial Exchange.

 

6.4 Agency Agreement

The Issuer undertakes that it will promptly notify the Arranger and the

 

LOGO

 

Page 29


Dealers in writing of any termination of, or amendment to, the Agency Agreement and of any change in the Transfer Agent or Paying Agent under the Agency Agreement.

 

6.5 Authorised representative

The Issuer will notify the Arranger and the Dealers immediately in writing if any of the persons named in the list referred to in clause 4 of the Initial Documentation List ceases to be authorised to take action on behalf of the Issuer or any Guarantor, as the case may be, or if any additional person becomes so authorised together, in the case of an additional authorised person, with evidence satisfactory to the Arranger and the Dealers that such person has been so authorised.

 

6.6 Auditors’ comfort letters

The Issuer will (i) at the time of the preparation of the Programme Memorandum and thereafter, if reasonably requested by the Arranger, upon each occasion when the same may be amended, supplemented or updated, insofar as such amendment, supplement or up-dating concerns or contains financial information about the Issuer (ii) if reasonably requested by the Lead Manager on behalf of the Dealers, in relation to each Tranche of Notes which is syndicated among a group of Dealers and (iii) at other times whenever so reasonably requested by the Arranger and/or the Dealers or any of them, deliver to the Arranger and/or Dealers or (as the case may be) the Relevant Dealer at the expense of the Issuer, a comfort letter or comfort letters from the auditors of the Issuer, or other auditors appointed by the Issuer, in such form and with such content as the Arranger, the Dealers or (as the case may be) the Relevant Dealer may reasonably request and the auditors agree to (provided that such agreement is not unreasonably withheld), provided that no such letter or letters will be delivered in connection solely with the incorporation by reference in the Programme Memorandum of the latest annual or interim audited financial statements of the Issuer or any announcement of financial results for any annual or interim period of the Issuer. If at or prior to the time of any agreement to issue and subscribe for, or procure the subscription for, Notes under clause 3 a request is made with respect to the

 

LOGO

 

Page 30


Notes to be issued, the receipt of the relevant comfort letter or letters in a form satisfactory to the Relevant Dealer shall be a further condition precedent to the issue of those Notes in respect of that Dealer.

 

6.7 No other issues/Clear issuance

Except as otherwise agreed between the Issuer and the Relevant Dealer, the Issuer undertakes that it will not, during the period commencing on the Agreement Date and ending on the date which is 7 (seven) days after the Issue Date of the relevant Tranche, without written consent of the Relevant Dealer, issue or agree to issue any Notes that are substantially similar to the Notes of the relevant Tranche.

 

6.8 Information on Noteholders’ meetings

The Issuer will, at the same time as it is despatched, furnish the Arranger and the Dealers with a copy of any notice of a meeting of the Noteholders which is despatched at the instigation of the Issuer and will notify the Arranger and the Dealers promptly upon its becoming aware that a meeting of the Noteholders has been convened.

 

6.9 Rating

In the event that the Issuer, any Notes or the Programme are rated by a Rating Agency at the request of the Issuer, the Issuer will promptly notify the Arranger and the Dealers upon it becoming aware that there has been any downgrading or withdrawal (save in the case of replacement of one rating by another rating given by another Rating Agency), or any public notice of any intended or potential withdrawal or downgrading of, such rating or upon it becoming aware that such rating(s) is listed on “Creditwatch” with negative implications or other similar publication for formal review by any relevant Rating Agency.

 

7 ISSUER’S INDEMNITY

 

7.1

The Issuer indemnifies each Dealer and the Arranger, all of their subsidiaries and/or holding companies (as defined in the Companies Act 61 of 1973) and each person who controls that Dealer or Arranger and any of

 

LOGO

 

Page 31


 

their respective representatives, directors, officers, employees and agents (each an “Indemnified Person” ) and agrees to hold such Indemnified Persons indemnified and harmless against any actual losses, liability, damages, cost, loss or expense (excluding any consequential economic loss but including, without limitation legal fees, costs and expenses reasonably incurred) (a “Loss” ) which may be directly suffered or made against such Indemnified Person as a result of or in relation to or in connection with (i) any actual breach by the Issuer or alleged breach (other than an allegation made by an indemnified Person) by the Issuer of any of the representations, warranties, undertakings and agreements contained in, or deemed to be made pursuant to, this Agreement including, but without limitation, the failure by the Issuer to issue the Notes (otherwise than by reason of non-payment by the Relevant Dealer(s) or investors procured by the Relevant Dealer(s)), or (ii) any untrue statement or alleged (other than an allegation made by an indemnified Person) untrue statement contained in the Programme Memorandum or Pricing Supplement circulated or distributed with the consent of the Issuer, or (iii) any untrue or alleged (other than an allegation made by an indemnified Person) untrue statement in any other document or information authorised pursuant to clause 8 to be distributed or passed on by such Relevant Dealer(s) (other than in respect of any information provided by or prepared by or on behalf of any Relevant Dealer(s) or Arranger) or (iv) any omission or alleged (other than an allegation made by an indemnified Person) omission to state in the Programme Memorandum a material fact necessary to make the statements therein not misleading, or (v) any breach by the Issuer of the Terms and Conditions.

 

7.2 Should any of the events in 7.1 occur, and an Indemnified Person thereby suffer a Loss, the Issuer shall pay to that Indemnified Person on demand an amount equal to such Loss and all costs, charges and expenses (including but not limited to legal costs and expenses) reasonably incurred which it or any Indemnified Person may actually pay or incur in connection with investigating, disputing or defending any such action or claim as such costs, charges and expenses are incurred. This undertaking to make payment is additional to any liability which the Issuer may otherwise have.

 

LOGO

 

Page 32


7.3 If any proceedings (including a governmental investigation) shall be instituted involving any Indemnified Person in respect of which indemnity may be sought pursuant to clause 7.1 such Indemnified Person shall promptly notify the Issuer in writing and the Issuer shall, upon request of such Indemnified Person, appoint lawyers reasonably satisfactory to such Indemnified Person to represent such Indemnified Person and the Issuer shall be liable to pay the reasonable fees and expenses of such lawyers related to such proceeding. In any such proceedings, the relevant Indemnified Person shall have the right to retain its own lawyer, but the reasonable fees and expenses of such lawyer shall be for the account of such Indemnified Person unless (i) the Issuer and such Indemnified Person shall have mutually agreed in writing to the retention of such lawyer or (ii) such Indemnified Person has defences additional to or different from the Issuer, or (iii) the Issuer fails, within a reasonable time, to appoint lawyers reasonably satisfactory to such Indemnified Person.

 

7.4 The Issuer shall not be liable for any settlement of any such proceeding purported to be effected by any Indemnified Person without the prior written consent of the Issuer (such consent not being unreasonably withheld or delayed), but if settled with such consent or if there be a final judgement for the plaintiff, the Issuer agrees to indemnify the relevant Indemnified Person(s) from and against any loss or liability reasonably incurred by reason of such settlement or judgement. Notwithstanding the foregoing sentence, if at any time any Indemnified Person shall have requested the Issuer to reimburse such Indemnified Person for fees and expenses of its own lawyers as contemplated in clause 7.3 and the Indemnified Person is entitled to such fees and expenses in terms of that clause, the Issuer agrees that it shall be liable for any settlement of any such proceeding effected without its written consent if (i) such settlement is entered into more than 30 (thirty) days after receipt by the Issuer of such request and (ii) the Issuer shall not have reimbursed such Indemnified Person in accordance with such request prior to the date of such settlement. The Issuer will not, without written consent of the relevant Indemnified Person, effect the settlement of any pending or threatened proceeding in respect of which any Indemnified Person is or could have been a party and indemnity could have been sought hereunder by such Indemnified Person, unless such settlement includes an unconditional release of such Indemnified Person from all liability in respect of the subject of such proceeding.

 

LOGO

 

Page 33


7.5 No Dealer shall have any duty or obligation, whether as fiduciary or otherwise toward any Indemnified Person or otherwise be obliged to recover any amount under this clause 7 on behalf of or to account to any other person for any such amount.

 

7.6 The undertakings in this clause 7 shall survive any termination of this Agreement, any termination of any agreement or the obligations of any party hereto.

 

8 AUTHORITY TO DISTRIBUTE DOCUMENTS

The Issuer hereby authorises the Arranger and the Dealers on its behalf to provide copies of, and make oral statements consistent with, (i) the Programme Memorandum and/or (ii) such additional information provided in writing by the Issuer in relation to the Programme, to the Arranger and the Dealers, to actual and potential subscribers for Notes and to other persons to whom such documents and statements or information need to be furnished or made for the purposes of the Programme.

 

9 DEALERS’ UNDERTAKINGS AND INDEMNITY

 

9.1 The Arranger and each Dealer agrees that its obligations under this Agreement are several (and not joint) and it shall not be responsible for the obligations of any other Arranger or Dealer.

 

9.2 The Arranger and each Dealer agrees to comply with the restrictions and requirements set out in Appendix B hereto insofar as they relate to an issue of Notes to such Dealer or any person procured by that Dealer or any offer for subscription for or sale of those Notes made by such Dealer. For the avoidance of doubt, no Dealer will be liable for the failure of any other Dealer or any other person, to comply with the restrictions and requirements set out in Appendix B.

 

9.3

The Arranger and each Dealer severally indemnifies the Issuer its subsidiaries and respective directors, officers, employees and controlling

 

LOGO

 

Page 34


 

persons and agents against any and all losses, claims, damages or liabilities to which it may become subject, insofar as such losses, claims, damages or liabilities (or actions in respect thereof) arise out of or are based upon the failure of such Dealer to observe or comply with any of the selling restrictions or requirements set out in Appendix B (insofar as they so relate to the Dealer) provided that no Dealer shall be liable for any losses, claims, damages or liabilities arising from the sale of Notes to any person believed in good faith by such Dealer, on reasonable grounds after making all reasonable investigations, to be a person to whom the Notes could legally be sold in compliance with the provisions of Appendix B, provided that the legal liability assumed in terms of this indemnity shall not extend to indirect or consequential damages and shall not extend beyond the relevant indemnifier’s liability that would nevertheless attach to each Arranger or Dealer by law or by custom in the absence of such indemnity. For the sake of clarity, and save as otherwise stated to the contrary, the liability of each Dealer under this clause 9.3 shall be independent from that of any other Dealer and shall be neither joint nor several as between Dealers.

 

9.4 The provisions of clauses 7.1, 7.3 and 7.4 as to the conduct and expense of conducting any defence against any action, proceeding, claim or demand in respect of which indemnity in clause 9.3 may be sought shall apply mutatis mutandis to clause 9.3.

 

10 FEES, EXPENSES AND STAMP DUTIES

Except as otherwise agreed, the Issuer undertakes that it will:

 

10.1 pay to each Dealer on demand the commissions (if any) agreed in connection with and at the time of each sale of Notes to that Dealer or to a person procured by that Dealer (and any VAT or other tax thereon, if applicable); and

 

10.2 pay (together with any VAT or other tax thereon, if applicable) all reasonable costs and expenses incidental to the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, including but not limited to -

 

10.2.1 the reasonable fees and expenses of its legal advisers and auditors;

 

LOGO

 

Page 35


10.2.2 the cost of listing and maintaining the listing of any Notes to be issued by the Issuer under the Programme on a Relevant Financial Exchange, where such Notes are intended to be listed;

 

10.2.3 the cost of obtaining and maintaining any rating for the Issuer, the Programme and/or the Notes;

 

10.2.4 the agreed fees of, or expenses incurred by, the Transfer Agent, the Paying Agent and the Calculation Agent pursuant to the Agency Agreement;

 

10.2.5 all reasonable expenses in connection with the issue, marketing, authentication, packaging and initial delivery of Notes, this Agreement, the Agency Agreement, any Subscription Agreement and the preparation and printing of Certificates, the Programme Memorandum and any amendments or supplements thereto (including the cost of updating any legal opinions issued pursuant to clause 4.4 and of any auditors’ comfort letters issued pursuant to clause 6.6), provided that proof thereof is furnished to the Issuer;

 

10.2.6 the cost of any publicity agreed to by the Issuer in connection with the Programme and any issue of Notes;

 

10.3 pay the agreed fees and disbursements of legal advisers appointed to represent the Arranger and the Dealers (including any VAT or other tax thereon, if applicable) in connection with the negotiation, preparation, execution and delivery of this Agreement, the Programme Memorandum, the Agency Agreement and any documents referred to in any of them and any other documents required in connection with the implementation or maintenance of the Programme and the issue of Notes; and

 

10.4

pay promptly, and in any event before any penalty becomes payable, any stamp, documentary, registration or similar duty or tax imposed within the Republic of South Africa and payable in connection with the entry into, performance, enforcement or admissibility in evidence of this Agreement, any communication pursuant hereto, the Agency Agreement, Programme

 

LOGO

 

Page 36


 

Memorandum or any Note and indemnify each Dealer against any liability with respect to or resulting from any delay in paying, or omission to pay, any such duty or tax.

 

11 TERMINATION OF APPOINTMENT OF DEALERS

The Arranger or each Dealer may terminate its participation described in this Agreement by giving not less than 30 (thirty) days’ written notice to the other parties hereto. The Issuer may terminate the appointment of the Arranger, a Dealer or Dealers by giving not less than 30 (thirty) days’ written notice to the Arranger, such Dealer or Dealers (with a copy promptly thereafter to the remainder of the parties to this Agreement) at any time after the earlier of the first Issue Date and 15 February 2009. Termination shall not affect any rights or obligations (including but not limited to those arising under clauses 7, 9 and/or 10) which have accrued at the time of termination or which accrue thereafter in relation to any act or omission or alleged act or omission which occurred prior to such time.

 

12 APPOINTMENT OF NEW DEALERS

 

12.1 Nothing in this Agreement shall prevent the Issuer from appointing one or more New Dealers for the duration of the Programme or, with regard to an issue of a particular Tranche of Notes, for the purposes of that Tranche, in either case upon the terms of this Agreement and provided that, unless such appointment is effected pursuant to a Subscription Agreement -

 

12.1.1 any New Dealer shall have first delivered to the Issuer an appropriate Dealer Accession Letter substantially in the form set out in Part I of Appendix C hereto (in respect of a New Dealer for the remainder of the Programme) and Part III of Appendix C hereto (in respect of a New Dealer with regard to an issue of a particular Tranche of Notes); and

 

12.1.2 the Issuer shall have delivered to such New Dealer an appropriate Letter of Appointment substantially in the form set out in Part II or Part IV of Appendix C hereto,

whereupon such New Dealer shall, subject to the terms of the relevant Dealer Accession Letter and the relevant Letter of Appointment, become a

 

LOGO

 

Page 37


party to this Agreement, vested with all authority, rights, powers, duties and obligations of a Dealer as if originally named as a Dealer hereunder provided further that, except in the case of the appointment of a New Dealer for the duration of the Programme, following the issue of the Notes in respect of the relevant Tranche on the Issue Date, the relevant New Dealer shall have no further such authority, rights, powers, duties or obligations except such as may be accrued or been incurred prior to and in connection with, the issue of such Notes.

 

12.2 The Issuer shall promptly notify the Arranger, the Transfer Agent and the other Dealers of any appointment of a New Dealer for the duration of the Programme by supplying to such parties a copy of any Dealer Accession Letter and Letter of Appointment. Such notice shall be required to be given to the Transfer Agent by the Issuer only in the case of an appointment of a New Dealer for a particular Tranche.

 

13 INCREASE IN THE AGGREGATE NOMINAL AMOUNT OF THE PROGRAMME

 

13.1 From time to time the Issuer may wish to increase the aggregate nominal amount of the Notes that may be issued under the Programme. In such circumstances, the Issuer shall obtain the prior written approval of all the Guarantors for such increase and shall give notification of such an increase (subject to clause 13.2) by delivering to the Sponsoring Member, the Transfer Agent, the Arranger and the Dealers a letter substantially in the form set out in Appendix D hereto. Upon such notice being given, all references in this Agreement, the Agency Agreement, the Programme Memorandum or any other agreement, deed or document in relation to the Programme, to the aggregate nominal amount of the Notes that may be issued under the Programme, shall be and shall be deemed to be references to the increased nominal amount.

 

13.2

Notwithstanding clause 13.1, the right of the Issuer, having obtained the prior written consent of the Guarantors, to increase the aggregate nominal amount of the Programme shall be subject to the Arranger and the Dealers having received and found satisfactory (in their reasonable opinion) all the documents and confirmations described in the Initial Documentation List

 

LOGO

 

Page 38


 

(with such changes as may be relevant with reference to the circumstances at the time of the proposed increase as are agreed between the Issuer, the Arranger and the Dealers), and the delivery of any further conditions precedent that any of the Arranger and the Dealers may reasonably require, including, without limitation, the production of a supplement to the Programme Memorandum by the Issuer and any further or other documents required by the Relevant Financial Exchange for the purpose of listing any Notes to be issued on the Relevant Financial Exchange. The Arranger shall circulate to the Dealers all the documents and confirmations described in the Initial Documentation List (save for item 7 on the Initial Document List which shall be provided directly to the Dealers by the Issuer) and any further conditions precedent so required in terms hereof. Any Dealer must notify the Arranger and the Arranger must notify the Issuer within 10 (ten) Business Days (or any shorter period as may be agreed) of receipt of the documents and confirmations described in the Initial Documentation List if it considers, in its reasonable opinion, any of such documents and confirmations to be unsatisfactory and must furnish the reasons therefore in its notice. In the absence of such notification, the Arranger and the Dealers shall be deemed to consider such documents and confirmations to be satisfactory.

 

14 STATUS OF THE DEALERS AND THE ARRANGER

Each of the Dealers agrees that the Arranger has only acted in an administrative capacity to facilitate the establishment and/or maintenance of the Programme and none of the Dealers nor the Arranger will be responsible to any other Dealer for the adequacy, accuracy, completeness or reasonableness of any representation, warranty, undertaking, agreement, statement or information in the Programme Memorandum, the Agency Agreement, any Pricing Supplement, this Agreement or any information provided in connection with the Programme with the authority of the Issuer or for providing assurance in respect of the nature of and suitability for and consequences to such Dealers or Arranger of all legal, tax and accounting matters and all documentation in connection with the Programme or any Tranche in reliance on any opinion or advice rendered by legal advisers or auditors appointed by the Issuer in relation to the Programme. The Arranger shall have only those duties, obligations and responsibilities expressly specified in this Agreement and its letter of appointment.

 

LOGO

 

Page 39


15 COUNTERPARTS

This Agreement may be signed in any number of counterparts, all of which, taken together, shall constitute one and the same agreement and any party may enter into this Agreement by executing a counterpart.

 

16 COMMUNICATIONS

 

16.1 All communications shall be letter delivered by registered mail or by hand or (but only where specifically provided in the Procedures Memorandum) by telephone. Each communication shall be made to the relevant party at the fax number or address or telephone number and, in the case of a communication by fax or letter, marked for the attention of, or (in the case of a communication by telephone) made to, the person(s) or department from time to time specified in writing by that party to the other for the purpose. The initial telephone number, fax number and address of, and person(s) or department so specified by, each party are set out on the signature pages hereof.

 

16.2 A communication shall be deemed received, (if by fax) when sent (provided that a confirmation of error free transmittal is received from the transmitting terminal), (if by telephone) when made or (if by letter) when actually delivered, or 7 (seven) days from posting in each case in the manner required by this clause 16. Every communication shall be irrevocable save in respect of any manifest error therein.

 

17 BENEFIT OF AGREEMENT

 

17.1 This Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure for the benefit of the Issuer, the Arranger and each Dealer and their respective successors and permitted assigns.

 

17.2 The Arranger and/or any Dealer may, -

 

17.2.1 with the prior written consent of the Issuer, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, assign and transfer all of such Arranger’s or any such Dealer’s rights and obligations hereunder to any third party, but subject to 17.2.2;

 

LOGO

 

Page 40


17.2.2 without the prior written consent of the Issuer (but on prior written notice to the Issuer), assign and transfer all of such Arranger’s or any such Dealer’s rights and obligations hereunder to any subsidiary or holding company of such Arranger or Dealer or to any subsidiary of such holding company, provided that the relevant Arranger or Dealer (as the case may be) unconditionally guarantees its obligations.

 

17.3 Any purported assignment in violation of clause 17.2 shall be void.

 

17.4 Upon any such transfer and/or assumption of obligations pursuant to clause 17.2, the assigning or transferring Arranger or Dealer shall be relieved of and fully discharged from all obligations under this Agreement (unless it shall have guaranteed such obligations), whether such obligations arose before or after such transfer and assumption and in all cases the relevant assignee or transferee shall be treated as if it were a party to this Agreement with effect from the date on which such assignment or transfer takes effect.

 

17.5 The Issuer may not, for as long as the Notes are Outstanding, cede its rights or delegate its obligations under this Agreement without the prior written consent of the Dealers, which will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed.

 

18 CALCULATION AGENT

 

18.1 In the case of any Series of Notes, the Calculation Agent shall act as such, unless the Relevant Dealer or (in the case of a syndicated issue) the Arranger agrees with the Issuer in writing to appoint such Dealer or the Arranger, or another person nominated by such Dealer or the Arranger (a “ Nominee ”), as Calculation Agent.

 

18.2

Should such a request be made to the Issuer and the Issuer agrees thereto, the appointment of that Dealer, the Arranger or nominee shall be automatic upon the issue of the relevant Series of Notes, and shall, except as agreed, be on the terms set out in the Calculation Agency Agreement

 

LOGO

 

Page 41


 

attached as Appendix B to the Agency Agreement, and no further action shall be required to effect the appointment of such Dealer, the Arranger or Nominee as Calculation Agent in relation to that Series of Notes, and the Calculation Schedule to the Calculation Agency Agreement shall be deemed to be duly annotated to include such Series. The name of the Dealer, the Arranger or Nominee so appointed will be entered in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

19 STABILISATION

 

19.1 In connection with the distribution of the relevant Tranche of Notes, the Relevant Dealer who is designated in the Applicable Pricing Supplement as the approved stabilisation manager (the “ Stabilisation Manager ”), for the issue of the relevant Tranche of Notes may, in accordance with any terms, directions or limits specified in the Applicable Pricing Supplement and to the extent permitted by all applicable rules and regulations, over-allot or effect transactions with a view to supporting the market price of the relevant Tranche of Notes at a level which might not otherwise prevail for a limited period after the Issue Date, but in doing so the Stabilisation Manager shall act as principal and not as agent of the Issuer.

 

19.2 Save to the extent agreed otherwise in writing, at the time such stabilisation is to take place -

 

19.2.1 the Issuer shall not be obliged to issue more than the aggregate principal amount of the relevant Tranche of Notes;

 

19.2.2 there may be no obligation on the Stabilisation Manager to so stabilise. Such stabilising, if commenced, may be discontinued at any time and must be brought to an end after a limited period and the price/yield and amount of Notes to be issued under the Programme will be determined by the Issuer and each Relevant Dealer and/or Lead Manager(s) at the time of issue in accordance with the prevailing market conditions; and

 

19.2.3 any loss or profit to the stabilisation Manager pursuant to the stabilising transactions effected by the Stabilisation Manager, shall be for the account of the Stabilisation Manager.

 

LOGO

 

Page 42


20 VARIATION AND CANCELLATION

No agreement varying, adding to, deleting from or cancelling this Agreement shall be effective unless reduced to writing and signed by or on behalf of all the parties hereto.

 

21 WHOLE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the whole agreement between the parties relating to the subject matter hereof.

 

22 NO WAIVER

Any indulgence which any party may show to any other pursuant to the provisions contained in this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver of such party’s rights.

 

23 GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

 

23.1 This Agreement and every agreement for the issue of and subscription for Notes as referred to in clause 3 shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

23.2 Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably consents to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the South Gauteng High Court of South Africa in relation to any disputes which may arise out of or in connection with this Agreement and accordingly any suit, action or proceedings (together referred to as “Proceedings” ) arising out of or in connection with this Agreement may be brought in such court. Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably waives any objection which it may have now or hereafter to the laying of the venue of any such Proceedings in any such court and any claim that any such Proceedings have been brought in an inconvenient forum and hereby further irrevocably agrees that a judgment in any such Proceedings brought in the above South African court shall be conclusive and binding upon the parties hereto and may be enforced in the courts of any other jurisdiction. Nothing contained in this clause shall limit any right to take Proceedings in any other court of competent jurisdiction nor shall the taking of Proceedings in one or more jurisdictions preclude the taking of Proceedings in any other jurisdiction, whether concurrently or not.

 

LOGO

 

Page 43


SIGNED at Sandton on 6 April 2009

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED (as Issuer )

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED (as Issuer )

/s/ Nicholas John Holland

   

/s/ Gayle Margaret Wilson

Signature:     Signature:

Nicholas John Holland

   

Gayle Margaret Wilson

Name:     Name:

CEO

   

Director

Designation:     Designation:

 

Address:   150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton, 2196
Tel:   +2711 562 9700
Attention:   Chief Financial Officer

 

LOGO

 

Page 44


SIGNED at Sandton on 6 April 2009

For and on behalf of

ABSA CAPITAL, a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED (as Arranger and Dealer )

   

For and on behalf of

ABSA CAPITAL, a division of ABSA BANK LIMITED (as Arranger and Dealer )

/s/ Jacques Els

   

 

Signature:     Signature:

Jacques Els

   

 

Name:     Name:

Head. Debt Capital Markets

   

 

Designation:     Designation:

 

Address:   15 Alice Lane, Sandton, 2196
Tel:   +2711 895 7027
Attention:   Head: Debt Capital Markets

 

SIGNED at                      on                      2009

For and on behalf of

NEDBANK CAPITAL, A DIVISION OF NEDBANK LIMITED (as Dealer )

   

For and on behalf of

NEDBANK CAPITAL, A DIVISION OF NEDBANK LIMITED (as Dealer )

/s/ Bruce Stewart

   

 

Signature:     Signature:

Bruce Stewart

   

 

Name:     Name:

 

   

 

Designation:     Designation:

 

Address:  

6 th Floor, Corporate Place, 135 Rivonia Road

Sandton, Johannesburg

Tel:   011 535 4027
Attention:   Head of Debt Origination

 

LOGO

 

Page 45


APPENDIX A

INITIAL DOCUMENTATION LIST

 

1 A certified copy of the memorandum and articles of association of the Issuer and each Guarantor.

 

2 A certified copy of all resolutions and/or other authorisations required to be passed or given, and evidence of any other action required to be taken, on behalf of the Issuer:

 

2.1.1 to approve its entry into this Agreement, the Programme Memorandum, the Agency Agreement, the Operating and Procedures Memorandum, the establishment of the Programme and the issue of Notes under the Programme;

 

2.1.2 to authorise appropriate persons to execute each of this Agreement, the Agency Agreement, the Operating and Procedures Memorandum and other agreement relevant to the establishment of the Programme and issue of the Notes; and

 

2.1.3 to authorise appropriate persons to enter into agreements with any Dealer to issue Notes in accordance with clause 3 of this Agreement.

 

3 A certified copy of all resolutions and/or other authorisations required to be passed or given, and evidence of any other action required to be taken, on behalf of each Guarantor:

 

3.1.1 to approve its entry into the Guarantee and any other agreement relevant to the Programme and to which such Guarantor is a party (the “ Guarantor Agreements ”); and

 

3.1.2 to authorise appropriate persons to execute each of Guarantor Agreements.

 

4 A certified list of the names, titles and specimen signatures of the persons authorised on behalf of the Issuer and each Guarantor in accordance with paragraphs 2.1.3 and 3.1.2 above.

 

5 Certified copies of any governmental consents, authorities and approvals, to the extent applicable, required for the Issuer and each Guarantor to issue Notes and to enter into this Agreement, the Programme Memorandum, the Guarantee, the Operating and Procedures Memorandum, the Agency Agreement and any other agreement relevant to the establishment of the Programme and issue of the Notes.

 

6 Legal opinions addressed to each of the Arranger and the Dealers dated on or after the date of this Agreement, in such form and with such content as the Arranger may reasonably require, from:

 

6.1 Cliffe Dekker Inc., legal advisers to the Arranger as to South African law;

 

LOGO

 

Page 46


6.2 Webber Wentzel, legal advisors to the Issuer and the Guarantors incorporated in the Republic of South Africa as to South African law and the due incorporation, authority and capacity of each Guarantor incorporated in the Republic of South Africa to enter into the Guarantor Agreements; and

 

6.3 Conyers Dill & Pearman, legal advisors to the Guarantors incorporated in the British Virgin Islands as to the due incorporation, authority and capacity of each Guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands to enter into the Guarantor Agreements.

 

7 A certified copy of this Agreement, the Operating and Procedures Memorandum, the Agency Agreement, the Guarantee and, where applicable, confirmation that executed copies of such documents have been delivered to the Transfer Agent (if any).

 

8 A printed final version of the signed Programme Memorandum.

 

9 Comfort letters from PricewaterhouseCoopers Incorporated as independent auditors of the Issuer in such form and with such content as the Dealer may reasonably request.

 

10 Confirmation that the Programme has been registered with The Bond Exchange of South Africa Limited.

 

LOGO

 

Page 47


APPENDIX B

SELLING RESTRICTIONS

REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA

The Issuer, each Guarantor and each Dealer have represented, warranted and agreed that they will not solicit any offers for subscription for the Notes in contravention of any applicable law and/or any regulation of the Republic of South Africa.

UNITED STATES

The Notes have not been and will not be registered under the U.S. Securities Act of 1933 (the “Securities Act” ) and the Notes may not be offered or sold within the United States except pursuant to an exemption from, or a transaction not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act. Each Dealer represents that it has not offered or sold, and agrees that it will not offer or sell, any Notes constituting part of its allotment in the United States except in accordance with Rule 903 of Regulation S under the Securities Act ( “Regulation S” ). Accordingly, neither the Issuer, each Dealer, their affiliates nor any persons acting on its or their behalf have engaged or will engage in any directed selling efforts with respect to the Notes. Terms used in this paragraph have the meaning given to them by Regulation S.

UNITED KINGDOM

In relation to the Notes, each Dealer subscribing for or purchasing such Notes has represented, warranted and agreed that:

 

a)

Notes with maturities of less than one year : in relation to any Notes which have a maturity of less than one year, (a) it is a person whose ordinary activities involve it in acquiring, holding, managing or disposing of investments (as principal or agent) for the purposes of its business and (b) it has not offered or sold and will not offer or sell any Notes other than to persons whose ordinary activities involve them in acquiring, holding, managing or disposing of investments (as principal or agent) for the purposes of their businesses or who

 

LOGO

 

Page 48


 

it is reasonable to expect will acquire, hold, manage or dispose of investments (as principal or agent) for the purposes of their businesses where the issue of the Notes would otherwise constitute a contravention of section 19 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (the “ FSMA ”) by the Issuer;

 

b) Financial promotion: it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated any invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of section 21 of the FSMA) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of any Notes in circumstances in which section 21(1) of the FSMA does not apply to the Issuer; and

 

c) General compliance: it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to any Notes in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.

EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA

In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a “ Relevant Member State ”), each Dealer has represented, warranted and agreed, and each further Dealer appointed under the Programme will be required to represent, warrant and agree, that with effect from and including the date on which the Prospectus Directive is implemented in that Member State (the “ Relevant Implementation Date ”) it has not made and will not make an offer of Notes which are the subject of the offering contemplated by this Programme Memorandum as completed by the Applicable Pricing Supplement in relation thereto to the public in that Relevant Member State, except that it may, with effect from and including that Relevant Implementation Date, make an offer of Notes to the public in that Relevant Member State:

 

(a) at any time to legal entities which are authorised or regulated to operate in the financial markets or, if not so authorised or regulated, whose corporate purpose is solely to invest in securities;

 

(b) at any time to any legal entity which has two or more of (i) an average of at least 250 employees during the last financial year; (ii) a total balance sheet of more than EUR43,000,000; and (iii) an annual turnover of more than EUR50,000,000, all as shown in its last annual or consolidated accounts;

 

LOGO

 

Page 49


(c) at any time to fewer than 100 natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive) subject to obtaining the prior consent of the Relevant Dealer or Dealers nominated by the relevant Issuer for any such offer; or

 

(d) at any time in any other circumstances falling within Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive,

provided that no such offer of Notes referred to in (a) to (d) above shall require the Issuer or any Dealer to publish a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive or supplement a prospectus pursuant to Article 16 of the Prospectus Directive.

For the purposes of this provision, the expression “offer of Notes to the public” in relation to any Notes in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and the Notes to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase or subscribe the Notes, as the same may be varied in that Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Member State and the expression “Prospectus Directive” means Directive 2003/71/EC and includes any relevant implementing measure in each Relevant Member State.

GENERAL

Each Dealer has agreed and each further Dealer appointed under the Programme will be required to agree that it will not, directly or indirectly, purchase, offer, sell or deliver any Notes or distribute or publish any offering circular, information memorandum, prospectus, form of application, advertisement or other document or information in any country or jurisdiction except under circumstances that will, to the best of its knowledge and belief, result in compliance with any applicable laws and regulations and all purchases, offers, sales and deliveries of Notes by it will be made on the same terms.

Without prejudice to the generality of the above paragraph, each Dealer has agreed and each further Dealer appointed under the Programme will be required to agree that it will obtain any consent, approval or permission which is, to the best of its

 

LOGO

 

Page 50


knowledge and belief, required for the offer, purchase, sale or delivery by it of Notes under the laws and regulations in force in any jurisdiction to which it is subject or in which it makes such offers, purchases, sales or deliveries and it will, to the best of its knowledge and belief, comply with all such laws and regulations.

With regard to each Tranche, the Relevant Dealer(s) will be required to comply with such other additional restrictions as shall be set out in the Applicable Pricing Supplement.

 

LOGO

 

Page 51


APPENDIX C

PART I

FORM OF DEALER ACCESSION LETTER - PROGRAMME

 

[Date]   
To:    Gold Fields Limited (the “Issuer” )
   [ ]
Dear Sirs

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

ZAR10,000,000,000

Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

We refer to the Programme Agreement executed by, among others, the Issuer on 6 October 2009 in respect of the above Domestic Medium Term Note Programme (which agreement, as amended from time to time, is herein referred to as the “Programme Agreement” ).

We confirm that we are in receipt of the documents referenced below:

 

1 a copy of the Programme Agreement; and

 

2

a copy of such of the documents referred to in Appendix A of the Programme Agreement,

 

LOGO

 

Page 52


and have found them to our satisfaction. We hereby expressly waive production of any of the documents referred to in Appendix A of the Programme Agreement which we have not requested. 1

For the purposes of the Programme Agreement our notice details are as follows:

[Insert name, address, telephone, facsimile, and contact].

In consideration of the appointment by the Issuer of us as a Dealer under the Programme Agreement we hereby undertake, for the benefit of the Issuer, the Guarantors, the Arranger and each of the other Dealers, that we will perform and comply with all the duties and obligations expressed to be assumed by a Dealer under the Programme Agreement.

This letter is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

Yours faithfully

[Name of New Dealer]

 

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

cc: The Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent

 

cc: The Arranger and the Dealers

 

1 It is important to ensure that each original legal opinion and comfort letter permits it to be delivered to, and relied upon by, New Dealers, otherwise a side letter to this effect should be provided.

 

LOGO

 

Page 59


PART II

FORM OF LETTER OF APPOINTMENT - PROGRAMME

 

[Date]   
To:    [Name and address of New Dealer]
cc:    The Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent
cc:    The Arranger and the Dealers

Dear Sirs

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

ZAR10,000,000,000

Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

We refer to the Programme Agreement executed by, among others, the Issuer on 6 October 2009 in respect of the above Domestic Medium Term Note Programme (which agreement, as amended from time to time, is herein referred to as the “Programme Agreement” ).

In accordance with clause 12 of the Programme Agreement we hereby appoint you as a dealer for the duration of the Programme and confirm that, with effect from the date hereof, you shall become a party to the Programme Agreement, vested with all the authority, rights, powers, duties and obligations of a Dealer as if originally named as Dealer under the Programme Agreement.

 

LOGO

 

Page 60


Yours faithfully
For: Gold Fields Limited

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

LOGO

 

Page 59


PART III

FORM OF DEALER ACCESSION LETTER - NOTE ISSUE

 

[Date]   
To:    Gold Fields Limited (the “Issuer”)
   [ ]

Dear Sirs

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

ZAR10,000,000,000

Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

(Tranche 1 of Series 1)

We refer to the Programme Agreement executed by, among others, the Issuer on 6 October 2009 in respect of the above Domestic Medium Term Note Programme (which agreement, as amended from time to time, is herein referred to as the “Programme Agreement” ).

We confirm that we are in receipt of the documents referenced below:

 

1 a copy of the Programme Agreement; and

 

2 a copy of such of the documents referred to in Appendix A of the Programme Agreement,

 

LOGO

 

Page 60


and have found them to our satisfaction. We hereby expressly waive production of any of the documents referred to in Appendix A of the Programme Agreement which we have not requested. 2

For the purposes of the Programme Agreement our notice details are as follows:

[Insert name, address, telephone, facsimile, and contact].

In consideration of the Issuer appointing us as a Dealer in respect of the issue of Notes under the Programme Agreement, being Tranche [ ] of Series [ ], we hereby undertake, for the benefit of the Issuer, the Guarantors and of the Arranger and the other Dealers that in relation to the issue of the Notes we will perform and comply with all the duties and obligations expressed to be assumed by a Dealer under the Programme Agreement.

This letter is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, South African law.

 

Yours faithfully
For:   [Name of New Dealer]

 

Name:  
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

cc: The Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent

 

cc: The Arranger and the Dealers

 

2 It is important to ensure that each original legal opinion and comfort letter permits it to be delivered to, and relied upon by, New Dealers, otherwise a side letter to this effect should be provided.

 

LOGO

 

Page 59


PART IV

FORM OF LETTER OF APPOINTMENT - NOTE ISSUE

 

[Date]   
To:    [Name and address of New Dealer]
cc:    The Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent
cc:    The Arranger and the Dealers

Dear Sirs

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

ZAR10,000,000,000

Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

(Tranche 1 of Series 1)

We refer to the Programme Agreement executed by, among others, the Issuer on 6 October 2009 in respect of the above Domestic Medium Term Note Programme (such agreement as amended from time to time, the “Programme Agreement” ) and hereby acknowledge receipt of your Dealer Accession Letter to us dated [ ] .

In accordance with clause 12 of the Programme Agreement we hereby appoint you as a Dealer under the Programme and confirm that, with effect from the date hereof

 

LOGO

 

Page 60


in respect of the issue of the Notes (Tranche [ ] of Series [ ]), you shall become a party to the Programme Agreement, vested with all the authority, rights, powers, duties and obligations of a Dealer in relation to the issue of the Notes as if originally named as Dealer under the Programme Agreement provided that following the issue on the Issue Date of the Notes you shall have no further such authority, rights, powers, duties and obligations except such as may have accrued or been incurred prior to and in connection with the issue of the said Notes.

 

Yours faithfully
For:   Gold Fields Limited

 

Name:  
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Name:  
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

LOGO

 

Page 59


APPENDIX D

LETTER REGARDING INCREASE IN THE NOMINAL AMOUNT

OF THE PROGRAMME

 

[Date]   
To:    The Arranger, the Dealers and Sponsoring Member (as defined in the Programme Agreement dated [ ] as amended from time to time (the “Programme Agreement” ))

Dear Sirs

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

ZAR10,000,000,000

Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

We hereby notify you, pursuant to clause 13 of the Programme Agreement, that the aggregate nominal amount of the above Programme shall be increased to ZAR [insert amount] from [insert date] whereupon all references to the current nominal amount of the Programme in the Programme Agreement, the Agency Agreement and any other relevant documents will be deemed amended accordingly. We understand that this increase is subject to the satisfaction of the conditions set out in clause 13 of the Programme Agreement and we attach the documents and confirmations referred to in clause 13.2.

 

LOGO

 

Page 60


You must notify the Arranger (in the case of Dealers) and ourselves within 7 (seven) Business Days of receipt by you of those documents and confirmations if you consider (in your reasonable opinion) such documents, confirmations and, if applicable, such further conditions precedent to be unsatisfactory and, in the absence of such notification, you will be deemed to consider such documents, confirmations and conditions precedent to be satisfactory or satisfied, as the case may be.

Terms used in this letter have the meanings given to them in the Programme Agreement.

 

Yours faithfully
For: Gold Fields Limited

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

cc: The Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent and the Paying Agent

 

LOGO

 

Page 2


APPENDIX E

FORM OF SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

in respect of GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

ZAR [ ]

Domestic Medium Term Note Programme

Dated [ ]

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

as Issuer

and

[ ]

as Lead Manager

 

LOGO

 

Page 3


SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT

This Agreement is made on [ ] between:

 

1 PARTIES

 

1.1 Gold Fields Limited

(the “Issuer”); and

 

1.2 [ ]

(the “Lead Manager”); and

[INSERT NAMES OF DEALERS, BUT EXCLUDING THE LEAD MANAGER (TO THE EXTENT ANY OTHER DEALERS APPOINTED) ]

(together with the Lead Manager referred to herein as the “Dealer(s)”).

 

2 INTRODUCTION

 

2.1 The Issuer proposes to issue ZAR [ ] per cent Notes due [ ] [insert bond code], being Tranche [ ] of Series [ ] (the “Notes” ) pursuant to Gold Fields Limited ZAR10,000,000,000 Domestic Medium Term Note Programme. The Notes will be issued on the Terms and Conditions as modified and supplemented by the pricing supplement (the “Pricing Supplement” ) attached hereto as Annex “A”.

 

2.2 The Subscription Agreement (this “Agreement” ) is supplemental to the Programme Agreement (the “Programme Agreement” ) dated 6 October 2009 and as may be further amended and/or restated and/or supplemented as at the Issue Date. The provisions of the Programme Agreement applicable to the issue of the Notes shall, save to the extent varied by this Agreement, be deemed to be incorporated in this Agreement. All terms with initial capitals used herein without definition have the meanings given to them in the Programme Agreement.

 

2.3 We wish to record the arrangements agreed among us in relation to the issue:

 

3 APPOINTMENT

 

3.1 The Dealers appointed in respect of the issue of Notes contemplated in this Agreement are party to the Programme Agreement and accordingly no New Dealers are appointed in terms of this Agreement.

 

3.2

OR [INSERT NAME OF NEW DEALER] IS HEREBY APPOINTED BY THE ISSUER AS A DEALER UNDER THE PROGRAMME AGREEMENT [IN RESPECT OF THE ISSUE OF NOTES CONTEMPLATED IN THIS AGREEMENT] OR [UNDER THE PROGRAMME] AND SUCH NEW

 

LOGO

 

Page 1


 

DEALER HEREBY UNDERTAKES, FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE ISSUER, THE ARRANGER AND EACH OF THE OTHER DEALERS, TO PERFORM AND COMPLY WITH ALL THE DUTIES AND OBLIGATIONS EXPRESSED TO BE ASSUMED BY A DEALER UNDER THE PROGRAMME AGREEMENT.]

 

4 ISSUE OF NOTES

 

4.1 Subject to the terms and conditions of the Programme Agreement and this Agreement, the Issuer hereby agrees to issue the Notes on [ ] or such later date as may be agreed in writing by the Issuer and the Lead Manager (not being later than [ ] ) (the “Issue Date” ) and the Managers jointly and severally agree to -

 

4.1.1 subscribe for the Notes at a subscription price of [ ] percent of the nominal amount of the Notes (the “Subscription Price” ), in consideration for which the Issuer agrees to pay each subscribing Manager a commission equal to [ ] percent of the nominal amount of the Notes subscribed for by it; and/ or

 

4.1.2 procure the subscription for the Notes as agent of the Issuer (for the avoidance of doubt the Dealers shall act as agents of the Issuer for the purpose of procuring subscriptions and for no other purpose) at a subscription price of [ ] per cent of the nominal amount of the Notes (the “Procurement Subscription Price” ), in consideration for which the Issuer agrees to pay each procuring Dealer a commission equal to [ ] per cent of the nominal amount of the Notes in respect of which subscriptions are procured by it,

it being agreed that it will be a domestic concern of the Dealers, determined by them in their sole discretion, as to how their obligation to subscribe or procure subscriptions will be discharged amongst themselves, that is, by whom, in what proportion and in what manner, but without detracting from the aforesaid obligation of the Dealers to subscribe or procure subscriptions.

 

5 SETTLEMENT

 

5.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the settlement procedures set out in Part 2 of Annex A to the Procedures Memorandum shall apply as if set out in this Agreement provided that Uncertificated Notes will be cleared and settled in accordance with the rules of the Central Depository.

 

5.2 The Issuer shall pay the commissions (if any) contemplated in clause 4.1 to the subscribing and/or procuring Dealers by cheque, or as otherwise agreed, on the Issue Date.

 

6 EXPENSES

 

6.1

The Issuer agrees to reimburse the Lead Manager promptly for all reasonable costs and expenses (plus VAT and other similar taxes thereon) including, but not limited to, travelling costs, legal fees (including all legal costs for Lead Manager’s legal counsel, incidental to the establishment of

 

LOGO

 

Page 2


 

the Programme and/or the issuance, including drafts and consultations, in accordance with the terms of the mandate letter entered into between the Lead Manager and the Issuer on [    ] (the “ Mandate Letter ”).

 

6.2 Expenses relating to Professional Advisors shall be paid by the Issuer directly to the relevant Professional Advisor. The Issuer undertakes to pay such invoices within 20 business days of receipt of such invoices from the Lead Manager or within such other period as is stipulated in any contract between the Issuer and the relevant Professional Advisor. Professional expenses shall not include listing fees and other cost incurred in obtaining regulatory approvals, which shall be paid by the Issuer directly.

 

7 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

7.1 The obligation of the Dealers to subscribe for or procure the subscription for the relevant Notes is conditional upon -

 

7.1.1 the execution by all parties of this Agreement on or prior to the Issue Date;

 

7.1.2 the conditions set out in clause 4.2 of the Programme Agreement being satisfied or waived as of the Issue Date;

 

7.1.3 without prejudice to the aforesaid, the Programme Memorandum dated 6 October 2009 (including any supplements thereto), containing all material information relevant in the context of the issue of Notes relating to the assets and liabilities, financial position, profits and losses of the Issuer and nothing having happened or being reasonably expected to happen which would require the Programme Memorandum to be supplemented or updated prior to the Issue Date;

 

7.1.4 as at the Issue Date, the warranties and representations of the Issuer under clause 5 of the Programme Agreement being true and correct as if made on the Issue Date;

 

7.1.5 the Issuer having performed all of its obligations then due under the Programme Agreement and this Agreement to be performed on or before the Issue Date; and

 

7.1.6 the delivery to the Lead Manager (on behalf of the Dealers) on or prior to the Issue Date of -

 

7.1.6.1 if required in terms of clause 4.4 of the Programme Agreement, legal opinions addressed to the Dealers dated the Issue Date in such form and with such content as the Dealers may reasonably require from [ insert name ], legal advisers to the Issuer, and from [i nsert Name ], legal advisers to the Lead Manager;

 

7.1.6.2 certificates dated as at the Issue Date signed by duly authorised officers of the Issuer giving confirmation -

 

7.1.6.2.1 that all the conditions set out in clause 4.2 of the Programme Agreement have been satisfied for which purpose where a condition contains reference to the opinion of any Dealer, such reference shall be ignored;

 

LOGO

 

Page 3


7.1.6.2.2 that the issue of the Notes would not give rise to any breach of any limit on the borrowings of the Issuer; and

 

7.1.6.2.3 there has been no material adverse change in the condition (financial or otherwise) of the Issuer since the date of its latest audited annual financial statements which is material in the context of the issue of the Notes;

 

7.1.6.3 certificates dated as at the Issue Date signed by duly authorised officers of each Guarantor giving confirmation -

 

7.1.6.3.1 that the guaranteeing of the payment obligations of the Issuer under the Notes would not give rise to any breach of any guaranteeing limit of such Guarantor; and

 

7.1.6.3.2 there has been no material adverse change in the condition (financial or otherwise) of such Guarantor since the date of its latest audited annual financial statements which is material in the context of the Guarantee;

 

7.1.6.4 if required in terms of clause 6.6 of the Programme Agreement, comfort letters dated the date hereof and the Issue Date from the independent auditors of the Issuer, in such form with such content as the Lead Manager may reasonably request.

 

7.2 If any of the foregoing conditions is not satisfied or waived by 10h00 on the Issue Date or such later date agreed by the parties, this Agreement shall terminate at 10h00 on the Issue Date or such later date as agreed, and the parties hereto shall be under no further liability arising out of this Agreement (except for the liability of the Issuer in relation to expenses as provided in clause 6 and except for any liability arising before or in relation to such termination), provided that the Lead Manager may in its discretion waive any of the aforesaid conditions (other than the condition precedent contained in clauses 4.2.1.3 and 4.2.1.10 of the Programme Agreement) or any part of them or may extend the time and/or date by which the conditions are to be satisfied to such later date and time as the Lead Manager and Issuer may agree upon.

 

8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

In the event of there being any dispute or difference between the Parties arising out of this Agreement, or in connection with it, or regarding its interpretation, validity, execution, implementation, termination or cancellation, the said dispute or difference will on written demand by any Party to the dispute be submitted to the Head of Treasury of each party, or a manager of similar seniority and status, for resolution. Should the designated representatives fail to resolve the said dispute with a period of 21 days from written submission, each party shall be entitled to follow its rights in terms of this Agreement.

 

LOGO

 

Page 4


9 TERMINATION

 

9.1 The Lead Manager (on behalf of the Dealers) may, on notice to the Issuer, terminate this Agreement at any time prior to payment of the net subscription monies to the Issuer if:

 

9.1.1 in the opinion of the Lead Manager (on behalf of the Dealers) there shall have been such a change in national or international financial, political or economic conditions or currency exchange rates or exchange controls or other calamity or emergency as would in the opinion of the Lead Manager (on behalf of the Dealers) be likely either -

 

9.1.2 to prejudice materially the success of the offering or distribution of the Notes or dealings in the Notes in the secondary market or result in a substantial deterioration in the price and/or the value of the Notes;

 

9.1.3 to a material extent prevent or restrict payment for the Notes in the manner contemplated in this Agreement; or

 

9.1.4 to a material extent prevent or restrict settlement of transactions in the Notes in the market or otherwise, or

 

9.1.5 a breach or any event rendering incorrect in any material respect any of the representations and warranties in clause 5 of the Programme Agreement or failure to perform any of the Issuer’s obligations contained in the Programme Agreement or this Agreement comes to notice of the Dealers,

and upon such notice being given, the parties to this Agreement shall (except for the liability of the Issuer in relation to expenses as provided in clause 6 of this Agreement and except for any liability arising before or in relation to such termination) be released and discharged from their respective obligations under this Agreement.

 

10 NOTICES

 

10.1 The parties choose as their addresses for all purposes under this Agreement, the following addresses:

Gold Fields Limited

Address: 150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton

 

Contact:

   [ ]

Telephone:

   [ ]

Telefax:

   [ ]

Attention:

   [ ]
[ ] (as Lead Manager)

 

LOGO

 

Page 5


Address: [ ]   
Contact:    [ ]
Telephone:    [ ]
Telefax:    [ ]
Attention:    [ ]
[INSERT NAME OF OTHER DEALERS]
Address: [ ]   
Contact:    [ ]
Telephone:    [ ]
Telefax:    [ ]
Attention:    [ ]

 

10.2 Any notice or communication given hereunder shall be sufficiently given or served -

 

10.2.1 if delivered in person to the relevant address specified herein and, if so delivered, shall be deemed to have been delivered at time of receipt; or

 

10.2.2 if sent by facsimile to the relevant number specified herein and, if so sent, shall be deemed to have been delivered immediately after successful transmission provided such transmission is confirmed when an acknowledgement of receipt is received.

 

10.3 Where a communication is received after business hours it shall be deemed to be received and become effective on the next Business Day. Every communication shall be irrevocable save in respect of any manifest error therein or with the agreement of the recipient.

 

11 GENERAL

 

11.1 This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

11.2 The Lead Manager (on behalf of the Dealers) undertakes to furnish the Transfer Agent, the Calculation Agent, the Paying Agent, the Arranger and the Dealers with signed copies of this Agreement.

 

11.3 The Issuer confirms that neither its assets nor the assets of any other Material Group Company are entitled to immunity from suit, execution, attachment or other legal process.

 

LOGO

 

Page 6


Signed on behalf of Gold Fields Limited ( as Issuer ) as set out below, the signatory hereto warranting that he or she has due authority to do so:

SIGNED at                                          on                                          2009

 

For and on behalf of

 

Gold Fields Limited

 

Signature:

 

Name:

 

Designation:

Signed on behalf of Gold Fields Limited ( as Issuer ) as set out below, the signatory hereto warranting that he or she has due authority to do so:

SIGNED at                                          on                                          2009

 

For and on behalf of

 

Gold Fields Limited

 

Signature:

 

Name:

 

Designation:

 

LOGO

 

Page 7


Signed on behalf of [ ] ( as Lead Manager ) as set out below, the signatory hereto warranting that he or she has due authority to do so:

SIGNED at                                          on                                          2009

 

For and on behalf of

 

[ ]

 

Signature:

 

Name:

 

Designation:

Signed on behalf of [ ] ( as Lead Manager ) as set out below, the signatory hereto warranting that he or she has due authority to do so:

SIGNED at                                          on                                          2009

 

For and on behalf of

 

[ ]

 

Signature:

 

Name:

 

Designation:

 

LOGO

 

Page 8


Signed on behalf of [INSERT NAME OF OTHER DEALERS] as set out below, the signatory hereto warranting that he or she has due authority to do so:

SIGNED at                                          on                                          2008

 

For and on behalf of

 

[INSERT NAME OF OTHER DEALERS]

 

Signature:

 

Name:

 

Designation:

Signed on behalf of [INSERT NAME OF OTHER DEALERS] as set out below, the signatory hereto warranting that he or she has due authority to do so:

SIGNED at                                          on                                          2008

 

For and on behalf of

 

[INSERT NAME OF OTHER DEALERS]

 

Signature:

 

Name:

 

Designation:

 

LOGO

 

Page 9


ANNEXE A

PRICING SUPPLEMENT

LOGO

Exhibit 4.23

REVOLVING CREDIT FACILITY AGREEMENT

Amongst

NEDBANK LIMITED

(acting through its NEDBANK CAPITAL and NEDBANK

CORPORATE divisions)

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

and

THE ORIGINAL GUARANTORS LISTED IN SCHEDULE 1

LOGO


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1.

   PARTIES    1

2.

   DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION    1

3.

   INTRODUCTION    38

4.

   THE FACILITY    39

5.

   CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION    40

6.

   UTILISATION OF FACILITY    42

7.

   INTEREST    44

8.

   INTEREST PERIODS    48

9.

   REPAYMENTS    50

10.

   PREPAYMENTS    50

11.

   FEES    55

12.

   TAX GROSS UP AND INDEMNITIES    56

13.

   INCREASED COSTS    60

14.

   COSTS AND EXPENSES    62

15.

   GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY    63

16.

   REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES    67

17.

   INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS    76

18.

   FINANCIAL COVENANTS    82

19.

   GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS    84

20.

   DEFAULT    91

21.

   CHANGE OF PARTY    99

22.

   CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS    103

23.

   PAYMENT MECHANICS    106

24.

   CONFIDENTIALITY    107

25.

   SET-OFF    109

26.

   NOTICES AND DOMICILIA    109


27.

   GENERAL    111

SCHEDULE 1 : ORIGINAL GUARANTORS

   119

SCHEDULE 2 : ADVANCE CONDITION DOCUMENTS

   120

SCHEDULE 3 : FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST

   123

SCHEDULE 4 : DISCLOSURES

   125

SCHEDULE 5 : FORM OF ACCESSION UNDERTAKING

   126

SCHEDULE 6 : FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER

   128

SCHEDULE 7 : FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

   130

SCHEDULE 8 : PERMITTED TRANSFEREES

   132


REVOLVING CREDIT FACILITY AGREEMENT

 

1. PARTIES

 

1.1 The Parties to this Agreement are:

 

1.1.1 NEDBANK LIMITED (acting through its NEDBANK CAPITAL and NEDBANK CORPORATE divisions) (as Facility Agent and Original Lender) ;

 

1.1.2 GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED (as Original Borrower) ;

 

1.1.3 GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED (as Original Borrower) ; and

 

1.1.4 THE ORIGINAL GUARANTORS LISTED IN SCHEDULE 1 (as Original Guarantors) .

 

1.2 The Parties agree as set out below.

 

2. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

2.1 In this Agreement and in the other Finance Documents, unless the context dictates otherwise or unless otherwise defined in a Finance Document, the words and expressions set forth below shall bear the following meanings and cognate expressions shall bear corresponding meanings:

 

2.1.1 “Accession Undertaking” means:

 

2.1.1.1 in relation to any Additional Borrower, an undertaking substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Accession Undertaking ) delivered or to be delivered to the Facility Agent and by which an Additional Borrower will become a Party to this Agreement; and


2.1.1.2 in relation to any Additional Guarantor, an undertaking substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Accession Undertaking ) delivered or to be delivered to the Facility Agent and by which an Additional Guarantor will become a Party to this Agreement;

 

2.1.2 “Additional Borrower” means any company which has become a Party as a Borrower in accordance with clause 22.2 ( Additional Borrowers );

 

2.1.3 “Additional Guarantor” means any company which has become a Party as a Guarantor in accordance with clause 22.4 ( Additional Guarantors );

 

2.1.4 “Agreement” means this Revolving Credit Facility Agreement and its Schedules;

 

2.1.5 “Arranger” means Nedbank;

 

2.1.6 “Auditors” means, at any time, the auditors of the Parent at that time, being as at the Signature Date PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc., and any replacement of those auditors appointed by the Parent;

 

2.1.7 “Availability Period” means the period commencing on the Financial Close Date and ending on the earlier of:

 

2.1.7.1 the date on which the Available Facility is cancelled in terms of this Agreement; and

 

2.1.7.2 the date which is 1 (one) month prior to the Final Maturity Date;

 

Page 2.


2.1.8 “Available Commitment” means, in relation to any Lender, that Lender’s Commitment minus (subject as set out below):

 

2.1.8.1 the amount of its participation in any outstanding Loans; and

 

2.1.8.2 in relation to any proposed Utilisation, the amount of its participation in any Loans that are due to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date;

provided that for the purposes of calculating a Lender’s Available Commitment in relation to any proposed Utilisation, that Lender’s participation in any Loans that are due to be repaid or prepaid on or before the proposed Utilisation Date shall not be deducted from that Lender’s Commitment;

 

2.1.9 “Available Facility” means the aggregate for the time being of each Lender’s Available Commitment;

 

2.1.10 “Base Rate” means, subject to clause 8.1.3, JIBAR or where it is not possible to determine JIBAR on any Reset Date, SAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks, in either case converted to a nominal annual compounded monthly in arrear rate;

 

2.1.11 “Borrowers” means the Original Borrowers and each Additional Borrower, unless it has ceased to be a Borrower in accordance with clause 22 (Change to the Obligors) , and a reference to “Borrower” shall be any one of them as the context requires;

 

2.1.12 “Breakage Costs” means the amount (if any) by which:

 

2.1.12.1

the interest which a Lender should have received for the period from the date of receipt of all or any part of its participation in a Loan or Unpaid Sum to the last day of the current Interest Period

 

Page 3.


 

in respect of that Loan or Unpaid Sum, had the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received been paid on the last day of that Interest Period;

exceeds:

 

2.1.12.2 the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received by it on deposit with a leading bank in the Johannesburg interbank market for a period starting on the Business Day following receipt or recovery and ending on the last day of the current Interest Period;

 

2.1.13 “Business Day” means any day (other than a Saturday, Sunday or an official public holiday in South Africa within the meaning of the Public Holidays Act, 1994) on which banks generally are open for business in Johannesburg;

 

2.1.14 “Cerro Corona Project” means the development of the gold and copper deposits in Peru by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary;

 

2.1.15 “Cerro Corona Subsidiary” means Gold Fields La Cima S.A.;

 

2.1.16 “Commitment” means:

 

2.1.16.1 in relation to the Original Lender, R1 500 000 000 (One Billion Five Hundred Million Rand); and

 

2.1.16.2 in relation to any other Lender, the amount of any Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement,

 

Page 4.


in each case, (a) to the extent not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement, and (b) exclusive of any accrued and unpaid or capitalised interest;

 

2.1.17 “Companies Act” means the Companies Act, 1973;

 

2.1.18 “Compliance Certificate” means a certificate substantially in the form of the letter set out in Schedule 7 ( Form of Compliance Certificate );

 

2.1.19 “Confidentiality Undertaking” means a confidentiality undertaking substantially in a recommended form of the Loan Market Association or in any other form agreed between the Parent and the Facility Agent;

 

2.1.20 “Constitutional Documents” means, in respect of any person at any time, the then current and up-to-date constitutional documents of such person at such time (including, without limitation, such person’s memorandum and articles of association, certificate of incorporation, articles of incorporation or commercial registration certificate);

 

2.1.21 “CP Satisfaction Date” means the date upon which the conditions set out in clause 5.1 have been fulfilled or, where capable of waiver, waived, as the case may be;

 

2.1.22 “Default” means an Event of Default or any event or circumstances specified in clause 20.1 ( Events of Default ) which would (with the expiry of a grace period, the giving of notice or the making of any determination under the Finance Documents or any combination of the foregoing) be an Event of Default;

 

2.1.23 “Encumbrance” means:

 

2.1.23.1 any mortgage, pledge, lien, assignment or cession conferring security, hypothecation, security interest, preferential right or trust arrangement or other encumbrance securing any obligation of any person; or

 

Page 5.


2.1.23.2 any arrangement under which money or claims to, or for the benefit of, a bank or other account may be applied, set off or made subject to a combination of accounts so as to effect discharge of any sum owed or payable to any person; or

 

2.1.23.3 any other type of preferential agreement or arrangement (including any title transfer and retention arrangement), the effect of which is the creation of a security interest;

 

2.1.24 “Environmental Claim” means any claim, proceeding or investigation by any person in respect of any Environmental Law;

 

2.1.25 “Environmental Law” means any law applicable to the business conducted by a Material Group Company at the relevant time in any jurisdiction in which that Material Group Company conducts business which relates to the pollution, degradation or protection of the environment or harm to or the protection of human health or the health of animals or plants;

 

2.1.26 “Environmental Permits” means any permit, licence, consent, approval and other authorisation and the filing of any notification, report or assessment required under any Environmental Law for the operation of the business of any Material Group Company conducted on or from the properties owned or used by that Material Group Company;

 

2.1.27 “Event of Default” means any event or circumstance specified as such in clause 20.1 ( Events of Default );

 

2.1.28 “Facility” means the revolving credit facility made available to the Borrowers under this Agreement as described in clause 4 ( The Facility );

 

Page 6.


2.1.29 “Facility Agent” means Nedbank;

 

2.1.30 “Fee Letter” means any letter or letters between the Arranger and the Parent (or the Facility Agent and the Parent) setting out any of the fees referred to in clause 11 ( Fees );

 

2.1.31 “Final Maturity Date” means the 5th anniversary of the Financial Close Date;

 

2.1.32 “Finance Documents” means:

 

2.1.32.1 this Agreement;

 

2.1.32.2 any Fee Letter;

 

2.1.32.3 any Utilisation Request;

 

2.1.32.4 any Accession Undertaking;

 

2.1.32.5 any other agreement or document at any time designated a Finance Document by written agreement between the Facility Agent and the Borrowers; and

 

2.1.32.6 any amendment agreement to any of the Finance Documents referred to in clauses 2.1.32.1 to 2.1.32.5 above;

and “Finance Document” means, as the context requires, any of them;

 

2.1.33 “Finance Party” means:

 

2.1.33.1 each Lender; and

 

2.1.33.2 the Facility Agent;

 

Page 7.


and “Finance Parties” means, as the context requires, all of them;

 

2.1.34 “Financial Close Date” means the date which is the earlier of:

 

2.1.34.1 the CP Satisfaction Date; or

 

2.1.34.2 the date on which the first Utilisation is made under this Agreement;

 

2.1.35 “Financial Close Documents” means all of the documents and other evidence listed in Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents );

 

2.1.36 “Financial Covenants” means the financial covenants and ratios set out in clause 18.1 ( Financial Condition );

 

2.1.37 “GAAP” means the generally accepted accounting principles set out in IFRS;

 

2.1.38 “GFIMSA” means GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited (Registration No. 2002/031431/07), a private company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa;

 

2.1.39 “GFOH” means Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited (Registration No. 184982), a limited liability company duly incorporated according to the company laws of the British Virgin Islands;

 

2.1.40 “GFO” means Gold Fields Operations Limited (Registration No. 1959/003209/06), a public company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa;

 

Page 8.


2.1.41 “Ghanaian Companies” means Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited and “Ghanaian Company” means either of them as required by the context;

 

2.1.42 “Group” means the Parent, the Guarantors and their subsidiaries from time to time;

 

2.1.43 “Group Company” means any member of the Group and “Group Companies” means, as the context requires, all of them;

 

2.1.44 “Guarantors” means the Original Guarantors and each Additional Guarantor, unless it has ceased to be a Guarantor in accordance with clause 22 (Change to the Obligors) , and a reference to “Guarantor” shall be to any one of them as the context requires;

 

2.1.45 “IFRS” means International Financial Reporting Standards issued and/or adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board;

 

2.1.46 “Interest Period” means, in relation to a Loan, each period determined in accordance with clause 8 ( Interest Periods ) and, in relation to an Unpaid Sum, each period determined in accordance with clause 7.3 ( Default Interest );

 

2.1.47 “JIBAR” means, in relation to any Interest Period, the rate for the period which most closely approximates such Interest Period which appears on the Reuters Screen SAFEY Page as at 11h00 Johannesburg time on the first day of such Interest Period;

 

2.1.48 “JSE Listings Requirements” means the listings requirements for public listed companies published by JSE Limited in accordance with the provisions of the Securities Services Act, 2004;

 

Page 9.


2.1.49 “Lender” means:

 

2.1.49.1 the Original Lender; and

 

2.1.49.2 any bank or financial institution which has become a Party in accordance with clause 21 ( Change of Party ),

which in each case has not ceased to be a Party in accordance with the terms of this Agreement;

 

2.1.50 “Loan” means a loan made or to be made under the Facility or (as the context may require) the principal amount outstanding for the time being of that loan;

 

2.1.51 “Majority Lenders” means:

 

2.1.51.1

if there are no Loans then outstanding, a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate more than 66 2 / 3 % of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated more than 66 2 / 3 % of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction); or

 

2.1.51.2

at any other time, a Lender or Lenders whose participations in the Loans then outstanding aggregate more than 66 2 / 3 % of all the Loans then outstanding;

 

2.1.52 “Margin” means 2,95% (two comma nine five percent) nominal annual compounded monthly in arrears (which includes, subject to clause 13 ( Increased Costs ), all statutory, liquid and reserve costs, the Lenders’ credit margin and all other regulatory costs);

 

2.1.53

“Market Downturn Event” means any material adverse change, determined in the sole good faith discretion of the Original Lender, in

 

Page 10.


 

(a) the South African or international capital markets or in the South African or international monetary, financial, political or economic conditions, or (b) the South African or international gold mining industry, in each case which renders it unlawful, impossible or, in the sole good faith discretion of the Original Lender, uneconomic, to provide the Facility on any terms or the terms set out in this Agreement; provided that the provision of the Facility shall not be regarded as “uneconomic” if the primary reason therefore is that the Original Lender wishes to place the capital committed by it pursuant to the Facility on more attractive financial terms than those of the Facility;

 

2.1.54 “Material Adverse Effect” means a material adverse effect on:

 

2.1.54.1 the ability of an Obligor to perform its financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party; or

 

2.1.54.2 the validity and enforceability of the Finance Documents or any of them;

 

2.1.55 “Material Group Companies” means:

 

2.1.55.1 each Obligor; and

 

2.1.55.2 any Group Company from time to time that is not a Non-Material Group Company,

and “Material Group Company” means, as the context requires, any one of them;

 

2.1.56 “Month” means a reference to a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day but one in the next calendar month, except that:

 

Page 11.


2.1.56.1 subject to clause 2.1.56.3, if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business Day, that period shall end on the next Business Day in that calendar month in which that period is to end if there is one, or if there is not, on the immediately preceding Business Day;

 

2.1.56.2 if there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month in which that period is to end, that period shall end on the last Business Day in that calendar month; and

 

2.1.56.3 if an Interest Period begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month, that Interest Period shall end on the last Business Day in the calendar month in which that Interest Period is to end;

 

2.1.57 “Nedbank” means Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (Registration No. 1951/000009/06), a public company and registered bank duly incorporated according to the company and banking laws of South Africa;

 

2.1.58 “Non-Material Group Company” means, at any time, a member of the Group (other than an Obligor) which had EBITDA (determined on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) or gross assets in its most recently ended Financial Year (on a consolidated basis taking into account it and its subsidiaries only) less than or equal to 5% (five percent) of Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements) ). Compliance with the aforementioned condition shall be determined by reference to the latest audited financial statements of such member of the Group (consolidated in the case of a member of the Group which itself has subsidiaries), provided that :

 

Page 12.


2.1.58.1 if, in the case of any member of the Group which itself has subsidiaries, no consolidated financial statements are prepared and audited, its consolidated EBITDA and gross assets shall be determined on the basis of pro forma consolidated financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and its subsidiaries, prepared for this purpose by the Parent;

 

2.1.58.2 if any intra-Group transfer or re-organisation takes place, the audited financial statements of the Group Company and all relevant members of the Group shall be adjusted by the Parent in order to take into account such intra-Group transfer or re-organisation; and

 

2.1.58.3 the audited financial statements of the Group and any relevant member of the Group shall be adjusted in such a manner as the Auditors think fair and appropriate to take account of the acquisition or disposal of any member of the Group or any business of any member of the Group, after the date or at which the audited financial statements of the Group are made up.

Should there be any dispute regarding whether any member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company such dispute shall be referred, at the request of the Facility Agent, to the Auditors and a report by the Auditors that a member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. The costs of obtaining the report by the Auditors will be borne by the unsuccessful party to the dispute;

 

2.1.59 “Obligor” means:

 

2.1.59.1 a Borrower;

 

Page 13.


2.1.59.2 a Guarantor; or

 

2.1.59.3 any other person comprising a Group Company, designated as an Obligor by agreement between the Facility Agent, the Parent and such person from time to time,

and “Obligors” means, as the context requires, all of them;

 

2.1.60 “Original Borrowers” means:

 

2.1.60.1 GFIMSA; and

 

2.1.60.2 GFO,

and “Original Borrower” means, as the context requires, any of them;

 

2.1.61 “Original Financial Statements” means the audited consolidated annual financial statements of the Parent for the Financial Year ended 30 June 2008;

 

2.1.62 “Original Guarantors” means the parties listed in Schedule 1 ( Original Guarantors );

 

2.1.63 “Original Lender” means Nedbank;

 

2.1.64 “Parent” means Gold Fields Limited (Registration No. 1968/004880/06), a public company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa;

 

2.1.65 “Parties” means:

 

2.1.65.1 the Lenders;

 

Page 14.


2.1.65.2 the Borrowers;

 

2.1.65.3 the Facility Agent; and

 

2.1.65.4 the Guarantors,

and “Party” means, as the context requires, any one of them;

 

2.1.66 “Permitted Disposal” means any sale, lease, transfer or other disposal:

 

2.1.66.1 by an Obligor or any member of the Group of obsolete or redundant assets which are no longer required for the efficient operation of the business of such Obligor or such member of the Group; or

 

2.1.66.2 by an Obligor or any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its day-to-day business if that sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is not otherwise restricted by a term of any Finance Document; or

 

2.1.66.3 by an Obligor to another Obligor (other than to an Additional Obligor); or

 

2.1.66.4 by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to an Obligor or by an Obligor to an Additional Obligor or to a member of the Group that is not an Obligor if such sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is concluded at arm’s length; or

 

2.1.66.5 by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to another member of the Group that is not an Obligor; or

 

2.1.66.6

by any member of the Group to any other person where the higher of the market value or consideration receivable when aggregated

 

Page 15.


 

with the higher of the market value or consideration receivable for any other sale, lease, transfer or other disposal by any member of the Group (other than a sale, lease, transfer or other disposal referred to in clauses 2.1.66.1, 2.1.66.2, 2.1.66.3, 2.1.66.4, 2.1.66.5 and 2.1.66.7) does not exceed 10% (ten percent) of the Consolidated Tangible Net Worth in any Financial Year subject to a maximum of 30% (thirty percent) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth at such time in aggregate during the period from the date of this Agreement to the Final Maturity Date; or

 

2.1.66.7 for which the Facility Agent has given its prior written consent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders);

 

2.1.67 “Permitted Encumbrance” means:

 

2.1.67.1 any Encumbrance created prior to the Signature Date which has been disclosed:

 

2.1.67.1.1 in writing to the Facility Agent prior to the Signature Date; or

 

2.1.67.1.2 in the Original Financial Statements,

and which only secures indebtedness outstanding at the Signature Date if the principal amount or original facility thereby secured is not increased after the Signature Date;

 

2.1.67.2 any title transfer or retention arrangement entered into by any Group Company in the normal course of the trading activities and on terms no worse for that Group Company than the standard terms of the relevant supplier;

 

Page 16.


2.1.67.3 any netting or set-off arrangement entered into by any Group Company in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements (which shall include, for the avoidance of doubt, those pursuant to hedging arrangements in relation to gold and silver prices, foreign exchange rates and interest rates where such arrangements are entered into for the purposes of providing protection against fluctuation in such rates or prices in the ordinary course of business), for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;

 

2.1.67.4 any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of trading and not by reason of any default (whether in payment or otherwise) of any Group Company;

 

2.1.67.5 any Encumbrance over or affecting (or transaction described in clause 19.3 ( Negative Pledge ) ( “Quasi-Encumbrance” ) affecting) any asset acquired by a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement if:

 

2.1.67.5.1 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group;

 

2.1.67.5.2 the principal amount secured has not been increased in contemplation of, or since the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group; and

 

2.1.67.5.3 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to clauses 2.1.67.2, 2.1.67.3, 2.1.67.4, 2.1.67.6, 2.1.67.7, 2.1.67.8 or 2.1.67.9) removed or discharged within six months of the date of acquisition of such asset;

 

Page 17.


2.1.67.6 any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement, where the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is created prior to the date on which that company becomes a member of the Group, if:

 

2.1.67.6.1 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that company;

 

2.1.67.6.2 the principal amount secured has not increased in contemplation of or since the acquisition of that company; and

 

2.1.67.6.3 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to clauses 2.1.67.2, 2.1.67.3, 2.1.67.4, 2.1.67.6, 2.1.67.7, 2.1.67.8 or 2.1.67.9) removed or discharged within six months of that company becoming a member of the Group;

 

2.1.67.7 any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Project Finance Borrowings over assets of, or the shares in, a Project Finance Subsidiary;

 

2.1.67.8

in respect of Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances over or affecting any asset of any Material Group Company, any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance securing indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other indebtedness which has the benefit of Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance other than any permitted under clauses 2.1.67.1 to 2.1.67.7 above and clauses 2.1.67.9 and 2.1.67.10 below) does not at any time exceed 12% (twelve

 

Page 18.


 

percent) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth (or its equivalent in another currency) (but adjusted to include the net value of new assets acquired since the last date of the latest set of consolidated annual financial statements of the Group);

 

2.1.67.9 any other Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance created with the prior written approval of the Facility Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders);

 

2.1.67.10 any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Financial Indebtedness incurred in connection with the Cerro Corona Project over the business or assets of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary or over the Ownership Interests in the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that the amount of Financial Indebtedness secured by all such Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances permitted by this clause 2.1.67.10 does not at any time in aggregate exceed US$200 000 000 (Two Hundred Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$). In this clause 2.1.67.10 “Ownership Interests” means:

 

2.1.67.10.1 the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary;

 

2.1.67.10.2 any shareholder loans made to the Cerro Corona Subsidiary;

 

2.1.67.10.3 to the extent required by Peruvian law, the shares in the holding company which directly owns the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that such holding company’s sole assets are shares issued by, and any loans made by it to, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and its sister company, Mineral Gold Fields S.A.;

 

Page 19.


2.1.68 “Permitted Indebtedness” means Financial Indebtedness:

 

2.1.68.1 arising under the Finance Documents;

 

2.1.68.2 arising under any environmental bond which any member of the Group is required to issue by any applicable law;

 

2.1.68.3 arising in connection with the Cerro Corona Project;

 

2.1.68.4 arising under any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price but not for speculative purposes;

 

2.1.68.5 of the Group existing and available on the date of this Agreement (or, of any person that becomes a member of the Group from time to time, provided that , such Financial Indebtedness existed at the time such person became a member of the Group and was not created in anticipation thereof);

 

2.1.68.6 between Group Companies to the extent incurred for the purposes of financing general working capital requirements; or

 

2.1.68.7 not falling within clauses 2.1.68.1, 2.1.68.2, 2.1.68.3, 2.1.68.4, 2.1.68.5 or 2.1.68.6 above provided that the aggregate amount of all Financial Indebtedness (excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any Financial Indebtedness incurred by a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) permitted under this clause 2.1.68.7 does not at any time exceed US$200 000 000 (Two Hundred Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$);

 

2.1.69 “Permitted Transferees” means, subject to clause 21.2.3, any person listed in Schedule 8 ( Permitted Transferees );

 

Page 20.


2.1.70 “Project Finance Borrowings” means:

 

2.1.70.1 any indebtedness to finance (or refinance) a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of assets which is incurred by a Project Finance Subsidiary in connection with such project and in respect of which the recourse of the person(s) making any such finance (or re-finance) available to that Project Finance Subsidiary for the payment, repayment and prepayment of such indebtedness is limited to (i) the Project Finance Subsidiary and its assets and/or the shares in that Project Finance Subsidiary and/or (ii) during the period prior to successful completion of the relevant completion tests applicable to such project guarantees from any one or more members of the Group;

 

2.1.70.2 any indebtedness the terms and conditions of which have been approved by the Facility Agent and which the Facility Agent has agreed in writing (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) to treat as a “Project Finance Borrowing” for the purposes of this Agreement;

 

2.1.71 “Project Finance Subsidiary” means a single purpose company (excluding the Obligors) whose sole business is a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of an asset which has incurred Project Finance Borrowings;

 

2.1.72 “Rand” and “R” means South African Rand, the lawful currency of South Africa;

 

Page 21.


2.1.73 “Reference Banks” means FirstRand Bank Limited, The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited, Nedbank Limited and Absa Bank Limited;

 

2.1.74 “Repeating Representations” means each of those representations and warranties set out in clause 16.1 ( Representations and Warranties ) which are stated as being deemed to be repeated as provided for pursuant to clause 16.2 ( Repetition );

 

2.1.75 “Repetition Date” has the meaning given to it in clause 16.2 ( Repetition );

 

2.1.76 “Reset Date” means the first day of each Interest Period, being the date in each case upon which the relevant Base Rate is to be determined for such Interest Period, provided the first Reset Date shall be the first Utilisation Date;

 

2.1.77 “Resignation Letter” means a letter substantially in the form of the letter set out in Schedule 6 ( Form of Resignation Letter );

 

2.1.78 “Rollover Loans” means one or more Loans:

 

2.1.78.1 made or to be made on the same day that a maturing Loan is due to be repaid;

 

2.1.78.2 the aggregate amount of which is equal to or less than the maturing Loan; and

 

2.1.78.3 made or to be made for the purpose of refinancing a maturing Loan;

 

Page 22.


2.1.79 “SAFEX Overnight Deposit Rate” means:

 

2.1.79.1 on the relevant Reset Date, the overnight deposit rate designated as ( “SFXROD” ) which appears on the Reuters SAFEX Money Market Screen as of 11h00 Johannesburg time on that date, rounded to the third decimal point; or

 

2.1.79.2 where the SAFEX Overnight Deposit Rate cannot be determined on account of the relevant rate not appearing on the Reuters SAFEX Money Market Screen, an equivalent rate determined by the Facility Agent, acting in a commercially reasonable manner;

 

2.1.80 “SAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks” means the mid-market rate between deposits and loans in Rand for an Interest Period quoted by the Reference Banks at approximately 11am Johannesburg time on the relevant Reset Date. The Facility Agent will request the principal Johannesburg office of each of the Reference Banks to provide a quotation of its rate. If at least two quotations are provided, the rate for that Reset Date will be the arithmetic means of the quotations. If fewer than two quotations are provided, the rate for that Reset Date will be determined by the Facility Agent, acting in a commercially reasonable manner, using a representative rate;

 

2.1.81 “Semi-Annual Period” shall bear the meaning defined in clause 7.2.2.1;

 

2.1.82 “Signature Date” means the date of the signature of this Agreement by the Party signing last in time, provided that all the Parties have signed this Agreement;

 

2.1.83 “South Africa” means the Republic of South Africa as constituted from time to time;

 

Page 23.


2.1.84 “Tax” means any tax, levy, impost, duty or other charge or withholding of a similar nature (including, without limitation, any penalty or interest payable in connection with any failure to pay or delay in paying any of the same);

 

2.1.85 “Tax Credit” means a credit against, relief or remission for, or repayment of any Tax;

 

2.1.86 “Tax Deduction” means a deduction or withholding for or on account of Tax from payment under a Finance Document;

 

2.1.87 “Tax Payment” means either the increase in a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party under Clause 12.1 (Tax gross-up) or a payment under Clause 12.2 (Tax indemnity) ;

 

2.1.88 “Total Commitments” means the aggregate of all the Lenders’ Commitments at any time;

 

2.1.89 “Unpaid Sum” means any sum due and payable but unpaid by an Obligor under the Finance Documents;

 

2.1.90 “Utilisation” means a utilisation of the Facility;

 

2.1.91 “Utilisation Date” means the date of a Utilisation being the date upon which the relevant Loan is made;

 

2.1.92 “Utilisation Request” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Schedule 3 ( Form of Utilisation Request );

 

2.1.93 “VAT” means value added tax leviable in terms of the Value Added Tax Act, 1991.

 

Page 24.


2.2 Financial Definitions

 

2.2.1 In the Finance Documents, the accounting expressions set forth below shall bear the following meanings:

 

2.2.1.1 “Consolidated EBITDA” means, for any Measurement Period or any Permitted Indebtedness Measurement Period, (having reversed any entries made to reflect fair value gains or losses on financial derivative investments which are undertaken in the normal course of business) Consolidated Profits Before Interest and Tax before any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets and before any extraordinary items;

 

2.2.1.2 “Consolidated Net Borrowings” means, at any time, the aggregate amount of all obligations of the Group for or in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money but excluding any such obligation to any member of the Group, adjusted to take account of the aggregate amount of freely available cash and cash equivalents held by any member of the Group (and so that no amount shall be included or excluded more than once);

 

2.2.1.3 “Consolidated Net Finance Charges” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the aggregate amount of the interest (including the interest element of leasing and hire purchase payments and capitalised interest), commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments payable by any member of the Group (including any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payment payable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging arrangement but deducting any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments receivable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging instrument) but deducting any other interest receivable by any member of the Group on any deposit or bank account;

 

28


2.2.1.4 “Consolidated Profits Before Interest and Tax” means, in respect of any Measurement Period or any Permitted Indebtedness Measurement Period, the consolidated net income of the Group (less the net income of any Project Finance subsidiaries but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group (other than a Project Finance Subsidiary) from a Project Finance Subsidiary) before:

 

2.2.1.4.1 any provision on account of normal taxation; and

 

2.2.1.4.2 any interest, commission, discounts or other fees incurred or payable, received or receivable by any member of the Group in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money;

 

2.2.1.5 “Consolidated Tangible Net Worth” means, at any time, the “Total Equity”, as reported in the “Group Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity” in the last set of annual consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to this Agreement;

 

2.2.1.6 “Financial Indebtedness” means (without double counting) any indebtedness of the Group for or in respect of:

 

2.2.1.6.1 moneys borrowed;

 

2.2.1.6.2 any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility;

 

Page 26.


2.2.1.6.3 any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument;

 

2.2.1.6.4 the amount of any liability in respect of any lease or hire purchase contract which would, in accordance with GAAP, be treated as a finance or capital lease;

 

2.2.1.6.5 receivables sold or discounted (other than any receivables to the extent they are sold on a non-recourse basis);

 

2.2.1.6.6 the amount of any liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred where the deferral of such price is either:

 

2.2.1.6.6.1 used primarily as a method of raising credit; or

 

2.2.1.6.6.2 not made in the ordinary course of business;

 

2.2.1.6.7 any agreement or option to re-acquire an asset if one of the primary reasons for entering into such agreement or option is to raise finance;

 

2.2.1.6.8 any amount raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) having the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

2.2.1.6.9

any derivative transaction (a “Derivative Transaction” ) entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price save for a Derivative Transaction entered into in relation to any amount payable to a trade creditor (and, when calculating the value of any Derivative Transaction, only the marked to market value

 

Page 27.


 

shall be taken into account which, for the avoidance of doubt, may be an addition to or subtraction from the amount of Financial Indebtedness);

 

2.2.1.6.10 any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, standby or documentary letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution;

 

2.2.1.6.11 any amount raised by the issue of redeemable shares; and

 

2.2.1.6.12 the amount of any liability in respect of any guarantee or indemnity for any of the items referred to in paragraphs 2.2.1.6.1 to 2.2.1.6.11 above,

but not including any indebtedness owed by any Obligor to any other Obligor;

 

2.2.1.7 “Financial Year” means, at any time, the financial year of the Group ending on 30 June in each calendar year;

 

2.2.1.8 “Forecast Consolidated EBITDA” means, for any Forecast Period, (having reversed any entries made to reflect fair value gains or losses on financial derivative investments which are undertaken in the normal course of business) Consolidated Profits Before Interest and Tax before any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets and before any extraordinary items plus, if clause 2.2.1.15.1 is applicable, the Target Forecast EBITDA;

 

2.2.1.9 “Forecast Measurement Date” means the last day of the most recent quarter of the Parent’s Financial Year for which quarterly financial statements have been published;

 

Page 28.


2.2.1.10 “Forecast Period” means, in relation to a Forecast Measurement Date, the period of 12 (twelve) calendar months immediately succeeding that Forecast Measurement Date;

 

2.2.1.11 “Indebtedness for Borrowed Money” means Financial Indebtedness save for any indebtedness for or in respect of clauses 2.2.1.6.9 and 2.2.1.6.10 of the definition of “Financial Indebtedness” ;

 

2.2.1.12 “Measurement Date” means the last day of the Parent’s Financial Year and the last day of the first half of the Parent’s Financial Year;

 

2.2.1.13 “Measurement Period” means each period of 12 (twelve) calendar months ending on (but including) a Measurement Date (and whether or not commencing prior to the Signature Date);

 

2.2.1.14 “Permitted Indebtedness Measurement Period” means each period of 12 (twelve) calendar months ending on (but including) a Forecast Measurement Date (and whether or not commencing prior to the Signature Date);

 

2.2.1.15 “Permitted Indebtedness Ratio” means, as at the date on which any Financial Indebtedness contemplated by clause 19.4.2 is proposed to be incurred, the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings (including such Financial Indebtedness) to Forecast Consolidated EBITDA or Consolidated EBITDA for the most recent Permitted Indebtedness Measurement Period, whichever is the lower; provided that:

 

2.2.1.15.1

if that Financial Indebtedness is to be incurred for the purpose of financing the acquisition by the Parent or any

 

Page 29.


 

member of the Group of all or such part of the issued share capital of a limited liability company (or other equivalent ownership interest in another limited liability entity) that would require the Parent to equity account for such entity in accordance with GAAP and/or the assets and undertaking of a business (each, a “Proposed Target” ), the Proposed Target’s:

 

2.2.1.15.1.1 projected earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation (calculated on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) ( “Target Forecast EBITDA” ) for the Forecast Period in which that Financial Indebtedness is to be incurred (pro rated to the extent that the acquisition is in respect of only a portion of the Proposed Target), after deducting the projected costs of the acquisition of the Proposed Target and the projected costs to be incurred in integrating the Proposed Target into the Group, may be added to the Forecast Consolidated EBITDA;

 

2.2.1.15.1.2 historic earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation (calculated on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) ( “Target Historic EBITDA” ) for the immediately preceding Permitted Indebtedness Measurement Period (pro rated to the extent that the acquisition is in respect of only a portion of the Proposed Target) may be added to the Consolidated EBITDA; and

 

2.2.1.15.1.3

net borrowings (calculated on the same basis as Consolidated Net Borrowings) ( “Target Net Borrowings” ) (pro rated to the extent that the

 

Page 30.


 

acquisition is in respect of only a portion of the Proposed Target) may be added to Consolidated Net Borrowings,

 

     for the purposes of determining the Permitted Indebtedness Ratio if the Permitted Indebtedness Ratio would exceed 2:1 without the inclusion of the Target Forecast EBITDA and/or the Target Historic EBITDA and the Target Net Borrowings;

 

2.2.1.15.2 the Forecast Consolidated EBITDA, and (if applicable) the Target Forecast EBITDA, is determined by the Parent based on forecasts and projections prepared on the basis of recent historical information, Bloomberg median consensus forecasts for exchange rates and commodity prices, and other assumptions that are fair and reasonable in all material respects as at that date.

 

2.3 I nterpretation and Construction

 

2.3.1 A document in an “ agreed form ” is a document which has been initialled as such on or before the relevant date for the purposes of identification by or on behalf of the Borrower and the Facility Agent or, if not so initialled, is in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Facility Agent.

 

2.3.2 Any reference in any Finance Document to:

 

2.3.2.1 an “affiliate” means, in relation to any person, a subsidiary of that person or a holding company of that person or any other subsidiary of that holding company;

 

Page 31.


2.3.2.2 an “amendment” includes a supplement, novation or re-enactment and “amended” is to be construed accordingly;

 

2.3.2.3 “arm’s length” means terms that are fair and reasonable to the counterparty of a transaction and no more or less favourable to the other party to the relevant transaction as could reasonably be expected to be obtained in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a person that is not the ultimate holding company of such counterparty or an entity of which such counterparty or its ultimate holding company has direct or indirect control, or owns directly or indirectly more than 20% (twenty percent) of the share capital or similar rights of ownership;

 

2.3.2.4 “assets” includes properties, revenues and rights of every description;

 

2.3.2.5 “audited” means, in respect of any financial statement those financial statements as audited by the Auditors;

 

2.3.2.6 “authorisations” mean any authorisation, consent, registration, filing, agreement, notarisation, certificate, licence, approval, resolution, permit and/or authority or any exemption from any of the aforesaid, by, with or from any authority (including, without limitation, any approvals required from the South African Reserve Bank in relation to any Finance Document or any transaction contemplated under any Finance Document);

 

2.3.2.7 “authority” means any government or governmental, administrative, fiscal or judicial authority, body, court, department, commission, tribunal, registry or any stated owned or controlled authority which principally performs governmental functions;

 

Page 32.


2.3.2.8 a “calendar month” shall be construed as a named month, i.e. January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November and December;

 

2.3.2.9 a “clause” shall, subject to any contrary indication, be construed as a reference to a clause hereof;

 

2.3.2.10 “continuing” , in the context of a Default, means:

 

2.3.2.10.1 where an Event of Default or its consequences are incapable of remedy that Event of Default is deemed to be continuing unless it has been expressly waived in writing by the Facility Agent and any conditions of such waiver have been fulfilled to the reasonable satisfaction of the Facility Agent;

 

2.3.2.10.2 in any other case, the Default is deemed to be continuing unless and until either:

 

2.3.2.10.2.1 it has been expressly waived in writing by the Facility Agent and any conditions of such waiver have been fulfilled to the reasonable satisfaction of the Facility Agent; or

 

2.3.2.10.2.2 it has been remedied within the applicable remedy period by any person and the resulting position is that which it would have been if such Default had not occurred or if the resulting position is reasonably acceptable to the Facility Agent;

 

2.3.2.11 a “holding company” shall be construed in accordance with the Companies Act;

 

Page 33.


2.3.2.12 the words “including” and “in particular” are used by way of illustration or emphasis only and shall not be construed as, nor shall they take effect as, limiting the generality of any of the preceding words;

 

2.3.2.13 “indebtedness” shall be construed so as to include any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety or as guarantor) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

 

2.3.2.14 “law” shall be construed as any law (including statutory, common or customary law), statute, constitution, decree, judgment, treaty, regulation, directive, by-law, order, other legislative measure, directive, requirement, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but, if not having the force of law, is generally complied with by the persons to whom it is addressed or applied) of any government, supranational, local government, statutory or regulatory or self-regulatory or similar body or authority or court and the common law, as amended, replaced, re-enacted, restated or reinterpreted from time to time;

 

2.3.2.15 the words “other” and “otherwise” shall not be construed eiusdem generis with any foregoing words where a wider construction is possible;

 

2.3.2.16 a “person” shall be construed as a reference to any person, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any association or partnership (whether or not having separate legal personality) of two or more of the foregoing;

 

2.3.2.17

a “regulation” means any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but

 

Page 34.


 

complied with generally) of any governmental, inter-governmental or supranational body, agency, department or regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation;

 

2.3.2.18 “repay” (or any derivative form of that word) includes “prepay” (or any derivative form of that word);

 

2.3.2.19 “security interest” means any mortgage, pledge, lien, charge, assignment, cession, hypothecation or security interest or any other agreement or arrangement having the effect of conferring security;

 

2.3.2.20 a “Schedule” shall, subject to any contrary indication, be construed as a reference to a schedule hereof or a schedule of a Finance Document;

 

2.3.2.21 a “subsidiary” shall be construed in accordance with the Companies Act.

 

2.3.3 Unless inconsistent with the context or save where the contrary is expressly indicated in any Finance Document:

 

2.3.3.1 if any provision in a definition is a substantive provision conferring rights or imposing obligations on any Party, notwithstanding that it appears only in an interpretation clause, effect shall be given to it as if it were a substantive provision of the relevant Finance Document;

 

2.3.3.2 when any number of days is prescribed in any Finance Document, same shall be reckoned inclusively of the first and exclusively of the last day unless the last day falls on a day which is not a Business Day, in which case the last day shall be the next succeeding Business Day;

 

Page 35.


2.3.3.3 in the event that the day for payment of any amount due in terms of any Finance Document should fall on a day which is not a Business Day, the relevant day for payment shall be the preceding Business Day;

 

2.3.3.4 in the event that the day for performance of any obligation to be performed in terms of any Finance Document should fall on a day which is not a Business Day, the relevant day for performance shall be the succeeding Business Day;

 

2.3.3.5 any reference in any Finance Document to an enactment is to that enactment as at the Signature Date and as amended or re-enacted from time to time;

 

2.3.3.6 any reference in any Finance Document to this Agreement or any other agreement or document shall be construed as a reference to this Agreement or, as the case may be, such other agreement or document as same may have been, or may from time to time be, amended, varied, novated or supplemented;

 

2.3.3.7 except as expressly provided for in any Finance Document, no provision of any Finance Document constitutes a stipulation for the benefit of any person who is not a Party to the relevant Finance Document;

 

2.3.3.8 references to day/s, calendar month/s or year/s shall be construed as Gregorian calendar day/s, calendar month/s or year/s;

 

2.3.3.9 a reference to a Party includes that Party’s successors-in-title and permitted assigns;

 

2.3.3.10

where any Party is required to provide any consent or approval or agree to the actions of any other Party, the request for such

 

Page 36.


 

consent or approval or agreement shall be in writing and such consent or approval or agreement shall be in writing and shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed having regard to the financial condition of the Borrower and the Group and the ability of the Obligors to perform their financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

2.3.4 The headings to the clauses and schedules of any Finance Document are for reference purposes only and shall in no way govern or affect the interpretation of nor modify nor amplify the terms of any Finance Document nor any clause or schedule thereof.

 

2.3.5 Unless inconsistent with the context, an expression in any Finance Document which denotes:

 

2.3.5.1 any one gender includes the other genders;

 

2.3.5.2 a natural person includes an artificial person and vice versa ; and

 

2.3.5.3 the singular includes the plural and vice versa .

 

2.3.6 The Schedules to any Finance Document form an integral part thereof and words and expressions defined in any Finance Document shall bear, unless the context otherwise requires, the same meaning in such Schedules. To the extent that there is any conflict between the Schedules to any Finance Document and the provisions of the relevant Finance Document, the provisions of the relevant Finance Document shall prevail.

 

2.3.7 Where any term is defined within the context of any particular clause in any Finance Document, the term so defined, unless it is clear from the clause in question that the term so defined has limited application to the relevant clause, shall bear the same meaning as ascribed to it for all purposes in terms of the relevant Finance Document, notwithstanding that that term has not been defined in any interpretation clause.

 

Page 37.


2.3.8 The expiration or termination of any Finance Documents shall not affect such of the provisions of the Finance Documents as expressly provide that they will operate after any such expiration or termination or which of necessity must continue to have effect after such expiration or termination, notwithstanding that the clauses themselves do not expressly provide for this.

 

2.3.9 The Finance Documents shall be binding on and enforceable by the administrators, trustees, permitted assigns or liquidators of the Parties as fully and effectually as if they had signed the Finance Documents in the first instance and reference to any Party shall be deemed to include such Party’s administrators, trustees, permitted assigns or liquidators, as the case may be.

 

2.3.10 The use of any expression in any Finance Document covering a process available under South African law such as winding-up (without limitation eiusdem generis ) shall, if any of the Parties to the Finance Documents is subject to the law of any other jurisdiction, be construed as including any equivalent or analogous proceedings under the law of such other jurisdiction.

 

2.3.11 Where figures are referred to in numerals and in words in any Finance Document, if there is any conflict between the two, the words shall prevail.

 

3. INTRODUCTION

 

3.1 The Borrowers require the Facility for the purpose of funding (i) capital expenditure of the Group, (ii) general corporate and working capital requirements of the Group, and (iii) the refinancing of existing Financial Indebtedness.

 

Page 38.


3.2 The Lenders have agreed to make the Facility available to the Borrowers in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

 

4. THE FACILITY

 

4.1 The Facility

The Lenders agree to make available to the Borrowers a revolving credit facility in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Commitments, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

 

4.2 Purpose of the Facility

The Borrowers shall utilise the Facility for the purpose of funding (i) capital expenditure of the Group, (ii) general corporate and working capital requirements of the Group, and (iii) the refinancing of existing Financial Indebtedness.

 

4.3 Monitoring

No Finance Party is bound to monitor or verify the application of any amount borrowed pursuant to this Agreement.

 

4.4 Finance Parties’ Rights and Obligations

 

4.4.1 The obligations of each Finance Party under the Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Finance Party to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents does not affect the obligations of any other Party under the Finance Documents. No Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Finance Party under the Finance Documents.

 

Page 39.


4.4.2 The rights of each Finance Party under or in connection with the Finance Documents are separate and independent rights and any debt arising under the Finance Documents to a Finance Party from an Obligor shall be a separate and independent debt.

 

4.4.3 A Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Finance Documents, separately enforce its rights under the Finance Documents.

 

4.5 Facility Agent

While Nedbank is the only Lender under the Facility, all references to the Facility Agent in this Agreement shall be construed as references to Nedbank in its capacity as a Lender.

 

5. CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION

 

5.1 Initial Conditions Precedent

The Lenders shall not be obliged to make any Loan to the Borrowers under the Facility unless:

 

5.1.1 all of the Financial Close Documents have been delivered to the Facility Agent in a form and in substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent. The Facility Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly on being so satisfied; or

 

5.1.2 to the extent that any Financial Close Documents are not in a form and in substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent or have not been delivered, the Facility Agent has, upon written notice to all of the Parties, waived or deferred delivery of those Financial Close Documents which are not in a form and in substance satisfactory to it or which have not been delivered pursuant to clause 5.3 ( Waiver of Conditions Precedent ); and

 

Page 40.


5.1.3 the Facility Agent has notified the Parent on or prior to the Financial Close Date that it is satisfied that no Market Downturn Event has occurred between the Signature Date and the Financial Close Date.

 

5.2 Further Conditions to Utilisation of Facility

The Lenders shall not be obliged to make any Loan to the Borrowers under the Facility unless on the proposed Utilisation Date:

 

5.2.1 in the case of a Rollover Loan, no Event of Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Rollover Loan, and in the case of any other Loan, no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Loan;

 

5.2.2 the Repeating Representations are true, accurate and complete in all material respects.

 

5.3 Waiver or Deferral of Conditions Precedent

 

5.3.1 Satisfaction of any of the conditions set out in:

 

5.3.1.1 clause 5.1 ( Initial Conditions Precedent ) may be waived or deferred by the Facility Agent acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders;

 

5.3.1.2 clause 5.2 ( Further Conditions to Utilisation of Facility ) may be waived or deferred by the Facility Agent acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

5.3.2

Waiver or deferral of delivery of any of the Financial Close Documents either at all or in a form and in substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent or waiver of any of the further conditions set out in clause 5.2 ( Further Conditions to Utilisation of Facility ) shall not prejudice the

 

Page 41.


 

right of the Facility Agent to require subsequent fulfilment of such condition in a written notice to this effect delivered at the time of such waiver or deferral and, unless otherwise specified in any written notice waiving fulfilment of the relevant condition, the relevant condition shall be fulfilled by the Obligors within 5 (five) Business Days of the date of the written notice waiving fulfilment of such condition.

 

5.4 Termination

If the Financial Close Date has not occurred before the date falling 60 (sixty) days after the Signature Date then the Facility Agent shall be entitled, acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders to cancel the Facility by written notice to the Borrowers. Such cancellation shall be without prejudice to the Borrowers’ obligation under clause 14 ( Costs and Expenses ) to pay any costs, fees, expenses or taxes then due and payable.

 

6. UTILISATION OF FACILITY

 

6.1 Subject to clause 5 ( Conditions of Utilisation ), a Borrower may utilise the Facility during the Availability Period by delivering to the Facility Agent a duly completed Utilisation Request:

 

6.1.1 not later than 11h00 not less than 5 (five) Business Days prior to the proposed Utilisation Date if the amount of the proposed Loan is less than or equal to R500 000 000 (Five Hundred Million Rand); or

 

6.1.2 not later than 11h00 not less than 10 (ten) Business Days prior to the proposed Utilisation Date if the amount of the proposed Loan is greater than R500 000 000 (Five Hundred Million Rand).

 

Page 42.


6.2 Each Utilisation Request is irrevocable and will not be regarded as having been duly completed unless:

 

6.2.1 the proposed Utilisation Date is a Business Day within the Availability Period;

 

6.2.2 the currency of the proposed Loan is Rand;

 

6.2.3 the amount of the proposed Loan is a minimum amount of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) (or, if less, the Available Facility);

 

6.2.4 it specifies an Interest Period of one, three, six or twelve Months applicable to the proposed Loan;

 

6.2.5 it specifies a bank account in South Africa to which the Borrower wishes the proceeds of the Loan to be credited; and

 

6.2.6 the proposed Loan together with the aggregate of the Loans still outstanding on the proposed Utilisation Date shall not exceed the Available Facility.

 

6.3 Only one Loan may be requested in each Utilisation Request.

 

6.4 Only one Utilisation Request may be outstanding at any point in time.

 

6.5 A maximum of two Utilisation Requests may be delivered in any calendar month during the Availability Period.

 

6.6 A Borrower may not deliver a Utilisation Request if as a result of the proposed Utilisation more than 10 (ten) Loans would be outstanding at any point in time and to this effect, the Lender will consolidate 2 (two) or more outstanding Loans made to the same Borrower maturing on the same date, such that the relevant Rollover Loan made to refinance such maturing Loans will be in respect of such outstanding Loans as consolidated into 1 (one) Loan.

 

Page 43.


6.7 The Borrower acknowledges and agrees that any Utilisation Request signed by an authorised signatory (as designated in terms of paragraph 1.2.2 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Documents )) on behalf of a Borrower shall be deemed to be a valid Utilisation Request issued by that Borrower and any Loan made pursuant to such Utilisation Request to that Borrower shall constitute a valid Loan to that Borrower.

 

6.8 If the conditions set out in this Agreement have been met, each Lender shall make its participation in each Loan available on the Utilisation Date.

 

6.9 The amount of each Lender’s participation in each Loan will be equal to the proportion borne by its Available Commitment to the Available Facility immediately prior to making the Loan.

 

7. INTEREST

 

7.1 Calculation of interest

The rate of interest on each Loan for each Interest Period is the percentage rate per annum which is the aggregate of the applicable:

 

7.1.1 Base Rate; and

 

7.1.2 Margin.

 

7.2 Payment of interest

 

7.2.1 In respect of each Interest Period of one, three or six Months selected in accordance with clause 8.1.2, each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan on the last day of each such Interest Period.

 

Page 44.


7.2.2 In respect of each Interest Period of twelve Months selected in accordance with clause 8.1.2, each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan as follows:

 

7.2.2.1 all interest accrued during the six Month period (a “Semi-Annual Period” ) commencing on the first day of such Interest Period (inclusive of the first day of that Semi-Annual Period but exclusive of the last day of that Semi-Annual Period) shall be paid by that Borrower on the last day of that Semi-Annual Period; and

 

7.2.2.2 all interest accrued during the period commencing on the last day of that Semi-Annual Period and ending on the last day of that Interest Period (inclusive of the first day of that period but exclusive of the last day that period) shall be paid by that Borrower on the last day of that Interest Period.

 

7.3 Default interest

 

7.3.1 If an Obligor fails to pay any amount payable by it under a Finance Document on its due date, interest shall accrue on the overdue amount from the due date up to the date of actual payment (both before and after judgment) at a rate which, subject to clause 7.3.2, is 2% (two percent) higher than the rate which would have been payable if the overdue amount had, during the period of non-payment, constituted a Loan in the currency of the overdue amount for successive Interest Periods, each of a duration selected by the Facility Agent (acting reasonably). Any interest accruing under this clause 7.3 shall be immediately payable by the relevant Obligor on demand by the Facility Agent.

 

Page 45.


7.3.2 If any overdue amount consists of all or part of a Loan which became due on a day which was not the last day of an Interest Period relating to that Loan:

 

7.3.2.1 the first Interest Period for that overdue amount shall have a duration equal to the unexpired portion of the current Interest Period relating to that Loan; and

 

7.3.2.2 the rate of interest applying to the overdue amount during that first Interest Period shall be 2% (two percent) higher than the rate which would have applied if the overdue amount had not become due.

 

7.3.3 Default interest (if unpaid) arising on an overdue amount will be compounded with the overdue amount at the end of each Interest Period applicable to that overdue amount but will remain immediately due and payable.

 

7.4 Notification of rates of interest

The Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders and the relevant Borrower of the determination of a rate of interest under this Agreement.

 

7.5 Absence of quotations

Subject to clause 7.6 ( Market disruption ), if the Base Rate is to be determined by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a quotation by 11h00 (Johannesburg time) on the Reset Date, the applicable Base Rate shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Reference Banks.

 

Page 46.


7.6 Market disruption

 

7.6.1 If a Market Disruption Event occurs in relation to a Loan for any Interest Period, then the rate of interest on each Lender’s share of that Loan for the Interest Period shall be the percentage rate nominal annual compounded monthly in arrears which is the sum of:

 

7.6.1.1 the Margin; and

 

7.6.1.2 the rate notified to the Facility Agent by that Lender as soon as practicable and in any event before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period, to be that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to that Lender of funding its participation in that Loan from whatever source it may reasonably select.

 

7.6.2 In this Agreement “Market Disruption Event” means:

 

7.6.2.1 at or about noon on the Reset Date for the relevant Interest Period JIBAR is not available on the relevant screen and none or only one of the Reference Banks supplies a rate to the Facility Agent to determine the Base Rate for the relevant Interest Period; or

 

7.6.2.2 before close of business in Johannesburg on the Reset Date for the relevant Interest Period, the Facility Agent receives notifications from any Lender that the cost to it of obtaining matching deposits in the Johannesburg interbank market would be in excess of the Base Rate.

 

7.7 Alternative basis of interest or funding

 

7.7.1 If a Market Disruption Event occurs and the Facility Agent or the Parent so requires, the Facility Agent and the Parent shall enter into negotiations (for a period of not more than 30 (thirty days) with a view to agreeing a substitute basis for determining the rate of interest.

 

7.7.2 Any alternative basis agreed pursuant to clause 7.7.1 above shall, with the prior consent of all the Lenders and the Parent, be binding on all Parties.

 

Page 47.


8. INTEREST PERIODS

 

8.1 Selection of Interest Periods

 

8.1.1 A Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) shall select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan.

 

8.1.2 Subject to this clause 8 (Interest Periods) , a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select an Interest Period of one, three, six or twelve Months, as specified in the Utilisation Request.

 

8.1.3 An Interest Period for a Loan shall not extend beyond the Final Maturity Date. If an Interest Period for a Loan selected a Borrower would, but for this clause 8.1.3, extend beyond the Final Maturity Date (such Interest Period, a “Broken Period” ), then for that Broken Period the Base Rate shall be determined in accordance with the following formula:

r = r1 + (t- t1) x (r2-r1) / (t2-t1)

where:

r = the Base Rate to be determined,

r1 = the JIBAR or where it is not possible to determine JIBAR on any Reset Date, SAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks, in either case converted to a nominal annual compounded monthly in arrear rate, for the period closest to but less than that Broken Period plus, if this would result in r1 being equal to SAFEX Overnight Deposit Rate, 0,01%;

r2 = JIBAR or where it is not possible to determine JIBAR on any Reset Date, SAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks, in either case converted to a nominal annual compounded monthly in arrear rate, for the period closest to but greater than that Broken Period;

 

Page 48.


t1 = the number of days applicable to the period for which r1 is quoted on the first day of that Broken Period;

t2 = the number of days applicable to the period for which r2 is quoted on the first day of that Broken Period;

t = the number of days in that Broken Period.

 

8.1.4 Each Interest Period for a Loan shall start on the relevant Utilisation Date.

 

8.1.5 A Loan has 1 (one) Interest Period only.

 

8.1.6 Subject to this clause 8 (Interest Periods) , a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select a different Interest Period for a Rollover Loan than the Interest Period of the Loan being refinanced by that Rollover Loan in the Utilisation Request delivered for that Rollover Loan.

 

8.1.7 If a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) fails to select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan, the Interest Period for the applicable Loan shall be 3 (three) Months.

 

8.2 Non-Business Days

If an Interest Period or a Semi-Annual Period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, that Interest Period or Semi-Annual Period will instead end on the next Business Day in that calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

Page 49.


8.3 Consolidation of Loans

If two or more Interest Periods relate to Loans made to the same Borrower and end on the same date, those Loans will be consolidated into, and treated as, a single Loan on the last day of the Interest Period.

 

8.4 Day Count Convention

Any interest or fee accruing under a Finance Document will accrue from day to day and is calculated inclusive of the first day but exclusive of the last day of an Interest Period or Semi-Annual Period, as the case may be, on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a year of 365 days (irrespective of whether the year is a leap year) or, in any case where the practice in the Johannesburg interbank market differs, in accordance with that market practice.

 

9. REPAYMENTS

Each Borrower shall repay each Loan made to it on the last day of its Interest Period such that all Loans outstanding under the Facility (including accrued and unpaid interest thereon) shall be repaid in full by no later than the Final Maturity Date.

 

10. PREPAYMENTS

 

10.1 Illegality

If it becomes unlawful in any applicable jurisdiction for a Lender to perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or to fund or maintain its participation in any Loan:

 

10.1.1 that Lender shall promptly notify the Facility Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

Page 50.


10.1.2 upon the Facility Agent notifying the Parent, the Commitment of that Lender will be immediately cancelled; and

 

10.1.3 each Borrower shall repay that Lender’s participation in the Loans made to that Borrower on the last day of the Interest Period for each Loan occurring after the Facility Agent has notified the Parent or, if earlier, the date specified by the Lender in the notice delivered to the Facility Agent (being no earlier than the last day of any applicable grace period permitted by law).

 

10.2 Mandatory Prepayment

 

10.2.1 If any person or group of persons acting in concert gains control of the Parent:

 

10.2.1.1 the Parent shall promptly notify the Facility Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

10.2.1.2 a Lender shall not be obliged to fund a Utilisation (except for a Rollover Loan) and the Facility Agent and the Parent shall consult about the change of control;

 

10.2.1.3 if the Majority Lenders so require after a period of 45 (forty-five) days from receipt of the notice referred to in clause 10.2.1.1 above, the Facility Agent shall by notice to the Parent, (such notice to be delivered no later than 60 (sixty) days from receipt of the notice referred to in clause 10.2.1.1 above), cancel the Total Commitments and declare all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest and all other amounts accrued under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Total Commitments will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable;

 

Page 51.


10.2.1.4 if the Facility Agent does not serve the notice referred to in clause 10.2.1.3 above, each Lender may by notice to the Facility Agent, which shall be delivered not earlier than 45 (forty-five) days nor later than 60 (sixty) days from receipt of the notice referred to in 10.2.1.1 above, whereupon the Facility Agent shall by notice to the Parent (such notice to be delivered promptly after receipt of the Lender’s notification), cancel the Commitment of that Lender and declare the participation of that Lender in all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest thereon and all other amounts due to such Lender under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Commitment of the Lender will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable.

 

10.2.2 For the purpose of clause 10.2.1 above, “control” means:

 

10.2.2.1 the power (whether by way ownership of shares, proxy, contract, agency or otherwise) to:

 

10.2.2.1.1 cast, or control the casting of, more than one-half of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the Parent; or

 

10.2.2.1.2 appoint or remove all, or the majority, of the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent; or

 

10.2.2.1.3 give directions with respect to the operating and financial policies of the Parent which the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent are obliged to comply with; or

 

10.2.2.2 the holding of more than one-half of the issued share capital of the Parent (excluding any part of that issued share capital that carries no right to participate beyond a specified amount in a distribution of either profits or capital).

 

Page 52.


For the purpose of clause 10.2.1 above, “acting in concert” means, a group of persons who, pursuant to an agreement or understanding (whether formal or informal), actively co-operate, through the acquisition by any of them, either directly or indirectly, of shares in the Parent, to obtain or consolidate control of the Parent.

 

10.3 Voluntary Prepayment

 

10.3.1 At any time prior to the Final Maturity Date and for as long as no Default is continuing, a Borrower may by giving to the Facility Agent not less than 5 (five) Business Days’ prior written notice (a “Prepayment Notice” ) to that effect, prepay the whole or a portion of the Loans made to it (the “Voluntary Prepayment Portion” ), subject to the conditions and provisions relating to prepayment as set out in clauses 10.3.2 and 10.7 ( Restrictions and Miscellaneous Provisions relating to Prepayments ).

 

10.3.2 Any proposed voluntary prepayment hereunder shall be conditional upon and subject to compliance by the Borrowers with the following conditions and provisions:

 

10.3.2.1 such prepayment shall not result in a breach of the Financial Covenants immediately after such prepayment has been made;

 

10.3.2.2 the Voluntary Prepayment Portion being prepaid shall be a minimum aggregate amount of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) (or, if less, the amount of the then outstanding Loans) and in integral multiples of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) thereafter.

 

Page 53.


10.4 Cancellation

Any unutilised portion of the Available Facility shall be cancelled on the last day of the Availability Period and the Available Facility shall be reduced to zero.

 

10.5 Voluntary Cancellation

During the Availability Period, subject to clause 11.4 ( Cancellation Fee ), the Parent may, if it gives the Facility Agent not less than 10 (ten) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, cancel the whole or any part (being a minimum amount of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) and integral multiples of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) in excess thereof) of the Available Facility. Any cancellation under this clause 10.5 shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

10.6 Breakage Costs

 

10.6.1 Each Borrower shall, within three Business Days of demand by a Finance Party, pay to that Finance Party its Breakage Costs attributable to all or any part of a Loan or Unpaid Sum being paid by that Borrower on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period for that Loan or Unpaid Sum.

 

10.6.2 Each Lender shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after a demand by the Facility Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Breakage Costs for any Interest Period in which they accrue.

 

10.7 Restrictions and Miscellaneous Provisions relating to Prepayments

 

10.7.1 Any notice of cancellation or prepayment given by any Party under this clause 10 shall be irrevocable and, unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, shall specify the date or dates upon which the relevant cancellation or prepayment is to be made and the amount of that cancellation or prepayment.

 

Page 54.


10.7.2 Any prepayment under this Agreement shall be made together with accrued interest on the amount prepaid and, subject to any Breakage Costs, without premium or penalty.

 

10.7.3 Unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, any part of any Loan which is prepaid may be reborrowed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

10.7.4 The Borrowers shall not repay or prepay all or any part of the Loans or cancel all or any part of the Commitments except at the times and in the manner expressly provided for in this Agreement.

 

10.7.5 No amount of the Total Commitments cancelled under this Agreement may be subsequently reinstated.

 

10.7.6 If the Facility Agent received a notice under this clause 10 it shall promptly forward a copy of that notice to either the Parent or the affected Lender, as appropriate.

 

11. FEES

 

11.1 Commitment Fees

 

11.1.1 The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Facility Agent (for the account of each Lender) a commitment fee in Rand which shall be computed at the rate of 0,75% (zero comma seven five percent) per annum on that Lender’s Available Commitment.

 

11.1.2

The accrued commitment fee is payable on the last day of each successive period of six Months which ends during the Availability

 

Page 55.


 

Period, on the last day of the Availability Period, on the Final Maturity Date and, if cancelled in full, on the cancelled amount of the relevant Lender’s Commitment at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

11.2 Arrangement Fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Arranger an arrangement fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.3 Agency Fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Facility Agent (for its own account) an agency fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.4 Cancellation Fee

If all or any part of a Lender’s Available Commitment is cancelled in accordance with clause 10.5 ( Voluntary Cancellation ) during the period commencing on the Financial Close Date and ending on the 2 nd anniversary of the Financial Close Date, the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Facility Agent (for the account of that Lender) a fee equal to 2% (two percent) of the amount of that Lender’s Available Commitment so cancelled on the date upon which such cancellation becomes effective.

 

12. TAX GROSS UP AND INDEMNITIES

 

12.1 Tax gross-up

 

12.1.1 Each Obligor shall make all payments to be made by it without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by law.

 

Page 56.


12.1.2 The Parent shall promptly upon becoming aware that an Obligor must make a Tax Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate or the basis of a Tax Deduction) notify the Facility Agent accordingly. Similarly, a Lender shall notify the Facility Agent on becoming so aware in respect of a payment payable to that Lender. If the Facility Agent receives such notification from a Lender it shall notify the Parent and, if applicable, that Obligor.

 

12.1.3 If a Tax Deduction is required by law to be made by an Obligor, the amount of the payment due from that Obligor shall be increased to an amount which (after making any Tax Deduction) leaves an amount equal to the payment which would have been due if no Tax Deduction had been required.

 

12.1.4 If an Obligor is required to make a Tax Deduction, that Obligor shall make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by law.

 

12.1.5 Within thirty days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction, the Obligor making that Tax Deduction shall deliver to the Facility Agent for the Finance Party entitled to the payment evidence reasonably satisfactory to that Finance Party that the Tax Deduction has been made or (as applicable) any appropriate payment paid to the relevant taxing authority.

 

12.2 Tax indemnity

 

12.2.1 The Parent shall (within three Business Days of demand by the Facility Agent) pay to a Finance Party an amount equal to the loss, liability or cost which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will be or has been (directly or indirectly) suffered for or on account of Tax by that Finance Party in respect of a Finance Document.

 

Page 57.


12.2.2 Clause 12.2.1 above shall not apply:

 

12.2.2.1 with respect to any Tax assessed on a Finance Party:

 

12.2.2.1.1 under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party is incorporated or, if different, the jurisdiction (or jurisdictions) in which that Finance Party is treated as resident for tax purposes; or

 

12.2.2.1.2 under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party’s Facility Office is located in respect of amounts received or receivable in that jurisdiction,

if that Tax is imposed on or calculated by reference to the net income received or receivable (but not any sum deemed to be received or receivable) by that Finance Party; or

 

12.2.2.2 to the extent a loss, liability or cost is compensated for by an increased payment under clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ).

 

12.2.3 A Finance Party making, or intending to make a claim under clause 12.2.1 above shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of the event which will give, or has given, rise to the claim, following which the Facility Agent shall notify the Parent.

 

12.2.4 A Finance Party shall, on receiving a payment from an Obligor under this clause 12.2, notify the Facility Agent.

 

Page 58.


12.3 Tax Credit

If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) that:

 

12.3.1 a Tax Credit is attributable either to an increased payment of which that Tax Payment forms part, or to that Tax Payment; and

 

12.3.2 that Finance Party has obtained, utilised and retained that Tax Credit,

the Finance Party shall pay an amount to such Obligor which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will leave it (after that payment) in the same after-Tax position as it would have been in had the Tax Payment not been required to be made by such Obligor.

 

12.4 Stamp taxes

The Parent shall pay and, within three Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability that a Finance Party incurs in relation to all stamp duty, registration and other similar Taxes payable in respect of any Finance Document.

 

12.5 Value added tax

 

12.5.1 All amounts set out, or expressed to be payable under a Finance Document by any Party to a Finance Party which (in whole or in part) constitute the consideration for VAT purposes shall be deemed to be exclusive of any VAT which is chargeable on such supply, and accordingly, subject to clause 12.5.3 below, if VAT is chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document, that Party shall pay to the Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying the consideration) an amount equal to the amount of the VAT (and such Finance Party shall promptly provide an appropriate VAT invoice to such Party).

 

Page 59.


12.5.2 If VAT is chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party (the “Supplier” ) to any other Finance Party (the “Recipient” ) under a Finance Document, and any Party (the “Relevant Party” ) is required by the terms of any Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration for such supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse the Recipient in respect of that consideration), such Party shall also pay to the Supplier (in addition to and at the same time as paying such amount) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT. The Recipient will promptly pay to the Relevant Party an amount equal to any credit or repayment from the relevant tax authority which it reasonably determines relates to the VAT chargeable on that supply.

 

12.5.3 Where a Finance Document requires any Party to reimburse a Finance Party for any costs or expenses, that Party shall also at the same time pay and indemnify the Finance Party against all VAT incurred by the Finance Party in respect of the costs or expenses to the extent that the Finance Party reasonably determines that neither it nor any other member of any group of which it is a member for VAT purposes is entitled to credit or repayment from the relevant tax authority in respect of the VAT.

 

13. INCREASED COSTS

 

13.1 Increased costs

 

13.1.1

Subject to clause 13.3 ( Exceptions ) the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within 5 (five) Business Days of a demand by the Facility Agent, pay for the account of a Finance Party the amount of any Increased Costs incurred by that Finance Party or any of its affiliates as

 

Page 60.


 

a result of (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation or (ii) compliance with any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement.

 

13.1.2 In this Agreement “Increased Costs” means:

 

13.1.2.1 a reduction in the rate of return from a Facility or on a Finance Party’s (or its affiliate’s) overall capital;

 

13.1.2.2 an additional or increased cost; or

 

13.1.2.3 a reduction of any amount due and payable under any Finance Document,

which is incurred or suffered by a Finance Party or any of its affiliates to the extent that it is attributable to that Finance Party having entered into its Commitment or funding or performing its obligations under any Finance Document.

 

13.2 Increased cost claims

 

13.2.1 A Finance Party intending to make a claim pursuant to clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) shall notify the Facility Agent of the event giving rise to the claim, following which the Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Parent.

 

13.2.2 Each Finance Party shall, as soon as practicable after a demand by the Facility Agent, provide a certificate in accordance with clause 27.2 ( Accounts and Certificates ) confirming the amount of its Increased Costs.

 

Page 61.


13.3 Exceptions

Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost is:

 

13.3.1 attributable to a Tax Deduction required by law to be made by an Obligor;

 

13.3.2 compensated for by clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) (or would have been compensated for under clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) but was not so compensated solely because any of the exclusions in clause 12.2.2 applied); or

 

13.3.3 attributable to the wilful breach by the relevant Finance Party or its affiliates of any law or regulation.

 

14. COSTS AND EXPENSES

 

14.1 Transaction Expenses

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall promptly within 5 (five) Business Days of demand pay the Facility Agent the amount of all reasonable or necessary costs and expenses, including reasonable and agreed legal fees payable up to an aggregate maximum amount of R100 000 (One Hundred Thousand Rand) excluding VAT and disbursements, reasonably incurred by the Facility Agent and the Lenders in connection with:

 

14.1.1 the negotiation, preparation, printing and execution of:

 

14.1.1.1 this Agreement, the other Finance Documents and the Financial Close Documents; and

 

14.1.1.2 any other Finance Documents executed after the Signature Date;

 

Page 62.


provided that no Obligor shall be liable for any cost or expense so incurred (other than the legal fees referred to above) in excess of R20 000 (Twenty Thousand Rand) unless the incurral of that cost or expense has been approved in writing by the Parent in advance of its incurral.

 

14.2 Amendment Costs

An Obligor shall within 5 (five) Business Days of demand reimburse the Facility Agent for the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by the Facility Agent in connection with any amendment, waiver or consent requested by that Obligor in relation to any Finance Document.

 

14.3 Enforcement Costs

The Obligors shall be jointly and severally liable for payment, within 5 (five) Business Days of demand of the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees on the scale as between attorney and own client whether incurred before or after judgement) reasonably incurred by any Finance Party in connection with the enforcement of, or the preservation of any rights under, any Finance Document.

 

15. GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

 

15.1 Guarantee and Indemnity

Each Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally jointly and severally:

 

15.1.1 guarantees to each Finance Party the punctual performance by each Borrower of all that Borrower’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

Page 63.


15.1.2 undertakes with each Finance Party that whenever a Borrower does not pay any amount when due under or in connection with any Finance Document, that Guarantor shall immediately on demand pay that amount as if it was the principal obligor; and

 

15.1.3 indemnifies each Finance Party immediately on demand (and shall make the relevant payment within 5 (five) Business Days of such demand) against any cost, loss or liability suffered by that Finance Party if any obligation guaranteed by it is or becomes unenforceable, invalid or illegal. The amount of the cost, loss or liability shall be equal to the amount which the Finance Party would otherwise have been entitled to recover.

 

15.2 Continuing Guarantee

This guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of sums payable by any Obligor under the Finance Documents regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part.

 

15.3 Reinstatement

If any payment by an Obligor or any one of them or any discharge given by a Finance Party (whether in respect of the obligations of any Obligor or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is avoided or reduced as a result of insolvency or any similar event:

 

15.3.1 the liability of each Obligor shall continue as if the payment, discharge, avoidance or reduction has not occurred; and

 

15.3.2 each Finance Party shall be entitled to recover the value or amount of that security or payment from each Obligor as if the payment, discharge, avoidance or reduction has not occurred.

 

Page 64.


15.4 Waiver of Defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this clause 15 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ) will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this clause, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this clause 15 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ) (without limitation and whether or not known to it or any Finance Party) including:

 

15.4.1 any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, the Obligors or any one of them or other person;

 

15.4.2 the release of the Obligors or any one of them or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any member of the Group;

 

15.4.3 the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, the Obligors or any one of them or other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

15.4.4 any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of the Obligors or any one of them or any other person;

 

15.4.5 any amendment (however fundamental) or replacement of a Finance Document or any other document or security;

 

15.4.6 any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

Page 65.


15.4.7 any insolvency or similar proceedings.

 

15.5 Immediate Recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Finance Party to proceed against or enforce any other rights or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this clause 15.

 

15.6 Subordination of Guarantors’ Rights

 

15.6.1 When any Default has occurred and is continuing, each of the Guarantors acknowledges and agrees that any recourse claims it may have against the Obligors or any one of them (the “Recourse Claims” ) shall be subordinated to the claims of the Lenders against the Obligors under this Agreement so that until the earlier to occur of the discharge in full of all the Obligors’ obligations under the Finance Documents (the “Secured Obligations”) or the remedy of the Default:

 

15.6.1.1 the Finance Parties’ claims will rank in priority to the Recourse Claims; and

 

15.6.1.2 no Guarantor will claim, receive or accept, directly or indirectly, payment of any Recourse Claims; and

 

15.6.1.3 no Guarantor shall take, accept or receive the benefit of any Encumbrance from any Obligor; and

 

15.6.1.4 no Guarantor shall obtain or enforce any judgement against any Obligor in relation to any of the Recourse Claims.

 

15.6.2

No Guarantor shall petition or apply for or vote in favour of any resolution for the winding-up, dissolution or administration or

 

Page 66.


 

analogous or similar process with regard to the Obligors or any one of them prior to the date of full and final discharge of the Secured Obligations.

 

15.6.3 In any liquidation of (whether provisional or final) or judicial management of or compromise of any Obligor, no Guarantor shall prove or seek to prove claims in respect of any Recourse Claims it may have prior to the date of full and final discharge of all of the Secured Obligations if the effect of such proof would be to reduce the dividend payable to the Finance Parties in relation to the Finance Parties’ claims at the time of such liquidation, judicial management or compromise.

 

15.7 Additional Security

This guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other guarantee or security and neither shall it prejudice any other guarantee or security now or subsequently held by the Lender.

 

16. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

16.1 Representations and Warranties

Each Obligor makes the representations and warranties set out in this clause 16.1 to each Finance Party.

 

16.1.1 Status

 

16.1.1.1 It is a limited liability company, duly incorporated and validly existing under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

16.1.1.2 It has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted or is contemplated to be conducted.

 

Page 67.


16.1.2 Power and Authority

It has the power to enter into and perform, and has taken all necessary action to authorise its entry into, and performance of, the Finance Documents to which it is party and the transactions contemplated by those Finance Documents.

 

16.1.3 Binding Obligations

The obligations expressed to be assumed by it in each Finance Document to which it is a party are, subject to any general principles of law as at the Signature Date limiting its obligations, which are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to clause 5.1 (Initial Conditions Precedent) or clause 22 (Change to Obligors) , legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.

 

16.1.4 Non-Conflict with Other Obligations

The entry into and performance by it of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party do not and will not conflict with:

 

16.1.4.1 any law applicable to it;

 

16.1.4.2 its Constitutional Documents; or

 

16.1.4.3 any material agreement or instrument binding upon it or any of its assets.

 

16.1.5 Authorisations

All authorisations required:

 

16.1.5.1 to enable it lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights and comply with its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure that the obligations expressed to be assumed by it thereunder are legal, valid, binding and enforceable;

 

Page 68.


16.1.5.2 to enable it to lawfully conduct its business where failure to obtain such authorisation would result in a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

16.1.5.3 to make the Finance Documents to which it is a party admissible in evidence in its jurisdiction of incorporation,

have been obtained or effected and are in full force and effect.

 

16.1.6 Governing law and enforcement

Subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement set out in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to clause 5.1 ( Initial conditions precedent ) or clause 22 ( Changes to the Obligors ):

 

16.1.6.1 the choice of South African law as the governing law of the Finance Documents will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation; and

 

16.1.6.2 any judgment obtained in South Africa in relation to a Finance Document will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

16.1.7 Deduction of Tax

It is not required under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation to make any deduction for or on account of Tax from any payment it may make under any Finance Document.

 

Page 69.


16.1.8 No filing or stamp taxes

Except to the extent set out in any legal opinion provided pursuant to clause 5.1 ( Initial conditions precedent ) or clause 22 ( Changes to the Obligors ) in relation to it, under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation it is not necessary that the Finance Documents be filed, recorded or enrolled with any court or other authority in that jurisdiction or that any stamp, registration or similar tax be paid on or in relation to the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

16.1.9 No Default

 

16.1.9.1 No Default is continuing or might reasonably be expected to result from the making of any Utilisation.

 

16.1.9.2 It is not, nor is it likely to be as a result of entering into and performing its obligations under the Finance Documents, in violation of any law or in breach of or in default under any agreement to which it is a party or which is binding on it or any of its assets to an extent or in a manner which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.10 No Misleading Information

 

16.1.10.1 To the best of its knowledge and belief (having made due enquiry), all written information supplied by it to the Finance Parties in connection with this Agreement was true and accurate in all material respects as at the date it was given and was not deliberately misleading in any material respects at such date.

 

16.1.10.2 It has not knowingly withheld any information which, if disclosed, could reasonably be expected materially and adversely to affect the decision of any Finance Party in considering whether or not to provide finance to the Borrowers.

 

Page 70.


16.1.11 Financial Statements

 

16.1.11.1 The Original Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP.

 

16.1.11.2 The Original Financial Statements fairly represent the Group’s financial condition and operations during the relevant financial period.

 

16.1.12 Pari Passu Ranking

Its payment obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation.

 

16.1.13 No Proceedings Pending or Threatened

Save as otherwise disclosed in the Original Financial Statements, no litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings of or before any court or arbitral body have been started or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against it which could reasonably be expected to affect the validity, legality or enforceability of any Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

16.1.14 No Winding-Up

No Material Group Company has taken any corporate action, nor have any other steps been taken or legal proceedings started or (to the best of

 

Page 71.


its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against any Material Group Company, for its winding-up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation or for the enforcement of any Encumbrance over all or any of its revenues or assets or for the appointment of a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of all or any of its assets, which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.15 No Encumbrances

 

16.1.15.1 No Encumbrance exists over all or any of the assets of any Material Group Company except for Permitted Encumbrances.

 

16.1.15.2 No Encumbrance would arise as a result of the execution of and performance of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

16.1.16 Assets and Intellectual Property Rights

It and each Material Group Company has good title to or validly leases or licenses all of the assets necessary to carry on its business as presently conducted, to the extent that failure to comply with this clause 16.1.16 ( Assets and Intellectual Property Rights ) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.17 Insurance

Each Material Group Company maintains insurances on and in relation to its business and assets against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies in the jurisdiction in which it conducts its business carrying on substantially similar business in such jurisdiction.

 

Page 72.


16.1.18 Environmental Compliance

Each Material Group Company has adopted and complies with an environmental policy which requires monitoring of and compliance with all applicable Environmental Law and Environmental Permits applicable to it from time to time unless non-compliance with such policy could not reasonably be expected to cause a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.19 Environmental Claims

No Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) is threatened against any Material Group Company where that claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.20 Taxation

 

16.1.20.1 It and each Material Group Company has duly and punctually paid and discharged all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties except to the extent that:

 

16.1.20.1.1 payment is being contested in good faith;

 

16.1.20.1.2 it has maintained adequate reserves for those Taxes; and

 

16.1.20.1.3 payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

16.1.20.2 It is not and no Material Group Company is materially overdue in the filing of any Tax returns.

 

Page 73.


16.1.21 Ownership of Material Group Companies

 

16.1.21.1 Each Material Group Company (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and the Ghanaian Companies) is a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Parent.

 

16.1.21.2 The Parent indirectly holds at least 71,1% (seventy-one comma one percent) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company.

 

16.1.21.3 The Parent indirectly holds at least 92% (ninety-two percent) of the voting shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to 80,7% (eighty comma seven percent) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

16.1.22 No Material Adverse Effect

There has been no change in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance, properties or prospects of the Obligors or the Group (taken as a whole) since 31 December 2008 which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.2 Repetition

 

16.2.1 All the representations and warranties in this clause 16 ( Representations and Warranties ) are made by each Obligor on the Signature Date (other than in respect of clause 16.1.11.1, which is deemed to be made on the date such information is provided).

 

16.2.2 All the representations and warranties in this clause 16 are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the date of each Utilisation Request and Utilisation Date.

 

Page 74.


16.2.3 The Repeating Representations are deemed to be made on each Repetition Date by each Obligor in either case by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing on that Repetition Date.

 

16.2.4 For the purposes of clause 16.2.2 above:

 

16.2.4.1 “Repeating Representations” means the representations and warranties contained in clause 16.1.1 ( Status ) to clause 16.1.22 ( No Material Adverse Effect ) (each inclusive) with the exception of clauses 16.1.3 (Binding Obligations), 16.1.6 (Governing Law and Enforcement) , 16.1.7 (Deduction of Tax) , 16.1.8 (No Filing or Stamp Taxes) and 16.1.10 ( No Misleading Information ) and 16.1.13 (No Proceedings Pending or Threatened) ; save that the references in clauses 16.1.11.1 and 16.1.11.2 to the Original Financial Statements shall, for the purposes of this Repeating Representation, be construed as references to the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Group and the audited financial statements of the Borrowers and each Guarantor delivered to the Facility Agent under clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ).

 

16.2.4.2 “Repetition Date” means the first day of each Interest Period (other than on the first day of the first Interest Period for a Loan).

 

16.3 Reliance

The Finance Parties have entered into the Finance Documents to which each of them is a party on the strength of, and relying on, the representations and warranties set out in clause 16.1 ( Representations and Warranties ), each of which shall be deemed to be a separate representation and warranty given without prejudice to any other representation or warranty and deemed to be a material representation inducing the Finance Parties to enter into the Finance Documents to which each of them is party.

 

Page 75.


17. INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this clause 17 ( Information Undertakings ) are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the Signature Date for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

17.1 Financial Statements

Each Obligor shall supply to the Facility Agent (in sufficient copies for all Lenders, if the Facility Agent so requests under clause 17.7 ( Delivery of Information )):

 

17.1.1 as soon as the same become available, but in any event within 120 (one hundred and twenty) days after the end of each Financial Year:

 

17.1.1.1 the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that Financial Year; and

 

17.1.1.2 its and the Borrowers’, other than Gold Fields Holding Company (BVI) Limited, GFOH or any Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements, audited financial statements for that Financial Year; and

 

17.1.2 as soon as same become available, but in any event within 60 (sixty) days after the first 6 (six) months of its Financial Years:

 

17.1.2.1 the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for the first 6 (six) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

Page 76.


17.1.2.2 the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the first 6 (six) month period of that Financial Year;

 

17.1.3 as soon as the same becomes available, but in any event within 45 (forty-five) days after the end of each quarter of each Financial Year:

 

17.1.3.1 the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that period; and

 

17.1.3.2 the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for that period.

 

17.2 Compliance Certificate

 

17.2.1 The Parent shall supply to the Facility Agent, with each set of consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1.1 and 17.1.2 of clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ), a Compliance Certificate setting out (in reasonable detail) computations as to compliance with clause 18 ( Financial Covenants ) as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

17.2.2 Each Compliance Certificate shall be signed by 2 (two) directors of the Parent and, if required to be delivered with the audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1.1.1 of clause 17.1 ( Financial statements ), by the Auditors.

 

17.3 Requirements as to Financial Statements

 

17.3.1 Each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ) shall be certified by a director of the Obligor as fairly representing its financial condition as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

Page 77.


17.3.2 Each Obligor shall procure that each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ) is prepared in accordance with GAAP, the requirements of its jurisdiction of incorporation and accounting practises and financial reference periods consistent with those applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements.

 

17.3.3 Clause 17.3.2 shall not apply to the extent that, in relation to any sets of financial statements, the Obligor notifies the Facility Agent that there has been a change in GAAP or the accounting practices or reference periods and its Auditors (in the case of its annual audited financial statements) or the Parent (in the case of any of its other financial statements) delivers to the Facility Agent:

 

17.3.3.1 a description of any change necessary for those financial statements to reflect GAAP, accounting practices and reference periods upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; and

 

17.3.3.2 sufficient information, in form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Facility Agent, to enable the Lenders to determine whether clause 18 ( Financial Covenants ) has been complied with and make an accurate comparison between the financial position indicated in those financial statements and the Original Financial Statements.

 

17.3.4 If an Obligor notifies the Facility Agent of a change in accordance with clause 17.3.3 above, then an Obligor and the Facility Agent shall enter into negotiations in good faith with a view to agreeing:

 

17.3.4.1 whether or not the change might result in material alteration in the commercial effect of any of the terms of this Agreement or any other Finance Document; and

 

Page 78.


17.3.4.2 if so, any amendments to this Agreement or any other Finance Document which may be necessary to ensure that the change does not result in any material alteration in the commercial effect of those terms,

and if any amendments are agreed they shall take effect and be binding on each of the Parties in accordance with their terms.

 

17.3.5 Any reference in this Agreement to “ financial statements ” shall be construed as a reference to those financial statements as the same may be adjusted under this clause 17.3 to reflect the basis upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared.

 

17.4 Access to Records

At any time after the occurrence of a Default and for so long as it is continuing, upon the request of the Facility Agent, each Obligor shall (at that Obligor’s expense) provide to that person or any of its representatives and professional advisors such access to that Obligor’s records (including its general ledger), books and assets as that person may require at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice.

 

17.5 Information : Miscellaneous

Each Obligor shall supply to the Facility Agent (in sufficient copies for all Finance Parties, if the Facility Agent so requests under clause 17.7 ( Delivery of Information )):

 

17.5.1 all documents dispatched by that Obligor to its shareholders (or any class of them) or its creditors generally at the same time as they are dispatched;

 

Page 79.


17.5.2 the details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings which are current, threatened or pending against any Group Company which, if adversely determined against it, would be reasonably likely to result in a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

17.5.3 such further information (including an extract of its general ledger) regarding the financial condition, business and operations of any Group Company as any Finance Party (through the Facility Agent) may reasonably request.

 

17.6 Notification of Default

 

17.6.1 Each Obligor shall notify the Facility Agent of any Default (and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it) promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

17.6.2 Promptly upon a request by the Facility Agent, each Borrower shall supply to the Facility Agent a certificate signed by 2 (two) directors or senior officers on its behalf certifying that no Default is continuing (or if a Default is continuing specifying the Default and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it).

 

17.7 Delivery of Information

 

17.7.1 Without prejudice to clause 26 ( Notices and Domicilia ), any documents to be delivered under this clause 17 ( Delivery of Information ) may be delivered by the Obligors to the Facility Agent (and by the Facility Agent to the Lenders):

 

17.7.1.1 by e-mail where the Majority Lenders have expressly agreed, by written notice to the Facility Agent, to receive such documents by e-mail and has informed the Facility Agent of an e-mail address pursuant to clause 26 ( Notices and Domicilia ), provided that, for this purpose, any such notification shall also be followed-up by telefax; or

 

Page 80.


17.7.1.2 to the extent that it becomes common practise in South Africa to do so and the Facility Agent has agreed to do so and (as applicable) a Finance Party has expressly agreed, by written notice to the Facility Agent (such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed), by reference to a website, the address of which (and the location of the relevant documents at such website) has been confirmed to such Party in accordance with clause 26 ( Notices and Domicilia ).

 

17.7.2 If a Finance Party requests delivery to it of a paper copy of any document to be delivered by an Obligor under this clause 17 ( Information Undertakings ) in place of an electronic copy of such document, it shall notify the Facility Agent accordingly. The Facility Agent shall request an Obligor in writing to provide such paper copies promptly upon receipt of any such notice and such Obligor shall be obliged promptly to do so.

 

17.8 Know your customer requirements

 

17.8.1

If any Finance Party (or any prospective New Lender) is obliged to comply with know your customer or similar identification procedures under the Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001 or any similar legislation in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, each Obligor must promptly, on the request of that Finance Party, supply to the Finance Party any documentation or

 

Page 81.


 

other evidence which that Finance Party reasonably requests (whether for itself or on behalf of a prospective new Lender) to enable that Finance Party or prospective New Lender to carry out all such procedures.

 

17.8.2 The Parent shall, by not less than 10 (ten) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Facility Agent, notify the Facility Agent (which shall promptly notify the Lenders) of its intention to request that one of the subsidiaries becomes an Additional Obligor pursuant to clause 22 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

 

17.8.3 Following the giving of any notice pursuant to clause 17.8.2 above, if the accession of any Additional Obligor requires any Finance Party to carry out know your customer procedures in circumstances where the required information is not already available to it, the Parent must promptly, on request by that Finance Party, supply to the Finance Party any documentation or other evidence which that Finance Party reasonably requires in order to carry out all applicable know your customer procedures.

 

17.8.4 Each Lender must promptly on the request of the Facility Agent supply to the Facility Agent any documentation or other evidence which is reasonably required by the Facility Agent to carry out and be satisfied with the results of all know your customer requirements.

 

18. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

 

18.1 Financial Condition

The Parent shall ensure that for so long as any amount is outstanding under a Finance Document or any Commitment is in force:

 

18.1.1 the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of any Measurement Period shall be or shall exceed 5:1;

 

Page 82.


18.1.2 the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA shall not in respect of any Measurement Period exceed 2.5:1.

 

18.2 Financial Testing

The Financial Covenants shall be tested semi-annually on each Measurement Date by reference to the unaudited and/or audited consolidated financial statements of the Group in respect of the relevant Measurement Period.

 

18.3 Breach of a Financial Condition Undertaking

Immediately upon becoming aware of a breach of any of the Financial Covenants, each Obligor shall notify the Facility Agent (and provide such details about the breach as the Facility Agent may request) (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

18.4 Permitted Financial Indebtedness

For the avoidance of doubt, but without derogating from clause 18.1.2, if any Financial Indebtedness is permitted to be incurred under clause 19.4.2 and, subsequent to the incurral of such Financial Indebtedness (but provided there was compliance with clause 19.4.2 at the time of incurral of such Financial Indebtedness), the Permitted Indebtedness Ratio be in excess of 2:1, the Consolidated Net Borrowings will not be required to be reduced so that the Permitted Indebtedness Ratio is not in excess of 2:1.

 

Page 83.


19. GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this clause 19 ( General Undertakings ) are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the Signature Date for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

19.1 Authorisation

Each Obligor shall promptly:

 

19.1.1 obtain, comply with and do all that is necessary to maintain in full force and effect; and

 

19.1.2 upon written request by the Facility Agent or a Finance Party supply certified copies to the Facility Agent of,

any authorisation required or desirable under any applicable law to enable it to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a Party and to ensure the legality, validity, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of any Finance Documents.

 

19.2 Compliance with Laws

Each Obligor shall comply in all respects with all laws and regulations (including, but not limited to, Environmental Law) to which it may be subject, if failure so to comply would materially impair its ability to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

Page 84.


19.3 Negative Pledge

 

19.3.1 No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company will) create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance over any of its assets.

 

19.3.2 No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

19.3.2.1 sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its assets on terms whereby they are or may be leased to or re-acquired by it or by an Obligor or any other member of the Group;

 

19.3.2.2 sell, transfer, cede or otherwise dispose of any of its receivables on recourse terms;

 

19.3.2.3 enter into any arrangement under which money or the benefit of a bank or other account may be applied, set-off or made subject to a combination of accounts; or

 

19.3.2.4 enter into any other preferential arrangement having a similar effect,

in circumstances where the arrangement or transaction is entered into primarily as a method of raising any form of Financial Indebtedness or of financing the acquisition of an asset.

 

19.3.3 Clauses 19.3.1 and 19.3.2 above do not apply to Permitted Encumbrances.

 

Page 85.


19.4 Financial Indebtedness

 

19.4.1 Subject to clause 19.4.2, the Parent shall not (and the Parent shall procure that no member of the Group (other than a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) shall) incur, create or permit to subsist or have outstanding any Financial Indebtedness or enter into any agreement or arrangement whereby it is entitled to incur, create or permit to subsist any Financial Indebtedness other than Permitted Indebtedness.

 

19.4.2 The Parent shall not (and the Parent shall procure that no member of the Group shall) incur any Financial Indebtedness or enter into any agreement or arrangement whereby it is entitled to incur any Financial Indebtedness (other than Permitted Indebtedness), such that the Permitted Indebtedness Ratio, immediately after the incurral of that Financial Indebtedness, will exceed 2:1; provided that:

 

19.4.2.1 should the Parent (or any member of the Group) wish to incur any Financial Indebtedness contemplated by clause 19.4.2 and the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings (including such Financial Indebtedness) to Consolidated EBITDA as at the most recent Forecast Measurement Date exceed 1.8:1, the Parent shall provide the Facility Agent the calculation of the Permitted Indebtedness Ratio and all supporting schedules thereto, including the calculation of Forecast Consolidated EBITDA (and Target Forecast EBITDA if clause 2.2.1.15.1 is applicable) (the “Forecast” ) prior to the date on which any Financial Indebtedness contemplated by clause 19.4.2 is proposed to be incurred; and thereafter for every increase of R200 000 000 (Two Hundred Million Rand) in Consolidated Net Borrowings in excess of the amount of Consolidated Net Borrowings used in the first Forecast provided to the Facility Agent until such time as the Permitted Indebtedness Ratio as at a subsequent Forecast Measurement Date does not exceed 1.8:1; and

 

Page 86.


19.4.2.2 the Forecast (a) contains all of the information and the assumptions on which the Forecast was prepared, and (b) is certified by the Chief Financial Officer of the Parent as being based on recent historical information, Bloomberg median consensus forecasts for exchange rates and commodity prices, and other assumptions that are fair and reasonable as at the date at which the Forecast was prepared.

 

19.5 Disposals and Mergers

 

19.5.1 No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

19.5.1.1 enter into a single transaction or a series of transactions (whether related or not) and whether voluntarily or involuntarily to sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of any assets; or

 

19.5.1.2 enter into any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction.

 

19.5.2 Clause 19.5.1 above does not apply to:

 

19.5.2.1 Permitted Disposals; or

 

19.5.2.2 any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction of any member of the Group, without insolvency, if:

 

19.5.2.2.1 in respect of the Obligors or the successors-in-title or assignees of the Obligors, the Finance Documents are preserved as binding upon the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed members of the Group; and

 

Page 87.


19.5.2.2.2 the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed companies will be members of the Group; and

 

19.5.2.2.3 such amalgamation, demerger, merger and/or corporate reconstruction will not have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.6 Pari Passu Ranking

Each Obligor shall ensure that at all times the claims of the Finance Parties against it under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

19.7 Change of Business

Each Obligor shall procure that no substantial change is made to the general nature of its business or the business of the Group taken as a whole from that carried on as at the Signature Date.

 

19.8 Insurance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) maintain insurances on and in relation to its business and assets with reputable underwriters or insurance companies against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies carrying on the same or substantially similar business.

 

Page 88.


19.9 Environmental Compliance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) substantially comply in all material respects with all Environmental Laws and obtain and maintain any Environmental Permits and take all reasonable steps in anticipation of known or expected future changes to or obligations under the same.

 

19.10 Environmental Claims

Each Obligor shall inform the Facility Agent, in writing as soon as reasonably practical upon becoming aware of the same:

 

19.10.1 if any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) threatened against any Material Group Company; or

 

19.10.2 of any facts or circumstances which will or are reasonably likely to result in any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) being commenced or threatened against any Material Group Company,

where the claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.11 Taxation

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each other Material Group Company will) duly and punctually pay and discharge all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring material penalties, except to the extent:

 

19.11.1 that such payment is being contested in good faith;

 

Page 89.


19.11.2 adequate reserves are being maintained for those Taxes; and

 

19.11.3 where such payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

19.12 Maintenance of Legal Status

Each Material Group Company shall do all such things as are necessary to maintain its existence as a legal person and shall maintain its books and records in good order and make all necessary corporate filings with the relevant authorities in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

19.13 Maintenance of Assets

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each other Material Group Company shall) ensure that it has good title to or validly leases or licences all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this clause 19.12 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.14 Acquisitions

No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no Material Group Company will), without the prior consent of the Lender, enter into any transaction, acquire any company, business, assets or undertaking where such a transaction or acquisition is classed as a “Category 1” transaction under the JSE Listings Requirements. For the purpose of this clause 19.14 only, references to a transaction shall be construed as not including any acquisition of the Parent by a third party.

 

19.15 Ownership of Material Group Companies

The Parent shall ensure that:

 

19.15.1 each Material Group Company which is a Material Group Company at the Signature Date (other any Ghanaian Company or the Cerro Corona Subsidiary) is and continues to be a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Parent;

 

Page 90.


19.15.2 it indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least 71.1% of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company; and

 

19.15.3 it indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least 92% of the voting shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to 80.7% of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

20. DEFAULT

 

20.1 Events of Default

Each of the events set out in this clause 20 ( Default ) is an Event of Default (whether or not caused by any reason whatsoever outside the control of the Borrowers, any other Obligor or any other person).

 

20.1.1 Non-Payment

An Obligor does not pay on the due date any amount payable pursuant to a Finance Document at the place at and in the currency in which it is expressly payable unless payment is made within 5 (five) Business Days of its due date.

 

20.1.2 Financial Covenants

Any requirement of clause 18 ( Financial Covenants ) is not satisfied.

 

Page 91.


20.1.3 Other Obligations under Finance Documents

 

20.1.3.1 Subject to clause 20.3 ( Remedy ), an Obligor does not comply with any provision of the Finance Documents (other than those referred to in clause 20.1.1 ( Non-Payment ) and clause 20.1.2 ( Financial Covenants ).

 

20.1.3.2 No Event of Default will occur under clause 20.1.3.1 if the Taxes not duly and punctually paid and discharged and in respect of which the undertaking contained in clause 19.11 ( Taxation ) is given do not exceed an amount of US$10 000 000 (Ten Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

20.1.4 Misrepresentation

 

20.1.4.1 Subject to clause 20.3 ( Remedy ), any representation or statement made or in the case of clause 16.2.1 ( Repetition ), deemed to be made by any Obligor or in the Finance Documents or any other document delivered by or on behalf of any Obligor under or in connection with any Finance Documents is or is proved to have been incorrect or misleading in any material and adverse respect when made or in the case of clause 16.2.1 ( Repetition ), deemed to be made.

 

20.1.4.2 No Event of Default will occur under clause 20.1.4.1 if the Taxes in respect of which the representation contained in clause 19.11 ( Taxation ) was made does not exceed an amount of US$10 000 000 (Ten Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

Page 92.


20.1.5 Cross-Default

 

20.1.5.1 Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is not paid when due, nor where there is an applicable grace period, within the earlier to expire of the originally applicable grace period and a period of 5 (five) days starting at the same time as the originally applicable grace period.

 

20.1.5.2 Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is declared to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

20.1.5.3 Any commitment for any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of a Material Group Company as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

20.1.5.4 Any creditor of a Material Group Company becomes entitled to declare any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

20.1.5.5 No Event of Default will occur under this clause 20.1.5 ( Cross Default ) if the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness or commitment for Financial Indebtedness, falling within clauses 20.1.5.1 to 20.1.5.4 is less than US$20 000 000 (Twenty Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

Page 93.


20.1.6 Insolvency

 

20.1.6.1 Any Material Group Company is unable or admits inability to pay its debts as they fall due, suspends making payments on any of its debts or, by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, commences negotiations with one or more of its classes of creditors with a view to rescheduling any of its Financial Indebtedness which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

20.1.6.2 The value of the assets of any Material Group Company is less than its liabilities (taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities) which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

20.1.6.3 A moratorium is declared in respect of any Financial Indebtedness of any Material Group Company.

 

20.1.7 Insolvency Proceedings

Any corporate action, legal proceedings or other similar procedure or steps taken in relation to:

 

20.1.7.1 the suspension of payments, a moratorium of any Financial Indebtedness, winding-up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation (by way of voluntary arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of any Material Group Company;

 

20.1.7.2 a composition, compromise or arrangement with any creditor or class of creditors of any Material Group Company;

 

Page 94.


20.1.7.3 the appointment of a liquidator, receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, judicial manager, compulsory manager or other similar officer in respect of any Material Group Company or any of its assets; or

 

20.1.7.4 enforcement of any Encumbrance over any assets of any Material Group Company,

or any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction and any such procedure or proceedings are not contested in good faith nor discharged within 30 (thirty) days (or such shorter period provided for contesting such procedure or proceedings under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction).

 

20.1.8 Failure to comply with Final Judgement

Any Material Group Company fails within 5 (five) Business Days of the due date to comply with or pay any sum due from it under any material final judgement or any final order made or given by any court of competent jurisdiction. For the purposes of this clause 20.1.8 ( Failure to comply with Final Judgement ), a “ material final judgement ” shall be any judgement for the payment of a sum of money in excess of US$10 000 000 (Ten Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

20.1.9 Creditors’ Process

Any expropriation (other than an expropriation where fair compensation is received) or the operation of the attachment, sequestration, distress or execution affects any material asset of a Material Group Company and is not discharged within 21 (twenty-one) days. For the purposes of this clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ) a “ material asset ” is any single

 

Page 95.


income producing asset of the relevant Material Group Company which contributes not less than 5% (five percent) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements )) provided that any loss of mineral rights arising as a result of the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement and/or the operation of the Minerals and Petroleum Royalty Bill in substantially its current form once enacted shall not constitute an expropriation for the purposes of this clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ).

 

20.1.10 Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for an Obligor to perform any of its obligations under the Financial Documents or such obligations are to be legal, valid, binding or enforceable obligations.

 

20.1.11 Repudiation

An Obligor repudiates a Finance Document or any Finance Document is declared to be or is otherwise unenforceable against an Obligor by a court of the jurisdiction of incorporation of the relevant Obligor.

 

20.1.12 Governmental Intervention

By or under the authority of any government:

 

20.1.12.1 the management of any Material Group Company is wholly or partially displaced or the authority of any Material Group Company in the conduct of its business is wholly or partially curtailed; or

 

Page 96.


20.1.12.2 all or a majority of the issued shares of any Material Group Company or material part of its revenues or assets is seized, nationalised, expropriated or compulsorily acquired. For the purposes of this clause 20.1.12 ( Governmental Intervention ) “ material part of its revenues or assets ” shall in relation to the relevant Material Group Company be construed as revenues comprising not less than 5% (five percent) of the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis in accordance with the provisions of clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ) or assets which contribute not less than 5% (five percent) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis accordance with the provisions of clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ), provided that neither the implementation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement nor the implementation of the Minerals and Petroleum Royalty Bill in substantially its current form once enacted shall constitute a seizure, nationalisation, expropriation or compulsory acquisition as contemplated by this clause 20.1.12 ( Governmental Intervention ).

 

20.1.13 Material Adverse Effect

Any change occurs in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance, properties or prospects of the Obligors or the Group taken as a whole since 31 December 2008, which could be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

20.1.14 Cessation of Business

Any Material Group Company ceases to carry on the business which it undertakes at the Signature Date.

 

Page 97.


20.2 Acceleration

 

20.2.1 If any Event of Default occurs which is continuing, the Facility Agent shall be entitled (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) and without prejudice to any other rights or remedies which the Finance Parties may have under any of the Financial Documents by notice to the Borrowers and the Parent to:

 

20.2.1.1 cancel the Total Commitments whereupon they shall immediately be cancelled;

 

20.2.1.2 declare that all or part of the Loans, together with accrued interest, and all other amounts accrued or outstanding under the Finance Documents be immediately due and payable, whereupon they shall become immediately due and payable; and/or

 

20.2.1.3 declare that all or part of the Loans be payable on demand, whereupon they shall immediately become payable on demand by the Facility Agent on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

20.3 Remedy

 

20.3.1 No Event of Default under this clause 20.1 ( Events of Default ) (other than those referred to in clause 20.1.1 ( Non-payment ) and 20.1.2 ( Financial covenants )) will occur if the failure to comply or circumstance giving rise to the same is capable of remedy and is remedied by an Obligor within 10 (ten) days of the earlier of the Facility Agent giving notice to the Obligors or any Obligor becoming aware of the failure to comply.

 

20.3.2

For the purposes of clause 20.3.1, the events or circumstances referred to in clause 20.1.5 ( Cross-default ), clause 20.1.6 ( Insolvency ), clause 20.1.7 ( Insolvency Proceedings ), clause 20.1.8 ( Failure to comply with

 

Page 98.


 

final judgment ), clause 20.1.9 ( Creditors’ process ), clause 20.1.10 ( Unlawfulness ), clause 20.1.11 ( Repudiation ), clause 20.1.12 ( Governmental Intervention ), clause 20.1.13 ( Material Adverse Effect ) and clause 20.1.14 ( Cessation of Business ) shall be deemed to be incapable of remedy save to the extent set out therein unless the Facility Agent determines otherwise.

 

21. CHANGE OF PARTY

 

21.1 Cession and Delegation by the Lenders

 

21.1.1 Subject to this clause, any Lender (the “Existing Lender” ) may:

 

21.1.1.1 cede any of its rights; or

 

21.1.1.2 delegate any of its obligations,

under this Agreement and any corresponding rights or obligations under any other Finance Document to another bank or financial institution, any one of whom shall be a new lender (the “New Lender” ).

 

21.2 Consent of Parent to Cession and Delegation by the Lenders

 

21.2.1 The consent of the Parent is required for any cession or delegation by an Existing Lender, unless the cession or delegation is to (a) a Permitted Transferee, (b) another Lender, or (c) an Affiliate of a Lender.

 

21.2.2 The consent of the Parent to a cession or delegation must not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The Parent will be deemed to have given its consent 5 (five) Business Days after the Existing Lender has requested it unless consent is expressly refused by the Parent within that time.

 

Page 99.


21.2.3 Notwithstanding clause 21.2.1, the Parent (acting reasonably) shall at any time (other than during the 15 (fifteen) Business Day notice period referred to in clause 21.6 ( Notification )) be entitled to deliver a written notice to the Facility Agent specifying that it wishes to remove a Permitted Transferee from the list set out in Schedule 8 (Permitted Transferees). Such written notice shall set out reasonable grounds for the Parent’s request to remove such Permitted Transferee from the list set out in Schedule 8 (Permitted Transferees). If the Facility Agent is satisfied (acting reasonably) that the Parent has reasonable grounds for such removal, the Facility Agent shall notify the Parent in writing accordingly and such Permitted Transferee shall thereupon cease to be a Permitted Transferee; provided that, to the extent that such Permitted Transferee is already a Lender as at the date of such removal, such removal shall not obligate any Finance Party to acquire or re-acquire such Permitted Transferee’s participation in any Loans.

 

21.3 New Lender to become Bound

In the event an Existing Lender cedes any of its rights or delegates any of its obligations as contemplated under clause 21.1 ( Cession and Delegation by the Lender ), the Existing Lender shall procure that the New Lender agrees to become bound by all the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the other Finance Documents to which the Existing Lender is a party as a party thereto.

 

21.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders

 

21.4.1 Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, an Existing Lender makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility to a New Lender for:

 

21.4.1.1 the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any other documents;

 

Page 100.


21.4.1.2 the financial condition of any Obligor;

 

21.4.1.3 the performance and observance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or any other documents; or

 

21.4.1.4 the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with any Finance Document or any other document,

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

21.4.2 Each New Lender confirms to the Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

21.4.2.1 has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by the Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

21.4.2.2 will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

21.4.3 Nothing in any Finance Document obliges an Existing Lender to:

 

21.4.3.1 accept a re-transfer from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this clause 21.4 ( Limitation of Responsibility of Existing Lenders ); or

 

Page 101.


21.4.3.2 support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or otherwise.

 

21.5 Disclosure of Information

A Lender may disclose to any of its affiliates and/or any other person:

 

21.5.1 to (or through) whom that the Lender cedes, assigns or transfers (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

21.5.2 with (or through) whom that Lender enters into (or may potentially enter into) any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made by reference to, the Finance Documents or any Obligor; or

 

21.5.3 to whom, and to the extent that, information is required to be disclosed by any applicable law or regulation,

any information about an Obligor, the Group and the Finance Documents as that Lender shall consider appropriate if, in relation to clauses 21.5.1 and 21.5.2 above, the person to whom the information is to be given has agreed to maintain such information as confidential information and has executed a Confidentiality Undertaking.

 

21.6 Notification

A Lender proposing to effect any cession, assignment or transfer occurring pursuant to this clause 21 ( Change of Party ) shall give the Parent and each other Finance Party 15 (fifteen) Business Days’ prior written notice of any such proposed cession, assignment or transfer.

 

Page 102.


21.7 Additional Parties

Each of the Lenders appoints the Facility Agent to receive on its behalf each Accession Undertaking delivered to the Facility Agent and to accept and sign it if, in the Facility Agent’s opinion, it is complete and appears on its face to be authentic and duly executed by the relevant acceding party and until accepted and signed by the Facility Agent that document shall not be effective.

 

22. CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS

 

22.1 Assignment and transfer by Obligors

No Obligor may cede any of its rights or delegate any of its obligations under the Finance Documents without the prior written consent of the Facility Agent.

 

22.2 Additional Borrowers

 

22.2.1 The Parent may request that any of its subsidiaries become an Additional Borrower. That subsidiary shall become an Additional Borrower if:

 

22.2.1.1 the Lenders approve the addition of that subsidiary;

 

22.2.1.2 the Parent delivers to the Facility Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Undertaking;

 

22.2.1.3 the Parent confirms that no Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that subsidiary becoming an Additional Borrower; and

 

Page 103.


22.2.1.4 the Facility Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4, 6 and 7 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Borrower, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent.

 

22.2.2 The Facility Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4, 6 and 7 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Borrower.

 

22.3 Resignation of an Additional Borrower

 

22.3.1 The Parent may request that a Borrower (other than the Original Borrowers) ceases to be a Borrower by delivering to the Facility Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

22.3.2 The Facility Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if:

 

22.3.2.1 no Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Letter (and the Parent has confirmed to the Facility Agent that this is the case); and

 

22.3.2.2 the Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Finance Documents,

whereupon that company shall cease to be a Borrower and shall have no further rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

Page 104.


22.4 Additional Guarantors

 

22.4.1 The Parent may request that any of its subsidiaries become an Additional Guarantor. That subsidiary shall become an Additional Guarantor if;

 

22.4.1.1 the Parent delivers to the Facility Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Undertaking; and

 

22.4.1.2 the Facility Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4 and 7 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Guarantor, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent.

 

22.4.2 The Facility Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4, 6 and 7 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Guarantor.

 

22.5 Repetition of Representations

Delivery of an Accession Undertaking constitutes confirmation by the relevant subsidiary that the representations in clause 16 ( Representations and Warranties ) are true and correct in relation to it as at the date of delivery as if made by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing.

 

22.6 Resignation of an Additional Guarantor

 

22.6.1 The Parent may request that a Guarantor (other than an Original Guarantor) ceases to be a Guarantor by delivering to the Facility Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

Page 105.


22.6.2 The Facility Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if no Default is continuing and the Parent has confirmed to the Facility Agent that this is the case.

 

23. PAYMENT MECHANICS

 

23.1 All payments to be made by the Obligors under any of the Finance Documents shall be governed by the following provisions:

 

23.1.1 all payments shall be made to the Facility Agent on the due date for such payment into the bank account nominated by the Facility Agent;

 

23.1.2 all payments shall be made for value by no later than 15h00 on the due date for such payment; and

 

23.1.3 all payments shall be made in immediately available, freely transferable, cleared funds free and clear of set-off, deduction or counterclaim.

 

23.2 Partial payments

 

23.2.1 If the Facility Agent receives a payment that is insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by an Obligor under the Finance Documents, the Agent shall apply that payment towards the obligations of that Obligor under the Finance Documents in the following order:

 

23.2.1.1 first , in or towards payment pro rata of any due but unpaid fees, costs and expenses of the Facility Agent under the Finance Documents;

 

23.2.1.2 secondly , in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest, fee or commission due but unpaid under the Finance Documents;

 

23.2.1.3 thirdly , in or towards payment pro rata of any principal due but unpaid under this Agreement; and

 

Page 106.


23.2.1.4 fourthly , in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Finance Documents.

 

23.2.2 The Facility Agent shall, if so directed by the Majority Lenders, vary the order set out in clauses 23.2.1.2 to 23.2.1.4.

 

23.2.3 Clauses 23.2.1 and 23.2.2 will override any appropriation made by an Obligor.

 

24. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

24.1 Without the prior written consent of the other Parties, each Party will keep confidential and will not disclose to any person:

 

24.1.1 the details of any document, the details of the negotiations leading to any document, and the information handed over to such Party during the course of negotiations, as well as the details of all the transactions or agreements contemplated in any document; and

 

24.1.2 all information relating to the business or the operations and affairs of the Parties (together “Confidential Information” ).

 

24.2 The Parties agree to keep all Confidential Information confidential and to disclose it only to their officers, directors, employees, consultants, shareholders, professional advisers, auditors, any other divisions or affiliates of the Party and any person to whom the Lenders wish to cede any or their respective rights or delegate any of their respective obligations under any of the Finance Documents who:

 

24.2.1 have a need to know (and then only to the extent that each such person has a need to know);

 

24.2.2 are aware that the Confidential Information should be kept confidential;

 

Page 107.


24.2.3 are aware of the disclosing Party’s undertaking in relation to such information in terms of this Agreement; and

 

24.2.4 have been directed by the disclosing Party to keep the Confidential Information confidential and have undertaken to keep the Confidential Information confidential. Furthermore, if either Party so requires, the other Party shall procure that each of its employees to whom such disclosure is made, provides a written undertaking of confidentiality to the requesting Party, on terms which meet with that Party’s reasonable satisfaction.

 

24.3 The obligations of the Parties in relation to the maintenance and non-disclosure of Confidential Information in terms of this Agreement do not extend to information that:

 

24.3.1 is disclosed to the receiving Party in terms of the Finance Documents but at the time of such disclosure such information is known to be in the lawful possession or control of that Party and not subject to an obligation of confidentiality; or

 

24.3.2 is or lawfully becomes public knowledge, otherwise than pursuant to a breach of this Agreement by the Party who received such Confidential Information; or

 

24.3.3 is required by the provisions of any law, statute or regulation or during any court proceedings, or by the rules or regulations of any recognised stock exchange or other regulatory authority (including the United States Securities and Exchange Commission) to be disclosed; or

 

24.3.4 is exchanged amongst the Lender and the Facility Agent for the purposes of or in connection with the instruction of the Facility Agent or for the purposes of exercising or enforcing any of their rights and/or in performing any of their obligations under this Agreement or any other Finance Document.

 

Page 108.


25. SET-OFF

A Finance Party may set-off any due and payable obligation owed by an Obligor under the Finance Documents to that Finance Party against any obligation owed by that Finance Party to that Obligor. Each Finance Party shall notify the relevant Obligor (giving full details) promptly after the exercise or purported exercise of any right under this clause 25.

 

26. NOTICES AND DOMICILIA

 

26.1 Notices

 

26.1.1 Each Party chooses the addresses set out opposite its name below as its addresses to which any written notice in connection with the Finance Documents may be addressed.

 

26.1.1.1 Nedbank:

Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions)

Block F, 1 st Floor

135 Rivonia Road

SANDOWN

2196

Telefax No: (011) 294 1333

Attention: General Manager: Corporate Credit

 

Page 109.


26.1.1.2 Facility Agent:

Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions)

Block F, 4 th Floor

135 Rivonia Road

SANDOWN

2196

Telefax No: (011) 294 6366

Attention: Greg Webber

 

26.1.1.3 Obligors:

150 Helen Road

SANDTON

2196

Telefax No: (011) 562 9828

Attention: Executive Vice President – General Counsel

 

26.1.2 Any notice or communication required or permitted to be given in terms of the Finance Documents shall be valid and effective only if in writing but it shall be competent to give notice by telefax transmitted to its telefax number set out opposite its name above.

 

26.1.3

Any Party may by written notice to the other Parties change its chosen physical addresses and/or telefax number for the purposes of clause 26.1.1 to any other address(es) and/or telefax number, provided that the change shall become effective on the 14 th (fourteenth) day after the receipt of the notice by the addressee.

 

26.1.4 Any notice given in terms of this Agreement shall:

 

26.1.4.1

if sent by a courier service be deemed to have been received by the addressee on the 7 th (seventh) Business Day following the date of such sending;

 

Page 110.


26.1.4.2 if delivered by hand be deemed to have been received by the addressee on the date of delivery;

 

26.1.4.3

if transmitted by facsimile be deemed to have been received by the addressee on the 1 st (first) Business Day after the date of transmission,

unless the contrary is proved.

 

26.1.5 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein contained, a written notice or communication actually received by a Party shall be an adequate written notice or communication to it, notwithstanding that it was not sent to or delivered at its chosen address and/or telefax number.

 

26.2 Domicilia

 

26.2.1 Each of the Parties chooses its physical address referred to in clause 26.1.1 as its domicilium citandi et executandi at which documents in legal proceedings in connection with this Agreement may be served.

 

26.2.2

Any Party may by written notice to the other Party change its domicilium from time to time to another address, not being a post office box or a poste restante , in South Africa; provided that any such change shall only be effective on the 14 th (fourteenth) day after deemed receipt of the notice by the other Party pursuant to clause 26.1.5.

 

27. GENERAL

 

27.1 Renunciation of Benefits

Each Obligor renounces, to the extent permitted under applicable law, the benefits of each of the legal exceptions of excussion, division, revision of accounts, no value received, errore calculi, non causa debiti, non numeratae pecuniae and cession of actions, and declares that it understands the meaning of each such legal exception and the effect of such renunciation.

 

Page 111.


27.2 Accounts and Certificates

The entries made in the accounts maintained by the Lenders in connection with the Facility and/or any certificate and/or notice issued, and signed by any manager or director (whose appointment, designation and authority as such it shall not be necessary to prove) of the Lenders or the Facility Agent, save for manifest error, be prima facie proof of the amounts from time to time owing by any Obligor under the Finance Documents.

 

27.3 Sole Agreement

The Finance Documents constitute the sole record of the agreement between the Parties in regard to the subject matter thereof.

 

27.4 No Implied Terms

No Party shall be bound by any express or implied term, representation, warranty, promise or the like, not recorded in any Finance Document.

 

27.5 No Variation

No addition to, variation or consensual cancellation of any Finance Document and no extension of time, waiver or relaxation or suspension of any of the provisions or terms of any Finance Document shall be of any force or effect unless in writing and signed by or on behalf of all the parties thereto.

 

27.6 Extensions and Waivers

No latitude, extension of time or other indulgence which may be given or allowed by any Party to any other Party in respect of the performance of any

 

Page 112.


obligation hereunder or enforcement of any right arising from any Finance Document and no single or partial exercise of any right by any Party shall under any circumstances be construed to be an implied consent by such Party or operate as a waiver or a novation of, or otherwise affect any of that Party’s rights in terms of or arising from any Finance Document or estop such Party from enforcing, at any time and without notice, strict and punctual compliance with each and every provision or term of any Finance Document.

 

27.7 Further Assurances

The Parties undertake at all times to do all such things, to perform all such acts and to take all such steps and to procure the doing of all such things, the performance of all such actions and the taking of all such steps as may be open to them and necessary for or incidental to the putting into effect or maintenance of the terms, conditions and import of any Finance Document.

 

27.8 Waiver of Defences

The provisions of the Finance Documents will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this clause 27.8 ( Waiver of Defences ), would reduce, release or prejudice the subordination and priorities in this Agreement including:

 

27.8.1 any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with any person;

 

27.8.2 the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any Obligor or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument;

 

27.8.3 any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of any person;

 

Page 113.


27.8.4 any amendment (however fundamental) or replacement of a Finance Document or any other document or security;

 

27.8.5 any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

27.8.6 any intermediate payment or discharge of any of the Secured Obligations in whole or in part.

 

27.9 Independent Advice

Each of the Parties acknowledges that they have been free to secure independent legal and other advice as to the nature and effect of all of the provisions of the Finance Documents and that they have either taken such independent legal and other advice or dispensed with the necessity of doing so. Further, each of the Parties acknowledges that all of the provisions of each Finance Document and the restrictions therein contained are fair and reasonable in all the circumstances and are part of the overall intention of the Parties in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

27.10 Counterparts

Any Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts and by different parties thereto in separate counterparts, each of which when so executed shall be deemed to be an original and all of which when taken together shall constitute one and the same agreement.

 

27.11 Waiver of Immunity

Each Obligor waives generally all immunity it or its assets or revenues may otherwise have in any jurisdiction, including immunity in respect of:

 

27.11.1 the giving of any relief by way of interdict or order for specific performance or for the recovery of assets or revenues; and

 

Page 114.


27.11.2 the issue of any process against its assets or revenues for the enforcement of a judgement or, in an action in rem, for the arrest, detention or sale of any of its assets and revenues.

 

27.12 Governing Law

The entire provisions of each Finance Document shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of South Africa.

 

27.13 Jurisdiction

The Parties hereby irrevocably and unconditionally consent to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the High Court of South Africa (South Gauteng High Court, Johannesburg division) (or any successor to that division) in regard to all matters arising from the Finance Documents.

 

27.14 Severability

Each provision in each Finance Document is severable from all others, notwithstanding the manner in which they may be linked together or grouped grammatically, and if in terms of any judgment or order, any provision, phrase, sentence, paragraph or clause is found to be defective or unenforceable for any reason, the remaining provisions, phrases, sentences, paragraphs and clauses shall nevertheless continue to be of full force. In particular, and without limiting the generality of the aforegoing, the Parties acknowledge their intention to continue to be bound by each Finance Document notwithstanding that any provision may be found to be unenforceable or void or voidable, in which event the provision concerned shall be severed from the other provisions, each of which shall continue to be of full force.

 

Page 115.


SIGNED at Sandton on this the 6 th day of May 2009.

 

For and on behalf of
NEDBANK LIMITED (acting through its Nedbank Capital division)

/s/ MR Weston

Name: MR Weston
Capacity: Authorised Signatory
Who warrants his authority hereto

/s/ BJ Maxwell

Name: BJ Maxwell
Capacity: Authorised Signatory
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at Sandton on this the 6 th day of May 2009.

 

For and on behalf of
NEDBANK LIMITED (acting through its Nedbank Corporate division)

 

Name:
Capacity: Authorised Signatory
Who warrants his authority hereto

/s/ D.G. Van Der Walt

Name: D.G. Van Der Walt
Capacity: Senior Credit Executive
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 116.


SIGNED at Johannesburg on this the 6 day of May 2009.

 

 

For and on behalf of
GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

 

/s/ Paul Andy Schmidt

Name: Paul Andy Schmidt
Capacity: Chief Financial Officer
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at Johannesburg on this the 6 day of May 2009.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

 

/s/ Paul Andy Schmidt

Name: Paul Andy Schmidt
Capacity: Chief Financial Officer
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at Johannesburg on this the 6 day of May 2009.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

/s/ Paul Andy Schmidt

Name: Paul Andy Schmidt
Capacity: Chief Financial Officer
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 117.


SIGNED at Johannesburg on this the 6 day of May 2009.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED

/s/ Paul Andy Schmidt

Name: Paul Andy Schmidt
Capacity: Chief Financial Officer
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at Johannesburg on this the 6 day of May 2009.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

/s/ Nicholas John Holland

Name: Nicholas John Holland
Capacity: Director
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 118.


SCHEDULE 1

ORIGINAL GUARANTORS

 

     

NO.

  

ORIGINAL GUARANTOR

      
  1.   

Gold Fields Limited

 

(Registration No. 1968/004880/06)

  
  2.   

Gold Fields Operations Limited

 

(Registration No. 1959/003209/06)

  
  3.   

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited

 

(Registration No. 651406)

  
  4.   

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

 

(Registration No. 184982)

  
  5.   

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited

 

(Registration No. 2002/031431/07)

  

 

Page 119.


SCHEDULE 2

FINANCIAL CLOSE DOCUMENTS

 

1. The Obligors

 

1.1 A copy of the Constitutional Documents of each Obligor.

 

1.2 A copy of a resolution of the board of directors of each Obligor:

 

1.2.1 approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party and resolving to execute those Finance Documents;

 

1.2.2 authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party on its behalf; and

 

1.2.3 authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or despatch all documents and notices to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

1.3 a specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraphs 1.2 above;

 

2. Finance Documents

A duly executed original of this Agreement.

 

Page 120.


3. Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001

All information and documentation required by the Original Lender in relation to each Obligor to enable it to comply with its obligations under, and the requirements of, the Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001 and its own “ know your customer ” procedures.

 

4. Legal Opinions

 

4.1 A legal opinion of the Facility Agent’s legal counsel in a form reasonably satisfactory to the Facility Agent dealing with the legality and enforceability of the Finance Documents.

 

4.2 A legal opinion of the Parent’s legal counsel in a form reasonably satisfactory to the Original Lender dealing with the capacity and authority of the Obligors, which opinion will include, but will not be limited to, confirmation that the limit on each Obligor’s respective powers will not be exceeded as a result of the borrowings or giving of guarantees or indemnities contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

5. Financial Statements

 

5.1 The Original Financial Statements together with the latest audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited) or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements).

 

5.2 The latest unaudited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

 

Page 121.


6. Credit Committee Approval

The approval of the Original Lender’s credit committee.

 

7. Authorisations and Consents

A copy of any authorisation or consent (to include any relevant corporate, regulatory and shareholder consent or approval required to authorise the relevant Obligor to guarantee the Facility or to take any action required to be taken by the relevant Obligor in connection with the Facility) which the Facility Agent reasonably considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

Page 122.


SCHEDULE 3

FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST

(To appear on the letterhead of a Borrower)

 

To: [insert]

[Facility Agent]

Date:

Attention: [insert]

Dear Sirs

FACILITY AGREEMENT DATED [INSERT DATE] : UTILISATION REQUEST

 

1. We refer to the Facility Agreement dated [insert] entered into between inter alia us and, Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (the “Facility Agreement” ).

 

2. This is an Utilisation Request.

 

3. The terms defined in the Facility Agreement shall have the same meanings where used in this Utilisation Request.

 

Page 123.


4. This Utilisation Request is irrevocable.

 

5. We hereby give you notice that, pursuant to the Facility Agreement and on [insert date] , we wish to borrow a Loan in an amount of R [insert] ( [insert] Rand) upon the terms and subject to the conditions contained therein.

 

6. We elect an Interest Period of [insert] months.

 

7. We confirm that as of the date hereof :

 

7.1 the Repeating Representations set out in the Facility Agreement are true and correct in all material respects; and

 

7.2 no Default has occurred and/or is continuing.

 

8. The proceeds of the Loan must be credited to the following bank account:

 

8.1 Bank:                               [insert] ;

 

8.2 Branch:                            [insert] ;

 

8.3 Account Name:               [insert] ;

 

8.4 Account Number:           [insert] ;

 

8.5 Branch Code:                  [insert] .

Yours faithfully

[BORROWER]

 

Page 124.


SCHEDULE 4

DISCLOSURES

See attached

 

Page 125.


SCHEDULE 5

FORM OF ACCESSION UNDERTAKING

 

To: Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (as Facility Agent)

 

From: Gold Fields Limited; and

[insert full name of new Borrower/Guarantor] (the “Acceding Party”)

Date:

Dear Sirs

Facility Agreement between Nedbank Limited, Gold Fields Limited and others dated [insert] (the “Facility Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Facility Agreement. This is an Accession Undertaking. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Accession Undertaking unless given a different meaning in this Accession Undertaking.

 

2. The Acceding Party agrees to become an Additional [Borrower/Guarantor] and to be bound by the terms of the Facility Agreement as an Additional [Borrower/Guarantor] pursuant to clause 22 ( Change to the Obligors ) of the Facility Agreement. The Acceding Party is a company duly incorporated under the laws of [insert name of relevant jurisdiction] .

 

3. The Acceding Party’s administrative details are as follows:

Address:

Fax No:


Attention:

 

4. This Accession Undertaking shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of South Africa.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

For and on behalf of
[insert actual name of Acceding Party]

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 127.


SCHEDULE 6

FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER

 

To: Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (as Facility Agent)

 

From: Gold Fields Limited (the “Parent” ); and

[insert full name of resigning Obligor]

Date:

Dear Sirs

Facility Agreement between Nedbank Limited, Gold Fields Limited and others dated [insert] (the “Facility Agreement”)

 

1 We refer to the Facility Agreement. This is a Resignation Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Resignation Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. Pursuant to [Clause 22.3 ( Resignation of an Additional Borrower )] / [Clause 22.6 ( Resignation of an Additional Guarantor )] , we request that [resigning Obligor] be released from its obligations as a [Borrower] / [Guarantor] under the Facility Agreement.

 

3 We confirm that no default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of this request:

 

Page 128.


4. This Resignation Letter shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of South Africa.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 129.


SCHEDULE 7

FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

 

To: Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (as Facility Agent)

[Date]

Dear Sirs

FACILITY AGREEMENT BETWEEN NEDBANK LIMITED, GOLD FIELDS LIMITED AND OTHERS DATED [            ] 2009 (the “Facility Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Facility Agreement. This is a Compliance Certificate, and terms used in this Compliance Certificate have the same meaning as in the Facility Agreement.

 

2. We confirm that as at [INSERT] :

 

2.1 Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges

the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [INSERT] was: [            ] : 1; and

 

2.2 Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA

the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [INSERT] was: [            ] : 1, and attach calculations showing how these figures were calculated.

 

Page 130.


3 We confirm that no Default is continuing.*

 

For and on behalf of
Gold Fields Limited

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Attachment: Auditor’s letter of confirmation of compliance with financial ratios.

 

* If this statement cannot be made, the Certificate should identify any Default that is continuing and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it.

 

Page 131.


SCHEDULE 8

PERMITTED TRANSFEREES

PART 1

LOCAL BANKS

Absa Bank Limited

FirstRand Bank Limited

The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited

Nedbank Limited

Investec Bank Limited

PART 2

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

Futuregrowth

Liberty Group Limited

Metropolitan Life Limited

Momentum Group Limited

MIBFA

Old Mutual Specialised Finance (Proprietary) Limited

Old Mutual Life Assurance Company (South Africa) Limited

PIC

Sanlam Capital

Sanlam Life Insurance Limited

PART 3

AFFILIATES

Any affiliates, subsidiaries or holding companies of any of the banks or financial institutions listed in this Schedule 8 that are not hedge funds.

 

Page 132.

Exhibit 4.24

LOGO

E XECUTION V ERSION

$311,000,000

FACILITY AGREEMENT

Dated      May 2009

for

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

arranged by

THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

listed herein as Arrangers

with

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

acting as Agent

 

 

CREDIT FACILITY AGREEMENT

 

 


CONTENTS

 

Clause    Page

1.

   Definitions and Interpretation    1

2.

   The Facility    17

3.

   Purpose    17

4.

   Conditions of Utilisation    17

5.

   Utilisation    19

6.

   Repayment    20

7.

   Prepayment and Cancellation    22

8.

   Interest    25

9.

   Interest Periods    26

10.

   Changes to the Calculation of Interest    27

11.

   Fees    28

12.

   Tax Gross up and Indemnities    29

13.

   Increased Costs    31

14.

   Other Indemnities    32

15.

   Mitigation by the Lenders    33

16.

   Costs and Expenses    34

17.

   Guarantee and Indemnity    35

18.

   Representations    38

19.

   Information Undertakings    42

20.

   Financial Covenants    47

21.

   General Undertakings    48

22.

   Events of Default    52

23.

   Changes to the Lenders    58

24.

   Changes to the Obligors    62

25.

   Role of the Agent and the Arrangers    65

26.

   Conduct of Business by the Finance Parties    70

27.

   Sharing among the Finance Parties    70

28.

   Payment Mechanics    72

29.

   Set-off    74

30.

   Notices    74

31.

   Calculations and Certificates    77


32.

   Partial Invalidity    77

33.

   Remedies and Waivers    77

34.

   Amendments and Waivers    77

35.

   Counterparts    78

36.

   Governing Law    79

37.

   Enforcement    79
SCHEDULE 1 T HE O RIGINAL P ARTIES    80
   Part I The Obligors    80
   Part II The Arrangers    81
   Part III The Original Lenders    82
SCHEDULE 2 C ONDITIONS P RECEDENT    83
   Part I Conditions precedent to initial utilisation    83
   Part II Conditions Precedent Required to be delivered by an Additional Borrower    85
   Part III Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Guarantor    87
SCHEDULE 3 R EQUESTS    89
   Part I Utilisation Request    89
   Part II Selection Notice    90
SCHEDULE 4 M ANDATORY C OST F ORMULAE    91
SCHEDULE 5 F ORM OF T RANSFER C ERTIFICATE    93
SCHEDULE 6 F ORM OF A CCESSION L ETTER    96
SCHEDULE 7 F ORM OF R ESIGNATION L ETTER    97
SCHEDULE 8 F ORM OF C OMPLIANCE C ERTIFICATE    98
SCHEDULE 9 F ORM OF T ERM O UT N OTICE    99
SCHEDULE 10 T IMETABLE    100


THIS AGREEMENT is dated May    2009 and made between:

 

(1) GOLD FIELDS LIMITED (the “ Parent ”);

 

(2) GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED, GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED and GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED (the Original Borrowers );

 

(3) THE SUBSIDIARIES of the Parent listed in Part I of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as guarantors (together with the Parent, the “ Original Guarantors ”);

 

(4) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part II of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as mandated lead arranger(s) (whether acting individually or together the “ Arranger ”);

 

(5) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as lenders (the “ Original Lenders ”); and

 

(6) BARCLAYS BANK PLC as agent of the other Finance Parties (the “ Agent ”).

IT IS AGREED as follows:

SECTION 1

INTERPRETATION

 

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Definitions

In this Agreement:

Accession Letter ” means a document substantially in the form set out in Schedule 6 ( Form of Accession Letter ).

Additional Borrower ” means a company which becomes an Additional Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Cost Rate ” has the meaning given to it in Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formulae ).

Additional Guarantor ” means a company which becomes an Additional Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Obligor ” means an Additional Borrower or an Additional Guarantor.

Affiliate ” means, in relation to any person, a Subsidiary of that person or a Holding Company of that person or any other Subsidiary of that Holding Company.

Agreement ” means this credit facility agreement.

Auditors ” means, at any time, the auditors of the Parent at that time, being as at the date of this Agreement PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc. and any replacement for those auditors appointed by the Parent.

 

- 1 -


Availability Period ” means the period from and including the date of this Agreement to and including the date which is the earlier of (i) one month prior to the Initial Revolving Termination Date and (ii) the Term Out Date.

Available Commitment ” means a Lender’s Commitment minus (subject as set out below):

 

  (a) the amount of its participation in any outstanding Loans; and

 

  (b) in relation to any proposed Utilisation, the amount of its participation in any Loans that are due to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date.

For the purposes of calculating a Lender’s Available Commitment in relation to any proposed Utilisation, that Lender’s participation in any Loans that are due to be repaid or prepaid on or before the proposed Utilisation Date shall not be deducted from a Lender’s Commitment.

Available Facility ” means the aggregate for the time being of each Lender’s Available Commitment in respect of the Facility.

Borrower ” means an Original Borrower or an Additional Borrower unless it has ceased to be a Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Break Costs ” means the amount (if any) by which:

 

  (a) the interest which a Lender should have received for the period from the date of receipt of all or any part of its participation in a Loan or Unpaid Sum to the last day of the current Interest Period in respect of that Loan or Unpaid Sum, had the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received been paid on the last day of that Interest Period;

exceeds:

 

  (b) the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received by it on deposit with a leading bank in the Relevant Interbank Market for a period starting on the Business Day following receipt or recovery and ending on the last day of the current Interest Period.

Business Day ” means a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday) on which banks are open for general business in London, New York, Johannesburg and Amsterdam.

Cerro Corona Project ” means the development of the gold and copper deposits in Peru by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary.

Cerro Corona Subsidiary ” means Sociedad Minera La Cima S.A.

Commitment ” means:

 

  (a) in relation to an Original Lender, the amount in dollars set out opposite its name under the heading “ Commitment ” in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties) and the amount of any other Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement; and

 

- 2 -


  (b) in relation to any other Lender, the amount in dollars of any Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement,

to the extent not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement.

Compliance Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 8 ( Form of Compliance Certificate ).

Confidentiality Undertaking ” means a confidentiality undertaking substantially in a recommended form of the LMA or in any other form agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

Consolidated EBITDA ” has the meaning set out in Clause 20.1 ( Financial Definitions ).

Consolidated Tangible Net Worth ” means, at any time, the “Shareholders’ Equity”, as reported in the “Group Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity” in the last set of annual consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent pursuant to this Agreement.

Constitutional Documents ” means, in respect of any person at any time, the then current and up-to-date constitutional documents of such person at such time (including, without limitation, such person’s memorandum and articles of association, certificate of incorporation, articles of incorporation or commercial registration certificate).

Default ” means an Event of Default or any event or circumstance specified in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) which would (with the expiry of a grace period, the giving of notice, the making of any determination under the Finance Documents or any combination of any of the foregoing) be an Event of Default.

Encumbrance ” means;

 

  (a) any mortgage, pledge, lien, assignment or cession conferring security, hypothecation, a security interest, preferential right or trust arrangement or other encumbrance of the like securing any obligation of any person; or

 

  (b) any arrangement under which money or claims to, or for the benefit of, a bank or other account may be applied, set off or made subject to a combination of accounts so as to effect discharge of any sum owed or payable to any person; or

 

  (c) any other type of preferential agreement or arrangement (including any title transfer and retention arrangement), the effect of which is the creation of a security interest.

Environmental Claim ” means any claim, proceeding or investigation by any person in respect of any Environmental Law.

Environmental Law ” means any law applicable to the business conducted by a Material Group Company at the relevant time in any jurisdiction in which that Material Group

 

- 3 -


Company conducts business which relates to the pollution, degradation or protection of the environment or harm to or the protection of human health or the health of animals or plants.

Environmental Permits ” means any permit, licence, consent, approval and other authorisation and the filing of any notification, report or assessment required under any Environmental Law for the operation of the business of any Material Group Company conducted on or from the properties owned or used by that Material Group Company.

Event of Default ” means any event or circumstance specified as such in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ).

Existing Facility ” means the revolving loan facility made available under paragraph (a) of Clause 2.1 ( The Facility ) of the US$ 750,000,000 facility agreement dated 16 May 2007 for GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Western Areas Limited arranged by ABN AMRO Bank N.V. and Barclays Capital with Barclays Bank PLC acting as Agent.

Extended Revolving Termination Date ” means, in the event the Parent has exercised the Extension Option pursuant to Clause 6.3 ( Extension Option ), the date falling seven hundred and twenty eight (728) days after the date of this Agreement.

Extension Option ” means the extension option set out in Clause 6.3 ( Extension Option ).

Facility ” means the revolving loan facility made available under this Agreement as described in Clause 2.1 ( The Facility ) subject to Clause 6.2 ( Term Out Option ).

Facility Office ” means the office(s) notified by a Lender to the Agent in writing on or before the date it becomes a Lender (or, following that date, by not less than five (5) Business Days’ written notice) as the office(s) through which it will perform its obligations under this Agreement.

Fee Letter ” means any letter or letters dated on or about the date of this Agreement between the Arrangers and the Original Borrowers or the Parent (or the Agent and the Parent) setting out any of the fees referred to in Clause 11 ( Fees ).

Finance Document ” means this Agreement, any Fee Letter, any Accession Letter, any Resignation Letter and any other document designated as such by the Agent and the Parent.

Finance Party ” means the Agent, the Arrangers or a Lender.

Financial Indebtedness ” means (without double counting) any indebtedness for or in respect of:

 

  (a) moneys borrowed;

 

  (b) any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility or dematerialised equivalent;

 

  (c) any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument;

 

- 4 -


  (d) the amount of any liability in respect of any lease or hire purchase contract which would, in accordance with GAAP, be treated as a finance or capital lease;

 

  (e) receivables sold or discounted (other than any receivables to the extent they are sold on a non-recourse basis);

 

  (f) the amount of liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred where the deferral of such price is either:

 

  (i) used primarily as a method of raising credit; or

 

  (ii) not made in the ordinary course of business;

 

  (g) any agreement or option to re-acquire an asset if one of the primary reasons for entering into such agreement or option is to raise finance;

 

  (h) any amount raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) having the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

  (i) any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price (and, when calculating the value of any derivative transaction, only the marked to market value shall be taken into account);

 

  (j) any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, standby or documentary letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution;

 

  (k) any amount raised by the issue of redeemable shares; and

 

  (l) the amount of any liability in respect of any guarantee or indemnity for any of its items referred to in paragraphs (a) to (k) above.

Financial Year ” means, at any time, the financial year of the Group ending on 30 June in each calendar year.

GAAP ” means the generally accepted accounting principles set out in IFRS.

Ghanaian Companies ” means Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited.

Group ” means the Parent, the Guarantors and each of their Subsidiaries for the time being.

Group Company ” means a member of the Group.

Guarantor ” means an Original Guarantor or an Additional Guarantor unless, in the case of an Additional Guarantor, it has ceased to be a Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Holding Company ” means, in relation to a company or corporation, any other company or corporation in respect of which it is a Subsidiary.

IFRS ” means International Financial Reporting Standards issued and/or adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board.

 

- 5 -


Indebtedness for Borrowed Money ” means Financial Indebtedness save for any indebtedness for or in respect of paragraphs (i) and (j) of the definition of “ Financial Indebtedness ”.

Information ” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ).

Information Package ” means the financial information distributed during March 2009 concerning the Group which, at the Parent’s request and on its behalf, was prepared in relation to this transaction and distributed by the Arrangers to selected financial institutions before the date of this Agreement.

Initial Revolving Termination Date ” means the date falling three hundred and sixty four (364) days after the date of this Agreement.

Interest Period ” means, in relation to a Loan, each period determined in accordance with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ) and, in relation to an Unpaid Sum, each period determined in accordance with Clause 8.3 ( Default interest ).

Lender ” means:

 

  (a) any Original Lender; and

 

  (b) any bank or financial institution which has become a Party in accordance with Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ),

which in each case has not ceased to be a Party in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

LIBOR ” means, in relation to any Loan:

 

  (a) the applicable Screen Rate; or

 

  (b) (if no Screen Rate is available for dollars for the Interest Period of that Loan) the arithmetic mean of the rates (rounded upwards to four decimal places) as supplied to the Agent at its request quoted by the Reference Banks to leading banks in the London interbank market,

as of the Specified Time on the Quotation Day for the offering of deposits in dollars and for a period comparable to the Interest Period for that Loan.

LMA ” means the Loan Market Association.

Loan ” means a Revolving Loan or a Term Out Loan.

Majority Lenders ” means:

 

  (a)

if there are no Loans then outstanding, a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate more than 66  2 / 3 % of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated more than 66  2 / 3 % of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction); or

 

- 6 -


  (b)

at any other time, a Lender or Lenders whose participations in the Loans then outstanding aggregate more than 66 2 / 3 % of all the Loans then outstanding.

Mandatory Cost ” means the percentage rate per annum calculated by the Agent in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formulae ).

Margin ” means 2.75 per cent. per annum.

Material Adverse Effect ” means a material adverse effect on:

 

  (a) the business, operations, property or financial condition of the Group taken as a whole;

 

  (b) the ability of an Obligor to perform its financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party; or

 

  (c) the validity or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any of them.

Material Group Company ” means:

 

  (a) the Obligors; and

 

  (b) any member of the Group from time to time that is not a Non-Material Group Company;

and “ Material Group Companies ” means, as the context requires, all of them.

Month ” means a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the next calendar month, except that:

 

  (a) (subject to paragraph (c) below) if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business Day, that period shall end on the next Business Day in that calendar month in which that period is to end if there is one, or if there is not, on the immediately preceding Business Day;

 

  (b) if there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month in which that period is to end, that period shall end on the last Business Day in that calendar month; and

 

  (c) if an Interest Period begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month, that Interest Period shall end on the last Business Day in the calendar month in which that Interest Period is to end.

Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above will only apply to the last Month of any period.

Non-Material Group Company ” means, at any time, a member of the Group (other than an Obligor) which had EBITDA (determined on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) or gross assets in its most recently ended Financial Year (on a consolidated basis taking into account it and its subsidiaries only) less than five per cent. (5%) of Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )).

 

- 7 -


Compliance with the aforementioned condition shall be determined by reference to the latest audited financial statements of such member of the Group (consolidated in the case of a member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries), provided that :

 

  (a) if, in the case of any member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries, no consolidated financial statements are prepared and audited, its consolidated EBITDA and gross assets shall be determined on the basis of pro forma consolidated financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and its Subsidiaries, prepared for this purpose by the Parent;

 

  (b) if any intra-Group transfer or re-organisation takes place, the audited financial statements of the Group Company and all relevant members of the Group shall be adjusted by the Parent in order to take into account such intra-Group transfer or re-organisation; and

 

  (c) the audited financial statements of the Group and any relevant member of the Group shall be adjusted in such a manner as the Auditors think fair and appropriate to take account of the acquisition or disposal of any member of the Group or any business of any member of the Group, after the date or at which the audited financial statements of the Group are made up.

Should there be any dispute regarding whether any member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company such dispute shall be referred, at the request of the Agent, to the Auditors and a report by the Auditors that a member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. The costs of obtaining the report by the Auditors will be borne by the unsuccessful party to the dispute.

Obligor ” means a Borrower or a Guarantor.

Original Financial Statements ” means the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the Financial Year ended 30 June 2008.

Party ” means a party to this Agreement.

Permitted Disposal ” means any sale, lease, transfer or other disposal:

 

  (a) by an Obligor or any member of the Group of obsolete or redundant assets which are no longer required for the efficient operation of the business of such Obligor or such member of the Group; or

 

  (b) by an Obligor or any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its day-to-day business if that sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is not otherwise restricted by a term of any Finance Document; or

 

  (c) by an Obligor to another Obligor (other than to an Additional Obligor); or

 

  (d) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to an Obligor or by an Obligor to an Additional Obligor or to a member of the Group that is not an Obligor if such sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is concluded at arm’s length; or

 

- 8 -


  (e) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to another member of the Group that is not an Obligor; or

 

  (f) by any member of the Group to any other person where the higher of the market value or consideration receivable when aggregated with the higher of the market value or consideration receivable for any other sale, lease, transfer or other disposal by any member of the Group (other than a sale, lease, transfer or other disposal referred to in (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (g)) does not exceed ten per cent. (10%) of the Consolidated Tangible Net Worth in any Financial Year subject to a maximum of thirty per cent. (30%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth at such time in aggregate during the period from the date of this Agreement to the Termination Date; or

 

  (g) for which the Agent has given its prior written consent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders).

Permitted Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a) any Encumbrance created prior to the date of this Agreement which (i) is disclosed in the Original Financial Statements and (ii) in all circumstances secures only indebtedness outstanding or a facility available at the date of this Agreement if the principal amount or original facility thereby secured is not increased after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (b) any title transfer or retention arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the normal course of its trading activities and on terms no worse for that member of the Group than the standard terms of the relevant supplier;

 

  (c) any netting or set-off arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements (which shall include, for the avoidance of doubt, those pursuant to hedging arrangements in relation to gold and silver prices, foreign exchange rates and interest rates where such arrangements are entered into for the purposes of providing protection against fluctuation in such rates or prices in the ordinary course of business), for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;

 

  (d) any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of trading and not by reason of any default (whether in payments or otherwise), of any member of the Group;

 

  (e) any Encumbrance over or affecting (or transaction described in paragraph (b) of Clause 21.3 ( Negative Pledge ) (“ Quasi-Encumbrance ”) affecting) any asset acquired by a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not been increased in contemplation of, or since the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group; and

 

- 9 -


  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (f), (g), (h) or (i)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of the date of acquisition of such asset;

 

  (f) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement, where the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is created prior to the date on which that company becomes a member of the Group, if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that company;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not increased in contemplation of or since the acquisition of that company; and

 

  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (h) or (i)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of that company becoming a member of the Group;

 

  (g) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Project Finance Borrowings over assets of, or the shares in, a Project Finance Subsidiary;

 

  (h) in respect of Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances over or affecting any asset of any Material Group Company, any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance securing indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other indebtedness which has the benefit of Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance other than any permitted under paragraphs (a) to (g) above and (i) and (j) below)) does not at any time exceed twelve per cent. (12%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth (or its equivalent in another currency) (but adjusted to include the net value of new assets acquired since the last date of the latest set of consolidated annual financial statements of the Group);

 

  (i) any other Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance as agreed by the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) in writing; or

 

  (j)

any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Financial Indebtedness incurred in connection with the Cerro Corona Project over the business or assets of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary or over the Ownership Interests in the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that the amount of Financial Indebtedness secured by all such Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances permitted by this paragraph (j) does not at any time in aggregate exceed two hundred million dollars ($200,000,000) (or its equivalent). In this paragraph (j) “ Ownership Interests ” means (i) the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary; (ii) any shareholder loans made to the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (iii) to the extent required by Peruvian law, the shares in the Holding Company which directly owns the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that such Holding Company’s sole assets

 

- 10 -


 

are shares issued by, and any loans made by it to, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and its sister company, Minera Gold Fields S.A.

Permitted Financial Indebtedness ” means any Financial Indebtedness:

 

  (a) arising under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) arising under any environmental bond which any member of the Group is required to issue by any applicable law;

 

  (c) arising in connection with the Cerro Corona Project;

 

  (d) arising under any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price but not for speculative purposes;

 

  (e) of the Group existing and available on the date of this Agreement (or, of any person that becomes a member of the Group from time to time, provided that , such Financial Indebtedness existed at the time such person became a member of the Group and was not created in anticipation thereof);

 

  (f) between Group Companies to the extent incurred for the purposes of financing general working capital requirements; or

 

  (g) not falling within paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) or (f) above provided that the aggregate amount of all Financial Indebtedness (excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any Financial Indebtedness incurred by a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) permitted under this paragraph (g) does not at any time exceed two hundred million dollars ($200,000,000) (or its equivalent).

Project Finance Borrowings ” means:

 

  (a) any indebtedness to finance (or re-finance) a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of assets which is incurred by a Project Finance Subsidiary in connection with such project and in respect of which the recourse of the person(s) making any such finance (or re-finance) available to that Project Finance Subsidiary for the payment, repayment and prepayment of such indebtedness is limited to (i) the Project Finance Subsidiary and its assets and/or the shares in that Project Finance Subsidiary and/or (ii) during the period prior to successful completion of the relevant completion tests applicable to such project, guarantees from any one or more members of the Group; or

 

  (b) any indebtedness the terms and conditions of which have been approved by the Agent and which the Agent has agreed in writing (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) to treat as a “Project Finance Borrowing” for the purposes of the Finance Documents.

Project Finance Subsidiary ” means a single purpose company (excluding the Obligors) whose sole business is a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of an asset which has incurred Project Finance Borrowings.

 

- 11 -


Quotation Day ” means, in the case of a determination of LIBOR, the date on which quotations would customarily be provided by leading banks in the London Interbank Market for deposits or amounts in dollars for delivery on the first day of such period or on any other relevant date.

Reference Banks ” means, the principal London offices of Barclays Bank PLC and The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and/or such other banks as may be appointed by the Agent in consultation with the Parent.

Relevant Interbank Market ” means the London interbank market.

Repeating Representations ” means each of the representations set out in Clause 18.1 ( Status ), to Clause 18.22 ( No Material Adverse Effect ) other than Clause 18.3 ( Binding Obligations ), Clause 18.6 ( Governing law and enforcement ), Clause 18.7 ( Deduction of Tax ), Clause 18.8 ( No filing or stamp taxes ), paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) and Clause 18.13 ( No proceedings pending or threatened ).

Resignation Letter ” means a letter substantially in the form set out in Schedule 7 ( Form of Resignation Letter ).

Revolving Loan ” means a loan made or to be made under the Facility or the principal amount outstanding for the time being of that loan.

Rollover Loans ” means one or more Revolving Loans:

 

  (a) made or to be made on the same day that a maturing Revolving Loan is due to be repaid;

 

  (b) the aggregate amount of which is equal to or less than the maturing Revolving Loan; and

 

  (c) made or to be made for the purpose of refinancing a maturing Revolving Loan.

Screen Rate ” means the British Bankers’ Association Interest Settlement Rate for dollars for the relevant period, displayed on the appropriate page (being LIBOR 01) of the Reuters screen. If the agreed page is replaced or service ceases to be available, the Agent may specify another page or service displaying the appropriate rate after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders.

Selection Notice ” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Part II of Schedule 3 ( Requests ) given in accordance with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ).

Specified Time ” means a time determined in accordance with Schedule 10 ( Timetable ).

Subsidiary ” means, in relation to any company or corporation, a company or corporation:

 

  (a) which is controlled, directly or indirectly, by the first mentioned company or corporation;

 

- 12 -


  (b) more than half the issued share capital of which is beneficially owned, directly or indirectly by the first mentioned company or corporation; or

 

  (c) which is a Subsidiary of another Subsidiary of the first mentioned company or corporation,

and for this purpose, a company or corporation shall be treated as being controlled by another if that other company or corporation is able to direct its affairs and/or to control the composition of its board of directors or equivalent body.

Tax ” means any tax, levy, impost, duty or other charge or withholding of a similar nature (including, without limitation, any penalty or interest payable in connection with any failure to pay or any delay in paying any of the same).

Tax Credit ” means a credit against, relief or remission for, or repayment of any Tax.

Tax Deduction ” means a deduction or withholding for or on account of Tax from a payment under a Finance Document.

Tax Payment ” means either the increase in a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ) or a payment under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ).

Term Out Date ” means the date on which the Parent wishes to exercise the Term Out Option, which date shall be the Initial Revolving Termination Date.

Term Out Loan ” means any Revolving Loan converted to a term loan pursuant to the exercise of the Term Out Option.

Term Out Notice ” has the meaning given to that term in Clause 6.2 ( Term Out Option ).

Term Out Option ” means the term out option set out in Clause 6.2 ( Term Out Option ).

Termination Date ” means

 

  (a) the Initial Revolving Termination Date;

 

  (b) in relation to a Revolving Loan which has been the subject of a Term Out Notice, the date set out in the Term Out Notice as the Termination Date being a date no later than twenty four (24) months after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (c) in the event the Parent has exercised the Extension Option pursuant to Clause 6.3 ( Extension Option ), the Extended Revolving Termination Date.

Total Commitments ” means the aggregate of the Commitments being three hundred and eleven million dollars ($311,000,000) at the date of this Agreement.

Transfer Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Transfer Certificate ) or any other form agreed between the Agent and the Parent.

Transfer Date ” means, in relation to a transfer, the later of:

 

  (a) the proposed Transfer Date specified in the Transfer Certificate; and

 

- 13 -


  (b) the date on which the Agent executes the Transfer Certificate.

Unpaid Sum ” means any sum due and payable but unpaid by an Obligor under the Finance Documents.

Utilisation ” means a utilisation of the Facility.

Utilisation Date ” means the date of a Utilisation, being the date on which the relevant Loan is to be made.

Utilisation Request ” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Part I of Schedule 3 ( Requests ).

VAT ” means value added tax as provided for in the Value Added Tax Act 1994 and any other tax of a similar nature.

 

1.2 Construction

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears any reference in this Agreement to:

 

  (i) the “ Agent ”, the “ Arranger ”, any “ Finance Party ”, any “ Lender ”, any “ Obligor ” or any “ Party ” shall be construed so as to include its successors in title, permitted assigns and permitted transferees;

 

  (ii) arm’s length ” means terms that are fair and reasonable to the counterparty of a transaction and no more or less favourable to the other party to the relevant transaction as could reasonably be expected to be obtained in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a person that is not the ultimate Holding Company of such counterparty or an entity of which such counterparty or its ultimate Holding Company has direct or indirect control, or owns directly or indirectly more than twenty per cent. (20%) of the share capital or similar rights of ownership;

 

  (iii) assets ” includes present and future properties, revenues and rights of every description;

 

  (iv) audited ” means, in respect of any financial statement, those financial statements as audited by the Auditors;

 

  (v) authorisations ” mean any authorisation, consent, registration, filing agreement, notarisation, certificate, licence, approval, resolution, permit and/or authority or any exemption from any of the aforesaid, by, with or from any authority (including, without limitation, any approvals required from the South African Reserve Bank in relation to any Finance Document or any transaction contemplated under any Finance Document);

 

  (vi) Barclays Capital ” is a reference to Barclays Capital, the investment banking division of Barclays Bank PLC;

 

- 14 -


  (vii) a “ Finance Document ” or any other agreement or instrument is a reference to that Finance Document or other agreement or instrument as amended, novated, supplemented, extended, replaced or restated;

 

  (viii) indebtedness ” shall be construed so as to include any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

 

  (ix) law ” shall be construed as any law (including statutory, common or customary law), statute, constitution, decree, judgment, treaty, regulation, directive, by-law, order, other legislative measure, requirement, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but, if not having the force of law, is generally complied with by the persons to whom it is addressed or applied) of any government, supranational, local government, statutory or regulatory or self-regulatory or similar body or authority or court and the common law, as amended, replaced, re-enacted, restated or reinterpreted from time to time;

 

  (x) a “ person ” shall be construed as a reference to any person, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any association, trust or partnership (whether or not having separate legal personality) or two or more of the foregoing;

 

  (xi) a “ regulation ” includes any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but complied with generally) of any governmental, intergovernmental or supranational body, agency, department or regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation;

 

  (xii) a provision of law is a reference to that provision as amended or re-enacted; and

 

  (xiii) a time of day is a reference to London time.

 

  (b) Section, Clause and Schedule headings are for ease of reference only.

 

  (c) Unless a contrary indication appears, a term used in any other Finance Document or in any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document has the same meaning in that Finance Document or notice as in this Agreement.

 

  (d) A Default (other than an Event of Default) is “ continuing ” if it has not been remedied or waived and an Event of Default is “ continuing ” if it has not been remedied or waived.

 

1.3 Currency Symbols and Definitions

US$ ”, “ $ ” and “ dollars ” denote lawful currency of the United States of America.

 

- 15 -


1.4 Third party rights

 

  (a) Unless expressly provided to the contrary in a Finance Document, a person who is not a Party has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (the “ Third Parties Act ”) to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this Agreement.

 

  (b) Notwithstanding any term of any Finance Document, the consent of any person who is not a Party is not required to rescind or vary this Agreement at any time.

 

- 16 -


SECTION 2

THE FACILITY

 

2. THE FACILITY

 

2.1 The Facility

Subject to the terms of this Agreement, the Lenders make available to the Borrower a dollar revolving loan facility with a term out option in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Commitments.

 

2.2 Finance Parties’ rights and obligations

 

  (a) The obligations of each Finance Party under the Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Finance Party to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents does not affect the obligations of any other Party under the Finance Documents. No Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Finance Party under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) The rights of each Finance Party under or in connection with the Finance Documents are separate and independent rights and any debt arising under the Finance Documents to a Finance Party from an Obligor shall be a separate and independent debt.

 

  (c) A Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Finance Documents, separately enforce its rights under the Finance Documents.

 

3. PURPOSE

 

3.1 Purpose

 

  (a) The Original Borrowers shall apply all amounts borrowed by them under the Facility towards (i) repayment of the Existing Facility and (ii) their general corporate purposes and working capital.

 

  (b) Each Additional Borrower shall apply all amounts borrowed by it under the Facility towards the purposes specified in the Accession Letter to which it is a party as Additional Borrower.

 

3.2 Monitoring

No Finance Party is bound to monitor or verify the application of any amount borrowed pursuant to this Agreement.

 

4. CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION

 

4.1 Initial conditions precedent

No Borrower may deliver a Utilisation Request unless the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent to Initial

 

- 17 -


Utilisation ) in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent. The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied.

 

4.2 Further conditions precedent

The Lenders will only be obliged to comply with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation ) if on the date of the Utilisation Request and on the proposed Utilisation Date:

 

  (a) in the case of a Rollover Loan, no Event of Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Rollover Loan, and in the case of any other Loan, no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Loan; and

 

  (b) the Repeating Representations to be made by each Obligor are true in all material respects.

 

4.3 Maximum number of Loans

A Borrower may not deliver a Utilisation Request if as a result of the proposed Utilisation more than 20 (twenty) Loans would be outstanding.

 

- 18 -


SECTION 3

UTILISATION

 

5. UTILISATION

 

5.1 Delivery of a Utilisation Request

A Borrower may utilise the Facility by delivery to the Agent of a duly completed Utilisation Request not later than the Specified Time.

 

5.2 Completion of a Utilisation Request

 

  (a) Each Utilisation Request is irrevocable and will not be regarded as having been duly completed unless:

 

  (i) the proposed Utilisation Date is a Business Day within the Availability Period;

 

  (ii) the currency and amount of the Utilisation comply with Clause 5.3 ( Currency and amount ); and

 

  (iii) the proposed Interest Period complies with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ).

 

  (b) Only one Loan may be requested in each Utilisation Request.

 

5.3 Currency and amount

 

  (a) The currency specified in a Utilisation Request must be dollars.

 

  (b) The amount of the proposed Loan must be an amount which is not more than the Available Facility and which is a minimum of ten million dollars ($10,000,000) or, if less, the Available Facility.

 

5.4 Lenders’ participation

 

  (a) If the conditions set out in this Agreement have been met, each Lender shall make its participation in each Loan available by the Utilisation Date through its Facility Office.

 

  (b) The amount of each Lender’s participation in each Loan will be equal to the proportion borne by its Available Commitment to the Available Facility immediately prior to making the Loan.

 

- 19 -


SECTION 4

REPAYMENT, PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

6. REPAYMENT

 

6.1 Repayment of Loans

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, each Borrower shall repay each Loan made to it on the last day of its Interest Period.

 

  (b) Each Borrower shall repay each Term Out Loan made to it on the applicable Termination Date.

 

6.2 Term Out Option

 

  (a) The Parent may elect to convert all of the Revolving Loans into Term Out Loans.

 

  (b) The Parent may, at any time up to ten (10) days prior to the Initial Revolving Termination Date, exercise the Term Out Option by notice to the Agent substantially in the form set out in Schedule 9 ( Form of Term Out Notice ) (the “ Term Out Notice ”). Only one such notice may be given and such notice is irrevocable.

 

  (c) The Term Out Notice shall specify the Revolving Loan(s) in relation to which the Term Out Option is being exercised and the Term Out Date.

 

  (d) The Agent shall promptly notify each Lender of the Revolving Loans specified in the Term Out Notice.

 

  (e) If the Term Out Option is so exercised and the matters set out in paragraph (f) and (g) below are satisfied, then on the Term Out Date:

 

  (i) the Revolving Loan(s) to be converted shall be deemed to have been borrowed on the Term Out Date as Term Out Loans repayable on the Termination Date (as specified in the Term Out Notice); and

 

  (ii) any Available Commitment shall be automatically cancelled.

 

  (f) The following must be satisfied for the Term Out Option to be effected as specified in paragraph (e) above:

 

  (i) the Repeating Representations are true in all material respects; and

 

  (ii) no Default is continuing or would result from the Term Out Loan(s),

in each case, on the date of the Term Out Notice and on the Term Out Date.

 

  (g) No later than on the Term Out Date payment of the term out fee to the Agent pursuant to Clause 11.5 ( Term Out Fees ) shall be made.

 

- 20 -


6.3 Extension Option

 

  (a) The Parent may request that the Termination Date be extended, on the same terms, from the Initial Revolving Termination Date to the Extended Revolving Termination Date (the “ Extension Option ”), subject to the terms of this Clause 6.3, by giving notice to the Agent not less than thirty (30) Business Days (and not more than sixty (60) Business Days) before the Initial Revolving Termination Date, provided that the Parent has not exercised the Term Out Option.

 

  (b) A notice served by the Parent pursuant to paragraph (a) of this Clause 6.3 above shall be irrevocable subject to paragraph (e) of this Clause 6.3 below.

 

  (c) The Agent shall promptly notify each Lender of any such request.

 

  (d) Each Lender shall notify the Agent of its decision (which shall be in its sole discretion) whether or not to agree to the request not later than fifteen (15) days before the Initial Revolving Termination Date (and, if any Lender has not notified the Agent of its acceptance of the request on or before such date, it shall be deemed to have refused such request), and the Agent shall promptly notify the Parent whether or not each Lender has agreed to the request.

 

  (e) Promptly following receipt of notification from the Agent pursuant to paragraph (d) above, the Parent may elect, in its absolute discretion, by notice to the Agent, either:

 

  (i) to accept the extension offered by some or all of the Lenders, in which case the Agent shall promptly notify the relevant Lender(s) of any such acceptance and the Termination Date shall be extended from the Initial Revolving Termination Date to the Extended Revolving Termination Date in relation to the Commitments and participations of such Lender(s) as elected on the same terms; or

 

  (ii) if any Lender does not agree to an extension request, not to benefit from the Extension Option, in which case the Revolving Loan shall be repaid on the Initial Revolving Termination Date together with accrued interest and all other amounts outstanding.

 

  (f) If any Lender does not agree to any extension request, and the Parent has elected to accept the extension offered by some of the Lenders, such non-agreeing Lender’s participation in any outstanding Revolving Loan shall be repaid on the Initial Revolving Termination Date, together with accrued interest and all other amounts outstanding in relation to such participation, and its Commitment shall be reduced to zero.

 

- 21 -


7. PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

7.1 Illegality

If it becomes unlawful in any applicable jurisdiction for a Lender to perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or to fund or maintain its participation in any Loan:

 

  (a) that Lender shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (b) upon the Agent notifying the Parent, the Commitment of that Lender will be immediately cancelled; and

 

  (c) each Borrower shall repay that Lender’s participation in the Loans made to that Borrower on the last day of the Interest Period for each Loan occurring after the Agent has notified the Parent or, if earlier, the date specified by the Lender in the notice delivered to the Agent (being no earlier than the last day of any applicable grace period permitted by law).

 

7.2 Change of control

 

  (a) If any person or group of persons acting in concert gains control of the Parent:

 

  (i) the Parent shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (ii) a Lender shall not be obliged to fund a Utilisation (except for a Rollover Loan) and the Agent and the Parent shall consult about the change of control;

 

  (iii) if the Majority Lenders so require after a period of forty-five (45) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above (provided, for the avoidance of doubt, failure of the Parent to provide such notice shall not prevent the Lenders from taking the following actions), the Agent shall by notice to the Parent, (such notice to be delivered no later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above), cancel the Total Commitments and declare all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest and all other amounts accrued under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Total Commitments will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable;

 

  (iv) if the Agent does not serve the notice referred to in paragraph (iii) above, a Lender may by notice to the Agent which shall be delivered not earlier than forty-five (45) days nor later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above, whereupon the Agent shall by notice to the Parent (such notice to be delivered promptly after receipt of such Lender notification), cancel the Commitment of that Lender and declare the participation of that Lender in all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest thereon and all other amounts due to such Lender under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Commitment of that Lender will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable.

 

- 22 -


  (b) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ control ” means:

 

  (i) the power (whether by way of ownership of shares, proxy, contract, agency or otherwise) to:

 

  (A) cast, or control the casting of, more than one-half of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the Parent; or

 

  (B) appoint or remove all, or the majority, of the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent; or

 

  (C) give directions with respect to the operating and financial policies of the Parent which the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent are obliged to comply with; or

 

  (ii) the holding of more than one-half of the issued share capital of the Parent (excluding any part of that issued share capital that carries no right to participate beyond a specified amount in a distribution of either profits or capital).

 

  (c) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ acting in concert ” means, a group of persons who, pursuant to an agreement or understanding (whether formal or informal), actively co-operate, through the acquisition by any of them, either directly or indirectly, of shares in the Parent, to obtain or consolidate control of the Parent.

 

7.3 Voluntary cancellation

During the Availability Period, the Parent may, if it gives the Agent not less than five (5) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, cancel the whole or any part (being a minimum amount of ten million dollars ($10,000,000)) of the Available Facility. Any cancellation under this Clause 7.3 shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

7.4 Voluntary prepayment of Term Out Loans

A Borrower may, if it gives the Agent not less than five (5) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, prepay the whole or any part of a Term Out Loan (but, if in part, being a minimum amount of ten million dollars ($10,000,000) and integral multiples of two million dollars ($2,000,000) in excess thereof); provided that a Term Out Loan may be prepaid at the end of the Interest Period therefor.

 

7.5 Right of repayment and cancellation in relation to a single Lender

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) any sum payable to any Lender by an Obligor is required to be increased under paragraph (c) of Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ); or

 

  (ii) any Lender claims indemnification from the Parent under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) or Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ); or

 

- 23 -


  (iii) any Lender notifies the Agent of its Additional Cost Rate under paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formulae ),

the Parent may, whilst (in the case of paragraphs (i) and (ii) above) the circumstance giving rise to the requirement or indemnification continues or (in the case of paragraph (iii) above) that Additional Cost Rate is greater than zero, give the Agent notice of cancellation of the Commitment of that Lender and its intention to procure the repayment of that Lender’s participation in the Loans.

 

  (b) On receipt of a notice referred to in paragraph (a) above, the Commitment of that Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero whereupon the Total Commitments shall be reduced by the same amount.

 

  (c) On the last day of each Interest Period which ends after the Parent has given notice under paragraph (a) above (or, if earlier, the date specified by the Parent in that notice), each Borrower to which a Loan is outstanding shall repay that Lender’s participation in that Loan.

 

7.6 Restrictions

 

  (a) Any notice of cancellation or prepayment given by any Party under this Clause 7 shall be irrevocable and, unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, shall specify the date or dates upon which the relevant cancellation or prepayment is to be made and the amount of that cancellation or prepayment.

 

  (b) Any prepayment under this Agreement shall be made together with accrued interest on the amount prepaid and, subject to any Break Costs, without premium or penalty.

 

  (c) Unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement any part of any Loan (other than a Term Out Loan) which is prepaid may be reborrowed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

  (d) The Borrowers shall not repay or prepay all or any part of the Loans or cancel all or any part of the Commitments except at the times and in the manner expressly provided for in this Agreement.

 

  (e) No amount of the Total Commitments cancelled under this Agreement may be subsequently reinstated.

 

  (f) At the end of the Availability Period, the Total Commitments shall be reduced to zero.

 

  (g) If the Agent receives a notice under this Clause 7 it shall promptly forward a copy of that notice to either the Parent or the affected Lender, as appropriate.

 

  (h) Any Term Out Loan which is prepaid or repaid may not be reborrowed.

 

- 24 -


SECTION 5

COSTS OF UTILISATION

 

8. INTEREST

 

8.1 Calculation of interest

The rate of interest on each Loan for each Interest Period is the percentage rate per annum which is the aggregate of the applicable:

 

  (a) Margin;

 

  (b) LIBOR; and

 

  (c) Mandatory Cost, if any.

 

8.2 Payment of interest

Each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan on the last day of each Interest Period (and, if the Interest Period is longer than 6 (six) months, on the dates falling at 6 (six) Monthly intervals after the first day of the relevant Interest Period).

 

8.3 Default interest

 

  (a) If an Obligor fails to pay any amount payable by it under a Finance Document on its due date, interest shall accrue on the overdue amount from the due date up to the date of actual payment (both before and after judgment) at a rate which, subject to paragraph (b) below, is one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have been payable if the overdue amount had, during the period of non-payment, constituted a Loan in the currency of the overdue amount for successive Interest Periods, each of a duration selected by the Agent (acting reasonably). Any interest accruing under this Clause 8.3 shall be immediately payable by that Obligor on demand by the Agent.

 

  (b) If any overdue amount consists of all or part of a Loan which became due on a day which was not the last day of an Interest Period relating to that Loan:

 

  (i) the first Interest Period for that overdue amount shall have a duration equal to the unexpired portion of the current Interest Period relating to that Loan; and

 

  (ii) the rate of interest applying to the overdue amount during that first Interest Period shall be one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have applied if the overdue amount had not become due.

 

  (c) Default interest (if unpaid) arising on an overdue amount will be compounded with the overdue amount at the end of each Interest Period applicable to that overdue amount but will remain immediately due and payable.

 

8.4 Notification of rates of interest

The Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders and the relevant Borrower of the determination of a rate of interest under this Agreement.

 

- 25 -


9. INTEREST PERIODS

 

9.1 Selection of Interest Periods

 

  (a) A Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan or in relation to a Term Out Loan (i) in relation to the first Interest Period (for each Term Out Loan) in the Term Out Notice or (ii) (in relation to all subsequent Interest Periods) in a Selection Notice.

 

  (b) Each Selection Notice for a Term Out Loan is irrevocable and must be delivered to the Agent by a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) to which that Loan was made not later than the Specified Time.

 

  (c) If a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) fails to deliver a Selection Notice to the Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above, the relevant Interest Period will be one Month.

 

  (d) Subject to this Clause 9, a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select an Interest Period of one (1), two (2), three (3) or six (6) months or any other period agreed between the Parent and the Agent (acting on the instructions of all the Lenders).

 

  (e) An Interest Period for a Loan shall not extend beyond the Termination Date.

 

  (f) Each Interest Period for a Loan shall start on the Utilisation Date or, in relation to any Term Out Loan, the last day of the immediately preceding Interest Period.

 

  (g) A Loan (except for a Term Out Loan) has one Interest Period only.

 

9.2 Non-Business Days

If an Interest Period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, that Interest Period will instead end on the next Business Day in that calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

9.3 Consolidation and division of Term Out Loans

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, if two or more Interest Periods end on the same date, the Term Out Loans relating thereto will, unless that Borrower (or the Parent on its behalf) specifies to the contrary in the Selection Notice for the next Interest Period, be consolidated into, and treated as, a single Term Out Loan on the last day of the Interest Period.

 

  (b) Subject to Clause 4.3 ( Maximum number of Loans ), if a Borrower (or the Parent on its behalf) requests in a Selection Notice that a Term Out Loan be divided into 2 (two) or more Term Out Loans, that Term Out Loan will, on the last day of its Interest Period, be so divided into the amounts specified in that Selection Notice, being an aggregate amount equal to the amount of the Term Out Loan immediately before its division.

 

- 26 -


10. CHANGES TO THE CALCULATION OF INTEREST

 

10.1 Absence of quotations

Subject to Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ), if LIBOR is to be determined by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a quotation by the Specified Time on the Quotation Day, the applicable LIBOR shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Reference Banks.

 

10.2 Market disruption

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs in relation to a Loan for any Interest Period, then the rate of interest on each Lender’s share of that Loan for the Interest Period shall be the percentage rate per annum which is the sum of:

 

  (i) the Margin;

 

  (ii) the rate notified to the Agent by that Lender as soon as practicable and in any event not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period ( provided that if such Lender is unable to notify the Agent of such rate not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period, it shall do so before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period), to be that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to that Lender of funding its participation in that Loan from whatever source it may reasonably select; and

 

  (iii) the Mandatory Cost, if any, applicable to that Lender’s participation in the Loan.

 

  (b) In this Agreement “ Market Disruption Event ” means:

 

  (i) at or about noon on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period the Screen Rate is not available and none or only one of the Reference Banks supplies a rate to the Agent to determine LIBOR for dollars and for the relevant Interest Period; or

 

  (ii) before close of business in London on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period, the Agent receives notifications from a Lender or Lenders (whose participations in a Loan exceed thirty five per cent. (35%) of that Loan) that the cost to it of obtaining matching deposits in the Relevant Interbank Market would be in excess of LIBOR.

 

10.3 Alternative basis of interest or funding

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs and the Agent or the Parent so requires, the Agent and the Parent shall enter into negotiations (for a period of not more than thirty (30) days) with a view to agreeing a substitute basis for determining the rate of interest.

 

- 27 -


  (b) Any alternative basis agreed pursuant to paragraph (a) above shall, with the prior consent of all the Lenders and the Parent, be binding on all Parties.

 

10.4 Break Costs

 

  (a) Each Borrower shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by a Finance Party, pay to that Finance Party its Break Costs attributable to all or any part of a Loan or Unpaid Sum being paid by that Borrower on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period for that Loan or Unpaid Sum.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Break Costs for any Interest Period in which they accrue.

 

11. FEES

 

11.1 Commitment fee

 

  (a) The Parent shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender) a fee in dollars which shall be computed at the rate of one point one per cent. (1.10%) per annum on that Lender’s Available Commitment for the Availability Period.

 

  (b) The accrued commitment fee is payable on the last day of each successive period of three (3) months which ends during the Availability Period, on the last day of the Availability Period, on the Termination Date and, if cancelled in full, on the cancelled amount of the relevant Lender’s Commitment at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

11.2 Participation fee

The Parent shall pay to the Agent (for the account of the Lenders based on their respective contributions) a participation fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.3 Syndication fee

The Parent shall pay to the Agent (for the account of the Arrangers) a syndication fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.4 Agency fee

The Parent shall pay to the Agent (for its own account) an agency fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.5 Term Out fee

The Parent shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender in respect of its participation in the Term Out Loan(s)) a term-out fee of a quarter per cent. (0.25%) flat on the Term Out Date. The term-out fee shall be calculated on the amount of the Facility which has been converted into a Term Out Loan.

 

- 28 -


SECTION 6

ADDITIONAL PAYMENT OBLIGATIONS

 

12. TAX GROSS UP AND INDEMNITIES

 

12.1 Tax gross-up

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall make all payments to be made by it without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by law.

 

  (b) The Parent shall promptly upon becoming aware that an Obligor must make a Tax Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate or the basis of a Tax Deduction) notify the Agent accordingly. Similarly, a Lender shall notify the Agent on becoming so aware in respect of a payment payable to that Lender. If the Agent receives such notification from a Lender it shall notify the Parent and, if applicable, that Obligor.

 

  (c) If a Tax Deduction is required by law to be made by an Obligor, the amount of the payment due from that Obligor shall be increased to an amount which (after making any Tax Deduction) leaves an amount equal to the payment which would have been due if no Tax Deduction had been required.

 

  (d) If an Obligor is required to make a Tax Deduction, that Obligor shall make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by law.

 

  (e) Within thirty (30) days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction, the Obligor making that Tax Deduction shall deliver to the Agent for the Finance Party entitled to the payment evidence reasonably satisfactory to that Finance Party that the Tax Deduction has been made or (as applicable) any appropriate payment paid to the relevant taxing authority.

 

12.2 Tax indemnity

 

  (a) The Parent shall (within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent) pay to a Finance Party an amount equal to the loss, liability or cost which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will be or has been (directly or indirectly) suffered for or on account of Tax by that Finance Party in respect of a Finance Document.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply:

 

  (i) with respect to any Tax assessed on a Finance Party:

 

  (A) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party is incorporated or, if different, the jurisdiction (or jurisdictions) in which that Finance Party is treated as resident for tax purposes; or

 

- 29 -


  (B) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party’s Facility Office is located in respect of amounts received or receivable in that jurisdiction,

 

     if that Tax is imposed on or calculated by reference to the net income received or receivable (but not any sum deemed to be received or receivable) by that Finance Party; or

 

  (ii) to the extent a loss, liability or cost is compensated for by an increased payment under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ).

 

  (c) A Finance Party making, or intending to make a claim under paragraph (a) above shall promptly notify the Agent of the event which will give, or has given, rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall notify the Parent.

 

  (d) A Finance Party shall, on receiving a payment from an Obligor under this Clause 12.2, notify the Agent.

 

12.3 Tax Credit

If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) that:

 

  (a) a Tax Credit is attributable either to an increased payment of which that Tax Payment forms part, or to that Tax Payment; and

 

  (b) that Finance Party has obtained, utilised and retained that Tax Credit,

the Finance Party shall pay an amount to such Obligor which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will leave it (after that payment) in the same after-Tax position as it would have been in had the Tax Payment not been required to be made by such Obligor.

 

12.4 Stamp taxes

The Parent shall pay and, within three (3) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability that Finance Party incurs in relation to all stamp duty, registration and other similar Taxes payable in respect of any Finance Document.

 

12.5 Value added tax

 

  (a) All amounts set out, or expressed to be payable under a Finance Document by any Party to a Finance Party which (in whole or in part) constitute the consideration for VAT purposes shall be deemed to be exclusive of any VAT which is chargeable on such supply, and accordingly, subject to paragraph (c) below, if VAT is chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document, that Party shall pay to the Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying the consideration) an amount equal to the amount of the VAT (and such Finance Party shall promptly provide an appropriate VAT invoice to such Party).

 

- 30 -


  (b) If VAT is chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party (the “ Supplier ”) to any other Finance Party (the “ Recipient ”) under a Finance Document, and any Party (the “ Relevant Party ”) is required by the terms of any Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration for such supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse the Recipient in respect of that consideration), such Party shall also pay to the Supplier (in addition to and at the same time as paying such amount) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT. The Recipient will promptly pay to the Relevant Party an amount equal to any credit or repayment from the relevant tax authority which it reasonably determines relates to the VAT chargeable on that supply.

 

  (c) Where a Finance Document requires any Party to reimburse a Finance Party for any costs or expenses, that Party shall also at the same time pay and indemnify the Finance Party against all VAT incurred by the Finance Party in respect of the costs or expenses to the extent that the Finance Party reasonably determines that neither it nor any other member of any group of which it is a member for VAT purposes is entitled to credit or repayment from the relevant tax authority in respect of the VAT.

 

13. INCREASED COSTS

 

13.1 Increased costs

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 13.3 ( Exceptions ) the Parent shall, within five (5) Business Days of a demand by the Agent, pay for the account of a Finance Party the amount of any Increased Costs incurred by that Finance Party or any of its Affiliates as a result of (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation or (ii) compliance with any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement.

 

  (b) In this Agreement “ Increased Costs ” means:

 

  (i) a reduction in the rate of return from the Facility or on a Finance Party’s (or its Affiliate’s) overall capital;

 

  (ii) an additional or increased cost; or

 

  (iii) a reduction of any amount due and payable under any Finance Document,

 

     which is incurred or suffered by a Finance Party or any of its Affiliates to the extent that it is attributable to that Finance Party having entered into its Commitment or funding or performing its obligations under any Finance Document.

 

13.2 Increased cost claims

 

  (a) A Finance Party intending to make a claim pursuant to Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) shall notify the Agent of the event giving rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall promptly notify the Parent.

 

- 31 -


  (b) Each Finance Party shall, as soon as practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Increased Costs.

 

13.3 Exceptions

Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost is:

 

  (a) attributable to a Tax Deduction required by law to be made by an Obligor;

 

  (b) compensated for by Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) (or would have been compensated for under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) but was not so compensated solely because any of the exclusions in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) applied);

 

  (c) compensated for by the payment of the Mandatory Cost; or

 

  (d) attributable to the wilful breach by the relevant Finance Party or its Affiliates of any law or regulation.

 

14. OTHER INDEMNITIES

 

14.1 Currency indemnity

 

  (a) If any sum due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (a “ Sum ”), or any order, judgment or award given or made in relation to a Sum, has to be converted from the currency (the “ First Currency ”) in which that Sum is payable into another currency (the “ Second Currency ”) for the purpose of:

 

  (i) making or filing a claim or proof against that Obligor;

 

  (ii) obtaining or enforcing an order, judgment or award in relation to any litigation or arbitration proceedings,

 

     that Obligor shall as an independent obligation, within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party to whom that Sum is due against any cost, loss or liability arising out of or as a result of the conversion including any discrepancy between (A) the rate of exchange used to convert that Sum from the First Currency into the Second Currency and (B) the rate or rates of exchange available to that person at the time of its receipt of that Sum.

 

  (b) Each Obligor waives any right it may have in any jurisdiction to pay any amount under the Finance Documents in a currency or currency unit other than that in which it is expressed to be payable.

 

14.2 Other indemnities

The Parent shall (or shall procure that an Obligor will), within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability incurred by that Finance Party as a result of:

 

  (a) the occurrence of any Event of Default;

 

- 32 -


  (b) a failure by an Obligor to pay any amount due under a Finance Document on its due date, including without limitation, any cost, loss or liability arising as a result of Clause 27 ( Sharing Among the Finance Parties );

 

  (c) funding, or making arrangements to fund, its participation in a Loan requested by a Borrower in a Utilisation Request but not made by reason of the operation of any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement (other than by reason of default or negligence by that Finance Party alone); or

 

  (d) a Loan (or part of a Loan) not being prepaid in accordance with a notice of prepayment given by a Borrower or the Parent.

 

14.3 Indemnity to the Agent

The Parent shall promptly indemnify the Agent against any cost, loss or liability incurred by the Agent (acting reasonably) as a result of:

 

  (a) investigating any event which it reasonably believes is a Default; or

 

  (b) acting or relying on any notice, request or instruction which it reasonably believes to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised.

 

15. MITIGATION BY THE LENDERS

 

15.1 Mitigation

 

  (a) Each Finance Party shall, in consultation with the Parent, take all reasonable steps to mitigate any circumstances which arise and which would result in any amount becoming payable under or pursuant to, or cancelled pursuant to, any of Clause 7.1 ( Illegality ), Clause 12 ( Tax Gross-up and Indemnities ), Clause 13 ( Increased Costs ) or paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formulae ) including (but not limited to) transferring its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to another Affiliate or Facility Office.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not in any way limit the obligations of any Obligor under the Finance Documents.

 

15.2 Limitation of liability

 

  (a) The Parent shall indemnify each Finance Party for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by that Finance Party as a result of steps taken by it under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ).

 

  (b) A Finance Party is not obliged to take any steps under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ) if, in the opinion of that Finance Party (acting reasonably), to do so might be prejudicial to it.

 

- 33 -


16. COSTS AND EXPENSES

 

16.1 Transaction expenses

The Parent shall, promptly within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay the Agent and the Arrangers the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees but subject to any separately agreed cap) reasonably incurred by any of them in connection with syndication of the Facility and the negotiation, preparation, printing and execution of:

 

  (a) this Agreement and any other documents referred to in this Agreement; and

 

  (b) any other Finance Documents executed after the date of this Agreement,

subject to a cap of ten thousand dollars ($10,000) (provided, however, that such cap shall not include the legal fees, which shall be subject to a separately agreed cap).

 

16.2 Amendment costs

If (a) an Obligor requests an amendment, waiver or consent or (b) an amendment is required pursuant to Clause 28.9 ( Change of currency ), the Parent shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, reimburse the Agent for the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by the Agent in responding to, evaluating, negotiating or complying with that request or requirement.

 

16.3 Enforcement costs

The Parent shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay to each Finance Party the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) incurred by that Finance Party in connection with the enforcement of, or the preservation of any rights under, any Finance Document.

 

- 34 -


SECTION 7

GUARANTEE

 

17. GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

 

17.1 Guarantee and indemnity

Each Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally jointly and severally:

 

  (a) guarantees to each Finance Party punctual performance by each Borrower of all that Borrower’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) undertakes with each Finance Party that whenever a Borrower does not pay any amount when due under or in connection with any Finance Document, that Guarantor shall immediately on demand pay that amount as if it was the principal obligor; and

 

  (c) indemnifies each Finance Party immediately on demand (and shall make the relevant payment within five (5) Business Days of such demand) against any cost, loss or liability suffered by that Finance Party if any obligation guaranteed by it is or becomes unenforceable, invalid or illegal. The amount of the cost, loss or liability shall be equal to the amount which that Finance Party would otherwise have been entitled to recover.

 

17.2 Continuing guarantee

This guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of sums payable by any Obligor under the Finance Documents, regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part.

 

17.3 Reinstatement

If any payment by an Obligor or any discharge given by a Finance Party (whether in respect of the obligations of any Obligor or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is avoided or reduced as a result of insolvency or any similar event:

 

  (a) the liability of each Obligor shall continue as if the payment, discharge, avoidance or reduction had not occurred; and

 

  (b) each Finance Party shall be entitled to recover the value or amount of that security or payment from each Obligor, as if the payment, discharge, avoidance or reduction had not occurred.

 

17.4 Waiver of defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this Clause 17 will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this Clause, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Clause 17 (without limitation and whether or not known to it or any Finance Party) including:

 

  (a) any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, any Obligor or other person;

 

- 35 -


  (b) the release of any other Obligor or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any member of the Group;

 

  (c) the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any Obligor or other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

  (d) any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of an Obligor or any other person;

 

  (e) any amendment, novation, supplement, extension, restatement (however fundamental) or replacement of a Finance Document or any other document or security;

 

  (f) any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

  (g) any insolvency or similar proceedings.

 

17.5 Immediate recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) to proceed against or enforce any other rights or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this Clause 17. This waiver applies irrespective of any law or any provision of a Finance Document to the contrary.

 

17.6 Appropriations

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full, each Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) may:

 

  (a) refrain from applying or enforcing any other moneys, security or rights held or received by that Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) in respect of those amounts, or apply and enforce the same in such manner and order as it sees fit (whether against those amounts or otherwise) and no Guarantor shall be entitled to the benefit of the same; and

 

  (b) hold in an interest-bearing suspense account any moneys received from any Guarantor or on account of any Guarantor’s liability under this Clause 17.

 

17.7 Deferral of Guarantors’ rights

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full and unless the Agent

 

- 36 -


otherwise directs, no Guarantor will exercise any rights which it may have by reason of performance by it of its obligations under the Finance Documents:

 

  (a) to be indemnified by an Obligor;

 

  (b) to claim any contribution from any other guarantor of any Obligor’s obligations under the Finance Documents; and/or

 

  (c) to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents or of any other guarantee or security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, the Finance Documents by any Finance Party.

 

17.8 Additional security

This guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other guarantee or security now or subsequently held by any Finance Party.

 

- 37 -


SECTION 8

REPRESENTATIONS, UNDERTAKINGS AND EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

18. REPRESENTATIONS

Each Obligor makes the representations and warranties set out in this Clause 18 to each Finance Party.

 

18.1 Status

 

  (a) It is a limited liability company, duly incorporated and validly existing under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

  (b) It has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted or is contemplated to be conducted.

 

18.2 Power and authority

It has the power to enter into and perform, and has taken all necessary action to authorise its entry into, and performance of, the Finance Documents to which it is party and the transactions contemplated by those Finance Documents.

 

18.3 Binding obligations

The obligations expressed to be assumed by it in each Finance Document to which it is a party are, subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement limiting its obligations, which are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Clause 4 ( Conditions of Utilisation ) or Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ), legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.

 

18.4 Non-conflict with other obligations

The entry into and performance by it of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party do not and will not conflict with:

 

  (a) any law applicable to it;

 

  (b) its Constitutional Documents; or

 

  (c) any material agreement or instrument binding upon it or any of its assets.

 

18.5 Validity and admissibility in evidence

All authorisations required:

 

  (a) to enable it lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights and comply with its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure that the obligations expressed to be assumed by it thereunder are legal, valid, binding and enforceable; and

 

  (b) to make the Finance Documents to which it is a party admissible in evidence in its jurisdiction of incorporation, have been obtained or effected and are in full force and effect.

 

- 38 -


18.6 Governing law and enforcement

Subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement set out in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Clause 4.1 ( Initial conditions precedent ) or Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ):

 

  (a) the choice of English law as the governing law of the Finance Documents will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation; and

 

  (b) any judgment obtained in England in relation to a Finance Document will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

18.7 Deduction of Tax

It is not required under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation to make any deduction for or on account of Tax from any payment it may make under any Finance Document.

 

18.8 No filing or stamp taxes

Except to the extent set out in any legal opinion provided pursuant to Clause 4.1 ( Initial conditions precedent ) or Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ) in relation to it, under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation it is not necessary that the Finance Documents be filed, recorded or enrolled with any court or other authority in that jurisdiction or that any stamp, registration or similar tax be paid on or in relation to the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

18.9 No default

 

  (a) No Default is continuing or might reasonably be expected to result from the making of any Utilisation.

 

  (b) It is not, nor is it likely to be as a result of entering into and performing its obligations under the Finance Documents, in violation of any law or in breach of or in default under any agreement to which it is a party or which is binding on it or any of its assets to an extent or in a manner which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.10 No misleading information

 

  (a) All written information supplied by it to the Finance Parties and the Agent in connection with this Agreement (and the information contained in the Information Package) (the “ Information ”) was true and accurate in all material respects as at the date it was given and was not misleading in any material respect at such date.

 

  (b) It has not knowingly withheld any information which, if disclosed, could reasonably be expected materially and adversely to affect the decision of the Finance Parties in considering whether or not to provide finance to each Borrower.

 

- 39 -


18.11 Financial statements

 

  (a) The Original Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements fairly represent the Group’s financial condition and operations during the relevant financial year.

 

18.12 Pari passu ranking

Its payment obligations under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation.

 

18.13 No proceedings pending or threatened

No litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings of or before any court, arbitral body or government agency which, if adversely determined, might reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect (to the best of its knowledge and belief) have been started or threatened against it or any Material Group Company.

 

18.14 No winding-up

No Material Group Company has taken any corporate action, nor have any other steps been taken or legal proceedings started or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against any Material Group Company, for its winding-up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation or for the enforcement of any Encumbrance over all or any of its revenues or assets or for the appointment of a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of all or any of its assets which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.15 No encumbrances

 

  (a) No Encumbrance exists over all or any of the assets of any Material Group Company except for Permitted Encumbrances.

 

  (b) No Encumbrance would arise as a result of the execution of and performance of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

18.16 Assets

It and each Material Group Company has good title to or validly leases or licenses all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 18.16 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.17 Insurance

Each Material Group Company maintains insurances on and in relation to its business and assets against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies in the jurisdiction in which it conducts its business carrying on substantially similar business in such jurisdiction.

 

- 40 -


18.18 Environmental Compliance

Each Material Group Company has adopted and complies with an environmental policy which requires monitoring of and compliance with all applicable Environmental Law and Environmental Permits applicable to it from time to time unless non-compliance with such policy could not reasonably be expected to cause a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.19 Environmental Claims

No Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) is threatened against any Material Group Company where that claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.20 Taxation

 

  (a) It and each Material Group Company has duly and punctually paid and discharged all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties except to the extent that:

 

  (i) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (ii) it has maintained adequate reserves for those Taxes; and

 

  (iii) payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

  (b) It is not and no Material Group Company is materially overdue in the filing of any Tax returns.

 

18.21 Ownership of Material Group Companies

 

  (a) Each Material Group Company (other than GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and the Ghanaian Companies) is a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent.

 

  (b) The Parent holds at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited.

 

  (c) The Parent indirectly holds at least seventy one point one per cent. (71.1%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company.

 

  (d) The Parent indirectly holds at least ninety two per cent. (92%) of the voting shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to eighty point seven per cent. (80.7%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

18.22 No Material Adverse Effect

There has been no change in the business, operations, property or financial condition of the Obligors or the Group (taken as a whole) since 30 June 2008 which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

- 41 -


18.23 Times when representation made

 

  (a) All the representations and warranties in this Clause 18 are made by each Obligor on the date of this Agreement (other than the representation in paragraph (a) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) which is deemed to be made on the date the Information is provided by the relevant Obligor).

 

  (b) All the representations and warranties in this Clause 18 are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the date of each Utilisation Request and Utilisation Date.

 

  (c) The Repeating Representations are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the first day of each Interest Period, on the date of extension pursuant to the exercise of the Extension Option under Clause 6.3 ( Extension Option ) and on the Term Out Date save that the references in Clause 18.11 ( Financial statements ) to “ the Original Financial Statements ” shall, for the purposes of the Repeating Representations, be construed as references to the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent under Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ).

 

19. INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 19 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

19.1 Financial statements

The Parent shall supply to the Agent:

 

  (a) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the end of each of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that Financial Year;

 

  (ii) the audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than (A) Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited unless there is a legal requirement to audit its financial statements and (B) any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements) for that Financial Year; and

 

  (iii) if the audited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements, as the case may be, are not delivered under (ii) above, the unaudited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements, as the case may be, for that Financial Year;

 

- 42 -


  (b) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within sixty (60) days after the first six (6) months of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for the first 6 (six) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (ii) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the first 6 (six) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (c) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within forty-five (45) days after the end of each quarter of each Financial Year:

 

  (i) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that period; and

 

  (ii) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for that period.

 

19.2 Compliance Certificate

 

  (a) The Parent shall supply to the Agent, with each set of consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements ), a Compliance Certificate setting out (in reasonable detail) computations as to compliance with Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

  (b) Each Compliance Certificate shall be signed by 2 (two) directors or executive officers of the Parent and, if required to be delivered with the audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraph (a)(i) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), by the Auditors.

 

19.3 Requirements as to financial statements

 

  (a) Each set of financial statements delivered by the Parent pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) shall be certified by a director of the relevant company as fairly representing its financial condition as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

  (b) The Parent shall procure that each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) is prepared in accordance with GAAP, the requirements of its jurisdiction of incorporation and accounting practices and financial reference periods consistent with those applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements.

 

  (c) Paragraph (b) above shall not apply to the extent that, in relation to any sets of financial statements, the Parent notifies the Agent that there has been a change in GAAP or the accounting practices or reference periods and its Auditors (in the case of its annual audited financial statements) or the Parent (in the case of any of its other financial statements) delivers to the Agent:

 

  (i) a description of any change necessary for those financial statements to reflect GAAP, accounting practices and reference periods upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; and

 

- 43 -


  (ii) sufficient information, in form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Agent, to enable the Agent to determine whether Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) has been complied with and make an accurate comparison between the financial position indicated in those financial statements and the Original Financial Statements.

 

  (d) If the Parent notifies the Agent of a change in accordance with paragraph (c) above, then the Parent and the Agent shall enter into negotiations in good faith with a view to agreeing:

 

  (i) whether or not the change might result in material alteration in the commercial effect of any of the terms of this Agreement or any other Finance Document; and

 

  (ii) if so, any amendments to this Agreement or any other Finance Document which may be necessary to ensure that the change does not result in any material alteration in the commercial effect of those terms, and if any amendments are agreed they shall take effect and be binding on each of the Parties in accordance with their terms.

 

  (e) Any reference in this Agreement to “financial statements” shall be construed as a reference to those financial statements as the same may be adjusted under this Clause 19.3 to reflect the basis upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared.

 

19.4 Access to records

At any time after the occurrence of a Default and for so long as it is continuing, upon the request of the Agent or a Finance Party each Obligor shall (at that Obligor’s expense) provide to the Agent or any of its representatives and professional advisors such access to that Obligor’s records (including its general ledger), books and assets as that person may require at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice.

 

19.5 Information: miscellaneous

Each Obligor shall supply to the Agent, if the Agent so requests:

 

  (a) all documents dispatched by that Obligor to its shareholders (or any class of them) or its creditors generally at the same time as they are dispatched;

 

  (b) the details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings which are current, threatened or pending against any member of the Group which, if adversely determined against it, would be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

- 44 -


  (c) promptly, such further information (including an extract of its general ledger) regarding the financial condition, business and operations of any Material Group Company as any Finance Party (through the Agent) may reasonably request.

 

19.6 Notification of default

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall notify the Agent, of any Default (and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it) promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

  (b) Promptly upon a request by the Agent, each Borrower shall supply to the Agent, a certificate signed by 2 (two) of its directors or senior officers on its behalf certifying that no Default is continuing (or if a Default is continuing specifying the Default and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it).

 

19.7 Use of websites

 

  (a) The Parent may satisfy its obligation under this Agreement to deliver any information in relation to those Lenders (the “ Website Lenders ”) who accept this method of communication by posting this information onto an electronic website designated by the Parent and the Agent (the “ Designated Website ”) if:

 

  (i) the Agent expressly agrees (after consultation with each of the Lenders) that it will accept communication of the information by this method;

 

  (ii) both the Parent and the Agent are aware of the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website; and

 

  (iii) the information is in a format previously agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

 

     If any Lender (a “ Paper Form Lender ”) does not agree to the delivery of information electronically then the Agent shall notify the Parent accordingly and the Parent shall supply the information to the Agent (in sufficient copies for each Paper Form Lender) in paper form. In any event the Parent shall supply the Agent with at least one copy in paper form of any information required to be provided by it.

 

  (b) The Agent shall supply each Website Lender with the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website following designation of that website by the Parent and the Agent.

 

  (c) The Parent shall promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence notify the Agent if:

 

  (i) the Designated Website cannot be accessed due to technical failure;

 

  (ii) the password specifications for the Designated Website change;

 

  (iii) any new information which is required to be provided under this Agreement is posted onto the Designated Website;

 

- 45 -


  (iv) any existing information which has been provided under this Agreement and posted onto the Designated Website is amended; or

 

  (v) the Parent becomes aware that the Designated Website or any information posted onto the Designated Website is or has been infected by any electronic virus or similar software.

 

     If the Parent notifies the Agent under paragraph (c)(i) or paragraph (c)(v) above, all information to be provided by the Parent under this Agreement after the date of that notice shall be supplied in paper form unless and until the Agent and each Website Lender is satisfied that the circumstances giving rise to the notification are no longer continuing.

 

     Any Website Lender may request, through the Agent, 1 (one) paper copy of any information required to be provided under this Agreement which is posted onto the Designated Website. The Parent shall comply with any such request within ten (10) Business Days.

 

19.8 “Know your customer” checks

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (ii) any change in the status of an Obligor or the composition of the shareholders of an Obligor after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (iii) a proposed assignment or transfer by a Lender of any of its rights and obligations under this Agreement to a party that is not a Lender prior to such assignment or transfer,

 

     obliges the Agent or any Lender (or, in the case of paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender) to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, each Obligor shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, on behalf of any prospective new Lender) in order for the Agent, such Lender or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (b)

Each Lender shall promptly upon the request of the Agent supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself) in order for the Agent to carry out and be satisfied it has complied

 

- 46 -


 

with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (c) The Parent shall, by not less than ten (10) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Agent, notify the Agent (which shall promptly notify the Lenders) of its intention to request that one of its Subsidiaries becomes an Additional Obligor pursuant to Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

 

  (d) Following the giving of any notice pursuant to paragraph (c) above, if the accession of such Additional Obligor obliges the Agent or any Lender to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not readily available to it, the Parent shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or on behalf of any prospective Lender) in order for the Agent or such Lender or any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the accession of such Subsidiary to this Agreement as an Additional Obligor.

 

20. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

 

20.1 Financial definitions

In this Clause 20:

Consolidated EBITDA ” means, for any Measurement Period, (having reversed any entries made to reflect fair value gains or losses on financial derivative investments which are undertaken in the normal course of business) Consolidated Profits Before Interest and Tax before any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets and before any extraordinary items;

Consolidated Net Borrowings ” means, at any time, the aggregate amount of all obligations of the Group for or in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money but excluding any such obligation to any member of the Group, adjusted to take account of the aggregate amount of freely available cash and cash equivalents held by any member of the Group (and so that no amount shall be included or excluded more than once);

Consolidated Net Finance Charges ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the aggregate amount of the interest (including the interest element of leasing and hire purchase payments and capitalised interest), commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments payable by any member of the Group (including any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payment payable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging arrangement but deducting any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments receivable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging instrument) but deducting any other interest receivable by any member of the Group on any deposit or bank account;

 

- 47 -


Consolidated Profits Before Interest and Tax ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the consolidated net income of the Group (less the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group (other than a Project Finance Subsidiary) from a Project Finance Subsidiary) before:

 

  (a) any provision on account of normal taxation; and

 

  (b) any interest, commission, discounts or other fees incurred or payable, received or receivable by any member of the Group in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money; and

Measurement Period ” means each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the Parent’s Financial Year and each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the first half of the Parent’s Financial Year.

 

20.2 Financial condition

The Parent shall ensure that for so long as any amount is outstanding under a Finance Document or any Commitment is in force:

 

  (a) the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of any Measurement Period shall be or shall exceed 5:1; and

 

  (b) the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA shall not in respect of any Measurement Period exceed 2.5:1.

 

20.3 Financial testing

The financial covenants set out in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ) shall be tested by reference to each of the financial statements and/or each Compliance Certificate delivered pursuant to Clause 19.2 ( Compliance Certificate ).

 

20.4 Breach of a Financial Condition Undertaking

Any Obligor shall, immediately upon becoming aware of a breach of either of the financial covenants in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ), notify the Agent and provide such details about the breach as the Agent may request (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

21. GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 21 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

- 48 -


21.1 Authorisations

Each Obligor shall promptly:

 

  (a) obtain, comply with and do all that is necessary to maintain in full force and effect; and

 

  (b) upon written request by the Agent or a Finance Party, supply certified copies to the Agent and/or a Finance Party, as the case may be, of,

any authorisation required or desirable under any applicable law to enable it to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure the legality, validity, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of any Finance Document.

 

21.2 Compliance with laws

Each Obligor shall comply in all respects with all laws and regulations to which it may be subject (including, but not limited to, Environmental Law), if failure so to comply would materially impair its ability to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

21.3 Negative pledge

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company shall) create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance over any of its assets.

 

  (b) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its assets on terms whereby they are or may be leased to or re-acquired by it or by an Obligor or any other member of the Group;

 

  (ii) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its receivables on recourse terms;

 

  (iii) enter into any arrangement under which money or the benefit of a bank or other account may be applied, set-off or made subject to a combination of accounts; or

 

  (iv) enter into any other preferential arrangement having a similar effect,

 

     in circumstances where the arrangement or transaction is entered into primarily as a method of raising Financial Indebtedness or of financing the acquisition of an asset.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above do not apply to Permitted Encumbrances.

 

21.4 Disposals and Mergers

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) enter into a single transaction or a series of transactions (whether related or not) and whether voluntarily or involuntarily to sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of any assets; or

 

- 49 -


  (ii) enter into any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not apply to:

 

  (i) Permitted Disposals; or

 

  (ii) any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction of any member of the Group, without insolvency, if:

 

  (A) in respect of the Obligors or the successors-in-title or assignees of the Obligors, the Finance Documents are preserved as binding upon the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed members of the Group; and

 

  (B) the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed companies will be members of the Group; and

 

  (C) such amalgamation, demerger, merger and/or corporate reconstruction will not have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.5 Change of business

Each Obligor shall procure that no substantial change is made to the general nature of its business or the business of the Group taken as a whole from that carried on at the date of this Agreement.

 

21.6 Insurance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) maintain insurances on and in relation to its business, properties and assets with reputable underwriters or insurance companies against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies carrying on the same or substantially similar business.

 

21.7 Environmental Compliance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) substantially comply in all material respects with all Environmental Law and obtain and maintain any Environmental Permits and take all reasonable steps in anticipation of known or expected future changes to or obligations under the same.

 

21.8 Environmental Claims

Each Obligor shall inform the Agent, in writing as soon as reasonably practical upon becoming aware of the same:

 

  (a) if any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) threatened against any Material Group Company; or

 

- 50 -


  (b) of any facts or circumstances which will or are reasonably likely to result in any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) being commenced or threatened against any Material Group Company,

where the claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.9 Taxation

Each Material Group Company shall duly and punctually pay and discharge all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties save to the extent that:

 

  (a) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (b) adequate reserves are being maintained for those Taxes; and

 

  (c) where such payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

21.10 Maintenance of Legal Status

Each Material Group Company shall do all such things as are necessary to maintain its existence as a legal person and shall maintain its books and records in good order and make all necessary corporate filings with the relevant authorities in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

21.11 Claims Pari Passu

Each Obligor shall ensure that at all times the claims of the Finance Parties against it under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors save those whose claims are preferred by any bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation or other similar laws of general application in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

21.12 Maintenance of Assets

Each Material Group Company shall ensure that it has good title to or validly leases or licences all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 21.12 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.13 Acquisitions

No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no Material Group Company will), without the prior consent of the Majority Lenders, enter into any transaction, acquire any company, business, assets or undertaking where such a transaction or acquisition is classed as a “Category 1” transaction under the Listing Requirements of the JSE Limited. For the

 

- 51 -


purpose of this Clause 21.13 only, references to a transaction shall be construed as not including any acquisition of the Parent by a third party.

 

21.14 Financial Indebtedness

No member of the Group (other than a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) shall incur, create or permit to subsist or have outstanding any Financial Indebtedness or enter into any agreement or arrangement whereby it is entitled to incur, create or permit to subsist any Financial Indebtedness other than Permitted Financial Indebtedness.

 

21.15 Ownership of Material Group Companies

The Parent shall ensure that:

 

  (a) each Material Group Company which is a Material Group Company at the date of this Agreement (other than the GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Cerro Corona Subsidiary, any Ghanaian Company) is and continues to be a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent;

 

  (b) it holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited;

 

  (c) it indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least seventy one point one per cent. (71.1%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company; and

 

  (d) it indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least ninety two per cent. (92%) of the voting shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to eighty point seven per cent. (80.7%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

22. EVENTS OF DEFAULT

Each of the events or circumstances set out in Clause 22 is an Event of Default (whether or not caused by any reason whatsoever outside the control of a Borrower or the Parent or any other person) save for Clause 22.16 ( Acceleration ) and Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ).

 

22.1 Non-payment

An Obligor does not pay on the due date any amount payable pursuant to a Finance Document at the place at and in the currency in which it is expressly payable unless payment is made within three (3) Business Days of its due date.

 

22.2 Financial covenants

Any requirement of Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) is not satisfied.

 

22.3 Other obligations

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), an Obligor does not comply with any provision of the Finance Documents (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-Payment ) and Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants )).

 

- 52 -


  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) above if the Taxes not duly and punctually paid and discharged and in respect of which the undertaking contained in Clause 21.9 ( Taxation ) is given do not exceed an amount of ten million dollars ($10,000,000).

 

22.4 Misrepresentation

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), any representation or statement made or deemed to be made by any Obligor in the Finance Documents or any other document delivered by or on behalf of any Obligor under or in connection with any Finance Document is or proves to have been incorrect or misleading in any material and adverse respect when made or deemed to be made.

 

  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) above if the Taxes in respect of which the representation contained in Clause 18.20 ( Taxation ) was made do not exceed an amount of ten million dollars ($10,000,000).

 

22.5 Cross-default

 

  (a) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is not paid when due, nor where there is an applicable grace period, within the originally applicable grace period.

 

  (b) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is declared to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (c) Any commitment for any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of a Material Group Company as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (d) Any creditor of a Material Group Company becomes entitled to declare any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (e) No Event of Default will occur under this Clause 22.5 if the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness or commitment for Financial Indebtedness, falling within paragraphs (a) to (d) of this Clause 22.5 above is less than twenty million dollars ($20,000,000).

 

- 53 -


22.6 Insolvency

 

  (a) Any Material Group Company is unable or admits inability to pay its debts as they fall due, suspends making payments on any of its debts or, by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, commences negotiations with one or more of its classes of creditors with a view to rescheduling any of its Financial Indebtedness which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

  (b) The value of the assets of any Material Group Company is less than its liabilities (taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities) which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

  (c) A moratorium is declared in respect of any Financial Indebtedness of any Material Group Company.

 

22.7 Insolvency proceedings

Any corporate action, legal proceedings or other similar procedure or step is taken in relation to:

 

  (a) the suspension of payments, a moratorium of any Financial Indebtedness, winding-up, dissolution, administration or reorganisation (by way of voluntary arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of any Material Group Company;

 

  (b) a composition, compromise, assignment or arrangement with any creditor or class of creditors of any Material Group Company;

 

  (c) the appointment of a liquidator, receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, judicial manager, compulsory manager or other similar officer in respect of any Material Group Company or any of its assets; or

 

  (d) enforcement of any Encumbrance over any assets of any Material Group Company,

or any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction and any such procedure or proceedings are not contested in good faith nor discharged within thirty (30) days (or such shorter period provided for contesting such procedure or proceedings under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction).

 

22.8 Failure to comply with final judgement

Any Material Group Company fails within five (5) Business Days of the due date to comply with or pay any sum due from it under any material final judgement or any final order made or given by any court of competent jurisdiction. For the purposes of this Clause 22.8, a “ material final judgement ” shall be any judgement for the payment of a sum of money in excess of ten million dollars ($10,000,000).

 

- 54 -


22.9 Creditors’ process

Any expropriation (other than an expropriation where fair compensation is received) or the operation of the attachment, sequestration, distress or execution affects any material asset of a Material Group Company and is not discharged within twenty-one (21) days. For the purposes of this Clause 22.9 a “ material asset ” is any single income producing asset of the relevant Material Group Company which contributes not less than five percent (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )) provided that any loss of mineral rights arising as a result of the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement and/or the operation of the Minerals and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act No. 28 of 2008 (which is expected to come into operation on 1 March 2010) in substantially its current form as at the date of this Agreement shall not constitute an expropriation for the purposes of this Clause 22.9.

 

22.10 Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for an Obligor to perform any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or such obligations cease to be legal, valid, binding or enforceable obligations.

 

22.11 Repudiation and Unenforceability

An Obligor repudiates a Finance Document or any Finance Document is declared to be or is otherwise unenforceable against an Obligor by a court of the jurisdiction of incorporation of the relevant Obligor.

 

22.12 Governmental Intervention

By or under the authority of any government:

 

  (a) the management of any Material Group Company is wholly or partially displaced or the authority of any Material Group Company in the conduct of its business is wholly or partially taken over; or

 

  (b)

all or a majority of the issued shares of any Material Group Company or material part of its revenues or assets is seized, nationalised, expropriated or compulsorily acquired. For the purposes of this Clause 22.12 “ material part of its revenues or assets ” shall in relation to the relevant Material Group Company be construed as revenues comprising not less than five percent (5%) of the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis in accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ) or assets which contribute not less than five per cent. (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), provided that neither the implementation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement nor the implementation of the Minerals and Petroleum Royalty Resources Royalty Act No. 28 of 2008 (which is expected to come into operation on 1 March 2010) in substantially its current form as at the

 

- 55 -


 

date of this Agreement shall constitute a seizure, nationalisation, expropriation or compulsory acquisition as contemplated by this Clause 22.12.

 

22.13 Material Adverse Effect

Any change occurs in the business, operations, property or financial condition of the Obligors or the Group taken as a whole since the date of the Original Financial Statements which could be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

22.14 Cessation of Business

Any Material Group Company ceases to carry on the business which it undertakes at the date of this Agreement.

 

22.15 Litigation

Any litigation, arbitration, administrative proceedings or governmental or regulatory investigations or proceedings against any Material Group Company or its respective assets or revenues is reasonably expected to be adversely determined, and if so determined, could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

22.16 Acceleration

On and at any time after the occurrence of an Event of Default which is continuing the Agent may, and shall if so directed by the Majority Lenders, by notice to the Borrower and the Parent:

 

  (a) cancel the Total Commitments whereupon they shall immediately be cancelled;

 

  (b) declare that all or part of the Loans, together with accrued interest, and all other amounts accrued or outstanding under the Finance Documents be immediately due and payable, whereupon they shall become immediately due and payable; and/or

 

  (c) declare that all or part of the Loans be payable on demand, whereupon they shall immediately become payable on demand by the Agent on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

22.17 Remedy

 

  (a) No Event of Default under this Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ) and 22.2 ( Financial covenants )) will occur if the failure to comply or circumstance giving rise to the same is capable of remedy and is remedied by an Obligor within ten (10) days of the earlier of the Agent giving notice to the Obligors or any Obligor becoming aware of the failure to comply.

 

  (b)

For the purposes of paragraph (a) above, the events or circumstances referred to in Clause 22.5 ( Cross-default ), Clause 22.6 ( Insolvency ), Clause 22.7 ( Insolvency Proceedings ), Clause 22.8 ( Failure to comply with final judgment ), Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), Clause 22.10 ( Unlawfulness ), Clause 22.11 ( Repudiation and Unenforceability ), Clause 22.12 ( Governmental Intervention ), Clause 22.13

 

- 56 -


 

( Material Adverse Effect ) and Clause 22.14 ( Cessation of Business ) shall be deemed to be incapable of remedy save to the extent set out therein unless the Agent determines otherwise.

 

- 57 -


SECTION 9

CHANGES TO PARTIES

 

23. CHANGES TO THE LENDERS

 

23.1 Assignments and transfers by the Lenders

Subject to this Clause 23, a Lender (the “ Existing Lender ”) may:

 

  (a) assign any of its rights; or

 

  (b) transfer by novation any of its rights and obligations,

to another bank or financial institution or to a trust, fund or other entity which is regularly engaged in or established for the purpose of making, purchasing or investing in loans, securities or other financial assets (the “ New Lender ”).

 

23.2 Conditions of assignment or transfer

 

  (a) The consent of the Parent is required for an assignment or transfer by an Existing Lender, unless the assignment or transfer:

 

  (i) is to another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender or, in the case of ABN AMRO Bank N.V., to The Royal Bank of Scotland plc; or

 

  (ii) takes effect at a time when an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

  (b) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer must not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The Parent will be deemed to have given its consent five (5) Business Days after the Existing Lender has requested it unless consent is expressly refused by the Parent within that time.

 

  (c) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer must not be withheld solely because the assignment or transfer may result in an increase to the Mandatory Cost.

 

  (d) An assignment will only be effective on:

 

  (i) receipt by the Agent of written confirmation from the New Lender (in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent) that the New Lender will assume the same obligations to the other Finance Parties as it would have been under if it was an Original Lender; and

 

  (ii) performance by the Agent of all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to such assignment to a New Lender, the completion of which the Agent shall promptly notify to the Existing Lender and the New Lender.

 

  (e) A transfer will only be effective if the procedure set out in Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ) is complied with.

 

- 58 -


  (f) If:

 

  (i) a Lender assigns or transfers any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents or changes its Facility Office; and

 

  (ii) as a result of circumstances existing at the date the assignment, transfer or change occurs, an Obligor would be obliged to make a payment to the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office under Clause 12 ( Tax gross-up and indemnities ) or Clause 13 ( Increased costs ),

then the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office is only entitled to receive payment under those Clauses to the same extent as the Existing Lender or Lender acting through its previous Facility Office would have been if the assignment, transfer or change had not occurred.

 

  (g) If a Lender assigns or transfers part, but not all, of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents, such assignment or transfer shall be in respect of such Lender’s Commitment and its participation in outstanding Loans on a pro rata basis.

 

23.3 Assignment or transfer fee

The New Lender shall, on the date upon which an assignment or transfer takes effect, pay to the Agent (for its own account) a fee of three thousand dollars ($3,000), unless the Agent, in its sole discretion, agrees to waive the payment of such fee.

 

23.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders

 

  (a) Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, an Existing Lender makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility to a New Lender for:

 

  (i) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any other documents;

 

  (ii) the financial condition of any Obligor;

 

  (iii) the performance and observance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or any other documents; or

 

  (iv) the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with any Finance Document or any other document,

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

  (b) Each New Lender confirms to the Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

  (i) has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by the Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

- 59 -


  (ii) will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

  (c) Nothing in any Finance Document obliges an Existing Lender to:

 

  (i) accept a re-transfer from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this Clause 23; or

 

  (ii) support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or otherwise.

 

23.5 Procedure for transfer

 

  (a) Subject to the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ) a transfer is effected in accordance with paragraph (c) below when the Agent executes an otherwise duly completed Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender. The Agent shall, subject to paragraph (b) below, as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt by it of a duly completed Transfer Certificate appearing on its face to comply with the terms of this Agreement and delivered in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, execute that Transfer Certificate.

 

  (b) The Agent shall only be obliged to execute a Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender once it is satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the transfer to such New Lender.

 

  (c) On the Transfer Date:

 

  (i) to the extent that in the Transfer Certificate the Existing Lender seeks to transfer by novation its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents each of the Obligors and the Existing Lender shall be released from further obligations towards one another under the Finance Documents and their respective rights against one another under the Finance Documents shall be cancelled (being the “ Discharged Rights and Obligations ”);

 

  (ii) each of the Obligors and the New Lender shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one another which differ from the Discharged Rights and Obligations only insofar as that Obligor and the New Lender have assumed and/or acquired the same in place of that Obligor and the Existing Lender;

 

  (iii) the Agent, the Arranger, the New Lender and other Lenders shall acquire the same rights and assume the same obligations between themselves as they would have acquired and assumed had the New Lender been an Original Lender with the rights and/or obligations acquired or assumed by it as a result of the transfer and to that extent the Agent, the Arrangers and the Existing Lender shall each be released from further obligations to each other under the Finance Documents; and

 

- 60 -


  (iv) the New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender”.

 

23.6 Copy of Transfer Certificate to Parent

The Agent shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after it has executed a Transfer Certificate, send to the Parent a copy of that Transfer Certificate.

 

23.7 Security over Lenders’ rights

 

  (a) In addition to the other rights provided to Lenders under this Clause 23, each Lender may without consulting with or obtaining consent from any Obligor, at any time charge or otherwise create an Encumbrance in or over (whether by way of collateral or otherwise) all or any of its rights under any Finance Document to secure obligations of that Lender including, without limitation:

 

  (i) any charge or other Encumbrance to secure obligations to a federal reserve or central bank; and

 

  (ii) in the case of any Lender which is a fund, any charge or other Encumbrance granted to any holders (or trustee or representatives of holders) of obligations owed, or securities issued, by that Lender as security for those obligations or securities,

except that no such charge or Encumbrance shall:

 

  (A) release a Lender from any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or substitute the beneficiary of the relevant charge or Encumbrance for the Lender as a party to any of the Finance Documents; or

 

  (B) require any payments to be made by an Obligor other than or in excess of, or grant to any person any more extensive rights than, those required to be made or granted to the relevant Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

23.8 Disclosure of information

Any Lender may disclose:

 

  (a) to any of its Affiliates, professional advisers and auditors, any information about any Obligor, the Group and the Finance Documents as that Lender shall consider appropriate if any person to whom such information is to be given pursuant to this paragraph (a) is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that some or all of such information may be price-sensitive information;

 

- 61 -


  (b) to any person:

 

  (i) to (or through) whom that Lender assigns or transfers (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of its rights and obligations under this Agreement;

 

  (ii) with (or through) whom that Lender enters into (or may potentially enter into) any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made by reference to, this Agreement or any Obligor; or

 

  (iii) to whom, and to the extent that, information is required to be disclosed by any applicable law or regulation,

any information about any Obligor, the Group and the Finance Documents as that Lender shall consider appropriate if, in relation to paragraphs (i) and (ii) above, the person to whom the information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking. A Lender may also disclose the size and term of the Facility and the name of each Obligor to any investor or potential investor in a securitisation (or similar transaction of broadly equivalent economic effect) if the person to whom the information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking; and

 

  (c) to any rating agency (including its professional advisers) such information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such rating agency to carry out its normal rating activities in relation to the Finance Documents and/or the Obligors if the rating agency to whom such information is to be given is informed of its confidential nature and that some or all of such information may be price-sensitive information and notice is provided to each Obligor of any such disclosure.

 

24. CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS

 

24.1 Assignment and transfer by Obligors

No Obligor may assign any of its rights or transfer any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.2 Additional Borrowers

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Borrower. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Borrower if:

 

  (i) all the Lenders approve the addition of that Subsidiary;

 

  (ii) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter;

 

  (iii) the Parent confirms that no Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that Subsidiary becoming an Additional Borrower; and

 

- 62 -


  (iv) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Borrower, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

24.3 Resignation of an Additional Borrower

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Borrower (other than the Original Borrowers) ceases to be a Borrower by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if:

 

  (i) no Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Letter (and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case); and

 

  (ii) the Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Finance Documents,

whereupon that company shall cease to be a Borrower and shall have no further rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.4 Additional Guarantors

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Guarantor. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Guarantor if;

 

  (i) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter; and

 

  (ii) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Guarantor, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

24.5 Repetition of Representations

Delivery of an Accession Letter constitutes confirmation by the relevant Subsidiary that the representations in Clause 18 ( Representations ) are true and correct in relation to it as at the date of delivery as if made by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing.

 

- 63 -


24.6 Resignation of an Additional Guarantor

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Guarantor (other than an Original Guarantor) ceases to be a Guarantor by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if no Default is continuing and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case.

 

- 64 -


SECTION 10

THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

25. ROLE OF THE AGENT AND THE ARRANGERS

 

25.1 Appointment of the Agent

 

  (a) Each other Finance Party appoints the Agent to act as its agent under and in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Each other Finance Party authorises the Agent to exercise the rights, powers, authorities and discretions specifically given to the Agent under or in connection with the Finance Documents together with any other incidental rights, powers, authorities and discretions.

 

25.2 Duties of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent shall promptly forward to a Party the original or a copy of any document which is delivered to the Agent for that Party by any other Party.

 

  (b) Except where a Finance Document specifically provides otherwise, the Agent is not obliged to review or check the adequacy, accuracy or completeness of any document it forwards to another Party.

 

  (c) If the Agent receives notice from a Party referring to this Agreement, describing a Default and stating that the circumstance described is a Default, it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (d) If the Agent is aware of the non-payment of any principal, interest, commitment fee or other fee payable to a Finance Party (other than the Agent or the Arranger) under this Agreement it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (e) The Agent’s duties under the Finance Documents are solely mechanical and administrative in nature.

 

25.3 Role of the Arranger

Except as specifically provided in the Finance Documents, the Arrangers have no obligations of any kind to any other Party under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.4 No fiduciary duties

 

  (a) Nothing in this Agreement constitutes the Agent or the Arrangers as a trustee or fiduciary of any other person.

 

  (b) Neither the Agent nor the Arrangers shall be bound to account to any Lender for any sum or the profit element of any sum received by it for its own account.

 

25.5 Business with the Group

The Agent and the Arrangers may accept deposits from, lend money to and generally engage in any kind of banking or other business with any member of the Group.

 

- 65 -


25.6 Rights and discretions of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may rely on:

 

  (i) any representation, notice or document believed by it to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised; and

 

  (ii) any statement made by a director, authorised signatory or employee of any person regarding any matters which may reasonably be assumed to be within his knowledge or within his power to verify.

 

  (b) The Agent may assume (unless it has received notice to the contrary in its capacity as agent for the Lenders) that:

 

  (i) no Default has occurred (unless it has actual knowledge of a Default arising under Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ));

 

  (ii) any right, power, authority or discretion vested in any Party or the Majority Lenders has not been exercised; and

 

  (iii) any notice or request made by the Parent (other than a Utilisation Request or Selection Notice) is made on behalf of and with the consent and knowledge of all the Obligors.

 

  (c) The Agent may engage, pay for and rely on the advice or services of any lawyers, accountants, surveyors or other experts.

 

  (d) The Agent may act in relation to the Finance Documents through its personnel and agents.

 

  (e) The Agent may disclose to any other Party any information it reasonably believes it has received as agent under this Agreement.

 

  (f) Notwithstanding any other provision of any Finance Document to the contrary, neither the Agent nor the Arrangers are obliged to do or omit to do anything if it would or might in its reasonable opinion constitute a breach of any law or regulation or a breach of a fiduciary duty or duty of confidentiality.

 

25.7 Majority Lenders’ instructions

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, the Agent shall (i) exercise any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent in accordance with any instructions given to it by the Majority Lenders (or, if so instructed by the Majority Lenders, refrain from exercising any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent) and (ii) not be liable for any act (or omission) if it acts (or refrains from taking any action) in accordance with an instruction of the Majority Lenders.

 

  (b) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, any instructions given by the Majority Lenders will be binding on all the Finance Parties.

 

- 66 -


  (c) The Agent may refrain from acting in accordance with the instructions of the Majority Lenders (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) until it has received such security as it may require for any cost, loss or liability (together with any associated VAT) which it may incur in complying with the instructions.

 

  (d) In the absence of instructions from the Majority Lenders, (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) the Agent may act (or refrain from taking action) as it considers to be in the best interest of the Lenders.

 

  (e) The Agent is not authorised to act on behalf of a Lender (without first obtaining that Lender’s consent) in any legal or arbitration proceedings relating to any Finance Document.

 

25.8 Responsibility for documentation

Neither the Agent nor the Arranger:

 

  (a) is responsible for the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information (whether oral or written) supplied by the Agent, the Arranger, an Obligor or any other person given in or in connection with any Finance Document; or

 

  (b) is responsible for the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.9 Exclusion of liability

 

  (a) Without limiting paragraph (b) below, the Agent will not be liable (including without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) for any action taken by it under or in connection with any Finance Document, unless directly caused by its gross negligence or wilful misconduct.

 

  (b) No Party (other than the Agent) may take any proceedings against any officer, employee or agent of the Agent in respect of any claim it might have against the Agent or in respect of any act or omission of any kind by that officer, employee or agent in relation to any Finance Document and any officer, employee or agent of the Agent may rely on this Clause 25.9 subject to Clause 1.4 ( Third Party Rights ) and the provisions of the Third Parties Act.

 

  (c) The Agent will not be liable for any delay (or any related consequences) in crediting an account with an amount required under the Finance Documents to be paid by the Agent if the Agent has taken all necessary steps as soon as reasonably practicable to comply with the regulations or operating procedures of any recognised clearing or settlement system used by the Agent for that purpose.

 

  (d)

Nothing in this Agreement shall oblige the Agent or the Arrangers to carry out any “know your customer” or other checks in relation to any person on behalf of any Lender and each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it is solely

 

- 67 -


 

responsible for any such checks it is required to carry out and that it may not rely on any statement in relation to such checks made by the Agent or the Arranger.

 

25.10 Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent

Each Lender shall (in proportion to its share of the Total Commitments or, if the Total Commitments are then zero, to its share of the Total Commitments immediately prior to their reduction to zero) indemnify the Agent, within three (3) Business Days of demand, against any cost, loss or liability (including, without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) incurred by the Agent (otherwise than by reason of the Agent’s gross negligence or wilful misconduct) in acting as Agent under the Finance Documents (unless the Agent has been reimbursed by an Obligor pursuant to a Finance Document).

 

25.11 Resignation of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may resign and appoint one of its Affiliates acting through an office as successor by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent.

 

  (b) Alternatively the Agent may resign by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent, in which case the Majority Lenders (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (c) If the Majority Lenders have not appointed a successor Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above within thirty (30) days after notice of resignation was given, the Agent (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (d) The retiring Agent shall, at its own cost, make available to the successor Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Agent may reasonably request for the purposes of performing its functions as Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

  (e) The Agent’s resignation notice shall only take effect upon the appointment of a successor.

 

  (f) Upon the appointment of a successor, the retiring Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 25. Its successor and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

  (g) After consultation with the Parent, the Majority Lenders may, by notice to the Agent, require it to resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above. In this event, the Agent shall resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above.

 

25.12 Confidentiality

 

  (a) In acting as agent for the Finance Parties, the Agent shall be regarded as acting through its agency division which shall be treated as a separate entity from any other of its divisions or departments.

 

- 68 -


  (b) If information is received by another division or department of the Agent, it may be treated as confidential to that division or department and the Agent shall not be deemed to have notice of it.

 

25.13 Relationship with the Lenders

 

  (a) The Agent may treat each Lender as a Lender, entitled to payments under this Agreement and acting through its Facility Office unless it has received not less than five (5) Business Days prior notice from that Lender to the contrary in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall supply the Agent with any information required by the Agent in order to calculate the Mandatory Cost in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formulae ).

 

25.14 Credit appraisal by the Lenders

Without affecting the responsibility of any Obligor for information supplied by it or on its behalf in connection with any Finance Document, each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it has been, and will continue to be, solely responsible for making its own independent appraisal and investigation of all risks arising under or in connection with any Finance Document including but not limited to:

 

  (a) the financial condition, status and nature of each member of the Group;

 

  (b) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document and any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document;

 

  (c) whether that Lender has recourse, and the nature and extent of that recourse, against any Party or any of its respective assets under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (d) the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information provided by the Agent, any Party or by any other person under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.15 Reference Banks

If a Reference Bank (or, if a Reference Bank is not a Lender, the Lender of which it is an Affiliate) ceases to be a Lender, the Agent shall (in consultation with the Parent) appoint another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender to replace that Reference Bank.

 

- 69 -


25.16 Agent’s Management Time

Any amount payable to the Agent under Clause 14.3 ( Indemnity to the Agent ), Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) and Clause 25.10 ( Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent ) shall include the cost of utilising the Agent’s management time or other resources and will be calculated on the basis of such reasonable daily or hourly rates as the Agent may notify to the Parent and the Lenders, and is in addition to any fee paid or payable to the Agent under Clause 11 ( Fees ).

 

25.17 Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent

If any Party owes an amount to the Agent under the Finance Documents the Agent may, after giving notice to that Party, deduct an amount not exceeding that amount from any payment to that Party which the Agent would otherwise be obliged to make under the Finance Documents and apply the amount deducted in or towards satisfaction of the amount owed. For the purposes of the Finance Documents that Party shall be regarded as having received any amount so deducted.

 

26. CONDUCT OF BUSINESS BY THE FINANCE PARTIES

No provision of this Agreement will:

 

  (a) interfere with the right of any Finance Party to arrange its affairs (tax or otherwise) in whatever manner it thinks fit;

 

  (b) oblige any Finance Party to investigate or claim any credit, relief, remission or repayment available to it or the extent, order and manner of any claim; or

 

  (c) oblige any Finance Party to disclose any information relating to its affairs (tax or otherwise) or any computations in respect of Tax.

 

27. SHARING AMONG THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

27.1 Payments to Finance Parties

If a Finance Party (a “ Recovering Finance Party ”) receives or recovers any amount from an Obligor other than in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment Mechanics ) and applies that amount to a payment due under the Finance Documents then:

 

  (a) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days, notify details of the receipt or recovery, to the Agent;

 

  (b) the Agent shall determine whether the receipt or recovery is in excess of the amount the Recovering Finance Party would have been paid had the receipt or recovery been received or made by the Agent and distributed in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment Mechanics ), without taking account of any Tax which would be imposed on the Agent in relation to the receipt, recovery or distribution; and

 

  (c) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent, pay to the Agent an amount (the “ Sharing Payment ”) equal to such receipt or recovery less any amount which the Agent determines may be retained by the Recovering Finance Party as its share of any payment to be made, in accordance with Clause 28.5 ( Partial Payments ).

 

- 70 -


27.2 Redistribution of payments

The Agent shall treat the Sharing Payment as if it had been paid by the relevant Obligor and distribute it between the Finance Parties (other than the Recovering Finance Party) in accordance with Clause 28.5 ( Partial Payments ).

 

27.3 Recovering Finance Party’s rights

 

  (a) On a distribution by the Agent under Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ), the Recovering Finance Party will be subrogated to the rights of the Finance Parties which have shared in the redistribution.

 

  (b) If and to the extent that the Recovering Finance Party is not able to rely on its rights under paragraph (a) above, the relevant Obligor shall be liable to the Recovering Finance Party for a debt equal to the Sharing Payment which is immediately due and payable.

 

27.4 Reversal of redistribution

If any part of the Sharing Payment received or recovered by a Recovering Finance Party becomes repayable and is repaid by that Recovering Finance Party, then:

 

  (a) each Finance Party which has received a share of the relevant Sharing Payment pursuant to Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ) shall, upon request of the Agent, pay to the Agent for account of that Recovering Finance Party an amount equal to the appropriate part of its share of the Sharing Payment (together with an amount as is necessary to reimburse that Recovering Finance Party for its proportion of any interest on the Sharing Payment which that Recovering Finance Party is required to pay); and

 

  (b) that Recovering Finance Party’s rights of subrogation in respect of any reimbursement shall be cancelled and the relevant Obligor will be liable to the reimbursing Finance Party for the amount so reimbursed.

 

27.5 Exceptions

 

  (a) This Clause 27 shall not apply to the extent that the Recovering Finance Party would not, after making any payment pursuant to this Clause 27, have a valid and enforceable claim against the relevant Obligor.

 

  (b) A Recovering Finance Party is not obliged to share with any other Finance Party any amount which the Recovering Finance Party has received or recovered as a result of taking legal or arbitration proceedings, if:

 

  (i) it notified that other Finance Party of the legal or arbitration proceedings; and

 

  (ii) that other Finance Party had an opportunity to participate in those legal or arbitration proceedings but did not do so as soon as reasonably practicable having received notice and did not take separate legal or arbitration proceedings.

 

- 71 -


SECTION 11

ADMINISTRATION

 

28. PAYMENT MECHANICS

 

28.1 Payments to the Agent

 

  (a) On each date on which an Obligor or a Lender is required to make a payment under a Finance Document, that Obligor or Lender shall make the same available to the Agent (unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document) for value on the due date at the time and in such funds specified by the Agent as being customary at the time for settlement of transactions in the relevant currency in the place of payment.

 

  (b) Payment shall be made to such account in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency with such bank as the Agent specifies.

 

28.2 Distributions by the Agent

Each payment received by the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party shall, subject to Clause 28.3 ( Distributions to an Obligor ), Clause 28.4 ( Clawback ) and Clause 25.17 ( Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent ) be made available by the Agent as soon as practicable after receipt to the Party entitled to receive payment in accordance with this Agreement (in the case of a Lender, for the account of its Facility Office), to such account as that Party may notify to the Agent by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice with a bank in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency.

 

28.3 Distributions to an Obligor

The Agent may (with the consent of the Obligor or in accordance with Clause 29 ( Set-off )) apply any amount received by it for that Obligor in or towards payment (on the date and in the currency and funds of receipt) of any amount due from that Obligor under the Finance Documents or in or towards purchase of any amount of any currency to be so applied.

 

28.4 Clawback

 

  (a) Where a sum is to be paid to the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party, the Agent is not obliged to pay that sum to that other Party (or to enter into or perform any related exchange contract) until it has been able to establish to its satisfaction that it has actually received that sum.

 

  (b) If the Agent pays an amount to another Party and it proves to be the case that the Agent had not actually received that amount, then the Party to whom that amount (or the proceeds of any related exchange contract) was paid by the Agent shall on demand refund the same to the Agent together with interest on that amount from the date of payment to the date of receipt by the Agent, calculated by the Agent to reflect its cost of funds.

 

- 72 -


28.5 Partial payments

 

  (a) If the Agent receives a payment that is insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by an Obligor under the Finance Documents, the Agent shall apply that payment towards the obligations of that Obligor under the Finance Documents in the following order:

 

  (i) first , in or towards payment pro rata of any unpaid fees, costs and expenses of the Agent and the Arrangers under the Finance Documents;

 

  (ii) secondly , in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest, fee or commission due but unpaid under this Agreement;

 

  (iii) thirdly , in or towards payment pro rata of any principal due but unpaid under this Agreement; and

 

  (iv) fourthly , in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) The Agent shall, if so directed by the Majority Lenders, vary the order set out in paragraphs (a)(ii) to (iv) above.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above will override any appropriation made by an Obligor.

 

28.6 No set-off by Obligors

All payments to be made by an Obligor under the Finance Documents shall be calculated and be made without (and free and clear of any deduction for) set-off or counterclaim.

 

28.7 Business Days

 

  (a) Any payment which is due to be made on a day that is not a Business Day shall be made on the next Business Day in the same calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

  (b) During any extension of the due date for payment of any principal or Unpaid Sum under this Agreement interest is payable on the principal or Unpaid Sum at the rate payable on the original due date.

 

28.8 Currency of account

 

  (a) Subject to paragraphs (b) and (c) below, dollars is the currency of account and payment for any sum due from an Obligor under any Finance Document.

 

  (b) Each payment in respect of costs, expenses or Taxes shall be made in the currency in which the costs, expenses or Taxes are incurred.

 

  (c) Any amount expressed to be payable in a currency other than dollars shall be paid in that other currency.

 

- 73 -


28.9 Change of currency

 

  (a) Unless otherwise prohibited by law, if more than one currency or currency unit are at the same time recognised by the central bank of any country as the lawful currency of that country, then:

 

  (i) any reference in the Finance Documents to, and any obligations arising under the Finance Documents in, the currency of that country shall be translated into, or paid in, the currency or currency unit of that country designated by the Agent (after consultation with the Parent); and

 

  (ii) any translation from one currency or currency unit to another shall be at the official rate of exchange recognised by the central bank for the conversion of that currency or currency unit into the other, rounded up or down by the Agent (acting reasonably).

 

  (b) If a change in any currency of a country occurs, this Agreement will, to the extent the Agent (acting reasonably and after consultation with the Parent) specifies to be necessary, be amended to comply with any generally accepted conventions and market practice in the Relevant Interbank Market and otherwise to reflect the change in currency.

 

29. SET-OFF

A Finance Party may set off any matured obligation due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (to the extent beneficially owned by that Finance Party) against any matured obligation owed by that Finance Party to that Obligor, regardless of the place of payment, booking branch or currency of either obligation. If the obligations are in different currencies, the Finance Party may convert either obligation at a market rate of exchange in its usual course of business for the purpose of the set-off.

 

30. NOTICES

 

30.1 Communications in writing

Any communication to be made under or in connection with the Finance Documents shall be made in writing and, unless otherwise stated, may be made by fax or letter.

 

30.2 Addresses

The address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention the communication is to be made) of each Party for any communication or document to be made or delivered under or in connection with the Finance Documents is:

 

  (a) in the case of the Parent, that identified with its name below;

 

  (b) in the case of each Lender or any other Obligor, that notified in writing to the Agent on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Party; and

 

  (c) in the case of the Agent, that identified with its name below,

 

- 74 -


or any substitute address or fax number or department or officer as the Party may notify to the Agent (or the Agent may notify to the other Parties, if a change is made by the Agent) by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice.

 

30.3 Delivery

 

  (a) Any communication or document made or delivered by one person to another under or in connection with the Finance Documents will only be effective:

 

  (i) if by way of fax, when received in legible form; or

 

  (ii) if by way of letter, when it has been left at the relevant address or five (5) Business Days after being deposited in the post postage prepaid in an envelope addressed to it at that address,

and, if a particular department or officer is specified as part of its address details provided under Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ), if addressed to that department or officer.

 

  (b) Any communication or document to be made or delivered to the Agent will be effective only when actually received by the Agent and then only if it is expressly marked for the attention of the department or officer identified with the Agent’s signature below (or any substitute department or officer as the Agent shall specify for this purpose).

 

  (c) All notices from or to an Obligor shall be sent through the Agent.

 

  (d) Any communication or document made or delivered to the Parent in accordance with this Clause will be deemed to have been made or delivered to each of the Obligors.

 

30.4 Notification of address and fax number

Promptly upon receipt of notification of an address and fax number or change of address or fax number pursuant to Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) or changing its own address or fax number, the Agent shall notify the other Parties.

 

30.5 Electronic communication

 

  (a) Any communication to be made between the Agent and a Lender under or in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by electronic mail or other electronic means, if the Agent and the relevant Lender:

 

  (i) agree that, unless and until notified to the contrary, this is to be an accepted form of communication;

 

  (ii) notify each other in writing of their electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means; and

 

  (iii) notify each other of any change to their address or any other such information supplied by them.

 

- 75 -


  (b) Any electronic communication made between the Agent and a Lender will be effective only when actually received in readable form and in the case of any electronic communication made by a Lender to the Agent only if it is addressed in such a manner as the Agent shall specify for this purpose.

 

30.6 English language

 

  (a) Any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document must be in English.

 

  (b) All other documents provided under or in connection with any Finance Document must be:

 

  (i) in English; or

 

  (ii) if not in English, and if so required by the Agent, accompanied by a certified English translation and, in this case, the English translation will prevail unless the document is a constitutional, statutory or other official document.

 

30.7 Obligor agent

 

  (a) Each Obligor (other than the Parent) by its execution of this Agreement or an Accession Letter (as the case may be) irrevocably appoints the Parent to act on its behalf as its agent in relation to the Finance Documents and irrevocably authorises:

 

  (i) the Parent on its behalf to supply all information concerning itself contemplated by this Agreement to the Finance Parties and to give all notices and instructions (including, in the case of a Borrower, Utilisation Requests, Selection Notices or a Term Out Notice), to execute on its behalf any documents required hereunder and to make such agreements capable of being given, made or effected by any Obligor notwithstanding that they may affect the Obligor, without further reference to or the consent of that Obligor; and

 

  (ii) each Finance Party to give any notice, demand or other communication to that Obligor pursuant to the Finance Documents to the Parent on its behalf,

and in each case the Obligor shall be bound as though the Obligor itself had given the notices and instructions (including, without limitation, any Utilisation Requests, Selection Notices or a Term Out Notice) or executed or made such agreements or received the relevant notice, demand or other communication.

 

  (b) Every act, agreement, undertaking, settlement, waiver, notice or other communication given or made by the Parent or given to the Parent under any Finance Document on behalf of another Obligor or in connection with any Finance Document (whether or not known to any other Obligor and whether occurring before or after such other Obligor became an Obligor under any Finance Document) shall be binding for all purposes on that Obligor as if that Obligor had expressly made, given or concurred with it. In the event of any conflict between any notices or other communications of the Parent and any other Obligor, those of the Parent shall prevail.

 

- 76 -


31. CALCULATIONS AND CERTIFICATES

 

31.1 Accounts

In any litigation or arbitration proceedings arising out of or in connection with a Finance Document, the entries made in the accounts maintained by a Finance Party are prima facie evidence of the matters to which they relate.

 

31.2 Certificates and Determinations

Any certification or determination by a Finance Party of a rate or amount under any Finance Document is, in the absence of manifest error, conclusive evidence of the matters to which it relates.

 

31.3 Day count convention

Any interest, commission or fee accruing under a Finance Document will accrue from day to day and is calculated on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a year of three hundred and sixty (360) days or, in any case where the practice in the Relevant Interbank Market differs, in accordance with that market practice.

 

32. PARTIAL INVALIDITY

If, at any time, any provision of the Finance Documents is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable in any respect under any law of any jurisdiction, neither the legality, validity or enforceability of the remaining provisions nor the legality, validity or enforceability of such provision under the law of any other jurisdiction will in any way be affected or impaired.

 

33. REMEDIES AND WAIVERS

No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, on the part of any Finance Party, any right or remedy under the Finance Documents shall operate as a waiver, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right or remedy prevent any further or other exercise or the exercise of any other right or remedy. The rights and remedies provided in this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law.

 

34. AMENDMENTS AND WAIVERS

 

34.1 Required consents

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 34.2 ( Exceptions ) any term of the Finance Documents may be amended or waived only with the consent of the Majority Lenders and the Parent and any such amendment or waiver will be binding on all Parties.

 

  (b) The Agent may effect, on behalf of any Finance Party, any amendment or waiver permitted by this Clause 34.

 

- 77 -


34.2 Exceptions

 

  (a) An amendment or waiver that has the effect of changing or which relates to:

 

  (i) the definition of “Majority Lenders” in Clause 1.1 ( Definitions );

 

  (ii) an extension to the date of payment of any amount under the Finance Documents;

 

  (iii) a reduction in the Margin or a reduction in the amount of any payment of principal, interest, fees or commission payable;

 

  (iv) an increase in or an extension of any Commitment;

 

  (v) a change to the Borrowers or Guarantors (other than in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ));

 

  (vi) any provision which expressly requires the consent of all the Lenders; or

 

  (vii) Clause 2.2 ( Finance Parties’ rights and obligations ), Clause 6.2 ( Term Out Option ), Clause 6.3 ( Extension Option ), Clause 17 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ), Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) or this Clause 34,

shall not be made without the prior consent of all the Lenders.

 

  (b) An amendment or waiver which relates to the rights or obligations of the Agent or the Arrangers may not be effected without the consent of the Agent or the Arrangers.

 

35. COUNTERPARTS

Each Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts, and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of the Finance Document.

 

- 78 -


SECTION 12

GOVERNING LAW AND ENFORCEMENT

 

36. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it are governed by English law.

 

37. ENFORCEMENT

 

37.1 Jurisdiction

 

  (a) The courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this Agreement (including a dispute regarding the existence, validity or termination of this Agreement or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it) (a “ Dispute ”).

 

  (b) The Parties agree that the courts of England are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle Disputes and accordingly no Party will argue to the contrary.

 

  (c) This Clause 37.1 is for the benefit of the Finance Parties only. As a result, no Finance Party shall be prevented from taking proceedings relating to a Dispute in any other courts with jurisdiction. To the extent allowed by law, the Finance Parties may take concurrent proceedings in any number of jurisdictions.

 

37.2 Service of process

Without prejudice to any other mode of service allowed under any relevant law, each Obligor (other than an Obligor incorporated in England and Wales):

 

  (a) irrevocably appoints Law Debenture Corporate Services Limited as its agent for service of process (in the case of an Obligor incorporated in South Africa, domicilium citandi et executandi ) in relation to any proceedings before the English courts in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (b) agrees that failure by an agent for service of process to notify the relevant Obligor of the process will not invalidate the proceedings concerned.

This Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement.

 

- 79 -


SCHEDULE 1

T HE O RIGINAL P ARTIES

Part I

The Obligors

 

Name of Original Borrowers   

Registration number (or

equivalent, if any)

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   2002/031431/07

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

 

Name of Original Guarantors   

Registration number (or

equivalent, if any)

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   2002/031431/07

Gold Fields Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1968/004880/06

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   651406

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/0

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

 

- 80 -


Part II

The Arrangers

 

Name of Arranger

ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Johannesburg Branch

Bank of China Limited

Bank of Montreal Ireland plc

Barclays Capital

Citibank, N.A., London Branch

Commonwealth Bank of Australia

J.P. Morgan plc

Scotiabank Europe plc

Standard Chartered Bank

 

- 81 -


Part III

The Original Lenders

 

Name of Original Lender    Commitment (US$)
ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Johannesburg Branch      30,000,000
Bank of China Limited      55,000,000
Bank of Montreal Ireland plc      30,000,000
Barclays Bank plc      30,000,000
Citibank, N.A., London Branch      30,000,000
Commonwealth Bank of Australia      30,000,000
JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.      30,000,000
Scotiabank Europe plc      30,000,000
Standard Chartered Bank      30,000,000
The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd.      16,000,000
      
   $ 311,000,000

 

- 82 -


SCHEDULE 2

C ONDITIONS P RECEDENT

Part I

Conditions precedent to initial utilisation

 

1. Obligors

 

  (a) A copy of the constitutional documents of each Obligor.

 

  (b) A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, issued as of a recent date by the appropriate official in the British Virgin Islands.

 

  (c) A copy of a resolution of the board of directors of each Obligor:

 

  (i) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party and resolving that it execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party;

 

  (ii) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party on its behalf; and

 

  (iii) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all documents and notices (including, if relevant, any Utilisation Request and Selection Notice) to be signed and/or dispatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

  (d) A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph (c) above.

 

  (e) A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent for Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

 

  (f) A copy of the resolution of the shareholders of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited approving the relevant resolutions of the board of directors and the transactions contemplated thereby.

 

  (g) A certificate of the Obligors (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on any Obligor to be exceeded.

 

  (h) A certificate of an authorised signatory of the relevant Obligor certifying that each copy document relating to it specified in this Part I of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of this Agreement.

 

- 83 -


2. Legal opinions

 

  (a) A legal opinion of Clifford Chance LLP legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in England, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (b) A legal opinion of Conyers Dill & Pearman, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in the British Virgin Islands, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (c) A legal opinion of Edward Nathan Sonnenbergs, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in South Africa, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

3. Other documents and evidence

 

  (a) Evidence that any agent for service of process referred to in Clause 37.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements together with the latest audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited).

 

  (c) The latest unaudited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

 

  (d) Evidence that the fees, costs and expenses then due from the Parent pursuant to Clause 11 ( Fees ) and Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) have been paid or will be paid by the initial Utilisation Date.

 

  (e) A copy of the approval of the Exchange Control Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that Gold Fields Limited, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited may enter into and provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Original Borrowers may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Original Borrowers acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

  (f) A copy of any authorisation or consent (to include any relevant corporate, regulatory and shareholder consent) which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

  (g) Evidence that all amounts outstanding under the Existing Facility have been or will be repaid and cancelled in full on or before the first Utilisation Date.

 

- 84 -


Part II

Conditions Precedent Required to be delivered by an Additional Borrower

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Borrower and the Parent.

 

2. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the appropriate official in the British Virgin Islands.

 

3. A copy of the constitutional documents of the Additional Borrower.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors of the Additional Borrower:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or despatch all other documents and notices (including, in relation to an Additional Borrower, any Utilisation Request or Selection Notice) to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. If appropriate, a certificate of the Additional Borrower (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded.

 

8. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Borrower certifying that each copy document listed in this Part II of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

9. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

10. If appropriate, a copy of the approval of the Exchange Control Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that Additional Borrower may enter into and provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Additional Borrower may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Additional Borrower acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

- 85 -


11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Borrower.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

13. If the Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Borrower is incorporated.

 

14. If the proposed Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 37.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Borrower.

 

- 86 -


Part III

Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Guarantor

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Guarantor and the Company.

 

2. A copy of the constitutional documents of the Additional Guarantor.

 

3. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the appropriate official in the British Virgin Islands.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors of the Additional Guarantor:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all other documents and notices to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. A copy of a resolution signed by all the holders of the issued shares of the Additional Guarantor, approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which the Additional Guarantor is a party.

 

8. A certificate of the Additional Guarantor (signed by a director) confirming that guaranteeing the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded.

 

9. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Guarantor certifying that each copy document listed in this Part III of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

10. A copy of any other Authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Guarantor.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

- 87 -


13. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Guarantor is incorporated.

 

14. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 37.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Guarantor.

 

15. A copy of the approval of the Exchange Control Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that any Additional Guarantor incorporated in South Africa may enter into and provide the guarantees as contemplated by this Agreement.

 

- 88 -


SCHEDULE 3

R EQUESTS

Part I

Utilisation Request

 

From:    Gold Fields Limited for and on behalf of [ Borrower ]
To:    Barclays Bank PLC
Dated:   

Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ] 2009

(the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Utilisation Request. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Utilisation Request unless given a different meaning in this Utilisation Request.

 

2. We wish to borrow a Loan on the following terms:

 

Proposed Utilisation Date:    [            ] (or, if that is not a Business Day, the next Business Day)
Currency of Loan:    Dollars
Amount:    [            ]
Interest Period:    [            ]

 

3. We confirm that each condition specified in Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent ) is satisfied on the date of this Utilisation Request.

 

4. The proceeds of this Loan should be credited to [ account ].

 

5. This Utilisation Request is irrevocable.

Yours faithfully

 

 

authorised signatory for

Gold Fields Limited for and on behalf of

[ name of relevant Borrower ]

 

- 89 -


Part II

Selection Notice

 

From:    Gold Fields Limited for and on behalf of [Borrower]
To:    Barclays Bank PLC
Dated:   

Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

and Gold Fields Operations Limited—US$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ]

2009 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Selection Notice. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Selection Notice unless given a different meaning in this Selection Notice.

 

2. We refer to the following Term Out Loans with an Interest Period ending on [            ]*.

 

3. [We request that the above Term Out Loans be divided into [            ] Term Out Loans of the following amounts and with the following Interest Periods:] **

or

[We request that the next Interest Period for the above Term Out Loans is [            ]].***

 

4. This Selection Notice is irrevocable.

Yours faithfully

 

 

authorised signatory for

Gold Fields Limited on behalf of

[name of relevant Borrower]

 

* Insert details of all Loans in the same currency which have an Interest Period ending on the same date.
** Use this option if division of Loans is requested.
*** Use this option if sub-division is not required.

 

- 90 -


SCHEDULE 4

M ANDATORY C OST F ORMULAE

 

1. The Mandatory Cost is an addition to the interest rate to compensate Lenders for the cost of compliance with (a) the requirements of the Bank of England and/or the Financial Services Authority (or, in either case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) or (b) the requirements of the European Central Bank.

 

2. On the first day of each Interest Period (or as soon as possible thereafter) the Agent shall calculate, as a percentage rate, a rate (the “ Additional Cost Rate ”) for each Lender, in accordance with the paragraphs set out below. The Mandatory Cost will be calculated by the Agent as a weighted average of the Lenders’ Additional Cost Rates (weighted in proportion to the percentage participation of each Lender in the relevant Loan) and will be expressed as a percentage rate per annum.

 

3. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in a Participating Member State will be the percentage notified by that Lender to the Agent. This percentage will be certified by that Lender in its notice to the Agent to be its reasonable determination of the cost (expressed as a percentage of that Lender’s participation in all Loans made from that Facility Office) of complying with the minimum reserve requirements of the European Central Bank in respect of loans made from that Facility Office.

 

4. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in the United Kingdom will be calculated by the Agent as follows:

 

  E  × 0.01  

per cent. per annum.

 

  300     

Where:

 

  E is designed to compensate Lenders for amounts payable under the Fees Rules and is calculated by the Agent as being the average of the most recent rates of charge supplied by the Reference Banks to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 7 below and expressed in pounds per £1,000,000.

 

5. For the purposes of this Schedule:

 

  (a) Fees Rules ” means the rules on periodic fees contained in the FSA Supervision Manual or such other law or regulation as may be in force from time to time in respect of the payment of fees for the acceptance of deposits;

 

  (b) Fee Tariffs ” means the fee tariffs specified in the Fees Rules under the activity group A.1 Deposit acceptors (ignoring any minimum fee or zero rated fee required pursuant to the Fees Rules but taking into account any applicable discount rate); and

 

  (c) Tariff Base ” has the meaning given to it in, and will be calculated in accordance with, the Fees Rules.

 

- 91 -


6. If requested by the Agent, each Reference Bank shall, as soon as practicable after publication by the Financial Services Authority, supply to the Agent, the rate of charge payable by that Reference Bank to the Financial Services Authority pursuant to the Fees Rules in respect of the relevant financial year of the Financial Services Authority (calculated for this purpose by that Reference Bank as being the average of the Fee Tariffs applicable to that Reference Bank for that financial year) and expressed in pounds per £1,000,000 of the Tariff Base of that Reference Bank.

 

7. Each Lender shall supply any information required by the Agent for the purpose of calculating its Additional Cost Rate. In particular, but without limitation, each Lender shall supply the following information on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Lender:

 

  (a) the jurisdiction of its Facility Office; and

 

  (b) any other information that the Agent may reasonably require for such purpose.

Each Lender shall promptly notify the Agent of any change to the information provided by it pursuant to this paragraph.

 

8. The percentages of each Lender for the purpose of E above shall be determined by the Agent based upon the information supplied to it pursuant to paragraphs 6 and 7 above and on the assumption that, unless a Lender notifies the Agent to the contrary, each Lender’s obligations in relation to cash ratio deposits are the same as those of a typical bank from its jurisdiction of incorporation with a Facility Office in the same jurisdiction as its Facility Office.

 

9. The Agent shall have no liability to any person if such determination results in an Additional Cost Rate which over or under compensates any Lender and shall be entitled to assume that the information provided by any Lender or Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above is true and correct in all respects.

 

10. The Agent shall distribute the additional amounts received as a result of the Mandatory Cost to the Lenders on the basis of the Additional Cost Rate for each Lender based on the information provided by each Lender and each Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above.

 

11. Any determination by the Agent pursuant to this Schedule in relation to a formula, the Mandatory Cost, an Additional Cost Rate or any amount payable to a Lender shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

12. The Agent may from time to time, after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders, determine and notify to all Parties any amendments which are required to be made to this Schedule in order to comply with any change in law, regulation or any requirements from time to time imposed by the Financial Services Authority or, the European Central Bank (or, in any case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) and any such determination shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

- 92 -


SCHEDULE 5

F ORM OF T RANSFER C ERTIFICATE

 

To:    Barclays Bank PLC as Agent
From:    [ The Existing Lender ] (the “ Existing Lender ”) and [ The New Lender ] (the “ New Lender ”)
Dated:   

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

and Gold Fields Operations Limited – US$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ]

2009 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Transfer Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Transfer Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Transfer Certificate.

 

2. We refer to Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ):

 

  (a) The Existing Lender and the New Lender agree to the Existing Lender transferring to the New Lender by novation all or part of the Existing Lender’s Commitment, rights and obligations referred to in the Schedule in accordance with Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ).

 

  (b) The proposed Transfer Date is [            ].

 

  (c) The Facility Office and address, fax number and attention details for notices of the New Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) are set out in the Schedule.

 

3. The New Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Existing Lender’s obligations set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 23.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders ).

 

4. This Transfer Certificate may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Transfer Certificate.

 

5. This Transfer Certificate is governed by English law.

 

- 93 -


THE SCHEDULE

C OMMITMENT / RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS TO BE TRANSFERRED

[ insert relevant details ]

[ Facility Office address, fax number and attention details for notices and account details for

payments, ]

 

[Existing Lender]    [New Lender]
By:    By:

 

- 94 -


This Transfer Certificate is accepted by the Agent and the Transfer Date is confirmed as [                        ].

[ ]

By:

 

- 95 -


SCHEDULE 6

F ORM OF A CCESSION L ETTER

 

To:    Barclays Bank PLC as Agent
From:    [Subsidiary] and Gold Fields Limited
Dated:   

Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

and Gold Fields Operations Limited – US$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ]

2009 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Accession Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Accession Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. [Subsidiary] agrees to become an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] and to be bound by the terms of the Agreement as an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] pursuant to Clause [24.2 ( Additional Borrowers )]/[24.4 ( Additional Guarantors )] of the Agreement. [Subsidiary] is a wholly owned Subsidiary of the Parent duly incorporated under the laws of [name of relevant jurisdiction].

 

3. [ Specify purpose of the Loan ].

 

4. [Subsidiary’s] administrative details are as follows:

Address:

Fax No:

Attention:

 

5. This Accession Letter is governed by English law.

 

Gold Fields Limited    [Subsidiary]
By:    By:

 

- 96 -


SCHEDULE 7

F ORM OF R ESIGNATION L ETTER

 

To:    Barclays Bank PLC as Agent
From:    [resigning Obligor] and Gold Fields Limited
Dated:   

Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

and Gold Fields Operations Limited – US$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ]

2009 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Resignation Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Resignation Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. Pursuant to [Clause 24.3 ( Resignation of an Additional Borrower )]/[Clause 24.6 ( Resignation of an Additional Guarantor )], we request that [resigning Obligor] be released from its obligations as a [Borrower]/[Guarantor] under the Agreement.

 

3. We confirm that no default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of this request.

 

4. This Resignation Letter is governed by English law.

 

Gold Fields Limited    [Subsidiary]
By:    By:

 

- 97 -


SCHEDULE 8

F ORM OF C OMPLIANCE C ERTIFICATE

 

To:    Barclays Bank PLC
From:    Gold Fields Limited
Dated:   

Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

and Gold Fields Operations Limited – US$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ]

2009 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Compliance Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning when used in this Compliance Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Compliance Certificate.

 

2. We confirm that as at [    ]:

 

  (a) Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges

the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [    ] was: [            ] : 1; and

 

  (b) Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA

the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [    ] was: [            ] : 1,

and attach calculations showing how these figures were calculated.

 

3. We confirm that no Default is continuing.

 

Signed:  

 

    

 

  [Director]/[Executive Officer]      [Director]/[Executive Officer]
  Of      Of
  Gold Fields Limited      Gold Fields Limited

[ insert applicable certification language ]

 

 

    
[or and on behalf of     
[ name of auditors of the Parent ]     

 

- 98 -


SCHEDULE 9

F ORM OF T ERM O UT N OTICE

 

From:    Gold Fields Limited
To:    Barclays Bank PLC
Dated:   

Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

and Gold Fields Operations Limited – US$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ]

2009 (the “Agreement”)

We refer to the Agreement. This is a Term Out Notice. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Term Out Notice unless given a different meaning in this Term Out Notice,

We elect to exercise the Term Out Option pursuant to Clause 6.2 ( Term Out Option ) of the Agreement in relation to the following Loan:

 

Amount:    [                                         ]      
Currency:    Dollars      
Interest Period:    [                                         ]      

The Term Out Date shall be [date].

The Termination Date shall be [date].

This Term Out Notice is irrevocable.

Yours faithfully

 

 

authorised signatory for

Gold Fields Limited

 

- 99 -


SCHEDULE 10

T IMETABLE

“U” = date of utilisation

“U - X” = X Business Days prior to date of Utilisation

 

Delivery of a duly completed

Utilisation Request (Clause 5.1

( Delivery of a Utilisation Request )

or in relation to a Term Out Loan

only, a Selection Notice (Clause 9.1

( Selection of Interest Periods ))

  

U-3*

10.00 a.m.

Agent notifies the Lenders of the

Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4

( Lenders’ participation )

  

U-3*

3.00 p.m.

LIBOR is fixed   

U-2**

11:00 a.m.

 

* provided that, in respect of the first Utilisation only, the Specified Time shall be U-2
** provided that, in respect of the first Utilisation only, the Specified Time shall be U-1

 

- 100 -


SIGNATURES

The Parent

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

By: /s/ Paul Andy Schmidt
Address:   150 Helen Road
  Sandton, 2196
  Johannesburg
  South Africa
Tel:   +27 11 644 2400
Fax:   +27 11 484 4882
Attention:   Executive Vice President - General Counsel

The Original Borrowers

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

 

By: /s/ Paul Andy Schmidt
Address:   150 Helen Road
  Sandton, 2196
  Johannesburg
  South Africa
Tel:   +27 11 644 2400
Fax:   +27 11 484 4882
Attention:   Executive Vice President - General Counsel


GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

 

By:
Address:   Fallon Cliff
  Palace Road
  Douglas
  Isle of Man
Fax:   +44 1624 630 001
Attention:   Company Secretary

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

 

By: /s/ Paul Andy Schmidt
Address:   150 Helen Road
  Sandton, 2196
  Johannesburg
  South Africa
Fax:   +27 11 434 4882
Attention:  

The Original Guarantors

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

 

By: /s/ Paul Andy Schmidt
Address:   150 Helen Road
  Sandton, 2196
  Johannesburg
  South Africa
Tel:   +27 11 644 2400
Fax:   +27 11 484 4882
Attention:   Executive Vice President - General Counsel


GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

By: /s/ Paul Andy Schmidt
Address:   150 Helen Road
  Sandton, 2196
  Johannesburg
  South Africa
Tel:   +27 11 644 2400
Fax:   +27 11 484 4882
Attention:   Executive Vice President - General Counsel

GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED

 

By: /s/ Paul Andy Schmidt
Address:   150 Helen Road
  Sandton, 2196
  Johannesburg
  South Africa
Tel:   +27 11 644 2400
Fax:   +27 11 484 4882
Attention:   Executive Vice President - General Counsel

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

 

By: /s/ Paul Andy Schmidt
Address:   150 Helen Road
  Sandton, 2196
  Johannesburg
  South Africa
Tel:   +27 11 644 2400
Fax:   +27 11 484 4882
Attention:  


GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

 

By:
Address:   Falcon Cliff, Palace Road
  Douglas
  Isle of Man
  IM99 1EP
  British Isles
Tel:   +44 (0) 1624 63 00 00
Fax:   +44 (0) 1624 63 00 01
Attention:   Company Secretary

The Arrangers

ABN AMRO BANK N.V., JOHANNESBURG BRANCH

 

By: /s/ Megan Smith; /s/ Sandra Holiston
Address:   2 Exchange Square
  85 Maude Street
  Sandown
  Sandton 2196
  South Africa
Fax:   + 27 11 685 2001
Attention:  

BANK OF CHINA LIMITED

 

By:
Address:   90 Cannon Street
  London
  EC4N 6HA
Fax:   + 44 20 7282 8899
Attention:  


BANK OF MONTREAL IRELAND PLC

 

By: /s/ Neil Ward; /s/ Finbarr Farrell
Address:   2 Harbourmaster Place
  IFSC
  Dublin 1, Ireland
Fax:   353-1-614-7819
Attention:  

BARCLAYS CAPITAL

 

By:
Address:  
Fax:  
Attention:  

CITIBANK, N.A., LONDON BRANCH

 

By: /s/ Murat Demirel
Address:   Citigroup Centre
  33 Canada Square
  Canary Wharf CGC-2
  London E14 5LB
Fax:   + 27 11 944 0849
Telephone:   + 27 11 944 0416
Attention:   Mickey Fernandes


COMMONWEALTH BANK OF AUSTRALIA

 

By: /s/ B. Pariler
Address:   Level 3
  150 St George’s Terrace
  Perth Western Australia
Fax:   61 8 9482 6099
Attention:  

J.P. MORGAN PLC

 

By:
Address:   125 London Wall
  London EC2V 5AJ
Fax:  
Attention:  

SCOTIABANK EUROPE PLC

 

By: /s/ J. A. Flexer
Address:   33 Finsbury Square
  London EC2A 1BB
Fax:   +44 20 7826 5645
Attention:  

STANDARD CHARTERED BANK

 

By: /s/ H. Singharay
Address:   1 Basinghall Avenue
  London EC2V 5DD
Fax:   + 44 20 7885 1688 / +44 20 7885 1823
Attention:   Edmund McGuire / Keith Garner


The Agent

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

 

By:
Address:  

5 The North Colonnade

Canary Wharf

London E14 4BB

Fax:   020 7773 4893
Attention:   Global Loans - Agency Division


The Original Lenders

ABN AMRO BANK N.V., JOHANNESBURG BRANCH

 

By: /s/ Megan Smith; /s/ Sandra Holiston
Address:   2 Exchange Square
  85 Maude Street
  Sandown
  Sandton 2196
  South Africa
Fax:   + 27 11 685 2001
Attention:   Loan Servicing OBCA Desk; cc Megan Smith

BANK OF CHINA LIMITED

 

By:
Address:   90 Cannon Street
  London
  EC4N 6HA
Fax:   + 44 20 7282 8899
Attention:  

BANK OF MONTREAL IRELAND PLC

 

By: /s/ Neil Ward, /s/ Finbarr Farrell
Address:   2 Harbourmaster Place
  IFSC
  Dublin 1, Ireland
Fax:   353-1-614-7819
Attention:  


BARCLAYS BANK PLC

 

By:
Address:  

5 The North Colonnade

Canary Wharf

London E14 4BB

Fax:  
Attention:  

CITIBANK, N.A., LONDON BRANCH

 

By: /s/ Murat Demirel
Address:   Citigroup Centre
  33 Canada Square
  Canary Wharf CGC-2
  London E14 5LB
Fax:   + 27 11 944 0849
Telephone:   + 27 11 944 0416
Attention:   Mickey Fernandes

COMMONWEALTH BANK OF AUSTRALIA

 

By: /s/ B. Pariler
Address:   Level 3
  150 St George’s Terrace
  Perth Western Australia
Fax:   61 8 9482 6099
Attention:  


JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.

 

By:
Address:   125 London Wall
  London EC2V 5AJ
Fax:  
Attention:  

SCOTIABANK EUROPE PLC

 

By: /s/ J. A. Flexer
Address:   33 Finsbury Square
  London EC2A 1BB
Fax:   +44 20 7826 5645
Attention:  

THE BANK OF TOKYO-MITSUBISHI UFJ, LTD.

 

By:
Address:   Finsbury Circus House
  12-15 Finsbury Circus
  London EC2M 7BT
Fax:   +44 20 7577 1264
Attention:  

STANDARD CHARTERED BANK

 

By: /s/ H. Singharay
Address:   1 Basinghall Avenue
  London EC2V 5DD
Fax:   + 44 20 7885 8073
Attention:   Amish Patel / Rochelle Chaffey

Exhibit 4.25

SYNDICATION FEE LETTER

Gold Fields Limited

(as the Parent and as agent for and on behalf of the Original Borrowers)

150 Helen Road

Sandton, 2196

Johannesburg

South Africa

For the attention of:

6 May 2009

Dear Sirs

USD$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

We refer to the credit facility agreement to be entered into on 6 May 2009 between, amongst others, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited as borrowers, Gold Fields Limited (the “ Parent ”) and certain wholly owned subsidiaries of the Parent as guarantors, ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Johannesburg Branch, Bank of China Limited, Bank of Montreal Ireland plc, Barclays Capital, Citibank, N.A., London Branch, Commonwealth Bank of Australia, J.P. Morgan plc, Scotiabank Europe plc and Standard Chartered Bank as arrangers (the “ Arrangers ”), Barclays Bank PLC as agent and the financial institutions named in the Facility Agreement as Lenders incorporating a dollar revolving loan facility with a term out option in an aggregate amount up to USD$311,000,000 (the “ Facility Agreement ”). This letter is a “Fee Letter” as defined in the Facility Agreement.

 

1. Terms defined in the Facility Agreement and not otherwise defined herein shall have the same meanings when used in this letter.

 

2. We confirm that the aggregate amount of the syndication fee referred to in Clause 11.3 ( Syndication fee ) of the Facility Agreement (the “ Syndication Fee ”) is USD$737,500 being 25 basis points on the respective amounts contributed by the Arrangers.

 

3. The Syndication Fee will be payable to the Agent on the date of signing of the Facility Agreement and will be paid to the Arrangers based on their respective contributions.


4. The Syndication Fee referred to in paragraph 2 above is payable by you to the Agent for the account of the Arrangers:

 

  (a) in immediately available, freely transferable, cleared funds to our account at Barclays Bank PLC, New York with SWIFT: BARCUS33, account number 050 036211 and account name Loan Operations Agency re: Gold Fields / Syndication Fee; and

 

  (b) in full, without any set-off, deduction or withholding of any kind.

 

5. This letter may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this letter.

 

6. This letter is a Finance Document for the purposes of the Facility Agreement.

 

7. This letter and any non-contractual obligations arising in connection with it are governed by English law.

 

8. Jurisdiction

 

  8.1.1 The courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this letter (including a dispute regarding the existence, validity or termination of this letter or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it) (a “ Dispute ”).

 

  8.1.2 The Parties agree that the courts of England are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle Disputes and accordingly no Party will argue to the contrary.

 

  8.1.3 This paragraph 8 is for the benefit of the Finance Parties only. As a result, no Finance Party shall be prevented from taking proceedings relating to a Dispute in any other courts with jurisdiction. To the extent allowed by law, the Finance Parties may take concurrent proceedings in any number of jurisdictions.

Please confirm your agreement with the above by signing where indicated below.

Yours faithfully

T HE A RRANGERS

ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Johannesburg Branch

/s/ Megan Smith; /s/ Sandra Holiston

Bank of China Limited

 

Bank of Montreal Ireland plc

/s/ Neil Ward

 

- 2 -


Barclays Capital

 

Citibank, N.A., London Branch

 

Commonwealth Bank of Australia

 

J.P. Morgan plc

 

Scotiabank Europe plc

 

Standard Chartered Bank

 

We agree to the above:

/s/ Paul Andy Schmidt

For and on behalf of Gold Fields Limited (as the Parent and agent for and on behalf of the Original Borrowers)

Dated: May 2009

 

- 3 -

Exhibit 4.26

PARTICIPATION FEE LETTER

Gold Fields Limited

(as the Parent and as agent for and on behalf of the Original Borrowers)

150 Helen Road

Sandton, 2196

Johannesburg

South Africa

For the attention of:

6 May 2009

Dear Sirs

USD$311,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

We refer to the credit facility agreement to be entered into on 6 May 2009 between, amongst others, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited as borrowers, Gold Fields Limited (the “ Parent ”) and certain wholly owned subsidiaries of the Parent as guarantors, ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Johannesburg Branch, Bank of China Limited, Bank of Montreal Ireland plc, Barclays Capital, Citibank, N.A., London Branch, Commonwealth Bank of Australia, J.P. Morgan plc, Scotiabank Europe plc and Standard Chartered Bank as arrangers, Barclays Bank PLC as agent and the financial institutions named in the Facility Agreement as Lenders incorporating a dollar revolving loan facility with a term out option in an aggregate amount up to USD$311,000,000 (the “ Facility Agreement ”). This letter is a “Fee Letter” as defined in the Facility Agreement.

 

1. Terms defined in the Facility Agreement and not otherwise defined herein shall have the same meanings when used in this letter.

 

2. We confirm that the aggregate amount of the participation fee referred to in Clause 11.2 ( Participation fee ) of the Facility Agreement (the “ Participation Fee ”) is USD$3,110,000 being 100 basis points on the respective amounts contributed by the Lenders.

 

3. The Participation Fee will be payable to the Agent on the date of signing of the Facility Agreement and will be paid to the Lenders based on their respective contributions.

 

4. The Participation Fee referred to in paragraph 2 above is payable by you to the Agent for the account of the Lenders:

 

  (a) in immediately available, freely transferable, cleared funds to our account at Barclays Bank PLC, New York with SWIFT: BARCUS33, account number 050 036211 and account name Loan Operations Agency re: Gold Fields / Participation Fee; and


  (b) in full, without any set-off, deduction or withholding of any kind.

 

5. This letter may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this letter.

 

6. This letter is a Finance Document for the purposes of the Facility Agreement.

 

7. This letter and any non-contractual obligations arising in connection with it are governed by English law.

 

8. Jurisdiction

 

  8.1.1 The courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this letter (including a dispute regarding the existence, validity or termination of this letter or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it) (a “ Dispute ”).

 

  8.1.2 The Parties agree that the courts of England are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle Disputes and accordingly no Party will argue to the contrary.

 

  8.1.3 This paragraph 8 is for the benefit of the Finance Parties only. As a result, no Finance Party shall be prevented from taking proceedings relating to a Dispute in any other courts with jurisdiction. To the extent allowed by law, the Finance Parties may take concurrent proceedings in any number of jurisdictions.

Please confirm your agreement with the above by signing where indicated below.

Yours faithfully

T HE L ENDERS

ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Johannesburg Branch

/s/ Megan Smith; /s/ Sandra Holiston

Bank of China Limited

 

Bank of Montreal Ireland plc

/s/ Neil Ward

 

- 2 -


Barclays Bank plc

 

Citibank, N.A., London Branch

 

Commonwealth Bank of Australia

 

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.

 

Scotiabank Europe plc

 

Standard Chartered Bank

 

The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd.

 

We agree to the above:

/s/ Paul Andy Schmidt

For and on behalf of Gold Fields Limited (as the Parent and agent for and on behalf of the Original Borrowers)

Dated: May 2009

 

- 3 -

Exhibit 4.27

S HARE P URCHASE  & S ALE A GREEMENT

B ETWEEN :

E LDORADO G OLD C ORPORATION

A ND :

G OLD F IELDS A USTRALASIA (BVI) L IMITED

D ATED : J UNE  3, 2009


Table of Contents (Share Sale Agreement)

 

T ABLE OF C ONTENTS

 

          Page

1.

  

Definitions and Interpretations

   3

1.1

  

Definitions

   3

1.2

  

Interpretation

   10

2.

  

Sale and Purchase of Shares

   11

2.1

  

Sale and Purchase

   11

2.2

  

Title

   11

3.

  

Consideration

   12

3.1

  

Purchase Price

   12

3.2

  

Payment of Purchase Price

   12

3.3

  

Form of Consideration Share Certificate

   12

4.

  

Covenants

   13

4.1

  

Additional shares

   13

4.2

  

Eldorado’s Covenants

   13

4.3

  

Acknowledgement

   19

4.4

  

GFA’s Covenants

   20

4.5

  

Eldorado’s Covenant

   20

5.

  

Capacity

   20

6.

  

GFA Warranties

   21

6.1

  

Additional Representations and Warranties of GFA

   21

6.2

  

Other Warranties and Conditions Excluded

   22

6.3

  

Disclosures

   22

6.4

  

Conditions of payment and Claims

   23

6.5

  

GFA Acknowledgments

   24

6.6

  

When GF Warranties Given

   27

6.7

  

Dealing with GF Warranty breach after Closing

   27

6.8

  

Reduction of Purchase Price

   28

6.9

  

Release

   28

6.10

  

Statutory actions

   28

7.

  

Eldorado

   29

7.1

  

Additional Representations and Warranties of Eldorado

   29

7.2

  

Other Warranties and Conditions Excluded

   31

7.3

  

Disclosures

   31

7.4

  

Conditions of payment and Claims

   32

7.5

  

Eldorado Acknowledgments

   33

7.6

  

When Eld Warranties Given

   35

7.7

  

Dealing with Eld Warranty breach after Closing

   35

7.8

  

Release

   35

7.9

  

Statutory actions

   35

8.

  

Conditions Precedent

   36

8.1

  

Conditions Precedent to Closing for Eldorado

   36

8.2

  

Waiver by Eldorado

   36

8.3

  

Waiver of Approvals

   37

8.4

  

Conditions Precedent to the Closing by GFA

   37

8.5

  

Waiver by GFA

   37

8.6

  

Waiver of Approvals

   37

8.7

  

Termination of this Agreement

   37

8.8

  

Pre-closing obligation

   38

8.9

  

Notification of Satisfaction

   38

9.

  

Closing

   38

9.1

  

Closing Date and Location

   38

9.2

  

Documents to be Delivered by Eldorado

   38

9.3

  

Documents to be Delivered by GFA

   38

9.4

  

Conditional quotation

   39

10.

  

Expert Determination

   39

10.1

  

When Appointed

   39

10.2

  

Appointment

   39

10.3

  

Instructions

   40

10.4

  

Procedure

   40

10.5

  

Costs

   41

10.6

  

Extension of time

   41

11.

  

Confidentiality

   41

11.1

  

Confidentiality

   41

11.2

  

Public Announcements

   42

11.3

  

Termination of Obligations

   42

11.4

  

Non-applicability

   42

11.5

  

Use of Information

   42

12.

  

General

   43

12.1

  

Time

   43

12.2

  

Notices

   43

12.3

  

Assignment by Party

   44

12.4

  

Governing Law

   44

12.5

  

Violation of Law of another Jurisdiction

   44

12.6

  

Severability

   45

12.7

  

Entire Agreement

   45

12.8

  

Further Assurances

   45

12.9

  

Survival

   45

12.10

  

Amendment and Variation

   45

12.11

  

Waiver

   45

12.12

  

Counterparts

   46

12.13

  

Execution – Authorized Officer to Sign

   46

 

Page 2 of 47


S HARE P URCHASE AND S ALE A GREEMENT

T HIS A GREEMENT is made June 3, 2009.

B ETWEEN :

E LDORADO G OLD C ORPORATION , a corporation existing under the laws of Canada

(“ Eldorado ”)

A ND :

G OLD F IELDS A USTRALASIA (BVI) L IMITED , a corporation existing under the laws of British Virgin Islands

(“ GFA ”)

I NTRODUCTION

 

A. GFA is a wholly owned subsidiary and Affiliate of Gold Fields.

 

B. GFA is the registered holder of the Sale Shares, as hereinafter defined.

 

C. GFA and Sino Gold Mining Limited (“ Sino Gold ”) are parties to a “Heads of Agreement Sino / Gold Fields China Alliance” dated November 22, 2006, as amended by a “Deed of Variation” dated May 18, 2008 (collectively, the “ Heads of Agreement ”).

 

D. GFA has agreed to sell, and Eldorado has agreed to purchase, the Sale Shares on the terms and conditions set out in this Agreement.

T ERMS OF A GREEMENT

In consideration of the mutual promises contained in this Agreement, the Parties agree as follows:

 

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS

 

1.1 Definitions

Unless the context otherwise requires, in this Agreement:

 

  (1) 1933 Act ” has the meaning given in section 6.5(1);

 

  (2) Acquisition ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(1);

 

  (3) Additional Shares ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(1);

 

Page 3 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (4) Adjustment Consideration Shares ” means any Eldorado Shares issued or issuable pursuant to section 4.2;

 

  (5) Affiliate ” means, in respect of a Person, a Person with which that Person is affiliated where:

 

  (a) one Person is affiliated with another Person if one of them is the direct or indirect subsidiary of the other or both are direct or indirect subsidiaries of the same Person or each of them is directly or indirectly controlled by the same Person; and

 

  (b) if two Persons are affiliated with the same Person at the same time, they are deemed to be affiliated with each other;

 

  (6) Agreement ” means this document, including any schedule or annexure to it;

 

  (7) Applicable Securities Laws ” means, collectively, the applicable securities laws of the province of British Columbia, the United States of America and Australia, the respective regulations, rulings, rules, instruments, orders and prescribed forms thereunder and the applicable policy statements issued by the Securities Commissions;

 

  (8) AMEX ” means the NYSE AMEX LLC;

 

  (9) Approvals ” means the FIRB Approval and the SARB Approval;

 

  (10) ASIC ” means the Australian Securities and Investments Commission;

 

  (11) ASTC Settlement Rules ” means the rules of the ASX Settlement and Transfer Corporation Pty Ltd (ABN 49 008 504 532);

 

  (12) Asset Consideration ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(1)(e);

 

  (13) associate ” has the meaning given in the Corporations Act;

 

  (14) ASX ” means the Australian Securities Exchange;

 

  (15) ASX Market Rules ” means the Market Rules of the ASX as amended or varied from time to time;

 

  (16) Benchmark ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(2)(a);

 

  (17) BCSC ” means the British Columbia Securities Commission;

 

  (18) Business ” means the gold exploration and mining business and operations conducted by or on behalf of Sino Gold and its Affiliates;

 

  (19) Business Day ” means a day that is not a Saturday, Sunday or any other day which is a statutory holiday or a bank holiday in the place where an act is to be performed or a payment is to be made, or Johannesburg in the Republic of South Africa or Leiden in the Netherlands;

 

Page 4 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (20) Capital Adjustment ” means an adjustment required to be made firstly, as contemplated in section 4.2(12), secondly, in respect of the number of Closing Consideration Shares (solely as provided for in section 3.2(1)) and thirdly, in respect of the Sale Shares (solely as set out in the definition thereof), as the case may be, to be fair and equitable in the circumstances to the Parties, to give effect to, in a fair and equitable manner to the Parties, the occurrence or consummation of:

 

  (a) any stock split, reverse stock split, subdivision, combination, reduction or consolidation of the relevant shares;

 

  (b) the issuance of a stock dividend or distribution of the relevant shares or other securities convertible into the relevant shares to all or substantially all of the holders of the relevant shares;

 

  (c) the issuance to all or substantially all the holders of the relevant shares of rights, options, warrants or other convertible securities to purchase the relevant shares or securities convertible into the relevant shares of the relevant company at any price, which results in the issuance of relevant shares;

 

  (d) a change of the relevant shares into other shares or securities; and

 

  (e) an amalgamation, merger, arrangement or similar combination with or into (including a transfer of the undertaking or assets of the relevant company as an entirety or substantially as an entirety to) another body corporate or other entity resulting in a change or exchange of the relevant shares into other shares or securities;

which affects the capitalization of Eldorado or Sino Gold, as the case may be, during the applicable period, and for greater certainty,

 

  (i) a Capital Adjustment does not include a Capital Adjustment arising from an acquisition of securities or a combination transaction involving Eldorado and Sino Gold; and

 

  (ii) no adjustment shall be made in respect of options or rights granted pursuant to any director, officer or employee stock option plans or share purchase or other equity compensation plans adopted by the relevant company.

 

  (21) Claim ” means, in relation to a Party, a demand, claim, action or proceeding made or brought by or against the Party, however arising and whether present, unascertained, immediate, future or contingent;

 

Page 5 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (22) Closing ” means completion by the Parties of the Transaction;

 

  (23) Closing Time ” has the meaning given in section 9.1 or such other time agreed between the Parties under section 9.1;

 

  (24) Closing Date ” has the meaning given in section 9.1 or such other date agreed between the Parties under section 9.1;

 

  (25) Closing Consideration Shares ” means the 27,824,654 Eldorado Shares to be issued upon Closing, subject to any Capital Adjustment pursuant to section 3.2(1);

 

  (26) Consideration Shares ” means collectively the Closing Consideration Shares and the issued Adjustment Consideration Shares;

 

  (27) Control Person ” has the meaning given in the Securities Act (British Columbia);

 

  (28) Corporations Act ” means the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth);

 

  (29) Deemed Eld Price ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(1)(b);

 

  (30) Deemed Eldorado Shares ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(1)(c);

 

  (31) Deemed SGX Price ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(1)(b);

 

  (32) Disclosure Material ” means:

 

  (a) all information (whether written, unwritten or oral) relating to the Sale Shares, Sino Gold or the Business that is within the actual knowledge of Eldorado or an Affiliate of Eldorado and any of its Personnel (if acting in their capacity as advisors to Eldorado or its Affiliates) whether contained in a document or disclosed orally or otherwise; and

 

  (b) all financial statements, information circulars, annual information forms, press releases, material change reports and other disclosure filings and other documents publicly filed with any Governmental Authority (including ASIC) or any other securities regulatory authority (including ASX) relating to Sino Gold or the Business;

 

  (33) Effective Date ” means the date of this Agreement;

 

  (34) Eldorado Shares ” means common shares in the issued share capital of Eldorado;

 

  (35) Eldorado Share Certificate ” has the meaning given in section 3.3;

 

  (36) Eld Warranty ” means a representation, warranty, undertaking and other obligation of Eldorado set out in section 5 (in so far as they relate to Eldorado) and sections 7.1 and 7.5;

 

Page 6 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (37) Encumbrance ” means any:

 

  (a) lien, security interest, mortgage, charge, hypothec, right of first refusal or first offer, option, claim or contractual restriction;

 

  (b) outstanding shareholders agreement, voting agreement, declaration or proxy;

 

  (c) outstanding order or pending proceeding prohibiting sale;

 

  (d) escrow or hold period created or granted by Sino Gold, GFA or its Affiliates;

 

  (e) agreement or option or any right capable of becoming an agreement or option to purchase or acquire (save in favour of Eldorado);

 

  (f) arrangement or condition which, in substance, secures payment or performance of an obligation, or

 

  (g) other encumbrance of any nature;

whether registered or unregistered, but does not include a Permitted Encumbrance;

 

  (38) Exchange Factor ” means the number derived by dividing the number of Eldorado Shares (or the number of Eldorado Shares and Deemed Eldorado Shares, as the case may be) to be issued under a subject Acquisition by the number of Additional Shares or Further Shares (as the case may be) acquired under the subject Acquisition;

 

  (39) Exchange Rate ” means the spot rate of exchange as at the close of trade on the relevant day for the purchase of one currency against another currency as quoted by Bloomberg. If for whatever reason Bloomberg does not quote, either for any day (or at all) an Exchange Rate for the relevant currency, the spot rate of exchange as at the close of trade on the relevant day will be that quoted by Reuters;

 

  (40) Expert ” means a person appointed in accordance with section 10;

 

  (41) FATA ” means the Foreign Acquisitions and Takeovers Act 1975 (Cth);

 

  (42) FIRB Approval ” means either:

 

  (a) Eldorado has received a written notice under the FATA, by or on behalf of the Treasurer of the Commonwealth of Australia stating that the Commonwealth Government does not object to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement; or

 

Page 7 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (b) the Treasurer of the Commonwealth of Australia becomes precluded from making an order in relation to the subject matter of this Agreement and the transactions contemplated by it under the FATA;

 

  (43) Further Shares ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(2);

 

  (44) GF Warranty ” means a representation, warranty, undertaking and other obligation of GFA set out in section 5 (in so far as they relate to GFA) and sections 6.1 and 6.5;

 

  (45) Gold Fields ” means Gold Fields Limited Reg. 1968/004880/06 of 150 Helen Road, Sandton Johannesburg, 2196 South Africa;

 

  (46) Governmental Authority ” means any federal, provincial, territorial, regional, municipal or local government or authority, quasi government authority, fiscal or judicial body, government or self regulatory organization, commission, board, panel, tribunal, organization, or any regulatory, administrative or other agency, or any political or other subdivision, department, or branch of any of the foregoing, all as has jurisdiction over a Party or a transaction entered into by a Party;

 

  (47) Heads of Agreement ” has the meaning given in recital C;

 

  (48) Latest Date” means the date which is 90 days after the Effective Date;

 

  (49) International Jurisdiction” has the meaning given in section 6.5(4);

 

  (50) Liability ” or “ Liabilities ” means Claims, losses, liabilities, costs or expenses of any kind and however arising, including penalties, fines, and interest and including those which are prospective or contingent and those the amount of which for the time being is not ascertained or ascertainable;

 

  (51) Notice ” or “ notice ” has the meaning given in section 12.2;

 

  (52) Parties ” means Eldorado and GFA and “ Party ” means either one of them as the context dictates;

 

  (53) Person ” means and includes any individual, corporation, partnership, firm, joint venture, syndicate, association, trust, Governmental Authority or any other form of entity or organization;

 

  (54) Permitted Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a) an Encumbrance on the Sale Shares granted by Eldorado; and

 

  (b) any statutory hold periods;

 

  (55) Personnel ” means, in relation to a Party, any of its directors, officers, employees, agents, consultants, professional advisers and representatives;

 

Page 8 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (56) Purchase Price ” has the meaning given in section 3.1;

 

  (57) Quarter ” means the period commencing on the Trigger Date and ending on the next to occur of 31 March, 30 June, 30 September or 31 December, and thereafter, each period of three consecutive calendar months ending on those dates and “Quarterly ” has a corresponding meaning;

 

  (58) Regulation S ” has the meaning given in section 6.5(1);

 

  (59) relevant interest ” has the meaning given in the Corporations Act;

 

  (60) Relevant Period ” means a period of eighteen (18) calendar months commencing on and from the Effective Date;

 

  (61) Sale Shares ” means 57,968,029 issued shares in the capital of Sino Gold, plus any Securities of Sino Gold issued to GFA after the Effective Date and prior to Closing pursuant to any Capital Adjustments;

 

  (62) SARB Approval ” means the provision of all clearances, approvals or authorizations (whether formal or otherwise) by the South Africa Reserve Bank which are necessary for GFA to close the Transaction;

 

  (63) SEC ” means the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission;

 

  (64) Securities ” means shares, debentures, convertible securities or options to acquire shares;

 

  (65) Securities Commissions ” means the BCSC, the SEC and the ASIC;

 

  (66) Sino Gold ” has the meaning given in recital C;

 

  (67) Standard Listing Requirements ” means the delivery of customary documents required by the TSX or AMEX, as the case may be, and the payment of the requisite listing fees to the TSX or AMEX, as the case may be;

 

  (68) Subscriber ” has the meaning given in section 3.2;

 

  (69) takeover bid ” has the meaning given thereto under section 9 of the Corporations Act;

 

  (70) Threshold ” has the meaning given in section 4.2(1);

 

  (71) Transaction ” means the sale and purchase of the Sale Shares and the issue of the Consideration Shares contemplated by this Agreement or any of the Transaction Documents;

 

  (72) Transaction Document ” means:

 

  (a) this Agreement; and

 

Page 9 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (b) any other documents that the Parties agree in writing to be a Transaction Document;

 

  (73) Trigger Date ” is defined in section 4.2(2);

 

  (74) TSX ” means the Toronto Stock Exchange;

 

  (75) VWAP ” means the volume weighted average trading price of common shares of Eldorado on the TSX in a specified period, calculated by dividing:

 

  (a) the total value of shares traded in the specified period; by

 

  (b) the total volume of shares traded in the specified period;

 

  (76) Warranty ” means collectively a GFA Warranty and an Eldorado Warranty.

 

1.2 Interpretation

Unless the context otherwise requires, in the Agreement:

 

  (1) the singular includes the plural and conversely;

 

  (2) a gender includes all genders;

 

  (3) if a word or phrase is defined, its other grammatical forms have a corresponding meaning;

 

  (4) a reference to a section, schedule or annexure is a reference to a section of or a schedule or annexure to this Agreement;

 

  (5) a reference to an agreement or document (including a reference to this Agreement) is to the agreement or document as amended, varied, supplemented, novated or replaced except to the extent prohibited by this Agreement or that other agreement or document;

 

  (6) a reference to a Party or a party to another agreement or document includes the successors and permitted substitutes to such Person (including Persons taking by novation) or assigns (and, where applicable, the Person’s legal personal representatives);

 

  (7) a reference to legislation or to a provision of legislation includes a modification or re-enactment of it, a legislative provision substituted for it and a regulation, code, by-law, ordinance or statutory instrument issued under it;

 

  (8) a reference to writing includes a facsimile or electronic mail transmission and any means of reproducing words in a tangible and permanently visible form;

 

  (9) a reference to dollars and $ is to the currency of Canada;

 

Page 10 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (10) the word “ including ” means “ including without limitation ” and “ include ” and, “ includes ” will be construed similarly;

 

  (11) headings and any table of contents or index are for convenience only and do not form part of this Agreement or affect its interpretation;

 

  (12) a provision of the Agreement must not be construed to the disadvantage of a Party merely because that Party was responsible for the preparation of this Agreement or the inclusion of the provision in this Agreement;

 

  (13) if an act must be done on a specified day which is not a Business Day, it must be done instead on the next Business Day;

 

  (14) reference to a body, other than a Party (including, without limitation, an institute, association or authority), whether statutory or not:

 

  (a) which ceases to exist; or

 

  (b) whose powers or functions are transferred to another body, is a reference to the body which replaces it or which substantially succeeds to its powers or functions;

 

  (15) a reference to any thing (including a right, obligation or concept) includes a part of that thing, but nothing in this section 1.2(15) implies that performance of part of an obligation constitutes performance of the obligation;

 

  (16) where any Warranty is expressly qualified by reference to the knowledge of, a Party, such Party confirms that it has made due and diligent inquiry of such Persons (including appropriate officers of such Party, as applicable) as it considers necessary as to the matters that are the subject of the Warranty; and

 

  (17) a reference to time is a reference to Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada time.

 

2. SALE AND PURCHASE OF SHARES

 

2.1 Sale and Purchase

Subject to the terms of this Agreement:

 

  (1) GFA agrees to sell, assign and transfer to Eldorado; and

 

  (2) Eldorado agrees to purchase from GFA;

the Sale Shares, free from any Encumbrances, on the Closing Date.

 

2.2 Title

Title to and risk in the Sale Shares:

 

Page 11 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (1) until Closing, remains solely with GFA; and

 

  (2) passes to Eldorado effective upon Closing.

 

3. CONSIDERATION

 

3.1 Purchase Price

The consideration payable by Eldorado to GFA for the Sale Shares is the Closing Consideration Shares plus any adjustments made pursuant to section 4.2 (the “ Purchase Price ”).

 

3.2 Payment of Purchase Price

Eldorado shall pay the Purchase Price by issuing and delivering to GFA or its nominated Affiliate (the “ Subscriber ”):

 

  (1) the Closing Consideration Shares, subject to adjustment for any Capital Adjustments relating to Eldorado after the Effective Date and prior to Closing; and

 

  (2) Adjustment Consideration Shares and/or funds (if any), pursuant to section 4.2.

 

3.3 Form of Consideration Share Certificate

The Closing Consideration Shares shall be issued in the form of one share certificate (the “ Eldorado Share Certificate ”), representing the Closing Consideration Shares registered in the name of GFA or the Subscriber (as directed by GFA not later than two business days prior to the Closing Date), with a legend in form substantially similar to the following:

“UNLESS PERMITTED UNDER SECURITIES LEGISLATION, THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY MUST NOT TRADE THE SECURITY BEFORE [ ] 2009 [Insert the date that is 4 months and a day after the distribution date] ”; and

“THE SECURITIES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE ARE LISTED ON THE TORONTO STOCK EXCHANGE (“TSX”); HOWEVER, THE SAID SECURITIES CANNOT BE TRADED THROUGH THE FACILITIES OF TSX SINCE THEY ARE NOT FREELY TRANSFERABLE, AND CONSEQUENTLY ANY CERTIFICATE REPRESENTING SUCH SECURITIES IS NOT “GOOD DELIVERY” IN SETTLEMENT OF TRANSACTIONS ON TSX.”

and any certificate representing the Adjustment Consideration Shares will bear the same legends.

 

Page 12 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

4. COVENANTS

 

4.1 Additional shares

Except for the Sale Shares, Eldorado, its Affiliates and associates must not, before the date which is six months after the Effective Date, acquire or offer to acquire a relevant interest in the Securities of Sino Gold by takeover bid or propose to make a takeover bid within that period, except with the prior written consent of GFA and the Parties must promptly negotiate in good faith in relation to that consent.

 

4.2 Eldorado’s Covenants

Eldorado covenants and agrees that:

 

  (1) If at any time during the Relevant Period, Eldorado or any of its Affiliates or associates acquire relevant interests in any Sino Gold Securities, or before the end of the Relevant Period issues a public announcement proposing to so acquire and after the end of the Relevant Period closes such acquisition, (in either case, an “ Acquisition ”) and as a result of one or more Acquisitions the number of Sino Gold Securities in which Eldorado or any of its Affiliates or associates collectively hold relevant interests is increased to a number equal to or exceeding the number “A” in the following formula (that number being the “ Threshold ”):

A = B + (5% of C)

   Where:
   “B” is the number of Sale Shares; and
   “C” is the total number of issued shares in the capital of Sino Gold from time to time,

then this section will apply (with the “ Additional Shares ” being the Securities acquired by Eldorado or any of its Affiliates or associates other than the Sale Shares);

 

  (a) if the consideration for the Additional Shares under a subject Acquisition is wholly Eldorado Shares and the Exchange Factor exceeds “Y”, then a Purchase Price adjustment is payable and the number of Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable shall be:

(X – Y) × Z

 

   Where:
   “X” is the Exchange Factor;
   “Y” is 0.48; and

 

Page 13 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  “Z” is the number of Sale Shares.

  By way of example, if the Exchange Factor is 0.50 and no Capital Adjustments to “Y” or “Z” are appropriate, then:

X is 0.50, Y is 0.48 and Z is 57,968,029

and the calculation is (0.50 – 0.48) × 57,968,029 = 1,159,361;

 

  (b) if the consideration for the Additional Shares is wholly cash consideration and the weighted average price paid per Additional Share (expressed in Canadian dollars converted using the Exchange Rate on the date of the subject Acquisition) (“ Deemed SGX Price ”) divided by the VWAP for the 30 trading day period immediately preceding the earlier of the date the subject Acquisition is completed and a public announcement is made concerning the subject Acquisition (“ Deemed Eld Price ”) derives a number which exceeds “Y”, then a Purchase Price adjustment is payable and the number of Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable shall be:

(X – Y) × Z

 

   Where:
   “X” is the number determined by dividing the Deemed SGX Price by the Deemed Eld Price;
   “Y” is 0.48; and
   “Z” is the number of Sale Shares.
   By way of example, if the Deemed SGX Price is $6.12 and the Deemed Eld Price is $12.00, then the number derived by dividing the Deemed SGX Price by the Deemed Eld Price is 0.51. Accordingly the number derived is more than 0.48 and assuming that no adjustments to “Y” or “Z” are appropriate:

X is 0.51, Y is 0.48 and Z is 57,968,029

and the calculation is: (0.51 – 0.48) × 57,968,029 = 1,739,041;

 

  (c)

if the consideration for the Additional Shares is partly cash and partly Eldorado Shares, such cash consideration (expressed in Canadian dollars converted using the Exchange Rate on the date of the subject Acquisition) will be converted to an equivalent number of Eldorado Shares using the VWAP for the 30 trading day period immediately preceding the earlier of the date the subject Acquisition is completed and a public announcement is made concerning the subject Acquisition (“ Deemed Eldorado Shares ”) and that number of Deemed Eldorado Shares will be aggregated with the

 

Page 14 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

 

number of Eldorado Shares actually issued and that total number will be divided by the number of Additional Shares so as to determine a value for “X” for the purposes of section 4.2(1)(a), and that section will thereafter apply to determine whether there is any Purchase Price adjustment with all necessary changes being made;

 

  (d) if the consideration for the Additional Shares is other forms of equity or security in Eldorado (including units, warrants, convertible securities or convertible debt) the Parties will agree an appropriate adjustment to the Purchase Price (if any) based on this section 4.2; and

 

  (e) if the consideration for the Additional Shares is other than cash or Eldorado Shares such as the transfer of mineral properties or other Persons owning mineral properties (collectively “ Asset Consideration ”), then that Asset Consideration will be converted (on a basis agreed by the Parties, each acting reasonably), to an equivalent cash consideration and thereafter sections 4.2(1)(b) and 4.2(1)(c) (as the case may be) will apply with all necessary changes;

 

  (2) Provided the Threshold has been satisfied in accordance with 4.2(1) and notwithstanding whether any Adjustment Consideration Shares are issuable (the date as of which the Threshold is calculated being referred to as the “ Trigger Date ”) if, at any time and from time to time during the remainder of the Relevant Period an Acquisition takes place, then section 4.2(1) will not apply and this section 4.2(2) will apply (with the Sino Gold Securities in which relevant interests are so acquired being the “ Further Shares ”):

 

  (a) for the purposes of the following formulas in this section 4.2(2), the value for “Y” will be for all Acquisitions of Further Shares for the first Quarter after the Trigger Date, the higher of (i) 0.48 and, (ii) that determined to be “X” for the purposes of section 4.2(1) (the “ Benchmark ”). However if, at the end of a subsequent Quarter, the value for “X” as part of determining any Purchase Price adjustment for a prior Quarter exceeds the then prevailing Benchmark, then that higher value will be the Benchmark, for succeeding Quarters, until a higher value for “X” is subsequently determined.

 

   By way of example, if the Trigger Date has occurred and the exchange ratio for the Additional Shares was 0.50 Eldorado Shares for each Additional Share, and following the Trigger Date, Eldorado acquires Further Shares during a Quarter (with the consideration being wholly Eldorado Shares) at an Exchange Factor of 0.52, then:

 

  (i) 0.50 will be the prevailing Benchmark (and therefore “Y”), for determining the Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable pursuant to section 4.2(2)(b) and (c); and

 

Page 15 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (ii) as the Exchange Factor (that is “X”) for the Further Shares exceeds the then prevailing Benchmark, the Exchange Factor applied in respect of those Further Shares will become the Benchmark (that is “Y”) for any Further Shares acquired in succeeding Quarters until the Exchange Factor exceeds the then prevailing Benchmark.

 

  (b) if the consideration for such Further Shares is wholly Eldorado Shares and the Exchange Factor applicable to the subject Acquisition exceeds the then prevailing Benchmark, then a Purchase Price adjustment is payable and the number of additional Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable shall be:

(X – Y) × Z

 

   Where:
   “X” is the Exchange Factor;
   “Y” is the then prevailing Benchmark; and
   “Z” is the number of Sale Shares.
   By way of example, if the exchange ratio for such purchase is 0.55 Eldorado Shares for each Further Share, “Y” is 0.50 and no Capital Adjustments to “Y” or “Z” are appropriate, then:

X is 0.55, Y is 0.50 and Z is 57,968,029

and the calculation is (0.55 – 0.50) × 57,968,029 = 2,898,401.45;

 

  (c) if the consideration for the Further Shares is wholly cash consideration and the Deemed SGX Price divided by the Deemed Eld Price exceeds the then prevailing Benchmark, then a Purchase Price adjustment is payable and the number of Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable shall be:

(X – Y) × Z

 

   Where:
   “X” is the number determined by dividing the Deemed SGX Price by the Deemed Eld Price;
   “Y” is the then prevailing Benchmark; and
   “Z” is the number of Sale Shares.
   By way of example if the cash per Further Share (expressed in Canadian dollars at the Exchange Rate on the date of the subject Acquisition) is $7.00 and the Deemed Eld Price is $12.50, then the ratio yielded is 0.56

 

Page 16 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

   Eldorado Shares for each Further Share. If the then prevailing Benchmark is 0.50, then the determined ratio is greater than the then prevailing Benchmark and assuming that no adjustments to “Y” or no Capital Adjustments to “Y” or “Z” are appropriate:

X is 0.56, Y is 0.50 and Z is 57,968,029

and the calculation is: (0.56 – 0.50) × 57,968,029 = 3,478,081.74;

 

  (d) if the consideration for the Further Shares is partly cash and partly Eldorado Shares, then such cash consideration (expressed in Canadian dollars converted using the Exchange Rate on the date of the subject Acquisition) will be converted to Deemed Eldorado Shares and that number of Deemed Eldorado Shares will be aggregated with the number of Eldorado Shares actually issued and that total number will be divided by the number of Further Shares so as to determine a value for “X” for the purposes of section 4.2(2)(b), and that section will thereafter apply to determine whether there is any Purchase Price adjustment with all necessary changes being made;

 

  (e) if the consideration for the Further Shares comprises other forms of equity or security in Eldorado (including units, warrants, convertible securities or convertible debt) then the Parties will seek to agree an appropriate adjustment to the Purchase Price (if any) based on this section 4.2; and

 

  (f) if the consideration for any Further Shares involves Asset Consideration, then that consideration will be converted on a basis agreed by the Parties, each acting reasonably, to an equivalent cash consideration and thereafter sections 4.2(2)(c) and 4.2(2)(d) (as the case may be) will apply with all necessary changes.

 

  (3) If, from time to time, a Purchase Price adjustment is payable pursuant to section 4.2(1) or section 4.2(2), then Eldorado shall, at its option, pay the Purchase Price adjustment:

 

  (a) within ten (10) Business Days of the Acquisition or Acquisitions for Additional Shares completing; and

 

  (b) on the date that is ten (10) Business Days of the end of the Quarter during which a Purchase Price adjustment accrued in respect of any Further Shares,

by either:

 

  (c)

payment of cash (in Cdn$) to GFA or the Subscriber, as the case may be, the amount of such cash being the number of Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable (as calculated pursuant to sections 4.2(1) or 4.2(2), as the case may be), multiplied by the VWAP for the 30 trading days prior to the

 

Page 17 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

 

date an announcement is made concerning the subject Acquisition or the date when an agreement for the subject Acquisition was entered into where the subject Acquisition is made without an announcement; or

 

  (d) issuance to the GFA or the Subscriber, as the case may be, of the number of Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable (as calculated pursuant to sections 4.2(1) or 4.2(2));

or by part cash and part Adjustment Consideration Shares (in each such case subject to any event, as detailed in section 1.1(20), which triggers a Capital Adjustment occurring subsequent to the end of the relevant Quarter and prior to the payment of such cash amount or the issuance of such Adjustment Consideration Shares). If Eldorado fails to pay the Purchase Price adjustment within the time frames stipulated in sections 4.2(3)(a) and 4.2(3)(b) (as the case may be) then the relevant Purchase Price adjustment must be paid pursuant to section 4.2(3)(c).

 

  (4) For greater certainty, the Parties acknowledge and agree that there shall be no Purchase Price adjustment:

 

  (a) in favour of GFA in respect of:

 

  (i) Additional Shares, unless the subject Acquisition yields an Exchange Factor more than 0.48, after taking into account any Capital Adjustments of Eldorado and Sino Gold; and

 

  (ii) Further Shares, unless the subject Acquisition yields an Exchange Factor more than the then current Benchmark after taking into account any Capital Adjustments of Eldorado and Sino Gold; or

 

  (b) in favour of Eldorado under any circumstance except as contemplated by section 6.8.

 

  (5) Within ten (10) Business Days of the end of each Quarter, Eldorado will provide to GFA copies of all relevant documentation regarding Acquisitions and the Purchase Price adjustment due thereunder, the Adjustment Consideration Shares issuable, and the cash Purchase Price adjustment payments payable or paid as the case may be and the underlying calculations in respect thereto, all in respect of the immediately preceding Quarter.

 

  (6) Within ten (10) Business Days of Eldorado providing the information detailed in section 4.2(5), Personnel of GFA and Eldorado will review and discuss that information to determine whether any further Purchase Price adjustment is payable and if so, then Eldorado will make such payment forthwith.

 

  (7)

If there is any disagreement or dispute between the Parties regarding any provision of this section 4.2, and the Parties cannot resolve that disagreement or dispute within twenty (20) Business Days of it first arising, either Party may

 

Page 18 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

 

thereafter refer determination of the matter to the Expert. In making its determination the Expert shall have regard to the acknowledgment of the Parties’ made under section 4.3.

 

  (8) The Eld Warranties and section 9.4 will apply to any Adjustment Consideration Shares issued to GFA or the Subscriber, as the case may be, as contemplated by this section 4.2 with all necessary changes being made.

 

  (9) The adjustments in section 4.2 will not apply to a takeover bid made or proposed by Eldorado, its Affiliate or associates within 6 months of the Effective Date.

 

  (10) For the purposes of section 4.2 and the definition of “Acquisition”, if Sino Gold Securities are cancelled under a merger transaction involving Eldorado or any of its Affiliates or associates, those Securities will be deemed to have been acquired by Eldorado, and the consideration provided to the holders of the Securities upon the cancellation of the Securities will be deemed to be consideration provided by Eldorado to acquire the Securities.

 

  (11) Unless otherwise agreed in writing by GFA, a payment of cash by Eldorado under section 4.2(3) must be made (without set-off or counterclaim) by direct transfer of immediately available funds to the bank account nominated in writing by GFA.

 

  (12) If, in the Relevant Period, an event, as detailed in section 1.1(20), occurs which triggers a Capital Adjustment, then some or all of “X”, “Y”, and “Z”, as appropriate, shall be fairly and equitably adjusted to ensure that the same dollar value Purchase Price adjustment is effected under this section 4.2, as if no such event had taken place.

 

  (13) For greater certainty, any Capital Adjustment under section 4.2 is not intended to provide GFA with liquidity protection save for the purpose of a Purchase Price adjustment calculation arising from an Acquisition.

 

  (14) If any calculation under section 4.2 produces a number of Deemed Eldorado Shares or Consideration Shares which is not a whole number, that number will be rounded to the nearest whole number.

 

  (15) For greater clarity, the Purchase Price adjustments detailed in this section 4.2 shall apply to any Acquisition directly from Sino Gold.

 

  (16) For greater clarity, the Purchase Price adjustments under this section 4.2 shall apply irrespective of whether GFA or the Subscriber, as the case may be, remains the holder of any Eldorado Shares during or after the Relevant Period.

 

4.3 Acknowledgement

The Parties acknowledge that for the purposes of any Expert determination, section 4.2 is intended to place GFA in the position as if it were selling the Sale Shares for the highest consideration paid (subject to weighted averaging) in respect of any Additional Shares or Further Shares.

 

Page 19 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

4.4 GFA’s Covenants

GFA covenants and agrees that:

 

  (a) they will not, prior to Closing, acquire any additional Sino Gold shares, other than pursuant to a Capital Adjustment, and if they so acquire must properly advise Eldorado; and

 

  (b) GFA will comply with all Applicable Securities Laws in respect of the Transaction.

 

4.5 Eldorado’s Covenant

Eldorado covenants and agrees that it will comply with all Applicable Securities Laws in respect of the Transaction.

 

5. CAPACITY

Subject to section 8, each Party represents and warrants to each of the other that as at the Effective Date and as at Closing:

 

  (1) it is duly incorporated, continued or amalgamated, as the case may be, and validly exists under the laws of its place of incorporation, continuation or amalgamation, and has the corporate power and authority to own and operate its property and assets and carry on its business;

 

  (2) it is in good standing under the statute under which it was incorporated, continued or amalgamated,

 

  (3) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement and each of the Transaction Documents to which it is a party has been properly authorized by all necessary corporate action;

 

  (4) it has full corporate power and lawful authority to execute and deliver this Agreement and each of the Transaction Documents to which it is a party and to consummate and perform or cause to be performed its obligations under this Agreement and each of the Transaction Documents to which it is a party and the Transaction;

 

  (5) this Agreement constitutes a legal, valid and binding obligation of it, enforceable in accordance with its terms by appropriate legal remedy, subject to laws generally affecting creditors’ rights and to principles of equity;

 

  (6) the execution, delivery and performance by it of this Agreement (including the issue and sale of the Consideration Shares by Eldorado) and each of the Transaction Documents (to which it is a party) and the Transaction does not or will not (with or without the lapse of time, the giving of notice or both):

 

  (a) contravene, conflict with or result in a breach of or default under or result in the creation of any material Encumbrance pursuant to or accelerate any performance of obligations required:

 

Page 20 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (i) by any provision of its constating documents, any shareholders’ agreements or resolutions of its shareholder or directors;

 

  (ii) under any legally binding agreement, arrangement or instrument to which it is party or by which it is bound;

 

  (iii) under any writ, order, decree or injunction, judgment, law, rule or regulation to which it is a party or is subject or by which it or its assets are bound by; or

 

  (iv) by any law applicable to the Party;

 

  (b) result in a breach or violation of, conflict with, or cause the termination or revocation of, any approval or authorization necessary to the ownership of the Sale Shares;

 

  (c) result in or require the creation of any Encumbrance upon any of the Sale Shares;

 

  (7) no litigation, arbitration, mediation, conciliation or administrative proceeding is taking place, pending or threatened against it which if adversely decided could, in the reasonable opinion of its management, have a material adverse effect on its business, assets or financial condition so as to materially impair its ability to perform its obligations under this Agreement;

 

  (8) no liquidator, trustee in bankruptcy, receiver or receiver and manager or other external administrator is currently appointed in relation to it or any of its property; and

 

  (9) to the best of its knowledge, there are no facts, matters or circumstances which give any Person the right to appoint or to apply to appoint (as the case may be) a liquidator, trustee in bankruptcy, receiver or receiver and manager or other external administrator to it or any of its property.

 

6. GFA WARRANTIES

 

6.1 Additional Representations and Warranties of GFA

GFA represents and warrants to Eldorado that as at the Effective Date and as at Closing:

 

  (1) GFA is the sole registered and beneficial owner of the Sale Shares with good and valid title thereto, free and clear from all Encumbrances so that upon completion of the Transaction, Eldorado will have legal and beneficial and good and valid title to the Sale Shares, free and clear of any Encumbrances;

 

Page 21 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (2) as of the Effective Date and the Closing Date, each of GFA and the Subscriber is an “accredited investor” under National Instrument 45-106 - Prospectus and Registration Exemptions of the Canadian Securities Administrators by virtue of it or its sole security holder being a company with net assets of at least $5,000,000 as shown on its most recently prepared financial statements and, as of the Effective Date and as at the Closing Date, is acquiring the Consideration Shares as principal for investment purposes and not with a view to resale or distribution;

 

  (3) with the exception of approval of the TSX, AMEX and ASX and the Approvals and filings required under section 13 of the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934 , as amended, there is no requirement for GFA or any GFA Affiliate to make any filing with, give any notice to, or obtain any approval, consent, waiver or authorization of any Person (including any Person who is a party to an agreement binding on or affecting GFA (including the Heads of Agreement)) as a condition to the lawful completion of, the Transaction;

 

  (4) except as specifically set out in this Agreement, no resolution or consent of the directors or shareholders of Sino Gold is required to authorize or approve the transfer of the Sale Shares to Eldorado or the Transaction; and

 

  (5) the only Securities of Sino Gold beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by GFA or any Affiliate thereof are the Sale Shares and such Securities have been held for at least four months.

 

6.2 Other Warranties and Conditions Excluded

Except as expressly set out in this Agreement, all terms, conditions, warranties and statements (whether express, implied, written, oral, collateral, statutory or otherwise) are excluded to the maximum extent permitted by law and, to the extent they cannot be excluded, GFA disclaims all liability in relation to them to the maximum extent permitted by law.

 

6.3 Disclosures

Save in respect to matters pertaining to section 6.1(1), GFA is not liable (whether by way of damages or otherwise) for any breach of any GF Warranty to the extent that the Claim is based on any fact, matter or circumstance:

 

  (1) fairly disclosed in the Disclosure Material;

 

  (2) relating to any Liability fairly disclosed in the Disclosure Material;

 

Page 22 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (3) any information in the public disclosure record of Gold Fields or Sino Gold, on or before the date that is two (2) Business Days prior to the Effective Date; or

 

  (4) within the actual knowledge of Eldorado or an Affiliate of Eldorado or any of its Personnel (if acting in their capacity as advisors to Eldorado or its Affiliates).

 

6.4 Conditions of payment and Claims

Despite any other provision of this Agreement, each of the following applies in respect of this Agreement:

 

  (1) GFA is not liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) for any breach of any GF Warranty to the extent that the amount of such payment has been increased because a Claim was not made in writing by Eldorado against GFA (setting out in reasonable detail the fact, circumstance or matter giving rise to the breach, the nature of the breach and Eldorado calculation of the loss suffered) as soon as reasonably practicable after Eldorado become aware of the fact, circumstance or matter on which the Claim is based. In any event, such Claims must be made on or before the date eighteen months after the Closing Date.

 

  (2) The maximum aggregate amount that Eldorado may recover from GFA (whether by way of damages or otherwise) for all Claims arising under or in respect of this Agreement is limited to the Purchase Price.

 

  (3) GFA’s Liability in respect of any breach of any GF Warranty will be reduced or extinguished (as the case may be) to the extent that the breach has arisen as a result of any act or omission by or on behalf of Eldorado or any of its Affiliates.

 

  (4) GFA will not be liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) to Eldorado for any breach of any GF Warranty:

 

  (a) where the breach is as a result of any legislation not in force at the date of this Agreement including legislation which takes effect retrospectively;

 

  (b) where the breach is as a result of or in respect of a change in the judicial interpretation of the law in any jurisdiction after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (c) where the breach is as a result of or in respect of a change in the administrative practice of any Governmental Authority after the date of this Agreement including any change which takes effect retrospectively.

 

  (5) GFA will not be liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) to Eldorado for any breach of any GF Warranty to the extent that Eldorado is or would be entitled to claim an indemnity against, or otherwise recover from a person other than GFA in respect of any loss or damage suffered by Eldorado arising out of the breach whether by way of contract, indemnity or otherwise.

 

Page 23 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (6) GFA will not be liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) to Eldorado for any indirect, consequential or indirect economic loss, or indirect loss of profits, however arising.

 

6.5 GFA Acknowledgments

GFA acknowledges and agrees that:

 

  (1) each of GFA and the Subscriber is not, and is not purchasing the Consideration Shares for the account or benefit of, a U.S. Person (as that term is defined in Regulation S (“ Regulation S ”) under the U.S. Securities Act of 1933 , as amended (the “ 1933 Act ”)) or for resale in the United States as defined in Regulation S;

 

  (2) neither GFA nor the Subscriber was offered the Consideration Shares in the United States and, at the time the Agreement was entered into, each of GFA and the Subscriber was outside the United States, and neither executed nor delivered the Agreement or related documents in the United States;

 

  (3) GFA and the Subscriber acknowledge that the Consideration Shares have not been, nor will they be, registered under the 1933 Act or the securities laws of any state in the United States, and may not be offered or sold in the United States or to a U.S. Person (as that term is defined in Regulation S), without registration or an exemption from registration under the 1933 Act and applicable state securities laws and agrees not to offer or sell the Consideration Shares in the United States or to a U.S. Person (as that term is defined in Regulation S), without registration or an exemption from registration under the 1933 Act and applicable state securities laws;

 

  (4) each of GFA and the Subscriber is a resident of a country other than Canada or the United States (an “ International Jurisdiction ”) and;

 

  (a) the execution and delivery of the Agreement by the Parties and the issuance of the Consideration Shares to GFA and the Subscriber complies with all applicable laws of their jurisdiction(s) of residence and will not cause Eldorado to become subject to or comply with any disclosure, prospectus or reporting requirements under any such applicable laws;

 

  (b) GFA and the Subscriber are knowledgeable of, or have been independently advised as to, the applicable securities laws of the International Jurisdictions which would apply to the Agreement, if there are any;

 

  (c)

GFA and the Subscriber are receiving the Consideration Shares pursuant to exemptions from the prospectus and registration requirements under the applicable securities laws of such International Jurisdictions or, if such is

 

Page 24 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

 

not applicable, each is permitted to purchase the Consideration Shares under the applicable securities laws of the International Jurisdictions without the need to rely on an exemption or the need of Eldorado to rely on an exemption; and

 

  (d) the applicable securities laws of their jurisdiction(s) of residence do not require Eldorado to make any disclosures or seek any approvals of any kind whatsoever from any regulatory authority of any kind whatsoever in such jurisdiction;

 

  (5) the Consideration Shares are not being received by GFA and the Subscriber as a result of any material information concerning Eldorado that has not been publicly disclosed and the decision to accept this offer and receive the Consideration Shares has not been made as a result of any verbal or written representation as to fact or otherwise made by or on behalf of Eldorado or any other person, except as set out herein or in Eldorado’s public disclosure records;

 

  (6) the Consideration Shares received hereunder are subject to resale restrictions imposed under Applicable Securities Laws and the rules of regulatory bodies having jurisdiction and may not be traded until the expiry of such hold period except as permitted by applicable securities legislation and stock exchange rules and that the certificates representing the Consideration Shares shall bear legends regarding certain of such restrictions and agrees not to resell the Consideration Shares, except in accordance with the provisions of applicable securities legislation and stock exchange rules;

 

  (7) each of GFA and the Subscriber acknowledge that:

 

  (a) no securities commission or similar regulatory authority has reviewed or passed on the merits of the Consideration Shares;

 

  (b) there is no government or other insurance covering the Consideration Shares;

 

  (c) there are risks associated with the purchase of the Consideration Shares;

 

  (d) there are restrictions on its ability to resell the Consideration Shares and it is its responsibility to find out what those restrictions are and to comply with them before selling the Consideration Shares; and

 

  (e) it has been advised by Eldorado that Eldorado is relying on an exemption from the requirements to provide it with a prospectus and to sell securities through a person registered to sell securities under applicable securities legislation (including the Securities Act (British Columbia)) and as a consequence of acquiring the Consideration Shares in such manner, certain protections, rights and remedies provided by such applicable securities legislation, including statutory rights of rescission or damages, will not be available to it.

 

Page 25 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (8) GFA and the Subscriber will execute, deliver, file and otherwise assist Eldorado in filing, such reports, undertakings and other documents required by applicable securities legislation, policy or order or by any securities commission, stock exchange or other regulatory authority with respect to the issue of the Consideration Shares;

 

  (9) as at the Effective Date and the Closing Date, GFA and the Subscriber and any Affiliates thereof do not hold any Eldorado Shares and they are not acting jointly or in concert with another person or bound by or subject to any agreement, commitment or understanding, whether formal or informal, with any other person relating to the voting rights attached to the Eldorado Shares, and none of GFA or its Affiliates is a Control Person of Eldorado, nor will they become a Control Person of Eldorado by virtue of the purchase of the Consideration Shares under this Agreement and they do not act or intend to act jointly or in concert with any other person to form a control group in respect of Eldorado as at the Effective Date and the Closing Date;

 

  (10) except as expressly set out in this Agreement, neither Eldorado nor any of its Personnel nor any other person acting on behalf of or associated with Eldorado has made any representation, given any advice or given any warranty or undertaking, promise or forecast of any kind to GFA in relation to the Eldorado Shares, Eldorado’s business or this Agreement;

 

  (11) without limiting paragraph 6.5(10), no representation, no advice, no warranty, no undertaking, no promise and no forecast is given in relation to:

 

  (a) any economic, fiscal or other interpretations or evaluations relating to Eldorado or its business;

 

  (b) future matters, including future or forecast costs, prices, revenues or profits (including in relation to reserves and resources);

 

  (c) the principles to be applied by any Governmental Authorities with respect to the regulation of the mining and exploration industry or any part of it and, in particular, matters affecting revenue, prices, charges and service levels in the jurisdictions in which Eldorado conducts business; or

 

  (d) the regulation of the exploration and mining industry in the jurisdictions in which Eldorado conducts business (including any act or omission by any other Governmental Authority) and other national industries (and the relationship of such other industry regulation to the regulation of the mining and exploration industry);

 

  (12) except for the Eld Warranties, they have made and relied upon their own enquiries in entering into this Agreement and proceeding to Closing;

 

  (13) it has experience in financial, business and mining and mineral processing, geological and geostatistical matters and is capable of evaluating adequately the merits and risks associated with entering into and performing its obligations under this Agreement;

 

Page 26 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (14) it has, by its own independent valuations and reports, determined the value of the Sale Shares;

 

  (15) it has determined by its own examination, investigation and analysis, the present and future economic feasibility, viability and economic return of the Eldorado Shares and Eldorado;

 

  (16) without limiting sub-sections (1) to (15), no statement or representation of fact, other than the Eld Warranties:

 

  (a) has induced or influenced GFA to enter into this Agreement or agree to any or all of its terms;

 

  (b) has been relied on in any way as being accurate by GFA;

 

  (c) has been warranted to GFA as being true; or

 

  (d) has been taken into account by GFA as being important to GFA’s decision to enter into this Agreement or agree to any or all of its terms; and

 

  (17) it has competently and diligently carried out all relevant investigations and has examined and acquainted itself concerning all information which is relevant to the risks, contingencies and other circumstances which could affect its decision to enter into this Agreement.

 

6.6 When GF Warranties Given

Each of the GF Warranties:

 

  (1) is given as at the Effective Date and as at Closing; and

 

  (2) will remain in full force and effect for a period of eighteen (18) months after the Closing Date despite Closing.

 

6.7 Dealing with GF Warranty breach after Closing

Without limiting section 6.4 or Eldorado’s obligations at law, if Eldorado becomes aware after Closing of any fact, circumstance or matter which constitutes or could (whether alone or with any other possible fact, circumstance or matter) constitute a breach of any GF Warranty, including a Claim against Eldorado which if satisfied would result in a breach of any GF Warranty, then Eldorado must do each of the following:

 

  (1) promptly give GFA full details including details of the fact, circumstance or matter giving rise to the breach (or possible breach), the nature of the breach and Eldorado’s calculation of the loss suffered and any further related information of which Eldorado becomes aware; and

 

Page 27 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (2) take reasonable steps to mitigate any loss which may give rise to a Claim against GFA for breach of any GF Warranty.

 

6.8 Reduction of Purchase Price

Any amount payable to Eldorado for a breach of any GF Warranty will be treated as a reduction of the Purchase Price.

 

6.9 Release

To the extent permitted by law, GFA releases Eldorado, its Affiliates and their respective Personnel from, and agrees not to make and waives any right it might have to make, any Claim against Eldorado, its Affiliates and their respective Personnel in relation to anything referred to in section 6.5 and will procure that all of its Affiliates and their respective Personnel so release and agree not to make and waive all such Claims, provided that nothing in this section has the effect of releasing Eldorado from any Liability for breach of an Eld Warranty or any other express Liability of Eldorado under this Agreement. Eldorado holds on trust for its Affiliates and their respective Personnel the benefit of this section to the extent that this section applies to those Affiliates and Personnel and is entitled to enforce this section on behalf of the Affiliates and Personnel.

 

6.10 Statutory actions

To the extent permitted by law, Eldorado agrees not to make and waives any right it might have to make any Claim against GFA, its Affiliates or any of its Personnel, whether in respect of GFA Warranties or otherwise, under:

 

  (1) Part 7.10 of the Corporations Act;

 

  (2) the Australian Securities and Investments Commission Act 2001 (Cth) in connection with a breach of section 12DA of that Act;

 

  (3) the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) in connection with a breach of Part V of that Act; and

 

  (4) the Fair Trading Act 1987 (NSW) in connection with a breach of section 42 of that Act,

or any corresponding or similar provision of any Australian State or Territory legislation or any similar provision of any legislation in any relevant jurisdiction or any other applicable laws.

 

Page 28 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

7. ELDORADO

 

7.1 Additional Representations and Warranties of Eldorado

Eldorado represents and warrants to GFA that as at the Effective Date and as at Closing:

 

  (1) Eldorado has all requisite corporate power and authority to create and issue the Consideration Shares, and all necessary corporate action has been taken by Eldorado so as to validly create and issue the Consideration Shares upon the terms and conditions herein;

 

  (2) the performance of the obligations of Eldorado hereunder do not and will not require:

 

  (a) shareholder approval; or

 

  (b) the consent, approval, authorization, registration or qualification of or with any Governmental Authority, stock exchange, Securities Commission or other third party, except the Approvals and such as have been obtained or such as may be required under Applicable Securities Laws or stock exchange regulations (which shall be obtained prior to the Closing Date);

 

  (3) the Consideration Shares have been, or prior to the Closing Date will be, authorized and reserved for issuance by Eldorado and when the share certificates representing the Consideration Shares are issued and delivered in accordance with the terms and conditions herein, then the Consideration Shares will be validly issued and outstanding as fully paid and non-assessable shares in the capital of Eldorado and otherwise rank pari passu with all other Eldorado Shares;

 

  (4) Eldorado and its Affiliates are duly registered and licensed to carry on business in the jurisdictions in which they carry on business or own property where required under the laws of that jurisdiction except to the extent that the failure to be duly registered or licensed would not have a material adverse effect upon Eldorado;

 

  (5) Eldorado is a “reporting issuer” not in default under the applicable securities legislation of each of the provinces of Canada and is in compliance with all its material obligations thereunder;

 

  (6) the outstanding common shares in the capital of Eldorado are listed and posted for trading on the TSX and AMEX;

 

  (7) Eldorado has complied in all material respects with the rules, policies and by-laws of the TSX and AMEX or its listing agreement with either such exchange, and no order ceasing or suspending trading in any securities of Eldorado or prohibiting the sale of common shares, the issuance of common shares or the trading of any of Eldorado’s issued securities has been issued and no proceedings for such purpose are pending or, to the knowledge of Eldorado, threatened;

 

Page 29 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (8) all financial statements, information circulars, annual information forms, press releases, material change reports and other disclosure filings and other documents publicly filed with the appropriate Governmental Authority or any other securities regulatory authority (the “ Disclosure Record ”) were, at their respective dates of filing, true and correct in all material respects, contained no misrepresentation and were prepared in accordance with, and complied in all material respects with, applicable securities laws;

 

  (9) there has been no material change (as defined in the Securities Act (British Columbia)) in relation to Eldorado (or its Affiliates) and no change in any material fact (as defined in the Securities Act (British Columbia)) relating to the Eldorado Shares which has not been disclosed in accordance with the requirements of the Securities Act (British Columbia) and the policies of the TSX and which does not form part of the Disclosure Record, and Eldorado has not filed any confidential material change reports;

 

  (10) Eldorado or its Affiliates are the beneficial owner of the properties, business and assets or the interests in the properties, business or assets referred to in the Disclosure Record; all agreements by which Eldorado or its Affiliates hold an interest in a property, business or asset are in good standing according to their terms and the properties in which Eldorado or its Affiliates hold an interest are in good standing under the applicable laws of the jurisdictions in which they are situated;

 

  (11) the latest audited annual and unaudited interim financial statements of Eldorado contained in the Disclosure Record have all been prepared in accordance with Canadian generally accepted accounting principles, accurately reflect the financial position and all material liabilities (accrued, absolute, contingent or otherwise) of Eldorado as of the respective dates thereof, and no adverse material changes in the business, operations or financial position of Eldorado and its Affiliates taken as a whole have taken place since the latest date thereof;

 

  (12) Eldorado has complied and will comply in all material respects with the requirements of all applicable corporate laws and Applicable Securities Laws;

 

  (13) to the knowledge of Eldorado:

 

  (a) it and its Affiliates have duly filed on a timely basis all tax returns required to be filed by it and has paid all taxes which are due and payable, and has paid all assessments and reassessments, and all other taxes, governmental charges, penalties, interest and fines due and payable on or before the Effective Date;

 

  (b) adequate provision has been made for taxes payable for the current period for which tax returns are not yet required to be filed; and

 

  (c)

in respect of any and all unpaid taxes, interest and penalties for any prior taxable period, there are no agreements, waivers or other arrangements of

 

Page 30 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

 

any kind whatsoever providing for an extension of time with respect to the filing of any tax return by, or payment of, any tax or governmental charge of any kind whatsoever by Eldorado or its Affiliates;

 

  (14) to the knowledge of Eldorado, and except as set out its Disclosure Record, there are no material outstanding obligations or Liabilities, contingent or otherwise, under any applicable environmental, mining or other law (including relating to hazardous substances, environmental impacts, reclamation or rehabilitation work), associated with the properties, business and assets or the interests of Eldorado and its Affiliates in the properties, business or assets referred to in the Disclosure Record, or otherwise adequate provision has been made for such obligations or liabilities as reflected in the Disclosure Record;

 

  (15) as of the Effective Date and the Closing Date, Eldorado is an “accredited investor” as defined for purposes of National Instrument 45-106 -  Prospectus and Registration Exemptions of the Canadian Securities Administrators by virtue of it being a company with net assets of at least $5,000,000 as shown in its most recently prepared financial statements and, as of the Effective Date and as at the Closing Date, Eldorado is acquiring the Sale Shares as principal for investment purposes and not with a view to resale or distribution; and

 

  (16) Eldorado nor any of its respective Affiliates, associates or joint actors hold a relevant interest in, beneficially owns, or exercises control, or direction over, any Securities of Sino Gold or Securities currently (or which may in the future become) convertible into Securities of Sino Gold.

 

7.2 Other Warranties and Conditions Excluded

Except as expressly set out in this Agreement, all terms, conditions, warranties and statements (whether express, implied, written, oral, collateral, statutory or otherwise) are excluded to the maximum extent permitted by law and, to the extent they cannot be excluded, Eldorado disclaims all liability in relation to them to the maximum extent permitted by law.

 

7.3 Disclosures

Save in respect to matters pertaining to sections 7.1(1) and 7.1(3), Eldorado is not liable (whether by way of damages or otherwise) for any breach of any Eld Warranty to the extent that the Claim is based on any fact, matter or circumstance:

 

  (1) fairly disclosed in Eldorado’s public disclosure record;

 

  (2) relating to any Liability fairly disclosed in Eldorado’s public disclosure record;

 

  (3) any information being the subject of public announcement by Eldorado on or before the date that is two (2) Business Days prior to the Effective Date; or

 

Page 31 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (4) within the actual knowledge of GFA or an Affiliate of GFA or any of its Personnel (if acting in their capacity as advisors to GFA or its Affiliates);

 

7.4 Conditions of payment and Claims

Despite any other provision of this Agreement, each of the following applies in respect of this Agreement:

 

  (1) Eldorado is not liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) for any breach of any Eld Warranty to the extent that the amount of such payment has been increased because a Claim was not made in writing by GFA against Eldorado (setting out in reasonable detail the fact, circumstance or matter giving rise to the breach, the nature of the breach and GFA calculation of the loss suffered) as soon as reasonably practicable after GFA become aware of the fact, circumstance or matter on which the Claim is based. In any event, such Claims must be made on or before the date eighteen months after the Closing Date.

 

  (2) The maximum aggregate amount that GFA may recover from Eldorado (whether by way of damages or otherwise) for all Claims arising under or in respect of this Agreement is limited to the Purchase Price.

 

  (3) Eldorado’s Liability in respect of any breach of any Eld Warranty will be reduced or extinguished (as the case may be) to the extent that the breach has arisen as a result of any act or omission by or on behalf of GFA or any of its Affiliates.

 

  (4) Eldorado will not be liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) to GFA for any breach of any Eld Warranty:

 

  (a) where the breach is as a result of any legislation not in force at the date of this Agreement including legislation which takes effect retrospectively;

 

  (b) where the breach is as a result of or in respect of a change in the judicial interpretation of the law in any jurisdiction after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (c) where the breach is as a result of or in respect of a change in the administrative practice of any Governmental Authority after the date of this Agreement including any change which takes effect retrospectively.

 

  (5) Eldorado will not be liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) to GFA for any breach of any Eld Warranty to the extent that GFA is or would be entitled to claim an indemnity against, or otherwise recover from a person other than Eldorado in respect of any loss or damage suffered by GFA arising out of the breach whether by way of contract, indemnity or otherwise.

 

Page 32 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (6) Eldorado will not be liable to make any payment (whether by way of damages or otherwise) to GFA for any indirect, consequential or indirect economic loss, or indirect loss of profits, however arising.

 

7.5 Eldorado Acknowledgments

Eldorado acknowledges and agrees that:

 

  (1) it is not, and is not purchasing the Sale Shares for the account or benefit of, a U.S. Person (as that term is defined in Regulation S) under the 1933 Act or for resale in the United States as defined in Regulation S;

 

  (2) it was not offered the Sale Shares in the United States and, at the time the Agreement was entered into, Eldorado was outside the United States, and did not execute or deliver the Agreement or related documents in the United States;

 

  (3) the Sale Shares may not be offered or sold in the United States or to a U.S. Person (as that term is defined in Regulation S), without registration or an exemption from registration under the 1933 Act and applicable state securities laws and agrees not to offer or sell the Sale Shares in the United States or to a U.S. Person (as that term is defined in Regulation S), without registration or an exemption from registration under the 1933 Act and applicable state securities laws;

 

  (4) except as expressly set out in this Agreement, neither GFA, its Affiliates nor any of its Personnel nor any other person acting on behalf of or associated with GFA has made any representation, given any advice or given any warranty or undertaking, promise or forecast of any kind in relation to the Sale Shares, the Business or this Agreement;

 

  (5) without limiting paragraph (4), no representation, no advice, no warranty, no undertaking, no promise and no forecast is given in relation to:

 

  (a) any economic, fiscal or other interpretations or evaluations relating to Sino Gold or its Business;

 

  (b) future matters, including future or forecast costs, prices, revenues or profits (including in relation to reserves and resources);

 

  (c) the principles to be applied by any Governmental Authorities with respect to the regulation of the mining and exploration industry or any part of it and, in particular, matters affecting revenue, prices, charges and service levels in the Peoples’ Republic of China; or

 

  (d) the regulation of the exploration and mining industry in the Peoples’ Republic of China (including any act or omission by any other Governmental Authority) and other national industries (and the relationship of such other industry regulation to the regulation of the mining and exploration industry);

 

Page 33 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (6) except for the GF Warranties, they have made and relied upon their own enquiries in entering into this Agreement and proceeding to Closing;

 

  (7) it has experience in financial, business and mining and mineral processing, geological and geostatistical matters and is capable of evaluating adequately the merits and risks associated with entering into and performing its obligations under this Agreement;

 

  (8) it has, by its own independent valuations and reports, determined the value of the Sale Shares;

 

  (9) no representation or warranty has been provided in relation to whether the Sale Shares and the Transaction in relation to the Sale Shares amounts to a distribution by a Control Person;

 

  (10) the Sale Shares purchased hereunder may be subject to resale restrictions imposed under applicable securities legislation and the rules of regulatory bodies having jurisdiction and may not be traded until the expiry of applicable hold periods prevailing in such jurisdictions except as permitted by applicable securities legislation and stock exchange rules and agrees not to resell the Sale Shares, except in accordance with the provisions of applicable securities legislation and stock exchange rules;

 

  (11) it is knowledgeable of, or has been independently advised as to, the Applicable Securities Laws which would apply to the Agreement;

 

  (12) it has determined by its own examination, investigation and analysis, the present and future economic feasibility, viability and economic return of the Sale Shares and Sino Gold;

 

  (13) without limiting sub-sections (1) to (12), no statement or representation of fact, other than the GF Warranties:

 

  (a) has induced or influenced Eldorado to enter into this Agreement or agree to any or all of its terms;

 

  (b) has been relied on in any way as being accurate by Eldorado;

 

  (c) has been warranted to Eldorado as being true; or

 

  (d) has been taken into account by Eldorado as being important to Eldorado’s decision to enter into this Agreement or agree to any or all of its terms; and

 

  (14) it has competently and diligently carried out all relevant investigations and has examined and acquainted itself concerning all information which is relevant to the risks, contingencies and other circumstances which could affect its decision to enter into this Agreement.

 

Page 34 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

7.6 When Eld Warranties Given

Each of the Eld Warranties:

 

  (1) is given as at the Effective Date and as at Closing; and

 

  (2) will remain in full force and effect for a period of eighteen (18) months after the Closing Date despite Closing.

 

7.7 Dealing with Eld Warranty breach after Closing

Without limiting section 7.4 or GFA’s obligations at law, if GFA becomes aware after Closing of any fact, circumstance or matter which constitutes or could (whether alone or with any other possible fact, circumstance or matter) constitute a breach of any Eld Warranty, including a Claim against GFA which if satisfied would result in a breach of any Eld Warranty, then GFA must do each of the following:

 

  (1) promptly give Eldorado full details including details of the fact, circumstance or matter giving rise to the breach (or possible breach), the nature of the breach and GFA’s calculation of the loss suffered and any further related information of which GFA becomes aware; and

 

  (2) take reasonable steps to mitigate any loss which may give rise to a Claim against Eldorado for breach of any Eld Warranty.

 

7.8 Release

To the extent permitted by law, Eldorado releases GFA, its Affiliates and their respective Personnel from, and agrees not to make and waives any right it might have to make, any Claim against GFA, its Affiliates and their respective Personnel in relation to anything referred to in section 7.5 and will procure that all of its Affiliates and their respective Personnel so release and agree not to make and waive all such Claims, provided that nothing in this section has the effect of releasing GFA from any Liability for breach of a GF Warranty or any other express Liability of GFA under this Agreement. GFA holds on trust for its Affiliates and their respective Personnel the benefit of this section to the extent that this section applies to those Affiliates and Personnel and is entitled to enforce this section on behalf of the Affiliates and Personnel.

 

7.9 Statutory actions

To the extent permitted by law, GFA agrees not to make and waives any right it might have to make any Claim against Eldorado, its Affiliates or any of its Personnel, whether in respect of Eld Warranties or otherwise, under:

 

  (1) Part 7.10 of the Corporations Act;

 

  (2) the Australian Securities and Investments Commission Act 2001 (Cth) in connection with a breach of section 12DA of that Act;

 

Page 35 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (3) the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) in connection with a breach of Part V of that Act; and

 

  (4) the Fair Trading Act 1987 (NSW) in connection with a breach of section 42 of that Act,

or any corresponding or similar provision of any Australian State or Territory legislation or any similar provision of any legislation in any relevant jurisdiction or any other applicable laws.

 

8. CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

8.1 Conditions Precedent to Closing for Eldorado

Eldorado’s obligation to Close is subject to the fulfillment or waiver of the following conditions:

 

  (1) the GF Warranties being true, in all material respects, as at the time immediately before Closing;

 

  (2) GFA will have performed and complied, in all material respects, with all agreements, covenants and conditions required by this Agreement to be performed or complied with by it before or at Closing;

 

  (3) all necessary conditional approval from the TSX and approval from the AMEX to the issuance of the Closing Consideration Shares, will have been obtained subject only to the Standard Listing Requirements;

 

  (4) all necessary approvals and authorizations to the transfer of the Sale Shares (not including the Approvals) have been obtained from Governmental Authorities; and

 

  (5) the FIRB Approval being obtained on terms and conditions acceptable to Eldorado.

Eldorado covenants and agrees that it will use its commercially reasonable efforts to satisfy the conditions set out in sections 8.1(3) and 8.1(5) on or before the Latest Date. GFA covenants and agrees that it will use its commercially reasonable efforts to satisfy the conditions set out in sections 8.1(1) and (2) on or before the Latest Date. Both Parties agree to use their commercially reasonable efforts to satisfy the condition set out in section 8.1(4) on or before the Latest Date.

 

8.2 Waiver by Eldorado

The conditions in section 8.1(1) and 8.1(2) are for the exclusive benefit of Eldorado and any such condition may be waived by Eldorado on or before the Latest Date by delivering to GFA a written waiver to that effect signed by Eldorado.

 

Page 36 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

8.3 Waiver of Approvals

The conditions in sections 8.1(3), 8.1(4) and 8.1(5) are for the benefit of the Parties and any such condition may only be waived by the Parties by agreement on or before the Latest Date.

 

8.4 Conditions Precedent to the Closing by GFA

GFA’s obligation to Close is subject to the fulfillment or waiver of the following conditions:

 

  (1) the Eld Warranties being true, in all material respects, as at the time immediately before Closing;

 

  (2) Eldorado will have performed and complied, in all material respects, with all covenants, agreements and conditions required by the Agreement to be performed or complied with by it before or at Closing;

 

  (3) all necessary approvals to the issuance of the Closing Consideration Shares, including conditional approval from the TSX and approval from the AMEX, subject only to the Standard Listing Requirements, will have been obtained; and

 

  (4) the SARB Approval being obtained on terms and conditions acceptable to GFA.

GFA agrees that it will use its commercially reasonable efforts to satisfy the condition set out in section 8.4(4) on or before the Latest Date. Eldorado agrees that it will use its commercially reasonable efforts to satisfy the conditions set out in sections 8.4(1), 8.4(2) and 8.4(3) on or before the Latest Date.

 

8.5 Waiver by GFA

Each of the conditions in sections 8.4(1) and 8.4(2) are for the exclusive benefit of GFA and any such condition may be waived by GFA on or before the Latest Date by delivering to Eldorado a written waiver to that effect signed by GFA.

 

8.6 Waiver of Approvals

The conditions in sections 8.4(3) and 8.4(4) are for the benefit of the Parties, and any such condition may only be waived by the Parties by agreement on or before the Latest Date.

 

8.7 Termination of this Agreement

If the conditions set out in sections 8.1 and 8.4 are not fulfilled or waived on or before the Latest Date, or a later date agreed in writing by GFA and Eldorado, this Agreement will be null and void and of no effect.

 

Page 37 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

8.8 Pre-closing obligation

From the Effective Date until the earlier of Closing or termination of this Agreement in accordance with section 8.7, GFA covenants and agrees that it will not dispose, assign, create a trust or Encumbrance over or otherwise deal with (including by way of stock lending) the Sale Shares other than as pursuant to this Agreement;

 

8.9 Notification of Satisfaction

Each Party shall notify the other Party forthwith upon each condition that is for its or mutual benefit being satisfied, such notice to include any conditions thereto relevant to a Party and the Transaction.

 

9. CLOSING

 

9.1 Closing Date and Location

Completion of the Transaction will commence at 5 am (“ Closing Time ”) on the sixth (6 th ) Business Day following the satisfaction or waiver of the last of the conditions set out in sections 8.1 and 8.4 (the “ Closing Date ”) at the offices of Fasken Martineau DuMoulin, at Suite 2900 – 550 Burrard Street, Vancouver, British Columbia, or on or at such other date, time or location as may be agreed upon in writing by the Parties.

 

9.2 Documents to be Delivered by Eldorado

At or prior to the Closing Time, Eldorado shall deliver or cause to be delivered to GFA:

 

  (1) evidence of conditional approval by TSX and approval by AMEX, to the listing of the Closing Consideration Shares, subject only to the Standard Listing Requirements;

 

  (2) evidence of the FIRB Approval;

 

  (3) the Eldorado Share Certificate; and

 

  (4) a certified copy of those resolutions of the directors of Eldorado authorizing the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement and of all documents to be delivered by Eldorado under this Agreement,

and do all such other acts and things as are required of Eldorado under the ASTC Settlement Rules and the ASX Market Rules to enable Eldorado to become the legal and beneficial owner of the Sale Shares on the Closing Date.

 

9.3 Documents to be Delivered by GFA

At the Closing Time, GFA will deliver or cause to be delivered, to Eldorado:

 

  (1) reasonably satisfactory evidence of transfer of the Sale Shares to Eldorado, including a copy of an irrevocable direction by GFA to its sponsoring broker directing the transfer of the Sale Shares to a holding of Eldorado’s sponsoring broker, as nominated by Eldorado to GFA sufficiently in advance of Closing;

 

Page 38 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (2) a certified copy of resolutions of the directors of GFA authorizing the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement and of all documents to be delivered by GFA under this Agreement; and

 

  (3) a certificate of an officer of GFA certifying that SARB Approval has been obtained, detailing any conditions thereto relevant to Eldorado and the Transaction,

and do all such other acts and things as are required of GFA under the ASTC Settlement Rules and the ASX Market Rules to enable Eldorado to become the legal and beneficial owner of the Sale Shares on the Closing Date.

 

9.4 Conditional quotation

Eldorado covenants that it shall take all reasonably necessary steps to cause the Closing Consideration Shares to be conditionally listed on the TSX and listed on AMEX (the only remaining conditions or steps to be taken as at the Closing Date being the Standard Listing Requirements) as soon as possible prior to the Closing Date. Eldorado shall, promptly following the Closing Date and in any event not later than the time prescribed by the TSX or AMEX, as the case may be, deliver to such exchange the customary documents and, when invoiced, promptly make payment of the requisite listing fee (both as comprising the Standard Listing Requirements), and procure in a timely manner the unconditional listing and posting for trading on the TSX and AMEX of the Closing Consideration Shares.

 

10. EXPERT DETERMINATION

 

10.1 When Appointed

Wherever under this Agreement:

 

  (1) any matter is expressly to be referred to an Expert; or

 

  (2) the Parties agree that a point of difference between them will be resolved by an Expert,

then unless specifically provided otherwise, the matter in issue will be referred to an Expert for determination and this section 10 will apply.

 

10.2 Appointment

The procedure for the appointment of an Expert will be as follows:

 

  (1) the Party wishing the appointment to be made will give notice in writing to that effect to the other Party and give details of the matter which it proposes will be resolved by the Expert;

 

Page 39 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (2) within 10 Business Days from the date of that notice, the Parties will meet in an endeavour to agree upon a single Expert (who will be independent of the Parties and will have qualifications and experience appropriate to the matter in dispute) to whom the matter in dispute will be referred for determination; and

 

  (3) if within 15 Business Days of the said notice the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of a single Expert either Party may request the appointment of an Expert by:

 

  (a) the President of the Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy to appoint the Expert, if the subject matter of the dispute relates to a technical issue; and

 

  (b) the President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia, if the subject matter of the dispute relates to a financial issue,

(collectively an “ Independent Body ”).

If an Independent Body fails to appoint an Expert within 10 Business Days of being requested to do so, or otherwise refuses to make such an appointment, then either Party may request the appointment of an Expert by the President of the Institute of Arbitrators & Mediators Australia.

 

10.3 Instructions

The Expert will be instructed to:

 

  (1) determine the dispute within the shortest practicable time and otherwise within 20 Business Days; and

 

  (2) deliver a report stating his determination with respect to the matters in dispute and setting out the reasons for the decision.

 

10.4 Procedure

 

  (1) The Expert will determine the procedures for the conduct of the process in order to resolve the dispute and must provide each Party with a fair opportunity to make submissions in relation to the matter in issue.

 

  (2) Any process or determination of the dispute by the Expert will be made as an expert and not as an arbitrator and the determination of the Expert will be final and binding on the Parties without appeal so far as the Law allows and except in the case of manifest error or where a Party has not been provided with a fair opportunity to make submissions in relation to the matter in issue.

 

Page 40 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

10.5 Costs

Each Party will bear its own costs of and incidental to any proceedings under this section 10. The costs of the Expert will be borne in equal shares between the Parties except as otherwise may be provided in this Agreement.

 

10.6 Extension of time

In the case of a dispute which is referable to an Expert under section 10 any time periods specified in this Agreement in relation to the subject matter of the dispute will be extended by the time between the date on which the dispute first arose and the date the Expert issues its determination.

 

11. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

11.1 Confidentiality

 

  (1) Each Party must keep confidential any information (whether embodied in tangible or electronic form) provided pursuant to this Agreement, including pertaining to the existence and terms of this Agreement and any draft of this Agreement, and must not disclose such information to any Person except:

 

  (a) without the prior consent of the other Party which will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed;

 

  (b) any Affiliate of the Party that has a clear need to use that information and that is obligated to keep such information confidential;

 

  (c) any Personnel of the Party who has a clear need to use that information;

 

  (d) pursuant to any applicable law, or to any regulatory body or Governmental Authority, or pursuant to the rules of any stock exchange; or

 

  (e) to the extent necessary to obtain any consent or approval contemplated by this Agreement.

 

  (2) section 11.1(1) does not restrict the disclosure or use of information:

 

  (a) which is or becomes generally available to the public other than as a result of a disclosure by the receiving Party or its Affiliates or Personnel in breach of this Agreement;

 

  (b) which becomes available to the receiving Party on a non-confidential basis from a source other than the disclosing Party or its Affiliates or their respective Personnel, provided that the receiving Party does not believe, after a good faith inquiry, that such source is bound by obligations of confidentiality with the disclosing Party or its Affiliates or their respective Personnel or is otherwise prohibited from transmitting the information to the receiving Party by a contractual, legal or fiduciary obligation; or

 

Page 41 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (c) which was known to the receiving Party on a non-confidential basis prior to disclosure to the receiving Party by the disclosing Party or its Affiliates or their respective Personnel, provided that such information is not known by the receiving Party to be subject to confidentiality obligations with or other obligations of secrecy of the disclosing Party or another Person.

 

11.2 Public Announcements

No Party will make any public or press announcement or statement concerning this Agreement or Closing without the prior approval of the other Party (such approval not to be unreasonably withheld). Prior to completion of the Closing, the Parties must in good faith agree upon the form or forms of press announcement or public statements that they will each make on completion of the Closing, including any disclosure which is required pursuant to any applicable law, or to any regulatory body or Governmental Authority, or pursuant to the rules of any stock exchange or stock market. The Parties agree to forthwith after the Effective Date make independent press announcements, each in a form to be agreed, acting reasonably.

 

11.3 Termination of Obligations

The obligations of confidentiality of the Parties under this section 11 are terminated with effect upon the expiration of 18 months from the Closing Date.

 

11.4 Non-applicability

Section 11.1(1) does not restrict the disclosure or use of the subject information for the purpose, of and to the extent required in connection with legal action to enforce rights under or seek remedies under this Agreement.

 

11.5 Use of Information

Each Party agrees that the other may collect and use the information about that Party which is provided by in the Agreement and any other information required to be disclosed to any Government Authority, regulatory authority or the TSX or AMEX, whether pursuant to a Securities Commission, TSX, AMEX or other regulatory authority form or a request by a Securities Commission, TSX, AMEX or other regulatory authority (the “ Party Information ”) for the following purposes:

 

  (1) to comply with securities regulatory requirements;

 

  (2) to provide a Party with information; and

 

  (3) to otherwise comply with its obligations in accordance with the terms of the Agreement.

 

Page 42 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

From time to time each Party agrees to, on request, promptly provide to the other (at the cost of the requesting Party) any information reasonably required by that Party or its Affiliate, for any of the above stated purposes or for any other lawful purpose, including the preparation of financial statements and the like, but not for the purposes of trading in the securities of that Party or its Affiliates.

 

12. GENERAL

 

12.1 Time

 

  (1) Time is of the essence of this Agreement.

 

  (2) If the Parties agree to vary a time requirement, the time requirement so varied is of the essence of this Agreement.

 

  (3) An agreement to vary a time requirement must be in writing.

 

12.2 Notices

All notices and other communications under this Agreement will be in writing and may be delivered personally or transmitted by facsimile as follows:

 

To Eldorado:

  

Eldorado Gold Corporation

1188 - 550 Burrard Street

Vancouver, BC V6C 2B5

Facsimile:        604 687 4026

Attention:        Eduardo Moura and Dawn Moss

With a copy to:

Fasken Martineau DuMoulin LLP

Barristers and Solicitors

Suite 2900, 550 Burrard Street

Vancouver, BC V6C 0A3

Facsimile:  604 631 3232

Attention:  Josh Lewis

To GFA:

  

Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited

9 Columbus Centre Pelican Drive Tortola British Virgin Islands

Facsimile:  +44 1624 630001

Attention:  Company Secretary

 

Page 43 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

With a copy to:

  

Minter Ellison Lawyers

  

Aurora Place 88 Phillip Street

  

SYDNEY NSW AUSTRALIA 2000

  

Facsimile:  +61 2 9921 8307

Attention:  James Philips - Partner

or to such addresses as each Party may from time to time specify by notice. Any notice will be deemed to have been given and received:

 

  (1) if personally delivered, then on the day of personal service to the recipient Party, provided that if such date is a day other than a Business Day such notice will be deemed to have been given and received on the first Business Day following the date of personal service;

 

  (2) if sent by facsimile transmission and successfully transmitted prior to 4:00 pm on a Business Day (recipient Party time), then on that Business Day, and if transmitted after 4:00 pm on that day then on the first Business Day following the date of transmission.

 

12.3 Assignment by Party

A Party may not assign or otherwise deal with this Agreement without the prior written consent of the other Parties.

 

12.4 Governing Law

This Agreement will be governed in all respects, including validity, interpretation and effect, by the laws of British Columbia and generally applicable in British Columbia and each Party:

 

  (1) irrevocably and unconditionally submits to and accepts the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts exercising jurisdiction in the Province of British Columbia, and any court that may hear appeals from any of those courts, for any proceeding in connection with the Agreement, subject only to the right to enforce a judgment obtained in any of those courts in any other jurisdiction; and

 

  (2) irrevocably waives any objection to the venue of any legal process commenced in the courts of British Columbia on the basis that the process has been brought in an inconvenient forum.

 

12.5 Violation of Law of another Jurisdiction

If any transaction contemplated by this Agreement is intended to be performed in more than one jurisdiction, and its performance would be a violation of the applicable law of a jurisdiction where it is intended to be performed, then this Agreement is binding in those

 

Page 44 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

jurisdictions in which it is valid and the Parties will use their reasonable efforts to re-negotiate and amend this Agreement so that its performance does not involve a violation of the applicable law of the jurisdiction where its performance would be a violation.

 

12.6 Severability

 

  (1) If anything in this Agreement in unenforceable, illegal or void, then it is severed and the rest of this Agreement remains in force.

 

  (2) Where a provision of this Agreement is prohibited or unenforceable, the Parties must negotiate in good faith to replace the invalid provision by a provision which is in accordance with applicable laws and which must be as close as possible to the Parties’ original intent and appropriate consequential amendments (if any) will be made to this Agreement.

 

12.7 Entire Agreement

This Agreement:

 

  (1) is the entire agreement and understanding between the Parties on everything connected with the subject matter of this Agreement; and

 

  (2) supersedes any prior agreement or understanding on anything connected with that subject matter.

 

12.8 Further Assurances

Each Party must promptly at its own cost do all things (including executing and if necessary delivering all documents) necessary or desirable to give full effect to this Agreement and the Transaction.

 

12.9 Survival

Section 11 and this section 12.9 will not merge on Closing, but will continue in full force and effect after Closing or any termination or expiration of this Agreement as will any other provision of this Agreement which expressly or by implication from its nature is intended to survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement.

 

12.10 Amendment and Variation

An amendment or variation to this Agreement is not effective unless it is in writing and signed by the Parties.

 

12.11 Waiver

(1) A Party’s failure or delay to exercise a power or right does not operate as a waiver of that power or right.

 

Page 45 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

  (2) The exercise of a power or right does not preclude either its exercise in the future or the exercise of any other power or right.

 

  (3) A waiver is not effective unless it is in writing.

 

  (4) Waiver of a power or right is effective only in respect of the specific instance to which it relates and for the specific purpose for which it is given.

 

12.12 Counterparts

 

  (1) This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts. Each counterpart is an original but the counterparts together are one and the same agreement.

 

  (2) This Agreement is binding on the Parties on the exchange of counterparts. A copy of a counterpart sent by facsimile machine or by electronic mail:

 

  (a) must be treated as an original counterpart;

 

  (b) is sufficient evidence of the execution of the original; and

 

  (c) may be produced in evidence for all purposes in place of the original.

 

12.13 Execution – Authorized Officer to Sign

Each Person signing this Agreement as an authorized officer of a Party hereby represents and warrants that he or she is duly authorized to sign this Agreement for that Party and that this Agreement will, upon having been so executed, be binding on that Party in accordance with its terms.

 

Page 46 of 47


(Share Sale Agreement)

 

 

E XECUTED AS AN A GREEMENT on the Effective Date.
E LDORADO G OLD C ORPORATION
By:  

 

  c/s
    Authorized Signatory  

 

 
Name (please print)

 

 
Office Held
G OLD F IELDS A USTRALASIA (BVI) L IMITED
By:  

/s/ Andrew M Dawson

  c/s
    Authorized Signatory  

Andrew M Dawson

 
Name (please print)

Director

 
Office Held

 

Page 47 of 47

Exhibit 4.28

AMENDING AGREEMENT

BETWEEN:

ELDORADO GOLD CORPORATION , a corporation existing

under the laws of Canada

(“ Eldorado ”)

AND:

GOLD FIELDS AUSTRALASIA (BVI) LIMITED , a

corporation existing under the laws of British Virgin Islands

(“ GFA ”)

WHEREAS:

 

A. By a Share Purchase and Sale Agreement (the “ SPSA ”) dated June 3, 2009 between Eldorado and GFA (the “ Parties ”), it was agreed that Eldorado would purchase and GFA would sell the Sale Shares (as defined in the SPSA) on the terms and conditions set out in the SPSA, including the issuance by Eldorado to GFA of the Closing Consideration Shares (as defined in the SPSA) on the Closing Date (as defined in the SPSA) and, if required to be issued pursuant to the SPSA, the issuance thereafter by Eldorado to GFA of any Adjustment Consideration Shares (as defined in the SPSA).

 

B. The SPSA contemplates that the Closing Consideration Shares would be subject to a four (4) month hold period, however the Parties propose that Eldorado issue the Closing Consideration Shares and the Top-up Adjustment Right (as defined herein) pursuant to a final short form prospectus or any amendment thereto subject to the terms herein.

NOW THEREFORE in consideration of the premises the Parties agree as follows:

 

1. All capitalized terms not specifically defined in this amending agreement (this “ Agreement ”) shall have the respective meanings attributed to such terms in the SPSA. In this Agreement

 

  (a) OSC ” means the Ontario Securities Commission;

 

  (b) Preliminary Prospectus ” means the preliminary short form prospectus, and any amendment thereto, filed with the BCSC and the OSC qualifying the Closing Consideration Shares and the Top-up Adjustment Right;

 

  (c) Prospectus ” means the final short form prospectus, and any amendment thereto, filed with the BCSC and the OSC qualifying the Closing Consideration Shares and the Top-up Adjustment Right;


  (d) Receipt ” means a receipt for the Preliminary Prospectus or the Prospectus, as the context requires, issued by the BCSC and evidencing that such a receipt has also been issued therefor by the OSC under National Policy 11-202 – Process for Prospectus Reviews in Multiple Jurisdictions;

 

  (e) Right of Withdrawal ” means the right pursuant to securities legislation of the Provinces of British Columbia and Ontario, whereby GFA and/or the Subscriber may withdraw from the agreement of purchase and sale of securities to be issued under the Prospectus;

 

  (f) Top-up Adjustment Right ” means the right under section 4.2 of the SPSA to issue Adjustment Consideration Shares to GFA or the Subscriber; and

 

  (g) Withdrawal Period ” means the time period under securities legislation of the Provinces of British Columbia and Ontario, during which GFA and/or the Subscriber may exercise the Right of Withdrawal.

 

2. With effect on and from the date of this Agreement, section 9.1 is amended by deleting: “on the sixth (6th) Business Day following the satisfaction or waiver of the last of the conditions set out in sections 8.1 and 8.4” and substituting therefore: “on the latest of firstly, the sixth (6th) Business Day following the satisfaction or waiver of the last of the conditions set out in sections 8.1 and 8.4 and secondly, July 27, 2009.”

 

3. If Eldorado, in its discretion, elects to file a Preliminary Prospectus and/or a Prospectus, then Eldorado shall provide GFA with an opportunity to review a draft of those sections of the Preliminary Prospectus and the Prospectus relating to the SPSA and GFA and will entertain the reasonable comments of GFA thereon, Eldorado shall also provide GFA with copies of (or relevant extracts from) any and all comment letters it receives from the BCSC or the OSC containing comments which could reasonably be considered to relate to GFA or GFA’s ownership of or rights in the Consideration Shares, and will entertain the reasonable comments of GFA on any submissions to be made in reply thereto.

 

4. Provided a Receipt is issued for the Preliminary Prospectus and the Prospectus, then as soon as practicable upon the issuance of such Receipt, Eldorado shall deliver to GFA by email, on its own behalf and on behalf of the Subscriber, a copy of the Preliminary Prospectus (in pdf format) or the Prospectus (in pdf format), as the case may be, and the Receipt (in pdf format) related thereto.

 

5. Subject to Eldorado having complied with section 3 of this Agreement, GFA agrees that it will accept delivery of the Prospectus (in pdf format), on its own behalf and on behalf of the Subscriber, by way of email sent to the attention of Colin Bird ( colin.bird@maitlandgroup.com ) and Andrew Dawson ( andy.dawson@maitlandgroup.com ) at ‘Maitland – Trust and Corporate Services’ with copies to Brett Mattison ( brett.mattison@goldfields.com.au ) and Ashley McDonald ( ashley.mcdonald@goldfields.nl ) and promptly provide Eldorado with written acknowledgment of receipt of the Prospectus on its behalf and on behalf of the Subscriber by way of email sent to the attention of Dawn Moss ( dawnm@eldoradogold.com ) at Eldorado with a copy to Josh Lewis ( jlewis@fasken.com ).

 

- 2 -


6. Provided (i) a Receipt for the Prospectus has been issued to Eldorado and continues to be effective; (ii) Eldorado has received a written acknowledgement pursuant to section 5 confirming the date and time of the receipt of the Prospectus; (iii) the Withdrawal Period has expired; and (iv) the Right of Withdrawal has not been exercised within the Withdrawal Period, then the SPSA shall be (with effect immediately prior to Closing) deemed amended as follows with the Transaction to close accordingly:

 

  (a) the following definitions are added to section 1.1:

 

  (i) OSC ” means the Ontario Securities Commission;

 

  (ii) Prospectus ” means the final short form prospectus and any amendment thereto filed with the BCSC and the OSC qualifying the Closing Consideration Shares and the Top-up Adjustment Right;

 

  (iii) Receipt ” means a final receipt for the Prospectus issued by the BCSC and evidencing that such receipt has also been issued therefor by the OSC under National Policy 11-202 – Process for Prospectus Review in Multiple Jurisdictions;

 

  (iv) Right of Withdrawal ” means the right pursuant to securities legislation of the Provinces of British Columbia and Ontario, whereby GFA and/or the Subscriber may withdraw from the agreement of purchase and sale of securities to be issued under the Prospectus;

 

  (v) Top-up Adjustment Right ” means the right under section 4.2 to issue Adjustment Consideration Shares to GFA or the Subscriber;

 

  (vi) Withdrawal Period ” means the time period under securities legislation of the Provinces of British Columbia and Ontario during which GFA and/or the Subscriber may exercise the Right of Withdrawal.

 

  (b) Section 1.1(7) is deleted in its entirety and the following text is inserted in its place:

Applicable Securities Laws ” means, collectively, the applicable securities laws of the Provinces of British Columbia and Ontario, the United States of America and Australia, the respective regulations rulings, rules instruments, orders and prescribed forms thereunder and the applicable policy statements issued by the Securities Commissions;”;

 

  (c) Section 1.1(65) is deleted in its entirety and the following text is inserted in its place:

““ Securities Commissions ” means the BCSC, the OSC, the SEC and the ASIC;”;

 

- 3 -


  (d) Section 3.3 is amended by the deletion of the following text:

“, with a legend in form substantially similar to the following:

“UNLESS PERMITTED UNDER SECURITIES LEGISLATION, THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY MUST NOT TRADE THE SECURITY BEFORE [ ] 2009 [Insert the date that is 4 months and a day after the distribution date] ”; and

“THE SECURITIES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE ARE LISTED ON THE TORONTO STOCK EXCHANGE (“TSX”); HOWEVER, THE SAID SECURITIES CANNOT BE TRADED THROUGH THE FACILITIES OF TSX SINCE THEY ARE NOT FREELY TRANSFERABLE, AND CONSEQUENTLY ANY CERTIFICATE REPRESENTING SUCH SECURITIES IS NOT “GOOD DELIVERY” IN SETTLEMENT OF TRANSACTIONS ON TSX.”

and any certificate representing the Adjustment Consideration Shares will bear the same legends” ;

 

  (e) Section 6.5(6) is deleted in its entirety;

 

  (f) Sections 6.5(7)(d) and (e) are deleted in their entirety and the following text is inserted in their place:

“(d) without expanding on the representation set out in section 6.1(2), there may be restrictions on the ability to resell the Consideration Shares in certain jurisdictions and it is its responsibility to find out what those restrictions are and to comply with them before selling the Consideration Shares in those jurisdictions; and

(e) it has been advised by Eldorado that Eldorado is relying on an exemption from the requirements to sell securities through a person registered to sell securities under applicable securities legislation (including the Securities Act (British Columbia)); ”;

 

  (g) Section 7.1(8) is amended by inserting “, including the Prospectus” after the words “securities regulatory authority” ;

 

  (h) Section 8.1 is amended as follows:

 

  (i) delete the word “and” after the semi-colon in section (4);

 

  (ii) delete the full stop at the end of section (5) and insert “;” ;

 

  (iii) new sections (6) and (7) are added:

(6) the issuance to Eldorado of the Receipt which continues to be effective as of the Closing Date; and

(7) the Withdrawal Period has expired.”; and

 

- 4 -


  (iv) the reference in the last paragraph to “ sections 8.1(3) and 8.1(5) ” is amended to read: “ sections 8.1(3), 8.1(5,) 8.1(6) and 8.1(7). ”;

 

  (i) The reference in section 8.3 to “ sections 8.1(3), 8.1(4), and 8.1(5) ” is amended to read “ sections 8.1(3), 8.1(4), 8.1(5), 8.1(6) and 8.1(7) ”;

 

  (j) Section 8.4 is amended as follows:

 

  (i) delete the word “and” after the semi-colon in section (3);

 

  (ii) delete the full stop at the end of section (4) and insert “; and” ;

 

  (iii) new section (5) is added:

(5) the issuance to Eldorado of the Receipt which continues to be effective as of the Closing Date.”; and

 

  (iv) the reference in the last paragraph to “ sections 8.4(1), 8.4(2) and 8.4(3) ” is amended to read “ sections 8.4(1), 8.4(2), 8.4(3) and 8.4(5) ”;

 

  (k) The reference in section 8.6 to “ sections 8.4(3) and 8.4(4) ” is amended to read “ sections 8.4(3), 8.4(4) and 8.4(5) ”;

 

  (l)

Section 9.1 is amended by deleting: “ on the latest of firstly, the sixth (6th) Business Day following the satisfaction or waiver of the last of the conditions set out in sections 8.1 and 8.4 and secondly, July 27, 2009 .” and substituting therefore: “ on the third (3 rd ) Business Day following the satisfaction or waiver of the last of the conditions set out in sections 8.1 and 8.4 .”;

 

  (m) Section 9.2 is amended as follows:

 

  (i) delete the word “and” after the semi-colon in section (3);

 

  (ii) delete the full stop at the end of section (4) and insert “; and” ; and

 

  (iii) new section (5) is added:

“(5) a copy of the Receipt.”.

 

7. Save as herein specifically amended, the parties hereby affirm the SPSA and confirm that all other terms and conditions thereof remain in full force and effect.

 

8. The Parties agree that this Agreement will, from the date hereof, be read and construed along with the SPSA and be treated as part thereof and for such purposes and so far as may be necessary to effectuate this Agreement, the SPSA will be regarded as being hereby amended, and the SPSA as so amended together with all terms and conditions thereof will remain in full force and effect.

 

- 5 -


9. In the case of any conflict between the terms and conditions of the SPSA and the terms or conditions of this Agreement, the terms and conditions of this Agreement will prevail.

 

10. Each of the Parties will at all times and from time to time and upon reasonable request to execute and deliver all further assurances, acts and documents for the purpose of evidencing and given full force and effect to the covenants, agreements and provisions in this Agreement.

 

11. Time is of the essence of this Agreement. If the Parties agree to vary a time requirement, the time requirement so varied is of the essence of this Agreement. An agreement to vary a time requirement must be in writing.

 

12. This Agreement will be governed in all respects, including validity, interpretation and effect, by the laws of British Columbia and generally applicable in British Columbia and each Party:

 

  (a) irrevocably and unconditionally submits to and accepts the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts exercising jurisdiction in the Province of British Columbia, and any court that may hear appeals from any of those courts, for any proceeding in connection with the Agreement, subject only to the right to enforce a judgment obtained in any of those courts in any other jurisdiction; and

 

  (b) irrevocably waives any objection to the venue of any legal process commenced in the courts of British Columbia on the basis that the process has been brought in an inconvenient forum.

 

13. If anything in this Agreement in unenforceable, illegal or void, then it is severed and the rest of this Agreement remains in force. Where a provision of this Agreement is prohibited or unenforceable, the Parties must negotiate in good faith to replace the invalid provision by a provision which is in accordance with applicable laws and which must be as close as possible to the Parties’ original intent and appropriate consequential amendments (if any) will be made to this Agreement.

 

14. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts. Each counterpart is an original but the counterparts together are one and the same agreement. This Agreement is binding on the Parties on the exchange of counterparts. A copy of a counterpart sent by facsimile machine or by electronic mail:

 

  (a) must be treated as an original counterpart;

 

  (b) is sufficient evidence of the execution of the original; and

 

  (c) may be produced in evidence for all purposes in place of the original.

 

- 6 -


15. Each Person signing this Agreement as an authorized officer of a Party hereby represents and warrants that he or she is duly authorized to sign this Agreement for that Party and that this Agreement will, upon having been so executed, be binding on that Party in accordance with its terms.

Dated this      day of July, 2009.

 

E LDORADO G OLD C ORPORATION
By:  

/s/ Dawn Moss

  c/s
  Authorized Signatory  
DAWN MOSS  
VICE PRESIDENT, ADMINISTRATION & CORPORATE SECRETARY  
G OLD F IELDS A USTRALASIA (BVI) L IMITED
By:  

/s/ Colin Bird

  c/s
  Authorized Signatory  

Mr Colin Bird

 
Name (please print)  

Director

 
Office Held  

 

- 7 -

Exhibit 4.29

Private & Confidential

6 March 2009

 

   Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd
   Reg. 2006/038878/07
Mr NJ Holland    150 Helen Rd, Sandown

9 Southbend Avenue

Northcliff

2195

   Sandton, 2196
  

Postnet Suite 252

Private Bag X30500

  
   Houghton, 2041
   South Africa
   Tel +27 11 562 9700
   Dir +27 11 562 9700
   Fax +27 11 562 9838
   www.goldfields.co.za

Dear Mr Holland

LETTER OF APPOINTMENT

Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, (hereinafter also referred to as the Company), a subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited (GFL), has the pleasure in offering you the position of Chief Executive Officer with effect 1 March 2009 on the following terms and conditions:

 

1. RECORDAL

 

  1.1. You commenced employment with Gold Fields Limited (GFL) on 1 March 1998 as the Financial Director. You subsequently were appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 1 July 2002, and thereafter as Chief Executive Officer on 1 May 2008.

 

  1.2. It is recorded that contemporaneously with your employment with the Company, you are also employed by and provide services to other offshore entities in the Gold Fields Group (“the Group”), currently Gold Fields Orogen Holdings BVI Limited (“Orogen”) and Gold Fields Ghana Holdings Limited (“Ghana”) (collectively referred to as “the Offshore Companies”).

 

 

Directors: N J Holland*, Mrs I Boninelli, MD Fleischer, PA Schmidt            *British

Company Secretary: C Farrel


  1.3. In terms of an agreement between the Company and the Offshore Companies, it has been agreed that you will provide services to the Company for the number of days set out in Annexure A over the period set out in Annexure A. Annexure A shall be amended effective 1 January each year to set out the number of days that you will provide services to the Company in the following twelve month period.

 

2. DUTIES

 

  2.1. Subject to clause 1.2 above, you shall devote the whole of your time and attention, other than de minimis amounts of time devoted by you to the management of your personal affairs or to engaging in charitable or community services, during the Company’s ordinary business hours, and such reasonable amount of additional time as may be necessary, having regard to the exigencies of business from time to time, to directing and managing the business and affairs of the Group and shall in particular take charge of and superintend the business carried on by the Group, to supervise the work of and engage and dismiss executives of the Group and to see to the due performance of their duties.

 

  2.2. The only services you will in terms of this agreement be required to render to offshore subsidiaries in the Group, will be those services known as ‘shareholder functions’ in the transfer pricing context, namely those functions which are performed for the benefit of Gold Fields Limited (“GFL”), for GFL to protect its investment in its subsidiaries. All other services (referred to as ‘intra-group’ services) you may be required to render to offshore subsidiaries of the Group, will be in terms of your employment agreements with the Offshore Companies.

 

  2.3. You shall not, during your employment by the Company, be engaged either directly or indirectly, and whether as principal, agent, shareholder, or in any other manner whatsoever, in any other form of business without the previous written consent of the Board of GFL (“the Board”).

 

  2.4. You shall comply with the directions of the Board and carry out such functions and duties as are from time to time assigned to you and are consistent with your office and use your utmost endeavours to protect and promote the business and interests of the Group and to preserve its reputation and goodwill.

 


  2.5. You shall not, during your employment by the Company or thereafter, regardless of the reason for termination of your employment, use for your own benefit or for the benefit of any other person or divulge or communicate to any person or persons, except to those officials of the Group whose province it is to know the same, any of the Group’s secrets or any other confidential information which you may receive or obtain in relation to the Group’s affairs or those of their customers, associates and suppliers.

 

  2.6. You may be required to take up office with other companies and bodies which you will be required to serve diligently, with any fees or other remuneration receivable by you in such capacity as a nominee of the Group required to be paid to the appropriate Group company, unless otherwise agreed by the Board.

 

  2.7. You shall undertake such reasonable and necessary travel as may be required for purposes of carrying out your duties, it being recorded that the Company may from time to time require your spouse to accompany you when you are obliged to conduct business away from your normal place of work.

 

  2.8. You shall submit to the Board, or to any person nominated by it, such information and reports as may be required of you in connection with the performance of your duties and the business of the Group.

 

  2.9. You shall generally discharge the fiduciary duties incumbent upon you in your aforesaid position and which may in law be applicable after you vacate that position.

 

  2.10. You shall, given the international nature of the Group, make yourself available at all times to attend to the business of the Group and, to this end, ensure that you have suitable facilities at your residence to attend to business outside ordinary office hours.


3. REMUNERATION AND OTHER BENEFITS

 

  3.1. As remuneration for your services, the Company will pay you an annual total cost to company Remuneration Package as set out in Annexure A (the “Remuneration Package”), one twelfth of which shall be paid each month (“monthly Remuneration Package”). The Company, where required, shall deduct tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.2. Your Remuneration Package will consist of a mix of cash and benefits as agreed to between you and the Company in advance. The cash amount shall be paid, directly into your bank account (being any bank account in the Republic of South Africa that you may nominate from time to time) and monthly in arrears on or before the last day of each month.

 

  3.3. Your Remuneration Package is subject to annual review (but not reduction) on or before 1 January of each year by the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.4. The benefit portion of your Remuneration Package will accrue as determined by the provisions and policies applicable to the benefits elected by you from time to time.

 

  3.5. You shall be entitled to participate in the Corporate Annual Incentive Bonus Scheme, subject to the rules applicable thereto from time to time. In respect of each financial year, you shall be eligible to earn a bonus from the Company that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package in effect at the end of the applicable financial year, provided applicable performance or other targets approved by the Board for that financial year are achieved. These targets will generally be adopted, after reasonable consultation with you, by no later than 60 (sixty) days following the start of a particular financial year.

 

  3.6. If the targets contemplated in clause 3.5 above are:

 

  3.6.1. achieved, you shall be paid a bonus that equates to 50% (fifty per cent) of your Remuneration Package;


  3.6.2. exceeded, you may in addition to the bonus contemplated in clause 3.6.1 above, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee, be paid an additional bonus of up to a further 50% (fifty per cent) of your Remuneration Package; and/or

 

  3.6.3. not achieved, you may, nonetheless, be paid a bonus at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.7. Any amount due to you determined in accordance with clause 3.5 will be paid to you within 60 (sixty) days following the end of that financial year, less tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.8. It is recorded that you are a Participant in the GF Management Incentive Scheme (“the Scheme”), in respect of which no further allocations shall be made, and The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan (“the Plan”). Your participation in the Scheme and the Plan shall, at all times, be in accordance with the provisions of the Scheme and/or the Plan and the decisions of the Remuneration Committee in terms of such provisions, which decisions shall be final and binding on you.

 

  3.9. The Company shall refund to you in Rands the out-of-pocket expenses incurred by you on behalf of the Company which are substantiated by vouchers and which have been approved by the Company or are incurred in accordance with principles determined by it from time to time.

 

  3.10. You shall join the Company’s currently nominated Medical Scheme or any other medical scheme nominated by the Company from time to time, subject to the rules thereof. The Company shall pay the monthly contributions to the Medical Scheme, monthly in arrears, the costs of which form part of your Remuneration Package. Upon termination of employment for any reason, including retirement, you may, subject to the rules of the applicable medical scheme at the time, be eligible to remain a member of such medical scheme, provided that the Company shall have no obligation to make any payment of contributions to such medical scheme following such termination of employment.

 

  3.11. You will become a member of the Alexander Forbes Retirement Fund or any other such fund nominated by the Company from time to time, subject to the rules thereof. The Company shall pay the monthly contributions to the said Retirement Fund, monthly in arrears, the costs of which form part of your Remuneration Package.


  3.12. You are required to use your personal motor vehicle for the purposes of the Company in performing your duties and will be reimbursed for such use in accordance with the Company’s vehicle policy as amended from time to time.

 

  3.13. As you are regarded as a key man in the Company and exposed to exceptional personal risks, the Company may require additional permanent or temporary security arrangements to be made in regard to your safety and the safety of your immediate family. The costs of the provision of such additional security arrangements shall be borne by the Company.

 

4. ANNUAL LEAVE

 

  4.1. You shall be entitled to a number of working days paid leave (“the Local Leave Entitlement”) on full pay in respect of each twelve-month cycle of employment with the Company, as set out in Annexure A, to be taken at such time or times as mutually agreed to by the Board and in accordance with the Company’s leave policy applicable from time to time.

 

  4.2. The monthly leave entitlement that will accrue to you with respect to the Company for the applicable period is set out in Annexure A.

 

5. NON-SOLICITATION

 

  5.1. You hereby undertake that neither you nor any company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern in which you are directly or indirectly interested or employed, will for a period of 24 (twenty four) months after the termination of your employment with the Company for any reason and whether for reward or not, directly or indirectly:

 

  5.1.1. encourage or entice or incite or persuade or induce any employee of the Group, who is employed by the Group as at the date your employment with the Company terminates, to terminate his or her employment by it; or


  5.1.2. furnish any information or advice to any employee to whom clause 5.1.1 applies or to any prospective employer of such employee or use any other means which is directly or indirectly designed, or in the ordinary course of events calculated, to result in any such employee terminating his or her employment by the Group and/or becoming employed by or directly or indirectly in any way interested in or associated with any other company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern.

 

6. INVENTIONS, DISCOVERIES AND COPYRIGHT

 

  6.1. Any discovery or invention or secret process or improvement in procedure made or discovered by you in the course and scope of your employment by the Company, in connection with or in any way affecting or relating to the business of the Group or capable of being used or adapted for use by the Group or in connection with their businesses shall be disclosed to the Company and shall belong to and be the absolute property of the Company or any other company or entity nominated by it.

 

  6.2. You shall, if and when required by the Company, apply or join with the Company at its expense in applying for Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the Republic of South Africa or in any other part of the world for such discovery, invention, process or improvement and shall at the Company’s expense execute all instruments and do all things necessary for vesting the said Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the name of the Company as sole beneficial owner or in the name of such other person as the Company may nominate.

 

  6.3. Insofar as may be necessary, you assign to the Company the copyright in all present and future works eligible for copyright of which you may be the author, which works were or are created, compiled, devised or brought into being during the course and scope of your employment with the Company. No consideration will be paid by the Company to you in respect of this assignment.

 

  6.4.

All reports, manuals, budgets, indices, research papers, letters or other similar documents (the nature of which is not limited by the specific reference to the aforegoing items and which include electronic versions thereof) which are created, compiled or devised or brought into being by you or


 

come into your possession during the course and scope of your employment, and all copies thereof, shall be the property of the Company. Upon the date of termination of your employment, or earlier if required by the Company, such documents and all copies shall be returned to the Company.

 

  6.5. On termination of this agreement, you shall deliver to the Company all property in your possession or under your control belonging to the Group.

 

7. NOTICE OF TERMINATION

 

  7.1. Your employment shall continue for an indefinite period subject to you being able to terminate the employment relationship by furnishing the Board with 6 (six) calendar months written notice or the Board furnishing you with 6 (six) calendar months written notice thereof. The Company may elect to pay you in lieu of notice. The aforegoing shall not derogate from the entitlement of either party to terminate this agreement summarily on grounds permitted in law.

 

  7.2. Your employment contemplated herein shall terminate ipso facto upon you reaching the retirement age of 60 (sixty) years.

 

8. CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

  8.1.

Notwithstanding clause 7, if, at any time before the termination of your employment pursuant to this agreement a change of control of GFL shall occur and your employment pursuant to this agreement is terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such change of control, you shall be entitled to a lump sum compensatory payment equal to two and a half times your then annual Remuneration Package, plus the average of the incentive bonuses paid by the Company to you during the previous 2 (two) completed financial years, together with any other payments and/or benefits then due and payable in terms of this agreement. The agreed amounts referred to in the preceding sentence shall cover any compensation or damages you may be entitled to in terms of the Labour Relations Act, 1995, the Basic Conditions of Employment Act, 1997, and any other law (including common law) governing employment or the termination of employment. You shall be entitled for a period of 2 (two) years


 

after the date of termination of your employment, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to you in terms of that Scheme including those which may not have vested at the date of such termination. Entitlements to Awards and Allocations in terms of The Gold Fields 2005 Share Plan shall be accelerated and on the date of such termination of employment you shall be Settled with the full number of SARS and PVRS previously Allocated and Awarded to you in accordance with the provisions of that Plan and, in the case of SARS, you shall have, subject to the relevant rules of that Plan then in force, a period of 1 (one) year after the date of termination of your employment, to retain and to exercise all SARS Allocated to you in terms of that Plan. You shall furthermore be entitled to receive the Bonus Incentive earned in terms of clause 3.6 notwithstanding that the financial year concerned may not have been concluded on the basis that the bonus targets shall be deemed to have been achieved.

 

  8.2. For the purposes of this clause 8, a change of control of GFL shall mean a transaction or series of transactions, whereby directly or indirectly, any company, person or other entity and its concert parties (as envisaged, from time to time, in the Securities Regulation Code on Take-Overs and Mergers) comes to beneficially hold in aggregate more than 30% (thirty per cent) of the ordinary issued share capital of GFL.

 

  8.3. In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other re-organisation, whether or not there is a change of control, and your services are terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such consummation, the provisions of 8.1 shall apply.

 

  8.4. You shall not be entitled to the benefits set out in 8.1 should your services be terminated as the result of your dismissal on the grounds of proven fraud, theft, misappropriation of property or funds, or a related disciplinary offence involving gross dishonesty.

 

9. DIRECTORS’ AND OFFICERS’ INSURANCE

The Company hereby indemnifies you to the full extent permitted by the provisions of section 247(2) of the Companies Act, 1973, as amended, and in addition undertakes to take out and maintain at its cost


and for your benefit, such standard Directors’ and Officers’ Insurance as may be recommended by the Company’s insurance brokers, from time to time, and for such reasonable level of cover having regard to all the circumstances as may be determined by the Board, from time to time.

 

10. TAXATION

None of the provisions of this agreement shall impose any obligation on the Company to make any tax payment in your favour and you shall be required to bear and pay all monies for which you may be liable in respect of income tax or any other tax.

 

11. APPLICABLE LAWS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

 

  11.1. This agreement will be interpreted and applied in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

  11.2. Any dispute between the parties in regard to any matter arising from this agreement and your employment relationship with the Company, shall first be referred to the Remuneration Committee for resolution, failing which it shall be referred to a sub-committee of the Board comprising the majority of the Non-executive members of the Board. Should such body not be able to resolve the dispute, the dispute shall be finally resolved by arbitration conducted in accordance with the appropriate rules of the Arbitration Foundation of South Africa, by an arbitrator agreed to between the parties or, failing such agreement, appointment by that Foundation.


12. DOMICILIUM CITANDI ET EXECUTANDI

The parties choose as their domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes under this agreement the following addresses:

 

  12.1. The Company:

150 Helen Road

Sandown

Sandton

2196

JOHANNESBURG

 

  12.2. Mr NJ Holland

9 Southbend Avenue

Northcliff

2195

 

13. GENERAL

 

  13.1. In the event that your services are terminated for any reason whatsoever, the Company may deduct all amounts owing to the Company from any amounts due to you by the Company on the date your employment terminates.

 

  13.2. Subject to 1.2, this agreement, read with any applicable written policies, procedures, regulations or the like of the Company, including the Company’s Corporate Office Staff Booklet, constitutes the whole agreement between the parties in respect of your employment by the Company. In the event of any conflict between such written policies, procedures, regulations or the like and this agreement, the terms of this agreement shall prevail.

 

  13.3. No relaxation or indulgence which the Company may show to you shall in any way prejudice or be deemed to be a waiver of its rights under this agreement.

 

  13.4. The parties record that the provisions of this agreement correctly reflect their intentions.


14. RESIGNATION

On the date your employment with the Company terminates, you shall ipso facto be deemed on that date to have resigned as a director or officer of GFL, the Company and/or any other company or body in which you hold office by virtue of your employment by the Company, in which event you hereby irrevocably appoint the then secretary of the Company as your agent in rem suam to sign all such documents and to do all such acts as may be necessary to effect and implement such resignations.

 

/s/    I B ONINELLI

    

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GROUP SERVICES (PTY) LTD

    

I hereby accept the terms and conditions of employment as set out in this letter of appointment.

26/6/2009

      

Date

      

/s/    NJ H OLLAND

      

Mr NJ Holland

      

12 March 2009

  
      

Date

  


ANNEXURE A

Mr NJ Holland

This Annexure is to be read in conjunction with the specified clauses in the Letter of Appointment.

This Annexure is to be updated effective 1 January each year, and at any other time when the

applicable details are reviewed.

This Annexure is effective 1 March 2009.

 

1. In terms of Clause 1.3, the Executive shall perform services to the Company for 177 working days for the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009.

 

2. In terms of Clause 3.1, the Remuneration Package is R 4,913,000 with effect from 1 March 2009.

 

3. In terms of Clause 4.1, the Local Leave Entitlement is calculated as 177 / 227 * 24 = 18.72 days, where:

 

  177 represents the annual number of contracted working days

 

  227 represents the number of working days in the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009

 

  24 represents the total leave entitlement for a full calendar year, inclusive of all leave entitlements arising out of your contracts with the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies.

Annual leave shall accrue on a monthly basis at the rate of 1.56 working days per month.

 

/s/    I B ONINELLI

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GROUP SERVICES (PTY) LTD

   

I hereby accept the terms of this Annexure A, effective 1 March 2009.

26/6/2009

     

Date

     

/s/    NJ H OLLAND

     

Mr NJ Holland

     

12 March 2009

  
     

Date

  

Exhibit 4.30

Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited

 

 

    

Correspondence Address:

 

Maitland Services Limited

Falcon Cliff

Palace Road

Douglas

Isle of Man

 

P O Box 75, Douglas,

Isle of Man, IM99 1EP, British Isles

 

Tel: +44 (0)1624 630000

Fax: +44 (0)1624 630001

 

Private & Confidential

9 March 2009

Mr NJ Holland

9 Southbend Avenue

Northcliff

2195

Dear Mr Holland

LETTER OF APPOINTMENT

Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited (“the Company”) is pleased to offer you a position on the following terms and conditions:

 

1. RECORDAL

 

  1.1. You have been employed by Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd (“the South African Employer”), which company is a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited (“GFL”), since 1 March 2009. The terms of this employment are set out in your agreement with the South African employer.

A Company Incorporated in The British Virgin Islands

And registered as a Foreign Company in the Isle Man under Number 4685F


  1.2. Due to the international operations of the Gold Fields Group (the “Group”), you will from time to time be required to render services for the benefit of the offshore subsidiaries in the Gold Fields Group outside of South Africa. You have previously been employed by certain Group companies.

 

  1.3. With effect from 1 March 2007, you were therefore appointed as the Chairman of the Company, which will be your offshore employer for purposes of this letter. The Company and any other offshore employer in the Group by which you are employed will collectively be referred to as the “Offshore Companies”.

 

  1.4. In terms of an agreement between the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies, it has been agreed that you will be entitled to provide services to the Company for the number of days set out in Annexure A over the period set out in Annexure A. Annexure A shall be amended effective 1 January each year to set out the number of days that you will provide services to the Company in the following twelve month period.

 

  1.5. For the time that you render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies, it has been arranged with the South African Employer that it will release you from devoting the whole of your time and attention to managing the business and affairs of GFL and your South African employer and make some of your time available to render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies.

 

  1.6. These terms are recorded below and are effective, as agreed from 1 March 2009.

 

2. DUTIES

 

  2.1. You shall in terms of this agreement be required to render services for the benefit of the Company.

 

  2.2.

Subject to clause 1 above, you shall, during the time you are rendering services to the Company, devote the whole of your time and attention, other than de minimis amounts of time devoted by you to the management of your personal affairs or to engaging in charitable or


 

community services, during the Company’s ordinary business hours, and such reasonable amount of additional time as may be necessary, having regard to the exigencies of business from time to time, to managing the business and affairs of the Company and its subsidiaries.

 

  2.3. You shall not, during your employment by the Company, be engaged either directly or indirectly, and whether as principal, agent, shareholder, or in any other manner whatsoever, in any other form of business without the previous written consent of the Board of the Company (“the Board”).

 

  2.4. You shall comply with the directions of the Board and carry out such functions and duties as are from time to time assigned to you and are consistent with your office and use your utmost endeavours to protect and promote the business and interests of the Group and to preserve its reputation and goodwill.

 

  2.5. You shall not, during your employment by the Company or thereafter, regardless of the reason for termination of your employment, use for your own benefit or for the benefit of any other person or divulge or communicate to any person or persons, except to those officials of the Group whose province it is to know the same, any of the Group’s secrets or any other confidential information which you may receive or obtain in relation to the Group’s affairs or those of their customers, associates and suppliers.

 

  2.6. You may be required to take up office with other companies and bodies which you will be required to serve diligently, with any fees or other remuneration receivable by you in such capacity as a nominee of the Group required to be paid to the appropriate Group Company, unless otherwise agreed by the Board.

 

  2.7. You shall undertake such reasonable and necessary travel as may be required for purposes of carrying out your duties, it being recorded that the Company may from time to time require your spouse to accompany you when you are obliged to conduct business away from your normal place of work.


  2.8. You shall submit to the Board, or to any person nominated by it, such information and reports as may be required of you in connection with the performance of your duties and the business of the Group.

 

  2.9. You shall generally discharge the fiduciary duties incumbent upon you in your aforesaid position and which may in law be applicable after you vacate that position.

 

  2.10. You shall, given the international nature of the Group, make yourself available at all times to attend to the business of the Group.

 

3. REMUNERATION AND OTHER BENEFITS

 

  3.1. As remuneration for your services, the Company will pay you an annual total cost to company Remuneration Package as set out in Annexure A (the “Remuneration Package”), one twelfth of which shall be paid each month (“monthly Remuneration Package”). The Company, where required, shall deduct tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.2. Your Remuneration Package will consist of a mix of cash and benefits as agreed to between you and the Company in advance. The monthly cash amount shall be paid directly into your bank accounts (not exceeding two), that you may nominate from time to time, and monthly in arrears on or before the last day of each month.

 

  3.3. Your Remuneration Package is subject to annual review (but not reduction) on or before 1 January of each year by the Remuneration Committee appointed by the Board of GFL (“the Remuneration Committee”).

 

  3.4. The benefit portion of your Remuneration Package will accrue as determined by the provisions and policies applicable to the benefits elected by you from time to time.

 

  3.5.

You shall be entitled to participate in the annual GF Bonus Incentive Scheme, subject to the rules applicable thereto from time to time. In respect of each financial year, you shall be eligible to earn a bonus from the Company that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration


 

Package in effect at the end of the applicable financial year, provided applicable performance or other targets approved by the Board for that financial year are achieved. These targets will generally be adopted, after reasonable consultation with you, by no later than 60 (sixty) days following the start of a particular financial year.

 

  3.6. If the targets contemplated in clause 3.5 above are:

 

  3.6.1. achieved, you shall be paid a bonus that equates to 50% (fifty per cent) of your Remuneration Package;

 

  3.6.2. exceeded, you may in addition to the bonus contemplated in clause 3.6.1 above, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee, be paid an additional bonus of up to a further 50% (fifty per cent) of your Remuneration Package; and/or

 

  3.6.3. not achieved, you may, nonetheless, be paid a bonus at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.7. Any amount due to you determined in accordance with clause 3.6 will be paid to you within 60 (sixty) days following the end of that financial year, less tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.8. The Company shall refund to you the out-of-pocket expenses incurred by you on behalf of the Company which are substantiated by vouchers and which have been approved by the Company or are incurred in accordance with principles determined by it from time to time.

 

4. ANNUAL LEAVE

 

  4.1. You shall be entitled to a number of working days paid leave (“the Offshore Leave Entitlement”) on full pay in respect of each twelve-month cycle of employment with the Company, as set out in Annexure A, to be taken at such time or times as mutually agreed to by the Board and in accordance with the Group’s leave policy applicable from time to time.

 

  4.2. The Offshore Leave Entitlement shall be reviewed at the same time that the numbers of days for which you will be entitled to provide services in 1.4 above are reviewed, and Annexure A shall be updated accordingly.


5. NON-SOLICITATION

 

  5.1. You hereby undertake that neither you nor any company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern in which you are directly or indirectly interested or employed, will for a period of 24 (twenty four) months after the termination of your employment with the Company for any reason and whether for reward or not, directly or indirectly:

 

  5.1.1. encourage or entice or incite or persuade or induce any employee of the Group, who is employed by the Group as at the date your employment with the Company terminates, to terminate his or her employment by it; or

 

  5.1.2. furnish any information or advice to any employee to whom clause 5.1.1 applies or to any prospective employer of such employee or use any other means which is directly or indirectly designed, or in the ordinary course of events calculated, to result in any such employee terminating his or her employment by the Group and/or becoming employed by or directly or indirectly in any way interested in or associated with any other company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern.

 

6. INVENTIONS, DISCOVERIES AND COPYRIGHT

 

  6.1. Any discovery or invention or secret process or improvement in procedure made or discovered by you in the course and scope of your employment by the Company, in connection with or in any way affecting or relating to the business of the Group or capable of being used or adapted for use by the Group or in connection with their businesses shall be disclosed to the Company and shall belong to and be the absolute property of the Company or any other company or entity nominated by it.

 

  6.2.

You shall, if and when required by the Company, apply or join with the Company at its expense in applying for Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the Republic of South Africa or in any other part of the world for such discovery, invention, process or improvement and shall at


 

the Company’s expense execute all instruments and do all things necessary for vesting the said Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the name of the Company as sole beneficial owner or in the name of such other person as the Company may nominate.

 

  6.3. Insofar as may be necessary, you assign to the Company the copyright in all present and future works eligible for copyright of which you may be the author, which works were or are created, compiled, devised or brought into being during the course and scope of your employment with the Company. No consideration will be paid by the Company to you in respect of this assignment.

 

  6.4. All reports, manuals, budgets, indices, research papers, letters or other similar documents (the nature of which is not limited by the specific reference to the aforegoing items and which include electronic versions thereof) which are created, compiled or devised or brought into being by you or come into your possession during the course and scope of your employment, and all copies thereof, shall be the property of the Company. Upon the date of termination of your employment, or earlier if required by the Company, such documents and all copies shall be returned to the Company.

 

  6.5. On termination of this agreement, you shall deliver to the Company all property in your possession or under your control belonging to the Group.

 

7. NOTICE OF TERMINATION

 

  7.1. Your employment shall continue for an indefinite period subject to you being able to terminate the employment relationship by furnishing the Board with 6 (six) calendar month’s written notice or the Board furnishing you with 6 (six) calendar month’s written notice thereof. The Company may elect to pay you in lieu of notice. The aforegoing shall not derogate from the entitlement of either party to terminate this agreement summarily on grounds permitted in law.

 

  7.2. Your employment contemplated herein shall terminate ipso facto upon you reaching the retirement age of 60 (sixty) years.


8. CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

  8.1. Notwithstanding clause 7, if, at any time before the termination of your employment pursuant to this agreement a change of control of GFL shall occur and your employment pursuant to this agreement is terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such change of control, you shall be entitled to a lump sum compensatory payment equal to two and a half times your then annual Remuneration Package, plus the average of the incentive bonuses paid by the Company to you during the previous 2 (two) completed financial years, together with any other payments and/or benefits then due and payable in terms of this agreement. The agreed amounts referred to in the preceding sentence shall cover any compensation or damages you may be entitled to in terms of the Labour Relations Act, 1995, the Basic Conditions of Employment Act, 1997, and any other law (including common law) governing employment or the termination of employment. You shall be entitled for a period of 2 (two) years after the date of termination of your employment, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to you in terms of that Scheme including those which may not have vested at the date of such termination. Entitlements to Awards and Allocations in terms of The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan shall be accelerated and on the date of such termination of employment you shall be Settled with the full number of SARS and PVRS previously Allocated and Awarded to you in accordance with the provisions of that Plan and, in the case of SARS, you shall have, subject to the relevant rules of that Plan then in force, a period of 1 (one) year after the date of termination of your employment, to retain and to exercise all SARS Allocated to you in terms of that Plan. You shall furthermore be entitled to receive the Bonus Incentive earned in terms of clause 3 notwithstanding that the financial year concerned may not have been concluded on the basis that the bonus targets shall be deemed to have been achieved.

 

  8.2. For the purposes of this clause 8, a change of control of GFL shall mean a transaction or series of transactions, whereby directly or indirectly, any company, person or other entity and its concert parties (as envisaged, from time to time, in the Securities Regulation Code on Take-Overs and Mergers) comes to beneficially hold in aggregate more than 30% (thirty per cent) of the ordinary issued share capital of GFL.


  8.3. In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other re-organisation, whether or not there is a change of control, and your services are terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such consummation, the provisions of 8.1 shall apply.

 

  8.4. You shall not be entitled to the benefits set out in 8.1 should your services be terminated as the result of your dismissal on the grounds of proven fraud, theft, misappropriation of property or funds, or a related disciplinary offence involving gross dishonesty.

 

9. DIRECTORS’ AND OFFICERS’ INSURANCE

The Company hereby indemnifies you to the full extent permitted by the provisions of applicable legislation and in addition undertakes to take out and maintain at its cost and for your benefit, such standard Directors’ and Officers’ Insurance as may be recommended by the Company’s insurance brokers, from time to time, and for such reasonable level of cover having regard to all the circumstances as may be determined by the Board, from time to time.

 

10. TAXATION

None of the provisions of this agreement shall impose any obligation on the Company to make any tax payment in your favour and you shall be required to bear and pay all monies for which you may be liable in respect of income tax or any other tax in any jurisdiction.

 

11. APPLICABLE LAWS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

 

  11.1. This agreement will be interpreted and applied in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

  11.2.

Any dispute between the parties in regard to any matter arising from this agreement and your employment relationship with the Company, shall first be referred to the Remuneration Committee for resolution, failing which it shall be referred to a sub-committee of the Board


 

comprising the majority of the Non-executive members of the Board. Should such body not be able to resolve the dispute, the dispute shall be finally resolved by arbitration conducted in accordance with the appropriate rules of the Arbitration Foundation of South Africa, by an arbitrator agreed to between the parties or, failing such agreement, appointment by that Foundation.

 

12. DOMICILIUM CITANDI ET EXECUTANDI

The parties choose as their domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes under this agreement the following addresses:

 

  12.1. The Company:

9 Columbus Centre

Pelican Drive

Road Town

Tortola

BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS

 

  12.2. Mr NJ Holland

9 Southbend Avenue

Northcliff

2195

 

13. GENERAL

 

  13.1. In the event that your services are terminated for any reason whatsoever, the Company may deduct all amounts owing to the Company from any amounts due to you by the Company on the date your employment terminates.

 

  13.2. Subject to 1.2, this agreement, read with any applicable written policies, procedures, regulations or the like of the Company, including the South African Employer’s Corporate Office Staff Booklet, constitutes the whole agreement between the parties in respect of your employment by the Company. In the event of any conflict between such written policies, procedures, regulations or the like and this agreement, the terms of this agreement shall prevail.


  13.3. No relaxation or indulgence which the Company may show to you shall in any way prejudice or be deemed to be a waiver of its rights under this agreement.

 

  13.4. The parties record that the provisions of this agreement correctly reflect their intentions.

 

14. RESIGNATION

On the date your employment with the Company terminates, you shall ipso facto be deemed on that date to have resigned as a director or officer of the Company and/or any other company or body in which you hold office by virtue of your employment by the Company, in which event you hereby irrevocably appoint the then secretary of the Company as your agent in rem suam to sign all such documents and to do all such acts as may be necessary to effect and implement such resignations.

 

/s/    JH P AULEY

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GHANA HOLDINGS (BVI) LIMITED

   

I hereby accept the terms and conditions of employment as set out in this letter of appointment.

6 March 2009

     

Date

     

/s/    NJ H OLLAND

     

Mr NJ Holland

     

22 May 2009

  
     

Date

  


ANNEXURE A

Mr NJ Holland

This Annexure is to be read in conjunction with the specified clauses in the Letter of Appointment.

This Annexure is to be updated effective 1 January each year, and at any other time when the

applicable details are reviewed.

This Annexure is effective 1 March 2009.

 

1. In terms of Clause 1.3, the Executive shall perform services to the Company for 5 working days for the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009.

 

2. In terms of Clause 3.1, the Remuneration Package is US$ 26,800 with effect from 1 March 2009.

 

3. In terms of Clause 4.1, the Offshore Leave Entitlement is calculated as 5 / 227 * 24 = 0.48 days, where:

 

  5 represents the annual number of contracted working days

 

  227 represents the number of working days in the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009

 

  24 represents the total leave entitlement for a full calendar year, inclusive of all leave entitlements arising out of your contracts with the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies.

Annual leave shall accrue on a monthly basis at the rate of 0.04 working days per month.

 

4. The Executive shall be entitled to work on non-working days (eg weekends), which days shall count towards his contracted total days.

 

/s/    JH P AULEY

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GHANA HOLDINGS (BVI) LIMITED

   

I hereby accept the terms of this Annexure A, effective 1 March 2009.

6 March 2009

     

Date

     

/s/    NJ H OLLAND

     

Mr NJ Holland

     

22 May 2009

  
     

Date

  

Exhibit 4.31

Gold Fields Orogen Holding Company (BVI) Limited

 

 

  

Correspondence Address:

 

Falcon Cliff, Palace Road,

Douglas, Isle of Man, IM2 4LB,

British Isles.

 

P O Box 75, Douglas

Isle of Man, IM99 1EP, British Isles

 

Tel:        (+44 1624) 63 00 00

Fax:        (+44 1624) 63 00 01

 

Private & Confidential

6 March 2009

Mr NJ Holland

9 Southbend Avenue

Northcliff

2195

Dear Mr Holland

LETTER OF APPOINTMENT

Gold Fields Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited (“the Company”) is pleased to offer you a position on the following terms and conditions:

 

1. RECORDAL

 

  1.1. You have been employed by Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd (“the South African Employer”), which company is a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited (“GFL”), since 1 March 2009. The terms of this employment are set out in your agreement with the South African employer.

A Company Incorporated in The British Virgin Islands

And registered as a Foreign Company in the Isle of Man under number 4310F


  1.2. Due to the international operations of the Gold Fields Group (the “Group”), you will from time to time be required to render services for the benefit of the offshore subsidiaries in the Gold Fields Group outside of South Africa.

 

  1.3. With effect from 1 March 2007, you were therefore appointed as the Chairman of the Company, which will be your offshore employer for purposes of this letter. The Company and any other offshore employer in the Group by which you are employed will collectively be referred to as the “Offshore Companies”.

 

  1.4. In terms of an agreement between the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies, it has been agreed that you will be entitled to provide services to the Company for the number of days set out in Annexure A over the period set out in Annexure A. Annexure A shall be amended effective 1 January each year to set out the number of days that you will provide services to the Company in the following twelve month period.

 

  1.5. For the time that you render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies, it has been arranged with the South African Employer that it will release you from devoting the whole of your time and attention to managing the business and affairs of GFL and your South African employer and make some of your time available to render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies.

 

  1.6. These terms are recorded below and are effective, as agreed from 1 March 2009.

 

2. DUTIES

 

  2.1. You shall in terms of this agreement be required to render services for the benefit of the Company.

 

  2.2. Subject to clause 1 above, you shall, during the time you are rendering services to the Company, devote the whole of your time and attention, other than de minimis amounts of time devoted by you to the management of your personal affairs or to engaging in charitable or community services, during the Company’s ordinary business hours, and such reasonable amount of additional time as may be necessary, having regard to the exigencies of business from time to time, to managing the business and affairs of the Company and its subsidiaries.


  2.3. You shall not, during your employment by the Company, be engaged either directly or indirectly, and whether as principal, agent, shareholder, or in any other manner whatsoever, in any other form of business without the previous written consent of the Board of the Company (“the Board”).

 

  2.4. You shall comply with the directions of the Board and carry out such functions and duties as are from time to time assigned to you and are consistent with your office and use your utmost endeavours to protect and promote the business and interests of the Group and to preserve its reputation and goodwill.

 

  2.5. You shall not, during your employment by the Company or thereafter, regardless of the reason for termination of your employment, use for your own benefit or for the benefit of any other person or divulge or communicate to any person or persons, except to those officials of the Group whose province it is to know the same, any of the Group’s secrets or any other confidential information which you may receive or obtain in relation to the Group’s affairs or those of their customers, associates and suppliers.

 

  2.6. You may be required to take up office with other companies and bodies which you will be required to serve diligently, with any fees or other remuneration receivable by you in such capacity as a nominee of the Group required to be paid to the appropriate Group company, unless otherwise agreed by the Board.

 

  2.7. You shall undertake such reasonable and necessary travel as may be required for purposes of carrying out your duties, it being recorded that the Company may from time to time require your spouse to accompany you when you are obliged to conduct business away from your normal place of work.


  2.8. You shall submit to the Board, or to any person nominated by it, such information and reports as may be required of you in connection with the performance of your duties and the business of the Group.

 

  2.9. You shall generally discharge the fiduciary duties incumbent upon you in your aforesaid position and which may in law be applicable after you vacate that position.

 

  2.10. You shall, given the international nature of the Group, make yourself available at all times to attend to the business of the Group.

 

3. REMUNERATION AND OTHER BENEFITS

 

  3.1. As remuneration for your services, the Company will pay you an annual total cost to company Remuneration Package as set out in Annexure A (the “Remuneration Package”), one twelfth of which shall be paid each month (“monthly Remuneration Package”). The Company, where required, shall deduct tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.2. Your Remuneration Package will consist of a mix of cash and benefits as agreed to between you and the Company in advance. The monthly cash amount shall be paid directly into your bank accounts (not exceeding two), that you may nominate from time to time, and monthly in arrears on or before the last day of each month.

 

  3.3. Your Remuneration Package is subject to annual review (but not reduction) on or before 1 January of each year by the Remuneration Committee appointed by the Board of GFL (“the Remuneration Committee”).

 

  3.4. The benefit portion of your Remuneration Package will accrue as determined by the provisions and policies applicable to the benefits elected by you from time to time.

 

  3.5.

You shall be entitled to participate in the annual GF Bonus Incentive Scheme, subject to the rules applicable thereto from time to time. In respect of each financial year, you shall be eligible to earn a bonus from the Company that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your


 

Remuneration Package in effect at the end of the applicable financial year, provided applicable performance or other targets approved by the Board for that financial year are achieved. These targets will generally be adopted, after reasonable consultation with you, by no later than 60 (sixty) days following the start of a particular financial year.

 

  3.6. If the targets contemplated in clause 3.5 above are:

 

  3.6.1. achieved, you shall be paid a bonus that equates to 50% (fifty per cent) of your Remuneration Package;

 

  3.6.2. exceeded, you may in addition to the bonus contemplated in clause 3.6.1 above, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee, be paid an additional bonus of up to a further 50% (fifty per cent) of your Remuneration Package; and/or

 

  3.6.3. not achieved, you may, nonetheless, be paid a bonus at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.7. Any amount due to you determined in accordance with clause 3.6 will be paid to you within 60 (sixty) days following the end of that financial year, less tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.8. The Company shall refund to you the out-of-pocket expenses incurred by you on behalf of the Company which are substantiated by vouchers and which have been approved by the Company or are incurred in accordance with principles determined by it from time to time.

 

4. ANNUAL LEAVE

 

  4.1. You shall be entitled to a number of working days paid leave (“the Offshore Leave Entitlement”) on full pay in respect of each twelve-month cycle of employment with the Company, as set out in Annexure A, to be taken at such time or times as mutually agreed to by the Board and in accordance with the Group’s leave policy applicable from time to time.


  4.2. The Offshore Leave Entitlement shall be reviewed at the same time that the number of days for which you will be entitled to provide services in 1.4 above are reviewed, and Annexure A shall be updated accordingly.

 

5. NON-SOLICITATION

 

  5.1. You hereby undertake that neither you nor any company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern in which you are directly or indirectly interested or employed, will for a period of 24 (twenty four) months after the termination of your employment with the Company for any reason and whether for reward or not, directly or indirectly:

 

  5.1.1. encourage or entice or incite or persuade or induce any employee of the Group, who is employed by the Group as at the date your employment with the Company terminates, to terminate his or her employment by it; or

 

  5.1.2. furnish any information or advice to any employee to whom clause 5.1.1 applies or to any prospective employer of such employee or use any other means which is directly or indirectly designed, or in the ordinary course of events calculated, to result in any such employee terminating his or her employment by the Group and/or becoming employed by or directly or indirectly in any way interested in or associated with any other company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern.

 

6. INVENTIONS, DISCOVERIES AND COPYRIGHT

 

  6.1. Any discovery or invention or secret process or improvement in procedure made or discovered by you in the course and scope of your employment by the Company, in connection with or in any way affecting or relating to the business of the Group or capable of being used or adapted for use by the Group or in connection with their businesses shall be disclosed to the Company and shall belong to and be the absolute property of the Company or any other company or entity nominated by it.


  6.2. You shall, if and when required by the Company, apply or join with the Company at its expense in applying for Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the Republic of South Africa or in any other part of the world for such discovery, invention, process or improvement and shall at the Company’s expense execute all instruments and do all things necessary for vesting the said Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the name of the Company as sole beneficial owner or in the name of such other person as the Company may nominate.

 

  6.3. Insofar as may be necessary, you assign to the Company the copyright in all present and future works eligible for copyright of which you may be the author, which works were or are created, compiled, devised or brought into being during the course and scope of your employment with the Company. No consideration will be paid by the Company to you in respect of this assignment.

 

  6.4. All reports, manuals, budgets, indices, research papers, letters or other similar documents (the nature of which is not limited by the specific reference to the aforegoing items and which include electronic versions thereof) which are created, compiled or devised or brought into being by you or come into your possession during the course and scope of your employment, and all copies thereof, shall be the property of the Company. Upon the date of termination of your employment, or earlier if required by the Company, such documents and all copies shall be returned to the Company.

 

  6.5. On termination of this agreement, you shall deliver to the Company all property in your possession or under your control belonging to the Group.

 

7. NOTICE OF TERMINATION

 

  7.1. Your employment shall continue for an indefinite period subject to you being able to terminate the employment relationship by furnishing the Board with 6 (six) calendar month’s written notice or the Board furnishing you with 6 (six) calendar month’s written notice thereof. The Company may elect to pay you in lieu of notice. The aforegoing shall not derogate from the entitlement of either party to terminate this agreement summarily on grounds permitted in law.


  7.2. Your employment contemplated herein shall terminate ipso facto upon you reaching the retirement age of 60 (sixty) years.

 

8. CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

  8.1. Notwithstanding clause 7, if, at any time before the termination of your employment pursuant to this agreement a change of control of GFL shall occur and your employment pursuant to this agreement is terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such change of control, you shall be entitled to a lump sum compensatory payment equal to two and a half times your then annual Remuneration Package, plus the average of the incentive bonuses paid by the Company to you during the previous 2 (two) completed financial years, together with any other payments and/or benefits then due and payable in terms of this agreement. The agreed amounts referred to in the preceding sentence shall cover any compensation or damages you may be entitled to in terms of the Labour Relations Act, 1995, the Basic Conditions of Employment Act, 1997, and any other law (including common law) governing employment or the termination of employment. You shall be entitled for a period of 2 (two) years after the date of termination of your employment, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to you in terms of that Scheme including those which may not have vested at the date of such termination. Entitlements to Awards and Allocations in terms of The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan shall be accelerated and on the date of such termination of employment you shall be Settled with the full number of SARS and PVRS previously Allocated and Awarded to you in accordance with the provisions of that Plan and, in the case of SARS, you shall have, subject to the relevant rules of that Plan then in force, a period of 1 (one) year after the date of termination of your employment, to retain and to exercise all SARS Allocated to you in terms of that Plan. You shall furthermore be entitled to receive the Bonus Incentive earned in terms of clause 3 notwithstanding that the financial year concerned may not have been concluded on the basis that the bonus targets shall be deemed to have been achieved.

 

  8.2.

For the purposes of this clause 8, a change of control of GFL shall mean a transaction or series of transactions, whereby directly or indirectly, any company, person or other entity and its


 

concert parties (as envisaged, from time to time, in the Securities Regulation Code on Take-Overs and Mergers) comes to beneficially hold in aggregate more than 30% (thirty per cent) of the ordinary issued share capital of GFL.

 

  8.3. In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other re-organisation, whether or not there is a change of control, and your services are terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such consummation, the provisions of 8.1 shall apply.

 

  8.4. You shall not be entitled to the benefits set out in 8.1 should your services be terminated as the result of your dismissal on the grounds of proven fraud, theft, misappropriation of property or funds, or a related disciplinary offence involving gross dishonesty.

 

9. DIRECTORS’ AND OFFICERS’ INSURANCE

The Company hereby indemnifies you to the full extent permitted by the provisions of applicable legislation and in addition undertakes to take out and maintain at its cost and for your benefit, such standard Directors’ and Officers’ Insurance as may be recommended by the Company’s insurance brokers, from time to time, and for such reasonable level of cover having regard to all the circumstances as may be determined by the Board, from time to time.

 

10. TAXATION

None of the provisions of this agreement shall impose any obligation on the Company to make any tax payment in your favour and you shall be required to bear and pay all monies for which you may be liable in respect of income tax or any other tax in any jurisdiction.

 

11. APPLICABLE LAWS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

 

  11.1. This agreement will be interpreted and applied in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.


  11.2. Any dispute between the parties in regard to any matter arising from this agreement and your employment relationship with the Company, shall first be referred to the Remuneration Committee for resolution, failing which it shall be referred to a sub-committee of the Board comprising the majority of the Non-executive members of the Board. Should such body not be able to resolve the dispute, the dispute shall be finally resolved by arbitration conducted in accordance with the appropriate rules of the Arbitration Foundation of South Africa, by an arbitrator agreed to between the parties or, failing such agreement, appointment by that Foundation.

 

12. DOMICILIUM CITANDI ET EXECUTANDI

The parties choose as their domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes under this agreement the following addresses:

 

  12.1. The Company:

9 Columbus Centre

Pelican Drive

Road Town

Tortola

BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS

 

  12.2. Mr NJ Holland

9 Southbend Avenue

Northcliff

2195

 

13. GENERAL

 

  13.1. In the event that your services are terminated for any reason whatsoever, the Company may deduct all amounts owing to the Company from any amounts due to you by the Company on the date your employment terminates.


  13.2. Subject to 1.2, this agreement, read with any applicable written policies, procedures, regulations or the like of the Company, including the South African Employer’s Corporate Office Staff Booklet, constitutes the whole agreement between the parties in respect of your employment by the Company. In the event of any conflict between such written policies, procedures, regulations or the like and this agreement, the terms of this agreement shall prevail.

 

  13.3. No relaxation or indulgence which the Company may show to you shall in any way prejudice or be deemed to be a waiver of its rights under this agreement.

 

  13.4. The parties record that the provisions of this agreement correctly reflect their intentions.

 

14. RESIGNATION

On the date your employment with the Company terminates, you shall ipso facto be deemed on that date to have resigned as a director or officer of the Company and/or any other company or body in which you hold office by virtue of your employment by the Company, in which event you hereby irrevocably appoint the then secretary of the Company as your agent in rem suam to sign all such documents and to do all such acts as may be necessary to effect and implement such resignations.

 

/s/    JH P AULEY

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDINGS (BVI) LIMITED

   

I hereby accept the terms and conditions of employment as set out in this letter of appointment.

6 March 2009

     

Date

     

/s/    NJ H OLLAND

     

Mr NJ Holland

     

22 May 2009

  
     

Date

  


ANNEXURE A

Mr NJ Holland

This Annexure is to be read in conjunction with the specified clauses in the Letter of Appointment.

This Annexure is to be updated effective 1 January each year, and at any other time when the

applicable details are reviewed.

This Annexure is effective 1 March 2009.

 

1. In terms of Clause 1.3, the Executive shall perform services to the Company for 45 working days for the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009.

 

2. In terms of Clause 3.1, the Remuneration Package is US$ 241,200 with effect from 1 March 2009.

 

3. In terms of Clause 4.1, the Offshore Leave Entitlement is calculated as 45 / 227 * 24 = 4.8 days, where:

 

  45 represents the annual number of contracted working days

 

  227 represents the number of working days in the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009

 

  24 represents the total leave entitlement for a full calendar year, inclusive of all leave entitlements arising out of your contracts with the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies.

Annual leave shall accrue on a monthly basis at the rate of 0.4 working days per month.

 

4. The Executive shall be entitled to work on non-working days (eg weekends), which days shall count towards his contracted total days.

 

/s/    JH P AULEY

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDINGS (BVI) LIMITED

   

I hereby accept the terms of this Annexure A, effective 1 March 2009.

6 March 2009

     

Date

     

/s/    NJ H OLLAND

     

Mr NJ Holland

     

22 May 2009

  
     

Date

  

Exhibit 4.32

LOGO

September 3, 2009

Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited

Falcon Cliff

Palace Road

Douglas

Isle of Man IM2 4LB

Copy to: Mr J Pauley

Schipholweg 66A

Leiden

2316XE

Attention: Mr. Colin Bird,

We understand that you hold 27,824,654 common shares of Eldorado Gold Corporation. We are pleased to submit this offer to purchase these shares subject to the terms and conditions set out in the attached term sheet. If you accept these terms please sign the letter where indicated below and return a copy thereof to Mr. Craig King (via email at craig.king@nbfinancial.com at 416-869-1010) whereupon this letter shall become binding agreement between us.

 

Yours sincerely,
NATIONAL BANK FINANCIAL Inc.
By:  

LOGO

Mr. Craig King
Director, Equity Capital Markets

We agree with the foregoing and accept your offer this 3 rd day of September, 2009.

 

GOLD FIELDS AUSTRALASIA (BVI) LIMITED
By:  

LOGO

Mr Colin Bird

Private and Confidential


ELDORADO GOLD CORPORATION

Block Trade of Common Shares

Term Sheet

 

Issuer:    Eldorado Gold Corporation (“Eldorado” or the “Company”).
Selling

Shareholder:

   Gold Fields Australasia (BVI) Limited (“Gold Fields”).
Offer:    Offer to acquire 27,824,654 common shares (the “Shares”) of Eldorado being sold by Gold Fields.
Price:    C$11.61 per Share.
Amount:    $323,044,232.94.
Listing:    The Shares are listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX: ELD) and the NYSE-Amex Exchange (NYSE-A: EGO).
Offer Basis:    This offer is open for acceptance until 9:15 am (EST) or 3:15 pm (Johannesburg time).
Representation:    Gold Fields represents and warrants to National Bank Financial Inc. that it is the legal and beneficial owner of the Shares and the Shares will be sold free and clear of all liens, encumbrances, security interests and escrow requirements and are not subject to any hold period under Canadian securities laws or stock exchange rules.
Trade Date:    September 3, 2009.
Settlement:    Gold Fields will deliver to National Bank Financial Inc. the shares in physical form by the Settlement Date against payment by National Bank Financial Inc. of the Amount. If necessary Gold Fields will open an account with National Bank Financial Inc. to facilitate settlement of the offering
Settlement Date:    September 9, 2009.

LOGO

Exhibit 4.33

Private & Confidential

24 November 2009

 

 

 

Mr PA Schmidt

1 The Cotswolds

Malawa Rd

Sunninghill

2157

  

Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd

Reg. 2006/038878/07

150 Helen Rd,Sandown

Sandton,2196

 

Postnet Suite 252

Private Bag X30500

Houghton, 2041

South Africa

 

Tel +27 11 562 9700

Dir +27 11 562 9700

Fax +27 11 562 9838

www.goldfields.co.za

Dear Paul

LETTER OF APPOINTMENT

Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, (hereinafter also referred to as the Company), a subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited (GFL), confirms your appointment by it on the following terms and conditions:

 

1. RECORDAL

 

  1.1. You commenced employment with the Company on 21 January 1999 as Senior Financial Accountant. You subsequently were appointed as Senior Manager Finance on 1 April 2003. With effect from 1 January 2009 you were appointed as Chief Financial Officer of Gold Fields Limited (“GFL”). Effective 1 March 2009, the employing entity changed to Gold Fields Group Services of which the terms and conditions of your employment remained unchanged. You have been appointed as an Executive Director with effect from 6 November 2009, in your current capacity.

 

  1.2. It is recorded that contemporaneously with your employment with the Company, you are also employed by and provide services to other offshore entities in the Gold Fields Group (“the Group”), currently Gold Fields Orogen Holdings BVI Limited (“Orogen”) and Gold Fields Ghana Holdings Limited (“Ghana”) (collectively referred to as “the Offshore Companies”).

 

 

Directors: N J Holland*, Mrs I Boninelli, MD Fleischer, PA Schmidt             *British

Company Secretary: C Farrel


  1.3. In terms of an agreement between the Company and the Offshore Companies, it has been agreed that you will provide services to the Company for the number of days set out in Annexure A over the period set out in Annexure A. Annexure A shall be amended effective 1 January each year to set out the number of days that you will provide services to the Company in the following twelve month period.

 

  1.4. The Parties hereby wish to confirm your employment terms and conditions effective from 6 November 2009.

 

2. DUTIES

 

  2.1. Subject to clause 1.1 above, you shall devote the whole of your time and attention, other than de minimis amounts of time devoted by you to the management of your personal affairs or to engaging in charitable or community services, during the Company’s ordinary business hours, and such reasonable amount of additional time as may be necessary, having regard to the exigencies of business from time to time, to directing and managing the financial affairs of the Group.

 

  2.2. The only services you will in terms of this agreement be required to render to offshore subsidiaries in the Group, will be those services known as ‘shareholder functions’ in the transfer pricing context, namely those functions which are performed for the benefit of Gold Fields Limited (“GFL”), for GFL to protect its investment in its subsidiaries. All other services (referred to as ‘intra-group’ services) you may be required to render to offshore subsidiaries of the Group, will be in terms of your employment agreements with the Offshore Companies.

 

  2.3. You shall not, during your employment by the Company, be engaged either directly or indirectly, and whether as principal, agent, shareholder, or in any other manner whatsoever, in any other form of business without the previous written consent of the Chief Executive Officer of GFL (“the CEO”).


  2.4. You shall comply with the directions of the CEO and carry out such functions and duties as are from time to time assigned to you and are consistent with your office and use your utmost endeavours to protect and promote the business and interests of the Group and to preserve its reputation and goodwill.

 

  2.5. You shall not, during your employment by the Company or thereafter, regardless of the reason for termination of your employment, use for your own benefit or for the benefit of any other person or divulge or communicate to any person or persons, except to those officials of the Group whose province it is to know the same, any of the Group’s secrets or any other confidential information which you may receive or obtain in relation to the Group’s affairs or those of their customers, associates and suppliers.

 

  2.6. You may be required to take up office with other companies and bodies which you will be required to serve diligently, with any fees or other remuneration receivable by you in such capacity as a nominee of the Group required to be paid to the appropriate Group Company, unless otherwise agreed by the CEO.

 

  2.7. You shall undertake such reasonable and necessary travel as may be required for purposes of carrying out your duties, it being recorded that the Company may from time to time require your spouse to accompany you when you are obliged to conduct business away from your normal place of work.

 

  2.8. You shall submit to the CEO, or to any person nominated by him, such information and reports as may be required of you in connection with the performance of your duties and the business of the Group.

 

  2.9. You shall generally discharge the fiduciary duties incumbent upon you in your aforesaid position and which may in law be applicable after you vacate that position.


  2.10. You shall, given the international nature of the Group, make yourself available at all times to attend to the business of the Group and, to this end, ensure that you have suitable facilities at your residence to attend to business outside ordinary office hours.

 

3. REMUNERATION AND OTHER BENEFITS

 

  3.1. As remuneration for your services, the Company will pay you an annual total cost to company Remuneration Package as set out in Annexure A (the “Remuneration Package”), one twelfth of which shall be paid each month (“monthly Remuneration Package”). The Company, where required, shall deduct tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.2. Your Remuneration Package will consist of a mix of cash and benefits as agreed to between you and the Company in advance. The cash amount shall be paid, directly into your bank account (being any bank account in the Republic of South Africa that you may nominate from time to time) and monthly in arrears on or before the last day of each month.

 

  3.3. Your Remuneration Package is subject to annual review (but not reduction) on or before 1 January of each year by the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.4. The benefit portion of your Remuneration Package will accrue as determined by the provisions and policies applicable to the benefits elected by you from time to time.

 

  3.5. You shall be entitled to participate in the Corporate Annual Incentive Bonus Scheme, subject to the rules applicable thereto from time to time. In respect of each financial year, you shall be eligible to earn a bonus from the Company that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package in effect at the end of the applicable financial year, provided applicable performance or other targets approved by the Board for that financial year are achieved. These targets will generally be adopted, after reasonable consultation with you, by no later than 60 (sixty) days following the start of a particular financial year.


  3.6. If the targets contemplated in clause 3.5 above are:

 

  3.6.1. achieved, you shall be paid a bonus that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package;

 

  3.6.2. exceeded, you may in addition to the bonus contemplated in clause 3.6.1 above, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee, be paid an additional bonus of up to a further 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package; and/or

 

  3.6.3. not achieved, you may, nonetheless, be paid a bonus at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.7. Any amount due to you determined in accordance with clause 3.5 will be paid to you within 60 (sixty) days following the end of that financial year, less tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.8. It is recorded that you are a Participant in the GF Management Incentive Scheme (“the Scheme”), in respect of which no further allocations shall be made, and The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan (“the Plan”). Your participation in the Scheme and the Plan shall, at all times, be in accordance with the provisions of the Scheme and/or the Plan and the decisions of the Remuneration Committee in terms of such provisions, which decisions shall be final and binding on you.

 

  3.9. The Company shall refund to you in Rands the out-of-pocket expenses incurred by you on behalf of the Company which are substantiated by vouchers and which have been approved by the Company or are incurred in accordance with principles determined by it from time to time.

 

  3.10.

Unless you are a dependant on the medical scheme to which your spouse belongs, you shall join the Company’s currently nominated Medical Scheme or any other medical scheme nominated by the Company from time to time, subject to the rules thereof. The Company shall pay the monthly contributions to the Medical Scheme, monthly in arrears, the costs of which form part of your Remuneration Package. Upon termination of employment for any reason, including retirement, you may, subject to the rules of the applicable medical scheme at the time,


 

be eligible to remain a member of such medical scheme, provided that the Company shall have no obligation to make any payment of contributions to such medical scheme following such termination of employment.

 

  3.11. You will become a member of the Alexander Forbes Retirement Fund or any other such fund nominated by the Company from time to time, subject to the rules thereof. The Company shall pay the monthly contributions to the said Retirement Fund, monthly in arrears, the costs of which form part of your Remuneration Package.

 

  3.12. You are required to use your personal motor vehicle for the purposes of the Company in performing your duties and will be reimbursed for such use in accordance with the Company’s vehicle policy as amended from time to time.

 

4. ANNUAL LEAVE

 

  4.1. You shall be entitled to a number of working days paid leave (“the Local Leave Entitlement”) on full pay in respect of each twelve-month cycle of employment with the Company, as set out in Annexure A, to be taken at such time or times as mutually agreed to by the CEO and in accordance with the Company’s leave policy applicable from time to time.

 

  4.2. The monthly leave entitlement that will accrue to you with respect to the Company for the applicable period is set out in Annexure A.

 

5. NON-SOLICITATION

 

  5.1. You hereby undertake that neither you nor any company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern in which you are directly or indirectly interested or employed, will for a period of 24 (twenty four) months after the termination of your employment with the Company for any reason and whether for reward or not, directly or indirectly:

 

  5.1.1. encourage or entice or incite or persuade or induce any employee of the Group, who is employed by the Group as at the date your employment with the Company terminates, to terminate his or her employment by it; or


  5.1.2. furnish any information or advice to any employee to whom clause 5.1.1 applies or to any prospective employer of such employee or use any other means which is directly or indirectly designed, or in the ordinary course of events calculated, to result in any such employee terminating his or her employment by the Group and/or becoming employed by or directly or indirectly in any way interested in or associated with any other company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern.

 

6. INVENTIONS, DISCOVERIES AND COPYRIGHT

 

  6.1. Any discovery or invention or secret process or improvement in procedure made or discovered by you in the course and scope of your employment by the Company, in connection with or in any way affecting or relating to the business of the Group or capable of being used or adapted for use by the Group or in connection with their businesses shall be disclosed to the Company and shall belong to and be the absolute property of the Company or any other company or entity nominated by it.

 

  6.2. You shall, if and when required by the Company, apply or join with the Company at its expense in applying for Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the Republic of South Africa or in any other part of the world for such discovery, invention, process or improvement and shall at the Company’s expense execute all instruments and do all things necessary for vesting the said Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the name of the Company as sole beneficial owner or in the name of such other person as the Company may nominate.

 

  6.3. Insofar as may be necessary, you assign to the Company the copyright in all present and future works eligible for copyright of which you may be the author, which works were or are created, compiled, devised or brought into being during the course and scope of your employment with the Company. No consideration will be paid by the Company to you in respect of this assignment.


  6.4. All reports, manuals, budgets, indices, research papers, letters or other similar documents (the nature of which is not limited by the specific reference to the aforegoing items and which include electronic versions thereof) which are created, compiled or devised or brought into being by you or come into your possession during the course and scope of your employment, and all copies thereof, shall be the property of the Company. Upon the date of termination of your employment, or earlier if required by the Company, such documents and all copies shall be returned to the Company.

 

  6.5. On termination of this agreement, you shall deliver to the Company all property in your possession or under your control belonging to the Group.

 

7. NOTICE OF TERMINATION

 

  7.1. Your employment shall continue for an indefinite period subject to you being able to terminate the employment relationship by furnishing the CEO with 6 (six) calendar months’ written notice or the CEO furnishing you with 6 (six) calendar months’ written notice thereof. The Company may elect to pay you in lieu of notice. The aforegoing shall not derogate from the entitlement of either party to terminate this agreement summarily on grounds permitted in law.

 

  7.2. Your employment contemplated herein shall terminate ipso facto upon you reaching the retirement age of 60 (sixty) years.

 

8. CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

  8.1.

Notwithstanding clause 7, if, at any time before the termination of your employment pursuant to this agreement a change of control of GFL shall occur and your employment pursuant to this agreement is terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such change of control, you shall be entitled to a lump sum compensatory payment equal to twice your then annual Remuneration Package, plus the average of the incentive bonuses paid by the Company to you during the previous 2 (two) completed financial years, together with any other payments and/or benefits then due and


 

payable in terms of this agreement. The agreed amounts referred to in the preceding sentence shall cover any compensation or damages you may be entitled to in terms of the Labour Relations Act, 1995, the Basic Conditions of Employment Act, 1997, and any other law (including common law) governing employment or the termination of employment. You shall be entitled for a period of 2 (two) years after the date of termination of your employment, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to you in terms of that Scheme including those which may not have vested at the date of such termination. Entitlements to Awards and Allocations in terms of The Gold Fields 2005 Share Plan shall be accelerated and on the date of such termination of employment you shall be Settled with the full number of SARS and PVRS previously Allocated and Awarded to you in accordance with the provisions of that Plan and, in the case of SARS, you shall have, subject to the relevant rules of that Plan then in force, a period of 1 (one) year after the date of termination of your employment, to retain and to exercise all SARS Allocated to you in terms of that Plan. You shall furthermore be entitled to receive the Bonus Incentive earned in terms of clause 3.6 notwithstanding that the financial year concerned may not have been concluded on the basis that the bonus targets shall be deemed to have been achieved.

 

  8.2. For the purposes of this clause 8, a change of control of GFL shall mean a transaction or series of transactions, whereby directly or indirectly, any company, person or other entity and its concert parties (as envisaged, from time to time, in the Securities Regulation Code on Take-Overs and Mergers) comes to beneficially hold in aggregate more than 30% (thirty per cent) of the ordinary issued share capital of GFL.

 

  8.3. In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other re-organisation, whether or not there is a change of control, and your services are terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such consummation, the provisions of 8.1 shall apply.

 

  8.4. You shall not be entitled to the benefits set out in 8.1 should your services be terminated as the result of your dismissal on the grounds of proven fraud, theft, misappropriation of property or funds, or a related disciplinary offence involving gross dishonesty.


9. DIRECTORS’ AND OFFICERS’ INSURANCE

The Company hereby indemnifies you to the full extent permitted by the provisions of section 247(2) of the Companies Act, 1973, as amended, and in addition undertakes to take out and maintain at its cost and for your benefit, such standard Directors’ and Officers’ Insurance as may be recommended by the Company’s insurance brokers, from time to time, and for such reasonable level of cover having regard to all the circumstances as may be determined by the CEO, from time to time.

 

10. TAXATION

None of the provisions of this agreement shall impose any obligation on the Company to make any tax payment in your favour and you shall be required to bear and pay all monies for which you may be liable in respect of income tax or any other tax.

 

11. APPLICABLE LAWS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

 

  11.1. This agreement will be interpreted and applied in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

  11.2. Any dispute between the parties in regard to any matter arising from this agreement and your employment relationship with the Company, shall first be referred to the Remuneration Committee for resolution, failing which it shall be referred to a sub-committee of the Board comprising the majority of the Non-executive members of the Board. Should such body not be able to resolve the dispute, the dispute shall be finally resolved by arbitration conducted in accordance with the appropriate rules of the Arbitration Foundation of South Africa, by an arbitrator agreed to between the parties or, failing such agreement, appointment by that Foundation.


12. DOMICILIUM CITANDI ET EXECUTANDI

The parties choose as their domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes under this agreement the following addresses:

 

  12.1. The Company:

150 Helen Road

Sandown

Sandton

2196

JOHANNESBURG

 

  12.2 Mr P Schmidt

1 The Cotswolds

Malawa Rd

Sunninghill

2157

JOHANNESBURG

 

13. GENERAL

In the event that your services are terminated for any reason whatsoever, the Company may deduct all amounts owing to the Company from any amounts due to you by the Company on the date your employment terminates.

 

  13.1. Subject to 1.2, this agreement, read with any applicable written policies, procedures, regulations or the like of the Company, including the Company’s Corporate Office Staff Booklet, constitutes the whole agreement between the parties in respect of your employment by the Company. In the event of any conflict between such written policies, procedures, regulations or the like and this agreement, the terms of this agreement shall prevail.

 

  13.2. No relaxation or indulgence which the Company may show to you shall in any way prejudice or be deemed to be a waiver of its rights under this agreement.

 

  13.3. The parties record that the provisions of this agreement correctly reflect their intentions.


14. RESIGNATION

On the date your employment with the Company terminates, you shall ipso facto be deemed on that date to have resigned as a director or officer of GFL, the Company and/or any other company or body in which you hold office by virtue of your employment by the Company, in which event you hereby irrevocably appoint the then secretary of the Company as your agent in rem suam to sign all such documents and to do all such acts as may be necessary to effect and implement such resignations.

 

 

     

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GROUP SERVICES (PTY) LTD

   

I hereby accept the terms and conditions of employment as set out in this letter of appointment.

                         

       

Date

     

 

     

Mr P Schmidt

     

                         

 
     

Date

 


ANNEXURE A

Mr PA Schmidt

This Annexure is to be read in conjunction with the specified clauses in the Letter of Appointment.

This Annexure is to be updated effective 1 January each year, and at any other time when the

applicable details are reviewed.

This Annexure is effective 6 November 2009.

 

1. In terms of Clause 1.3, the Executive shall perform services to the Company for 182 working days for the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009.

 

2. In terms of Clause 3.1, the Remuneration Package is R 2,240,000 with effect from 1 January 2009.

 

3. In terms of Clause 4.1, the Local Leave Entitlement is calculated as 182 / 227 * 24 = 19.32 days, where:

 

182    represents the annual number of contracted working days
227    represents the number of working days in the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009
24    represents the total leave entitlement for a full calendar year, inclusive of all leave entitlements arising out of your contracts with the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies.

Annual leave shall accrue on a monthly basis at the rate of 1.61 working days per month.

 

 

     

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GROUP SERVICES (PTY) LTD

   

I hereby accept the terms of this Annexure A, effective 6 November 2009.

                         

       

Date

     

 

     

Mr PA Schmidt

     

                         

 
     

Date

 

 

Exhibit 4.34

Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited

 

 

    

Correspondence Address:

 

Maitland Services Limited

Falcon Cliff

Palace Road

Douglas

Isle of Man

 

P O Box 75, Douglas,

Isle of Man, IM99 1EP, British Isles

 

Tel:    +44 (0)1624 630000

Fax:    +44 (0)1624 630001

 

Private & Confidential

24 November 2009

Mr PA Schmidt

1 The Cotswolds

Malawa Rd

Sunninghill

2157

Dear Paul

LETTER OF APPOINTMENT

Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited (“the Company”) confirms your appointment on the following terms and conditions:

 

1. RECORDAL

 

  1.1.

With effect from 1 January 2009, you have been appointed as the Chief Financial Officer of Gold Fields Limited. Effective 1 March 2009, the employing entity changed to Gold Fields Group Services of which the terms and conditions of your employment remained unchanged. You have subsequently been appointed as an Executive Director with effect from 6 November 2009, in your current capacity of the Company, which will be your offshore

 

A Company Incorporated in The British Virgin Islands

And registered as a Foreign Company in the Isle Man under Number 4685F


 

employer for purposes of this letter. The Company and any other offshore employer in the Group by which you are employed will collectively be referred to as the “Offshore Companies”.

 

  1.2. Due to the international operations of the Gold Fields Group (the “Group”), you will from time to time be required to render services for the benefit of the offshore subsidiaries in the Gold Fields Group outside of South Africa.

 

  1.3. In terms of an agreement between the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies, it has been agreed that you will be entitled to provide services to the Company for the number of days set out in Annexure A over the period set out in Annexure A. Annexure A shall be amended effective 1 January each year to set out the number of days that you will provide services to the Company in the following twelve month period.

 

  1.4. For the time that you render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies, it has been arranged with the South African Employer that it will release you from devoting the whole of your time and attention to managing the business and affairs of GFL and your South African employer and make some of your time available to render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies.

 

  1.5. The Parties hereby wish to confirm your employment terms and conditions effective from 6 November 2009.

 

2. DUTIES

 

  2.1. You shall in terms of this agreement be required to render services for the benefit of the Company.

 

  2.2. Subject to clause 1 above, you shall, during the time you are rendering services to the Company, devote the whole of your time and attention, other than de minimis amounts of time devoted by you to the management of your personal affairs or to engaging in charitable or community services, during the Company’s ordinary business hours, and such reasonable amount of additional time as may be necessary, having regard to the exigencies of business from time to time, to managing the business and affairs of the Company and its subsidiaries.


  2.3. You shall not, during your employment by the Company, be engaged either directly or indirectly, and whether as principal, agent, shareholder, or in any other manner whatsoever, in any other form of business without the previous written consent of the Chairman of the Board of the Company (“the Chairman”).

 

  2.4. You shall comply with the directions of the Chairman and carry out such functions and duties as are from time to time assigned to you and are consistent with your office and use your utmost endeavours to protect and promote the business and interests of the Group and to preserve its reputation and goodwill.

 

  2.5. You shall not, during your employment by the Company or thereafter, regardless of the reason for termination of your employment, use for your own benefit or for the benefit of any other person or divulge or communicate to any person or persons, except to those officials of the Group whose province it is to know the same, any of the Group’s secrets or any other confidential information which you may receive or obtain in relation to the Group’s affairs or those of their customers, associates and suppliers.

 

  2.6. You may be required to take up office with other companies and bodies which you will be required to serve diligently, with any fees or other remuneration receivable by you in such capacity as a nominee of the Group required to be paid to the appropriate Group company, unless otherwise agreed by the Chairman.

 

  2.7. You shall undertake such reasonable and necessary travel as may be required for purposes of carrying out your duties, it being recorded that the Company may from time to time require your spouse to accompany you when you are obliged to conduct business away from your normal place of work.


  2.8. You shall submit to the Chairman, or to any person nominated by him, such information and reports as may be required of you in connection with the performance of your duties and the business of the Group.

 

  2.9. You shall generally discharge the fiduciary duties incumbent upon you in your aforesaid position and which may in law be applicable after you vacate that position.

 

  2.10. You shall, given the international nature of the Group, make yourself available at all times to attend to the business of the Group.

 

3. REMUNERATION AND OTHER BENEFITS

 

  3.1. As remuneration for your services, the Company will pay you an annual total cost to company Remuneration Package as set out in Annexure A (the “Remuneration Package”), one twelfth of which shall be paid each month (“monthly Remuneration Package”). The Company, where required, shall deduct tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.2. Your Remuneration Package will consist of a mix of cash and benefits as agreed to between you and the Company in advance. The monthly cash amount shall be paid directly into your bank accounts (not exceeding two), that you may nominate from time to time, and monthly in arrears on or before the last day of each month.

 

  3.3. Your Remuneration Package is subject to annual review (but not reduction) on or before 1 January of each year by the Remuneration Committee appointed by the Board of GFL (“the Remuneration Committee”).

 

  3.4. The benefit portion of your Remuneration Package will accrue as determined by the provisions and policies applicable to the benefits elected by you from time to time.

 

  3.5.

You shall be entitled to participate in the Corporate Annual Incentive Bonus Scheme, subject to the rules applicable thereto from time to time. In respect of each financial year, you shall be eligible to earn a bonus from the Company that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your


 

Remuneration Package in effect at the end of the applicable financial year, provided applicable performance or other targets approved by the Board for that financial year are achieved. These targets will generally be adopted, after reasonable consultation with you, by no later than 60 (sixty) days following the start of a particular financial year.

 

  3.6. If the targets contemplated in clause 3.5 above are:

 

  3.6.1. achieved, you shall be paid a bonus that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package;

 

  3.6.2. exceeded, you may in addition to the bonus contemplated in clause 3.6.1 above, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee, be paid an additional bonus of up to a further 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package; and/or

 

  3.6.3. not achieved, you may, nonetheless, be paid a bonus at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.7. Any amount due to you determined in accordance with clause 3.6 will be paid to you within 60 (sixty) days following the end of that financial year, less tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.8. The Company shall refund to you the out-of-pocket expenses incurred by you on behalf of the Company which are substantiated by vouchers and which have been approved by the Company or are incurred in accordance with principles determined by it from time to time.

 

4. ANNUAL LEAVE

 

  4.1. You shall be entitled to a number of working days paid leave (“the Offshore Leave Entitlement”) on full pay in respect of each twelve-month cycle of employment with the Company, as set out in Annexure A, to be taken at such time or times as mutually agreed to by the Chairman and in accordance with the Group’s leave policy applicable from time to time.


  4.2. The Offshore Leave Entitlement shall be reviewed at the same time that the number of days for which you will be entitled to provide services in 1.4 above are reviewed, and Annexure A shall be updated accordingly.

 

5. NON-SOLICITATION

 

  5.1. You hereby undertake that neither you nor any company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern in which you are directly or indirectly interested or employed, will for a period of 24 (twenty four) months after the termination of your employment with the Company for any reason and whether for reward or not, directly or indirectly:

 

  5.1.1. encourage or entice or incite or persuade or induce any employee of the Group, who is employed by the Group as at the date your employment with the Company terminates, to terminate his or her employment by it; or

 

  5.1.2. furnish any information or advice to any employee to whom clause 5.1.1 applies or to any prospective employer of such employee or use any other means which is directly or indirectly designed, or in the ordinary course of events calculated, to result in any such employee terminating his or her employment by the Group and/or becoming employed by or directly or indirectly in any way interested in or associated with any other company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern.

 

6. INVENTIONS, DISCOVERIES AND COPYRIGHT

 

  6.1. Any discovery or invention or secret process or improvement in procedure made or discovered by you in the course and scope of your employment by the Company, in connection with or in any way affecting or relating to the business of the Group or capable of being used or adapted for use by the Group or in connection with their businesses shall be disclosed to the Company and shall belong to and be the absolute property of the Company or any other company or entity nominated by it.


  6.2. You shall, if and when required by the Company, apply or join with the Company at its expense in applying for Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the Republic of South Africa or in any other part of the world for such discovery, invention, process or improvement and shall at the Company’s expense execute all instruments and do all things necessary for vesting the said Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the name of the Company as sole beneficial owner or in the name of such other person as the Company may nominate.

 

  6.3. Insofar as may be necessary, you assign to the Company the copyright in all present and future works eligible for copyright of which you may be the author, which works were or are created, compiled, devised or brought into being during the course and scope of your employment with the Company. No consideration will be paid by the Company to you in respect of this assignment.

 

  6.4. All reports, manuals, budgets, indices, research papers, letters or other similar documents (the nature of which is not limited by the specific reference to the aforegoing items and which include electronic versions thereof) which are created, compiled or devised or brought into being by you or come into your possession during the course and scope of your employment, and all copies thereof, shall be the property of the Company. Upon the date of termination of your employment, or earlier if required by the Company, such documents and all copies shall be returned to the Company.

 

  6.5. On termination of this agreement, you shall deliver to the Company all property in your possession or under your control belonging to the Group.

 

7. NOTICE OF TERMINATION

 

  7.1.

Your employment shall continue for an indefinite period subject to you being able to terminate the employment relationship by furnishing the Chairman with 6 (six) calendar month’s written notice or the Chairman furnishing you with 6 (six) calendar month’s written


 

notice thereof. The Company may elect to pay you in lieu of notice. The aforegoing shall not derogate from the entitlement of either party to terminate this agreement summarily on grounds permitted in law.

 

  7.2. Your employment contemplated herein shall terminate ipso facto upon you reaching the retirement age of 60 (sixty) years.

 

8. CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

  8.1. Notwithstanding clause 7, if, at any time before the termination of your employment pursuant to this agreement a change of control of GFL shall occur and your employment pursuant to this agreement is terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such change of control, you shall be entitled to a lump sum compensatory payment equal to twice your then annual Remuneration Package, plus the average of the incentive bonuses paid by the Company to you during the previous 2 (two) completed financial years, together with any other payments and/or benefits then due and payable in terms of this agreement. The agreed amounts referred to in the preceding sentence shall cover any compensation or damages you may be entitled to in terms of the Labour Relations Act, 1995, the Basic Conditions of Employment Act, 1997, and any other law (including common law) governing employment or the termination of employment. You shall be entitled for a period of 2 (two) years after the date of termination of your employment, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to you in terms of that Scheme including those which may not have vested at the date of such termination. Entitlements to Awards and Allocations in terms of The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan shall be accelerated and on the date of such termination of employment you shall be Settled with the full number of SARS and PVRS previously Allocated and Awarded to you in accordance with the provisions of that Plan and, in the case of SARS, you shall have, subject to the relevant rules of that Plan then in force, a period of 1 (one) year after the date of termination of your employment, to retain and to exercise all SARS Allocated to you in terms of that Plan. You shall furthermore be entitled to receive the Bonus Incentive earned in terms of clause 3 notwithstanding that the financial year concerned may not have been concluded on the basis that the bonus targets shall be deemed to have been achieved.


  8.2. For the purposes of this clause 8, a change of control of GFL shall mean a transaction or series of transactions, whereby directly or indirectly, any company, person or other entity and its concert parties (as envisaged, from time to time, in the Securities Regulation Code on Take-Overs and Mergers) comes to beneficially hold in aggregate more than 30% (thirty per cent) of the ordinary issued share capital of GFL.

 

  8.3. In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other re-organisation, whether or not there is a change of control, and your services are terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such consummation, the provisions of 8.1 shall apply.

 

  8.4. You shall not be entitled to the benefits set out in 8.1 should your services be terminated as the result of your dismissal on the grounds of proven fraud, theft, misappropriation of property or funds, or a related disciplinary offence involving gross dishonesty.

 

9. DIRECTORS’ AND OFFICERS’ INSURANCE

The Company hereby indemnifies you to the full extent permitted by the provisions of applicable legislation and in addition undertakes to take out and maintain at its cost and for your benefit, such standard Directors’ and Officers’ Insurance as may be recommended by the Company’s insurance brokers, from time to time, and for such reasonable level of cover having regard to all the circumstances as may be determined by the Chairman, from time to time.

 

10. TAXATION

None of the provisions of this agreement shall impose any obligation on the Company to make any tax payment in your favour and you shall be required to bear and pay all monies for which you may be liable in respect of income tax or any other tax in any jurisdiction.


11. APPLICABLE LAWS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

 

  11.1. This agreement will be interpreted and applied in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

  11.2. Any dispute between the parties in regard to any matter arising from this agreement and your employment relationship with the Company, shall first be referred to the Remuneration Committee for resolution, failing which it shall be referred to a sub-committee of the Board comprising the majority of the Non-executive members of the Board. Should such body not be able to resolve the dispute, the dispute shall be finally resolved by arbitration conducted in accordance with the appropriate rules of the Arbitration Foundation of South Africa, by an arbitrator agreed to between the parties or, failing such agreement, appointment by that Foundation.

 

12. DOMICILIUM CITANDI ET EXECUTANDI

The parties choose as their domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes under this agreement the following addresses:

 

  12.1. The Company:

9 Columbus Centre

Pelican Drive

Road Town

Tortola

BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS

 

  12.2 Mr P Schmidt

1 The Cotswolds

Malawa Rd

Sunninghill

2157

JOHANNESBURG


13. GENERAL

 

  13.1. In the event that your services are terminated for any reason whatsoever, the Company may deduct all amounts owing to the Company from any amounts due to you by the Company on the date your employment terminates.

 

  13.2. Subject to 1.2, this agreement, read with any applicable written policies, procedures, regulations or the like of the Company, including the South African Employer’s Corporate Office Staff Booklet, constitutes the whole agreement between the parties in respect of your employment by the Company. In the event of any conflict between such written policies, procedures, regulations or the like and this agreement, the terms of this agreement shall prevail.

 

  13.3. No relaxation or indulgence which the Company may show to you shall in any way prejudice or be deemed to be a waiver of its rights under this agreement.

 

  13.4. The parties record that the provisions of this agreement correctly reflect their intentions.

 

14. RESIGNATION

On the date your employment with the Company terminates, you shall ipso facto be deemed on that date to have resigned as a director or officer of the Company and/or any other company or body in which you hold office by virtue of your employment by the Company, in which event you hereby irrevocably appoint the then secretary of the Company as your agent in rem suam to sign all such documents and to do all such acts as may be necessary to effect and implement such resignations.


 

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GHANA HOLDINGS (BVI) LIMITED

    I hereby accept the terms and conditions of employment as set out in this letter of appointment.

 

   

 

Date     Mr P Schmidt
   

 

    Date


ANNEXURE A

Mr PA Schmidt

This Annexure is to be read in conjunction with the specified clauses in the Letter of

Appointment. This Annexure is to be updated effective 1 January each year, and at any other time

when the applicable details are reviewed.

This Annexure is effective 6 November 2009.

 

1. In terms of Clause 1.3, the Executive shall perform services to the Company for 5 working days for the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009.

 

2. In terms of Clause 3.1, the Remuneration Package is US$ 5,600 with effect from 1 January 2009.

 

3. In terms of Clause 4.1, the Offshore Leave Entitlement is calculated as 5 / 227 * 24 = 0.48 days, where:

 

  5 represents the annual number of contracted working days

 

  227 represents the number of working days in the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009

 

  24 represents the total leave entitlement for a full calendar year, inclusive of all leave entitlements arising out of your contracts with the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies.

Annual leave shall accrue on a monthly basis at the rate of 0.04 working days per month.

 

4. The Executive shall be entitled to work on non-working days (eg weekends), which days shall count towards his contracted total days.

 

 

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS GHANA HOLDINGS (BVI) LIMITED

    I hereby accept the terms of this Annexure A, effective 6 November 2009.

 

   

 

Date     Mr PA Schmidt
   

 

    Date

Exhibit 4.35

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

 

 

    

Correspondence Address:

 

Falcon Cliff, Palace Road,

Douglas, Isle of Man, IM2 4LB,

British Isles.

 

P O Box 75, Douglas,

Isle of Man, IM99 1EP, British Isles

 

Tel:    (+44 1624) 63 00 00

Fax:    (+44 1624) 63 00 01

 

Private & Confidential

24 November 2009

Mr PA Schmidt

1 The Cotswolds

Malawa Rd

Sunninghill

2157

Dear Paul

LETTER OF APPOINTMENT

Gold Fields Orogen Holdings BVI Limited (“the Company”) confirms your appointment on the following terms and conditions:

 

1. RECORDAL

 

  1.1. With effect from 1 January 2009, you have been appointed as the Chief Financial Officer of Gold Fields Limited. Effective 1 March 2009, the employing entity changed to Gold Fields Group Services of which the terms and conditions of your employment remained unchanged. You have subsequently been appointed as an Executive Director with effect from 6 November 2009, in your current capacity of the Company, which will be your offshore employer for purposes of this letter. The Company and any other offshore employer in the Group by which you are employed will collectively be referred to as the “Offshore Companies”.

A Company Incorporated in The British Virgin Islands


  1.2. Due to the international operations of the Gold Fields Group (the “Group”), you will from time to time be required to render services for the benefit of the offshore subsidiaries in the Gold Fields Group outside of South Africa.

 

  1.3. In terms of an agreement between the South African Employer and the Offshore Companies, it has been agreed that you will be entitled to provide services to the Company for the number of days set out in Annexure A over the period set out in Annexure A. Annexure A shall be amended effective 1 January each year to set out the number of days that you will provide services to the Company in the following twelve month period.

 

  1.4. For the time that you render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies, it has been arranged with the South African Employer that it will release you from devoting the whole of your time and attention to managing the business and affairs of GFL and your South African employer and make some of your time available to render services for the benefit of the Offshore Companies.

 

  1.5. The Parties hereby wish to confirm your employment terms and conditions effective from 6 November 2009.

 

2. DUTIES

 

  2.1. You shall in terms of this agreement be required to render services for the benefit of the Company.

 

  2.2.

Subject to clause 1 above, you shall, during the time you are rendering services to the Company, devote the whole of your time and attention, other than de minimis amounts of time devoted by you to the management of your personal affairs or to engaging in charitable or


 

community services, during the Company’s ordinary business hours, and such reasonable amount of additional time as may be necessary, having regard to the exigencies of business from time to time, to managing the business and affairs of the Company and its subsidiaries.

 

  2.3. You shall not, during your employment by the Company, be engaged either directly or indirectly, and whether as principal, agent, shareholder, or in any other manner whatsoever, in any other form of business without the previous written consent of the Chairman of the Board of the Company (“the Chairman”).

 

  2.4. You shall comply with the directions of the Chairman and carry out such functions and duties as are from time to time assigned to you and are consistent with your office and use your utmost endeavours to protect and promote the business and interests of the Group and to preserve its reputation and goodwill.

 

  2.5. You shall not, during your employment by the Company or thereafter, regardless of the reason for termination of your employment, use for your own benefit or for the benefit of any other person or divulge or communicate to any person or persons, except to those officials of the Group whose province it is to know the same, any of the Group’s secrets or any other confidential information which you may receive or obtain in relation to the Group’s affairs or those of their customers, associates and suppliers.

 

  2.6. You may be required to take up office with other companies and bodies which you will be required to serve diligently, with any fees or other remuneration receivable by you in such capacity as a nominee of the Group required to be paid to the appropriate Group Company, unless otherwise agreed by the Chairman.

 

  2.7. You shall undertake such reasonable and necessary travel as may be required for purposes of carrying out your duties, it being recorded that the Company may from time to time require your spouse to accompany you when you are obliged to conduct business away from your normal place of work.


  2.8. You shall submit to the Chairman, or to any person nominated by him, such information and reports as may be required of you in connection with the performance of your duties and the business of the Group.

 

  2.9. You shall generally discharge the fiduciary duties incumbent upon you in your aforesaid position and which may in law be applicable after you vacate that position.

 

  2.10. You shall, given the international nature of the Group, make yourself available at all times to attend to the business of the Group.

 

3. REMUNERATION AND OTHER BENEFITS

 

  3.1. As remuneration for your services, the Company will pay you an annual total cost to company Remuneration Package as set out in Annexure A (the “Remuneration Package”), one twelfth of which shall be paid each month (“monthly Remuneration Package”). The Company, where required, shall deduct tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.2. Your Remuneration Package will consist of a mix of cash and benefits as agreed to between you and the Company in advance. The monthly cash amount shall be paid directly into your bank accounts (not exceeding two), that you may nominate from time to time, and monthly in arrears on or before the last day of each month.

 

  3.3. Your Remuneration Package is subject to annual review (but not reduction) on or before 1 January of each year by the Remuneration Committee appointed by the Board of GFL (“the Remuneration Committee”).

 

  3.4. The benefit portion of your Remuneration Package will accrue as determined by the provisions and policies applicable to the benefits elected by you from time to time.


  3.5. You shall be entitled to participate in the Corporate Annual Incentive Bonus Scheme, subject to the rules applicable thereto from time to time. In respect of each financial year, you shall be eligible to earn a bonus from the Company that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package in effect at the end of the applicable financial year, provided applicable performance or other targets approved by the Board for that financial year are achieved. These targets will generally be adopted, after reasonable consultation with you, by no later than 60 (sixty) days following the start of a particular financial year.

 

  3.6. If the targets contemplated in clause 3.5 above are:

 

  3.6.1. achieved, you shall be paid a bonus that equates to 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package;

 

  3.6.2. exceeded, you may in addition to the bonus contemplated in clause 3.6.1 above, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee, be paid an additional bonus of up to a further 50% (fifty percent) of your Remuneration Package; and/or

 

  3.6.3. not achieved, you may, nonetheless, be paid a bonus at the sole and absolute discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

 

  3.7. Any amount due to you determined in accordance with clause 3.6 will be paid to you within 60 (sixty) days following the end of that financial year, less tax and other lawful deductions.

 

  3.8. The Company shall refund to you the out-of-pocket expenses incurred by you on behalf of the Company which are substantiated by vouchers and which have been approved by the Company or are incurred in accordance with principles determined by it from time to time.

 

4. ANNUAL LEAVE

 

  4.1. You shall be entitled to a number of working days paid leave (“the Offshore Leave Entitlement”) on full pay in respect of each twelve-month cycle of employment with the Company, as set out in Annexure A, to be taken at such time or times as mutually agreed to by the Chairman and in accordance with the Group’s leave policy applicable from time to time.


  4.2. The Offshore Leave Entitlement shall be reviewed at the same time that the numbers of days for which you will be entitled to provide services in 1.4 above are reviewed, and Annexure A shall be updated accordingly.

 

5. NON-SOLICITATION

 

  5.1. You hereby undertake that neither you nor any company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern in which you are directly or indirectly interested or employed, will for a period of 24 (twenty four) months after the termination of your employment with the Company for any reason and whether for reward or not, directly or indirectly:

 

  5.1.1. encourage or entice or incite or persuade or induce any employee of the Group, who is employed by the Group as at the date your employment with the Company terminates, to terminate his or her employment by it; or

 

  5.1.2. furnish any information or advice to any employee to whom clause 5.1.1 applies or to any prospective employer of such employee or use any other means which is directly or indirectly designed, or in the ordinary course of events calculated, to result in any such employee terminating his or her employment by the Group and/or becoming employed by or directly or indirectly in any way interested in or associated with any other company, close corporation, firm, undertaking or concern.

 

6. INVENTIONS, DISCOVERIES AND COPYRIGHT

 

  6.1.

Any discovery or invention or secret process or improvement in procedure made or discovered by you in the course and scope of your employment by the Company, in connection with or in


 

any way affecting or relating to the business of the Group or capable of being used or adapted for use by the Group or in connection with their businesses shall be disclosed to the Company and shall belong to and be the absolute property of the Company or any other company or entity nominated by it.

 

  6.2. You shall, if and when required by the Company, apply or join with the Company at its expense in applying for Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the Republic of South Africa or in any other part of the world for such discovery, invention, process or improvement and shall at the Company’s expense execute all instruments and do all things necessary for vesting the said Letters Patent or other equivalent protection in the name of the Company as sole beneficial owner or in the name of such other person as the Company may nominate.

 

  6.3. Insofar as may be necessary, you assign to the Company the copyright in all present and future works eligible for copyright of which you may be the author, which works were or are created, compiled, devised or brought into being during the course and scope of your employment with the Company. No consideration will be paid by the Company to you in respect of this assignment.

 

  6.4. All reports, manuals, budgets, indices, research papers, letters or other similar documents (the nature of which is not limited by the specific reference to the aforegoing items and which include electronic versions thereof) which are created, compiled or devised or brought into being by you or come into your possession during the course and scope of your employment, and all copies thereof, shall be the property of the Company. Upon the date of termination of your employment, or earlier if required by the Company, such documents and all copies shall be returned to the Company.

 

  6.5. On termination of this agreement, you shall deliver to the Company all property in your possession or under your control belonging to the Group.


7. NOTICE OF TERMINATION

 

  7.1. Your employment shall continue for an indefinite period subject to you being able to terminate the employment relationship by furnishing the Chairman with 6 (six) calendar months’ written notice or the Chairman furnishing you with 6 (six) calendar months’ written notice thereof. The Company may elect to pay you in lieu of notice. The aforegoing shall not derogate from the entitlement of either party to terminate this agreement summarily on grounds permitted in law.

 

  7.2. Your employment contemplated herein shall terminate ipso facto upon you reaching the retirement age of 60 (sixty) years.

 

8. CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

  8.1.

Notwithstanding clause 7, if, at any time before the termination of your employment pursuant to this agreement a change of control of GFL shall occur and your employment pursuant to this agreement is terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such change of control, you shall be entitled to a lump sum compensatory payment equal to twice your then annual Remuneration Package, plus the average of the incentive bonuses paid by the Company to you during the previous 2 (two) completed financial years, together with any other payments and/or benefits then due and payable in terms of this agreement. The agreed amounts referred to in the preceding sentence shall cover any compensation or damages you may be entitled to in terms of the Labour Relations Act, 1995, the Basic Conditions of Employment Act, 1997, and any other law (including common law) governing employment or the termination of employment. You shall be entitled for a period of 2 (two) years after the date of termination of your employment, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to you in terms of that Scheme including those which may not have vested at the date of such termination. Entitlements to Awards and Allocations in terms of The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan shall be accelerated and on the date of such termination of employment you shall be Settled with the full number of SARS and PVRS previously Allocated and Awarded to


 

you in accordance with the provisions of that Plan and, in the case of SARS, you shall have, subject to the relevant rules of that Plan then in force, a period of 1 (one) year after the date of termination of your employment, to retain and to exercise all SARS Allocated to you in terms of that Plan. You shall furthermore be entitled to receive the Bonus Incentive earned in terms of clause 3 notwithstanding that the financial year concerned may not have been concluded on the basis that the bonus targets shall be deemed to have been achieved.

 

  8.2. For the purposes of this clause 8, a change of control of GFL shall mean a transaction or series of transactions, whereby directly or indirectly, any company, person or other entity and its concert parties (as envisaged, from time to time, in the Securities Regulation Code on Take-Overs and Mergers) comes to beneficially hold in aggregate more than 30% (thirty per cent) of the ordinary issued share capital of GFL.

 

  8.3. In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other re-organisation, whether or not there is a change of control, and your services are terminated by the Company, directly or constructively, within 12 (twelve) months of the effective date of such consummation, the provisions of 8.1 shall apply.

 

  8.4. You shall not be entitled to the benefits set out in 8.1 should your services be terminated as the result of your dismissal on the grounds of proven fraud, theft, misappropriation of property or funds, or a related disciplinary offence involving gross dishonesty.

 

9. DIRECTORS’ AND OFFICERS’ INSURANCE

The Company hereby indemnifies you to the full extent permitted by the provisions of applicable legislation and in addition undertakes to take out and maintain at its cost and for your benefit, such standard Directors’ and Officers’ Insurance as may be recommended by the Company’s insurance brokers, from time to time, and for such reasonable level of cover having regard to all the circumstances as may be determined by the Chairman, from time to time.


10. TAXATION

None of the provisions of this agreement shall impose any obligation on the Company to make any tax payment in your favour and you shall be required to bear and pay all monies for which you may be liable in respect of income tax or any other tax in any jurisdiction.

 

11. APPLICABLE LAWS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

 

  11.1. This agreement will be interpreted and applied in accordance with the laws of the Republic of South Africa.

 

  11.2. Any dispute between the parties in regard to any matter arising from this agreement and your employment relationship with the Company, shall first be referred to the Remuneration Committee for resolution, failing which it shall be referred to a sub-committee of the Board comprising the majority of the Non-executive members of the Board. Should such body not be able to resolve the dispute, the dispute shall be finally resolved by arbitration conducted in accordance with the appropriate rules of the Arbitration Foundation of South Africa, by an arbitrator agreed to between the parties or, failing such agreement, appointment by that Foundation.

 

12. DOMICILIUM CITANDI ET EXECUTANDI

The parties choose as their domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes under this agreement the following addresses:

 

  12.1. The Company:

9 Columbus Centre

Pelican Drive

Road Town

Tortola

BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS


  12.2 Mr P Schmidt

1 The Cotswolds

Malawa Rd

Sunninghill

2157

JOHANNESBURG

 

13. GENERAL

 

  13.1. In the event that your services are terminated for any reason whatsoever, the Company may deduct all amounts owing to the Company from any amounts due to you by the Company on the date your employment terminates.

 

  13.2. Subject to 1.2, this agreement, read with any applicable written policies, procedures, regulations or the like of the Company, including the South African Employer’s Corporate Office Staff Booklet, constitutes the whole agreement between the parties in respect of your employment by the Company. In the event of any conflict between such written policies, procedures, regulations or the like and this agreement, the terms of this agreement shall prevail.

 

  13.3. No relaxation or indulgence which the Company may show to you shall in any way prejudice or be deemed to be a waiver of its rights under this agreement.

 

  13.4. The parties record that the provisions of this agreement correctly reflect their intentions.

 

14. RESIGNATION

On the date your employment with the Company terminates, you shall ipso facto be deemed on that date to have resigned as a director or officer of the Company and/or any other company or body in which you hold office by virtue of your employment by the Company, in which event you hereby irrevocably appoint the then secretary of the Company as your agent in rem suam to sign all such documents and to do all such acts as may be necessary to effect and implement such resignations.


 

   

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDINGS BVI LIMITED

    I hereby accept the terms and conditions of employment as set out in this letter of appointment.

 

   

 

Date     Mr P Schmidt
   

 

    Date


ANNEXURE A

Mr PA Schmidt

This Annexure is to be read in conjunction with the specified clauses in the Letter of Appointment.

This Annexure is to be updated effective 1 January each year, and at any other time when

the applicable details are reviewed.

This Annexure is effective 6 November 2009.

 

1. In terms of Clause 1.4, the Executive shall perform services to the Company for 40 working days for the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009.

 

2. In terms of Clause 3.1, the Remuneration Package is $ 50,400 with effect from 1 January 2009.

 

3. In terms of Clause 4.1, the number of working days paid leave is calculated as 40 / 227 * 24 = 4.20 days, where:

 

  40 represents the number of contracted working days

 

  227 represents the number of working days in the period 1 January 2009 to 31 December 2009

 

  24 represents the leave entitlement for a full calendar year

Annual leave shall accrue on a monthly basis at the rate of 0.35 working days per month.

 

4. The Executive shall be entitled to work on non-working days (eg weekends), which days shall count towards his contracted total days.

 

 

   

For and on behalf of

OROGEN HOLDINGS (BVI) LIMITED

    I hereby accept the terms of this Annexure A, effective 6 November 2009.

 

   

 

Date     Mr PA Schmidt
   

 

    Date

Exhibit 8.1

AMENDED LIST OF SIGNIFICANT SUBSIDIARIES OF GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(AS OF JUNE 30, 2009)

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in South Africa

GFL Mining Services Limited, incorporated in South Africa

Gold Fields Group Services Limited, incorporated in South Africa

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa (1)

GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Limited, incorporated in South Africa (2)

Gold Fields Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Ghana Holdings Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Ghana Limited, incorporated in Ghana

Abosso Goldfields Limited, incorporated in Ghana

Gold Fields Australasia Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Australia Pty Limited, incorporated in Australia

St. Ives Gold Mining Company (Pty) Limited, incorporated in Australia

Agnew Gold Mining Company (Pty) Limited, incorporated in Australia

Gold Fields Corona BVI Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields La Cima S.A., incorporated in Peru

Gold Fields Exploration B.V., incorporated in the Netherlands

Gold Fields Finland O.Y., incorporated in Finland

Gold Fields Artic Platinum O.Y, incorporated in Finland

Gold Fields Netherlands Services B.V., incorporated in the Netherlands (3)

 

Notes:

(1) In fiscal 2007, Western Areas Limited changed its name to Gold Fields Operations Limited.
(2) In fiscal 2007, Barrick Gold South Africa (Pty) Limited changed its name to GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Limited.
(3) In fiscal 2007, Gold Fields Venezuela Holding B.V. changed its name to Gold Fields Netherlands Services B.V.

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATIONS

I, Nicholas J. Holland, the Chief Executive Officer of Gold Fields Limited, certify that:

 

1 I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited;

 

2 Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3 Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

 

1


  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: December 3, 2009

 

/s/ Nicholas J. Holland

Nicholas J. Holland
Chief Executive Officer

 

 

2

Exhibit 12.2

CERTIFICATIONS

I, Paul A. Schmidt, the Chief Financial Officer of Gold Fields Limited, certify that:

 

1 I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited;

 

2 Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3 Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

 

1


  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: December 3, 2009

 

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

Paul A. Schmidt
Chief Financial Officer

 

 

2

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

(18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350)

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited (the “ Company ”) for the period ended June 30, 2009 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “ Report ”), I, Nicholas J. Holland, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1 The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2 The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

Date: December 3, 2009

 

/s/ Nicholas J. Holland

Nicholas J. Holland
Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 13.2

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

(18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350)

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited (the “ Company ”) for the period ended June 30, 2009 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “ Report ”), I, Paul A. Schmidt, Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1 The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2 The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

Date: December 3, 2009

 

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

Paul A. Schmidt
Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 99.1

 

 

THIS DOCUMENT IS IMPORTANT AND REQUIRES YOUR IMMEDIATE ATTENTION. If you are in any doubt as to the action you should take, you are recommended to seek your own personal financial advice immediately from your stockbroker, bank manager, solicitor, accountant or other independent professional adviser who, if you are taking advice in Ireland, is duly authorised under the European Communities (Markets in Financial Instruments) Regulations 2007 or, if you are taking advice in the United Kingdom, is duly authorised under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 or, if you are taking advice elsewhere, from another appropriately authorised independent financial adviser.

If you have sold or otherwise transferred all of your Glencar Shares, please forward this document, together with the Form of Acceptance, at once to the purchaser or transferee or to the stockbroker, bank or other agent through whom the sale or transfer was effected, for onward transmission to the purchaser or transferee. However, these documents should not be forwarded or transmitted in or into any Restricted Jurisdiction. If you have sold or otherwise transferred only part of your holding of Glencar Shares, you should retain these documents and consult the stockbroker, bank or other agent through whom the sale or transfer was effected.

The Offer is not being made, directly or indirectly, in or into any Restricted Jurisdiction, or by the use of the mails, or by any means or instrumentality (including, without limitation, telephonically or electronically) of interstate or foreign commerce, or by any facility of a national securities exchange of any Restricted Jurisdiction, and the Offer will not be capable of acceptance by any such means, instrumentality or facility from or within any Restricted Jurisdiction. Accordingly, copies of this document, the Form of Acceptance and any related documents are not being, and must not be, mailed or otherwise distributed or sent in, into or from any Restricted Jurisdiction and persons receiving such documents (including custodians, nominees and trustees) must not distribute or send them in, into or from any Restricted Jurisdiction. Failure to observe these requirements may invalidate any purported acceptance of the Offer. Notwithstanding the foregoing restrictions, Gold Fields reserves the right to permit the Offer to be accepted if, in its sole discretion, it is satisfied that the transaction in question is exempt from or not subject to the legislation or regulation giving rise to the restrictions in question. Failure to comply with the above restrictions may constitute a violation of relevant securities law.

 

 

Recommended Cash Offer

by

Gold Fields Metals BV

for

Glencar Mining plc

 

 

This document should be read as a whole and in conjunction with the accompanying Form of Acceptance. Appendix IV contains the definitions of certain terms used in this document and the Form of Acceptance.

Your attention is drawn to the letter of recommendation from Sean Finlay, the Chairman of Glencar, set out on pages 3 to 9 of this document, which explains why the Board of Glencar are unanimously recommending that Glencar Shareholders accept the Offer.

The procedure for acceptance of the Offer is set out in paragraph 17 of Part II of this document and in the Form of Acceptance. A reply-paid envelope for Ireland and the UK is enclosed for your convenience. To accept the Offer in respect of Glencar Shares held in certificated form, the Form of Acceptance should be completed, signed, witnessed and returned, together with your share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title, by post or (during normal business hours only) by hand to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954 Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland as soon as possible and in any event so as to be received by no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. To accept the Offer in respect of Glencar Shares held in uncertificated form (that is to say, in CREST), the Form of Acceptance should be completed, signed, witnessed and returned by post or (during normal business hours only) by hand to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954 Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland as soon as possible and in any event so as to be received by no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009, and by following the procedure set out in paragraph 17(d) of Part II of this document so that the TTE instruction settles no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. If you are a CREST sponsored member, you must refer to your CREST sponsor as only your CREST sponsor will be able to send the necessary TTE instruction to CRESTCo.

Canaccord Adams, which is authorised and regulated in the United Kingdom by the Financial Services Authority, is acting exclusively for Gold Fields and no one else in connection with the Offer and Canaccord Adams will not regard any other person as a client in relation to the Offer and will not be responsible to anyone other than Gold Fields for providing the protections afforded exclusively to its clients or for providing advice in relation to the Offer, the contents of this Offer Document, the Form of Acceptance or any other matters referred to therein.

Davy Corporate Finance, which is regulated by the Financial Regulator, is acting exclusively for Glencar and no one else in connection with the Offer and Davy Corporate Finance will not regard any other person as a client in relation to the Offer and will not be responsible to anyone other than Glencar for providing the protections afforded exclusively to its clients or for providing advice in relation to the Offer, the contents of this Offer Document, the Form of Acceptance or any other matters referred to therein.

If you are in any doubt as to the procedure for acceptance of the Offer or require assistance with completion of the Form of Acceptance, please contact Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited by telephone on + 353 1 447 5472.

 

 


Forward-looking statements

This document includes “forward-looking statements” concerning Glencar, the Glencar Group, Gold Fields, Gold Fields Limited and the Gold Fields Group. These statements are based on the current expectations of the management of Glencar, the Glencar Group, Gold Fields, Gold Fields Limited and the Gold Fields Group, as the case may be, and are naturally subject to uncertainty and changes in circumstances. Forward-looking statements include, without limitation, statements typically containing words such as “intends”, “expects”, “anticipates”, “targets”, “estimates” and words of similar import. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will occur in the future. Given these risks and uncertainties, investors should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements as a prediction of actual results. Important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from estimates or projections contained in the forward-looking statements include, without limitation: overall economic and business conditions in South Africa, Ghana, Australia, Peru, Mali and elsewhere; the ability to achieve anticipated efficiencies and other cost savings in connection with past and future acquisitions; the success of exploration and development activities; decreases in the market price of gold or copper; the occurrence of hazards associated with underground and surface gold mining; the occurrence of labour disruptions; availability, terms and deployment of capital or credit; changes in relevant government regulations, particularly environmental regulations and potential new legislation affecting mining and mineral rights; fluctuations in exchange rates, currency devaluations and other macroeconomic monetary policies; political instability in South Africa, Ghana, Peru, Mali or regionally in Africa or South America; the inability to obtain necessary regulatory approvals relating to the Offer or to obtain them on acceptable terms; the inability to successfully integrate Glencar within the Gold Fields Group or to realise synergies from such integration; costs related to the acquisition of Glencar; and the economic environment of the industries in which the Gold Fields Group and the Glencar Group operate. None of Glencar, the Glencar Group, Gold Fields, Gold Fields Limited or the Gold Fields Group undertake any obligation to update publicly or revise forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except to the extent legally required.

Notice to shareholders in the United States

The Offer described in this Offer Document is made for the shares of Glencar, a company organised under the laws of Ireland, and is subject to the laws of Ireland.

The Offer is being made for securities of an Irish company and is subject to Irish disclosure requirements which are different from certain US disclosure requirements. In addition, US investors should be aware that this Offer Document has been prepared in accordance with an Irish format and style, which differs from the US format and style. In particular, the appendices to this document contain information concerning the Offer required by Irish disclosure requirements which may be material and which has not been summarised elsewhere in this document. In addition, the summary financial information of Glencar, reproduced in this document has been extracted from the financial statements of Glencar which have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards and thus may not be comparable to financial statements of US companies or companies whose financial statements are prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States. Also, the settlement procedure with respect to the Offer will comply with the Irish Takeover Rules, which differ from US domestic tender offer procedures in certain material respects, particularly with regard to the date of payment of consideration. Also, withdrawal rights will comply with the Irish Takeover Rules which differ from US domestic tender offer procedures in certain material respects, particularly with regard to when they terminate.

Gold Fields Limited is incorporated under the laws of South Africa and Gold Fields is incorporated under the laws of the Netherlands. Glencar is incorporated under the laws of Ireland. Some or all of the officers and directors of Gold Fields Limited, Gold Fields and Glencar are residents of countries other than the United States and a substantial portion of the assets of Gold Fields Limited, Gold Fields and Glencar are located outside the United States. As a result, it may not be possible for US shareholders of Gold Fields Limited or Glencar to effect service of process within the United States upon Gold Fields Limited, Gold Fields or Glencar (or such persons) or to enforce against any of them judgement of US courts predicated upon the federal or state securities laws of the United States.

In accordance with normal Irish and United Kingdom market practice, Gold Fields or its nominees, or its brokers (acting as agents) may from time to time make certain purchases of, or arrangements to purchase, Glencar Shares outside the United States, other than pursuant to the Offer, before or during the period in which the Offer remains open for acceptance. These purchases may occur either in the open market at prevailing prices or in private transactions at negotiated prices and shall comply with applicable laws and the Irish Takeover Rules. The Offeror will disclose purchases of Glencar Shares in the United States to the extent that such information is made public in Ireland or the United Kingdom.

Neither the SEC nor any state securities commission has passed upon the adequacy or accuracy of the disclosure in this document. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offence in the United States.

 

2


CONTENTS

 

      PAGE
Part I    Letter of recommendation from the Chairman of Glencar on behalf of the Board of Glencar    4
  

1.              Introduction

   4
  

2.               Summary terms of Offer

   5
  

3.               Background to and reasons for recommending the Offer

   5
  

4.               Irrevocable undertakings

   8
  

5.               Non-solicitation undertaking

   8
  

6.               Current trading and prospects

   8
  

7.               Management and employees and community relations

   8
  

8.               Glencar Share Options and Glencar Share Warrants

   9
  

9.               Compulsory acquisition, delisting and cancellation of trading

   9
  

10.             Offer Document and Form of Acceptance

   9
  

11.            Taxation

   9
  

12.             Action to be taken to accept the Offer

   9
  

13.            Recommendation

   10
Part II    Letter from Gold Fields    11
  

1.              Introduction

   11
  

2.              The Offer

   11
  

3.               Irrevocable undertakings

   12
  

4.               Background to and reasons for the Offer

   12
  

5.               Information on Gold Fields Limited

   13
  

6.               Information on Gold Fields

   13
  

7.               Information on Glencar

   13
  

8.               Current trading and prospects of the Gold Fields Group

   14
  

9.               Gold Fields’ intentions regarding Glencar

   14
  

10.            Financing of the Offer

   14
  

11.            Management and employees

   14
  

12.            Non-solicitation agreement

   14
  

13.             Glencar Share Option Scheme and Glencar Share Warrants

   15
  

14.             Compulsory acquisition, delisting and cancellation of trading

   15
  

15.             Ireland and United Kingdom taxation

   15
  

16.            Overseas Shareholders

   17
  

17.             Procedure for acceptance of the Offer

   17
  

18.            Settlement

   21
  

19.            Further information

   23
  

20.            Action to be taken

   23
Appendix I    Conditions and further terms of the Offer    24
   Part A: Conditions of the Offer    24
   Part B: Further terms of the Offer    32
   Part C: Form of Acceptance    42
Appendix II    Financial information relating to Glencar    47
Appendix III    Additional information    58
Appendix IV    Definitions    74

 

3


PART I

Letter from the Chairman of Glencar on behalf of the Board of Glencar

LOGO

Registered in Ireland No. 35324

 

Directors   Registered office
S Finlay (Chairman)*   71 Lower Baggot Street
H McCullough (Managing Director)   Dublin 2
W Cummins (Canada)*   Ireland
K Harrington  
P O’Quigley*  

* Denotes non-executive

7 August 2009

To Glencar Shareholders and, for information only, to Glencar Optionholders and the Glencar Warrantholder

Dear Shareholder,

Recommended cash offer for Glencar Mining plc

 

1. Introduction

The Board of Gold Fields Metals BV ( Gold Fields ”) and the Board of Glencar Mining plc ( Glencar ) announced on 24 July 2009 that they had agreed the terms of a recommended cash offer to be made by Gold Fields, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, for the entire issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar.

As of the date of this letter, Gold Fields Netherlands Services, another wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, owns 90,231,197 Glencar Shares in total, representing approximately 29.9 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar, and has irrevocably undertaken to accept the Offer.

This letter sets out a summary of the terms of the Offer and the reasons why the Board of Glencar, who have been so advised by Davy Corporate Finance, consider the terms of the Offer to be fair and reasonable and unanimously recommend that Glencar Shareholders accept the Offer as the directors of Glencar who are Glencar Shareholders (directly or indirectly) have irrevocably undertaken to do in respect of their own beneficial holdings amounting to, in aggregate, 6,911,583 Glencar Shares, which represents approximately 2.3 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar.

I draw your attention to the letter from Gold Fields set out in Part II of this document which gives further details about the Offer as well as to the information set out in Appendices I to III to this document. Appendix IV contains certain definitions of words used herein. I also draw your attention to the terms of the accompanying Form of Acceptance.

 

4


2. Summary terms of Offer

The Offer is set out in the letter from Gold Fields in Part II of this document. The Offer, which is subject to the conditions and further terms set out in Appendix I to this document and in the Form of Acceptance, is being made on the following basis:

 

for each Glencar Share    Stg 9 pence in cash

The Offer values the entire issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar at approximately Stg£28.1 million (US$47.7 million) and represents:

 

   

a premium of approximately 105 per cent. to the Closing Price of Stg 4.38 pence for each Glencar Share on 23 July 2009, being the last business day before the commencement of the Offer Period; and

 

   

a premium of 116 per cent. to the average daily Closing Price of Stg 4.16 pence per Glencar Share for the three month period before the commencement of the Offer Period.

 

3. Background to and reasons for recommending the Offer

Following the disposal of its interest in the Wassa mine in Ghana in 2002, Glencar has raised US$14.7 million, net of costs, from shareholders through the issue of new ordinary shares.

Glencar has used funds raised since 2002 to progress exploration drilling on licences in Mali at Komana, Solona and three licences at Sankarani in West Africa. Following very positive drill results at the Komana licence property in late 2005 the focus of Glencar has been on exploration at Komana and the adjacent licence at Solona. Glencar has a 95 per cent. interest in the Komana and Solona licences.

A shareholders agreement was entered into on 24 March 2009 with Gold Fields Sankarani (BVI) Limited reflecting the terms of a framework agreement signed by Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited on 13 February 2006 relating to the Sankarani licence properties in Mali, West Africa. Pursuant to the agreement, Gold Fields Sankarani (BVI) Limited must spend up to US$12 million in exploration expenditures in order for it to earn a 65 per cent. interest in three of the five exploration licences in Glencar’s Sankarani property. Gold Fields has already earned a 51 per cent. interest through exploration expenditures which currently total over US$6 million. A summary of the shareholders agreement is set out in paragraph 6 of Appendix III.

Glencar’s work on the Komana licence property continued during the second half of the 2007-2008 field season. During this period, the drilling focus moved away from the Komana West deposit to the Komana East deposit, which emerged as a highly promising target following the initial drilling programme in the early part of the season. The drilling season ended in June 2008 with the onset of the rains in the area. The objective of that campaign was to complete as much drilling as possible to allow SRK Consulting (UK) Limited, Glencar’s appointed independent consultants, to complete a resource statement on the Komana licence property. The independent resource estimate for Komana was completed by SRK Consulting (UK) Limited in October 2008. The combined Komana East and Komana West indicated and inferred mineral resource now stands at 1,250,000 ounces of gold with a mean grade of 1.6 g/t.

The turmoil in the financial markets prompted a change in planned drilling strategy shortly after the recommencement of fieldwork in October 2008. It was considered prudent to conserve cash resources and to develop new sources of finance for ongoing exploration on both the Komana and Solona licence properties. At this point discussions with Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited on a possible joint venture on the Komana licence property were commenced and Glencar’s management made the decision to redirect further drilling on the Komana licence property to short target definition infill programmes at Komana West and Komana East, pending evaluation of alternative financing options and/or conclusion of the discussions with Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited on a joint venture on the property.

 

5


In Autumn 2008, Glencar began a comprehensive review of the funding options available, involving discussions with many large institutional shareholders and others over a period of approximately six months. Glencar received feedback from certain institutional Glencar Shareholders that in light of the then prevailing economic climate, they would either not fund Glencar further or if they did so it would be at a significant discount to the then share price. Glencar’s Shares were then trading at between Stg 4 pence and Stg 4.5 pence and indications were given to the Board of Glencar that the issue price would need to be in the Stg 2 pence – Stg 2.5 pence range for the funding to be made available. For a relatively modest US$5 million funding, this would have diluted the existing, non participating Glencar Shareholders by approximately 33 per cent. Subsequent essential fundraisings would obviously dilute non participating Glencar Shareholders even further. It must be emphasised that no firm proposals or commitments were received at that time from any party in relation to funding.

Glencar then explored other strategic options with a wide range of parties including farm-in deals for the Komana licence property with several major mining groups and merger proposals with certain other exploration companies who held similar or complementary assets. No proposal was received which incorporated a cash element for the Glencar Shareholder.

Negotiations with Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited led to the signing of a letter of intent regarding a joint venture on the Komana licence property on 24 March 2009. Negotiations in relation to the Komana Joint Venture were terminated on 7 July 2009 following failure to agree on certain fundamental issues.

Since the termination of discussions regarding a joint venture with another wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited, on the Komana licence property the Board of Glencar has carefully re-evaluated its strategic options including:

 

   

independent financing of a minimum of US$5 million up to US$10 million for the planned drilling programmes for the Komana and Solona licence properties;

 

   

farm-in deals on the Komana licence property;

 

   

merger proposals with certain other exploration companies; and

 

   

potential acquisition by a major mining group.

Following the receipt on 13 July 2009 of a non-binding indicative offer from Gold Fields, the Board of Glencar considered the indicative offer with its financial advisers, Davy Corporate Finance, and its legal advisers, Whitney Moore. The Board of Glencar reviewed the value of the indicative offer based on a variety of valuation methods and in the context of other strategic options Glencar was evaluating. Following due consideration the Board of Glencar responded to Gold Fields setting out the reasons why it believed the initial indicative offer could not be recommended, notwithstanding that the initial indicative offer was at a significant premium to the Glencar share price prior to receipt of the indicative offer.

Following a period of negotiation, an indicative offer price was agreed at a level that the Board of Glencar determined it could recommend and the Board of Glencar therefore determined that it was advisable and in the best interests of Glencar and its shareholders to recommend acceptance of the Offer as described in this Offer Document.

The Board of Glencar believes that the Offer gives due recognition to the assets of the Glencar Group, without exposing the Glencar Shareholders to the risks, uncertainties and potential dilution associated with funding the exploration of those assets.

 

6


In reaching its determination, the Board of Glencar consulted with management and its financial and legal advisors, drew on its knowledge of the business, operations, properties, assets, financial condition, operating results, historical market prices and prospects of the Glencar Group, and considered the following factors:

 

   

the value of the Consideration, using 1.25 million ounces of resource at 0.5g cut-off, equates to an enterprise value (“EV”) per ounce of US$38;

 

   

the value of the Consideration compares favourably to the:

 

  ¡  

US$35 EV per ounce of resource IAMGOLD paid in shares to acquire Orezone Resources Inc in December 2008. Orezone Resources Inc owned 90 per cent. of the Essakane project in Burkina Faso, a project which contained in excess of 3 million ounces of reserves. Production of gold is scheduled for late 2010.

 

  ¡  

US$31 EV per ounce of resource Randgold Resources Limited in joint venture with AngloGold Ashanti Limited agreed to pay in shares and/or cash for Moto Goldmines Limited in July 2009. Moto Goldmines Limited is an emerging gold producer, operating in the Democratic Republic of Congo, with a total attributable resource of 15.8 million ounces and a completed feasibility study as of February 2009.

 

   

the fact that Glencar Shareholders will receive the Consideration in cash, which provides certainty of value to Glencar Shareholders;

 

   

the Consideration of Stg 9 pence per Glencar Share represents a 105 per cent. premium over the Closing Price of a Glencar Share on 23 July 2009 (the last Business Day prior to the commencement of the Offer Period) and a 116 per cent. premium over the average Closing Price of a Glencar Share for the three month period beginning 23 April 2009 and ending on 23 July 2009 (the last business day prior to the commencement of the Offer Period);

 

   

historical and current information concerning Glencar’s business, financial position, properties, management and current industry, economic and market conditions, including Glencar’s prospects, if Glencar were to remain an independent company;

 

   

the ability of Glencar to fund successfully its potentially significant capital expenditure requirements of between US$5 million and US$10 million for the drilling programmes on the Komana and Solona licence properties over the next drilling season, and the risk to the share price if Glencar was not in a position to do this on favourable terms. The Board of Glencar also worked on the assumption that a successful drilling programme at Komana in the next drill season would likely mean that significant further exploration expenditure would be required to develop its potential;

 

   

the overall cost required to bring Glencar to a bankable feasibility study (the outcome of which cannot be guaranteed) on the Komana licence property is estimated to be in excess of US$20 million and could be significantly more. Such a feasibility study could, assuming it was successful, take a two to three year period to complete during which time Glencar would require significant risk funding;

 

   

the valuation of Glencar’s interests in Sankarani and Asheba (Ghana), which are subject to agreements with Gold Fields and Adamus Resources Limited respectively and its interest in a licence in Uganda;

 

   

Gold Fields financial capability to make the Offer and pay the Consideration in full;

 

   

Gold Fields Netherlands Services now owns 29.9 per cent. of Glencar’s issued share capital, a significant minority holding, which could affect the valuation, liquidity and control over Glencar should the Offer not be completed; and

 

7


   

since the termination of discussions with Gold Fields Limited on the Komana Joint Venture, announced on 7 July 2009, Glencar has had discussions with several third parties who have expressed an interest in Glencar and/or its assets. Discussions with one of these parties led to an approach which has not led to an indicative offer. None of the other discussions have led to an approach and/or an indicative offer.

The foregoing discussion of the factors considered by the Board of Glencar is not intended to be exhaustive, but does set forth the principal factors considered by the Board.

 

4. Irrevocable undertakings

Gold Fields has received irrevocable undertakings from the directors of Glencar who are Glencar Shareholders (directly or indirectly) in respect of their own beneficial holdings amounting to, in aggregate, 6,911,583 Glencar Shares, which represents approximately 2.3 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar and in respect of the Glencar Shares which may be issued to each of them on exercise of their respective Glencar Shares Options.

Gold Fields has also received an irrevocable undertaking from Gold Fields Netherlands Services in respect of its beneficial holding of 90,231,197 Glencar Shares, which represents approximately 29.9 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar.

Further details of these irrevocable undertakings are set out in paragraph 5 of Appendix III to this document.

 

5. Non-solicitation undertaking

Until the Offer is declared unconditional (or lapses or is withdrawn), Glencar has agreed that no member of the Glencar Group or any of their respective directors, officers, employees or advisers shall, among other things, solicit interest or initiate discussions in respect of or in connection with the acquisition of Glencar and the Board of Glencar will not recommend another competing offer unless the consideration is more than 10 per cent. greater than the Consideration payable under the Offer.

Subject to the Irish Takeover Rules or the Irish Takeover Panel, Glencar has also agreed to inform Gold Fields of any approach from any third party in connection with an offer to acquire the issued share capital of Glencar and to provide the identity of the person making any such inquiry or proposing a competing offer.

 

6. Current trading and prospects

Glencar issued its annual report in respect of the year ended 31 December 2008 on 4 June 2009.

Since the year ended 31 December 2008 Glencar raised US$1.8 million from Gold Fields in a placing of Glencar Shares on 7 April 2009 and completed an option agreement with Adamus Resources Limited relating to its licence in Asheba in Ghana, details of which are set out in paragraph 6 of Appendix III.

All material drill results relating to Glencar’s licences have been announced. It is anticipated that no further drilling will be commenced by Glencar until the end of the rainy season in Mali which usually runs until the end of September.

Historical financial information on Glencar is set out in Appendix II to this document.

 

7. Management and employees and community relations

The Board of Glencar notes Gold Fields’ comments concerning the effect of the Offer on the management and employees of Glencar and that the employees of Glencar in Mali will continue employment under their current terms and conditions.

 

8


If the Offer becomes unconditional in all respects, the directors of Glencar intend to resign from the Board of Glencar.

The Board of Glencar is also pleased to note the comments of Gold Fields with regard to its record on corporate social responsibility and its intentions in that respect in relation to Mali.

 

8. Glencar Share Options and Glencar Share Warrants

Appropriate proposals will be made to the Glencar Optionholders and the Glencar Warrantholder in due course. However, Glencar Optionholders and the Glencar Warrantholder may accept the Offer in respect of the Glencar Shares resulting from the exercise of any options or warrants exercised while the Offer remains open for acceptance.

 

9. Compulsory acquisition, delisting and cancellation of trading

Your attention is drawn to paragraph 14 of the letter from Gold Fields in Part II of this document in relation to Gold Fields’ intentions regarding the compulsory acquisition of Glencar Shares and cancellation of the admission to trading of the Glencar Shares on the IEX market of the Irish Stock Exchange and the AIM market of the London Stock Exchange.

 

10. Offer Document and Form of Acceptance

This document and the Form of Acceptance are being posted to eligible Glencar Shareholders and, for information purposes, to Glencar Optionholders and the Glencar Warrantholder. Copies of this document and the Form of Acceptance are available from Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland.

If you are in any doubt as to the action you should take, you are recommended to seek your own personal financial advice immediately from your stockbroker, bank manager, solicitor, accountant or other independent professional adviser duly authorised under the European Communities (Markets in Financial Instruments) Regulations 2007 if you are taking advice in Ireland, duly authorised under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 if you are taking advice in the United Kingdom, or, if you are taking advice elsewhere, from another appropriately authorised independent financial adviser.

 

11. Taxation

Your attention is drawn to paragraph 15 of the letter from Gold Fields in Part II of this document for a summary of certain Irish and United Kingdom taxation considerations. If you are in any doubt as to your taxation position or if you are subject to taxation in any jurisdiction other than Ireland and the United Kingdom, you are strongly recommended to consult your independent financial adviser immediately.

 

12. Action to be taken to accept the Offer

Your attention is drawn to the letter from Gold Fields in Part II of this document, to the Form of Acceptance and to Appendices I to IV to this document. In particular, your attention is drawn to the procedure for accepting the Offer, which is set out in paragraph 17 of Part II of this document and in the Form of Acceptance.

If you hold your Glencar Shares in certificated form (that is, not in CREST), to accept the Offer, the Form of Acceptance should be completed, signed, witnessed and returned, together with your share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title, in the enclosed envelope (reply-paid within Ireland and the UK) by post or (during normal business hours only) by hand to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland as soon as possible and, in any event, so as to be received by no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009 .

 

9


If you hold your Glencar Shares in uncertificated form (that is, in CREST), then to accept the Offer, the Form of Acceptance should be completed, signed, witnessed and returned in the enclosed envelope (reply-paid within Ireland and the UK) by post or (during normal business hours only) by hand to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland as soon as possible and, in any event, so as to be received by no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009 and you should ensure that you send (or, if you are a CREST sponsored member, procure that your CREST sponsor sends) a TTE instruction in accordance with the procedure set out in paragraph 17(d) of the letter from Gold Fields in Part II of this document as soon as possible and, in any event, so that the TTE instruction settles no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009 .

Glencar Shareholders whose Glencar Shares are registered in the name of a nominee should contact their broker, investment dealer, bank, trust company or other nominee for assistance in accepting the Offer.

If you are in any doubt as to the procedure for acceptance of the Offer or require assistance with completion of the Form of Acceptance, please contact Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited by telephone on + 353 1 447 5472.

 

13. Recommendation

The Board of Glencar, who have been so advised by Davy Corporate Finance, consider the terms of the Offer to be fair and reasonable. In providing its advice to the Board of Glencar, Davy Corporate Finance has taken into account the commercial assessments of the Board of Glencar. Accordingly, the Board of Glencar unanimously recommend that Glencar Shareholders accept the Offer, as the members of the Board of Glencar have irrevocably undertaken to do (or procure to be done) in respect of their own beneficial holdings amounting to, in aggregate, 6,911,583 Glencar Shares, representing approximately 2.3 per cent. of the current issued share capital of Glencar and in respect of any Glencar Shares issued to them on the exercise of their respective Glencar Share Options.

Yours faithfully,

LOGO

Sean Finlay

Chairman

 

10


PART II

Letter from Gold Fields Metals BV

LOGO

 

Directors    Registered Office
NJ Holland    1 st Floor
TD McKeith    66a Schiphalweg
JH Pauley    Leiden 2316XE
JD Pool    The Netherlands
   7 August 2009

To Glencar Shareholders and, for information only, to Glencar Optionholders and the Glencar Warrantholder

Dear Shareholder,

Recommended Cash Offer for Glencar Mining plc

 

1. Introduction

The Board of Gold Fields and the Board of Glencar announced on 24 July 2009 that they had agreed the terms of a recommended cash offer to be made by Gold Fields, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, for the entire issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar.

As of the date of this letter, Gold Fields Netherlands Services, another wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, owns 90,231,197 Glencar Shares in total, representing approximately 29.9 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar, and has irrevocably undertaken to accept the Offer.

This document contains the formal Offer by Gold Fields.

Your attention is drawn to the letter of recommendation from Sean Finlay, Chairman of Glencar, on behalf of the Board of Glencar contained in Part I of this document which sets out the reasons why the Board of Glencar, who have been so advised by Davy Corporate Finance, consider the terms of the Offer to be fair and reasonable and why the members of the Board of Glencar are unanimously recommending that Glencar Shareholders accept the Offer.

The instructions and procedure for acceptance of the Offer are set out in paragraph 17 of this letter and in the Form of Acceptance which should be completed signed and returned as soon as possible but in any event so as to be received by Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited no later than 1.00 p.m. on 4 September 2009.

 

2. The Offer

Gold Fields hereby offers to acquire, subject to the terms and conditions set out in this document and in the Form of Acceptance, the entire issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar on the following basis:

 

for each Glencar Share

   Stg 9 pence in cash

The Offer values the entire issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar at approximately Stg£28.1 million.

 

11


The Consideration represents:

 

   

a premium of approximately 105 per cent. to the Closing Price of Stg 4.38 pence for each Glencar Share on 23 July 2009, being the last business day before the commencement of the Offer Period, and

 

   

a premium of 116 per cent. to the average daily Closing Price of Stg 4.16 pence per Glencar Share for the three month period before the commencement of the Offer Period.

The Offer is subject to certain conditions set out in Appendix I including, amongst other things, the acceptance of the Offer by Glencar Shareholders holding not less than 80 per cent. in nominal value of the issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar.

The Offer extends to all Glencar Shares unconditionally allotted or issued on the date of the Offer, together with any further such shares which are unconditionally allotted or issued (including pursuant to the Glencar Share Option Scheme or pursuant to the Glencar Share Warrants) while the Offer remains open for acceptance or until such date as Gold Fields may, subject to the Irish Takeover Rules and applicable laws and regulations, decide.

The Glencar Shares will be acquired pursuant to the Offer fully paid or credited as fully paid and free from all liens, charges, equitable interests, encumbrances, rights of pre-emption and any other rights and interests of any nature whatsoever and together with all rights now and hereafter attaching thereto, including any voting rights and the right to receive and retain in full all dividends and other distributions (if any) declared, made or paid on or after the date of this document.

The conditions and further terms of the Offer are set out in Appendix I to this document and in the enclosed Form of Acceptance.

 

3. Irrevocable undertakings

Gold Fields has received irrevocable undertakings from the directors of Glencar who are Glencar Shareholders (directly or indirectly) in respect of their own beneficial holdings amounting to, in aggregate, 6,911,583 Glencar Shares, which represents approximately 2.3 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar.

Gold Fields Netherlands Services, another wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, owns 90,231,197 Glencar Shares in total, representing approximately 29.9 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar, and has irrevocably undertaken to accept the Offer.

Further details of these irrevocable undertakings are set out in paragraph 5 of Appendix III to this document.

 

4. Background to and reasons for the Offer

Following the termination of discussions (announced on 7 July 2009) between Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Glencar on the Komana Joint Venture, Gold Fields Limited considered its options and came to the conclusion that an approach should be made to Glencar with a view to making an offer for the entire issued share capital of Glencar. In the view of Gold Fields Limited this approach was a sensible and fair means of meeting the objectives of Glencar Shareholders to obtain a certain and fair value for their shares in Glencar, which gives due recognition to the assets of Glencar, without exposing the shareholders to the risks, uncertainties and potential dilution associated with funding the exploration of those assets while at the same time allowing the Gold Fields Group the opportunity to consolidate its exploration activities in Mali.

The combination with Glencar is consistent with the Gold Fields Group’s existing exploration focus and strategy and will expand its geographical presence thereby consolidating its regional presence in Mali. Gold Fields Limited believes that there is considerable potential for Glencar as part of the Gold Fields Group. Gold Fields Limited is a senior international gold producer and has both an active growth strategy and premier existing production.

 

12


5. Information on Gold Fields Limited

Gold Fields Limited is a South African incorporated company that is publicly traded on the JSE (primary listing), the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol GFI, the Dubai International Financial Exchange, the Euronext in Brussels and the Swiss Exchange.

Gold Fields Limited is one of the world’s largest unhedged producers of gold with attributable production of approximately 3.64 million ounces per annum from nine operating mines in South Africa, Peru, Ghana and Australia. It has total attributable ore reserves of 83 million ounces and mineral resources of 251 million ounces.

For the last two financial years of Gold Fields Limited for which information has been published, being the years ended 30 June 2008 and 30 June 2007, turnover and profit and loss before taxation were as follows:

 

     Turnover
(US$)
   Profit/loss before tax
(US$)

2008

   3,165.0 million    913.9 million

2007

   2,699.1 million    586.5 million

The latest published audited accounts of Gold Fields Limited show net assets of US$5,320.1 million.

 

6. Information on Gold Fields

Gold Fields is a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Netherlands Services and is a company incorporated under the laws of the Netherlands.

Gold Fields is an investment holdings company.

Gold Fields is not subject to external audit. The financial statements are drawn up for local reporting purposes in the Netherlands and are lodged with the Dutch Chamber of Commerce on an annual basis from whom they are publicly available.

For the last three financial periods of Gold Fields for which information has been lodged with the Dutch Chamber of Commerce and is publicly available, being the periods 1 July 2007 to 24 January 2008, 25 January 2008 to 30 June 2008 and 1 July 2006 to 30 June 2007, turnover and profit and loss before taxation were as follows:

 

     Turnover
(US$)
   Profit/loss before tax
(US$)

1 July 2007 to 24 January 2008

   nil    0.0 million

25 January 2008 to 30 June 2008

   nil    4.0 million

1 July 2006 to 30 June 2007

   nil    0.0 million

The latest accounts of Gold Fields lodged with the Dutch Chamber of Commerce show net assets of US$174.0 million.

 

7. Information on Glencar

Glencar is a Dublin-based exploration company with a focus on exploration and development of gold deposits in Africa. Glencar has found major gold deposits in Ghana, West Africa in the 1980s and in the 1990s. The Glencar Group has operations in Mali and Ghana in West Africa and in Uganda in East Africa. Glencar is headquartered in Dublin, Ireland.

The Glencar Group’s principal asset, and only defined resource, is its Komana licence in Southern Mali, West Africa. The Komana licence property has an indicated and inferred mineral resource of 24 million tonnes with a grade of 1.6 g/t and contained gold metal of 1,250,000 ounces, within 150 m of surface based on a 0.5 g/t cut off grade.

Gold Fields confirm that all material drill results in its possession relating to the Sankarani project have been disclosed to Glencar.

 

13


8. Current trading and prospects of the Gold Fields Group

For the year ended 30 June 2009, the Gold Fields’ Group produced 3.4 million attributable ounces of gold at cash costs of US$512 per ounce, while operating profit was US$1.3 billion and normalized earnings amounted to US$331 million. The Gold Fields Group also has an exciting growth pipeline with numerous near mine exploration opportunities, a comprehensive greenfields exploration portfolio, and three advanced drilling stage exploration projects.

 

9. Gold Fields’ intentions regarding Glencar

The Gold Fields Group intends to continue exploring all of the properties held by Glencar in Mali. If exploration is successful the Gold Fields Group will complete mining feasibility studies to determine the economic viability of constructing and operating a mining operation on the Glencar Mali tenements. Gold Fields will continue to monitor developments at Glencar’s Ugandan and Ghanaian exploration operations that were divested to third parties.

The Gold Fields Group intends to use all of the fixed assets of Glencar and its subsidiaries in Mali to continue its exploration and development activity in the country. Other fixed assets not in Mali will either be redeployed to Mali or sold.

The Gold Fields Group has an excellent record of corporate social responsibility and interaction with the communities in which it works. It intends to continue this tradition in Mali as it develops its operations there.

 

10. Financing of the Offer

The cash payable to Glencar Shareholders under the terms of the Offer will be financed out of Gold Fields’ existing resources and facilities.

Full payment of the Consideration would involve a maximum cash payment of approximately Stg£28.1 million. Canaccord Adams, financial adviser to Gold Fields, is satisfied that the necessary financial resources are available to Gold Fields to satisfy in full the Consideration payable to Glencar Shareholders under the terms of the Offer.

 

11. Management and employees

It is intended that all of Glencar’s employees in Mali will continue employment under their current terms and conditions of employment. The corporate office in Dublin will be closed and consequently it is Gold Fields’ intention to terminate the employment of the two executives based in Dublin. The proposed transaction will have no effect on the employees and management of Gold Fields except to provide further employment opportunities in Mali.

 

12. Non-solicitation agreement

Until the Offer is declared unconditional (or lapses or is withdrawn), Glencar has agreed that no member of the Glencar Group or any of their respective directors, officers, employees or advisers shall, among other things, solicit interest or initiate discussions in respect of or in connection with the acquisition of Glencar and the Board of Glencar will not recommend another offer unless the consideration is more than 10 per cent. greater than the Consideration payable under the Offer.

Subject to the Irish Takeover Rules or the Irish Takeover Panel, Glencar has also agreed to inform Gold Fields of any approach from any third party in connection with an offer to acquire the issued share capital of Glencar and to provide the identity of the person making any such inquiry or proposing a competing offer.

 

14


13. Glencar Share Option Scheme and Glencar Share Warrants

Appropriate proposals will be made to the Glencar Optionholders and the Glencar Warrantholder in due course. However, Glencar Optionholders and the Glencar Warrantholder may accept the Offer in respect of the Glencar Shares resulting from the exercise of any options exercised while the Offer remains open for acceptances.

 

14. Compulsory acquisition, delisting and cancellation of trading

If the Offer is declared unconditional in all respects and sufficient acceptances have been received to permit it to do so, Gold Fields intends to apply the provisions of section 204 of the Companies Act, 1963 to acquire compulsorily any Glencar Shares not acquired or agreed to be acquired pursuant to the Offer or otherwise on the same terms as the Offer.

It is intended that, subject to the Offer being declared unconditional in all respects, and subject to Gold Fields receiving sufficient acceptances of the Offer to permit it to do so, Gold Fields will procure that Glencar applies for cancellation of the admission to trading of the Glencar Shares on AIM and IEX. It is expected that such cancellation will take effect no earlier than 20 business days after Gold Fields has, by virtue of its shareholding and acceptances under the Offer, acquired or agreed to acquire 75 per cent. (seventy five per cent.) of the voting rights attached to the Glencar Shares.

 

15. Ireland and United Kingdom taxation

Ireland taxation

This summary relating to Irish taxation consequences is based on Irish taxation laws currently in force, regulations promulgated thereunder, proposals to amend any of the foregoing publicly announced prior to the date hereof, and the currently published administrative practices of the Irish Revenue Commissioners. Taxation laws are subject to change from time to time, and no representation is or can be made as to whether such laws will change, or what impact, if any, such changes will have on the statements contained in this summary. No assurance is or can be given that legislative or judicial changes, or changes in administrative practice, will not modify or change the statements expressed herein. This summary is of a general nature only. It does not constitute tax or legal advice and does not discuss all aspects of Irish taxation that may be relevant to a particular Irish holder of Glencar shares. Holders of Glencar Shares are advised to consult their own tax advisers with respect to the application of Irish taxation laws to their own particular circumstances in relation to the Offer.

This summary applies only to Glencar Shareholders who hold their Glencar Shares as investments (and not as securities to be realised in the course of a trade) and does not address special classes of holders of Glencar shares, including, but not limited to, dealers in securities, insurance companies, pension schemes, employee share ownership trusts, collective investment undertakings, charities, tax-exempt organisations, financial institutions and employees of Glencar (or a connected company), each of which may be subject to special rules not discussed below. Social welfare taxes and levies are not addressed in this document but may apply to the receipt of income by certain individuals depending on their circumstances.

This section applies to holders of Glencar Shares (“ Irish Holders ”) that (i) beneficially own the Glencar Shares; (ii) in the case of individual holders, are resident, ordinarily resident and domiciled in Ireland under Irish taxation laws; (iii) in the case of holders that are companies, are resident in Ireland under Irish taxation laws; and (iv) are not considered resident in any country other than Ireland for the purposes of any double taxation agreement entered into by Ireland.

Tax on Capital Gains

Irish Holders who dispose of their Glencar Shares for cash under the Offer may, depending on the particular circumstances of such Irish Holder (including the availability of exemptions, reliefs and

 

15


allowable losses) be subject to Irish capital gains tax (“ CGT ”) (in the case of individuals) or Irish corporation tax on chargeable gains (in the case of companies) to the extent that the proceeds realised from such disposition exceed the indexed base cost (indexation may apply to increase the base cost of acquisitions of shares made prior to 1 January, 2003) of the Glencar Shares plus incidental acquisition and selling expenses. The current rate of tax applicable to such chargeable gains is 25 per cent. Irish Holders who are companies may qualify for the holding company exemption from Irish corporation tax on chargeable gains provided certain conditions are met.

Irish Holders who are individuals are entitled to an annual exemption of €1,270, which may have the effect of reducing their CGT liability.

Irish Holders that realise a loss on the disposition of Glencar Shares should generally be entitled to offset such capital losses against chargeable gains realised from other sources in determining their CGT or corporation tax on chargeable gains in a year. Capital gains tax losses are restricted to the actual monetary loss suffered and would not be increased by any indexation allowances on the base cost of the shares. Capital losses that remain unrelieved in a year may generally be carried forward and applied against chargeable gains realised in future years.

Stamp Duty

No Irish stamp duty should be payable by an Irish Holder of Glencar Shares on the disposal of Glencar Shares for cash under the Offer.

Glencar Optionholders

The taxation implications for persons holding Glencar Share Options will be advised in a separate letter addressed to Glencar Optionholders which should be referred to where applicable.

Irish tax considerations for UK holders of Glencar Shares

This section applies to holders of Glencar Shares (“ UK Holders ”) that (i) beneficially own Glencar Shares; (ii) in the case of individual holders, are resident, ordinarily resident or domiciled in the UK for UK tax purposes; (iii) in the case of corporate holders, are resident in the UK for UK tax purposes, and not also resident in Ireland for Irish tax purposes or under the control of persons who are resident in Ireland; (iv) are considered resident in the UK for the purposes of the Ireland/UK Tax Treaty; and (v) do not hold their Glencar Shares in connection with any business carried on through a permanent establishment in Ireland.

Tax on Capital Gains

UK Holders who elect, under the Offer, to dispose of their Glencar Shares for cash should not be subject to Irish tax on any capital gain arising on the disposal of their Glencar Shares.

Stamp Duty

No Irish stamp should be payable by a UK Holder of Glencar Shares on the disposal of the Glencar Shares for cash pursuant to the Offer

United Kingdom taxation

The following paragraphs, which are intended as a general guide only, are based on current UK tax legislation and the practice of HM Revenue & Customs (“ HMRC ”). They summarise certain limited aspects of the UK tax treatment of acceptance of the Offer and they relate only to the position of Glencar Shareholders who are beneficial owners of their Glencar Shares, who hold their Glencar Shares as an investment (other than under an individual savings account), who are not treated for tax

 

16


purposes as having received their Glencar Shares by reason of their employment and who are resident, and if an individual, ordinarily resident, in the United Kingdom for taxation purposes. If you are in any doubt as to your taxation position or if you are subject to tax in any jurisdiction other than the UK, you should consult an appropriate professional adviser immediately.

Tax on Capital Gains

Liability to UK tax on capital gains will depend on the individual circumstances of Glencar Shareholders.

A Glencar Shareholder will receive cash under the Offer, and this will be treated as a disposal, or (where relevant) part disposal, of his Glencar Shares which may, depending on the Glencar Shareholder’s individual circumstances (including the availability of exemptions or allowable losses), give rise to a liability to UK tax on capital gains.

 

16. Overseas Shareholders

The attention of all Glencar Shareholders who are citizens, nationals or residents of jurisdictions outside Ireland and the United Kingdom and any persons (including, without limitation, any custodians, nominees or trustees) who would, or otherwise intend to, forward this document or the Form of Acceptance outside Ireland and the United Kingdom is drawn to paragraph 5 of Part B of Appendix I and to the relevant provisions of the Form of Acceptance.

The availability of the Offer to Overseas Shareholders may be affected by the laws of the relevant jurisdiction. Any persons who are subject to the laws of any jurisdiction other than Ireland or the United Kingdom should inform themselves about and observe any applicable requirements of that jurisdiction. The release, publication or distribution of this document and the accompanying Form of Acceptance in jurisdictions other than Ireland and the United Kingdom may be restricted by law and therefore any persons who are subject to the laws of any jurisdiction other than Ireland and the United Kingdom should inform themselves about and observe any applicable requirements. Any failure to comply with the applicable requirements may constitute a violation of the securities laws of any such jurisdiction.

Any persons (including, without limitation, any custodian, nominee or trustee) who would, or otherwise intend to, or who may be under a contractual or legal obligation to, forward this document, the Form of Acceptance and/or any other related document to any jurisdiction outside Ireland and the United Kingdom should inform themselves of and observe any applicable legal or regulatory requirements of the relevant jurisdiction. If you are in any doubt about your position or the action you should take, you should consult an appropriate financial adviser.

The Offer is not being made, directly or indirectly, in or into any Restricted Jurisdiction. Copies of this document and the Form of Acceptance and/or any other related document are not being, and must not be, directly or indirectly, mailed or otherwise forwarded, distributed or sent in, into or from any Restricted Jurisdiction and persons receiving this document and the Form of Acceptance (including custodians, nominees and trustees) must not mail or otherwise distribute or send them in, into or from any Restricted Jurisdiction as doing so may invalidate any purported acceptance of the Offer.

 

17. Procedure for acceptance of the Offer

This section should be read in conjunction with Appendix I to this document and the Form of Acceptance and its notes and instructions. The instructions and notes contained in the Form of Acceptance are deemed to be part of the terms of the Offer.

To accept the Offer, whether or not your Glencar Shares are held in CREST, you must complete and return the Form of Acceptance in accordance with the instructions set out below and the instructions printed on the Form of Acceptance.

 

17


(a) Completion of Form of Acceptance

You should note that if you hold Glencar Shares in both certificated and uncertificated form you should complete separate Forms of Acceptance for each holding. You should complete separate Forms of Acceptance for Glencar Shares held in uncertificated form, but under different Member Account IDs. Holders of Glencar Shares in certificated form, but under different designations, should complete a separate Form of Acceptance for each designation. Additional Forms of Acceptance can be obtained by contacting Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland or by telephoning them on + 353 1 447 5472.

 

  (i) To accept the Offer

To accept the Offer in respect of all your Glencar Shares, you must complete Box 1B, and if your Glencar Shares are in CREST, Box 6, and, if appropriate, Boxes 4 and/or 5 of the enclosed Form of Acceptance. You must also sign Box 3 on the Form of Acceptance in the presence of a witness, who must also sign in accordance with the instructions printed on the Form of Acceptance.

 

  (ii) To accept the Offer in respect of less than all your Glencar Shares

To accept the Offer in respect of less than all your Glencar Shares, you must insert in Box 1B on the enclosed Form of Acceptance such lesser number of Glencar Shares in respect of which you wish to accept the Offer in accordance with the instructions printed thereon. You should then follow the procedure set out in (i) above in respect of such lesser number of Glencar Shares. If you do not insert a number in Box 1B your acceptance will be deemed to be in respect of all of the Glencar Shares held by you.

 

  (iii) To request payment of the Consideration in Euro

To request payment of the Consideration in Euro, you should tick Box 1C on the enclosed Form of Acceptance. Otherwise the Consideration will be paid in Sterling.

Consideration paid in Euro will be calculated at the prevailing exchange rate at the time Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited transfers funds from a Sterling account to a Euro denominated account for the purposes of discharging the Consideration in Euro.

If you have any questions as to how to complete the Form of Acceptance, please telephone Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited on + 353 1 447 5472.

 

(b) Return of Form of Acceptance

To accept the Offer, the completed Form of Acceptance should be returned, signed and witnessed, whether or not your Glencar Shares are held in CREST. The completed Form of Acceptance should be returned by post or (during normal business hours only) by hand to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland together (subject to paragraphs (c) and (d) below) with the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title as soon as possible and, in any event, so as to arrive no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. An envelope (reply-paid within Ireland and the UK) is enclosed for your convenience. No acknowledgement of receipt of documents will be given by or on behalf of Gold Fields. The instructions on the Form of Acceptance are deemed to be part of the terms of the Offer.

 

18


(c) Documents of title

If your Glencar Shares are in certificated form, a completed, signed and witnessed Form of Acceptance should be accompanied by the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title and should be returned by post or by hand to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at the address set out in paragraph 17(b) above.

If for any reason the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title is/are not readily available or is/are lost, you should nevertheless complete, sign and lodge the Form of Acceptance as stated above so as to be received by Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited not later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009, and you should then arrange for the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title to be forwarded as soon as possible thereafter. The completed Form of Acceptance, together with any share certificate(s) and/or any other document(s) of title which you may have available, should be lodged with Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited accompanied by a letter stating that the outstanding document(s) will follow or that you have not yet received your share certificate(s) from Glencar or that you have lost or do not otherwise have one or more of your share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title. No acknowledgement of receipt of documents will be given. In the case of non-receipt of the share certificate(s) from Glencar, you should write to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited to request your new share certificate(s).

If the share certificate(s) has/have been lost, you should as soon as possible, contact Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited for a letter of indemnity for the lost share certificate(s) which, when completed in accordance with the instructions given, should be returned by post to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at the address set out in paragraph 17(b) above.

If your shares certificate(s) is/are not in your name, you should send by post or by hand (during normal business hours only) to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited such other document(s) as establish your right to become the registered holder of the relevant Glencar Shares.

 

(d) Additional procedures for Glencar Shares in uncertificated form (that is, in CREST)

If your Glencar Shares are held in uncertificated form, you should insert in Box 6 of the enclosed Form of Acceptance the Participant ID and Member Account ID under which such shares are held by you in CREST and otherwise complete and return the Form of Acceptance as described in paragraphs 17(a) and 17(b) above. In addition, you should take (or procure to be taken) the action set out below to transfer the Glencar Shares in respect of which you wish to accept the Offer to an escrow balance (that is, a transfer to escrow or TTE instruction) specifying Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited (in its capacity as a CREST participant under its Participant ID referred to below) as the Escrow Agent, as soon as possible and in any event so that the transfer to escrow settles no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009.

Note that the settlement cannot take place on weekends or bank holidays (or other times at which the CREST system is non-operational). You should therefore ensure you time the input of any TTE instructions accordingly.

If you are a CREST sponsored member, you should refer to your CREST sponsor before taking any action. Your CREST sponsor will be able to confirm details of your Participant ID and the Member Account ID under which your Glencar Shares are held. In addition, only your CREST sponsor will be able to send the TTE instruction to CRESTCo in relation to your Glencar Shares.

 

19


You should send (or, if you are a CREST sponsored member, procure that your CREST sponsor sends) a TTE instruction to CRESTCo which must be properly authenticated in accordance with CRESTCo’s specifications for transfers to escrow and which must contain, in addition to the other information that is required for a TTE instruction to settle in CREST, the following details:

 

  (i) the number of Glencar Shares to be transferred to an escrow balance;

 

  (ii) your Member Account ID. This must be the same Member Account ID as the Member Account ID that is inserted in Box 6 of the Form of Acceptance:

 

  (iii) your Participant ID. This must be the same Participant ID as the Participant ID that is inserted in Box 6 of the Form of Acceptance;

 

  (iv) the Participant ID of the Escrow Agent (namely, Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited, in its capacity as a CREST receiving agent). This is RA79.

 

  (v) the Member Account ID of the Escrow Agent. This is “GLENCAR”;

 

  (vi) the Form of Acceptance reference number. This is the reference number that appears next to Box 6 on page 3 of the Form of Acceptance. This reference number should be inserted in the first eight characters of the shared note field on the TTE instruction. Such insertion will enable Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited to match the transfer to escrow to your Form of Acceptance. You should keep a separate record of this reference number for future reference;

 

  (vii) the intended settlement date. This should be as soon as possible and in any event no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009;

 

  (viii) the Corporate Action Number for the Offer. This is allocated by CRESTCo and can be found by viewing the relevant Corporate Action details in CREST;

 

  (ix) the Corporate Action ISIN. This is IE0003725383; and

 

  (x) the standard TTE instruction of priority 80.

After settlement of the TTE instruction, you will not be able to access the Glencar Shares concerned in CREST for any transaction for charging purposes. If the Offer becomes or is declared unconditional in all respects, the Escrow Agent will transfer the Glencar Shares concerned to itself in accordance with paragraph (e) of Part C of Appendix I of this document.

You are recommended to refer to the CREST manual published by CRESTCo for further information on the CREST procedures outlined above. For ease of processing, you are requested, wherever possible, to ensure that a Form of Acceptance relates to only one transfer to escrow.

If no Form of Acceptance reference number, or an incorrect Form of Acceptance reference number, is included on the TTE instruction, Gold Fields may treat any number of Glencar Shares transferred to an escrow balance in favour of Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited from the Participant ID and Member Account ID identified in the TTE instruction as relating to any Form(s) of Acceptance which relate(s) to the same Participant ID and Member Account ID (up to the number of Glencar Shares inserted or deemed to be inserted on the Form(s) of Acceptance concerned).

You should note that CRESTCo does not make available special procedures in CREST for any particular corporate action. Normal system timings and limitations will therefore

 

20


apply in connection with a TTE instruction and its settlement. You should therefore ensure that all necessary action is taken by you (or by your CREST sponsor) to enable a TTE instruction relating to your Glencar Shares to settle prior to 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. In this regard, you are referred in particular to those sections of the CREST manual concerning practical limitations of the CREST system and timings.

Gold Fields will make an appropriate announcement if any of the details contained in this paragraph (d) alter for any reason in any respect that is, in the view of Gold Fields, material to Glencar Shareholders.

 

(e) Deposits of Glencar Shares into, and withdrawals of Glencar Shares from, CREST

Normal CREST procedures (including timings) apply in relation to any Glencar Shares that are, or are to be, converted from uncertificated to certificated form, or from certificated to uncertificated form, during the course of the Offer (whether any such conversion arises as a result of a transfer of Glencar Shares or otherwise). Holders of Glencar Shares who are proposing to convert any such shares are recommended to ensure that the conversion procedures are implemented in sufficient time to enable the person holding or acquiring the Glencar Shares as a result of the conversion to take all necessary steps in connection with an acceptance of the Offer (in particular, as regards delivery of share certificate(s) or other document(s) of title or transfers to an escrow balance as described above) prior to 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009.

 

(f) Validity of acceptances

Without prejudice to Parts B and C of Appendix I of this document, Gold Fields and/or its agents reserve the right, subject to the terms of the Offer and the Irish Takeover Rules, to treat as valid, in whole or in part, any acceptance of the Offer which is not entirely in order or which is not accompanied by the relevant TTE instruction or (as applicable) the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title. In that event, the consideration payable under such acceptances will not be despatched until after the relevant TTE instruction has settled or (as applicable) the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title or indemnities satisfactory to Gold Fields have been received.

 

(g) Overseas Shareholders

The attention of Glencar Shareholders who are not resident in Ireland or the United Kingdom and any person (including, without limitation, any nominee, custodian or trustee) who may have an obligation to forward this document outside Ireland or the United Kingdom is drawn to paragraph 5 of Part B of Appendix I and to the relevant provisions of the Form of Acceptance.

If you are in any doubt as to the procedure for acceptance, please contact Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited by telephone on + 353 1 447 5472 or at the address in paragraph 17(b) above. You are reminded that, if you are a CREST personal member, you should contact your CREST sponsor before taking any action.

 

18. Settlement

Subject to the Offer becoming or being declared unconditional in all respects, settlement of the consideration to which any Glencar Shareholder is entitled under the Offer (except as provided in paragraph 5 of Part B of Appendix I to this document in the case of certain Overseas Shareholders and save to the extent that the Irish Takeover Panel permits any extension of such period) will be effected: (a) in the case of acceptances of the Offer received, complete in all respects, by the date on which the Offer becomes or is declared unconditional in all respects, within 14 days of such date; or

 

21


(b) in the case of acceptances of the Offer received, complete in all respects, after the date on which the Offer becomes or is declared unconditional in all respects but while the Offer remains open for acceptance, within 14 days of such receipt, in the following manner:

 

(a) Glencar Shares in certificated form

Where an acceptance relates to Glencar Shares in certificated form, settlement of the cash consideration due will be dispatched by post (or by such other method as may be approved by the Irish Takeover Panel) to accepting Glencar Shareholders or their appointed agents. All such cash payments will be made in Sterling by cheque drawn on a branch of a UK clearing bank unless the accepting Glencar Shareholder has ticked Box 1C on the accompanying Form of Acceptance, in which case, the cash payment will be made in Euro by check drawn on a branch of an Irish clearing bank.

Consideration paid in Euro will be calculated at the prevailing exchange rate at the time Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited transfers funds from a Sterling account to a Euro denominated account for the purposes of discharging the Consideration in Euro.

In the case of joint holders of Glencar Shares, relevant cheques will be despatched to the joint holder whose name appears first in the register of members.

 

(b) Glencar Shares in uncertificated form (that is, in CREST)

Where an acceptance relates to Glencar Shares in uncertificated form, the cash consideration to which the accepting Glencar Shareholder is entitled will be paid in Sterling (except where the accepting Glencar Shareholder has elected otherwise by ticking Box 1C on the accompanying Form of Acceptance in which case they will be paid in Euro) by means of CREST by Gold Fields procuring the creation of an assured payment obligation in favour of the accepting Glencar Shareholder’s payment bank in respect of the cash consideration due, in accordance with CREST assured payment arrangements.

Consideration paid in Euro will be calculated at the prevailing exchange rate at the time Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited transfers funds from a Sterling account to a Euro denominated account for the purposes of discharging the Consideration in Euro.

Gold Fields reserves the right to settle all or any part of the consideration, for all or any accepting Glencar Shareholder(s), in the manner referred to in paragraph (a) above, if for any reason it wishes to do so.

 

(c) General

If the Offer does not become or is not declared unconditional in all respects: (a) in the case of Glencar Shares held in certificated form, completed Form(s) of Acceptance, the share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title will be returned by post (or such other method as may be approved by the Irish Takeover Panel) within 14 days of the Offer lapsing, to the person or agent whose name and address is set out in Box 2 of the Form of Acceptance or, if none is set out, to the first named or sole holder at his or her registered address; and (b) in the case of Glencar Shares held in uncertificated form, Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited will, immediately after the lapsing of the Offer (or within such longer period, not exceeding 14 days after the Offer has lapsed, as the Irish Takeover Panel may approve), give TTE instructions to CRESTCo to transfer all relevant Glencar Shares held in escrow balance and in relation to which it is the Escrow Agent for the purpose of the Offer to the original available balances of the Glencar Shareholders concerned.

All documents and remittances delivered or sent by, to or from Glencar Shareholders or their appointed agents will be delivered or sent at their own risk and may be sent by post.

 

22


19. Further information

Your attention is drawn to the conditions and further terms of the Offer set out in Appendix I to this document and in the Form of Acceptance and to the other information set out in the Appendices which form part of this document.

 

20. Action to be taken

If you wish to accept the Offer in respect of Glencar Shares held in certificated form (that is, not in CREST), please return the relevant Form of Acceptance duly completed, by post or by hand (during normal business hours only) to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland together with the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title as soon as possible and, in any event, so as to arrive no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. The procedure for such acceptance is set out in paragraphs 17(a) and (b) of this letter and in the Form of Acceptance. An envelope (reply-paid within Ireland and the UK) is enclosed for your convenience.

If you wish to accept the Offer in respect of your Glencar Shares held in uncertificated form (that is, in CREST), please return the relevant Form of Acceptance duly completed, by post or by hand (during normal business hours only) to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland as soon as possible and, in any event, so as to arrive no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. In addition, you must send (or, if you are a CREST sponsored member, procure that your CREST sponsor sends) a TTE instruction in accordance with the procedure set out above in paragraph 17(d) of this letter, as soon as possible and, in any event, so that the TTE Instruction settles no later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. An envelope (reply-paid within Ireland and the UK) is enclosed for your convenience.

Yours faithfully,

LOGO

TD McKeith

Director of Gold Fields

On behalf of the Board of Gold Fields

 

23


APPENDIX I

CONDITIONS AND FURTHER TERMS OF THE OFFER

PART A: CONDITIONS OF THE OFFER

The Offer complies with the Irish Takeover Rules and, where relevant, the AIM Rules, the IEX Rules and the respective rules and regulations of the London Stock Exchange, the Irish Stock Exchange and the applicable provisions of the US federal securities laws and is subject to the terms and conditions set out below. The Offer and any acceptances thereunder will be governed by Irish law and subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Ireland, which exclusivity shall not limit the right to seek provisional or protective relief in the courts of another state during or after any substantive proceedings have been instituted in Ireland, nor shall it limit the right to bring enforcement proceedings in another state on foot of an Irish judgment.

The Offer will be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (a) valid acceptances being received (and not, where permitted, withdrawn) by not later than 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009 (or such later time(s) and/or date(s) as Gold Fields may, subject to the Irish Takeover Rules, decide) in respect of such number of Glencar Shares which represent in aggregate not less than 80 (eighty) per cent in nominal value of the Glencar Shares (or such lower percentage, being more than 50 (fifty) per cent. as Gold Fields may determine in its sole discretion;

 

  (b) all filings having been made and all or any applicable waiting periods (including any extensions thereof) shall have terminated, lapsed or expired, as appropriate, in each case in connection with the Offer;

 

  (c) no Irish, South African or foreign, federal, state or local governmental commission, board, body, bureau, or other regulatory authority or agency, including courts and other judicial bodies, any competition, anti-trust or supervisory body or other governmental, trade or regulatory agency or body, securities exchange or any self-regulatory body or authority, including any instrumentality or entity designed to act for or on behalf of any of the foregoing, in each case, in any jurisdiction (each a “ Governmental Authority ”) having instituted or implemented any action, proceeding, investigation, enquiry, reference or suit or having made, enforced, enacted, issued or deemed applicable to the Offer any statute, regulation or order or having withheld any consent which would or would reasonably be expected to:

 

  (i) make the Offer or its implementation, or the acquisition or proposed acquisition by Gold Fields of any shares in, or control of, Glencar, or any of the assets of Glencar, void, illegal or unenforceable under the laws of any jurisdiction or otherwise, directly or indirectly, restrain, revoke, prohibit, restrict or materially delay the same or impose additional or different conditions or obligations with respect thereto;

 

  (ii) result in a material delay in the ability of Gold Fields, or render Gold Fields unable, to acquire some or all of the Glencar Shares or result in or effect any divestiture of, or requirement to hold separate (including by establishing a trust or otherwise), or agree to restrict its ownership or operation of, any business or assets of Glencar, or to enter into any settlement or consent decree, or agree to any undertaking, with respect to any business or assets of Glencar;

 

  (iii)

impose any limitation on or result in a material delay in the ability of Gold Fields to acquire, or to hold or to exercise effectively, directly or indirectly, all or any rights of ownership of shares, Glencar Shares, (or the equivalent) in, or to exercise voting or management control over, Glencar or any Subsidiary or

 

24


 

subsidiary undertaking of Glencar or on the ability of any member of the Glencar Group to hold or exercise effectively, directly or indirectly, rights of ownership of shares (or the equivalent) in, or to exercise rights of voting or management control over, any member of the Glencar Group;

 

  (iv) require any member of the Gold Fields Group or any member of the Glencar Group to acquire or offer to acquire any shares or other securities which constitute a substantial interest (or the equivalent) in, or any interest in any material asset owned by, any third party;

 

  (v) except where the consequences thereof would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole, impose any limitation on the ability of any member of the Glencar Group to integrate or co-ordinate its business, or any part of it, with the businesses of any member of the Gold Fields Group;

 

  (vi) result in any member of the Glencar Group ceasing to be able to carry on business in any jurisdiction in which it currently does;

 

  (vii) except where the consequences thereof would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole, cause any member of the Glencar Group to cease to be entitled to any authorisation, order, recognition, grant, consent, clearance, confirmation, licence, permission or approval used by it in the carrying on of its business in any jurisdiction; or

 

  (viii) except where the consequences thereof would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole, otherwise adversely affect the business, profits, assets, liabilities, financial or commercial position of any member of the Glencar Group,

for the purposes of this Appendix I, the effects referred to in the foregoing paragraphs (i) through (viii) are referred to as a “Restraint”;

 

  (d) having obtained (i) from any Governmental Authority any Clearances required to be obtained or made by the Glencar Group or Gold Fields in connection with the Offer (except, in each case, for any Clearance or additional instrument that does not impose a Restraint on Glencar or Gold Fields), and (ii) any third party Clearances required to be obtained to accept the Offer (except where the consequence thereof would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole), it being understood that neither Glencar nor Gold Fields shall be required to make any material payments, other than filing or other fees payable to a Governmental Authority for seeking the relevant Clearance, all such Clearances remaining in full force and effect, there being no notified intention to revoke or vary or not to renew the same at the time at which the Offer becomes otherwise unconditional;

 

  (e) all applicable waiting periods and any other time periods during which any Governmental Authority could, in respect of the Offer or the acquisition or proposed acquisition of any shares or other securities (or the equivalent) in, or control of, Glencar or any member of the Glencar Group by Gold Fields, institute or implement any legal action, proceeding or suit under the laws of any jurisdiction which would be reasonably expected to have a material adverse effect (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole), having expired, lapsed or been terminated;

 

  (f)

there being no provision of any arrangement, agreement, licence, permit, franchise, facility, lease or other instrument to which any member of the Glencar Group is a party

 

25


 

or by or to which any such member or any of its respective assets may be bound, entitled or be subject and which, in consequence of the Offer or the acquisition or proposed acquisition by Gold Fields of any shares or other securities (or the equivalent) in or control of Glencar or any member of the Glencar Group or because of a change of control or management of Glencar or otherwise, would or would be reasonably expected to result (except where, in any of the following cases, the consequences thereof would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as whole) in:

 

  (i) save as disclosed, any monies borrowed by, or any indebtedness or liability (actual or contingent) of, or any grant available to any member of the Glencar Group becoming, or becoming capable of being declared, repayable immediately or prior to their or its stated maturity;

 

  (ii) the creation or enforcement of any mortgage, charge or other security interest wherever existing or having arisen over the whole or any part of the business, property or assets of any member of the Glencar Group or any such mortgage, charge or other security interest becoming enforceable;

 

  (iii) any such arrangement, agreement, licence, permit, franchise, facility, lease or other instrument or the rights, liabilities, obligations or interests of any member of the Glencar Group thereunder, or the business of any such members with, any person, firm or body (or any arrangement or arrangements relating to any such interest or business) being terminated or adversely modified or any adverse action being taken or any obligation or liability arising thereunder;

 

  (iv) any assets or interests of, or any asset the use of which is enjoyed by, any member of the Glencar Group being or falling to be disposed of or charged, or ceasing to be available to any member of the Glencar Group or any right arising under which any such asset or interest would be required to be disposed of or charged or would cease to be available to any member of the Glencar Group otherwise than in the ordinary course of business;

 

  (v) any member of the Glencar Group ceasing to be able to carry on business, being prohibited from carrying on business or being subject to a restriction imposing a non-compete, exclusivity or similar restrictive covenant on the Glencar Group, in each case, in any jurisdiction;

 

  (vi) the value of, or financial or commercial position of any member of the Glencar Group being prejudiced or adversely affected; or

 

  (vii) the creation of any liability or liabilities (actual or contingent) by any member of the Glencar Group;

unless, if any such provision exists, such provision shall have been waived, modified or amended on terms satisfactory to Gold Fields;

 

  (g)

save as publicly announced by Glencar (by the delivery of an announcement to the London Stock Exchange) since 31 December 2008 the Glencar Group has conducted its business in the ordinary course consistent with past practice in all material respects and in compliance in all material respects with all applicable laws and regulations and using reasonable endeavours to preserve substantially intact its business organisation and goodwill and keeping available the services of its executive officers and key employees and preserving the relationships with those Persons having business

 

26


 

dealings with the Glencar Group, and no member of the Glencar Group having taken since 31 December 2008 any of the following actions (except as expressly required by the Offer, or to the extent Gold Fields shall consent in writing):

 

  (i) amend its memorandum and articles of association or its equivalent organisational documents;

 

  (ii) (A) except pursuant to the exercise of the Glencar Share Options and Glencar Share Warrants granted prior to the date of this announcement and disclosed, issue or agree to issue any shares, or any rights or securities convertible or exchangeable into, or grant the right to call for the issue of, any shares, effect any share split, share combination, reverse share split, share dividend, recapitalisation, alter the rights attaching to any shares, or effect any reduction, repayment or cancellation of share capital or share premium or capitalise any reserves or redeem or buy-back any shares or other similar transaction, and (B) grant, confer or award any option, right, warrant, deferred stock unit, conversion right or other right not existing on the date of this announcement to acquire any of its shares (whether or not pursuant to the Glencar Share Option Scheme);

 

  (iii) save as disclosed (A) increase any compensation payable to an employee or enter into any severance agreement, (B) grant any bonuses, (C) adopt any new employee benefit plan (including any share option, share benefit or share purchase plan) or pension scheme or amend any existing employee benefit plan or pension scheme (including, without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, changing the entitlements to benefits under a pension scheme, or the benefits that accrue under a pension scheme, or the amounts payable thereunder, or the basis of calculation of such amounts, or the basis on which any pension scheme is funded), except for changes which are less favourable to participants in such plans or are required to implement the Offer, (D) commence or terminate the employment of any employee or proposed employee whose annual remuneration exceeds US$50,000 or (E) enter into or amend or otherwise modify any agreement or arrangement with Persons that are Affiliates or are officers or directors of Glencar;

 

  (iv) (A) declare, set aside or pay any dividend or make any other distribution or payment (whether in cash, stock or other property) with respect to any Glencar Shares or allow any of Glencar’s Subsidiaries to pay or make any such dividend, distribution or payment (other than dividends or distributions from a wholly owned Glencar Subsidiary to another Glencar Subsidiary or to Glencar), or (B) directly or indirectly redeem, purchase or otherwise acquire any of Glencar’s Shares or any equity interest of any of the Glencar Subsidiaries, other than in connection with (1) the acquisition of Glencar Shares from holders of Glencar Share Options or Glencar Share Warrants in full or partial payment of the exercise price payable by such holders upon exercise of Glencar Share Options or Glencar Share Warrants outstanding as of the date of this announcement, and (2) tax withholdings upon the exercise of Glencar Share Options;

 

  (v) save as disclosed, merge with, enter into a consolidation with, enter into a scheme of arrangement with or acquire an interest in any Person or acquire a substantial portion of the assets or business of any Person or any division or line of business thereof, or otherwise acquire any assets other than in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice, or enter into any agreement or arrangement for any of the above;

 

27


  (vi) save as disclosed, other than in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice, sell, lease, license, pledge, transfer, or otherwise dispose of or encumber any properties or assets of Glencar or of any of its Subsidiaries (including any accounts, leases, contracts or intellectual property or any assets or the stock of any of its Subsidiaries);

 

  (vii) save as disclosed, (A) enter into any material joint venture or profit sharing agreement or (B) except where the consequences thereof would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole), enter into or vary any contract, transaction, arrangement or commitment or announce its intention to enter into or vary any contract, transaction, arrangement or commitment (whether in respect of capital expenditure or otherwise) which is of a long term, onerous or unusual nature or magnitude or which is or would be materially restrictive on the business of any member of the Glencar Group;

 

  (viii) (A) create, incur or suffer to exist any indebtedness for borrowed money except (1) such indebtedness which existed as of 31 December 2008 as reflected on the balance sheet included in Glencar’s Annual Report for the financial year ended 31 December 2008 or (2) any indebtedness owed to Glencar by any of its direct or indirect wholly owned Subsidiaries, (B) guarantee indebtedness of another Person, or (C) issue, sell or amend any debt securities or warrants or other rights to acquire any debt securities of Glencar or any of its Subsidiaries, or guarantee any debt securities of another Person;

 

  (ix) make any change to its methods, principles or practices of accounting currently in effect, except (A) as required by generally accepted accounting principles, (B) as required by a Governmental Authority or quasi-Governmental Authority (including the Financial Accounting Standards Board or any similar organisation), or (C) as required by a change in applicable law;

 

  (x) make or change any tax election, settle or compromise any tax claim or amend any tax return;

 

  (xi) save as disclosed, open or expand any facility or office;

 

  (xii) settle or compromise any litigation or other disputes (whether or not commenced prior to the date of this announcement) other than settlements or compromises for litigation or other disputes where the settlement imposes no material (in this context, material shall mean material to either Glencar or Gold Fields) obligation other than the payment of cash and the amount paid in settlement or compromise, excluding any amounts that may be paid under existing insurance policies;

 

  (xiii) save as disclosed, authorise, recommend, propose or announce an intention to adopt a plan of complete or partial liquidation or dissolution of Glencar or any of its Subsidiaries;

 

  (xiv) save as disclosed incur any administration and exploration expenditure in excess of €70,000 per month;

 

  (xv) other than in the ordinary course of business, modify, amend or terminate any material contract or agreement to which Glencar or any of its Subsidiaries is a party, or knowingly waive, release or assign any material rights or claims (including any write-off or other compromise of any accounts receivable of Glencar or any of its Subsidiaries); or

 

28


  (xvi) authorise any of, or commit or agree, in writing or otherwise, to take any of the foregoing actions, or otherwise agree to take any action inconsistent with any of the foregoing paragraphs (g)(i) to (xv);

 

  (h) save as disclosed and/or save as publicly disclosed by Glencar by the delivery of an announcement to the London Stock Exchange and/or the Irish Stock Exchange at any time up to 24 July 2009 (being the date of the Announcement):

 

  (i) there not having arisen any adverse change or adverse deterioration in the business, assets, financial or commercial position or profits of Glencar or any member of the Glencar Group (save to an extent which would not have a material adverse effect (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole);

 

  (ii) no litigation, arbitration proceedings, prosecution or other legal proceedings to which any member of the Glencar Group is or would reasonably be expected to become a party (whether as plaintiff or defendant or otherwise) and no investigation by any Governmental Authority against or in respect of any member of the Glencar Group having been instituted or remaining outstanding by, against or in respect of any member of the Glencar Group (save where the consequences of such litigation, arbitration proceedings, prosecution or other legal proceedings or investigation are not or would not have a material adverse effect (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole) and no litigation, arbitration proceedings, prosecution or other legal proceedings to which any member of the Glencar Group or the Wider Gold Fields Group is a party having been instituted by a third party (other than a Governmental Authority) which makes the Offer or its implementation, or the acquisition or proposed acquisition by Gold Fields of any shares in, or any of the material assets (which for this purpose means any intellectual property, or any assets that are material, in value terms or otherwise, in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole) of, Glencar or control of, Glencar, void, illegal or unenforceable under the laws of any jurisdiction or otherwise, directly or indirectly, restrains, revokes, prohibits, restricts or materially delays the same or imposes additional or different conditions or obligations with respect thereto; or

 

  (iii) no contingent or other liability existing or having arisen which would reasonably be expected to affect adversely any member of the Glencar Group (save where such liability is not or would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole);

 

  (i) save as disclosed and/or save as publicly disclosed by Glencar by the delivery of an announcement to the London Stock Exchange and/or the Irish Stock Exchange at any time up to 24 July 2009 (being the date of the Announcement) Gold Fields not having discovered:

 

  (i) that any financial, business or other information concerning the Glencar Group which has been disclosed is materially misleading, contains a material misrepresentation of fact or omits to state a fact necessary to make the material information contained therein not misleading, (save where the consequences of which would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole);

 

  (ii) that any member of the Glencar Group is subject to any liability (actual or contingent) which is material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole;

 

29


  (iii) in relation to any release, emission, discharge, disposal or other fact or circumstance which has caused or might impair the environment or harm human health, that any past or present member of the Glencar Group has acted in material violation of any laws, statutes, regulations, notices or other legal or regulatory requirements of any third party (except where the consequences thereof would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group, taken as a whole);

 

  (iv) that there is, or is likely to be, any liability, whether actual or contingent, to make good, repair, reinstate or clean up any property now or previously owned, occupied or made use of by any past or present member of the Glencar Group or any other property or any controlled waters under any environmental legislation, regulation, notice, circular, order or other lawful requirement of any relevant authority (whether by formal notice or order or not) or third party or otherwise (save where such liability is not or would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole); or

 

  (v) the circumstances which exist which are likely to result in any actual or contingent liability to any member of the Glencar Group under any applicable legislation referred to in sub-paragraph (iv) above to improve or modify existing or install new plant, machinery or equipment or to carry out any changes in the process currently carried out (save where such liability is not or would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole).

 

  (j) Save as disclosed, no member of the Glencar Group being in default under the terms or conditions of any facility or agreement or arrangement for the provision of loans, credit or drawdown facilities, or of any security, surety or guarantee in respect of any facility or agreement or arrangement for the provision of loans, credit or drawdown facilities to any member of the Glencar Group (save where such default is not or would not be material (in value terms or otherwise) in the context of the Glencar Group taken as a whole);

 

  (k) for the purposes of the conditions set out above:

 

  (i) disclosed ” means fairly disclosed in writing by or on behalf of Glencar to Gold Fields Group or its Representatives at any time up to the date hereof;

 

  (ii) Glencar Group ” means Glencar and its Subsidiaries and subsidiary undertakings;

 

  (iii) parent undertaking ”, “ subsidiary undertaking ”, “ associated undertaking ” and “ undertaking ” have the meanings given by the European Communities (Companies: Group Accounts) Regulations, 1992;

 

  (iv) Gold Fields Group ” means Gold Fields, and its parent undertaking and its Subsidiaries and subsidiary undertakings and any other Subsidiary or subsidiary undertaking of its parent undertaking;

 

  (v) substantial interest ” means an interest in 5 per cent. or more of the voting equity capital of an undertaking; and

 

  (vi) Wider Gold Fields Group ” means the Gold Fields Group, its associated undertakings and any entities in which any member of the Gold Fields Group holds a substantial interest.

 

30


Subject to the requirements of the Irish Takeover Panel, Gold Fields reserves the right (but shall be under no obligation) to waive, in whole or in part, all or any of the conditions other than (a) above.

If Gold Fields is required to make an offer for Glencar Shares under the provisions of Rule 9 of the Irish Takeover Rules, Gold Fields may make such alterations to any of the above conditions as are necessary to comply with the provisions of that rule.

Gold Fields reserves the right at its discretion to effect the Offer as a scheme of arrangement under Section 201 of the Companies Act, 1963. In such event, the Offer will be implemented on the same terms (subject to appropriate amendments), in as far as is applicable, as those which apply to the Offer.

 

31


PART B: FURTHER TERMS OF THE OFFER

Except where the context requires otherwise, any reference in Parts B and C of this Appendix I and in the Form of Acceptance:

 

(a) to the Offer will include any revision, variation or extension of it;

 

(b) to the Offer becoming unconditional will include the Offer becoming or being declared unconditional;

 

(c) to the Offer being or becoming or being declared unconditional will be construed as the Offer being or becoming or being declared unconditional as to acceptances whether or not any other condition of the Offer remains to be fulfilled;

 

(d) to the acceptance condition means the condition as to acceptances of the Offer set out in paragraph (a) of Part A of this Appendix I and references to the Offer becoming unconditional as to acceptances will be construed accordingly;

 

(e) to the Offer Document will mean this document and any other document containing the Offer; and

 

(f) to acting in concert will be construed in accordance with the meaning attributed to that phrase in Appendix IV.

The following further terms apply, unless the context requires otherwise, to the Offer.

 

1. Acceptance Period

 

(a) The Offer will initially be open for acceptance until 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009. Gold Fields reserves the right (but will not be obliged, other than as required by the Irish Takeover Panel) at any time and from time to time to extend the Offer after such time.

 

(b) Although no revision is envisaged, if the Offer is revised it will remain open for acceptance for a period of at least 14 calendar days (or such other period as may be permitted by the Irish Takeover Panel) following the date written notice of the revision is despatched to Glencar Shareholders. Except with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel, no revision of the Offer may be made after 22 September 2009 or, if later, the date 14 calendar days before the last date on which the Offer can become unconditional.

 

(c) The Offer, whether revised or not, will not (except with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel) be capable of becoming unconditional after 5.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 6 October 2009 (or any other time and/or date beyond which Gold Fields has stated that the Offer will not be extended and has not, where permitted, withdrawn that statement), nor of being kept open for acceptances after that time and/or date unless the Offer has previously become unconditional, provided that Gold Fields reserves the right, with the permission of the Irish Takeover Panel, to extend the Offer to any later time(s) and/or date(s). Except with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel, Gold Fields may not, for the purposes of determining whether the acceptance condition has been satisfied, take into account acceptances received or purchases of Glencar Shares made after 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 6 October 2009 (or any other time(s) and/or date(s) beyond which Gold Fields has stated that the Offer will not be extended and has not, where permitted, withdrawn that statement) or, if the Offer is so extended, such later time(s) and/or date(s) as Gold Fields, with the permission of the Irish Takeover Panel, may determine.

 

(d) If the Offer becomes unconditional, it will remain open for acceptance for not less than 14 calendar days from the date on which it would otherwise have expired. If the Offer has become unconditional and it is stated that the Offer will remain open until further notice, then not less than 14 calendar days’ notice in writing will be given prior to the closing of the Offer by or on behalf of Gold Fields to those Glencar Shareholders who have not accepted the Offer.

 

32


(e) If a competing offer or other competitive situation arises after Gold Fields has made a “no extension” statement and/or a “no increase” statement (as referred to in the Irish Takeover Rules) in connection with the Offer, Gold Fields may, if it specifically reserves the right to do so at the time such statement is made (or otherwise with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel), choose not to be bound by or withdraw such statement and be free to revise and/or extend the Offer provided it complies with the requirements of the Irish Takeover Rules and in particular that:

 

  (i) it announces the withdrawal as soon as possible and in any event within four business days of the firm announcement of the competing offer or other competitive situation;

 

  (ii) it notifies Glencar Shareholders to that effect in writing at the earliest opportunity or, in the case of Glencar Shareholders with registered addresses outside Ireland and the United Kingdom or whom Gold Fields knows to be nominees, custodians or trustees holding Glencar Shares for such persons, by announcement in Ireland and the United Kingdom at the earliest opportunity; and

 

  (iii) any Glencar Shareholder who accepted the Offer after the date of the “no extension” or “no increase” statement is given a right of withdrawal in accordance with paragraph 3(c) of this Part B.

Gold Fields may choose not to be bound by a “no increase” or “no extension” statement if, having reserved the right to do so, it posts an increased or improved offer (either as to the value or form of the consideration or otherwise) which is recommended for acceptance by the Board of Glencar, or in other circumstances permitted by the Irish Takeover Panel.

 

(f) For the purposes of determining whether the acceptance condition has been satisfied, Gold Fields will not be bound (unless otherwise required by the Irish Takeover Panel) to take into account any Glencar Shares which have been issued or unconditionally allotted or which arise as the result of the exercise of subscription or conversion rights before that determination takes place unless written notice containing relevant details of the allotment, issue, subscription or conversion has been received from Glencar or its agents before that time by Gold Fields or Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited on behalf of Gold Fields at the address specified in paragraph 3(a) of this Part B. Notification by telex or facsimile or other electronic transmissions or copies will not be sufficient.

 

2. Announcements

 

(a) Without prejudice to paragraph 3(a) below, by 8.00 a.m. (Dublin time) on the business day (the relevant day ) following the day on which the Offer is due to expire, or becomes unconditional, or is revised or is extended, as the case may be, (or such later time or date as the Irish Takeover Panel may agree), Gold Fields will make an appropriate announcement and simultaneously inform the Irish Stock Exchange and the London Stock Exchange of the position and provide a copy of such notice to the Stock Exchanges. Such announcement will also state (unless otherwise permitted by the Irish Takeover Panel) the total number of Glencar Shares and rights over Glencar Shares (as nearly as practicable):

 

  (i) for which acceptances of the Offer have been received (showing the extent, if any, to which such acceptances have been received from persons acting or deemed to be acting in concert (for the purposes of the Irish Takeover Rules and in relation to the Offer) with Gold Fields);

 

  (ii) acquired or agreed to be acquired by or on behalf of Gold Fields or any person acting or deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields during the Offer Period; and

 

  (iii) held by or on behalf of Gold Fields or any person acting or deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields prior to the Offer Period,

 

33


and will specify the percentage of Glencar’s share capital represented by each of these figures. Any decision to extend the time and/or date by which the acceptance condition has to be satisfied may be made at any time up to, and will be announced not later than 8.00 a.m. (Dublin Time) on the relevant day (or such later time and/or date as the Irish Takeover Panel may agree). The announcement will also state the next expiry date unless the Offer is unconditional, in which case it may instead state that the Offer will remain open until further notice. In computing the number of Glencar Shares represented by acceptances and purchases, there may be included or excluded for announcement purposes, subject to paragraph 6(f) of this Part B, acceptances and purchases not in all respects in order or subject to verification.

 

(b) In this Appendix I, references to the making of an announcement or the giving of notice by or on behalf of Gold Fields include the release of an announcement by public relations consultants or by Canaccord Adams on behalf of Gold Fields to the press and the delivery by hand or telephone, telex or facsimile transmission or other electronic transmission of an announcement to a Regulatory Information Service. An announcement made otherwise than to a Regulatory Information Service will be notified simultaneously to a Regulatory Information Service (unless the Irish Takeover Panel otherwise agrees).

 

(c) Without limiting the manner in which Gold Fields may choose to make any public statement and subject to Gold Fields’s obligations under applicable law, Gold Fields will have no obligation to publish, advertise or otherwise communicate any such public announcement other than by making a release to a Regulatory Information Service.

 

3. Rights of withdrawal

 

(a) If Gold Fields, having announced the Offer to be unconditional, fails by 3.30 p.m. (Dublin time) on the relevant day (or such later time and/or date as the Irish Takeover Panel may agree) to comply with any of the other relevant requirements specified in paragraph 2(a) of this Part B, an accepting Glencar Shareholder may (unless the Irish Takeover Panel otherwise agrees) immediately after that time withdraw his acceptance of the Offer by written notice signed by the accepting Glencar Shareholder (or his agent duly appointed in writing and evidence of whose appointment, in a form reasonably satisfactory to Gold Fields, is produced with the notice) given by post or (during normal business hours only) by hand to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland on behalf of Gold Fields. Subject to paragraph 1(c) of this Part B, this right of withdrawal may be terminated not less than eight calendar days after the relevant day by Gold Fields confirming, if that be the case, that the Offer is still unconditional and complying with the other relevant requirements specified in paragraph 2(a) of this Part B. If any such confirmation is given, the first period of 14 calendar days referred to in paragraph 1(d) of this Part B will run from the date of that confirmation and compliance.

 

(b) If by 3.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 25 September 2009 (or such later time and/or date as the Irish Takeover Panel may agree) the Offer has not become unconditional, an accepting Glencar Shareholder may withdraw his acceptance at any time thereafter in the manner referred to in paragraph 3(a) of this Part B, before the earlier of:

 

  (i) the time that the Offer becomes unconditional; and

 

  (ii) the final time for lodgement of acceptances which can be taken into account in accordance with paragraph 1(c) of this Part B.

 

(c) If a “no extension” and/or “no increase” statement is withdrawn in accordance with paragraph 1(e) of this Part B, any acceptance made by a Glencar Shareholder after the date of that statement may be withdrawn thereafter in the manner referred to in paragraph 1(e) of this Part B for a period of eight calendar days following the date on which the notice of the withdrawal of such statement is posted to Glencar Shareholders.

 

34


(d) Except as provided by this paragraph 3 acceptances of the Offer will be irrevocable.

 

(e) Withdrawals of Glencar Shares deposited under the Offer must be effected by notice of withdrawal made by or on behalf of the depositing Glencar Shareholder and must be received by the Receiving Agent at the place of deposit of the applicable Glencar Shares before such Glencar Shares are accepted, or accepted and paid for in the case of paragraph (c) above. Notice of withdrawal must: (i) be in writing (which includes facsimile or notice by electronic means that produces a printed copy); (ii) be made on behalf of the depositing holder; (iii) be signed by the person who signed the Form of Acceptance accompanying the Glencar Shares which are to be withdrawn; and (iv) specify such person’s name, the number of Glencar Shares to be withdrawn, the name of the registered holder and (if applicable) the certificate number shown on each certificate representing the Glencar Shares to be withdrawn. The withdrawal shall take effect upon actual receipt of the written notice by the Receiving Agent.

 

(f) In this paragraph 3, written notice (including any letter of appointment, direction or authority) means notice in writing bearing the original signature(s) of the relevant accepting Glencar Shareholder or his/their agent(s) duly appointed in writing (evidence of whose appointment satisfactory to Gold Fields is produced with the notice). Telex, e-mail, facsimile or other electronic transmissions or copies will not be sufficient.

 

4. Revised Offer

 

(a) Although no such revision is envisaged, if the Offer (in its original or any previously revised form(s)) is revised (either in its terms or conditions or in the value or form of the consideration offered or otherwise), and any such revised Offer represents on the date on which the revision is announced (on such basis as Gold Fields may consider appropriate) an improvement (or no diminution) in the value of the consideration of the Offer as so revised compared with the value of the consideration or terms previously offered, or in the overall value received by a Glencar Shareholder (under or in consequence of the Offer or otherwise), the benefit of the revised Offer will, subject to paragraphs 4(c), 4(d) and 5 of this Part B, be made available to any Glencar Shareholder who has validly accepted the Offer in its original or any previously revised form(s) and who has not validly withdrawn such acceptance (a Previous Acceptor ). The acceptance by or on behalf of a Previous Acceptor of the Offer in its original or any previously revised form(s) shall, subject to paragraphs 4(c), 4(d) and 5 of this Part B, be deemed to be an acceptance of the Offer as so revised and will also constitute an authority to Gold Fields or any of its respective directors, authorised representatives and agents as his attorney and/or agent ( attorney ):

 

  (i) to accept any such revised Offer on behalf of such Previous Acceptor;

 

  (ii) if such revised Offer includes alternative forms of consideration, to make on his behalf elections for and/or accept such alternative forms of consideration on his behalf in such proportions as such attorney in his absolute discretion thinks fit; and

 

  (iii) to execute on behalf of and in the name of such Previous Acceptor all such further documents and take such further actions (if any) as may be required to give effect to such acceptances and/or elections.

In making any such acceptance or making any such election, the attorney will take into account the nature of any previous acceptances and/or elections made by the Previous Acceptor and such other facts or matters as he may reasonably consider relevant.

 

(b)

Gold Fields reserves the right (subject to paragraph 4(a) above) to treat an executed Form of Acceptance or TTE instruction relating to the Offer in its original or any previously revised form(s) which is received (or dated) on or after the Announcement or issue of the Offer in any revised form as a valid acceptance of the revised Offer (and, where applicable, a valid election

 

35


 

for the alternative form(s) of consideration). Such acceptance will constitute an authority in the terms of paragraph 4(a) above, mutatis mutandis , on behalf of the relevant Glencar Shareholder.

 

(c) The deemed acceptances and elections referred to in this paragraph 4 shall not apply and the authorities conferred by this paragraph 4 shall not be exercised by Gold Fields or any of its respective directors, authorised representatives and agents if, as a result thereof, the Previous Acceptor would (on such basis as Gold Fields may consider appropriate) thereby receive, under or in consequence of the Offer and/or any alternative pursuant thereto as revised or otherwise, less consideration in aggregate under the revised Offer than he would have received in aggregate consideration as a result of acceptance of the Offer in the form in which it was originally accepted by him or on his behalf, having regard to any previous acceptance or election originally made by him, unless the Previous Acceptor has previously otherwise agreed in writing.

 

(d) The deemed acceptances and elections referred to in this paragraph 4 will not apply, and the authorities conferred by this paragraph will be ineffective, to the extent that a Previous Acceptor lodges with Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited in the manner specified in paragraph 3(a) of this Part B, within 14 calendar days of the posting of the document pursuant to which the revision of the Offer is made available to Glencar Shareholders, a Form of Acceptance or some other form issued by or on behalf of Gold Fields in which the Glencar Shareholder validly elects to receive the consideration receivable by him under such revised Offer in some other manner.

 

5. Overseas Shareholders

 

(a) The making of the Offer in, or to certain persons who are resident in, or citizens or nationals of, jurisdictions outside Ireland and the United Kingdom or to custodians, nominees of or trustees for such persons, may be affected by the laws of the relevant jurisdictions. Glencar Shareholders who are residents, citizens or nationals of jurisdictions outside Ireland and the United Kingdom should inform themselves about and observe any applicable legal requirements. It is the responsibility of any such person wishing to accept the Offer to satisfy himself as to the full observance of the laws of the relevant jurisdiction in connection therewith, including the obtaining of any governmental, exchange control or other consents which may be required and compliance with other necessary formalities. Any such Overseas Shareholder will be responsible for the payment of any issue, transfer or other taxes due in that jurisdiction of whomsoever payable and Gold Fields and any person acting on its behalf shall be fully indemnified and held harmless by such Overseas Shareholder for any such issue, transfer or other taxes as such person may be required to pay. If you are an Overseas Shareholder and you are in doubt about your position, you should consult your professional adviser in the relevant jurisdiction.

 

(b) The Offer is not being made, directly or indirectly, in or into any jurisdiction if to do so would constitute a violation of the relevant laws in such jurisdiction, including Australia, Canada or Japan, by use of the mails of, or by any means or instrumentality of interstate or foreign commerce of, or any facilities of a national securities exchanges of any of these jurisdictions. Such means or instrumentalities include, but are not limited to, facsimile transmission, telex, telephone and internet.

 

(c)

Copies of this document, the Form of Acceptance and any related Offer document(s) are not being, and must not be, mailed or otherwise distributed or sent in or into any Restricted Jurisdiction including to Glencar Shareholders with registered addresses in such jurisdictions or to persons whom Gold Fields knows to be nominees, custodians or trustees holding Glencar Shares for such persons. The Offer is not being made, directly or indirectly, in or into any Restricted Jurisdiction, or by the use of the mails, or by any means or instrumentality (including, without limitation, telephonically or electronically) of interstate or foreign

 

36


 

commerce, or by any facility of a national securities exchange of any Restricted Jurisdiction, and the Offer will not be capable of acceptance by any such means, instrumentality or facility from within any Restricted Jurisdiction. Envelopes containing the Form of Acceptance or other documents relating to the Offer must not be postmarked in any Restricted Jurisdiction or otherwise despatched from any Restricted Jurisdiction and all acceptors must provide addresses outside of any such Restricted Jurisdiction on the receipt of the consideration to which they are entitled under the Offer and which is despatched by post pursuant to paragraph (d)(ii) of Part C of this Appendix I or for the return of the Form of Acceptance and (in relation to Glencar Shares in certificated form) any share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title.

 

(d) A Glencar Shareholder will, subject to the paragraphs below, be deemed not to have validly accepted the Offer if:

 

  (i) such shareholder puts “NO” in Box 4 of the Form of Acceptance and thereby does not give the representation and warranty set out in paragraph (c) of Part C of this Appendix I to the effect that such shareholder has not received or sent copies or originals of this document, the Form of Acceptance or any related offering documents in, into or from any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer and has not otherwise utilised in connection with the Offer, directly or indirectly, the use of mails of, or any means or instrumentality (including, without limitation, facsimile transmission, telex and telephone or email) of interstate or foreign commerce of, or any facility of a national securities exchange of any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer;

 

  (ii) having completed Box 2 of the Form of Acceptance with a registered address in any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer, such shareholder does not insert in Box 5 of the Form of Acceptance the name and address of a person or agent outside any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer to whom such shareholder wishes the consideration to which such shareholder is entitled under the Offer to be sent;

 

  (iii) such shareholder inserts in Box 5 of the Form of Acceptance the name and address of a person or agent in any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer to whom such shareholder wishes the consideration to which such shareholder is entitled under the Offer to be sent; or

 

  (iv) in any case, the Form of Acceptance received from such shareholder is received in an envelope postmarked in, or which otherwise appears to Gold Fields or its agents to have been sent from, or otherwise evidences use of any means or instrumentality of interstate or foreign commerce of any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer.

Gold Fields reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to investigate, in relation to any acceptance whether the representation and warranty set out in paragraph (c) of Part C of this Appendix I could have been truthfully given by the relevant Glencar Shareholder and, if such investigation is made and, as a result, Gold Fields cannot satisfy itself that such representation and warranty was true and correct, such acceptance shall not, subject to paragraphs 5(f) and 5(g) below, be valid.

 

(e)

If, notwithstanding the restrictions described above, any person (including, without limitation, custodians, nominees and trustees) whether pursuant to a contractual or legal obligation or otherwise forwards this document, the Form of Acceptance or any related Offer document in, into or from any jurisdiction if to do so would constitute a violation of the relevant laws in such jurisdiction or uses the mails or any means or instrumentality (including, without limitation, facsimile transmission, e-mail, telex and telephone) of interstate or foreign

 

37


 

commerce of, or any facilities of a national securities exchange of any jurisdiction if to do so would constitute a violation of the relevant laws in such jurisdiction in connection with such forwarding, such person should:

 

  (i) inform the recipient of such fact;

 

  (ii) explain to the recipient that such action may invalidate any purported acceptance by the recipient; and

 

  (iii) draw the attention of the recipient to this paragraph 5.

 

(f) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this document or the Form of Acceptance, Gold Fields may make the Offer (with or without giving effect to the foregoing paragraphs of this paragraph 5) in any jurisdiction where to do so would otherwise constitute a violation of the relevant laws in such jurisdiction if the Offer is made pursuant to an exemption under, or in accordance with, applicable law in such jurisdiction and in this connection the provisions of paragraph (c) of Part C of this Appendix I will be varied accordingly.

 

(g) The provisions of this paragraph 5 supersede any terms of the Offer inconsistent with them. The provisions of this paragraph 5 and/or any other terms of the Offer relating to Overseas Shareholders may be waived, varied or modified as regards specific Glencar Shareholder(s) or on a general basis by Gold Fields in its absolute discretion.

 

6. General

 

(a) Except with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel, the Offer will lapse unless all the conditions relating to the Offer have been fulfilled or (if capable of waiver) waived, or, where appropriate, have been determined by Gold Fields to be, and continue to be, satisfied by 5.00 p.m. on 25 September 2009 or by 5.00 p.m. on the date which is 21 days after the date on which the Offer becomes unconditional, whichever is the later, or such later date as Gold Fields, with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel, may decide. To the extent that the Offer would give rise to a concentration with a Community dimension within the scope of Council Regulation (EC) No. 139/2004 (the Regulation ), the Offer shall lapse if the European Commission initiates proceedings in respect of that concentration under Article 6(1)(c) of the Regulation or refers the concentration to a competent authority of a Member State under Article 9(1) of the Regulation before the First Closing Date or the date when the Offer becomes or is declared unconditional as to acceptances, whichever is the later.

 

(b) If the Offer lapses, it will cease to be capable of further acceptance and accepting Glencar Shareholders and Gold Fields will cease to be bound by Forms of Acceptance submitted before the time the Offer lapses.

 

(c) If the Offer is declared unconditional in all respects and sufficient acceptances under the Offer are received, Gold Fields intends to apply the provisions of section 204, Companies Act, 1963 to acquire compulsorily any outstanding Glencar Shares to which the Offer relates.

Glencar Shareholders who wish to be better informed about section 204, Companies Act 1963 should consult their legal advisers.

Furthermore, Gold Fields intends to procure that Glencar applies for the cancellation of admission to trading of the Glencar Shares on the Irish Stock Exchange and the London Stock Exchange and for Glencar’s listing on IEX and AIM to be cancelled. Such cancellation of admission to trading will take effect no earlier than 20 business days after: the earlier of (a) Gold Fields has by virtue of its shareholding (if any) and acceptances under the Offer, acquired or agreed to acquire 75 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar or (b) the first date of issue of the compulsory acquisition notices under section 204, Companies Act 1963 as appropriate.

 

38


(d) The expression Offer Period when used in this document means, in relation to the Offer, the period commencing on (and including) 24 July 2009 until whichever of the following dates will be the latest:

 

  (i) 1.00 p.m. (Dublin time) on 4 September 2009;

 

  (ii) the date on which the Offer lapses; and

 

  (iii) the date on which the Offer becomes unconditional.

 

(e) Except with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel, settlement of the consideration to which any Glencar Shareholder is entitled under the Offer will be implemented in full in accordance with the terms of the Offer without regard to any lien, right of set-off, counterclaim or other analogous right to which Gold Fields may otherwise be, or claim to be, entitled as against such Glencar Shareholder and will be effected:

 

  (i) in the case of acceptances received, complete in all respects (including the relevant transfer to escrow or (as applicable) receipt of relevant share certificate(s) and/or other documents of title or indemnities satisfactory to Gold Fields), by the date on which the Offer becomes or is declared unconditional in all respects, within 14 calendar days of such date; or

 

  (ii) in the case of acceptances of the Offer received, complete in all respects, after the date on which the Offer becomes or is declared unconditional in all respects, but while it remains open for acceptance, within 14 calendar days of such receipt.

 

(f) All Sterling cash payments (other than payments made by means of CREST) will be made by cheque drawn on a branch of UK clearing bank. All Euro cash payments (other than payments made by means of CREST) will be made by cheque drawn on a branch of an Irish clearing bank. Notwithstanding the right reserved by Gold Fields to treat a Form of Acceptance as valid (even though the relevant Form of Acceptance is not entirely in order or, in the case of Glencar Shares in certificated form, is not accompanied by the relevant share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title), except as otherwise agreed with the Irish Takeover Panel:

 

  (i) an acceptance of the Offer will only be counted towards fulfilling the acceptance condition if the requirements of Rule 10.3 and, if applicable, Rule 10.5 of the Irish Takeover Rules are satisfied in respect of it;

 

  (ii) a purchase of Glencar Shares by Gold Fields or its nominee(s) (or, if relevant, any person deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields, or its nominee(s)) will only be counted towards fulfilling the acceptance condition if the requirements of Rule 10.4 and, if applicable, Rule 10.5 of the Irish Takeover Rules are satisfied in respect of it; and

 

  (iii) the Offer will not become unconditional unless Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited has issued a certificate to Gold Fields or its respective agents stating the number of Glencar Shares in respect of which acceptances have been received which comply with subparagraph (i) above and the number of Glencar Shares otherwise acquired, whether before or during the Offer Period, which comply with subparagraph (ii) above. Gold Fields will send a copy of such certificate to the Irish Takeover Panel and to Glencar’s financial advisers as soon as possible after it is issued.

 

(g) The terms, provisions, instructions and authorities contained in the Form of Acceptance constitute part of the terms of the Offer. Words and expressions defined in this document have the same meanings when used in the Form of Acceptance, unless the context otherwise requires. The provisions of this Appendix I shall be deemed to be incorporated into and form part of the Form of Acceptance.

 

39


(h) All references in this document and in the Form of Acceptance to 4 September 2009 will (except in paragraph 1(a) of this Part B and 6(d) above and where the context otherwise requires) be deemed, if the expiry date of the Offer be extended, to refer to the expiry date of the Offer as so extended.

 

(i) References in paragraph 5 of this Part B and in Part C of this Appendix I to a Glencar Shareholder will include references to the person or persons executing a Form of Acceptance and in the event of more than one person executing a Form of Acceptance, such paragraphs will apply to them jointly and severally.

 

(j) Any omission to despatch this document, the Form of Acceptance or any notice required to be despatched under the terms of the Offer to, or any failure to receive the same by, any person to whom the Offer is made, or should be made, will not invalidate the Offer in any way.

 

(k) Gold Fields reserves the right to treat acceptances of the Offer as valid if received by it at any place or places determined by it otherwise than as set out in this document or the Form of Acceptance.

 

(l) No acknowledgement of receipt of any Form of Acceptance, transfer by means of CREST, share certificate(s) or other document(s) of title will be given by, or on behalf of, Gold Fields. All communications, notices, certificates, documents of title and remittances to be delivered by, or sent to or from, Glencar Shareholders (or their designated agent(s)) will be delivered by or sent to or from them (or their designated agent(s)) at their own risk.

 

(m) The Offer extends to persons to whom the Offer is made or should be made to whom this document, the Form of Acceptance or any related documents may not be despatched and such persons may collect copies of these documents from Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at the address set out in paragraph 3(a) of this Part B.

 

(n) Subject to applicable law, Gold Fields reserves the right to notify any matter including the making of the Offer to all or any Glencar Shareholders with a registered address outside Ireland or the United Kingdom; or whom Gold Fields knows to be a custodian, trustee or nominee holding Glencar Shares for persons who are citizens, residents or nationals of jurisdictions outside Ireland and the UK, by announcement or by paid advertisement in a daily newspaper published and circulated in Ireland and the United Kingdom in which event such notice will be deemed to have been sufficiently given, notwithstanding any failure by any such shareholder(s) to receive or see such notice, and all references in this document to notice in writing by or on behalf of Gold Fields will be construed accordingly.

 

(o) The Offer is made at 5.00 p.m. on 7 August 2009 and is capable of acceptance from and after that time. The Offer has been made by means of this document and an advertisement proposed to be published in the Financial Times (United Kingdom and Ireland editions) on 10 August 2009.

 

(p) If the Offer does not become unconditional in all respects:

 

  (i) the Form of Acceptance, share certificates and/or other documents of title will be returned by post (or such other method as may be approved by the Irish Takeover Panel) within 14 calendar days of the Offer lapsing to the person or agent whose name and address is set out in the relevant box in the Form of Acceptance or, if none is set out, to the first-named holder at his registered address; and

 

  (ii) in respect of Glencar Shares held in uncertificated form, Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited will, immediately after the lapsing of the Offer (or within such longer period as the Irish Takeover Panel may permit, not exceeding 14 calendar days of the lapsing of the Offer), give instructions to CRESTCo to transfer all Glencar Shares held in escrow balances and in relation to which it is the Escrow Agent for the purposes of the Offer to the original available balances of the Glencar Shareholders concerned.

 

40


(q) All powers of attorney, appointments of agents and authorities conferred by this Appendix I or in the Form of Acceptance are given by way of security for the performance of the obligations of the Glencar Shareholder concerned and are irrevocable in accordance with Section 20 of the Powers of Attorney Act 1996 except in the circumstances where the donor of such power of attorney or authority or appointor is entitled to withdraw his acceptance in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Part B and duly does so.

 

(r) In relation to any acceptance of the Offer in respect of a holding of Glencar Shares which are in uncertificated form, Gold Fields reserves the right to make such alterations, additions or modifications to the terms of the Offer as may be necessary or desirable to give effect to any purported acceptance of the Offer, whether in order to comply with the facilities or requirements of CREST or otherwise, provided any such alterations, additions or modifications are consistent with the requirements of the Irish Takeover Rules or are otherwise made with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel.

 

(s) For the purposes of this document, the time of receipt of a TTE instruction shall be the time at which the relevant instruction settles in CREST.

 

(t) Neither Gold Fields, nor any subsidiary or parent of Gold Fields nor any agent or director of Gold Fields, nor any person acting on behalf of any of them, shall have any liability to any person for any loss or alleged loss arising from any decision as to the treatment of acceptances of the Offer or otherwise in connection therewith.

 

(u) All references in this Appendix I to any statute or statutory instrument shall include a statute or statutory provision which amends, consolidates or replaces the same.

 

(v) The Offer and all Forms of Acceptance and all acceptances and elections in respect thereof will be governed by and construed in accordance with Irish law.

 

41


PART C: FORM OF ACCEPTANCE

Each Glencar Shareholder by whom, or on whose behalf, any Form of Acceptance is executed and lodged with Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited irrevocably undertakes, represents, warrants and agrees to and with Gold Fields (so as to bind him and his personal representatives, heirs, successors and assigns) to the following effect:

 

(a) that the execution of the Form of Acceptance shall constitute:

 

  (i) an acceptance of the Offer in respect of the number of Glencar Shares inserted or deemed to be inserted in Box 1B of the Form of Acceptance; and

 

  (ii) an undertaking to execute any further documents, take any further action and give any further assurances which may be required in connection with the foregoing,

in each case on and subject to the terms and conditions set out in this document and the Form of Acceptance and that, subject only to the rights of withdrawal set out in paragraph 3 of Part B of this Appendix I, each such acceptance, election and undertaking shall be irrevocable.

If Box 1B is left blank or a number greater than such Glencar Shareholder’s registered holding appears in Box 1B or the Form of Acceptance is otherwise completed incorrectly, but the Form of Acceptance is signed in Box 3, it will be deemed to be an acceptance by such Glencar Shareholder of the Offer in respect of the total number of Glencar Shares registered in his name;

 

(b) that he is irrevocably and unconditionally entitled to transfer the Glencar Shares in respect of which the Form of Acceptance is completed and that the Glencar Shares in respect of which the Offer is accepted, or is deemed to be accepted, are sold fully paid and free from all liens, charges, encumbrances, rights of pre-emption and any other third party rights of any nature whatsoever and together with all rights attaching thereto, including the right to receive in full all dividends and other distributions, if any, declared, paid or made after the date of this document;

 

(c) that, unless he has written “NO” in Box 4 of the Form of Acceptance:

 

  (i) he has not received or sent copies or originals of this document, the Form of Acceptance or any related documents in, into, or from any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer;

 

  (ii) he has not used in connection with the Offer or the execution or delivery of the Form of Acceptance, directly or indirectly, the mails of, or any means or instrumentality (including, without limitation, facsimile transmissions, telex and telephone) of interstate or foreign commerce of, or any facilities of a national securities exchange of any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer;

 

  (iii) in respect of the Glencar Shares to which the Form of Acceptance relates, he is not an agent or fiduciary acting on a non-discretionary basis for a principal who has given any instructions with respect to the Offer from within any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer (unless such person has given all instructions with respect to the Offer from outside any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer);

 

  (iv) this document, the Form of Acceptance or any related offering documents have not been mailed or otherwise distributed or sent directly or indirectly in, into or from any Restricted Jurisdiction and he is accepting the Offer from outside a Restricted Jurisdiction; and

 

  (v) he has not signed the Form of Acceptance in any jurisdiction where it would be unlawful to make the Offer;

 

42


(d) that the execution of the Form of Acceptance and its delivery to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited constitutes, subject to the Offer becoming unconditional in all respects in accordance with its terms and to the accepting Glencar Shareholder not having validly withdrawn his acceptance, the irrevocable separate appointment of Gold Fields as such Glencar Shareholder’s attorney and/or agent ( attorney ), with an irrevocable instruction to the attorney to:

 

  (i) complete and execute all or any form(s) of transfer and/or renunciation and/or other document(s) in the attorney’s discretion in relation to the Glencar Shares referred to in paragraph (a)(i) of this Part C in favour of Gold Fields or as Gold Fields or its agents may direct;

 

  (ii) deliver such form(s) of transfer and/or renunciation and/or other document(s) at the attorney’s discretion together with any certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title relating to such Glencar Shares for registration within six months of the Offer becoming unconditional in all respects; and

 

  (iii) do all such other acts and things as may in the opinion of such attorney be necessary or expedient for the purpose of, or in connection with, the acceptance or deemed acceptance of the Offer and to vest in Gold Fields or its nominee the Glencar Shares as aforesaid;

 

(e) that the execution of the Form of Acceptance and its delivery to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited constitutes the irrevocable appointment of Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited as such Glencar Shareholder’s attorney and/or agent ( attorney ) and an irrevocable instruction and authority to the attorney:

 

  (i) subject to the Offer becoming unconditional in all respects in accordance with its terms and to an accepting Glencar Shareholder not having validly withdrawn his acceptance, to transfer to itself (or to such other person or persons as Gold Fields or its agents may direct) by means of CREST all or any of the Relevant Glencar Shares in uncertificated form (but not exceeding the number of Glencar Shares in uncertificated form in respect of which the Offer is accepted or deemed to be accepted); and

 

  (ii) if the Offer does not become unconditional in all respects, to give instructions to CRESTCo, immediately after the lapsing of the Offer (or within such longer period as the Irish Takeover Panel may permit, not exceeding 14 calendar days from the lapsing of the Offer), to transfer all such Relevant Glencar Shares to the original available balance of the accepting Glencar Shareholder.

In this paragraph, “ Relevant Glencar Shares ” means Glencar Shares in uncertificated form in respect of which a transfer or transfers to escrow has or have been effected in accordance with the procedures described in paragraph 17(d) of the letter from Gold Fields contained in Part II of this document and where the transfer or transfers to escrow was or were made in respect of Glencar Shares held under the same Member Account ID and Participant ID as the Member Account ID and Participant ID relating to the relevant Form of Acceptance (but irrespective of whether or not any Form of Acceptance reference number, or a Form of Acceptance reference number corresponding to that appearing on the relevant Form of Acceptance, was included in the relevant TTE instruction).

 

(f) that the execution of the Form of Acceptance and its delivery to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited constitutes, subject to the Offer becoming unconditional in all respects in accordance with its terms and to the accepting Glencar Shareholder not having validly withdrawn his acceptance, a separate and irrevocable instruction, authority and request:

 

  (i) to Glencar or its agents to procure the registration of the transfer of those Glencar Shares that are in certificated form pursuant to the Offer and the delivery of the share certificate(s) and/or other document(s) of title in respect thereof to Gold Fields or as it may direct; and

 

43


  (ii) if the Glencar Shares comprised or deemed comprised in such acceptance are in certificated form (or in circumstances where the following sub-paragraph applies), to Gold Fields or its agents, to procure the despatch by post (or such other method as may be approved by the Irish Takeover Panel) of a cheque drawn on a branch of a UK clearing bank (in the case of Sterling payments) or an Irish clearing bank in the case of Euro payments in respect of cash consideration to which he is entitled under the Offer, at the risk of such Glencar Shareholder, to the person or agent whose name and address is set out in Box 5 of the Form of Acceptance if an alternative address other than that set out in Box 2 is to be used or, if none is set out, to the first-named holder at his registered address set out in Box 2;

 

  (iii) if the Glencar Shares comprised or deemed comprised in such acceptance are in uncertificated form, to Gold Fields or its agents to procure the making of a CREST payment obligation in favour of the Glencar Shareholder’s payment bank in accordance with the CREST payment arrangements in respect of any cash consideration to which such shareholder is entitled under the Offer, provided that Gold Fields may (if, for any reason, it wishes to do so) determine that all or any part of any such cash consideration shall be paid by cheque drawn on a branch of a UK clearing bank (in the case of Sterling payments) or an Irish clearing bank in the case of Euro payments despatched by post;

 

(g) that the execution of the Form of Acceptance and its delivery constitutes a separate authority to Gold Fields and/or its agents within the terms of paragraphs 4 and 5 of Part B of this Appendix I;

 

(h) that, subject to the Offer becoming unconditional in all respects (or, in the case of voting by proxy, if the Offer will become unconditional in all respects or lapse depending upon the outcome of the resolution in question) or if the Irish Takeover Panel otherwise gives its consent, in respect of Glencar Shares in respect of which the Offer has been accepted, or is deemed to be accepted, which acceptance has not been validly withdrawn, and which have not been registered in the name of Gold Fields:

 

  (i) Gold Fields or its agents be entitled to direct the exercise of any votes and any other rights and privileges (including the right to requisition the convening of a general meeting of Glencar or of any class of its shareholders) attaching to any Glencar Shares;

 

  (ii) the execution of a Form of Acceptance by a Glencar Shareholder shall constitute with regard to such Glencar Shares:

 

  (A) an authority to Glencar and/or its agents from such Glencar Shareholder to send any notice, warrant, document or other communication which may be required to be sent to him as a member of Glencar (including any share certificate(s) or other document(s) of title issued as a result of a conversion of such Glencar Shares into certificated form) to Gold Fields at its registered office;

 

  (B) an authority to Gold Fields and/or its agents to sign any consent to short notice on his behalf and/or attend and/or execute a form of proxy in respect of such Glencar Shares appointing any person nominated by Gold Fields to attend general meetings and separate class meetings of Glencar or its members (or any of them) (and any adjournments thereof) and to exercise the votes attaching to such shares on his behalf, where relevant, such votes to be cast so far as possible to satisfy any outstanding condition of the Offer; and

 

44


  (C) the agreement of such Glencar Shareholder not to exercise any of such rights without the consent of Gold Fields and the irrevocable undertaking of such Glencar Shareholder not to appoint a proxy to attend any such general meeting or separate class meeting;

 

(i) that he will deliver (or procure the delivery) to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at the address referred to in paragraph 3(a) of Part B of this Appendix I his share certificate(s) or other document(s) of title in respect of all Glencar Shares held by him in certificated form in respect of which the Offer has been accepted or is deemed to have been accepted and not validly withdrawn, or an indemnity acceptable to Gold Fields in lieu thereof, as soon as possible and in any event within six months of the Offer becoming unconditional in all respects;

 

(j) that he will take (or procure to be taken) the action specified in accordance with paragraph 17(d) of the letter from Gold Fields contained in Part II of this document to transfer all those Glencar Shares held by him in uncertificated form in respect of which the Offer has been accepted or is deemed to have been accepted and not validly withdrawn in order to send a TTE instruction as soon as possible and in any event so that the TTE instruction settles within six months of the Offer becoming unconditional in all respects;

 

(k) that if, for any reason, any Glencar Shares in respect of which a TTE instruction has been effected in accordance with paragraph 17(d) of the letter from Gold Fields contained in Part II of this document are converted to certificated form, he will (without prejudice to paragraph (h)(ii)(A) of this Part C of this Appendix I) immediately deliver or procure the immediate delivery of the share certificate(s) or other document(s) of title in respect of all such Glencar Shares as so converted to Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited at the address referred to in paragraph 3(a) of Part B of this Appendix 1 or to Gold Fields at its registered office or to such other address as Gold Fields or its agents may direct, and he shall be deemed upon conversion to undertake, represent, warrant and agree in the terms set out in this Part C of this Appendix I in relation to such Glencar Shares;

 

(l) that the creation of a CREST payment obligation in favour of his payment bank in accordance with the CREST payment arrangements referred to in paragraph (f)(iii) of this Part C of this Appendix I shall, to the extent of the obligation so created, discharge in full any obligation of Gold Fields to pay to him the cash consideration to which he is entitled pursuant to the Offer; that Gold Fields may decide to settle all or part of the consideration due to a Glencar Shareholder whose shares are in uncertificated form by cheque in accordance with paragraph (f)(iii) of this Part C of this Appendix I;

 

(m) that, if he accepts the Offer, he will do all such acts and things as shall, in the opinion of Gold Fields or Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited, be necessary or expedient to vest in Gold Fields or its nominee(s) or such other persons as Gold Fields may decide the Glencar Shares comprised or deemed comprised in the Form of Acceptance and, in respect of such Glencar Shares in uncertificated form, all such acts and things as may be necessary or expedient to enable Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited to perform its functions as Escrow Agent for the purposes of the Offer;

 

(n) that the terms and conditions of the Offer contained in this document will be incorporated and deemed to be incorporated in, and form part of, the Form of Acceptance, which will be read and construed accordingly;

 

(o) that he will ratify each and every act or thing which may be done or effected by Gold Fields or Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited or any director of Gold Fields or Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited or their respective agents or Glencar or its agents, as the case may be, in the exercise of any of his or its powers and/or authorities hereunder (and to indemnify each such person against any losses arising therefrom);

 

45


(p) that, if any provision of Part B of this Appendix I or this Part C of this Appendix I will be unenforceable or invalid or will not operate so as to afford Gold Fields or Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited or any director or duly authorised representative of any of them or their respective agents the benefit of the authority expressed to be given therein, he agrees with all practicable speed to do all such acts and things and execute all such documents that may be required to enable those persons to secure the full benefits of Part B of this Appendix I and this Part C of this Appendix I; and

 

(q) that the execution of the Form of Acceptance constitutes his submission, in relation to all matters arising out of the Offer and the Form of Acceptance, to the jurisdiction of the Courts of Ireland and that nothing shall limit the right of Gold Fields to bring any action, suit or proceedings arising out of or in connection with the Offer and the Form of Acceptance in any other manner permitted by law or in any court of competent jurisdiction.

References in this Part C of this Appendix I to a Glencar Shareholder shall include references to the person or persons executing a Form of Acceptance, and in the event of more than one person executing a Form of Acceptance the provisions of this Part C of this Appendix I shall apply to them jointly and to each of them.

 

46


APPENDIX II

FINANCIAL INFORMATION RELATING TO GLENCAR

This section comprises summary financial information for the years ended 31 December 2006, 2007 and 2008, extracted from the Annual Reports and Accounts, on which the independent auditors have issued unqualified audit reports. The financial information in this Appendix II is extracted without material adjustment from the published audited consolidated accounts for those periods. The financial information in this Appendix II does not constitute statutory accounts within the meaning of section 19 of the Companies (Amendment) Act, 1986.

Group income statement

For the year ended 31 December

 

     Note    2008
US$
   2007
US$
   2006
US$

Administrative expenses

      (742,477)    (755,888)    (630,492)

Cost of share awards

      -    -    (643,328)

(Loss)/Gain on exchange

      (359,415)    26,814    214,001
                 

Operating loss

      (1,101,892)    (729,074)    (1,059,819)
                 

Exceptional item

   11    -    -    (455,198)

Movement in associate undertaking

   2    2,341,578    -    -

Bank interest receivable

      81,427    179,181    90,612

Interest payable

      (35,027)    (28,284)    (24,822)
                 

Profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before taxation

      1,286,086    (578,177)    (1,449,227)

Taxation

      (2,113)    (1,815)    (1,734)
                 

Profit for the year attributable to equity holders

      1,283,973    (579,992)    (1,450,961)
                 

Earnings/(loss) per share

   3    0.48    (0.23)    (0.64)

Diluted earnings/(loss) per share

   3    0.45    (0.22)    (0.62)

 

47


Group balance sheet

As at 31 December

 

     Note    2008
US$
   2007
US$

Assets

        

Property, plant and equipment

      279,261    525,932

Intangible assets

   4    10,353,049    9,331,764

Investment in associate

   2/6    2,365,056    -
            
      12,997,366    9,857,696
            

Current assets

        

Debtors

      214,753    19,407

Cash

      471,621    3,313,251
            
      686,374    3,332,658
            

Total assets

      13,683,740    13,190,354
            

Equity

        

Capital and reserves attributable to the Group’s equity holders

        

Share capital

   7    10,206,269    9,457,194

Share premium

   8    43,084,472    41,617,993

Capital conversion reserve fund

      82,092    82,092

Retained losses

      (40,264,400)    (41,536,426)
            
      13,108,433    9,620,853

Minority interest

   9    (112,660)    2,881,231
            

Total equity

      12,995,773    12,502,084
            

Liabilities

        

Non-current liabilities

        

Creditors and accrued expenses

   10    253,220    330,853
            

Current liabilities

        

Trade and other payables

      434,747    357,417
            

Total liabilities

      687,967    688,270
            

Total equity and liabilities

      13,683,740    13,190,354
            

 

48


Group cash flow statement

For the year ended 31 December

 

     Note    2008
US$
   2007
US$

Cash flows from operating activities

        

Cash used in operations

      (1,138,772)    (859,783)

Corporation tax paid

      (2,114)    (1,815)
            

Net cash used in operating activities

      (1,140,886)    (861,598)
            

Cash flows from investing activities

        

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

      (19,945)    (200,367)

Purchases of intangible assets

      (3,809,572)    (1,997,800)

Interest received

      81,427    179,181
            

Net cash used in investing activities

      (3,748,090)    (2,018,986)
            

Cash flows from financing activities

        

Proceeds from issuance of ordinary shares

      2,215,554    4,558,440
            

Net cash generated from financing activities

      2,215,554    4,558,440
            

Net (decrease)/increase in cash

      (2,673,422)    1,677,856

Cash movement arising from elimination of associate cash balance

      (168,208)    -

Cash at beginning of year

      3,313,251    1,635,395
            

Cash at end of year

      471,621    3,313,251
            

Statement of Accounting policies

The following accounting policies are applied consistently in dealing with items which are considered material in relation to the Group’s financial statements.

BASIS OF ACCOUNTING

The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting standards generally accepted in Ireland and the Companies Acts 1963 to 2006. Accounting standards generally accepted in Ireland in preparing financial statements giving a true and fair view are those published by the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Ireland and issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

BASIS OF GROUP CONSOLIDATION

The Group financial statements include the financial statements of the company and each of its subsidiary undertakings, having eliminated all inter-company transactions and balances. Acquisitions are dealt with on the basis of acquisition accounting, whereby the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired are recorded at their fair value and compared with the fair value of the total cost of the acquisition, including associated costs. Goodwill arising on acquisition of subsidiary undertakings is carried at cost and is tested annually for impairment. Any impairment losses are written off to the income statement in the year of impairment. The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of are included in the Group income statement from the date of acquisition and up to the date of disposal respectively. The profit or loss on disposal of subsidiary undertakings is determined, inter alia, by the inclusion in the income statement of goodwill previously written off against reserves. Subsidiaries where the Group has been released from any financial liability in respect of the subsidiary are not consolidated. In the company’s own balance sheet, investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less provisions for any permanent diminution in value.

 

49


INVESTMENTS IN ASSOCIATES

Entities in which the Group holds a participating interest and exercises significant influence are treated as Associates and are accounted for in the Consolidated Financial Statements using the Equity Method.

EXPLORATION COSTS

In accordance with International Financial Reporting Standard 6 – Exploration For and Evaluation of Mineral Resources, the Group uses the cost method of recognition. Exploration costs include licence costs, survey, geophysical and geological analysis and evaluation costs, costs of drilling and project-related overheads. Exploration expenditure in respect of properties and licences not in production is deferred and is carried forward in the balance sheet under intangible assets in respect of each area of interest where:

(i) The operations are ongoing in the area of interest and exploration or evaluation activities have not reached a stage which permits a reasonable assessment of the existence or otherwise of economically recoverable reserves; or

(ii) Such costs are expected to be recouped through successful development and exploration of the area of interest or alternatively by its realisation.

When the directors decide that no further expenditure on an area of interest is worthwhile, the related expenditure is written off or down to an amount, which it is considered represents the residual value of the Group’s interest therein.

TANGIBLE ASSETS AND DEPRECIATION

Tangible assets are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is provided on all tangible assets so as to write off the cost less estimated residual value of each asset over its expected useful economic life on a straight-line basis at the following annual rates:

Fixtures, fittings and plant 15%

Computer equipment 25%

TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables are recognised and carried at the lower of their original invoiced value and recoverable amount. Where the time value of money is material, receivables are carried at amortised cost. Provision is made when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to recover balances in full. Balances are written off when the probability of recovery is assessed as being remote.

TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Trade payables are stated at their fair value. Trade payables on extended terms are recorded at their fair value at the period end, with any discount to fair value amortised over the period of the credit term and charged to finance costs.

FOREIGN CURRENCIES

Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency are translated into US dollars at the exchange rate ruling at the balance sheet date, unless specifically covered by foreign exchange contracts whereupon the contract rate is used. Revenues, costs and non-monetary assets are translated at the exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions. All exchange differences are dealt with through the income statement.

PENSIONS

The company operates defined contribution schemes and pension benefits are funded by way of contributions from the company and employees. Company contributions are charged to the profit and loss account in the year in which they become payable.

 

50


DEFERRED TAXATION

Full provision is made for deferred tax liabilities arising from timing differences between the gains and losses in the financial statements and their recognition in a tax computation, using the liability method. Timing differences are temporary differences between profits as computed for taxation purposes and profits as stated in the financial statements. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is considered probable that future taxable profits will be generated to enable the Group to utilise either the timing differences or tax losses.

EMPLOYEE SHARE SCHEMES

The company operates an executive remuneration scheme under which certain executive and non-executive directors and certain staff of the company are granted options to acquire ordinary shares in the company at the market price on the day of grant. Such options can only be exercised within five years of the anniversary of the date of grant.

Under International Financial Reporting Standard No. 2 – Share-Based Payment the company calculates the fair value of the equity instruments granted at the date of grant, using a binomial pricing share valuation model which takes into account various factors including vesting periods, share price volatility, option life, expected dividends and risk-free interest rates.

Notes to the group financial statements

 

1. Segmental reporting

For the purpose of segmental information the operations of the Group comprise one class of business, the exploration for gold and metals. Segmental information for Ireland includes the corporate costs of the organisation.

 

     Carrying value of
segment assets
     Additions to Property, Plant and
Equipment and Intangible Assets
     Total Liabilities
     2008    2007      2008    2007      2008    2007
     US$    US$      US$    US$      US$    US$

Ireland

   685,202    3,232,937      -    15,922      492,767    475,648

Ghana

   1,652,510    1,652,742      14,768    26,455      192,478    192,825

Uganda

   439,672    432,638      2,835    4,199      -    17,075

Mali

   10,906,356    7,872,037      5,958,924    3,948,631      2,722    2,722
                  
   13,683,740    13,190,354      5,976,527    3,995,207      687,967    688,270
                  

The depreciation charge of US$78,093 (2007: US$84,638) on tangible assets relates US$7,626 (2007: US$9,297) to the Irish business segment and US$70,467 (2007: €75,341) to the Mali business segment.

 

51


2. Movement on associate undertaking

Under the terms of the Framework Agreement between the Gold Fields subsidiary, Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited and Centrebind Agency Limited, a subsidiary of Glencar Mining plc, Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited became entitled during 2007 and again in 2008 to convert certain amounts of preference shares in Glencar International (BVI) Limited into ordinary shares at predetermined conversion rates. At the balance sheet date, the rate of conversion of the total number of preference shares would give Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited a 53.68 per cent. interest in the share capital of Glencar International (BVI) Limited. This leaves Centrebind Agency Limited with a 46.32 per cent. interest in the share capital of Glencar International (BVI) Limited. As such, Glencar International (BVI) Limited is no longer a subsidiary as defined in IAS 27 ‘Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements’, and has been accounted for in the consolidated financial statements as an associate undertaking, using the Equity Method of accounting. This change in accounting from a subsidiary to an associate undertaking resulted in a gain to the Group of €2,341,578, arrived at as follows:

 

     US$

Net book value of associate fixed assets eliminated

   (5,123,820)

Cash and cash equivalents eliminated

   (168,208)

Minority interest in associate eliminated

   5,070,433

Share of associate profits eliminated

   11,947

Recognition of associate debtor in group balance sheet

   209,699

Amounts owed to associate in respect of share capital

   (23,529)
    

Net book value of assets and liabilities eliminated/recognised

   (23,478)

Fair value of consideration received (share of net assets of associate)

   2,365,056
    

Net gain accruing to the Group

   2,341,578
    

 

3. Profit/(loss) per share

2008

The profit per ordinary share of US$0.0048 (2007: loss of US$0.0023) is based on the profit for the financial year of US$1,283,973 (2007: loss of US$579,992) and 264,934,591 ordinary shares (2007: 250,956,330), being the weighted average number of shares in issue for the year. The share options and warrants had a dilutive effect on the profit per ordinary share at 31 December 2008 giving a diluted profit per share of US$0.0045 (2007: loss of US$0.0022).

2007

The loss per ordinary share of US$0.0023 (2006 – loss of US$0.0064) is based on the loss for the financial year of US$579,992 (2006 – loss of US$1,450,961) and 250,956,330 ordinary shares (2006 –225,587,031), being the weighted average number of shares in issue for the year. The share options and warrants had a dilutive effect on the loss per ordinary share at 31 December 2007 giving a diluted loss per share of US$0.0022 (2006 – loss of US$0.0062).

 

52


4. Intangible Assets

 

Deferred Exploration    2008
US$
   2007
US$

Cost

     

At beginning of year

   9,664,984    5,870,144

Additions

   5,956,582    3,794,840

Transfer out of associate assets

   (4,935,297)    -

Impairment

   -    -
         

At end of year

   10,686,269    9,664,984
         

Depreciation

     

At beginning of year

   333,220    333,220

Charge for year

   -    -

Transfer out of associate assets

   -    -
         

At end of year

   333,220    333,220
         

Net book value

     

At end of year

   10,353,049    9,331,764
         

At beginning of year

   9,331,764    5,536,924
         

Expenditure on exploration activities is deferred on areas of interest until a reasonable assessment can be determined of the existence or otherwise of economically recoverable reserves. The directors have reviewed the carrying value of the deferred exploration expenditure and consider it to be fairly stated and not impaired.

Included in deferred exploration expenditure is US$70,467 (2007: US$75,341) of a depreciation charge on tangible fixed assets relating to exploration projects.

 

53


5. Composition of group

At 31 December 2008 the company had the following subsidiary undertakings:

 

Name and Registered office    Incorporated In    Main Activity    Proportion of holding

Centrebind Agency Limited

Totalserve House

17, Gr. Xenopoulou Street

3106 Limassol

Cyprus

   Cyprus    Intermediate holding company    100%

Held by Centrebind Agency Limited

Ensign Resources Limited

PO Box 118

Chesterfield House

Victoria Street

Douglas

Isle of Man IM1 2LR

   Isle of Man    Intermediate holding company    100%

Glencar Mali s.a.r.l

Faladie Sema

Rue 841

Porte 202

BP:366

Bamako

Mali

   Mali    Mineral exploration    95%

Held by Ensign Resources

Limited

Antubia Resources Limited

21 5th Circular Road

PO Box C 2173

Cantonments

Accra,

Ghana

   Ghana    Mineral exploration    100%

Glencar (Uganda) Limited

PO Box 882

Kampala

Uganda

   Uganda    Mineral exploration    100%

Wassa Holdings Limited

19/21 Circular Road

Douglas

Isle of Man

   Isle of Man    Holding of investments    66%

At 31 December 2008 Wassa Holdings Limited held a 59% shareholding in Satellite Goldfields Limited, a company incorporated in Ghana with a registered office at 142 Nortei Ababio Loop, Airport Residential Area, Accra, Ghana. Satellite Goldfields Limited has not been consolidated as it is in the process of being liquidated.

During 2008, the beneficial interest of Centrebind Agency Limited in Glencar International (BVI) Limited was reduced from a 100 per cent. interest to a 46.32 per cent. interest by virtue of the right of Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited to acquire a 53.68 per cent. interest in that company. Accordingly, Glencar International (BVI) Limited and its subsidiary, Sankarani Resources s.a.r.l, are no longer accounted for as subsidiary undertakings.

All of the above companies operate in the country of incorporation. Neither the company nor any of its subsidiary undertakings has acquired or is holding any of its own capital.

 

54


6. Investment in associate

At 31 December 2008 the company had the following associate undertaking, held by Centrebind Agency Limited:

 

     2008
US$
   2007
US$

Net assets of associate at year end

   5,105,907                  -
         

Percentage interest held by the Group

   46.32%    -
         

Share of associated undertaking net assets

   2,365,056    -
         

 

Name and Registered office    Incorporated In    Main Activity    Proportion of holding

Glencar International (BVI)

Limited

PO Box 3540

Road Town

Tortola

British Virgin Islands

   British Virgin Islands    Intermediate holding company    46.32%

In turn, the above company had the following subsidiary

undertaking at the year end:

  

Sankarani Resources s.a.r.l

Faladie Sema

Rue 841

Porte 202

BP:366

Bamako

Mali

   Mali    Mineral exploration    95%

 

7. Called up share capital

 

     Authorised
Number
      Alloted, called up and
fully paid Number
   US$
Ordinary shares of €0.031 each            
At 31 December 2008    350,000,000    10,850,000    274,136,467    10,206,269
At 31 December 2007    350,000,000    10,850,000    258,386,467    9,457,194
At 31 December 2006    300,000,000    9,300,000    235,786,467    8,507,021

2008

During the year, the company allotted 11,250,000 ordinary shares of €0.031 per share, as well as issuing 4,500,000 ordinary shares of €0.031 to directors under share options. Full details of these allotments are set out in the report of the directors.

Share Options and warrants:

At 31 December 2008, options over 9,500,000 (2007: 14,750,000) shares remained outstanding to current directors and staff, of which 2,250,000 are at a price of €0.075 and 7,250,000 are at a price of €0.105. In addition and as part of a placing of ordinary shares during the year, the Company issued warrants which entitle the holder to acquire one ordinary share for each two ordinary shares acquired under the placing at an exercise price of €0.17 (Stg £0.135) per share. Warrants over 5,625,000 shares (2007: nil) remained outstanding at the balance sheet date.

2007

During the year the company members resolved to increase the authorised share capital by 50,000,000 to 350,000,000 ordinary shares. The company issued a total of 22,600,000 Ordinary shares of €0.031 per share, full details of which are set out in the report of the directors.

 

55


8. Share Premium

 

     2008
US$
   2007
US$
Balance at beginning of year    41,617,993    38,009,726
Shares issued at a premium    1,466,479    3,762,747
Share issue costs    -    (154,480)
         
Balance at end of year    43,084,472    41,617,993
         

2008

The movement relates to the issuance of 11,250,000 shares during the year at a premium to the nominal share price of €0.031.

2007

The movement relates to the issuance of 22,600,000 shares during the year at a premium to the nominal share price of €0.031.

 

9. Minority Interest

 

     2008
US$
   2007
US$

At beginning of year

   2,881,231    1,159,531

Interest in preference shares in subsidiary

   2,076,542    1,721,700

Disposal of shares in subsidiary

   (5,070,433)    -
         

Balance at end of year

   (112,660)    2,881,231
         
         

The minority interest relates to the following:

1. 33.98 per cent. interest in Wassa Holdings Limited held by Haddington Limited. Haddington Limited’s and the Ghanaian Government’s interest in the net liabilities of the subsidiary undertaking, Satellite Goldfields Limited, were written off following its exclusion from these Group financial statements.

2. Under the terms of the Framework Agreement between the subsidiary of Goldfields, Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited, and Centrebind Agency Limited, a subsidiary of Glencar Mining plc, Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited became entitled during 2007 and again in 2008 to convert certain amounts of their preference shares in Glencar International (BVI) Limited into ordinary shares at predetermined conversion rates. At the balance sheet date, the rate of conversion of the total number of preference shares would give Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited a 53.68 per cent. interest in the share capital of the company. This leaves Centrebind Agency Limited with a 46.32 per cent. interest in the share capital of Glencar International (BVI) Limited. As such, Glencar International (BVI) Limited is no longer a subsidiary and is accounted for in these financial statements as an associate undertaking.

3. The 5 per cent. interest in Glencar Mali s.a.r.l held by La Societe Malienne de la Petite Mine d’Or s.a.r.l.

 

10. Non-current liabilities

 

     2008
US$
   2007
US$
Group      
Creditors and accrued expenses    253,220    330,853
         

 

56


Non-current liabilities include a provision for legal costs relating to legal fees and legal costs awarded against the company in High Court and Supreme Court proceedings taken by the company in relation to the Mayo project. The payment terms in respect of these costs are US$63,437 due in one to two years and the remaining balance of US$189,783 due in two to five years. US$63,437 which is due for payment during 2009 has been included in creditors and accrued expenses falling due within one year. Interest is accrued for the amounts payable in line with the terms of the Court rulings.

 

11. Exceptional item

 

     2008
US$
   2007
US$
   2006
US$

Exceptional item

                 -                  -    455,198
              

During 2006, the directors concluded that further expenditure on the company’s sites in Laois, Ireland was not worthwhile. Accordingly, all expenditure on these sites has been written off to the income statement.

 

57


APPENDIX III

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

 

1. Responsibility

 

(a) The directors of Gold Fields Limited and the directors of Gold Fields, whose names are set out in paragraphs 2(a) and 2(b) below, accept responsibility for the information contained in this document, other than that relating to the Glencar Group, the Board of Glencar and their immediate families, related trusts and persons connected with them. To the best of the knowledge and belief of the directors of Gold Fields Limited and the directors of Gold Fields (who have taken all reasonable care to ensure that such is the case), the information contained in this document for which they accept responsibility is in accordance with the facts and does not omit anything likely to affect the import of such information.

 

(b) The Board of Glencar, whose names are set out in paragraph 2(c) below, accept responsibility for the information contained in this document relating to the Glencar Group, the Board of Glencar and their immediate families, related trusts and persons connected with them. To the best of the knowledge and belief of the directors of Glencar (who have taken all reasonable care to ensure that such is the case), the information contained in this document for which they accept responsibility is in accordance with the facts and does not omit anything likely to affect the import of such information.

 

2. Directors and registered office

 

(a) Gold Fields Limited

The names of the directors of Gold Fields Limited and their respective functions are as follows:

 

NAME

 

POSITION

A J Wright   Chairman
N J Holland   Chief Executive Officer
K Ansah #   Non Executive
C A Carolus   Non Executive
R Dañino*   Non Executive
J G Hopwood   Non Executive
R P Menell   Non Executive
D N Murray   Non Executive
D M J Ncube   Non Executive
R L Pennant-Rae   Non Executive
C I von Christierson   Non Executive
G M Wilson   Non Executive

 

British   # Ghanaian   * Peruvian

Corporate Secretary: C Farrel

The registered office of Gold Fields Limited is 150 Helen Road, Sandton, Sandown 2196, South Africa.

 

(b) Gold Fields

The names of the directors of Gold Fields and their respective functions are as follows:

 

NAME

 

POSITION

N J Holland   Director
T D McKeith   Director
J H Pauley   Director
J D Pool   Director

 

58


The registered office of Gold Fields is 1 st Floor, 66a Schipholweg, Leiden 2316XE, The Netherlands.

 

(c) Glencar

The names of the directors of Glencar and their respective functions are as follows:

 

NAME

 

POSITION

H McCullough   Chief Executive
K Harrington   Operations Director
P O’Quigley   Non executive Director
S Finlay   Chairman, Non executive
W Cummins   Non executive Director

The registered office of Glencar is 71 Lower Baggot Street, Dublin 2, Ireland.

 

3. Market quotations

The following table shows the Closing Price of a Glencar Share for the first business day in each of the six months immediately prior to the date of this document, for 23 July 2009 (being the last business day before the commencement of the Offer Period) and for 5 August 2009 (being the latest available date before the posting of this document):

 

Date

   Share price    Share price
    

(Euro cent)

  

(Stg pence)

05 August 2009

   10.00    8.88

03 August 2009

   10.50    9.00

23 July 2009

   5.50    4.38

01 July 2009

   5.50    4.63

01 June 2009

   4.40    3.63

01 May 2009

   5.00    4.38

01 April 2009

   5.00    4.13

02 March 2009

   4.50    4.00

 

4. Shareholdings and dealings

For the purposes of this paragraph 4:

 

  (i) acting in concert shall have the meaning attributed to that phrase in Appendix IV:

 

  (ii) arrangement includes any indemnity or option arrangement and any agreement or understanding, formal or informal, of whatever nature, relating to relevant securities which may be an inducement to deal or refrain from dealing;

 

  (iii) associate means:

 

  (A) the subsidiaries and associated companies of Gold Fields or, as the case may be, Glencar and companies of which any such subsidiaries or associated companies are associated companies (for this purpose, ownership or control of 20 per cent. or more of the equity share capital of a company is the test of associated company status) (a paragraph 1 associate );

 

  (B)

a bank, financial or other professional adviser (including a stockbroker) to Gold Fields or Glencar or a company referred to in (A) above (not being a bank which is engaged only in the provision of normal commercial banking services or such activities in connection with the Offer as handling acceptances and registration work and, in the case of an adviser which is a partnership, including only those partners and professional staff who are

 

59


 

actively engaged in relation to the Offer or who are customarily engaged in the affairs of the client or who have been engaged in those affairs within the period of two years before the commencement of the Offer Period) (together, connected advisers ), and persons controlling, controlled by or under the same control as such connected advisers;

 

  (C) the directors of Gold Fields, the directors of Gold Fields Limited, the Board of Glencar or the directors of any company covered in (A) above (together, in each case, with their close relatives, related trusts and any company controlled by any one or more of such directors, relatives or trustees of such trusts);

 

  (D) the trustee of any pension scheme (other than an industry-wide scheme) in which Gold Fields or Glencar or any company covered in (A) above participates;

 

  (E) a collective investment scheme or other person whose investments an associate manages on a discretionary basis, in respect of the relevant investment accounts;

 

  (F) a company having a material business arrangement with Gold Fields, Gold Fields or Glencar;

 

  (iv) connected adviser has the meaning attributed to it in paragraph (iii)(B) above;

 

  (v) connected person means any person whose interests in shares the relevant director is taken to be interested in pursuant to Section 26 of the Companies Act 1990;

 

  (vi) control means the holding, whether directly or indirectly, of securities in a company that confer in aggregate not less than 30 per cent. or more of the voting rights in that company;

 

  (vii) dealing , in relation to relevant securities, includes the following:

 

  (i) the acquisition or disposal of such securities or of the right (whether absolute or conditional) to exercise or to control the exercise of the voting rights (if any) attaching to such securities;

 

  (ii) the taking, granting, acquisition, disposal, entering into, closing out, termination, exercise (by either party) or variation of an option (including a traded option contract) in respect of any such securities;

 

  (iii) subscribing or agreeing to subscribe for such securities;

 

  (iv) the exercise of conversion or subscription rights conferred by any security or any other instrument, whether in respect of new or existing relevant securities;

 

  (v) the acquisition of, disposal of, entering into, closing out, exercise (by either party) of any rights under or variation of, a derivative referenced, directly or indirectly, to such securities;

 

  (vi) entering into, terminating or varying the terms of any agreement to purchase or sell such securities; and

 

  (vii) any action (not included in any of the above subparagraphs) which results or may result in an increase or decrease in the number of such securities in which a person is interested or in respect of which he or she has a short position;

 

60


  (viii) derivative includes any financial product whose value, in whole or in part, is determined directly or indirectly by reference to the price of an underlying security but which does not include the possibility of delivery of such underlying security;

 

  (ix) disclosure date means 5 August 2009 being the latest practicable date prior to the posting of this document;

 

  (x) disclosure period means the period commencing on 23 July 2008 (being the date 12 months prior to the commencement of the Offer Period) and ending on the disclosure date;

 

  (xi) exempt fund manager and exempt market maker have the meanings attributed to them in the Irish Takeover Rules;

 

  (xii) interest and interested have the meaning such that a person will be deemed to be interested in relevant securities or be deemed to hold an interest in relevant securities, only where that person has a long position in the relevant securities, and for the avoidance of doubt, a person who only has a short position in the relevant securities will be deemed not to have an interest nor be interested in the relevant securities.

 

  (xiii) relevant Gold Fields securities means:

 

  (A) equity share capital of Gold Fields Limited or Gold Fields;

 

  (B) any securities of Gold Fields Limited or Gold Fields carrying conversion or subscription rights into any securities listed in (A) above;

 

  (C) options (including traded options) in respect of any of the foregoing securities and derivatives referenced to any of the foregoing securities;

 

  (xiv) relevant Glencar securities means:

 

  (A) Glencar Shares and any other securities of Glencar carrying voting rights;

 

  (B) equity share capital of Glencar;

 

  (C) any securities of Glencar carrying conversion or subscription rights into any securities listed in (A) or (B) above;

 

  (D) options (including traded options) in respect of any of the foregoing securities and derivatives referenced to any of the foregoing securities;

 

  (xv) relevant securities means relevant Glencar securities or relevant Gold Fields securities, as appropriate;

 

  (xvi) references to a director being interested in securities of Glencar, Gold Fields or Gold Fields (as the case may be) shall be interpreted in the manner described in Chapter 1 of Part IV of the Companies Act 1990.

 

61


(a) Interests or short positions in relevant Glencar securities

 

  (i) As at the close of business on the disclosure date, the directors of Glencar were interested in the following relevant Glencar securities (excluding options which are disclosed in paragraph (ii) below):

 

NAME

   NUMBER OF GLENCAR
SHARES

Hugh McCullough

   2,975,106

Kieran Harrington

   1,001,300

Philip O’Quigley

   518,750

Sean Finlay

   528,927

William Cummins

   1,887,500

 

     As at the close of business on the disclosure date, no directors of Glencar held short positions in any relevant Glencar securities.

 

  (ii) As at the close of business on the disclosure date, the following options or warrants to subscribe for new Glencar Shares under the Glencar Share Option Schemes have been granted to the following directors of Glencar and remain outstanding:

Hugh McCullough

No. of Glencar Shares

   Date of grant    Exercise period    Exercise
price
(Euro)

1,000,000

   12 August 2004   

From 12/08/2004 to

11/08/2009

   0.075

3,000,000

   20 February 2006   

From 21/02/2006 to

20/02/2011

   0.105

3,000,000

   9 June 2009   

From to 10/06/2009 to

9/06/2014

   0.045

Kieran Harrington

No. of Glencar Shares

   Date of grant    Exercise period    Exercise
price

(Euro)

500,000

   12 August 2004   

From 12/08/2004 to

11/08/2009

   0.075

2,000,000

   20 February 2006   

From 21/02/2006 to

20/02/2011

   0.105

2,000,000

   9 June 2009   

From to 10/06/2009 to

9/06/2014

   0.045

Philip O’Quigley

No. of Glencar Shares

   Date of grant    Exercise period    Exercise
price

(Euro)

250,000

   12 August 2004   

From 12/08/2004 to

11/08/2009

   0.075

750,000

   20 February 2006   

From 21/02/2006 to

20/02/2011

   0.105

750,000

   9 June 2009   

From to 10/06/2009 to

9/06/2014

   0.045

 

62


Sean Finlay

No. of Glencar Shares

   Date of grant    Exercise period    Exercise
price

(Euro)

250,000

   12 August 2004   

From 12/08/2004 to

11/08/2009

   0.075

750,000

   20 February 2006   

From 21/02/2006 to

20/02/2011

   0.105

750,000

   9 June 2009   

From to 10/06/2009 to

9/06/2014

   0.045

William Cummins

No. of Glencar Shares

   Date of grant    Exercise period    Exercise
price

(Euro)

250,000

   12 August 2004   

From 12/08/2004 to

11/08/2009

   0.075

750,000

   20 February 2006   

From 21/02/2006 to

20/02/2011

   0.105

750,000

   9 June 2009   

From to 10/06/2009 to

9/06/2014

   0.045

 

  (iii) As at the close of business on the disclosure date, neither Gold Fields nor any person deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields owned or controlled any relevant Glencar securities, save as set out below:

 

NAME

   NUMBER OF GLENCAR SHARES

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   90,231,197

 

     As at the close of business on the disclosure date, neither Gold Fields nor any person deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities.

 

  (iv) As at the close of business on the disclosure date, the following persons (excluding the directors of Glencar and their connected parties) who have irrevocably undertaken to accept the Offer owned or controlled relevant Glencar securities, as set out below:

 

NAME

   NUMBER OF GLENCAR SHARES

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   90,231,197

 

     As at the close of business on the disclosure date, no person who has irrevocably undertaken to accept the offer held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities.

 

  (v) As at the close of business on the disclosure date, no connected advisor to Glencar owned or controlled any relevant Glencar securities, save as set out below:

 

NAME

   NUMBER OF GLENCAR SHARES

Thérèse Rochford a partner in Whitney Moore (as trustee with Hugh McCullough and Philip O’Quigley of an employee share trust) on trust for Philip O’Quigley

   15,000

J&E Davy (Discretionary clients)

   1,386,744

J&E Davy and affiliates (own account)

   6,498,760

 

     As at the close of business on the disclosure date, no connected adviser to Glencar held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities.

 

63


(b) Dealings in relevant Glencar Securities

 

  (i) During the disclosure period, there were no dealings for value in relevant Glencar securities by any directors of Glencar, save as set out below:

 

PARTY

   DATE    TRANSACTION    NUMBER
OF
GLENCAR
SHARES
   PRICE
(EURO cent)

Hugh McCullough

   26 August 2008    Exercise of Options    2,000,000    3.1

Kieran Harrington

   26 August 2008    Exercise of Options    1,000,000    3.1

Philip O’Quigley

   26 August 2008    Exercise of Options    500,000    3.1

Sean Finlay

   26 August 2008    Exercise of Options    500,000    3.1

William Cummins

   8 September 2008    Exercise of Options    500,000    3.1

 

  (ii) During the disclosure period, there were no dealings for value in relevant Glencar securities by any persons who have irrevocably undertaken to accept the Offer (excluding the directors of Glencar and their connected parties), save as set out below:

 

PARTY

   DATE    TRANSACTION    NUMBER
OF
GLENCAR
SHARES
   PRICE
(STG
PENCE)

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   7 April 2009    Private Placement    27,431,197    4.55

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   24 July 2009    Bought    21,426,600    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   27 July 2009    Bought    15,200,296    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   28 July 2009    Bought    4,738,448    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   29 July 2009    Bought    6,016,116    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   30 July 2009    Bought    13,050,000    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   31 July 2009    Bought    2,368,540    9.00

 

  (iii) During the Offer Period, there were no dealings for value in relevant Glencar securities by any connected adviser to Glencar, save as set out below by J&E Davy (own account):

 

DATE

   TRANSACTION    NUMBER
OF
GLENCAR
SHARES
   PRICE
(EURO)

28 July 2009

   Sell    1,483,267    0.10

 

  (iv) During the disclosure period, there were no dealings for value in relevant Glencar securities by any person deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields Limited or Gold Fields save as set out below:

 

PARTY

   DATE    TRANSACTION    NUMBER
OF
GLENCAR
SHARES
   PRICE
(STG
PENCE)

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   7 April 2009    Private Placement    27,431,197    4.55

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   24 July 2009    Bought    21,426,600    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   27 July 2009    Bought    15,200,296    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   28 July 2009    Bought    4,738,448    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   29 July 2009    Bought    6,016,116    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   30 July 2009    Bought    13,050,000    9.00

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   31 July 2009    Bought    2,368,540    9.00

 

64


Dealings by Canaccord Adams for own account:

Aggregated dealings for value in the relevant securities of Glencar by Canaccord Adams for its own account for the period 23 July 2008 up to and including 23 July 2009 were as follows:

 

          Bought    Sold
Period    Market   

No. of

Glencar

Shares

   Max
Price
Stg
pence
   Min
Price
Stg
pence
  

No. of
Glencar

Shares

   Max
Price
Stg
pence
   Min
Price
Stg
pence

01 April – 30 April

2009

   AIM    275,000    4.00    3.55    137,895    4.43    4.00

01 May – 31 May

2009

   AIM    562,490    4.30    3.13    342,002    4.40    3.53

01 June – 30 June

2009

   AIM    776,610    4.05    3.75    1,110,490    4.73    3.60

01 July – 23 July

2009

   AIM    815,140    4.63    3.80    998,367    4.90    3.88

Dealings for value in relevant securities of Glencar by Canaccord Adams for its own account during the Offer Period were as follows:

 

DATE

   MARKET    TRANSACTION    NO OF GLENCAR SHARES    PRICE
STG PENCE

24 July 2009

   AIM    Bought    5,000    7.20

24 July 2009

   AIM    Bought    17,000    7.20

24 July 2009

   AIM    Sold    85,000    4.75

27 July 2009

   AIM    Bought    250,000    8.00

Note: Canaccord Adams was granted exempt market-maker status on 27 July 2009. Accordingly Canaccord Adams is not required to make disclosures between 28 July 2009 and the disclosure date.

 

(c) Interests or short positions in relevant Gold Fields securities

As at the close of business on the disclosure date:

 

  (i) Glencar neither owned nor controlled any relevant Gold Fields securities;

 

  (ii) Glencar did not hold any short positions in relevant Gold Fields securities;

 

  (iii) the directors of Glencar held no interest in relevant Gold Fields securities;

 

  (iv) the directors of Glencar did not hold any short positions in relevant Gold Fields securities;

 

  (v) no connected adviser to Glencar owned or controlled any relevant Gold Fields securities, save as set out below:

 

NAME

   NUMBER OF GOLD FIELDS SHARES

J&E Davy (discretionary clients)

   92

 

  (vi) no connected adviser to Glencar held any short positions in relevant Gold Fields securities.

 

(d) Dealings in relevant Gold Fields securities

During the disclosure period:

 

  (i) there were no dealings for value in relevant Gold Fields securities by Glencar;

 

65


  (ii) there were no dealings for value in relevant Gold Fields securities by the directors of Glencar; and

during the period between the start of the Offer Period and the disclosure date, there were no dealings for value in relevant Gold Fields Limited securities by any connected adviser to Glencar.

 

(e) General

As at the close of business on the disclosure date, save as disclosed in this paragraph 4:

 

  (i) neither Gold Fields Limited nor Gold Fields owned or controlled any relevant Glencar securities or held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities, and nor had it dealt for value in any relevant Glencar securities during the disclosure period;

 

  (ii) none of the directors of Gold Fields Limited or the directors of Gold Fields had an interest in any relevant Glencar securities or held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Glencar securities during the disclosure period;

 

  (iii) no person deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields Limited or Gold Fields owned or controlled any relevant Glencar securities or held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Glencar securities during the disclosure period;

 

  (iv) no person who has irrevocably committed to accept the Offer owned or controlled any relevant Glencar securities or held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Glencar securities during the disclosure period;

 

  (v) no person with whom Gold Fields Limited or Gold Fields or any associate of Gold Fields Limited or Goldfields (which for these purposes is an associate by virtue of paragraphs (A), (B), (C) and (D) of the definition of associate) has any arrangement owned or controlled any relevant Glencar securities or held any short positions in relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Glencar securities during the disclosure period;

 

  (vi) none of the directors of Glencar had an interest in any relevant Gold Fields securities or any relevant Glencar securities or held any short position in relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities during the disclosure period;

 

  (vii) no subsidiary of Glencar owned or controlled any relevant Gold Fields securities or any relevant Glencar securities or held any short position in relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Gold Fields securities or any relevant Glencar securities during the period between the start of the Offer Period and the disclosure date;

 

  (viii) there was no pension scheme in which Glencar or any subsidiary of Glencar participates (other than an industry-wide scheme) the trustees of which owned or controlled any relevant Gold Fields securities or any relevant Glencar securities or held any short position in relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such trustees dealt for value in any relevant Gold Fields securities or any relevant Glencar securities during the period between the start of the Offer Period and the disclosure date;

 

66


  (ix) no associate of Glencar (by virtue of paragraph (B) of the definition of associate), excluding exempt market makers, owned or controlled any relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities or held any short position in relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities during the period between the start of the Offer Period and the disclosure date;

 

  (x) no discretionary fund manager (other than an exempt fund manager) connected with Glencar managed any relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Glencar securities during the period between the start of the Offer Period and the disclosure date;

 

  (xi) no person who has an arrangement with Glencar or with an associate of Glencar (which for these purposes is an associate of Glencar by virtue of paragraphs (A), (B), (C) and (D) of the definition of associate) owned or controlled any relevant Gold Fields securities or any relevant Glencar securities or held any short position in relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities, nor had any such person dealt for value in any relevant Gold Fields securities or relevant Glencar securities during the period between the start of the Offer Period and the disclosure date;

 

  (xii) there were no arrangements which existed between Glencar or any associate of Glencar and any other person relating to any relevant Glencar securities;

 

  (xiii) Glencar has not redeemed or purchased any Glencar relevant securities during the disclosure period; and

 

  (xiv) there were no arrangements which existed between Gold Fields Limited or Gold Fields, or any person deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields Limited or Gold Fields, and any other person relating to any relevant Glencar securities.

 

5. Irrevocable undertakings

Irrevocable undertakings to accept the Offer have been given by the following persons in respect of the following Glencar Shares:

 

NAME

   NUMBER OF
GLENCAR
SHARES

Gold Fields Netherlands Services

   90,231,197

Hugh McCullough

   2,975,106

Kieran Harrington

   1,001,300

Philip O’Quigley

   518,750

Sean Finlay

   528,927

William Cummins

   1,887,500
    

TOTAL IRREVOCABLE UNDERTAKINGS

   97,142,780

(subject to options)

  

Hugh McCullough

   7,000,000

Kieran Harrington

   4,500,000

Philip O’Quigley

   1,750,000

Sean Finlay

   1,750,000

William Cummins

   1,750,000

TOTAL

   16,750,000

The irrevocable undertakings given by the above directors and Gold Fields Netherlands Services to accept the Offer shall cease to be binding if the Offer is withdrawn or lapses.

 

67


6. Material Contracts of Glencar

The following contracts, not being contracts entered into in the ordinary course of business, which are or may be material, have been entered into by members of the Glencar Group since 23 July 2007 (being the date two years before the commencement of the Offer Period):

 

(a) On 24 March 2009 (1) Gold Fields Sankarani (BVI) Limited, a subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited (Gold Fields BVI), (2) Centrebind Agency Limited a subsidiary of Glencar (Centrebind), (3) Glencar International BVI Limited (Glencar BVI), entered into an agreement governing Gold Fields BVI and Centrebind’s relationship as shareholders in Glencar BVI (“Shareholders Agreement”). Glencar BVI is the parent of Sankarani Resources Limited (“Sankarani”) which company holds certain prospecting licences in Mali. Pursuant to the Shareholders Agreement Glencar BVI issued to Gold Fields BVI shares which entitled Gold Fields BVI to 56.68 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar BVI in consideration of the payment of US$4,000,000 to Glencar BVI. The Shareholders Agreement provides that Gold Fields BVI has the right to increase its shareholding to 68.42 per cent. of Glencar BVI on the payment of a further US$8,000,000 prior to 30 June 2011. Centrebind would then hold 31.58 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar BVI. Following the issue to Sankarani of an exploitation convention by the government of Mali, Gold Fields BVI shall be entitled to subscribe for such further number of shares as will entitle it to acquire 76.47 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar BVI. Centrebind would then hold 23.53 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar BVI. The government of Mali will hold 10 per cent. of Sankarani and Mr. Madani Diallo will hold 5 per cent. of Sankarani in trust for La Societe Malienne de la Petite Mine and Africa Resources s.a.r.l. The Shareholders Agreement provides that after 30 June 2011 each of Centrebind and Gold Fields BVI shall fund all expenditures in connection with approved programs and budget on a pro-rata basis to their shareholding in Glencar BVI save that the government of Mali shall be free carried and Centrebind shall be responsible for Mr. Diallo’s share of any such expenditures in Sankarani. Centrebind shall have the right to call on Gold Fields BVI to provide Centrebind’s pro-rata share of the funding after completion of a feasibility study in consideration inter alia of the issue of further shares to Gold Fields BVI so as to increase its shareholding from 76.47 per cent. to 82.35 per cent. of Glencar BVI. On such event Centrebind would then hold 17.65 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar BVI.

The Shareholders Agreement further provides that if Glencar BVI elects to obtain its own financing of any approved program and budget and it fails to obtain such funding within 120 business days of its election to do so then Gold Fields BVI shall be allotted one share for every US$571.43 expended on its pro-rata share and shall be allotted one share in respect of every US$377.14 expended on behalf of Centrebind where Centrebind has failed to fund its pro-rata share. In circumstances where a shareholders percentage shareholding falls below 10 per cent. of Glencar BVI such shareholding shall entitle the holder to a 1 per cent. net smelter return royalty and the shares representing 10 per cent. or less shall be transferred to the other shareholder for no consideration. The agreement acknowledges that Mr. Diallo shall be entitled to a net smelter return royalty of 1 per cent. in respect of each mine established by Sankarani or any of its affiliates on any of its licences and that Glencar has the right to acquire Mr. Diallo’s interest for US$1,000,000 or shares to that value in Glencar. The Shareholders Agreement sets out detailed terms in relation to the Glencar BVI board which shall consist of four directors, with Gold Fields BVI on acquiring 51 per cent. having the right to appoint two directors. When Gold Fields BVI holds 65 per cent. or more of Glencar BVI it shall have the right to appoint three directors and when it holds 90 per cent. or more of Glencar BVI it shall have the right to appoint all the directors. The Shareholders Agreement provides for pre-emption rights on the transfer of shares by either party save that if either party wishes to acquire the shares of the other the price may be discharged by the issue of shares in its respective parent, such number of shares to be determined by reference to the volume weighted average price on which the shares are traded on the respective stock exchange for 10 business days prior to the date the party applies for the shares. The Shareholders Agreement provides

 

68


for certain matters which Glencar BVI cannot undertake without the consent of any shareholder who holds not less than 15 per cent. of the issued share capital of Glencar BVI. The Shareholders Agreement also sets out the provisions in relation to the appointment of a steering committee and the provisions and obligations of the manager of the steering committee and provisions in relation to programs and budgets.

 

(b) On the 22 day of June 2009 (1) Adamus Resources Limited, an Australian company, (Adamus Australia), (2) Adamus Resource Limited, a Ghanaian company (Adamus), (3) Glencar and (4) Antubia Resources Limited, a subsidiary of Glencar, (Antubia) entered into an option agreement. On entering into the agreement Adamus Australia issued to Antubia 100,000 shares. Pursuant to the agreement Antubia granted to Adamus the option to acquire a 70 per cent. interest in the prospecting licence held by Antubia dated 27 June 2008 (Prospecting Licence) in consideration of the issue to Antubia of 1,000,000 shares in Adamus Australia (the First Option). The First Option must be exercised prior to 21 February 2010. During the period to 21 February 2010 Adamus is obliged to meet all outgoings and observe and perform all conditions imposed under any legislation relating to the Prospecting Licence, however full legal title to the Prospecting Licence shall remain with Antubia. If Adamus exercises the First Option the Prospecting Licence shall be transferred to a newly incorporated Ghanaian company to be held as to 70 per cent. by Adamus and 30 per cent. by Antubia. On or prior to the second anniversary of the exercise of the First Option, Adamus shall have the right to acquire the remaining 30 per cent. of the Ghanaian company (Second Option) in consideration for Adamus paying a 2 per cent. net smelter return royalty to Antubia and in consideration of the issue to Antubia of a further 2,000,000 shares in Adamus Australia. If Adamus fails to exercise the Second Option within the specified period Antubia may either buy back all the shares held by Adamus in the Ghanaian company in consideration of the issue to Adamus of shares in Glencar to the value of US$50,000 or elect to sell its remaining shareholding in the Ghanaian company to Adamus in consideration of Adamus Australia issuing shares to Glencar to the value of US$50,000. If either party is issued shares in the other it will enter into a restriction agreement under which it will agree not to dispose of shares in the other for a period of 6 months from the date of the issue of such shares. The agreement provides that at the time of the commencement of mining operations on the Prospecting Licence area that the Ghanaian government shall be entitled to a 10 per cent. interest in the Ghanaian company and to this extent their respective shareholdings of Adamus and Antubia shall be reduced on a pro-rata basis. Antubia provides certain warranties to Adamus in relation to the Prospecting Licence including a warranty as to the Prospecting Licence remaining in full force and effect and a warranty as to its legal and beneficial ownership of the Prospecting Licence.

 

(c) On 26 June 2008 Macquarie Bank Limited (“Macquarie”) and Glencar entered into a share subscription agreement. Pursuant to the terms of the share subscription agreement Macquarie irrevocably applied for 11,250,000 ordinary shares in the capital of Glencar at an issue price of Stg£0.09 per ordinary share. The condition of the subscription by Macquarie for such number of ordinary shares was the issue to Macquarie of one warrant for every two ordinary shares subscribed for in Glencar. The agreement provides that Macquarie confirms that it is making the application on its own behalf and will be the beneficial owner of such shares issued to it.

 

(d)

On 26 June 2008 Glencar executed a warrant instrument in respect of 5,625,000 warrants, each warrant entitling the holder (being Macquarie Bank Limited) to subscribe for one ordinary share in Glencar at a subscription price of Stg£0.135. The instrument provides that the warrants must be exercised prior to 26 June 2010, and any subscription rights not exercised by that date shall lapse. The instrument further provides that if there is any allotment or issue of ordinary shares in Glencar by way of a capitalisation of reserves or any redemption or buy back Glencar shall adjust the subscription rights attached to the warrants (“Subscription Rights”) and the subscription price such that (i) after such adjustment the total number of ordinary shares in respect of which the subscription will be capable of being exercised will carry as nearly as possible the same proportion of the votes and the same entitlements to participate in profits and assets of Glencar as the total number of ordinary shares which might

 

69


 

have been subscribed pursuant to the warrant instrument had the adjustment not occurred and (ii) the subscription price shall be such amount as is certified by Glencar’s auditors as being fair and reasonable. If there is a general offer to acquire all the ordinary shares of Glencar and such offer becomes unconditional then provided that the offeror offers or undertakes to offer to acquire any shares resulting from the exercise of the Subscription Rights on the same terms as those upon which all the ordinary shares in Glencar are acquired, Glencar shall as soon as practicable notify the warrant holder in writing of the occurrence of the takeover and the terms of the offer. Glencar may at any time within three months of the takeover arising request the warrant holder to exercise all subscription rights within 28 days or such longer period as Glencar may select. In the event that any Subscription Rights remain outstanding at the expiry of such 28 days the right to exercise shall automatically lapse.

 

(e) On 6 April 2009 Gold Fields Netherlands Services and Glencar entered into a share subscription agreement pursuant to which Gold Fields Netherlands Services irrevocably applied for 27,431,197 ordinary shares in Glencar at a subscription price of Stg£0.0455 per ordinary share. Pursuant to the agreement Glencar warranted inter-alia that Glencar is duly organised and validly existing under the laws of Ireland, that it has corporate power and authority to execute and deliver the agreement, that it is not in default under an applicable securities, legislation rules and policies of the London Stock Exchange and that all necessary corporate action has been taken by Glencar to authorise the execution and delivery of the agreement and the consummation of the transactions contemplated by it. It also warranted that no member of the Glencar Group is a party to any actions, suits or proceedings which could materially affect the respective businesses or financial condition of the Glencar Group members and that there were no insurance claims outstanding against Glencar or judgments against it. Gold Fields Netherlands Services warranted that it had the legal capacity and competence to enter into the agreement. It acknowledged that it would not receive any offering memorandum or any other disclosure document to assist it when making any investment decision. It warranted that the entering into the agreement will not result in the violation of any terms and provisions of any law applicable to Gold Fields Netherlands Services and that it has all requisite corporate power and authority to enter into and confirm its obligations under the agreement. Glencar agreed to indemnify Gold Fields Netherlands Services against any costs, damages and expenses arising out of or relating to the charges that are recorded against Glencar in favour of Law Debenture Trust Corporation Plc.

 

7. Service contracts

 

(a) The following are the principal terms of the service agreement entered into between Mr. Hugh McCullough and Glencar.

Mr. McCullough is employed under a service agreement with Glencar dated 7 September 1994 as amended. Under this agreement Mr. McCullough is appointed as managing director of Glencar. The service agreement provides for a fixed term duration of two years from 15 October 1999 and to continue thereafter unless terminated by either party giving to the other six months prior notice in writing to expire at the end of any anniversary of the fixed term. Mr. McCullough shall devote the whole of his time and attention in discharge of his duties to Glencar and may not undertake any other employment related obligations for third parties without the prior consent of the Board of Glencar. Mr. McCullough may not during the term of the service agreement be engaged by or work in any company which competes directly or indirectly with Glencar. All rights in inventions and related work products generated and developed by Mr. McCullough in the course of his engagement shall exclusively belong to Glencar without further compensation. In the event that any party or group of parties deemed to be acting in concert is entitled to acquire control of 30 per cent. or more of the issued share capital of Glencar, Mr. McCullough within 12 months of becoming aware of that fact is entitled to terminate the service agreement with effect from no less than 30 and no greater than 90 days thereafter. In the event of Mr. McCullough exercising his right to so terminate the

 

70


service agreement Glencar would be bound to pay to Mr. McCullough an amount equivalent to two times his gross annual salary at the rate payable immediately before the exercise of the right of termination.

The remuneration payable under Mr. McCullough’s service agreement in respect of the 12 month period commencing on 1 July 2009 is Euro182,000 which was increased from Euro152,000 in respect of the 12 month period to 30 June 2009.

Mr. McCullough is entitled to participate in a bonus scheme for executive directors adopted by the Board of Glencar on 11 January 2006. Pursuant to the bonus scheme an executive is entitled to a bonus of a percentage of his base salary depending on the increase in the market capitalisation of Glencar as follows:

 

Average Annual Market
Capitalisation Increase

   Bonus as percentage of Base Salary

Less than 5%

   0

6-10

   5

11-20

   10

21-30

   15

31-40

   20

41-50

   25

Greater than 50

   30

Glencar may also award a once off discretionary bonus to a director, but there is no contractual entitlement of Mr. McCullough to same. Glencar contributes the sum of Euro 25,700 annually to Mr. McCullough’s pension scheme. Glencar also contributes to a death in service benefit scheme and a disablement benefit scheme on his behalf.

 

(b) The following are the principal terms of the service agreement entered into between Glencar and Mr. Kieran Harrington.

Mr. Harrington is employed under a service agreement with Glencar dated 21 February 2001. The contract is for a fixed term duration of two years from 15 October 2000 and shall continue thereafter unless terminated by either party giving to the other not less than 6 months prior notice to expire at the end of an anniversary of the fixed term. He must devote the whole of his time and attention in discharge of his duties to Glencar and may not undertake any other employment related obligations for third parties without the prior consent of the Board of Glencar. Mr. Harrington may not during the term of the service agreement be engaged by or work in any company which competes directly or indirectly with Glencar. All rights in inventions and related work products generated and developed by Mr. Harrington in the course of his engagement shall exclusively belong to Glencar without further compensation.

The remuneration payable under Mr. Harrington’s service agreement in respect of the 12 month period commencing on 1 July 2009 is Euro 125,828 which was increased from Euro 105,828 in respect of the 12 month period to 30 June 2009. Mr. Harrington is also entitled to participate in the bonus scheme detailed in paragraph (a) above. Glencar may also award a once off discretionary bonus to directors but Mr. Harrington has no contractual entitlement to same. Glencar contributes the sum of Euro 10,000 annually to Mr. Harrington’s pension scheme.

 

(c) None of the other directors have service contracts with any member of the Glencar Group.

 

8. Bases of calculations and sources of information

 

(a) The value attributed to the existing issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar is based upon:

 

  (i) 301,901,764 Glencar Shares in issue; and

 

71


  (ii) 10,500,000 Glencar Shares under option under the Glencar Share Option Scheme and Glencar Share Warrants where the exercise price is at or below the Offer Price;

as at the close of business on 5 August 2009, being the latest practicable date prior to the posting of this document.

 

(b) Glencar Share prices are sourced from AIM and IEX.

 

(c) References to a percentage of Glencar Shares are based on the number of Glencar Shares in issue as set out in (a)(i) above.

 

(d) Unless otherwise stated, the financial information on Gold Fields is extracted from the financial statements of Gold Fields for the last three financial periods, which have been lodged with the Dutch Chamber of Commerce and are publicly available, being the periods 1 July 2007 to 24 January 2008, 25 January 2008 to 30 June 2008 and 1 July 2006 to 30 June 2007, and the financial information on Gold Fields Limited is extracted from the reported consolidated accounts of Gold Fields Limited for the financial years ended 30 June 2008 and 30 June 2007.

 

(e) Unless otherwise stated, the financial information on Glencar is extracted from Glencar’s annual report and accounts for the year ended 31 December 2008.

 

(f) Resource information for Glencar is sourced from an SRK Consulting (UK) Limited report dated December 2008.

 

(g) A Stg£ - US$ exchange rate of 1.6965, sourced from Thomson Financial as at 5 August 2009, has been used throughout this document.

 

(h) For the purposes of this document the enterprise value (EV) of Glencar is assumed to be the value of the Offer.

 

(i) The US$ EV per ounce for IAMGOLD’s acquisition of Orezone Resources Inc has been sourced from the IAMGOLD Q4, 2008 results presentation on 25 February 2009. Orezone Resources Inc resources figure has been sourced from the same document.

 

(j) The US$ EV for the Randgold Resources Limited acquisition of Moto Goldmines Limited has been sourced from an RNS dated 16 July 2009. The attributable resource of Moto Goldmines Limited is calculated as 70 per cent. (its interest in the Moto gold project) of 22.5 million ounces. The interest of Moto Goldmines Limited in the Moto gold project and the resources of the Moto gold project are sourced from a corporate overview presentation of Moto Goldmines Limited dated 14/15 May 2009.

 

9. Other information

 

(a) Save as disclosed in this document, no agreement, arrangement or understanding (including any compensation arrangement) exists between Gold Fields or any party deemed to be acting in concert with Gold Fields and any of the directors, recent directors, shareholders or recent shareholders of Glencar having any connection with or dependence upon the Offer.

 

(b) Gold Fields will finance the Offer from the Gold Fields Group’s existing resources and facilities.

 

(c) Canaccord Adams is satisfied that resources are available to Gold Fields which are sufficient to satisfy full acceptance of the Offer. Full acceptance of the Offer, based on 301,901,764 Glencar Shares in issue at the date of this document and a further 10,500,000 Glencar Shares being issued, assuming the exercise of all outstanding options under the Glencar Share Option Scheme and Glencar Share Warrants which have an exercise price at or below the Offer price of Stg 9 pence for each Glencar Share, would involve a maximum cash payment of approximately Stg£28.1 million.

 

72


(d) No agreement, arrangement or understanding exists whereby any Glencar Shares acquired in pursuance of the Offer will be transferred to any other person, save that Gold Fields reserves the right to transfer any Glencar Shares to any member of the Gold Fields Group.

 

(e) Canaccord Adams has given and not withdrawn its written consent to the issue of this document with the inclusion of the references to its name in the form and context in which it appears.

 

(f) Davy Corporate Finance has given and not withdrawn its written consent to the issue of this document with the inclusion of the references to its name in the form and context in which they appear.

 

(g) Save as disclosed in this document, there has been no known material change in the financial or trading position of Glencar since 31 December 2008, the date to which the latest audited accounts for Glencar were published.

 

(h) Except with the consent of the Irish Takeover Panel, settlement of the consideration to which any Glencar Shareholder is entitled under the Offer will be implemented in full in accordance with the terms of the Offer without regard to any lien, right of set-off, counterclaim or other analogous right to which Gold Fields or Gold Fields Limited may otherwise be, or claim to be, entitled against such Glencar Shareholder.

 

10. Documents available for inspection

Copies of the following documents will be available for inspection at the offices of Arthur Cox at Earlsfort Centre, Earlsfort Terrace, Dublin 2, Ireland and 12 Gough Square, London EC4A 3DW, England during usual business hours on any week day (Saturdays and public holidays excepted) while the Offer remains open for acceptance:

 

(a) the constitutional documents of Gold Fields Limited and Gold Fields;

 

(b) the memorandum and articles of association of Glencar;

 

(c) the published audited consolidated accounts of Gold Fields Limited for the financial years ended 30 June 2008 and 30 June 2007 and the financial statements of Gold Fields for the last three financial periods which have been lodged with the Dutch Chamber of Commerce and are publicly available, being the periods 1 July 2007 to 24 January 2008, 25 January 2008 to 30 June 2008 and 1 July 2006 to 30 June 2007;

 

(d) the published audited consolidated accounts of Glencar for the last three financial years ended 31 December 2006, 31 December 2007 and 31 December 2008;

 

(e) the written consents referred to in paragraph 9 of this Appendix III;

 

(f) the material contracts referred to in paragraph 6 of this Appendix III;

 

(g) the service agreements of two directors of Glencar referred to in paragraph 7 of this Appendix III;

 

(h) the irrevocable undertakings to accept the Offer referred to in paragraph 5 of this Appendix III;

 

(i) a full list of dealings by Canaccord Adams in relevant Glencar securities in respect of which the Irish Takeover Panel has consented to aggregation;

 

(j) the source documents referred to at paragraph 8(f), 8(i) and 8(j) of this Appendix III.

 

(k) this document and the Forms of Acceptance.

 

73


APPENDIX IV

DEFINITIONS

 

acting in concert

 

has the meaning such that two or more persons shall be deemed to be acting in concert as respects a takeover or other relevant transaction (in neither case being a bid to which the Regulations of 2006 apply) if they co-operate on the basis of an agreement, either express or tacit, either oral or written, aimed at:

 

(i)            either –

 

(I)            the acquisition by any one or more of them of securities in the relevant company concerned, or

 

(II)          the doing, or the procuring of the doing, of any act that will or may result in an increase in the proportion of securities in the relevant company concerned held by any one or more of them;

 

or

 

(ii)           either –

 

(I)            acquiring control of the relevant company concerned, or

 

(II)          frustrating the successful outcome of an offer made for the purpose of the acquisition of control of the relevant company concerned,

 

and, for this purpose, persons controlled by another person within the meaning of Article 87 of Directive 2001/34/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 28 May 2001 shall be deemed to be persons acting in concert, as respects the matters mentioned directly above with that other person and with each other,

 

and furthermore, for this purpose, ‘bid to which the Takeover Regulations apply’ means a takeover bid, within the meaning of the Takeover Regulations, which the Panel has, by virtue of Regulation 6 of the Takeover Regulations, jurisdiction to supervise

Affiliate   with respect to any Person, any other Person controlling, controlled by or under common control with such Person. As used in this definition, “control” (including, with its correlative meanings, “controlled by” and “under common control with”) means the possession, directly or indirectly, of power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of a Person whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise

 

74


AIM   the Alternative Investment Market (AIM) of the London Stock Exchange
AIM Rules   the rules for companies with a class of securities admitted to AIM published by the London Stock Exchange governing admission to and the operation of AIM
Announcement   the announcement made by the Boards of Gold Fields and Glencar on 24 July 2009 pursuant to Rule 2.5 of the Irish Takeover Rules
Board   the board of directors of Gold Fields, Gold Fields Limited or Glencar (as the case may be)
business day   any day, other than a Saturday, Sunday or public or bank holiday, on which banks are generally open for business in Dublin, London and New York
Canaccord Adams   Canaccord Adams Limited of Cardinal Place, 80 Victoria Street, 7th Floor, London, SW1E 5JL, United Kingdom
certificated or in certificated form   a Glencar Share which is not in uncertificated form
Clearances   all consents, clearances, licenses, permissions, waivers, approvals, authorisations or orders that need to be obtained, all applications and filings that need to be made and all waiting periods that may need to have expired, from or under the laws, regulations or practices applied by any Governmental Authority in connection with the implementation of the Offer and/or the Offer and, in each case, that constitute conditions; and any reference to conditions having been “satisfied” shall be construed as meaning that the foregoing have been obtained, or where appropriate, made or expired in accordance with the relevant condition
Closing Price   the official closing price or the middle market quotation of a Glencar Share, as appropriate, on a particular business day as derived from AIM and IEX
Computershare   Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited with an address at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland
Consideration   the cash consideration of Stg£ 9p per Glencar Share payable in cash to Glencar Shareholders for each Glencar Share acquired pursuant to the Offer
CREST   the relevant system (as defined in the Regulations) in respect of which CRESTCo is the operator (as defined in the Regulations)
CREST member   a person who has been admitted by CRESTCo as a system-member (as defined in the Regulations)

 

75


CREST participant   a person who is, in relation to CREST, a system-participant (as defined in the Regulations)
CREST payment   shall have the meaning given in the CREST manual issued by CRESTCo
CREST sponsor   a CREST participant admitted to CREST as a CREST sponsor
CREST sponsored member   a CREST member admitted to CREST as a sponsored member
CRESTCo   CRESTCo Limited
Davy Corporate Finance   Davy Corporate Finance, a wholly owned subsidiary of J&E Davy Holdings, of Davy House, 49 Dawson Street, Dublin 2, Ireland and affiliate of J&E Davy
Euro or € or Euro cents   the lawful currency of Ireland
Escrow Agent   Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited with an address at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland
Financial Regulator   the Irish Financial Services Regulatory Authority
Financial Services Authority   the Financial Services Authority of the United Kingdom
First Closing Date  

4 September 2009

Form of Acceptance   the form of acceptance, relating to the Offer which accompanies this document
Glencar   Glencar Mining plc, a company incorporated in Ireland under registration number 35324 and with a registered address at 71 Lower Baggot Street, Dublin 2, Ireland
Glencar Group   Glencar, its Subsidiaries and associated undertakings
Glencar Optionholders   the holders of options to subscribe for Glencar Shares under the Glencar Share Option Scheme
Glencar Share(s)   ordinary shares of €0.031, par value per share, each in the share capital of Glencar;
Glencar Shareholders   the holders of Glencar Shares from time to time
Glencar Share Option Scheme   the 2005 share option scheme of Glencar
Glencar Share Options   options to subscribe for Glencar Shares pursuant to the Glencar Share Option Scheme
Glencar Share Warrants   warrants to subscribe for Glencar Shares issued pursuant to the Glencar Share Warrant Instrument
Glencar Share Warrant Instrument   the warrant instrument dated 26 June 2008 executed by Glencar and creating warrants to subscribe for Glencar Shares

 

76


Glencar Warrantholder   the holder of Warrants to subscribe for Glencar Shares pursuant to the Glencar Share Warrant Instrument
Gold Fields   Gold Fields Metals BV, a company incorporated in the Netherlands and a wholly owned Subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited
Gold Fields Group   Gold Fields, and its parent undertaking and its Subsidiaries and subsidiary undertakings and any other Subsidiary or subsidiary undertaking of its parent undertaking
Gold Fields Limited   Gold Fields Limited, a public limited company incorporated in South Africa
Gold Fields Netherlands Services   Gold Fields Netherlands Services BV, a company incorporated in the Netherlands and a wholly owned Subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited
Governmental Authority   has the meaning attributed to it in paragraph (c) of Part A of Appendix I to this document
IEX   the Irish Enterprise Exchange (IEX) of the Irish Stock Exchange
IEX Rules   the rules for companies with a class of securities admitted to IEX published by the Irish Stock Exchange governing admission to and the operation of IEX
Ireland or Republic of Ireland   Ireland excluding Northern Ireland and the word Irish shall be construed accordingly
Irish Stock Exchange   the Irish Stock Exchange Limited
Irish Takeover Panel   the Irish Takeover Panel, established under the Irish Takeover Panel Act
Irish Takeover Panel Act   the Irish Takeover Panel Act 1997 (as amended)
Irish Takeover Rules   the Irish Takeover Panel Act 1997, Takeover Rules 2007
J&E Davy   J&E Davy, trading as Davy, a wholly owned subsidiary of J&E Davy Holdings of Davy House, 49 Dawson Street, Dublin 2, Ireland
JSE   the JSE Limited, exchange of South Africa
Komana Joint Venture   Proposed joint venture between Gold Fields Limited and Glencar relating to Glencar’s licence property at Komana, Mali
London Stock Exchange   London Stock Exchange plc
Member Account ID   the identification code or number attached to any member account in CREST
Northern Ireland   the counties of Antrim, Armagh, Derry, Down, Fermanagh and Tyrone on the island of Ireland

 

77


Offer   the offer being made by Gold Fields to acquire the entire issued and to be issued share capital of Glencar (other than Glencar Shares in the beneficial ownership of Gold Fields) on the terms and subject to the conditions set out in this document and the Form of Acceptance (including, where the context so requires, any subsequent revision, variation, extension or renewal of such offer)
Offer Document   this document
Offer Period   the period which commenced on 24 July 2009 (the date of an announcement of a possible offer for Glencar), and ending on the First Closing Date of the Offer or, if later, the date the Offer becomes or is declared unconditional as to acceptances or lapses
Overseas Shareholders   Glencar Shareholders who are resident in, or nationals or citizens of, jurisdictions outside Ireland or the United Kingdom or who are nominees of, or custodians or trustees for, residents, citizens or nationals of such other countries

parent undertaking, subsidiary

undertaking, associated undertaking

and undertaking

  have the meanings given by the European Communities (Companies: Group Accounts) Regulations, 1992
Participant ID   the identification code or membership number used in CREST to identify a particular CREST member or other CREST participant
Person(s)   any individual, corporation, partnership, joint venture, association, trust, unincorporated organisation or other legal entity, or any governmental agency or political subdivision thereof
Receiving Agent   Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited with an address at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland
Registrar   Computershare Investor Services (Ireland) Limited with an address at P.O. Box 954, Heron House, Corrig Road, Sandyford Industrial Estate, Dublin 18, Ireland
Regulations   the Companies Act 1990 (Uncertificated Securities) Regulations, 1996
Regulatory Information Service   any regulatory information service as set out in the Irish Listing Rules
Representatives   the directors, officers, employees, Affiliates, agents, investment bankers, financial advisers, attorneys, accountants, brokers, finders, consultants or representatives of Glencar or Gold Fields, or any of their respective Subsidiaries, as the case may be

 

78


Restricted Jurisdiction   any jurisdiction in respect of which it would be unlawful for this announcement to be released, published or distributed, in whole or in part, in, into or from, including for the avoidance of doubt, Canada, Australia, and Japan
SEC   the Securities and Exchange Commission of the United States
Sterling or Stg£ or pence  

the lawful currency of the United Kingdom

Stock Exchanges   the Irish Stock Exchange and the London Stock Exchange
Subsidiary, Subsidiaries   when used with reference to a Person, any corporation or other organisation, whether incorporated or unincorporated, of which such Person or any other subsidiary of such Person is a general partner or serves in a similar capacity, or, with respect to such corporation or other organisation, either (i) at least 50 per cent. of the securities or other interests having by their terms ordinary voting power to elect a majority of the
board of directors or others performing similar functions is directly or indirectly owned or controlled by such Person or by any one or more of its subsidiaries, or by such Person and one or more of its subsidiaries, or (ii) the right to receive more than 50 per cent. of the net assets of such corporation or other organisation available for distribution to the holders of outstanding stock or ownership interests upon a liquidation or dissolution of such corporation or other organisation;
Takeover Regulations   the European Communities (Takeover Bids (Directive 2004/25/EC)) Regulations 2006
TTE instruction   a transfer to escrow instruction (as described in the CREST manual issued by CRESTCo) in relation to Glencar Shares in uncertificated form meeting the requirements set out in paragraph 17 of the letter from Gold Fields set out in Part II of this document.
uncertificated or in uncertificated form   a Glencar Share which is for the time being recorded on the register or members of Glencar as being held in uncertificated form
United Kingdom or UK   the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
United States or US   The United States of America, its territories and possessions, any State of the United States of America, the District of Columbia and all other areas subject to its jurisdiction
US$ or US cent   the lawful currency of the United States of America
Whitney Moore   Whitney Moore, legal advisers to Glencar, with an address at Wilton Park House, Wilton Place, Dublin 2, Ireland

 

79


 

 

 

 

 

 

Printed by RR Donnelley, 28782